This is a modern-English version of Encyclopaedia Britannica, 11th Edition, "Harmony" to "Heanor": Volume 13, Slice 1, originally written by Various. It has been thoroughly updated, including changes to sentence structure, words, spelling, and grammar—to ensure clarity for contemporary readers, while preserving the original spirit and nuance. If you click on a paragraph, you will see the original text that we modified, and you can toggle between the two versions.

Scroll to the bottom of this page and you will find a free ePUB download link for this book.


Transcriber’s note: A few typographical errors have been corrected. They appear in the text like this, and the explanation will appear when the mouse pointer is moved over the marked passage. Sections in Greek will yield a transliteration when the pointer is moved over them, and words using diacritic characters in the Latin Extended Additional block, which may not display in some fonts or browsers, will display an unaccented version.

Links to other EB articles: Links to articles residing in other EB volumes will be made available when the respective volumes are introduced online.
 

THE

THE

ENCYCLOPÆDIA BRITANNICA

Britannica Encyclopedia

 

ELEVENTH EDITION

11th Edition

 
FIRST edition, published in three volumes, 1768-1771.
SECOND ten 1777-1784.
THIRD eighteen 1788-1797.
FOURTH twenty 1801-1810.
FIFTH twenty 1815-1817.
SIXTH twenty 1823-1824.
SEVENTH twenty-one 1830-1842.
EIGHTH twenty-two 1853-1860.
NINTH twenty-five 1875-1889.
TENTH ninth edition and eleven supplementary volumes, 1902-1903.
ELEVENTH published in twenty-nine volumes, 1910-1911.
 

 

COPYRIGHT

COPYRIGHT

in all countries subscribing to the
Bern Convention

in all countries that are part of the
Bern Convention

by

by

THE CHANCELLOR, MASTERS AND SCHOLARS

THE CHANCELLOR, FACULTY AND STUDENTS

of the

of the

UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE

University of Cambridge

 

All rights reserved

All rights reserved

 

THE

THE

ENCYCLOPÆDIA BRITANNICA

Encyclopedia Britannica

 

A

A

DICTIONARY

DICTIONARY

OF

OF

ARTS, SCIENCES, LITERATURE AND GENERAL

Arts, Sciences, Literature, and General

INFORMATION

INFO

 

ELEVENTH EDITION

11th Edition

 

VOLUME XIII

VOLUME 13

HARMONY to HURSTMONCEAUX

HARMONY to HURSTMONCEAUX

 

New York

NYC

 

Encyclopædia Britannica, Inc.

Encyclopedia Britannica, Inc.

342 Madison Avenue

342 Madison Ave

 

Copyright, in the United States of America, 1910,
by
The Encyclopædia Britannica Company.

Copyright, in the United States, 1910,
by
The Encyclopædia Britannica Company.

 

VOLUME XIII SLICE I

Harmony to Heanor


 

Articles in This Slice

Articles in This Section

HARMONY HATHERLEY, WILLIAM PAGE WOOD
HARMOTOME HATHERTON, EDWARD JOHN LITTLETON
HARMS, CLAUS HATHRAS
HARNACK, ADOLF HATTIESBURG
HARNESS HATTINGEN
HARO, CLAMEUR DE HATTO I.
HAROLD I. HATTON, SIR CHRISTOPHER
HAROLD II. HATTON, JOHN LIPTROT
HARP HAUCH, JOHANNES CARSTEN
HARPENDEN HAUER, FRANZ
HARPER’S FERRY HAUFF, WILHELM
HARPIES HAUG, MARTIN
HARPIGNIES, HENRI HAUGE, HANS NIELSEN
HARP-LUTE HAUGESUND
HARPOCRATES HAUGHTON, SAMUEL
HARPOCRATION, VALERIUS HAUGHTON, WILLIAM
HARPOON HAUGWITZ, CHRISTIAN AUGUST HEINRICH KURT
HARPSICHORD HAUNTINGS
HARPY HAUPT, MORITZ
HARRAN HAUPTMANN, GERHART
HARRAR HAUPTMANN, MORITZ
HARRATIN HAURÉAU, (JEAN) BARTHÉLEMY
HARRIER HAUSA
HARRIGAN, EDWARD HAUSER, KASPAR
HARRIMAN, EDWARD HENRY HAUSMANN, JOHANN FRIEDRICH LUDWIG
HARRIMAN HAUSRATH, ADOLPH
HARRINGTON, EARLS OF HÄUSSER, LUDWIG
HARRINGTON, JAMES HAUSSMANN, GEORGES EUGÈNE
HARRIOT, THOMAS HAUSSONVILLE, JOSEPH OTHENIN BERNARD DE CLÉRON
HARRIS, GEORGE HAUTE-GARONNE
HARRIS, JAMES HAUTE-LOIRE
HARRIS, JOEL CHANDLER HAUTE-MARNE
HARRIS, JOHN HAUTERIVE, ALEXANDRE MAURICE BLANC DE LANAUTTE
HARRIS, THOMAS LAKE HAUTES ALPES
HARRIS, SIR WILLIAM SNOW HAUTE-SAÔNE
HARRIS, WILLIAM TORREY HAUTE-SAVOIE
HARRISBURG HAUTES-PYRÉNÉES
HARRISMITH HAUTE-VIENNE
HARRISON, BENJAMIN HAUT-RHIN
HARRISON, FREDERIC HAÜY, RENÉ JUST
HARRISON, JOHN HAVANA
HARRISON, THOMAS HAVANT
HARRISON, THOMAS ALEXANDER HAVEL
HARRISON, WILLIAM HAVELBERG
HARRISON, WILLIAM HENRY HAVELOCK, SIR HENRY
HARRISON (New Jersey, U.S.A.) HAVELOK THE DANE
HARRODSBURG HAVERFORDWEST
HARROGATE HAVERGAL, FRANCES RIDLEY
HARROW HAVERHILL (England)
HARROWBY, DUDLEY RYDER HAVERHILL (Massachusetts, U.S.A.)
HARROWING OF HELL HAVERSACK
HARROW-ON-THE-HILL HAVERSTRAW
HARRY THE MINSTREL HAVET, EUGÈNE AUGUSTE ERNEST
HARSDÖRFFER, GEORG PHILIPP HAVET, JULIEN
HARSHA HAVRE, LE
HARSNETT, SAMUEL HAWAII
HART, ALBERT BUSHNELL HAWARDEN
HART, CHARLES HAWAWIR
HART, ERNEST ABRAHAM HAWEIS, HUGH REGINALD
HART, SIR ROBERT HAWES, STEPHEN
HART, WILLIAM HAWES, WILLIAM
HARTE, FRANCIS BRET HAWFINCH
HARTEBEEST HAWICK
HARTFORD HAWK
HARTFORD CITY HAWKE, EDWARD HAWKE
HARTIG, GEORG LUDWIG HAWKER, ROBERT STEPHEN
HARTLEPOOL HAWKERS and PEDLARS
HARTLEY, SIR CHARLES AUGUSTUS HAWKESWORTH, JOHN
HARTLEY, DAVID HAWKHURST
HARTLEY, JONATHAN SCOTT HAWKINS, CAESAR HENRY
HARTLIB, SAMUEL HAWKINS, SIR JOHN (British admiral)
HARTMANN, KARL ROBERT EDUARD VON HAWKINS, SIR JOHN (British writer)
HARTMANN, MORITZ HAWKINS, SIR RICHARD
HARTMANN VON AUE HAWKS, FRANCIS LISTER
HARTSHORN, SPIRITS OF HAWKSHAW, SIR JOHN
HARTZENBUSCH, JUAN EUGENIO HAWKSLEY, THOMAS
HĀRŪN AL-RASHĪD HAWKSMOOR, NICHOLAS
HARUSPICES HAWKWOOD, SIR JOHN
HARVARD UNIVERSITY HAWLEY, HENRY
HARVEST HAWLEY, JOSEPH ROSWELL
HARVEST-BUG HAWORTH
HARVESTER HAWSER
HARVEY, GABRIEL HAWTHORN (Australian city)
HARVEY, SIR GEORGE HAWTHORN (genus of shrubs)
HARVEY, WILLIAM HAWTHORNE, NATHANIEL
HARVEY (Illinois, U.S.A.) HAWTREY, CHARLES HENRY
HARWICH HAWTREY, EDWARD CRAVEN
HARZBURG HAXO, FRANÇOIS NICOLAS BENOÎT
HARZ MOUNTAINS HAXTHAUSEN, AUGUST FRANZ LUDWIG MARIA
HASA, EL HAY, GEORGE
ḤASAN and ḤOSAIN HAY, GILBERT
ḤASAN UL-BAṢRĪ HAY, JOHN
HASBEYA HAY (Australia)
ḤASDAI IBN SHAPRUT HAY (Wales)
HASDEU, BOGDAN PETRICEICU HAY (dried grass)
HASDRUBAL HAYASHI, TADASU
HASE, CARL BENEDICT HAYDEN, FERDINAND VANDEVEER
HASE, KARL AUGUST VON HAYDN, FRANZ JOSEPH
HASHISH HAYDON, BENJAMIN ROBERT
HASLEMERE HAYES, RUTHERFORD BIRCHARD
HASLINGDEN HAY FEVER
HASPE HAYLEY, WILLIAM
HASSAM, CHILDE HAYM, RUDOLF
HASSAN HAYNAU, JULIUS JACOB
HASSANĪA HAYNE, ROBERT YOUNG
HASSĀN IBN THĀBIT HAYTER, SIR GEORGE
HASSE, JOHANN ADOLPH HAYTON
HASSELQUIST, FREDERIK HAYWARD, ABRAHAM
HASSELT, ANDRÉ HENRI CONSTANT VAN HAYWARD, SIR JOHN
HASSELT HAYWOOD, ELIZA
HASSENPFLUG, HANS DANIEL LUDWIG FRIEDRICH HAZARA (race of Afghanistan)
HASTINAPUR HAZARA (district of British India)
HASTINGS (English family) HAZARD
HASTINGS, FRANCIS RAWDON-HASTINGS HAZARIBAGH
HASTINGS, FRANK ABNEY HAZEBROUCK
HASTINGS, WARREN HAZEL
HASTINGS (Sussex, England) HAZLETON
HASTINGS (Nebraska, U.S.A.) HAZLITT, WILLIAM
HAT HEAD, SIR EDMUND WALKER
HATCH, EDWIN HEAD, SIR FRANCIS BOND
HATCH HEAD
HATCHET HEAD-HUNTING
HATCHETTITE HEALTH
HATCHMENT HEALY, GEORGE PETER ALEXANDER
HATFIELD HEANOR
 

INITIALS USED IN VOLUME XII. TO IDENTIFY INDIVIDUAL
CONTRIBUTORS,1 WITH THE HEADINGS OF THE
ARTICLES IN THIS VOLUME SO SIGNED.

INITIALS USED IN VOLUME XII. TO IDENTIFY INDIVIDUAL
CONTRIBUTORS,1 WITH THE HEADINGS OF THE
ARTICLES IN THIS VOLUME SO SIGNED.

 
A. E. G.* Rev. Alfred Ernest Garvie, M.A., D.D.
Principal of New College, Hampstead. Member of the Board of Theology and the Board of Philosophy, London University. Author of Studies in the Inner Life of Jesus, &c.
Heresy (in part).
A. D. Henry Austin Dobson, PhD.
See the biographical article, Dobson, H. A.
Hogarth.
A. E. T. W. Alfred Edward Thomas Watson.
Editor of the Badminton Library and Badminton Magazine. Formerly Editor of the Illustrated Sporting and Dramatic News. Author of The Racing World and its Inhabitants: &c.

Horse-Racing (in part);

Horse Racing (partially);

Hunting.

Hunting.

A. C. S. Algernon Charles Swinburne.
See the biographical article, Swinburne, A. C.
Hugo, Victor.
A. Cy. Arthur Ernest Cowley, M.A., Litt.D.
Sub-Librarian of the Bodleian Library, Oxford. Fellow of Magdalen College.

Hebrew Language;

Hebrew

Hebrew Literature.

Hebrew Literature.

A. F. P. Albert Frederick Pollard, M.A., F.R.Hist.S.
Professor of English History in the University of London. Fellow of All Souls College, Oxford. Assistant Editor of the Dictionary of National Biography, 1893-1901. Lothian Prizeman (Oxford), 1892, Arnold Prizeman, 1898. Author of England under the Protector Somerset; Henry VIII.; Life of Thomas Cranmer; &c.

Heath, Nicholas;

Heath, Nicholas;

Henry VIII. of England;

Henry VIII of England

Hooper, Bishop;

Hooper, Bishop

Humphrey, Lawrence.

Humphrey, Lawrence.

A. Go.* Rev. Alex Gordon, M.A.
Lecturer on Church History in the University of Manchester.

Hofmann, Melchior;

Hofmann, Melchior;

Hotman.

Attractive person.

A. H. S. Rev. Archibald Henry Sayce, D.D., Litt.D., LL.D.
See the biographical article, Sayce, A. H.
Humboldt, Karl W. Von.
A. H.-S. Sir A. Houtum-Schindler, C.I.E.
General in the Persian Army. Author of Eastern Persian Irak.

Hormuz (in part).

Hormuz (partially).

A. J. H. Alfred J. Hipkins, F.S.A. (1826-1903).
Formerly Member of Council and Hon. Curator of the Royal College of Music, London. Member of Committee of the Inventions and Music Exhibition, 1885; of the Vienna Exhibition, 1892; and of the Paris Exhibition, 1900. Author of Musical Instruments; &c.

Harp (in part).

Harp (in part).

A. L. Andrew Lang.
See the biographical article, Lang, Andrew.
Hauntings.
A. M. C. Agnes Mary Clerke.
See the biographical article, Clerke, A. M.

Herschel, Sir F. W. (in part);

Herschel, Sir F. W. (partially);

Herschel, Sir J. F. W. (in part).

Herschel, Sir J. F. W. (in part).

Hevelius; Hipparchus;

Hevelius; Hipparchus;

Horrocks; Huggins;

Horrocks; Huggins;

Humboldt.

Humboldt.

A. N. Alfred Newton, F.R.S.
See the biographical article, Newton, Alfred.

Harpy; Harrier; Hawfinch;

Harpy; Harrier; Hawfinch;

Hawk; Heron; Hoactzin;

Hawk; Heron; Hoactzin;

Honeyeater; Honey Guide;

Honeyeater; Honey Guide;

Hoopoe; Hornbill;

Hoopoe; Hornbill;

Humming-Bird.

Hummingbird.

A. Sl. Arthur Shadwell, M.A., M.D., LL.D., F.R.C.P.
Member of Council of Epidemiological Society. Author of Industrial Efficiency; The London Water Supply; Drink, Temperance and Legislation.
Housing.
A. W. H.* Arthur W. Holland.
Formerly Scholar of St John’s College, Oxford. Bacon Scholar of Gray’s Inn, 1900.

Henry IV.: Roman Emperor;

Henry IV: Holy Roman Emperor;

Hide; Hohenzollern;

Hide; Hohenzollern;

Honorius II.: Anti-Pope.

Honorius II: Antipope.

A. W. W. Adolphus William Ward, Doctor of Letters, Doctor of Laws.
See the biographical article, Ward, A. W.
Hrosvitha.
C. A. M. F. Charles Augustus Maude Fennell, M.A., Litt.D.
Formerly Fellow of Jesus College, Cambridge. Editor of Pindar’s Odes and Fragments; and of the Stanford Dictionary of Anglicised Words and Phrases.
Hercules.
C. B.* Charles Bémont, Ph.D. (Oxon.).
See the biographical article, Bémont, C.

Havet;

Sea;

Hozier.

Hozier.

C. El. Sir Charles Norton Edgcumbe Eliot, K.C.M.G., C.B., M.A., LL.D., D.C.L.
Vice-Chancellor of Sheffield University. Formerly Fellow of Trinity College, Oxford. H.M.’s Commissioner and Commander-in-Chief for the British East Africa Protectorate; Agent and Consul-General at Zanzibar; and Consul-General for German East Africa, 1900-1904.

Hissar (in part);

Hissar (partially);

Hungary: Language;

Hungary: Language

Huns.

Huns.

C. F. A. Charles Atkinson.
Formerly Scholar of Queen’s College, Oxford. Captain, 1st City of London (Royal Fusiliers). Author of The Wilderness and Cold Harbour.
Hohenlohe (in part).
C. H. Ha. Carlton Huntley Hayes, M.A., Ph.D.
Assistant Professor of History in Columbia University, New York City. Member of the American Historical Association.
Honorius II., III., IV.
C. J. L. Sir Charles James Lyall, K.C.S.I., C.I.E., LL.D. (Edin.).
Secretary Judicial and Public Department, India Office. Fellow of King’s College, London. Secretary to Government of India, Home Department, 1889-1894. Chief Commissioner, Central Provinces, India, 1895-1898. Author of Translations of Ancient Arabic Poetry; &c.
Hindōstānī Literature.
C. L. K. Charles Lethbridge Kingsford, M.A., F.R.Hist.S., F.S.A.
Assistant Secretary to the Board of Education. Author of Life of Henry V. Editor of Chronicles of London, and Stow’s Survey of London.

Henry IV., V., VI.: of England.

Henry IV, V, VI: of England.

C. Mo. William Cosmo Monkhouse.
See the biographical article, Monkhouse, W. C.
Hunt, W. Holman.
C. P. Rev. Charles Pritchard, M.A.
See the biographical article, Pritchard, Charles.

Herschel, Sir F. W. (in part);

Herschel, Sir F.W. (partially);

Herschel, Sir J. F. W. (in part).

Herschel, Sir J. F. W. (partial).

C. Pf. Christian Peister, D.-ès-L.
Professor at the Sorbonne, Paris. Chevalier of the Legion of Honour. Author of Études sur le règne de Robert le Pieux.
Hunald.
C. R. B. Charles Raymond Beazley, M.A., D.Litt.
Professor of Modern History in the University of Birmingham. Formerly Fellow of Merton College, Oxford, and University Lecturer in the History of Geography. Author of Henry the Navigator; The Dawn of Modern Geography; &c.

Hayton; Henry the Navigator.

Hayton; Henry the Navigator.

C. S. Carl Schurz, PhD.
See the biographical article, Schurz, Carl.
Hayes, Rutherford B.
C. W. W. Sir Charles William Wilson, K.C.B., K.C.M.G., F.R.S. (1836-1907).
Major-General, Royal Engineers. Secretary to the North American Boundary Commission, 1858-1862. British Commissioner on the Servian Boundary Commission. Director-General of the Ordnance Survey, 1886-1894. Director-General of Military Education, 1895-1898. Author of From Korti to Khartoum; Life of Lord Clive; &c.
Hierapolis (in part).
D. B. M. David Binning Monro, M.A., Litt.D.
See the biographical article, Monro, David Binning.
Homer.
D. F. T. Donald F. Tovey.
Author of Essays in Musical Analysis: comprising The Classical Concerto, The Goldberg Variations, and analyses of many other classical works.
Harmony.
D. Gi. Sir David Gill, K.C.B., LL.D., F.R.S., F.R.A.S., D.Sc.
H.M. Astronomer at Cape of Good Hope, 1879-1907. Served in Geodetic Survey of Egypt, and on the expedition to Ascension Island to determine the Solar Parallax by observations of Mars. Directed Geodetic Survey of Natal, Cape Colony and Rhodesia. Author of Geodetic Survey of South Africa; Catalogues of Stars for the Equinoxes (1850, 1860, 1885, 1890, 1900); &c.
Heliometer.
D. G. H. David George Hogarth, M.A.
Keeper of the Ashmolean Museum, Oxford. Fellow of Magdalen College, Oxford. Fellow of the British Academy. Excavated at Paphos, 1888; Naucratis, 1899 and 1903; Ephesus, 1904-1905; Assiut, 1906-1907. Director, British School at Athens, 1897-1900. Director, Cretan Exploration Fund, 1899.

Heraclea (in part);

Heraclea (partially);

Hierapolis (in part);

Hierapolis (partially);

Hittites.

Hittites.

D. H. David Hannay.
Formerly British Vice-Consul at Barcelona. Author of Short History of the Royal Navy; Life of Emilio Castelar; &c.

Heyn; Hood, Viscount;

Heyn Hood, Viscount;

Howe, Earl; Humour.

Howe, Earl; Humor.

D. Mn. Rev. Dugald Macfadyen, M.A.
Minister of South Grove Congregational Church, Highgate. Author of Constructive Congregational Ideals; &c.

Henderson, Alexander (in part).

Henderson, Alexander (partially).

D. S.* David Sharp, M.A., M.B., F.R.S., F.Z.S.
Editor of the Zoological Record. Formerly Curator of Museum of Zoology, University of Cambridge. President of Entomological Society of London. Author of “Insecta” (Cambridge Natural History); &c.
Hexapoda (in part).
E. C. B. Right Reverend Edward Cuthbert Butler, O.S.B., M.A., D.Litt.
Abbot of Downside Abbey, Bath. Author of “The Lausiac History of Palladius” in Cambridge Texts and Studies, vol. vi.

Hieronymites;

Hieronymites;

Hilarion, Saint.

Saint Hilarion.

E. D. B. Edwin Dampier Brickwood.
Author of Boat-Racing; &c.

Horse: History;

Horse: Backstory;

Horse-Racing (in part).

Horse Racing.

E. D. Bu. Edward Dundas Butler.
Formerly Assistant in the Department of Printed Books, British Museum. Foreign Member of the Hungarian Academy of Sciences. Author of Hungarian Poems and Fables for English Readers; &c.

Hungary: Literature (in part).

Hungary: Literature (partially).

E. E. S. Ernest Edward Sikes, M.A.
Fellow, Tutor and Lecturer, St John’s College, Cambridge. Newton Student at Athens, 1890. Editor of the Prometheus Vinctus of Aeschylus, and of The Homeric Hymns.

Hephaestus;

Hephaestus

Hera; Hermes.

Hera; Hermes.

E. F. S. Edward Fairbrother Strange.
Assistant-Keeper, Victoria and Albert Museum, South Kensington. Member of Council, Japan Society. Author of numerous works on art subjects. Joint-editor of Bell’s “Cathedral” Series.

Hiroshige;

Hiroshige

Hokusai.

Hokusai.

E. G. Edmund Gosse, PhD.
See the biographical article, Gosse, Edmund, W.

Heroic Romances;

Heroic Love Stories;

Heroic Verse;

Heroic Poetry;

Herrick; Holberg.

Herrick; Holberg.

Ed. M. Eduard Meyer, Ph.D., D.Litt. (Oxon.), LL.D.
Professor of Ancient History in the University of Berlin. Author of Geschichte des Alterthums; Geschichte des alten Aegyptens; Die Israeliten und ihre Nachbarstämme.
Hormizd.
E. M. W. Rev. Edward Mewburn Walker, M.A.
Fellow, Senior Tutor and Librarian of Queen’s College, Oxford.
Herodotus (in part).
E. O.* Edmund Owen, M.B., F.R.C.S., LL.D., D.Sc.
Consulting Surgeon to St Mary’s Hospital, London, and to the Children’s Hospital, Great Ormond Street, London. Chevalier of the Legion of Honour. Late Examiner in Surgery at the Universities of Cambridge, London and Durham. Author of A Manual of Anatomy for Senior Students.

Heart: Surgery;

Heart: Surgery

Hernia.

Hernia.

E. Pr. Edgar Prestage.
Special Lecturer in Portuguese Literature at the University of Manchester. Commendador, Portuguese Order of S. Thiago. Corresponding Member of Lisbon Royal Academy of Sciences and Lisbon Geographical Society.

Herculano de Carvalho e Araiyo.

Herculano de Carvalho e Araiyo.

E. Re.* Emil Reich, PhD, F.R.Hist.S.
Author of Hungarian Literature; History of Civilization; &c.

Hungary: Literature (in part).

Hungary: Literature (partly).

E. R. B. Edwyn Robert Bevan, M.A.
New College, Oxford. Author of The House of Seleucus; Jerusalem under the High Priests.
Hellenism.
F. B. Felice Barnabei, Ph.D.
Formerly Director of Museum of Antiquities at Rome. Author of archaeological papers in Italian reviews and in the Athenaeum.
Herculaneum.
F. C. C. Frederick Cornwallis Conybeare, M.A., D.Th. (Giessen).
Fellow of the British Academy. Formerly Fellow of University College, Oxford. Author of The Ancient Armenian Texts of Aristotle; Myth, Magic and Morals; &c.
Holy Water.
F. G. M. B. Frederick George Meeson Beck, M.A.
Fellow and Lecturer of Clare College, Cambridge.
Heruli.
F. G. P. Frederick Gymer Parsons, F.R.C.S., F.Z.S., F.R.Anthrop.Inst.
Vice-President, Anatomical Society of Great Britain and Ireland. Lecturer on Anatomy at St Thomas’s Hospital and the London School of Medicine for Women. Formerly Hunterian Professor at the Royal College of Surgeons.

Heart: Anatomy.

Heart: Structure.

F. G. S. F.G. Stephens
Formerly art critic of the Athenaeum. Author of Artists at Home; George Cruikshank; Memorials of W. Mulready; French and Flemish Pictures; Sir E. Landseer; T. C. Hook, R.A.; &c.
Holl, Frank.
F. H. B. Francis Henry Butler, M.A.
Worcester College, Oxford. Associate of the Royal School of Mines.

Honey; Hunter, John;

Honey; Hunter, John;

Hunter, William.

William Hunter.

F. Ll. G. Francis Llewellyn Griffith, M.A., Ph.D., F.S.A.
Reader in Egyptology, Oxford University. Editor of the Archaeological Survey and Archaeological Reports of the Egypt Exploration Fund. Fellow of Imperial German Archaeological Institute.

Heliopolis;

Heliopolis;

Hermes Trismegistus;

Hermes Trismegistus

Horus.

Horus.

F. O. B. Frederick Orpen Bower, D.Sc., F.R.S.
Regius Professor of Botany in the University of Glasgow. Author of Practical Botany for Beginners.
Hofmeister.
F. Px. Frank Puaux.
President of the Société de l’Histoire du Protestantisme français. Author of Les Précurseurs français de la tolérance; Histoire de l’établissement des protestants français en Suède; L’Église réformée de France; &c.
Huguenots.
G. A. Gr. George Abraham Grierson, C.I.E., Ph.D., D.Litt.
Member of the Indian Civil Service, 1873-1903. In charge of Linguistic Survey of India, 1898-1902. Gold Medallist, Asiatic Society, 1909. Vice-President of the Royal Asiatic Society. Formerly Fellow of Calcutta University. Author of The Languages of India; &c.
Hindōstānī.
G. C. R. George Croom Robertson, M.A.
See the biographical article, Robertson, G. C.

Hobbes, Thomas (in part).

Hobbes, Thomas (partially).

G. C. W. George C. Williamson, Ph.D.
Chevalier of the Legion of Honour. Author of Portrait Miniatures; Life of Richard Cosway, R.A.; George Engleheart; Portrait Drawings; &c. Editor of new edition of Bryan’s Dictionary of Printers and Engravers.

Hilliard, Lawrence;

Hilliard, Lawrence;

Hilliard, Nicholas; Hoskins.

Hilliard, Nicholas; Hoskins.

Humphry, Ozias.

Humphry, Ozias.

G. G. S. George Gregory Smith, M.A.
Professor of English Literature, Queen’s University of Belfast. Author of The Days of James IV.; The Transition Period; Specimens of Middle Scots; &c.
Henryson.
G. E. Rev. George Edmundson, M.A., F.R.Hist.S.
Formerly Fellow and Tutor of Brasenose College, Oxford. Ford’s Lecturer, 1909. Hon. Member, Dutch Historical Society, and Foreign Member, Netherlands Association of Literature.

Holland: History.

Netherlands: History.

Holland: County and Province of.

Holland: County and Province of.

G. H. C. George Herbert Carpenter, B.Sc.
Professor of Zoology in the Royal College of Science, Dublin. President of the Association of Economic Biologists. Member of the Royal Irish Academy. Author of Insects: their Structure and Life; &c.

Hemiptera;

Hemiptera

Hexapoda (in part).

Hexapoda (partially).

G. J. T. George James Turner.
Barrister-at-Law, Lincoln’s Inn. Editor of Select Pleas for the Forests for the Selden Society.
Hundred.
G. K. Gustav Krüger.
Professor of Church History in the University of Giessen. Author of Das Papsttum; &c.
Hippolytus.
G. R. Rev. George Rawlinson, M.A.
See the biographical article, Rawlinson, George.
Herodotus (in part).
G. W. T. Rev. Griffithes Wheeler Thatcher, M.A., B.D.
Warden of Camden College, Sydney, N.S.W. Formerly Tutor in Hebrew and Old Testament History at Mansfield College, Oxford.

Ḥasan-ul-Basrī;

Ḥasan-ul-Basrī;

Ḥassān ibn Thābit;

Hassan ibn Thabit

Ḥishām ibn al-Kalbī.

Ḥishām ibn al-Kalbī.

H. Lord Houghton.
See the biographical article, Houghton, 1st Baron.
Hood, Thomas.
H. Br. Henry Bradley, M.A., Ph.D.
Joint-editor of the New English Dictionary (Oxford). Fellow of the British Academy. Author of The Story of the Goths; The Making of English; &c.
Heliand.
H. Bt. Sir Henry Burdett, K.C.B., K.C.V.O.
Founder and Editor of The Hospital. Formerly Superintendent of the Queen’s Hospital, Birmingham, and the Seamen’s Hospital, Greenwich. Author of Hospitals and Asylums of the World; &c.
Hospital.
H. Ch. Hugh Chisholm, M.A.
Formerly Scholar of Corpus Christi College, Oxford. Editor of the 11th edition of the Encyclopaedia Britannica; Co-editor of the 10th edition.
Howe, Samuel Gridley.
H. De. Hippolyte Delehaye, S.J.
Assistant in the compilation of the Bollandist publications: Analecta Bollandiana and Acta sanctorum.
Helena, St; Hubert, St.
H. L. Henri Labrosse.
Assistant Librarian at the Bibliothèque Nationale, Paris. Officer of the Academy.
Hugh of St Cher.
H. L. C. Hugh Longbourne Callendar, F.R.S., LL.D.
Professor of Physics, Royal College of Science, London. Formerly Professor of Physics in McGill College, Montreal, and in University College, London.
Heat.
H. M. V. Herbert M. Vaughan, FSA
Keble College, Oxford. Author of The Last of the Royal Stuarts; The Medici Popes; The Last Stuart Queen.

Henry, Stuart (Cardinal York).

Henry, Stuart (Cardinal of York).

H. W. C. D. Henry William Carless Davis, M.A.
Fellow and Tutor of Balliol College, Oxford. Fellow of All Souls College, Oxford, 1895-1902. Author of England under the Normans and Angevins; Charlemagne.

Henry I., II., III.: Of England.

Henry I, II, III: Of England.

Henry of Huntingdon.

Henry of Huntingdon.

H. W. R.* Rev. Henry Wheeler Robinson, M.A.
Professor of Church History in Rawdon College, Leeds. Senior Kennicott Scholar, Oxford, 1901. Author of Hebrew Psychology in Relation to Pauline Anthropology (in Mansfield College Essays); &c.

Hosea (in part).

Hosea (partially).

H. W. S. H. Wickham Steed.
Correspondent of The Times at Vienna. Correspondent of The Times at Rome, 1897-1902.
Humbert, King.
H. Y. Sir Henry Yule, KCSI, CB
See the biographical article, Yule, Sir H.

Hormuz (in part);

Hormuz (partially);

Hsüan Tsang (in part).

Hsüan Tsang (in part).

I. A. Israel Abrahams, Master's degree
Reader in Talmudic and Rabbinic Literature in the University of Cambridge. Formerly President, Jewish Historical Society of England. Author of A Short History of Jewish Literature; Jewish Life in the Middle Ages; Judaism; &c.

Hasdai ibn Shaprut;

Hasdai ibn Shaprut;

Herzl;

Herzl;

Hirsch, Samson R.

Samson R. Hirsch

J. A. C. Sir Joseph Archer Crowe, K.C.M.G.
See the biographical article, Crowe, Sir J. A.
Hobbema; Holbein.
J. A. R. Very Rev. Joseph Armitage Robinson, D.D.
Dean of Westminster. Fellow of the British Academy. Hon. Fellow of Christ’s College, Cambridge. Formerly Fellow of Christ’s College, Cambridge, and Norrisian Professor of Divinity in the University. Author of Some Thoughts on the Incarnation; &c.
Hippolytus, The Canons of.
J. Bt. James Bartlett.
Lecturer on Construction, Architecture, Sanitation, Quantities, &c., at King’s College, London. Member of Society of Architects. Member of Institute of Junior Engineers.
Heating.
J. B. T. Sir John Batty Tuke, M.D., F.R.S. (Edin.), D.Sc., LL.D.
President of the Neurological Society of the United Kingdom. Medical Director of New Saughton Hall Asylum, Edinburgh. M.P. for the Universities of Edinburgh and St Andrews, 1900-1910.
Hippocrates.
J. Da. Rev. James Davies, M.A. (1820-1883).
Formerly Head Master of Ludlow Grammar School and Prebendary of Hereford Cathedral. Translated classical authors for Bohn’s “Classical Library.” Author of volumes in Collins’s Ancient Classics for English Readers.
Hesiod (in part).
J. E. Dr. H. Julius Eggeling
Professor of Sanskrit and Comparative Philology, University of Edinburgh. Formerly Secretary and Librarian to Royal Asiatic Society.
Hinduism.
J. F. F. John Faithfull Fleet, C.I.E.
Commissioner of Central and Southern Divisions of Bombay, 1891-1897. Author of Inscriptions of the Early Gupta Kings; &c.
Hindu Chronology.
J. F. H. B. Sir John Francis Harpin Broadbent, Bart., M.A., M.D.
Physician to Out-Patients, St Mary’s Hospital, London, and to the Hampstead General Hospital. Assistant Physician to the London Fever Hospital. Author of Heart Disease and Aneurysm; &c.

Heart: Heart Disease.

Heart: Cardiovascular Disease.

J. G.* Rev. James Gow, M.A., Litt.D.
Head Master of Westminster School. Fellow of King’s College, London. Formerly Fellow of Trinity College, Cambridge. Editor of Horace’s Odes and Satires. Author of A Companion to the School Classics; &c.
Horace (in part).
J. Ga. James Gairdner, C.B.
See the biographical article, Gairdner, J.

Henry VII.: of England.

Henry VII: King of England.

J. G. M. John Gray McKendrick, M.D., LL.D., F.R.S., F.R.C.P. (Edin.)
Emeritus Professor of Physiology at the University of Glasgow. Author of Life in Motion; Life of Helmholtz; &c.

Hearing;

Listening;

Helmholtz.

Helmholtz.

J. G. R. John George Robertson, M.A., Ph.D.
Professor of German at the University of London. Formerly Lecturer on the English Language, Strassburg University. Author of History of German Literature; &c.

Heine (in part);

Heine (partially);

Hildebrand, Lay of;

Hildebrand, Song of;

Hoffmann, E. T. W.

Hoffmann, E. T. W.

J. Hn. Justus Hashagen, Ph.D.
Privatdozent in Medieval and Modern History, University of Bonn. Author of Das Rheinland unter der französischen Herrschaft.

Hecker, F. F. K.;

Hecker, F. F. K.;

Hertzberg, Count Von;

Count Von Hertzberg;

Hormayr.

Hormayr.

J. H. A. H. John Henry Arthur Hart, M.A.
Fellow, Theological Lecturer and Librarian, St John’s College, Cambridge.
Herod; Herodians.
J. H. F. John Henry Freese, M.A.
Formerly Fellow of St John’s College, Cambridge.
Herald; Hesiod (in part).
J. H. Mu. John Henry Muirhead, M.A., LL.D.
Professor of Philosophy in the University of Birmingham. Author of Elements of Ethics; Philosophy and Life; &c. Editor of Library of Philosophy.

Hegel: Hegelianism in England.

Hegel: Hegelianism in the UK.

J. H. R. John Horace Round, M.A., LL.D. (Edin.).
Author of Feudal England; Studies in Peerage and Family History; Peerage and Pedigree.
Hereward.
J. J. F. Rev. James J. Fox
St Thomas’s College, Brookland, D.C., U.S.A.
Hecker, I. T.
J. K. L. Sir John Knox Laughton, M.A., Litt.D.
Professor of Modern History, King’s College, London, Secretary of the Navy Records Society. Served in the Baltic, 1854-1855; in China, 1856-1859. Honorary Fellow, Gonville and Caius College, Cambridge. Fellow, King’s College, London. Author of Physical Geography in its Relation to the Prevailing Winds and Currents; Studies in Naval History; Sea Fights and Adventures; &c.
Hood of Avalon.
J. M. M. John M. Mitchell.
Sometime Scholar of Queen’s College, Oxford. Lecturer in Classics, East London College (University of London). Joint-editor of Grote’s History of Greece.

Heraclitus;

Heraclitus

Hume, David (in part).

David Hume (partially).

J. P.-B. James Penderel-Brodhurst.
Editor of the Guardian (London).
Hepplewhite.
J. P. Pe. Rev. John Punnett Peters, Ph.D., D.D.
Canon Residentiary, Cathedral of New York. Formerly Professor of Hebrew in the University of Pennsylvania. Director of the University Expedition to Babylonia, 1888-1895. Author of Nippur, or Explorations and Adventures on the Euphrates.
Hillah; Hit.
J. S. Co. James Sutherland Cotton, M.A.
Editor of The Imperial Gazetteer of India. Hon. Secretary of the Egyptian Exploration Fund. Formerly Fellow and Lecturer of Queen’s College, Oxford. Author of India in the “Citizen” Series; &c.
Hastings, Warren.
J. S. F. John Smith Flett, D.Sc., F.G.S.
Petrographer to the Geological Survey. Formerly Lecturer on Petrology in Edinburgh University. Neill Medallist of the Royal Society of Edinburgh. Bigsby Medallist of the Geological Society of London.
Hornfels.
J. T. Be. John T. Bealby.
Joint-author of Stanford’s Europe. Formerly Editor of the Scottish Geographical Magazine. Translator of Sven Hedin’s Through Asia, Central Asia and Tibet; &c.
Hissar (in part).
J. T. C. Joseph Thomas Cunningham, M.A., F.Z.S.
Lecturer on Zoology at the South-Western Polytechnic, London. Formerly Fellow of University College, Oxford. Assistant Professor of Natural History in the University of Edinburgh and Naturalist to the Marine Biological Association.
Herring.
J. T. Mo. John Torrey Morse, Jr.
Author of The Life and Letters of Oliver Wendell Holmes.
Holmes, Oliver Wendell.
J. T. S.* James Thomson Shotwell, Ph.D.
Professor of History in Columbia University, New York City.
History.
J. V.* Jules Viard.
Archivist at the National Archives, Paris. Officer of Public Instruction. Author of La France sous Philippe VI. de Valois; &c.
Hundred Years’ War.
J. V. B. James Vernon Bartlet, M.A., D.D. (St Andrews).
Professor of Church History, Mansfield College, Oxford. Author of The Apostolic Age; &c.

Hebrews, Epistle to the;

Letter to the Hebrews;

Hermas, Shepherd of.

Shepherd of Hermas.

J. Ws. John Weathers, F.R.H.S.
Lecturer on Horticulture to the Middlesex County Council. Author of Practical Guide to Garden Plants; French Market Gardening; &c.

Hippeastrum; Honeysuckle;

Hippeastrum; Honeysuckle;

Horticulture (in part).

Horticulture (in part).

J. W.* James Ward, PhD, LLD.
Professor of Mental Philosophy and Logic in the University of Cambridge. Fellow of Trinity College, Cambridge. Fellow of the British Academy. Fellow of the New York Academy of Sciences.
Herbart.
J. W. F. J. Walter Ferrier.
Translated George Eliot and Judaism from the German of Kaufmann. Author of Mottiscliffe.
Heine (in part).
J. W. Fo. The Honorable John Watson Foster, A.M., LL.D.
Professor of American Diplomatics, George Washington University, Washington, U.S.A. Formerly U.S. Secretary of State. Author of Diplomatic Memoirs; &c.
Harrison, Benjamin.
K. S. Kathleen Schlesinger.
Editor of The Portfolio of Musical Archaeology. Author of The Instruments of the Orchestra.

Harp (in part);

Harp (partially);

Harp-Lute; Harpsichord;

Harp-Lute; Harpsichord;

Holztrompete;

Wood trumpet;

Horn; Hurdy-Gurdy.

Horn; Hurdy-Gurdy.

L. H. B. Liberty Hyde Bailey, LL.D.
Director of the College of Agriculture, Cornell University. Chairman of Roosevelt Commission on Country Life.

Horticulture: American Calendar (in part).

Horticulture: American Calendar (in part).

L. J. S. Leonard James Spencer, M.A.
Assistant in Department of Mineralogy, British Museum. Formerly Scholar of Sidney Sussex College, Cambridge, and Harkness Scholar. Editor of the Mineralogical Magazine.

Harmotome; Hemimorphite;

Harmotome; Hemimorphite;

Heulandite; Hornblende;

Heulandite; Hornblende;

Humite.

Humite.

L. W. Lucien Wolf.
Vice-President of the Jewish Historical Society of England. Formerly President of the Society. Joint-editor of the Bibliotheca Anglo-judaica.
Hirsch, Baron.
M. G. Moses Gaster, PhD (Leipzig).
Chief Rabbi of the Sephardic Communities of England. Vice-President, Zionist Congress, 1898, 1899, 1900. Ilchester Lecturer at Oxford on Slavonic and Byzantine Literature, 1886 and 1891. President, Folk lore Society of England. Vice-President Anglo-Jewish Association. Author of History of Rumanian Popular Literature; &c.
Hasdeu.
M. Ha. Marcus Hartog, M.A., D.Sc., F.L.S.
Professor of Zoology, University College, Cork. Author of “Protozoa” in Cambridge Natural History; and papers for various scientific journals.
Heliozoa.
M. H. C. Montague Hughes Crackanthorpe, K.C., D.C.L.
President of the Eugenics Education Society. Honorary Fellow, St John’s College, Oxford. Bencher of Lincoln’s Inn. Formerly Member of the General Council of the Bar and of the Council of Legal Education, and Standing Counsel to the University of Oxford.
Herschell, 1st Baron.
M. N. T. Marcus Niehbur Tod, M.A.
Fellow and Tutor of Oriel College, Oxford. University Lecturer in Epigraphy. Joint-author of Catalogue of the Sparta Museum.
Helots.
M. O. B. C. Maximilian Otto Bismarck Caspari.
Reader in Ancient History at London University. Lecturer in Greek at Birmingham University, 1905-1908.
Heraclius.
M. T. M. Maxwell T. Masters, M.D., F.R.S. (1833-1907).
Formerly Editor of Gardeners’ Chronicle; and Lecturer on Botany, St George’s Hospital, London. Author of Plant Life; Botany for Beginners; and numerous monographs in botanical works.
Horticulture (in part).
N. D. M. Newton Dennison Mereness, M.A., Ph.D.
Author of Maryland as a Proprietary Province.

Henry, Patrick;

Henry, Patrick;

Homestead and Exemption Laws.

Homestead and Exemption Laws.

O. Ba. Oswald Barron, F.S.A.
Editor of The Ancestor, 1902-1905. Hon. Genealogist to Standing Council of the Honourable Society of the Baronetage.

Heraldry;

Coat of arms;

Herbert: family;

Herbert: family;

Howard: family.

Howard: family.

O. Br. Oscar Brilliant.

Hungary: Geography and Statistics.

Hungary: Geography and Stats.

O. C. W. Rev. Owen Charles Whitehouse, M.A., D.D.
Christ’s College, Cambridge. Professor of Hebrew, Biblical Exegesis and Theology, and Theological Tutor, Cheshunt College, Cambridge.
Hebrew Religion.
P. A. Paul Daniel Alphandéry.
Professor of the History of Dogma, École pratique des hautes études, Sorbonne, Paris. Author of Les Idées morales chez les hétérodoxes Latines au début du XIII^e siècle.

Henry of Lausanne;

Henry of Lausanne;

Hugh of St Victor;

Hugh of St. Victor

Humiliati.

Humiliated.

P. C. M. Peter Chalmers Mitchell, M.A., F.R.S., F.Z.S., D.Sc., LL.D.
Secretary to the Zoological Society of London. University Demonstrator in Comparative Anatomy and Assistant to Linacre Professor at Oxford, 1888-1891. Examiner in Zoology to the University of London, 1903. Author of Outlines of Biology; &c.

Hemichorda;

Hemichordata;

Heredity.

Genetics.

P. C. Y. Philip Chesney Yorke, M.A.
Magdalen College, Oxford. Editor of Letters of Princess Elizabeth of England.
Holles, Baron.
P. H. Peter Henderson (1823-1890).
Formerly Horticulturist, Jersey City and New York. Author of Gardening for Profit; Garden and Farm Topics.

Horticulture: American Calendar (in part).

Horticulture: American Calendar (in part).

P. H. P.-S. Philip Henry Pye-Smith, M.D., F.R.S.
Consulting Physician to Guy’s Hospital, London. Formerly Vice-Chancellor of the University of London. Joint-author of A Text Book of Medicine; &c.
Harvey, William.
P. La. Philip Lake, M.A., F.G.S.
Lecturer on Physical and Regional Geography in Cambridge University. Formerly of the Geological Survey of India. Author of Monograph of British Cambrian Trilobites. Translator and Editor of Kayser’s Comparative Geology.

Himalaya: Geology.

Himalayas: Geology.

R. A.* Robert Anchel.
Archivist to the Department de l’Eure.
Herault de Séchelles.
R. Ad. Robert Adamson, PhD.
See the biographical article, Adamson, R.
Hume, David (in part).
R. A. S. M. Robert Alexander Stewart Macalister, M.A., F.S.A.
St John’s College, Cambridge. Director of Excavations for the Palestine Exploration Fund.
Hebron; Hor, Mt.
R. A. W. Robert Alexander Wahab, C.B., C.M.G., C.I.E.
Colonel, Royal Engineers. Formerly H.M. Commissioner, Aden Boundary Delimitation, and Superintendent, Survey of India. Served with Tirah Expeditionary Force, 1897-1898; Anglo-Russian Boundary Commission, Pamirs, 1895; &c.
Hasa, El; Hejaz.
R. H. S. Richard Henry Stoddard.
See the biographical article, Stoddard, Richard Henry.
Hawthorne, Nathaniel.
R. I. P. Reginald Innes Pocock, F.Z.S.
Superintendent of the Zoological Gardens, London.
Harvester; Hibernation.
R. J. M. Ronald John McNeill, M.A.
Christ Church, Oxford. Barrister-at-Law. Formerly Editor of the St James’s Gazette, London.
Hely-Hutchinson.
R. J. S. Hon. Robert John Strutt, M.A., F.R.S.
Professor of Physics in the Imperial College of Science and Technology, South Kensington. Fellow of Trinity College, Cambridge.
Helium.
R. K. D. Sir Robert Kennaway Douglas.
Formerly Keeper of Oriental Printed Books and MSS. at the British Museum, and Professor of Chinese, King’s College, London. Author of The Language and Literature of China; &c.
Hsüan Tsang (in part).
R. L.* Richard Lydekker, F.R.S., F.G.S., F.Z.S.
Member of the Staff of the Geological Survey of India, 1874-1882. Author of Catalogue of Fossil Mammals, Reptiles and Birds in the British Museum; The Deer of all Lands; The Game Animals of Africa; &c.

Hedgehog;

Hedgehog;

Hippopotamus;

Hippopotamus

Horse (in part); Howler.

Horse; Howler.

R. N. B. Robert Nisbet Bain (d. 1909).
Assistant Librarian, British Museum, 1883-1909. Author of Scandinavia, the Political History of Denmark, Norway and Sweden, 1513-1900; The First Romanovs 1613-1725; Slavonic Europe, the Political History of Poland and Russia from 1469 to 1796; &c.

Höpken; Horn, A. B., Count;

Höpken; Count A. B. Horn;

Hungary: History (in part);

Hungary: History (partially);

Hunyadi, János;

John Hunyadi;

Hunyadi, László.

László Hunyadi.

R. Po. René Poupardin, D. ès L.
Secretary of the École des Chartes. Honorary Librarian at the Bibliothèque Nationale, Paris. Author of Le Royaume de Provence sous les Carolingiens; Recueil des chartes de Saint-Germain; &c.
Hinemar.
R. P. S. R. Phené Spiers, F.S.A., F.R.I.B.A.
Formerly Master of the Architectural School, Royal Academy, London. Past President of Architectural Association. Associate and Fellow of King’s College, London. Corresponding Member of the Institute of France. Editor of Fergusson’s History of Architecture. Author of Architecture: East and West; &c.
House.
R. S. C. Robert Seymour Conway, M.A., D.Litt. (Cantab.).
Professor of Latin and Indo-European Philology in the University of Manchester. Formerly Professor of Latin in University College, Cardiff; and Fellow of Gonville and Caius College, Cambridge. Author of The Italic Dialects.

Hernici;

Hernia;

Hirpini.

Hirpini.

R. S. T. Ralph Tarr.
Professor of Physical Geography, Cornell University.
Hudson River.
R. W. Robert Wallace, F.R.S. (Edin.), F.L.S.
Professor of Agriculture and Rural Economy at Edinburgh University, and Garton. Lecturer on Colonial and Indian Agriculture. Professor of Agriculture, R.A.C., Cirencester, 1882-1885. Author of Farm Live Stock of Great Britain; The Agriculture and Rural Economy of Australia and New Zealand; Farming Industries of Cape Colony; &c.
Horse (in part).
S. F. B. Spencer Fullerton Baird, LL.D.
See the biographical article, Baird, S. F.
Henry, Joseph.
S. A. C. Stanley Arthur Cook, M.A.
Lecturer in Hebrew and Syriac, and formerly Fellow, Gonville and Caius College, Cambridge. Editor for Palestine Exploration Fund. Examiner in Hebrew and Aramaic, London University, 1904-1908. Author of Glossary of Aramaic Inscriptions; The Laws of Moses and the Code of Hammurabi; Critical Notes on Old Testament History; Religion of Ancient Palestine; &c.

Hezekiah;

Hezekiah

Hoshea.

Hoshea.

T. A. I. Thomas Allan Ingram, M.A., LL.D.
Trinity College, Dublin.
Holiday.
T. As. Thomas Ashby, M.A., D.Litt. (Oxon.).
Director of British School of Archaeology at Rome. Formerly Scholar of Christ Church, Oxford. Craven Fellow, 1897. Conington Prizeman, 1906. Member of the Imperial German Archaeological Institute.

Heraclea (in part);

Heraclea (partially);

Hispellum.

Hispellum.

T. Ba. Thomas Barclay, M.P.
Member of the Institute of International Law. Member of the Supreme Council of the Congo Free State. Officer of the Legion of Honour. Author of Problems of International Practice and Diplomacy; &c. M.P. for Blackburn, 1910.
High Seas.
T. B.* Thomas Brown.
Incorporated Weaving, Dyeing and Printing College, Glasgow.
Hosiery.
T. F. H. T.F. Henderson.
Author of The Casket Letters and Mary Queen of Scots; Life of Robert Burns; &c.
Hooker, Richard.
T. Gi. Thomas Gilray, M.A.
Formerly Professor of Modern History and English Literature, University College, Dundee.

Henderson, Alexander (in part).

Henderson, Alexander (partly).

T. H. H.* Colonel Sir Thomas Hungerford Holdich, K.C.M.G., K.C.I.E., Honorary D.Sc.
Superintendent Frontier Surveys, India, 1892-1898. Gold Medallist, R.G.S., London, 1887. Author of The Indian Borderland; The Countries of the King’s Award; India; Tibet; &c.

Helmund; Herat;

Helmand; Herat;

Himalaya;

Himalayas

Hindu Kush.

Hindu Kush.

T. L. H. Sir Thomas Little Heath, K.C.B., D.Sc.
Assistant Secretary to the Treasury. Formerly Fellow of Trinity College, Cambridge.
Hero of Alexandria.
T. Se. Thomas Seccombe, M.A.
Balliol College, Oxford. Lecturer in History, East London and Birkbeck Colleges, University of London. Stanhope Prizeman, Oxford, 1887. Assistant Editor of Dictionary of National Biography, 1891-1901. Author of The Age of Johnson; joint-author of Bookman History of English Literature; &c.

Hayward, Abraham;

Hayward, Abraham;

Hughes, Thomas.

Hughes, Thomas.

T. Wo. Thomas Woodhouse.
Head of the Weaving and Textile Designing Department, Technical College, Dundee.
Hose-Pipe.
T. W. A. Thomas William Allen, M.A.
Fellow and Tutor of Queen’s College, Oxford. Joint-editor of The Homeric Hymns.
Homer (in part).
W. A. B. C Rev. William Augustus Brevoort Coolidge, M.A., F.R.G.S., Ph.D.
Fellow of Magdalen College, Oxford. Professor of English History, St David’s College, Lampeter, 1880-1881. Author of Guide to Switzerland; The Alps in Nature and in History; &c. Editor of The Alpine Journal, 1880-1889.

Hautes Alpes;

Hautes Alpes

Haute-Savoie;

Haute-Savoie

Herzog, Hans.

Hans Herzog.

W. A. P. Walter Alison Phillips, M.A.
Formerly Exhibitioner of Merton College and Senior Scholar of St John’s College, Oxford. Author of Modern Europe; &c.

Hohenlohe (in part).

Hohenlohe (partly).

Holy Alliance, The;

Holy Alliance

Honorius I.;

Honorius I.

Hungary: History (in part).

Hungary: History (partially).

W. Ba. William Bacher, D.Ph.
Professor of Biblical Studies at the Rabbinical Seminary, Budapest.
Hillel.
W. Fr. William Fream, LL.D. (d. 1907).
Formerly Lecturer on Agricultural Entomology, University of Edinburgh, and Agricultural Correspondent of The Times.

Hop;

Hop

Horse (in part).

Horse (partly).

W. F. C William Feilden Craies, M.A.
Barrister-at-Law, Inner Temple. Lecturer on Criminal Law at King’s College, London. Editor of Archbold’s Criminal Pleading (23rd ed.).
Homicide.
W. G. H. Walter George Headlam (1866-1908).
Fellow of King’s College, Cambridge. Editor of Herodas. Translator of the plays of Aeschylus.
Herodas.
W. H. F. Sir William Henry Flower, F.R.S.
See the biographical article, Flower, Sir W. H.
Horse (in part).
W. H. Ha. William Henry Hadow, M.A., Mus.Doc.
Principal, Armstrong College, Newcastle-on-Tyne. Formerly Fellow and Tutor of Worcester College, Oxford. Member of Council, Royal College of Music. Editor of Oxford History of Music. Author of Studies in Modern Music; &c.
Haydn.
W. L. G. William Lawson Grant, M.A.
Professor at Queen’s University, Kingston, Canada. Formerly Beit Lecturer in Colonial History at Oxford University. Editor of Acts of the Privy Council, Colonial Series; Canadian Constitutional Development (in collaboration).
Howe, Joseph.
W. M. R. William Michael Rossetti.
See the biographical article, Rossetti, Dante Gabriel.
Haydon, Benjamin Robert.
W. P. J. William James Price.
University College, Oxford. Barrister-at-Law. High Bailiff of County Courts, Cardiff. Author of Romantic Professions; &c.
Henley, W. E.
W. R. Nl. Sir William Robertson Nicoll, Ph.D.
See the biographical article, Nicoll, Sir W. R.
Harris, Thomas Lake.
W. R. S. William Robertson Smith, Ph.D.
See the biographical article, Smith, William Robertson.
Hosea (in part).
W. R. S.-R. William Ralston Shedden-Ralston, M.A.
Assistant in the Department of Printed Books, British Museum. Author of Russian Folk Tales; &c.
Hertzen.
W. R. W. William Robert Worthington Williams, F.L.S.
Superintendent of London County Council Botany Centre. Assistant Lecturer in Botany, Birkbeck College (University of London). Member of the Geologists’ Association.
Horticulture (in part).
W. T. H. William Tod Helmuth, M.D., LL.D. (d. 1901).
Formerly Professor of Surgery and Dean of the Homoeopathic and Medical College and Hospital New York. President of the Collins State Homoeopathic Hospital. Sometime President of the American Institute of Homoeopathy and the New York State Homoeopathic Medical Society. Author of Treatise on Diphtheria; System of Surgery; &c.
Homoeopathy.
W. W. William Wallace, Doctor of Laws
See the biographical article, Wallace, William (1844-1897).
Hegel (in part).
W. Wr. Williston Walker, Ph.D., D.D.
Professor of Church History, Yale University. Author of History of the Congregational Churches in the United States; The Reformation; John Calvin; &c.
Hopkins, Samuel.
W. Y. S. William Young Sellar, Ph.D.
See the biographical article, Sellar, W. Y.
Horace (in part).

1 A complete list, showing all individual contributors, appears in the final volume.

1 A full list of all individual contributors will be included in the final volume.

 

 

PRINCIPAL UNSIGNED ARTICLES

MAIN UNSIGNED ARTICLES

Harrow.

Harrow.

Hartford.

Hartford.

Hartlepool.

Hartlepool.

Harvard University.

Harvard University.

Harz Mountains.

Harz Mountains.

Hat.

Hat.

Havana.

Havanna.

Hawaii.

Hawaii.

Hazel.

Hazel.

Health.

Wellness.

Heath.

Health.

Hebrides, The.

The Hebrides.

Heidelberg Catechism.

Heidelberg Catechism.

Heligoland.

Helgoland.

Heliostat.

Heliostat.

Hellebore.

Hellebore flower.

Helmet.

Helmet.

Hemp.

Hemp plant.

Herbarium.

Plant collection.

Herefordshire.

Herefordshire.

Hero.

Hero.

Hertfordshire.

Hertfordshire.

Hesse.

Hesse.

Hesse-Cassel.

Hesse-Kassel.

Hesse-Darmstadt.

Hesse-Darmstadt.

High Place.

High Place.

Highway.

Highway.

Hockey.

Hockey.

Holly.

Holly.

Homily.

Sermon.

Honduras.

Honduras.

Hong-Kong.

Hong Kong.

Hostage.

Hostage situation.

Hottentots.

Khoikhoi.

Household, Royal.

Royal Household.

Hudson’s Bay Company.

Hudson's Bay Co.

Huntingdonshire.

Huntingdonshire.


1

1

HARMONY (Gr. ἁρμονία, a concord of musical sounds, ἁρμόζειν to join; ἁρμονική (sc. τεχνή) meant the science or art of music, μουσική being of wider significance), a combination of parts so that the effect should be aesthetically pleasing. In its earliest sense in English it is applied, in music, to a pleasing combination of musical sounds, but technically it is confined to the science of the combination of sounds of different pitch.

HARMONY (Gr. harmony, a blend of musical sounds, Fit to bring together; harmonic (sc. art) referred to the science or art of music, with music having a broader meaning), a combination of elements designed to be aesthetically pleasing. Initially, in English, it relates to a pleasing mix of musical sounds, but in a technical sense, it specifically refers to the science of combining sounds of different pitches.

I. Concord and Discord.—By means of harmony modern music has attained the dignity of an independent art. In ancient times, as at the present day among nations that have not come under the influence of European music, the harmonic sense was, if not altogether absent, at all events so obscure and undeveloped as to have no organizing power in the art. The formation by the Greeks of a scale substantially the same as that which has received our harmonic system shows a latent harmonic sense, but shows it in a form which positively excludes harmony as an artistic principle. The Greek perception of certain successions of sounds as concordant rests on a principle identifiable with the scientific basis of concord in simultaneous sounds. But the Greeks did not conceive of musical simultaneity as consisting of anything but identical sounds; and when they developed the practice of magadizingi.e. singing in octaves—they did so because, while the difference between high and low voices was a source of pleasure, a note and its octave were then, as now, perceived to be in a certain sense identical. We will now start from this fundamental identity of the octave, and with it trace the genesis of other concords and discords; bearing in mind that the history of harmony is the history of artistic instincts and not a series of progressive scientific theories.

I. Concord and Discord.—Through harmony, modern music has become a respected independent art form. In ancient times, just like in some cultures today that haven't been influenced by European music, the understanding of harmony was not completely absent, but was so unclear and underdeveloped that it didn’t have the power to organize the art. The Greeks created a scale that is mostly the same as the one used in our harmonic system, indicating a basic understanding of harmony, but still excluding harmony as an artistic principle. The Greek understanding of certain successions of sounds as harmonious is based on principles that align with the scientific reasoning behind harmony in simultaneous sounds. However, the Greeks didn't view musical simultaneity as anything other than identical sounds; when they practiced magadizingi.e. singing in octaves—they did so because the contrast between high and low voices was enjoyable, while a note and its octave were seen, then as now, as somewhat identical. We'll begin from this fundamental identity of the octave and use it to explore the development of other harmonies and disharmonies, keeping in mind that the history of harmony reflects artistic instincts rather than a series of evolving scientific theories.

Ex. 1.—The notes marked * are out of tune.

The unisonous quality of octaves is easily explained when we examine the “harmonic series” of upper partials (see Sound). Every musical sound, if of a timbre at all rich (and hence pre-eminently the human voice), contains some of these upper partials. Hence, if one voice produce a note which is an upper partial of another note sung at the same time by another voice, the higher voice adds nothing new to the lower but only reinforces what is already there. Moreover, the upper partials of the higher voice will also coincide with some of the lower. Thus, if a note and its octave be sung together, the upper octave is itself No. 2 in the harmonic series of the lower, No. 2 of its own series is No. 4 of the lower, and its No. 3 is No. 6, and so on. The impression of identity thus produced is so strong that we often find among people unacquainted with music a firm conviction that a man is singing in unison with a boy or an instrument when he is really singing in the octave below. And even musical people find a difficulty in realizing more than a certain brightness and richness of single tone when a violinist plays octaves perfectly in tune and with a strong emphasis on the lower notes. Doubling in octaves therefore never was and never will be a process of harmonization.

The harmonious quality of octaves is easy to understand when we look at the “harmonic series” of overtones (see Sound). Every musical sound, especially a rich timbre like the human voice, includes some of these overtones. So, if one voice sings a note that is an overtone of another note sung simultaneously by a second voice, the higher voice doesn’t add anything new to the lower voice; it just reinforces what’s already there. Additionally, the overtones of the higher voice will also match some of the lower voice’s. Therefore, when a note and its octave are sung together, the upper octave corresponds to No. 2 in the lower’s harmonic series, No. 2 of its own series is No. 4 of the lower, and its No. 3 is No. 6, and so on. This feeling of sameness is so strong that we often find people unfamiliar with music convinced that a man is singing in unison with a boy or an instrument when he is actually singing an octave lower. Even those with musical training can struggle to recognize more than a certain brightness and richness in a single tone when a violinist plays octaves perfectly in tune with a strong emphasis on the lower notes. Doubling in octaves has never been and never will be a process of harmonization.

Now if we take the case of one sound doubling another in the 12th, it will be seen that here, too, no real addition is made by the higher sound to the lower. The 12th is No. 3 of the harmonic series, No. 2 of the higher note will be No. 6 of the lower, No. 3 will be No. 9, and so on. But there is an important difference between the 12th and the octave. However much we alter the octave by transposition into other octaves, we never get anything but unison or octaves. Two notes two octaves apart are just as devoid of harmonic difference as a plain octave or unison. But, when we apply our principle of the identity of the octave to the 12th, we find that the removal of one of the notes by an octave may produce a combination in which there is a distinct harmonic element. If, for example, the lower note is raised by an octave so that the higher note is a fifth from it, No. 3 of the harmonic series of the higher note will not belong to the lower note at all. The 5th is thus a combination of which the two notes are obviously different; and, moreover, the principle of the identity of octaves can now operate in a contrary direction and transfer this positive harmonic value of the 5th to the 12th, so that we regard the 12th as a 5th plus an octave, instead of regarding the 5th as a compressed 12th.1 At the same time, the relation between the two is quite close enough to give the 5th much of the feeling of harmonic poverty and reduplication that characterizes the octave; and hence when medieval musicians 2 doubled a melody in 5ths and octaves they believed themselves to be doing no more than extending and diversifying the means by which a melody might be sung in unison by different voices. How they came to prefer for this purpose the 4th to the 5th seems puzzling when we consider that the 4th does not appear as a fundamental interval in the harmonic series until that series has passed beyond that part of it that maintains any relation to our musical ideas. But it was of course certain that they obtained the 4th as the inversion of the 5th; and it is at least possible that the singers of lower voices found a peculiar pleasure in singing below higher voices in a position which they felt harmonically as that of a top part. That is to say, a bass, in singing a fourth below a tenor, would take pleasure in doubling in the octave an alto singing normally a 5th above the tenor.2 This should also, perhaps, be taken in connexion with the fact that the interval of the downward 4th is in melody the earliest that became settled. And it is worth noticing that, in any singing-class where polyphonic music is sung, there is a marked tendency among the more timid members to find their way into their part by a gentle humming which is generally a 4th below the nearest steady singers.

Now, if we look at the case where one sound doubles another in the 12th, we can see that, similarly, the higher sound doesn’t really add anything to the lower one. The 12th is No. 3 of the harmonic series, and the higher note's No. 2 will be No. 6 of the lower. No. 3 will be No. 9, and so on. However, there's a key difference between the 12th and the octave. No matter how we shift the octave into other octaves, we only ever get unison or octaves. Two notes that are two octaves apart have no harmonic difference, just like a simple octave or unison. But when we apply our principle of octave identity to the 12th, we find that taking one of the notes up an octave can create a combination with a distinct harmonic element. For example, if we raise the lower note by an octave so that the higher note is a fifth above it, No. 3 of the harmonic series for the higher note won’t belong to the lower note at all. The 5th therefore is a combination where the two notes are clearly different; additionally, the principle of octave identity can now work in the opposite direction and carry this positive harmonic value of the 5th over to the 12th, allowing us to view the 12th as a 5th plus an octave instead of seeing the 5th as a compressed 12th. At the same time, the relationship between the two is close enough that the 5th has much of the harmonic lack and duplication feeling that characterizes the octave. Thus, when medieval musicians doubled a melody in 5ths and octaves, they thought they were simply broadening and diversifying the ways a melody could be sung in unison by different voices. It’s puzzling why they preferred the 4th over the 5th for this purpose, given that the 4th doesn't show up as a fundamental interval in the harmonic series until that series goes beyond what relates to our musical ideas. However, it’s clear they got the 4th as the inversion of the 5th; and it’s at least possible that singers with lower voices enjoyed singing below higher voices in a position they felt was harmonically a lead part. In other words, a bass singer, performing a fourth below a tenor, would enjoy doubling in the octave an alto typically singing a 5th above the tenor. This may also connect to the fact that the downward 4th interval in melody was among the first to become established. It’s also worth noting that, in any singing class where polyphonic music is involved, there’s a noticeable trend among the more timid members to find their part by softly humming, which usually is a 4th below the nearest steady singers.

The limited compass of voices soon caused modifications in the medieval parallelisms of 4ths and 5ths, and the introduction of independent ornaments into one or more of the voices increased to an extent which drew attention to other intervals. It was long, however, before the true criterion of concord and discord was attained; and at first the notion of concord was purely acoustic, that is to say, the ear was sensitive only to the difference in roughness and smoothness between combinations in themselves. And even the modern researches of Helmholtz fail to represent classical and modern harmony, in so far as the phenomena of beats are quite independent of the contrapuntal nature of concord and discord which depends upon the melodic intelligibility of the motion of the parts. Beats give rise to a strong physical sense of discord akin to the painfulness of a flickering light (see Sound). Accordingly, in the earliest experiments in harmony, the ear, in the absence of other criteria, attached much more importance to the purely acoustic roughness of beats than our ears under the experience of modern music. This, and the circumstance that the imperfect concords3 (the 3rds and 6ths) long remained out of tune owing to the incompleteness of the Pythagorean system of harmonic ratios, sufficiently explain the medieval treatment of these combinations as discords differing only in degree from the harshness of 2nds and 7ths. In the earliest attempts at really contrapuntal writing (the astonishing 13th and 14th-century motets, in which voices are made to sing different melodies at once, with what seems to modern ears a total disregard of sound and sense) we find that the method consists in a kind of rough-hewing by which the concords of the octave, 5th and 4th are provided at most of the strong accents, while the rest of the harmony is left to take care of itself. As the art advanced the imperfect concords began to be felt as different from the discords; but as their true nature appeared it brought with it such an increased sense of the harmonic poverty of octaves, 5ths and 4ths, as ended in a complete inversion of the earliest rules of harmony.

The limited range of voices soon led to changes in the medieval use of 4ths and 5ths, and the addition of independent embellishments to one or more voices grew to the point where it highlighted other intervals. However, it took a long time to establish a true understanding of consonance and dissonance; at first, the concept of consonance was strictly acoustic, meaning the ear was only tuned to the differences in roughness and smoothness among combinations themselves. Even modern studies by Helmholtz fail to capture the full spectrum of classical and modern harmony, as the phenomenon of beats operates independently of the contrapuntal nature of consonance and dissonance, which relies on how clearly the motion of the parts is perceived melodically. Beats produce a strong physical sensation of dissonance similar to the discomfort caused by a flickering light (see Sound). Thus, in the earliest experiments with harmony, the ear, lacking other standards, prioritized the purely acoustic roughness of beats more than our ears do with today's music. This, along with the fact that the imperfect consonances3 (the 3rds and 6ths) remained out of tune for a long time due to the incompleteness of the Pythagorean system of harmonic ratios, explains why medieval thinkers regarded these combinations as dissonances that differed only slightly from the harshness of 2nds and 7ths. In the early attempts at true contrapuntal writing (the remarkable motets of the 13th and 14th centuries, where voices sing different melodies simultaneously, often ignoring sound and sense from a modern perspective), we see a method that resembles a rough sketch, where the consonances of the octave, 5th, and 4th are positioned at most strong accents, leaving the remainder of the harmony to manage itself. As the art evolved, the imperfect consonances began to be recognized as distinct from the dissonances; but as their true nature emerged, it brought with it a heightened awareness of the harmonic shortcomings of octaves, 5ths, and 4ths, culminating in a complete reversal of the earliest harmonic rules.

Ex. 2.
Ex. 3.

The harmonic system of the later 15th century, which culminated in the “golden age” of the 16th-century polyphony, may be described as follows: Imagine a flux of simultaneous independent melodies, so ordered as to form an artistic texture based not only on the variety of the melodies themselves, but also upon gradations between points of repose and points in which the roughness of sound is rendered interesting and beautiful by means of the clearness with which the melodic sense in each part indicates the convergence of all towards the next point of repose. The typical point of repose owes its effect not only to the acoustic smoothness of the combination, but to the fact that it actually consists of the essential elements present in the first five notes of the harmonic series. The major 3rd has thus in this scheme asserted itself as a concord, and the fundamental principle of the identity of octaves produces the result that any combination of a bass note with a major 3rd and a perfect 5th above it, at any distance, and with any amount of doubling, may constitute a concord available even as the final point of repose in the whole composition. And by degrees the major triad, with its major 3rd, became so familiar that a chord consisting of a bare 5th, with or without an octave, was regarded rather as a skeleton triad without the 3rd than as a concord free from elements of imperfection. Again, the identity of the octave secured for the combination of a note with its minor 3rd and minor 6th a place among concords; because, whether so recognized by early theorists or not, it was certainly felt as an inversion of the major triad. The fact that its bass note is not the fundamental note (and therefore has a series of upper partials not compatible with the higher notes) deprives it of the finality and perfection of the major triad, to which, however, its relationship is too near for it to be felt otherwise than as a concord. This sufficiently explains why the minor 6th ranks as a concord in music, though it is acoustically nearly as rough as the discord of the minor 7th, and considerably rougher than that of the 7th note of the harmonic series, which has not become accepted in our musical system at all.

The harmonic system of the late 15th century, which led to the “golden age” of 16th-century polyphony, can be described like this: Picture a flow of simultaneous independent melodies, arranged to create an artistic texture based not only on the variety of the melodies themselves but also on the transitions between points of rest and moments where the roughness of sound becomes interesting and beautiful due to the clarity with which the melodic ideas in each part point towards the next moment of rest. The typical point of rest is effective not just because of the pleasing sound combination, but because it consists of the essential elements found in the first five notes of the harmonic series. In this context, the major 3rd has established itself as a concord, and the fundamental principle of octave identity results in any combination of a bass note with a major 3rd and a perfect 5th above it, at any interval and with any degree of doubling, being able to act as a concord that can even serve as the final point of rest in the entire composition. Gradually, the major triad, with its major 3rd, became so well known that a chord made up of just a perfect 5th, with or without an octave, was seen more as an incomplete triad missing the 3rd than as a concord lacking imperfections. Furthermore, the identity of the octave ensured that a note combined with its minor 3rd and minor 6th gained a place among concords; because, regardless of whether early theorists recognized it or not, it was definitely felt as an inversion of the major triad. The fact that its bass note isn’t the fundamental note (and thus has a series of higher overtones that clash with the upper notes) takes away the finality and perfection of the major triad, yet its closeness in relationship means it is still perceived as a concord. This explains why the minor 6th is considered a concord in music, even though it sounds almost as rough as the discord of the minor 7th and significantly rougher than the 7th note of the harmonic series, which hasn’t been accepted in our musical system at all.

But the major triad and its inversion are not the only concords that will be produced by our flux of melodies. From time to time this flux will arrest attention by producing a combination which, while it does not appeal to the ear as being a part of the harmonic chord of nature, yet contains in itself no elements not already present in the major triad. Theorists have in vain tried to find in “nature” a combination of a note with its minor 3rd and perfect 5th; and so long as harmony was treated unhistorically and unscientifically as an a priori theory in which every chord must needs have a “root,” the minor triad, together with nearly every other harmonic principle of any complexity, remained a mystery. But the minor triad, as an artistic and not purely acoustic phenomenon, is an inevitable thing. It has the character of a concord because of our intellectual perception that it contains the same elements as the major triad; but its absence of connexion with the natural harmonic series deprives it of complete finality in the simple system of 16th-century harmony, and at the same time gives it a permanent contrast with the major triad; a contrast which is acoustically intensified by the fact that, though its intervals are in themselves as concordant as those of the major triad, their relative position produces decidedly rough combinations of “resultant tones.”

But the major triad and its inversion aren't the only harmonies created by our flow of melodies. Occasionally, this flow will catch our attention by producing a combination that, while not pleasing to the ear as part of the natural harmonic chord, still contains no elements that aren't already found in the major triad. Theorists have unsuccessfully tried to identify a combination in "nature" of a note with its minor third and perfect fifth; and as long as harmony was viewed unhistorically and unscientifically as an a priori theory where every chord must have a "root," the minor triad, along with almost every other harmonic principle that has any complexity, remained a mystery. However, the minor triad, as an artistic and not just acoustic phenomenon, is unavoidable. It has the quality of a harmony because our intellect perceives that it shares the same elements as the major triad; but its lack of connection to the natural harmonic series takes away its complete finality in the simple system of 16th-century harmony, while also creating a lasting contrast with the major triad. This contrast is acoustically heightened by the fact that, although its intervals are as harmonious as those of the major triad, their relative positioning leads to notably dissonant combinations of "resultant tones."

By the time our flux of melodies had come to include the major and minor triads as concords, the notion of the independence of parts had become of such paramount importance as totally to revolutionize the medieval conception of the perfect concords. Fifths and octaves no longer formed an oasis in a desert of cacophony, but they assumed the character of concord so nearly approaching to unison that a pair of consecutive 5ths or octaves began to be increasingly felt as violating the independence of the parts. And thus it came about that in pure 16th-century counterpoint (as indeed at the present day whenever harmony and counterpoint are employed in their purest significance) consecutive 5ths and octaves are strictly forbidden. When we compare our laws of counterpoint with those of medieval discant (in which consecutive 5ths and octaves are the rule, while consecutive 3rds and 6ths are strictly forbidden) we are sometimes tempted to think that the very nature of the human ear has changed. But it is now generally recognized that the process was throughout natural and inevitable, and the above account aims at showing that consecutive 5ths are forbidden by our harmonic system for the very reason which inculcated them in the system of the 12th century.

By the time our flow of melodies included major and minor triads as harmonious sounds, the idea of parts being independent had become so crucial that it completely changed the medieval view of perfect harmonies. Fifths and octaves stopped being an oasis in a desert of discord; instead, they started to feel so close to unison that having consecutive fifths or octaves began to be recognized as disrupting the independence of the parts. This led to the rule that in pure 16th-century counterpoint (and even today when harmony and counterpoint are used in their truest form), consecutive fifths and octaves are strictly prohibited. When we compare our counterpoint rules with those of medieval discant (where consecutive fifths and octaves were the norm, while consecutive thirds and sixths were strictly forbidden), we might think that the very nature of human hearing has changed. However, it is now widely accepted that this process was entirely natural and inevitable, and the explanation above seeks to demonstrate that consecutive fifths are banned by our harmonic system for the same reason they were embraced in the 12th-century system.

Ex. 4.
Ex. 5.

II. Tonality.—As soon as the major and minor triad and their first inversions were well-defined entities, it became evident that 3 the successions of these concords and their alternations with discord involved principles at once larger and more subtle than those of mere difference in smoothness and artificiality. Not only was a major chord (or at least its skeleton) necessary for the final point of repose in a composition, but it could not itself sound final unless the concords as well as the discords before it showed a well-defined tendency towards it. This tendency was best realized when the penultimate concord had its fundamental note at the distance of a 5th or a 4th above or below that of the final chord. When the fundamental note of the penultimate chord is a 5th above or (what is the same thing) a 4th below that of the final chord, we have an “authentic” or “perfect” cadence, and the relation between the two chords is very clear. While the contrast between them is well marked, they have one note in common—for the root of the penultimate chord is the 5th of the final chord; and the statement of this common note, first as an octave or unison and then as a 5th, expresses the first facts of harmony with a force which the major 3rds of the chords can only strengthen, while it also involves in the bass that melodic interval of the 4th or the 5th which is now known to be the germ of all melodic scales. The relation of the final note of a scale with its upper 5th or lower 4th thus becomes a fundamental fact of complex harmonic significance—that is to say, of harmony modified by melody in so far as it concerns the succession of sounds as well as their simultaneous combination. In our modern key-system the final note of the scale is called the tonic, and the 5th above or 4th below it is the dominant. (In the 16th century the term “dominant” has this meaning only in the “authentic” modes other than the Phrygian, but as an aesthetic fact it is present in all music, though the theory here given would not have been intelligible to any composers before the 18th century). Another penultimate chord asserts itself as the converse of the dominant—namely, the chord of which the root is a 5th below or a 4th above the final. This chord has not that relationship to the final which the dominant chord shows, for its fundamental note is not in the harmonic series of the final. But the fundamental note of the final chord is in its harmonic series, and in fact stands to it as the dominant stands to the final. Thus the progression from subdominant, as it is called, to tonic, or final, forms a full close known as the “plagal cadence,” second only in importance to the “perfect” or “authentic cadence.” In our modern key-system these three chords, the tonic, the dominant and the subdominant, form a firm harmonic centre in reference to which all other chords are grouped. The tonic is the final in which everything ultimately resolves: the dominant stands on one side of it as a chord based on the note harmonically most closely related to the tonic, and the subdominant stands on the other side as the converse and opposite of the dominant, weaker than the dominant because not directly derived from the tonic. The other triads obtainable from the notes of the scale are all minor, and of less importance; and their relationship to each other and to the tonic is most definite when they are so grouped that their basses rise and fall in 4th and 5ths, because they then tend to imitate the relationship between tonic, dominant and subdominant.

II. Tonality.—Once the major and minor triads and their first inversions were clearly established, it became clear that the sequences of these harmonious chords and their alternations with dissonance involved principles that were broader and more nuanced than just differences in smoothness and artificiality. Not only was a major chord (or at least its basic form) essential for the final resolution in a composition, but it couldn’t sound definitive unless the chords that came before it, both harmonious and dissonant, showed a clear tendency towards it. This tendency was best expressed when the second-to-last chord had its root note located a 5th or a 4th above or below that of the final chord. When the root note of the penultimate chord is a 5th above or (which is the same thing) a 4th below the final chord, we have an “authentic” or “perfect” cadence, making the relationship between the two chords very clear. While the contrast between them is distinct, they share one note in common—after all, the root of the penultimate chord is the 5th of the final chord; stating this common note first as an octave or unison and then as a 5th powerfully conveys the basic facts of harmony, which the major 3rds of the chords only enhance. It also involves in the bass that melodic interval of the 4th or the 5th, which is now recognized as the foundation of all melodic scales. The relationship of the final note of a scale with its upper 5th or lower 4th thus becomes a foundational fact of complex harmonic significance—meaning harmony modified by melody concerning the progression of sounds as well as their simultaneous combination. In our modern key system, the final note of the scale is called the tonic, and the 5th above or 4th below it is the dominant. (In the 16th century, the term “dominant” only had this meaning in “authentic” modes other than the Phrygian, but as an artistic fact, it exists in all music, though the theory presented here would not have been understood by composers before the 18th century). Another penultimate chord emerges as the counterpart of the dominant—specifically, the chord whose root is a 5th below or a 4th above the final chord. This chord doesn’t have the same relationship to the final chord as the dominant does, because its root note isn’t in the harmonic series of the final. However, the root note of the final chord is in its harmonic series and actually relates to it as the dominant relates to the final. Therefore, the progression from subdominant to tonic, or final, forms a complete close known as a “plagal cadence,” which is second in importance only to the “perfect” or “authentic cadence.” In our modern key system, these three chords—the tonic, the dominant, and the subdominant—create a solid harmonic center around which all other chords are organized. The tonic is the final point where everything resolves; the dominant resides on one side of it as a chord based on the note most closely related to the tonic, while the subdominant stands on the other side as its opposite and counterpart, being weaker than the dominant since it is not directly derived from the tonic. The other triads obtainable from the notes of the scale are all minor and of lesser importance, and their relationships to each other and to the tonic become most distinct when they are arranged such that their roots rise and fall in 4ths and 5ths, as they then tend to imitate the relationships between the tonic, dominant, and subdominant.

Ex. 6.

1 The submediant is so-called because if the subdominant is taken a 5th below the tonic, the submediant will come midway between it and the tonic, as the mediant comes midway between tonic and dominant.

1 The submediant gets its name because if you take the subdominant a 5th below the tonic, the submediant will be located halfway between it and the tonic, just like the mediant is halfway between the tonic and dominant.

Here are the six common chords of the diatonic scale. The triad on the 7th degree or “leading-note” (B) is a discord, and is therefore not given here.

Here are the six common chords of the diatonic scale. The triad on the 7th degree or "leading note" (B) is a dissonance, so it’s not included here.

Now, in the 16th century it was neither necessary nor desirable that chords should be grouped exclusively in this way. The relation between tonic, dominant and subdominant must necessarily appear at the final close, and in a lesser degree at subordinate points of repose; but, where no harmonies were dwelt on as stable and independent entities except the major and minor triads and their first inversions, a scheme in which these were confined to the illustration of their most elementary relationship would be intolerably monotonous. It is therefore neither surprising nor a sign of archaism that the tonality of modal music is from the modern point of view often very indefinite. On the contrary, the distinction between masterpieces and inferior works in the 16th century is nowhere more evident than in the expressive power of modal tonality, alike where it resembles and where it differs from modern. Nor is it too much to say that that expressive power is based on the modern sense of key, and that a description of modal tonality in terms of modern key will accurately represent the harmonic art of Palestrina and the other supreme masters, though it will have almost as little in common with 16th-century theory and inferior 16th-century practice as it has with modern custom. We must conceive modal harmony and tonality as a scheme in which voices move independently and melodiously in a scale capable of bearing the three chords of the tonic, dominant and subdominant, besides three other minor triads, but not under such restrictions of symmetrical rhythm and melodic design as will necessitate a confinement to schemes in which these three cardinal chords occupy a central position. The only stipulation is that the relationship of at least two cardinal chords shall appear at every full close. At other points the character and drift of the harmony is determined by quite a different principle—namely, that, the scale being conceived as indefinitely extended, the voices are agreed in selecting a particular section of it, the position of which determines not only the melodic character of each part but also the harmonic character of the whole, according to its greater or less remoteness from the scale in which major cardinal chords occupy a central position. Historically these modes were derived, with various errors and changes, from the purely melodic modes of the Greeks. Aesthetically they are systems of modern tonality adapted to conditions in which the range of harmony was the smallest possible, and the necessity for what we may conveniently call a clear and solid key-perspective incomparably slighter than that for variety within so narrow a range. We may thus regard modal harmony as an essentially modern scheme, presented to us in cross-sections of various degrees of obliquity, and modified at every close so as either to take us to a point of view in which we see the harmony symmetrically (as in those modes4 of which the final chord is normally major, namely the Ionian, which is practically our major scale, the Mixolydian and the Lydian, which last is almost invariably turned into Ionian by the systematic flattening of its 4th degree) or else to transform the mode itself so that its own notes are flattened and sharpened into suitable final chords (as is necessary in those modes of which the triad on the final is normally minor, namely, the Dorian, Phrygian and Aeolian). In this way we may describe Mixolydian tonality as a harmonic scheme in which the keys of G major and C major are so combined that sometimes we feel that we are listening to harmony in C major that is disposed to overbalance towards the dominant, and sometimes that we are in G major with a pronounced leaning towards the subdominant. In the Dorian mode our sensations of tonality are more confused. We seem to be wandering through all the key-relationships of a minor tonic without defining anything, until at the final close the harmonies gather strength and bring us, perhaps with poetic surprise, to a close in D with a major chord. In the Phrygian mode the difficulty in forming the final close is such that classical Phrygian compositions actually end in what we feel to be a half-close, an impression which is by the great masters rendered perfectly artistic by the strong feeling that all such parts of the composition as do not owe their expression to the variety and inconstancy of their harmonic drift are on the dominant of A minor.

Now, in the 16th century, it wasn't necessary or desirable for chords to be grouped in this exclusive way. The relationship between the tonic, dominant, and subdominant had to appear clearly at the end of a piece, and to a lesser extent at certain points of rest; however, since harmonies were not treated as stable and independent entities except for major and minor triads and their first inversions, a method that only highlighted their most basic relationships would be unbearably monotonous. So, it’s not surprising or indicative of being outdated that the tonality of modal music often seems very vague from a modern perspective. In fact, the difference between masterpieces and lesser works in the 16th century is most clearly seen in the expressive power of modal tonality, both in its similarities to and differences from modern styles. It’s fair to say that this expressive power is based on a contemporary understanding of key, and that describing modal tonality using modern key terms will accurately reflect the harmonic craft of Palestrina and other great masters, even though it aligns almost as little with 16th-century theory and lesser 16th-century practices as it does with modern conventions. We need to understand modal harmony and tonality as a system where voices move independently and melodically across a scale that can support the three chords of tonic, dominant, and subdominant, along with three other minor triads, but without the constraints of symmetrical rhythm and melodic design that would limit the central role of these three essential chords. The only requirement is that the relationship between at least two of the essential chords should appear at every complete close. At other moments, the nature and direction of the harmony are shaped by a different principle—specifically, that the scale is viewed as indefinitely broad, allowing the voices to agree on a specific section, the position of which not only shapes the melodic character of each part but also the overall harmonic character, depending on how close or far it is from the scale where major essential chords dominate. Historically, these modes were derived, with various mistakes and alterations, from the purely melodic modes of the Greeks. Aesthetically, they represent systems of modern tonality adapted to a context where harmony's range was as narrow as possible, and the need for a clear and solid key perspective was far less significant than the need for variety within that limited range. Therefore, we can see modal harmony as a fundamentally modern concept, presented to us in various degrees of complexity, and altered at each close so that it either leads us to a viewpoint where we perceive the harmony symmetrically (as in those modes4 where the final chord is typically major, namely the Ionian, which is practically our major scale, the Mixolydian, and the Lydian, which usually becomes Ionian through the systematic flattening of its 4th degree) or transforms the mode itself so that its own notes are adjusted into appropriate final chords (as happens in those modes where the triad on the final is generally minor, namely, the Dorian, Phrygian, and Aeolian). In this light, we can describe Mixolydian tonality as a harmonic framework where the keys of G major and C major are blended in such a way that sometimes we feel we are listening to harmony in C major leaning towards the dominant, and sometimes we perceive we are in G major with a strong inclination towards the subdominant. In the Dorian mode, our sense of tonality is more ambiguous. We seem to be floating through all the key relationships of a minor tonic without settling on any, until the final close brings the harmonies together with strength and perhaps with a poetic surprise, finishing in D with a major chord. In the Phrygian mode, the challenge of achieving a final close is such that classical Phrygian works often end with what feels like a half-close, a feeling that the great masters artistically convey through a strong sense that all sections of the composition, which do not derive their expression from the variety and unpredictability of their harmonic direction, are resting on the dominant of A minor.

It cannot be too strongly insisted that the expression of modal music is a permanent artistic fact. Its refinements may be crowded out by the later tonality, in which the much greater 4 variety of fixed chords needs a much more rigid harmonic scheme to control it, but they can never be falsified. And when Beethoven in his last “Bagatelle” raises the 6th of a minor scale for the pleasure he takes in an unexpectedly bright major chord; or when, in the Incarnatus of his Mass in D, he makes a free use of the Dorian scale, he is actuated by precisely the same harmonic and aesthetic motives as those of the wonderful opening of Palestrina’s eight-part Stabat Mater; just as in the Lydian figured chorale in his A minor Quartet he carries out the principle of harmonic variety, as produceable by an oblique melodic scale, with a thoroughness from which Palestrina himself would have shrunk. (We have noted that in 16th-century music the Lydian mode is almost invariably Ionicized.)

It can't be emphasized enough that the expression of modal music is a lasting artistic reality. Its nuances may be overshadowed by later tonal music, where the much broader range of fixed chords requires a stricter harmonic framework to manage it, but they can never be invalidated. When Beethoven, in his final “Bagatelle,” raises the 6th of a minor scale just for the joy of an unexpectedly bright major chord, or when he freely uses the Dorian scale in the Incarnatus of his Mass in D, he is driven by the same harmonic and aesthetic motives as those found in the stunning opening of Palestrina’s eight-part Stabat Mater. Similarly, in the Lydian figured chorale of his A minor Quartet, he fully realizes the principle of harmonic variety through an oblique melodic scale, with a thoroughness that Palestrina himself would have found daunting. (We’ve noted that in 16th-century music the Lydian mode is almost always adjusted to fit the Ionic scale.)

Ex. 7.
Suspension.
No. 8.
Passing Notes.
Ex. 9.

III. Modern Harmony and Tonality.—In the harmonic system of Palestrina only two kinds of discord are possible, namely, suspensions and passing-notes. The principle of the suspension is that while parts are moving from one concord to another one of the parts remains behind, so as to create a discord at the moment when the other parts proceed. The suspended part then goes on to its concordant note, which must lie on an adjacent (and in most cases a lower) degree of the scale. Passing-notes are produced transiently by the motion of a part up or down the scale while other parts remain stationary. The possibilities of these two devices can be worked out logically so as to produce combinations of extreme harshness. And, when combined with the rules which laid on the performers the responsibility for modifying the strict scale of the mode in order to form satisfactory closes and avoid melodic harshness, they sometimes gave rise to combinations which the clearest artistic intellects of the 16th century perceived as incompatible with the modal style. For example, in a passage written thus the singer of the lower part would be obliged to flatten his B in order to avoid the ugly “tritone” between F and B, while the other singer would be hardly less likely on the spur of the moment to sharpen his G under the impression that he was making a close; and thus one of the most complex and characteristically modern discords, that of the augmented 6th, did frequently occur in 16th-century performances, and was not always regarded as a blunder. But if the technical principles of 16th-century discord left much to the good taste of composers and singers, they nevertheless in conjunction with that good taste severely restricted the resources of harmony; for, whatever the variety and artificiality of the discords admitted by them, they all had this in common, that every discord was transient and could only arise as a phenomenon of delay in the movement of one or more parts smoothly along the scale (“in conjunct motion”) or of a more rapid motion up and down the scale in which none but the rigorously concordant first and last notes received any emphasis. No doubt there were many licenses (such as the “changing-note”) which introduced discords by skip, or on the strong beat without preparation, but these were all as natural as they were illogical. They were artistic as intelligible accidents, precisely like those which make language idiomatic, such as “attraction of the relative” in Greek. But when Monteverde and his fellow monodists tried experiments with unprepared discords, they opened up possibilities far too vast to be organized by them or by the next three generations. We have elsewhere compared the difference between early and modern harmony with that between classical Greek, which is absolutely literal and concrete in expression, and modern English, which is saturated with metaphors and abstractions. We may go further and say that a 16th-century discord, with its preparation and resolution, is, on a very small scale, like a simile, in which both the figure and its interpretation are given, whereas modern discord is like the metaphor, in which the figure is a substitute for and not an addition to the plain statement. It is not surprising that the sudden opening up of the whole possibilities of modern harmony at the end of the 16th century at first produced a chaos of style.

III. Modern Harmony and Tonality.—In Palestrina's harmonic system, there are only two types of dissonance: suspensions and passing notes. The principle of suspension involves one part staying behind while others move from one consonant note to another, creating a moment of dissonance. The suspended part will then resolve to its consonant note, which is typically adjacent (and usually lower) on the scale. Passing notes occur momentarily when a part moves up or down the scale while other parts remain still. The potential of these two techniques can produce harsh combinations. Additionally, the rules placing responsibility on performers to adjust the strict modal scale to create satisfying endings and minimize melodic harshness sometimes resulted in combinations that the most discerning artistic minds of the 16th century found incompatible with the modal style. For instance, in a passage structured this way, the singer in the lower part would have to lower his B to avoid the unpleasant "tritone" between F and B, while the other singer might impulsively raise his G, thinking it would create a resolution. Thus, one of the most intricate and typically modern dissonances, the augmented sixth, frequently appeared in 16th-century performances and was not always seen as a mistake. However, while the technical aspects of 16th-century dissonance relied heavily on the good taste of composers and singers, they, along with that aesthetic, tightly limited harmonic resources. Regardless of how varied and complex the dissonances they allowed were, they all shared the trait that every dissonance was temporary and could only stem from a delay in the smooth motion of one or more parts along the scale ("in conjunct motion") or from swift movements up and down the scale, where only the strictly consonant first and last notes received emphasis. There were certainly many exceptions (such as the "changing note") that introduced dissonances through leaps or on strong beats without preparation, but these were as natural as they were illogical. They were artistic occurrences like those that make language idiomatic, akin to “attraction of the relative” in Greek. Yet when Monteverdi and his contemporaries began experimenting with unprepared dissonances, they unleashed possibilities that were far too expansive to be organized by themselves or by the next three generations. We have previously likened the difference between early and modern harmony to that between classical Greek, which is utterly literal and concrete in expression, and modern English, which is rich in metaphors and abstractions. We can further assert that a 16th-century dissonance, with its preparation and resolution, resembles a simile, where both the figure and its meaning are provided, whereas modern dissonance is akin to a metaphor, where the figure is a substitute for and not an addition to the straightforward statement. It’s not surprising that the sudden emergence of the full spectrum of modern harmony at the end of the 16th century initially resulted in a stylistic chaos.

Another feature of the harmonic revolution arose from the new habit of supporting a single voice on chords played by an instrument. This, together with the use of discords in a new sense, drew attention to the chords as things in themselves and not as moments of greater or less repose in a flux of independent melodies. This was as valuable an addition to musical thought and expression as the free use of abstract terms is in literature, but it had precisely the same dangers, and has until recent times vitiated harmonic theory and divorced it from the modest observation of the practice of great masters. When, early in the 18th century, Rameau devoted much of his best energy to the elaboration of a theory of harmony, his field of observation was a series of experiments begun in chaos and resolved, not as yet in a great art, but in a system of conventions, for the contemporary art of Bach and Handel was beyond the scope of contemporary theory. He showed great analytical genius and sense of tonality in his development of the notion of the “fundamental bass,” and it is rather to his credit than otherwise that he did not emphasize the distinction between discords on the dominant and those on other degrees of the scale. But his system, with all subsequent improvements, refutations and repairs only led to that bane of 19th-century theory and source of what may be called the journalese of harmonic style, according to which every chord (no matter how obviously artificial and transient) must be regarded, so to speak, as a literal fact for which a root and a scientific connexion with the natural harmonic series must at all cost be found. Some modern theorists have, however, gone too far in denying the existence of harmonic roots altogether, and certainly it is neither scientific nor artistic to regard the coincidence of the major triad with the first five notes of the harmonic series as merely accidental. It is not likely that the dominant 7th owes all its naturalness to a resemblance to the flat 7th of the harmonic series, which is too far out of tune even to pass for an augmented 6th. But the dominant major 9th certainly gains in sonorousness from its coincidence with the 9th harmonic, and many cases in music could be found where the dominant 7th itself would gain from being so far flattened as to add coincidence with a natural harmonic to its musical significance as an unprepared discord (see, for example the “native wood-notes wild” of the distant huntsmen in the second act of Tristan und Isolde, where also the 9th and 11th are involved, and, moreover, on horns, of which the natural scale is the harmonic series itself). If the distinction between “essential” and “unessential” discords is, in the light of history and common sense, a difference only in degree, it is thus none the less of great aesthetic importance. Arithmetic and acoustics show that in proportion as musical harmony emphasizes combinations belonging to the lower region of the harmonic series the effect will be sonorous and natural; but common sense, history and aesthetics also show that the interaction of melody, harmony and rhythm must produce a host of combinations which acoustics alone cannot possibly explain. These facts are amply competent to explain themselves. To describe them in detail is beyond the scope of the present article, but a few examples from different periods are given at the end in musical type.

Another feature of the harmonic revolution came from the new practice of supporting a single voice with chords played by an instrument. This, along with the use of dissonance in a fresh way, focused attention on chords as entities on their own rather than just as points of rest in a stream of independent melodies. This was as significant for musical thought and expression as the liberal use of abstract terms is in writing, but it carried similar risks and has, until recently, undermined harmonic theory and distanced it from the careful observation of the works of great masters. When Rameau dedicated much of his best energy in the early 18th century to developing a theory of harmony, he was working from a series of experiments that began in chaos and were not yet resolved into a great art but rather into a system of conventions, since the contemporary art of Bach and Handel was beyond the reach of current theory. He demonstrated remarkable analytical skills and a sense of tonality in his development of the concept of the “fundamental bass,” and it's more to his credit that he didn’t stress the difference between dissonances on the dominant and those on other degrees of the scale. However, his system, despite later improvements, challenges, and adjustments, only led to the downfall of 19th-century theory and the creation of what can be referred to as the journalistic style of harmonic writing, which insisted that every chord (no matter how evidently artificial and temporary) must be viewed, so to speak, as a factual entity for which a root and a scientific link to the natural harmonic series must be established at all costs. Some modern theorists, however, have taken this too far by completely denying the existence of harmonic roots, and it’s certainly neither scientific nor artistic to treat the alignment of the major triad with the first five notes of the harmonic series as merely coincidental. It seems unlikely that the dominant 7th owes all its naturalness to its similarity to the flat 7th of the harmonic series, which is too out of tune even to qualify as an augmented 6th. But the dominant major 9th certainly benefits in resonance from its alignment with the 9th harmonic, and there are many instances in music where the dominant 7th could also benefit from being flattened enough to connect with a natural harmonic, adding musical significance as an unresolved dissonance (see, for example, the “native wood-notes wild” of the distant huntsmen in the second act of Tristan und Isolde, where the 9th and 11th are also involved, and, moreover, on horns, which naturally follow the harmonic series). While the distinction between “essential” and “unessential” dissonances is, when viewed through the lens of history and common sense, merely a difference in degree, it remains of significant aesthetic importance. Mathematics and acoustics indicate that as musical harmony emphasizes combinations that align with the lower range of the harmonic series, the result will be resonant and natural; nonetheless, common sense, history, and aesthetics also reveal that the interplay of melody, harmony, and rhythm must yield countless combinations that acoustics alone cannot adequately explain. These facts can adequately explain themselves. Detailing them is beyond the scope of this article, but a few examples from different periods are provided at the end in musical notation.

IV. The Minor Mode.—When the predecessors of Bach and Handel had succeeded in establishing a key-system able to bear the weight of free discord, that key-system took two forms, in both of which the three chords of tonic, dominant and subdominant occupied cardinal points. In the one form the tonic chord was natural, that is to say, major. In the other form the tonic chord was artificial, that is to say, minor. In the minor mode so firm is the position of the tonic and dominant (the dominant chord always being major) that it is no longer necessary, as in the 16th century, to conclude with a major chord, although it long remained a frequent practice, rather because of the inherent beauty and surprise of the effect than because of any 5 mere survival of ancient customs, at least where great masters are concerned. (This final major chord is known as the Tierce de Picardie.) The effect of the minor mode is thus normally plaintive because it centres round the artificial concord instead of the natural; and, though the keynote bears this minor artificial triad, the ear nevertheless has an expectation (which may be intensified into a powerful emotional effect) that the final conclusion of the harmonic scheme may brighten out into the more sonorous harmonic system of major chords. Let us once more recall those ecclesiastical modes of which the 3rd degree is normally minor. We have seen how they may be regarded as the more oblique of the various cross-sections of the 16th-century harmonic scheme. Now, the modern minor mode is too firmly rooted in its minor tonic chord for the 16th-century feeling of an oblique harmonic scheme to be of more than secondary importance, though that feeling survives, as the discussion of key-relationships will show us. But it is constantly thrust into the background by the new possibility that the minor tonic chord with its attendant minor harmonies may give place to the major system round the same tonic, and by the certainty that if any change is made at the conclusion of the work it will be upon the same tonic and not have reference to some other harmonic centre. In other words, a major and minor key on the same tonic are felt as identical in everything but expression (a point in which the Tonic Sol Fa system, as hitherto practised, with its identification of the minor key with its “relative” instead of its tonic major, shows a most unfortunate confusion of thought). The characteristics of the major and minor modes may of course be modified by many artistic considerations, and it would be as absurd to develop this account into a scheme of pigeon-holed passions as to do the same for the equally obvious and closely parallel fact that in drama a constant source of pathos is the placing of our sympathies in an oblique relation to the natural sequence of events or to the more universal issues of the subject.

IV. The Minor Mode.—When Bach and Handel's predecessors established a key system that could support free dissonance, it took on two forms, both of which featured the three chords of tonic, dominant, and subdominant as key points. In one form, the tonic chord was natural, meaning major. In the other, the tonic chord was artificial, meaning minor. In the minor mode, the positions of the tonic and dominant (the dominant chord is always major) are so stable that, unlike in the 16th century, it’s no longer essential to finish with a major chord, although this practice persisted for a long time, mostly because of the beauty and surprise of the effect rather than simply as a remnant of ancient customs, especially among great masters. (This final major chord is known as the Tierce de Picardie.) The effect of the minor mode is typically sorrowful because it revolves around the artificial concord rather than the natural one; even though the keynote has this minor artificial triad, the listener still anticipates (which can intensify into a powerful emotional effect) that the conclusion of the harmonic progression may brighten into the richer harmonic system of major chords. Let’s recall those church modes where the 3rd degree is usually minor. We’ve seen how these modes can be viewed as the more indirect cross-sections of the 16th-century harmonic structure. However, the modern minor mode is so firmly grounded in its minor tonic chord that the 16th-century sense of an indirect harmonic structure is of little significance, even though that feeling persists, as we will explore in discussions of key relationships. This feeling is often overshadowed by the new possibility that the minor tonic chord, along with its minor harmonies, can transition to the major system based on the same tonic, and by the certainty that if any change occurs at the end of a piece, it will be based on the same tonic and not refer to a different harmonic center. In other words, major and minor keys on the same tonic are perceived as identical in every way except for expression (a point where the Tonic Sol Fa system, as previously practiced, confusingly associates the minor key with its “relative” instead of its tonic major). The features of the major and minor modes can certainly be influenced by various artistic factors, and it would be just as ridiculous to turn this account into a rigid scheme of categorized emotions as it would be to do the same for the equally clear and closely related fact that in drama, a constant source of emotion comes from placing our sympathies in an indirect relationship to the natural flow of events or to the broader issues of the subject.

V. Key-Relationships.—On the modern sense of the identity of the tonic in major and minor rests the whole distinctive character of modern harmony, and the whole key-system of the classical composers. The masters of the 16th century naturally found it necessary to make full closes much more frequently than would be desirable if the only possible close was that on the final of the mode. They therefore formed closes on other notes, but they formed them on these exactly as on a final. Thus, a close on the second degree of the Ionian mode was identical with a Dorian final close. The notes, other than the final, on which closes could be made were called modulations. And what between the three “regular modulations” (known as the dominant, mediant, and participant) and the “conceded modulations,” of which two were generally admitted in each mode simply in the interests of variety, a composer was at liberty to form a full close on any note which did not involve too many extraneous sharps or flats for its correct accomplishment. But there was a great difference between modal and modern conceptions of modulation. We have said that the close on the second degree of the Ionian mode was Dorian, but such a modulation was not regarded as a visit paid to the Dorian mode, but merely as the formation of a momentary point of repose on the second degree of the Ionian mode. When therefore it is said that the modulations of 16th-century music are “purposeless and shifting,” the criticism implies a purpose in change of key which is wholly irrelevant. The modal composers’ purpose lay in purely local relationships of harmony, in various degrees of refinement which are often crowded out of the larger and more coarse-grained scheme of modern harmony, but which modern harmony is perfectly capable of employing in precisely the same sense whenever it has leisure.

V. Key Relationships.—The contemporary understanding of the tonic's identity in major and minor keys is fundamental to the unique character of modern harmony and the entire key system used by classical composers. The masters of the 16th century often needed to end musical phrases more frequently than would be ideal if the only possible ending was on the final note of the mode. As a result, they created endings on other notes, treating these closures just like a final ending. For example, a closure on the second degree of the Ionian mode was the same as a Dorian final closure. The other notes on which endings could be made were called modulations. With three main “regular modulations” (known as the dominant, mediant, and participant) and two “accepted modulations” typically acknowledged in each mode for variety, composers had the freedom to create a full closure on any note, provided it didn’t require too many extra sharps or flats to execute properly. However, there was a significant difference between modal and modern ideas of modulation. While we noted that a closure on the second degree of the Ionian mode was considered Dorian, such a modulation was not viewed as entering the Dorian mode, but rather as creating a temporary resting point on the second degree of the Ionian mode. Thus, when it’s stated that the modulations in 16th-century music are “purposeless and shifting,” the critique suggests a goal in changing keys that is completely off base. The goal of modal composers was rooted in local harmonic relationships, involving varying levels of subtlety often lost in the broader and more straightforward framework of modern harmony, which, when given the chance, can utilize these same nuances just as effectively.

Modulation, in the modern sense of the term, is a different thing. The modern sense of tonality is so firm, and modern designs so large, that it is desirable that different portions of a composition should be arranged round different harmonic centres or keys, and moreover that the relation between these keys and the primary key should be felt, and the whole design should at last return to the primary key, to remain there with such emphasis and proportion as shall leave upon the mind the impression that the whole is in the primary key and that the foreign keys have been as artistically grouped around it as its own local harmonies. The true principles on which keys are related proved so elastic in the hands of Beethoven that their results utterly outstripped the earlier theory which adhered desperately to the limitations of the 16th century; and so vast is the range of key which Beethoven is able to organize in a convincing scheme of relationship, that even modern theory, dazzled by the true harmonic possibilities, is apt to come to the conclusion, more lame and impotent than any ancient pedantry, that all keys are equally related. A vague conception, dubbed “the unity of the chromatic scale,” is thus made to explain away the whole beauty and power of Wagner’s no less than Beethoven’s harmonic system. We have not space to dispute the matter here, and it must suffice to state dogmatically and statistically the classical facts of key-relationship, including those which Beethoven established as normal possibilities on the suggestion of Haydn, in whose works they appear as special effects.

Modulation, as we understand it today, is something different. Today's sense of tonality is so solid, and modern compositions are so expansive, that it's beneficial for different parts of a piece to be arranged around various harmonic centers or keys. Additionally, the connection between these keys and the main key should be apparent, and the entire structure should ultimately return to the primary key, making it stand out in a way that leaves the impression that the whole piece is centered around it, with the other keys thoughtfully grouped around it as if they were its own local harmonies. The true principles of key relationships were so flexible in Beethoven's hands that the outcomes far surpassed the earlier theories that stubbornly clung to the limitations of the 16th century. Beethoven's ability to organize a wide range of keys into a cohesive relational scheme is so impressive that even modern theory, overwhelmed by the genuine harmonic possibilities, often concludes—less effectively than any ancient dogma—that all keys are equally related. A vague idea known as “the unity of the chromatic scale” tries to simplify and diminish the beauty and power of both Wagner’s and Beethoven’s harmonic systems. We don't have the space to argue this here, but it’s enough to assert the classical facts of key relationships, including those that Beethoven established as normal possibilities based on Haydn’s suggestions, where they appear as special effects.

a. Direct Relationships.—The first principle on which two keys are considered to be related is a strengthening of that which determined the so-called modulations of the 16th-century modes. Two keys are directly related when the tonic chord of the one is among the common chords of the other. Thus, D minor is related to C major because the tonic chord of D minor is the common chord on the supertonic of C (see Ex. 6). In the same way the four other related keys to C major are E minor the mediant, F major the subdominant, G major the dominant and A minor the submediant.

a. Direct Relationships.—The first principle for determining the relationship between two keys is based on the enhancement of what defined the so-called modulations of the 16th-century modes. Two keys are directly related when the tonic chord of one is included in the common chords of the other. For example, D minor is related to C major because the tonic chord of D minor is the common chord on the supertonic of C (see Ex. 6). Similarly, the four other keys related to C major are E minor (the mediant), F major (the subdominant), G major (the dominant), and A minor (the submediant).

Ex. 10.

This last key-relationship is sometimes called the “relative” minor, partly because it is usually expressed by the same key-signature as the tonic, but probably more justifiably because it is the point of view from which to reckon the key-relationships of the minor tonic. If we take the minor scale in its “harmonic” form (i.e. the form deducible from its chords of minor tonic, minor subdominant and major dominant, without regard to the exigencies of melody in concession to which the “melodic” minor scale raises the 6th in ascent and flattens the 7th in descent), we shall find it impossible to build a common chord upon its mediant (Ex. 10). But we have seen that A minor is related to C major; therefore it is absurd to suppose that C major is not related to A minor. Clearly then we must deduce some of the relationships of a minor tonic as the converse of those of a major tonic. Thus we may read Ex. 6 backwards and reason as follows: A minor is the submediant of C major; therefore C major is the mediant or relative major of A minor. D minor is the supertonic of C major; therefore C major is related to D minor and may be called its flat 7th. Taking A minor as our standard key, G major is then the flat 7th to A minor. The remaining major keys (C major to E minor = F major to A minor) may be traced directly as well as conversely; and the subdominant, being minor, does not involve an appeal to the major scale at all. But with the dominant we find the curious fact that while the dominant chord of a minor key is major it is impossible to regard the major dominant key as directly related to the minor tonic, since it does not contain the minor tonic chord at all; e.g. the only chord of A in E major is A major. But the dominant minor key contains the tonic chord of the primary minor key clearly enough as subdominant, and therefore when we modulate from a minor tonic to a minor dominant we feel that we have a direct key-relationship and have not lost touch with our tonic. Thus in the minor mode modulation to the dominant key is, though frequent and necessary, a much more uphill process than in the major mode, because the naturally major dominant chord has first to be contradicted. On the other hand, a contrast between minor tonic and major dominant key is very difficult to work on a large scale (as, for example, in the complementary key for second subjects of sonata movements) because, while the major dominant key behaves as if not directly 6 related to the minor tonic, it also gives a curious sensation of being merely on the dominant instead of in it; and thus we find that in the few classical examples of a dominant major second subject in a minor sonata-movement the second subject either relapses into the dominant minor, as in Beethoven’s Kreutzer Sonata and the finale of Brahms’s Third Symphony, or begins in it, as in the first movement of Brahms’s Fourth Symphony.

This last key relationship is sometimes referred to as the “relative” minor, partly because it usually shares the same key signature as the tonic, but more accurately because it's the perspective from which to understand the key relationships of the minor tonic. If we take the minor scale in its “harmonic” form (i.e., the version derived from its chords of minor tonic, minor subdominant, and major dominant, regardless of the melodic adjustments that lead to the “melodic” minor scale raising the 6th when ascending and lowering the 7th when descending), we will find that it's impossible to build a common chord on its mediant (Ex. 10). However, we’ve established that A minor is related to C major; therefore, it’s unreasonable to think that C major is not related to A minor. Clearly, we need to derive some relationships of a minor tonic as the converse of those of a major tonic. So we can read Ex. 6 backward and reason as follows: A minor is the submediant of C major; thus, C major is the mediant or relative major of A minor. D minor is the supertonic of C major; hence C major relates to D minor and can be referred to as its flat 7th. Taking A minor as our standard key, G major is then the flat 7th of A minor. The other major keys (C major to E minor = F major to A minor) can be traced both directly and in reverse; and since the subdominant is minor, it does not require referencing the major scale at all. However, with the dominant, we encounter the interesting fact that while the dominant chord of a minor key is major, we cannot consider the major dominant key as directly related to the minor tonic since it doesn’t contain the minor tonic chord at all; for example, the only chord of A in E major is A major. But the dominant minor key clearly contains the tonic chord of the primary minor key as subdominant; therefore, when we modulate from a minor tonic to a minor dominant, we feel that we have a direct key relationship and haven’t lost touch with our tonic. Thus, in the minor mode, modulating to the dominant key is, though common and necessary, a much more challenging process than in the major mode because we first have to contradict the naturally major dominant chord. On the other hand, creating a contrast between a minor tonic and a major dominant key is quite difficult on a large scale (for example, in the complementary key for second subjects of sonata movements) because, while the major dominant key behaves as if it’s not directly related to the minor tonic, it also gives an odd sensation of being merely on the dominant instead of in it; and thus we find that in the few classical examples of a dominant major second subject in a minor sonata movement, the second subject either reverts to the dominant minor, as in Beethoven’s Kreutzer Sonata and the finale of Brahms’s Third Symphony, or begins in it, as in the first movement of Brahms’s Fourth Symphony.

The effect of a modulation to a related key obviously depends upon the change of meaning in the chords common to both keys, and also in the new chords introduced. Thus, in modulating to the dominant we invest the brightest chord of our first key with the finality and importance of a tonic; our original tonic chord becomes comparatively soft in its new position as subdominant; and a new dominant chord arises, surpassing in brilliance the old dominant (now tonic) as that surpassed the primary tonic. Again, in modulating to the subdominant the softest chord of the primary key becomes tonic, the old tonic is comparatively bright, and a new and softer subdominant chord appears. We have seen the peculiarities of modulation to the dominant from a minor tonic, and it follows from them that modulation from a minor tonic to the subdominant involves the beautiful effect of a momentary conversion of the primary tonic chord to major, the poetic and often dramatically ironical power of which is manifested at the conclusion of more than half the finest classical slow movements in minor keys, from Bach’s E♭ minor Prelude in the first book of the Forty-eight to the slow movement of Brahms’s G major String Quintet, Op. 111.

The impact of changing to a related key clearly depends on how the meaning of the chords that both keys share changes, along with the introduction of new chords. When we shift to the dominant, we give the brightest chord from our original key the importance of a tonic; meanwhile, our original tonic chord feels softer in its new role as subdominant; and a new dominant chord emerges that is even brighter than the previous dominant (now acting as tonic), which itself had surpassed the original tonic. Similarly, when we modulate to the subdominant, the softest chord from the primary key takes on a tonic role, the old tonic appears comparatively brighter, and a new, softer subdominant chord comes into play. We have observed the unique characteristics of modulating to the dominant from a minor tonic, and it follows that modulating from a minor tonic to the subdominant creates a beautiful effect of briefly transforming the primary tonic chord to major. This poetic and often dramatically ironic effect is evident at the end of many of the finest classical slow movements in minor keys, ranging from Bach’s E♭ minor Prelude in the first book of the Forty-eight to the slow movement of Brahms’s G major String Quintet, Op. 111.

The effect of the remaining key-relationships involves contrasts between major and minor mode; but it is otherwise far less defined, since the primary tonic chord does not occupy a cardinal position in the second key. These key-relationships are most important from a minor tonic, as the change from minor to major is more vivid than the reverse change. The smoothest changes are those to “relative” minor, “relative” major (C to A minor; C minor to E♭); and mediant minor and submediant major (C to E minor; C minor to A♭). The change from major tonic to supertonic minor is extremely natural on a small scale, i.e. within the compass of a single melody, as may be seen in countless openings of classical sonatas. But on a large scale the identity of primary dominant with secondary subdominant confuses the harmonic perspective, and accordingly in classical music the supertonic minor appears neither in the second subjects of first movements nor as the key for middle movements.5 But since the key-relationships of a minor tonic are at once more obscure harmonically and more vivid in contrast, we find that the converse key-relationship of the flat 7th, though somewhat bold and archaic in effect on a small scale, has once or twice been given organic function on a large scale in classical movements of exceptionally fantastic character, of which the three great examples are the ghostly slow movement of Beethoven’s D major Trio, Op. 70, No. 1, the scherzo of his Ninth Symphony, and the finale of Brahms’s D minor Violin Sonata (where, however, the C major theme soon passes permanently into the more orthodox dominant minor).

The impact of the remaining key relationships includes differences between major and minor modes; however, it is generally less defined since the main tonic chord doesn't have a crucial role in the second key. These key relationships are especially significant from a minor tonic, as the switch from minor to major is more striking than the other way around. The smoothest transitions are those to "relative" minor and "relative" major (C to A minor; C minor to E♭); and mediant minor and submediant major (C to E minor; C minor to A♭). Transitioning from major tonic to supertonic minor is very natural on a small scale, meaning within a single melody, as seen in countless openings of classical sonatas. However, on a larger scale, the overlap of primary dominant with secondary subdominant muddles the harmonic perspective, so in classical music, supertonic minor typically doesn't appear in the second subjects of first movements or as the key for middle movements.5 Yet, since the key relationships of a minor tonic are both more ambiguous harmonically and more striking in contrast, we find that the reverse key relationship of the flat 7th, while a bit bold and outdated on a small scale, has occasionally been given a cohesive function on a larger scale in classical pieces with exceptionally imaginative character. Three great examples are the ghostly slow movement of Beethoven’s D major Trio, Op. 70, No. 1, the scherzo of his Ninth Symphony, and the finale of Brahms’s D minor Violin Sonata (where, however, the C major theme quickly shifts into a more conventional dominant minor).

Thus far we have the set of key-relationships universally recognized since the major and minor modes were established, a relationship based entirely on the place of the primary tonic chord in the second key. It only remains for us to protest against the orthodox description of the five related keys as being the “relative” minor or major and the dominant and subdominant with their “relative” minors or majors; a conception which expresses the fallacious assumption that keys which are related to the same key are related to one another, and which thereby implies that all keys are equally related and that classical composers were fools. It cannot be too strongly insisted that there is no foundation for key-relationship except through a tonic, and that it is through the tonic that the most distant keys have always been connected by every composer with a wide range of modulation, from Haydn to Brahms and (with due allowance for the conditions of his musical drama) Wagner.

So far, we have the set of key relationships widely recognized since the establishment of major and minor modes, a relationship that depends entirely on the position of the primary tonic chord in the second key. Now we just need to push back against the traditional description of the five related keys as being the “relative” minor or major and the dominant and subdominant with their “relative” minors or majors; this idea wrongly assumes that keys related to the same key are related to each other, suggesting that all keys are equally connected and that classical composers were foolish. It’s crucial to emphasize that there is no basis for key relationships except through a tonic, and it is through the tonic that even the most distant keys have always been linked by every composer with a wide range of modulation, from Haydn to Brahms and (with appropriate consideration for the context of his musical drama) Wagner.

b. Indirect Relationships.—So strong is the identity of the tonic in major and minor mode that Haydn and Mozart had no scruple in annexing, with certain reservations, the key-relationships of either as an addition to those of the other. The smoothness of Mozart’s style makes him prefer to annex the key-relationships of the tonic minor (e.g. C major to A♭, the submediant of C minor), because the primary tonic note is in the second key, although its chord is transformed. His range of thought does not allow him to use these keys otherwise than episodically; but he certainly does not treat them as chaotically remote by confining them to rapid modulations in the development-portions of his movements. They occur characteristically as beautiful purple patches before or during his second subjects. Haydn, with his mastery of rational paradox, takes every opportunity, in his later works, of using all possible indirect key-relationships in the choice of key for slow movements and for the trios of minuets. By using them thus sectionally (i.e. so as not to involve the organic connecting links necessary for the complementary keys of second subjects) he gives himself a free hand; and he rather prefers those keys which are obtained by transforming the minor relationships of a major primary key (e.g. C to A major instead of A minor). These relationships are of great brilliance and also of some remoteness of effect, since the primary tonic note, as well as its chord, disappears entirely. Haydn also obtains extreme contrasts by changing both modes (e.g. C minor to A major, as in the G minor Quartet, Op. 72, No 6, where the slow movement is in E major), and indeed there is not one key-contrast known to Beethoven and Brahms which Haydn does not use with complete sense of its meaning, though his art admits it only as a surprise.

b. Indirect Relationships.—The identity of the tonic in major and minor modes is so strong that Haydn and Mozart had no hesitation in incorporating, with certain reservations, the key relationships of one into the other. Mozart's smooth style leads him to prefer integrating the key relationships of the tonic minor (e.g., C major to A♭, the submediant of C minor) because the primary tonic note is present in the second key, even though its chord is altered. His way of thinking doesn't allow for these keys to be used anything but episodically; however, he definitely doesn’t treat them as chaotically distant, confining them to quick modulations in the development sections of his pieces. They typically appear as beautiful highlights before or during his second themes. Haydn, with his skill in rational paradox, takes every chance in his later works to use all possible indirect key relationships when selecting keys for slow movements and the trios of minuets. By using them in a sectional way (i.e., in a manner that doesn’t require the organic connections needed for complementary keys of second themes), he gives himself more freedom, preferring keys derived from transforming the minor relationships of a major primary key (e.g., C to A major instead of A minor). These relationships are striking and somewhat distant in effect, as the primary tonic note and its chord completely vanish. Haydn also creates extreme contrasts by switching both modes (e.g., C minor to A major, as in the G minor Quartet, Op. 72, No 6, where the slow movement is in E major), and indeed, there is not a single key contrast known to Beethoven and Brahms that Haydn does not utilize with a full understanding of its meaning, though his style allows it only as a surprise.

Beethoven rationalized every step in the whole possible range of key-relationship by such harmonic means as are described in the article Beethoven. Haydn’s favourite key-relationships he used for the complementary key in first movements; and he at once discovered that the use of the major mediant as complementary key to a major tonic implied at all events just as much suggestion of the submediant major in the recapitulation as would not keep the latter half of the movement for too long out of the tonic. The converse is not the case, and where Beethoven uses the submediant major as complementary key in a major first movement he does not subsequently introduce the still more remote and brilliant mediant in the recapitulation. The function of the complementary key is that of contrast and vividness, so that if the key is to be remote it is as well that it should be brilliant rather than sombre; and accordingly the easier key-relationships obtainable through transforming the tonic into minor do not appear as complementary keys until Beethoven’s latest and most subtle works, as the Quartet in B♭, Op. 130 (where we again note that the flat submediant of the exposition is temporarily answered by the flat mediant of the recapitulation).

Beethoven reasoned through every step in the entire range of key relationships using the harmonic techniques mentioned in the article Beethoven. He utilized Haydn’s favorite key relationships for the complementary key in first movements, and he quickly realized that using the major mediant as the complementary key to a major tonic suggested just as much the submediant major during the recapitulation, as long as it didn’t keep the second half of the movement away from the tonic for too long. The opposite isn’t true; when Beethoven uses the submediant major as the complementary key in a major first movement, he doesn’t later introduce the more remote and bright mediant in the recapitulation. The role of the complementary key is to provide contrast and liveliness, so if the key is going to be distant, it’s better for it to be bright rather than dark; therefore, the easier key relationships that can be created by changing the tonic to minor do not appear as complementary keys until Beethoven’s later and more complex works, like the Quartet in B♭, Op. 130 (where we again see the flat submediant from the exposition temporarily answered by the flat mediant in the recapitulation).

c. Artificial Key-relationships.—Early in the history of the minor mode it was discovered that the lower tetrachord could be very effectively and naturally altered so as to resemble the upper (thus producing the scale C D♭ E♮ F, G A♭ B♮ C). This produces a flat supertonic (the chord of which is generally presented in its first inversion, and is known as the Neapolitan 6th, from its characteristic use in the works of the Neapolitan school which did so much to establish modern tonality) and its origin, as just described, often impels it to resolve on a major tonic chord. Consequently it exists in the minor mode as a phenomenon not much more artificial than the mode itself; and although the keys it thus connects are extremely remote, and the effect of their connexion very surprising, the connexion is none the less real, whether from a major or a minor tonic, and is a crucial test of a composer’s sense of key-perspective. Thus Philipp Emanuel Bach in a spirit of mere caprice puts the charming little slow movement of his D major Symphony into E♭ and obliterates all real relationship by chaotic operatic 7 connecting links. Haydn’s greatest pianoforte sonata (which, being probably his last, is of course No. 1 in most editions) is in E♭, and its slow movement is in F♮ major (= F♭). That key had already appeared, with surprising effect, in the wanderings of the development of the first movement. No attempt is made to indicate its connexion with E♭; and the finale begins in E♭, but its first bar is unharmonized and starts on the one note which most contradicts E♮ and least prepares the mind for E♭. The immediate repetition of the opening phrase a step higher on the normal supertonic strikes the note which the opening had contradicted, and thus shows its function in the main key without in the least degree explaining away the paradoxical effect of the key of the slow movement. Brahms’s Violoncello Sonata Op. 99, is in F; a prominent episode in the development of the first movement is in E♯ minor (= G♭), thus preparing the mind for the slow movement, which is in F♯ major (= G♭), with a central episode in F minor. The scherzo is in F minor, and begins on the dominant. Thus if we play its first chord immediately after the last chord of the slow movement we have exactly that extreme position of flat supertonic followed by dominant which is a favourite form of cadence in Wagner, who can even convey its meaning by its mere bass without any harmonies (Walküre, Act 3, Scene 2: “Was jetzt du bist, das sage dir selbst”).

c. Artificial Key-relationships.—Early in the history of the minor scale, it was discovered that the lower tetrachord could be effectively and naturally altered to resemble the upper one (resulting in the scale C D♭ E♮ F, G A♭ B♮ C). This creates a flat supertonic (its chord is typically presented in its first inversion and is known as the Neapolitan 6th, named for its distinctive use in the works of the Neapolitan school, which played a significant role in establishing modern tonality) and its origin, as just described, often leads it to resolve on a major tonic chord. Therefore, it exists in the minor mode as a phenomenon that is not much more artificial than the mode itself; and although the keys it connects are quite distant, and their connection is very surprising, this connection is nonetheless real, whether from a major or minor tonic, and serves as a crucial test of a composer’s sense of key perspective. For instance, Philipp Emanuel Bach, in a whimsical spirit, puts the charming little slow movement of his D major Symphony into E♭ and erases all real relationship with chaotic operatic connecting links. Haydn’s greatest piano sonata (which, likely being his last, is No. 1 in most editions) is in E♭, with its slow movement in F♮ major (= F♭). That key had already appeared, surprisingly, in the development of the first movement. No attempt is made to indicate its connection with E♭; the finale begins in E♭, but its first bar is unharmonized and starts on the one note that contradicts E♮ the most and least prepares the mind for E♭. The immediate repetition of the opening phrase a step higher on the normal supertonic strikes the note that the opening had contradicted, thus showing its function in the main key without at all resolving the paradoxical effect of the key of the slow movement. Brahms’s Violoncello Sonata Op. 99 is in F; a prominent episode in the development of the first movement is in E♯ minor (= G♭), thus preparing the mind for the slow movement, which is in F♯ major (= G♭), with a central episode in F minor. The scherzo is in F minor and starts on the dominant. Therefore, if we play its first chord immediately after the last chord of the slow movement, we find exactly that extreme position of flat supertonic followed by dominant, which is a favored cadence form in Wagner, who can even convey its meaning with just the bass without any harmonies (Walküre, Act 3, Scene 2: “Was jetzt du bist, das sage dir selbst”).

Converse harmonic relationships are, as we have seen, always weaker than their direct forms. And thus the relation of C major to B major or minor (as shown in the central episode of the slow movement just mentioned) is rare. Still more rare is the obtaining of indirect artificial relationships, of which the episode in the first movement just mentioned is an illustration in so far as it enhances the effect of the slow movement, but is inconclusive in so far as it is episodic. For with remote key-relationships everything depends upon whether they are used with what may be called cardinal function (like complementary keys) or not. Even a near key may occur in the course of wandering modulations without producing any effect of relationship at all, and this should always be borne in mind whenever we accumulate statistics from classical music.

Converse harmonic relationships are always weaker than their direct counterparts, as we've seen. So, the connection between C major and B major or minor (as shown in the central part of the previously mentioned slow movement) is uncommon. Even rarer are the indirect artificial relationships, like the episode in the first movement we talked about, which enhances the effect of the slow movement but is inconclusive since it’s just an episode. With distant key relationships, it really depends on whether they are used in a way that serves a primary function (like complementary keys) or not. Even a nearby key can appear during wandering modulations without creating any sense of relationship, and this is something to keep in mind whenever we analyze classical music.

d. Contrary and Unconnected Keys.—There remain only two pairs of keys that classical music has not brought into connexion, a circumstance which has co-operated with the utter vagueness of orthodox theories on the subject to confirm the conventionally progressive critic in his conviction that all modulations are alike. We have seen how the effect of modulation from major tonic to minor supertonic is, on a large scale, obscured by the identity of the primary dominant with the secondary subdominant, though the one chord is major and the other minor. Now when the supertonic becomes major this difference no longer obviates the confusion, and modulation from C major to D major, though extremely easy, is of so bewildering effect that it is used by classical composers only in moments of intensely dramatic surprise, as, for example, in the recapitulation of the first subject of Beethoven’s Eroica Symphony, and the last variation (or coda) of the slow movement of his Trio in B♭, Op. 97. And in both cases the balance is restored by the converse (and equally if not more contradictory) modulation between major tonic and major flat 7th, though in the slow movement of the BTrio the latter is represented only by its dominant chord which is “enharmonically” resolved into quite another key. The frequent attempts made by easy-going innovators to treat these key-contrasts on another footing than that of paradox, dramatic surprise or hesitation, only show a deficient sense of tonality, which must also mean an inability to see the intensely powerful effect of the true use of such modulations in classical music, an effect which is entirely independent of any ability to formulate a theory to explain it.6 There now remains only one pair of keys that have never been related, namely, those that (whether major or minor) are at the distance of a tritone 4th. In the first place they are unrelated because there is no means of putting any form of a tonic chord of F♯ into any form of the key of C, or vice versa; and in the second place because it is impossible to tell which of two precisely opposite keys the second key may be (e.g. we have no means of knowing that a direct modulation from C to F♯ is not from C to G♭, which is exactly the same distance in the opposite direction). And this brings us to the only remaining subjects of importance in the science and art of harmony, namely, those of the tempered scale, enharmonic ambiguity and just intonation. Before proceeding we subjoin a table of all the key-relationships from major and minor tonics, representing the degrees by capital Roman figures when the second key is major and small figures 8 when minor. Thus I represents tonic major, iv represents subdominant minor, and so on. A flat or a sharp after the figure indicates that the normal degree of the standard scale has been lowered or raised a semitone, even when in any particular pair of keys it would not be expressed by a flat or a sharp. Thus vi♭ would, from the tonic of B♭ major, express the position of the slow movement of Beethoven’s Sonata, Op. 106, which is written in F♯ minor since G♭ minor is beyond the practical limits of notation.

d. Contrary and Unconnected Keys.—There are only two pairs of keys that classical music has not connected, a fact that, combined with the vague nature of traditional theories, has led the conventionally progressive critic to believe that all modulations are the same. We’ve seen how the effect of modulating from a major tonic to a minor supertonic is, on a large scale, hidden by the identity of the primary dominant and the secondary subdominant, despite one chord being major and the other minor. Now, when the supertonic becomes major, this distinction no longer clears up the confusion, and modulation from C major to D major, while very simple, creates such a bewildering effect that classical composers use it only in moments of intense dramatic surprise, like in the recapitulation of the first subject of Beethoven’s Eroica Symphony, and the last variation (or coda) of the slow movement of his Trio in B♭, Op. 97. In both instances, balance is restored by the contrasting (and equally if not more conflicting) modulation between the major tonic and the major flat 7th, though in the slow movement of the BTrio the latter is represented only by its dominant chord, which is “enharmonically” resolved into a completely different key. The frequent attempts by relaxed innovators to handle these key contrasts in a way other than as paradoxes, dramatic surprises, or hesitations merely demonstrate a lack of understanding of tonality, which also reflects an inability to grasp the intensely powerful effect of the true use of such modulations in classical music, an effect that is wholly independent of any capacity to formulate a theory to explain it.6 There now remains only one pair of keys that have never been connected, namely, those that (whether major or minor) are a tritone apart. They are unrelated because there's no way to incorporate any form of a tonic chord of F♯ into the key of C, or vice versa; and it's also impossible to determine which of two exactly opposite keys the second key may represent (e.g. we can't tell if a direct modulation from C to F♯ is actually from C to G♭, which is the same distance in the opposite direction). This brings us to the only remaining important topics in the science and art of harmony, namely, the tempered scale, enharmonic ambiguity, and just intonation. Before we proceed, we’ll provide a table of all the key relationships from major and minor tonics, representing the degrees with capital Roman numerals when the second key is major and small figures when minor. Thus I represents tonic major, iv represents subdominant minor, and so on. A flat or sharp after the figure indicates that the normal degree of the standard scale has been lowered or raised by a semitone, even when it wouldn’t be expressed as a flat or sharp in particular pairs of keys. Hence, vi♭, from the tonic of B♭ major, would express the position of the slow movement of Beethoven’s Sonata, Op. 106, which is written in F♯ minor since G♭ minor exceeds practical limits of notation.

TABLES OF KEY-RELATIONSHIPS

KEY RELATIONSHIP TABLES


2 Very rare, but the slow movement of Schubert’s C major String Quintet demonstrates it magnificently.

2 Very rare, but the slow movement of Schubert’s C major String Quintet shows it beautifully.

3 All the indirect relationships from a minor tonic are distinctly strained and, except in the violently contrasted doubly indirect keys, obscure as being themselves minor. But the direct artificial modulation is quite smooth, and rich rather than remote. See Beethoven’s C♯ minor Quartet.

3 All the indirect relationships from a minor tonic are clearly strained, and except for the strongly contrasting doubly indirect keys, they're unclear since they are also minor. However, the direct artificial modulation is quite smooth and feels rich rather than distant. Check out Beethoven’s C♯ minor Quartet.

4 No classical example, though the clearer converse from a major tonic occurs effectively.

4 There's no classic example, though the clearer opposite from a major tonic is used effectively.

5 Not (with the exception of II) so violent as when from major tonic. Bach, whose range seldom exceeds direct key-relationships, is not afraid to drift from D minor to C minor, though nothing would induce him to go from D major to C major or minor.

5 Not (except for II) as intense as when coming from the major tonic. Bach, whose scope rarely goes beyond straightforward key relationships, isn’t hesitant to move from D minor to C minor, although nothing would persuade him to shift from D major to either C major or C minor.

VI. Temperament and Enharmonic Changes.—As the facts of artistic harmony increased in complexity and range, the purely acoustic principles which (as Helmholtz has shown) go so far to explain 16th-century aesthetics became more and more inadequate; and grave practical obstacles to euphonious tuning began to assert themselves. The scientific (or natural) ratios of the diatonic scale were not interfered with by art so long as no discords were “fundamental”; but when discords began to assume independence, one and the same note often became assignable on scientific grounds to two slightly different positions in pitch, or at all events to a position incompatible with even tolerable effect in performance. Thus, the chord of the diminished 7th is said to be intolerably harsh in “just intonation,” that is to say, intonation based upon the exact ratios of a normal minor scale. In practical performance the diminished 7th contains three minor 3rds and two imperfect 5ths (such as that which is present in the dominant 7th), while the peculiarly dissonant interval from which the chord takes its name is very nearly the same as a major 6th. Now it can only be said that an intonation which makes nonsense of chords of which every classical composer from the time of Corelli has made excellent sense, is a very unjust intonation indeed; and to anybody who realizes the universal relation between art and nature it is obvious that the chord of the diminished 7th must owe its naturalness to its close approximation to the natural ratios of the minor scale, while it owes its artistic possibility to the extremely minute instinctive modification by which its dissonance becomes tolerable. As a matter of fact, although we have shown here and in the article Music how artificial is the origin and nature of all but the very scantiest materials of the musical language, there is no art in which the element of practical compromise is so minute and so hard for any but trained scientific observation to perceive. If a painter could have a scale of light and shade as nearly approaching nature as the practical intonation of music approaches the acoustic facts it really involves, a visit to a picture gallery would be a severe strain on the strongest eyes, as Ruskin constantly points out. Yet music is in this respect exactly on the same footing as other arts. It constitutes no exception to the universal law that artistic ideas must be realized, not in spite of, but by means of practical necessities. However independent the treatment of discords, they assert themselves in the long run as transient. They resolve into permanent points of repose of which the basis is natural; but the transient phenomena float through the harmonic world adapting themselves, as best they can, to their environment, showing as much dependence upon the stable scheme of “just intonation” as a crowd of metaphors and abstractions in language shows a dependence upon the rules of the syllogism. As much and no more, but that is no doubt a great deal. Yet the attempt to determine the point in modern harmony where just intonation should end and the tempered scale begin, is as vexatious as the attempt to define in etymology the point at which the literal meaning of a word gives places to a metaphorical meaning. And it is as unsound scientifically as the conviction of the typical circle-squarer that he is unravelling a mystery and measuring a quantity hitherto unknown. Just intonation is a reality in so far as it emphasizes the contrast between concord and discord; but when it forbids artistic interaction between harmony and melody it is a chimera. It is sometimes said that Bach, by the example of his forty-eight preludes and fugues in all the major and minor keys, first fixed the modern scale. This is true practically, but not aesthetically. By writing a series of movements in every key of which the keynote was present in the normal organ and harpsichord manuals of his and later times, he enforced the system by which all facts of modern musical harmony are represented on keyed instruments by dividing the octave into twelve equal semitones, instead of tuning a few much-used keys as accurately as possible and sacrificing the euphony of all the rest. This system of equal temperament, with twelve equal semitones in the octave, obviously annihilates important distinctions, and in the most used keys it sours the concords and blunts the discords more than unequal temperament; but it is never harsh; and where it does not express harmonic subtleties the ear instinctively supplies the interpretation; as the observing faculty, indeed, always does wherever the resources of art indicate more than they express.

VI. Temperament and Enharmonic Changes.—As artistic harmony became more complex and varied, the purely acoustic principles that Helmholtz showed could explain 16th-century aesthetics became increasingly inadequate, and serious practical challenges to pleasant tuning began to emerge. The scientific (or natural) ratios of the diatonic scale remained untouched by art as long as there were no fundamental dissonances. However, once dissonances started to become independent, the same note could often be assigned to two slightly different pitch positions based on scientific reasoning, or at least to a position inconsistent with even an acceptable performance outcome. For example, the diminished 7th chord is said to be unbearably harsh in “just intonation,” meaning intonation based on the exact ratios of a standard minor scale. In practice, the diminished 7th consists of three minor 3rds and two imperfect 5ths (like those found in the dominant 7th), while the particularly dissonant interval that gives the chord its name is very close to a major 6th. It can only be stated that an intonation that renders nonsensical chords, which every classical composer since Corelli has made sense of, is a highly unjust intonation. For anyone who recognizes the universal relationship between art and nature, it’s clear that the diminished 7th chord owes its naturalness to its close resemblance to the natural ratios of the minor scale, while its artistic viability comes from the minute instinctive adjustments that make its dissonance acceptable. In fact, although we have illustrated here and in the article on Music how artificial the origins and nature of almost all musical language materials are, no other art has as subtle and hard-to-detect an element of practical compromise as music does, except for those with trained scientific observation. If a painter had a scale of light and shadow as closely matching nature as practical intonation in music aligns with the acoustic principles it actually represents, visiting an art gallery would be a tremendous strain on even the strongest eyes, as Ruskin often points out. Yet music, in this respect, is just like other arts. It follows the universal rule that artistic ideas must be realized, not despite, but because of practical needs. Regardless of how independent the treatment of dissonances might be, they ultimately reveal themselves as temporary. They resolve into permanent points of rest that are based in nature; however, the temporary elements navigate the harmonic world adapting themselves to their surroundings, showing just as much dependence on the stable framework of “just intonation” as a collection of metaphors and abstractions in language shows dependency on syllogistic rules. Just as much and no more, but that is certainly significant. Yet trying to pinpoint where modern harmony transitions from just intonation to the tempered scale is as frustrating as trying to define in etymology when the literal meaning of a word shifts to a metaphorical meaning. It is as scientifically flawed as the typical circle-squarer’s belief that they are unraveling a mystery and measuring an unknown quantity. Just intonation is real to the extent that it highlights the difference between harmony and dissonance; however, when it prevents artistic interaction between harmony and melody, it becomes a fantasy. It is sometimes claimed that Bach, through his forty-eight preludes and fugues in all the major and minor keys, was the first to establish the modern scale. This is true in practice, but not aesthetically. By composing a series of pieces in every key, each featuring the keynote present on the standard organ and harpsichord manuals of his time and later, he enforced the system by which modern musical harmony is represented on keyboard instruments by dividing the octave into twelve equal semitones, rather than tuning a few frequently used keys as accurately as possible and sacrificing the euphony of the rest. This system of equal temperament, with twelve equal semitones in the octave, clearly eliminates important distinctions, and in the most utilized keys, it tends to sour the harmonies and mute the dissonances more than unequal temperament would; yet it is never jarring. Where it does not convey harmonic subtleties, the ear instinctively fills in the gaps; as it always does wherever the resources of art suggest more than they express.

Now it frequently happens that discords or artificial chords are not merely obscure in their intonation, whether ideally or practically, but as produced in practice they are capable of two sharply distinct interpretations. And it is possible for music to take advantage of this and to approach a chord in one significance and quit it with another. Where this happens in just intonation (in so far as that represents a real musical conception) such chords will, so to speak, quiver from one meaning into the other. And even in the tempered scale the ear will interpret the change of meaning as involving a minute difference of intonation. The chord of the diminished 7th has in this way four different meanings—

Now it often happens that dissonances or complex chords are not just unclear in their tuning, whether ideally or practically, but when played, they can have two sharply different interpretations. Music can take advantage of this, approaching a chord with one meaning and leaving it with another. When this occurs in just intonation (as it represents a real musical idea), such chords will, so to speak, tremble between one meaning and the other. Even in the tempered scale, the ear will perceive the change in meaning as a subtle difference in tuning. The diminished 7th chord has four different meanings in this way—

Ex. 11.

and the chord of the augmented 6th, when accompanied by the fifth, may become a dominant 7th or vice versa, as in the passage already cited in the coda of the slow movement of Beethoven’s BTrio, Op. 97. Such modulations are called enharmonic. We have seen that all the more complex musical phenomena involve distinctions enharmonic in the sense of intervals smaller than a semitone, as, for instance, whenever the progression D E in the scale of C, which is a minor tone, is identified with the progression of D E in the scale of D, which is a major tone (differing from the former as 89 from 910). But the special musical meaning of the word “enharmonic” is restricted to the difference between such pairs of sharps with flats or naturals as can be represented on a keyboard by the same note, this difference being the most impressive to the ear in “just intonation” and to the imagination in the tempered scale.

and the chord of the augmented 6th, when paired with the fifth, can turn into a dominant 7th or the other way around, as seen in the previously mentioned passage in the coda of the slow movement of Beethoven’s BTrio, Op. 97. These types of modulations are termed enharmonic. We have observed that all the more intricate musical phenomena involve distinctions that are enharmonic in the sense of intervals smaller than a semitone, as, for instance, whenever the progression D E in the scale of C, which is a minor tone, is recognized as the progression of D E in the scale of D, which is a major tone (differing from the former as 89 does from 910). However, the specific musical meaning of the term “enharmonic” is limited to the difference between pairs of sharps with flats or naturals that can be represented on a keyboard by the same note, this difference being most striking to the ear in “just intonation” and to the imagination in the tempered scale.

Not every progression of chords which is, so to speak, spelt enharmonically is an enharmonic modulation in itself. Thus a modulation from D flat to E major looks violently enharmonic on paper, as in the first movement of Beethoven’s Sonata, Op. 110. But E major with four sharps is merely the most convenient way of expressing F flat, a key which would need six flats and a double flat. The reality of an enharmonic modulation can be easily tested by transporting the passage a semitone. Thus, the passage just cited, put a semitone lower, becomes a perfectly diatonic modulation from C to E flat. But no transposition of the sixteen bars before the return of the main theme in the scherzo of Beethoven’s Sonata in E♭, Op. 31, No. 3, will get rid of the fact that the diminished 7th (G B♭ D♭ E♮), on the dominant of F minor, must have changed into G B♭ D♭ F♭ (although Beethoven does not take the trouble to alter the spelling) before it could resolve, as it does, upon the dominant of A♭. But though there is thus a distinction between real and apparent enharmonic modulations, it frequently happens that a series of modulations perfectly diatonic in themselves returns to the original key by a process which can only be called an enharmonic circle. Thus the whole series of keys now in practical use can be arranged in what is called the circle of fifths (C G D A E B F♯ [= G♭] D♭ A♭ B♭ F C, from which series we now see the meaning of what was said in the discussion of key-relationships as to the ambiguity of the relationships between keys a tritone fourth apart). Now no human memory is capable of distinguishing the difference of pitch between the 9 keys of C and B♯ after a wide series of modulations. The difference would be perceptible enough in immediate juxtaposition, but after some interval of time the memory will certainly accept two keys so near in pitch as identical, whether in “just intonation” or not. And hence the enharmonic circle of fifths is a conception of musical harmony by which infinity is at once rationalized and avoided, just as some modern mathematicians are trying to rationalize the infinity of space by a non-Euclidian space so curved in the fourth dimension as to return upon itself. A similar enharmonic circle progressing in major 3rds is of frequent occurrence and of very rich effect. For example, the keys of the movements of Brahms’s C Minor Symphony are C minor, E major, A♭ major (= G♯), and C (= B♯). And the same circle occurs in the opposite direction in the first movement of his Third Symphony, where the first subject is in F, the transition passes directly to D♭ and thence by exactly the same step to A (= B♭♭). The exposition is repeated, which of course means that in “just intonation” the first subject would begin in G♭♭ and then pass through a transition in E♭♭♭ to the second subject in C♭♭♭. As the development contains another spurious enharmonic modulation, and the recapitulation repeats in another position the first spurious enharmonic modulation of the exposition, it would follow that Brahms’s movement began in F and ended in C sextuple-flat! So much, then, for the application of bad metaphysics and circle-squaring mathematics to the art of music. Neither in mathematics nor in art is an approximation to be confused with an imperfection. Brahms’s movement begins and ends in F much more exactly than any wooden diagonal fits a wooden square.

Not every sequence of chords that looks, so to speak, spelled enharmonically is an actual enharmonic modulation. For instance, a modulation from D flat to E major appears extremely enharmonic on paper, like in the first movement of Beethoven’s Sonata, Op. 110. However, E major with four sharps is just the most convenient way to express F flat, which would require six flats and a double flat. You can easily test the reality of an enharmonic modulation by shifting the passage up a semitone. Therefore, the passage mentioned, when lowered by a semitone, becomes a perfectly diatonic modulation from C to E flat. But no reworking of the sixteen bars before the return of the main theme in the scherzo of Beethoven’s Sonata in E♭, Op. 31, No. 3, will change the fact that the diminished 7th (G B♭ D♭ E♮), on the dominant of F minor, must have changed into G B♭ D♭ F♭ (even though Beethoven doesn’t bother to change the spelling) before it resolves, as it does, onto the dominant of A♭. While there’s a distinction between real and apparent enharmonic modulations, it often happens that a series of modulations that are perfectly diatonic can return to the original key through a process that can only be called an enharmonic circle. Thus, the entire set of keys in practical use can be organized into what is called the circle of fifths (C G D A E B F♯ [= G♭] D♭ A♭ B♭ F C), from which we can understand the implications discussed regarding key relationships and the ambiguity between keys a tritone fourth apart. No human memory can distinguish the pitch difference between the keys of C and B♯ after a long series of modulations. The difference would be obvious when placed right next to each other, but after a while, memory will likely accept two such close keys as identical, whether in “just intonation” or not. Thus, the enharmonic circle of fifths is a concept of musical harmony that rationalizes and avoids infinity, just as some modern mathematicians attempt to rationalize the infinity of space through a non-Euclidean space that curves in the fourth dimension and returns upon itself. A similar enharmonic circle progressing in major thirds often occurs and has a very rich effect. For example, the keys of the movements in Brahms’s C Minor Symphony are C minor, E major, A♭ major (= G♯), and C (= B♯). The same circle also appears in the opposite direction in the first movement of his Third Symphony, where the first subject is in F, the transition goes straight to D♭, and then exactly the same step to A (= B♭♭). The exposition is repeated, which means that in “just intonation,” the first subject would start in G♭♭ and then transition through E♭♭♭ to the second subject in C♭♭♭. Since the development includes another false enharmonic modulation, and the recapitulation restates the first false enharmonic modulation of the exposition in a different spot, it follows that Brahms’s movement begins in F and ends in C sextuple-flat! So much for applying flawed metaphysics and circle-squaring math to the art of music. In neither math nor art should an approximation be confused with imperfection. Brahms’s movement begins and ends in F more precisely than any wooden diagonal can fit a wooden square.

The following series of musical illustrations show the genesis of typical harmonic resources of classical and modern music.

The following series of musical examples demonstrates the origins of typical harmonic techniques found in both classical and modern music.

Ex. 12.—Three concords (ionic, first inversion of subdominant, and dominant of A minor, a possible 16th-century cadence in the Phrygian mode).

Ex. 12.—Three chords (ionic, first inversion of the subdominant, and dominant of A minor, a potential 16th-century cadence in the Phrygian mode).

Ex. 13.—The same chords varied by a suspension (*).

Ex. 13.—The same chords changed by a suspension (*).

Ex. 14.—Ditto, with the further addition of a double suspension (*) and two passing notes (††).

Ex. 14.—Same as above, with the added features of a double suspension (*) and two passing notes (††).

Ex. 15.—Ditto, with a chromatic alteration of the second chord (*) and an “essential” discord (dominant 7th) at (†).

Ex. 15.—Same thing, with a chromatic change in the second chord (*) and a "key" dissonance (dominant 7th) at (†).

Ex. 16.—Ditto, with chromatic passing notes (**) and appoggiaturas (††).

Ex. 16.—Same, with chromatic passing notes (**) and appoggiaturas (††).

Ex. 17.—The last two chords of Ex. 16 attacked unexpectedly, the first appoggiatura (*) prolonged till it seems to make a strange foreign chord before it resolves on the short note at ‡, while the second appoggiatura (†) is chromatic.

Ex. 17.—The last two chords of Ex. 16 hit unexpectedly, with the first appoggiatura (*) stretched out until it creates a strange foreign chord before it resolves on the short note at ‡, while the second appoggiatura (†) is chromatic.

Ex. 18.—The same enharmonically transformed so as to become a variation of the “dominant ninth” of C minor. The G♯ at * is really A♭, and ‡ is no longer a note of resolution, but a chromatic passing-note.

Ex. 18.—The same enharmonically transformed to become a variation of the “dominant ninth” of C minor. The G♯ at * is actually A♭, and ‡ is no longer a note of resolution, but a chromatic passing note.

Definitions.

Definitions.

(Intended to comprise the general conceptions set forth in the above article.)

(Intended to include the general ideas presented in the above article.)

1. Musical sounds, or notes, are sensations produced by regular periodical vibrations in the air, sufficiently rapid to coalesce in a single continuous sensation, and not too rapid for the mechanism of the human ear to respond.

1. Musical sounds, or notes, are experiences created by regular, periodic vibrations in the air that are fast enough to blend into a single continuous sensation but not so fast that the human ear can't detect them.

2. The pitch of a note is the sensation corresponding to the degree of rapidity of its vibrations; being low or grave where these are slow, and high or acute where they are rapid.

2. The pitch of a note is the sensation that relates to how fast its vibrations occur; it is low or grave when the vibrations are slow, and high or acute when they are fast.

3. An interval is the difference in pitch between two notes.

3. An interval is the difference in pitch between two notes.

4. Rhythm is the organization, in a musical scheme, of sounds in respect of time.

4. Rhythm is the arrangement of sounds within a musical framework concerning time.

5. Melody is the organization, in a musical scheme, of rhythmic notes in respect of pitch.

5. Melody is the arrangement of rhythmic notes in a musical context, considering their pitch.

6. Harmony is the organization, in a musical scheme, of simultaneous combinations of notes on principles whereby their acoustic properties interact with laws of rhythm and melody.

6. Harmony is the organization, in a musical framework, of simultaneous combinations of notes based on principles where their sound characteristics interact with the rules of rhythm and melody.

7. The harmonic series is an infinite series of notes produced by the subdivision of a vibrating body or column of air into aliquot parts, such notes being generally inaudible except in the form of the timbre which their presence in various proportions imparts to the fundamental note produced by the whole vibrating body or air-column.

7. The harmonic series is an endless series of notes created by breaking down a vibrating object or column of air into equal parts. These notes are usually inaudible, except for the unique sound quality they add to the main note produced by the entire vibrating object or air column.

8. A concord is a combination which, both by its acoustic smoothness and by its logical origin and purpose in a musical scheme, can form a point of repose.

8. A concord is a blend that can create a sense of rest, both because of its harmonious sound and its logical role and intention within a musical structure.

9. A discord is a combination in which both its logical origin in a musical scheme and its acoustic roughness show that it cannot form a point of repose.

9. A discord is a combination where both its logical basis in a musical structure and its harsh sound indicate that it can't serve as a resting point.

10. The perfect concords and perfect intervals are those comprised within the first four members of the harmonic series, namely, the octave, as between numbers 1 and 2 of the series (see Ex. 1 above); the 5th, as between Nos. 2 and 3; and the 4th, as between Nos. 3 and 4.

10. The perfect concords and perfect intervals are those found within the first four elements of the harmonic series, specifically, the octave, which is between numbers 1 and 2 of the series (see Ex. 1 above); the 5th, which is between numbers 2 and 3; and the 4th, which is between numbers 3 and 4.

11. All notes exactly one or more octaves apart are regarded as harmonically identical.

11. All notes that are exactly one or more octaves apart are considered harmonically the same.

12. The root of a chord is that note from which the whole or the most important parts of the chord appear (if distributed in the right octaves) as members of the harmonic series.

12. The root of a chord is the note from which the entire chord or its most essential parts are derived (when placed in the correct octaves) as elements of the harmonic series.

13. A chord is inverted when its lowest note is not its root.

13. A chord is considered inverted when its lowest note isn't the root note.

14. The major triad is a concord containing three different notes which (octaves being disregarded) are identical with the first, third and fifth members of the harmonic series (the second and fourth members being negligible as octaves).

14. The major triad is a chord made up of three distinct notes that, ignoring octaves, are the same as the first, third, and fifth notes of the harmonic series (the second and fourth notes are not considered since they are just octaves).

15. The minor triad is a concord containing the same intervals as the major triad in a different order; in consequence it is artificial, as one of its notes is not derivable from the harmonic series.

15. The minor triad is a chord made up of the same intervals as the major triad but arranged differently; therefore, it is considered artificial, since one of its notes cannot be found in the harmonic series.

16. Unessential discords are those that are treated purely as the phenomena of transition, delay or ornament, in an otherwise concordant harmony.

16. Unessential discords are those that are seen purely as temporary disturbances, delays, or decorative elements, in an otherwise harmonious melody.

17. Essential discords are those which are so treated that the mind tends to regard them as definite chords possessing roots.

17. Essential discords are those that are handled in a way that makes the mind see them as specific chords with roots.

18. A key is an harmonic system in which there is never any doubt as to which note or triad shall be the final note of music in that system, nor of the relations between that note or chord and the other notes or chords. (In this sense the church modes are either not keys or else they are subtle mixtures of keys.)

18. A key is a harmonic system where it's always clear which note or chord will be the final one in that system, as well as the relationships between that note or chord and the other notes or chords. (In this sense, the church modes are either not keys or they are complex blends of keys.)

19. This final note of a key is called its tonic.

19. This last note of a key is called its tonic.

20. The major mode is that of keys in which the tonic triad and the two other cardinal triads are major.

20. The major mode is used for keys where the tonic triad and the two other primary triads are major.

21. The minor mode is that of keys in which the tonic triad and one other cardinal triad are minor.

21. The minor mode refers to keys where the tonic triad and one other main triad are minor.

22. A diatonic scale is a series of the notes essential to one major or minor key, arranged in order of pitch and repeating itself in other octaves on reaching the limit of an octave.

22. A diatonic scale is a sequence of notes that are fundamental to a major or minor key, organized by pitch and repeating in different octaves when it reaches the end of an octave.

23. Modulation is the passing from one key to another.

23. Modulation is moving from one key to another.

24. Chromatic notes and chords are those which do not belong to the diatonic scale of the passage in which they occur, but which are not so used as to cause modulation.

24. Chromatic notes and chords are those that don't belong to the diatonic scale of the section they're in, but are used in a way that doesn't lead to modulation.

25. Enharmonic intervals are minute intervals which never occur in music as directly measured quantities, though they exist as differences between approximately equal ordinary intervals, diatonic or chromatic. In an enharmonic modulation, two chords differing by an enharmonic quantity are treated as identical.

25. Enharmonic intervals are small intervals that never appear in music as distinctly measured values, but they exist as differences between nearly identical regular intervals, whether diatonic or chromatic. In an enharmonic modulation, two chords that differ by an enharmonic quantity are regarded as the same.

26. Pedal or organ point is the sustaining of a single note in the bass (or, in the case of an inverted pedal, in an upper part) while the harmonies move independently. Unless the harmonies are sometimes foreign to the sustained note, it does not constitute a pedal. In modern music pedals take place on either the tonic or the dominant, other pedal-notes being rare and of complex meaning. Double pedals (of tonic and dominant, with tonic below) are not unusual. The device is capable of very free treatment, and has produced many very bold and rich harmonic effects in music since the earlier works of Beethoven. It probably accounts for many so-called “essential discords.”

26. Pedal or organ point is when a single note in the bass (or, in the case of an inverted pedal, in a higher part) is held while the harmonies move on their own. If the harmonies are not sometimes unrelated to the sustained note, it doesn't count as a pedal. In modern music, pedals usually happen on either the tonic or the dominant, while other pedal notes are uncommon and carry complex meanings. Double pedals (of tonic and dominant, with tonic below) are quite common. This technique can be treated very flexibly and has created many bold and rich harmonic effects in music since Beethoven's earlier works. It likely explains many so-called “essential discords.”

In the form of drones the pedal is the only real harmonic device of ancient and primitive music. The ancient Greeks sometimes 10 used a reiterated instrumental note as an accompaniment above the melody. These primitive devices, though harmonic in the true modern sense of the word, are out of the line of harmonic development, and did not help it in any definite way.

In the form of drones, the pedal is the only genuine harmonic tool of ancient and primitive music. The ancient Greeks sometimes 10 used a repeated instrumental note as a backdrop above the melody. While these primitive techniques are harmonic in the true modern sense, they are not part of the harmonic development line and didn't contribute to it in any specific way.

27. The fundamental bass of a harmonic passage is an imaginary bass consisting of the roots of the chords.

27. The fundamental bass of a harmonic passage is an imaginary bass made up of the roots of the chords.

28. A figured bass, or continuo, is the bass of a composition supplied with numerals indicating the chords to be filled in by the accompanist. Thorough-bass (Ger. Generalbass) is the art of interpreting such figures.

28. A figured bass, or continuo, is the bass line of a piece of music that includes numbers showing the chords that the accompanist should play. Thorough-bass (Ger. Generalbass) is the skill of interpreting these figures.

(D. F. T.)

1 Musical intervals are reckoned numerically upwards along the degrees of the diatonic scales (described below). Intervals greater than an octave are called compound, and are referred to their simple forms, e.g. the 12th is a compound 5th.

1 Musical intervals are measured numerically upward through the degrees of the diatonic scales (explained below). Intervals larger than an octave are called compound, and they're related to their simple forms, e.g. the 12th is a compound 5th.

2 It is at least probable that this is one of the several rather obscure reasons for the peculiar instability of the 4th in modern harmony, which is not yet satisfactorily explained.

2 It's likely that this is one of the several somewhat unclear reasons for the unusual instability of the 4th in modern harmony, which still hasn't been fully explained.

3 The perfect concords are the octave, unison, 5th and 4th. Other diatonic combinations, whether concords or discords, are called imperfect.

3 The perfect intervals are the octave, unison, fifth, and fourth. Other diatonic combinations, whether they sound harmonious or clash, are referred to as imperfect.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ See Plain Song.

5 Until Beethoven developed the resources for a wider scheme of key-contrasts, the only keys for second subjects of sonata-movements were the dominant (when the tonic was major) and the “relative” major or dominant minor (when the tonic was minor). A wider range was possible only in the irresponsible style of D. Scarlatti.

5 Until Beethoven created the means for a broader scheme of key contrasts, the only keys used for the second subjects of sonata movements were the dominant (when the tonic was major) and the “relative” major or dominant minor (when the tonic was minor). A wider variety was only achievable in the carefree style of D. Scarlatti.

6 Many theorists mistake the usual extreme emphasis on the dominant chord of the dominant key, in preparation for second subjects, for a modulation to the major supertonic, but this can deceive no one with any sense of tonality. A good practical test is to see what becomes of such passages when translated into the minor mode. Illusory modulation to the flat 7th frequently occurs as a bold method of throwing strong emphasis on to the subdominant at the outset of a movement, as in Beethoven’s Sonata, Op. 31, No. 1.

6 Many theorists misunderstand the typical strong focus on the dominant chord of the dominant key when setting up the second subjects, thinking it’s a shift to the major supertonic. However, this can’t fool anyone who understands tonality. A good practical test is to see what happens to such sections when translated into the minor mode. Deceptive modulation to the flat 7th often appears as a bold way to place strong emphasis on the subdominant at the start of a movement, as seen in Beethoven’s Sonata, Op. 31, No. 1.


HARMOTOME, a mineral of the zeolite group, consisting of hydrous barium and aluminium silicate, H2BaAl2(SiO3)5 + 5H2O. Usually a small amount of potassium is present replacing part of the barium. The system of crystallization is monoclinic; only complex twinned crystals are known. A common and characteristic form of twinned crystal, such as is represented in the figure, consists of four intercrossing individuals twinned together according to two twin-laws; the compound group resembles a tetragonal crystal with prism and pyramid, but may be distinguished from this by the grooves along the edges of the pseudo-prism. The faces of the crystals are marked by characteristic striations, as indicated in the figure. Twinned crystals of exactly the same kind are also frequent in phillipsite (q.v.). Crystals are usually white and translucent, with a vitreous lustre. The hardness is 4½, and the specific gravity 2.5.

HARMOTOME, is a mineral from the zeolite group, made up of hydrous barium and aluminum silicate, H2BaAl2(SiO3)5 + 5H2O. It often contains a small amount of potassium that replaces some of the barium. The crystallization system is monoclinic; only complex twinned crystals are known. A typical and distinctive form of twinned crystal, as shown in the figure, consists of four intercrossing individuals twinned together according to two twin laws. The combined group looks like a tetragonal crystal with a prism and pyramid shape but can be recognized by the grooves along the edges of the pseudo-prism. The crystal faces feature characteristic striations, as shown in the figure. Twinned crystals of the same type are also common in phillipsite (q.v.). Crystals are typically white and translucent, with a glassy shine. The hardness is 4½, and the specific gravity is 2.5.

The name harmotome (from ἁρμός, “a joint,” and τέμνειν, “to cut”) was given by R. J. Haüy in 1801, and has a crystallographic signification. Earlier names are cross-stone (Ger. Kreuzstein), ercinite, andreasbergolite and andreolite, the two last being derived from the locality, Andreasberg in the Harz. Morvenite (from Morven in Argyllshire) is the name given to small transparent crystals formerly referred to as phillipsite.

The name harmotome (from joint, “a joint,” and τέμνειν, “to cut”) was given by R. J. Haüy in 1801 and has a crystallographic meaning. Earlier names include cross-stone (Ger. Kreuzstein), ercinite, andreasbergolite, and andreolite, with the last two derived from the location, Andreasberg in the Harz. Morvenite (from Morven in Argyllshire) is the name given to small transparent crystals that were previously referred to as phillipsite.

Like other zeolites, harmotome occurs with calcite in the amygdaloidal cavities of volcanic rocks, for example, in the dolerites of Dumbartonshire, and as fine crystals in the agate-lined cavities in the melaphyre of Oberstein in Germany. It also occurs in gneiss, and sometimes in metalliferous veins. At Andreasberg in the Harz it is found in the lead and silver veins; and at Strontian in Argyllshire in lead veins, associated with brewsterite (a strontium and barium zeolite), barytes and calcite.

Like other zeolites, harmotome is found with calcite in the amygdaloidal cavities of volcanic rocks, such as in the dolerites of Dumbartonshire, and as fine crystals in the agate-lined cavities of the melaphyre in Oberstein, Germany. It also occurs in gneiss and sometimes in metal-rich veins. In Andreasberg in the Harz, it is found in lead and silver veins; and at Strontian in Argyllshire, it appears in lead veins, alongside brewsterite (a strontium and barium zeolite), barytes, and calcite.

(L. J. S.)

HARMS, CLAUS (1778-1855), German divine, was born at Fahrstedt in Schleswig-Holstein on the 25th of May 1778, and in his youth worked in his father’s mill. At the university of Kiel he repudiated the prevailing rationalism and under the influence of Schleiermacher became a fervent Evangelical preacher, first at Lunden (1806), and then at Kiel (1816). His trenchant style made him very popular, and he did great service for his cause especially in 1817, when, on the 300th anniversary of the Reformation, he published side by side with Luther’s theses, ninety-five of his own, attacking reason as “the pope of our time” who “dismisses Christ from the altar and throws God’s word from the pulpit.” He also had some fame as a hymn-writer, and besides volumes of sermons published a good book on Pastoraltheologie (1830). He resigned his pastorate on account of blindness in 1849, and died on the 1st of February 1855.

HARMS, CLAUS (1778-1855), a German theologian, was born in Fahrstedt, Schleswig-Holstein, on May 25, 1778. In his early years, he worked in his father's mill. While studying at the University of Kiel, he rejected the dominant rationalism of the time and, influenced by Schleiermacher, became a passionate Evangelical preacher, first in Lunden (1806) and then in Kiel (1816). His sharp style made him quite popular, and he greatly contributed to his cause, especially in 1817, when he published ninety-five theses alongside Luther's, criticizing reason as “the pope of our time” who “dismisses Christ from the altar and throws God’s word from the pulpit” to mark the 300th anniversary of the Reformation. He also gained some recognition as a hymn writer and published various volumes of sermons, along with a notable book on Pastoraltheologie (1830). Harms resigned from his pastoral role due to blindness in 1849 and passed away on February 1, 1855.

See Autobiography (2nd ed., Kiel, 1852); M. Baumgarten, Ein Denkmal für C. Harms (Brunswick, 1855).

See Autobiography (2nd ed., Kiel, 1852); M. Baumgarten, Ein Denkmal für C. Harms (Brunswick, 1855).


HARNACK, ADOLF (1851-  ), German theologian, was born on the 7th of May 1851 at Dorpat, in Russia, where his father, Theodosius Harnack (1817-1889), held a professorship of pastoral theology.

HARNACK, ADOLF (1851-  ), a German theologian, was born on May 7, 1851, in Dorpat, Russia, where his father, Theodosius Harnack (1817-1889), was a professor of pastoral theology.

Theodosius Harnack was a staunch Lutheran and a prolific writer on theological subjects; his chief field of work was practical theology, and his important book on that subject, summing up his long experience and teaching, appeared at Erlangen (1877-1878, 2 vols.). The liturgy of the Lutheran church of Russia has, since 1898, been based on his Liturgische Formulare (1872).

Theodosius Harnack was a dedicated Lutheran and a prolific writer on theological topics. His main focus was practical theology, and his significant book on this subject, which summarized his extensive experience and teaching, was published in Erlangen (1877-1878, 2 vols.). Since 1898, the liturgy of the Lutheran church in Russia has been based on his Liturgische Formulare (1872).

The son pursued his studies at Dorpat (1869-1872) and at Leipzig, where he took his degree; and soon afterwards (1874) began lecturing as a Privatdozent. These lectures, which dealt with such special subjects as Gnosticism and the Apocalypse, attracted considerable attention, and in 1876 he was appointed professor extraordinarius. In the same year he began the publication, in conjunction with O. L. von Gebhardt and T. Zahn, of an edition of the works of the Apostolic Fathers, Patrum apostolicorum opera, a smaller edition of which appeared in 1877. Three years later he was called to Giessen as professor ordinarius of church history. There he collaborated with Oscar Leopold von Gebhardt in Texte und Untersuchungen zur Geschithte der altchristlichen Litteratur (1882 sqq.), an irregular periodical, containing only essays in New Testament and patristic fields. In 1881 he published a work on monasticism, Das Mönchtum, seine Ideale und seine Geschichte (5th ed., 1900; English translation, 1901), and became joint-editor with Emil Schürer of the Theologische Literaturzeitung. In 1885 he published the first volume of his epoch-making work, Lehrbuch der Dogmengeschichte (3rd ed. in three volumes, 1894-1898; English translation in seven volumes, 1894-1899). In this work Harnack traces the rise of dogma, by which he understands the authoritative doctrinal system of the 4th century and its development down to the Reformation. He considers that in its earliest origins Christian faith and the methods of Greek thought were so closely intermingled that much that is not essential to Christianity found its way into the resultant system. Therefore Protestants are not only free, but bound, to criticize it; indeed, for a Protestant Christian, dogma cannot be said to exist. An abridgment of this appeared in 1889 with the title Grundriss der Dogmengeschichte (3rd ed., 1898). In 1886 Harnack was called to Marburg; and in 1888, in spite of violent opposition from the conservative section of the church authorities, to Berlin. In 1890 he became a member of the Academy of Sciences. At Berlin, somewhat against his will, he was drawn into a controversy on the Apostles’ Creed, in which the party antagonisms within the Prussian Church had found expression. Harnack’s view is that the creed contains both too much and too little to be a satisfactory test for candidates for ordination, and he would prefer a briefer symbol which could be rigorously exacted from all (cf. his Das apostolische Glaubensbekenntnis. Ein geschichtlicher Bericht nebst einem Nachworte, 1892; 27th ed., 1896). At Berlin Harnack continued his literary labours. In 1893 he published a history of early Christian literature down to Eusebius, Geschichte der altchristl. Litteratur bis Eusebius (part 2 of vol. i., 1897); and in 1900 appeared his popular lectures, Das Wesen des Christentums (5th ed., 1901; English translation, What is Christianity? 1901; 3rd ed., 1904). One of his more recent historical works is Die Mission und Ausbreitung des Christentums in den ersten drei Jahrhunderten (1902; English translation in two volumes, 1904-1905). It has been followed by some very interesting and important New Testament studies (Beiträge zur Einleitung in das neue Testament, 1906 sqq.; Engl. trans.: Luke the Physician, 1907; The Sayings of Jesus, 1908). Harnack, both as lecturer and writer, was one of the most prolific and most stimulating of modern critical scholars, and trained up in his “Seminar” a whole generation of teachers, who carried his ideas and methods throughout the whole of Germany and even beyond its borders. His distinctive characteristics are his claim for absolute freedom in the study of church history and the New Testament; his distrust of speculative theology, whether orthodox or liberal; his interest in practical Christianity as a religious life and not a system of theology. Some of his addresses on social matters have been published under the heading “Essays on the Social Gospel” (1907).

The son studied at Dorpat (1869-1872) and Leipzig, where he earned his degree; shortly after (1874), he started lecturing as a Privatdozent. These lectures, covering topics like Gnosticism and the Apocalypse, gained significant attention, and in 1876, he was appointed professor extraordinarius. That same year, he began publishing, along with O. L. von Gebhardt and T. Zahn, an edition of the works of the Apostolic Fathers, Patrum apostolicorum opera, with a smaller edition released in 1877. Three years later, he was invited to Giessen as professor ordinarius of church history. There, he worked with Oscar Leopold von Gebhardt on Texte und Untersuchungen zur Geschichte der altchristlichen Litteratur (1882 sqq.), a periodic publication featuring essays focused on New Testament and patristic studies. In 1881, he published a work on monasticism, Das Mönchtum, seine Ideale und seine Geschichte (5th ed., 1900; English translation, 1901), and became a co-editor with Emil Schürer of the Theologische Literaturzeitung. In 1885, he released the first volume of his groundbreaking work, Lehrbuch der Dogmengeschichte (3rd ed. in three volumes, 1894-1898; English translation in seven volumes, 1894-1899). In this work, Harnack examines the origins of dogma, which he sees as the authoritative doctrinal system of the 4th century and its evolution up to the Reformation. He argues that in its earliest forms, Christian faith and Greek thought were so intertwined that many non-essential elements found their way into the resulting system. Consequently, Protestants are not only free but also obligated to critique it; indeed, for a Protestant Christian, dogma cannot be considered to exist. A condensed version of this was published in 1889 titled Grundriss der Dogmengeschichte (3rd ed., 1898). In 1886, Harnack was appointed to Marburg; and in 1888, despite strong opposition from conservative church authorities, to Berlin. In 1890, he became a member of the Academy of Sciences. At Berlin, somewhat reluctantly, he became involved in a debate regarding the Apostles’ Creed, reflecting the factional divisions within the Prussian Church. Harnack believes the creed has both too much and too little content to serve as an acceptable test for candidates for ordination, preferring a shorter statement that could be uniformly required from everyone (cf. his Das apostolische Glaubensbekenntnis. Ein geschichtlicher Bericht nebst einem Nachworte, 1892; 27th ed., 1896). While in Berlin, Harnack continued his writing. In 1893, he published a history of early Christian literature up to Eusebius, Geschichte der altchristl. Litteratur bis Eusebius (part 2 of vol. i., 1897); and in 1900, he released his popular lectures, Das Wesen des Christentums (5th ed., 1901; English translation, What is Christianity? 1901; 3rd ed., 1904). Among his more recent historical works is Die Mission und Ausbreitung des Christentums in den ersten drei Jahrhunderten (1902; English translation in two volumes, 1904-1905). This was followed by some significant New Testament studies (Beiträge zur Einleitung in das neue Testament, 1906 sqq.; Engl. trans.: Luke the Physician, 1907; The Sayings of Jesus, 1908). Harnack was one of the most prolific and engaging modern critical scholars, and he mentored an entire generation of teachers in his “Seminar,” spreading his ideas and methods across Germany and beyond. His distinct traits include his advocacy for complete freedom in studying church history and the New Testament; his skepticism of speculative theology, whether it be orthodox or liberal; and his focus on practical Christianity as a lived experience rather than a theological framework. Some of his talks on social issues have been published under the title “Essays on the Social Gospel” (1907).


HARNESS (from O. Fr. harneis or harnois; the ultimate origin is obscure; the Celtic origin which connects it with the Welsh haiarn, iron, has phonetic and other difficulties; the French is the origin of the Span. arnes, and Ger. Harnisch), probably, in 11 origin, gear, tackle, equipment in general, but early applied particularly to the body armour of a soldier, including the trappings of the horse; now the general term for the gear of an animal used for draft purposes, traces, collar, bridle, girth, breeching, &c. It is usually not applied to the saddle or bridle of a riding animal. The word, in its original meaning of tackle or working apparatus, is still found in weaving, for the mechanism which shifts the warp-threads to form the “shed,” and in bell-hanging, for the apparatus by which a large bell is hung. The New English Dictionary quotes an early use of the word for the lines, rod and hooks of an angler (Fysshing with an Angle, c. 1450).

HARNESS (from Old French harneis or harnois; the exact origin is unclear; the suggested Celtic link to the Welsh haiarn, meaning iron, has some phonetic and other issues; the French forms are the source of the Spanish arnes and German Harnisch), probably, in 11 origin, refer to gear, tackle, or general equipment, but it was initially used specifically for a soldier's body armor, including the horse's trappings; it now generally describes the equipment for an animal used in pulling, such as traces, collars, bridles, girths, breeching, etc. It typically does not refer to the saddle or bridle of a riding animal. The word, in its original sense of tackle or working apparatus, is still used in weaving, referring to the mechanism that moves the warp-threads to create the “shed,” and in bell-hanging, for the system by which a large bell is hung. The New English Dictionary cites an early use of the term to refer to the lines, rod, and hooks of an angler (Fysshing with an Angle, c. 1450).


HARO, CLAMEUR DE, the ancient Norman custom of “crying for justice,” still surviving in the Channel Islands. The wronged party must on his knees and before witnesses cry: “Haro! Haro! Haro! à l’aide, mon prince, on me fait tort.” This appeal has to be respected, and the alleged trespass or tort must cease till the matter has been thrashed out in the courts. The “cry” thus acts as an interim injunction, and no inhabitant of the Channel Islands would think of resisting it. The custom is undoubtedly very ancient, dating from times when there were no courts and no justice except such as was meted out by princes personally. The popular derivation for the name is that which explains “Haro” as an abbreviation of “Ha! Rollo,” a direct appeal to Rollo, first duke of Normandy. It is far more probable that haro is simply an exclamation to call attention (O.H.G. hero, hara, “here”!). Indeed it is clear that the “cry for justice” was in no sense an institution of Rollo, but was a method of appeal recognized in many countries. It is said to be identical with the “Legatro of the Bavarians and the Thuringians,” and the first mention of it in France is to be found in the “Grand coutumier de Normandie.” A similar custom, only observed in criminal charges, was recognized by the Saxon laws under the name of “Clamor Violentiae.” Thus there is reason to think that William the Conqueror on his arrival in England found the “cry” fully established as far as criminal matters were concerned. Later the “cry” was made applicable to civil wrongs, and, when the administration of justice became systematized, disappeared altogether in criminal cases. It naturally tended to become obsolete as the administration of justice became systematized, but it was long retained in north-western France in cases of disputed possession, and was not actually repealed until the close of the 18th century. A survival of the English form of haro is possibly to be found in the “Ara,” a cry at fairs when “settling time” arrived.

HARO, CLAMEUR DE, the old Norman tradition of “crying for justice,” still exists in the Channel Islands. The wronged person must kneel and, in front of witnesses, shout: “Haro! Haro! Haro! Help, my prince, I am being wronged.” This call must be respected, and the alleged offense or wrong must stop until the issue is resolved in court. The “cry” serves as a temporary injunction, and no resident of the Channel Islands would dare resist it. This custom is undoubtedly very old, dating back to times when there were no courts and no justice except what was given personally by princes. The popular explanation for the name is that “Haro” is short for “Ha! Rollo,” a direct appeal to Rollo, the first duke of Normandy. However, it’s more likely that haro is just an exclamation to attract attention (O.H.G. hero, hara, “here”!). In fact, it’s clear that the “cry for justice” was not established by Rollo but was a method of appeal recognized in many places. It is said to be the same as the “Legatro of the Bavarians and the Thuringians,” and the first record of it in France can be found in the “Grand coutumier de Normandie.” A similar custom, observed only in criminal charges, was acknowledged by Saxon laws under the name of “Clamor Violentiae.” Thus, William the Conqueror likely found the “cry” already well-known regarding criminal matters when he arrived in England. Later, the “cry” was applied to civil wrongs, and as the justice system became more organized, it disappeared entirely in criminal cases. It naturally started to become outdated as the justice system became more established but was long maintained in northwestern France for disputed possession cases, remaining in place until the end of the 18th century. A remnant of the English form of haro might be found in the “Ara,” a cry at fairs when “settling time” arrived.


HAROLD I. (d. 1040), surnamed Harefoot, the illegitimate son of Canute, king of England, and Ælfgifu of Northampton. On the death of his father in 1035, he claimed the crown of England in opposition to Canute’s legitimate son, Hardicanute. His claims were supported by Leofric, earl of Mercia, and the north; those of Hardicanute by his mother, Queen Emma, Godwine, earl of the West-Saxons and the south. Eventually Harold was temporarily elected regent, pending a final settlement on Hardicanute’s return from Denmark. Hardicanute, however, tarried, and meanwhile Harold’s party increased rapidly. In 1037 he was definitely elected king, and banished Emma from the kingdom. The only events of his brief reign are ineffectual inroads of the Welsh and Scots. Hardicanute was preparing to invade England in support of his claims when Harold died at Oxford on the 10th of March 1040.

HAROLD I. (d. 1040), known as Harefoot, was the illegitimate son of Canute, king of England, and Ælfgifu of Northampton. After his father died in 1035, he claimed the English crown against Canute’s legitimate son, Hardicanute. Leofric, the earl of Mercia and the north, supported Harold's claims, while Hardicanute was backed by his mother, Queen Emma, and Godwine, the earl of the West-Saxons and the south. Eventually, Harold was temporarily elected regent while waiting for Hardicanute to return from Denmark for a final decision. However, Hardicanute delayed, and Harold's supporters grew stronger. In 1037, he was officially elected king and expelled Emma from the kingdom. The only significant events during his short reign were ineffective attacks from the Welsh and Scots. Hardicanute was getting ready to invade England to support his claims when Harold died in Oxford on March 10, 1040.


HAROLD II. (c. 1022-1066), king of the English, the second son of Earl Godwine, was born about 1022. While still very young (before 1045) he was appointed to the earldom of the East-Angles. He shared his father’s outlawry and banishment in 1051; but while Godwine went to Flanders, Harold with his brother Leofwine took refuge in Ireland. In 1052 Harold and Leofwine returned. Having plundered in the west of England, they joined their father, and were with him at the assembly which decreed the restoration of the whole family. Harold was now restored to his earldom of the East-Angles, and on his father’s death in 1053 he succeeded him in the greater earldom of the West-Saxons. He was now the chief man in the kingdom, and when the older earls Leofric and Siward died his power increased yet more, and the latter part of Edward’s reign was virtually the reign of Harold. In 1055 he drove back the Welsh, who had burned Hereford. In 1063 came the great Welsh war, in which Harold, with the help of his brother Tostig, crushed the power of Gruffyd, who was killed by his own people. But in spite of his power and his prowess, Harold was the minister of the king rather than his personal favourite. This latter position rather belonged to Tostig, who on the death of Siward in 1055 received the earldom of Northumberland. Here, however, his harshness soon provoked enmity, and in 1065 the Northumbrians revolted against him, choosing Morkere in his place. Harold acted as mediator between the king and the insurgents, and at length agreed to the choice of Morkere, and the banishment of his brother. At the beginning of 1066 Edward died, with his last breath recommending Harold as his successor. He was accordingly elected at once and crowned. The men of Northumberland at first refused to acknowledge him, but Harold won them over. The rest of his brief reign was taken up with preparations against the attacks which threatened him on both sides at once. William challenged the crown, alleging both a bequest of Edward in bis favour and a personal engagement which Harold had contracted towards him—probably in 1064; and prepared for the invasion of England. Meanwhile Tostig was trying all means to bring about his own restoration. He first attacked the Isle of Wight, then Lindesey, but was compelled to take shelter in Scotland. From May to September the king kept the coast with a great force by sea and land, but at last provisions failed and the land army was dispersed. Harold then came to London, ready to meet whichever enemy came first. By this time Tostig had engaged Harold Hardrada of Norway to invade England. Together they sailed up the Humber, defeated Edwin and Morkere, and received the submission of York. Harold hurried northwards; and on the 25th of September he came on the Northmen at Stamford Bridge and won a complete victory, in which Tostig and Harold Hardrada were slain. But two days later William landed at Pevensey. Harold marched southward as fast as possible. He gathered his army in London from all southern and eastern England, but Edwin and Morkere kept back the forces of the north. The king then marched into Sussex and engaged the Normans on the hill of Senlac near Battle (see Hastings). After a fight which lasted from morning till evening, the Normans had the victory, and Harold and his two brothers lay dead on the field (14th of October 1066).

HAROLD II. (c. 1022-1066), king of the English, the second son of Earl Godwine, was born around 1022. While still quite young (before 1045), he was appointed as the Earl of East Anglia. He shared his father's outlaw status and exile in 1051; while Godwine went to Flanders, Harold and his brother Leofwine took refuge in Ireland. In 1052, Harold and Leofwine returned. After raiding the west of England, they joined their father and were present at the gathering that reinstated the entire family. Harold was restored to his earldom of East Anglia, and upon his father's death in 1053, he succeeded him in the larger earldom of Wessex. He became the most important figure in the kingdom, and after the deaths of the older earls Leofric and Siward, his power grew even more, making the later part of Edward's reign essentially Harold's rule. In 1055, he pushed back the Welsh, who had burned Hereford. In 1063, the significant Welsh war occurred, during which Harold, with the help of his brother Tostig, defeated Gruffyd, who was killed by his own people. Despite his power and military skills, Harold served more as the king's minister than his personal favorite, a role that belonged to Tostig, who received the earldom of Northumberland after Siward's death in 1055. However, Tostig's harshness quickly led to resentment, and in 1065, the Northumbrians revolted against him, choosing Morkere as their leader. Harold acted as a mediator between the king and the rebels, ultimately agreeing to Morkere’s election and Tostig’s exile. At the beginning of 1066, Edward died, and with his last breath, he recommended Harold as his successor. Harold was immediately elected and crowned. The people of Northumberland initially refused to accept him, but Harold managed to win them over. The rest of his short reign focused on preparing for attacks that threatened him from both sides at once. William claimed the crown, arguing both that Edward had bequeathed it to him and that Harold had made a personal promise to him—likely in 1064—and began preparing to invade England. Meanwhile, Tostig sought to reclaim his position. He first attacked the Isle of Wight, then Lindsey, but was forced to take refuge in Scotland. From May to September, the king maintained a strong presence along the coast by sea and land, but eventually, supplies ran out, and the land army was dispersed. Harold then went to London, ready to confront whichever enemy appeared first. By this time, Tostig had enlisted Harold Hardrada of Norway to invade England. They sailed up the Humber, defeated Edwin and Morkere, and secured the submission of York. Harold rushed north and on September 25, faced the Norsemen at Stamford Bridge, achieving a complete victory where Tostig and Harold Hardrada were killed. Just two days later, William landed at Pevensey. Harold marched south as quickly as possible, gathering his army in London from all over southern and eastern England, but Edwin and Morkere held back the northern forces. The king then moved into Sussex and confronted the Normans on the hill of Senlac near Battle (see Hastings). After a battle that lasted from morning until evening, the Normans won, and Harold and his two brothers were killed on the battlefield (October 14, 1066).


HARP (Fr. harpe; Ger. Harfe; Ital. arpa), a member of the class of stringed instruments of which the strings are twanged or vibrated by the fingers. The harp is an instrument of beautiful proportions, approximating to a triangular form, the strings diminishing in length as they ascend in pitch. The mechanism is concealed within the different parts of which the instrument is composed, (1) the pedestal or pedal-box, on which rest (2) the vertical pillar, and (3) the inclined convex body in which the soundboard is fixed, (4) the curved neck, with (5) the comb concealing the mechanism for stopping the strings, supported by the pillar and the body.

HARP (Fr. harpe; Ger. Harfe; Ital. arpa), a type of string instrument where the strings are plucked or vibrated by the fingers. The harp is an instrument with beautiful proportions, resembling a triangular shape, with strings that get shorter as the pitch increases. The mechanism is hidden within the various parts of the instrument, including (1) the pedestal or pedal-box, which supports (2) the vertical pillar and (3) the inclined convex body where the soundboard is fixed, (4) the curved neck, along with (5) the comb that hides the mechanism for stopping the strings, which is supported by the pillar and the body.

(1) The pedestal or pedal-box forms the base of the harp and contains seven pedals both in single and double action harps, the difference being that in the single action the pedals are only capable of raising the strings one semitone by means of a drop into a notch, whereas with the double action the pedals, after a first drop, can by a further drop into a second and lower notch shorten the string a second semitone, whereby each string is made to serve in turn for flat, natural and sharp. The harp is normally in the key of C flat major, and each of the seven pedals acts upon one of the notes of this diatonic scale throughout the compass. The choice of this method of tuning was imposed by the construction of the harp with double action. The pedals remain in the notches until released by the foot, when the pedal returns to its normal position through the action of a spiral spring, which may be seen under each of the pedals by turning the harp up.

(1) The pedestal or pedal box is the base of the harp and has seven pedals in both single and double action harps. The single action pedals can only raise the strings by one semitone by dropping into a notch, while the double action pedals can, after the first drop, drop again into a second and lower notch to shorten the string by a second semitone. This allows each string to be used for flat, natural, and sharp notes in turn. The harp is typically in the key of C flat major, and each of the seven pedals corresponds to one note in this diatonic scale across the range of the instrument. This tuning method was determined by the design of the harp with double action. The pedals stay in the notches until they’re released by the foot, at which point the pedal returns to its normal position via a spiral spring that can be seen underneath each pedal by turning the harp upside down.

(2) The vertical pillar is a kind of tunnel in which are placed the seven rods worked by the pedals, which set in motion the mechanism situated in the neck of the instrument. Although the pillar apparently 12 rests on the pedestal, it is really supported by a brass shoulder firmly screwed to the beam which forms the lowest part of the body, a connexion which remains undisturbed when the pedal box and its cover are removed.

(2) The vertical pillar is like a tunnel that holds the seven rods controlled by the pedals, which activate the mechanism located in the neck of the instrument. Even though the pillar looks like it rests on the pedestal, it’s actually held up by a brass shoulder securely attached to the beam at the bottom of the body, a connection that stays intact when the pedal box and its cover are removed.

(3) The body or sound-chest of the harp is in shape like the longitudinal section of a cone. It was formerly composed of staves joined together as in the lute and mandoline. Erard was the first to make it in two pieces of wood, generally sycamore, with the addition of a flat soundboard of Swiss pine. The body is strengthened on the inside, in order to resist the tension of the strings, by means of ribs; there are five soundholes in the back, which in the older models were furnished with swell shutters opened at will by the swell pedal, the fourth from the left worked by the left foot. As the increase of sound obtained by means of the swell was infinitesimal, the device has now been discarded. The harp is strung by knotting the end of the string and passing it through its hole in the centre of the soundboard, where it is kept in position by means of a grooved peg which grips the string.

(3) The body or sound-chest of the harp is shaped like the side view of a cone. It used to be made of staves joined together like those in a lute or mandolin. Erard was the first to create it from two pieces of wood, usually sycamore, adding a flat soundboard made of Swiss pine. The inside of the body is reinforced to withstand the tension of the strings with ribs; there are five soundholes in the back, which in older models had swell shutters that could be opened using the swell pedal, with the fourth from the left controlled by the left foot. Since the increase in sound produced by the swell was minimal, this feature is no longer used. The harp is strung by knotting the end of the string and passing it through a hole in the center of the soundboard, where it's held in place by a grooved peg that grips the string.

(4) The neck consists of a curved piece of wood resting on the body at the treble end of the instrument and joining the pillar at the bass end. In the neck are set the tuning pins round which are wound the strings.

(4) The neck is a curved piece of wood that sits on the body at the treble end of the instrument and connects to the pillar at the bass end. The tuning pins are attached to the neck, and the strings are wound around them.

(5) The comb is the name given to two brass plates or covers which fit over both sides of the neck, concealing part of the mechanism for shortening the strings and raising their pitch a semitone when actuated by the pedals. On the front plate of the comb, to the left of the player, is a row of brass bridges against which the strings rest below the tuning pins, and which determine the vibrating length of the string reckoned from the peg in the soundboard. Below the bridges are two rows of brass disks, known as forks, connected by steel levers; each disk is equipped with two studs for grasping the string and shortening it. The mechanism is ingenious. When a pedal is depressed to the first notch, the corresponding lower disk turns a little way on a mandrel keeping the studs clear of the string. The upper disk, set in motion by the steel levers connecting the disks, revolves simultaneously till the string is caught by the two studs which thus form a new bridge, shortening the vibrating length of the string by just the length necessary to raise the pitch a semitone. If the same pedal be depressed to the second notch, another movement causes the lower disk to revolve again till the string is a second time seized and shortened, the upper disk remaining stationary. The hidden mechanism meanwhile has gone through a series of movements; the pedal is really a lever set upon a spring, and when depressed it draws down the connecting rod in the pillar which sets in motion chains governing the mandrels of the disks.

(5) The comb refers to two brass plates or covers that fit over both sides of the neck, hiding part of the mechanism that shortens the strings and raises their pitch by a semitone when the pedals are activated. On the front plate of the comb, to the player's left, there's a row of brass bridges where the strings rest below the tuning pins, determining the vibrating length of the string from the peg in the soundboard. Below the bridges are two rows of brass disks, called forks, connected by steel levers; each disk has two studs that grip the string and shorten it. The mechanism is clever. When a pedal is pressed down to the first notch, the corresponding lower disk turns slightly on a mandrel, keeping the studs away from the string. The upper disk moves, driven by the steel levers connecting the disks, and rotates until the string is caught by the two studs, creating a new bridge that shortens the string's vibrating length enough to raise the pitch by a semitone. If the same pedal is pressed down to the second notch, another movement causes the lower disk to turn again until the string is once more grabbed and shortened, with the upper disk staying in place. Meanwhile, the hidden mechanism has completed a series of movements; the pedal acts as a lever on a spring, and when pressed, it pulls down the connecting rod in the pillar, triggering chains that control the mandrels of the disks.

The harp usually has forty-six strings, of gut in the middle and upper registers, and of covered steel wire in the bass; the C strings are red and the F strings blue. The compass thus has a range of 6½ octaves from . The double stave is used as for the pianoforte. The single action harp used to be tuned to the key of E♭ major.

The harp typically has forty-six strings, made of gut in the middle and upper registers, and covered steel wire in the bass. The C strings are red and the F strings are blue. This gives it a range of 6½ octaves from . It uses a double staff, like the piano. The single-action harp was usually tuned to the key of E♭ major.

The modern harp with double action is the only instrument with fixed tones, not determined by the ear or touch of the performer, which has separate notes for naturals, sharps and flats, giving it an enharmonic compass. On the harp the appreciable interval between D♯ and E♭ can be played. The harp in its normal condition is tuned to C♭ major; it rests with the performer to transpose it at will in a few seconds into any other key by means of the pedals. Each of the pedals influences one note of the scale throughout the compass, beginning at the left with D, C, and B worked by the left foot. Missing the fourth or forte pedal, and continuing towards the right we get the E, F, G and A pedals worked by the right foot. By lowering the D pedal into the first notch the D♭ becomes D♮, and into the second notch D♯, and so on for all the pedals. If, for example, a piece be written in the key of E major, the harp is transposed into that key by depressing the E, A, and B pedals to the first notch, and those for F, G, C and D to the second or sharp notch and so on through all the keys. Accidentals and modulations are readily played by means of the pedals, provided the transitions be not too rapid. The harp is the instrument upon which transposition presents the least difficulty, for the fingering is the same for all keys. The strings are twanged with the thumbs and the first three fingers.

The modern harp with double action is the only instrument with fixed tones that aren't based on the player's ear or touch. It has separate notes for naturals, sharps, and flats, giving it an enharmonic range. On the harp, the noticeable interval between D♯ and E♭ can be played. The harp is typically tuned to C♭ major; the performer can quickly transpose it to any other key using the pedals. Each pedal affects one note of the scale across the range, starting from the left with D, C, and B, which are controlled by the left foot. Moving to the right, we have the E, F, G, and A pedals that are operated by the right foot. By lowering the D pedal to the first notch, D♭ becomes D♮, and at the second notch, it becomes D♯, and this applies to all the pedals. For example, if a piece is written in E major, the harp is transposed to that key by pressing the E, A, and B pedals to the first notch, and the F, G, C, and D pedals to the second or sharp notch, and so forth through all the keys. Accidentals and modulations can be easily played using the pedals, as long as the transitions aren't too fast. The harp is the instrument where transposition is the easiest, as the fingering remains the same for all keys. The strings are plucked with the thumbs and the first three fingers.

The quality of tone does not vary much in the different registers, but it has the greatest brilliancy in keys with many flats, for the strings are then open and not shortened by the forks. Various effects can be obtained on the harp: (1) by harmonics, (2) by damping, (3) by guitar tones, (4) by the glissando. (1) Harmonics are produced by resting the ball of the hand on the middle of the string and setting it in vibration by the thumb or the first two fingers of the same hand, whereby a mysterious and beautiful tone is obtained. Two or three harmonics can be played together with the left hand, and by using both hands at once as many as four are possible. (2) Damping is effected by laying the palm against the string in the bass and the back of the finger in the treble. (3) Guitar or pizzicato notes are obtained by twanging the strings sharply at the lower end near the soundboard with the nails. (4) The glissando effect is produced, as on the pianoforte, by sliding the thumb or finger along the strings in quick succession; this does not necessarily give the diatonic scale, for by means of the pedals the harp can be tuned beforehand to chords. It is possible to play on the harp all kinds of diatonic and arpeggio passages, but no chromatic, except in very slow tempo, on account of the time required by the mechanism of the pedals; and chords of three or four notes in each hand, shakes, turns, successions of double notes can be easily acquired. The same note can also be repeated slowly or quickly, the next string being tuned to a duplicate note, and the two strings plucked alternately in order to give the string time to vibrate.

The tone quality doesn’t change much across different ranges, but it shines the most in keys with many flats because the strings are then open and not shortened by the forks. You can create various effects on the harp: (1) harmonics, (2) damping, (3) guitar tones, and (4) glissando. (1) Harmonics are made by resting the ball of your hand in the middle of the string and making it vibrate with your thumb or the first two fingers of the same hand, creating a mysterious and beautiful sound. You can play two or three harmonics together with your left hand, and by using both hands at once, you can get up to four. (2) Damping is done by pressing your palm against the string in the bass and the back of your finger in the treble. (3) Guitar or pizzicato notes are created by plucking the strings sharply at the lower end near the soundboard with your nails. (4) The glissando effect is achieved, like on the piano, by sliding your thumb or finger along the strings rapidly; this doesn’t always produce the diatonic scale, as the harp can be pre-tuned to chords using pedals. You can play all kinds of diatonic and arpeggio passages on the harp, but chromatic passages are only possible at a very slow pace due to the time needed for the pedal mechanism; and you can easily manage chords of three or four notes in each hand, shakes, turns, and sequences of double notes. The same note can also be repeated slowly or quickly, with the next string tuned to match, allowing you to pluck the two strings alternately to give each string time to vibrate.

Pleyel’s chromatic harp, patented in 1894 and improved in 1903 by Gustave Lyon, manager of the firm of Pleyel, Wolff & Co., is an instrument practically without mechanism which has already won great favour in France and Belgium, notably in the orchestra. It has been constructed on the familiar lines of the pianoforte. Henry Pape, a piano manufacturer, had in 1845 conceived the idea of a chromatic harp of which the strings crossed in the centre as in the piano, and a report on the construction was published at the time; the instrument, however, was not considered successful, and was relegated to oblivion until Mr Lyon revised the matter and brought out a successful and practical instrument. The advantages claimed for this harp are the abandonment of the whole pedal mechanism, a metal framing which insures the strings keeping in tune as long as those of a piano, and an easily acquired technique. The chromatic harp consists of (1) a pedestal on castors, (2) a steel pillar without internal mechanism, (3) a wide neck containing two brass wrest-planks in which are fixed two rows of tuning pins, and (4) a soundchest in which is firmly riveted the steel plate to which the strings are fastened, and the soundboard pierced with eyelet holes through which the strings are drawn to the string plate. There is a string for every chromatic semitone of the scale of C major, the white strings representing the white keys of the piano keyboard, and the black strings corresponding to the black keys. The tuning pins for the black strings are set in the left side of the neck in alternate groups of twos and threes, and those for the white in the right side in alternate groups of threes and fours. The strings cross half-way between neck and soundboard, this being the point where they are plucked; the left hand finds the black notes above, and the right hand below the crossing. There is besides in the neck a set of twelve tuning buttons, each one of which on being pressed gives out one note of the chromatic scale tuned to the pitch of the diapason normal. It is obvious that the répertoire for this harp is very extensive, including many compositions written for the piano, which however cannot be played with any legato effects, these being still impossible on this chromatic harp.

Pleyel’s chromatic harp, patented in 1894 and refined in 1903 by Gustave Lyon, the manager of Pleyel, Wolff & Co., is an instrument that operates with minimal mechanics and has gained significant popularity in France and Belgium, especially in orchestras. It is designed similarly to a piano. In 1845, Henry Pape, a piano manufacturer, had imagined a chromatic harp with strings crossing in the center like a piano, and a report on its construction was published at the time; however, the instrument was deemed unsuccessful and faded into obscurity until Mr. Lyon revisited the concept and developed a practical and successful version. The advantages of this harp include the elimination of the entire pedal mechanism, a metal frame that ensures the strings remain in tune as long as a piano's, and an easily learned technique. The chromatic harp consists of (1) a pedestal on wheels, (2) a steel column with no internal mechanism, (3) a wide neck that contains two brass wrest-planks with two rows of tuning pins, and (4) a sound chest that has a steel plate securely attached to which the strings are fastened, along with a soundboard featuring eyelet holes where the strings pass through to the string plate. There is a string for every chromatic semitone in the C major scale, with white strings representing the white keys of a piano keyboard and black strings corresponding to the black keys. The tuning pins for the black strings are located on the left side of the neck in alternating groups of two and three, while the white string pins are on the right side in groups of three and four. The strings cross halfway between the neck and the soundboard, at the point where they are plucked; the left hand plays the black notes above this point, and the right hand plays the white notes below. Additionally, the neck includes a set of twelve tuning buttons, each of which, when pressed, produces a note from the chromatic scale tuned to standard pitch. It's clear that the repertoire for this harp is quite extensive, including many compositions originally written for piano, though these cannot achieve legato effects, which remain impossible on this chromatic harp.

History.—While the instrument is of great antiquity, it is yet from northern Europe that the modern harp and its name are derived. The Greeks and Romans preferred to it the lyre in its different varieties, and a Latin writer, Venantius Fortunatus,1 describes it in the 7th century of our era as an instrument of the barbarians—“Romanusque lyra, plaudat tibi barbarus harpa.” This is believed to be the earliest mention of the name, which is clearly Teutonic,—O.H.Ger. harapha, A.-S. hearpe, Old Norse harpa. The modern Fr. harpe retains the aspirate; in the Spanish and Italian arpa it is dropped.

History.—Although the instrument has ancient origins, the modern harp and its name come from northern Europe. The Greeks and Romans preferred the lyre in its various forms, and a Latin writer, Venantius Fortunatus, 1 describes it in the 7th century as an instrument of the barbarians—“Romanusque lyra, plaudat tibi barbarus harpa.” This is thought to be the earliest mention of the name, which is clearly Teutonic—O.H.Ger. harapha, A.-S. hearpe, Old Norse harpa. The modern French harpe keeps the aspirate; in Spanish and Italian, it is dropped to arpa.

Fig. 1.

The earliest delineations of the harp in Egypt give no indication that it had not existed long before. There are, indeed, representations in Egyptian paintings of stringed instruments of a bow-form having affinities with both primitive harp and nefer (a kind of oval guitar) that support the idea of the invention of the harp from the tense string of the warrior’s or hunter’s bow. This primitive-looking instrument, called nanga, had a boat-shaped sound-chest with a parchment or skin soundboard, down the centre of which one end of the string was fastened to a strip of wood, whilst the other was wound round pegs in the upper part of the bow. The nanga was played horizontally, being borne upon the performer’s shoulder.2 Between it and the grand vertical harps in the frescos of the time of Rameses III., more than 3000 years old, discovered by the traveller Bruce3 (fig. 1), there are varieties that permit us to bind the whole, 13 from the simplest bow-form to the almost triangular harp, into one family (see fig. 2).

The earliest depictions of the harp in Egypt suggest that it had been around for a long time before those images were created. There are actually representations in Egyptian paintings of stringed instruments shaped like a bow that show similarities to both primitive harps and the nefer (a type of oval guitar), which supports the idea that the harp was invented from the taut string of a warrior’s or hunter’s bow. This primitive-looking instrument, called nanga, featured a boat-shaped soundbox with a parchment or skin soundboard. One end of the string was attached to a strip of wood in the center, while the other end was wound around pegs at the top of the bow. The nanga was played horizontally, resting on the performer's shoulder.2 Between it and the grand vertical harps seen in frescoes from the time of Rameses III., over 3,000 years ago, discovered by the traveler Bruce3 (fig. 1), there are variations that allow us to group them all, from the simplest bow-shaped forms to the nearly triangular harps, into one family (see fig. 2).

Fig. 2.

The Egyptian harp had no front pillar, and as it was strung with catgut the tension and pitch must necessarily have been low. The harps above-mentioned depicted in the tomb at Thebes, assumed from the players to be more than 6 ft. high, have not many strings, the one having ten, the other thirteen. What the accordance of these strings was it would be hard to recover. We must be content with the knowledge that the old Egyptians possessed harps in principle like our own, the largest having pedestals upon which they bestowed a wealth of decoration, as if to show how much they prized them.

The Egyptian harp didn't have a front pillar, and since it was strung with catgut, the tension and pitch would have been low. The harps mentioned earlier, depicted in the tomb at Thebes, are assumed to be over 6 ft. high and have a limited number of strings, one with ten and the other with thirteen. It's hard to determine how these strings worked together. We can only understand that the ancient Egyptians had harps similar in principle to ours, with the largest ones featuring pedestals that were richly decorated, showing how much they valued them.

The ancient Assyrians had harps like those of Egypt in being without a front pillar, but differing from them in having the sound-body uppermost, in which we find the early use of soundholes; while the lower portion was a bar to which the strings were tied and by means of which the tuning was apparently effected.4 What the Hebrew harp was, whether it followed the Egyptian or the Assyrian, we do not know. That King David played upon the harp as commonly depicted is rather a modern idea. Medieval artists frequently gave King David the psaltery, a horizontal stringed instrument from which has gradually developed the modern piano. The Hebrew “kinnor” may have been a kind of trigonon, a triangular stringed instrument between a small harp and a psaltery, sounded by a plectrum, or more probably, as advocated by Dr Stainer in his essay on the music of the Bible, a kind of lyre.

The ancient Assyrians had harps similar to those of Egypt in that they didn't have a front pillar, but they were different because the sound body was on top, featuring early soundholes. The lower part consisted of a bar where the strings were attached, which seems to be how tuning was done.4 We don’t know exactly what the Hebrew harp was like or whether it was influenced by the Egyptian or Assyrian models. The idea that King David played the harp, as often shown in art, is more of a modern concept. Medieval artists usually portrayed King David with the psaltery, a horizontal stringed instrument that eventually evolved into the modern piano. The Hebrew “kinnor” might have been a type of trigonon, a triangular stringed instrument that sits between a small harp and a psaltery, played with a plectrum, or more likely, as Dr. Stainer suggests in his essay on the music of the Bible, a kind of lyre.

The earliest records that we possess of the Celtic race, whether Gaelic or Cymric, give the harp a prominent place and harpists peculiar veneration and distinction. The names for the harp are, however, quite different from the Teutonic. The Irish “clairseach,” the Highland Scottish “clarsach,” the Welsh, Cornish, Breton “telyn,” “telein,” “télen,” show no etymological kinship to the other European names. The first syllable in clairseach or clarsach is derived from the Gaelic “clar,” a board or table (soundboard), while the first syllable of telyn is distinctly Old Welsh, and has a tensile meaning; thus resonance supplies the one idea, tension the other.

The earliest records we have of the Celtic race, whether Gaelic or Cymric, highlight the harp's importance and the special respect and status given to harpists. However, the names for the harp are quite different from the Teutonic ones. The Irish "clairseach," the Highland Scottish "clarsach," and the Welsh, Cornish, Breton "telyn," "telein," "télen," show no linguistic connection to the names found in other European languages. The first part of clairseach or clarsach comes from the Gaelic "clar," meaning board or table (soundboard), while the first part of telyn is clearly Old Welsh and has a meaning related to tension; thus, resonance conveys one idea, while tension conveys another.

Fig. 3.
Irish (Dalway) Harp.
Fig. 4.
Welsh Triple Harp.

The literature of these Celtic harps may be most directly found in Bunting’s Ancient Music of Ireland (Dublin, 1840), Gunn’s Historical Enquiry respecting the Performance on the Harp in the Highlands of Scotland (Edinburgh, 1807), and E. Jones’s Musical and Poetical Memoirs of the Welsh Bards (London, 1784). The treatises of Walker, Dalyell, and others may also be consulted; but in all these authorities due care must be taken of the bias of patriotism, and the delusive aim to reconstruct much that we must be content to receive as only vaguely indicated in records and old monuments. There is, however, one early Irish monument about which there can be no mistake, the harp upon a cross belonging to the ancient church of Ullard near Kilkenny, the date of which cannot be later than 830; the sculpture is rude, but the instrument is clearly shown by the drawing in Bunting’s work to have no front pillar. This remarkable structural likeness to the old harps of Egypt and Assyria may be accidental, but permits the plausible hypothesis of Eastern descent. The oldest specimen of the beautiful form by which the Irish harp is now recognized, with gracefully curved front pillar and sweep of neck (the latter known as the harmonic curve), is the famous harp in Trinity College, Dublin, the possession of which has been attributed to King Brian Boiroimhe. From this mythic ownership Dr Petrie (see essay in Bunting) has delivered it; but he can only deduce the age from the ornamentation and heraldry, which fix its date in the 14th century or a little later. There is a cast of it in the Victoria and Albert Museum. The next oldest is in the Highlands of Scotland, the Clarsach Lumanach, or Lamont’s Clarschoe, belonging, with another of later date, to the old Perthshire family of Robertson of Lude. Both are described in detail by Gunn. This Lamont harp was taken by a lady of that family from Argyleshire about 1460, on her marriage into the family of Lude. It had about thirty strings tuned singly, but the scale was sometimes doubled in pairs of unisons like lutes and other contemporary instruments. The Dalway harp in Ireland (fig. 3) inscribed “Ego sum Regina Cithararum,” and dated 1621, appears to have had pairs of strings in the centre only. These were of brass wire, and played with the pointed finger-nails. The Italian contemporary “Arpa Doppia” was entirely upon the duplex principle, but with gut strings played by the fleshy ends of the fingers. When E. Bunting met at Belfast in 1792 as many Irish harpers as could be at that late date assembled, he found the compass of their harps to comprise thirty notes which were tuned diatonically in the key of G, under certain circumstances transposable to C and rarely to D, the scales being the major of these keys. The harp first appeared in the coat of arms of Ireland in the reign of Henry VIII.; and some years after in a map of 1567 preserved in a volume of state papers, we find it truly drawn according to the outlines of the national Irish instrument.5 References to the Highlands of Scotland are of necessity included with Ireland; and in both we find another name erroneously applied by lexicographers to the harp, viz. “cruit.” Bunting particularly mentions the “cinnard cruit” (harp with a high head) and the “crom cruit” (the curved harp). In the Ossianic MSS. of the Dean of Lismore (1512) the word “crwt” occurs several times, and in Neill M’Alpine’s Gaelic Dictionary (1832), which gives the dialect of Islay, closely related to that of Ulster, the word “cruit” is rendered “harp.” The confusion doubtless arose from the fact that from the 11th century cithara is glossed hearpan in Anglo-Saxon MSS., a word which, like citharisare in medieval Latin, referred to plucking or twanging of strings in contradistinction to those instruments vibrated by means of the bow. In Irish of the 8th and 9th centuries (Zeuss) cithara is always glossed by “crot.” The modern Welsh “crwth” is not a harp but a “rotta” (see Crowd). An old Welsh harp, not triple strung, exists, which bears a great resemblance to the Irish harp in neck, soundboard and soundholes. But this does not imply derivation of the harp of Wales from that of Ireland or the reverse. There is really no good historical evidence, and there may have been a common or distinct origin on which ethnology only can throw light.6 The Welsh like the Irish harp was often an hereditary instrument to be preserved with great care and veneration, and used by the bards of the family, who were alike the poet-musicians and historians. A slave was not allowed to touch a harp, and it was exempted by the Welsh laws from seizure for debt. The old Welsh harp appears to have been at one time strung with horse-hair, and by the Eisteddfod laws the pupil spent his noviciate of three years in the practice of a harp with that stringing. The comparatively modern Welsh triple harp (fig. 4) is always strung with gut. It has a rising neck as before stated, and three rows of strings,—the outer rows tuned diatonic, the centre one chromatic for the sharps and flats. Jones gives it 98 strings and a compass of 5 octaves and one note, from violoncello C. As in all Celtic harps, the left is the treble hand, and in the triple harps there are 27 strings on that side, the right or bass hand having 37, and the middle or chromatic row 34.

The literature on these Celtic harps can mainly be found in Bunting's Ancient Music of Ireland (Dublin, 1840), Gunn's Historical Enquiry Respecting the Performance on the Harp in the Highlands of Scotland (Edinburgh, 1807), and E. Jones's Musical and Poetical Memoirs of the Welsh Bards (London, 1784). The writings of Walker, Dalyell, and others can also be referenced; however, it’s important to be aware of their patriotic biases and the misleading attempts to reconstruct details that we can only assume from vague records and ancient monuments. There is, however, one early Irish monument that is unmistakable: the harp on a cross from the ancient church of Ullard near Kilkenny, which dates back to no later than 830; the sculpture is rough, but the drawing in Bunting's work clearly shows the instrument lacks a front pillar. This striking structural similarity to the old harps of Egypt and Assyria might be a coincidence, but it opens up the reasonable theory of Eastern influence. The oldest example of the elegant design that the Irish harp is now recognized for, featuring a gracefully curved front pillar and a neck sweep (known as the harmonic curve), is the famous harp at Trinity College, Dublin, which is said to have belonged to King Brian Boiroimhe. Dr. Petrie (refer to the essay in Bunting) has attributed this mythic ownership to it, but he can only determine its age through the ornamentation and heraldry, which dates it to the 14th century or a bit later. A cast of it is held at the Victoria and Albert Museum. The next oldest harp is found in the Highlands of Scotland, the Clarsach Lumanach, or Lamont’s Clarschoe, which, along with another younger one, belongs to the old Perthshire family of Robertson of Lude. Both are described in detail by Gunn. This Lamont harp was brought by a lady from Argyleshire around 1460 when she married into the family of Lude. It had about thirty strings tuned individually, though sometimes the scale was doubled in pairs of unisons like lutes and other contemporary instruments. The Dalway harp in Ireland (fig. 3), inscribed “Ego sum Regina Cithararum,” and dated 1621, seems to have had pairs of strings only in the center. These were made of brass wire, and played with pointed fingernails. The Italian contemporary “Arpa Doppia” was completely based on the duplex principle, with gut strings played by the fleshy tips of the fingers. When E. Bunting gathered as many Irish harpers as he could in Belfast in 1792, he found their harps had a range of thirty notes, tuned diatonically in the key of G, which could sometimes be transposed to C and rarely to D, with the scales being major in these keys. The harp first appeared in the coat of arms of Ireland during Henry VIII.'s reign; a few years later, in a map from 1567 preserved in state papers, it is depicted accurately according to the design of the national Irish instrument.5 References to the Highlands of Scotland are necessarily included with Ireland; in both places, we find another name mistakenly used by lexicographers for the harp, namely “cruit.” Bunting specifically mentions the “cinnard cruit” (harp with a high head) and the “crom cruit” (the curved harp). In the Ossianic manuscripts of the Dean of Lismore (1512), the word “crwt” appears several times, and in Neill M’Alpine’s Gaelic Dictionary (1832), which gives the dialect of Islay closely related to that of Ulster, the word “cruit” is defined as “harp.” The confusion likely arose because, starting from the 11th century, cithara is glossed as hearpan in Anglo-Saxon manuscripts—a term that, similar to citharisare in medieval Latin, referred to plucking or twanging strings, as opposed to instruments vibrated with a bow. In the Irish of the 8th and 9th centuries (Zeuss), cithara is consistently glossed by “crot.” The modern Welsh “crwth” is not a harp but a “rotta” (see Crowd). An old Welsh harp, not triple-strung, exists, resembling the Irish harp in neck, soundboard, and soundholes. However, this does not imply that the harp of Wales originated from that of Ireland or vice versa. There is no solid historical evidence, and it’s possible there was a common or distinct origin that only ethnology can clarify.6 Like the Irish harp, the Welsh harp was often an inherited instrument, preserved with great care and respect, and used by the family bards, who were both poet-musicians and historians. A slave was not allowed to touch a harp, and it was protected from seizure for debt by Welsh laws. The old Welsh harp seems to have been strung with horse hair at one point, and the Eisteddfod laws required students to spend their three-year apprenticeship practicing on a harp with that type of stringing. The relatively modern Welsh triple harp (fig. 4) is always strung with gut. It has an upward-curving neck as previously mentioned, and three rows of strings—the outer rows tuned diatonically, while the center row is chromatic for sharps and flats. Jones reports it has 98 strings and a range of 5 octaves plus one note, extending from violoncello C. As with all Celtic harps, the left side is for the treble hand, and on the triple harps, there are 27 strings on that side, while the right or bass hand has 37, and the middle or chromatic row has 34.

The first pattern of the modern harp is discovered in German and Anglo-Saxon illuminated MSS. as far back as the 9th century.7 A diatonic instrument, it must have been common throughout Europe, as Orcagna, Fra Angelico, and other famous Italian painters depict it over and over again in their masterpieces. No accidental semitones were possible with this instrument, unless the strings were shortened by the player’s fingers. This lasted until the 17th century, when a Tirolese maker adapted hooks8 (perhaps suggested by the fretted or bonded clavichord) that, screwed into the neck, could be turned downwards to fix the desired semitone at pleasure. At last, somewhere about 1720, Hochbrucker, a Bavarian, invented pedals that, acting through the pedestal of the instrument, governed by mechanism the stopping, and thus left the player’s hands free, an indisputable advantage; and it became possible at once to play in no less 14 than eight major scales. By a sequence of improvements, in which two Frenchmen named Cousineau took an important part, the various defects inherent in Hochbrucker’s plan became ameliorated. The pedals were doubled, and, the tuning of the instrument being changed from the key of E♭ to C♭, it became possible to play in fifteen keys, thus exceeding the power of the keyboard instruments, over which the harp has another important advantage in the simplicity of the fingering, which is the same for every key.

The first version of the modern harp was found in German and Anglo-Saxon illuminated manuscripts dating back to the 9th century. Being a diatonic instrument, it likely had a widespread presence across Europe, as artists like Orcagna, Fra Angelico, and other renowned Italian painters frequently depicted it in their masterpieces. This instrument didn't allow for accidental semitones unless the player adjusted the string length using their fingers. This situation continued until the 17th century when a maker from Tyrol introduced hooks (possibly inspired by the fretted or bonded clavichord) that could be screwed into the neck and turned down to set the desired semitone. Eventually, around 1720, a Bavarian named Hochbrucker invented pedals that operated through the pedestal of the instrument, allowing mechanisms to engage the stopping and freeing the player's hands, which was a significant advantage. This innovation enabled players to perform in as many as eight major scales. Through a series of improvements, in which two Frenchmen named Cousineau played a significant role, the various issues with Hochbrucker’s design were addressed. The pedals were doubled, and with the instrument's tuning shifted from E♭ to C♭, it became possible to play in fifteen keys, surpassing the capabilities of keyboard instruments. The harp also had the added advantage of simpler fingering, which remained consistent across different keys.

Fig. 5.
Modern Erard
Harp.

It is to Sebastian Erard we owe the perfecting of the pedal harp (fig. 5), a triumph he gained in Paris by unremitting studies begun when he adopted a “fork” mechanism in 1786 and ended in 1810 when he had attained complete success with the double action pedal mechanism already described above. Erard’s merit was not confined to this improvement only; he modified the structure of the comb that conceals the mechanism, and constructed the sound-body of the instrument upon a modern principle more advantageous to the tone.

It’s thanks to Sebastian Erard that we have the modern pedal harp (fig. 5), a success he achieved in Paris after years of dedicated study that began when he introduced a “fork” mechanism in 1786 and culminated in 1810 with his complete success using the double action pedal mechanism mentioned earlier. Erard's contributions didn’t stop with this improvement; he also redesigned the structure of the comb that hides the mechanism and built the instrument’s sound body based on a modern principle that enhances the tone.

Notwithstanding these improvements and the great beauty of tone the harp possesses, the domestic use of it in modern times has almost disappeared. The great cost of a good harp, and the trouble to many amateurs of tuning, may have led to the supplanting of the harp by the more convenient and useful pianoforte. With this comes naturally a diminution in the number of solo-players on the instrument. Were it not for the increasing use of the harp in the orchestra, the colour of its tone having attracted the masters of instrumentation, so that the great scores of Meyerbeer and Gounod, of Berlioz, Liszt and Wagner are not complete without it, we should perhaps know little more of the harp than of the dulcimer, in spite of the efforts of distinguished virtuosi whose devotion to their instrument maintains its technique on an equality with that of any other, even the most in public favour. The first record of the use of harps in the orchestra occurs in the account of the Ballet comique de la royne performed at the château de Moutiers on the occasion of the marriage of Mary of Lorraine with the duc de Joyeuse in 1581, when harps formed part of the concert de musique.

Despite these advancements and the beautiful sound the harp produces, its use in homes today has nearly vanished. The high cost of a quality harp and the difficulty many beginners face in tuning it might have led to the harp being replaced by the more practical and versatile piano. This naturally resulted in a decrease in the number of solo harp players. Without the growing presence of the harp in orchestras—its unique sound appealing to composers—the famous works of Meyerbeer, Gounod, Berlioz, Liszt, and Wagner would not be complete without it. Otherwise, we might know as little about the harp as we do about the dulcimer, despite the efforts of skilled musicians dedicated to mastering their instrument, which keeps its technique on par with that of any other, even those more popular. The earliest record of harps being used in orchestras is found in the account of the Ballet comique de la royne performed at the château de Moutiers during the marriage of Mary of Lorraine to the Duc de Joyeuse in 1581, when harps were included in the concert de musique.

See in addition to the works already referred to, Engel’s Musical Instruments in the South Kensington Museum (1874); and the articles “Harp,” in Rees’s Cyclopaedia, written by Dr Burney, in Stainer and Barrett’s Dictionary of Musical Terms (1876), and in Grove’s Dictionary of Music and Musicians. On the origins of the instrument see Proceedings of British Association (1904) (address of president of anthropological section).

See in addition to the works already mentioned, Engel’s Musical Instruments in the South Kensington Museum (1874); and the articles “Harp” in Rees’s Cyclopaedia, written by Dr. Burney, in Stainer and Barrett’s Dictionary of Musical Terms (1876), and in Grove’s Dictionary of Music and Musicians. For the origins of the instrument, see Proceedings of British Association (1904) (address of the president of the anthropological section).

(K. S.; A. J. H.)

1 Poemata, lib. vii. cap. 8, p. 245, Migne’s Patrologiae cursus completus (Paris, 1857-1866, vol. 88).

1 Poemata, book vii, chapter 8, page 245, Migne’s Patrologiae cursus completus (Paris, 1857-1866, vol. 88).

2 A few nangas (c. 1500 B.C.) are preserved among the Egyptian antiquities at the British Museum, fourth Egyptian room.

2 A few nangas (c. 1500 BCE) are kept among the Egyptian artifacts at the British Museum, in the fourth Egyptian room.

3 Bruce’s harps are reproduced by Champollion, tome iii. p. 261.

3 Bruce’s harps are reproduced by Champollion, volume iii, page 261.

4 Representations of these may be seen among the musical scenes in the Nimrod Gallery at the British Museum.

4 You can see representations of these in the musical scenes at the Nimrod Gallery in the British Museum.

5 See also a woodcut in John Derrick’s Image of Ireland (1581), pl. iii. (Edinburgh ed. 1883).

5 See also a woodcut in John Derrick’s Image of Ireland (1581), pl. iii. (Edinburgh ed. 1883).

6 See the fine volume Musical Instruments on the Irish and Scottish harps by Robert Bruce Armstrong (1904), vol. i. Vol. ii., which deals with the Welsh harp, has unfortunately been withdrawn from sale.

6 Check out the excellent book Musical Instruments on the Irish and Scottish harps by Robert Bruce Armstrong (1904), vol. i. Unfortunately, vol. ii., which covers the Welsh harp, is no longer available for purchase.

7 See for the medieval harp a careful article by Hortense Panum, “Harfe und Lyra im alten Nord-Europa,” in Intern. Mus. Ges. vol. vii. pt. 1 (Leipzig, 1905); and for references as to illuminated MSS., early woodcuts, paintings, &c. see Hugo Leichtentritt, “Was lehren uns die Bildwerke des 14-17 Jahrhunderts über die Instrumentalmusik ihrer Zeit?” ibid. vol. vii. p. 3 (Leipzig, 1906).

7 For a detailed look at the medieval harp, check out Hortense Panum's article, “Harfe und Lyra im alten Nord-Europa,” in Intern. Mus. Ges. vol. vii. pt. 1 (Leipzig, 1905); and for sources related to illuminated manuscripts, early woodcuts, paintings, etc., see Hugo Leichtentritt’s article, “Was lehren uns die Bildwerke des 14-17 Jahrhunderts über die Instrumentalmusik ihrer Zeit?” ibid. vol. vii. p. 3 (Leipzig, 1906).

8 See Nauwerk, “Die Hakenharfe, Die Vervollkommnung des Mechanismus an der deutschen Harfe.” in Allg. musik. Ztg. (Leipzig, 1815), p. 545 seq.

8 See Nauwerk, "The Hakenharfe, The Perfecting of the Mechanism on the German Harp." in General Music Journal (Leipzig, 1815), p. 545 and following.


HARPENDEN, an urban district in the Mid or St Albans parliamentary division of Hertfordshire, England, 25 m. N.W. by N. from London by the Midland railway, served also by a branch of the Great Northern railway. Pop. (1901) 4725. It is a favourite outlying residential district for those whose work lies in London. The church of St Nicholas is a modern reconstruction with the exception of the Perpendicular tower. In the Lawes Testimonial Laboratory there is a vast collection of samples of experimentally grown produce, annual products, ashes and soils. Sir John Bennet Lawes (d. 1900) provided an endowment of £100,000 for the perpetuation of the agricultural experiments which he inaugurated here at his seat of Rothamsted Park. The success of his association of chemistry with botany is shown by the fact that soil has been made to bear wheat without intermission for upwards of half a century without manure. The country neighbouring to Harpenden is very pleasant, including the gorse-covered Harpenden Common and the narrow well-wooded valley of the upper Lea.

HARPENDEN, is an urban district in the Mid or St Albans parliamentary division of Hertfordshire, England, located 25 miles northwest of London via the Midland Railway, and also served by a branch of the Great Northern Railway. Population (1901) was 4,725. It is a popular residential area for those who work in London. The church of St Nicholas is a modern rebuild except for the Perpendicular tower. At the Lawes Testimonial Laboratory, there is an extensive collection of samples from experimental agriculture, including annual products, ashes, and soils. Sir John Bennet Lawes (d. 1900) endowed £100,000 to continue the agricultural experiments he started here at his estate, Rothamsted Park. His successful integration of chemistry with botany is evident, as soil has been able to grow wheat continuously for over fifty years without manure. The countryside around Harpenden is very pleasant, featuring the gorse-covered Harpenden Common and the narrow, well-wooded valley of the upper Lea.


HARPER’S FERRY, a town of Jefferson county, West Virginia, U.S.A., finely situated at the confluence of the Potomac and Shenandoah rivers (which here pass through a beautiful gorge in the Blue Ridge), 55 m. N.W. of Washington. Pop. (1900) 896; (1910) 766. It is served by the Baltimore & Ohio railway, which crosses the Potomac here, by the Winchester & Potomac railway (Baltimore & Ohio) of which it is a terminus, and by boats on the Chesapeake & Ohio Canal, which passes along the Maryland side of the Potomac. Across the Potomac on the north rise the Maryland Heights; across the Shenandoah, on the West Virginia side, the Virginia or Loudoun Heights; and behind the town to the W. the Bolivar Heights. A United States arsenal and armoury were established at Harper’s Ferry in 1796, the site being chosen because of the good water-power; these were seized on the 16th of October 1859 by John Brown (q.v.), the abolitionist, and some 21 of his followers. For four months before the raid Brown and his men lived on the Kennedy Farm, in Washington county, Maryland, about 4 m. N.W. of Harper’s Ferry. The engine-house in which Brown was captured was exhibited at the Columbian Exposition at Chicago and was later rebuilt on Bolivar Heights; a marble pillar, marked “John Brown’s Fort,” has been erected on its original site. On Camp Hill is Storer College (state-aided), a normal school for negroes, which was established under Free Baptist control in 1867, and has academic, normal, biblical, musical and industrial departments.

HARPER’S FERRY, is a town in Jefferson County, West Virginia, U.S.A., beautifully located at the meeting point of the Potomac and Shenandoah rivers (which flow through a stunning gorge in the Blue Ridge). It lies 55 miles northwest of Washington. Population (1900) was 896; (1910) was 766. The town is served by the Baltimore & Ohio railway, which crosses the Potomac here, the Winchester & Potomac railway (part of Baltimore & Ohio), where it serves as a terminus, and by boats on the Chesapeake & Ohio Canal, which runs along the Maryland side of the Potomac. To the north across the Potomac are the Maryland Heights; across the Shenandoah on the West Virginia side are the Virginia or Loudoun Heights; and to the west behind the town are the Bolivar Heights. A United States arsenal and armory were established at Harper’s Ferry in 1796, chosen for its strong water-power; these were seized on October 16, 1859, by John Brown (q.v.), the abolitionist, along with about 21 of his followers. For four months before the raid, Brown and his men lived at the Kennedy Farm in Washington County, Maryland, about 4 miles northwest of Harper’s Ferry. The engine house where Brown was captured was displayed at the Columbian Exposition in Chicago and was later rebuilt on Bolivar Heights; a marble pillar marked “John Brown’s Fort” has been set up at its original site. On Camp Hill is Storer College (state-aided), a teacher training school for African Americans, established under Free Baptist control in 1867, which includes academic, teacher training, biblical, musical, and industrial programs.

The first settlement here was made about 1747 by Robert Harper, who ran a ferry across the Potomac. The position of Harper’s Ferry at the lower end of the Shenandoah Valley rendered it a place of strategic importance during the Civil War. On the 18th of April 1861, the day after Virginia passed her ordinance of secession, when a considerable force of Virginia militia under General Kenton Harper approached the town—an attack having been planned in Richmond two days before—the Federal garrison of 45 men under Lieutenant Roger Jones set fire to the arsenal and fled. Within the next few days large numbers of Confederate volunteers assembled here; and Harper was succeeded in command (27th April) by “Stonewall” Jackson, who was in turn succeeded by Brigadier-General Joseph E. Johnston on the 23rd of May. Johnston thought that the place was unimportant, and withdrew when (15th June) the Federal forces under General Robert Patterson and Colonel Lew Wallace approached, and Harper’s Ferry was again occupied by a Federal garrison. In September 1862, during General Lee’s first invasion of the North, General McClellan advised that the place be abandoned in order that the 10,000 men defending it might be added to his fighting force, but General Halleck would not consent, so that when Lee needed supplies from the Shenandoah Valley he was blocked by the garrison, then under the command of Colonel Dixon S. Miles. On Jackson’s approach they were distributed as follows: about 7000 men on Bolivar Heights, about 2000 on Maryland Heights, and about 1800 on the lower ground. On the 13th of September General Lafayette McLaws carried Maryland Heights and General John G. Walker planted a battery on Loudoun Heights. On the 14th there was some fighting, but early on the 15th, as Jackson was about to make an assault on Bolivar Heights, the garrison, surrounded by a superior force, surrendered. The total Federal loss (including the garrisons at Winchester and Martinsburg) amounted to 44 killed (the commander was mortally wounded), 12,520 prisoners, and 13,000 small arms. For this terrible loss to the Union army the responsibility seems to have been General Halleck’s, though the blame was officially put on Colonel Miles, who died immediately after the surrender. Jackson rejoined Lee on the following day in time to take part in the battle of Antietam, and after the battle General McClellan placed a strong garrison (the 12th Corps) at Harper’s Ferry. In June 1863 the place was again abandoned to the Confederates on their march to Pennsylvania. After their defeat at Gettysburg, the town again fell into the hands of the Federal troops, and it remained in their possession until the end of the war. On the 4th of July 1864 General Franz Sigel, who was then in command here, withdrew his troops to Maryland Heights, and from there resisted Early’s attempt to enter the town and to drive the Federal garrison from Maryland Heights. Harper’s Ferry was seriously damaged by a flood in the Shenandoah in October 1878.

The first settlement here was established around 1747 by Robert Harper, who operated a ferry across the Potomac. Harper’s Ferry, located at the southern end of the Shenandoah Valley, became strategically important during the Civil War. On April 18, 1861, the day after Virginia passed its secession ordinance, a sizable force of Virginia militia led by General Kenton Harper approached the town—an attack having been planned in Richmond two days earlier. The Federal garrison of 45 men under Lieutenant Roger Jones set fire to the arsenal and fled. In the following days, many Confederate volunteers gathered here; Harper was replaced in command (April 27) by “Stonewall” Jackson, who was then succeeded by Brigadier-General Joseph E. Johnston on May 23. Johnston considered the location unimportant and retreated when (June 15) Federal forces under General Robert Patterson and Colonel Lew Wallace approached, allowing the Federal army to occupy Harper’s Ferry again. In September 1862, during General Lee’s first invasion of the North, General McClellan suggested abandoning the place to reinforce his 10,000 men, but General Halleck disagreed. This decision meant that when Lee sought supplies from the Shenandoah Valley, he was blocked by the garrison, then commanded by Colonel Dixon S. Miles. When Jackson approached, the troops were stationed as follows: about 7,000 men on Bolivar Heights, about 2,000 on Maryland Heights, and about 1,800 on the lower ground. On September 13, General Lafayette McLaws captured Maryland Heights, and General John G. Walker set up a battery on Loudoun Heights. Some fighting occurred on the 14th, but early on the 15th, as Jackson prepared to attack Bolivar Heights, the garrison, surrounded by a larger force, surrendered. The total Federal loss (including the garrisons at Winchester and Martinsburg) amounted to 44 killed (the commander was fatally wounded), 12,520 prisoners, and 13,000 small arms. While General Halleck seemed to bear responsibility for this significant loss to the Union army, the blame was officially placed on Colonel Miles, who died right after the surrender. Jackson rejoined Lee the next day in time to participate in the battle of Antietam, and after the battle, General McClellan assigned a strong garrison (the 12th Corps) to Harper’s Ferry. In June 1863, the town was again surrendered to the Confederates as they marched toward Pennsylvania. After their defeat at Gettysburg, the town fell back into Federal hands, remaining under their control until the war ended. On July 4, 1864, General Franz Sigel, who was in command there, withdrew his troops to Maryland Heights and resisted Early’s attempt to enter the town and displace the Federal garrison from Maryland Heights. Harper’s Ferry suffered significant damage from a flood in the Shenandoah in October 1878.


HARPIES (Gr. Ἅρπυιαι, older form Ἀρέπυιαι, “swift robbers”), in ancient mythology, the personification of the sweeping storm-winds. In Homer, where they appear indifferently under the name of ἄρπυιαι and θύελλαι, their function is to carry off those whose sudden disappearance is desired by the gods. Only one of them is there mentioned (Iliad, xvi. 150) by name, Podargē, the mother of the coursers of Achilles by Zephyrus, the generative wind. According to Hesiod (Theog. 265) they are two in number, Aëllo and Ocypetē, daughters of Thaumas and Electra, winged 15 goddesses with beautiful locks, swifter than winds and birds in their flight, and their domain is the air. In later times their number was increased (Celaeno being a frequent addition and their leader in Virgil), and they were described as hateful and repulsive creatures, birds with the faces of old women, the ears of bears, crooked talons and hanging breasts; even in Aeschylus (Eumenides, 50) they appear as ugly and misshapen monsters. Their function of snatching away mortals to the other world brings them into connexion with the Erinyes, with whom they are often confounded. On the so-called Harpy monument from Lycia, now in the British Museum, the Harpies appear carrying off some small figures, supposed to be the daughters of Pandareus, unless they are intended to represent departed souls. The repulsive character of the Harpies is more especially seen in the legend of Phineus, king of Salmydessus in Thrace (Apollodorus i. 9, 21; see also Diod. Sic. iv. 43). Having been deprived of his sight by the gods for his ill-treatment of his sons by his first wife (or for having revealed the future to mortals), he was condemned to be tormented by two Harpies, who carried off whatever food was placed before him. On the arrival of the Argonauts, Phineus promised to give them particulars of the course they should pursue and of the dangers that lay before them, if they would deliver him from his tormentors. Accordingly, when the Harpies appeared as usual to carry off the food from Phineus’s table, they were driven off and pursued by Calaïs and Zetes, the sons of Boreas, as far as the Strophades islands in the Aegean. On promising to cease from molesting Phineus, their lives were spared. Their place of abode is variously placed in the Strophades, the entrance to the under-world, or a cave in Crete. According to Cecil Smith, Journal of Hellenic Studies, xiii. (1892-1893), the Harpies are the hostile spirits of the scorching south wind; E. Rohde (Rheinisches Museum, i., 1895) regards them as spirits of the storm, which at the bidding of the gods carry off human beings alive to the under-world or some spot beyond human ken.

HARPIES (Gr. Harpy, older form Ἀρέπυιαι, “swift robbers”), in ancient mythology, are the embodiment of the fierce storm-winds. In Homer, they appear under the names harpies and storms, and their role is to abduct those whose sudden disappearance is wanted by the gods. Only one of them is named, Podargē, the mother of Achilles's horses by the wind Zephyrus, in the Iliad (xvi. 150). According to Hesiod (Theog. 265), there are two of them, Aëllo and Ocypetē, daughters of Thaumas and Electra, winged goddesses with beautiful hair, faster than winds and birds, ruling the air. In later accounts, their numbers grew (with Celaeno being a common addition and their leader in Virgil), and they were depicted as horrible and unattractive beings, bird-like creatures with old women’s faces, bear-like ears, crooked claws, and sagging breasts; even in Aeschylus (Eumenides, 50), they are described as ugly and misshapen monsters. Their role in snatching mortals away to the afterlife connects them with the Erinyes, with whom they're often confused. The so-called Harpy monument from Lycia, currently in the British Museum, shows the Harpies capturing small figures, believed to be the daughters of Pandareus, unless they represent lost souls. Their grotesque nature is particularly highlighted in the story of Phineus, king of Salmydessus in Thrace (Apollodorus i. 9, 21; see also Diod. Sic. iv. 43). After being blinded by the gods for mistreating his sons from his first wife (or for revealing the future to mortals), he was tormented by two Harpies that snatched away his food. When the Argonauts arrived, Phineus offered to share crucial details about their journey if they freed him from his tormentors. Thus, when the Harpies came to steal food from Phineus’s table, Calaïs and Zetes, the sons of Boreas, chased them to the Strophades islands in the Aegean. After promising to stop harassing Phineus, they were spared. Their home is often said to be in the Strophades, at the entrance to the underworld, or in a cave in Crete. According to Cecil Smith, Journal of Hellenic Studies, xiii. (1892-1893), the Harpies represent the hostile spirits of the hot southern wind; E. Rohde (Rheinisches Museum, i., 1895) sees them as storm spirits that, at the command of the gods, carry living humans away to the underworld or to a place beyond human reach.

See articles in Roscher’s Lexikon der Mythologie and Daremberg and Saglio’s Dictionnaire des antiquités. In the article Greek Art, fig. 14 gives a representation of the winged Harpies.

See articles in Roscher’s Lexikon der Mythologie and Daremberg and Saglio’s Dictionnaire des antiquités. In the article Greek Art, fig. 14 shows a depiction of the winged Harpies.


HARPIGNIES, HENRI (1819-  ), French landscape painter, born at Valenciennes in 1819, was intended by his parents for a business career, but his determination to become an artist was so strong that it conquered all obstacles, and he was allowed at the age of twenty-seven to enter Achard’s atelier in Paris. From this painter he acquired a groundwork of sound constructive draughtsmanship, which is so marked a feature of his landscape painting. After two years under this exacting teacher he went to Italy, whence he returned in 1850. During the next few years he devoted himself to the painting of children in landscape setting, and fell in with Corot and the other Barbizon masters, whose principles and methods are to a certain extent reflected in his own personal art. To Corot he was united by a bond of warm friendship, and the two artists went together to Italy in 1860. On his return, he scored his first great success at the Salon, in 1861, with his “Lisière de bois sur les bords de l’Allier.” After that year he was a regular exhibitor at the old Salon; in 1886 he received his first medal for “Le Soir dans la campagne de Rome,” which was acquired for the Luxembourg Gallery. Many of his best works were painted at Hérisson in the Bourbonnais, as well as in the Nivernais and the Auvergne. Among his chief pictures are “Soir sur les bords de la Loire” (1861), “Les Corbeaux” (1865), “Le Soir” (1866), “Le Saut-du-Loup” (1873), “La Loire” (1882), and “Vue de Saint-Privé” (1883). He also did some decorative work for the Paris Opéra—the “Vallée d’Egérie” panel, which he showed at the Salon of 1870.

HARPIGNIES, HENRI (1819-  ), French landscape painter, born in Valenciennes in 1819, was meant by his parents to pursue a business career, but his strong desire to become an artist overcame all obstacles, and at the age of twenty-seven, he was allowed to join Achard’s studio in Paris. Under this painter, he developed a solid foundation in precise drawing, which is a prominent feature of his landscape art. After two years with this demanding teacher, he traveled to Italy, returning in 1850. In the following years, he focused on painting children in landscape settings and connected with Corot and the other Barbizon masters, whose principles and techniques are somewhat reflected in his own work. He shared a close friendship with Corot, and the two artists traveled to Italy together in 1860. Upon his return, he achieved his first major success at the Salon in 1861 with “Lisière de bois sur les bords de l’Allier.” After that year, he regularly exhibited at the old Salon; in 1886, he received his first medal for “Le Soir dans la campagne de Rome,” which was acquired for the Luxembourg Gallery. Many of his finest works were painted in Hérisson in Bourbonnais, as well as in Nivernais and Auvergne. Some of his key pieces include “Soir sur les bords de la Loire” (1861), “Les Corbeaux” (1865), “Le Soir” (1866), “Le Saut-du-Loup” (1873), “La Loire” (1882), and “Vue de Saint-Privé” (1883). He also created some decorative work for the Paris Opéra—the “Vallée d’Egérie” panel, which he exhibited at the Salon of 1870.


HARP-LUTE, or Dital Harp, one of the many attempts to revive the popularity of the guitar and to increase its compass, invented in 1798 by Edward Light. The harp-lute owes the first part of its name to the characteristic mechanism for shortening the effective length of the strings; its second name—dital harp—emphasizes the nature of the stops, which are worked by the thumb in contradistinction to the pedals of the harp worked by the feet. It consists of a pear-shaped body, to which is added a curved neck supported on a front pillar or arm springing from the body, and therefore reminiscent of the harp. There are 12 catgut strings. The curved fingerboard, almost parallel with the neck, is provided with frets, and has in addition a thumb-key for each string, by means of which the accordance of the string is mechanically raised a semitone at will. The dital or key, on being depressed, acts upon a stop-ring or eye, which draws the string down against the fret, and thus shortens its effective length. The fingers then stop the strings as usual over the remaining frets. A further improvement was patented in 1816 as the British harp-lute. Other attempts possessing less practical merit than the dital harp were the lyra-guitarre, which appeared in Germany at the beginning of the 19th century; the accord-guitarre, towards the middle of the same century; and the keyed guitar.

Harp-Lute, or Digital Harp, is one of the many attempts to bring back the popularity of the guitar and expand its range, invented in 1798 by Edward Light. The first part of its name comes from its distinctive mechanism for shortening the length of the strings; its second name—dital harp—highlights the nature of the stops, which are operated by the thumb, unlike the pedals of the harp that are controlled by the feet. It features a pear-shaped body with a curved neck supported by a front pillar or arm extending from the body, giving it a resemblance to the harp. There are 12 catgut strings. The curved fingerboard, which is almost parallel to the neck, has frets and also includes a thumb key for each string, allowing the tuning of the string to be raised a semitone as needed. When the dital or key is pressed, it activates a stop-ring or eye that pulls the string down against the fret, shortening its effective length. The fingers then stop the strings as usual over the remaining frets. An additional improvement was patented in 1816 as the British harp-lute. Other attempts that had less practical value than the dital harp included the lyra-guitarre, which emerged in Germany at the start of the 19th century; the accord-guitarre, which appeared in the middle of the same century; and the keyed guitar.

(K. S.)

HARPOCRATES, originally an Egyptian deity, adopted by the Greeks, and worshipped in later times both by Greeks and Romans. In Egypt, Harpa-khruti, Horus the child, was one of the forms of Horus, the sun-god, the child of Osiris. He was supposed to carry on war against the powers of darkness, and hence Herodotus (ii. 144) considers him the same as the Greek Apollo. He was represented in statues with his finger on his mouth, a symbol of childhood. The Greeks and Romans, not understanding the meaning of this attitude, made him the god of silence (Ovid, Metam. ix. 691), and as such he became a favourite deity with the later mystic schools of philosophy.

HARPOCRATES, was originally an Egyptian god, taken on by the Greeks and later worshipped by both Greeks and Romans. In Egypt, Harpa-khruti, or Horus the child, was one of the forms of Horus, the sun god and son of Osiris. He was believed to fight against the forces of darkness, which is why Herodotus (ii. 144) viewed him as the equivalent of the Greek Apollo. He was depicted in statues with his finger on his mouth, symbolizing childhood. The Greeks and Romans, not grasping the meaning of this gesture, made him the god of silence (Ovid, Metam. ix. 691), and as such, he became a popular deity among later mystic schools of philosophy.

See articles by G. Lafaye in Daremberg and Saglio’s Dictionnaire des antiquités, and by E. Meyer (s.v. “Horos”) in Roscher’s Lexikon der Mythologie.

See articles by G. Lafaye in Daremberg and Saglio’s Dictionnaire des antiquités, and by E. Meyer (s.v. “Horos”) in Roscher’s Lexikon der Mythologie.


HARPOCRATION, VALERIUS, Greek grammarian of Alexandria. He is possibly the Harpocration mentioned by Julius Capitolinus (Life of Verus, 2) as the Greek tutor of Antoninus Verus (2nd century A.D.); some authorities place him much later, on the ground that he borrowed from Athenaeus. He is the author of a Λεξικὸν (or Περὶ τῶν λέξεων) τῶν δέκα ῥητόρων, which has come down to us in an incomplete form. The work contains, in more or less alphabetical order, notes on well-known events and persons mentioned by the orators, and explanations of legal and commercial expressions. As nearly all the lexicons to the Greek orators have been lost, Harpocration’s work is especially valuable. Amongst his authorities were the writers of Atthides (histories of Attica), the grammarian Didymus, Dionysius of Halicarnassus, and the lexicographer Dionysius, son of Tryphon. The book also contains contributions to the history of Attic oratory and Greek literature generally. Nothing is known of an Ἀνθηρῶν συναγωγή, a sort of anthology or chrestomathy attributed to him by Suidas. A series of articles in the margin of a Cambridge MS. of the lexicon forms the basis of the Lexicon rhetoricum Cantabrigiense (see Dobree, P. P.).

HARPOCRATION, VALERIUS, Greek grammarian from Alexandria. He might be the Harpocration that Julius Capitolinus mentions (Life of Verus, 2) as the Greek tutor of Antoninus Verus (2nd century CE); however, some scholars place him much later because he supposedly borrowed from Athenaeus. He is the author of a Dictionary (or About the words) the ten orators, which has survived in an incomplete form. The work includes notes, generally arranged in alphabetical order, on notable events and individuals mentioned by the orators, as well as explanations of legal and commercial terms. Since almost all lexicons of the Greek orators are lost, Harpocration’s work is particularly valuable. Among his sources were writers of Atthides (histories of Attica), the grammarian Didymus, Dionysius of Halicarnassus, and the lexicographer Dionysius, son of Tryphon. The book also provides insights into the history of Attic oratory and Greek literature more broadly. Nothing is known about an Gathering of flowers, a type of anthology or collection attributed to him by Suidas. A series of articles in the margin of a Cambridge manuscript of the lexicon serves as the foundation for the Lexicon rhetoricum Cantabrigiense (see Dobree, P. P.).

The best edition is by W. Dindorf (1853); see also J. E. Sandys, History of Classical Scholarship, i. (1906), p. 325; C. Boysen, De Harpocrationis fontibus (Kiel, 1876).

The best edition is by W. Dindorf (1853); see also J. E. Sandys, History of Classical Scholarship, i. (1906), p. 325; C. Boysen, De Harpocrationis fontibus (Kiel, 1876).


HARPOON (from Fr. harpon, a grappling-iron, O. Fr. harpe, a dog’s claw, an iron clamp for fastening stones together; the source of these words is the Lat. harpago, harpa, &c., formed from Gr. ἁρπαγή, hook, ἁρπάζειν, to snatch, tear away, cf. “harpy”), barbed spear, particularly one used for spearing whales or other large fish, and either thrown by hand or fired from a gun (see Whale-Fishery).

HARPOON (from French harpon, meaning a grappling-iron, Old French harpe, meaning a dog's claw, an iron clamp for securing stones together; these words come from the Latin harpago, harpa, etc., which are derived from Greek abduction, meaning hook, Grab, meaning to snatch or tear away, related to "harpy"), a barbed spear, especially one used for catching whales or other large fish, that can be thrown by hand or shot from a gun (see Whale-Fishery).


HARPSICHORD, Harpsicon, double virginals (Fr. clavecin; Ger. Clavicymbel, Kiel-Flügel; Ital. arpicordo, cembalo, clavicembalo, gravecembalo; Dutch, clavisinbal), a large keyboard instrument (see Pianoforte), belonging to the same family as the virginal and spinet, but having 2, 3, or even 4 strings to each note, and a case of the harp or wing shape, afterwards adopted for the grand pianoforte. J. S. Bach’s harpsichord, preserved in the museum of the Hochschule für Musik at Charlottenburg, has two manuals and 4 strings to each note, one 16 ft., two 8 ft. and one 4 ft. By means of stops the performer has within his power a number of combinations for varying the tone and dynamic power. In all instruments of the harpsichord family 16 the strings, instead of being struck by tangents as in the clavichord, or by hammers as in the pianoforte, are plucked by means of a quill firmly embedded in the centred tongue of a jack or upright placed on the back end of the key-lever. When the finger depresses a key, the jack is thrown up, and in passing the crow-quill catches the string and twangs it. It is this twanging of the string which produces the brilliant incisive tone peculiar to the harpsichord family. What these instruments gain in brilliancy of tone, however, they lose in power of expression and of accent. The impossibility of commanding any emphasis necessarily created for the harpsichord an individual technique which influenced the music composed for it to so great an extent that it cannot be adequately rendered upon the pianoforte.

HARPSICHORD, Harpsichord, two virginals (Fr. clavecin; Ger. Clavicymbel, Kiel-Flügel; Ital. arpicordo, cembalo, clavicembalo, gravecembalo; Dutch, clavisinbal), a large keyboard instrument (see Pianoforte), belonging to the same family as the virginal and spinet, but featuring 2, 3, or even 4 strings for each note, and a case shaped like a harp or wing, which was later used for the grand piano. J. S. Bach’s harpsichord, which is preserved in the museum of the Hochschule für Musik at Charlottenburg, has two keyboards and 4 strings for each note—one at 16 ft., two at 8 ft., and one at 4 ft. By using stops, the player can create various combinations to change the tone and dynamics. In all instruments of the harpsichord family 16 the strings aren't struck by tangents like in the clavichord, or by hammers like in the piano, but are plucked by a quill that is firmly fitted into the center of a jack or upright located at the back end of the key lever. When a finger presses down a key, the jack moves up, and as it does, the crow-quill catches the string and plucks it. This plucking creates the bright, sharp sound that is characteristic of the harpsichord family. However, what these instruments gain in brightness, they lose in expressiveness and emphasis. The inability to control any nuance resulted in a unique technique for the harpsichord that influenced the music written for it to such an extent that it cannot be accurately performed on the piano.

The harpsichord assumed a position of great importance during the 16th and 17th centuries, more especially in the orchestra, which was under the leadership of the harpsichord player. The most famous of all harpsichord makers, whose names form a guarantee for excellence, were the Ruckers, established at Antwerp from the last quarter of the 16th century.

The harpsichord became extremely important during the 16th and 17th centuries, especially in orchestras that were led by the harpsichord player. The most renowned harpsichord makers, whose names are synonymous with quality, were the Ruckers, who were based in Antwerp starting in the last quarter of the 16th century.

(K. S.)

HARPY, a large diurnal bird of prey, so named after the mythological monster of the classical poets (see Harpies),—the Thrasaëtus harpyia of modern ornithologists—an inhabitant of the warmer parts of America from Southern Mexico to Brazil. Though known since the middle of the 17th century, its habits have come very little under the notice of naturalists, and what is said of them by the older writers must be received with some suspicion. A cursory inspection of the bird, which is not unfrequently brought alive to Europe, its size, and its enormous bill and talons, at once suggest the vast powers of destruction imputed to it, and are enough to account for the stories told of its ravages on mammals—sloths, fawns, peccaries and spider-monkeys. It has even been asserted to attack the human race. How much of this is fabulous there seems no means at present of determining, but some of the statements are made by veracious travellers—D’Orbigny and Tschudi. It is not uncommon in the forests of the isthmus of Panama, and Salvin says (Proc. Zool. Society, 1864, p. 368) that its flight is slow and heavy. Indeed its owl-like visage, its short wings and soft plumage, do not indicate a bird of very active habits, but the weapons of offence with which it is armed show that it must be able to cope with vigorous prey. Its appearance is sufficiently striking—the head and lower parts, except a pectoral band, white, the former adorned with an erectile crest, the upper parts dark grey banded with black, the wings dusky, and the tail barred; but the huge bill and powerful scutellated legs most of all impress the beholder. The precise affinities of the harpy cannot be said to have been determined. By some authors it is referred to the eagles, by others to the buzzards, and by others again to the hawks; but possibly the first of these alliances is the most likely to be true.

HARPY, a large daytime bird of prey, named after the mythological monster from classical poetry (see Harpies), —the Thrasaëtus harpyia according to modern ornithologists—lives in the warmer regions of America from Southern Mexico to Brazil. Although it's been known since the mid-17th century, not much is understood about its behavior, and the information from older writers should be taken with caution. A quick look at this bird, often brought alive to Europe, along with its size and massive bill and talons, instantly suggests its supposed destructive power, which explains the tales of its attacks on mammals like sloths, fawns, peccaries, and spider monkeys. Some even claim it attacks humans. It's hard to determine how much of this is true, but some reports come from credible travelers—D’Orbigny and Tschudi. It can often be found in the forests of the isthmus of Panama, and Salvin notes (Proc. Zool. Society, 1864, p. 368) that its flight is slow and heavy. Its owl-like face, short wings, and soft feathers don't suggest an active lifestyle, but its offensive weapons indicate it's capable of tackling vigorous prey. Its appearance is quite striking—the head and lower body, except for a pectoral band, are white, with the head featuring an erectile crest; the upper body is dark gray striped with black, the wings are dark, and the tail is barred. However, the large bill and powerful scutellated legs are what impress most. The exact relationships of the harpy aren't clearly defined; some classify it with eagles, others with buzzards, and some with hawks, but it's likely that the first classification is the most accurate.

(A. N.)
Harpy.

HARRAN, Haran or Charran (Sept. Χαῤῥάν or Χαῤῥά: Strabo, Κάῤῥαι: Pliny, Carrae or Carrhae; Arab. Harrān), in biblical history the place where Terah halted after leaving Ur, and apparently the birthplace of Abraham, a town on the stream Jullab, some nine hours’ journey from Edessa in Syria. At this point the road from Damascus joins the highway between Nineveh and Carchemish, and Haran had thus considerable military and commercial value. As a strategic position it is mentioned in inscriptions as early as the time of Tiglath Pileser I., about 1100 B.C., and subsequently by Sargon II., who restored the privileges lost at the rebellion which led to the conquest referred to in 2 Kings xix. 12 (= Isa. xxxvii. 12). It was the centre of a considerable commerce (Ezek. xxvii. 23), and one of its specialities was the odoriferous gum derived from the strobus (Pliny, H.N. xii. 40). It was here that Crassus in his eastern expedition was attacked and slain by the Parthians (53 B.C.); and here also the emperor Caracalla was murdered at the instigation of Macrinus (A.D. 217). Haran was the chief home of the moon-god Sin, whose temple was rebuilt by several kings, among them Assur-bani-pal and Nabunidus and Herodian (iv. 13, 7) mentions the town as possessing in his day a temple of the moon. In the middle ages it is mentioned as having been the seat of a particular heathen sect, that of the Haranite Sabeans. It retained its importance down to the period of the Arab ascendancy; but by Abulfeda it is mentioned as having before his time fallen into decay. It is now wholly in ruins. The Yahwistic writer (Gen. xxvii. 43) makes it the home of Laban and connects it with Isaac and Jacob. But we cannot thus put Haran in Aramnaharaim; the home of the Labanites is rather to be looked for in the very similar word Hauran.

Harran Haran or Charran (Sept. Χαῤῤάν or Χαῤῥά: Strabo, Κάῤῥαι: Pliny, Carrae or Carrhae; Arab. Harrān), in biblical history, is the place where Terah stopped after leaving Ur, and it’s believed to be the birthplace of Abraham. It's a town near the Jullab River, about a nine-hour journey from Edessa in Syria. At this location, the road from Damascus connects with the highway between Nineveh and Carchemish, giving Haran significant military and commercial importance. Its strategic location is mentioned in inscriptions dating back to Tiglath Pileser I., around 1100 BCE, and later by Sargon II., who restored the privileges lost during the rebellion leading to the conquest noted in 2 Kings xix. 12 (= Isa. xxxvii. 12). It was a hub of trade (Ezek. xxvii. 23), and one of its notable exports was the fragrant gum from the strobus tree (Pliny, H.N. xii. 40). Crassus was attacked and killed by the Parthians here during his eastern campaign (53 B.C.), and the emperor Caracalla was also murdered here, instigated by Macrinus (A.D. 217). Haran was the main center for the moon-god Sin, whose temple was rebuilt by several kings, including Assur-bani-pal and Nabunidus, and Herodian (iv. 13, 7) mentions that it had a temple dedicated to the moon in his time. In the Middle Ages, it was known to be the center of a specific pagan sect, the Haranite Sabeans. It remained significant until the Arab ascendancy, but Abulfeda noted that it had fallen into decline by his time. It is now completely in ruins. The Yahwistic writer (Gen. xxvii. 43) identifies it as Laban's home and connects it to Isaac and Jacob. However, we cannot place Haran in Aramnaharaim; the home of the Labanites is more accurately associated with the similar-sounding Hauran.


HARRAR (or Harar), a city of N.E. Africa, in 8° 45′ N., 42° 36′ E., capital of a province of Abyssinia and 220 m. S.S.W. of the ports of Zaila (British) and Jibuti (French) on the Gulf of Aden. With Jibuti it is connected by a railway (188 m. long) and carriage-road. Harrar is built on the slopes of a hill at an elevation of over 5000 ft. A lofty stone wall, pierced by five gates and flanked by twenty-four towers, encloses the city, which has a population of about 40,000. The streets are steep, narrow, dirty and unpaved, the roadways consisting of rough boulders. The houses are in general made of undressed stone and mud and are flat-topped, the general aspect of the city being Oriental and un-Abyssinian. A few houses, including the palace of the governor and the foreign consulates, are of more elaborate and solid construction than the majority of the buildings. There are several mosques and an Abyssinian church (of the usual circular construction) built of stone. Harrar is a city of considerable commercial importance, through it passing all the merchandise of southern Abyssinia, Kaffa and Galla land. The chief traders are Abyssinians, Armenians and Greeks. The principal article of export is coffee, which is grown extensively in the neighbouring hills and is of the finest quality. Besides coffee there is a large trade in durra, the kat plant (used by the Mahommedans as a drug), ghee, cattle, mules and camels, skins and hides, ivory and gums. The import trade is largely in cotton goods, but every kind of merchandise is included.

HARRAR (or Harar), a city in northeastern Africa, located at 8° 45′ N., 42° 36′ E., is the capital of a province in Abyssinia and lies 220 miles south-southwest of the ports of Zaila (British) and Djibouti (French) on the Gulf of Aden. It is connected to Djibouti by a railway that is 188 miles long and a carriage road. Harrar is built on the slopes of a hill at an elevation of over 5,000 feet. A tall stone wall, featuring five gates and twenty-four towers, surrounds the city, which has a population of about 40,000. The streets are steep, narrow, dirty, and unpaved, with roadways made of rough boulders. The houses are generally constructed from untreated stone and mud, with flat roofs, giving the city an overall Oriental appearance that is different from typical Abyssinian architecture. A few buildings, including the governor's palace and the foreign consulates, are built with more elaborate and sturdy designs than most other structures. There are several mosques and an Abyssinian church (built in the usual circular style) made of stone. Harrar holds significant commercial importance, being a key hub for the merchandise from southern Abyssinia, Kaffa, and Galla land. The main traders are Abyssinians, Armenians, and Greeks. The leading export is coffee, which is extensively grown in the nearby hills and is of the highest quality. In addition to coffee, there is a robust trade in durra, the kat plant (used by Muslims as a stimulant), ghee, cattle, mules and camels, skins and hides, ivory, and gums. The import trade mainly consists of cotton goods, but it includes a wide variety of merchandise.

Harrar is believed to owe its foundation to Arab immigrants from the Yemen in the 7th century of the Christian era. In the region of Somaliland, now the western part of the British protectorate of that name, the Arabs established the Moslem state of Adel or Zaila, with their capital at Zaila on the Gulf of Aden. In the 13th century the sultans of Adel enjoyed great power. In 1521 the then sultan Abubekr transferred the seat of government to Harrar, probably regarding Zaila as too exposed to the attacks of the Turkish and Portuguese navies then contending 17 for the mastery of the Red Sea and Gulf of Aden. Abubekr’s successor was Mahommed III., Ahmed ibn Ibrahim el-Ghazi (1507-1543), surnamed Gran (Granyé), the left-handed. He was not an Arab but, probably, of Somali origin. The son of a noted warrior, he quickly rose to supreme power, becoming sultan or amir in 1525. He is famous for his invasion of Abyssinia, of which country he was virtual master for several years. From the beginning of the 17th century Adel suffered greatly from the ravages of pagan Galla tribes, and Harrar sank to the position of an amirate of little importance. It was first visited by a European in 1854 when (Sir) Richard Burton spent ten days there in the guise of an Arab. In 1875 Harrar was occupied by an Egyptian force under Raouf Pasha, by whose orders the amir was strangled. The town remained in the possession of Egypt until 1885, when the garrison was withdrawn in consequence of the rising of the Mahdi in the Sudan. The Egyptian garrison and many Egyptian civilians, in all 6500 persons, left Harrar between November 1884 and the 25th of April 1885, when a son of the ruler who had been deposed by Egypt was installed as amir, the arrangement being carried out under the superintendence of British officers. The new amir held power until January 1887, in which month Harrar was conquered by Menelek II., king of Shoa (afterwards emperor of Abyssinia). The governorship of Harrar was by Menelek entrusted to Ras Makonnen, who held the post until his death in 1906.

Harrar is thought to have been founded by Arab immigrants from Yemen in the 7th century AD. In the region of Somaliland, now the western part of the British protectorate of the same name, the Arabs established the Muslim state of Adel or Zaila, with its capital at Zaila on the Gulf of Aden. In the 13th century, the sultans of Adel had significant power. In 1521, Sultan Abubekr moved the capital to Harrar, likely seeing Zaila as too vulnerable to attacks from the Turkish and Portuguese navies that were fighting for control of the Red Sea and Gulf of Aden. Abubekr’s successor was Mahommed III, Ahmed ibn Ibrahim el-Ghazi (1507-1543), known as Gran (Granyé), the left-handed. He was not Arab but likely of Somali descent. The son of a well-known warrior, he quickly ascended to power, becoming sultan or amir in 1525. He is known for his invasion of Abyssinia, where he effectively ruled for several years. Starting in the early 17th century, Adel faced severe troubles from the attacks of pagan Galla tribes, and Harrar diminished to a minor amirate. It was first visited by a European in 1854 when (Sir) Richard Burton spent ten days there pretending to be an Arab. In 1875, an Egyptian force led by Raouf Pasha occupied Harrar, under whose orders the amir was killed. The town remained under Egyptian control until 1885, when the garrison was withdrawn due to the Mahdi uprising in Sudan. Between November 1884 and April 25, 1885, the Egyptian garrison and many Egyptian civilians, totaling 6,500 people, left Harrar, and a son of the ruler who had been deposed by the Egyptians was installed as amir, with British officers supervising the arrangement. The new amir held power until January 1887, when Harrar was conquered by Menelek II, the king of Shoa (later the emperor of Abyssinia). Menelek appointed Ras Makonnen as the governor of Harrar, a position he held until his death in 1906.

The Harrari proper are of a distinct stock from the neighbouring peoples, and speak a special language. Harrarese is “a Semitic graft inserted into an indigenous stock” (Sir R. Burton, First Footsteps in East Africa). The Harrari are Mahommedans of the Shafa’i or Persian sect, and they employ the solar year and the Persian calendar. Besides the native population there are in Harrar colonies of Abyssinians, Somalis and Gallas. By the Somalis the place is called Adari, by the Gallas Adaray.

The Harrari people are distinct from their neighbors and speak a unique language. Harrarese is described as “a Semitic influence mixed with a local language” (Sir R. Burton, First Footsteps in East Africa). The Harrari practice Islam of the Shafa’i or Persian branch, and they use the solar year along with the Persian calendar. In addition to the local population, Harrar also has communities of Abyssinians, Somalis, and Gallas. The Somalis refer to the place as Adari, while the Gallas call it Adaray.

See Abyssinia; Somaliland. Also P. Paulitschke, Harar: Forschungsreise nach den Somâl- und Galla-Ländern Ost-Afrikas (Leipzig, 1888).

See Abyssinia; Somaliland. Also P. Paulitschke, Harar: Research Journey to the Somali and Galla Regions of East Africa (Leipzig, 1888).


HARRATIN, black Berbers, dwelling in Tidikelt and other Saharan oases. Many of them are blacker than the average negro. In physique, however, they are true to the Berber type, being of handsome appearance with European features and well-proportioned bodies. They are the result of an early crossing with the Sudanese negro races, though to-day they have all the pride of the Berbers (q.v.), and do not live with or intermarry among negroes.

HARRATIN, black Berbers living in Tidikelt and other Saharan oases. Many of them are darker than the typical Black person. Physically, though, they represent the Berber type, being good-looking with European features and well-proportioned bodies. They are the result of an early mix with Sudanese Black races, but today they take pride in their Berber identity (q.v.) and do not live or intermarry with Black people.


HARRIER, or Hen-Harrier, name given to certain birds of prey which were formerly very abundant in parts of the British Islands, from their habit of harrying poultry. The first of these names has now become used in a generic sense for all the species ranked under the genus Circus of Lacépède, and the second confined to the particular species which is the Falco cyaneus of Linnaeus and the Circus cyaneus of modern ornithologists.

HARRIER, or Hen Harrier, refers to certain birds of prey that were once very common in parts of the British Islands because they tended to prey on poultry. The first term has now become a general name for all species classified under the genus Circus by Lacépède, while the second term is specifically reserved for the species known as Falco cyaneus by Linnaeus and Circus cyaneus by modern ornithologists.

One European species, C. aeruginosus, though called in books the marsh-harrier, is far more commonly known in England and Ireland as the moor-buzzard. But harriers are not, like buzzards, arboreal in their habits, and always affect open country, generally, though not invariably, preferring marshy or fenny districts, for snakes and frogs form a great part of their ordinary food. On the ground their carriage is utterly unlike that of a buzzard, and their long wings and legs render it easy to distinguish the two groups when taken in the hand. All the species also have a more or less well-developed ruff or frill of small thickset feathers surrounding the lower part of the head, nearly like that seen in owls, and accordingly many systematists consider that the genus Circus, though undoubtedly belonging to the Falconidae, connects that family with the Striges. No osteological affinity, however, can be established between the harriers and any section of the owls, and the superficial resemblance will have to be explained in some other way. Harriers are found almost all over the world,1 and fifteen species are recognized by Bowdler Sharpe (Cat. Birds Brit. Museum, i. pp. 50-73). In most if not all the harriers the sexes differ greatly in colour, so much so that for a long while the males and females of one of the commonest and best known, the C. cyaneus above mentioned, were thought to be distinct species, and were or still are called in various European languages by different names. The error was maintained with the greater persistency since the young males, far more abundant than the adults, wear much the same plumage as their mother, and it was not until after Montagu’s observations were published at the beginning of the 19th century that the “ringtail,” as she was called (the Falco pygargus of Linnaeus), was generally admitted to be the female of the “hen-harrier.” But this was not Montagu’s only good service as regards this genus. He proved the hitherto unexpected existence of a second species,2 subject to the same diversity of plumage. This was called by him the ash-coloured falcon, but it now generally bears his name, and is known as Montagu’s harrier, C. cineraceus. In habits it is very similar to the hen-harrier, but it has longer wings, and its range is not so northerly, for while the hen-harrier extends to Lapland, Montagu’s is but very rare in Scotland, though in the south of England it is the most common species. Harriers indeed in the British Islands are rapidly becoming things of the past. Their nests are easily found, and the birds when nesting are easily destroyed. In the south-east of Europe, reaching also to the Cape of Good Hope and to India, there is a fourth species, the C. swainsoni of some writers, the C. pallidus of others. In North America C. cyaneus is represented by a kindred form, C. hudsonius, usually regarded as a good species, the adult male of which is always to be recognized by its rufous markings beneath, in which character it rather resembles C. cineraceus, but it has not the long wings of that species. South America has in C. cinereus another representative form, while China, India and Australia possess more of this type. Thus there is a section in which the males have a strongly contrasted black and grey plumage, and finally there is a group of larger forms allied to the European C. aeruginosus, wherein a grey dress is less often attained, of which the South African C. ranivorus and the New Zealand C. gouldi are examples.

One European species, C. aeruginosus, although referred to in books as the marsh-harrier, is much more commonly known in England and Ireland as the moor-buzzard. However, harriers don’t roost in trees like buzzards; they typically prefer open countryside and usually, but not always, choose marshy or wetland areas because snakes and frogs make up a significant part of their diet. On the ground, their posture is completely different from that of a buzzard, and their long wings and legs make it easy to tell the two groups apart when held in hand. All species also display a well-developed ruff or frill of thickset feathers around the lower part of their heads, almost resembling that seen in owls, which leads many taxonomists to believe that the genus Circus, while definitely belonging to the Falconidae, links this family to the Striges. However, no skeletal connection has been found between harriers and any owl group, so the superficial similarity needs another explanation. Harriers can be found almost everywhere in the world, 1 and fifteen species are recognized by Bowdler Sharpe (Cat. Birds Brit. Museum, i. pp. 50-73). In most, if not all, harrier species, males and females have very different colors, to the extent that for a long time the males and females of one of the most common and well-known species, the C. cyaneus, were thought to be separate species and were called different names in various European languages. This misunderstanding persisted particularly because young males, which are much more plentiful than adults, have similar plumage to their mothers. It wasn't until Montagu's observations were published at the beginning of the 19th century that the “ringtail,” as she was called (the Falco pygargus of Linnaeus), was widely recognized as the female of the “hen-harrier.” But Montagu's contributions to this genus didn't stop there; he also discovered the previously unknown existence of a second species, 2, which also exhibits a variety of plumage. He named it the ash-colored falcon, but it is now commonly called Montagu’s harrier, C. cineraceus. In behavior, it is very similar to the hen-harrier, but has longer wings and doesn’t range as far north; while the hen-harrier extends to Lapland, Montagu’s is very rare in Scotland, though it is the most common species in southern England. In fact, harriers in the British Islands are quickly becoming a thing of the past. Their nests are easy to find, and birds are easily destroyed when nesting. In southeastern Europe, extending to the Cape of Good Hope and India, there is a fourth species, referred to as C. swainsoni by some writers and C. pallidus by others. In North America, C. cyaneus is represented by a related form, C. hudsonius, which is usually considered a distinct species; the adult male can be identified by its rufous markings underneath, similar to C. cineraceus, but it lacks the long wings of that species. South America has another variant in C. cinereus, while China, India, and Australia have even more examples of this type. Thus, there is a section where males have a sharply contrasted black and gray plumage, and finally, there's a group of larger forms related to the European C. aeruginosus, in which gray plumage is less common, such as the South African C. ranivorus and the New Zealand C. gouldi.

(A. N.)
Hen-Harrier (Male and Female).

1 The distribution of the different species is rather curious, while the range of some is exceedingly wide,—one, C. maillardi, seems to be limited to the island of Réunion (Bourbon).

1 The distribution of different species is quite interesting, while some have an exceptionally wide range—one, C. maillardi, appears to be restricted to the island of Réunion (Bourbon).

2 A singular mistake, which has been productive of further error, was made by Albin, who drew his figure (Hist. Birds, ii. pi. 5) from a specimen of one species, and coloured it from a specimen of the other.

2 A single mistake, which led to more errors, was made by Albin, who created his illustration (Hist. Birds, ii. pi. 5) from a specimen of one species and colored it using a specimen from another.


HARRIGAN, EDWARD (1845-  ), American actor, was born in New York of Irish parents on the 26th of October 1845. He made his first appearance in San Francisco in 1867, and soon afterwards formed a stage partnership with Tony Hart, whose real name was Anthony Cannon. As “Harrigan and Hart,” they had a great success in the presentation of types of low life in New York. Beginning as simple sketches, these were gradually worked up into plays, with occasional songs, set to popular music 18 by David Braham. The titles of these plays indicate their character, The Mulligan Guards, Squatter Sovereignty, A Leather Patch, The O’Regans. The partnership with Hart lasted from 1871-1884. Subsequently Harrigan played in different cities of the United States, one of his favourite parts being George Coggswell in Old Lavender.

HARRIGAN, EDWARD (1845-  ), American actor, was born in New York to Irish parents on October 26, 1845. He made his first appearance in San Francisco in 1867 and shortly after formed a stage partnership with Tony Hart, whose real name was Anthony Cannon. As “Harrigan and Hart,” they achieved great success presenting depictions of low life in New York. Starting as simple sketches, these were gradually developed into plays, with some songs set to popular music 18 by David Braham. The titles of these plays reflect their nature, The Mulligan Guards, Squatter Sovereignty, A Leather Patch, The O’Regans. The partnership with Hart lasted from 1871 to 1884. Afterward, Harrigan performed in various cities across the United States, with one of his favorite roles being George Coggswell in Old Lavender.


HARRIMAN, EDWARD HENRY (1848-1909), American financier and railroad magnate, son of the Rev. Orlando Harriman, rector of St George’s Episcopal church, Hempstead, L.I., was born at Hempstead on the 25th of February 1848. He became a broker’s clerk in New York at an early age, and in 1870 was able to buy a seat on the New York Stock Exchange on his own account. For a good many years there was nothing sensational in his success, but he built up a considerable business connexion and prospered in his financial operations. Meanwhile he carefully mastered the situation affecting American railways. In this respect he was assisted by his friendship with Mr Stuyvesant Fish, who, on becoming vice-president of the Illinois Central in 1883, brought Harriman upon the directorate, and in 1887, being then president, made Harriman vice-president; twenty years later it was Harriman who dominated the finance of the Illinois Central, and Fish, having become his opponent, was dropped from the board. It was not till 1898, however, that his career as a great railway organizer began with his formation, by the aid of the bankers, Kuhn, Loeb & Co., of a syndicate to acquire the Union Pacific line, which was then in the hands of a receiver and was generally regarded as a hopeless failure. It was soon found that a new power had arisen in the railway world. Having brought the Union Pacific out of bankruptcy into prosperity, and made it an efficient instead of a decaying line, he utilized his position to draw other lines within his control, notably the Southern Pacific in 1901. These extensions of his power were not made without friction, and his abortive contest in 1901 with James J. Hill for the control of the Northern Pacific led to one of the most serious financial crises ever known on Wall Street. But in the result he became the dominant factor in American railway matters. At his death, on the 9th of September 1909, his influence was estimated to extend over 60,000 m. of track, with an annual earning power of $700,000,000 or over. Astute and unscrupulous manipulation of the stock markets, and a capacity for the hardest of bargaining and the most determined warfare against his rivals, had their place in this success, and Harriman’s methods excited the bitterest criticism, culminating in a stern denunciation from President Roosevelt himself in 1907. Nevertheless, besides acquiring colossal wealth for himself, he helped to create for the American public a vastly improved railway service, the benefit of which survived all controversy as to the means by which he triumphed over the obstacles in his way.

HARRIMAN, EDWARD HENRY (1848-1909), American financier and railroad tycoon, was born to the Rev. Orlando Harriman, rector of St. George’s Episcopal Church, Hempstead, L.I., on February 25, 1848. He became a broker's clerk in New York at a young age, and by 1870, he was able to purchase a seat on the New York Stock Exchange for himself. For many years, his success was relatively unremarkable, but he developed a significant business network and thrived in his financial dealings. During this time, he meticulously studied the American railway landscape. His friendship with Mr. Stuyvesant Fish helped in this regard; when Fish became vice-president of the Illinois Central in 1883, he brought Harriman onto the board of directors. In 1887, after becoming president, Fish made Harriman vice-president. Twenty years later, Harriman was the one who controlled the finances of the Illinois Central, while Fish, having become his rival, was removed from the board. However, it wasn't until 1898 that his career as a major railway organizer took off when, with the help of bankers Kuhn, Loeb & Co., he formed a syndicate to acquire the Union Pacific line, which was then managed by a receiver and seen as a lost cause. It quickly became clear that a new force had emerged in the railway industry. After bringing the Union Pacific out of bankruptcy and transforming it from a failing line to a prosperous one, he used his position to take control of other lines, notably the Southern Pacific in 1901. These expansions were not made without conflicts, and his unsuccessful battle in 1901 with James J. Hill for control of the Northern Pacific triggered one of the worst financial crises ever seen on Wall Street. Ultimately, however, he became the key player in American railway affairs. At his death on September 9, 1909, his influence stretched over 60,000 miles of track, generating more than $700 million in annual earnings. His sharp and ruthless tactics in the stock markets, along with a talent for tough negotiations and relentless competition against his rivals, played a role in his success, and Harriman's methods drew harsh criticism, culminating in a strong rebuke from President Roosevelt in 1907. Nonetheless, in addition to amassing great wealth for himself, he helped create a significantly improved railway service for the American public, the benefits of which persisted despite the controversies surrounding how he overcame the challenges in his path.


HARRIMAN, a city of Roane county, Tennessee, U.S.A., on the Emory river, about 35 m. W. by S. of Knoxville. Pop. (1900) 3442 (516 being negroes); (1910) 3061. Harriman is served by the Harriman & North Eastern, the Tennessee Central, and the Southern railways. It is the seat of the East Tennessee Normal and Industrial Institute, for negroes, and of the American University of Harriman (Christian Church, coeducational; 1893), which comprises primary, preparatory, collegiate, Bible school, civic research, commercial, music and art departments, and in 1907-1908 had 12 instructors and 317 students. Near the city are large deposits of iron and an abundance of coal and timber. Among manufactures are cotton products, farming tools, leather, tannic acid, furniture and flour. Harriman was founded in 1890 by a land company. A clause in this company’s by-laws requires that every conveyance of real estate by the company “shall contain a provision forbidding the use of the property or any building thereon, for the purpose of making, storing or selling intoxicating beverages as such.” Harriman was chartered as a city in 1891, and its charter was revised in 1899.

HARRIMAN, is a city in Roane County, Tennessee, U.S.A., on the Emory River, about 35 miles west-southwest of Knoxville. Population: (1900) 3,442 (516 of whom were African American); (1910) 3,061. Harriman is served by the Harriman & North Eastern, the Tennessee Central, and the Southern railways. It is home to the East Tennessee Normal and Industrial Institute for African Americans and the American University of Harriman (Christian Church, coeducational; founded in 1893), which includes primary, preparatory, collegiate, Bible school, civic research, commercial, music, and art departments; in 1907-1908, it had 12 instructors and 317 students. Nearby are large deposits of iron along with plenty of coal and timber. Key industries include cotton products, farming tools, leather, tannic acid, furniture, and flour. Harriman was founded in 1890 by a land company. A provision in the company’s by-laws states that every transfer of real estate must include a clause that prohibits using the property or any buildings on it for making, storing, or selling intoxicating beverages. Harriman was incorporated as a city in 1891, and its charter was updated in 1899.


HARRINGTON, EARLS OF. The first earl of Harrington was the diplomatist and politician, William Stanhope (c. 1690-1756), a younger son of John Stanhope of Elvaston, Derbyshire, and a brother of Charles Stanhope (1673-1760), an active politician during the reign of George I. His ancestor, Sir John Stanhope (d. 1638), was a half-brother of Philip Stanhope, 1st earl of Chesterfield. Educated at Eton, William Stanhope entered the army and served in Spain, but soon he turned his attention to more peaceful pursuits, went on a mission to Madrid and represented his country at Turin. When peace was made between England and Spain in 1720 Stanhope became British ambassador to the latter country, and he retained this position until March 1727, having built up his reputation as a diplomatist during a difficult period. In 1729 he had some part in arranging the treaty of Seville between England, France and Spain, and for his services in this matter he was created Baron Harrington in January 1730. Later in the same year he was appointed secretary of state for the northern department under Sir Robert Walpole, but, like George II., he was anxious to assist the emperor Charles VI. in his war with France, while Walpole favoured a policy of peace. Although the latter had his way Harrington remained secretary until the great minister’s fall in 1742, when he was transferred to the office of president of the council and was created earl of Harrington and Viscount Petersham. In 1744, owing to the influence of his political allies, the Pelhams, he returned to his former post of secretary of state, but he soon lost the favour of the king, and this was the principal cause why he left office in October 1746. He was lord lieutenant of Ireland from 1747 to 1751, and he died in London on the 8th of December 1756.

Harrington, Earls of. The first Earl of Harrington was the diplomat and politician, William Stanhope (c. 1690-1756), the younger son of John Stanhope of Elvaston, Derbyshire, and a brother of Charles Stanhope (1673-1760), a prominent politician during the reign of George I. His ancestor, Sir John Stanhope (d. 1638), was a half-brother of Philip Stanhope, 1st Earl of Chesterfield. Educated at Eton, William Stanhope joined the army and served in Spain, but soon shifted his focus to diplomatic work, going on a mission to Madrid and representing his country in Turin. When peace was established between England and Spain in 1720, Stanhope became the British ambassador to Spain, holding this position until March 1727, during which he built a solid reputation as a diplomat during challenging times. In 1729, he played a role in arranging the Treaty of Seville between England, France, and Spain, and in recognition of his efforts, he was made Baron Harrington in January 1730. Later that year, he was appointed Secretary of State for the Northern Department under Sir Robert Walpole, but like George II, he wanted to help Emperor Charles VI in his war against France, while Walpole preferred a peaceful approach. Although Walpole had his way, Harrington stayed in the position until the fall of the great minister in 1742, when he was moved to the office of President of the Council and was made Earl of Harrington and Viscount Petersham. In 1744, thanks to the support of his political allies, the Pelhams, he returned to his previous role as Secretary of State, but he quickly lost the king's favor, which was the main reason he left office in October 1746. He served as Lord Lieutenant of Ireland from 1747 to 1751, and he died in London on December 8, 1756.

The earl’s successor was his son, William (1719-1779), who entered the army, was wounded at Fontenoy and became a general in 1770. He was a member of parliament for about ten years and he died on the 1st of April 1779. This earl’s wife Caroline (1722-1784), daughter of Charles Fitzroy, 2nd duke of Grafton, was a noted beauty, but was also famous for her eccentricities. Their elder son, Charles (1753-1829), who became the 3rd earl, was a distinguished soldier. He served with the British army during the American War of Independence and attained the rank of general in 1802. From 1805 to 1812 he was commander-in-chief in Ireland; he was sent on diplomatic errands to Vienna and to Berlin, and he died at Brighton on the 15th of September 1829.

The earl’s successor was his son, William (1719-1779), who joined the army, was injured at Fontenoy, and became a general in 1770. He served as a member of parliament for about ten years and passed away on April 1, 1779. This earl’s wife, Caroline (1722-1784), daughter of Charles Fitzroy, 2nd duke of Grafton, was known for her beauty but also for her eccentricities. Their older son, Charles (1753-1829), who became the 3rd earl, was a notable soldier. He fought with the British army during the American War of Independence and achieved the rank of general in 1802. From 1805 to 1812, he was the commander-in-chief in Ireland; he was sent on diplomatic missions to Vienna and Berlin, and he died in Brighton on September 15, 1829.

Charles Stanhope, 4th earl of Harrington (1780-1851), the eldest son of the 3rd earl, was known as Lord Petersham until he succeeded to the earldom in 1829. He was very well known in society owing partly to his eccentric habits; he dressed like the French king Henry IV., and had other personal peculiarities. He married the actress, Maria Foote, but when he died in March 1851 he left no sons, and his brother Leicester Fitzgerald Charles (1784-1862) became the 5th earl. This nobleman was a soldier and a politician of advanced views, who is best known as a worker with Lord Byron in the cause of Greek independence. He was in Greece in 1823 and 1824, where his relations with Byron were not altogether harmonious. He wrote A Sketch of the History and Influence of the Press in British India (1823); and Greece in 1821 and 1824 (English edition 1824, American edition 1825). His son Sydney Seymour Hyde, 6th earl (1845-1866), dying unmarried, was succeeded by a cousin, Charles Wyndham Stanhope (1809-1881), as 7th earl, and in 1881 the latter’s son Charles Augustus Stanhope (b. 1844) became 8th earl of Harrington.

Charles Stanhope, 4th Earl of Harrington (1780-1851), the eldest son of the 3rd Earl, was known as Lord Petersham until he became the Earl in 1829. He was quite well-known in society, partly because of his eccentric habits; he dressed like Henry IV of France and had other unique traits. He married the actress Maria Foote, but when he died in March 1851, he left no sons, so his brother Leicester Fitzgerald Charles (1784-1862) became the 5th Earl. This nobleman was a soldier and a politician with progressive views, best known for working with Lord Byron for Greek independence. He was in Greece in 1823 and 1824, where his relationship with Byron was not always smooth. He wrote A Sketch of the History and Influence of the Press in British India (1823) and Greece in 1821 and 1824 (English edition 1824, American edition 1825). His son Sydney Seymour Hyde, 6th Earl (1845-1866), died unmarried, and was succeeded by a cousin, Charles Wyndham Stanhope (1809-1881), as the 7th Earl, and in 1881, the latter’s son Charles Augustus Stanhope (b. 1844) became the 8th Earl of Harrington.

Before the time of the first earl of Harrington the Stanhope family had held the barony of Stanhope of Harrington, which was created in 1605 in favour of Sir John Stanhope (c. 1550-1621) of Harrington, Northamptonshire. Sir John was a younger son of Sir Michael Stanhope (d. 1552) of Shelford, Nottinghamshire, who was a brother-in-law of the protector Somerset. Sir Michael’s support of Somerset cost him his life, as he was beheaded on the 26th of February 1552. Sir John was treasurer of the chamber from 1596 to 1616 and was a member of parliament for several years. He died on the 9th of March 1621, and when his only son Charles, 2nd baron (c. 1595-1675), died without issue in 1675 the barony became extinct.

Before the first Earl of Harrington, the Stanhope family held the barony of Stanhope of Harrington, created in 1605 in favor of Sir John Stanhope (c. 1550-1621) of Harrington, Northamptonshire. Sir John was a younger son of Sir Michael Stanhope (d. 1552) of Shelford, Nottinghamshire, who was a brother-in-law of the Protector Somerset. Sir Michael's support of Somerset cost him his life; he was beheaded on February 26, 1552. Sir John served as treasurer of the chamber from 1596 to 1616 and was a member of parliament for several years. He died on March 9, 1621, and when his only son Charles, 2nd baron (c. 1595-1675), died without any children in 1675, the barony became extinct.


HARRINGTON, or Harington, JAMES (1611-1677), English political philosopher, was born in January 1611 of an old Rutlandshire family. He was son of Sir Sapcotes Harrington of Rand, Lincolnshire, and great-nephew of the first Lord Harington of Exton (d. 1615). In 1629 he entered Trinity College, Oxford, as 19 a gentleman commoner. One of his tutors was the famous Chillingworth. After several years spent in travel, and as a soldier in the Dutch army, he returned to England and lived in retirement till 1646, when he was appointed to the suite of Charles I., at that time being conveyed from Newcastle as prisoner. Though republican in his ideas, Harrington won the king’s regard and esteem, and accompanied him to the Isle of Wight. He roused, however, the suspicion of the parliamentarians and was dismissed: it is said that he was for a short time put in confinement because he would not swear to refuse assistance to the king should he attempt to escape. After Charles’s death Harrington devoted his time to the composition of his Oceana, a work which pleased neither party. By order of Cromwell it was seized when passing through the press. Harrington, however managed to secure the favour of the Protector’s favourite daughter, Mrs Claypole; the work was restored to him, and appeared in 1656, dedicated to Cromwell. The views embodied in Oceana, particularly that bearing on vote by ballot and rotation of magistrates and legislators, Harrington and others (who in 1659 formed a club called the “Rota”) endeavoured to push practically, but with no success. In November 1661, by order of Charles II., Harrington was arrested, apparently without sufficient cause, on a charge of conspiracy, and was thrown into the Tower. Despite his repeated request no public trial could be obtained, and when at length his sisters obtained a writ of habeas corpus he was secretly removed to St Nicholas Island off Plymouth. There his health gave way owing to his drinking guaiacum on medical advice, and his mind appeared to be affected. Careful treatment restored him to bodily vigour, but his mind never wholly recovered. After his release he married,—at what date does not seem to be precisely known. He died on the 11th of September 1677, and was buried next to Sir Walter Raleigh in St Margaret’s, Westminster.

HARRINGTON, or Harington, JAMES (1611-1677), an English political philosopher, was born in January 1611 into an old Rutlandshire family. He was the son of Sir Sapcotes Harrington of Rand, Lincolnshire, and the great-nephew of the first Lord Harington of Exton (d. 1615). In 1629, he began his studies as a gentleman commoner at Trinity College, Oxford, where one of his tutors was the notable Chillingworth. After spending several years traveling and serving as a soldier in the Dutch army, he returned to England and lived in seclusion until 1646, when he was appointed to the entourage of Charles I., who was being transported from Newcastle as a prisoner. Despite his republican views, Harrington earned the king's respect and accompanied him to the Isle of Wight. However, he raised suspicions among the parliamentarians and was dismissed; it is said that he was briefly confined for refusing to swear he wouldn’t assist the king if he attempted to escape. After Charles’s execution, Harrington focused on writing his Oceana, a work that pleased neither side. Under Cromwell’s orders, it was seized while being printed. However, Harrington managed to win the favor of Cromwell’s favorite daughter, Mrs. Claypole; the work was returned to him and published in 1656, dedicated to Cromwell. The ideas presented in Oceana, especially regarding voting by ballot and the rotation of magistrates and legislators, were pushed by Harrington and others (who formed a club called the “Rota” in 1659), but they were unsuccessful. In November 1661, by order of Charles II., Harrington was arrested, seemingly without just cause, on a conspiracy charge and imprisoned in the Tower. Despite his repeated requests, he could not obtain a public trial, and when his sisters finally secured a writ of habeas corpus, he was secretly moved to St Nicholas Island off Plymouth. There, his health deteriorated due to drinking guaiacum on medical advice, and his mental state seemed to suffer. Careful treatment restored his physical health, but his mind never fully recovered. After his release, he married—though the exact date is unclear. He died on September 11, 1677, and was buried beside Sir Walter Raleigh in St Margaret’s, Westminster.

Harrington’s writings consist of the Oceana, and of papers, pamphlets, aphorisms, even treatises, in defence of the Oceana. The Oceana is a hard, prolix, and in many respects heavy exposition of an ideal constitution, “Oceana” being England, and the lawgiver Olphaus Megaletor, Oliver Cromwell. The details are elaborated with infinite care, even the salaries of officials being computed, but the main ideas are two in number, each with a practical corollary. The first is that the determining element of power in a state is property generally, property in land in particular; the second is that the executive power ought not to be vested for any considerable time in the same men or class of men. In accordance with the first of these, Harrington recommends an agrarian law, limiting the portion of land held to that yielding a revenue of £3000, and consequently insisting on particular modes of distributing landed property. As a practical issue of the second he lays down the rule of rotation by ballot. A third part of the executive or senate are voted out by ballot every year (not being capable of being elected again for three years). Harrington explains very carefully how the state and its governing parts are to be constituted by his scheme. Oceana contains many valuable ideas, but it is irretrievably dull.

Harrington’s writings include the Oceana, as well as various papers, pamphlets, aphorisms, and even treatises defending the Oceana. The Oceana is a dense, lengthy, and in many ways tedious exploration of an ideal constitution, with “Oceana” representing England and the lawgiver Olphaus Megaletor as Oliver Cromwell. The details are meticulously developed, even calculating the salaries of officials, but the main ideas boil down to two, each with a practical implication. The first is that the key factor of power in a state is property in general, and particularly land; the second is that executive power shouldn’t be held by the same individuals or class of individuals for too long. In line with the first idea, Harrington advocates for an agrarian law that limits land ownership to what produces a revenue of £3000, insisting on specific methods for distributing land. As a practical outcome of the second idea, he establishes a rule of rotation via ballot. A third of the executive or senate is voted out each year (and they cannot be re-elected for three years). Harrington carefully explains how the state and its governing structures should be organized according to his plan. While Oceana contains many insightful ideas, it is undeniably boring.

His Works were edited with biography by John Toland in 1700; Toland’s edition, with additions by Birch, appeared in 1747, and again in 1771. Oceana was reprinted by Henry Morley in 1887. See Dwight in Political Science Quarterly (March, 1887). Harrington has often been confused with his cousin Sir James Harrington, a member of the commission which tried Charles I., and afterwards excluded from the acts of pardon.

His Works were edited with a biography by John Toland in 1700; Toland’s edition, with additions by Birch, came out in 1747, and again in 1771. Oceana was reprinted by Henry Morley in 1887. See Dwight in Political Science Quarterly (March, 1887). Harrington has often been mistaken for his cousin Sir James Harrington, a member of the commission that tried Charles I, and later excluded from the acts of pardon.


HARRIOT, or Harriott, THOMAS (1560-1621), English mathematician and astronomer, was born at Oxford in 1560. After studying at St Mary Hall, Oxford, he became tutor to Sir Walter Raleigh, who appointed him in 1585 to the office of geographer to the second expedition to Virginia. Harriot published an account of this expedition in 1588, which was afterwards reprinted in Hakluyt’s Voyages. On his return to England, after an absence of two years, he resumed his mathematical studies, and having made the acquaintance of Henry Percy, earl of Northumberland, distinguished for his patronage of men of science, he received from him a yearly pension of £120. He died at London on the 2nd of July 1621. A manuscript of Harriot’s entitled Ephemeris chrysometria is preserved in Sion College; and his Artis analyticae praxis ad aequaliones algebraicas resolvendas was published at London in 1631. His contributions to algebra are treated in the article Algebra; Wallis’s History of Algebra (1685) may also be consulted. From some papers of Harriot’s, discovered in 1784, it would appear that he had either procured a telescope from Holland, or divined the construction of that instrument, and that he coincided in point of time with Galileo in discovering the spots on the sun’s disk.

HARRIOT, or Harriot, THOMAS (1560-1621), an English mathematician and astronomer, was born in Oxford in 1560. After studying at St Mary Hall, Oxford, he became the tutor to Sir Walter Raleigh, who appointed him in 1585 as the geographer for the second expedition to Virginia. Harriot published a report on this expedition in 1588, which was later reprinted in Hakluyt’s Voyages. Upon returning to England after two years, he resumed his mathematical studies, and after meeting Henry Percy, the Earl of Northumberland, known for supporting scientists, he received a yearly pension of £120 from him. He passed away in London on July 2, 1621. A manuscript by Harriot titled Ephemeris chrysometria is kept at Sion College, and his Artis analyticae praxis ad aequaliones algebraicas resolvendas was published in London in 1631. His contributions to algebra are discussed in the article Algebra; Wallis’s History of Algebra (1685) can also provide additional information. Some papers by Harriot, discovered in 1784, suggest that he either obtained a telescope from Holland or figured out how to create one, and that he coincidentally discovered sunspots at the same time as Galileo.

See Charles Hutton, Mathematical and Philosophical Dictionary (1815), and J. E. Montucla, Histoire des mathématiques (1758).

See Charles Hutton, Mathematical and Philosophical Dictionary (1815), and J. E. Montucla, Histoire des mathématiques (1758).


HARRIS, GEORGE, 1st Baron (1746-1829), British general, was the son of the Rev George Harris, curate of Brasted, Kent, and was born on the 18th of March 1746. Educated at Westminster school and at the Royal Military Academy, Woolwich, he was commissioned to the Royal Artillery in 1760, transferring to an ensigncy in the 5th foot (Northumberland Fusiliers) in 1762. Three years later he became lieutenant, and in 1771 captain. His first active service was in the American War of Independence, in which he served at Lexington, Bunker Hill (severely wounded) and in every engagement of Howe’s army except one up to November 1778. By this time he had obtained his majority, and his next service was under Major-General Medows at Santa Lucia in 1778-1779, after which his regiment served as marines in Rodney’s fleet. Later in 1779 he was for a time a prisoner of war. Shortly before his promotion to lieutenant-colonel in his regiment (1780) he married. After commanding the 5th in Ireland for some years, he exchanged and went with General Medows to Bombay, and served with that officer in India until 1792, taking part in various battles and engagements, notably Lord Cornwallis’s attack on Seringapatam. In 1794, after a short period of home service, he was again in India. In the same year he became major-general, and in 1796 local lieutenant-general in Madras. Up to 1800 he commanded the troops in the presidency, and for a short time he exercised the civil government as well. In December 1798 he was appointed by Lord Wellesley, the governor-general, to command the field army which was intended to attack Tipu Sahib, and in a few months Harris reduced the Mysore country and stormed the great stronghold of Seringapatam. His success established his reputation as a capable and experienced commander, and its political importance led to his being offered the reward (which he declined) of an Irish peerage. He returned home in 1800, became lieutenant-general in the army the following year, and attained the rank of full general in 1812. In 1815 he was made a peer of the United Kingdom under the title Baron Harris of Seringapatam and Mysore, and of Belmont, Kent. In 1820 he received the G.C.B., and in 1824 the governorship of Dumbarton Castle. Lord Harris died at Belmont in May 1829. He had been colonel of the 73rd Highlanders since 1800.

HARRIS, GEORGE, 1st Baron (1746-1829), British general, was the son of Rev George Harris, a curate in Brasted, Kent, and was born on March 18, 1746. He was educated at Westminster School and the Royal Military Academy in Woolwich. He was commissioned into the Royal Artillery in 1760 and transferred to an ensigncy in the 5th Foot (Northumberland Fusiliers) in 1762. Three years later, he was promoted to lieutenant, and in 1771, he became a captain. His first active service was during the American War of Independence, where he fought at Lexington, Bunker Hill (seriously wounded), and in every engagement of Howe’s army except one until November 1778. By this time, he had achieved the rank of major, and his next service was under Major-General Medows at Santa Lucia from 1778 to 1779, after which his regiment served as marines in Rodney’s fleet. Later in 1779, he was a prisoner of war for a while. Shortly before his promotion to lieutenant-colonel in his regiment in 1780, he got married. After commanding the 5th in Ireland for several years, he exchanged and joined General Medows in Bombay, serving in India with that officer until 1792, participating in various battles and engagements, notably Lord Cornwallis’s assault on Seringapatam. In 1794, after a brief period of service at home, he returned to India. That same year, he became a major-general, and in 1796, he was appointed local lieutenant-general in Madras. Until 1800, he commanded the troops in the presidency and briefly held civil government responsibilities. In December 1798, he was appointed by Lord Wellesley, the governor-general, to lead the field army set to attack Tipu Sahib, and within a few months, Harris conquered the Mysore territory and stormed the major stronghold of Seringapatam. His success solidified his reputation as a skilled and seasoned commander, and its political significance led to an offer for an Irish peerage, which he declined. He returned home in 1800, became a lieutenant-general in the army the following year, and reached full general rank in 1812. In 1815, he was elevated to the peerage of the United Kingdom with the title Baron Harris of Seringapatam and Mysore, and of Belmont, Kent. In 1820, he was awarded the G.C.B., and in 1824, he became governor of Dumbarton Castle. Lord Harris passed away at Belmont in May 1829. He had been the colonel of the 73rd Highlanders since 1800.

His descendant, the 4th Baron Harris (b. 1851), best known as a cricketer, was under-secretary for India (1885-1886), under-secretary for war (1886-1889) and governor of Bombay (1890-1895).

His descendant, the 4th Baron Harris (b. 1851), who is most famous as a cricketer, served as under-secretary for India (1885-1886), under-secretary for war (1886-1889), and governor of Bombay (1890-1895).

See Rt. Hon. S. Lushington, Life of Lord Harris (London, 1840), and the regimental histories of the 5th Northumberland Fusiliers and 73rd Highlanders.

See Rt. Hon. S. Lushington, Life of Lord Harris (London, 1840), and the regimental histories of the 5th Northumberland Fusiliers and 73rd Highlanders.


HARRIS, JAMES (1709-1780), English grammarian, was born at Salisbury on the 20th of July 1709. He was educated at the grammar school in the Close at Salisbury, and at Wadham College, Oxford. On leaving the university he was entered at Lincoln’s Inn as a student of law, though not intended for the bar. The death of his father in 1733 placed him in possession of an independent fortune and of the house in Salisbury Close. He became a county magistrate, and represented Christchurch in parliament from 1761 till his death, and was comptroller to the queen from 1774 to 1780. He held office under Lord Grenville, retiring with him in 1765. The decided bent of his mind had always been towards the Greek and Latin classics; and to the study of these, especially of Aristotle, he applied himself with unremitting assiduity during a period of fourteen or fifteen 20 years. He published in 1744 three treatises—on art; on music, painting and poetry; and on happiness. In 1751 appeared the work by which he became best known, Hermes, a philosophical inquiry concerning universal grammar. He also published Philosophical Arrangements and Philosophical Inquiries. Harris was a great lover of music, and adapted the words for a selection from Italian and German composers, published by the cathedral organist, James Corfe. He died on the 22nd of December 1780.

HARRIS, JAMES (1709-1780), English grammarian, was born in Salisbury on July 20, 1709. He was educated at the grammar school in Salisbury Close and at Wadham College, Oxford. After leaving university, he enrolled at Lincoln’s Inn to study law, although he did not intend to practice as a lawyer. The death of his father in 1733 gave him an independent fortune and the family home in Salisbury Close. He became a county magistrate and represented Christchurch in parliament from 1761 until his death, serving as comptroller to the queen from 1774 to 1780. He held office under Lord Grenville and retired with him in 1765. His true passion was always for the Greek and Latin classics, particularly Aristotle, which he studied diligently for about fourteen or fifteen years. In 1744, he published three treatises—on art; on music, painting, and poetry; and on happiness. In 1751, he released the work for which he became most famous, Hermes, a philosophical inquiry into universal grammar. He also published Philosophical Arrangements and Philosophical Inquiries. Harris was a passionate music lover and adapted lyrics for a selection of pieces from Italian and German composers, published by the cathedral organist, James Corfe. He passed away on December 22, 1780.

His works were collected and published in 1801, by his son, the first earl of Malmesbury, who prefixed a brief biography.

His works were collected and published in 1801 by his son, the first Earl of Malmesbury, who included a short biography.


HARRIS, JOEL CHANDLER (1848-1908), American author, was born in Eatonton, Putnam county, Georgia, on the 8th of December 1848. He started as an apprentice to the printer’s trade in the office of the Countryman, a weekly paper published on a plantation not far from his home. He then studied law, and practised for a short time in Forsyth, Ga., but soon took to journalism. He joined the staff of the Savannah Daily News in 1871, and in 1876 that of the Atlanta Constitution, of which he was an editor from 1890 to 1901, and in this capacity did much to further the cause of the New South. But his most distinctive contribution to this paper, and to American literature, consisted of his dialect pieces dealing with negro life and folk-lore. His stories are characterized by quaint humour, poetic feeling and homely philosophy; and “Uncle Remus,” the principal character of most of them, is a remarkably vivid and real creation. The first collection of his stories was published in 1880 as Uncle Remus: his Songs and his Sayings. Among his later works are Nights with Uncle Remus (1883), Mingo and Other Sketches in Black and White (1884), Free Joe and Other Georgian Sketches (1887), Balaam and His Master and Other Sketches and Stories (1891), Uncle Remus and His Friends (1892), On the Plantation (1892), which is partly autobiographic, Sister Jane (1896), The Chronicles of Aunt Minervy Ann (1899), and The Tar-Baby and Other Rhymes of Uncle Remus (1904). More purely juvenile are Daddy Jake the Runaway and Other Stories (1889), Little Mr Thimblefinger and his Queer Country (1894) and its sequel Mr Rabbit at Home (1895), Aaron in the Wildwoods (1897), Plantation Pageants (1899), Told by Uncle Remus (1905), and Uncle Remus and Br’er Rabbit (1907). He was one of the compilers of the Life of Henry W. Grady, including his Writings and Speeches (1890) and wrote Stories of Georgia (1896), and Georgia from the Invasion of De Soto to Recent Times (1899). He died in Atlanta on the 3rd of July 1908.

HARRIS, JOEL CHANDLER (1848-1908), American author, was born in Eatonton, Putnam County, Georgia, on December 8, 1848. He began as an apprentice in the printing trade at the office of the Countryman, a weekly newspaper published on a plantation near his home. He then studied law and practiced briefly in Forsyth, Georgia, but soon shifted to journalism. He joined the staff of the Savannah Daily News in 1871, and in 1876, he joined the Atlanta Constitution, where he served as an editor from 1890 to 1901, playing a significant role in promoting the New South. However, his most notable contribution to this newspaper and to American literature was his dialect stories focusing on African American life and folklore. His stories are marked by charming humor, poetic sentiment, and everyday wisdom; and “Uncle Remus,” the main character in most of them, is a remarkably vivid and authentic creation. The first collection of his stories was published in 1880 as Uncle Remus: his Songs and his Sayings. Among his later works are Nights with Uncle Remus (1883), Mingo and Other Sketches in Black and White (1884), Free Joe and Other Georgian Sketches (1887), Balaam and His Master and Other Sketches and Stories (1891), Uncle Remus and His Friends (1892), On the Plantation (1892), which is partly autobiographical, Sister Jane (1896), The Chronicles of Aunt Minervy Ann (1899), and The Tar-Baby and Other Rhymes of Uncle Remus (1904). More geared towards children are Daddy Jake the Runaway and Other Stories (1889), Little Mr Thimblefinger and his Queer Country (1894) and its sequel Mr Rabbit at Home (1895), Aaron in the Wildwoods (1897), Plantation Pageants (1899), Told by Uncle Remus (1905), and Uncle Remus and Br’er Rabbit (1907). He was one of the compilers of the Life of Henry W. Grady, which includes his Writings and Speeches (1890), and wrote Stories of Georgia (1896) and Georgia from the Invasion of De Soto to Recent Times (1899). He died in Atlanta on July 3, 1908.


HARRIS, JOHN (c. 1666-1719), English writer. He is best known as the editor of the Lexicon technicum, or Dictionary of the Arts and Sciences (1704), which ranks as the earliest of the long line of English encyclopaedias, and as the compiler of the Collection of Voyages and Travels which passes under his name. He was born about 1666, probably in Shropshire, and was a scholar of Trinity College, Oxford, from 1684 to 1688. He was presented to the vicarage of Icklesham in Sussex, and subsequently to the rectory of St Thomas, Winchelsea. In 1698 he was entrusted with the delivery of the seventh series of the Boyle lectures—Atheistical Objections against the Being of God and His Attributes fairly considered and fully refuted. Between 1702 and 1704 he delivered at the Marine Coffee House in Birchin Lane the mathematical lectures founded by Sir Charles Cox, and advertised himself as a mathematical tutor at Amen Corner. The friendship of Sir William Cowper, afterwards lord chancellor, secured for him the office of private chaplain, a prebend in Rochester cathedral (1708), and the rectory of the united parishes of St Mildred, Bread Street and St Margaret Moses, in addition to other preferments. He showed himself an ardent supporter of the government, and engaged in a bitter quarrel with the Rev. Charles Humphreys, who afterwards was chaplain to Dr Sacheverel. Harris was one of the early members of the Royal Society, and for a time acted as vice-president. At his death on the 7th of September 1719, he was busy completing an elaborate History of Kent. He is said to have died in poverty brought on by his own bad management of his affairs.

HARRIS, JOHN (c. 1666-1719), English writer. He is best known as the editor of the Lexicon technicum, or Dictionary of the Arts and Sciences (1704), which is recognized as the earliest in the long line of English encyclopedias, and as the compiler of the Collection of Voyages and Travels that carries his name. He was born around 1666, likely in Shropshire, and studied at Trinity College, Oxford, from 1684 to 1688. He was appointed vicar of Icklesham in Sussex, and later served as the rector of St Thomas, Winchelsea. In 1698, he was tasked with delivering the seventh series of the Boyle lectures—Atheistical Objections against the Being of God and His Attributes fairly considered and fully refuted. Between 1702 and 1704, he delivered mathematical lectures at the Marine Coffee House in Birchin Lane, founded by Sir Charles Cox, and promoted himself as a mathematical tutor at Amen Corner. His friendship with Sir William Cowper, who later became lord chancellor, helped him secure the position of private chaplain, a prebend at Rochester cathedral (1708), and the rectory of the combined parishes of St Mildred, Bread Street, and St Margaret Moses, along with other benefits. He proved to be a strong supporter of the government and got into a fierce dispute with Rev. Charles Humphreys, who later became chaplain to Dr Sacheverel. Harris was one of the early members of the Royal Society, and served for a time as vice-president. When he died on September 7, 1719, he was occupied with finishing an extensive History of Kent. It is said that he passed away in poverty due to his poor management of his finances.


HARRIS, THOMAS LAKE (1823-1906), American spiritualistic “prophet,” was born at Fenny Stratford in Buckinghamshire, England, on the 15th of May 1823. His parents were Calvinistic Baptists, and very poor. They settled at Utica, New York, when Harris was five years old. When he was about twenty Harris became a Universalist preacher, and then a Swedenborgian. He became associated about 1847 with a spiritualist of indifferent character named Davis. After Davis had been publicly exposed, Harris established a congregation in New York. About 1850 he professed to receive inspirations, and published some long poems. He had the gift of improvisation in a very high degree. About 1859 he preached in London, and is described as a man “with low, black eyebrows, black beard, and sallow countenance.” He was an effective speaker, and his poetry was admired by many; Alfred Austin in his book The Poetry of the Period even devoted a chapter to Harris. He founded in 1861 a community at Wassaic, New York, and opened a bank and a mill, which he superintended. There he was joined by about sixty converts, including five orthodox clergymen, some Japanese people, some American ladies of position, and especially by Laurence Oliphant (q.v.) with his wife and mother. The community—the Brotherhood of the New Life—decided to settle at the village of Brocton on the shore of Lake Erie. Harris established there a wine-making industry. In reply to the objections of teetotallers he said that the wine prepared by himself was filled with the divine breath so that all noxious influences were neutralized. Harris also built a tavern and strongly advocated the use of tobacco. He exacted complete surrender from his disciples—even the surrender of moral judgment. He taught that God was bi-sexual, and apparently, though not in reality, that the rule of society should be one of married celibacy. He professed to teach his community a change in the mode of respiration which was to be the visible sign of possession by Christ and the seal of immortality. The Oliphants broke away from the restraint about 1881, charging him with robbery and succeeding in getting back from him many thousands of pounds by legal proceedings. But while losing faith in Harris himself, they did not abandon his main teaching. In Laurence Oliphant’s novel Masollam his view of Harris will be found. Briefly, he held that Harris was originally honest, greatly gifted, and possessed of certain psychical powers. But in the end he came to practise unbridled licence under the loftiest pretensions, made the profession of extreme disinterestedness a cloak to conceal his avarice, and demanded from his followers a blind and supple obedience. Harris in 1876 discontinued for a time public activities, but issued to a secret circle books of verse dwelling mainly on sexual questions. On these his mind ran from the first. In 1891 he announced that his body had been renewed, and that he had discovered the secret of the resuscitation of humanity. He published a book, Lyra triumphalis, dedicated to A. C. Swinburne. He also made a third marriage, and visited England intending to remain there. He was called back by a fire which destroyed large stocks of his wine, and remained in New York till 1903, when he visited Glasgow. His followers believed that he had attained the secret of immortal life on earth, and after his death on the 23rd of March 1906 declared that he was only sleeping. It was three months before it was acknowledged publicly that he was really dead. There can be little or no doubt as to the real character of Harris. His teaching was esoteric in form, but is a thinly veiled attempt to alter the ordering of sexual relations.

HARRIS, THOMAS LAKE (1823-1906), was an American spiritualistic “prophet,” born on May 15, 1823, in Fenny Stratford, Buckinghamshire, England. His parents were Calvinistic Baptists and very poor. They moved to Utica, New York, when Harris was five. Around the age of twenty, he became a Universalist preacher and later a Swedenborgian. In about 1847, he associated with a questionable spiritualist named Davis. After Davis was publicly discredited, Harris founded a congregation in New York. Around 1850, he claimed to receive inspirations and published several long poems. He was highly skilled in improvisation. By 1859, he was preaching in London and was described as a man “with low, black eyebrows, black beard, and sallow complexion.” He was an effective speaker, and many admired his poetry; Alfred Austin even dedicated a chapter to Harris in his book The Poetry of the Period. In 1861, he established a community in Wassaic, New York, where he opened a bank and a mill, overseeing them himself. About sixty converts joined him, including five orthodox clergymen, some Japanese individuals, some well-to-do American women, and notably Laurence Oliphant (q.v.) with his wife and mother. The community, known as the Brotherhood of the New Life, chose to settle in Brocton on the shore of Lake Erie, where Harris started a wine-making business. To counter the objections of teetotalers, he claimed that his wine was imbued with divine breath, neutralizing all harmful effects. Harris also constructed a tavern and staunchly endorsed tobacco use. He demanded total surrender from his disciples, even in matters of moral judgment. He taught that God was bisexual, and suggested, though not truly, that society should operate under married celibacy. He claimed to instruct his community in a new way of breathing that would demonstrate possession by Christ and be the mark of immortality. The Oliphants broke away from his influence around 1881, accusing him of theft and succeeding in recovering thousands of pounds through legal action. Despite losing faith in Harris, they did not reject his core teachings. Laurence Oliphant's novel Masollam reflects this perspective, summarizing that Harris was initially honest, highly talented, and had certain psychic abilities. However, he ultimately indulged in reckless behavior while claiming lofty ideals, using the guise of extreme selflessness to mask his greed, demanding blind and obedient loyalty from his followers. In 1876, Harris temporarily ceased his public activities but circulated books of verse focused primarily on sexual topics to a secret group, a theme that had preoccupied him from the start. In 1891, he declared that his body had been renewed and claimed to have discovered the secret to humanity's resurrection. He published a book titled Lyra triumphalis, dedicated to A. C. Swinburne, and entered into a third marriage before traveling to England intending to stay there. He was called back to New York due to a fire that destroyed a significant amount of his wine, remaining there until 1903, when he visited Glasgow. His followers believed he had unlocked the secret to achieving immortal life on earth, and after his death on March 23, 1906, they asserted that he was merely sleeping. It took three months before it was publicly acknowledged that he had indeed passed away. There is little doubt about Harris's true character. His teachings were esoteric in nature, but they were essentially a thinly veiled effort to reshape sexual relations.

The authoritative biography from the side of his disciples is the Life by A. A. Cuthbert, published in Glasgow in 1908. It is full of the jargon of Harris’s sect, but contains some biographical facts as well as many quotations. Mrs Oliphant’s Life of Laurence Oliphant (1891) has not been shaken in any important particular, and Oliphant’s own portrait of Harris in Masollam is apparently unexaggerated. But Harris had much personal magnetism, unbounded self-confidence, along with endless fluency, and to the last was believed in by some disciples of character and influence.

The authoritative biography from his disciples' perspective is the Life by A. A. Cuthbert, published in Glasgow in 1908. It is filled with the language of Harris’s sect, but includes some biographical facts as well as many quotes. Mrs. Oliphant’s Life of Laurence Oliphant (1891) remains reliable in all important aspects, and Oliphant’s own depiction of Harris in Masollam seems to be accurate. However, Harris had a lot of personal charisma, immense self-confidence, and endless eloquence, and until the end, he was believed in by some disciples of notable character and influence.

(W. R. Ni.)

HARRIS, SIR WILLIAM SNOW (1791-1867), English electrician, was descended from an old family of solicitors at Plymouth, where he was born on the 1st of April 1791. He received his early education at the Plymouth grammar-school, 21 and completed a course of medical studies at the university of Edinburgh, after which he established himself as a general medical practitioner in Plymouth. On his marriage in 1824 he resolved to abandon his profession on account of its duties interfering too much with his favourite study of electricity. As early as 1820 he had invented a new method of arranging the lightning conductors of ships, the peculiarity of which was that the metal was permanently fixed in the masts and extended throughout the hull; but it was only with great difficulty, and not till nearly thirty years afterwards, that his invention was adopted by the government for the royal navy. In 1826 he read a paper before the Royal Society “On the Relative Powers of various Metallic Substances as Conductors of Electricity,” which led to his being elected a fellow of the society in 1831. Subsequently, in 1834, 1836 and 1839, he read before the society several valuable papers on the elementary laws of electricity, and he also communicated to the Royal Society of Edinburgh various interesting accounts of his experiments and discoveries in the same field of inquiry. In 1835 he received the Copley gold medal from the Royal Society for his papers on the laws of electricity of high tension, and in 1839 he was chosen to deliver the Bakerian lecture. Meanwhile, although a government commission had recommended the general adoption of his conductors in the royal navy, and the government had granted him an annuity of £300 “in consideration of services in the cultivation of science,” the naval authorities continued to offer various objections to his invention; to aid in removing these he in 1843 published his work on Thunderstorms, and also about the same time contributed a number of papers to the Nautical Magazine illustrative of damage by lightning. His system was actually adopted in the Russian navy before he succeeded in removing the prejudices against it in England, and in 1845 the emperor of Russia, in acknowledgment of his services, presented him with a valuable ring and vase. At length, the efficiency of his system being acknowledged, he received in 1847 the honour of knighthood, and subsequently a grant of £5000. After succeeding in introducing his invention into general use Harris resumed his labours in the field of original research, but as he failed to realize the advances that had been made by the new school of science his application resulted in no discoveries of much value. His manuals of Electricity, Galvanism and Magnetism, published between 1848 and 1856, were, however, written with great clearness, and passed through several editions. He died at Plymouth on the 22nd of January 1867, while having in preparation a Treatise on Frictional Electricity, which was published posthumously in the same year, with a memoir of the author by Charles Tomlinson.

HARRIS, SIR WILLIAM SNOW (1791-1867), English electrician, came from an old family of solicitors in Plymouth, where he was born on April 1, 1791. He received his early education at the Plymouth grammar school, 21, and completed a course in medicine at the University of Edinburgh. After that, he became a general medical practitioner in Plymouth. When he got married in 1824, he decided to leave his profession because its obligations were interfering too much with his passion for studying electricity. As early as 1820, he invented a new way to arrange lightning conductors on ships, where the metal was permanently fixed in the masts and extended throughout the hull. However, it took nearly thirty years for the government to adopt his invention for the Royal Navy. In 1826, he presented a paper to the Royal Society titled “On the Relative Powers of various Metallic Substances as Conductors of Electricity,” which led to his election as a fellow of the society in 1831. Later, in 1834, 1836, and 1839, he presented several important papers on the fundamental laws of electricity, and he also shared various fascinating reports of his experiments and discoveries with the Royal Society of Edinburgh. In 1835, he received the Copley gold medal from the Royal Society for his papers on the laws of high-tension electricity, and in 1839 he was selected to deliver the Bakerian lecture. Meanwhile, although a government commission recommended the general use of his conductors in the Royal Navy and granted him an annuity of £300 “in consideration of services in the cultivation of science,” naval authorities still had various objections to his invention. To help overcome these, he published his work on Thunderstorms in 1843 and contributed several articles to the Nautical Magazine that illustrated damage caused by lightning. His system was actually adopted by the Russian Navy before he was able to dispel the prejudices against it in England, and in 1845 the Emperor of Russia recognized his services with a valuable ring and vase. Eventually, once the effectiveness of his system was acknowledged, he received a knighthood in 1847 and later a grant of £5000. After getting his invention widely accepted, Harris returned to original research, but as he didn't keep up with the progress of the new wave of science, his efforts didn't lead to significant discoveries. His manuals on Electricity, Galvanism, and Magnetism, published between 1848 and 1856, were very clearly written and went through multiple editions. He passed away in Plymouth on January 22, 1867, while preparing a Treatise on Frictional Electricity, which was published posthumously in the same year, along with a memoir by Charles Tomlinson.


HARRIS, WILLIAM TORREY (1835-1909), American educationist, was born in North Killingly, Connecticut, on the 10th of September 1835. He studied at Phillips Andover Academy, Andover, Massachusetts, and entered Yale, but left in his junior year (1857) to accept a position as a teacher of shorthand in the St Louis, Missouri, public schools. Advancing through the grades of principal and assistant superintendent, he was city superintendent of schools from 1867 until 1880. In 1858, under the stimulus of Henry C. Brockmeyer, Harris became interested in modern German philosophy in general, and in particular in Hegel, whose works a small group, gathering about Harris and Brockmeyer, began to study in 1859. From 1867 to 1893 Harris edited The Journal of Speculative Philosophy (22 vols.), which was the quarterly organ of the Philosophical Society founded in 1866. The Philosophical Society died out before 1874, when Harris founded in St Louis a Kant Club, which lived for fifteen years. In 1873, with Miss Susan E. Blow, he established in St Louis the first permanent public-school kindergarten in America. He represented the United States Bureau of Education at the International Congress of Educators at Brussels in 1880. In 1889 he represented the United States Bureau of Education at the Paris Exposition, and from 1889 to 1906 was United States commissioner of education. In 1899 the university of Jena gave him the honorary degree of Doctor of Philosophy for his work on Hegel. In 1906 the Carnegie Foundation for the Advancement of Teaching conferred upon him “as the first man to whom such recognition for meritorious service is given, the highest retiring allowance which our rules will allow, an annual income of $3000.” Besides being a contributor to the magazines and encyclopedias on educational and philosophical subjects, he wrote An Introduction to the Study of Philosophy (1889); The Spiritual Sense of Dante’s Divina Commedia (1889); Hegel’s Logic (1890); and Psychologic Foundations of Education (1898); and edited Appleton’s International Education Series and Webster’s International Dictionary. He died on the 5th of November 1909.

HARRIS, WILLIAM TORREY (1835-1909), American educator, was born in North Killingly, Connecticut, on September 10, 1835. He attended Phillips Andover Academy in Andover, Massachusetts, and started at Yale but left in his junior year (1857) to become a teacher of shorthand in the public schools of St. Louis, Missouri. He progressed through the ranks to become a principal and assistant superintendent, serving as the city superintendent of schools from 1867 to 1880. In 1858, inspired by Henry C. Brockmeyer, Harris became interested in modern German philosophy, particularly in Hegel, whose works a small group around Harris and Brockmeyer began studying in 1859. From 1867 to 1893, Harris edited The Journal of Speculative Philosophy (22 vols.), which was the quarterly publication of the Philosophical Society founded in 1866. The Philosophical Society dissolved before 1874, when Harris established a Kant Club in St. Louis that lasted for fifteen years. In 1873, along with Miss Susan E. Blow, he set up the first permanent public-school kindergarten in America in St. Louis. He represented the United States Bureau of Education at the International Congress of Educators in Brussels in 1880, and in 1889, he represented the Bureau at the Paris Exposition. From 1889 to 1906, he served as the United States commissioner of education. In 1899, the University of Jena awarded him an honorary Doctor of Philosophy degree for his work on Hegel. In 1906, the Carnegie Foundation for the Advancement of Teaching recognized him as “the first person to receive such recognition for outstanding service,” granting him the highest retirement allowance allowed by their rules, which was an annual income of $3,000. Besides contributing to magazines and encyclopedias on educational and philosophical topics, he wrote An Introduction to the Study of Philosophy (1889); The Spiritual Sense of Dante’s Divina Commedia (1889); Hegel’s Logic (1890); and Psychologic Foundations of Education (1898); and he edited Appleton’s International Education Series and Webster’s International Dictionary. He died on November 5, 1909.

See Henry R. Evans, “A List of the Writings of William Torrey Harris” in the Report of the Commissioner of Education for 1907, vol. i. (Washington, 1908).

See Henry R. Evans, “A List of the Writings of William Torrey Harris” in the Report of the Commissioner of Education for 1907, vol. i. (Washington, 1908).


HARRISBURG, the capital of Pennsylvania, U.S.A., and the county-seat of Dauphin county, on the E. bank of the Susquehanna river, about 105 m. W. by N. of Philadelphia. Pop. (1890), 39,385; (1900), 50,167, of whom 2493 were foreign-born and 4107 were negroes; (1910 census) 64,186. It is served by the Pennsylvania, the Philadelphia & Reading, the Northern Central and the Cumberland Valley railways; and the Pennsylvania canal gives it water communication with the ocean. The river here is a mile wide, and is ordinarily very shallow and dotted with islets, but rises from 4 to 6 ft. after a moderate rain; it is spanned by several bridges.

HARRISBURG, is the capital of Pennsylvania, U.S.A., and the county seat of Dauphin County, located on the east bank of the Susquehanna River, about 105 miles west-northwest of Philadelphia. Population: (1890) 39,385; (1900) 50,167, including 2,493 foreign-born individuals and 4,107 African Americans; (1910 census) 64,186. It is served by the Pennsylvania, Philadelphia & Reading, Northern Central, and Cumberland Valley railways, and the Pennsylvania Canal provides water access to the ocean. The river here is a mile wide, usually quite shallow and scattered with small islands, but it can rise 4 to 6 feet after moderate rainfall; it is crossed by several bridges.

The city lies for the most part on the E. slope of a hill extending from the river bank, several feet in height, across the Pennsylvania canal to Paxton Creek. Front Street, along the river, is part of a parkway connecting the park system with which the city is encircled. Overlooking it are the finest residences, among them the governor’s mansion. State Street, 120 ft. in width, runs at right angles with Front Street through the business centre of the city, being interrupted by the Capitol Park (about 16 acres). The Capitol,1 dedicated in 1906, was erected to replace one burned in 1897; it is a fine building, with a dome modelled after St Peter’s at Rome. At the main entrance are bronze doors, decorated in relief with scenes from the state’s history; the floor of the rotunda is of tiles made at Doylestown, in the style of the pottery made by early Moravian settlers, and illustrating the state’s resources; the Senate Chamber and the House Chamber have stained-glass windows by W. B. van Ingen and mural paintings by Edwin A. Abbey, who painted a series, “The Development of the Law,” for the Supreme Court room in the eastern wing and decorated the rotunda. The mural decorations of the south corridor, by W. B. van Ingen, portray the state’s religious sects; those in the north corridor, by John W. Alexander, represent the changes in the physical and material character of the state; and there is a frieze by Miss Violet Oakley, “The Founding of the State of Liberty Spiritual,” in the governor’s reception room. Two heroic groups of statuary for the building were designed by George Grey Barnard. The state library in the Capitol contains about 150,000 volumes. In the same park is also a monument 105 ft. high erected in 22 1868 to the memory of the soldiers who fell in the Mexican War; it has a column of Maryland marble 76 ft. high, which is surmounted by an Italian marble statue of Victory, executed in Rome. At the base of the monument are muskets used by United States soldiers in that war and guns captured at Cerro Gordo. In State Street is the Dauphin County Soldiers’ monument, a shaft 10 ft. sq. at the base and 110 ft. high, with a pyramidal top.

The city mainly sits on the east slope of a hill stretching from the riverbank, rising several feet in height, across the Pennsylvania canal to Paxton Creek. Front Street, which runs along the river, is part of a parkway that connects the city's park system. The most impressive residences overlook this area, including the governor’s mansion. State Street, 120 feet wide, intersects with Front Street through the city's business center, with a break for Capitol Park (about 16 acres). The Capitol, dedicated in 1906, was built to replace one that burned down in 1897; it’s an impressive building, featuring a dome inspired by St. Peter’s in Rome. At the main entrance, bronze doors are adorned with relief sculptures depicting scenes from the state’s history; the rotunda floor consists of tiles made in Doylestown, reflecting the pottery crafted by early Moravian settlers and showcasing the state’s resources. The Senate and House Chambers have stained-glass windows by W. B. van Ingen and murals by Edwin A. Abbey, who created a series titled “The Development of the Law” for the Supreme Court room in the eastern wing and embellished the rotunda. The south corridor murals, by W. B. van Ingen, illustrate the state’s religious groups; those in the north corridor, by John W. Alexander, depict changes in the state’s physical and material landscape; and a frieze by Miss Violet Oakley titled “The Founding of the State of Liberty Spiritual” is in the governor’s reception room. Two heroic statue groups for the building were designed by George Grey Barnard. The state library within the Capitol contains about 150,000 volumes. Also in the park is a 105-foot-high monument erected in 1868 to honor the soldiers who died in the Mexican War; it features a 76-foot-high column made of Maryland marble topped by an Italian marble statue of Victory, crafted in Rome. At the base of the monument are muskets used by U.S. soldiers in that war and cannons captured at Cerro Gordo. In State Street stands the Dauphin County Soldiers’ monument, a shaft measuring 10 feet square at the base and rising 110 feet high, culminating in a pyramidal top.

For several years prior to 1902 Harrisburg suffered much from impure water, a bad sewerage system, and poorly paved and dirty streets. In that year, however, a League for Municipal Improvements was formed; in February 1902 a loan of $1,000,000 for municipal improvements was voted, landscape gardeners and sewage engineers were consulted, and a non-partisan mayor was elected, under whom great advances were made in street cleaning and street paving, a new filtration plant was completed, the river front was beautified and protected from flood, sewage was diverted from Paxton Creek, and the development of an extensive park system was undertaken.

For several years before 1902, Harrisburg struggled with dirty water, a faulty sewage system, and poorly maintained, messy streets. However, that year, a League for Municipal Improvements was created; in February 1902, a $1,000,000 loan for city improvements was approved, landscape architects and sewage engineers were consulted, and a non-partisan mayor was elected. Under this mayor, significant progress was made in street cleaning and paving, a new filtration plant was built, the riverfront was made more attractive and protected from flooding, sewage was redirected away from Paxton Creek, and plans for a large park system were launched.

Harrisburg’s charitable institutions include a city hospital, a home for the friendless, a children’s industrial home, and a state lunatic hospital (1845). The city is the seat of a Roman Catholic bishopric. Both coal and iron ore abound in the vicinity, and the city has numerous manufacturing establishments. The value of its factory products in 1905 was $17,146,338 (14.3% more than in 1900), the more important being those of steel works and rolling mills ($4,528,907), blast furnaces, steam railway repair shops, cigar and cigarette factories ($1,258,498), foundries and machine shops ($953,617), boot and shoe factories ($922,568), flouring and grist mills, slaughtering and meat-packing establishments and silk mills.

Harrisburg's charitable organizations include a city hospital, a home for those in need, a children's industrial home, and a state mental hospital (1845). The city is home to a Roman Catholic bishopric. There are plenty of coal and iron ore in the area, and the city has many manufacturing businesses. The value of its factory products in 1905 was $17,146,338 (14.3% more than in 1900), with the most significant being steelworks and rolling mills ($4,528,907), blast furnaces, steam railway repair shops, cigar and cigarette factories ($1,258,498), foundries and machine shops ($953,617), boot and shoe factories ($922,568), flour and grain mills, slaughtering and meat-packing businesses, and silk mills.

Harrisburg was named in honour of John Harris, who, upon coming into this region to trade early in the 18th century, was attracted to the site as an easy place at which to ford the Susquehanna, and about 1726 settled here. He was buried in what is now Harris Park, where he erected the first building, a small hut, within the present limits of Harrisburg. In 1753 his son established a ferry over the river, and the place was called Harris’s Ferry until 1785, when the younger Harris laid out the town and named it Harrisburg. In the same year it was made the county-seat of the newly constituted county of Dauphin, and its name was changed to Louisburg; but when, in 1791, it was incorporated as a borough, the present name was again adopted. In 1812, after an effort begun twenty-five years before, it was made the capital of the state; and in 1860 it was chartered as a city. In the summer of 1827, through the persistent efforts of persons most interested in the woollen manufactures of Massachusetts and other New England states to secure legislative aid for that industry, a convention of about 100 delegates—manufacturers, newspaper men and politicians—was held in Harrisburg, and the programme adopted by the convention did much to bring about the passage of the famous high tariff act of 1828.

Harrisburg was named in honor of John Harris, who came to this area to trade in the early 18th century. He found the location appealing because it was a convenient spot to cross the Susquehanna River and settled here around 1726. He was buried in what is now Harris Park, where he built the first structure, a small hut, within what are now the limits of Harrisburg. In 1753, his son started a ferry across the river, and the place was called Harris’s Ferry until 1785, when the younger Harris mapped out the town and named it Harrisburg. That same year, it became the county seat of the newly created Dauphin County, and its name was briefly changed to Louisburg; however, when it was incorporated as a borough in 1791, the name was changed back to Harrisburg. In 1812, after efforts that began twenty-five years earlier, it became the capital of the state, and in 1860, it was chartered as a city. In the summer of 1827, driven by the persistent efforts of people interested in the woolen manufacturing industry from Massachusetts and other New England states looking to gain legislative support, a convention of about 100 delegates—manufacturers, journalists, and politicians—was held in Harrisburg. The program adopted at the convention significantly contributed to the passage of the well-known high tariff act of 1828.


1 For this building the legislature in 1901 appropriated $4,000,000, stipulating that it should be completed before the 1st of January 1907. It was completed by that time, the net expenditure of the building commission being about $3,970,000. Although the legislature had made no provision for furniture and decoration, the state Board of Public Grounds and Buildings (governor, auditor-general and treasurer) undertook to complete the furnishing and decoration of the building within the stipulated time, and paid out for that purpose more than $8,600,000. In May 1906 a new treasurer entered office, who discovered that many items for furniture and decoration were charged twice, once at a normal and again at a remarkably high figure. In 1907 the legislature appointed a committee to investigate the charge of fraud. The committee’s decision was that the Board of Grounds and Buildings was not authorized to let the decorating and furnishing of the state house; that it had illegally authorized certain expenditures; and that architect and contractors had made fraudulent invoices and certificates. Various indictments were found: in the first trial for conspiracy in the making and delivering of furniture the contractor and the former auditor-general, state treasurer and superintendent of public grounds and buildings were convicted and in December 1908 were sentenced to two years’ imprisonment and fined $500 each; in 1910 a suit was brought for the recovery of about $5,000,000 from those responsible.

1 For this building, the legislature in 1901 allocated $4,000,000, requiring that it be finished by January 1, 1907. It was completed on time, with the building commission's net spending being around $3,970,000. Although the legislature hadn’t set aside funds for furniture and decoration, the state Board of Public Grounds and Buildings (which included the governor, auditor-general, and treasurer) took on the task of fully furnishing and decorating the building within the deadline, spending over $8,600,000 for that purpose. In May 1906, a new treasurer took office and discovered that many furniture and decoration charges were billed twice—once at a normal rate and again at an unusually high figure. In 1907, the legislature formed a committee to look into the fraud allegations. The committee concluded that the Board of Grounds and Buildings did not have the authority to manage the decorating and furnishing of the state house; it had illegally approved certain expenses; and that the architect and contractors had submitted fraudulent invoices and certificates. Various indictments followed: in the first trial for conspiracy related to the furniture procurement, the contractor, former auditor-general, state treasurer, and superintendent of public grounds and buildings were all convicted, and in December 1908, they received two-year prison sentences and a $500 fine each; in 1910, a lawsuit was filed to recover about $5,000,000 from those accountable.


HARRISMITH, a town in the Orange Free State, 60 m. N.W. by rail of Ladysmith, Natal, and 240 m. N.E. of Bloemfontein via Bethlehem. Pop. (1904) 8300 (including troops 1921). It is built on the banks of the Wilge, 5250 ft. above the sea and some 20 m. W. of the Drakensberg. Three miles N. is the Platberg, a table-shaped mountain rising 2000 ft. above the town, whence an excellent supply of water is derived. The town is well laid out and several of the streets are lined with trees. Most of the houses are built of white stone quarried in the neighbourhood. The Kaffirs, who numbered in 1904 3483, live in a separate location. Harrismith has a dry, bracing climate and enjoys a high reputation in South Africa as a health resort. It serves one of the best-watered and most fertile agricultural and pastoral districts of the province, of which it is the chief eastern trading centre. Wool and hides are the principal exports.

HARRISMITH, is a town in the Orange Free State, 60 miles northwest by rail from Ladysmith, Natal, and 240 miles northeast of Bloemfontein via Bethlehem. The population in 1904 was 8,300 (including 1,921 troops). It is situated on the banks of the Wilge River, at an elevation of 5,250 feet above sea level, and about 20 miles west of the Drakensberg Mountains. Three miles to the north is Platberg, a flat-topped mountain that rises 2,000 feet above the town, providing a great water supply. The town is well-planned, with several tree-lined streets. Most of the houses are made from white stone sourced from the nearby quarries. The local Black community, numbering 3,483 in 1904, lives in a designated area. Harrismith has a dry, invigorating climate and is well-regarded in South Africa as a health resort. It serves one of the best-watered and most fertile agricultural and pastoral regions of the province, being the primary eastern trading center. The main exports are wool and hides.

Harrismith was founded in 1849, the site first chosen being on the Elands river, where the small town of Aberfeldig now is; but the advantages of the present site soon became apparent and the settlement was removed. The founders were Sir Harry Smith (after whom the town is named), then governor of Cape Colony, and Major Henry D. Warden, at that time British resident at Bloemfontein, whose name is perpetuated in that of the principal street. In a cave about 2 m. from the town are well-preserved Bushman paintings.

Harrismith was established in 1849, originally located on the Elands River, where the small town of Aberfeldig is now; however, the benefits of the current location quickly became clear, and the settlement was moved. The founders were Sir Harry Smith (who the town is named after), then governor of Cape Colony, and Major Henry D. Warden, who was the British resident at Bloemfontein at the time, with his name carried on in that of the main street. About 2 miles from the town, there's a cave with well-preserved Bushman paintings.


HARRISON, BENJAMIN (1833-1901), the twenty-third president of the United States, was born at North Bend, near Cincinnati, Ohio, on the 20th of August 1833. His great-grandfather, Benjamin Harrison of Virginia (c. 1740-1791), was a signer of the Declaration of Independence. His grandfather, William Henry Harrison (1773-1841), was ninth president of the United States. His father, John Scott Harrison (1804-1878), represented his district in the national House of Representatives in 1853-1857. Benjamin’s youth was passed upon the ancestral farm, and as opportunity afforded he attended school in the log school-house near his home. He was prepared for college by a private tutor, studied for two years at the Farmers’ College, near Cincinnati, and in 1852 graduated from Miami University, at that time the leading educational institution in the State of Ohio. From his youth he was diligent in his studies and a great reader, and during his college life showed a marked talent for extemporaneous speaking. He pursued the study of law, partly in the office of Bellamy Storer (1798-1875), a leading lawyer and judge of Cincinnati, and in 1853 he was admitted to the bar. At the age of twenty-one he removed to Indianapolis. He had but one acquaintance in the place, the clerk of the federal court, who permitted him to occupy a desk in his office and place at the door his sign as a lawyer. Waiting for professional business, he was content to act as court crier for two dollars and a half a day; but he soon gave indications of his talent, and his studious habits and attention to his cases rapidly brought him clients. Within a few years he took rank among the leading members of the profession at a bar which included some of the ablest lawyers of the country. His legal career was early interrupted by the Civil War. His whole heart was enlisted in the anti-slavery cause, and during the second year of the war he accepted a commission from the governor of the state as second-lieutenant and speedily raised a regiment. He became its colonel, and as such continued in the Union Army until the close of the war, and on the 23rd of January 1865 was breveted a brigadier-general of volunteers for “ability and manifest energy and gallantry in command of brigade.” He participated with his regiment in various engagements during General Don Carlos Buell’s campaigns in Kentucky and Tennessee in 1862 and 1863; took part in General W. T. Sherman’s march on Atlanta in 1864 and in the Nashville campaign of the same year; and was transferred early in 1865 to Sherman’s army in its march through the Carolinas. As the commander of a brigade he served with particular distinction in the battles of Kenesaw Mountain (June 29-July 3, 1864), Peach Tree Creek (20th of July 1864) and Nashville (15th-16th of December 1864).

HARRISON, BENJAMIN (1833-1901), the twenty-third president of the United States, was born in North Bend, near Cincinnati, Ohio, on August 20, 1833. His great-grandfather, Benjamin Harrison of Virginia (c. 1740-1791), was a signer of the Declaration of Independence. His grandfather, William Henry Harrison (1773-1841), served as the ninth president of the United States. His father, John Scott Harrison (1804-1878), represented his district in the national House of Representatives from 1853 to 1857. Benjamin spent his childhood on the family farm and attended school at a log schoolhouse nearby as opportunities arose. He was prepared for college by a private tutor, studied for two years at Farmers’ College near Cincinnati, and graduated from Miami University in 1852, which was then the top educational institution in Ohio. From a young age, he was dedicated to his studies and an avid reader, showing a strong talent for extemporaneous speaking during his college years. He studied law partly in the office of Bellamy Storer (1798-1875), a prominent lawyer and judge in Cincinnati, and was admitted to the bar in 1853. At the age of twenty-one, he moved to Indianapolis. He only knew one person there, the clerk of the federal court, who let him use a desk in his office and put up his lawyer sign at the door. While waiting for clients, he worked as a court crier for two dollars and fifty cents a day; however, he quickly demonstrated his skills, and his hard work and focus on his cases soon attracted clients. Within a few years, he ranked among the leading attorneys in a bar that included some of the best lawyers in the country. His legal career was interrupted early by the Civil War. He passionately supported the anti-slavery cause, and during the war's second year, he received a commission from the state governor as a second lieutenant and quickly raised a regiment. He became its colonel and served in the Union Army until the war ended, being promoted to brevet brigadier general of volunteers on January 23, 1865, for “ability and manifest energy and gallantry in command of brigade.” He fought with his regiment in various battles during General Don Carlos Buell’s campaigns in Kentucky and Tennessee in 1862 and 1863; participated in General W. T. Sherman’s march on Atlanta in 1864 and the Nashville campaign the same year; and was transferred early in 1865 to Sherman’s army during its march through the Carolinas. As the commander of a brigade, he distinguished himself in the battles of Kenesaw Mountain (June 29-July 3, 1864), Peach Tree Creek (July 20, 1864), and Nashville (December 15-16, 1864).

Allowing for this interval of military service, he applied himself exclusively for twenty-four years to his legal work. The only office he held was that of reporter of the supreme court of Indiana for two terms (1860-1862 and 1864-1868), and this was strictly in the line of his profession. He was a devoted member of the Republican party, but not a politician in the strict sense. Once he became a candidate for governor, in 1876, but his candidature was a forlorn hope, undertaken from a sense of duty after the regular nominee had withdrawn. He took a deep interest in the campaign which resulted in the election of James A. Garfield as president, and was offered by him a place in his cabinet; but this he declined, having been elected a member of the United States Senate, in which he took his seat on the 4th of March 1881. He was chairman of the committee on territories, and took an active part in urging the admission as states of North Dakota, South Dakota, Washington, Idaho and Montana, which finally came into the Union during his presidency. He served also on the committee of military and Indian affairs, the committee on foreign relations and others, was prominent in the discussion of matters brought before the Senate from these committees, advocated the enlargement of the navy and the reform of the civil service, and opposed the 23 pension veto messages of President Cleveland. Having failed to secure a re-election to the Senate in 1887, Harrison was nominated by the Republican party for the presidency in 1888, and defeated Grover Cleveland, the candidate of the Democratic party, receiving 233 electoral votes to Cleveland’s 168. Among the measures and events distinguishing his term as president were the following: The meeting of the Pan-American Congress at Washington; the passage of the McKinley Tariff Bill and of the Sherman Silver Bill of 1890; the suppressing of the Louisiana Lottery; the enlargement of the navy; further advance in civil service reform; the convocation by the United States of an international monetary conference; the establishment of commercial reciprocity with many countries of America and Europe; the peaceful settlement of a controversy with Chile; the negotiation of a Hawaiian Annexation Treaty, which, however, before its ratification, his successor withdrew from the Senate; the settlement of difficulties with Germany concerning the Samoan Islands, and the adjustment by arbitration with Great Britain of the Bering Sea fur-seal question. His administration was marked by a revival of American industries and a reduction of the public debt, and at its conclusion the country was left in a condition of prosperity and on friendly terms with foreign nations. He was nominated by his party in 1892 for re-election, but was defeated by Cleveland, this result being due, at least in part, to the labour strikes which occurred during the presidential campaign and arrayed the labour unions against the tariff party.

Allowing for this time of military service, he focused solely on his legal career for twenty-four years. The only position he held was as a reporter for the Indiana Supreme Court for two terms (1860-1862 and 1864-1868), which was entirely relevant to his profession. He was a dedicated member of the Republican Party but wasn't a politician in the typical sense. He ran for governor in 1876, but that campaign was a long shot, driven by a sense of duty after the main nominee stepped aside. He was deeply involved in the campaign that led to James A. Garfield being elected president, and Garfield offered him a position in his cabinet; however, he turned it down to take his seat in the United States Senate on March 4, 1881. He was the chairman of the committee on territories and played an active role in pushing for the admission of North Dakota, South Dakota, Washington, Idaho, and Montana as states, which eventually joined the Union during his presidency. He also served on the military and Indian affairs committee, the foreign relations committee, and others. He was prominent in discussions on various issues brought before the Senate from these committees, supported expanding the navy and reforming the civil service, and opposed the pension veto messages from President Cleveland. After not being re-elected to the Senate in 1887, Harrison was nominated by the Republican Party for president in 1888 and won against Grover Cleveland, the Democratic candidate, receiving 233 electoral votes to Cleveland’s 168. Key events during his presidency included the Pan-American Congress in Washington, the passage of the McKinley Tariff Bill and the Sherman Silver Bill of 1890, the suppression of the Louisiana Lottery, the expansion of the navy, further progress in civil service reform, the organization of an international monetary conference by the United States, the establishment of commercial reciprocity with several American and European countries, a peaceful resolution of a dispute with Chile, negotiation of a Hawaiian Annexation Treaty—though his successor withdrew it from the Senate before ratification—settling issues with Germany regarding the Samoan Islands, and resolving the Bering Sea fur-seal controversy with Great Britain through arbitration. His presidency witnessed a resurgence of American industries and a decrease in public debt, leaving the country in a prosperous state and on good terms with foreign nations. He was nominated by his party in 1892 for re-election but lost to Cleveland, partly due to the labor strikes that happened during the campaign, which turned labor unions against the tariff party.

After leaving public life he resumed the practice of the law, and in 1898 was retained by the government of Venezuela as its leading counsel in the arbitration of its boundary dispute with Great Britain. In this capacity he appeared before the international tribunal of arbitration at Paris in 1899, worthily maintaining the reputation of the American bar. After the Spanish-American War he strongly disapproved of the colonial policy of his party, which, however, he continued to support. He occupied a portion of his leisure in writing a book, entitled This Country of Ours (1897), treating of the organization and administration of the government of the United States, and a collection of essays by him was published posthumously, in 1901, under the title Views of an Ex-President. He died at Indianapolis on the 13th of March 1901. Harrison’s distinguishing trait of character, to which his success is to be most largely attributed, was his thoroughness. He was somewhat reserved in manner, and this led to the charge in political circles that he was cold and unsympathetic; but no one gathered around him more devoted and loyal friends, and his dignified bearing in and out of office commanded the hearty respect of his countrymen.

After stepping away from public life, he went back to practicing law, and in 1898, he was hired by the government of Venezuela as its main legal advisor in the arbitration of its boundary dispute with Great Britain. In this role, he represented Venezuela before the international arbitration tribunal in Paris in 1899, successfully upholding the reputation of American lawyers. After the Spanish-American War, he strongly disagreed with his party's colonial policy, although he continued to support them. He spent part of his free time writing a book titled This Country of Ours (1897), which discussed the organization and operation of the U.S. government, and a collection of his essays was published posthumously in 1901 under the title Views of an Ex-President. He passed away in Indianapolis on March 13, 1901. Harrison's defining characteristic, which greatly contributed to his success, was his thoroughness. While he was somewhat reserved in nature, leading some in political circles to label him as cold and unsympathetic, he gathered a group of devoted and loyal friends around him, and his dignified presence in and out of office earned him the genuine respect of his fellow citizens.

President Harrison was twice married; in 1853 to Miss Caroline Lavinia Scott, by whom he had a son and a daughter, and in 1896 to Mrs Mary Scott Lord Dimmock, by whom he had a daughter.

President Harrison was married twice; first in 1853 to Miss Caroline Lavinia Scott, with whom he had a son and a daughter, and then in 1896 to Mrs. Mary Scott Lord Dimmock, by whom he had a daughter.

A “campaign” biography was published by Lew Wallace (Philadelphia, 1888), and a sketch of his life may be found in Presidents of the United States (New York, 1894), edited by James Grant Wilson.

A “campaign” biography was published by Lew Wallace (Philadelphia, 1888), and a sketch of his life can be found in Presidents of the United States (New York, 1894), edited by James Grant Wilson.

(J. W. Fo.)

HARRISON, FREDERIC (1831-  ), English jurist and historian, was born in London on the 18th of October 1831. Members of his family (originally Leicestershire yeomen) had been lessees of Sutton Place, Guildford, of which he wrote an interesting account (Annals of an Old Manor House, 1893). He was educated at King’s College school and at Wadham College, Oxford, where, after taking a first-class in Literae Humaniores in 1853, he became fellow and tutor. He was called to the bar in 1858, and, in addition to his practice in equity cases, soon began to distinguish himself as an effective contributor to the higher-class reviews. Two articles in the Westminster Review, one on the Italian question, which procured him the special thanks of Cavour, the other on Essays and Reviews, which had the probably undesigned effect of stimulating the attack on the book, attracted especial notice. A few years later Mr Harrison worked at the codification of the law with Lord Westbury, of whom he contributed an interesting notice to Nash’s biography of the chancellor. His special interest in legislation for the working classes led him to be placed upon the Trades Union Commission of 1867-1869; he was secretary to the commission for the digest of the law, 1869-1870; and was from 1877 to 1889 professor of jurisprudence and international law under the council of legal education. A follower of the positive philosophy, but in conflict with Richard Congreve (q.v.) as to details, he led the Positivists who split off and founded Newton Hall in 1881, and he was president of the English Positivist Committee from 1880 to 1905; he was also editor and part author of the Positivist New Calendar of Great Men (1892), and wrote much on Comte and Positivism. Of his separate publications, the most important are his lives of Cromwell (1888), William the Silent (1897), Ruskin (1902), and Chatham (1905); his Meaning of History (1862; enlarged 1894) and Byzantine History in the Early Middle Ages (1900); and his essays on Early Victorian Literature (1896) and The Choice of Books (1886) are remarkable alike for generous admiration and good sense. In 1904 he published a “romantic monograph” of the 10th century, Theophano, and in 1906 a verse tragedy, Nicephorus. An advanced and vehement Radical in politics and Progressive in municipal affairs, Mr Harrison in 1886 stood unsuccessfully for parliament against Sir John Lubbock for London University. In 1889 he was elected an alderman of the London County Council, but resigned in 1893. In 1870 he married Ethel Berta, daughter of Mr William Harrison, by whom he had four sons. George Gissing, the novelist, was at one time their tutor; and in 1905 Mr Harrison wrote a preface to Gissing’s Veranilda (see also Mr Austin Harrison’s article on Gissing in the Nineteenth Century, September 1906). As a religious teacher, literary critic, historian and jurist, Mr Harrison took a prominent part in the life of his time, and his writings, though often violently controversial on political and social subjects, and in their judgment and historical perspective characterized by a modern Radical point of view, are those of an accomplished scholar, and of one whose wide knowledge of literature was combined with independence of thought and admirable vigour of style. In 1907 he published The Creed of a Layman, Apologia pro fide mea, in explanation of his religious position.

HARRISON, FREDERIC (1831-  ), English lawyer and historian, was born in London on October 18, 1831. His family, originally from Leicestershire, had leased Sutton Place, Guildford, about which he wrote an engaging account in Annals of an Old Manor House (1893). He was educated at King’s College School and Wadham College, Oxford, where he earned a first-class degree in Literae Humaniores in 1853 and later became a fellow and tutor. He was called to the bar in 1858 and, in addition to his work on equity cases, quickly made a name for himself as a prominent contributor to highbrow journals. Two articles in the Westminster Review caught particular attention—one discussing the Italian question, which earned him special thanks from Cavour, and another on Essays and Reviews, which may have unintentionally sparked criticism of the book. A few years later, Mr. Harrison collaborated with Lord Westbury on codifying the law and wrote an interesting notice about him for Nash’s biography of the chancellor. His strong interest in legislation for the working class led to his appointment to the Trades Union Commission from 1867 to 1869; he served as secretary to the commission for the law digest from 1869 to 1870; and from 1877 to 1889, he was a professor of jurisprudence and international law under the Council of Legal Education. A proponent of positive philosophy, although he had differences with Richard Congreve (q.v.), he led a breakaway group of Positivists that founded Newton Hall in 1881 and served as president of the English Positivist Committee from 1880 to 1905. He also edited and co-authored the Positivist New Calendar of Great Men (1892) and wrote extensively on Comte and Positivism. Among his individual publications, the most significant include his biographies of Cromwell (1888), William the Silent (1897), Ruskin (1902), and Chatham (1905); his works Meaning of History (1862; expanded 1894) and Byzantine History in the Early Middle Ages (1900); as well as his essays on Early Victorian Literature (1896) and The Choice of Books (1886), which are notable for their generous appreciation and sound reasoning. In 1904, he published a “romantic monograph” of the 10th century, titled Theophano, and in 1906, he wrote a verse tragedy, Nicephorus. An outspoken and passionate Radical in politics and a Progressive in local government matters, Mr. Harrison ran unsuccessfully for parliament in 1886 against Sir John Lubbock for London University. In 1889, he was elected an alderman of the London County Council but resigned in 1893. He married Ethel Berta in 1870, the daughter of Mr. William Harrison, and they had four sons. George Gissing, the novelist, was their tutor for a time, and in 1905, Mr. Harrison wrote a preface for Gissing’s Veranilda (see also Mr. Austin Harrison’s article on Gissing in the Nineteenth Century, September 1906). As a religious educator, literary critic, historian, and lawyer, Mr. Harrison played a prominent role in the intellectual life of his era. His writings, often contentious regarding political and social issues and reflecting a modern Radical perspective with keen judgment and historical insight, showcase him as a skilled scholar with a wide-ranging knowledge of literature combined with independent thought and vibrant style. In 1907, he published The Creed of a Layman, Apologia pro fide mea, to clarify his religious beliefs.


HARRISON, JOHN (1693-1776), English horologist, was the son of a carpenter, and was born at Faulby, near Pontefract in Yorkshire, in the year 1693. Thence his father and family removed in 1700 to Barrow in Lincolnshire. Young Harrison at first learned his father’s trade, and worked at it for several years, at the same time occasionally making a little money by land-measuring and surveying. The bent of his mind, however, was towards mechanical pursuits. In 1715 he made a clock with wooden wheels, which is in the patent museum at South Kensington, and in 1726 he devised his ingenious “gridiron pendulum,” which maintains its length unaltered in spite of variations of temperature (see Clock). Another invention of his was a recoil clock escapement in which friction was reduced to a minimum, and he was the first to employ the commonly used and effective form of “going ratchet,” which is a spring arrangement for keeping the timepiece going at its usual rate during the interval of being wound up.

HARRISON, JOHN (1693-1776), an English clockmaker, was born in 1693 in Faulby, near Pontefract in Yorkshire, to a carpenter father. In 1700, his family moved to Barrow in Lincolnshire. Young Harrison initially learned his father's trade and worked in it for several years while also making some extra money through land-measuring and surveying. However, his true passion was mechanical work. In 1715, he created a clock with wooden wheels, which is now displayed in the patent museum at South Kensington. In 1726, he invented the clever “gridiron pendulum,” which maintains its length regardless of temperature changes (see Clock). Another of his inventions was a recoil clock escapement that minimized friction, and he was the first to use the effective “going ratchet,” a spring mechanism that keeps the clock running at its regular pace while being wound up.

In Harrison’s time the British government had become fully alive to the necessity of determining more accurately the longitude at sea. For this purpose they passed an act in 1713 offering rewards of £10,000, £15,000 and £20,000 to any who should construct chronometers that would determine the longitude within 60, 40 and 30 m. respectively. Harrison applied himself vigorously to the task, and in 1735 went to the Board of Longitude with a watch which he also showed to Edmund Halley, George Graham and others. Through their influence he was allowed to proceed in a king’s ship to Lisbon to test it; and the result was so satisfactory that he was paid £500 to carry out further improvements. Harrison worked at the subject with the utmost perseverance, and, after making several watches, went up to London in 1761 with one which he considered almost perfect. His son William was sent on a voyage to Jamaica to test it; and, on his return to Portsmouth in 1762, it was found to have lost 24 only 1 minute 54½ seconds. This was surprisingly accurate, as it determined the longitude within 18 m., and Harrison claimed the full reward of £20,000; but though from time to time he received sums on account, it was not till 1773 that he was paid in full. In these watches compensation for changes of temperature was applied for the first time by means of a “compensation-curb,” designed to alter the effective length of the balance-spring in proportion to the expansion or contraction caused by variations of temperature. Harrison died in London on the 24th of March 1776. His want of early education was felt by him greatly throughout life. He was unfortunately never able to express his ideas clearly in writing, although in conversation he could give a very precise and exact account of his many intricate mechanical contrivances.

In Harrison’s time, the British government realized the importance of accurately determining longitude at sea. To address this, they passed an act in 1713 offering rewards of £10,000, £15,000, and £20,000 to anyone who could create chronometers that would determine longitude within 60, 40, and 30 minutes, respectively. Harrison worked diligently on this task and in 1735 presented a watch to the Board of Longitude, which he also showcased to Edmund Halley, George Graham, and others. With their support, he was allowed to travel on a king’s ship to Lisbon to test it; the results were so impressive that he received £500 to develop further improvements. Harrison continued to work on this with remarkable determination, and after several attempts, he traveled to London in 1761 with a watch he deemed nearly perfect. His son William was sent on a journey to Jamaica to test it; when they returned to Portsmouth in 1762, it was found to have lost only 1 minute and 54½ seconds. This level of accuracy was exceptional, determining the longitude within 18 minutes, and Harrison claimed the full reward of £20,000. However, while he received partial payments over time, he wasn’t fully paid until 1773. In these watches, he introduced a compensation mechanism for temperature changes for the first time, using a “compensation-curb” designed to adjust the effective length of the balance-spring in response to temperature variations. Harrison passed away in London on March 24, 1776. He felt the lack of early education keenly throughout his life and unfortunately could never clearly express his ideas in writing, although he could explain his many complex mechanical inventions very precisely in conversation.

Among his writings were a Description concerning such Mechanism as will afford a Nice or True Mensuration of Time (1775), and The Principles of Mr Harrison’s Timekeeper, published by order of the Commissioners of Longitude (1767).

Among his writings were a Description concerning such Mechanism as will afford a Nice or True Mensuration of Time (1775), and The Principles of Mr Harrison’s Timekeeper, published by order of the Commissioners of Longitude (1767).


HARRISON, THOMAS (1606-1660), English parliamentarian, a native of Newcastle-under-Lyme in Staffordshire, the son of a butcher and mayor of that town, was baptized in 1606. He was placed with an attorney of Clifford’s Inn, but at the beginning of the war in 1642 he enlisted in Essex’s lifeguards, became major in Fleetwood’s regiment of horse under the earl of Manchester, was present at Marston Moor, at Naseby, Langport and at the taking of Winchester and Basing, as well as at the siege of Oxford. At Basing Harrison was accused of having killed a prisoner in cold blood. In 1646 he was returned to parliament for Wendover, and served in Ireland in 1647 under Lord Lisle, returning to England in May, when he took the side of the army in the dispute with the parliament and obtained from Fairfax a regiment of horse. In November he opposed the negotiations with the king, whom he styled “a man of blood” to be called to account, and he declaimed against the House of Lords. At the surprise of Lambert’s quarters at Appleby on the 18th of July 1648, in the second civil war, he distinguished himself by his extraordinary daring and was severely wounded. He showed a special zeal in bringing about the trial of the king. Charles was entrusted to his care on being brought up from Hurst Castle to London, and believed that Harrison intended his assassination, but was at once favourably impressed by bis bearing and reassured by his disclaiming any such design. Harrison was assiduous in his attendance at the trial, and signed the death-warrant with the fullest conviction that it was his duty. He took part in suppressing the royalist rising in the midlands in May 1649, and in July was appointed to the chief command in South Wales, where he is said to have exercised his powers with exceptional severity. On the 20th of February 1651 he became a member of the council of state, and during Cromwell’s absence in Scotland held the supreme military command in England. He failed in stopping the march of the royalists into England at Knutsford on the 16th of August 1651, but after the battle of Worcester he rendered great service in pursuing and capturing the fugitives. Later he pressed on Cromwell the necessity of dismissing the Long Parliament, and it was he who at Cromwell’s bidding, on the 20th of April 1653, laid hands on Speaker Lenthall and compelled him to vacate the chair. He was president of the council of thirteen which now exercised authority, and his idea of government appears to have been an assembly nominated by the congregations, on a strictly religious basis, such as Barebone’s Parliament which now assembled, of which he was a member and a ruling spirit. Harrison belonged to the faction of Fifth Monarchy men, whose political ideals were entirely destroyed by Cromwell’s assumption of the protectorate. He went immediately into violent opposition, was deprived of his commission on the 22nd of December 1653, and on the 3rd of February 1654 was ordered to confine himself to his father’s house in Staffordshire. Suspected of complicity in the plots of the anabaptists, he was imprisoned for a short time in September, and on that occasion was sent for by Cromwell, who endeavoured in a friendly manner to persuade him to desist. He, however, incurred the suspicions of the administration afresh, and on the 15th of February 1655 he was imprisoned in Carisbrooke Castle, being liberated in March 1656 when he took up his residence at Highgate with his family. In April 1657 he was arrested for supposed complicity in Venner’s conspiracy, and again once more in February 1658, when he was imprisoned in the Tower. At the Restoration, Harrison, who was excepted from the Act of Indemnity, refused to take any steps to save his life, to give any undertaking not to conspire against the government or to flee. “Being so clear in the thing,” he declared, “I durst not turn my back nor step a foot out of the way by reason I had been engaged in the service of so glorious and great a God.” He was arrested in Staffordshire in May 1660 and brought to trial on the 11th of October. He made a manly and straightforward defence, pleading the authority of parliament and adding, “May be I might be a little mistaken, but I did it all according to the best of my understanding, desiring to make the revealed will of God in His holy scriptures a guide to me.” At his execution, which took place at Charing Cross on the 13th of October 1660, he behaved with great fortitude.

HARRISON, THOMAS (1606-1660), an English parliamentarian, born in Newcastle-under-Lyme, Staffordshire, was the son of a butcher and the town's mayor, and was baptized in 1606. He was apprenticed to a lawyer at Clifford’s Inn, but when the war began in 1642, he joined Essex’s lifeguards, became a major in Fleetwood’s horse regiment under the earl of Manchester, and fought at Marston Moor, Naseby, Langport, and during the capture of Winchester and Basing, as well as the siege of Oxford. At Basing, Harrison was accused of killing a prisoner in cold blood. In 1646, he was elected to parliament for Wendover and served in Ireland in 1647 under Lord Lisle, returning to England in May when he sided with the army in the conflict with parliament and received a horse regiment from Fairfax. In November, he opposed negotiations with the king, whom he called “a man of blood” responsible for his actions, and spoke out against the House of Lords. During the surprise attack on Lambert’s quarters at Appleby on July 18, 1648, in the second civil war, he distinguished himself through his exceptional bravery and was severely injured. He was particularly focused on ensuring the king's trial. Charles was entrusted to him when brought from Hurst Castle to London and suspected that Harrison planned his assassination but was soon reassured by his demeanor and his denial of such intentions. Harrison was diligent in attending the trial and signed the death warrant, fully believing it was his duty. He participated in quelling the royalist uprising in the Midlands in May 1649 and in July was appointed to lead in South Wales, where he reportedly exercised his authority with unusual harshness. On February 20, 1651, he joined the council of state, and during Cromwell’s absence in Scotland, he held the top military command in England. He was unable to stop the royalists’ advance into England at Knutsford on August 16, 1651, but after the Battle of Worcester, he played a significant role in pursuing and capturing the fleeing troops. Later, he urged Cromwell to dissolve the Long Parliament and, at Cromwell’s request on April 20, 1653, physically removed Speaker Lenthall from his position. He became president of the council of thirteen that now held authority, and his vision of governance seemed to be an assembly chosen by the congregations based on religious grounds, like Barebone’s Parliament, where he was both a member and a leading figure. Harrison was part of the Fifth Monarchy men faction, whose political ideals were utterly undermined by Cromwell’s rise to power as protector. He soon turned against him violently, was stripped of his commission on December 22, 1653, and was ordered to confine himself to his father's house in Staffordshire on February 3, 1654. Suspected of involvement in the anabaptists' plots, he was imprisoned briefly in September and was called in by Cromwell, who tried to persuade him to back down in a friendly manner. However, he again fell under the administration's suspicion and was jailed in Carisbrooke Castle on February 15, 1655, released in March 1656, when he moved to Highgate with his family. In April 1657, he was arrested for alleged involvement in Venner’s conspiracy and was imprisoned again in February 1658 in the Tower. At the Restoration, Harrison, who was excluded from the Act of Indemnity, refused to attempt to save his life or commit to not conspiring against the government or fleeing. “Being so clear in the thing,” he stated, “I could not turn my back nor step out of the way because I had been engaged in the service of such a glorious and great God.” He was arrested in Staffordshire in May 1660 and put on trial on October 11. He delivered a straightforward defense, invoking parliamentary authority, and added, “I may have been a little mistaken, but I acted according to my best understanding, seeking to make the revealed will of God in His holy scriptures my guide.” At his execution, which took place at Charing Cross on October 13, 1660, he displayed remarkable courage.

Richard Baxter, who was acquainted with him, describes Harrison as “a man of excellent natural parts for affection and oratory, but not well seen in the principles of his religion of a sanguine complexion, naturally of such a vivacity, hilarity and alacrity as another man hath when he hath drunken a cup too much, but naturally also so far from humble thoughts of himself that it was his ruin.” Cromwell also complained of his excessive eagerness. “Harrison is an honest man and aims at good things, yet from the impatience of his spirit will not wait the Lord’s leisure but hurries me on to that which he and all honest men will have cause to repent.” Harrison was an eloquent and fluent expounder of the scriptures, and his “raptures” on the field of victory are recorded by Baxter. He was of the chief of those “fiery spirits” whose ardent and emotional religion inspired their political action, and who did wonders during the period of struggle and combat, but who later, in the more sober and difficult sphere of constructive statesmanship, showed themselves perfectly incapable.

Richard Baxter, who knew him, describes Harrison as “a man with great natural talent for passion and speaking, but not well-versed in the fundamentals of his faith. He had a lively and cheerful personality, similar to someone who has had one too many drinks, but he also lacked humility, which ultimately led to his downfall.” Cromwell also noted his excessive eagerness. “Harrison is an honest man who aims for good things, yet his impatient spirit won't wait for the Lord's timing and pushes me into actions that he and all good people will later regret.” Harrison was a gifted and articulate interpreter of the scriptures, and Baxter recorded his “raptures” on the battlefield. He was among the foremost of those “fiery spirits” whose passionate and emotional faith drove their political actions, achieving great things during the struggles and conflicts, but who later proved completely incapable in the more serious and challenging realm of constructive governance.

Harrison married about 1648 Katherine, daughter and heiress of Ralph Harrison of Highgate in Middlesex, by whom he had several children, all of whom, however, appear to have died in infancy.

Harrison married around 1648 to Katherine, the daughter and heiress of Ralph Harrison of Highgate in Middlesex. Together, they had several children, but unfortunately, all of them seem to have died in infancy.

See the article on Harrison by C. H. Firth in the Dict. of Nat. Biog.; Life of Harrison by C. H. Simpkinson (1905); Notes and Queries, 9 series, xi. 211.

See the article on Harrison by C. H. Firth in the Dict. of Nat. Biog.; Life of Harrison by C. H. Simpkinson (1905); Notes and Queries, 9 series, xi. 211.


HARRISON, THOMAS ALEXANDER (1853-  ), American artist, was born in Philadelphia on the 17th of January 1853. He was a pupil of the Pennsylvania Academy of Fine Arts and of the École des Beaux-Arts, Paris, whither he went in 1878, having previously been with a United States government survey expedition on the Pacific coast. Chafing under the restraints of the schools, he went into Brittany, and at Pont Aven and Concarneau turned his attention to marine painting and landscape. In 1882 he sent a figure-piece to the Salon, a fisher boy on the beach, which he called “Châteaux en Espagne.” This attracted attention, and in 1885 he received an honourable mention, the first of many awards conferred upon him, including the Temple gold medal (Pennsylvania Academy of Fine Arts, Philadelphia, 1887), first medal, Paris Exhibition (1889), and medals in Munich, Brussels, Ghent, Vienna and elsewhere. He became a member of the Legion of Honour and officier of Public Instruction, Paris; a member of the Société Nationale des Beaux-Arts, Paris; of the Royal Institute of Painters in Oil Colours, London; of the Secession societies of Munich, Vienna and Berlin; of the National Academy of Design, the Society of American Artists, New York, and other art bodies. In the Salon of 1885 he had a large canvas of several nude women, called “In Arcady,” a remarkable study of flesh tones in light and shade which had a strong influence on the younger men of the day. But his reputation rests rather on his marine pictures, long waves rolling in on the beach, and great stretches of open sea under poetic conditions of light and colour.

HARRISON, THOMAS ALEXANDER (1853-  ), American artist, was born in Philadelphia on January 17, 1853. He studied at the Pennsylvania Academy of Fine Arts and the École des Beaux-Arts in Paris, which he joined in 1878 after taking part in a U.S. government survey expedition on the Pacific coast. Frustrated by the limitations of the schools, he went to Brittany, where in Pont Aven and Concarneau, he focused on marine painting and landscapes. In 1882, he submitted a piece to the Salon featuring a fisherman boy on the beach, titled “Châteaux en Espagne.” This gained attention, and in 1885, he received an honorable mention, the first of many accolades he would earn, including the Temple gold medal (Pennsylvania Academy of Fine Arts, Philadelphia, 1887), first medal at the Paris Exhibition (1889), and medals in Munich, Brussels, Ghent, Vienna, and elsewhere. He became a member of the Legion of Honour and an officier of Public Instruction in Paris, as well as a member of the Société Nationale des Beaux-Arts in Paris, the Royal Institute of Painters in Oil Colours in London, and the Secession societies in Munich, Vienna, and Berlin, among others, including the National Academy of Design and the Society of American Artists in New York. At the Salon of 1885, he exhibited a large canvas featuring several nude women, titled “In Arcady,” which was a remarkable study of flesh tones in light and shadow that significantly influenced younger artists at the time. However, his reputation primarily rests on his marine paintings, depicting long waves crashing on the beach and expansive seas under poetic light and color conditions.

His brother, Birge Harrison (1854-  ), also a painter, particularly successful in snow scenes, was a pupil of the École 25 des Beaux Arts, Paris, under Cabanel and Carolus Duran; his “November” (honourable mention, 1882) was purchased by the French government. Another brother, Butler Harrison (d. 1886), was a figure painter.

His brother, Birge Harrison (1854-  ), who was also a painter known for his impressive snow scenes, studied at the École 25 des Beaux Arts in Paris under Cabanel and Carolus Duran. His painting “November” received an honorable mention in 1882 and was bought by the French government. Another brother, Butler Harrison (d. 1886), was a figure painter.


HARRISON, WILLIAM (1534-1593), English topographer and antiquary, was born in London on the 18th of April 1534. He was educated, according to his own account, at St Paul’s school and at Westminster under Alexander Nowell. In 1551 he was at Cambridge, but he took his B.A. degree from Christ Church, Oxford, in 1560. He was inducted early in 1559 to the rectory of Radwinter, Essex, on the presentation of Sir William Brooke, Lord Cobham, to whom he had formerly acted as chaplain; and from 1571 to 1581 he held from another patron, Francis de la Wood, the living of Wimbish in the same county. He became canon of Windsor in 1586, and his death and burial are noted in the chapter book of St George’s chapel on the 24th of April 1593.

HARRISON, WILLIAM (1534-1593), an English topographer and antiquarian, was born in London on April 18, 1534. According to his own account, he was educated at St Paul’s School and Westminster under Alexander Nowell. In 1551, he was at Cambridge, but he earned his B.A. degree from Christ Church, Oxford, in 1560. He was appointed to the rectory of Radwinter, Essex, early in 1559 on the recommendation of Sir William Brooke, Lord Cobham, for whom he had previously served as chaplain. From 1571 to 1581, he held the living of Wimbish in the same county from another patron, Francis de la Wood. He became a canon of Windsor in 1586, and his death and burial are recorded in the chapter book of St George’s Chapel on April 24, 1593.

His famous and amusing Description of England was undertaken for the queen’s printer, Reginald Wolfe, who designed the publication of “an universall cosmographie of the whole world ... with particular histories of every knowne nation.” After Wolfe’s death in 1576 this comprehensive plan was reduced to descriptions and histories of England, Scotland and Ireland. The historical section was to be supplied by Raphael Holinshed, the topographical by Harrison. The work was eventually published as The Chronicles of England, Scotland and Ireland ... by Raphael Holinshed and others, and was printed in two black-letter folio volumes in 1577. Harrison’s Description of England, humbly described as his “foule frizeled treatise,” and dedicated to his patron Cobham, is an invaluable survey of the condition of England under Elizabeth, in all its political, religious and social aspects. Harrison is a minute and careful observer of men and things, and his descriptions are enlivened with many examples of a lively and caustic humour which makes the book excellent reading. In spite of his Puritan prejudices, which lead him to regret that the churches had not been cleared of their “pictures in glass” (“by reason of the extreme cost thereof”), and to exhaust his wit on the effeminate Italian fashions of the younger generation, he had an eye for beauty and is loud in his praise of such architectural gems as Henry VII.’s chapel at Westminster. He is properly contemptuous of the snobbery that was even then characteristic of English society; but his account of “how gentlemen are made in England” must be read in full to be appreciated. He is especially instructive on the condition and services of the Church immediately after the Reformation; notably in the fact that, though an ardent Protestant, he is quite unconscious of any breach of continuity in the life and organization of the Church of England.

His well-known and entertaining Description of England was created for the queen’s printer, Reginald Wolfe, who aimed to publish “a universal cosmography of the whole world ... with detailed histories of every known nation.” After Wolfe died in 1576, this ambitious project was scaled down to focus on the descriptions and histories of England, Scotland, and Ireland. The historical part was to be provided by Raphael Holinshed, while the topographical content was handled by Harrison. The work eventually came out as The Chronicles of England, Scotland and Ireland ... by Raphael Holinshed and others, printed as two black-letter folio volumes in 1577. Harrison’s Description of England, modestly referred to as his “foul frizzled treatise,” and dedicated to his patron, Cobham, offers an invaluable overview of England's state under Elizabeth, touching on its political, religious, and social aspects. Harrison is a detailed and observant chronicler, and his descriptions are filled with lively and sharp humor that make the book enjoyable to read. Despite his Puritan biases, which lead him to lament that churches hadn't been stripped of their “pictures in glass” (“due to the high costs”), and to critique the effeminate Italian fashions of the younger crowd, he appreciates beauty and is vocal in his admiration for architectural treasures like Henry VII’s chapel at Westminster. He rightly dismisses the snobbery that was already common in English society; however, his commentary on “how gentlemen are made in England” is worth reading in full to grasp its nuances. He provides valuable insights into the condition and roles of the Church right after the Reformation, notably in the fact that, despite being a passionate Protestant, he doesn't perceive any disruption in the continuity of the life and structure of the Church of England.

Harrison also contributed the translation from Scots into English of Bellenden’s version of Hector Boëce’s Latin Description of Scotland. His other works include a “Chronologie,” giving an account of events from the creation to the year 1593, which is of some value for the period covered by the writer’s lifetime. This, with an elaborate treatise on weights and measures, remains in MS. in the diocesan library of Londonderry.

Harrison also translated Bellenden's version of Hector Boëce's Latin Description of Scotland from Scots into English. His other works include a “Chronology,” which outlines events from creation up to 1593 and provides some valuable insights into the time period of the writer's life. This, along with a detailed study on weights and measures, is still in manuscript form in the diocesan library of Londonderry.

For the later editions of the Chronicles of England ... see Holinshed. The second and third books of Harrison’s Description were edited by Dr F. J. Furnivall for the New Shakspere Society, with extracts from his “Chronologie” and from other contemporary writers, as Shakspere’s England (2 vols., 1877-1878).

For the later editions of the Chronicles of England ... see Holinshed. The second and third books of Harrison’s Description were edited by Dr. F. J. Furnivall for the New Shakspere Society, with excerpts from his “Chronologie” and from other contemporary writers, as Shakspere’s England (2 vols., 1877-1878).


HARRISON, WILLIAM HENRY (1773-1841), ninth president of the United States, was born at Berkeley, Charles City county, Virginia, on the 9th of February 1773, the third son of Benjamin Harrison (c. 1740-1791). His father was long prominent in Virginia politics, and became a member of the Virginia House of Burgesses in 1764, opposing Patrick Henry’s Stamp Act resolutions in the following year; he was a member of the Continental Congress in 1774-1777, signing the Declaration of Independence and serving for a time as president of the Board of War; speaker of the Virginia House of Delegates in 1777-1782; governor of Virginia in 1781-1784; and in 1788 as a member of the Virginia Convention he actively opposed the ratification of the Federal Constitution by his state. William Henry Harrison received a classical education at Hampden-Sidney College, where he was a student in 1787-1790, and began a medical course in Philadelphia, but the death of his father caused him to discontinue his studies, and in November 1791 he entered the army as ensign in the Tenth Regiment at Fort Washington, Cincinnati. In the following year he became a lieutenant, and subsequently acted as aide-de-camp to General Anthony Wayne in the campaign which ended in the battle of Fallen Timbers on the 10th of August 1794. He was promoted to a captaincy in 1797 and for a brief period served as commander of Fort Washington, but resigned from the army in June 1798. Soon afterwards he succeeded Winthrop Sargent as secretary of the North-west Territory. In 1799 he was chosen by the Jeffersonian party of this territory as the delegate of the territory in Congress. While serving in this capacity he devised a plan for disposing of the public lands upon favourable terms to actual settlers, and also assisted in the division of the North-west Territory. It was his ambition to become governor of the more populous eastern portion, which retained the original name, but instead, in January 1800, President John Adams appointed him governor of the newly created Indiana Territory, which comprised until 1809 a much larger area than the present state of the same name. (See Indiana: History.) He was not sworn into office until the 10th of January 1801, and was governor until September 1812. Among the legislative measures of his administration may be mentioned the attempted modification of the slavery clause of the ordinance of 1787 by means of an indenture law—a policy which Harrison favoured; more effective land laws; and legislation for the more equitable treatment of the Indians and for preventing the sale of liquor to them. In 1803 Harrison also became a special commissioner to treat with the Indians “on the subject of boundary or lands,” and as such negotiated various treaties—at Fort Wayne (1803 and 1809), Vincennes (1804 and 1809) and Grouseland (1805)—by which the southern part of the present state of Indiana and portions of the present states of Illinois, Wisconsin and Missouri were opened to settlement. For a few months after the division in 1804 of the Louisiana Purchase into the Orleans Territory and the Louisiana Territory he also acted as governor of the Louisiana Territory—all of the Louisiana Purchase N. of the thirty-third parallel, his jurisdiction then being the greatest in extent ever exercised by a territorial official in the United States.

HARRISON, WILLIAM HENRY (1773-1841), the ninth president of the United States, was born at Berkeley, Charles City County, Virginia, on February 9, 1773, as the third son of Benjamin Harrison (c. 1740-1791). His father was influential in Virginia politics, becoming a member of the Virginia House of Burgesses in 1764, where he opposed Patrick Henry’s Stamp Act resolutions the following year. He served in the Continental Congress from 1774 to 1777, signed the Declaration of Independence, and held the position of president of the Board of War for a time. He was the speaker of the Virginia House of Delegates from 1777 to 1782, governor of Virginia from 1781 to 1784, and actively opposed the ratification of the Federal Constitution by Virginia as a member of the Virginia Convention in 1788. William Henry Harrison received a classical education at Hampden-Sidney College, where he studied from 1787 to 1790, and started a medical program in Philadelphia. However, after his father's death, he had to pause his studies and enlisted in the army as an ensign in the Tenth Regiment at Fort Washington, Cincinnati, in November 1791. The following year, he was promoted to lieutenant and later served as aide-de-camp to General Anthony Wayne during the campaign that led to the Battle of Fallen Timbers on August 10, 1794. He became a captain in 1797 and briefly commanded Fort Washington before resigning from the army in June 1798. Shortly after, he took over as secretary of the Northwest Territory from Winthrop Sargent. In 1799, he was selected by the Jeffersonian party of the territory to be a delegate in Congress. While in this role, he created a plan for disposing of public lands on favorable terms to actual settlers and helped with the division of the Northwest Territory. He aimed to become governor of the eastern part, which kept its original name, but instead, in January 1800, President John Adams appointed him governor of the newly established Indiana Territory, which covered a much larger area than the current state until 1809. (See Indiana: History). He was officially sworn into office on January 10, 1801, and served as governor until September 1812. Some legislative measures during his administration included an attempt to modify the slavery clause of the 1787 ordinance through an indenture law—a policy Harrison supported; improvements in land laws; and laws for fairer treatment of Native Americans and prohibiting alcohol sales to them. In 1803, Harrison also became a special commissioner to negotiate with Native Americans about boundaries and land, negotiating several treaties at Fort Wayne (1803 and 1809), Vincennes (1804 and 1809), and Grouseland (1805), which opened parts of what is now Indiana, Illinois, Wisconsin, and Missouri to settlement. For a few months after the 1804 division of the Louisiana Purchase into the Orleans Territory and the Louisiana Territory, he also served as governor of the Louisiana Territory—all the land north of the thirty-third parallel in the Louisiana Purchase, making his jurisdiction the largest ever held by a territorial official in the United States.

The Indian cessions of 1809, along the Wabash river, aroused the hostility of Tecumseh (q.v.) and his brother, familiarly known as “The Prophet,” who were attempting to combine the tribes between the Ohio and the Great Lakes in opposition to the encroachment of the whites. Several fruitless conferences between the governor and the Indian chiefs, who were believed to be encouraged by the British, resulted in Harrison’s advance with a force of militia and regulars to the Tippecanoe river, where (near the present Lafayette, Ind.) on the 7th of November 1811 he won over the Indians a victory which established his military reputation and was largely responsible for his subsequent nomination and election to the presidency of the United States. From one point of view the battle of Tippecanoe may be regarded as the opening skirmish of the war of 1812. When in the summer of 1812 open hostilities with Great Britain began, Harrison was appointed by Governor Charles Scott of Kentucky major-general in the militia of that state. A few weeks later (22nd August 1812) he was made brigadier-general in the regular U.S. army, and soon afterwards was put in command of all the troops in the north-west, and on the 2nd of March 1813 he was promoted to the rank of major-general. General James Winchester, whom Harrison had ordered to prepare to cross Lake Erie on the ice and surprise Fort Malden, turned back to rescue the threatened American settlement at Frenchtown (now Monroe), on the Raisin river, and there on the 22nd of January 1813 was forced to surrender to Colonel Henry A. Proctor. Harrison’s offensive operations being thus checked, he accomplished nothing that summer except to hold in check Proctor, who (May 1-5) besieged him at Fort Meigs, the American advanced 26 post after the disaster of the river Raisin. After Lieutenant O. H. Perry’s naval victory on the 10th of September 1813, Harrison no longer had to remain on the defensive; he advanced to Detroit, re-occupied the territory surrendered by General William Hull, and on the 5th of October administered a crushing defeat to Proctor at the battle of the Thames.

The Indian land give-ups of 1809, along the Wabash River, sparked the anger of Tecumseh (q.v.) and his brother, known as “The Prophet,” who were trying to unite the tribes between the Ohio River and the Great Lakes against the expansion of white settlers. Several unsuccessful meetings between the governor and the Indian leaders, who were thought to be supported by the British, led to Harrison moving forward with a group of militia and regular troops to the Tippecanoe River. There, near what is now Lafayette, Indiana, he achieved a victory over the Indians on November 7, 1811, which built his military reputation and played a big part in his later nomination and election as President of the United States. From one perspective, the battle of Tippecanoe can be seen as the first clash in the War of 1812. When open conflict with Great Britain began in the summer of 1812, Harrison was appointed by Kentucky Governor Charles Scott as a major general in the state militia. A few weeks later (August 22, 1812), he became a brigadier general in the regular U.S. army and shortly after took command of all troops in the northwest. On March 2, 1813, he was promoted to major general. General James Winchester, whom Harrison had instructed to get ready to cross Lake Erie on the ice and surprise Fort Malden, turned back to protect the threatened American settlement at Frenchtown (now Monroe), on the Raisin River, and there on January 22, 1813, he was forced to surrender to Colonel Henry A. Proctor. With Harrison’s offensive actions halted, he achieved nothing that summer beyond keeping Proctor at bay, who besieged him at Fort Meigs from May 1-5, the American forward base after the disaster at the River Raisin. Following Lieutenant O. H. Perry’s naval victory on September 10, 1813, Harrison no longer had to stay on the defensive; he moved to Detroit, reoccupied the area surrendered by General William Hull, and on October 5 delivered a devastating defeat to Proctor at the battle of the Thames.

In 1814 Harrison received no active assignments to service, and on this account and because the secretary of war (John Armstrong) issued an order to one of Harrison’s subordinates without consulting him, he resigned his commission. Armstrong accepted the resignation without consulting President Madison, but the president later utilized Harrison in negotiating with the north-western Indians, the greater part of whom agreed (22nd July 1814) to a second treaty of Greenville, by which they were to become active allies of the United States, should hostilities with Great Britain continue. This treaty publicly marked an American policy of alliance with these Indians and caused the British peace negotiators at Ghent to abandon them. In the following year Harrison held another conference at Detroit with these tribes in order to settle their future territorial relations with the United States.

In 1814, Harrison didn’t have any active assignments, and because of this, along with the fact that the Secretary of War (John Armstrong) issued an order to one of Harrison’s subordinates without consulting him, he resigned his commission. Armstrong accepted the resignation without checking with President Madison, but the president later involved Harrison in negotiations with the northwestern tribes, the majority of whom agreed (July 22, 1814) to a second treaty of Greenville, which committed them to become active allies of the United States if hostilities with Great Britain continued. This treaty publicly signified an American policy of alliance with these tribes and led the British peace negotiators in Ghent to abandon them. The following year, Harrison held another conference in Detroit with these tribes to settle their future territorial relations with the United States.

From 1816 to 1819 Harrison was a representative in Congress, and as such worked in behalf of more liberal pension laws and a better militia organization, including a system of general military education, of improvements in the navigation of the Ohio, and of relief for purchasers of public lands, and for the strict construction of the power of Congress over the Territories, particularly in regard to slavery. In accordance with this view in 1819 he voted against Tallmadge’s amendment (restricting the extension of slavery) to the enabling act for the admission of Missouri. He also delivered forcible speeches upon the death of Kosciusko and upon General Andrew Jackson’s course in the Floridas, favouring a partial censure of the latter.

From 1816 to 1819, Harrison served as a representative in Congress, where he advocated for more progressive pension laws and improved militia organization, including a system for general military education, enhancements to the navigation of the Ohio River, and relief for those who bought public lands. He also pushed for a strict interpretation of Congress's power over the Territories, especially concerning slavery. In line with this perspective, he voted against Tallmadge's amendment (which limited the expansion of slavery) to the enabling act for Missouri's admission in 1819. Additionally, he gave powerful speeches regarding the death of Kosciusko and General Andrew Jackson's actions in Florida, supporting a partial censure of Jackson.

Harrison was a member of the Ohio senate in 1819-1821, and was an unsuccessful candidate for the National House of Representatives in 1822, when his Missouri vote helped to cause his defeat; he was a presidential elector in 1824, supporting Henry Clay, and from 1825 to 1828 was a member of the United States Senate. In 1828 after unsuccessful efforts to secure for him the command of the army, upon the death of Major-General Jacob Brown, and the nomination for the vice-president, on the ticket with John Quincy Adams, his friends succeeded in getting Harrison appointed as the first minister of the United States to Colombia. He became, however, an early sacrifice to Jackson’s spoils system, being recalled within less than a year, but not until he had involved himself in some awkward diplomatic complications with Bolivar’s autocratic government.

Harrison was a member of the Ohio Senate from 1819 to 1821 and ran unsuccessfully for the National House of Representatives in 1822, when his vote in Missouri contributed to his loss. He served as a presidential elector in 1824, backing Henry Clay, and was a U.S. Senator from 1825 to 1828. In 1828, after trying unsuccessfully to get appointed to command the army following Major-General Jacob Brown's death and to be nominated as vice president on the ticket with John Quincy Adams, his supporters were able to secure his appointment as the first U.S. minister to Colombia. However, he became an early victim of Jackson's spoils system and was recalled in less than a year, but not before he got tangled in some tricky diplomatic situations with Bolivar's authoritarian government.

For some years after his return from Colombia he lived in retirement at North Bend, Ohio. He was occasionally “mentioned” for governor, senator or representative, by the anti-Jackson forces, and delivered a few addresses on agricultural or political topics. Later he became clerk of the court of common pleas of Hamilton county—a lucrative position that was then most acceptable to him. Early in 1835 Harrison began to be mentioned as a suitable presidential candidate, and later in the year he was nominated for the presidency at large public meetings in Pennsylvania, New York and Maryland. In the election of the following year he attracted a large part of the Whig and Anti-Masonic vote of the Middle and Western states and led among the candidates opposing Van Buren, but received only 73 electoral votes while Van Buren received 170. His unexpected strength, due largely to his clear, if non-committal, political record, rendered him the most “available” candidate for the Whig party for the campaign of 1840, and he was nominated by the Whig convention at Harrisburg, Pa., in December 1839, his most formidable opponent being Henry Clay, who, though generally regarded as the real leader of his party, was less “available” because as a mason he would alienate former members of the old Anti-Masonic party, and as an advocate of a protective tariff would repel many Southern voters. The convention adjourned without adopting any “platform” of principles, the party shrewdly deciding to make its campaign merely on the issue of whether the Van Buren administration should be continued in power and thus to take full advantage of the popular discontent with the administration, to which was attributed the responsibility for the panic of 1837 and the subsequent business depression. Largely to attract the votes of Democratic malcontents the Whig convention nominated for the vice-presidency John Tyler, who had previously been identified with the Democratic party. The campaign was marked by the extraordinary enthusiasm exhibited by the Whigs, and by their skill in attacking Van Buren without binding themselves to any definite policy. Because of his fame as a frontier hero, of the circumstance that a part of his home at North Bend, Ohio, had formerly been a log cabin, and of the story that cider, not wine, was served on his table, Harrison was derisively called by bis opponents the “log cabin and hard cider” candidate; the term was eagerly accepted by the Whigs, in whose processions miniature log cabins were carried and at whose meetings hard cider was served, and the campaign itself has become known in history as the “log cabin and hard cider campaign.” Harrison’s canvass was conspicuous for the immense Whig processions and mass meetings, the numerous “stump” speeches (Harrison himself addressing meetings at Dayton, Chillicothe, Columbus and other places), and the use of campaign songs, of party insignia, and of campaign cries (such as “Tippecanoe and Tyler too”); and in the election he won by an overwhelming majority of 234 electoral votes to 60 cast for Van Buren.

For several years after returning from Colombia, he lived a quiet life in North Bend, Ohio. Occasionally, the anti-Jackson forces discussed him as a potential candidate for governor, senator, or representative, and he gave a few talks on agricultural or political issues. Later, he became the clerk of the court of common pleas for Hamilton County, a well-paying job that suited him at the time. In early 1835, Harrison started to be mentioned as a viable presidential candidate, and later that year, he was nominated for president at large public meetings in Pennsylvania, New York, and Maryland. In the election the following year, he captured a significant portion of the Whig and Anti-Masonic votes in the Middle and Western states and led among the contenders against Van Buren, but he only received 73 electoral votes compared to Van Buren's 170. His unexpected popularity, largely due to his clear yet neutral political stance, made him the most "available" candidate for the Whig party for the 1840 campaign. He was nominated by the Whig convention in Harrisburg, Pennsylvania, in December 1839, with his most formidable opponent being Henry Clay, who, while seen as the real leader of his party, was less "available" because being a Mason would alienate former members of the old Anti-Masonic party, and his support for a protective tariff would turn away many Southern voters. The convention ended without adopting any formal “platform” of principles, cleverly deciding to base their campaign solely on whether the Van Buren administration should remain in power, aiming to fully capitalize on the public dissatisfaction with the administration, which was blamed for the panic of 1837 and the subsequent economic downturn. To attract the votes of disgruntled Democrats, the Whig convention nominated John Tyler for vice president, who had previously been associated with the Democratic party. The campaign was marked by incredible enthusiasm from the Whigs and their skill in attacking Van Buren without committing to any specific policy. Because of his reputation as a frontier hero, the fact that part of his home in North Bend, Ohio, had once been a log cabin, and the story that cider, not wine, was served at his table, Harrison's opponents mockingly dubbed him the “log cabin and hard cider” candidate; this nickname was eagerly embraced by the Whigs, who carried miniature log cabins in their parades and served hard cider at their gatherings. The campaign has since been referred to as the “log cabin and hard cider campaign.” Harrison’s campaign was notable for the massive Whig parades and rallies, numerous “stump” speeches (with Harrison himself speaking at events in Dayton, Chillicothe, Columbus, and other locations), and the use of campaign songs, party symbols, and rallying cries (such as “Tippecanoe and Tyler too”); ultimately, he won the election by an overwhelming majority of 234 electoral votes to the 60 votes cast for Van Buren.

President Harrison was inaugurated on the 4th of March 1841. He chose for his cabinet Daniel Webster as secretary of state, Thomas Ewing as secretary of the treasury, John Bell as secretary of war, George E. Badger as secretary of the navy, Francis Granger as postmaster-general, and John J. Crittenden as attorney-general. He survived his inauguration only one month, dying on the 4th of April 1841, and being succeeded by the vice-president, John Tyler. The immediate cause of his death was an attack of pneumonia, but the disease was aggravated by the excitement attending his sudden change in circumstances and the incessant demands of office seekers. After temporary interment at Washington, his body was removed to the tomb at North Bend, Ohio, where it now lies. A few of Harrison’s public addresses survive, the most notable being A Discourse on the Aborigines of the Ohio. It has been said of him: “He was not a great man, but he had lived in a great time, and he had been a leader in great things.” He was the first territorial delegate in the Congress of the United States and was the author of the first step in the development of the country’s later homestead policy; the first presidential candidate to be selected upon the ground of “expediency” alone; and the first president to die in office. In 1795 he married Anna Symmes (1775-1864), daughter of John Cleves Symmes. Their grandson, Benjamin Harrison, was the twenty-third president of the United States.

President Harrison was inaugurated on March 4, 1841. He appointed Daniel Webster as secretary of state, Thomas Ewing as secretary of the treasury, John Bell as secretary of war, George E. Badger as secretary of the navy, Francis Granger as postmaster general, and John J. Crittenden as attorney general. He survived his inauguration for only one month, dying on April 4, 1841, and was succeeded by the vice president, John Tyler. The immediate cause of his death was pneumonia, but the disease was worsened by the stress of his sudden change in circumstances and the constant pressure from office seekers. After a temporary burial in Washington, his body was moved to the tomb in North Bend, Ohio, where it rests today. A few of Harrison’s public speeches remain, with the most notable being A Discourse on the Aborigines of the Ohio. People have said of him: “He was not a great man, but he lived in a great time, and he led in great things.” He was the first territorial delegate in the U.S. Congress and was instrumental in the early development of the country’s later homestead policy; he was the first presidential candidate chosen solely on the basis of “expediency”; and he was the first president to die in office. In 1795, he married Anna Symmes (1775-1864), the daughter of John Cleves Symmes. Their grandson, Benjamin Harrison, became the twenty-third president of the United States.

Authorities.—In 1824 Moses Dawson published at Cincinnati the Historical Narrative of the Civil and Military Services of Major-General William H. Harrison. This is a combined defence and political pamphlet, but it is the source of all the subsequent “lives” that have appeared. There are several “campaign” biographies, including one by Richard Hildreth (1839) and one by Caleb Cushing (1840); and there is a good sketch in Presidents of the United States (New York, 1894), edited by J. G. Wilson. An excellent study of Harrison’s career in Indiana appears in vol. 4 of the Indiana Historical Society Publications. Selections from his scanty correspondence appear in vols. ii. and iii. of the Quarterly Publications of the Historical and Philosophical Society of Ohio.

Authorities.—In 1824, Moses Dawson published in Cincinnati the Historical Narrative of the Civil and Military Services of Major-General William H. Harrison. This work serves as a combined defense and political pamphlet, and it is the foundation for all the subsequent biographies that have been written. There are several "campaign" biographies, including one by Richard Hildreth (1839) and another by Caleb Cushing (1840); additionally, there’s a solid overview in Presidents of the United States (New York, 1894), edited by J. G. Wilson. An excellent study of Harrison's career in Indiana can be found in vol. 4 of the Indiana Historical Society Publications. Excerpts from his limited correspondence are included in vols. ii. and iii. of the Quarterly Publications of the Historical and Philosophical Society of Ohio.


HARRISON, a town of Hudson county, New Jersey, U.S.A., on the Passaic river, opposite Newark (with which it is connected by bridges and electric railways), and 7 m. W. of Jersey City. Pop. (1890) 8338; (1900) 10,596, of whom 3633 were foreign-born; (1910 census) 14,498. It is served by the Pennsylvania, the Erie, and the Delaware, Lackawanna & Western railways. Harrison was chosen as the eastern terminal of the Pennsylvania railroad for steam locomotive service, transportation thence to New York being by electric power through the railway’s Hudson river tunnels. The town has an extensive river-front, along which are many of its manufactories; among their products are steam-pumps, steel, iron, machinery, roller bearings, 27 brass tubing, iron and brass castings, marine engines, hoisting engines, metal novelties, dry batteries, electric lamps, concrete blocks, cotton thread, wire cloth, leather, trunks, beer, barrels, lumber, inks and cutlery. The factory product in 1905 was valued at $8,408,924. The town is governed by a mayor and a common council. Harrison was settled toward the close of the 17th century, and for many years constituted the S. portion of the township of Lodi. In 1840, however, it was set off from Lodi and named in honour of President William Henry Harrison, and in 1873 it was incorporated. Harrison originally included what is now the town of Kearny (q.v.).

HARRISON, is a town in Hudson County, New Jersey, U.S.A., located on the Passaic River, directly across from Newark (connected by bridges and electric railways), and 7 miles west of Jersey City. Population: (1890) 8,338; (1900) 10,596, with 3,633 foreign-born; (1910 census) 14,498. It is served by the Pennsylvania, Erie, and Delaware, Lackawanna & Western railways. Harrison was designated as the eastern terminal for Pennsylvania railroad steam locomotive service, with transport to New York being provided by electric power through the railway’s Hudson River tunnels. The town has a large riverfront, housing many of its factories, which produce steam pumps, steel, iron, machinery, roller bearings, 27 brass tubing, iron and brass castings, marine engines, hoisting engines, metal novelties, dry batteries, electric lamps, concrete blocks, cotton thread, wire cloth, leather, trunks, beer, barrels, lumber, inks, and cutlery. The total factory output in 1905 was valued at $8,408,924. The town is governed by a mayor and a common council. Harrison was settled near the end of the 17th century and for many years was part of the southern portion of the township of Lodi. However, in 1840, it was separated from Lodi and named in honor of President William Henry Harrison, and it was incorporated in 1873. Harrison originally included what is now the town of Kearny (q.v.).


HARRODSBURG, a city and the county-seat of Mercer county, Kentucky, U.S.A., 32 m. S. of Frankfort, on the Southern railway. Pop. (1890) 3230; (1900) 2876, of whom 1150 were negroes; (1910 U.S. census) 3147. On account of its sulphur springs Harrodsburg became early in the 19th century a fashionable resort, and continues to attract a considerable number of visitors. The city is the seat of Harrodsburg Academy, Beaumont College for women (1894; founded as Daughters’ College in 1856); and Wayman College (African M.E.) for negroes. Among its manufactures are flour, whisky, dressed lumber and ice. About 7 m. E. of Harrodsburg is Pleasant Hill, or Union Village, a summer resort and the home, since early in the 19th century, of a Shaker community. Harrodsburg was founded on the 16th of June 1774 by James Harrod (1746-1793) and a few followers, and is the oldest permanent settlement in the state. It was incorporated in 1875. Harrodsburg was formerly the seat of Bacon College (see Lexington, Kentucky).

HARRODSBURG, a city and the county seat of Mercer County, Kentucky, U.S.A., located 32 miles south of Frankfort, on the Southern Railway. Population (1890) 3,230; (1900) 2,876, including 1,150 African Americans; (1910 U.S. census) 3,147. Due to its sulfur springs, Harrodsburg became a popular resort early in the 19th century and continues to draw a significant number of visitors. The city is home to Harrodsburg Academy, Beaumont College for Women (founded in 1894 as Daughters’ College in 1856), and Wayman College (African M.E.) for African Americans. Its manufacturing includes flour, whiskey, dressed lumber, and ice. About 7 miles east of Harrodsburg is Pleasant Hill, or Union Village, a summer resort and the site of a Shaker community since the early 19th century. Harrodsburg was founded on June 16, 1774, by James Harrod (1746-1793) and a few followers, making it the oldest permanent settlement in the state. It was incorporated in 1875. Harrodsburg was previously the site of Bacon College (see Lexington, Kentucky).


HARROGATE, a municipal borough and watering-place in the Ripon parliamentary division of the West Riding of Yorkshire, England, 203 m. N. by W. from London, on the North-Eastern railway. Pop. (1891) 16,316; (1901) 28,423. It is indebted for its rise and importance to its medicinal springs, and is the principal inland watering-place in the north of England. It consists of two scattered townships, Low Harrogate and High Harrogate, which have gradually been connected by a continuous range of handsome houses and villas. A common called the Stray, of 200 acres, secured by act of parliament from ever being built upon, stretches in front of the main line of houses, and on this account Harrogate, notwithstanding its rapid increase, has retained much of its rural charm. As regards climate a choice is offered between the more bracing atmosphere of High Harrogate and the sheltered and warm climate of the low town. The waters are chalybeate, sulphureous and saline, and some of the springs possess all these qualities to a greater or less extent. The principal chalybeate springs are the Tewitt well, called by Dr Bright, who wrote the first account of it, the “English Spa,” discovered by Captain William Slingsby of Bilton Hall near the close of the 16th century; the Royal Chalybeate Spa, more commonly known as John’s Well, discovered in 1631 by Dr Stanhope of York; Muspratt’s chalybeate or chloride of iron spring discovered in 1819, but first properly analysed by Dr Sheridan Muspratt in 1865; and the Starbeck springs midway between High Harrogate and Knaresborough. The principal sulphur springs are the old sulphur well in the centre of Low Harrogate, discovered about the year 1656; the Montpellier springs, the principal well of which was discovered in 1822, situated in the grounds of the Crown Hotel and surmounted by a handsome building in the Chinese style, containing pump-room, baths and reading-room; and the Harlow Car springs, situated in a wooded glen about a mile west from Low Harrogate. Near Harlow Car is Harlow observatory, a square tower 100 ft. in height, standing on elevated ground and commanding a very extensive view. A saline spring situated in Low Harrogate was discovered in 1783. Some eighty springs in all have been discovered. The principal bath establishments are the Victoria Baths (1871) and the Royal Baths (1897). There are also a handsome kursaal (1903), a grand opera house, numerous modern churches, and several hospitals and benevolent institutions, including the Royal Bath hospital. The corporation owns the Stray, and also the Spa concert rooms and grounds, Harlow Moor, Crescent Gardens, Royal Bath gardens and other large open spaces, as well as Royal Baths, Victoria Baths and Starbeck Baths. The mineral springs are vested in the corporation. The high-lying moorland of the surrounding district is diversified by picturesque dales; and Harrogate is not far from many towns and sites of great interest, such as Ripon, Knaresborough and Fountains Abbey. The town was incorporated in 1884, and the corporation consists of a mayor, 8 aldermen and 24 councillors. Area, 3276 acres.

HARROGATE, is a municipal borough and spa town in the Ripon parliamentary division of the West Riding of Yorkshire, England, located 203 miles north-northwest from London on the North-Eastern railway. Population (1891) 16,316; (1901) 28,423. It owes its growth and significance to its medicinal springs and is the main inland spa in the north of England. The town consists of two scattered areas, Low Harrogate and High Harrogate, which have gradually connected through a continuous line of attractive houses and villas. A common area known as the Stray, covering 200 acres and protected by an act of parliament from development, lies in front of the main row of houses. Because of this, Harrogate has maintained much of its rural charm despite its rapid growth. In terms of climate, visitors can choose between the fresher air of High Harrogate and the milder, sheltered climate of the lower town. The waters are chalybeate, sulfurous, and saline, with some springs possessing varying degrees of these qualities. The key chalybeate springs include the Tewitt well, described by Dr. Bright, who was the first to document it as the “English Spa,” discovered by Captain William Slingsby of Bilton Hall around the end of the 16th century; the Royal Chalybeate Spa, commonly referred to as John’s Well, found in 1631 by Dr. Stanhope from York; Muspratt’s chalybeate or chloride of iron spring discovered in 1819 and properly analyzed by Dr. Sheridan Muspratt in 1865; and the Starbeck springs located between High Harrogate and Knaresborough. The main sulfur springs include the old sulfur well in the center of Low Harrogate, discovered around 1656; the Montpellier springs, whose main well was discovered in 1822, located on the grounds of the Crown Hotel and topped with an attractive building in Chinese style, which houses a pump room, baths, and a reading room; and the Harlow Car springs, found in a wooded valley about a mile west of Low Harrogate. Near Harlow Car is the Harlow observatory, a square tower 100 feet tall, situated on elevated ground that offers an extensive view. A saline spring in Low Harrogate was discovered in 1783. In total, about eighty springs have been identified. The main bathing establishments are the Victoria Baths (1871) and the Royal Baths (1897). There is also a beautiful kursaal (1903), a grand opera house, several modern churches, and various hospitals and charitable institutions, including the Royal Bath hospital. The corporation owns the Stray, along with the Spa concert rooms and grounds, Harlow Moor, Crescent Gardens, Royal Bath gardens, and other large open areas, as well as the Royal Baths, Victoria Baths, and Starbeck Baths. The mineral springs are owned by the corporation. The high moorland surrounding the area is filled with picturesque valleys; and Harrogate is close to many towns and sites of significant interest, including Ripon, Knaresborough, and Fountains Abbey. The town was incorporated in 1884, and its governing body includes a mayor, 8 aldermen, and 24 councillors. Area, 3,276 acres.


HARROW,1 an agricultural implement used for (1) levelling ridges left by the plough and preparing a smooth surface for the reception of seeds; (2) covering in seeds after sowing; (3) tearing up and gathering weeds; (4) disintegrating and levelling the soil of meadows and pastures; (5) forming a surface tilth by pulverizing the top soil and so conserving moisture.

HARROW,1 a farming tool used for (1) smoothing out the ridges made by the plow and creating an even surface for seeds; (2) covering seeds after planting; (3) pulling up and collecting weeds; (4) breaking up and leveling the soil in meadows and pastures; (5) creating a surface layer by breaking up the topsoil to retain moisture.

The harrow rivals the plough in antiquity. In its simplest form it consists of the boughs of trees interlaced into a wooden frame, and this form survives in the “bush-harrow.” Another old type, found in the middle ages and still in use, consists of a wooden framework in which iron pegs or “tines” are set. This is now generally superseded by the “zig-zag” harrow patented by Armstrong in 1839, built of iron bars in which the tines are so arranged that each follows its own track and has a separate line of action. This harrow is usually made in two or three sections which fold over one another and are thus easily portable, the arrangement at the same time giving a flexibility on uneven ground. Additional flexibility may be imparted to the implement by jointing the stays of the frame which are in the line of draught. The liability that the tines may snap off is the chief weakness of this type, and improvements have consisted chiefly in alterations in their shape and the method of fixing them to the frame.

The harrow is just as ancient as the plough. In its simplest form, it’s made from tree branches woven into a wooden frame, which still exists today in the “bush-harrow.” Another old version, used in the Middle Ages and still around, features a wooden frame with iron pegs or “tines.” This has largely been replaced by the “zig-zag” harrow, patented by Armstrong in 1839, which is made of iron bars where the tines are arranged so that each one follows its own path and has a distinct line of action. This harrow typically comes in two or three sections that fold over each other, making it easy to transport while providing flexibility on uneven terrain. More flexibility can be added by jointing the stays of the frame that are aligned with the direction of pull. The main downside of this design is that the tines can break off, and improvements mostly focus on changing their shape and how they're attached to the frame.

Fig. 1.—Jointed Zig-zag Harrow. (Ransomes, Sims & Jefferies, Ltd.)

The other type of harrow most used is the chain harrow, consisting of a number of square-link chains connected by cross links and attached to a draught-bar, the whole being kept expanded by stretchers and trailing weights. It is used for levelling and spreading manure over grass-land, from which it at the same time tears up moss and coarse herbage. Mention may also be made of the drag-harrow, a heavy implement with long tines, approximating closely to the cultivator, and of the Norwegian harrow with its revolving rows of spikes.

The other type of harrow that's most commonly used is the chain harrow, made up of several square-link chains linked by cross links and connected to a draft bar, all kept spread out by stretchers and trailing weights. It's used for leveling and spreading manure on grassland, while also tearing up moss and thick weeds. There's also the drag harrow, a heavy tool with long tines, which is quite similar to a cultivator, and the Norwegian harrow with its rotating rows of spikes.

A few variations and developments of the ordinary harrow require notice. In the adjustable harrow (fig. 2) the teeth are secured to bars pivoted at their ends in the side bars of the frame, and provided with crank arms connected to a common link bar, which may be moved horizontally by means of a lever for the purpose of adjusting 28 the angle which the teeth make with the ground, and thus convert the machine from a pulverizer to a smoothing harrow. The small figure illustrates a spring connexion between the adjusting lever and its locking bar, which allows the teeth to yield upon striking an obstruction. As the briskness of the operation adds to its effectiveness, the harrow is often made with a seat from which the operator can hasten the team without fatiguing himself.

A few variations and developments of the regular harrow deserve mention. In the adjustable harrow (fig. 2), the teeth are attached to bars that are pivoted at their ends in the side bars of the frame, and these are equipped with crank arms linked to a common link bar. This can be moved horizontally using a lever to adjust the angle of the teeth in relation to the ground, allowing the machine to switch from a pulverizer to a smoothing harrow. The small figure shows a spring connection between the adjusting lever and its locking bar, which enables the teeth to give way when they hit an obstruction. Since the speed of operation enhances its efficiency, the harrow is often designed with a seat from which the operator can urge the team on without getting tired.

Fig. 2.—Adjustable Harrow.

Fig. 3 illustrates a spring-tooth harrow. In this harrow the independent frames are carried upon wheels, and a seat for the operator is mounted upon standards supported by the two frames. The teeth consist of flat steel springs of scroll form, which yield to rigid obstructions and are mounted on rock shafts in the same manner as in the walking harrow before described. The levers enable the operator to raise the teeth more or less, and thus free them from rubbish and also regulate the depth of action.

Fig. 3 shows a spring-tooth harrow. In this harrow, the separate frames are mounted on wheels, and there's a seat for the operator on supports that come from the two frames. The teeth are made of flat steel springs that are shaped like scrolls, which flex when they hit hard obstacles. They're mounted on rock shafts just like in the walking harrow described earlier. The levers allow the operator to adjust the height of the teeth, so they can clear away debris and control how deep they work.

Fig. 3.—Spring-tooth Harrow.

Another variation of the harrow with great pulverizing and loosening capabilities consists of a main frame, having a pole and whipple-trees attached: to this frame are pivoted two supplemental frames, each of which has mounted on it a shaft carrying a series of concavo-convex disks. The supplemental frames may be swung by the adjusting levers to any angle with relation to the line of draught, and the disks then act like that of the disk plough (see PLOUGH), throwing the soil outward with more or less force, according to the angle at which they are set, and thus thoroughly breaking up and pulverizing the clods. Above the disks is a bar to which are pivoted a series of scrapers, one for each disk, which are held to their work with a yielding action, being thrown out of operation when desired by the levers shown in connexion with the operating bar. Pans on the main frame are used to carry weights to hold the disks down to their work. The cut away disk harrow differs from the ordinary disk harrow in that its disks are notched and so have greater penetrating power. The curved knife-tooth harrow consists of a frame to which a row of curved blades is attached. Other forms of the implement are illustrated and discussed in Farm Machinery and Farm Motors by J. B. Davidson and L. W. Chase (New York, 1908).

Another version of the harrow that effectively breaks up and loosens soil features a main frame with a pole and whipple-trees attached. Two additional frames are connected to this main frame, each equipped with a shaft that holds a series of concave-convex disks. These additional frames can be adjusted to any angle in relation to the direction of pull using the adjusting levers, allowing the disks to function like those on a disk plow (see PLOUGH), pushing the soil outward with varying force depending on the set angle, thereby thoroughly breaking apart and pulverizing clumps of soil. Above the disks, there is a bar that holds a series of scrapers—one for each disk—that engage with a flexible action, allowing them to be lifted out of operation when needed via the levers connected to the operating bar. Pans on the main frame are used for adding weights to keep the disks pressing down into their work. The cutaway disk harrow is different from the standard disk harrow because its disks are notched, giving them greater penetration power. The curved knife-tooth harrow consists of a frame with a row of curved blades attached. Other variations of this tool are illustrated and discussed in Farm Machinery and Farm Motors by J. B. Davidson and L. W. Chase (New York, 1908).


1 In Mid. Eng. harwe; the O. Eng. appears to have been hearge; the word is cognate with the Dutch hark, Swed. harke, Ger. Harke, rake, and with Danish harv, and Swed. harf, harrow, but the ultimate origin is unknown; the Fr. herse is a different word, cf. Hearse.

1 In Middle English harwe; the Old English seems to have been hearge; the word is related to the Dutch hark, Swedish harke, German Harke, rake, and Danish harv, as well as Swedish harf, harrow, but the ultimate origin is unknown; the French herse is a different word, cf. Hearse.


HARROWBY, DUDLEY RYDER, 1st Earl OF (1762-1847), the eldest son of Nathaniel Ryder, 1st Baron Harrowby (1735-1803), was born in London on the 22nd of December 1762. His grandfather Sir Dudley Ryder (1691-1756) became a member of parliament and solicitor-general owing to the favour of Sir Robert Walpole in 1733; in 1737 he was appointed attorney-general and three years later he was knighted; in 1754 he was made lord chief justice of the king’s bench and a privy councillor, the patent creating him a peer having been just signed by the king, but not passed, when he died on the 25th of May 1756. His only son Nathaniel, who was member of parliament for Tiverton for twenty years, was created Baron Harrowby in 1776. Educated at St John’s College, Cambridge, Dudley Ryder became member of parliament for Tiverton in 1784 and under-secretary for foreign affairs in 1789. In 1791 he was appointed paymaster of the forces and vice-president of the board of trade, but he resigned the positions and also that of treasurer of the navy when he succeeded to his father’s barony in June 1803. In 1804 he was secretary of state for foreign affairs and in 1805 chancellor of the duchy of Lancaster under his intimate friend William Pitt; in the latter year he was sent on a special and important mission to the emperors of Austria and Russia and the king of Prussia, and for the long period between 1812 and 1827 he was lord president of the council. After Canning’s death in 1827 he refused to serve George IV. as prime minister and he never held office again, although he continued to take part in politics, being especially prominent during the deadlock which preceded the passing of the Reform Bill in 1832. Harrowby’s long association with the Tories did not prevent him from assisting to remove the disabilities of Roman Catholics and Protestant dissenters, or from supporting the movement for electoral reform; he was also in favour of the emancipation of the slaves. The earl died at his Staffordshire residence, Sandon Hall, on the 26th of December 1847, being, as Charles Greville says, “the last of his generation and of the colleagues of Mr Pitt, the sole survivor of those stirring times and mighty contests.”

HARROWBY, DUDLEY RYDER, 1st Earl OF (1762-1847), the oldest son of Nathaniel Ryder, 1st Baron Harrowby (1735-1803), was born in London on December 22, 1762. His grandfather Sir Dudley Ryder (1691-1756) became a member of parliament and solicitor-general thanks to Sir Robert Walpole's support in 1733; in 1737 he was appointed attorney-general and three years later was knighted; in 1754 he became lord chief justice of the king’s bench and a privy councillor, with the patent making him a peer just signed by the king, but not passed, when he died on May 25, 1756. His only son Nathaniel served as a member of parliament for Tiverton for twenty years and was made Baron Harrowby in 1776. Educated at St John’s College, Cambridge, Dudley Ryder became a member of parliament for Tiverton in 1784 and under-secretary for foreign affairs in 1789. In 1791 he was appointed paymaster of the forces and vice-president of the board of trade, but he resigned these positions along with the treasurer of the navy when he inherited his father’s barony in June 1803. In 1804 he was secretary of state for foreign affairs and in 1805 chancellor of the duchy of Lancaster under his close friend William Pitt; that same year he was sent on an important special mission to the emperors of Austria and Russia and the king of Prussia. He served as lord president of the council from 1812 to 1827. After Canning’s death in 1827, he declined to serve George IV as prime minister and never held office again, although he remained active in politics, particularly during the deadlock before the passing of the Reform Bill in 1832. Harrowby’s long ties with the Tories didn’t stop him from helping to remove the disabilities of Roman Catholics and Protestant dissenters, or from supporting electoral reform; he was also in favor of abolishing slavery. The earl passed away at his Staffordshire residence, Sandon Hall, on December 26, 1847, being, as Charles Greville described, “the last of his generation and of the colleagues of Mr Pitt, the sole survivor of those stirring times and mighty contests.”

Harrowby’s eldest son, Dudley Ryder, 2nd earl (1798-1882), was born in London on the 19th of May 1798, his mother being Susan (d. 1838), daughter of Granville Leveson-Gower, marquess of Stafford, a lady of exceptional attainments. As Viscount Sandon he became member of parliament for Tiverton in 1819, in 1827 he was appointed a lord of the admiralty, and in 1830 secretary to the India board. From 1831 to 1847 Sandon represented Liverpool in the House of Commons. For a long time he was out of office, but in 1855, eight years after he had become earl of Harrowby, he was appointed chancellor of the duchy of Lancaster by Lord Palmerston; in a few months he was transferred to the office of lord privy seal, a position which he resigned in 1857. He was chairman of the Maynooth commission and a member of other important royal commissions, and was among the most stalwart and prominent defenders of the established church. He died at Sandon on the 19th of November 1882. His successor was his eldest son, Dudley Francis Stuart Ryder (1831-1900), vice-president of the council from 1874 to 1878, president of the board of trade from 1878 to 1880, and lord privy seal in 1885 and 1886. He died without sons on the 26th of March 1900, and was succeeded by his brother, Henry Dudley Ryder (1836-1900), whose son, John Herbert Dudley Ryder (b. 1864), became 5th earl of Harrowby.

Harrowby’s eldest son, Dudley Ryder, 2nd Earl (1798-1882), was born in London on May 19, 1798. His mother was Susan (d. 1838), the daughter of Granville Leveson-Gower, Marquess of Stafford, a remarkable woman. As Viscount Sandon, he became a Member of Parliament for Tiverton in 1819; in 1827, he was appointed a Lord of the Admiralty, and in 1830, Secretary to the India Board. From 1831 to 1847, Sandon represented Liverpool in the House of Commons. He was out of office for a long time, but in 1855, eight years after becoming Earl of Harrowby, he was appointed Chancellor of the Duchy of Lancaster by Lord Palmerston; a few months later, he was moved to the position of Lord Privy Seal, which he resigned in 1857. He was the chairman of the Maynooth Commission and a member of other important royal commissions, and he was one of the most steadfast and notable defenders of the established church. He died at Sandon on November 19, 1882. His successor was his eldest son, Dudley Francis Stuart Ryder (1831-1900), who was Vice-President of the Council from 1874 to 1878, President of the Board of Trade from 1878 to 1880, and Lord Privy Seal in 1885 and 1886. He died without sons on March 26, 1900, and was succeeded by his brother, Henry Dudley Ryder (1836-1900), whose son, John Herbert Dudley Ryder (b. 1864), became the 5th Earl of Harrowby.


HARROWING OF HELL, an English poem in dialogue, dating from the end of the 13th century. It is written in the East Midland dialect, and is generally cited as the earliest dramatic work of any kind preserved in the language, though it was in reality probably intended for recitation rather than performance; It is closely allied to the kind of poem known as a débat, and the opening words—“Alle herkneth to me nou A strif wille I tellen ou Of Jesu and of Satan”—seem to indicate that the piece was delivered by a single performer. The subject—the descent of Christ into Hades to succour the souls of the just, as related in the apocryphal gospel of Nicodemus—is introduced in a kind of prologue; then follows the dispute between “Dominus” and “Satan” at the gate of Hell; the gatekeeper runs away, and the just are set free, while Adam, Eve, Habraham, David, Johannes and Moyses do homage to the deliverer. The poem 29 ends with a short prayer: “God, for his moder loue Let ous never thider come.” Metrically, the poem is characterized by frequent alliteration imposed upon the rhymed octosyllabic couplet:—

HARROWING OF HELL, is an English poem written as a dialogue, originating from the late 13th century. It's composed in the East Midland dialect and is often recognized as the earliest known dramatic work in the English language, although it was likely meant for recitation rather than a stage performance. It’s closely related to a type of poem known as a débat, and the opening lines—“Everyone listen to me now, I want to tell you a conflict about Jesus and Satan”—suggest that it was presented by a single performer. The theme, which is Christ’s descent into Hades to rescue the souls of the righteous, as described in the apocryphal Gospel of Nicodemus, is introduced in a prologue. This is followed by a debate between “Dominus” and “Satan” at the gates of Hell; the gatekeeper flees, and the righteous are freed, with Adam, Eve, Abraham, David, John, and Moses paying respect to their rescuer. The poem 29 concludes with a short prayer: “God, for His mother's love, let us never come there.” In terms of meter, the poem features frequent alliteration within the rhymed octosyllabic couplet:—

Welcome, louerd, god of londe

Welcome, Lord, God of Land

Godes sone and godes sonde (ii. 149-150).

Godes sone and godes sonde (ii. 149-150).

The piece is obviously connected with the Easter cycle of liturgical drama, and the subject is treated in the York and Townley plays.

The piece is clearly related to the Easter cycle of liturgical drama, and the topic is addressed in the York and Townley plays.

MSS. are: Brit. Mus., Harl. MS. 2253; Edinburgh, Auchinleck MS., W 41; Oxford, Bodleian, Digby 86. It was privately printed by J. P. Collier and by J. O. Halliwell, but is available in Appendix III. of A. W. Pollard’s English Miracle Plays ... (4th ed., 1904) K. Böddeker, Altengl. Dichtungen des MS. Harl. 2253 (Berlin, 1878); and E. Mall, The Harrowing of Hell (Breslau, 1871). See also E. K. Chambers, The Medieval Stage (2 vols., 1903).

MSS. are: Brit. Mus., Harl. MS. 2253; Edinburgh, Auchinleck MS., W 41; Oxford, Bodleian, Digby 86. It was printed privately by J. P. Collier and J. O. Halliwell, but it's also available in Appendix III of A. W. Pollard’s English Miracle Plays ... (4th ed., 1904) K. Böddeker, Altengl. Dichtungen des MS. Harl. 2253 (Berlin, 1878); and E. Mall, The Harrowing of Hell (Breslau, 1871). See also E. K. Chambers, The Medieval Stage (2 vols., 1903).


HARROW-ON-THE-HILL, an urban district in the Harrow parliamentary division of Middlesex, England, 12 m. W.N.W. of St Paul’s cathedral, London, served by the London and North Western, Metropolitan and District railways. Pop. (1901), 10,220. It takes its name from its position on an isolated hill rising to a height of 345 ft. On the summit, and forming a conspicuous landmark, is the church of St Mary, said to have been founded by Lanfranc, archbishop of Canterbury, in the reign of William I., and Norman work appears at the base of the tower. The remainder of the church is of various later dates, and there are several ancient monuments and brasses.

HARROW-ON-THE-HILL, is an urban district in the Harrow parliamentary division of Middlesex, England, located 12 miles west-northwest of St Paul’s Cathedral in London. It's served by the London and North Western, Metropolitan, and District railways. Population (1901) was 10,220. The area gets its name from its location on an isolated hill that rises to a height of 345 feet. At the top, there's the church of St Mary, which is said to have been founded by Lanfranc, the Archbishop of Canterbury, during the reign of William I. You can see Norman work at the base of the tower. The rest of the church is from various later periods, and there are several ancient monuments and brasses.

Harrow is celebrated for its public school, founded in 1571 by John Lyon, whose brass is in the church, a yeoman of the neighbouring village of Preston who had yearly during his life set aside 20 marks for the education of poor children of Harrow; though a school existed before his time. Though the charter was granted by Queen Elizabeth in 1571, and the statutes drawn up by the founder in 1590, two years before his death, it was not till 1611 that the first building was opened for scholars. Lyon originally settled about two-thirds of his property on the school, leaving the remainder for the maintenance of the highway between London and Harrow, but in the course of time the values of the respective endowments have changed so far that the benefit accruing to the school is a small proportion of the whole. About 1660 the headmaster, taking advantage of a concession in Lyon’s statutes, began to receive “foreigners,” i.e. boys from other parishes, who were to pay for their education. From this time the prosperity of the school may be dated. In 1809 the parishioners of Harrow appealed to the court of chancery against the manner in which the school was conducted, but the decision, while it recognized their privileges, confirmed the right of admission to foreigners. The government of the school was originally vested in six persons of standing in the parish who had the power of filling vacancies in their number by election among themselves; but under the Public Schools Act of 1868 the governing body now consists of the surviving members of the old board, besides six new members who are elected respectively by the lord chancellor, the universities of Oxford, Cambridge and London, the Royal Society, and the assistant masters of the school. There are several scholarships in connexion with the school to Oxford and Cambridge Universities. Harrow was originally an exclusively classical school, but mathematics became a compulsory study in 1837; modern languages, made compulsory in the upper forms In 1851, were extended to the whole school in 1855; while English history and literature began to be especially studied about 1869. The number of boys is about 600. The principal buildings are modern, including the chapel (1857), the library (1863), named after the eminent headmaster Dr Charles John Vaughan, and the speech-room (1877), the scene of the brilliant ceremony on “Speech Day” each summer term. The fourth form room, however, dates from 1611, and on its panels are cut the names of many eminent alumni, such as Byron, Robert Peel, R. B. Sheridan and Temple (Lord Palmerston). Several of the buildings were erected out of the Lyon Tercentenary Fund, subscribed after the tercentenary celebration in 1871.

Harrow is known for its public school, which was founded in 1571 by John Lyon, whose brass plaque is in the church. He was a farmer from the nearby village of Preston who set aside 20 marks every year for the education of poor children in Harrow during his lifetime, even though a school existed before he founded it. Although Queen Elizabeth granted the charter in 1571, and Lyon created the statutes in 1590—two years before his death—it wasn't until 1611 that the first building opened for students. Lyon originally dedicated about two-thirds of his property to the school, leaving the rest for maintaining the road between London and Harrow, but over time, the value of the endowments changed so that the benefit to the school is now only a small portion of the total. Around 1660, the headmaster took advantage of a provision in Lyon's statutes to start admitting “foreigners,” meaning boys from other parishes, who would pay for their education. This marked the beginning of the school's prosperity. In 1809, the residents of Harrow challenged how the school was run in court, but while the decision acknowledged their rights, it upheld the admission of foreign students. The school was originally managed by six respected individuals from the parish who could fill vacancies by electing new members from within; however, under the Public Schools Act of 1868, the governing body now includes the remaining members of the old board and six new members elected by the lord chancellor, the universities of Oxford, Cambridge, and London, the Royal Society, and the assistant masters of the school. There are several scholarships associated with the school for Oxford and Cambridge Universities. Originally, Harrow was an exclusively classical school, but in 1837, mathematics became a required subject; modern languages became mandatory in the upper grades in 1851 and were expanded to include the entire school in 1855; English history and literature started to be emphasized around 1869. The school has about 600 boys enrolled. The main buildings are modern, including the chapel (1857), the library (1863), named after the notable headmaster Dr. Charles John Vaughan, and the speech room (1877), where the impressive “Speech Day” ceremony occurs every summer term. However, the fourth form room dates back to 1611, and its panels are engraved with the names of many notable alumni, such as Byron, Robert Peel, R. B. Sheridan, and Temple (Lord Palmerston). Several of the buildings were constructed using funds raised during the Lyon Tercentenary celebrations in 1871.

A considerable extension of Harrow as an outer residential suburb of London has taken place north of the hill, where is the urban district of Wealdstone (pop. 5901), and there are also important printing and photographic works.

A significant expansion of Harrow as a suburban area outside of London has occurred to the north of the hill, where the urban district of Wealdstone (pop. 5901) is located, and there are also major printing and photography businesses.


HARRY THE MINSTREL, or Blind Harry (fl. 1470-1492), author of the Scots historical poem The Actis and Deidis of the Illustere and Vailzeand Campioun Schir William Wallace, Knicht of Ellerslie, flourished in the latter half of the 15th century. The details of his personal history are of the scantiest. He appears to have been a blind Lothian man, in humble circumstances, who had some reputation as a story-teller, and who received, on five occasions, in 1490 and 1491, gifts from James IV. The entries of these, in the Accounts of the Lord High Treasurer, occur among others to harpers and singers. He is alluded to by Dunbar (q.v.) in the fragmentary Interlude of the Droichis Part of the Play, where a “droich,” or dwarf, personates

HARRY THE MINSTREL, or Blind Harry (active 1470-1492), author of the Scottish historical poem The Actis and Deidis of the Illustere and Vailzeand Campioun Schir William Wallace, Knicht of Ellerslie, lived in the latter half of the 15th century. There’s very little information about his personal life. He seems to have been a blind man from Lothian, living in modest means, who gained some fame as a storyteller, receiving gifts from James IV five times in 1490 and 1491. These gifts are recorded in the Accounts of the Lord High Treasurer, along with those given to other harpers and singers. Dunbar refers to him in the incomplete Interlude of the Droichis Part of the Play, where a “droich,” or dwarf, acts as a character.

“the nakit blynd Harry

“the nakit blind Harry”

That lang has bene in the fary

That lang has been in the fairy

Farleis to find;”

Hard to find;”

and again in Dunbar’s Lament for the Makaris. John Major (q.v.) in his Latin History speaks of “one Henry, blind from his birth, who, in the time of my childhood, fashioned a whole book about William Wallace, and therein wrote down in our popular verse—and this was a kind of composition in which he had much skill—all that passed current among the people in his day. I, however, can give but partial credence to these writings. This Henry used to recite his tales before nobles, and thus received food and clothing as his reward” (Bk. iv. ch. xv.).

and again in Dunbar’s Lament for the Makaris. John Major (q.v.) in his Latin History talks about “a man named Henry, who was blind from birth, and who, during my childhood, created an entire book about William Wallace, where he wrote down in our popular verse—and he was quite skilled at this—all that was widely believed among the people of his time. However, I can only partially believe these writings. This Henry would recite his stories in front of nobles, and in return, he received food and clothing” (Bk. iv. ch. xv.).

The poem (preserved in a unique MS., dated 1488, in the Advocates’ library, Edinburgh) is divided into eleven books and runs to 11,853 lines. Its poetic merits are few, and its historical accuracy is easily impugned. It has the formal interest of being one of the earliest, certainly one of the most extensive verse-documents in Scots written in five-accent, or heroic, couplets. It is also the earliest outstanding work which discloses that habit of Scotticism which took such strong hold of the popular Northern literature during the coming years of conflict with England. In this respect it is in marked contrast with all the patriotic verse of preceding and contemporary literature. This attitude of the Wallace may perhaps be accepted as corroborative evidence of the humble milieu and popular sentiment of its author. The poem owed its subsequent widespread reputation to its appeal to this sentiment rather than to its literary quality. On the other hand, there are elements in the poem which show that it is not entirely the work of a poor crowder; and these (notably references to historical and literary authorities, and occasional reminiscences of the literary tricks of the Scots Chaucerian school) have inclined some to the view that the text, as we have it, is an edited version of the minstrel’s rough song-story. It has been argued, though by no means conclusively, that the “editor” was John Ramsay, the scribe of the Edinburgh MS. and of the companion Edinburgh MS. of the Brus by John Barbour (q.v.).

The poem (kept in a unique manuscript from 1488, located in the Advocates’ library in Edinburgh) is split into eleven books and consists of 11,853 lines. Its poetic qualities are limited, and its historical accuracy is often questioned. It holds formal interest as one of the earliest, definitely one of the most extensive verse-documents in Scots, written in five-accent, or heroic, couplets. It is also the first significant work that reveals the Scotticism that greatly influenced popular Northern literature during the upcoming years of conflict with England. In this way, it sharply contrasts with all the patriotic verse of earlier and contemporary literature. The attitude present in Wallace can be seen as supporting evidence of the modest background and popular feelings of its author. The poem gained its widespread reputation more for its connection to this sentiment than for its literary quality. However, there are aspects in the poem that suggest it isn’t solely the work of a lowly minstrel; these elements (especially references to historical and literary authorities, along with occasional echoes of the literary techniques of the Scots Chaucerian school) have led some to believe that the text, as we have it, is an edited version of the minstrel’s rough song-story. It has been suggested, though not convincingly, that the “editor” was John Ramsay, the scribe of the Edinburgh manuscript and the accompanying Edinburgh manuscript of Brus by John Barbour (q.v.).

The poem appears, on the authority of Laing, to have been printed at the press of Chepman & Myllar about 1508, but the fragments which Laing saw are not extant. The first complete edition, now available, was printed by Lekprevik for Henry Charteris in 1570 (Brit. Museum). It was reprinted by Charteris in 1594 and 1601, and by Andro Hart in 1611 and 1620. At least six other editions appeared in the 17th century. There are many later reprints, including some of William Hamilton of Gilbertfield’s modern Scots version of 1722. The first critical edition was prepared by Dr. Jamieson and published in 1820. In 1889 the Scottish Text Society completed their edition of the text, with prolegomena and notes by James Moir.

The poem seems to have been printed by Chepman & Myllar around 1508, according to Laing, but the fragments he saw no longer exist. The first complete edition available now was printed by Lekprevik for Henry Charteris in 1570 (Brit. Museum). Charteris reprinted it in 1594 and 1601, and Andro Hart did so in 1611 and 1620. At least six other editions were published in the 17th century. Numerous later reprints exist, including some of William Hamilton of Gilbertfield’s modern Scots version from 1722. The first critical edition was prepared by Dr. Jamieson and published in 1820. In 1889, the Scottish Text Society completed their edition of the text, which included prolegomena and notes by James Moir.

See, in addition to Jamieson’s and Moir’s volumes (u.s.), J. T. T. Brown’s The Wallace and the Bruce Restudied (Bonner, Beiträge zur Anglistik, vi., 1900), a plea for Ramsay’s authorship of the known text; also W. A. Craigie’s article in The Scottish Review (July 1903), a comparative estimate of the Brus and Wallace, in favour of the latter.

See, in addition to Jamieson’s and Moir’s volumes (u.s.), J. T. T. Brown’s The Wallace and the Bruce Restudied (Bonner, Beiträge zur Anglistik, vi., 1900), makes a case for Ramsay’s authorship of the known text; also W. A. Craigie’s article in The Scottish Review (July 1903), which offers a comparative analysis of the Brus and Wallace, supporting the latter.


HARSDÖRFFER, GEORG PHILIPP (1607-1658), German poet, was born at Nuremberg on the 1st of November 1607. He studied law at Altdorf and Strassburg, and subsequently travelled 30 through Holland, England, France and Italy. His knowledge of languages gained for him the appellation “the learned,” though he was as little a learned man as he was a poet. As a member of the Fruchtbringende Gesellschaft he was called der Spielende (the player). Jointly with Johann Klaj (q.v.) he founded in 1644 at Nuremberg the order of the Pegnitzschäfer, a literary society, and among the members thereof he was known by the name of Strephon. He died at Nuremberg on the 22nd of September 1658. His writings in German and Latin fill fifty volumes, and a selection of his poems, interesting mostly for their form, is to be found in Müller’s Bibliothek deutscher Dichter des 17ten Jahrhunderts, vol. ix. (Leipzig, 1826).

HARSDÖRFFER, GEORG PHILIPP (1607-1658), a German poet, was born in Nuremberg on November 1, 1607. He studied law at Altdorf and Strasbourg, and later traveled through Holland, England, France, and Italy. His knowledge of languages earned him the nickname “the learned,” even though he was neither particularly learned nor a true poet. As a member of the Fruchtbringende Gesellschaft, he was referred to as der Spielende (the player). Together with Johann Klaj (q.v.), he established the Pegnitzschäfer order, a literary society, in Nuremberg in 1644, where he was known by the name Strephon. He passed away in Nuremberg on September 22, 1658. His writings in German and Latin fill fifty volumes, and a selection of his poems, notable mostly for their form, can be found in Müller’s Bibliothek deutscher Dichter des 17ten Jahrhunderts, vol. ix. (Leipzig, 1826).

His life was written by Widmann (Altdorf, 1707). See also Tittmann, Die Nürnberger Dichterschule (Göttingen, 1847); Hodermann, Eine vornehme Gesellschaft, nach Harsdörffers “Gesprächspielen” (Paderborn, 1890); T. Bischoff, “Georg Philipp Harsdörffer” in the Festschrift zur 250 jährigen Jubelfeier des Pegnesischen Blumenordens (Nuremberg, 1894); and Krapp, Die ästhetischen Tendenzen Harsdörffers (Berlin, 1904).

His life was documented by Widmann (Altdorf, 1707). See also Tittmann, Die Nürnberger Dichterschule (Göttingen, 1847); Hodermann, Eine vornehme Gesellschaft, nach Harsdörffers “Gesprächspielen” (Paderborn, 1890); T. Bischoff, “Georg Philipp Harsdörffer” in the Festschrift zur 250-jährigen Jubelfeier des Pegnesischen Blumenordens (Nuremberg, 1894); and Krapp, Die ästhetischen Tendenzen Harsdörffers (Berlin, 1904).


HARSHA, or Harshavardhana (fl. A.D. 606-648), an Indian king who ruled northern India as paramount monarch for over forty years. The events of his reign are related by Hsüan Tsang, the Chinese pilgrim, and by Bana, a Brahman author. He was the son of a raja of Thanesar, who gained prominence by successful wars against the Huns, and came to the throne in A.D. 606, though he was only crowned in 612. He devoted himself to a scheme of conquering the whole of India, and carried on wars for thirty years with success, until (A.D. 620) he came in contact with Pulakesin II., the greatest of the Chalukya dynasty, who made himself lord of the south, as Harsha was lord of the north. The Nerbudda river formed the boundary between the two empires. In the latter years of his reign Harsha’s sway over the whole basin of the Ganges from the Himalayas to the Nerbudda was undisputed. After thirty-seven years of war he set himself to emulate Asoka and became a patron of art and literature. He was the last native monarch who held paramount power in the north prior to the Mahommedan conquest; and was succeeded by an era of petty states.

HARSHA, or Harshavardhana (fl. A.D. 606-648), was an Indian king who ruled northern India as the top monarch for over forty years. The events of his reign are recounted by Hsüan Tsang, the Chinese traveler, and by Bana, a Brahman writer. He was the son of a raja of Thanesar, who gained recognition through successful wars against the Huns, and he ascended to the throne in CE 606, although he was only crowned in 612. He focused on a plan to conquer all of India and waged wars for thirty years with success, until (CE 620) he encountered Pulakesin II., the greatest of the Chalukya dynasty, who became the ruler of the south, just as Harsha was the ruler of the north. The Nerbudda River served as the boundary between the two empires. In the later years of his reign, Harsha’s control over the entire Ganges basin from the Himalayas to the Nerbudda was unquestionable. After thirty-seven years of war, he aimed to emulate Asoka and became a supporter of art and literature. He was the last native monarch to hold supreme power in the north before the Muslim conquest and was followed by a time of small states.

See Bana, Sri-harsha-charita, trans. Cowell and Thomas (1897); Ettinghausen, Harsha Vardhana (Louvain, 1906).

See Bana, Sri-harsha-charita, trans. Cowell and Thomas (1897); Ettinghausen, Harsha Vardhana (Louvain, 1906).


HARSNETT, SAMUEL (1561-1631), English divine, archbishop of York, was born at Colchester in June 1561, and was educated at Pembroke Hall, Cambridge, where he was successively scholar, fellow and master (1605-1616). He was also vice-chancellor of the university in 1606 and 1614. His ecclesiastical career began somewhat unpromisingly, for he was censured by Archbishop Whitgift for Romanist tendencies in a sermon which he preached against predestination in 1584. After holding the living of Chigwell (1597-1605) he became chaplain to Bancroft (then bishop of London), and afterwards archdeacon of Essex (1603-1609), rector of Stisted and bishop of Chichester (1609-1619) and archbishop of York (1629). He died on the 25th of May 1631. Harsnett was no favourite with the Puritan community, and Charles I. ordered his Considerations for the better Settling of Church Government (1629) to be circulated among the bishops. His Declaration of Egregious Popish Impostures (1603) furnished Shakespeare with the names of the spirits mentioned by Edgar in King Lear.

HARSNETT, SAMUEL (1561-1631), English clergyman and archbishop of York, was born in Colchester in June 1561. He was educated at Pembroke Hall, Cambridge, where he served as a scholar, fellow, and master (1605-1616). He also held the position of vice-chancellor of the university in 1606 and 1614. His ecclesiastical career started on a rough note, as he was reprimanded by Archbishop Whitgift for having Romanist views in a sermon he delivered against predestination in 1584. After serving as the rector of Chigwell (1597-1605), he became chaplain to Bancroft (who was then bishop of London), and later served as archdeacon of Essex (1603-1609), rector of Stisted, bishop of Chichester (1609-1619), and archbishop of York (1629). He passed away on May 25, 1631. Harsnett was not well-liked by the Puritan community, and Charles I ordered his Considerations for the better Settling of Church Government (1629) to be distributed among the bishops. His Declaration of Egregious Popish Impostures (1603) provided Shakespeare with the names of the spirits mentioned by Edgar in King Lear.


HART, ALBERT BUSHNELL (1854-  ), American historian, was born at Clarksville, Mercer county, Pennsylvania, on the 1st of July 1854. He graduated at Harvard College in 1880, studied at Paris, Berlin and Freiburg, and received the degree of Ph.D. at Freiburg in 1883. He was instructor in history at Harvard in 1883-1887, assistant professor in 1887-1897, and became professor in 1897. Among his writings are: Introduction to the Study of Federal Government (1890), Formation of the Union (1892, in the Epochs of American History series), Practical Essays on American Government (1893), Studies in American Education (1895), Guide to the Study of American History (with Edward Channing, 1897), Salmon Portland Chase (1899, in the American Statesman series), Foundations of American Foreign Policy (1901), Actual Government (1903), Slavery and Abolition (1906, the volume in the American Nation series dealing with the period 1831-1841), National Ideals Historically Traced (1907), the 26th volume of the American Nation series, and many historical pamphlets and articles. In addition he edited American History told by Contemporaries (4 vols., 1898-1901), and Source Readers in American History (4 vols., 1901-1903), and two co-operative histories of the United States, the Epochs of American History series (3 small text-books), and, on a much larger scale, the American Nation series (27 vols., 1903-1907); he also edited the American Citizen series.

HART, ALBERT BUSHNELL (1854-  ), American historian, was born in Clarksville, Mercer County, Pennsylvania, on July 1, 1854. He graduated from Harvard College in 1880, studied in Paris, Berlin, and Freiburg, and earned his Ph.D. from Freiburg in 1883. He served as a history instructor at Harvard from 1883 to 1887, then as an assistant professor from 1887 to 1897, and became a full professor in 1897. His notable works include: Introduction to the Study of Federal Government (1890), Formation of the Union (1892, part of the Epochs of American History series), Practical Essays on American Government (1893), Studies in American Education (1895), Guide to the Study of American History (co-authored with Edward Channing, 1897), Salmon Portland Chase (1899, from the American Statesman series), Foundations of American Foreign Policy (1901), Actual Government (1903), Slavery and Abolition (1906, the volume in the American Nation series covering the period 1831-1841), National Ideals Historically Traced (1907), the 26th volume of the American Nation series, and numerous historical pamphlets and articles. Additionally, he edited American History told by Contemporaries (4 vols., 1898-1901), and Source Readers in American History (4 vols., 1901-1903), along with two collaborative histories of the United States: the Epochs of American History series (3 small textbooks) and the more extensive American Nation series (27 vols., 1903-1907); he also edited the American Citizen series.


HART, CHARLES (d. 1683), English actor, grandson of Shakespeare’s sister Joan, is first heard of as playing women’s parts at the Blackfriars’ theatre as an apprentice of Richard Robinson. In the Civil War he was a lieutenant of horse in Prince Rupert’s regiment, and after the king’s defeat he played surreptitiously at the Cockpit and at Holland House and other noblemen’s residences. After the Restoration he is known to have been in 1660 the original Dorante in The Mistaken Beauty, adapted from Corneille’s Le Menteur. In 1663 he went to the Theatre Royal in Killigrew’s company, with which he remained until 1682, taking leading parts in Dryden’s, Jonson’s and Beaumont and Fletcher’s plays. He is highly spoken of by contemporaries in such Shakespearian parts as Othello and Brutus. He is often mentioned by Pepys. Betterton praised him, and would not himself play the part of Hotspur until after Hart’s retirement. He died in 1683 and was buried on the 20th of August. Hart is said to have been the first lover of Nell Gwyn, and to have trained her for the stage.

HART, CHARLES (d. 1683), an English actor and the grandson of Shakespeare’s sister Joan, is first noted for playing female roles at the Blackfriars’ theatre while apprenticing with Richard Robinson. During the Civil War, he served as a cavalry lieutenant in Prince Rupert’s regiment, and after the king's defeat, he performed secretly at the Cockpit, Holland House, and other noble houses. After the Restoration, in 1660, he was the original Dorante in The Mistaken Beauty, adapted from Corneille’s Le Menteur. In 1663, he joined Killigrew’s company at the Theatre Royal, where he stayed until 1682, playing leading roles in works by Dryden, Jonson, and Beaumont and Fletcher. He was highly regarded by his peers for his performances in Shakespearean roles such as Othello and Brutus. Pepys often mentioned him, and Betterton praised him, refusing to take on the role of Hotspur until after Hart’s retirement. He passed away in 1683 and was buried on August 20th. Hart is said to have been Nell Gwyn’s first lover and to have trained her for the stage.


HART, ERNEST ABRAHAM (1835-1898), English medical journalist, was born in London on the 26th of June 1835, the son of a Jewish dentist. He was educated at the City of London school, and became a student at St George’s hospital. In 1856 he became a member of the Royal College of Surgeons, making a specialty of diseases of the eye. He was appointed ophthalmic surgeon at St Mary’s hospital at the age of 28, and occupied various other posts, introducing into ophthalmic practice some modifications since widely adopted. His name, too, is associated with a method of treating popliteal aneurism, which he was the first to use in Great Britain. His real life-work, however, was as a medical journalist, beginning with the Lancet in 1857. He was appointed editor of the British Medical Journal in 1866. He took a leading part in the exposures which led to the inquiry into the state of London workhouse infirmaries, and to the reform of the treatment of sick poor throughout England, and the Infant Life Protection Act of 1872, aimed at the evils of baby-farming, was largely due to his efforts. The record of his public work covers nearly the whole field of sanitary legislation during the last thirty years of his life. He had a hand in the amendments of the Public Health and of the Medical Acts; in the measures relating to notification of infectious disease, to vaccination, to the registration of plumbers; in the improvement of factory legislation; in the remedy of legitimate grievances of Army and Navy medical officers; in the removal of abuses and deficiencies in crowded barrack schools; in denouncing the sanitary shortcomings of the Indian government, particularly in regard to the prevention of cholera. His work on behalf of the British Medical Association is shown by the increase from 2000 to 19,000 in the number of members, and the growth of the British Medical Journal from 20 to 64 pages, during his editorship. From 1872 to 1897 he was chairman of the Association’s Parliamentary Bill Committee. He died on the 7th of January 1898. For his second wife he married Alice Marion Rowland, who had herself studied medicine in London and Paris, and was no less interested than her husband in philanthropic reform. She was most active in her encouragement of Irish cottage industries, and was the founder of the Donegal Industrial Fund.

HART, ERNEST ABRAHAM (1835-1898), was an English medical journalist born in London on June 26, 1835, the son of a Jewish dentist. He was educated at the City of London school and became a student at St George’s Hospital. In 1856, he joined the Royal College of Surgeons, specializing in eye diseases. He was appointed ophthalmic surgeon at St Mary’s Hospital at the age of 28 and held various positions, introducing changes in ophthalmic practice that are now widely used. His name is also linked to a method for treating popliteal aneurysm, which he was the first to use in Great Britain. However, his main focus was his work as a medical journalist, starting with the Lancet in 1857. He became editor of the British Medical Journal in 1866. He played a key role in exposing issues that led to investigations into the conditions of workhouse infirmaries in London and the reform of how the sick poor were treated across England. The Infant Life Protection Act of 1872, aimed at addressing the problems of baby farming, was largely a result of his efforts. His public work spanned nearly the entire field of sanitary legislation during the last thirty years of his life. He influenced amendments to the Public Health and Medical Acts; measures for reporting infectious diseases, vaccination, and plumber registration; improvements in factory laws; resolutions for legitimate grievances of Army and Navy medical officers; the elimination of abuses in overcrowded barrack schools; and highlighted the sanitary failures of the Indian government, especially concerning cholera prevention. His contributions to the British Medical Association are evident in the growth of membership from 2,000 to 19,000, and the expansion of the British Medical Journal from 20 to 64 pages during his time as editor. From 1872 to 1897, he served as chairman of the Association’s Parliamentary Bill Committee. He passed away on January 7, 1898. His second wife, Alice Marion Rowland, also studied medicine in London and Paris and shared his passion for philanthropic reform. She was active in promoting Irish cottage industries and founded the Donegal Industrial Fund.


HART, SIR ROBERT, Bart. (1835-  ), Anglo-Chinese statesman, was born at Milltown, Co. Armagh, on the 20th of February 1835. He was educated at Taunton, Dublin and Belfast, and graduated at Queen’s College, Belfast, in 1853. In the following year he received an appointment as student-interpreter 31 in the China consular service, and after serving for a short time at the Ningpo vice-consulate, he was transferred to Canton, where after acting as secretary to the allied commissioners governing the city, he was appointed the local inspector of customs. There he first gained an insight into custom-house work. One effect of the Taiping rebellion was to close the native custom-house at Shanghai; and as the corrupt alternatives proposed by the Chinese were worse than useless, it was arranged by Sir Rutherford Alcock, the British consul, with his French and American colleagues, that they should undertake to collect the duties on goods owned by foreigners entering and leaving the port. Sir T. Wade was appointed to the post of collector in the first instance, and after a short tenure of office was succeeded by Mr H. N. Lay, who held the post until 1863, when he resigned owing to a disagreement with the Chinese government in connexion with the Lay-Osborn fleet. During his tenancy of office the system adopted at Shanghai was applied to the other treaty ports, so that when on Mr Lay’s resignation Mr Hart was appointed inspector-general of foreign customs, he found himself at the head of an organization which collected a revenue of upwards of eight million taels per annum at fourteen treaty ports. From the date when Mr Hart took up his duties at Peking, in 1863, he unceasingly devoted the whole of his energies to the work of the department, with the result that the revenue grew from upwards of eight million taels to nearly twenty-seven million, collected at the thirty-two treaty ports, and the customs staff, which in 1864 numbered 200, reached in 1901 a total of 5704. From the first Mr Hart gained the entire confidence of the members of the Chinese government, who were wise enough to recognize his loyal and able assistance. Of all their numerous sources of revenue, the money furnished by Mr Hart was the only certain asset which could be offered as security for Chinese loans. For many years, moreover, it was customary for the British minister, as well as the ministers of other powers, to consult him in every difficulty; and such complete confidence had Lord Granville in his ability and loyalty, that on the retirement of Sir T. Wade he appointed him minister plenipotentiary at Peking (1885). Sir Robert Hart, however—who was made a K.C.M.G. in 1882—recognized the anomalous position in which he would have been placed had he accepted the proposal, and declined the proffered honour. On all disputed points, whether commercial, religious or political, his advice was invariably sought by the foreign ministers and the Chinese alike. Thrice only did he visit Europe between 1863 and 1902, the result of this long comparative isolation, and of his constant intercourse with the Peking officials, being that he learnt to look at events through Chinese spectacles; and his work, These from the Land of Sinim, shows how far this affected his outlook. The faith which he put in the Chinese made him turn a deaf ear to the warnings which he received of the threatening Boxer movement in 1900. To the last he believed that the attacking force would at least have spared his house, which contained official records of priceless value, but he was doomed to see his faith falsified. The building was burnt to the ground with all that it contained, including his private diary for forty years. When the stress came, and he retreated to the British legation, he took an active part in the defence, and spared neither risk nor toil in his exertions. In addition to the administration of the foreign customs service, the establishment of a postal service in the provinces devolved upon him, and after the signing of the protocol of 1901 he was called upon to organize a native customs service at the treaty ports.

HART, SIR ROBERT, Bart. (1835-  ), Anglo-Chinese statesman, was born in Milltown, Co. Armagh, on February 20, 1835. He was educated in Taunton, Dublin, and Belfast, graduating from Queen’s College, Belfast, in 1853. The following year, he received an meeting as a student-interpreter 31 in the China consular service. After a short stint at the Ningpo vice-consulate, he was transferred to Canton, where he acted as secretary to the allied commissioners governing the city and was then appointed the local customs inspector. This was where he first gained insight into customs work. One consequence of the Taiping rebellion was the closure of the native customs house in Shanghai. As the corrupt alternatives proposed by the Chinese were even more unhelpful, Sir Rutherford Alcock, the British consul, arranged with his French and American colleagues to collect duties on goods owned by foreigners entering and leaving the port. Sir T. Wade was initially appointed as collector, and after a short tenure, he was succeeded by Mr. H. N. Lay, who held the position until 1863, when he resigned due to a disagreement with the Chinese government regarding the Lay-Osborn fleet. During his time in office, the system used in Shanghai was implemented in other treaty ports. So when Mr. Lay resigned, Mr. Hart was appointed inspector-general of foreign customs, leading an organization that collected over eight million taels annually at fourteen treaty ports. From the time Mr. Hart began his duties in Peking in 1863, he dedicated all his efforts to the department's work, resulting in revenue growth from over eight million taels to nearly twenty-seven million, collected at thirty-two treaty ports. The customs staff grew from 200 in 1864 to 5704 by 1901. Mr. Hart quickly gained the complete trust of the Chinese government, which wisely recognized his loyal and capable assistance. Of all their various revenue sources, the funds provided by Mr. Hart were the only reliable asset available for Chinese loans. For many years, it was standard for the British minister and ministers from other countries to consult him in every challenge. Lord Granville had such confidence in his ability and loyalty that when Sir T. Wade retired, he appointed him minister plenipotentiary at Peking (1885). However, Sir Robert Hart, made a K.C.M.G. in 1882, acknowledged the unusual position he would have faced had he accepted the offer and declined the accolade. For all disputed issues—whether commercial, religious, or political—his advice was consistently sought by both foreign ministers and the Chinese. He visited Europe only three times between 1863 and 1902, leading to a long period of relative isolation. His continuous interactions with Peking officials resulted in him viewing events from a Chinese perspective, which is evident in his work, These from the Land of Sinim, reflecting how deeply this influenced his viewpoint. His trust in the Chinese led him to ignore warnings about the impending Boxer movement in 1900. Until the end, he believed that the attacking forces would spare his house, which held invaluable official records. Unfortunately, his faith was shattered when the building was burned to the ground, including his private diary covering forty years. When the crisis hit, he retreated to the British legation, actively participating in the defense and taking on significant risks in his efforts. Along with managing the foreign customs service, he was also responsible for establishing a postal service in the provinces, and after signing the protocol of 1901, he was tasked with organizing a native customs service at the treaty ports.

The appointment of Sir Robert Hart as inspector-general of the imperial maritime customs secured the interests of European investors in Chinese securities, and helped to place Chinese finance generally on a solid footing. When, therefore, in May 1906 the Chinese government appointed a Chinese administrator and assistant administrator of the entire customs of China, who would control Sir Robert Hart and his staff, great anxiety was aroused. The Chinese government had bound itself in 1896 and 1898 that the imperial maritime customs services should remain as then constituted during the currency of the loan. The British government obtained no satisfactory answer to its remonstrances, and Sir Robert Hart, finding himself placed in a subordinate position after his long service, retired in July 1907. He received formal leave of absence in January 1908, when he received the title of president of the board of customs. Both the Chinese and the British governments from time to time conferred honours upon Sir Robert Hart. By giving him a Red Button, or button of the highest rank, a Peacock’s Feather, the order of the Double Dragon, a patent of nobility to his ancestors for three generations, and the title of Junior Guardian of the heir apparent, the Chinese showed their appreciation of his manifold and great services; while under the seal of the British government there were bestowed upon him the orders of C.M.G.(1880), K.C.M.G.(1882), G.C.M.G. (1889), and a baronetcy (1893). He has also been the recipient of many foreign orders. Sir Robert Hart married in 1886 Hester, the daughter of Alexander Bredon, Esq., M.D., of Portadown.

The appointment of Sir Robert Hart as inspector-general of the imperial maritime customs guaranteed the interests of European investors in Chinese securities and helped stabilize Chinese finance overall. Therefore, when the Chinese government appointed a Chinese administrator and assistant administrator to oversee all customs in China in May 1906, which would put Sir Robert Hart and his team under their control, it caused significant concern. The Chinese government had agreed in 1896 and 1898 that the imperial maritime customs services would remain as they were for the duration of the loan. The British government did not receive a satisfactory response to its protests, and Sir Robert Hart, feeling marginalized after his lengthy service, retired in July 1907. He was granted formal leave in January 1908 and was given the title of president of the board of customs. Both the Chinese and British governments periodically honored Sir Robert Hart. The Chinese government showed their appreciation for his numerous and significant contributions by awarding him a Red Button, a Peacock’s Feather, the order of the Double Dragon, a nobility patent for his ancestors for three generations, and the title of Junior Guardian of the heir apparent. Similarly, under the seal of the British government, he received the orders of C.M.G. (1880), K.C.M.G. (1882), G.C.M.G. (1889), and a baronetcy (1893). He also received several foreign honors. Sir Robert Hart married Hester, the daughter of Alexander Bredon, Esq., M.D., of Portadown, in 1886.

See his life by Julia Bredon (Sir Robert Hart, 1909).

See his life by Julia Bredon (Sir Robert Hart, 1909).


HART, WILLIAM (1823-1894), American landscape and cattle painter, was born in Paisley, Scotland, on the 31st of March 1823, and was taken to America in early youth. He was apprenticed to a carriage painter at Albany, New York, and his first efforts in art were in making landscape decorations for the panels of coaches. Subsequently he returned to Scotland, where he studied for three years. He opened a studio in New York in 1853, and was elected an associate of the National Academy of Design in 1857 and an academician in the following year. He was also a member of the American Water Colour Society, and was its president from 1870 to 1873. As one of the group of the Hudson River School he enjoyed considerable popularity, his pictures being in many well-known American collections. He died at Mount Vernon, New York, on the 17th of June 1894.

HART, WILLIAM (1823-1894), an American landscape and cattle painter, was born in Paisley, Scotland, on March 31, 1823, and moved to America in his early years. He apprenticed as a carriage painter in Albany, New York, and began his artistic career by creating landscape designs for the panels of coaches. Later, he returned to Scotland, where he studied for three years. He opened a studio in New York in 1853 and became an associate of the National Academy of Design in 1857, achieving full academician status the following year. He was also a member of the American Water Colour Society, serving as its president from 1870 to 1873. As part of the Hudson River School, he gained significant popularity, with his works featured in many prominent American collections. He passed away in Mount Vernon, New York, on June 17, 1894.

His brother, James McDougal Hart (1828-1901), born in Kilmarnock, Scotland, was also a landscape and cattle painter. He was a pupil of Schirmer in Düsseldorf, and became an associate of the National Academy of Design in 1857 and a full member in 1859. He was survived by two daughters, both figure painters, Letitia B. Hart (b. 1867) and Mary Theresa Hart (b. 1872).

His brother, James McDougal Hart (1828-1901), born in Kilmarnock, Scotland, was also a landscape and cattle painter. He studied under Schirmer in Düsseldorf and became an associate of the National Academy of Design in 1857, becoming a full member in 1859. He was survived by two daughters, both of whom were figure painters: Letitia B. Hart (b. 1867) and Mary Theresa Hart (b. 1872).


HARTE, FRANCIS BRET (1839-1902), American author, was born at Albany, New York, on the 25th of August 1839. His father, a professor of Greek at the Albany College, died during his boyhood. After a common-school education he went with his mother to California at the age of seventeen, afterwards working in that state as a teacher, miner, printer, express-messenger, secretary of the San Francisco mint, and editor. His first literary venture was a series of Condensed Novels (travesties of well-known works of fiction, somewhat in the style of Thackeray), published weekly in The Californian, of which he was editor, and reissued in book form in 1867. The Overland Monthly, the earliest considerable literary magazine on the Pacific coast, was established in 1868, with Harte as editor. His sketches and poems, which appeared in its pages during the next few years, attracted wide attention in the eastern states and in Europe.

HARTE, FRANCIS BRET (1839-1902), American author, was born in Albany, New York, on August 25, 1839. His father, a professor of Greek at Albany College, passed away during his childhood. After getting a standard education, he moved to California with his mother at the age of seventeen, later working there as a teacher, miner, printer, express messenger, secretary of the San Francisco mint, and editor. His first literary effort was a series of Condensed Novels (parodies of famous fiction works, similar to the style of Thackeray), published weekly in The Californian, where he was the editor, and later reissued as a book in 1867. The Overland Monthly, the first major literary magazine on the Pacific coast, was launched in 1868, with Harte as its editor. His sketches and poems, which were published in its pages over the next few years, gained significant attention in the eastern states and in Europe.

Bret Harte was an early master of the short story, and his Californian tales were regarded as introducing a new genre into fiction. “The Luck of Roaring Camp” (1868), “The Outcasts of Poker Flat” (1869), the later sketch “How Santa Claus came to Simpson’s Bar,” and the verses entitled “Plain Language from Truthful James,” combined humour, pathos and power of character portrayal in a manner that indicated that the new land of mining-gulches, gamblers, unassimilated Asiatics, and picturesque and varied landscape had found its best delineator; so that Harte became, in his pioneer pictures, a sort of later Fenimore Cooper. Forty-four volumes were published by him between 1867 and 1898. After a year as professor in the university of California, Harte lived in New York, 1871-1878; was United States consul at Crefeld, Germany, 1878-1880; consul at Glasgow, 1880-1885; and after 1885 resided in London, engaged 32 in literary work. He died at Camberley, England, on the 5th of May 1902.

Bret Harte was an early master of the short story, and his Californian tales were seen as introducing a new genre into fiction. “The Luck of Roaring Camp” (1868), “The Outcasts of Poker Flat” (1869), the later piece “How Santa Claus Came to Simpson’s Bar,” and the poem “Plain Language from Truthful James” combined humor, emotion, and strong character portrayal in a way that showed the new lands of mining camps, gamblers, unassimilated Asians, and diverse landscapes had found their best storyteller. Because of this, Harte became, in his pioneering depictions, a sort of later Fenimore Cooper. He published forty-four volumes between 1867 and 1898. After a year as a professor at the University of California, Harte lived in New York from 1871 to 1878; he served as the United States consul in Crefeld, Germany, from 1878 to 1880; consul in Glasgow from 1880 to 1885; and after 1885, he resided in London, working in literature. He died in Camberley, England, on May 5, 1902.

A library edition of his Writings (16 vols.) was issued in 1900, and increased to 19 vols. in 1904. See also H. W. Boynton, Bret Harte (1905) in the Contemporary Men of Letters series; T. E. Pemberton, Life of Bret Harte (1903), which contains a list of his poems, tales, &c.

A library edition of his Writings (16 vols.) was released in 1900 and expanded to 19 volumes in 1904. Also, check out H. W. Boynton's Bret Harte (1905) from the Contemporary Men of Letters series and T. E. Pemberton's Life of Bret Harte (1903), which includes a list of his poems, stories, etc.


HARTEBEEST, the Boer name for a large South African antelope (also known as caama) characterized by its red colour, long face with naked muzzle and sharply angulated lyrate horns, which are present in both sexes. This antelope is the Bubalis cama or Alcelaphus cama of naturalists; but the name hartebeest has been extended to include all the numerous members of the same genus, some of which are to be found in every part of Africa, while one or two extend into Syria. Some of the species of the allied genus Damaliscus, such as Hunter’s antelope (D. hunteri), are also often called hartebeests. (See Antelope).

HARTEBEEST the Boer name for a large South African antelope (also known as caama) known for its reddish color, long face with a bare muzzle, and sharply angled lyre-shaped horns, which are found in both males and females. This antelope is classified as Bubalis cama or Alcelaphus cama by naturalists; however, the name hartebeest has been broadened to include all the many species within the same genus, some of which are present all over Africa, while a few extend into Syria. Some species of the related genus Damaliscus, like Hunter’s antelope (D. hunteri), are also commonly referred to as hartebeests. (See Antelope).

Cape Hartebeest (Bubalis cama).

HARTFORD, a city and the capital of Connecticut, U.S.A., the county-seat of Hartford county, and a port of entry, coterminous with the township of Hartford, in the west central part of the state, on the W. bank of the Connecticut river, and about 35 m. from Long Island Sound. Pop. (1890), 53,230; (1900), 79,850, of whom 23,758 were foreign-born (including 8076 Irish, 2700 Germans, 2260 Russians, 1952 Italians, 1714 Swedes, 1634 English and 1309 English Canadians); (1910 census) 98,915. Of the total population in 1900, 43,872 were of foreign parentage (both parents foreign-born), and of these 18,410 were of Irish parentage. Hartford is served by two divisions of the New York, New Haven & Hartford railway, by the Central New England railway, by the several electric lines of the Connecticut Company which radiate to the surrounding towns, and by the steamboats of the Hartford & New York Transportation Co., all of which are controlled by the N.Y., N.H. & H. The river, which is navigable to this point, is usually closed from the middle of December to the middle of March.

HARTFORD, is a city and the capital of Connecticut, U.S.A., the county seat of Hartford County, and a port of entry, located alongside the township of Hartford, in the west-central part of the state, on the west bank of the Connecticut River, about 35 miles from Long Island Sound. Population (1890): 53,230; (1900): 79,850, of which 23,758 were foreign-born (including 8,076 Irish, 2,700 Germans, 2,260 Russians, 1,952 Italians, 1,714 Swedes, 1,634 English, and 1,309 English Canadians); (1910 census): 98,915. Of the total population in 1900, 43,872 had foreign parents (both parents foreign-born), with 18,410 being of Irish descent. Hartford is served by two branches of the New York, New Haven & Hartford railway, the Central New England railway, several electric lines from the Connecticut Company that extend to surrounding towns, and steamboats from the Hartford & New York Transportation Co., all controlled by the N.Y., N.H. & H. The river, which is navigable up to this point, is typically frozen over from mid-December to mid-March.

The city covers an area of 17.7 sq. m.; it is well laid out and compactly built, and streets, parks, &c., are under a city-plan commission authorized in 1907. It is intersected by the sluggish Park river, which is spanned by ten bridges. A stone arch bridge, with nine arches, built of granite at a cost of $1,700,000 and dedicated in 1908, spans the Connecticut (replacing the old Connecticut river bridge built in 1818 and burned in 1895), and connects Hartford with the village of East Hartford in the township of East Hartford (pop. 1900, 6406), which has important paper-manufacturing and tobacco-growing interests. The park system of Hartford is the largest in any city of the United States in proportion to the city’s population. In 1908 there were 21 public parks, aggregating more than 1335 acres. In the extreme S. of the city is Goodwin Park (about 200 acres); in the S.E. is Colt Park (106 acres), the gift of Mrs Elizabeth Colt, the widow of Samuel Colt, inventor of the Colt revolver; in the S.W. is Pope Park (about 90 acres); in the W. is Elizabeth (100 acres); in the E., along the Connecticut river front, is Riverside (about 80 acres); and in the extreme N. is Keney Park (680 acres), the gift of Henry Keney, and, next to the Metropolitan Reservations near Boston, the largest park in the New England states. Near the centre of the city are the Capitol Grounds (27 acres; until 1872 the campus of Trinity College) and Bushnell Park (41 acres), adjoining Capitol Park. Bushnell Park, named in honour of Horace Bushnell, contains the Corning Memorial Fountain, erected in 1899 and designed by J. Massey Rhind, and three bronze statues, one, by J. Q. A. Ward, of General Israel Putnam; one, by Truman H. Bartlett, of Dr Horace Wells (1815-1848), the discoverer of anaesthesia; and one, by E. S. Woods, of Colonel Thomas Knowlton (1749-1776), a patriot soldier of the War of Independence, killed at the battle of Harlem Heights. On the Capitol Grounds is the state capitol (Richard M. Upjohn, architect), a magnificent white marble building, which was completed in 1880 at a cost of $2,534,000. Its exterior is adorned with statues and busts of Connecticut statesmen and carvings of scenes in the history of the state. Within the building are regimental flags of the Civil War, a bronze statue by Olin L. Warner of Governor William A. Buckingham, a bronze statue by Karl Gerhardt of Nathan Hale, a bronze tablet (also by Karl Gerhardt) in memory of John Fitch (1743-1798), the inventor; a portrait of Washington, purchased by the state in 1800 from the artist, Gilbert Stuart; and a series of oil portraits of the colonial and state governors. The elaborately carved chair of the lieutenant-governor in the senate chamber, made of wood from the historic Charter Oak, and the original charter of 1662 (or its duplicate of the same date) are preserved in a special vault in the Connecticut state library. A new state library and supreme court building and a new state armoury and arsenal, both of granite, have been (1910) erected upon lands recently added to the Capitol Grounds, thus forming a group of state buildings with the Capitol as the centre. Near the Capitol, at the approach of the memorial bridge across the Park river, is the Soldiers’ and Sailors’ memorial arch, designed by George Keller and erected by the city in 1885 in memory of the Hartford soldiers and sailors who served in the American Civil War.

The city covers an area of 17.7 square miles; it is well-designed and compactly built, with streets, parks, etc., managed by a city-plan commission established in 1907. It is crossed by the slow-moving Park River, which has ten bridges. A stone arch bridge, featuring nine arches and built of granite at a cost of $1,700,000, was dedicated in 1908 and spans the Connecticut River (replacing the old Connecticut River bridge built in 1818 and burned down in 1895), connecting Hartford with the village of East Hartford in the township of East Hartford (population in 1900, 6,406), which has significant paper manufacturing and tobacco growing industries. Hartford's park system is the largest in any city in the United States relative to its population. In 1908, there were 21 public parks totaling over 1,335 acres. In the extreme south of the city is Goodwin Park (about 200 acres); in the southeast is Colt Park (106 acres), a gift from Mrs. Elizabeth Colt, the widow of Samuel Colt, inventor of the Colt revolver; in the southwest is Pope Park (about 90 acres); in the west is Elizabeth Park (100 acres); in the east, along the Connecticut River front, is Riverside Park (about 80 acres); and in the extreme north is Keney Park (680 acres), a gift from Henry Keney, and, next to the Metropolitan Reservations near Boston, the largest park in the New England states. Near the center of the city are the Capitol Grounds (27 acres; until 1872 the campus of Trinity College) and Bushnell Park (41 acres), which borders Capitol Park. Bushnell Park, named in honor of Horace Bushnell, features the Corning Memorial Fountain, erected in 1899 and designed by J. Massey Rhind, and three bronze statues: one by J. Q. A. Ward of General Israel Putnam; another by Truman H. Bartlett of Dr. Horace Wells (1815-1848), the discoverer of anesthesia; and the last by E. S. Woods of Colonel Thomas Knowlton (1749-1776), a patriot soldier of the War of Independence, who was killed at the Battle of Harlem Heights. On the Capitol Grounds is the state capitol (designed by architect Richard M. Upjohn), a magnificent white marble building completed in 1880 at a cost of $2,534,000. Its exterior is adorned with statues and busts of Connecticut statesmen and carvings depicting scenes from the state’s history. Inside the building are regimental flags from the Civil War, a bronze statue by Olin L. Warner of Governor William A. Buckingham, a bronze statue by Karl Gerhardt of Nathan Hale, a bronze tablet (also by Karl Gerhardt) in memory of John Fitch (1743-1798), the inventor; a portrait of Washington, purchased by the state in 1800 from the artist, Gilbert Stuart; and a series of oil portraits of colonial and state governors. The intricately carved chair of the lieutenant governor in the senate chamber, made of wood from the historic Charter Oak, and the original charter of 1662 (or its duplicate from the same year) are preserved in a special vault in the Connecticut state library. A new state library and supreme court building and a new state armory and arsenal, both made of granite, have been built (in 1910) on land recently added to the Capitol Grounds, creating a group of state buildings centered around the Capitol. Near the Capitol, at the entrance to the memorial bridge across the Park River, is the Soldiers’ and Sailors’ Memorial Arch, designed by George Keller and built by the city in 1885 to honor the Hartford soldiers and sailors who served in the American Civil War.

Near the centre of the city is the old town square (now known as the City Hall Square), laid off in 1637. Here, facing Main Street, stands the city hall, a beautiful example of Colonial architecture, which was designed by Charles Bulfinch, completed in 1796, and until 1879 used as a state capitol; it has subsequently been restored. In Main Street is the present edifice of the First Church of Christ, known as the Centre Congregational Church, which was organized in Cambridge, Massachusetts, in 1632, and removed to Hartford, under the leadership of Thomas Hooker and Samuel Stone, in 1636. In the adjoining cemetery are the graves of Thomas Hooker, Governor William Leete (1603-1683), and Governor John Haynes, and a monument in memory of 100 early residents of Hartford. In the same thoroughfare is the Wadsworth Atheneum (built in 1842; enlarged in 1892-1893 and 1907) and its companion buildings, the Colt memorial (built in 1908 to accommodate the Elizabeth Colt art collection) and the Morgan art gallery (built in 1908 by J. Pierpont Morgan in memory of his father, Junius Morgan, a native of Hartford). In this group of buildings are the Hartford public library (containing 90,000 volumes in 1908), the Watkinson library of reference (70,000 volumes in 1908), the library of the Connecticut historical society (25,000 volumes in 1908) and a public art gallery. Other institutions of importance in Hartford are the American school for the deaf (formerly the American asylum for the deaf and dumb), founded in 1816 by Thomas H. Gallaudet; the retreat for the insane (opened for patients in 1824); the Hartford hospital; St Francis hospital; St Thomas’s seminary (Roman Catholic); La Salette Missionary college (R.C.; 1898); Trinity college (founded by members of the Protestant Episcopal church, and now non-sectarian), which was 33 chartered as Washington College in 1823, opened in 1824, renamed Trinity College in 1845, and in 1907-1908 had 27 instructors and 208 students; the Hartford Theological seminary, a Congregational institution, which was founded at East Windsor Hill in 1834 as the Theological Institute of Connecticut, was removed to Hartford in 1865, and adopted its present name in 1885; and, affiliated with the last mentioned institution, the Hartford School of Religious Pedagogy. The Hartford grammar school, founded in 1638, long managed by the town and in 1847 merged with the classical department of the Hartford public high school, is the oldest educational institution in the state. In Farmington Avenue is St Joseph’s cathedral (Roman Catholic), the city being the seat of the diocese of Hartford.

Near the center of the city is the old town square (now known as City Hall Square), laid out in 1637. Here, facing Main Street, stands the city hall, a stunning example of Colonial architecture, designed by Charles Bulfinch and completed in 1796, which served as the state capitol until 1879; it has since been restored. On Main Street is the current building of the First Church of Christ, known as the Center Congregational Church, which was founded in Cambridge, Massachusetts, in 1632 and moved to Hartford, under the leadership of Thomas Hooker and Samuel Stone, in 1636. In the adjoining cemetery are the graves of Thomas Hooker, Governor William Leete (1603-1683), and Governor John Haynes, along with a monument honoring 100 early residents of Hartford. On the same street is the Wadsworth Atheneum (built in 1842; expanded in 1892-1893 and 1907) along with its companion buildings, the Colt Memorial (built in 1908 to hold the Elizabeth Colt art collection) and the Morgan Art Gallery (built in 1908 by J. Pierpont Morgan in memory of his father, Junius Morgan, a Hartford native). In this group of buildings are the Hartford Public Library (which contained 90,000 volumes in 1908), the Watkinson Library of Reference (70,000 volumes in 1908), the Library of the Connecticut Historical Society (25,000 volumes in 1908), and a public art gallery. Other important institutions in Hartford include the American School for the Deaf (formerly the American Asylum for the Deaf and Dumb), founded in 1816 by Thomas H. Gallaudet; the Retreat for the Insane (opened for patients in 1824); Hartford Hospital; St. Francis Hospital; St. Thomas’s Seminary (Roman Catholic); La Salette Missionary College (R.C.; 1898); Trinity College (founded by members of the Protestant Episcopal Church and now non-sectarian), which was chartered as Washington College in 1823, opened in 1824, renamed Trinity College in 1845, and in 1907-1908 had 27 instructors and 208 students; the Hartford Theological Seminary, a Congregational institution that was founded in East Windsor Hill in 1834 as the Theological Institute of Connecticut, moved to Hartford in 1865, and adopted its current name in 1885; and the Hartford School of Religious Pedagogy, affiliated with the last mentioned institution. The Hartford Grammar School, established in 1638, was long managed by the town and merged in 1847 with the classical department of the Hartford Public High School, making it the oldest educational institution in the state. On Farmington Avenue is St. Joseph’s Cathedral (Roman Catholic), as the city is the seat of the Diocese of Hartford.

During the 18th century Hartford enjoyed a large and lucrative commerce, but the railway development of the 19th century centralized commerce in New York and Boston, and consequently the principal source of the city’s wealth has come to be manufacturing and insurance. In 1905 the total value of the “factory” product was $25,975,651. The principal industries are the manufacture of small arms (by the Colt’s Patent Fire-Arms Manufacturing Co., makers of the Colt revolver and the Gatling gun), typewriters (Royal and Underwood), automobiles, bicycles, cyclometers, carriages and wagons, belting, cigars, harness, machinists’ tools and instruments of precision, coil-piping, church organs, horse-shoe nails, electric equipment, machine screws, drop forgings, hydrants and valves, and engines and boilers. In 1788 the first woollen mill in New England was opened in Hartford; and here, too, about 1846, the Rogers process of electro-silver plating was invented. The city is one of the most important insurance centres in the United States. As early as 1794 policies were issued by the Hartford Fire Insurance Company (chartered in 1810). In 1909 Hartford was the home city of six fire insurance and six life insurance companies, the principal ones being the Aetna (fire), Aetna Life, Phoenix Mutual Life, Phoenix Fire, Travelers (Life and Accident), Hartford Fire, Hartford Life, National Fire, Connecticut Fire, Connecticut General Life and Connecticut Mutual Life. In 1906 the six fire insurance companies had an aggregate capital of more than $10,000,000; on the 1st January 1906 they reported assets of about $59,000,000 and an aggregate surplus of $30,000,000. In the San Francisco disaster of that year they paid more than $15,000,000 of losses. Since the fire insurance business began in Hartford, the companies of that city now doing business there have paid about $340,000,000 in losses. Several large and successful foreign companies have made Hartford their American headquarters. The life insurance companies have assets to the value of about $225,000,000. The Aetna (fire), Aetna Life, Connecticut Fire, Connecticut Mutual Life, Connecticut General Life, Hartford Fire, Hartford Life, Hartford Steam Boiler Inspection and Insurance Co., National Fire, Orient Fire, Phoenix Mutual Life and Travelers companies have their own homes, some of these being among the finest buildings in Hartford. The city has also large banking interests.

During the 18th century, Hartford experienced significant and profitable trade, but the railway expansion in the 19th century shifted commerce to New York and Boston. As a result, the main sources of the city's wealth are now manufacturing and insurance. In 1905, the total value of the factory output was $25,975,651. The key industries include the production of firearms (by Colt’s Patent Fire-Arms Manufacturing Co., known for the Colt revolver and the Gatling gun), typewriters (Royal and Underwood), automobiles, bicycles, cyclometers, carriages and wagons, belting, cigars, harnesses, machinist tools and precision instruments, coil-piping, church organs, horse-shoe nails, electric equipment, machine screws, drop forgings, hydrants and valves, and engines and boilers. In 1788, the first woolen mill in New England was established in Hartford; around 1846, the Rogers process for electro-silver plating was also invented here. The city is one of the most significant insurance hubs in the United States. As early as 1794, policies were issued by the Hartford Fire Insurance Company (chartered in 1810). In 1909, Hartford was the home of six fire insurance and six life insurance companies, the major ones being Aetna (fire), Aetna Life, Phoenix Mutual Life, Phoenix Fire, Travelers (Life and Accident), Hartford Fire, Hartford Life, National Fire, Connecticut Fire, Connecticut General Life, and Connecticut Mutual Life. In 1906, the six fire insurance companies had a combined capital of over $10,000,000; on January 1, 1906, they reported assets of about $59,000,000 and a total surplus of $30,000,000. During the San Francisco disaster that year, they paid out over $15,000,000 in losses. Since the start of the fire insurance business in Hartford, the companies based there have paid out approximately $340,000,000 in losses. Several large and successful international companies have established their American headquarters in Hartford. The life insurance companies hold assets worth about $225,000,000. The Aetna (fire), Aetna Life, Connecticut Fire, Connecticut Mutual Life, Connecticut General Life, Hartford Fire, Hartford Life, Hartford Steam Boiler Inspection and Insurance Co., National Fire, Orient Fire, Phoenix Mutual Life, and Travelers companies have their own offices, some of which are among the finest buildings in Hartford. The city also has substantial banking interests.

The first settlement on the site of Hartford was made by the Dutch from New Amsterdam, who in 1633 established on the bank of the Connecticut river, at the mouth of the Park river, a fort which they held until 1654. The township of Hartford was one of the first three original townships of Connecticut. The first English settlement was made in 1635 by sixty immigrants, mostly from New Town (now Cambridge), Massachusetts; but the main immigration was in 1636, when practically all the New Town congregation led by Thomas Hooker and Samuel Stone joined those who had preceded them. Their settlement was called Newtown until 1637, when the present name was adopted from Hertford, England, the birthplace of Stone. In 1636 Hartford was the meeting-place of the first general court of the Connecticut colony; the Fundamental Orders, the first written constitution, were adopted at Hartford in 1639; and after the union of the colonies of New Haven and Connecticut, accomplished by the charter of 1662, Hartford became the sole capital: but from 1701 until 1873 that honour was shared with New Haven. At Hartford occurred in 1687 the meeting of Edmund Andros and the Connecticut officials (see Connecticut). Hartford was first chartered in 1784, was rechartered in 1856 (the charter of that date has been subsequently revised), and in 1881 was made coterminous with the township of Hartford. The city was the literary centre of Federalist ideas in the latter part of the 18th century, being the home of Lemuel Hopkins, John Trumbull, Joel Barlow and David Humphreys, the leading members of a group of authors known as the “Hartford Wits”; and in 1814-1815 the city was the meeting-place of the famous Hartford Convention, an event of great importance in the history of the Federalist party. The War of 1812, with the Embargo Acts (1807-1813), which were so destructive of New England’s commerce, thoroughly aroused the Federalist leaders in this part of the country against the National government as administered by the Democrats, and in 1814, when the British were not only threatening a general invasion of their territory but had actually occupied a part of the Maine coast, and the National government promised no protection, the legislature of Massachusetts invited the other New England states to join with her in sending delegates to a convention which should meet at Hartford to consider their grievances, means of preserving their resources, measures of protection against the British, and the advisability of taking measures to bring about a convention of delegates from all the United States for the purpose of revising the Federal constitution. The legislatures of Connecticut and Rhode Island, and town meetings in Cheshire and Grafton counties (New Hampshire) and in Windham county (Vermont) accepted the invitation, and the convention, composed of 12 delegates from Massachusetts, 7 from Connecticut, 4 from Rhode Island, 2 from New Hampshire and 1 from Vermont, all Federalists, met on the 15th of December 1814, chose George Cabot of Massachusetts president and Theodore Dwight of Connecticut secretary, and remained in secret session until the 5th of January 1815, when it adjourned sine die. At the conclusion of its work it recommended greater military control for each of the several states and that the Federal constitution be so amended that representatives and direct taxes should be apportioned among the several states “according to their respective numbers of free persons,” that no new state should be admitted to the Union without the concurrence of two-thirds of both Houses of Congress, that Congress should not have the power to lay an embargo for more than sixty days, that the concurrence of two-thirds of the members of both Houses of Congress should be necessary to pass an act “to interdict the commercial intercourse between the United States and any foreign nation or the dependencies thereof” or to declare war against any foreign nation except in case of actual invasion, that “no person who shall hereafter be naturalized shall be eligible as a member of the Senate or House of Representatives of the United States, nor capable of holding any civil office under the authority of the United States,” and that “the same person shall not be elected president of the United States a second time; nor shall the president be elected from the same state two terms in succession.” After making these recommendations concerning amendments the Convention resolved: “That if the application of these states to the government of the United States, recommended in a foregoing resolution, should be unsuccessful, and peace should not be concluded, and the defence of these states should be neglected, as it has been since the commencement of the war, it will, in the opinion of this convention, be expedient for the legislatures of the several states to appoint delegates to another convention, to meet at Boston in the state of Massachusetts on the third Thursday of June next, with such powers and instructions as the exigency of a crisis so momentous may require.” The legislatures of Massachusetts and Connecticut approved of these proposed amendments and sent commissioners to Washington to urge their adoption, but before their arrival the war had closed, and not only did the amendments fail to receive the approval of any other state, but the legislatures of nine states expressed their disapproval of the Hartford Convention itself, some charging it with sowing “seeds of dissension and 34 disunion.” The cessation of the war brought increased popularity to the Democratic administration, and the Hartford Convention was vigorously attacked throughout the country.

The first settlement on the site of Hartford was established by the Dutch from New Amsterdam in 1633. They built a fort on the bank of the Connecticut River, at the mouth of the Park River, and held it until 1654. Hartford was one of the first three original townships in Connecticut. The first English settlement occurred in 1635, when sixty immigrants, mostly from New Town (now Cambridge), Massachusetts, arrived. However, the major influx of settlers came in 1636, when practically the entire New Town congregation, led by Thomas Hooker and Samuel Stone, joined those who were already there. Their settlement was called Newtown until 1637, when it adopted its current name, taken from Hertford, England, the birthplace of Stone. In 1636, Hartford hosted the first general court of the Connecticut colony; the Fundamental Orders, the first written constitution, were adopted there in 1639. After the union of the New Haven and Connecticut colonies established by the charter of 1662, Hartford became the sole capital, although from 1701 until 1873, it shared that distinction with New Haven. Notably, in 1687, Hartford was the site of a meeting between Edmund Andros and the Connecticut officials (see Connecticut). Hartford was first chartered in 1784 and rechartered in 1856 (this charter has since been revised), and in 1881 it became coterminous with the township of Hartford. The city became the literary center for Federalist ideas in the late 18th century, home to figures like Lemuel Hopkins, John Trumbull, Joel Barlow, and David Humphreys, who were part of a group known as the “Hartford Wits.” In 1814-1815, Hartford was also where the famous Hartford Convention took place, an event that was significant in the history of the Federalist party. The War of 1812, coupled with the Embargo Acts (1807-1813) that severely affected New England's commerce, galvanized Federalist leaders in this region against the National government led by the Democrats. In 1814, with British forces threatening to invade and having occupied parts of the Maine coast, and with the National government showing no intentions of providing protection, the Massachusetts legislature invited the other New England states to send delegates to a convention in Hartford. The purpose of the meeting was to address their grievances, discuss ways to preserve their resources, consider protection against the British, and evaluate whether to call for a convention of delegates from all the United States to revise the Federal Constitution. The legislatures of Connecticut and Rhode Island, along with town meetings in Cheshire and Grafton counties (New Hampshire) and Windham county (Vermont), accepted the invitation. The convention, consisting of 12 delegates from Massachusetts, 7 from Connecticut, 4 from Rhode Island, 2 from New Hampshire, and 1 from Vermont—all Federalists—met on December 15, 1814. They elected George Cabot of Massachusetts as president and Theodore Dwight of Connecticut as secretary, remaining in secret session until January 5, 1815, when it adjourned sine die. When the convention concluded its work, it recommended increased military control for each state and proposed that the Federal Constitution be amended to allocate representatives and direct taxes among the states “according to their respective numbers of free persons,” that no new state should join the Union without the approval of two-thirds of both Houses of Congress, that Congress should not have the power to impose an embargo for more than sixty days, that a two-thirds majority in both Houses of Congress should be necessary to pass laws “to interdict the commercial intercourse between the United States and any foreign nation or its dependencies” or to declare war against foreign nations except in instances of actual invasion, that “no person who shall hereafter be naturalized shall be eligible as a member of the Senate or House of Representatives of the United States, nor capable of holding any civil office under the authority of the United States,” and that “the same person shall not be elected president of the United States a second time; nor shall the president be elected from the same state two terms in a row.” After proposing these amendments, the Convention resolved: “That if the application of these states to the government of the United States, recommended in a previous resolution, should fail, and peace should not be established, and the defense of these states should continue to be neglected, as it has been since the start of the war, then, in the opinion of this convention, it would be appropriate for the legislatures of the several states to appoint delegates to another convention, meeting in Boston in Massachusetts on the third Thursday of June next, with such powers and instructions as the seriousness of the situation may require.” The legislatures of Massachusetts and Connecticut supported these proposed amendments and sent commissioners to Washington to advocate for their adoption. However, before they arrived, the war ended, and not only did the amendments not gain approval from any other state, but the legislatures of nine states disapproved of the Hartford Convention itself, some accusing it of sowing “seeds of dissension and disunion.” The end of the war increased the popularity of the Democratic administration, and the Hartford Convention faced significant backlash across the country.

Hartford was the birthplace of Noah Webster, who here published his Grammatical Institute of the English Language (1783-1785), and of Henry Barnard, John Fiske and Frederick Law Olmsted, and has been the home of Samuel P. Goodrich (Peter Parley), George D. Prentice, Harriet Beecher Stowe, Charles Dudley Warner, Samuel L. Clemens (Mark Twain) and Horace Bushnell. More than 100 periodicals have been established in Hartford, of which the oldest is the Hartford Courant (1764), the oldest newspaper in the United States. This paper was very influential in shaping public opinion in the years preceding the War of Independence; after the war it was successively Federalist, Whig and Republican. The Times (semi-weekly 1817; daily 1841) was one of the most powerful Democratic organs in the period before the middle of the 19th century, and had Gideon Wells for editor 1826-1836. The Congregationalist (afterwards published in Boston) and the Churchman (afterwards published in New York) were also founded at Hartford.

Hartford was the birthplace of Noah Webster, who published his Grammatical Institute of the English Language (1783-1785) here, as well as of Henry Barnard, John Fiske, and Frederick Law Olmsted. It's also where Samuel P. Goodrich (Peter Parley), George D. Prentice, Harriet Beecher Stowe, Charles Dudley Warner, Samuel L. Clemens (Mark Twain), and Horace Bushnell lived. More than 100 periodicals have been established in Hartford, with the oldest being the Hartford Courant (1764), the oldest newspaper in the United States. This paper played a significant role in shaping public opinion leading up to the War of Independence; afterwards, it was successively Federalist, Whig, and Republican. The Times (semi-weekly in 1817; daily in 1841) was one of the most influential Democratic publications before the mid-19th century, with Gideon Wells as editor from 1826 to 1836. The Congregationalist (later published in Boston) and the Churchman (later published in New York) were also founded in Hartford.

See Scaeva, Hartford in the Olden Times: Its First Thirty Years (Hartford, 1853), edited by W. M. B. Hartley; and J. H. Trumbull, Memorial History of Hartford County (Boston, 1886). For the Hartford Convention see History of the Hartford Convention (Boston, 1833), published by its secretary, Theodore Dwight; H. C. Lodge, Life and Letters of George Cabot (Boston, 1877); and Henry Adams, Documents Relating to New England Federalism (Boston, 1877).

See Scaeva, Hartford in the Olden Times: Its First Thirty Years (Hartford, 1853), edited by W. M. B. Hartley; and J. H. Trumbull, Memorial History of Hartford County (Boston, 1886). For the Hartford Convention see History of the Hartford Convention (Boston, 1833), published by its secretary, Theodore Dwight; H. C. Lodge, Life and Letters of George Cabot (Boston, 1877); and Henry Adams, Documents Relating to New England Federalism (Boston, 1877).


HARTFORD CITY, a city and the county-seat of Blackford county, Indiana, U.S.A., 62 m. N.E. of Indianapolis. Pop. (1890) 2287; (1900) 5912 (572 foreign-born); (1910) 6187. The city is served by the Fort Wayne, Cincinnati & Louisville, and the Pittsburg, Cincinnati, Chicago & St Louis railways, and the Indiana Union Traction line (electric). There are oil and natural gas wells in the vicinity, and the city has pulp and paper mills, glass and tile works, and manufactories of woodenware, and nitro-glycerine and powder. The municipality owns and operates its water-works system. The first settlement in the vicinity was made in 1832. Hartford City became the county-seat of Blackford county when that county was erected in 1837; it was laid out in 1839 and was first incorporated as a town in 1867.

HARTFORD CITY, is a city and the county seat of Blackford County, Indiana, U.S.A., located 62 miles northeast of Indianapolis. Population: (1890) 2,287; (1900) 5,912 (572 foreign-born); (1910) 6,187. The city is accessible via the Fort Wayne, Cincinnati & Louisville, and the Pittsburg, Cincinnati, Chicago & St. Louis railways, as well as the Indiana Union Traction line (electric). There are oil and natural gas wells nearby, and the city has pulp and paper mills, glass and tile factories, and manufacturers of wooden goods, nitroglycerin, and explosives. The municipality owns and operates its own waterworks system. The first settlement in the area was established in 1832. Hartford City became the county seat of Blackford County when it was formed in 1837; it was laid out in 1839 and was first incorporated as a town in 1867.


HARTIG, GEORG LUDWIG (1764-1837), German agriculturist and writer on forestry, was born at Gladenbach, near Marburg, on the 2nd of September 1764. After obtaining a practical knowledge of forestry at Harzburg, he studied from 1781 to 1783 at the university of Giessen. In 1786 he became manager of forests to the prince of Solms-Braunfels at Hungen in the Wetterau, where he founded a school for the teaching of forestry. After obtaining in 1797 the appointment of inspector of forests to the prince of Orange-Nassau, he continued his school of forestry at Dillenburg, where the attendance thereat increased considerably. On the dissolution of the principality by Napoleon I. in 1805 he lost his position, but in 1806 he went as chief inspector of forests to Stuttgart, whence in 1811 he was called to Berlin in a like capacity. There he continued his school of forestry, and succeeded in connecting it with the university of Berlin, where in 1830 he was appointed an honorary professor. He died at Berlin on the 2nd of February 1837. His son Theodor (1805-1880), and grandson Robert (1839-1901), were also distinguished for their contributions to the study of forestry.

HARTIG, GEORG LUDWIG (1764-1837), a German agricultural expert and forestry writer, was born in Gladenbach, near Marburg, on September 2, 1764. After gaining hands-on experience in forestry at Harzburg, he studied at the University of Giessen from 1781 to 1783. In 1786, he became the forest manager for the prince of Solms-Braunfels in Hungen, Wetterau, where he established a school for forestry education. After earning the role of inspector of forests for the prince of Orange-Nassau in 1797, he expanded his forestry school in Dillenburg, which saw a significant increase in attendance. When Napoleon I dissolved the principality in 1805, he lost his position, but in 1806, he took on the role of chief inspector of forests in Stuttgart. In 1811, he was called to Berlin in a similar position. There, he continued his forestry school and successfully linked it with the University of Berlin, where he was named an honorary professor in 1830. He passed away in Berlin on February 2, 1837. His son Theodor (1805-1880) and grandson Robert (1839-1901) also made significant contributions to forestry studies.

G. L. Hartig was the author of a number of valuable works: Lehrbuch für Jäger (Stuttgart, 1810); Lehrbuch für Förster (3 vols., Stuttgart, 1808); Kubiktabellen für geschnittene, beschlagene, und runde Hölzer (1815, 10th ed. Berlin, 1871); and Lexikon für Jäger und Jagdfreunde (1836, 2nd ed. Berlin, 1859-1861). Theodor Hartig and his son Robert also published numerous works dealing with forestry, one of the latter’s books being translated into English by W. Somerville and H. Marshall Ward as Diseases of Trees (1894).

G. L. Hartig wrote several important works: Textbook for Hunters (Stuttgart, 1810); Textbook for Foresters (3 vols., Stuttgart, 1808); Cubic Tables for Cut, Processed, and Round Timber (1815, 10th ed. Berlin, 1871); and Encyclopedia for Hunters and Hunting Enthusiasts (1836, 2nd ed. Berlin, 1859-1861). Theodor Hartig and his son Robert also published many works on forestry, with one of Robert’s books being translated into English by W. Somerville and H. Marshall Ward as Diseases of Trees (1894).


HARTLEPOOL, a parliamentary borough of Durham, England, embracing the municipal borough of Hartlepool or East Hartlepool and the municipal and county borough of West Hartlepool. Pop. (1901) of Hartlepool, 22,723; of West Hartlepool, 62,627. The towns are on the coast of the North Sea separated by Hartlepool Bay, with a harbour, and both have stations on branches of the North Eastern railway, 247 m. N. by W. from London. The surrounding country is bleak, and the coast is low. Caves occur in the slight cliffs, and protection against the attacks of the waves has been found necessary. The ancient market town of Hartlepool lies on a peninsula which forms the termination of a south-eastward sweep of the coast and embraces the bay. Its naturally strong position was formerly fortified, and part of the walls, serving as a promenade, remain. The parish church of St Hilda, standing on an eminence above the sea, is late Norman and Early English, with a massive tower, heavily buttressed. There is a handsome borough hall in Italian style. West Hartlepool, a wholly modern town, has several handsome modern churches, municipal buildings, exchange, market hall, Athenaeum and public library. The municipal area embraces the three townships of Seaton Carew, a seaside resort with good bathing, and golf links; Stranton, with its church of All Saints, of the 14th century, on a very early site; and Throston.

HARTLEPOOL, is a parliamentary borough in Durham, England, which includes the municipal borough of Hartlepool or East Hartlepool and the municipal and county borough of West Hartlepool. The population in 1901 was 22,723 for Hartlepool and 62,627 for West Hartlepool. The towns are located on the North Sea coast, separated by Hartlepool Bay, which has a harbor, and both have train stations on branches of the North Eastern railway, 247 miles northwest of London. The surrounding area is barren, and the coastline is low. There are caves in the shallow cliffs, and measures have been taken to protect against wave attacks. The historic market town of Hartlepool sits on a peninsula that extends into the bay. Its naturally strong position was once fortified, and some of the walls still stand, serving as a promenade. The parish church of St Hilda, located on a rise above the sea, has late Norman and Early English architecture, featuring a massive, heavily buttressed tower. There is an attractive borough hall designed in Italian style. West Hartlepool is a completely modern town with several striking modern churches, municipal buildings, an exchange, a market hall, an Athenaeum, and a public library. The municipal area includes three townships: Seaton Carew, a seaside resort with good bathing and golf links; Stranton, home to the 14th-century church of All Saints on a very early site; and Throston.

The two Hartlepools are officially considered as one port. The harbour, which embraces two tidal basins and six docks aggregating 83½ acres, in addition to timber docks of 57 acres, covers altogether 350 acres. There are five graving docks, admitting vessels of 550 ft. length and 10 to 21 ft. draught. The depth of water on the dock sills varies from 17½ ft. at neap tides to 25 ft. at spring tides. A breakwater three-quarters of a mile long protects the entrance to the harbour. An important trade is carried on in the export of coal, ships, machinery, iron and other metallic ores, woollens and cottons, and in the import of timber, sugar, iron and copper ores, and eggs. Timber makes up 59% of the imports, and coal and ships each about 30% of the exports. The principal industries are shipbuilding (iron), boiler and engineering works, iron and brass foundries, steam saw and planing mills, flour-mills, paper and paint factories, and soapworks.

The two Hartlepools are officially recognized as one port. The harbor includes two tidal basins and six docks, totaling 83½ acres, along with 57 acres of timber docks, making a combined area of 350 acres. There are five dry docks that can accommodate vessels up to 550 feet long with a draft of 10 to 21 feet. The water depth at the dock sills ranges from 17½ feet at neap tides to 25 feet at spring tides. A breakwater that is three-quarters of a mile long safeguards the harbor entrance. Important trade occurs in exporting coal, ships, machinery, iron and other metals, woolen goods, and cotton, as well as importing timber, sugar, iron and copper ores, and eggs. Timber accounts for 59% of the imports, while coal and ships each make up about 30% of the exports. The main industries include shipbuilding (iron), boiler and engineering works, iron and brass foundries, steam saw and planing mills, flour mills, paper and paint factories, and soap production.

The parliamentary borough (falling within the south-east county division) returns one member. The municipal borough of Hartlepool is under a mayor, 6 aldermen and 18 councillors, and has an area of 972 acres. The municipal borough of West Hartlepool is under a mayor, 8 aldermen and 24 councillors, and has an area of 2684 acres.

The parliamentary borough (located in the southeast county division) elects one representative. The municipal borough of Hartlepool is governed by a mayor, 6 aldermen, and 18 council members, covering an area of 972 acres. The municipal borough of West Hartlepool is led by a mayor, 8 aldermen, and 24 council members, spanning an area of 2,684 acres.

Built on the horns of a sheltered bay, Hartlepool (Hertepull, Hertipol), grew up round the monastery founded there in 640, but was destroyed by the Danes in 800 and rebuilt by Ecgred, bishop of Lindisfarne. In 1173 Bishop Hugh de Puiset allowed French and Flemish troops to land at Hartlepool to aid the Scots. It is not mentioned in Boldon Book as, being part of the royal manor of Sadberg held at this time by the family of Bruce, it did not become the property of the see of Durham until the purchase of that manor in 1189. The bishops did not obtain possession until the reign of John, who during the interval in 1201 gave Hartlepool a charter granting the burgesses the same privileges that the burgesses of Newcastle enjoyed; in 1230 Bishop Richard Poor granted further liberties, including a gild merchant. Edward II. seized the borough as a possession of Robert Bruce, but he could control it very slightly owing to the bishop’s powers. In 1328 Edward III. granted the borough 100 marks towards the town-wall and Richard II. granted murage for seven years, the term being extended in 1400. In 1383 Bishop Fordham gave the burgesses licence to receive tolls within the borough for the maintenance of the walls, while Bishop Neville granted a commission for the construction of a pier or mole. In the 16th century Hartlepool was less prosperous; in 1523 the haven was said to be ruined, the fortifications decayed. An act of 1535 declared Hartlepool to be in Yorkshire, but in 1554 it was reinstated in the county of Durham. It fell into the hands of the northern earls in 1563, and a garrison was maintained there after the rebellion was crushed. In 1593 Elizabeth incorporated it, and gave the burgesses a town hall and court of pie powder. During the civil wars Hartlepool, which a few years before was said to be the only port town in the country, was taken by the Scots, who maintained a garrison there until 1647. As a borough of the Palatinate Hartlepool was not represented in parliament until the 19th century, though strong arguments in its favour were advanced in the Commons in 1614. The markets of 35 Hartlepool were important throughout the middle ages. In 1216 John confirmed to Robert Bruce the market on Wednesday granted to his father and the fair on the feast of St Lawrence; this fair was extended to fifteen days by the grant of 1230, while the charter of 1595 also granted a fair and market. During the 14th century trade was carried on with Germany, Spain and Holland, and in 1346 Hartlepool provided five ships for the French war, being considered one of the chief seaports in the kingdom. The markets were still considerable in Camden’s day, but declined during the 18th century, when Hartlepool became fashionable as a watering-place.

Built on the edge of a protected bay, Hartlepool (Hertepull, Hertipol), developed around the monastery established there in 640, but was destroyed by the Danes in 800 and rebuilt by Ecgred, the bishop of Lindisfarne. In 1173, Bishop Hugh de Puiset allowed French and Flemish troops to land at Hartlepool to assist the Scots. It is not mentioned in the Boldon Book since, being part of the royal manor of Sadberg, held at that time by the Bruce family, it did not become the property of the see of Durham until the purchase of that manor in 1189. The bishops did not gain possession until the reign of John, who, during the interval in 1201, granted Hartlepool a charter that provided the burgesses with the same privileges as the burgesses of Newcastle; in 1230, Bishop Richard Poor granted additional liberties, including a guild merchant. Edward II seized the borough as a possession of Robert Bruce, but he could hardly control it due to the bishop’s powers. In 1328, Edward III granted the borough 100 marks for the town wall, and Richard II granted murage for seven years, with the term being extended in 1400. In 1383, Bishop Fordham allowed the burgesses to collect tolls within the borough for the upkeep of the walls, while Bishop Neville authorized a commission for the construction of a pier or mole. In the 16th century, Hartlepool was less prosperous; in 1523, the haven was reported to be ruined, and the fortifications were in decay. An act of 1535 declared Hartlepool to be in Yorkshire, but in 1554 it was restored to the county of Durham. It fell into the hands of the northern earls in 1563, and a garrison was maintained there after the rebellion was put down. In 1593, Elizabeth incorporated it and provided the burgesses with a town hall and court of pie powder. During the civil wars, Hartlepool, which a few years earlier was said to be the only port town in the country, was captured by the Scots, who held a garrison there until 1647. As a borough of the Palatinate, Hartlepool was not represented in parliament until the 19th century, although strong arguments in its favor were made in the Commons in 1614. The markets of 35 Hartlepool were significant throughout the Middle Ages. In 1216, John confirmed to Robert Bruce the market on Wednesday that had been granted to his father and the fair on the feast of St. Lawrence; this fair was extended to fifteen days by the grant of 1230, while the charter of 1595 also granted a fair and market. During the 14th century, trade was conducted with Germany, Spain, and Holland, and in 1346, Hartlepool provided five ships for the French war, being regarded as one of the principal seaports in the kingdom. The markets were still significant in Camden’s time but declined during the 18th century when Hartlepool became popular as a seaside resort.


HARTLEY, SIR CHARLES AUGUSTUS (1825-  ), English engineer, was born in 1825 at Heworth, Durham. Like most engineers of his generation he was engaged in railway work in the early part of his career, but subsequently he devoted himself to hydraulic engineering and the improvement of estuaries and harbours for the purposes of navigation. He was employed in connexion with some of the largest and most important waterways of the world. After serving in the Crimea as a captain of engineers in the Anglo-Turkish contingent, he was in 1856 appointed engineer-in-chief for the works carried out by the European Commission of the Danube for improving the navigation at the mouths of that river, and that position he retained till 1872, when he became consulting engineer to the Commission (see Danube). In 1875 he was one of the committee appointed by the authority of the U.S.A. Congress to report on the works necessary to form and maintain a deep channel through the south pass of the Mississippi delta; and in 1884 the British government nominated him a member of the international technical commission for widening the Suez Canal. In addition he was consulted by the British and other governments in connexion with many other river and harbour works, including the improvement of the navigation of the Scheldt, Hugli, Don and Dnieper, and of the ports of Odessa, Trieste, Kustendjie, Burgas, Varna and Durban. He was knighted in 1862, and became K.C.M.G. in 1884.

HARTLEY, SIR CHARLES AUGUSTUS (1825-  ), English engineer, was born in 1825 in Heworth, Durham. Like most engineers of his time, he started his career working in railways, but later focused on hydraulic engineering and improving estuaries and harbors for navigation. He worked on some of the largest and most significant waterways in the world. After serving in the Crimea as a captain of engineers in the Anglo-Turkish contingent, he was appointed chief engineer for the European Commission of the Danube in 1856 to enhance navigation at the river's mouths, a role he held until 1872 when he became a consulting engineer to the Commission (see Danube). In 1875, he was part of a committee appointed by the U.S. Congress to report on the necessary work to create and maintain a deep channel through the south pass of the Mississippi delta; and in 1884, the British government appointed him to the international technical commission for widening the Suez Canal. Additionally, he advised the British and other governments on various river and harbor projects, including improving navigation of the Scheldt, Hugli, Don, and Dnieper rivers, as well as the ports of Odessa, Trieste, Kustendjie, Burgas, Varna, and Durban. He was knighted in 1862 and became K.C.M.G. in 1884.


HARTLEY, DAVID (1705-1757), English philosopher, and founder of the Associationist school of psychologists, was born on the 30th of August 1705. He was educated at Bradford grammar school and Jesus College, Cambridge, of which society he became a fellow in 1727. Originally intended for the Church, he was deterred from taking orders by certain scruples as to signing the Thirty-nine Articles, and took up the study of medicine. Nevertheless, he remained in the communion of the English Church, living on intimate terms with the most distinguished churchmen of his day. Indeed he asserted it to be a duty to obey ecclesiastical as well as civil authorities. The doctrine to which he most strongly objected was that of eternal punishment. Hartley practised as a physician at Newark, Bury St Edmunds, London, and lastly at Bath, where he died on the 28th of August 1757. His Observations on Man was published in 1749, three years after Condillac’s Essai sur l’origine des connaissances humaines, in which theories essentially similar to his were expounded. It is in two parts—the first dealing with the frame of the human body and mind, and their mutual connexions and influences, the second with the duty and expectations of mankind. His two main theories are the doctrine of vibrations and the doctrine of associations. His physical theory, he tells us, was drawn from certain speculations as to nervous action which Newton had published in his Principia. His psychological theory was suggested by the Dissertation concerning the Fundamental Principles of Virtue or Morality, which was written by a clergyman named John Gay (1699-1745), and prefixed by Bishop Law to his translation1 of Archbishop King’s Latin work on the Origin of Evil, its chief object being to show that sympathy and conscience are developments by means of association from the selfish feelings.

HARTLEY, DAVID (1705-1757), an English philosopher and founder of the Associationist school of psychology, was born on August 30, 1705. He attended Bradford grammar school and Jesus College, Cambridge, where he became a fellow in 1727. Initially meant for the Church, he was hesitant to take holy orders due to some concerns about signing the Thirty-nine Articles, so he switched to studying medicine. However, he remained part of the English Church and had close relationships with some of the most notable church leaders of his time. In fact, he believed it was his duty to obey both religious and civil authorities. The doctrine that he strongly opposed was the idea of eternal punishment. Hartley worked as a physician in Newark, Bury St Edmunds, London, and finally in Bath, where he passed away on August 28, 1757. His Observations on Man was published in 1749, three years after Condillac's Essai sur l'origine des connaissances humaines, which presented similar theories. The work is divided into two parts—the first focuses on the structure of the human body and mind and their mutual connections and influences, while the second addresses the duties and expectations of humanity. His two main theories are the doctrine of vibrations and the doctrine of associations. He stated that his physical theory was based on certain ideas about nervous action that Newton had published in his Principia. His psychological theory was inspired by the Dissertation concerning the Fundamental Principles of Virtue or Morality, authored by clergyman John Gay (1699-1745), which was prefixed by Bishop Law to his translation1 of Archbishop King’s Latin work on the Origin of Evil, primarily aiming to demonstrate that sympathy and conscience evolve through association from selfish feelings.

The outlines of Hartley’s theory are as follows. With Locke he asserted that, prior to sensation, the human mind is a blank. By a growth from simple sensations those states of consciousness which appear most remote from sensation come into being. And the one law of growth of which Hartley took account was the law of contiguity, synchronous and successive. By this law he sought to explain, not only the phenomena of memory, which others had similarly explained before him, but also the phenomena of emotion, of reasoning, and of voluntary and involuntary action (see Association of Ideas).

The main points of Hartley’s theory are as follows. Like Locke, he claimed that before we experience sensation, the human mind is a blank slate. Through a process of building from simple sensations, the more complex states of consciousness that seem far removed from sensation develop. The primary principle of development that Hartley recognized was the law of contiguity, both simultaneous and sequential. He aimed to explain not just memory — which others had also explained — but also emotions, reasoning, and both voluntary and involuntary actions (see Association of Ideas).

By his physical theory Hartley gave the first strong impulse to the modern study of the intimate connexion of physiological and psychical facts which has proved so fruitful, though his physical theory in itself is inadequate, and has not been largely adopted. He held that sensation is the result of a vibration of the minute particles of the medullary substance of the nerves, to account for which he postulated, with Newton, a subtle elastic ether, rare in the interstices of solid bodies and in their close neighbourhood, and denser as it recedes from them. Pleasure is the result of moderate vibrations, pain of vibrations so violent as to break the continuity of the nerves. These vibrations leave behind them in the brain a tendency to fainter vibrations or “vibratiuncles” of a similar kind, which correspond to “ideas of sensation.” Thus memory is accounted for. The course of reminiscence and of the thoughts generally, when not immediately dependent upon external sensation, is accounted for on the ground that there are always vibrations in the brain on account of its heat and the pulsation of its arteries. What these vibrations shall be is determined by the nature of each man’s past experience, and by the influence of the circumstances of the moment, which causes now one now another tendency to prevail over the rest. Sensations which are often associated together become each associated with the ideas corresponding to the others; and the ideas corresponding to the associated sensations become associated together, sometimes so intimately that they form what appears to be a new simple idea, not without careful analysis resolvable into its component parts.

By his physical theory, Hartley gave a major push to the modern investigation of the close relationship between physiological and psychological facts, which has been very productive, even though his physical theory itself is insufficient and hasn't been widely accepted. He believed that sensation results from vibrations of the tiny particles in the nerve's medullary substance. To explain this, he, along with Newton, proposed a subtle elastic ether that is rare in the spaces between solid objects and nearby, but gets denser as it moves away from them. Pleasure comes from moderate vibrations, while pain arises from vibrations that are so intense they disrupt the nerves' continuity. These vibrations leave a tendency in the brain for fainter vibrations or “vibratiuncles” of a similar nature, which correspond to “ideas of sensation.” This explains memory. The flow of recollection and thoughts, when not directly linked to external sensations, is understood on the basis that there are always vibrations in the brain due to its heat and the pulsation of its arteries. The nature of these vibrations is shaped by each person's past experiences and the circumstances at the moment, which causes one tendency to dominate over others. Sensations that are often linked together become associated with the ideas related to the other sensations; and the ideas corresponding to those linked sensations can become so closely tied that they seem to form a new simple idea, which, upon close examination, can be broken down into its individual components.

Starting, like the modern Associationists, from a detailed account of the phenomena of the senses, Hartley tries to show how, by the above laws, all the emotions, which he analyses with considerable skill, may be explained. Locke’s phrase “association of ideas” is employed throughout, “idea” being taken as including every mental state but sensation. He emphatically asserts the existence of pure disinterested sentiment, while declaring it to be a growth from the self-regarding feelings. Voluntary action is explained as the result of a firm connexion between a motion and a sensation or “idea,” and, on the physical side, between an “ideal” and a motory vibration. Therefore in the Freewill controversy Hartley took his place as a determinist. It is singular that, as he tells us, it was only with reluctance, and when his speculations were nearly complete, that he came to a conclusion on this subject in accordance with his theory.

Starting, like today's modern Associationists, from a detailed description of sensory phenomena, Hartley attempts to show how, based on the above laws, all the emotions he analyzes with considerable skill can be explained. He frequently uses Locke’s term “association of ideas,” where “idea” refers to every mental state except sensation. He firmly asserts the existence of pure disinterested sentiment while stating that it develops from self-regarding feelings. Voluntary action is explained as the result of a strong connection between a motion and a sensation or “idea,” and, on the physical side, between an “idea” and a motor vibration. Thus, in the Freewill debate, Hartley positions himself as a determinist. It’s interesting that, as he mentions, it was only reluctantly, and when his theories were nearly complete, that he reached a conclusion on this topic that aligned with his theory.

See life of Hartley by his son in the 1801 edition of the Observations, which also contains notes and additions translated from the German of H. A. Pistorius; Sir Leslie Stephen, History of English Thought in the Eighteenth Century (3rd ed., 1902), and article in the Dictionary of National Biography; G. S. Bower, Hartley and James Mill (1881); B. Schönlank, Hartley und Priestley die Begründer des Assoziationismus in England (1882). See also the histories of philosophy and bibliography in J. M. Baldwin’s Dictionary of Philosophy and Psychology (1905), vol. iii.

See the biography of Hartley by his son in the 1801 edition of the Observations, which also includes notes and additions translated from the German of H. A. Pistorius; Sir Leslie Stephen, History of English Thought in the Eighteenth Century (3rd ed., 1902), and an article in the Dictionary of National Biography; G. S. Bower, Hartley and James Mill (1881); B. Schönlank, Hartley und Priestley die Begründer des Assoziationismus in England (1882). Also, refer to the histories of philosophy and bibliography in J. M. Baldwin’s Dictionary of Philosophy and Psychology (1905), vol. iii.


1 Anonymously in the 1731 ed., with acknowledgment in the 1758 ed.

1 Anonymously in the 1731 edition, with credit in the 1758 edition.


HARTLEY, JONATHAN SCOTT (1845-  ), American sculptor, was born at Albany, New York, on the 23rd of September 1845. He was a pupil of E. D. Palmer, New York, and of the schools of the Royal Academy, London; he later studied for a year in Berlin and for a year in Paris. His first important work (1882) was a statue of Miles Morgan, the Puritan, for Springfield, Mass. Among his other works are the Daguerre monument in Washington; “Thomas K. Beecher,” Elmira, New York, and “Alfred the Great,” Appellate Court House, New York. He devoted himself particularly to the making of portrait busts, in which he attained high rank. In 1891 he became a member of the National Academy of Design.

HARTLEY, JONATHAN SCOTT (1845-  ), American sculptor, was born in Albany, New York, on September 23, 1845. He studied under E. D. Palmer in New York, and attended the Royal Academy schools in London; he later spent a year studying in Berlin and another year in Paris. His first major work (1882) was a statue of Miles Morgan, the Puritan, located in Springfield, Mass. Other notable works include the Daguerre monument in Washington; “Thomas K. Beecher” in Elmira, New York, and “Alfred the Great” at the Appellate Court House in New York. He focused especially on creating portrait busts, where he achieved significant recognition. In 1891, he became a member of the National Academy of Design.


HARTLIB, SAMUEL (c. 1599-c. 1670), English writer on education and agriculturist, was born towards the close of the 16th century at Elbing in Prussia, his father being a refugee merchant from Poland. His mother was the daughter of a rich English merchant at Danzig. About 1628 Hartlib went to England, where he carried on a mercantile agency, and at the same time found leisure to enter with interest into the public questions of the day. An enthusiastic admirer of Comenius, he published in 1637 his Conatuum Comenianorum praeludia, and in 1639 Comenii pansophiae prodromus et didactica dissertatio. In 1641 appeared his Relation of that which hath been lately attempted to procure Ecclesiastical Peace among Protestants, and A Description of Macaria, containing his ideas of what a model state should be. During the civil war Hartlib occupied himself 36 with the peaceful study of agriculture, publishing various works by himself, and printing at his own expense several treatises by others on the subject. In 1652 he issued a second edition of the Discourse of Flanders Husbandry by Sir Richard Weston (1645); and in 1651 Samuel Hartlib, his Legacy, or an Enlargement of the Discourse of Husbandry used in Brabant and Flanders, by Robert Child. For his various labours Hartlib received from Cromwell a pension of £100, afterwards increased to £300, as he had spent all his fortune on his experiments. He planned a school for the sons of gentlemen, to be conducted on new principles, and this probably was the occasion of his friend Milton’s Tractate on Education, addressed to him in 1644, and of Sir William Petty’s Two Letters on the same subject, in 1647 and 1648. At the Restoration Hartlib lost his pension, which had already fallen into arrears; he petitioned parliament for a new grant of it, but what success he met with is unknown, as his latter years and death are wrapped in obscurity. A letter from him is known to have been written in February 1661-1662, and apparently he is referred to by Andrew Marvell as alive in 1670 and fleeing to Holland from his creditors.

HARTLIB, SAMUEL (c. 1599-c. 1670), an English writer on education and farmer, was born towards the end of the 16th century in Elbing, Prussia. His father was a Polish refugee merchant, and his mother was the daughter of a wealthy English merchant in Danzig. Around 1628, Hartlib moved to England, where he worked as a trade agent and also found time to engage deeply with the public issues of his time. A passionate admirer of Comenius, he published his Conatuum Comenianorum praeludia in 1637, followed by Comenii pansophiae prodromus et didactica dissertatio in 1639. In 1641, he released Relation of that which hath been lately attempted to procure Ecclesiastical Peace among Protestants and A Description of Macaria, detailing his vision of an ideal state. During the civil war, Hartlib focused on the peaceful study of agriculture, publishing various works of his own and financing the printing of several treatises by others on the topic. In 1652, he published a second edition of Sir Richard Weston’s Discourse of Flanders Husbandry (1645), and in 1651, he released Samuel Hartlib, his Legacy, or an Enlargement of the Discourse of Husbandry used in Brabant and Flanders, by Robert Child. For his efforts, Hartlib received a pension of £100 from Cromwell, later increased to £300, as he had spent his entire fortune on his projects. He envisioned a school for gentlemen's sons to be run on innovative principles, which likely inspired his friend Milton’s Tractate on Education, addressed to Hartlib in 1644, and Sir William Petty’s Two Letters on the same topic, in 1647 and 1648. After the Restoration, Hartlib lost his pension, which had already fallen into arrears. He petitioned parliament for a renewal of it, but the outcome remains unknown, as his later years and death are shrouded in mystery. A letter from him is dated February 1661-1662, and Andrew Marvell seems to refer to him as still alive in 1670, escaping to Holland from his creditors.

A Biographical Memoir of Samuel Hartlib, by H. Dircks, appeared in 1865.

A Biographical Memoir of Samuel Hartlib, by H. Dircks, was published in 1865.


HARTMANN, KARL ROBERT EDUARD VON (1842-1906), German philosopher, was born in Berlin on the 23rd of February 1842. He was educated for the army, and entered the artillery of the Guards as an officer in 1860, but a malady of the knee, which crippled him, forced him to quit the service in 1865. After some hesitation between music and philosophy, he decided to make the latter the serious work of his life, and in 1867 the university of Rostock conferred on him the degree of doctor of philosophy. He subsequently returned to Berlin, and died at Grosslichterfelde on the 5th of June 1906. His reputation as a philosopher was established by his first book, The Philosophy of the Unconscious (1869; 10th ed. 1890). This success was largely due to the originality of its title, the diversity of its contents (von Hartmann professing to obtain his speculative results by the methods of inductive science, and making plentiful use of concrete illustrations), the fashionableness of its pessimism and the vigour and lucidity of its style. The conception of the Unconscious, by which von Hartmann describes his ultimate metaphysical principle, is not at bottom as paradoxical as it sounds, being merely a new and mysterious designation for the Absolute of German metaphysicians. The Unconscious appears as a combination of the metaphysic of Hegel with that of Schopenhauer. The Unconscious is both Will and Reason and the absolute all-embracing ground of all existence. Von Hartmann thus combines “pantheism” with “panlogism” in a manner adumbrated by Schelling in his “positive philosophy.” Nevertheless Will and not Reason is the primary aspect of the Unconscious, whose melancholy career is determined by the primacy of the Will and the subservience of the Reason. Precosmically the Will is potential and the Reason latent, and the Will is void of reason when it passes from potentiality to actual willing. This latter is absolute misery, and to cure it the Unconscious evokes its Reason and with its aid creates the best of all possible worlds, which contains the promise of its redemption from actual existence by the emancipation of the Reason from its subjugation to the Will in the conscious reason of the enlightened pessimist. When the greater part of the Will in existence is so far enlightened by reason as to perceive the inevitable misery of existence, a collective effort to will non-existence will be made, and the world will relapse into nothingness, the Unconscious into quiescence. Although von Hartmann is a pessimist, his pessimism is by no means unmitigated. The individual’s happiness is indeed unattainable either here and now or hereafter and in the future, but he does not despair of ultimately releasing the Unconscious from its sufferings. He differs from Schopenhauer in making salvation by the “negation of the Will-to-live” depend on a collective social effort and not on individualistic asceticism. The conception of a redemption of the Unconscious also supplies the ultimate basis of von Hartmann’s ethics. We must provisionally affirm life and devote ourselves to social evolution, instead of striving after a happiness which is impossible; in so doing we shall find that morality renders life less unhappy than it would otherwise be. Suicide, and all other forms of selfishness, are highly reprehensible. Epistemologically von Hartmann is a transcendental realist, who ably defends his views and acutely criticizes those of his opponents. His realism enables him to maintain the reality of Time, and so of the process of the world’s redemption.

HARTMANN, KARL ROBERT EDUARD VON (1842-1906), German philosopher, was born in Berlin on February 23, 1842. He was trained for the army and joined the Guards artillery as an officer in 1860, but a knee injury that left him disabled forced him to leave the service in 1865. After some uncertainty between music and philosophy, he chose philosophy as his life's serious work, and in 1867, the University of Rostock awarded him a doctorate in philosophy. He later returned to Berlin and died in Grosslichterfelde on June 5, 1906. His status as a philosopher was cemented by his first book, The Philosophy of the Unconscious (1869; 10th ed. 1890). This success was largely due to the originality of its title, the variety of its content (von Hartmann claimed to arrive at his speculative conclusions using inductive science and made extensive use of concrete examples), the trendiness of its pessimism, and the strength and clarity of its style. The concept of the Unconscious, which von Hartmann uses to describe his ultimate metaphysical principle, is not as paradoxical as it might seem, being simply a new and mysterious term for the Absolute of German metaphysicians. The Unconscious combines Hegel's metaphysics with Schopenhauer's. The Unconscious encompasses both Will and Reason and serves as the absolute foundational ground of all existence. Von Hartmann thus merges “pantheism” with “panlogism” in a way hinted at by Schelling in his “positive philosophy.” However, Will, rather than Reason, is the primary aspect of the Unconscious, whose sorrowful trajectory is defined by the supremacy of Will and the subservience of Reason. Before the cosmos, Will is potential and Reason is latent, and when Will transitions from potentiality to actual willing, it is devoid of reason. This state represents absolute misery, and to remedy it, the Unconscious calls forth Reason, which helps create the best of all possible worlds, promising its liberation from tangible existence through the emancipation of Reason from its subjugation to Will in the conscious reason of the enlightened pessimist. When a significant portion of Will in existence is enlightened enough to recognize the unavoidable misery of existence, a collective effort to will non-existence will emerge, causing the world to revert to nothingness, and the Unconscious to fall into quiescence. Although von Hartmann is a pessimist, his outlook isn't entirely bleak. Individual happiness is indeed unattainable, whether in the present or future, but he doesn't lose hope in ultimately freeing the Unconscious from suffering. He differs from Schopenhauer by asserting that salvation through the “negation of the Will-to-live” relies on a collective social effort rather than solitary asceticism. The idea of redeeming the Unconscious also forms the foundation of von Hartmann's ethics. We must temporarily affirm life and focus on social evolution instead of chasing an impossible happiness; in doing so, we will discover that morality makes life less unhappy than it would be otherwise. Suicide and all forms of selfishness are strongly condemned. Epistemologically, von Hartmann is a transcendental realist, who skillfully defends his positions while sharply critiquing those of his opponents. His realism allows him to uphold the reality of Time and thus the process of the world's redemption.

Von Hartmann’s numerous works extend to more than 12,000 pages. They may be classified into—A. Systematical, including Grundprobleme der Erkenntnistheorie; Kategorienlehre; Das sittliche Bewusstsein; Die Philosophie des Schönen; Die Religion des Geistes; Die Philosophie des Unbewussten (3 vols., which now include his, originally anonymous, self-criticism, Das Unbewusste vom Standpunkte der Physiologie und Descendenztheorie, and its refutation, Eng. trs. by W. C. Coupland, 1884); System der Philosophie im Grundriss, i.; Grundriss der Erkenntnislehre. B. Historical and critical—Das religiöse Bewusstsein der Menschheit; Geschichte der Metaphysik (2 vols.); Kant’s Erkenntnistheorie; Kritische Grundlegung des transcendentalen Realismus; Über die dialektische Methode; studies of Schelling, Lotze, von Kirchmann; Zur Geschichte des Pessimismus; Neukantianismus, Schopenhauerismus, Hegelianismus; Geschichte der deutschen Ästhetik seit Kant; Die Krisis des Christentums in der modernen Theologie; Philosophische Fragen der Gegenwart; Ethische Studien; Moderne Psychologie; Das Christentum des neuen Testaments; Die Weltanschauung der modernen Physik, C. Popular—Soziale Kernfragen; Moderne Probleme; Tagesfragen; Zwei Jahrzehnte deutscher Politik; Das Judentum in Gegenwart und Zukunft; Die Selbstzersetzung des Christentums; Gesammelte Studien; Der Spiritismus and Die Geisterhypothese des Spiritismus; Zur Zeitgeschichte. His select works have been published in 10 volumes (2nd ed., 1885-1896). On his philosophy see R. Köber, Das philosophische System Eduard von Hartmanns (1884); O. Plümacher, Der Kampf ums Unbewusste (2nd ed., 1890), with a chronological table of the Hartmann literature from 1868 to 1890; A. Drews, E. von Hartmanns Philosophie und der Materialismus in der modernen Kultur (1890) and E. von Hartmanns philosophisches System im Grundriss (1902), with biographical introduction; and for further authorities, J. M. Baldwin, Dictionary of Philosophy and Psychology (1901-1905).

Von Hartmann's many works span over 12,000 pages. They can be categorized into: A. Systematic, including Grundprobleme der Erkenntnistheorie; Kategorienlehre; Das sittliche Bewusstsein; Die Philosophie des Schönen; Die Religion des Geistes; Die Philosophie des Unbewussten (3 volumes, which now include his originally anonymous self-criticism, Das Unbewusste vom Standpunkte der Physiologie und Descendenztheorie, and its refutation, Eng. trans. by W. C. Coupland, 1884); System der Philosophie im Grundriss, i.; Grundriss der Erkenntnislehre. B. Historical and critical—Das religiöse Bewusstsein der Menschheit; Geschichte der Metaphysik (2 volumes); Kant’s Erkenntnistheorie; Kritische Grundlegung des transcendentalen Realismus; Über die dialektische Methode; studies of Schelling, Lotze, von Kirchmann; Zur Geschichte des Pessimismus; Neukantianismus, Schopenhauerismus, Hegelianismus; Geschichte der deutschen Ästhetik seit Kant; Die Krisis des Christentums in der modernen Theologie; Philosophische Fragen der Gegenwart; Ethische Studien; Moderne Psychologie; Das Christentum des neuen Testaments; Die Weltanschauung der modernen Physik. C. Popular—Soziale Kernfragen; Moderne Probleme; Tagesfragen; Zwei Jahrzehnte deutscher Politik; Das Judentum in Gegenwart und Zukunft; Die Selbstzersetzung des Christentums; Gesammelte Studien; Der Spiritismus and Die Geisterhypothese des Spiritismus; Zur Zeitgeschichte. His selected works have been published in 10 volumes (2nd ed., 1885-1896). For more on his philosophy, see R. Köber, Das philosophische System Eduard von Hartmanns (1884); O. Plümacher, Der Kampf ums Unbewusste (2nd ed., 1890), with a chronological table of the Hartmann literature from 1868 to 1890; A. Drews, E. von Hartmanns Philosophie und der Materialismus in der modernen Kultur (1890) and E. von Hartmanns philosophisches System im Grundriss (1902), with a biographical introduction; and for additional references, J. M. Baldwin, Dictionary of Philosophy and Psychology (1901-1905).


HARTMANN, MORITZ (1821-1872), German poet and author, was born of Jewish parentage at Duschnik in Bohemia on the 15th of October 1821. Having studied philosophy at Prague and Vienna, he travelled in south Germany, Switzerland and Italy, and became tutor in a family at Vienna. In 1845 he proceeded to Leipzig and there published a volume of patriotic poems, Kelch und Schwert (1845). Fearing in consequence prosecution at the hands of the authorities, he abided events in France and Belgium, and after issuing in Leipzig Neuere Gedichte (1846) returned home, suffered a short term of imprisonment, and in 1848 was elected member for Leitmeritz in the short-lived German parliament at Frankfort-on-Main, in which he sided with the extreme Radical party. He took part with Robert Blum (1807-1848) in the revolution of that year in Vienna, but contrived to escape to London and Paris. In 1849 he published Reimchronik des Pfaffen Mauritius, a satirical political poem in the style of Heine. During the Crimean War (1854-56) Hartmann was correspondent of the Kölnische Zeitung, settled in 1860 in Geneva as a teacher of German literature and history, became in 1865 editor of the Freya in Stuttgart and in 1868 a member of the staff of the Neue Freie Presse in Vienna. He died at Oberdöbling near Vienna on the 13th of May 1872.

HARTMANN, MORITZ (1821-1872), a German poet and author, was born to Jewish parents in Duschnik, Bohemia, on October 15, 1821. After studying philosophy in Prague and Vienna, he traveled through southern Germany, Switzerland, and Italy, eventually becoming a tutor for a family in Vienna. In 1845, he moved to Leipzig, where he published a collection of patriotic poems, Kelch und Schwert (1845). Fearing prosecution by the authorities due to his work, he sought refuge in France and Belgium, and after releasing Neuere Gedichte (1846) in Leipzig, he returned home, where he briefly spent time in prison. In 1848, he was elected to represent Leitmeritz in the short-lived German parliament at Frankfurt-on-Main, where he aligned with the extreme Radical party. He participated with Robert Blum (1807-1848) in the revolution that year in Vienna but managed to escape to London and Paris. In 1849, he published Reimchronik des Pfaffen Mauritius, a satirical political poem in the style of Heine. During the Crimean War (1854-56), Hartmann worked as a correspondent for the Kölnische Zeitung, settled in Geneva in 1860 as a teacher of German literature and history, became the editor of Freya in Stuttgart in 1865, and joined the staff of the Neue Freie Presse in Vienna in 1868. He died in Oberdöbling near Vienna on May 13, 1872.

Among Hartmann’s numerous works may be especially mentioned Der Krieg um den Wald (1850), a novel, the scene of which is laid in Bohemia; Tagebuch aus Languedoc und Provence (1852); Erzählungen eines Unsteten (1858); and Die letzten Tage eines Königs (1867). His idyll, Adam und Eva (1851), and his collection of poetical tales, Schatten (1851), show that the author possessed but little talent for epic narrative. Hartmann’s poems are often lacking in genuine poetical feeling, but the love of liberty which inspired them, and the fervour, ease and clearness of their style compensated for these shortcomings and gained for him a wide circle of admirers.

Among Hartmann’s many works, we should especially mention Der Krieg um den Wald (1850), a novel set in Bohemia; Tagebuch aus Languedoc und Provence (1852); Erzählungen eines Unsteten (1858); and Die letzten Tage eines Königs (1867). His idyll, Adam und Eva (1851), and his collection of poetic tales, Schatten (1851), show that the author had limited talent for epic storytelling. Hartmann’s poems often lack real poetic depth, but the passion for freedom that inspired them, along with the enthusiasm, simplicity, and clarity of his style, made up for these weaknesses and earned him a large number of fans.

His Gesammelte Werke were published in 10 vols, in 1873-1874, and a selection of his Gedichte in the latter year. The first two volumes of a new edition of his works contain a biography of Hartmann by O. Wittner. See also E. Ziel, “Moritz Hartmann” (in Unsere Zeit, 1872); A. Marchand, Les Poètes lyriques de l’Autriche (1892); Brandes, Das junge Deutschland (Charlottenburg, 1899).

His Collected Works were published in 10 volumes from 1873 to 1874, and a selection of his Poems was released in the latter year. The first two volumes of a new edition of his works include a biography of Hartmann by O. Wittner. See also E. Ziel, “Moritz Hartmann” (in Our Time, 1872); A. Marchand, The Lyrical Poets of Austria (1892); Brandes, Young Germany (Charlottenburg, 1899).


37

37

HARTMANN VON AUE (c. 1170-c. 1210), one of the chief Middle High German poets. He belonged to the lower nobility of Swabia, where he was born about 1170. After receiving a monastic education, he became retainer (dienstman) of a nobleman whose domain, Aue, has been identified with Obernau on the Neckar. He also took part in the Crusade of 1196-97. The date of his death is as uncertain as that of his birth; he is mentioned by Gottfried von Strassburg (c. 1210) as still alive, and in the Krone of Heinrich von dem Türlin, written about 1220, he is mourned for as dead. Hartmann was the author of four narrative poems which are of importance for the evolution of the Middle High German court epic. The oldest of these, Erec, which may have been written as early as 1191 or 1192, and the latest and ripest, Iwein, belong to the Arthurian cycle and are based on epics by Chrétien de Troyes (q.v.); between them lie the romance, Gregorius, also an adaptation of a French epic, and Der arme Heinrich, one of the most charming specimens of medieval German poetry. The theme of the latter—the cure of the leper, Heinrich, by a young girl who is willing to sacrifice her life for him—Hartmann had evidently found in the annals of the family in whose service he stood. Hartmann’s most conspicuous merit as a poet lies in his style; his language is carefully chosen, his narrative lucid, flowing and characterized by a sense of balance and proportion which is rarely to be found in German medieval poetry. Gregorius, Der arme Heinrich and his lyrics, which are all fervidly religious in tone, imply a tendency towards asceticism, but, on the whole, Hartmann’s striving seems rather to have been to reconcile the extremes of life; to establish a middle way of human conduct between the worldly pursuits of knighthood and the ascetic ideals of medieval religion.

HARTMANN VON AUE (c. 1170-c. 1210), one of the main poets of Middle High German literature. He was part of the lower nobility in Swabia, where he was born around 1170. After receiving an education in a monastery, he became a retainer (dienstman) for a nobleman whose domain, Aue, is thought to be located in Obernau on the Neckar River. He also participated in the Crusade of 1196-97. The exact date of his death is as unclear as that of his birth; he is referenced by Gottfried von Strassburg (c. 1210) as still alive, and in the Krone of Heinrich von dem Türlin, written around 1220, he is mourned as having died. Hartmann wrote four narrative poems that are significant for the development of the Middle High German court epic. The oldest, Erec, which may have been composed as early as 1191 or 1192, and the latest and most mature, Iwein, are part of the Arthurian cycle and draw from epics by Chrétien de Troyes (q.v.); between them are the romance, Gregorius, also adapted from a French epic, and Der arme Heinrich, one of the most appealing examples of medieval German poetry. The theme of the latter—the healing of the leper, Heinrich, by a young girl who is willing to sacrifice her life for him—Hartmann likely found in the records of the family he served. Hartmann’s greatest strength as a poet lies in his style; his language is meticulously chosen, his narrative clear, smooth, and marked by a sense of balance and proportion that is rarely found in German medieval poetry. Gregorius, Der arme Heinrich, and his lyrics, which all have a passionate religious tone, suggest a tendency towards asceticism, but overall, Hartmann seems to have aimed to balance the extremes of life; to create a middle ground of human behavior between the worldly ambitions of knighthood and the ascetic ideals of medieval religion.

Erec has been edited by M. Haupt (2nd ed., Leipzig, 1871); Gregorius, by H. Paul (2nd ed., Halle, 1900); Der arme Heinrich, by W. Wackernagel and W. Toischer (Basel, 1885) and by H. Paul (2nd ed., Halle, 1893); by J. G. Robertson (London, 1895), with English notes; Iwein, by G. F. Benecke and K. Lachmann (4th ed., Berlin, 1877) and E. Henrici (Halle, 1891-1893). A convenient edition of all Hartmann’s poems by F. Bech, 3 vols. (3rd ed., Leipzig, 1891-1893, vol. 3 in 4th ed., 1902).

Erec has been edited by M. Haupt (2nd ed., Leipzig, 1871); Gregorius, by H. Paul (2nd ed., Halle, 1900); Der arme Heinrich, by W. Wackernagel and W. Toischer (Basel, 1885) and by H. Paul (2nd ed., Halle, 1893); by J. G. Robertson (London, 1895), with English notes; Iwein, by G. F. Benecke and K. Lachmann (4th ed., Berlin, 1877) and E. Henrici (Halle, 1891-1893). A convenient edition of all Hartmann’s poems by F. Bech, 3 vols. (3rd ed., Leipzig, 1891-1893, vol. 3 in 4th ed., 1902).

The literature on Hartmann is extensive. See especially L. Schmid, Des Minnesingers Hartmann von Aue Stand, Heimat und Geschlecht (Tübingen, 1874); H. Rötteken, Die epische Kunst Heinrichs von Veldeke und Hartmanns von Aue (Halle, 1887); F. Saran, Hartmann von Aue als Lyriker (Halle, 1889); A. E. Schönbach, Über Hartmann von Aue (Graz, 1894); F. Piquet, Étude sur Hartmann d’Aue (Paris, 1898). Translations have been made into modern German of all Hartmann’s poems, while Der arme Heinrich has repeatedly attracted the attention of modern poets, both English (Longfellow, Rossetti) and German (notably, Gerhart Hauptmann). See H. Tardel, Der arme Heinrich in der neueren Dichtung (Berlin, 1905).

The literature on Hartmann is extensive. See especially L. Schmid, Des Minnesingers Hartmann von Aue Stand, Heimat und Geschlecht (Tübingen, 1874); H. Rötteken, Die epische Kunst Heinrichs von Veldeke und Hartmanns von Aue (Halle, 1887); F. Saran, Hartmann von Aue als Lyriker (Halle, 1889); A. E. Schönbach, Über Hartmann von Aue (Graz, 1894); F. Piquet, Étude sur Hartmann d’Aue (Paris, 1898). All of Hartmann’s poems have been translated into modern German, and Der arme Heinrich has consistently drawn the attention of contemporary poets, both English (Longfellow, Rossetti) and German (notably, Gerhart Hauptmann). See H. Tardel, Der arme Heinrich in der neueren Dichtung (Berlin, 1905).


HARTSHORN, SPIRITS OF, a name signifying originally the ammoniacal liquor obtained by the distillation of horn shavings, afterwards applied to the partially purified similar products of the action of heat on nitrogenous animal matter generally, and now popularly used to designate the aqueous solution of ammonia (q.v.).

HARTSHORN, SPIRITS OF, originally referred to the ammoniacal liquid obtained by distilling horn shavings. It later became associated with the partially purified products resulting from heating nitrogenous animal matter in general, and today it is commonly used to refer to the aqueous solution of ammonia (q.v.).


HARTZENBUSCH, JUAN EUGENIO (1806-1880), Spanish dramatist, was born at Madrid on the 6th of September 1806. The son of a German carpenter, he was educated for the priesthood, but he had no religious vocation and, on leaving school, followed his father’s trade till 1830, when he learned shorthand and joined the staff of the Gaceta. His earliest dramatic essays were translations from Molière, Voltaire and the elder Dumas; he next recast old Spanish plays, and in 1837 produced his first original play, Los Amantes de Teruel, the subject of which had been used by Rey de Artieda, Tirso de Molina and Perez de Montalbán. Los Amantes de Teruel at once made the author’s reputation, which was scarcely maintained by Doña Mencia (1839) and Alfonso el Casto (1841); it was not till 1845 that he approached his former success with La Jura en Santa Gadea. Hartzenbusch was chief of the National Library from 1862 to 1875, and was an indefatigable—though not very judicious—editor of many national classics. Inferior in inspiration to other contemporary Spanish dramatists, Hartzenbusch excels his rivals in versatility and in conscientious workmanship.

HARTZENBUSCH, JUAN EUGENIO (1806-1880), Spanish playwright, was born in Madrid on September 6, 1806. The son of a German carpenter, he was trained for the priesthood but had no religious calling. After finishing school, he worked in his father’s trade until 1830, when he learned shorthand and joined the staff of the Gaceta. His earliest plays were translations of works by Molière, Voltaire, and the elder Dumas; he then reworked old Spanish plays, and in 1837 produced his first original play, Los Amantes de Teruel, a story also told by Rey de Artieda, Tirso de Molina, and Perez de Montalbán. Los Amantes de Teruel immediately established the author's reputation, which was only somewhat upheld by Doña Mencia (1839) and Alfonso el Casto (1841); it wasn't until 1845 that he came close to regaining his earlier success with La Jura en Santa Gadea. Hartzenbusch served as the head of the National Library from 1862 to 1875 and was a tireless—if not always wise—editor of many national classics. While he may lack the inspiration of other contemporary Spanish playwrights, Hartzenbusch surpasses his competitors in versatility and dedication to his craft.


HĀRŪN AL-RASHĪD (763 or 766-809), i.e. “Hārūn the Orthodox,” the fifth of the ‘Abbasid caliphs of Bagdad, and the second son of the third caliph Mahdi. His full name was Hārūn ibn Muhammad ibn ‘Abdallah ibn Muḥammad ibn ‘Ali ibn ‘Abdallah ibn ‘Abbās. He was born at Rai (Rhagae) on the 20th of March A.D. 763, according to some accounts, and according to others on the 15th of February A.D. 766. Hārūn al-Rashīd was twenty-two years old when he ascended the throne. His father Mahdi just before his death conceived the idea of superseding his elder son Mūsa (afterwards known as Hādī, the fourth caliph) by Hārūn. But on Mahdi’s death Hārūn gave way to his brother. For the campaigns in which he took part prior to his accession see Caliphate, section C, The Abbasids, §§ 3 and 4.

Hārūn al-Rashīd (763 or 766-809), i.e. “Hārūn the Orthodox,” was the fifth of the ‘Abbasid caliphs of Baghdad and the second son of the third caliph Mahdi. His full name was Hārūn ibn Muhammad ibn ‘Abdallah ibn Muḥammad ibn ‘Ali ibn ‘Abdallah ibn ‘Abbās. He was born in Rai (Rhagae) on March 20, CE 763, according to some sources, and according to others on February 15, CE 766. Hārūn al-Rashīd was twenty-two years old when he became caliph. Before his death, his father Mahdi planned to replace his elder son Mūsa (later known as Hādī, the fourth caliph) with Hārūn. However, after Mahdi passed away, Hārūn stepped aside for his brother. For the campaigns he participated in before becoming caliph, see Caliphate, section C, The Abbasids, §§ 3 and 4.

Rashīd owed his succession to the throne to the prudence and sagacity of Yahyā b. Khālid the Barmecide, his secretary, whom on his accession he appointed his lieutenant and grand vizier (see Barmecides). Under his guidance the empire flourished on the whole, in spite of several revolts in the provinces by members of the old Alid family. Successful wars were waged with the rulers of Byzantium and the Khazars. In 803, however, Hārūn became suspicious of the Barmecides, whom with only a single exception he caused to be executed. Henceforward the chief power was exercised by Fadl b. Rabi’, who had been chamberlain not only under Hārūn himself but under his predecessors, Mansūr, Madhi and Hādī. In the later years of Hārūn’s reign troubles arose in the eastern parts of the empire. These troubles assumed proportions so serious that Hārūn himself decided to go to Khorasan. He died, however, at Tus in March 809.

Rashīd became king thanks to the wisdom and insight of Yahyā b. Khālid the Barmecide, his secretary, whom he appointed as his deputy and grand vizier when he took the throne (see Barmecides). Under his leadership, the empire thrived overall, despite several uprisings in the provinces by members of the old Alid family. Successful wars were fought against the rulers of Byzantium and the Khazars. However, in 803, Hārūn grew suspicious of the Barmecides and had all but one executed. From then on, the main power was held by Fadl b. Rabi’, who had been chamberlain not only under Hārūn but also under his predecessors, Mansūr, Madhi, and Hādī. In the later years of Hārūn’s reign, issues arose in the eastern parts of the empire. These problems became so serious that Hārūn decided to travel to Khorasan, but he died in Tus in March 809.

The reign of Hārūn (see Caliphate, section C, § 5) was one of the most brilliant in the annals of the caliphate, in spite of losses in north-west Africa and Transoxiana. His fame spread to the West, and Charlemagne and he exchanged gifts and compliments as masters respectively of the West and the East. No caliph ever gathered round him so great a number of learned men, poets, jurists, grammarians, cadis and scribes, to say nothing of the wits and musicians who enjoyed his patronage. Hārūn himself was a scholar and poet, and was well versed in history, tradition and poetry. He possessed taste and discernment, and his dignified demeanour is extolled by the historians. In religion he was extremely strict; he prostrated himself a hundred times daily, and nine or ten times made the pilgrimage to Mecca. At the same time he cannot be regarded as a great administrator. He seems to have left everything to his viziers Yahyā and Fadl, to the former of whom especially was due the prosperous condition of the empire. Hārūn is best known to Western readers as the hero of many of the stories in the Arabian Nights; and in Arabic literature he is the central figure of numberless anecdotes and humorous stories. Of his incognito walks through Bagdad, however, the authentic histories say nothing. His Arabic biographers are unanimous in describing him as noble and generous, but there is little doubt that he was in fact a man of little force of character, suspicious, untrustworthy and on occasions cruel.

The reign of Hārūn (see Caliphate, section C, § 5) was one of the most remarkable in the history of the caliphate, despite setbacks in north-west Africa and Transoxiana. His reputation reached the West, leading to exchanges of gifts and praise with Charlemagne, who was then the leader of the West, while Hārūn represented the East. No other caliph gathered such a large group of scholars, poets, jurists, grammarians, judges, and scribes around him, not to mention the wits and musicians who flourished under his support. Hārūn was a scholar and poet himself, knowledgeable in history, tradition, and poetry. He had a refined taste and judgment, and historians praise his dignified presence. In terms of religion, he was extremely devoted; he prostrated himself a hundred times a day and made the pilgrimage to Mecca nine or ten times. However, he wasn’t regarded as an exceptional administrator. He seemed to rely heavily on his viziers Yahyā and Fadl, with the former being particularly responsible for the empire's thriving condition. Hārūn is best known to Western audiences as the hero of many tales in the Arabian Nights, and in Arabic literature, he is the main character in countless anecdotes and humorous stories. However, the real history offers no evidence of his secret walks through Baghdad. His Arabic biographers unanimously describe him as noble and generous, but there’s little doubt that he was, in fact, a man of weak character, suspicious, unreliable, and at times cruel.

See the Arabic histories of Ibn al-Athir and Ibn Khaldūn. Among modern works see Sir W. Muir, The Caliphate (London, 1891); R. D. Osborn, Islam under the Khalifs of Bagdad (London, 1878); Gustav Weil, Geschichte der Chalifen (Mannheim and Stuttgart, 1846-1862); G. le Strange, Baghdad during the Abbasid Caliphate (Oxford, 1900); A. Müller, Der Islam, vol. i. (Berlin, 1885); E. H. Palmer, The Caliph Haroun Alraschid (London, 1880); J. B. Bury’s edition of Gibbon’s Decline and Fall (London, 1898), vol. vi. pp. 34 foll.

See the Arabic histories of Ibn al-Athir and Ibn Khaldūn. Among modern works, check out Sir W. Muir, The Caliphate (London, 1891); R. D. Osborn, Islam under the Khalifs of Bagdad (London, 1878); Gustav Weil, Geschichte der Chalifen (Mannheim and Stuttgart, 1846-1862); G. le Strange, Baghdad during the Abbasid Caliphate (Oxford, 1900); A. Müller, Der Islam, vol. i. (Berlin, 1885); E. H. Palmer, The Caliph Haroun Alraschid (London, 1880); J. B. Bury’s edition of Gibbon’s Decline and Fall (London, 1898), vol. vi. pp. 34 foll.


HARUSPICES, or Aruspices (perhaps “entrail observers,” cf. Skt. hira, Gr. χορδή), a class of soothsayers in Rome. Their art (disciplina) consisted especially in deducing the will of the gods from the appearance presented by the entrails of the slain victim. They also interpreted all portents or unusual phenomena of nature, especially thunder and lightning, and prescribed the expiatory ceremonies after such events. To please the god, the victim must be without spot or blemish, and the practice of observing whether the entrails presented any abnormal appearance, 38 and thence deducing the will of heaven, was also very important in Greek religion. This art, however, appears not to have been, as some other modes of ascertaining the will of the gods undoubtedly were, of genuine Aryan growth. It is foreign to the Homeric poems, and must have been introduced into Greece after their composition. In like manner, as the Romans themselves believed, the art was not indigenous in Rome, but derived from Etruria.1 The Etruscans were said to have learned it from a being named Tages, grandson of Jupiter, who had suddenly sprung from the ground near Tarquinii. Instructions were contained in certain books called libri haruspicini, fulgurales, rituales. The art was practised in Rome chiefly by Etruscans, occasionally by native-born Romans who had studied in the priestly schools of Etruria. From the regal period to the end of the republic, haruspices were summoned from Etruria to deal with prodigies not mentioned in the pontifical and Sibylline books, and the Roman priests carried out their instructions as to the offering necessary to appease the anger of the deity concerned. Though the art was of great importance under the early republic, it never became a part of the state religion. In this respect the haruspices ranked lower than the augurs, as is shown by the fact that they received a salary; the augurs were a more ancient and purely Roman institution, and were a most important element in the political organization of the city. In later times the art fell into disrepute, and the saying of Cato the Censor is well known, that he wondered how one haruspex could look another in the face without laughing (Cic. De div. ii. 24). Under the empire, however, we hear of a regular collegium of sixty haruspices; and Claudius is said to have tried to restore the art and put it under the control of the pontifices. This collegium continued to exist till the time of Alaric.

HARUSPICES, or Diviners (possibly “entrail observers,” cf. Skt. hira, Gr. string), were a group of fortune tellers in Rome. Their skill (disciplina) mainly involved interpreting the will of the gods based on the appearance of the entrails of a sacrificed animal. They also explained omens or unusual natural events, especially thunder and lightning, and recommended rituals to atone for such occurrences. To appease the god, the sacrificed animal had to be flawless, and the practice of checking for any unusual signs in the entrails and interpreting them as the will of heaven was also significant in Greek religion. However, this practice does not seem to have originated from true Aryan roots, unlike some other methods of understanding the gods' intentions. It is absent in the Homeric poems and likely entered Greece after they were written. Similarly, the Romans believed this skill was not native to Rome but came from Etruria. The Etruscans supposedly learned it from a figure named Tages, the grandson of Jupiter, who suddenly appeared from the ground near Tarquinii. Guidance was found in specific texts called libri haruspicini, fulgurales, rituales. The practice was primarily performed in Rome by Etruscans, with some native Romans who had trained in Etruscan priestly schools. From the regal period through the end of the republic, haruspices were brought from Etruria to address prodigies not covered in the pontifical and Sibylline texts, and the Roman priests followed their directives for offerings needed to calm the deity's anger. Although this practice was very significant during the early republic, it never became a part of the official state religion. In this way, haruspices were considered less important than augurs, which is evident from the fact that they received a salary; augurs were a more ancient and purely Roman institution and played a crucial role in the city’s political structure. Over time, the practice declined in reputation, and Cato the Censor famously remarked on how one haruspex could look another in the eye without laughing (Cic. De div. ii. 24). However, during the empire, there was a formal group of sixty haruspices, and Claudius reportedly attempted to revive the practice and place it under the authority of the pontifices. This group persisted until the era of Alaric.

See A. Bouché-Leclercq, Histoire de la divination dans l’antiquité (1879-1881); Marquardt, Römische Staatsverwaltung, iii. (1885), pp. 410-415; G. Schmeisser, Die etruskische Disciplin vom Bundesgenossenkriege bis zum Untergang des Heidentums (1881), and Quaestionum de Etrusca disciplina particula (1872); P. Clairin, De haruspicibus apud Romanos (1880). Also Omen.

See A. Bouché-Leclercq, History of Divination in Antiquity (1879-1881); Marquardt, Roman State Administration, iii. (1885), pp. 410-415; G. Schmeisser, The Etruscan Discipline from the Social War to the Decline of Paganism (1881), and Parts of Questions About the Etruscan Discipline (1872); P. Clairin, On the Haruspices among the Romans (1880). Also Omen.


1 The statement of Dionysius of Halicarnassus (ii. 22) that the haruspices were instituted by Romulus is due to his confusing them with the augurs.

1 Dionysius of Halicarnassus's statement (ii. 22) that Romulus established the haruspices is because he mixed them up with the augurs.


HARVARD UNIVERSITY, the oldest of American educational institutions, established at Cambridge, Massachusetts. In 1636 the General Court of the colony voted £400 towards “a schoale or colledge,” which in the next year was ordered to be at “New Towne.” In memory of the English university where many (probably some seventy) of the leading men of the colony had been educated, the township was named Cambridge in 1638. In the same year John Harvard (1607-1638), a Puritan minister lately come to America, a bachelor and master of Emmanuel college, Cambridge, dying in Charlestown (Mass.), bequeathed to the wilderness seminary half his estate (£780) and some three hundred books; and the college, until then unorganized, was named Harvard College (1639) in his honour. Its history is unbroken from 1640, and its first commencement was held in 1642. The spirit of the founders is beautifully expressed in the words of a contemporary letter which are carved on the college gates: “After God had carried us safe to New-England, and wee had builded our houses, provided necessaries for our liveli-hood, rear’d convenient places for Gods worship, and setled the Civill Government; One of the next things we longed for, and looked after was to advance Learning, and perpetuate it to Posterity; dreading to leave an illiterate Ministry to the Churches, when our present Ministers shall lie in the Dust.” The college charter of 1650 dedicated it to “the advancement of all good literature, arts, and sciences,” and “the education of the English and Indian youth ... in knowledge and godlynes.” The second building (1654) on the college grounds was called “the Indian College.” In it was set up the College press, which since 1638 had been in the president’s house, and here, it is believed, was printed the translation of the Bible (1661-1663) by John Eliot into the language of the natives, with primer, catechisms, grammars, tracts, &c. A fair number of Indians were students, but only one, Caleb Cheeshahteaumuck, took a bachelor’s degree (1665). By generous aid received from abroad for this special object, the college was greatly helped in its infancy.

HARVARD UNIVERSITY, the oldest of American educational institutions, was founded in Cambridge, Massachusetts. In 1636, the General Court of the colony allocated £400 towards “a school or college,” which was designated to be in “New Towne” the following year. To honor the English university where many (likely around seventy) of the colony’s prominent figures had studied, the township was named Cambridge in 1638. That same year, John Harvard (1607-1638), a Puritan minister who had recently arrived in America and was a graduate and lecturer at Emmanuel College, Cambridge, passed away in Charlestown (Massachusetts). He left half of his estate (£780) and about three hundred books to the fledgling school; as a result, the college, which had been unstructured until that point, was named Harvard College (1639) in his honor. Its history has remained continuous since 1640, and the first commencement took place in 1642. The founders' vision is beautifully captured in the words of a contemporary letter carved on the college gates: “After God had brought us safely to New England, and we had built our homes, arranged for our livelihoods, established proper places for worship, and set up civil government; one of the next things we desired and worked towards was to promote Learning, and ensure it for future generations; fearing to leave an illiterate ministry to the churches when our current ministers lie in the dust.” The college charter of 1650 dedicated it to “the advancement of all good literature, arts, and sciences,” and “the education of English and Indian youth ... in knowledge and godliness.” The second building (1654) on the college grounds was called “the Indian College.” It housed the college press, which had been at the president’s residence since 1638, and here, it is believed, John Eliot’s translation of the Bible (1661-1663) into the native language, along with primers, catechisms, grammars, and tracts, was printed. A fair number of Native Americans were students, but only one, Caleb Cheeshahteaumuck, earned a bachelor’s degree (1665). The college received substantial support from abroad for this specific purpose, which greatly aided its early development.

The charter of 1650 has been in the main, and uninterruptedly since 1707, the fundamental source of authority in the administration of the university. It created a co-optating corporation consisting of the president, treasurer and five fellows, who formally initiate administrative measures, control the college funds, and appoint officers of instruction and government; subject, however, to confirmation by the Board of Overseers (established in 1642), which has a revisory power over all acts of the corporation. Circumstances gradually necessitated ordinary government by the resident teachers; and to-day the various faculties, elaborately organized, exercise immediate government and discipline over all the students, and individually or in the general university council consider questions of policy. The Board of Overseers was at first jointly representative of state and church. The former, as founder and patron, long regarded Harvard as a state institution, controlling or aiding it through the legislature and the overseers; but the controversies and embarrassments incident to legislative action proved prejudicial to the best interests of the college, and its organic connexion with the state was wholly severed in 1866. Financial aid and practical dependence had ceased some time earlier; indeed, from the very beginning, and with steadily increasing preponderance, Harvard has been sustained and fostered by private munificence rather than by public money. The last direct subsidy from the state determined in 1824, although state aid was afterwards given to the Agassiz museum, later united with the university. The church was naturally sponsor for the early college. The changing composition of its Board of Overseers marked its liberation first from clerical and later from political control; since 1865 the board has been chosen by the alumni (non-residents of Massachusetts being eligible since 1880), who therefore really control the university. When the state ceased to repress effectually the rife speculation characteristic of the first half of the seventeenth century, in religion as in politics, and in America as in England, the unity of Puritanism gave way to a variety of intense sectarianisms, and this, as also the incoming of Anglican churchmen, made the old faith of the college insecure. President Henry Dunster (c. 1612-1659), the first president, was censured by the magistrates and removed from office for questioning infant baptism. The conservatives, who clung to pristine and undiluted Calvinism, sought to intrench themselves in Harvard, especially in the Board of Overseers. The history of the college from about 1673 to 1725 was exceedingly troubled. Increase and Cotton Mather, forceful but bigoted, were the bulwarks of reaction and fomenters of discord. One episode in the struggle was the foundation and encouragement of Yale College by the reactionaries of New England as a truer “school of the prophets” (Cotton Mather being particularly zealous in its interests), after they had failed to secure control of the government of Harvard. It represented conservative secession. In 1792 the first layman was chosen to the corporation; in 1805 a Unitarian became professor of theology; in 1843 the board of overseers was opened to clergymen of all denominations; in 1886 attendance on prayers by the students ceased to be compulsory. Thus Harvard, in response to changing ideas and conditions, grew away from the ideas of its founders.

The charter of 1650 has primarily been the main source of authority in the administration of the university since 1707. It established a co-opted corporation made up of the president, treasurer, and five fellows, who officially initiate administrative actions, manage college funds, and appoint instructional and administrative officers; however, their actions must be confirmed by the Board of Overseers (created in 1642), which has review power over all corporate actions. Over time, circumstances required the resident teachers to take on more governing responsibilities; today, various well-organized faculties exercise immediate governance and discipline over all students, and they discuss policy matters either individually or in the general university council. Initially, the Board of Overseers represented both the state and the church. The state, as the founder and supporter, long viewed Harvard as a state institution, controlling or supporting it through the legislature and overseers; however, the controversies and challenges that arose from legislative actions proved detrimental to the college's best interests, leading to a complete separation from the state in 1866. Financial support and practical reliance had ended some time earlier; in fact, from the beginning, and increasingly so, Harvard has relied more on private generosity than on public funds. The last direct state subsidy ended in 1824, although the state later provided funding for the Agassiz museum, which later merged with the university. The church was naturally the early college’s sponsor. The changing makeup of the Board of Overseers signified its gradual liberation from ecclesiastical and then political control; since 1865, the board has been elected by alumni (with non-residents of Massachusetts eligible since 1880), who now genuinely control the university. When the state could no longer effectively suppress the rampant speculation prevalent in both religion and politics in the first half of the seventeenth century, Puritan unity began to fragment into a range of intense sectarian movements, with the arrival of Anglican churchmen further destabilizing the college's original faith. President Henry Dunster (c. 1612-1659), the first president, was criticized by the magistrates and removed from office for questioning infant baptism. The conservatives, who clung to traditional and unaltered Calvinism, aimed to establish their influence at Harvard, particularly in the Board of Overseers. The college's history from around 1673 to 1725 was very troubled. Increase and Cotton Mather, influential but intolerant figures, became strong advocates for reaction and sources of conflict. One notable episode in this struggle was the founding of Yale College by New England reactionaries as a true “school of the prophets” (with Cotton Mather being especially supportive), after they failed to gain control of Harvard's governance. It represented a conservative breakaway. In 1792, the first layman was elected to the corporation; in 1805, a Unitarian became a professor of theology; in 1843, the board of overseers was opened to clergy of all denominations; in 1886, attendance at student prayers ceased to be mandatory. Thus, Harvard evolved away from the ideas of its founders in response to changing ideologies and circumstances.

Harvard, her alumni, and her faculty have been very closely connected with American letters, not only in the colonial period, when the Mathers, Samuel Sewall and Thomas Prince were important names, or in the revolutionary and early national epoch with the Adamses, Fisher Ames, Joseph Dennie and Robert Treat Paine, but especially in the second third of the 19th century, when the great New England movements of Unitarianism and Transcendentalism were led by Harvard graduates. In 1805 Henry Ware (1764-1845) was elected the first anti-Trinitarian to be Hollis professor of divinity, and this marked Harvard’s close connexion with Unitarianism, in the later history of which Ware, his son Henry (1794-1843), and Andrews Norton (1786-1852), all Harvard alumni and professors, 39 and Joseph Buckminster (1751-1812) and William Ellery Channing were leaders of the conservative Unitarians, and Joseph Stevens Buckminster (1784-1812), James Freeman Clarke, and Theodore Parker were liberal leaders. Of the “Transcendentalists,” Emerson, Francis Henry Hedge (1805-1890), Clarke, Convers Francis (1795-1863), Parker, Thoreau and Christopher Pearse Cranch (1813-1892) were Harvard graduates. Longfellow’s professorship at Harvard identified him with it rather than with Bowdoin; Oliver Wendell Holmes was professor of anatomy and physiology at Harvard in 1847-1882; and Lowell, a Harvard alumnus, was Longfellow’s successor in 1855-1886 as Smith Professor of the French and Spanish languages and literatures. Ticknor and Charles Eliot Norton are other important names in American literary criticism. The historians Sparks, Bancroft, Hildreth, Palfrey, Prescott, Motley and Parkman were graduates of Harvard, as were Edward Everett, Charles Sumner and Wendell Phillips.

Harvard, its alumni, and faculty have always had strong ties to American literature, not just during the colonial era when notable figures like the Mathers, Samuel Sewall, and Thomas Prince emerged, or in the revolutionary and early national period with the Adamses, Fisher Ames, Joseph Dennie, and Robert Treat Paine, but especially in the second third of the 19th century when major New England movements like Unitarianism and Transcendentalism were driven by Harvard graduates. In 1805, Henry Ware (1764-1845) became the first anti-Trinitarian to be appointed Hollis professor of divinity, marking Harvard's close relationship with Unitarianism. In the later history of this movement, Ware, his son Henry (1794-1843), and Andrews Norton (1786-1852) were all Harvard alumni and professors who played crucial roles among the conservative Unitarians, while Joseph Stevens Buckminster (1784-1812), James Freeman Clarke, and Theodore Parker were prominent liberal figures. Among the “Transcendentalists,” Emerson, Francis Henry Hedge (1805-1890), Clarke, Convers Francis (1795-1863), Parker, Thoreau, and Christopher Pearse Cranch (1813-1892) were graduates of Harvard. Longfellow’s position at Harvard associated him with the school rather than Bowdoin; Oliver Wendell Holmes served as a professor of anatomy and physiology at Harvard from 1847 to 1882; and Lowell, an alumnus, succeeded Longfellow as Smith Professor of the French and Spanish languages and literatures from 1855 to 1886. Ticknor and Charles Eliot Norton are other key figures in American literary criticism. The historians Sparks, Bancroft, Hildreth, Palfrey, Prescott, Motley, and Parkman were all Harvard graduates, along with Edward Everett, Charles Sumner, and Wendell Phillips.

In organization and scope of effort Harvard has grown, especially after 1869, under the direction of President Charles W. Eliot, to be in the highest sense a university; but the “college” proper, whose end is the liberal culture of undergraduates, continues to be in many ways the centre of university life, as it is the embodiment of university traditions. The medical school (in Boston) dates from 1782, the law school from 1817, the divinity school1 (though instruction in theology was of course given from the foundation of the college) from 1819, and the dental school (in Boston) from 1867. The Bussey Institution at Jamaica Plain was established in 1871 as an undergraduate school of agriculture, and reorganized in 1908 for advanced instruction and research in subjects relating to agriculture and horticulture. The Graduate School of Arts and Sciences dates from 1872, the Graduate School of Applied Science (growing out of the Lawrence Scientific School) from 1906, and the Graduate School of Business Administration (which applies to commerce the professional methods used in post-graduate schools of medicine, law, &c.) from 1908. The Lawrence Scientific School, established in 1847, was practically abolished in 1907-1908, when its courses were divided between the College (which thereafter granted a degree of S.B.) and the Graduate School of Applied Science, which was established in 1906 and gives professional degrees in civil, mechanical and electrical engineering, mining, metallurgy, architecture, landscape architecture, forestry, applied physics, applied chemistry, applied zoology and applied geology. A school of veterinary medicine, established in 1882, was discontinued in 1901. The university institutions comprise the botanic garden (1807) and the (Asa) Gray herbarium (1864); the Arnold arboretum (1872), at Jamaica Plain, for the study of arboriculture, forestry and dendrology; the university museum of natural history, founded in 1859 by Louis Agassiz as a museum of comparative zoology, enormously developed by his son, Alexander Agassiz, and transferred to the university in 1876, though under an independent faculty; the Peabody museum of American archaeology and ethnology, founded in 1866 by George Peabody; the William Hayes Fogg art museum (1895); the Semitic museum (1889); the Germanic Museum (1902), containing rich gifts from Kaiser Wilhelm II., the Swiss government, and individuals and societies of Germanic lands; the social museum (1906); and the astronomical observatory (1843; location 42° 22′ 48″ N. lat., 71° 8′ W. long.), which since 1891 has maintained a station near Arequipa, Peru. A permanent summer engineering camp is maintained at Squam Lake, New Hampshire. In Petersham, Massachusetts, is the Harvard Forest, about 2000 acres of hilly wooded country with a stand in 1908 of 10,000,000 ft. B.M. of merchantable timber (mostly white pine); this forest was given to the university in 1907, and is an important part of the equipment of the division of forestry. The university library is the largest college library in the country, and from its slow and competent selection is of exceptional value. In 1908 it numbered, including the various special libraries, 803,800 bound volumes, about 496,600 pamphlets, and 27,450 maps. Some of its collections are of great value from associations or special richness, such as Thomas Carlyle’s collection on Cromwell and Frederick the Great; the collection on folk-lore and medieval romances, supposed to be the largest in existence and including the material used by Bishop Percy in preparing his Reliques; and that on the Ottoman empire. The law library has been described by Professor A. V. Dicey of Oxford as “the most perfect collection of the legal records of the English people to be found in any part of the English-speaking world.” There are department libraries at the Arnold arboretum, the Gray herbarium, the Bussey Institution, the astronomical observatory, the dental school, the medical school, the law school, the divinity school, the Peabody museum, and the museum of comparative zoology. In 1878 the library published the first of a valuable series of Bibliographical Contributions. Other publications of the university (apart from annual reports of various departments) are: the Harvard Oriental Series (started 1891), Harvard Studies in Classical Philology (1890), Harvard Theological Review (1907), the Harvard Law Review (1889), Harvard Historical Studies (1897), Harvard Economic Studies (1906), Harvard Psychological Studies (1903), the Harvard Engineering Journal (1902), the Bulletin (1874) of the Bussey Institution, the Archaeological and Ethnological Papers (1888) of the Peabody museum, and the Bulletin (1863), Contributions and Memoirs (1865) of the museum of comparative zoology. The students’ publications include the Crimson (1873), a daily newspaper; the Advocate (1831), a literary bi-weekly; the Lampoon (1876), a comic bi-weekly; and the Harvard Monthly (1885), a literary monthly. The Harvard Bulletin, a weekly, and the Harvard Graduates’ Magazine (1892), a quarterly, are published chiefly for the alumni.

In terms of organization and effort, Harvard has really expanded, especially after 1869, under President Charles W. Eliot, becoming a true university. However, the “college” itself, which focuses on providing a liberal education to undergraduates, remains at the heart of university life, reflecting the university’s traditions. The medical school in Boston started in 1782, the law school opened in 1817, the divinity school (although theology instruction has been part of the college since its founding) began in 1819, and the dental school in Boston was established in 1867. The Bussey Institution in Jamaica Plain was created in 1871 as an undergraduate school of agriculture and reorganized in 1908 for advanced teaching and research in agriculture and horticulture topics. The Graduate School of Arts and Sciences was established in 1872, the Graduate School of Applied Science (which evolved from the Lawrence Scientific School) opened in 1906, and the Graduate School of Business Administration (which applies professional methods from post-graduate schools of medicine, law, etc.) began in 1908. The Lawrence Scientific School, founded in 1847, was effectively closed in 1907-1908, with its courses split between the College (which then awarded a degree of S.B.) and the Graduate School of Applied Science, created in 1906, offering professional degrees in civil, mechanical, and electrical engineering, mining, metallurgy, architecture, landscape architecture, forestry, applied physics, applied chemistry, applied zoology, and applied geology. A veterinary medicine school that was set up in 1882 was shut down in 1901. The university’s institutions include the botanic garden (1807) and the (Asa) Gray herbarium (1864); the Arnold Arboretum (1872) in Jamaica Plain for studying arboriculture, forestry, and dendrology; the university museum of natural history, started in 1859 by Louis Agassiz as a comparative zoology museum, greatly expanded by his son Alexander Agassiz, and transferred to the university in 1876, although it operates under an independent faculty; the Peabody Museum of American archaeology and ethnology, founded in 1866 by George Peabody; the William Hayes Fogg Art Museum (1895); the Semitic Museum (1889); the Germanic Museum (1902), which holds significant gifts from Kaiser Wilhelm II, the Swiss government, and various individuals and organizations from German-speaking countries; the social museum (1906); and the astronomical observatory (1843; coordinates 42° 22′ 48″ N. lat., 71° 8′ W. long.), which has maintained a station near Arequipa, Peru, since 1891. There’s a permanent summer engineering camp at Squam Lake, New Hampshire. In Petersham, Massachusetts, the Harvard Forest spans about 2000 acres of hilly, wooded land, containing 10,000,000 ft. B.M. of marketable timber (mostly white pine) as of 1908; this forest was given to the university in 1907 and is a crucial asset for the division of forestry. The university library is the largest college library in the U.S., and its careful selection process makes it especially valuable. In 1908, it had, including various special libraries, 803,800 bound volumes, about 496,600 pamphlets, and 27,450 maps. Some of its collections are notable for their associations or unique richness, such as Thomas Carlyle's collection on Cromwell and Frederick the Great; the folkloric and medieval romance collection, thought to be the largest in existence and including materials used by Bishop Percy for his Reliques; and the collection on the Ottoman Empire. The law library has been described by Professor A. V. Dicey of Oxford as “the most perfect collection of the legal records of the English people to be found in any part of the English-speaking world.” There are department libraries at the Arnold Arboretum, the Gray Herbarium, the Bussey Institution, the astronomical observatory, the dental school, the medical school, the law school, the divinity school, the Peabody Museum, and the Museum of Comparative Zoology. In 1878, the library published the first in a valuable series of Bibliographical Contributions. Other university publications (besides annual department reports) include: the Harvard Oriental Series (started 1891), Harvard Studies in Classical Philology (1890), Harvard Theological Review (1907), Harvard Law Review (1889), Harvard Historical Studies (1897), Harvard Economic Studies (1906), Harvard Psychological Studies (1903), Harvard Engineering Journal (1902), the Bulletin (1874) of the Bussey Institution, the Archaeological and Ethnological Papers (1888) of the Peabody Museum, and the Bulletin (1863), Contributions and Memoirs (1865) of the Museum of Comparative Zoology. Student publications include the Crimson (1873), a daily newspaper; the Advocate (1831), a literary bi-weekly; the Lampoon (1876), a comic bi-weekly; and the Harvard Monthly (1885), a literary monthly. The Harvard Bulletin, a weekly, and the Harvard Graduates’ Magazine (1892), a quarterly, are aimed mainly at alumni.

In 1908-1909 there were 743 officers of instruction and administration (including those for Radcliffe) and 5250 students (1059 in 1869), the latter including 2238 in the college, 1641 in the graduate and professional schools, and 1332 in the summer school. Radcliffe College, for women, had 449 additional students. The whole number of degrees conferred up to 1905 was 31,805 (doctors of science and of philosophy by examination, 408; masters of arts and of science by examination, 1759). The conditions of the time when Harvard was a theological seminary for boys, governed like a higher boarding school, have left traces still discernible in the organization and discipline, though no longer in the aims of the college. The average age of students at entrance, only 14 years so late as 1820, had risen by 1890 to 19 years, making possible the transition to the present régime of almost entire liberty of life and studies without detriment, but with positive improvement, to the morals of the student body. A strong development toward the university ideal marked the opening of the 19th century, especially in the widening of courses, the betterment of instruction, and the suggestions of quickening ideas of university freedom, whose realization, along with others, has come since 1870. The elimination of the last vestiges of sectarianism and churchly discipline, a lessening of parietal oversight, a lopping off of various outgrown colonial customs, a complete reconstruction of professional standards and methods, the development of a great graduate school in arts and sciences based on and organically connected with the undergraduate college, a great improvement in the college standard of scholarship, the allowance of almost absolute freedom to students in the shaping of their college course (the “elective” system), and very remarkable material prosperity marked the administration (1860-1909) of President Eliot. In the readjustment in the curricula of American colleges of the elements of professional training and liberal culture Harvard has been bold in experiment and innovation. With Johns Hopkins University she has led the movement that has transformed university education, and her influence upon secondary education in America has been incomparably greater than that of any other university. Her entrance requirements to the college and to the schools of medicine, law, dentistry and divinity have been higher than those of any other American university. 40 A bachelor’s degree is requisite for entrance to the professional schools (except that of dentistry), and the master’s degree (since 1872) is given to students only for graduate work in residence, and rarely to other persons as an honorary degree. In scholarship and in growth of academic freedom Germany has given the quickening impulse. This influence began with George Ticknor and Edward Everett, who were trained in Germany, and was continued by a number of eminent German scholars, some driven into exile for their liberalism, who became professors in the second half of the 19th century, and above all by the many members of the faculty still later trained in German universities. The ideas of recognizing special students and introducing the elective system were suggested in 1824, attaining establishment even for freshmen by 1885, the movement characterizing particularly the years 1865-1885. The basis of the elective system (as in force in 1910) is freedom in choice of studies within liberal limits; and, as regards admission to college2 (completely established 1891), the idea that the admission is of minds for the quality of their training and not for their knowledge of particular subjects, and that any subject may be acceptable for such training if followed with requisite devotion and under proper methods. Except for one course in English in the Freshman year, and one course in French or German for those who do not on entrance present both of these languages, no study is prescribed, but the student is compelled to select a certain number of courses in some one department or field of learning, and to distribute the remainder among other departments, the object being to secure a systematic education, based on the principle of knowing a little of everything and something well.

In 1908-1909, there were 743 instructional and administrative officers (including those for Radcliffe) and 5,250 students (1,059 in 1869), which included 2,238 in the college, 1,641 in the graduate and professional schools, and 1,332 in the summer school. Radcliffe College, for women, had an additional 449 students. The total number of degrees conferred up to 1905 was 31,805 (408 doctors of science and philosophy by examination; 1,759 masters of arts and science by examination). The influences from the time when Harvard functioned as a theological seminary for boys, managed like an elite boarding school, can still be seen in its organization and discipline, though the college’s objectives have evolved. The average entering age of students, which was just 14 years as late as 1820, rose to 19 years by 1890, allowing the transition to the current regime of near-total freedom in lifestyle and studies without harming, but actually improving, the morals of the student body. A significant shift toward the university ideal marked the start of the 19th century, especially in the broadening of courses, improvement of teaching, and introduction of advancing ideas about university freedom, many of which have been realized since 1870. The removal of the final remnants of sectarianism and church discipline, reduced oversight of residential life, abandonment of several outdated colonial customs, complete overhaul of professional standards and methods, development of a significant graduate school in arts and sciences connected to the undergraduate college, and a notable enhancement in college scholarship standards, as well as granting students almost complete freedom in shaping their courses (the “elective” system), characterized President Eliot's administration from 1860 to 1909. In reshaping the curricula of American colleges to incorporate elements of professional training and liberal education, Harvard has embraced bold experiments and innovations. Along with Johns Hopkins University, it has pioneered the movement that transformed university education, and its influence on secondary education in the U.S. surpasses that of any other university. Its admission standards for the college and the schools of medicine, law, dentistry, and divinity have been more rigorous than those of any other American university. A bachelor’s degree is required for admission to the professional schools (except dentistry), and the master’s degree (since 1872) is awarded to students only for graduate work completed in residence, rarely given honorarily to others. Germany has inspired this progress in scholarship and academic freedom. This influence began with George Ticknor and Edward Everett, who were educated in Germany, and continued with several prominent German scholars, some exiled for their liberal views, who became professors in the latter half of the 19th century, along with many faculty members trained in German universities afterward. The proposals for recognizing special students and implementing the elective system were suggested in 1824, becoming established even for freshmen by 1885, particularly prominent during the years 1865-1885. The foundation of the elective system (as it was in 1910) is freedom of study choice within broad, liberal limits; regarding college admission (fully established in 1891), the principle is that admission evaluates minds for the quality of their training, not for their knowledge of specific subjects, and that any subject may be valid for such training if pursued with the necessary dedication and appropriate methods. Except for one English course in the freshman year and one course in French or German for those who do not present both languages upon entry, no specific study is required; however, students must select a certain number of courses within one department or field of knowledge and distribute the rest among other departments, aimed at securing a well-rounded education based on the concept of knowing a little about everything and mastering something specific.

The material equipment of Harvard is very rich. In 1909 it included invested funds of $22,716,760 ($2,257,990 in 1869) and lands and buildings valued at $12,000,000 at least. In 1908-1909 an income of more than $130,000 was distributed in scholarships, fellowships, prizes and other aids to students. The yearly income available for immediate use from all sources in 1899-1904 averaged $1,074,229, of which $452,760 yearly represented gifts. The total gifts, for funds and for current use, in the same years aggregated $6,152,988. The income in 1907-1908 was $1,846,976; $241,924 was given for immediate use, and $449,822 was given for capital. The medical school is well endowed and is housed in buildings (1906) on Longwood Avenue, Boston; the gifts for its buildings and endowments made in 1901-1902 aggregate $5,000,000. Among the university buildings are two dining-balls accommodating some 2500 students, a theatre for public ceremonies, a chapel, a home for religious societies, a club-home (the Harvard Union) for graduates and undergraduates, an infirmary, gymnasium, boat houses and large playgrounds, with a concrete stadium capable of seating 27,000 spectators. Massachusetts Hall (1720) is the oldest building. University Hall (1815), the administration building, dignified, of excellent proportions and simple lines, is a good example of the work of Charles Bulfinch. Memorial Hall (1874), an ambitious building of cathedral suggestion, commemorates the Harvard men who fell in the Civil War, and near it is an ideal statue (1884) of John Harvard by Daniel C. French. The medical and dental schools are in Boston, and the Bussey Institution and Arnold Arboretum are at Jamaica Plain.

The resources at Harvard are extremely impressive. In 1909, it had invested funds amounting to $22,716,760 ($2,257,990 in 1869) and lands and buildings valued at least $12,000,000. In the 1908-1909 academic year, more than $130,000 was distributed in scholarships, fellowships, prizes, and other forms of student assistance. The average annual income available for immediate use from all sources between 1899 and 1904 was $1,074,229, with $452,760 coming from donations each year. During those same years, total donations for funds and current use totaled $6,152,988. The income for 1907-1908 was $1,846,976, with $241,924 allocated for immediate use and $449,822 for capital projects. The medical school is well-funded and located in buildings (1906) on Longwood Avenue, Boston; donations for its buildings and endowments in 1901-1902 totaled $5,000,000. Among the university's facilities are two dining halls that serve about 2,500 students, a theater for public events, a chapel, a home for religious organizations, a club-house (the Harvard Union) for graduates and undergraduates, an infirmary, a gym, boat houses, and large playgrounds, featuring a concrete stadium that seats 27,000 spectators. Massachusetts Hall (1720) is the oldest building. University Hall (1815), the administration building, is distinguished, well-proportioned, and simple in design, showcasing the work of Charles Bulfinch. Memorial Hall (1874), an ambitious structure reminiscent of a cathedral, honors Harvard men who died in the Civil War, and nearby is an iconic statue (1884) of John Harvard by Daniel C. French. The medical and dental schools are located in Boston, while the Bussey Institution and Arnold Arboretum are situated in Jamaica Plain.

Radcliffe College, essentially a part of Harvard, dates from the beginning of systematic instruction of women by members of the Harvard faculty in 1879, the Society for the Collegiate Instruction of Women being formally organized in 1882. The present name was adopted in 1894 in honour of Ann Radcliffe, Lady Mowlson (ob. c. 1661), widow of Sir Thomas Mowlson, alderman and (1634) lord mayor of London, who in 1643 founded the first scholarship in Harvard College. From 1894 also dates the present official connexion of Radcliffe with Harvard. The requirements for admission and for degrees are the same as in Harvard (whose president countersigns all diplomas), and the president and fellows of Harvard control absolutely the administration of the college, although it has for immediate administration a separate government. Instruction is given by members of the university teaching force, who repeat in Radcliffe many of the Harvard courses. Many advanced courses in Harvard, and to a certain extent laboratory facilities, are directly accessible to Radcliffe students, and they have unrestricted access to the library.

Radcliffe Institute, which is essentially part of Harvard, started with the systematic education of women by Harvard faculty in 1879, and the Society for the Collegiate Instruction of Women was officially formed in 1882. The college adopted its current name in 1894 to honor Ann Radcliffe, Lady Mowlson (ob. c. 1661), the widow of Sir Thomas Mowlson, who was an alderman and lord mayor of London in 1634, and who founded the first scholarship at Harvard College in 1643. The official connection between Radcliffe and Harvard was established in 1894. The admission requirements and degree criteria are the same as those at Harvard (whose president signs all diplomas), and the administration of the college is completely under the control of the president and fellows of Harvard, although it has its own immediate governing body. Instruction is provided by faculty members of the university, who teach many of the same courses offered at Harvard. Radcliffe students have access to many advanced courses at Harvard and, to some extent, the laboratory facilities, plus they have full access to the library.

The presidents of Harvard have been: Henry Dunster (1640-1654); Charles Chauncy (1654-1672); Leonard Hoar (1672-1675); Urian Oakes (1675-1681); John Rogers (1682-1684); Increase Mather (1685-1701); Charles Morton (vice-president) (1697-1698); Samuel Willard (1700-1707); John Leverett (1708-1724); Benjamin Wadsworth (1725-1737); Edward Holyoke (1737-1769); Samuel Locke (1770-1773); Samuel Langdon (1774-1780); Joseph Willard (1781-1804); Samuel Webber (1806-1810); John Thornton Kirkland (1810-1828); Josiah Quincy (1829-1845); Edward Everett (1846-1849); Jared Sparks (1849-1853); James Walker (1853-1860); Cornelius Conway Felton (1860-1862); Thomas Hill (1862-1868); Charles William Eliot (1869-1909); Abbott Lawrence Lowell (appointed 1909).

The presidents of Harvard have been: Henry Dunster (1640-1654); Charles Chauncy (1654-1672); Leonard Hoar (1672-1675); Urian Oakes (1675-1681); John Rogers (1682-1684); Increase Mather (1685-1701); Charles Morton (vice-president) (1697-1698); Samuel Willard (1700-1707); John Leverett (1708-1724); Benjamin Wadsworth (1725-1737); Edward Holyoke (1737-1769); Samuel Locke (1770-1773); Samuel Langdon (1774-1780); Joseph Willard (1781-1804); Samuel Webber (1806-1810); John Thornton Kirkland (1810-1828); Josiah Quincy (1829-1845); Edward Everett (1846-1849); Jared Sparks (1849-1853); James Walker (1853-1860); Cornelius Conway Felton (1860-1862); Thomas Hill (1862-1868); Charles William Eliot (1869-1909); Abbott Lawrence Lowell (appointed 1909).

Authorities.—Benjamin Peirce, A History of Harvard University 1636-1775 (Boston, 1883); Josiah Quincy, A History of Harvard University (2 vols., Boston, 1840); Samuel A. Eliot, Harvard College and its Benefactors (Boston, 1848); H. C. Shelley, John Harvard and his Times (Boston, 1907); The Harvard Book (2 vols., Cambridge, 1874); G. Birkbeck Hill, Harvard College, by an Oxonian (New York, 1894); William R. Thayer, “History and Customs of Harvard University,” in Universities and their Sons, vol. i. (Boston, 1898); Official Guide to Harvard, and the various other publications of the university; also the Harvard Graduates’ Magazine (1892 sqq.).

Authorities.—Benjamin Peirce, A History of Harvard University 1636-1775 (Boston, 1883); Josiah Quincy, A History of Harvard University (2 vols., Boston, 1840); Samuel A. Eliot, Harvard College and its Benefactors (Boston, 1848); H. C. Shelley, John Harvard and his Times (Boston, 1907); The Harvard Book (2 vols., Cambridge, 1874); G. Birkbeck Hill, Harvard College, by an Oxonian (New York, 1894); William R. Thayer, “History and Customs of Harvard University,” in Universities and their Sons, vol. i. (Boston, 1898); Official Guide to Harvard, and the various other publications of the university; also the Harvard Graduates’ Magazine (1892 sqq.).


1 Affiliated with the university, but autonomous and independent, is the Andover Theological Seminary, which in 1908 removed from Andover to Cambridge.

1 Connected to the university, yet self-governing and independent, is the Andover Theological Seminary, which moved from Andover to Cambridge in 1908.

2 The requirements for admission as changed in 1908 are based on the “unit system”; satisfactory marks must be got in subjects aggregating 26 units, the unit being a measure of preparatory study. Of these 26 units, English (4 units), algebra (2), plane geometry (2), some science or sciences (2), history (2; either Greek and Roman, or American and English), a modern language (2; French and German) are prescribed; prospective candidates for the degree of A.B. are required to take examinations for 4 additional units in Greek or Latin, and for the other 8 points have large range of choice; and candidates for the degree of S.B. must take additional examinations in French or German (2 units) and have a similar freedom of choice in making up the remaining 10 units.

2 The admission requirements changed in 1908 are based on the "unit system"; students must achieve satisfactory grades in subjects totaling 26 units, with a unit representing a measure of preparatory study. Of these 26 units, the required subjects include English (4 units), algebra (2), plane geometry (2), some science or sciences (2), history (2; either Greek and Roman or American and English), and a modern language (2; French and German). Prospective candidates for the A.B. degree must take exams for 4 additional units in Greek or Latin, while they have a wide range of choices for the remaining 8 points. Candidates for the S.B. degree must take additional exams in French or German (2 units) and also have similar freedom in selecting the remaining 10 units.


HARVEST (A.S. hærfest “autumn,” O.H. Ger. herbist, possibly through an old Teutonic root representing Lat. carpere, “to pluck”), the season of the ingathering of crops. Harvest has been a season of rejoicing from the remotest ages. The ancient Jews celebrated the Feast of Pentecost as their harvest festival, the wheat ripening earlier in Palestine. The Romans had their Cerealia or feasts in honour of Ceres. The Druids celebrated their harvest on the 1st of November. In pre-reformation England Lammas Day (Aug. 1st, O.S.) was observed at the beginning of the harvest festival, every member of the church presenting a loaf made of new wheat. Throughout the world harvest has always been the occasion for many queer customs which all have their origin in the animistic belief in the Corn-Spirit or Corn-Mother. This personification of the crops has left its impress upon the harvest customs of modern Europe. In west Russia, for example, the figure made out of the last sheaf of corn is called the Bastard, and a boy is wrapped up in it. The woman who binds this sheaf represents the “Cornmother,” and an elaborate simulation of childbirth takes place, the boy in the sheaf squalling like a new-born child, and being, on his liberation, wrapped in swaddling bands. Even in England vestiges of sympathetic magic can be detected. In Northumberland, where the harvest rejoicing takes place at the close of the reaping and not at the ingathering, as soon as the last sheaf is set on end the reapers shout that they have “got the kern.” An image formed of a wheatsheaf, and dressed in a white frock and coloured ribbons, is hoisted on a pole. This is the “kern-baby” or harvest-queen, and it is carried back in triumph with music and shouting and set up in a prominent place during the harvest supper. In Scotland the last sheaf if cut before Hallowmas is called the “maiden,” and the youngest girl in the harvest-field is given the privilege of cutting it. If the reaping finishes after Hallowmas the last corn cut is called the Cailleach (old woman). In some parts of Scotland this last sheaf is kept till Christmas morning and then divided among the cattle “to make them 41 thrive all the year round,” or is kept till the first mare foals and is then given to her as her first food. Throughout the world, as J. G. Frazer shows, the semi-worship of the last sheaf is or has been the great feature of the harvest-home. Among harvest customs none is more interesting than harvest cries. The cry of the Egyptian reapers announcing the death of the corn-spirit, the rustic prototype of Osiris, has found its echo on the world’s harvest-fields, and to this day, to take an English example, the Devonshire reapers utter cries of the same sort and go through a ceremony which in its main features is an exact counterpart of pagan worship. “After the wheat is cut they ‘cry the neck.’ ... An old man goes round to the shocks and picks out a bundle of the best ears be can find ... this bundle is called ‘the neck’; the harvest hands then stand round in a ring, the old man holding ‘the neck’ in the centre. At a signal from him they take off their hats, stooping and holding them with both hands towards the ground. Then all together they utter in a prolonged cry ‘the neck!’ three times, raising themselves upright with their hats held above their heads. Then they change their cry to ‘Wee yen! way yen!’ or, as some report, ‘we haven!’” On a fine still autumn evening “crying the neck” has a wonderful effect at a distance. In East Anglia there still survives the custom known as “Hallering Largess.” The harvesters beg largess from passers, and when they have received money they shout thrice “Halloo, largess,” having first formed a circle, bowed their heads low crying “Hoo-Hoo-Hoo,” and then jerked their heads backwards and uttered a shrill shriek of “Ah! Ah!”

HARVEST (A.S. hærfest “autumn,” O.H. Ger. herbist, possibly derived from an old Teutonic root meaning Lat. carpere, “to pluck”), the season for gathering crops. Harvest has long been a time of celebration. The ancient Jews held the Feast of Pentecost as their harvest festival, as wheat ripened earlier in Palestine. The Romans celebrated their Cerealia or feasts in honor of Ceres. The Druids marked their harvest on November 1st. In pre-Reformation England, Lammas Day (August 1st, O.S.) was observed as the start of the harvest festival, where every church member presented a loaf made from new wheat. Around the world, harvest has always sparked various unusual customs, rooted in the animistic belief in the Corn-Spirit or Corn-Mother. This embodiment of the crops influences modern harvest traditions across Europe. In western Russia, for example, the last sheaf of corn is called the Bastard, and a boy is wrapped in it. The woman who binds this sheaf represents the “Cornmother,” and a detailed simulation of childbirth occurs, with the boy in the sheaf crying like a newborn and being wrapped in swaddling bands once freed. Even in England, signs of sympathetic magic can be seen. In Northumberland, where harvest celebrations occur at the end of the reaping instead of at the gathering, once the last sheaf is stood up, the reapers shout that they have “got the kern.” An image made from a wheatsheaf, dressed in a white frock and colored ribbons, is raised on a pole. This is the “kern-baby” or harvest-queen, which is carried back in triumph with music and cheers, set up in a prominent spot during the harvest supper. In Scotland, the last sheaf cut before Hallowmas is called the “maiden,” and the youngest girl in the harvest field has the honor of cutting it. If the reaping happens after Hallowmas, the last corn cut is referred to as the Cailleach (old woman). In some areas of Scotland, this last sheaf is kept until Christmas morning and then shared among the cattle “to make them thrive all year long,” or it’s kept until the first mare foals and given to her as her first food. Worldwide, as J. G. Frazer points out, the semi-worship of the last sheaf has been a prominent aspect of harvest home celebrations. Among harvest customs, none are more fascinating than harvest cries. The cry of Egyptian reapers marking the death of the corn-spirit, the rural equivalent of Osiris, has echoed through harvest fields globally. To this day, in England, for example, Devonshire reapers make similar cries and perform a ceremony closely resembling pagan rituals. “After the wheat is cut, they ‘cry the neck.’ ... An old man goes around the shocks and picks out a bundle of the best ears he can find ... this bundle is called ‘the neck’; then the harvest workers form a circle, the old man holding ‘the neck’ in the center. At his signal, they remove their hats, stooping and holding them with both hands towards the ground. Together, they let out a prolonged cry of ‘the neck!’ three times, standing up with their hats raised above their heads. Then they change their cry to ‘Wee yen! way yen!’ or, as some say, ‘we haven!’” On a calm autumn evening, “crying the neck” has a powerful impact from a distance. In East Anglia, the custom known as “Hallering Largess” still exists. Harvesters ask for largess from passersby, and when they receive money, they shout “Halloo, largess” three times after forming a circle, bowing their heads low and crying “Hoo-Hoo-Hoo,” then jerking their heads back and letting out a sharp shriek of “Ah! Ah!”

For a very full discussion of harvest customs see J. G. Frazer, The Golden Bough, and Brand’s Antiquities of Great Britain (Hazlitt’s edit., 1905).

For a comprehensive discussion of harvest customs, see J. G. Frazer, The Golden Bough, and Brand’s Antiquities of Great Britain (Hazlitt’s edit., 1905).


HARVEST-BUG, the familiar name for mites of the family Trombidiidae, belonging to the order Acari of the class Arachnida. Although at one time regarded as constituting a distinct species, described as Leptus autumnalis, harvest-bugs are now known to be the six-legged larval forms of several British species of mites of the genus Trombidium. They are minute, rusty-brown organisms, barely visible to the naked eye, which swarm in grass and low herbage in the summer and early autumn, and cause considerable, sometimes intense, irritation by piercing and adhering to the skin of the leg, usually lodging themselves in some part where the clothing is tight, such as the knee when covered with gartered stockings. They may be readily destroyed, and the irritation allayed, by rubbing the affected area with some insecticide like turpentine or benzine. They are not permanently parasitic, and if left alone will leave their temporary host to resume the active life characteristic of the adult mite, which is predatory in habits, preying upon minute living animal organisms.

HARVEST BUG, is the common name for mites from the family Trombidiidae, which belong to the order Acari in the class Arachnida. Once thought to be a separate species called Leptus autumnalis, harvest-bugs are now recognized as the six-legged larval forms of various British mite species from the genus Trombidium. These tiny, rusty-brown creatures are nearly invisible to the naked eye and can be found swarming in grass and low vegetation during the summer and early autumn. They can cause significant, sometimes severe, irritation by piercing and sticking to the skin on the legs, often settling in tight areas such as the knee when covered by gartered stockings. They can be easily eliminated, and the irritation relieved, by rubbing the affected area with an insecticide like turpentine or benzene. They are not permanent parasites, and if left alone, they will detach from their temporary host to go back to the active lifestyle typical of adult mites, which are predatory and feed on small living organisms.


HARVESTER, Harvest-Spider, or Harvest-Man, names given to Arachnids of the order Opiliones, referable to various species of the family Phalangiidae. Harvest-spiders or harvest-men, so-called on account of their abundance in the late summer and early autumn, may be at once distinguished from all true spiders by the extreme length and thinness of their legs, and by the small size and spherical or oval shape of the body, which is not divided by a waist or constriction into an anterior and a posterior region. They may be met with in houses, back yards, fields, woods and heaths; either climbing on walls, running over the grass, or lurking under stones and fallen tree trunks. They are predaceous, feeding upon small insects, mites and spiders. The males are smaller than the females, and often differ from them in certain well-marked secondary sexual characters, such as the mandibular protuberance from which one of the common English spiders, Phalangium cornutum, takes its scientific name. The male is also furnished with a long and protrusible penis, and the female with an equally long and protrusible ovipositor. The sexes pair in the autumn, and the female, by means of her ovipositor, lays her eggs in some cleft or hole in the soil and leaves them to their fate. After breeding, the parents die with the autumn cold; but the eggs retain their vitality through the winter and hatch with the warmth of spring and early summer, the young gradually attaining maturity as the latter season progresses. Hence the prevalence of adult individuals in the late summer and autumn, and at no other time of the year. They are provided with a pair of glands, situated one on each side of the carapace, which secrete an evil-smelling fluid believed to be protective in nature. Harvest-men are very widely distributed and are especially abundant in temperate countries of the northern hemisphere. They are also, however, common in India, where they are well known for their habit of adhering together in great masses, comparable to a swarm of bees, and of swaying gently backwards and forwards. The long legs of harvest-men serve them not only as organs of rapid locomotion, but also as props to raise the body well off the ground, thus enabling the animals to stalk unmolested from the midst of an army of raiding ants.

HARVESTER, Harvest Spider, or Harvestman, are names given to arachnids from the order Opiliones, referring to various species in the family Phalangiidae. Harvest-spiders or harvest-men are named for their abundance in late summer and early autumn. They can be easily recognized from true spiders by their extremely long and thin legs and their small, spherical or oval bodies, which are not divided by a waist into front and back sections. You can find them in houses, backyards, fields, woods, and heaths, climbing walls, running over grass, or hiding under stones and fallen tree trunks. They are predators, feeding on small insects, mites, and spiders. Males are smaller than females and often have distinct secondary sexual characteristics, like the mandibular protuberance that gives the common English spider, Phalangium cornutum, its scientific name. Males also have a long, extendable penis, while females have a similarly long, extendable ovipositor. The sexes mate in the autumn, and the female uses her ovipositor to lay her eggs in a crevice or hole in the soil, leaving them to their fate. After mating, the parents die with the autumn chill, but the eggs survive through the winter and hatch with the warmth of spring and early summer, with the young maturing as the season progresses. This is why adult individuals are prevalent in late summer and autumn, but not at other times of the year. They have a pair of glands located on each side of the carapace that secrete a foul-smelling fluid thought to be protective. Harvest-men are widely distributed and especially abundant in temperate regions of the northern hemisphere. However, they are also common in India, where they are known for sticking together in large groups, similar to a swarm of bees, and gently swaying back and forth. The long legs of harvest-men not only allow for quick movement but also lift their bodies high off the ground, enabling them to move undisturbed amidst a group of foraging ants.

(R. I. P.)
Fig. 1.—Harvest-man (Phalangium cornutum, Linn.); profile of male, with legs and palpi truncated.

a, Ocular tubercle.

a, Eye tubercle.

b, Mandible.

b, Jawbone.

c, Labrum (upper lip).

Labrum (upper lip).

d, Sheath of penis protruded.

d, Penis sheath protruded.

e, Penis.

e, penis.

f, The glans.

The glans.


HARVEY, GABRIEL (c. 1545-1630), English writer, eldest son of a ropemaker of Saffron-Walden, Essex, was born about 1545. He matriculated at Christ’s College, Cambridge, in 1566, and in 1570 was elected fellow of Pembroke Hall. Here he formed a lasting friendship with Edmund Spenser, and it has been suggested (Athen. Cantab., ii. 258) that he may have been the poet’s tutor. Harvey was a scholar of considerable weight, who has perhaps been judged too exclusively from the brilliant invectives directed against him by Thomas Nashe. Henry Morley, writing in the Fortnightly Review (March 1869), brought evidence from Harvey’s Latin writings which shows that he was distinguished by quite other qualities than the pedantry and conceit usually associated with his name. He desired to be “epitaphed as the Inventour of the English Hexameter,” and was the prime mover in the literary clique that desired to impose on English verse the Latin rules of quantity. In a “gallant, familiar letter” to M. Immerito (Edmund Spenser) he says that Sir Edward Dyer and Sir Philip Sidney were helping forward “our new famous enterprise for the exchanging of Barbarous and Balductum Rymes with Artificial Verses.” The document includes a tepid appreciation of the Faerie Queene which had been sent to him for his opinion, and he gives examples of English hexameters illustrative of the principles enunciated in the correspondence. The opening lines—

HARVEY, GABRIEL (c. 1545-1630), English writer, oldest son of a ropemaker from Saffron-Walden, Essex, was born around 1545. He enrolled at Christ’s College, Cambridge, in 1566, and in 1570 was elected a fellow of Pembroke Hall. There, he developed a lasting friendship with Edmund Spenser, and it has been suggested (Athen. Cantab., ii. 258) that he might have been the poet’s tutor. Harvey was a notable scholar who may have been judged too harshly based on the sharp criticisms from Thomas Nashe. Henry Morley, writing in the Fortnightly Review (March 1869), provided evidence from Harvey’s Latin writings that showed he was known for qualities beyond the pedantry and arrogance typically associated with him. He wished to be “epitaphed as the Inventor of the English Hexameter,” and was a key figure in the literary group that aimed to apply Latin rules of quantity to English verse. In a “gallant, familiar letter” to M. Immerito (Edmund Spenser), he mentions that Sir Edward Dyer and Sir Philip Sidney were assisting in “our new famous enterprise for the exchanging of Barbarous and Balductum Rymes with Artificial Verses.” The document includes a lukewarm review of the Faerie Queene, which had been sent to him for feedback, and he provides examples of English hexameters to illustrate the principles discussed in the correspondence. The opening lines—

“What might I call this Tree? A Laurell? O bonny Laurell

“What should I name this Tree? A Laurel? Oh, beautiful Laurel

Needes to thy bowes will I bow this knee, and vayle my bonetto”—

Need to your bows will I bow this knee, and lower my hat”—

afford a fair sample of the success of Harvey’s metrical experiments, which presented a fair mark for the wit of Thomas Nashe. “He (Harvey) goes twitching and hopping in our language like a man running upon quagmires, up the hill in one syllable, and down the dale in another,” says Nashe in Strange Newes, and he mimics him in the mocking couplet:

afford a good example of the success of Harvey’s poetic experiments, which provided a solid target for the wit of Thomas Nashe. “He (Harvey) stumbles and skips in our language like someone running over marshy ground, up the hill in one syllable and down the valley in another,” says Nashe in Strange Newes, and he mocks him in the satirical couplet:

“But eh! what news do you hear of that good Gabriel Huffe-Snuffe,

“But hey! what news have you heard about that good Gabriel Huffe-Snuffe,

Known to the world for a foole, and clapt in the Fleete for a Runner?”

Known to the world as a fool, and locked up in the Fleet for being a runner?

Harvey exercised great influence over Spenser for a short time, and the friendship lasted even though Spenser’s genius refused 42 to be bound by the laws of the new prosody. Harvey is the Hobbinoll of his friend’s Shepheards Calender, and into his mouth is put the beautiful song in the fourth eclogue in praise of Eliza. If he was really the author of the verses “To the Learned Shepheard” signed “Hobynoll” and prefixed to the Faerie Queene, he was a good poet spoiled. But Harvey’s genuine friendship for Spenser shows the best side of a disposition uncompromising and quarrelsome towards the world in general. In 1573 ill-will against him in his college was so strong that there was a delay of three months before the fellows would agree to grant him the necessary grace for his M.A. degree. He became reader in rhetoric about 1576, and in 1578, on the occasion of Queen Elizabeth’s visit to Sir Thomas Smith at Audley End, he was appointed to dispute publicly before her. In the next year he wrote to Spenser complaining of the unauthorized publication of satirical verses of his which were supposed to reflect on high personages, and threatened seriously to injure Harvey’s career. In 1583 he became junior proctor of the university, and in 1585 he was elected master of Trinity Hall, of which he had been a fellow from 1578, but the appointment appears to have been quashed at court. He was a protégé of the Earl of Leicester, to whom he introduced Spenser, and this connexion may account for his friendship with Sir Philip Sidney. But in spite of patronage, a second application for the mastership of Trinity Hall failed in 1598. In 1585 he received the degree of D.C.L. from the university of Oxford, and is found practising at the bar in London. Gabriel’s brother, Richard, had taken part in the Marprelate controversy, and had given offence to Robert Greene by contemptuous references to him and his fellow wits. Greene retorted in his Quip for an Upstart Courtier with some scathing remarks on the Harveys, the worst of which were expunged in later editions, drawing attention among other things to Harvey’s modest parentage. In 1599 Archbishop Whitgift made a raid on contemporary satire in general, and among other books the tracts of Harvey and Nashe were destroyed, and it was forbidden to reprint them. Harvey spent the last years of his life in retirement at his native place, dying in 1630.

Harvey had a significant influence on Spenser for a brief period, and their friendship continued despite Spenser's genius refusing to conform to the new rules of poetry. Harvey represents the character Hobbinoll in his friend's *Shepheards Calender*, and he is given the lovely song in the fourth eclogue praising Eliza. If he truly wrote the verses "To the Learned Shepheard" signed "Hobynoll" that are prefixed to the *Faerie Queene*, then he was a talented poet who was ultimately unfulfilled. However, Harvey's genuine friendship for Spenser reveals a kinder side to his generally uncompromising and combative nature towards the world. In 1573, there was so much resentment against him at his college that it took three months for the fellows to agree to grant him the necessary approval for his M.A. degree. He became a reader in rhetoric around 1576, and in 1578, during Queen Elizabeth’s visit to Sir Thomas Smith at Audley End, he was chosen to publicly debate in front of her. The following year, he wrote to Spenser to complain about the unauthorized release of some of his satirical verses, which were thought to be aimed at prominent figures and could seriously damage Harvey's career. In 1583, he became junior proctor of the university, and in 1585, he was elected master of Trinity Hall, where he had been a fellow since 1578, but this appointment seems to have been canceled by the court. He was a supporter of the Earl of Leicester, to whom he introduced Spenser, which may explain his friendship with Sir Philip Sidney. However, even with this patronage, a second attempt to secure the master position at Trinity Hall failed in 1598. In 1585, he received the D.C.L. degree from the University of Oxford and was found practicing law in London. Gabriel's brother, Richard, was involved in the Marprelate controversy and had antagonized Robert Greene with disdainful comments about him and his fellow writers. Greene retaliated in his *Quip for an Upstart Courtier* with harsh remarks about the Harveys, some of which were removed in later editions, notably pointing out Harvey’s humble background. In 1599, Archbishop Whitgift launched an attack on contemporary satire, leading to the destruction of Harvey and Nashe's works, and it was prohibited to reprint them. Harvey spent his final years in seclusion in his hometown and passed away in 1630.

His extant Latin works are: Ciceronianus (1577); G. Harveii rhetor, sive 2 dierum oratio de natura, arte et exercitatione rhetorica (1577); Smithus, vel Musarum lachrymae (1578), in honour of Sir Thomas Smith; and G. Harveii gratulationum Valdensium libri quatuour (sic), written on the occasion of the queen’s visit to Audley End (1578). The Letter-Book of Gabriel Harvey, A.D. 1573-80 (1884, ed. E. J. L. Scott, Camden Society), contains rough drafts of the correspondence between Spenser and Harvey, letters relative to the disputes at Pembroke Hall, and an extraordinary correspondence dealing with the pursuit of his sister Mercy by a young nobleman. A copy of Quintilian (1542), in the British Museum, is extensively annotated by Gabriel Harvey. After Greene’s death Harvey published Foure Letters and certaine Sonnets (1592), in which in a spirit of righteous superiority he laid bare with spiteful fulness the miserable details of Greene’s later years. Thomas Nashe, who in power of invective and merciless wit was far superior to Harvey, took upon himself to avenge Greene’s memory, and at the same time settle his personal account with the Harveys, in Strange Newes (1593). Harvey refuted the personal charges made by Nashe in Pierce’s Supererogation, or a New Prayse Of the Old Asse ... (1593). In Christes Teares over Jerusalem (1593) Nashe made a full apology to Harvey, who refused to be appeased, and resumed what had become a very scurrilous controversy in a New Letter of Notable Contents (1593). Nashe thereupon withdrew his apology in a new edition (1594) of Christes Teares, and hearing that Harvey had boasted of victory he produced the most biting satire of the series in Have with you to Saffron Walden (1596). Harvey retorted in The Trimming of Thomas Nashe Gentleman, by the high-tituled patron Don Richardo de Medico campo ... (1597).

His existing Latin works include: Ciceronianus (1577); G. Harveii rhetor, sive 2 dierum oratio de natura, arte et exercitatione rhetorica (1577); Smithus, vel Musarum lachrymae (1578), honoring Sir Thomas Smith; and G. Harveii gratulationum Valdensium libri quatuour (sic), written for the queen’s visit to Audley End (1578). The Letter-Book of Gabriel Harvey, CE 1573-80 (1884, ed. E. J. L. Scott, Camden Society) contains rough drafts of the correspondence between Spenser and Harvey, letters about the disputes at Pembroke Hall, and a remarkable exchange regarding a young nobleman's pursuit of his sister Mercy. A copy of Quintilian (1542) in the British Museum is heavily annotated by Gabriel Harvey. After Greene’s death, Harvey published Foure Letters and certaine Sonnets (1592), where, with self-righteous superiority, he revealed the unfortunate details of Greene’s later life with spiteful detail. Thomas Nashe, who was far more powerful in invective and ruthless wit than Harvey, took it upon himself to defend Greene’s memory while also settling his personal score with the Harveys in Strange Newes (1593). Harvey countered the personal accusations made by Nashe in Pierce’s Supererogation, or a New Prayse Of the Old Asse ... (1593). In Christes Teares over Jerusalem (1593), Nashe issued a complete apology to Harvey, who refused to forgive him and continued what became a very scurrilous feud in a New Letter of Notable Contents (1593). Nashe then retracted his apology in a new edition (1594) of Christes Teares, and upon hearing that Harvey had claimed victory, he created the sharpest satire of the series in Have with you to Saffron Walden (1596). Harvey responded in The Trimming of Thomas Nashe Gentleman, by the high-tituled patron Don Richardo de Medico campo ... (1597).

His complete works were edited by Dr A. B. Grosart with a “Memorial Introduction” for the Huth Library (1884-1885). See also Isaac Disraeli, on “Literary Ridicule,” in Calamities of Authors (ed. 1840); T. Warton’s History of English Poetry (ed. W. C. Hazlitt, 1871); J. P. Collier’s Bibliographical and Critical Account of the Rarest Books in the English Language (1865), and the Works of Thomas Nashe.

His complete works were edited by Dr. A. B. Grosart with a “Memorial Introduction” for the Huth Library (1884-1885). See also Isaac Disraeli on “Literary Ridicule” in Calamities of Authors (ed. 1840); T. Warton’s History of English Poetry (ed. W. C. Hazlitt, 1871); J. P. Collier’s Bibliographical and Critical Account of the Rarest Books in the English Language (1865), and the Works of Thomas Nashe.


HARVEY, SIR GEORGE (1806-1876), Scottish painter, the son of a watchmaker, was born at St Ninians, near Stirling, in February 1806. Soon after his birth his parents removed to Stirling, where George was apprenticed to a bookseller. His love for art having, however, become very decided, in his eighteenth year he entered the Trustees’ Academy at Edinburgh. Here he so distinguished himself that in 1826 he was invited by the Scottish artists, who had resolved to found a Scottish academy, to join it as an associate. Harvey’s first picture, “A Village School,” was exhibited in 1826 at the Edinburgh Institution; and from the time of the opening of the Academy in the following year he continued annually to exhibit. His best-known pictures are those depicting historical episodes in religious history from a puritan or evangelical point of view, such as “Covenanters Preaching,” “Covenanters’ Communion,” “John Bunyan and his Blind Daughter,” “Sabbath Evening,” and the “Quitting of the Manse.” He was, however, equally popular in Scotland for subjects not directly religious; and “The Bowlers,” “A Highland Funeral,” “The Curlers,” “A Schule Skailin’,” and “Children Blowing Bubbles in the Churchyard of Greyfriars’, Edinburgh,” manifest the same close observation of character, artistic conception and conscientious elaboration of details. In “The Night Mail” and “Dawn Revealing the New World to Columbus” the aspects of nature are made use of in different ways, but with equal happiness, to lend impressiveness and solemnity to human concerns. He also painted landscapes and portraits. In 1829 he was elected a fellow of the Royal Scottish Academy; in 1864 he succeeded Sir J. W. Gordon as president; and he was knighted in 1867. He died at Edinburgh on the 22nd of January 1876.

HARVEY, SIR GEORGE (1806-1876), Scottish painter, the son of a watchmaker, was born in St Ninians, near Stirling, in February 1806. Shortly after his birth, his parents moved to Stirling, where George was apprenticed to a bookseller. However, his passion for art became very strong, and at eighteen, he joined the Trustees’ Academy in Edinburgh. He distinguished himself so well that in 1826, he was invited by Scottish artists, who aimed to establish a Scottish academy, to become an associate member. Harvey’s first painting, “A Village School,” was displayed in 1826 at the Edinburgh Institution; and from the opening of the Academy the following year, he continued to exhibit annually. His most recognized works are those portraying historical events in religious history from a puritan or evangelical perspective, such as “Covenanters Preaching,” “Covenanters’ Communion,” “John Bunyan and his Blind Daughter,” “Sabbath Evening,” and “Quitting of the Manse.” He was also popular in Scotland for non-religious subjects; pieces like “The Bowlers,” “A Highland Funeral,” “The Curlers,” “A Schule Skailin’,” and “Children Blowing Bubbles in the Churchyard of Greyfriars’, Edinburgh,” showcase his keen eye for character, artistic vision, and meticulous attention to detail. In “The Night Mail” and “Dawn Revealing the New World to Columbus,” he skillfully uses elements of nature in varying ways to enhance the significance and solemnity of human themes. He also created landscapes and portraits. In 1829, he was elected a fellow of the Royal Scottish Academy; in 1864, he succeeded Sir J. W. Gordon as president; and he was knighted in 1867. He passed away in Edinburgh on January 22, 1876.

Sir George Harvey was the author of a paper on the “Colour of the Atmosphere,” read before the Edinburgh Royal Society, and afterwards published with illustrations in Good Words; and in 1870 he published a small volume entitled Notes of the Early History of the Royal Scottish Academy. Selections from the Works of Sir George Harvey, P.R.S.A., described by the Rev. A. L. Simpson, F.S.A. Scot., and photographed by Thomas Annan, appeared at Edinburgh in 1869.

Sir George Harvey wrote a paper on the "Color of the Atmosphere," which he presented to the Edinburgh Royal Society and later published with illustrations in Good Words; in 1870, he released a small book called Notes of the Early History of the Royal Scottish Academy. Selections from the Works of Sir George Harvey, P.R.S.A., described by the Rev. A. L. Simpson, F.S.A. Scot., and photographed by Thomas Annan, which came out in Edinburgh in 1869.


HARVEY, WILLIAM (1578-1657), English physician, the discoverer of the circulation of the blood, was the eldest son of Thomas Harvey, a prosperous Kentish yeoman, and was born at Folkestone on the 1st of April 1578. After passing through the grammar school of Canterbury, on the 31st of May 1593, having just entered his sixteenth year, he became a pensioner of Caius College, Cambridge, at nineteen he took his B.A. degree, and soon after, having chosen the profession of medicine, he went to study at Padua under H. Fabricius and Julius Casserius. At the age of twenty-four Harvey became doctor of medicine, in April 1602. Returning to England in the first year of James I., he settled in London; and two years later he married the daughter of Dr Lancelot Browne, who had been physician to Queen Elizabeth. In the same year he became a candidate of the Royal College of Physicians, and was duly admitted a fellow (June 1607). In 1609 he obtained the reversion of the post of physician to St Bartholomew’s hospital. His application was supported by the king himself and by Dr Henry Atkins (1558-1635), the president of the college, and on the death of Dr Wilkinson in the course of the same year he succeeded to the post. He was thrice censor of the college, and in 1615 was appointed Lumleian lecturer.

HARVEY, WILLIAM (1578-1657), an English doctor who discovered blood circulation, was the oldest son of Thomas Harvey, a successful farmer from Kent. He was born in Folkestone on April 1, 1578. After attending the grammar school in Canterbury, he became a student at Caius College, Cambridge on May 31, 1593, just before turning sixteen. At nineteen, he earned his B.A. degree, and shortly after, he decided to pursue medicine, studying in Padua under H. Fabricius and Julius Casserius. By the age of twenty-four, Harvey became a doctor of medicine in April 1602. He returned to England in the first year of King James I, settling in London. Two years later, he married the daughter of Dr. Lancelot Browne, who had been a physician for Queen Elizabeth. That same year, he became a candidate at the Royal College of Physicians and was admitted as a fellow in June 1607. In 1609, he secured the position of physician at St Bartholomew’s Hospital. His appointment was backed by the king and Dr. Henry Atkins (1558-1635), the college president, and after Dr. Wilkinson passed away later that year, he took over the position. He served as censor of the college three times and was appointed Lumleian lecturer in 1615.

In 1616 he began his course of lectures, and first brought forward his views upon the movements of the heart and blood. Meantime his practice increased, and he had the lord chancellor, Francis Bacon, and the earl of Arundel among his patients. In 1618 he was appointed physician extraordinary to James I., and on the next vacancy physician in ordinary to his successor. In 1628, the year of the publication of the Exercitatio anatomica de motu cordis et sanguinis, he was elected treasurer of the College of Physicians, but at the end of the following year he resigned the office, in order, by command of Charles I., to accompany the young duke of Lennox (James Stuart, afterwards duke of Richmond) on his travels. He appears to have visited Italy, and returned in 1632. Four years later he accompanied the earl of Arundel on his embassy to the emperor Ferdinand II. He was eager in collecting objects of natural history, sometimes causing the earl anxiety for his safety by his excursions in a country infested by robbers in consequence of the Thirty Years’ War. In a letter written on this journey, he says: “By the 43 way we could scarce see a dogg, crow, kite, raven, or any bird, or anything to anatomise; only sum few miserable people, the reliques of the war and the plague, whom famine had made anatomies before I came.” Having returned to his practice in London at the close of the year 1636, he accompanied Charles I. in one of his journeys to Scotland (1639 or 1641). While at Edinburgh he visited the Bass Rock; he minutely describes its abundant population of sea-fowl in his treatise De generatione, and incidentally speaks of the account then credited of the solan goose growing on trees as a fable. He was in attendance on the king at the battle of Edgehill (October 1642), where he withdrew under a hedge with the prince of Wales and the duke of York (then boys of twelve and ten years old), “and took out of his pocket a book and read. But he had not read very long before a bullet of a great gun grazed on the ground near him, which made him remove his station,” as he afterwards told John Aubrey. After the indecisive battle, Harvey followed Charles I. to Oxford, “where,” writes the same gossiping narrator, “I first saw him, but was then too young to be acquainted with so great a doctor. I remember he came several times to our college (Trinity) to George Bathurst, B.D. who had a hen to hatch eggs in his chamber, which they opened daily to see the progress and way of generation.” In Oxford he remained three years, and there was some chance of his being superseded in his office at St Bartholomew’s hospital, “because he hath withdrawn himself from his charge, and is retired to the party in arms against the Parliament.” It was no doubt at this time that his lodgings at Whitehall were searched, and not only the furniture seized but also invaluable manuscripts and anatomical preparations.1

In 1616, he started giving lectures and first presented his ideas on how the heart and blood move. Meanwhile, his practice grew, and he treated prominent patients, including the Lord Chancellor, Francis Bacon, and the Earl of Arundel. In 1618, he was appointed as physician extraordinary to James I., and upon the next vacancy, he became the physician in ordinary to his successor. In 1628, the same year he published Exercitatio anatomica de motu cordis et sanguinis, he was elected treasurer of the College of Physicians, but he resigned the position the following year to accompany the young Duke of Lennox (James Stuart, who later became the Duke of Richmond) on his travels at the request of Charles I. He traveled to Italy and returned in 1632. Four years later, he joined the Earl of Arundel on his mission to Emperor Ferdinand II. He was enthusiastic about collecting natural history specimens, sometimes worrying the Earl with his adventures in a country plagued by robbers due to the Thirty Years’ War. In a letter from this journey, he wrote: “Along the way, we could barely see a dog, crow, kite, raven, or any bird, or anything to disassemble; only a few miserable people, the remnants of the war and the plague, whom famine had turned into corpses before I arrived.” After returning to his practice in London at the end of 1636, he traveled with Charles I. to Scotland (in 1639 or 1641). While in Edinburgh, he visited Bass Rock and detailed its vast population of seabirds in his treatise De generatione, casually dismissing as myth the tale that the solan goose grows on trees. He was with the king at the battle of Edgehill (October 1642), where he took shelter under a hedge with the prince of Wales and the duke of York (both boys then aged twelve and ten) and pulled out a book to read. However, he hadn’t read long before a cannonball skimmed the ground nearby, prompting him to change his spot,” as he later recounted to John Aubrey. After the inconclusive battle, Harvey followed Charles I. to Oxford, “where,” the same social commentator wrote, “I first saw him, but I was too young to understand such a great doctor. I remember he came to our college (Trinity) several times to see George Bathurst, B.D., who had a hen laying eggs in his room, which they opened daily to track the progress of generation.” He stayed in Oxford for three years, during which time there was a possibility he would be replaced at St Bartholomew’s Hospital, “because he has stepped away from his responsibilities and has joined the side opposing Parliament.” It was probably during this time that his lodgings at Whitehall were searched, resulting in not only his furniture being seized but also priceless manuscripts and anatomical preparations.1

While with the king at Oxford he was made warden of Merton College, but a year later, in 1646, that city surrendered to Fairfax, and Harvey returned to London. He was now sixty-eight years old, and, having resigned his appointments and relinquished the cares of practice, lived in learned retirement with one or other of his brothers. It was in his brother Daniel’s house at Combe that Dr (afterwards Sir George) Ent, a faithful friend and disciple (1604-1689), visited him in 1650. “I found him,” he says, “with a cheerful and sprightly countenance investigating, like Democritus, the nature of things. Asking if all were well with him—‘How can that be,’ he replied, ‘when the state is so agitated with storms and I myself am yet in the open sea? And indeed, were not my mind solaced by my studies and the recollection of the observations I have formerly made, there is nothing which should make me desirous of a longer continuance. But thus employed, this obscure life and vacation from public cares which would disgust other minds is the medicine of mine.’” The work on which he had been chiefly engaged at Oxford, and indeed since the publication of his treatise on the circulation in 1628, was an investigation into the recondite but deeply interesting subject of generation. Charles I. had been an enlightened patron of Harvey’s studies, had put the royal deer parks at Windsor and Hampton Court at his disposal, and had watched his demonstration of the growth of the chick with no less interest than the movements of the living heart. Harvey had now collected a large number of observations, though he would probably have delayed their publication. But Ent succeeded in obtaining the manuscripts, with authority to print them or not as he should find them. “I went from him,” he says, “like another Jason in possession of the golden fleece, and when I came home and perused the pieces singly, I was amazed that so vast a treasure should have been so long hidden.” The result was the publication of the Exercitationes de generatione (1651).

While with the king at Oxford, he was appointed warden of Merton College, but a year later, in 1646, the city surrendered to Fairfax, and Harvey returned to London. He was now sixty-eight years old and, having resigned his posts and given up the demands of practice, lived a scholarly life with one or another of his brothers. It was at his brother Daniel’s house in Combe that Dr (later Sir George) Ent, a loyal friend and student (1604-1689), visited him in 1650. “I found him,” he says, “with a happy and lively expression, exploring, like Democritus, the nature of things. When I asked if all was well with him—‘How can that be,’ he replied, ‘when the state is so troubled by storms and I myself am still in open waters? And truly, if my mind weren’t eased by my studies and the memories of my past observations, there would be nothing to make me want to live longer. But engaged in this way, this quiet life and break from public duties, which would dishearten others, is the remedy for me.’” The work he had mainly focused on at Oxford, and since the publication of his treatise on circulation in 1628, was an exploration into the complex yet fascinating topic of generation. Charles I had been a progressive supporter of Harvey’s research, had made the royal deer parks at Windsor and Hampton Court available to him, and had watched his demonstration of chick development with as much interest as the movements of the living heart. Harvey had gathered a significant amount of observations, but he probably would have postponed their publication. However, Ent managed to get hold of the manuscripts, with the authority to publish them or not based on his assessment. “I left him,” he says, “like another Jason with the golden fleece, and when I got home and read the pieces one by one, I was astonished that such a vast treasure had been hidden for so long.” This led to the publication of the Exercitationes de generatione (1651).

This was the last of Harvey’s labours. He had now reached his seventy-third year. His theory of the circulation had been opposed and defended, and was now generally accepted by the most eminent anatomists both in his own country and abroad. He was known and honoured throughout Europe, and his own college (Caius) voted a statue in his honour (1652) viro monumentis suis immortali. In 1654 he was elected to the highest post in his profession, that of president of the college; but the following day he met the assembled fellows, and, declining the honour for himself on account of the infirmities of age, recommended the re-election of the late president Dr Francis Prujean (1593-1666). He accepted, however, the office of consiliarius, which he again held in the two following years. He had already enriched the college with other gifts besides the honour of his name. He had raised for them “a noble building of Roman architecture (rustic work with Corinthian pilasters), comprising a great parlour or conversation room below and a library above”; he had furnished the library with books, and filled the museum with “simples and rarities,” as well as with specimens of instruments used in the surgical and obstetric branches of medicine. At last he determined to give to his beloved college his paternal estate at Burmarsh in Kent. His wife had died some years before, his brothers were wealthy men, and he was childless, so that he was defrauding no heir when, in July 1656, he made the transfer of this property, then valued at £56 per annum, with provision for a salary to the college librarian and for the endowment of an annual oration, which is still given on the anniversary of the day. The orator, so Harvey orders in his deed of gift, is to exhort the fellows of the college “to search out and study the secrets of nature by way of experiment, and also for the honour of the profession to continue mutual love and affection among themselves.”

This was the last of Harvey's efforts. He had now reached his seventy-third year. His theory about circulation had been challenged and defended and was now widely accepted by the most respected anatomists both in his country and abroad. He was known and honored throughout Europe, and his own college (Caius) voted to erect a statue in his honor (1652) viro monumentis suis immortali. In 1654, he was elected to the highest position in his profession, that of president of the college; but the following day, he met with the assembled fellows and, declining the honor for himself due to the frailties of old age, recommended the re-election of the former president Dr. Francis Prujean (1593-1666). However, he accepted the position of consiliarius, which he held again for the next two years. He had already enriched the college with other contributions beyond the honor of his name. He had constructed for them “a noble building of Roman architecture (rustic work with Corinthian pilasters), featuring a large parlor or conversation room below and a library above”; he had stocked the library with books and filled the museum with “simples and rarities,” as well as specimens of instruments used in surgical and obstetric medicine. Finally, he decided to bequeath his beloved college his estate in Burmarsh, Kent. His wife had passed away years earlier, his brothers were affluent, and he had no children, so he wasn't denying any heir when, in July 1656, he transferred this property, then valued at £56 per year, along with provisions for a salary for the college librarian and an endowment for an annual oration that is still delivered on the anniversary of that day. The orator, as Harvey specified in his deed of gift, is to encourage the fellows of the college “to explore and study the secrets of nature through experimentation, and also to uphold mutual love and affection among themselves for the honor of the profession.”

Harvey, like his contemporary and great successor Thomas Sydenham, was long afflicted with gout, but he preserved his activity of mind to an advanced age. In his eightieth year, on the 3rd of June 1657, he was attacked by paralysis, and though deprived of speech was able to send for his nephews and distribute his watch, ring, and other personal trinkets among them. He died the same evening, “the palsy giving him an easy passport,” and was buried with great honour in his brother Eliab’s vault at Hempstead in Essex, annorum et famae satur. In 1883 the lead coffin containing his remains was enclosed in a marble sarcophagus and moved to the Harvey chapel within the church.

Harvey, like his contemporary and great successor Thomas Sydenham, suffered from gout for a long time, but he kept his mind active well into old age. In his eightieth year, on June 3, 1657, he suffered a paralysis attack, and although he lost his ability to speak, he managed to call for his nephews and give them his watch, ring, and other personal items. He passed away that same evening, "the palsy giving him an easy passport," and was buried with great honor in his brother Eliab’s vault at Hempstead in Essex, annorum et famae satur. In 1883, the lead coffin containing his remains was placed inside a marble sarcophagus and relocated to the Harvey chapel within the church.

John Aubrey, to whom we owe most of the minor particulars about Harvey which have been preserved, says: “In person he was not tall, but of the lowest stature, round faced, olivaster complexion, little eyes, round, very black, full of spirits; his hair black as a raven, but quite white twenty years before he died.” The best portrait of him extant is by Cornelius Jansen in the library of the College of Physicians, one of those rescued from the great fire, which destroyed their original hall in 1666. It has been often engraved, and is prefixed to the fine edition of his works published in 1766.

John Aubrey, to whom we owe most of the minor details about Harvey that have been preserved, says: “In person, he wasn’t tall, but of the shortest stature, with a round face, olive-colored skin, small, very black eyes, full of energy; his hair was as black as a raven, but completely white twenty years before he died.” The best existing portrait of him is by Cornelius Jansen, located in the library of the College of Physicians, one of those saved from the great fire that destroyed their original hall in 1666. It has been frequently reproduced and is featured in the fine edition of his works published in 1766.

Harvey’s Work on the Circulation.—In estimating the character and value of the discovery announced in the Exercitatio de motu cordis et sanguinis, it is necessary to bear in mind the previous state of knowledge on the subject. Aristotle taught that in man and the higher animals the blood was elaborated from the food in the liver, thence carried to the heart, and sent by it through the veins over the body. His successors of the Alexandrian school of medicine, Erasistratus and Herophilus, further elaborated his system, and taught that, while the veins carried blood from the heart to the members, the arteries carried a subtle kind of air or spirit. For the practical physician only two changes had been made in this theory of the circulation between the Christian era and the 16th century. Galen had discovered that the arteries were not, as their name implies, merely air-pipes, but that they contained blood as well as vital air or spirit. And it had been gradually ascertained that the nerves (νεῦρα) which 44 arose from the brain and conveyed “animal spirits” to the body were different from the tendons or sinews (νεῦρα) which attach muscles to bones. First, then, the physicians of the time of Thomas Linacre knew that the blood is not stagnant in the body. So did Shakespeare and Homer, and every augur who inspected the entrails of a victim, and every village barber who breathed a vein. Plato even uses the expression to τὸ αἷμα κατὰ πάντα τὰ μέλη σφοδρῶς περιφέρεσθαι. But no one had a conception of a continuous stream returning to its source (a circulation in the true sense of the word) either in the system or in the lungs. If they used the word circulatio, as did Caesalpinus,2 it was as vaguely as the French policeman cries “Circulez.” The movements of the blood were in fact thought to be slow and irregular in direction as well as in speed, like the “circulation” of air in a house, or the circulation of a crowd in the streets of a city. Secondly, they supposed that one kind of blood flowed from the liver to the right ventricle of the heart, and thence to the lungs and the general system by the veins, and that another kind flowed from the left ventricle to the lungs and general system by the arteries. Thirdly, they supposed that the septum of the heart was pervious and allowed blood to pass directly from the right to the left side. Fourthly, they had no conception of the functions of the heart as the motor power of the movement of the blood. They doubted whether its substance was muscular; they supposed its pulsation to be due to expansion of the spirits it contained; they believed the only dynamic effect which it had on the blood to be sucking it in during its active diastole, and they supposed the chief use of its constant movements to be the due mixture of blood and spirits.

Harvey’s Work on the Circulation.—To evaluate the significance and impact of the discovery introduced in the Exercitatio de motu cordis et sanguinis, it's essential to understand the previous knowledge on the topic. Aristotle believed that in humans and higher animals, blood was produced from food in the liver, then transported to the heart, which pumped it through the veins to the rest of the body. His successors at the Alexandrian school of medicine, Erasistratus and Herophilus, built on his ideas, teaching that while veins carried blood from the heart to the body parts, arteries transported a fine type of air or spirit. For a practicing physician, only two significant changes had occurred in the understanding of circulation from the time of Christ to the 16th century. Galen discovered that arteries were not merely air tubes, as their name suggests, but also carried blood along with vital air or spirit. Additionally, it was gradually confirmed that the nerves (nerves) which originated from the brain and transmitted “animal spirits” to the body were distinct from the tendons or sinews (nerves) that attached muscles to bones. Firstly, the physicians of Thomas Linacre's era recognized that blood does not stagnate in the body. This was also known to Shakespeare, Homer, every augur inspecting a victim's entrails, and every village barber bleeding a vein. Plato even used the phrase to The blood flows violently through all the limbs.. However, no one understood the concept of a continuous stream returning to its source (a true circulation) within the body or lungs. If they mentioned the term circulatio, as did Caesalpinus, it was as vaguely as a French policeman saying “Circulez.” The movements of blood were actually believed to be slow and erratic both in direction and speed, akin to the “circulation” of air in a house or crowds in a city street. Secondly, it was thought that one type of blood traveled from the liver to the heart's right ventricle, then to the lungs and the overall system via the veins, while another type moved from the left ventricle to the lungs and body through the arteries. Thirdly, they assumed that the septum of the heart was permeable, allowing blood to flow directly from the right side to the left. Fourthly, they had no understanding of the heart's role as the driving force behind blood movement. They questioned whether its structure was muscular; they believed its pulsations resulted from the expansion of the spirits it contained; they thought the primary effect it had on blood was drawing it in during its active diastole, and they believed the main purpose of its constant movements was to properly mix blood and spirits.

Of the great anatomists of the 16th century, Sylvius (In Hipp. et Gal. phys. partem anatom. isagoge) described the valves of the veins; Vesalius (De humani corporis fabrica, 1542) ascertained that the septum between the right and left ventricles is complete, though he could not bring himself to deny the invisible pores which Galen’s system demanded. Servetus, in his Christianismi restitutio (1553), goes somewhat farther than his fellow-student Vesalius, and says: “Paries ille medius non est aptus ad communicationem et elaborationem illam; licet aliquid resudare possit”; and, from this anatomical fact and the large size of the pulmonary arteries he concludes that there is a communication in the lungs by which blood passes from the pulmonary artery to the pulmonary vein: “Eodem artificio quo in hepate fit transfusio a vena porta ad venam cavam propter sanguinem, fit etiam in pulmone transfusio a vena arteriosa ad arteriam venosam propter spiritum.” The natural spirit of the left side and the vital spirit of the right side of the heart were therefore, he concluded, practically the same, and hence two instead of three distinct spiritus should be admitted. It seems doubtful whether even Servetus rightly conceived of the entire mass of the blood passing through the pulmonary artery and the lungs. The transference of the spiritus naturalis to the lungs, and its return to the left ventricle as spiritus vitalis, was the function which he regarded as important. Indeed a true conception of the lesser circulation as a transference of the whole blood of the right side to the left was impossible until the corresponding transference in the greater or systematic circulation was discovered. Servetus, however, was the true predecessor of Harvey in physiology, and his claims to that honour are perfectly authentic and universally admitted.3

Of the notable anatomists of the 16th century, Sylvius (In Hipp. et Gal. phys. partem anatom. isagoge) described the valves of the veins; Vesalius (De humani corporis fabrica, 1542) confirmed that the septum between the right and left ventricles is complete, although he couldn’t bring himself to deny the invisible pores that Galen’s system required. Servetus, in his Christianismi restitutio (1553), went a bit further than his fellow student Vesalius and stated: “The middle wall is not suitable for that communication and elaboration; although something may flow through.” From this anatomical fact and the large size of the pulmonary arteries, he concluded that there is a connection in the lungs that allows blood to flow from the pulmonary artery to the pulmonary vein: “In the same way that transfusion occurs in the liver from the portal vein to the cava vein because of blood, it also occurs in the lung from the arterial vein to the venous artery because of spirit.” He thus concluded that the natural spirit of the left side and the vital spirit of the right side of the heart are practically the same, which means we should recognize two instead of three distinct spiritus. It seems questionable whether even Servetus fully understood that the entire volume of blood flowed through the pulmonary artery and the lungs. He considered the transfer of the spiritus naturalis to the lungs and its return to the left ventricle as spiritus vitalis to be significant. In fact, a true understanding of the lesser circulation as a transfer of all the blood from the right side to the left wasn’t possible until the corresponding transfer in the greater or systemic circulation was discovered. Nevertheless, Servetus was truly the forerunner of Harvey in physiology, and his claim to that honor is well-recognized and widely accepted.3

The way then to Harvey’s great work had been paved by the discovery of the valves in the veins, and by that of the lesser circulation—the former due to Sylvius and Fabricius, the latter to Servetus—but the significance of the valves was unsuspected and the fact of even the pulmonary circulation was not generally admitted in its full meaning.

The path to Harvey’s major contributions was laid by the discovery of valves in the veins and the lesser circulation—credit for the former goes to Sylvius and Fabricius, while Servetus is recognized for the latter—but the importance of the valves was not understood, and the concept of pulmonary circulation was not widely accepted in its entirety.

In his treatise Harvey proves (1) that it is the contraction, not the dilatation, of the heart which coincides with the pulse, and that the ventricles as true muscular sacs squeeze the blood which they contain into the aorta and pulmonary artery; (2) that the pulse is not produced by the arteries enlarging and so filling, but by the arteries being filled with blood and so enlarging; (3) that there are no pores in the septum of the heart, so that the whole blood in the right ventricle is sent to the lungs and round by the pulmonary veins to the left ventricle, and also that the whole blood in the left ventricle is again sent into the arteries, round by the smaller veins into the venae cavae, and by them to the right ventricle again—thus making a complete “circulation”; (4) that the blood in the arteries and that in the veins is the same blood; (5) that the action of the right and left sides of the heart, auricles, ventricles and valves, is the same, the mechanism in both being for reception and propulsion of liquid and not of air, since the blood on the right side, though mixed with air, is still blood; (6) that the blood sent through the arteries to the tissues is not all used, but that most of it runs through into the veins; (7) that there is no to and fro undulation in the veins, but a constant stream from the distant parts towards the heart; (8) that the dynamical starting-point of the blood is the heart and not the liver.

In his treatise, Harvey shows (1) that it's the contraction, not the expansion, of the heart that lines up with the pulse, and that the ventricles act as true muscular sacs that push the blood they hold into the aorta and pulmonary artery; (2) that the pulse isn't created by the arteries swelling and filling up, but rather by the arteries getting filled with blood and then expanding; (3) that there are no openings in the septum of the heart, so that all the blood in the right ventricle goes to the lungs and back through the pulmonary veins to the left ventricle, and also that all the blood in the left ventricle is sent into the arteries and then flows through the smaller veins into the venae cavae, returning to the right ventricle—thus completing a full "circulation"; (4) that the blood in the arteries and that in the veins is the same blood; (5) that the functions of the right and left sides of the heart, the atria, ventricles, and valves, are the same—both operate for receiving and pushing liquid, not air, since the blood on the right side, even when mixed with air, is still blood; (6) that the blood sent through the arteries to the tissues isn't all utilized, but most of it flows through into the veins; (7) that there's no back-and-forth movement in the veins, but a steady flow from far-off areas toward the heart; (8) that the main source of the blood's movement is the heart, not the liver.

The method by which Harvey arrived at his complete and almost faultless solution of the most fundamental and difficult problem in physiology has been often discussed, and is well worthy of attention. He begins his treatise by pointing out the many inconsistencies and defects in the Galenical theory, quoting the writings of Galen himself, of Fabricius, Columbus and others, with great respect, but with unflinching criticism. For, in his own noble language, wise men must learn anatomy, not from the decrees of philosophers, but from the fabric of nature herself, “nec ita in verba jurare antiquitatis magistrae, ut veritatem amicam in apertis relinquant, et in conspectu omnium deserant.” He had, as we know, not only furnished himself with all the knowledge that books and the instructions of the best anatomists of Italy could give, but, by a long series of dissections, had gained a far more complete knowledge of the comparative anatomy of the heart and vessels than any contemporary—we may almost say than any successor—until the times of John Hunter and J. F. Meckel. Thus equipped, he tells us that he began his investigations into the movements of the heart and blood by looking at them—i.e. by seeing their action in living animals. After a modest preface, he heads his first chapter 45 “Ex vivorum dissectione, qualis sit cordis motus.” He minutely describes what he saw and handled in dogs, pigs, serpents, frogs and fishes, and even in slugs, oysters, lobsters and insects, in the transparent minima squilla, “quae Anglice dicitur a shrimp,” and lastly in the chick while still in the shell. In these investigations he used a perspicillum or simple lens. He particularly describes his observations and experiments on the ventricles, the auricles, the arteries and the veins. He shows how the arrangement of the vessels in the foetus supports his theory. He adduces facts observed in disease as well as in health to prove the rapidity of the circulation. He explains how the mechanism of the valves in the veins is adapted, not, as Fabricius believed, to moderate the flow of blood from the heart, but to favour its flow to the heart. He estimates the capacity of each ventricle, and reckons the rate at which the whole mass of blood passes through it. He elaborately and clearly demonstrates the effect of obstruction of the blood-stream in arteries or in veins, by the forceps in the case of a snake, by a ligature on the arm of a man, and illustrates his argument by figures. He then sums up his conclusion thus: “Circulari quodam motu, in circuitu, agitari in animalibus sanguinem, et esse in perpetuo motu; et hanc esse actionem sive functionem cordis quam pulsu peragit; et omnino motus et pulsus cordis causam unam esse.” Lastly, in the 15th, 16th and 17th chapters, he adds certain confirmatory evidence, as the effect of position on the circulation, the absorption of animal poisons and of medicines applied externally, the muscular structure of the heart and the necessary working of its valves. The whole treatise, which occupies only 67 pages of large print in the quarto edition of 1766, is a model of accurate observation, patient accumulation of facts, ingenious experimentation, bold yet cautious hypothesis and logical deduction.

The method Harvey used to reach his complete and nearly flawless solution to one of the most fundamental and challenging problems in physiology has often been discussed and deserves attention. He starts his treatise by highlighting the many inconsistencies and flaws in the Galenical theory, respectfully quoting the works of Galen, Fabricius, Columbus, and others, while maintaining strong criticism. In his own commendable words, wise individuals should learn anatomy not from the opinions of philosophers, but from the natural world itself, “nec ita in verba jurare antiquitatis magistrae, ut veritatem amicam in apertis relinquant, et in conspectu omnium deserant.” He not only acquired all the knowledge that books and the teachings of Italy's best anatomists could offer, but through a long series of dissections, gained a much deeper understanding of comparative anatomy of the heart and vessels than any contemporary—almost any successor—until the times of John Hunter and J. F. Meckel. Armed with this knowledge, he states that he began investigating the movements of the heart and blood by observing them—i.e. by witnessing their actions in living animals. After a modest introduction, he titles his first chapter 45 “Ex vivorum dissectione, qualis sit cordis motus.” He meticulously describes what he observed and handled in dogs, pigs, snakes, frogs, and fish, as well as in slugs, oysters, lobsters, and insects, in the transparent minima squilla, “which is called a shrimp” in English, and finally in a chick still in its shell. Throughout these investigations, he used a perspicillum or simple lens. He specifically details his observations and experiments on the ventricles, auricles, arteries, and veins. He demonstrates how the arrangement of vessels in the fetus supports his theory. He cites facts observed in both disease and health to prove the speed of circulation. He explains how the mechanism of the valves in the veins is designed, not—as Fabricius believed—to slow the flow of blood from the heart, but to facilitate its flow towards the heart. He estimates the capacity of each ventricle and calculates the rate at which the entire blood volume passes through it. He thoroughly and clearly demonstrates the impact of obstacles in the blood flow in arteries or veins, using forceps on a snake and a ligature on a man's arm, and supports his argument with illustrations. He then summarizes his conclusion: “Blood circulates in animals in a circular motion and is in constant motion; and this is the action or function of the heart carried out by its pulse; and in fact, the movement and pulse of the heart are one and the same cause.” Finally, in chapters 15, 16, and 17, he provides additional supporting evidence, such as the effect of position on circulation, the absorption of animal poisons and externally applied medicines, the muscular structure of the heart, and the necessary functioning of its valves. The entire treatise, which takes up only 67 pages of large print in the 1766 quarto edition, is a model of precise observation, careful accumulation of facts, clever experimentation, bold yet cautious hypotheses, and logical reasoning.

In one point only was the demonstration of the circulation incomplete. Harvey could not discover the capillary channels by which the blood passes from the arteries to the veins. This gap in the circulation was supplied several years later by the great anatomist Marcello Malpighi, who in 1661 saw in the lungs of a frog, by the newly invented microscope, how the blood passes from the one set of vessels to the other. Harvey saw all that could be seen by the unaided eye in his observations on living animals; Malpighi, four years after Harvey’s death, by another observation on a living animal, completed the splendid chain of evidence. If this detracts from Harvey’s merit it leaves Servetus no merit at all. But in fact the existence of the channels first seen by Malpighi was as clearly pointed to by Harvey’s reasoning as the existence of Neptune by the calculations of Leverrier and of Adams.

In one aspect, the demonstration of circulation was incomplete. Harvey couldn't identify the tiny vessels through which blood flows from the arteries to the veins. This gap in understanding was filled several years later by the great anatomist Marcello Malpighi, who, in 1661, used the newly invented microscope to observe how blood moves between two sets of vessels in the lungs of a frog. Harvey had seen everything that could be observed with the naked eye in his studies of living animals; Malpighi, four years after Harvey’s death, completed the impressive chain of evidence through his own observations on a living animal. If this reduces Harvey’s achievements, it leaves no merit for Servetus. However, the existence of the channels first observed by Malpighi was as clearly indicated by Harvey’s reasoning as the existence of Neptune was by the calculations of Leverrier and Adams.

Harvey himself and all his contemporaries were well aware of the novelty and importance of his theory. He says in the admirable letter to Dr Argent, president of the College of Physicians, which follows the dedication of his treatise to Charles I., that he should not have ventured to publish “a book which alone asserts that the blood pursues its course and flows back again by a new path, contrary to the received doctrine taught so many ages by innumerable learned and illustrious men,” if he had not set forth his theory for more than nine years in his college lectures, gradually brought it to perfection, and convinced his colleagues by actual demonstrations of the truth of what he advanced. He anticipates opposition, and even obloquy or loss, from the novelty of his views. These anticipations, however, the event proved to have been groundless. If we are to credit Aubrey indeed, he found that after the publication of the De motu “he fell mightily in his practice; ’twas believed by the vulgar that he was crackbrained, and all the physicians were against him.” But the last assertion is demonstrably untrue; and if apothecaries and patients ever forsook him, they must soon have returned, for Harvey left a handsome fortune. By his own profession the book was received as it deserved. So novel a doctrine was not to be accepted without due inquiry, but his colleagues had heard his lectures and seen his demonstrations for years; they were already convinced of the truth of his theory, urged its publication, continued him in his lectureship, and paid him every honour in their power. In other countries the book was widely read and much canvassed. Few accepted the new theory; but no one dreamt of claiming the honour of it for himself, nor for several years did any one pretend that it could be found in the works of previous authors. The first attack on it was a feeble tract by one James Primerose, a pupil of Jean Riolan (Exerc. et animadv. in libr. Harvei de motu cord. et sang., 1630). Five years later Parisanus, an Italian physician, published his Lapis Lydius de motu cord. et sang. (Venice, 1635), a still more bulky and futile performance. Primerose’s attacks were “imbellia pleraque” and “sine ictu”; that of Parisanus “in quamplurimis turpius,” according to the contemporary judgment of Johann Vessling. Their dulness has protected them from further censure. Caspar Hoffmann, professor at Nuremberg, while admitting the truth of the lesser circulation in the full Harveian sense, denied the rest of the new doctrine. To him the English anatomist replied in a short letter, still extant, with great consideration yet with modest dignity, beseeching him to convince himself by actual inspection of the truth of the facts in question. He concludes: “I accept your censure in the candid and friendly spirit in which you say you wrote it; do you also the same to me, now that I have answered you in the same spirit.” This letter is dated May 1636, and in that year Harvey passed through Nuremberg with the earl of Arundel, and visited Hoffmann. But he failed to convince him; “nec tamen valuit Harveius vel coram,” writes P. M. Schlegel, who, however, afterwards succeeded in persuading the obstinate old Galenist to soften his opposition to the new doctrine, and thinks that his complete conversion might have been effected if he had but lived a little longer—“nec dubito quin concessisset tandem in nostra castra.” While in Italy the following year Harvey visited his old university of Padua, and demonstrated his views to Professor Vessling. A few months later this excellent anatomist wrote him a courteous and sensible letter, with certain objections to the new theory. The answer to this has not been preserved, but it convinced his candid opponent, who admitted the truth of the circulation in a second letter (both were published in 1640), and afterwards told a friend, “Harveium nostrum si audis, agnosces coelestem sanguinis et spiritus ingressum ex arteriis per venas in dextrum cordis sinum.” Meanwhile a greater convert, R. Descartes, in his Discours sur la méthode (1637) had announced his adhesion to the new doctrine, and refers to “the English physician to whom belongs the honour of having first shown that the course of the blood in the body is nothing less than a kind of perpetual movement in a circle.” J. Walaeus of Leyden, H. Regius of Utrecht and Schlegel of Hamburg successively adopted the new physiology. Of these professors, Regius was mauled by the pertinacious Primerose and mauled him in return (Spongia qua eluuntur sordes quae Jac. Primirosius, &c., and Antidotum adv. Spongiam venenatam Henr. Regii). Descartes afterwards repeated Harvey’s vivisections, and, more convinced than ever, demolished Professor V. F. Plempius of Louvain, who had written on the other side. George Ent also published an Apologia pro circulatione sanguinis in answer to Parisanus.

Harvey and his peers recognized the uniqueness and significance of his theory. In a remarkable letter to Dr. Argent, the president of the College of Physicians, following the dedication of his work to Charles I, he stated that he wouldn’t have dared to publish “a book that alone claims that blood follows its path and flows back by a new route, contrary to the established doctrine taught for so many ages by countless learned and distinguished men,” if he hadn't presented his theory over nine years in his college lectures, perfected it gradually, and convinced his colleagues through actual demonstrations of its truth. He anticipated criticism and even backlash due to the novelty of his ideas. However, as events showed, those worries were unfounded. If we believe Aubrey, he found that after the publication of the De motu, “his practice declined significantly; the public thought he was insane, and all the physicians were against him.” But this claim is demonstrably false; if apothecaries and patients ever abandoned him, they must have quickly returned, as Harvey left behind a considerable fortune. By his peers, the book was received as it deserved. Such a groundbreaking doctrine couldn’t be accepted without thorough investigation, but his colleagues had attended his lectures and witnessed his demonstrations for years; they were already convinced of his theory's truth, encouraged its publication, retained him in his lectureship, and honored him in every way possible. In other countries, the book was widely read and debated. Few accepted the new theory, but no one thought to claim the credit for it or pretended that it was found in earlier works for several years. The first attack on it was a weak pamphlet by James Primerose, a student of Jean Riolan (Exerc. et animadv. in libr. Harvei de motu cord. et sang., 1630). Five years later, the Italian physician Parisanus published his Lapis Lydius de motu cord. et sang. (Venice, 1635), an even larger and more pointless work. Primerose’s criticism was “mostly weak” and “lacking impact”; Parisanus’s was “even more disgraceful in many respects,” according to contemporary judgment from Johann Vessling. Their dullness has shielded them from further criticism. Caspar Hoffmann, a professor in Nuremberg, while acknowledging the truth of the smaller circulation in the complete Harveian sense, denied the rest of the new doctrine. To him, the English anatomist responded in a still-existing brief letter, showing great thoughtfulness yet modest dignity, urging him to confirm the facts through personal investigation. He concluded: “I accept your criticism in the frank and friendly spirit in which you say you wrote it; I ask that you do the same for me, now that I have responded to you in kind.” This letter is dated May 1636, and that year, Harvey passed through Nuremberg with the Earl of Arundel and visited Hoffmann. However, he failed to persuade him; “yet Harvey could not succeed even in person,” writes P. M. Schlegel, who later managed to convince the stubborn old Galenist to ease his opposition to the new doctrine and believes that complete conversion could have happened if he had lived a little longer—“I have no doubt he would eventually have joined our camp.” While in Italy the following year, Harvey went to his old university of Padua and demonstrated his ideas to Professor Vessling. A few months later, this excellent anatomist wrote him a polite and sensible letter with certain objections to the new theory. The response to this has not been preserved, but it convinced his open-minded opponent, who acknowledged the truth of circulation in a second letter (both were published in 1640), and later told a friend, “If you listen to our Harvey, you will recognize the celestial entrance of blood and spirit from arteries into the right heart’s chamber.” Meanwhile, a more significant convert, R. Descartes, in his Discours sur la méthode (1637), announced his support for the new theory and referred to “the English physician who deserves the credit for first showing that blood circulation in the body is essentially a kind of perpetual movement in a circle.” J. Walaeus of Leyden, H. Regius of Utrecht, and Schlegel of Hamburg subsequently adopted the new physiology. Among these professors, Regius was relentlessly criticized by the persistent Primerose and responded in kind (Spongia qua eluuntur sordes quae Jac. Primirosius, & etc., and Antidotum adv. Spongiam venenatam Henr. Regii). Descartes later repeated Harvey’s vivisections and, now more convinced than ever, refuted Professor V. F. Plempius of Louvain, who had written against them. George Ent also published an Apologia pro circulatione sanguinis in response to Parisanus.

At last Jean Riolan ventured to publish his Enchiridium anatomicum (1648), in which he attacks Harvey’s theory, and proposes one of his own. Riolan had accompanied the queen dowager of France (Maria de’ Medici) on a visit to her daughter at Whitehall, and had there met Harvey and discussed his theory. He was, in the opinion of the judicious Haller, “vir asper et in nuperos suosque coaevos immitis ac nemini parcens, nimis avidus suarum laudum praeco, et se ipso fatente anatomicorum princeps.” Harvey replied to the Enchiridium with perfectly courteous language and perfectly conclusive arguments, in two letters De circulatione sanguinis, which were published at Cambridge in 1649, and are still well worth reading. He speaks here of the “circuitus sanguinis a me inventus.” Riolan was unconvinced, but lived to see another professor of anatomy appointed in his own university who taught Harvey’s doctrines. Even in Italy, Trullius, professor of anatomy at Rome, expounded the new doctrine in 1651. But the most illustrious converts were Jean Pecquet of Dieppe, the discoverer of the thoracic duct, and of the true course of the lacteal vessels, and Thomas Bartholinus of Copenhagen, in his Anatome ex omnium veterum recentiorumque observationibus, imprimis institutionibus beati mei parentis Caspari Bartholini, ad circulationem Harveianam et vasa lymphatica renovata (Leiden, 1651). At last Plempius also retracted all his objections; for, as he candidly stated, “having opened the bodies of a few living dogs, I find that all Harvey’s statements are perfectly true.” Hobbes of Malmesbury could thus say in the preface to his Elementa philosophiae that his friend Harvey, “solus quod sciam, doctrinam novam superata invidia vivens stabilivit.”

At last, Jean Riolan decided to publish his Enchiridium anatomicum (1648), in which he criticizes Harvey’s theory and proposes his own. Riolan had traveled with the queen dowager of France (Maria de’ Medici) to visit her daughter at Whitehall, where he met Harvey and discussed his theory. In the view of the discerning Haller, he was “a harsh man, ruthless to his contemporaries, unwilling to spare anyone, too eager to praise himself as the leading anatomist.” Harvey responded to the Enchiridium with polite language and solid arguments in two letters titled De circulatione sanguinis, published in Cambridge in 1649, which are still worth reading today. He refers to the “circuitus sanguinis a me inventus.” Riolan remained unconvinced but lived to see another professor of anatomy appointed at his own university who taught Harvey’s ideas. Even in Italy, Trullius, a professor of anatomy in Rome, explained the new doctrine in 1651. However, the most notable converts were Jean Pecquet from Dieppe, who discovered the thoracic duct and the correct path of the lacteal vessels, and Thomas Bartholinus from Copenhagen, in his Anatome ex omnium veterum recentiorumque observationibus, imprimis institutionibus beati mei parentis Caspari Bartholini, ad circulationem Harveianam et vasa lymphatica renovata (Leiden, 1651). Eventually, Plempius also withdrew all his objections; as he honestly stated, “after examining the bodies of a few living dogs, I find that all of Harvey’s claims are perfectly true.” Hobbes of Malmesbury could therefore write in the preface to his Elementa philosophiae that his friend Harvey, “the only one I know of, established a new doctrine while living, overcoming envy.”

It has been made a reproach to Harvey that he failed to appreciate the importance of the discoveries of the lacteal and lymphatic vessels by G. Aselli, J. Pecquet and C. Bartholinus. In three letters on the subject, one to Dr R. Morison of Paris (1652) and two to Dr Horst of Darmstadt (1655), a correspondent of Bartholin’s, he discusses these observations, and shows himself unconvinced of their accuracy. He writes, however, with great moderation and reasonableness, and excuses himself from investigating the subject further on the score of the infirmities of age; he was then above seventy-four. The following quotation shows the spirit of these letters: “Laudo equidem summopere Pecqueti aliorumque in indaganda veritate industriam singularem, nec dubito quin multa adhuc in Democriti puteo abscondita sint, a venturi saeculi indefatigabili diligentia expromenda.” Bartholin, though reasonably disappointed in not having Harvey’s concurrence, speaks of him with the utmost respect, and generously says that the glory of discovering the movements of the heart and of the blood was enough for one man.

It has been pointed out to Harvey that he didn’t recognize the significance of the discoveries of the lacteal and lymphatic vessels made by G. Aselli, J. Pecquet, and C. Bartholin. In three letters on the topic—one to Dr. R. Morison in Paris (1652) and two to Dr. Horst in Darmstadt (1655), a colleague of Bartholin’s—he discusses these findings and expresses his disbelief in their accuracy. However, he writes with great calm and reason and excuses himself from further exploration of the topic due to the limitations of age; he was over seventy-four at the time. The following quote captures the essence of these letters: “I greatly praise the remarkable diligence of Pecquet and others in pursuing truth, and I have no doubt that many things are still hidden in Democritus's well, awaiting the tireless efforts of future generations to uncover them.” Bartholin, although reasonably disappointed in not gaining Harvey’s agreement, speaks of him with the highest respect and generously remarks that the achievement of discovering the movements of the heart and blood was enough for one person.

46

46

Harvey’s Work on Generation.—We have seen how Dr. Ent persuaded his friend to publish this book in 1651. It is between five and six times as long as the Exerc. de motu cord. et sang., and is followed by excursus De partu, De uteri membranis, De conceptione; but, though the fruit of as patient and extensive observations, its value is far inferior. The subject was far more abstruse, and in fact inaccessible to proper investigation without the aid of the microscope. And the field was almost untrodden since the days of Aristotle. Fabricius, Harvey’s master, in his work De formatione ovi et pulli (1621), had alone preceded him in modern times. Moreover, the seventy-two chapters which form the book lack the co-ordination so conspicuous in the earlier treatise, and some of them seem almost like detached chapters of a system which was never completed or finally revised.

Harvey’s Work on Generation.—We have seen how Dr. Ent convinced his friend to publish this book in 1651. It is about five to six times longer than the Exerc. de motu cord. et sang., and is followed by sections De partu, De uteri membranis, De conceptione; however, despite being the result of careful and extensive observations, its value is significantly lower. The topic was much more complex and practically impossible to investigate properly without a microscope. Additionally, the area had been nearly untouched since the time of Aristotle. Fabricius, Harvey’s mentor, had been the only one to come before him in modern times with his work De formatione ovi et pulli (1621). Furthermore, the seventy-two chapters that make up the book lack the organization that is so apparent in the earlier treatise, and some seem almost like isolated chapters of a system that was never finished or properly revised.

Aristotle had believed that the male parent furnished the body of the future embryo, while the female only nourished and formed the seed; this is in fact the theory on which, in the Eumenides of Aeschylus, Apollo obtains the acquittal of Orestes. Galen taught almost as erroneously that each parent contributes seeds, the union of which produced the young animal. Harvey, after speaking with due honour of Aristotle and Fabricius, begins rightly “ab ovo”; for, as he remarks, “eggs cost little and are always and everywhere to be had,” and moreover “almost all animals, even those which bring forth their young alive, and man himself, are produced from eggs” (“omnia omnino animalia, etiam vivipara, atque hominem adeo ipsum, ex ovo progigni”). This dictum, usually quoted as “omne vivurn ex ovo,” would alone stamp this work as worthy of the discoverer of the circulation of the blood, but it was a prevision of genius, and was not proved to be a fact until K. E. von Baer discovered the mammalian ovum in 1827. Harvey proceeds with a careful anatomical description of the ovary and oviduct of the hen, describes the new-laid egg, and then gives an account of the appearance seen on the successive days of incubation, from the 1st to the 6th, the 10th and the 14th, and lastly describes the process of hatching. He then comments upon and corrects the opinions of Aristotle and Fabricius, declares against spontaneous generation (though in one passage he seems to admit the current doctrine of production of worms by putrefaction as an exception), proves that there is no semen foemineum, that the chalazae of the hen’s eggs are not the semen galli, and that both parents contribute to the formation of the egg. He describes accurately the first appearance of the ovarian ova as mere specks, their assumption of yelk and afterwards of albumen. In chapter xlv. he describes two methods of production of the embryo from the ovum: one is metamorphosis, or the direct transformation of pre-existing material, as a worm from an egg, or a butterfly from an aurelia (chrysalis); the other is epigenesis, or development with addition of parts, the true generation observed in all higher animals. Chapters xlvi.-l. are devoted to the abstruse question of the efficient cause of generation, which, after much discussion of the opinions of Aristotle and of Sennertius, Harvey refers to the action of both parents as the efficient instruments of the first great cause.4 He then goes on to describe the order in which the several parts appear in the chick. He states that the punctum saliens or foetal heart is the first organ to be seen, and explains that the nutrition of the chick is not only effected by yelk conveyed directly into the midgut, as Aristotle taught, but also by absorption from yelk and white by the umbilical (omphalomeseraic) veins; on the fourth day of incubation appear two masses (which he oddly names vermiculus), one of which develops into three vesicles, to form the cerebrum, cerebellum and eyes, the other into the breastbone and thorax; on the sixth or seventh day come the viscera, and lastly, the feathers and other external parts. Harvey points out how nearly this order of development in the chick agrees with what he had observed in mammalian and particularly in human embryos. He notes the bifid apex of the foetal heart in man and the equal thickness of the ventricles, the soft cartilages which represent the future bones, the large amount of liquor amnii and absence of placenta which characterize the foetus in the third month; in the fourth the position of the testes in the abdomen, and the uterus with its Fallopian tubes resembling the uterus bicornis of the sheep; the large thymus; the caecum, small as in the adult, not forming a second stomach as in the pig, the horse and the hare; the lobulated kidneys, like those of the seal (“vitulo,” sc. marino) and porpoise, and the large suprarenal veins, not much smaller than those of the kidneys (li.-lvi). He failed, however, to trace the connexion of the urachus with the bladder. In the following chapters (lxiii.-lxxii.) he describes the process of generation in the fallow deer or the roe. After again insisting that all animals arise from ova, that a “conception” is an internal egg and an egg an extruded conception, he goes on to describe the uterus of the doe, the process of impregnation, and the subsequent development of the foetus and its membranes, the punctum saliens, the cotyledons of the placenta, and the “uterine milk,” to which Sir William Turner recalled attention in later years. The treatise concludes with detached notes on the placenta, parturition and allied subjects.

Aristotle believed that the male parent provided the body of the future embryo, while the female only nourished and formed the seed; this is the theory on which, in the Eumenides of Aeschylus, Apollo secures Orestes' acquittal. Galen taught, almost incorrectly, that each parent contributes seeds, which unite to produce the young animal. Harvey, after respectfully acknowledging Aristotle and Fabricius, begins rightly “ab ovo”; as he notes, “eggs cost little and are always and everywhere available,” and “almost all animals, even those that give birth to their young alive, and even humans, come from eggs” (“omnia omnino animalia, etiam vivipara, atque hominem adeo ipsum, ex ovo progigni”). This statement, often quoted as “omne vivurn ex ovo,” alone makes this work deserving of the discoverer of blood circulation, but it was a stroke of genius and wasn’t proven to be true until K. E. von Baer discovered the mammalian egg in 1827. Harvey then carefully describes the anatomy of the hen's ovary and oviduct, describes the newly laid egg, and provides a detailed account of what appears during the incubation process from the 1st to the 6th, the 10th, and the 14th days, ending with the hatching process. He critiques and corrects Aristotle and Fabricius’s views, rejects spontaneous generation (though at one point he seems to concede the common belief that worms arise from decay as an exception), proves there is no semen foemineum, that the chalazae of hen’s eggs aren’t the semen galli, and that both parents contribute to the egg's formation. He accurately describes the initial appearance of the ovarian eggs as tiny specks and their development into yolk and later into albumen. In chapter xlv, he describes two methods of embryo development from the egg: one is metamorphosis, which is the direct transformation of existing material, like a worm coming from an egg, or a butterfly from a chrysalis; the other is epigenesis, or development with the addition of parts, the true generation observed in all higher animals. Chapters xlvi.-l. are dedicated to the complex question of the efficient cause of generation, which, after discussing the ideas of Aristotle and Sennertius, Harvey attributes to the actions of both parents as the effective instruments of the first great cause.4 He then describes the sequence in which various parts appear in the chick. He states that the punctum saliens or fetal heart is the first organ visible, explaining that the chick's nutrition comes not only from yolk directly transported to the midgut, as Aristotle claimed, but also from nutrients absorbed from the yolk and white by the umbilical (omphalomeseraic) veins; on the fourth day of incubation, two masses emerge (which he oddly names vermiculus), one of which develops into three vesicles that form the brain, cerebellum, and eyes, while the other develops into the breastbone and thorax; the internal organs appear by the sixth or seventh day, followed by feathers and other external features. Harvey notes how closely this development order in the chick resembles what he observed in mammalian and particularly human embryos. He points out the forked tip of the fetal heart in humans and the equal thickness of the ventricles, the soft cartilage that will become bones, the large amount of amniotic fluid, and the absence of a placenta characteristic of a three-month fetus; in the fourth month, he notes the position of the testes in the abdomen and the uterus with its Fallopian tubes resembling a sheep's bicornuate uterus; the large thymus; the cecum, small like in adults, which does not develop into a second stomach as in pigs, horses, and hares; the lobulated kidneys, like those of seals and porpoises, and the large adrenal veins, nearly as big as the kidneys (li.-lvi). However, he could not trace the connection of the urachus with the bladder. In the following chapters (lxiii.-lxxii.), he describes the generation process in the fallow deer or the roe. After reiterating that all animals come from eggs, defining “conception” as an internal egg and an egg as an external conception, he goes on to describe the doe's uterus, the fertilization process, and the subsequent development of the fetus and its membranes, the punctum saliens, the placental cotyledons, and the “uterine milk,” which Sir William Turner later highlighted. The treatise concludes with separate notes on the placenta, childbirth, and related topics.

Harvey’s other Writings and Medical Practice.—The remaining writings of Harvey which are extant are unimportant. A complete list of them will be found below, together with the titles of those which we know to be lost. Of these the most important were probably that on respiration, and the records of post-mortem examinations. From the following passage (De partu, p. 550) it seems that he had a notion of respiration being connected rather with the production of animal heat than, as then generally supposed, with the cooling of the blood. “Haec qui diligenter perpenderit, naturamque aeris diligenter introspexerit, facile opinor fatebitur eundem nec refrigerationis gratia nec in pabulum animalibus concedi. Haec autem obiter duntaxat de respiratione diximus, proprio loco de eadem forsitan copiosius disceptaturi.”

Harvey’s other Writings and Medical Practice.—The remaining writings of Harvey that still exist are not very significant. A complete list of them will be provided below, along with the titles of those we know are lost. The most important among these were likely those about respiration and the records of autopsies. From the following passage (De partu, p. 550), it seems that he thought respiration was connected more to the production of body heat rather than, as was commonly believed at the time, to cooling the blood. “Anyone who carefully considers this and closely examines the nature of the air will easily agree that it is neither granted for the sake of cooling nor as nourishment for living beings. However, we have only briefly mentioned respiration here, and we may discuss it more thoroughly in its proper place.”

Of Harvey as a practising physician we know very little. Aubrey tells us that “he paid his visits on horseback with a foot-cloth, his man following on foot, as the fashion then was.” He adds—“Though all of his profession would allow him to be an excellent anatomist, I never heard any that admired his therapeutic way. I knew several practitioners that would not have given threepence for one of his bills” (the apothecaries used to collect physicians’ prescriptions and sell or publish them to their own profit), “and that a man could hardly tell by his bill what he did aim at.” However this may have been,—and rational therapeutics was impossible when the foundation stone of physiology had only just been laid,—we know that Harvey was an active practitioner, performing such important surgical operations as the removal of a breast, and he turned his obstetric experience to account in his book on generation. Some good practical precepts as to the conduct of labour are quoted by Percivall Willughby (1596-1685). He also took notes of the anatomy of disease; these unfortunately perished with his other manuscripts. Otherwise we might regard him as a forerunner of G. B. Morgagni; for Harvey saw that pathology is but a branch of physiology, and like it must depend first on accurate anatomy. He speaks strongly to this purpose in his first epistle to Riolan: “Sicut enim sanorum et boni habitus corporum dissectio plurimum ad philosophiam et rectam physiologiam facit, ita corporum morbosorum et cachecticorum inspectio potissimum ad pathologiam philosophicam.” The only specimen we have of his observations in morbid anatomy is his account of the post-mortem examination made by order of the king on the body of the famous Thomas Parr, who died in 1635, at the reputed age of 152. Harvey insists on the value of physiological truths for their own sake, independently of their immediate utility; but he himself gives us an interesting example of the practical application of his theory of the circulation in the cure of a large tumour by tying the arteries which supplied it with blood (De generat. Exerc. xix.).

Of Harvey as a practicing physician, we know very little. Aubrey tells us that “he paid his visits on horseback with a foot-cloth, his man following on foot, as was the style back then.” He adds—“Though all in his profession admitted he was an excellent anatomist, I never heard anyone who praised his approach to treatment. I knew several practitioners who wouldn’t have given a penny for one of his bills” (the apothecaries used to collect physicians’ prescriptions and sell or publish them for their own profit), “and it was hard to tell from his bill what he was actually aiming for.” However that may be—and sensible treatment was difficult when the fundamentals of physiology had just been established— we know that Harvey was an active practitioner, performing significant surgical procedures like breast removal, and he applied his obstetric experience in his book on generation. Some good practical guidelines for managing labor are quoted by Percivall Willughby (1596-1685). He also kept notes on the anatomy of diseases; sadly, these were lost along with his other manuscripts. Otherwise, we might consider him a forerunner of G. B. Morgagni; for Harvey recognized that pathology is just a branch of physiology, and like it, must first rely on precise anatomy. He strongly emphasizes this in his first letter to Riolan: “Just as the dissection of healthy and well-functioning bodies greatly contributes to philosophy and proper physiology, so the examination of diseased and cachectic bodies is primarily crucial to philosophical pathology.” The only example we have of his observations in morbid anatomy is his account of the autopsy conducted by royal order on the body of the famous Thomas Parr, who died in 1635 at the believed age of 152. Harvey insists on the value of physiological truths for their own sake, regardless of their immediate usefulness; but he himself provides us with an interesting illustration of the practical application of his theory of circulation in the treatment of a large tumor by tying the arteries that supplied it with blood (De generat. Exerc. xix.).

The following is believed to be a complete list of all the known writings of Harvey, published and unpublished:—

The following is thought to be a complete list of all the known writings of Harvey, both published and unpublished:—

Exercitatio anatomica de motu cordis et sanguinis, 4to (Frankfort-on-the-Main, 1628); Exercitationes duae anatomicae de circulatione sanguinis, ad Johannem Riolanum, filium, Parisiensem (Cambridge, 1649); Exercitationes de generatione animalium, quibus accedunt quaedam de partu, de membranis ac humoribus uteri, et de conceptione, 4to (London, 1651); Anatomia Thomae Parr, first published in the treatise of Dr John Betts, De ortu et natura sanguinis, 8vo (London, 1669). Letters: (1) to Caspar Hoffmann of Nuremberg, May 1636; (2) to Schlegel of Hamburg, April 1651; (3) three to Giovanni Nardi of Florence, July 1651, Dec. 1653 and Nov. 1655; (4) two to Dr Morison of Paris, May 1652; (5) two to Dr Horst of 47 Darmstadt, Feb. 1654-1655 and July 1655; (6) to Dr Vlackveld of Haarlem, May 1657. His letters to Hoffmann and Schlegel are on the circulation; those to Morison, Horst and Vlackveld refer to the discovery of the lacteals; the two to Nardi are short letters of friendship. All these letters were published by Sir George Ent in his collected works (Leiden, 1687). Of two MS. letters, one on official business to the secretary Dorchester was printed by Dr Aveling, with a facsimile of the crabbed handwriting (Memorials of Harvey, 1875), and the other, about a patient, appears in Dr Robert Willis’s Life of Harvey (1878). Praelectiones anatomiae universalis per me Gul. Harveium medicum Londinensem, anat. et chir. professorem, an. dom. (1616), aetat. 37,—MS. notes of his Lumleian lectures in Latin,—are in the British Museum library; an autotype reproduction was issued by the College of Physicians in 1886. An account of a second MS. in the British Museum, entitled Gulielmus Harveius de musculis, motu locali, &c., was published by Sir G. E. Paget (Notice of an unpublished MS. of Harvey, London, 1850). The following treatises, or notes towards them, were lost either in the pillaging of Harvey’s house, or perhaps in the fire of London, which destroyed the old College of Physicians: A Treatise on Respiration, promised and probably at least in part completed (pp. 82, 550, ed. 1766); Observationes de usu Lienis; Observationes de motu locali, perhaps identical with the above-mentioned manuscript; Tractatum physiologicum; Anatomia medicalis (apparently notes of morbid anatomy); De generatione insectorum. The fine 4to edition of Harvey’s Works, published by the Royal College of Physicians in 1766, was superintended by Dr Mark Akenside; it contains the two treatises, the account of the post-mortem examination of old Parr, and the six letters enumerated above. A translation of this volume by Dr Willis, with Harvey’s will, was published by the Sydenham Society, 8vo (London, 1849).

Exercitatio anatomica de motu cordis et sanguinis, 4to (Frankfort-on-the-Main, 1628); Exercitationes duae anatomicae de circulatione sanguinis, ad Johannem Riolanum, filium, Parisiensem (Cambridge, 1649); Exercitationes de generatione animalium, quibus accedunt quaedam de partu, de membranis ac humoribus uteri, et de conceptione, 4to (London, 1651); Anatomia Thomae Parr, first published in the treatise of Dr John Betts, De ortu et natura sanguinis, 8vo (London, 1669). Letters: (1) to Caspar Hoffmann of Nuremberg, May 1636; (2) to Schlegel of Hamburg, April 1651; (3) three to Giovanni Nardi of Florence, July 1651, Dec. 1653, and Nov. 1655; (4) two to Dr Morison of Paris, May 1652; (5) two to Dr Horst of Darmstadt, Feb. 1654-1655 and July 1655; (6) to Dr Vlackveld of Haarlem, May 1657. His letters to Hoffmann and Schlegel discuss circulation; those to Morison, Horst, and Vlackveld refer to the discovery of the lacteals; the two to Nardi are brief letters of friendship. All these letters were published by Sir George Ent in his collected works (Leiden, 1687). Of two MS. letters, one on official business to the secretary Dorchester was printed by Dr Aveling, with a facsimile of the crabbed handwriting (Memorials of Harvey, 1875), and the other, about a patient, appears in Dr Robert Willis’s Life of Harvey (1878). Praelectiones anatomiae universalis per me Gul. Harveium medicum Londinensem, anat. et chir. professorem, an. dom. (1616), aetat. 37,—MS. notes of his Lumleian lectures in Latin,—are in the British Museum library; an autotype reproduction was issued by the College of Physicians in 1886. An account of a second MS. in the British Museum, entitled Gulielmus Harveius de musculis, motu locali, &c., was published by Sir G. E. Paget (Notice of an unpublished MS. of Harvey, London, 1850). The following treatises, or notes towards them, were lost either in the looting of Harvey’s house or perhaps in the Great Fire of London, which destroyed the old College of Physicians: A Treatise on Respiration, promised and probably at least partially completed (pp. 82, 550, ed. 1766); Observationes de usu Lienis; Observationes de motu locali, possibly the same as the mentioned manuscript; Tractatum physiologicum; Anatomia medicalis (apparently notes on morbid anatomy); De generatione insectorum. The fine 4to edition of Harvey’s Works, published by the Royal College of Physicians in 1766, was overseen by Dr Mark Akenside; it includes the two treatises, the account of the post-mortem examination of old Parr, and the six letters listed above. A translation of this volume by Dr Willis, along with Harvey’s will, was published by the Sydenham Society, 8vo (London, 1849).

The following are the principal biographies of Harvey: in Aubrey’s Letters of Eminent Persons, &c., vol. ii. (London, 1813), first published in 1685, the only contemporary account; in Bayle’s Dictionnaire historique et critique (1698 and 1720; Eng. ed., 1738); in the Biographia Britannica, and in Aitken’s Biographical Memoirs; the Latin Life by Dr Thomas Lawrence, prefixed to the college edition of Harvey’s Works in 1766; memoir in Lives of British Physicians (London, 1830); a Life by Dr Robert Willis, founded on that by Lawrence, and prefixed to his English edition of Harvey in 1847; the much enlarged Life by the same author, published in 1878; the biography by Dr William Munk in the Roll of the College of Physicians, vol. i. (2nd ed., 1879).

The main biographies of Harvey include: Aubrey’s Letters of Eminent Persons, etc., vol. ii. (London, 1813), first published in 1685, which is the only contemporary account; Bayle’s Dictionnaire historique et critique (1698 and 1720; English edition, 1738); Biographia Britannica; and Aitken’s Biographical Memoirs; the Latin Life by Dr. Thomas Lawrence, which was included in the college edition of Harvey’s Works in 1766; a memoir in Lives of British Physicians (London, 1830); a Life by Dr. Robert Willis, based on Lawrence's work, included in his English edition of Harvey from 1847; the significantly expanded Life by the same author, published in 1878; and the biography by Dr. William Munk in the Roll of the College of Physicians, vol. i. (2nd ed., 1879).

The literature which has arisen on the great discovery of Harvey, on his methods and his merits, would fill a library. The most important contemporary writings have been mentioned above. The following list gives some of the most remarkable in modern times: the article in Bayle’s dictionary quoted above; Anatomical Lectures, by Wm. Hunter, M.D. (1784); Sprengell, Geschichte der Arzneikunde (Halle, 1800), vol. iv.; Flourens, Histoire de la circulation (1854); Lewes, Physiology of Common Life (1859), vol. i. pp. 291-345; Ceradini, La Scoperta della circolazione del sangue (Milan, 1876); Tollin, Die Entdeckung des Blutkreislaufs durch Michael Servet (Jena, 1876); Kirchner, Die Entdeckung des Blutkreislaufs (Berlin, 1878); Willis, in his Life of Harvey; Wharton Jones, “Lecture on the Circulation of the Blood,” Lancet for Oct. 25 and Nov. 1, 1879; and the various Harveian Orations, especially those by Sir E. Sieveking, Dr Guy and Professor George Rolleston.

The literature that has emerged about Harvey's great discovery, his methods, and his contributions could fill a library. The key contemporary writings have been mentioned above. The following list includes some of the most notable works in modern times: the article in Bayle’s dictionary referenced earlier; Anatomical Lectures by Wm. Hunter, M.D. (1784); Sprengell, Geschichte der Arzneikunde (Halle, 1800), vol. iv.; Flourens, Histoire de la circulation (1854); Lewes, Physiology of Common Life (1859), vol. i. pp. 291-345; Ceradini, La Scoperta della circolazione del sangue (Milan, 1876); Tollin, Die Entdeckung des Blutkreislaufs durch Michael Servet (Jena, 1876); Kirchner, Die Entdeckung des Blutkreislaufs (Berlin, 1878); Willis, in his Life of Harvey; Wharton Jones, “Lecture on the Circulation of the Blood,” Lancet for Oct. 25 and Nov. 1, 1879; and the various Harveian Orations, particularly those by Sir E. Sieveking, Dr. Guy, and Professor George Rolleston.

(P. H. P.-S.)

1 “Ignoscant mihi niveae animae, si, summarum injuriarum memor, levem gemitum effudero. Doloris mihi haec causa est: cum, inter nuperos nostros tumultus et bella plusquam civilia, serenissimum regem (idque non solum senatus permissione sed et jussu) sequor, rapaces quaedam manus non modo aedium mearum supellectilem omnem expilarunt, sed etiam, quae mihi causa gravior querimoniae, adversaria mea, multorum annorum laboribus parta, e museo meo summoverunt. Quo factum est ut observationes plurimae, praesertim de generatione insectorum, cum republicae literariae (ausim dicere) detrimento, perierint.”—De gen., Ex. lxviii. To this loss Cowley refers—

1 “Forgive me, pure souls, if I, remembering the gravity of my wrongs, let out a light sigh. This is the reason for my pain: while I follow the most serene king (and not only by the permission of the senate but also by command) amidst our recent unrest and more than civil wars, certain greedy hands have not only pillaged all the furnishings of my home but, more importantly, removed my adversary, which I had worked for many years to acquire, from my museum. As a result, many observations, especially regarding the generation of insects, have perished, to the detriment of our literary republic (I dare say).”—De gen., Ex. lxviii. To this loss Cowley refers—

“O cursed war! who can forgive thee this?

“O cursed war! Who can forgive you for this?

Houses and towns may rise again,

Houses and towns might rise again,

And ten times easier ’tis

And ten times easier it is

To rebuild Paul’s than any work of his.”

To rebuild Paul’s than any work of his.

2 Indeed the same word, περίοδος αἵματος, occurs in the Hippocratic writings, and was held by Van der Linden to prove that to the father of medicine himself, and not to Columbus or Caesalpinus, belonged the laurels of Harvey.

2 Indeed the same term, menstrual cycle, appears in the Hippocratic writings, and Van der Linden argued that this showed that the honors of Harvey belonged to the father of medicine himself, not to Columbus or Caesalpinus.

3 Realdo Columbus (De re anatomica, 1559) formally denies the muscularity of the heart, yet correctly teaches that blood and spirits pass from the right to the left ventricle, not through the septum but through the lungs, “quod nemo hactenus aut animadvertit aut scriptum reliquit.” The fact that Harvey quotes Columbus and not Servetus is explained by the almost entire destruction of the writings of the latter, which are now among the rarest curiosities. The great anatomist Fabricius, Harvey’s teacher at Padua, described the valves of the veins more perfectly than had Sylvius. Carlo Ruini, in his treatise on the Anatomy and Diseases of the Horse (1590), taught that the left ventricle sends blood and vital spirits to all parts of the body except the lungs—the ordinary Galenical doctrine. Yet on the strength of this phrase Professor J. B. Ercolani actually put up a tablet in the veterinary school at Bologna to Ruini as the discoverer of the circulation of the blood! The claims of Caesalpinus, a more plausible claimant to Harvey’s laurels, are scarcely better founded. In his Quaestiones peripateticae (1571) he followed Servetus and Columbus in describing what we now know as the pulmonary “circulation” under that name, and this is the only foundation for the assertion (first made in Bayle’s dictionary) that Caesalpinus knew “the circulation of the blood.” He is even behind Servetus, for he only allows part of the blood of the right ventricle to go round by this “circuit”; some, he conceives, passes through the hypothetical pores in the septum, and the rest by the superior cava to the head and arms, by the inferior to the rest of the body: “Hanc esse venarum utilitatem ut omnes partes corporis sanguinem pro nutrimento deferant. Ex dextro ventr° cordis vena cava sanguinem crassiorem, in quo calor intensus est magis, ex altero autern ventr°, sanguinem temperatissimum ac sincerissimum habente, egreditur aorta.” Caesalpinus seems to have had no original views on the subject; all that he writes is copied from Galen or from Servetus except some erroneous observations of his own. His greatest merit was as a botanist; and no claim to the “discovery of the circulation” was made by him or by his contemporaries. When it was made, Haller decided conclusively against it. The fact that an inscription has been placed on the bust of Caesalpinus at Rome, which states that he preceded others in recognizing and demonstrating “the general circulation of the blood,” is only a proof of the blindness of misplaced national vanity.

3 Realdo Columbus (De re anatomica, 1559) officially denies that the heart is muscular, but correctly explains that blood and spirits flow from the right to the left ventricle, not through the septum but through the lungs, “which no one has yet noticed or written about.” The reason Harvey cites Columbus instead of Servetus is due to the near-total loss of Servetus's writings, which are now among the rarest curiosities. The great anatomist Fabricius, who was Harvey’s mentor in Padua, described the valves of the veins more accurately than Sylvius did. Carlo Ruini, in his book on the Anatomy and Diseases of the Horse (1590), claimed that the left ventricle sends blood and vital spirits to all parts of the body except the lungs—following the standard Galenical doctrine. Yet, based on this statement, Professor J. B. Ercolani actually put up a plaque in the veterinary school in Bologna recognizing Ruini as the discoverer of blood circulation! The claims of Caesalpinus, a more reasonable candidate for Harvey’s accolades, are hardly better supported. In his Quaestiones peripateticae (1571), he followed Servetus and Columbus in describing what we now call the pulmonary “circulation” using that term, which is the only basis for the assertion (first made in Bayle’s dictionary) that Caesalpinus understood “the circulation of the blood.” He even falls behind Servetus, as he only suggests that part of the blood from the right ventricle goes through this “circuit”; some, he believes, passes through the supposed pores in the septum, while the rest travels through the superior vena cava to the head and arms, and through the inferior vena cava to the rest of the body: “This is the purpose of the veins, to carry blood to all parts of the body for nourishment. From the right ventricle of the heart, the vena cava carries the thicker blood, which has more intense heat, while from the other ventricle, the aorta emerges, carrying the most balanced and pure blood.” Caesalpinus seems to have had no original ideas on the matter; everything he writes is copied from Galen or Servetus, except for a few of his own incorrect observations. His greatest contribution was as a botanist; he or his contemporaries never claimed to have “discovered the circulation.” When such a claim was made, Haller firmly rejected it. The fact that an inscription has been placed on the bust of Caesalpinus in Rome stating that he was ahead of others in recognizing and demonstrating “the general circulation of the blood” serves only as proof of the folly of misplaced national pride.

4 So in Exerc. liv.: “Superior itaque et divinior opifex, quam est homo, videtur hominem fabricare et conservare, et nobilior artifex, quam gallus, pullum ex ovo producere. Nempe agnoscimus Deum, creatorem summum atque omnipotentem, in cunctorum animalium fabrica ubique praesentem esse, et in operibus suis quasi digito monstrari: cujus in procreatione pulli instrumenta sint gallus et gallina.... Nec cuiquam sane haec attributa conveniunt nisi omnipotenti rerum Principio, quocunque demum nomine idipsum appellare libuerit: sive Mentem divinam cum Aristotele, sive cum Platone Animam Mundi, aut cum aliis Naturam naturantem, vel cum ethnicis Saturnum aut Iovem; vel potius (ut nos decet) Creatorem ac Patrem omnium quae in coelis et terris, a quo animalia eorumque origines dependent, cujusque nutu sive effatu fiunt et generantur omnia.”

4 In Exercise 55: “So it seems that a greater and more divine craftsman than man is at work in creating and sustaining humanity, and a more noble artist than a rooster is in producing a chick from an egg. Indeed, we recognize God, the supreme and omnipotent creator, as being present everywhere in the creation of all animals, and His works are evident as if pointed out by a finger: in the generation of chicks, the instruments are the rooster and hen.... No one else truly fits these attributes except the all-powerful origin of all things, whatever name one wishes to call Him: whether the Divine Mind with Aristotle, or the World Soul with Plato, or Nature creating nature with others, or with the pagans, Saturn or Jupiter; or rather (as is appropriate for us) the Creator and Father of all that is in heaven and on earth, from whom animals and their origins depend, and by whose will or command all things come to be and are generated.”


HARVEY, a city of Cook county, Illinois, U.S.A., about 18 m. S. of the Chicago Court House. Pop. (1900) 5395 (982 foreign-born); (1910) 7227. It is served by the Chicago Terminal Transfer, the Grand Trunk and the Illinois Central railways. Harvey is a manufacturing and residence suburb of Chicago. Among its manufactures are railway, foundry and machine-shop supplies, mining and ditching machinery, stone crushers, street-making and street-cleaning machinery, stoves and motor-vehicles. It was named in honour of Turlington W. Harvey, a Chicago capitalist, founded in 1890, incorporated as a village in 1891 and chartered as a city in 1895.

HARVEY, is a city in Cook County, Illinois, U.S.A., located about 18 miles south of the Chicago Courthouse. Its population was 5,395 in 1900 (982 foreign-born) and 7,227 in 1910. The city is served by the Chicago Terminal Transfer, Grand Trunk, and Illinois Central railways. Harvey is a manufacturing and residential suburb of Chicago. Its industries include railway, foundry, and machine shop supplies, mining and ditching machinery, stone crushers, street-making and street-cleaning machinery, stoves, and motor vehicles. It was named after Turlington W. Harvey, a Chicago businessman, was founded in 1890, incorporated as a village in 1891, and chartered as a city in 1895.


HARWICH, a municipal borough and seaport in the Harwich parliamentary division of Essex, England, on the extremity of a small peninsula projecting into the estuary of the Stour and Orwell, 70 m. N.E. by E. of London by the Great Eastern railway. Pop. (1901), 10,070. It occupies an elevated situation, and a wide view is obtained from Beacon Hill at the southern end of the esplanade. The church of St Nicholas was built of brick in 1821; and there are a town hall and a custom-house. The harbour is one of the best on the east coast of England, and in stormy weather is largely used for shelter. A breakwater and sea-wall prevent the blocking of the harbour entrance and encroachments of the sea; and there is another breakwater at Landguard Point on the opposite (Suffolk) shore of the estuary. The principal imports are grain and agricultural produce, timber and coal, and the exports cement and fish. Harwich is one of the principal English ports for continental passenger traffic, steamers regularly serving the Hook of Holland, Amsterdam, Rotterdam, Antwerp, Esbjerg, Copenhagen and Hamburg. The continental trains of the Great Eastern railway run to Parkeston Quay, 1 m. from Harwich up the Stour, where the passenger steamers start. The fisheries are important, principally those for shrimps and lobsters. There are cement and shipbuilding works. The port is the headquarters of the Royal Harwich Yacht Club. There are batteries at and opposite Harwich, and modern works on Shotley Point, at the fork of the two estuaries. There are also several of the Martello towers of the Napoleonic era. At Landguard Fort there are important defence works with heavy modern guns commanding the main channel. This has been a point of coast defence since the time of James I. Between the Parkeston Quay and Town railway stations is that of Dovercourt, an adjoining parish and popular watering-place. Harwich is under a mayor, 4 aldermen and 12 councillors. Area, 1541 acres.

HARWICH, is a municipal borough and seaport located in the Harwich parliamentary division of Essex, England. It sits at the tip of a small peninsula that juts into the estuary of the Stour and Orwell, about 70 miles northeast by east of London via the Great Eastern railway. As of 1901, its population was 10,070. The town is situated at a high elevation, offering a wide view from Beacon Hill at the southern end of the esplanade. The Church of St Nicholas was constructed from brick in 1821, and notable buildings include a town hall and a custom house. The harbor is considered one of the best on the east coast of England and provides shelter during stormy weather. A breakwater and sea wall protect the harbor entrance from blockages and sea encroachment, with another breakwater located at Landguard Point on the opposite (Suffolk) side of the estuary. Main imports include grain, agricultural products, timber, and coal, while exports consist of cement and fish. Harwich is one of the key English ports for continental passenger traffic, with regular steamers servicing the Hook of Holland, Amsterdam, Rotterdam, Antwerp, Esbjerg, Copenhagen, and Hamburg. Continental trains from the Great Eastern railway go to Parkeston Quay, just one mile from Harwich along the Stour, where passenger steamers depart. Fishing is significant here, especially for shrimps and lobsters, and there are cement and shipbuilding industries. The port serves as the headquarters for the Royal Harwich Yacht Club. There are defenses at Harwich and across the water, along with modern installations at Shotley Point, which is located at the junction of the two estuaries. Several Martello towers from the Napoleonic era can also be found here. At Landguard Fort, important defense structures house heavy modern artillery that oversee the main channel. This location has been key for coastal defense since the era of James I. Between the Parkeston Quay and Town railway stations lies the Dovercourt station, which is part of an adjacent parish and a popular seaside resort. Harwich is governed by a mayor, four aldermen, and twelve councillors. Its area covers 1,541 acres.

Harwich (Herewica, Herewyck) cannot be shown to have been inhabited very early, although in the 18th century remains of a camp, possibly Roman, existed there. Harwich formed part of the manor of Dovercourt. It became a borough in 1319 by a charter of Edward II., which was confirmed in 1342 and 1378, and by each of the Lancastrian kings. The exact nature and degree of its self-government is not clear. Harwich received charters in 1547, 1553 and 1560. In 1604 James I. gave it a charter which amounted to a new constitution, and from this charter begins the regular parliamentary representation. Two burgesses had attended parliament in 1343, but none had been summoned since. Until 1867 Harwich returned two members; it then lost one, and in 1885 it was merged in the county. Included in the manor of Dovercourt, Harwich from 1086 was for long held by the de Vere family. In 1252 Henry III. granted to Roger Bigod a market here every Tuesday, and a fair on Ascension day, and eight days after. In 1320 a grant occurs of a Tuesday market, but no fair is mentioned. James I. granted a Friday market, and two fairs, at the feast of St Philip and St James, and on St Luke’s day. The fair has died out, but markets are still held on Tuesday and Friday. Harwich has always had a considerable trade; in the 14th century merchants came even from Spain, and there was much trade in wheat and wool with Flanders. But the passenger traffic appears to have been as important at Harwich in the 14th century as it is now. Shipbuilding was a considerable industry at Harwich in the 17th century.

Harwich (Herewica, Herewyck) cannot be proven to have been inhabited very early, although in the 18th century, there were remains of a camp, possibly Roman, found there. Harwich was part of the manor of Dovercourt. It became a borough in 1319 through a charter from Edward II, which was confirmed in 1342 and 1378, and by each of the Lancastrian kings. The exact nature and extent of its self-governance are not clear. Harwich received charters in 1547, 1553, and 1560. In 1604, James I granted it a charter that created a new constitution, marking the beginning of its regular parliamentary representation. Two burgesses attended parliament in 1343, but none had been summoned since then. Until 1867, Harwich elected two members; it then lost one, and in 1885, it was merged into the county. Included in the manor of Dovercourt, Harwich had been held by the de Vere family since 1086. In 1252, Henry III granted Roger Bigod permission to hold a market here every Tuesday, along with a fair on Ascension Day and for eight days afterward. In 1320, there was a grant for a Tuesday market, but no fair was mentioned. James I permitted a Friday market and two fairs, one at the feast of St. Philip and St. James and another on St. Luke’s Day. The fair has since disappeared, but markets are still held on Tuesday and Friday. Harwich has always had a significant trade; in the 14th century, merchants even came from Spain, and there was substantial trade in wheat and wool with Flanders. The passenger traffic at Harwich in the 14th century seems to have been just as important as it is today. Shipbuilding was also a major industry in Harwich in the 17th century.


HARZBURG, a town of Germany, in the duchy of Brunswick, beautifully situated in a deep and well-wooded vale at the north foot of the Harz Mountains, at the terminus of the Brunswick-Harzburg railway, 5 m. E.S.E. from Goslar and 18 m. S. from Wolfenbüttel. Pop. (1905), 4396. The Radau, a mountain stream, descending from the Brocken, waters the valley and adds much to its picturesque charm. The town is much frequented as a summer residence. It possesses brine and carbonated springs, the Juliushall saline baths being about a mile to the south of the town, and a hydropathic establishment. A mile and a half south from the town lies the Burgberg, 1500 ft. above sea-level, on whose summit, according to tradition, was once an altar to the heathen idol Krodo, still to be seen in the Ulrich chapel at Goslar. There are on the summit of the hill the remains of an old castle, and a monument erected in 1875 to Prince Bismarck, with an inscription taken from one of his speeches against the Ultramontane claims of Rome—“Nach Canossa gehen wir nicht.”

HARZBURG, is a town in Germany, located in the duchy of Brunswick. It's beautifully placed in a deep, wooded valley at the northern foot of the Harz Mountains, at the end of the Brunswick-Harzburg railway, 5 miles east-southeast of Goslar and 18 miles south of Wolfenbüttel. The population in 1905 was 4,396. The Radau, a mountain stream flowing from the Brocken, nourishes the valley and adds to its picturesque beauty. The town is a popular summer destination. It has brine and carbonated springs, with the Juliushall saline baths about a mile south of the town, along with a hydropathic establishment. A mile and a half south of the town is Burgberg, which is 1,500 feet above sea level. According to tradition, an altar to the pagan idol Krodo once stood on its summit, which can still be seen in the Ulrich chapel at Goslar. There are remnants of an old castle on top of the hill, along with a monument erected in 1875 to Prince Bismarck, featuring an inscription from one of his speeches against the Ultramontane claims of Rome—“Nach Canossa gehen wir nicht.”

The castle on the Burgberg called the Harzburg is famous in German history. It was built between 1065 and 1069, but was laid in ruins by the Saxons in 1074; again it was built and again destroyed during the struggle between the emperor Henry IV. and the Saxons. By Frederick I. it was granted to Henry the Lion, who caused it to be rebuilt about 1180. It was a frequent residence of Otto IV., who died therein, and after being frequently besieged and taken, it passed to the house of 48 Brunswick. It ceased to be of importance as a fortress after the Thirty Years’ War, and gradually fell into ruins.

The castle on Burgberg, known as Harzburg, is well-known in German history. It was built between 1065 and 1069 but was ruined by the Saxons in 1074. It was rebuilt only to be destroyed again during the conflict between Emperor Henry IV and the Saxons. Frederick I later granted it to Henry the Lion, who had it rebuilt around 1180. It was often home to Otto IV., who died there. After being besieged and captured multiple times, it fell into the hands of the House of 48 Brunswick. Its significance as a fortress diminished after the Thirty Years’ War, and it gradually fell into ruins.

See Delius, Untersuchungen über die Geschichte der Harzburg (Halberstadt, 1826); Dommes, Harzburg und seine Umgebung (Goslar, 1862); Jacobs, Die Harzburg und ihre Geschichte (1885); and Stolle, Führer von Bad Harzburg (1899).

See Delius, Research on the History of Harzburg (Halberstadt, 1826); Dommes, Harzburg and Its Surroundings (Goslar, 1862); Jacobs, The Harzburg and Its History (1885); and Stolle, Guide to Bad Harzburg (1899).


HARZ MOUNTAINS (also spelt Hartz, Ger. Harzgebirge, anc. Silva Hercynia), the most northerly mountain-system of Germany, situated between the rivers Weser and Elbe, occupy an area of 784 sq. m., of which 455 belong to Prussia, 286 to Brunswick and 43 to Anhalt. Their greatest length extends in a S.E. and N.W. direction for 57 m., and their maximum breadth is about 20 m. The group is made up of an irregular series of terraced plateaus, rising here and there into rounded summits, and intersected in various directions by narrow, deep valleys. The north-western and higher part of the mass is called the Ober or Upper Harz; the south-eastern and more extensive part, the Unter or Lower Harz; while the N.W. and S.W. slopes of the Upper Harz form the Vorharz. The Brocken group, which divides the Upper and Lower Harz, is generally regarded as belonging to the first. The highest summits of the Upper Harz are the Brocken (3747 ft.), the Heinrichshöhe (3425 ft.), the Königsberg (3376 ft.) and the Wurmberg (3176 ft.); of the Lower Harz, the Josephshöhe in the Auerberg group and the Viktorhöhe in the Ramberg, each 1887 ft. Of these the Brocken (q.v.) is celebrated for the legends connected with it, immortalized in Goethe’s Faust. Streams are numerous, but all small. While rendered extensively useful, by various skilful artifices, in working the numerous mines of the district, at other parts of their course they present the most picturesque scenery in the Harz. Perhaps the finest valley is the rocky Bodethal, with the Rosstrappe, the Hexentanzplatz, the Baumannshöhle and the Bielshöhle.

HARZ MOUNTAINS (also spelled Hartz, Ger. Harzgebirge, anc. Silva Hercynia), the northernmost mountain range in Germany, located between the Weser and Elbe rivers, covers an area of 784 square miles, with 455 belonging to Prussia, 286 to Brunswick, and 43 to Anhalt. The range stretches 57 miles from southeast to northwest and has a maximum width of about 20 miles. It consists of an irregular series of terraced plateaus that rise into rounded peaks and are divided by narrow, deep valleys. The northwestern and higher section is known as the Ober or Upper Harz; the southeastern and larger section is called the Unter or Lower Harz; while the northwestern and southwestern slopes of the Upper Harz make up the Vorharz. The Brocken group, which separates the Upper and Lower Harz, is generally considered part of the Upper Harz. The highest peaks of the Upper Harz include the Brocken (3747 ft.), Heinrichshöhe (3425 ft.), Königsberg (3376 ft.), and Wurmberg (3176 ft.); while in the Lower Harz, Josephshöhe in the Auerberg group and Viktorhöhe in the Ramberg both stand at 1887 ft. The Brocken (q.v.) is famous for the legends associated with it, immortalized in Goethe’s Faust. Many small streams flow through the region, which are harnessed skillfully for the numerous mines in the area, while in other parts they create some of the most picturesque scenery in the Harz. One of the most beautiful valleys is the rocky Bodethal, featuring the Rosstrappe, Hexentanzplatz, Baumannshöhle, and Bielshöhle.

The Harz is a mass of Palaeozoic rock rising through the Mesozoic strata of north Germany, and bounded on all sides by faults. Slates, schists, quartzites and limestones form the greater part of the hills, but the Brocken and Victorshöhe are masses of intrusive granite, and diabases and diabase tuffs are interstratified with the sedimentary deposits. The Silurian, Devonian and Carboniferous systems are represented—the Silurian and Devonian forming the greater part of the hills S.E. of a line drawn from Lauterberg to Wernigerode, while N.W. of this line the Lower Carboniferous predominates. A few patches of Upper Carboniferous are found on the borders of the hills near Ilfeld, Ballenstedt, &c., lying unconformably upon the Devonian. The structure of the Harz is very complicated, but the general strike of the folds, especially in the Oberharz plateau, is N.E. or N.N.E. The whole mass evidently belongs to the ancient Hercynian chain of North Europe (which, indeed, derives its name from the Harz), and is the north-easterly continuation of the rocks of the Ardennes and the Eifel. The folding of the old rocks took place towards the close of the Palaeozoic era; but the faulting to which they owe their present position was probably Tertiary. Metalliferous veins are common, amongst the best-known being the silver-bearing lead veins of Klausthal, which occur in the Culm or Lower Carboniferous.

The Harz is a mass of Paleozoic rock that rises through the Mesozoic layers of northern Germany and is surrounded by faults. Slates, schists, quartzites, and limestones make up most of the hills, but the Brocken and Victorshöhe are composed of intrusive granite, while diabases and diabase tuffs are layered with the sedimentary deposits. The Silurian, Devonian, and Carboniferous systems are represented—the Silurian and Devonian forming the majority of the hills southeast of an imaginary line drawn from Lauterberg to Wernigerode, while the Lower Carboniferous dominates northwest of this line. A few patches of Upper Carboniferous can be found along the edges of the hills near Ilfeld, Ballenstedt, etc., sitting unconformably on top of the Devonian. The structure of the Harz is quite complex, but the general alignment of the folds, especially in the Oberharz plateau, is northeast or north-northeast. This entire mass clearly belongs to the ancient Hercynian chain of Northern Europe (which actually gets its name from the Harz) and is the northeastern continuation of the rocks from the Ardennes and the Eifel. The folding of the old rocks occurred toward the end of the Paleozoic era, but the faulting that led to their current position likely happened during the Tertiary period. Metalliferous veins are common, with some of the best-known being the silver-bearing lead veins of Klausthal that are found in the Culm or Lower Carboniferous.

Owing to its position as the first range which the northerly winds strike after crossing the north German plain, the climate on the summit of the Harz is generally raw and damp, even in summer. In 1895 an observatory was opened on the top of the Brocken, and the results of the first five years (1806-1900) showed a July mean of 50° Fahr., a February mean of 24.7°, and a yearly mean of 36.6°. During the same five years the rainfall averaged 6413 ins. annually. But while the summer is thus relatively ungenial on the top of the Harz, the usual summer heat of the lower-lying valleys is greatly tempered and cooled; so that, adding this to the natural attractions of the scenery, the deep forests, and the legendary and romantic associations attaching to every fantastic rock and ruined castle, the Harz is a favourite summer resort of the German people. Among the more popular places of resort are Harzburg, Thale and the Bodethal; Blankenburg, with the Teufelsmauer and the Hermannshöhle; Wernigerode, Ilsenburg, Grund, Lauterberg, Hubertusbad, Alexisbad and Suderode. Some of these, and other places not named, add to their natural attractions the advantage of mineral springs and baths, pine-needle baths, whey cures, &c. The Harz is penetrated by several railways, among them a rack-railway up the Brocken, opened in 1898. The district is traversed by excellent roads in all directions.

Due to its location as the first mountain range hit by northern winds after crossing the North German plain, the climate on the summit of the Harz is usually chilly and damp, even in summer. In 1895, an observatory was established at the top of the Brocken, and the results from the first five years (1806-1900) indicated an average temperature of 50°F in July, 24.7°F in February, and an annual average of 36.6°F. During the same five years, the average rainfall was 6413 inches per year. While summer is relatively cool at the top of the Harz, it does provide a refreshing break from the summer heat experienced in the lower-lying valleys. This, combined with the natural beauty of the scenery, the dense forests, and the legendary and romantic stories attached to every unusual rock and ruined castle, makes the Harz a popular summer destination for the German people. Some of the more well-known resort areas include Harzburg, Thale, and the Bodethal; Blankenburg, with the Teufelsmauer and Hermannshöhle; Wernigerode, Ilsenburg, Grund, Lauterberg, Hubertusbad, Alexisbad, and Suderode. Some of these places, along with others not mentioned, enhance their natural appeal with mineral springs and baths, pine-needle baths, whey treatments, etc. The Harz is served by several railways, including a cog railway to the Brocken that opened in 1898. The area also boasts excellent roads that connect in all directions.

The northern summits are destitute of trees, but the lower slopes of the Upper Harz are heavily wooded with pines and firs. Between the forests of these stretch numerous peat-mosses, which contain in their spongy reservoirs the sources of many small streams. On the Brocken are found one or two arctic and several alpine, plants. In the Lower Harz the forests contain a great variety of timber. The oak, elm and birch are common, while the beech especially attains an unusual size and beauty. The walnut-tree grows in the eastern districts.

The northern peaks lack trees, but the lower slopes of the Upper Harz are thick with pines and firs. Between these forests are many peat bogs, which hold the sources of several small streams in their spongy reservoirs. The Brocken is home to a couple of arctic plants and several alpine ones. In the Lower Harz, the forests are diverse in timber. Oak, elm, and birch are common, while the beech grows particularly large and beautiful. The walnut tree can be found in the eastern areas.

The last bear was killed in the Harz in 1705, and the last lynx in 1817, and since that time the wolf too has become extinct; but deer, foxes, wild cats and badgers are still found in the forests.

The last bear was killed in the Harz in 1705, and the last lynx in 1817, and since then, the wolf has also gone extinct; however, deer, foxes, wildcats, and badgers can still be found in the forests.

The Harz is one of the richest mineral storehouses in Germany, and the chief industry is mining, which has been carried on since the middle of the 10th century. The most important mineral is a peculiarly rich argentiferous lead, but gold in small quantities, copper, iron, sulphur, alum and arsenic are also found. Mining is carried on principally at Klausthal and St Andreasberg in the Upper Harz. Near the latter is one of the deepest mining shafts in Europe, namely the Samson, which goes down 2790 ft. or 720 ft. below sea-level. For the purpose of getting rid of the water, and obviating the flooding of such deep workings, it has been found necessary to construct drainage works of some magnitude. As far back as 1777-1799 the Georgsstollen was cut through the mountains from the east of Klausthal westward to Grund, a distance of 4 m.; but this proving insufficient, another sewer, the Ernst-Auguststollen, no less than 14 m. in length, was made from the same neighbourhood to Gittelde, at the west side of the Harz, in 1851-1864. Marble, granite and gypsum are worked; and large quantities of vitriol are manufactured. The vast forests that cover the mountain slopes supply the materials for a considerable trade in timber. Much wood is exported for building and other purposes, and in the Harz itself is used as fuel. The sawdust of the numerous mills is collected for use in the manufacture of paper. Turf-cutting, coarse lace-making and the breeding of canaries and native song-birds also occupy many of the people. Agriculture is carried on chiefly on the plateaus of the Lower Harz; but there is excellent pasturage both in the north and in the south. In the Lower Harz, as in Switzerland, the cows, which carry bells harmoniously tuned, are driven up into the heights in early summer, returning to the sheltered regions in late autumn.

The Harz Mountains are one of Germany's richest mineral deposits, and mining is the main industry, which has been active since the mid-10th century. The most significant mineral is a unique, silver-rich lead, but small amounts of gold, copper, iron, sulfur, alum, and arsenic are also found. Mining mainly takes place at Klausthal and St. Andreasberg in the Upper Harz. Near St. Andreasberg is one of the deepest mining shafts in Europe, known as the Samson, which goes down 2,790 feet, or 720 feet below sea level. To manage the water and prevent flooding in such deep mines, it has been necessary to build significant drainage systems. As early as 1777-1799, the Georgsstollen was carved through the mountains from the east of Klausthal to Grund, a distance of 4 miles; however, since this wasn’t enough, another tunnel, the Ernst-Auguststollen, measuring 14 miles in length, was constructed from that area to Gittelde on the west side of the Harz between 1851 and 1864. Marble, granite, and gypsum are quarried, and large quantities of vitriol are produced. The vast forests covering the mountain slopes provide materials for a substantial timber trade. Much wood is exported for construction and other uses, while in the Harz, it is utilized as fuel. Sawdust from the numerous mills is collected for paper manufacturing. Turf-cutting, coarse lace-making, and breeding canaries and native songbirds also engage many locals. Agriculture primarily occurs on the plateaus of the Lower Harz, but there is excellent grazing land in both the north and south. In the Lower Harz, similar to Switzerland, cows adorned with harmoniously tuned bells are driven up to the heights in early summer and return to the protected areas in late autumn.

The inhabitants are descended from various stocks. The Upper and Lower Saxon, the Thuringian and the Frankish races have all contributed to form the present people, and their respective influences are still to be traced in the varieties of dialect. The boundary line between High and Low German passes through the Harz. The Harz was the last stronghold of paganism in Germany, and to that fact are due the legends, in which no district is richer, and the fanciful names given by the people to peculiar objects and appearances of nature.

The people come from a mix of backgrounds. The Upper and Lower Saxons, the Thuringians, and the Franks have all played a role in shaping the current population, and you can still see their influences in the different dialects. The dividing line between High and Low German runs through the Harz Mountains. The Harz was the final bastion of pagan beliefs in Germany, which is why this area is rich in legends and has unique names that locals have given to unusual objects and natural phenomena.

See Zeitschrift des Harzvereins (Wernigerode, annually since 1868); Günther, Der Harz in Geschichts- Kultur- und Landschaftsbildern (Hanover, 1885), and “Der Harz” in Scobel’s Monographien zur Erdkunde (Bielefeld, 1901); H. Hoffmann and others, Der Harz (Leipzig, 1899), Harzwanderungen (Leipzig, 1902); Hampe, Flora Hercynica (Halle, 1873); von Groddeck, Abriss der Geognosie des Harzes (2nd ed., Klausthal, 1883); Pröhle, Harzsagen (2nd ed., Leipzig, 1886); Hautzinger, Der Kupfer- und Silbersegen des Harzes (Berlin, 1877); Hoppe, Die Bergwerke im Ober- und Unterharz (Klausthal, 1883); Schulze, Lithia Hercynica (Leipzig, 1895); Lüdecke, Die Minerale des Harzes (Berlin, 1896).

See Zeitschrift des Harzvereins (Wernigerode, annually since 1868); Günther, Der Harz in Geschichts- Kultur- und Landschaftsbildern (Hanover, 1885), and “Der Harz” in Scobel’s Monographien zur Erdkunde (Bielefeld, 1901); H. Hoffmann and others, Der Harz (Leipzig, 1899), Harzwanderungen (Leipzig, 1902); Hampe, Flora Hercynica (Halle, 1873); von Groddeck, Abriss der Geognosie des Harzes (2nd ed., Klausthal, 1883); Pröhle, Harzsagen (2nd ed., Leipzig, 1886); Hautzinger, Der Kupfer- und Silbersegen des Harzes (Berlin, 1877); Hoppe, Die Bergwerke im Ober- und Unterharz (Klausthal, 1883); Schulze, Lithia Hercynica (Leipzig, 1895); Lüdecke, Die Minerale des Harzes (Berlin, 1896).


HASA, EL (Ahsa, Al Hasa), a district in the east of Arabia stretching along the shore of the Persian Gulf from Kuwét in 29° 20′ N. to the south point of the Gulf of Bahrein in 25° 10′ N., a length of about 360 m. On the W. it is bounded by Nejd, and on the S.E. by the peninsula of El Katr which forms part of Oman. The coast is low and flat and has no deep-water port along its whole length with the exception of Kuwét; from that place to El Katif the country is barren and without villages 49 or permanent settlements, and is only occupied by nomad tribes, of which the principal are the Bani Hajar, Ajman and Khālid. The interior consists of low stony ridges rising gradually to the inner plateau. The oases of Hofuf and Katif, however, form a strong contrast to the barren wastes that cover the greater part of the district. Here an inexhaustible supply of underground water (to which the province owes its name Hasa) issues in strong springs, marking, according to Arab geographers, the course of a great subterranean river draining the Nejd highlands. Hofuf the capital, a town of 15,000 to 20,000 inhabitants, with its neighbour Mubāriz scarcely less populous, forms the centre of a thriving district 50 m. long by 15 m. in breadth, containing numerous villages each with richly cultivated fields and gardens. The town walls enclose a space of 1½ by 1 m., at the north-west angle of which is a remarkable citadel attributed to the Carmathian princes. Mubāriz is celebrated for its hot spring, known as Um Sabā or “mother of seven,” from the seven channels by which its water is distributed. Beyond the present limits of the oasis much of the country is well supplied with water, and ruined sites and half-obliterated canals show that it has only relapsed into waste in recent times. Cultivation reappears at Katif, a town situated on a small bay some 35 m. north-west of Bahrein. Date groves extend for several miles along the coast, which is low and muddy. The district is fertile but the climate is hot and unhealthy; still, owing to its convenient position, the town has a considerable trade with Bahrein and the gulf ports on one side and the interior of Nejd on the other. The fort is a strongly built enclosure attributed, like that at Hofuf, to the Carmathian prince Abu Tahir.

HASA, EL (Ahsa, Al Hasa) is a region in eastern Arabia that stretches along the Persian Gulf from Kuwait at 29° 20′ N. to the southern tip of the Gulf of Bahrain at 25° 10′ N., covering about 360 miles. To the west, it borders Nejd, and to the southeast, it is bounded by the El Katr peninsula, which is part of Oman. The coastline is low and flat, lacking deep-water ports except for Kuwait. From Kuwait to El Katif, the land is barren with no villages or permanent settlements, primarily inhabited by nomadic tribes, including the Bani Hajar, Ajman, and Khālid. The interior features low, rocky ridges that gradually rise to the inner plateau. However, the oases of Hofuf and Katif stand in stark contrast to the desolate areas that dominate much of the region. Here, there is an abundant supply of underground water (which gives the province its name, Hasa) that surfaces through strong springs, marking the path of a significant underground river that drains the Nejd highlands, according to Arab geographers. Hofuf, the capital, is a town with a population of 15,000 to 20,000, and its neighbor, Mubāriz, is almost equally populated, together forming the heart of a prosperous area measuring 50 miles long and 15 miles wide, filled with many villages of fertile fields and gardens. The town walls enclose an area of 1½ by 1 mile, and at the northwest corner is a notable citadel, attributed to the Carmathian princes. Mubāriz is known for its hot spring, called Um Sabā or “mother of seven,” named after the seven channels that distribute its water. Outside the current oasis limits, much of the land has ample water supply, with ruins and faded canals indicating that it has recently fallen into disrepair. Cultivation can be found again at Katif, a town located on a small bay about 35 miles northwest of Bahrain. Date orchards stretch for several miles along the low, muddy coastline. The district is fertile, but the climate is hot and unhealthy; nevertheless, due to its strategic location, the town engages in significant trade with Bahrain and the Gulf ports on one side and the interior of Nejd on the other. The fort is a solidly constructed area also attributed to the Carmathian prince Abu Tahir.

‘Uker or ‘Ujer is the nearest port to Hofuf, from which it is distant about 40 m.; large quantities of rice and piece goods transhipped at Bahrein are landed here and sent on by caravan to Hofuf, the great entrepôt for the trade between southern Nejd and the coast. It also shares in the valuable pearl fishery of Bahrein and the adjacent coast.

‘Uker or ‘Ujer is the closest port to Hofuf, located about 40 miles away. Large amounts of rice and textiles that are transferred at Bahrain are brought here and transported by caravan to Hofuf, which is the main trading hub between southern Nejd and the coast. It also participates in the valuable pearl fishing of Bahrain and the nearby coast.

Politically El Hasa is a dependency of Turkey, and its capital Hofuf is the headquarters of the sanjak or district of Nejd. Hofuf, Katif and El Katr were occupied by Turkish garrisons in 1871, and the occupation has been continued in spite of British protest as to El Katr, which according to the agreement made in 1867, when Bahrein was taken under British protection, was tributary to the latter. Turkish claims to Kuwēt have not been admitted by Great Britain.

Politically, El Hasa is a territory of Turkey, and its capital, Hofuf, serves as the center of the sanjak or district of Nejd. Hofuf, Katif, and El Katr were taken over by Turkish troops in 1871, and this occupation has persisted despite British objections regarding El Katr, which, according to the agreement made in 1867 when Bahrain came under British protection, was supposed to support the latter. Great Britain has not recognized Turkish claims to Kuwait.

Authorities.—W. G. Palgrave, Central and Eastern Arabia (London, 1865); L. Pelly, Journal R.G.S. (1866); S. M. Zwemer, Geog. Journal (1902); G. F. Sadlier, Diary of a Journey across Arabia (Bombay, 1866); V. Chirol, The Middle East (London, 1904).

Authorities.—W. G. Palgrave, Central and Eastern Arabia (London, 1865); L. Pelly, Journal R.G.S. (1866); S. M. Zwemer, Geog. Journal (1902); G. F. Sadlier, Diary of a Journey across Arabia (Bombay, 1866); V. Chirol, The Middle East (London, 1904).

(R. A. W.)

ḤASAN and ḤOSAIN (or Ḥusein), sons of the fourth Mahommedan caliph Ali by his wife Fatima, daughter of Mahomet. On Ali’s death Ḥasan was proclaimed caliph, but the strength of Moawiya who had rebelled against Ali was such that he resigned his claim on condition that he should have the disposal of the treasure stored at Kufa, with the revenues of Darabjird. This secret negotiation came to the ears of Ḥasan’s supporters, a mutiny broke out and Ḥasan was wounded. He retired to Medina where he died about 669. The story that he was poisoned at Moawiya’s instigation is generally discredited (see Caliphate, sect. B, § 1). Subsequently his brother Ḥosain was invited by partisans in Kufa to revolt against Moawiya’s successor Yazid. He was, however, defeated and killed at Kerbela on the 10th of October (Muharram) 680 (see Caliphate, sect. B, § 2 ad init.). Ḥosain is the hero of the Passion Play which is performed annually (e.g. at Kerbela) on the anniversary of his death by the Shi’ites of Persia and India, to whom from the earliest times the family of Ali are the only true descendants of Mahomet. The play lasts for several days and concludes with the carrying out of the coffins (tabūt) of the martyrs to an open place in the neighbourhood.

ḤASAN and ḤOSAIN (or Ḥusein), the sons of the fourth Muslim caliph Ali and his wife Fatima, who was the daughter of Muhammad. After Ali died, Ḥasan was named caliph, but Moawiya, who had rebelled against Ali, had such power that Ḥasan gave up his claim on the condition that he could control the treasure stored in Kufa and the revenues from Darabjird. This secret deal got out to Ḥasan’s supporters, leading to a mutiny where Ḥasan was wounded. He retreated to Medina, where he died around 669. The story that he was poisoned at Moawiya's request is largely discredited (see Caliphate, sect. B, § 1). Later, his brother Ḥosain was invited by supporters in Kufa to rebel against Moawiya's successor Yazid. However, he was defeated and killed at Kerbela on October 10 (Muharram) 680 (see Caliphate, sect. B, § 2 ad init.). Ḥosain is the focus of the Passion Play performed every year (for example, at Kerbela) on the anniversary of his death by Shi’ites in Persia and India, who have long viewed the family of Ali as the only true descendants of Muhammad. The play lasts several days and ends with the carrying out of the coffins (tabūt) of the martyrs to an open area nearby.

See Sir Wm. Muir, The Caliphate (1883); Sir Lewis Pelly, The Miracle Play of Hasan and Hosein (1879).

See Sir Wm. Muir, The Caliphate (1883); Sir Lewis Pelly, The Miracle Play of Hasan and Hosein (1879).


ḤASAN UL-BAṢRĪ [Abū Sa‘ūd ul-Ḥasan ibn Abī-l-Ḥasan Yassār ul-Baṣrī], (642-728 or 737), Arabian theologian, was born at Medina. His father was a freedman of Zaid ibn Thābit, one of the Anṣār (Helpers of the Prophet), his mother a client of Umm Salama, a wife of Mahomet. Tradition says that Umm Salama often nursed Ḥasan in his infancy. He was thus one of the Tābi‘ūn (i.e. of the generation that succeeded the Helpers). He became a teacher of Baṣra and founded a school there. Among his pupils was Wāṣil ibn ‘Atā, the founder of the Mo‘tazilites. He himself was a great supporter of orthodoxy and the most important representative of asceticism in the time of its first development. With him fear is the basis of morality, and sadness the characteristic of his religion. Life is only a pilgrimage, and comfort must be denied to subdue the passions. Many writers testify to the purity of his life and to his excelling in the virtues of Mahomet’s own companions. He was “as if he were in the other world.” In politics, too, he adhered to the earliest principles of Islam, being strictly opposed to the inherited caliphate of the Omayyads and a believer in the election of the caliph.

Ḥasan al-Basri [Abū Sa‘ūd ul-Ḥasan ibn Abī-l-Ḥasan Yassār ul-Baṣrī], (642-728 or 737), Arabian theologian, was born in Medina. His father was a freedman of Zaid ibn Thābit, one of the Anṣār (Helpers of the Prophet), and his mother was a client of Umm Salama, one of Muhammad's wives. According to tradition, Umm Salama often nursed Ḥasan when he was an infant. He was thus one of the Tābi‘ūn (i.e., the generation that followed the Helpers). He became a teacher in Baṣra and founded a school there. One of his students was Wāṣil ibn ‘Atā, who started the Mo‘tazilite movement. He himself strongly supported orthodoxy and was the main representative of asceticism during its early development. For him, fear was the foundation of morality, and sadness defined his religious outlook. He viewed life as merely a pilgrimage and believed that one must deny comfort to control their passions. Many writers have praised the purity of his life and his virtues, surpassing even those of Muhammad’s companions. He was described as “as if he were in the other world.” In political matters, he remained true to the foundational principles of Islam, firmly opposing the hereditary caliphate of the Umayyads and believing in the election of the caliph.

His life is given in Nawāwī’s Biographical Dictionary (ed. F. Wüstenfeld, Göttingen, 1842-1847). Cf. R. Dozy, Essai sur l’histoire de l’islamisme, pp. 201 sqq. (Leiden and Paris, 1879); A. von Kremer, Culturgeschichtliche Streifzüge, p. 5 seq.; R. A. Nicholson, A Literary History of the Arabs, pp. 225-227 (London, 1907).

His life is detailed in Nawāwī’s Biographical Dictionary (ed. F. Wüstenfeld, Göttingen, 1842-1847). See R. Dozy, Essai sur l’histoire de l’islamisme, pp. 201 sqq. (Leiden and Paris, 1879); A. von Kremer, Culturgeschichtliche Streifzüge, p. 5 seq.; R. A. Nicholson, A Literary History of the Arabs, pp. 225-227 (London, 1907).

(G. W. T.)

HASBEYA, or Hasbeiya, a town of the Druses, about 36 m. W. of Damascus, situated at the foot of Mt. Hermon in Syria, overlooking a deep amphitheatre from which a brook flows to the Hasbāni. The population is about 5000 (4000 Christians). Both sides of the valley are planted in terraces with olives, vines and other fruit trees. The grapes are either dried or made into a kind of syrup. In 1846 an American Protestant mission was established in the town. This little community suffered much persecution at first from the Greek Church, and afterwards from the Druses, by whom in 1860 nearly 1000 Christians were massacred, while others escaped to Tyre or Sidon. The castle in Hasbeya was held by the crusaders under Count Oran; but in 1171 the Druse emirs of the great Shehāb family (see Druses) recaptured it. In 1205 this family was confirmed in the lordship of the town and district, which they held till the Turkish authorities took possession of the castle in the 19th century. Near Hasbeya are bitumen pits let by the government; and to the north, at the source of the Hasbāni, the ground is volcanic. Some travellers have attempted to identify Hasbeya with the biblical Baal-Gad or Baal-Hermon.

HASBEYA, or Hasbaya, is a town of the Druze, located about 36 miles west of Damascus, at the base of Mt. Hermon in Syria. It overlooks a deep amphitheater from which a stream flows to the Hasbāni River. The population is around 5,000, with 4,000 being Christians. Both sides of the valley are terraced with olive, vine, and other fruit trees. The grapes are either dried or turned into a type of syrup. An American Protestant mission was established in Hasbeya in 1846. This small community faced significant persecution initially from the Greek Church and later from the Druze, who massacred nearly 1,000 Christians in 1860, while others fled to Tyre or Sidon. The castle in Hasbeya was held by the Crusaders under Count Oran, but in 1171, the Druze emirs of the prominent Shehāb family (see Druses) regained control of it. In 1205, this family was confirmed in their lordship over the town and district, a position they maintained until the Turkish authorities took control of the castle in the 19th century. Near Hasbeya, there are bitumen pits leased by the government, and to the north, at the source of the Hasbāni, the ground is volcanic. Some travelers have tried to associate Hasbeya with the biblical Baal-Gad or Baal-Hermon.


ḤASDAI IBN SHAPRUT, the founder of the new culture of the Jews in Moorish Spain in the 10th century. He was both physician and minister to Caliph Abd ar-Raḥman III. in Cordova. A man of wide learning and culture, he encouraged the settlement of Jewish scholars in Andalusia, and his patronage of literature, science and art promoted the Jewish renaissance in Europe. Poetry, philology, philosophy all flourished under his encouragement, and his name was handed down to posterity as the first of the many Spanish Jews who combined diplomatic skill with artistic culture. This type was the creation of the Moors in Andalusia, and the Jews ably seconded the Mahommedans in the effort to make life at once broad and deep.

ḤasDAI Ibn Shaprut, was the founder of the new culture of the Jews in Moorish Spain in the 10th century. He served as both a physician and a minister to Caliph Abd ar-Raḥman III in Cordova. A highly educated man, he promoted the settlement of Jewish scholars in Andalusia, and his support of literature, science, and art fueled the Jewish renaissance in Europe. Poetry, linguistics, and philosophy thrived under his guidance, and his name became well-known as the first of many Spanish Jews who skillfully blended diplomacy with artistic culture. This combination arose from the Moors in Andalusia, and the Jews effectively supported the Muslims in the effort to enrich life with both breadth and depth.

(I. A.)

HASDEU, or Hăjdeu, BOGDAN PETRICEICU (1836-1907), Rumanian philologist, was born at Khotin in Bessarabia in 1836, and studied at the university of Kharkov. In 1858 he first settled in Jassy as professor of the high school and librarian. He may be considered as the pioneer in many branches of Rumanian philology and history. At Jassy he started his Archiva historica a Romaniei (1865-1867), in which a large number of old documents in Slavonic and Rumanian were published for the first time. In 1870 he inaugurated Columna lui Traian, the best philological review of the time in Rumania. In his Cuvente den Bătrăni (2 vols., 1878-1881) he was the first to contribute to the history of apocryphal literature in Rumania. His Historia critica a Romanilor (1875), though incomplete, marks the beginning of critical investigation into the history of Rumania. Hasdeu edited the ancient Psalter of Coresi of 1577 (Psaltirea lui Coresi, 1881). His Etymologicum magnum Romaniae (1886, &c.) is the beginning of an encyclopaedic dictionary of the Rumanian language, though never finished 50 beyond the letter B. In 1876 he was appointed director of the state archives in Bucharest and in 1878 professor of philology at the university of Bucharest. His works, which include one drama, Rasvan şi Vidra, bear the impress of great originality of thought, and the author is often carried away by his profound erudition and vast imagination. Hasdeu was a keen politician. After the death of his only child Julia in 1888 he became a mystic and a strong believer in spiritism. He died at Campina on the 7th of September 1907.

HASDEU, or Hăjdeu, BOGDAN PETRICEICU (1836-1907), Rumanian philologist, was born in Khotin, Bessarabia, in 1836 and studied at the University of Kharkov. In 1858, he settled in Jassy as a high school professor and librarian. He can be seen as a pioneer in many areas of Rumanian philology and history. In Jassy, he launched his Archiva historica a Romaniei (1865-1867), where a large number of old documents in Slavonic and Rumanian were published for the first time. In 1870, he started Columna lui Traian, the leading philological journal of the time in Rumania. In his Cuvente den Bătrăni (2 vols., 1878-1881), he was the first to contribute to the history of apocryphal literature in Rumania. His Historia critica a Romanilor (1875), although incomplete, marks the start of critical investigation into Rumanian history. Hasdeu edited the ancient Psalter of Coresi from 1577 (Psaltirea lui Coresi, 1881). His Etymologicum magnum Romaniae (1886, &c.) is the beginning of an encyclopedic dictionary of the Rumanian language, though it was never finished beyond the letter B. In 1876, he was appointed director of the state archives in Bucharest and in 1878, he became a professor of philology at the University of Bucharest. His works, which include one drama, Rasvan şi Vidra, show a great originality of thought, and the author is often swept away by his deep knowledge and imagination. Hasdeu was an active politician. After the death of his only child Julia in 1888, he turned to mysticism and became a strong believer in spiritism. He died in Campina on September 7, 1907.

(M. G.)

HASDRUBAL, the name of several Carthaginian generals, among whom the following are the most important:—

HASDRUBAL, the name of several Carthaginian generals, among whom the following are the most significant:—

1. The son-in-law of Hamilcar Barca (q.v.), who followed the latter in his campaign against the governing aristocracy at Carthage at the close of the First Punic War, and in his subsequent career of conquest in Spain. After Hamilcar’s death (228) Hasdrubal, who succeeded him in the command, extended the newly acquired empire by skilful diplomacy, and consolidated it by the foundation of New Carthage (Cartagena) as the capital of the new province, and by a treaty with Rome which fixed the Ebro as the boundary between the two powers. In 221 he was killed by an assassin.

1. The son-in-law of Hamilcar Barca (q.v.), who took over after him in the campaign against the ruling aristocracy in Carthage at the end of the First Punic War, and in his later conquests in Spain. After Hamilcar’s death (228), Hasdrubal, who took over command, expanded the newly acquired empire through smart diplomacy and strengthened it by establishing New Carthage (Cartagena) as the capital of the new province and by signing a treaty with Rome that set the Ebro as the boundary between the two powers. In 221, he was assassinated.

Polybius ii. 1; Livy xxi. 1; Appian, Hispanica, 4-8.

Polybius ii. 1; Livy xxi. 1; Appian, Hispanica, 4-8.

2. The second son of Hamilcar Barca, and younger brother of Hannibal. Left in command of Spain when Hannibal departed to Italy (218), he fought for six years against the brothers Gnaeus and Publius Scipio. He had on the whole the worst of the conflict, and a defeat in 216 prevented him from joining Hannibal in Italy at a critical moment; but in 212 he completely routed his opponents, both the Scipios being killed. He was subsequently outgeneralled by Publius Scipio the Younger, who in 209 captured New Carthage and gained other advantages. In the same year he was summoned to join his brother in Italy. He eluded Scipio by crossing the Pyrenees at their western extremity, and, making his way thence through Gaul and the Alps in safety, penetrated far into Central Italy (207). He was ultimately checked by two Roman armies, and being forced to give battle was decisively defeated on the banks of the Metaurus. Hasdrubal himself fell in the fight; his head was cut off and thrown into Hannibal’s camp as a sign of his utter defeat.

2. The second son of Hamilcar Barca and younger brother of Hannibal. Left in charge of Spain when Hannibal went to Italy (218), he fought for six years against the brothers Gnaeus and Publius Scipio. Overall, he had the tougher side of the conflict, and a defeat in 216 prevented him from joining Hannibal in Italy at a crucial time; but in 212, he completely destroyed his opponents, with both Scipios being killed. He was later outsmarted by Publius Scipio the Younger, who captured New Carthage in 209 and gained other advantages. In that same year, he was called to join his brother in Italy. He evaded Scipio by crossing the Pyrenees at their western end and made his way through Gaul and the Alps safely, penetrating deep into Central Italy (207). He was eventually stopped by two Roman armies, and when forced to battle, he was decisively defeated on the banks of the Metaurus. Hasdrubal himself died in the fight; his head was chopped off and thrown into Hannibal’s camp as a sign of his total defeat.

Polybius x. 34-xi. 3; Livy xxvii. 1-51; Appian, Bellum Hannibalicum, ch. lii. sqq.; R. Oehler, Der letzte Feldzug des Barkiden Hasdrubals (Berlin, 1897); C. Lehmann, Die Angriffe der drei Barkiden auf Italien (Leipzig, 1905). See also Punic Wars.

Polybius x. 34-xi. 3; Livy xxvii. 1-51; Appian, Bellum Hannibalicum, ch. lii. sqq.; R. Oehler, Der letzte Feldzug des Barkiden Hasdrubals (Berlin, 1897); C. Lehmann, Die Angriffe der drei Barkiden auf Italien (Leipzig, 1905). See also Punic Wars.


HASE, CARL BENEDICT (1780-1864), French Hellenist, of German extraction, was born at Sulza near Naumburg on the 11th of May 1780. Having studied at Jena and Helmstedt, in 1801 he made his way on foot to Paris, where he was commissioned by the comte de Choiseul-Gouffier, late ambassador to Constantinople, to edit the works of Johannes Lydus from a MS. given to Choiseul by Prince Mourousi. Hase thereupon decided to devote himself to Byzantine history and literature, on which he became the acknowledged authority. In 1805 he obtained an appointment in the MSS. department of the royal library; in 1816 became professor of palaeography and modern Greek at the École Royale, and in 1852 professor of comparative grammar in the university. In 1812 he was selected to superintend the studies of Louis Napoleon (afterwards Napoleon III.) and his brother. He died on the 21st of March 1864. His most important works are the editions of Leo Diaconus and other Byzantine writers (1819), and of Johannes Lydus, De ostentis (1823), a masterpiece of textual restoration, the difficulties of which were aggravated by the fact that the MS. had for a long time been stowed away in a wine-barrel in a monastery. He also edited part of the Greek authors in the collection of the Historians of the Crusades and contributed many additions (from the fathers, medical and technical writers, scholiasts and other sources) to the new edition of Stephanus’s Thesaurus.

HASE, CARL BENEDICT (1780-1864), a French expert in Greek, originally from Germany, was born in Sulza near Naumburg on May 11, 1780. After studying at Jena and Helmstedt, he walked to Paris in 1801, where he was tasked by Comte de Choiseul-Gouffier, the former ambassador to Constantinople, to edit the works of Johannes Lydus using a manuscript given to Choiseul by Prince Mourousi. Hase then chose to focus on Byzantine history and literature, becoming a recognized authority in the field. In 1805, he secured a position in the manuscript department of the royal library; in 1816, he became a professor of paleography and modern Greek at the École Royale, and in 1852, he was appointed professor of comparative grammar at the university. In 1812, he was selected to oversee the studies of Louis Napoleon (later Napoleon III) and his brother. He passed away on March 21, 1864. His major works include editions of Leo Diaconus and other Byzantine writers (1819) and Johannes Lydus's De ostentis (1823), a remarkable achievement in textual restoration, complicated by the fact that the manuscript had been hidden in a wine barrel in a monastery for a long time. He also edited portions of Greek authors in the collection of the Historians of the Crusades and contributed numerous additions (from church fathers, medical and technical writers, scholiasts, and other sources) to the new edition of Stephanus’s Thesaurus.

See J. D. Guigniaut, Notice historique sur la vie et les travaux de Carl Benedict Hase (Paris, 1867); articles in Nouvelle Biographie générale and Allgemeine deutsche Biographie; and a collection of autobiographical letters, Briefe von der Wanderung und aus Paris, edited by O. Heine (1894), containing a vivid account of Hase’s journey, his enthusiastic impressions of Paris and the hardships of his early life.

See J. D. Guigniaut, Notice historique sur la vie et les travaux de Carl Benedict Hase (Paris, 1867); articles in Nouvelle Biographie générale and Allgemeine deutsche Biographie; and a collection of autobiographical letters, Briefe von der Wanderung und aus Paris, edited by O. Heine (1894), which includes a vivid account of Hase’s journey, his enthusiastic impressions of Paris, and the challenges he faced in his early life.


HASE, KARL AUGUST VON (1800-1890), German Protestant theologian and Church historian, was born at Steinbach in Saxony on the 25th of August 1800. He studied at Leipzig and Erlangen, and in 1829 was called to Jena as professor of theology. He retired in 1883 and was made a baron. He died at Jena on the 3rd of January 1890. Hase’s aim was to reconcile modern culture with historical Christianity in a scientific way. But though a liberal theologian, he was no dry rationalist. Indeed, he vigorously attacked rationalism, as distinguished from the rational principle, charging it with being unscientific inasmuch as it ignored the historical significance of Christianity, shut its eyes to individuality and failed to give religious feeling its due. His views are presented scientifically in his Evangelisch-protestantische Dogmatik (1826; 6th ed., 1870), the value of which “lies partly in the full and judiciously chosen historical materials prefixed to each dogma, and partly in the skill, caution and tact with which the permanent religious significance of various dogmas is discussed” (Otto Pfleiderer). More popular in style is his Gnosis oder prot.-evang. Glaubenslehre (3 vols., 1827-1829; 2nd ed. in 2 vols., 1869-1870). But his reputation rests chiefly on his treatment of Church history in his Kirchengeschichte, Lehrbuch zunächst für akademische Vorlesungen (1834, 12th ed., 1900).

Hase, Karl August von (1800-1890), a German Protestant theologian and Church historian, was born in Steinbach, Saxony, on August 25, 1800. He studied at Leipzig and Erlangen, and in 1829, he was appointed as a professor of theology in Jena. He retired in 1883 and was granted the title of baron. He passed away in Jena on January 3, 1890. Hase aimed to reconcile modern culture with historical Christianity in a scientific manner. Although he was a liberal theologian, he was not a dry rationalist. In fact, he strongly criticized rationalism, distinguishing it from rational principles, accusing it of being unscientific because it ignored the historical importance of Christianity, overlooked individuality, and didn't adequately recognize religious feelings. His views are scientifically presented in his Evangelisch-protestantische Dogmatik (1826; 6th ed., 1870), which is valuable for its thorough and well-chosen historical materials prefixed to each dogma, as well as the skillful, careful, and tactful way in which he discusses the lasting religious significance of various dogmas (Otto Pfleiderer). His writing is more accessible in Gnosis oder prot.-evang. Glaubenslehre (3 vols., 1827-1829; 2nd ed. in 2 vols., 1869-1870). However, his reputation primarily rests on his examination of Church history in his Kirchengeschichte, Lehrbuch zunächst für akademische Vorlesungen (1834, 12th ed., 1900).

His biographical studies, Franz von Assisi (1856; 2nd ed., 1892), Katerina von Siena (1864; 2nd ed., 1892), Neue Propheten (Die Jungfrau von Orleans, Savonarola, Thomas Münzer) are judicious and sympathetic. Other works are: Hutterus redivivus oder Dogmatik der evang.-luth. Kirche (1827; 12th ed., 1883), in which he sought to present the teaching of the Protestant church in such a way as Hutter would have reconstructed it, had he still been alive; Leben Jesu (1829; 5th ed., 1865; Eng. trans., 1860); in an enlarged form, Geschichte Jesu (2nd ed., 1891); and Handbuch der prot. Polemik gegen die röm.-kath. Kirche (1862; 7th ed., 1900; Eng. trans., 1906).

His biographical studies, Franz von Assisi (1856; 2nd ed., 1892), Katerina von Siena (1864; 2nd ed., 1892), and Neue Propheten (The Maid of Orleans, Savonarola, Thomas Münzer) are insightful and compassionate. Other works include: Hutterus redivivus oder Dogmatik der evang.-luth. Kirche (1827; 12th ed., 1883), where he aimed to present the teachings of the Protestant church as Hutter would have reconstructed them if he were still alive; Leben Jesu (1829; 5th ed., 1865; Eng. trans., 1860); in an expanded version, Geschichte Jesu (2nd ed., 1891); and Handbuch der prot. Polemik gegen die röm.-kath. Kirche (1862; 7th ed., 1900; Eng. trans., 1906).

For his life see his Ideale und Irrtümer (1872; 5th ed., 1894) and Annalen meines Lebens (1891); and cf. generally Otto Pfleiderer, Development of Theology (1890); F. Lichtenberger, Hist. of German Theology (1889).

For more about his life, check out his Ideale und Irrtümer (1872; 5th ed., 1894) and Annalen meines Lebens (1891); and see also Otto Pfleiderer, Development of Theology (1890); F. Lichtenberger, Hist. of German Theology (1889).


HASHISH, or Hasheesh, the Arabic name, meaning literally “dried herb,” for the various preparations of the Indian hemp plant (Cannabis indica), used as a narcotic or intoxicant in the East, and either smoked, chewed or drunk (see Hemp and Bhang). From the Arabic hashīshīn, i.e. “hemp-eaters,” comes the English “assassin” (see Assassin).

HASHISH, or Hashish, the Arabic term meaning literally “dried herb,” refers to the different preparations of the Indian hemp plant (Cannabis indica), which is used as a drug or intoxicant in the East, and can be smoked, chewed, or consumed as a drink (see Hemp and Bhang). The English word “assassin” comes from the Arabic hashīshīn, meaning “hemp-eaters” (see Assassin).


HASLEMERE, a market-town in the Guildford parliamentary division of Surrey, England, 43 m. S.W. from London by the London & South-Western railway. It is situated in an elevated valley between the bold ridges of Hindhead (895 ft.) and Blackdown (918 ft.). Their summits are open and covered with heath, but their flanks and the lower ground are magnificently wooded. The hills are deeply scored by steep and picturesque valleys, of which the most remarkable is the Devil’s Punch Bowl, a hollow of regular form on the west flank of Hindhead. The invigorating air has combined with scenic attraction to make the district a favourite place of residence. Professor Tyndall built a house on the top of Hindhead, setting an example followed by many others. On Blackdown, closely screened by plantations, is Aldworth, built for Alfred, Lord Tennyson, who died here in 1892. George Eliot stayed for a considerable period at Shottermill, a neighbouring village. Pop. of Haslemere (1901), 2614; of Hindhead, 666.

HASLEMERE, is a market town in the Guildford parliamentary division of Surrey, England, located 43 miles southwest of London by the London & South-Western railway. It sits in an elevated valley between the striking ridges of Hindhead (895 ft.) and Blackdown (918 ft.). Their tops are open and covered with heath, but the slopes and lower areas are beautifully wooded. The hills are deeply carved by steep and scenic valleys, with the most notable being the Devil’s Punch Bowl, a hollow of regular shape on the west side of Hindhead. The refreshing air, along with the scenic beauty, has made the district a popular place to live. Professor Tyndall built a house on top of Hindhead, setting an example that many others followed. On Blackdown, well-hidden by trees, is Aldworth, built for Alfred, Lord Tennyson, who passed away here in 1892. George Eliot spent a significant amount of time at Shottermill, a nearby village. Population of Haslemere (1901), 2,614; of Hindhead, 666.


HASLINGDEN, a market-town and municipal borough in the Rossendale and Heywood parliamentary divisions of Lancashire, England, 19 m. N. by W. from Manchester by the Lancashire & Yorkshire railway. Pop. (1901), 18,543. It lies in a hilly district on the borders of the forest of Rossendale, and is supposed by some to derive its name from the hazel trees which formerly abounded in its neighbourhood. The old town stood on the slope of a hill, but the modern part has extended about its base. The parish church of St James was rebuilt in 1780, with the exception of the tower, which dates from the time of Henry VIII. The woollen manufacture was formerly the staple. The town, however, steadily increasing in importance, has cotton, woollen and engineering works—coal-mining, quarrying and brickmaking are carried on in the neighbourhood. The borough, 51 as incorporated in 1891, comprised several townships and parts of townships, but under the Local Government Act of 1894 these were united into one civil parish. The corporation consists of a mayor, 6 aldermen and 18 councillors. Area, 8196 acres.

HASLINGDEN, is a market town and municipal borough in the Rossendale and Heywood parliamentary divisions of Lancashire, England, located 19 miles N. by W. from Manchester via the Lancashire & Yorkshire railway. Population (1901) was 18,543. It sits in a hilly area on the edge of the forest of Rossendale, and some believe its name comes from the hazel trees that used to flourish nearby. The old town was built on the slope of a hill, but the modern part has expanded around its base. The parish church of St James was rebuilt in 1780, except for the tower, which dates back to the time of Henry VIII. Woolen manufacturing used to be the main industry, but the town has been growing in importance and now has cotton, woolen, and engineering businesses—coal mining, quarrying, and brickmaking also happen in the area. The borough, 51 formed in 1891, included several townships and parts of townships, but following the Local Government Act of 1894, these were combined into one civil parish. The corporation consists of a mayor, 6 aldermen, and 18 councillors. Area: 8,196 acres.


HASPE, a town of Germany, in the Prussian province of Westphalia, in the valley of the Ennepe, at the confluence of the Hasper, and on the railway from Düsseldorf to Dortmund, 10 m. N.E. of Barmen by rail. Pop. (1905), 19,813. Its industries include iron foundries, rolling mills, puddling furnaces, and manufactures of iron, steel and brass wares and of machines. Haspe was raised to the rank of a town in 1873.

HASPE, is a town in Germany, located in the Prussian province of Westphalia, in the valley of the Ennepe, at the meeting point of the Hasper River, and on the railway line from Düsseldorf to Dortmund, about 10 miles northeast of Barmen by train. Population (1905), 19,813. The local industries include iron foundries, rolling mills, puddling furnaces, as well as the manufacturing of iron, steel, brass goods, and machinery. Haspe was officially established as a town in 1873.


HASSAM, CHILDE (1859-  ), American figure and landscape painter, born in Boston, Massachusetts, was a pupil of Boulanger and Lefebvre in Paris. He soon fell under the influence of the Impressionists, and took to painting in a style of his own, in brilliant colour, with effective touches of pure pigment. He won a bronze medal at the Paris Exhibition of 1889; medals at the World’s Fair, Chicago, 1893; Boston Art Club, 1896; Philadelphia Art Club, 1892; Carnegie Institute, Pittsburg, 1898; Buffalo Pan-American, 1901; Temple gold medal, Pennsylvania Academy of Fine Arts, Philadelphia, 1899; and silver medal, Paris Exhibition, 1900. He became a member of the National Academy of Design, the Society of American Artists, the Ten Americans, the American Water Colour Society, the Société Nationale des Beaux Arts, Paris, and the Secession Society, Munich.

HASSAM, CHILDE (1859-  ), American figure and landscape painter, born in Boston, Massachusetts, studied under Boulanger and Lefebvre in Paris. He quickly became influenced by the Impressionists and developed his own painting style, using vibrant colors and effective applications of pure pigment. He received a bronze medal at the Paris Exhibition of 1889; medals at the World’s Fair in Chicago in 1893; Boston Art Club in 1896; Philadelphia Art Club in 1892; Carnegie Institute in Pittsburgh in 1898; Buffalo Pan-American in 1901; Temple gold medal from the Pennsylvania Academy of Fine Arts in Philadelphia in 1899; and a silver medal at the Paris Exhibition in 1900. He was elected to the National Academy of Design, the Society of American Artists, the Ten Americans, the American Water Colour Society, the Société Nationale des Beaux Arts in Paris, and the Secession Society in Munich.


HASSAN, a town and district of Mysore, India. The town dates from the 11th century and had in 1901 a population of 8241. The district naturally divides into two portions, the Malnad, or hill country, which includes some of the highest ranges of the Western Ghats, and the Maidan or plain country, sloping towards the south. The Hemavati, which flows into the Cauvery in the extreme south, is the most important river of the district. The upper slopes of the Western Ghats are abundantly clothed with magnificent forests, and wild animals abound. Among the mineral products are kaolin, felspar and quartz. The soil of the valleys is a rich red alluvial loam. The area is 2547 sq. m. Population (1901), 568,919, showing an increase of 11% in the decade. The district contains some of the most remarkable archaeological monuments in India, such as the colossal Jain image at Sravana Belgola (a monolith 57 ft. high on the summit of a hill) and the great temple at Halebid. Coffee cultivation has been on the increase of late years. The first plantation was opened in 1843, and now there are many coffee estates owned by Europeans and also native holdings. The exports are large, consisting chiefly of food-grains and coffee. The imports are European piece-goods, hardware of all sorts and spices. The largest weekly fair is held at Alur. A great annual religious gathering and fair, attended by about 10,000 persons, takes place every year at Melukot. The Southern Mahratta railway traverses the north-east of the district.

HASSAN, is a town and district in Mysore, India. The town has been around since the 11th century and had a population of 8,241 in 1901. The district is divided into two main areas: the Malnad, or hill country, which features some of the highest peaks of the Western Ghats, and the Maidan or plain country, which slopes toward the south. The Hemavati, flowing into the Cauvery in the far south, is the most important river in the district. The upper slopes of the Western Ghats are densely covered with beautiful forests, and wildlife is plentiful. Mineral products found in the area include kaolin, felspar, and quartz. The soil in the valleys is a rich red alluvial loam. The total area is 2,547 square miles. The population in 1901 was 568,919, indicating an increase of 11% over the past decade. The district is home to some of the most notable archaeological sites in India, like the massive Jain statue at Sravana Belgola (a 57-ft monolith at the top of a hill) and the grand temple at Halebid. Coffee farming has been growing in recent years, with the first plantation established in 1843. There are now many coffee estates owned by Europeans as well as local farmers. Exports primarily consist of food grains and coffee, while imports include European textiles, various hardware, and spices. The largest weekly market occurs in Alur, and a significant annual religious festival and fair, attracting about 10,000 attendees, is held every year at Melukot. The Southern Mahratta railway runs through the northeastern part of the district.

The real history of Hassan does not begin until the epoch of the Hoysala dynasty, which lasted from the 11th till the 14th century. Their capital was at Dwarasamundra (Dwaravati-pura), the ruins of which are still to be seen scattered round the village of Halebid. The earlier kings professed the Jain faith, but the finest temples were erected to Siva by the later monarchs of the line. While they were at the zenith of their power the whole of southern India acknowledged their sway.

The real history of Hassan starts during the Hoysala dynasty, which lasted from the 11th to the 14th century. Their capital was Dwarasamundra (Dwaravati-pura), and the ruins can still be seen around the village of Halebid. The earlier kings followed the Jain faith, but the most impressive temples were built for Shiva by the later kings of the dynasty. At the peak of their power, the entire southern India recognized their rule.


HASSANĪA, an African tribe of Semitic stock. They inhabit the desert between Merawi and the Nile at the 6th Cataract, and the left bank of the Blue Nile immediately south of Khartum.

HASSANĪA, an African tribe of Semitic origin. They live in the desert between Merawi and the Nile at the 6th Cataract, and on the left bank of the Blue Nile just south of Khartum.


HASSĀN IBN THĀBIT (died 674), Arabian poet, was born in Yathrib (Medina), a member of the tribe Khazraj. In his youth he travelled to Hira and Damascus, then settled in Medina, where, after the advent of Mahomet, he accepted Islam and wrote poems in defence of the prophet. His poetry is regarded as commonplace and lacking in distinction.

Hassan Ibn Thabit (died 674), an Arabian poet, was born in Yathrib (Medina) and was part of the Khazraj tribe. In his youth, he traveled to Hira and Damascus before settling in Medina, where, after the arrival of Muhammad, he embraced Islam and wrote poems in support of the prophet. His poetry is seen as ordinary and not particularly remarkable.

His diwan has been published at Bombay (1864), Tunis (1864) and Lahore (1878). See H. Hirschfeld’s “Prolegomena to an edition of the Diwan of Hassan” in Transactions of Oriental Congress (London, 1892).

His diwan was published in Bombay (1864), Tunis (1864), and Lahore (1878). See H. Hirschfeld’s “Prolegomena to an edition of the Diwan of Hassan” in Transactions of Oriental Congress (London, 1892).

(G. W. T.)

HASSE, JOHANN ADOLPH (1699-1783), German musical composer, was born at Bergedorf near Hamburg, on the 25th of March 1699, and received his first musical education from his father. Being possessed of a fine tenor voice, he chose the theatrical career, and joined the operatic troupe conducted by Reinhard Keiser, in whose orchestra Handel had played the second violin some years before. Hasse’s success led to an engagement at the court theatre of Brunswick, and it was there that, in 1723, he made his début as a composer with the opera Antigonus. The success of this first work induced the duke to send Hasse to Italy for the completion of his studies, and in 1724 he went to Naples and placed himself under Porpora, with whom, however, he seems to have disagreed both as a man and as an artist. On the other hand he gained the friendship of Alessandro Scarlatti, to whom he owed his first commission for a serenade for two voices, sung at a family celebration of a wealthy merchant by two of the greatest singers of Italy, Farinelli and Signora Tesi. This event established Hasse’s fame; he soon became very popular, and his opera Sesostrato, written for the Royal Opera at Naples in 1726, made his name known all over Italy. At Venice, where he went in 1727, he became acquainted with the celebrated singer Faustina Bordogni (born at Venice in 1700), who became the composer’s wife in 1730. The two artists soon afterwards went to Dresden, in compliance with a brilliant offer made to them by the splendour-loving elector of Saxony, Augustus II. There Hasse remained for two years, after which he again journeyed to Italy, and also in 1733 to London, in which latter city he was tempted by the aristocratic clique inimical to Handel to become the rival and antagonist of that great master. But this he modestly and wisely declined, remaining in London only long enough to superintend the rehearsals for his opera Artaserse (first produced at Venice, 1730). All this while Faustina had remained at Dresden, the declared favourite of the public and unfortunately also of the elector, nor was her husband, who remained attached to her, allowed to see her except at long intervals. In 1739, after the death of Augustus II., Hasse settled permanently at Dresden till 1763, when he and his wife retired from court service with considerable pensions. But Hasse was still too young to rest on his laurels. He went with his family to Vienna, and added several operas to the great number of his works already in existence. His last work for the stage was the opera Ruggiero (1771), written for the wedding of Archduke Ferdinand at Milan. On the same occasion a work by Mozart, then fourteen years old, was performed, and Hasse observed “this youngster will surpass us all.” By desire of his wife Hasse settled at her birthplace Venice, and there he died on the 23rd of December 1783. His compositions include as many as 120 operas, besides oratorios, cantatas, masses, and almost every variety of instrumental music. During the siege of Dresden by the Prussians in 1760, most of his manuscripts, collected for a complete edition to be brought out at the expense of the elector, were burnt. Some of his works, amongst them an opera Alcide al Bivio (1760), have been published, and the libraries of Vienna and Dresden possess the autographs of others. Hasse’s instrumentation is certainly not above the low level attained by the average musicians of his time, and his ensembles do not present any features of interest. In dramatic fire also he was wanting, but he had a fund of gentle and genuine melody, and by this fact his enormous popularity during his life must be accounted for. The two airs which Farinelli had to repeat every day for ten years to the melancholy king of Spain, Philip V., were both from Hasse’s works. Of Faustina Hasse it will be sufficient to add that she was, according to the unanimous verdict of the critics (including Dr Burney), one of the greatest singers of a time rich in vocal artists. The year of her death is not exactly known. Most probably it shortly preceded that of her husband.

HASSE, JOHANN ADOLPH (1699-1783), a German composer, was born in Bergedorf near Hamburg on March 25, 1699, and received his initial musical training from his father. With a beautiful tenor voice, he pursued a career in theater and joined the operatic group led by Reinhard Keiser, where Handel had played second violin years earlier. Hasse's success led to a position at the court theater in Brunswick, where he debuted as a composer with the opera Antigonus in 1723. The success of this first opera encouraged the duke to send Hasse to Italy to further his studies. In 1724, he traveled to Naples and studied under Porpora, although they apparently disagreed both personally and artistically. However, he gained the friendship of Alessandro Scarlatti, who gave him his first commission for a serenade for two voices, performed at a family celebration by two of Italy's top singers, Farinelli and Signora Tesi. This event established Hasse's reputation, and his opera Sesostrato, written for the Royal Opera in Naples in 1726, made him well-known throughout Italy. In 1727, during a visit to Venice, he met the famous singer Faustina Bordogni (born in Venice in 1700), who became his wife in 1730. Soon after, they moved to Dresden, following an impressive offer from the luxury-loving elector of Saxony, Augustus II. Hasse spent two years there before returning to Italy, and then in 1733, to London, where he was invited by the aristocratic faction opposed to Handel to be his rival. He modestly declined this, staying in London just long enough to oversee the rehearsals for his opera Artaserse (first performed in Venice in 1730). Meanwhile, Faustina remained in Dresden, adored by the public and, unfortunately, also by the elector, and her husband could only see her infrequently. In 1739, following Augustus II's death, Hasse permanently settled in Dresden until 1763, when he and his wife left their court positions with substantial pensions. However, Hasse was still too young to rest on his accomplishments. He relocated with his family to Vienna and composed several more operas to add to his impressive catalog. His final stage work was the opera Ruggiero (1771), created for Archduke Ferdinand's wedding in Milan. At the same event, a piece by Mozart, just fourteen years old at the time, was performed, and Hasse remarked, “this kid will outshine us all.” At his wife's request, Hasse settled in her hometown of Venice, where he died on December 23, 1783. His works include around 120 operas, in addition to oratorios, cantatas, masses, and nearly every kind of instrumental music. During the Prussian siege of Dresden in 1760, most of his manuscripts, prepared for a complete edition funded by the elector, were destroyed. Some of his works, including the opera Alcide al Bivio (1760), have been published, and the libraries in Vienna and Dresden hold autographs of others. Hasse's orchestration is certainly not outstanding compared to the average musicians of his time, and his ensembles lack intriguing features. He also lacked dramatic intensity, but he had a wealth of gentle and genuine melodies, which explains his enormous popularity during his lifetime. The two pieces that Farinelli performed daily for ten years for the melancholic King of Spain, Philip V, were both from Hasse's compositions. Regarding Faustina Hasse, it suffices to say that critics, including Dr. Burney, unanimously considered her one of the greatest singers of a time rich with vocal talent. The exact year of her death is unknown but likely occurred shortly before her husband's.


HASSELQUIST, FREDERIK (1722-1752), Swedish traveller and naturalist, was born at Törnevalla, East Gothland, on the 3rd of January 1722. On account of the frequently expressed regrets of Linnaeus, under whom he studied at Upsala, at the lack of information regarding the natural history of Palestine, 52 Hasselquist resolved to undertake a journey to that country, and a sufficient subscription having been obtained to defray expenses, he reached Smyrna towards the end of 1749. He visited parts of Asia Minor, Egypt, Cyprus and Palestine, making large natural history collections, but his constitution, naturally weak, gave way under the fatigues of travel, and he died near Smyrna on the 9th of February 1752 on his way home. His collections reached home in safety, and five years after his death his notes were published by Linnaeus under the title Resa till Heliga Landet förättad från år 1749 till 1752, which was translated into French and German in 1762 and into English in 1766.

HASSELQUIST, FREDERIK (1722-1752), a Swedish traveler and naturalist, was born in Törnevalla, East Gothland, on January 3, 1722. Due to the frequent concerns expressed by Linnaeus, his professor at Upsala, regarding the lack of information about the natural history of Palestine, 52 Hasselquist decided to embark on a journey to that region. After securing enough funding to cover his expenses, he arrived in Smyrna toward the end of 1749. He traveled through parts of Asia Minor, Egypt, Cyprus, and Palestine, gathering extensive natural history collections. However, his naturally weak constitution was unable to withstand the hardships of travel, and he passed away near Smyrna on February 9, 1752, while on his way home. His collections arrived home safely, and five years after his death, Linnaeus published his notes under the title Resa till Heliga Landet förättad från år 1749 till 1752, which was translated into French and German in 1762 and into English in 1766.


HASSELT, ANDRÉ HENRI CONSTANT VAN (1806-1874), Belgian poet, was born at Maastricht, in Limburg, on the 5th of January 1806. He was educated in his native town, and at the university of Liége. In 1833 he left Maastricht, then blockaded by the Belgian forces, and made his way to Brussels, where he became a naturalized Belgian, and was attached to the Bibliothèque de Bourgogne. In 1843 be entered the education department, and eventually became an inspector of normal schools. His native language was Dutch, and as a French poet André van Hasselt had to overcome the difficulties of writing in a foreign language. He had published a Chant hellénique in honour of Canaris in the columns of La Sentinelle des Pays-Bas as early as 1826, and other poems followed. His first volume of verse, Primevères (1834), shows markedly the influence of Victor Hugo, which had been strengthened by a visit to Paris in 1830. His relations with Hugo became intimate in 1851-1852, when the poet was an exile in Brussels. In 1839 he became editor of the Renaissance, a paper founded to encourage the fine arts. His chief work, the epic of the Quatre Incarnations du Christ, was published in 1867. In the same volume were printed his Études rythmiques, a series of metrical experiments designed to show that the French language could be adapted to every kind of musical rhythm. With the same end in view he executed translations of many German songs, and wrote new French libretti for the best-known operas of Mozart, Weber and others. Hasselt died at Saint Josse ten Noode, a suburb of Brussels, on the 1st of December 1874.

HASSELT, ANDRÉ HENRI CONSTANT VAN (1806-1874), Belgian poet, was born in Maastricht, Limburg, on January 5, 1806. He was educated in his hometown and at the University of Liège. In 1833, he left Maastricht, which was then blockaded by Belgian forces, and made his way to Brussels, where he became a naturalized Belgian and joined the Bibliothèque de Bourgogne. In 1843, he entered the education department and eventually became an inspector of normal schools. His native language was Dutch, and as a French poet, André van Hasselt had to overcome the challenges of writing in a foreign language. He published a Chant hellénique in honor of Canaris in the pages of La Sentinelle des Pays-Bas as early as 1826, followed by other poems. His first collection of poetry, Primevères (1834), clearly shows the influence of Victor Hugo, which was strengthened by a trip to Paris in 1830. His relationship with Hugo became close in 1851-1852 when the poet was in exile in Brussels. In 1839, he became editor of the Renaissance, a publication created to promote the fine arts. His main work, the epic Quatre Incarnations du Christ, was published in 1867. The same volume included his Études rythmiques, a series of metrical experiments aimed at showing that the French language could be adapted to all kinds of musical rhythms. To achieve this goal, he translated many German songs and wrote new French libretti for the most well-known operas of Mozart, Weber, and others. Hasselt died in Saint Josse ten Noode, a suburb of Brussels, on December 1, 1874.

A selection from his works (10 vols., Brussels, 1876-1877) was edited by MM. Charles Hen and Louis Alvin. He wrote many books for children, chiefly under the pseudonym of Alfred Avelines; and studies on historical and literary subjects. The books written in collaboration with Charles Hen are signed Charles André. A bibliography of his writings is appended to the notice by Louis Alvin in the Biographie nat. de Belgique, vol. vii. Van Hasselt’s fame has continued to increase since his death. A series of tributes to his memory are printed in the Poésies choisies (1901), edited by M. Georges Barral for the Collection des poètes français de l’étranger. This book contains a biographical and critical study by Jules Guillaume, and some valuable notes on the poet’s theories of rhythm.

A selection from his works (10 vols., Brussels, 1876-1877) was edited by Charles Hen and Louis Alvin. He wrote many children's books, mostly under the pen name Alfred Avelines, as well as studies on historical and literary topics. The books he co-wrote with Charles Hen are credited to Charles André. A bibliography of his writings is included in the notice by Louis Alvin in the Biographie nat. de Belgique, vol. vii. Van Hasselt’s reputation has continued to grow since his passing. A collection of tributes to his memory appears in Poésies choisies (1901), edited by Georges Barral for the Collection des poètes français de l’étranger. This book includes a biographical and critical study by Jules Guillaume, along with some valuable notes on the poet’s theories of rhythm.


HASSELT, the capital of the Belgian province of Limburg. Pop. (1904), 16,179. It derives its name from Hazel-bosch (hazel wood). It stands at the junction of several important roads and railways from Maaseyck, Maastricht and Liége. It has many breweries and distilleries, and the spirit known by its name, which is a coarse gin, has a certain reputation throughout Belgium. On the 6th of August 1831 the Dutch troops obtained here their chief success over the Belgian nationalists during the War of Independence. Hasselt is best known for its great septennial fête held on the day of Assumption, August 15th. The curious part of this fête, which is held in honour of the Virgin under the name of Virga Jesse, is the conversion of the town for the day into the semblance of a forest. Fir trees and branches from the neighbouring forest are collected and planted in front of the houses, so that for a few hours Hasselt has the appearance of being restored to its primitive condition as a wood. The figure of the giant who is supposed to have once held the Hazel-bosch under his terror is paraded on this occasion as the “lounge man.” Originally this celebration was held annually, but in the 18th century it was restricted to once in seven years. There was a celebration in 1905.

HASSELT, is the capital of the Belgian province of Limburg. Population (1904), 16,179. Its name comes from Hazel-bosch (hazel wood). It is located at the crossroads of several important roads and railways from Maaseyck, Maastricht, and Liége. The city has many breweries and distilleries, and the spirit that bears its name, a strong gin, has a solid reputation throughout Belgium. On August 6, 1831, Dutch troops achieved a major victory over the Belgian nationalists here during the War of Independence. Hasselt is most famous for its large septennial festival on Assumption Day, August 15th. A unique aspect of this festival, which honors the Virgin under the name Virga Jesse, is the transformation of the town into a forest for the day. Fir trees and branches from the nearby forest are collected and placed in front of houses, so that for a few hours, Hasselt looks like it has returned to its original state as a woodland. The giant figure, who is said to have once terrorized the Hazel-bosch, is paraded at this event as the “lounge man.” Originally, this celebration took place annually, but in the 18th century, it was limited to once every seven years. There was a celebration in 1905.


HASSENPFLUG, HANS DANIEL LUDWIG FRIEDRICH (1794-1862), German statesman, was born at Hanau in Hesse on the 26th of February 1794. He studied law at Göttingen, graduated in 1816, and took his seat as Assessor in the judicial chamber of the board of government (Regierungskollegium) at Cassel, of which his father Johann Hassenpflug was also a member. In 1821 he was nominated by the new elector, William II., Justizrat (councillor of justice); in 1832 he became Ministerialrat and reporter (Referent) to the ministry of Hesse-Cassel, and in May of the same year was appointed successively minister of justice and of the interior. It was from this moment that he became conspicuous in the constitutional struggles of Germany.

HASSENPFLUG, HANS DANIEL LUDWIG FRIEDRICH (1794-1862), a German statesman, was born in Hanau, Hesse on February 26, 1794. He studied law at Göttingen, graduated in 1816, and started his role as an Assessor in the judicial chamber of the government board (Regierungskollegium) in Cassel, where his father, Johann Hassenpflug, was also a member. In 1821, he was appointed by the new elector, William II, as Justizrat (councillor of justice); in 1832, he became Ministerialrat and reporter (Referent) to the Hessian ministry, and in May of the same year, he was consecutively appointed as the minister of justice and the minister of the interior. From that moment on, he became prominent in Germany's constitutional struggles.

The reactionary system introduced by the elector William I. had broken down before the revolutionary movements of 1830, and in 1831 Hesse had received a constitution. This development was welcome neither to the elector nor to the other German governments, and Hassenpflug deliberately set to work to reverse it. In doing so he gave the lie to his own early promise; for he had been a conspicuous member of the revolutionary Burschenschaft at Göttingen, and had taken part as a volunteer in the War of Liberation. Into the causes of the change it is unnecessary to inquire; Hassenpflug by training and tradition was a strait-laced official; he was also a first-rate lawyer; and his naturally arbitrary temper had from the first displayed itself in an attitude of overbearing independence towards his colleagues and even towards the elector. To such a man constitutional restrictions were intolerable, and from the moment he came into power he set to work to override them, by means of press censorship, legal quibbles, unjustifiable use of the electoral prerogatives, or frank supersession of the legislative rights of the Estates by electoral ordinances. The story of the constitutional deadlock that resulted belongs to the history of Hesse-Cassel and Germany; so far as Hassenpflug himself was concerned, it made him, more even than Metternich, the Mephistopheles of the Reaction to the German people. In Hesse itself he was known as “Hessen’s Hass und Fluch” (Hesse’s hate and curse). In the end, however, his masterful temper became unendurable to the regent (Frederick William); in the summer of 1837 he was suddenly removed from his post as minister of the interior and he thereupon left the elector’s service.

The conservative system set up by Elector William I had collapsed in the face of the revolutionary movements of 1830, and by 1831, Hesse had adopted a constitution. This change was unwelcome to both the elector and the other German governments, and Hassenpflug intentionally set out to reverse it. In doing so, he betrayed his earlier commitments; he had been a prominent member of the revolutionary Burschenschaft at Göttingen and had volunteered in the War of Liberation. It's unnecessary to delve into the reasons for this shift; Hassenpflug was, by training and habit, a rigid official and also an exceptional lawyer. His naturally arrogant temperament had early on shown itself in an attitude of dominance towards his colleagues and even towards the elector. To someone like him, constitutional limits were unacceptable, and from the moment he gained power, he worked to bypass them through press censorship, legal loopholes, improper use of electoral powers, or outright ignoring the legislative rights of the Estates with electoral ordinances. The story of the resulting constitutional crisis is part of the history of Hesse-Cassel and Germany; as far as Hassenpflug was concerned, it made him more than Metternich the figure of the Reaction against the German people. In Hesse, he was known as “Hessen’s Hass und Fluch” (Hesse’s hate and curse). Ultimately, however, his domineering nature became unbearable to the regent (Frederick William); in the summer of 1837, he was suddenly removed from his position as minister of the interior and subsequently left the elector's service.

In 1838 he was appointed head of the administration of the little principality of Hohenzollern-Sigmaringen, an office which he exchanged in the following year for that of civil governor of the grand-duchy of Luxemburg. Here, too, his independent character suffered him to remain only a year: he resented having to transact all business with the grand-duke (king of the Netherlands) through a Dutch official at the Hague; he protested against the absorption of the Luxemburg surplus in the Dutch treasury; and, failing to obtain redress, he resigned (1840). From 1841 to 1850 he was in Prussian service, first as a member of the supreme court of justice (Obertribunal) and then (1846) as president of the high court of appeal (Oberappellationsgericht) at Greifswald. In 1850 he was tried for peculation and convicted; and, though this judgment was reversed on appeal, he left the service of Prussia.

In 1838, he was appointed head of the administration for the small principality of Hohenzollern-Sigmaringen, a position he swapped the following year for the role of civil governor of the grand duchy of Luxemburg. Again, his independent nature only allowed him to stay for a year: he was unhappy about having to handle all business with the grand duke (king of the Netherlands) through a Dutch official in The Hague; he protested against the inclusion of the Luxemburg surplus in the Dutch treasury; and, unable to get any resolution, he resigned in 1840. From 1841 to 1850, he worked in Prussian service, initially as a member of the supreme court of justice (Obertribunal) and then (in 1846) as president of the high court of appeal (Oberappellationsgericht) in Greifswald. In 1850, he was put on trial for embezzlement and found guilty; although this verdict was overturned on appeal, he left the Prussian service.

With somewhat indecent haste (the appeal had not been heard) he was now summoned by the elector of Hesse once more to the head of the government, and he immediately threw himself again with zeal into the struggle against the constitution. He soon found, however, that the opinion of all classes, including the army, was solidly against him, and he decided to risk all on an alliance with the reviving fortunes of Austria, which was steadily working for the restoration of the status quo overthrown by the revolution of 1848. On his advice the elector seceded from the Northern Union established by Prussia and, on the 13th of September, committed the folly of flying secretly from Hesse with his minister. They went to Frankfort, where the federal diet had been re-established, and on the 21st persuaded the diet to decree an armed intervention in Hesse. This decree, carried out by Austrian troops, all but led to war with Prussia, but the unreadiness of the Berlin government led to the triumph of Austria and of Hassenpflug, who at the end of the year was once more installed in power at Cassel as minister of finance. His position was, however, not enviable; he was loathed and 53 despised by all, and disliked even by his master. The climax came in November 1853, when he was publicly horse-whipped by the count of Isenburg-Wächtersbach, the elector’s son-in-law. The count was pronounced insane; but Hassenpflug was conscious of the method in his madness, and tendered his resignation. This was, however, not accepted; and it was not till the 16th of October 1855 that he was finally relieved of his offices. He retired to Marburg, where he died on the 15th of October 1862. He lived just long enough to hear of the restoration of the Hesse constitution of 1831 (June 21, 1862), which it had been his life’s mission to destroy. Of his publications the most important is Actenstücke, die landständischen Anklagen wider den Kurfürstlichen hessischen Staatsminister Hassenpflug. Ein Beitrag zur Zeitgeschichte und zum neueren deutschen Staatsrechte, anonym. (Stuttgart and Tübingen, 1836). He was twice married, his first wife being the sister of the brothers Grimm. His son Karl Hassenpflug (1824-1890) was a distinguished sculptor.

With somewhat inappropriate speed (the appeal hadn't been addressed), he was once again called by the elector of Hesse to take charge of the government, and he immediately threw himself back into the fight against the constitution. However, he soon realized that everyone, including the army, was firmly against him, so he decided to gamble everything on an alliance with the rising power of Austria, which was steadily working to restore the conditions overturned by the revolution of 1848. On his recommendation, the elector withdrew from the Northern Union set up by Prussia and, on September 13th, made the reckless decision to secretly flee Hesse with his minister. They went to Frankfurt, where the federal diet had been reinstated, and on the 21st, they convinced the diet to order military intervention in Hesse. This decree, executed by Austrian troops, almost led to war with Prussia, but the hesitancy of the Berlin government resulted in a victory for Austria and for Hassenpflug, who by the end of the year was back in power in Cassel as the minister of finance. However, his position was far from desirable; he was hated and despised by everyone, and even his master didn't like him. The peak of his misery came in November 1853 when he was publicly horse-whipped by the count of Isenburg-Wächtersbach, the elector's son-in-law. The count was declared insane, but Hassenpflug was aware of the method behind his madness and resigned. This resignation, however, was not accepted, and it wasn't until October 16, 1855, that he was finally relieved of his duties. He retreated to Marburg, where he died on October 15, 1862. He lived just long enough to hear about the restoration of the Hesse constitution of 1831 (June 21, 1862), which had been his life's mission to destroy. Among his publications, the most significant is Actenstücke, die landständischen Anklagen wider den Kurfürstlichen hessischen Staatsminister Hassenpflug. Ein Beitrag zur Zeitgeschichte und zum neueren deutschen Staatsrechte, anonymously published (Stuttgart and Tübingen, 1836). He was married twice, with his first wife being the sister of the Brothers Grimm. His son Karl Hassenpflug (1824-1890) was a notable sculptor.

See the biography by Wippermann in Allgemeine deutsche Biographie, with authorities.

See the biography by Wippermann in Allgemeine deutsche Biographie, with sources.


HASTINAPUR, an ancient city of British India, in the Meerut district of the United Provinces, lying on the bank of a former bed of the Ganges, 22 m. N.E. of Meerut. It formed the capital of the great Pandava kingdom, celebrated in the Mahābhārata, and probably one of the earliest Aryan settlements outside the Punjab. Tradition points to a group of shapeless mounds as the residence of the Lunar princes of the house of Bharata whose deeds are commemorated in the great national epic. After the conclusion of the famous war which forms the central episode of that poem, Hastinapur remained for some time the metropolis of the descendants of Parikshit, but the town was finally swept away by a flood of the Ganges, and the capital was transferred to Kausambi.

Hastinapur, an ancient city in British India, located in the Meerut district of the United Provinces, sits on the shore of an old Ganges riverbed, 22 miles northeast of Meerut. It was the capital of the great Pandava kingdom, celebrated in the Mahābhārata, and is likely one of the earliest Aryan settlements outside the Punjab. Tradition suggests a group of indistinct mounds as the home of the Lunar princes from the house of Bharata, whose stories are honored in the epic. After the famous war that is the main focus of that poem, Hastinapur stayed as the capital for a time, ruled by the descendants of Parikshit, but eventually the town was washed away by a flood from the Ganges, and the capital moved to Kausambi.


HASTINGS, a famous English family. John, Baron Hastings (c. 1262-c. 1313), was a son of Sir Henry de Hastings (d. 1268), who was summoned to parliament as a baron by Simon de Montfort in 1264. Having joined Montfort’s party Sir Henry led the Londoners at the battle of Lewes and was taken prisoner at Evesham. After his release he continued his opposition to Henry III.; he was among those who resisted the king at Kenilworth, and after the issue of the Dictum de Kenilworth he commanded the remnants of the baronial party when they made their last stand in the isle of Ely, submitting to Henry in July 1267. His younger son, Edmund, was specially noted for his military services in Scotland during the reign of Edward I. John Hastings married Isabella (d. 1305), daughter of William de Valence, earl of Pembroke, a half-brother of Henry III., and fought in Scotland and in Wales. Through his mother, Joanna de Cantilupe, he inherited the extensive lordship of Abergavenny, hence he is sometimes referred to as lord of Bergavenny, and in 1295 he was summoned to parliament as a baron. Before this date, however, he had come somewhat prominently to the front. His paternal grandmother, Ada, was a younger daughter of David, earl of Huntingdon, and a niece of the Scottish king, William the Lion; and in 1290 when Margaret, the maid of Norway, died, Hastings came forward as a claimant for the vacant throne. Although unsuccessful in the matter he did not swerve from his loyalty to Edward I. He fought constantly either in France or in Scotland; he led the bishop of Durham’s men at the celebrated siege of Carlaverock castle in 1300; and with his brother Edmund he signed the letter which in 1301 the English barons sent to Pope Boniface VIII. repudiating papal interference in the affairs of Scotland; on two occasions he represented the king in Aquitaine. Hastings died in 1312 or 1313. His second wife was Isabella, daughter of the elder Hugh le Despenser. Hastings, who was one of the most wealthy and powerful nobles of his time, stood high in the regard of the king and is lauded by the chroniclers.

Hastings a well-known English family. John Hastings, Baron (c. 1262-c. 1313), was the son of Sir Henry de Hastings (d. 1268), who was called to parliament as a baron by Simon de Montfort in 1264. After joining Montfort’s faction, Sir Henry led the Londoners at the battle of Lewes and was captured at Evesham. After he was released, he kept opposing Henry III.; he was one of the leaders who stood against the king at Kenilworth, and after the Dictum de Kenilworth was issued, he commanded the remaining barons when they made their last stand on the isle of Ely, surrendering to Henry in July 1267. His younger son, Edmund, was particularly recognized for his military achievements in Scotland during Edward I's reign. John Hastings married Isabella (d. 1305), the daughter of William de Valence, earl of Pembroke, who was a half-brother of Henry III., and he fought in Scotland and Wales. Through his mother, Joanna de Cantilupe, he inherited the large lordship of Abergavenny, which is why he is sometimes called lord of Bergavenny, and in 1295 he was summoned to parliament as a baron. Before that, he had already made a notable appearance. His paternal grandmother, Ada, was a younger daughter of David, earl of Huntingdon, and a niece of the Scottish king, William the Lion; and in 1290, when Margaret, the maid of Norway, passed away, Hastings stepped up as a contender for the vacant throne. Although he was unsuccessful, he remained loyal to Edward I. He fought regularly in either France or Scotland; he led the bishop of Durham’s troops during the famous siege of Carlaverock castle in 1300; and with his brother Edmund, he signed the letter that the English barons sent to Pope Boniface VIII in 1301, rejecting papal interference in Scottish affairs; on two occasions he represented the king in Aquitaine. Hastings died in 1312 or 1313. His second wife was Isabella, daughter of the elder Hugh le Despenser. Hastings, one of the wealthiest and most powerful nobles of his time, was highly regarded by the king and praised by historians.

His eldest son John (d. 1325), who succeeded to the barony, was the father of Laurence Hastings, who was created earl of Pembroke in 1339, the earls of Pembroke retaining the barony of Hastings until 1389. A younger son by a second marriage, Sir Hugh Hastings (c. 1307-1347), saw a good deal of military service in France; his portrait and also that of his wife may still be seen on the east window of Elsing church, which contains a beautiful brass to his memory.

His oldest son John (d. 1325), who took over the barony, was the father of Laurence Hastings, who was made Earl of Pembroke in 1339. The Earls of Pembroke kept the barony of Hastings until 1389. A younger son from a second marriage, Sir Hugh Hastings (c. 1307-1347), served extensively in the military in France. His portrait and that of his wife can still be seen in the east window of Elsing church, which features a beautiful brass plaque in his memory.

On the death of John, the third and last earl of Pembroke of the Hastings family, in 1389, Sir Hugh’s son John had, according to a decision of the House of Lords in 1840, a title to the barony of Hastings, but he did not prosecute his claim and he died without sons in 1393. However his grand-nephew and heir, Hugh (d. 1396), claimed the barony, which was also claimed by Reginald, Lord Grey of Ruthyn. Like the earls of Pembroke, Grey was descended through his grandmother, Elizabeth Hastings, from John, Lord Hastings, by his first wife; Hugh, on the other hand, was descended from John’s second wife. After Hugh’s death his brother, Sir Edward Hastings (c. 1382-1438), claimed the barony, and the case as to who should bear the arms of the Hastings family came before the court of chivalry. In 1410 it was decided in favour of Grey, who thereupon assumed the arms. Both disputants still claimed the barony, but the view seems to have prevailed that it had fallen into abeyance in 1389. Sir Edward was imprisoned for refusing to pay his rival’s costs, and he was probably still in prison when he died in January 1438. After his death the Hastings family, which became extinct during the 16th century, tacitly abandoned the claim to the barony. Then in 1840 the title was revived in favour of Sir Jacob Astley, Bart. (1797-1859), who derived his claim from a daughter of Sir Hugh Hastings who died in 1540. Sir Jacob’s descendant, Albert Edward (b. 1882), became 21st Baron Hastings in 1904.

On the death of John, the third and last earl of Pembroke from the Hastings family, in 1389, Sir Hugh’s son John had, according to a decision by the House of Lords in 1840, a claim to the barony of Hastings, but he didn't pursue it and died without sons in 1393. However, his grand-nephew and heir, Hugh (d. 1396), claimed the barony, which was also claimed by Reginald, Lord Grey of Ruthyn. Like the earls of Pembroke, Grey was descended through his grandmother, Elizabeth Hastings, from John, Lord Hastings, by his first wife; Hugh, on the other hand, was descended from John’s second wife. After Hugh’s death, his brother, Sir Edward Hastings (c. 1382-1438), claimed the barony, and the issue of who should bear the arms of the Hastings family came before the court of chivalry. In 1410, it was decided in favor of Grey, who then took on the arms. Both claimants still insisted on the barony, but it seems the prevailing thought was that it had gone into abeyance in 1389. Sir Edward was imprisoned for refusing to pay his rival’s costs, and he was probably still in prison when he died in January 1438. After his death, the Hastings family, which became extinct during the 16th century, kind of gave up on the claim to the barony. Then in 1840, the title was reinstated in favor of Sir Jacob Astley, Bart. (1797-1859), who based his claim on a daughter of Sir Hugh Hastings who died in 1540. Sir Jacob’s descendant, Albert Edward (b. 1882), became the 21st Baron Hastings in 1904.

A distant relative of the same family was William, Baron Hastings (c. 1430-1483), a son of Sir Leonard Hastings (d. 1455). He became attached to Edward IV., whom he served before his accession to the throne, and after this event he became master of the mint, chamberlain of the royal household and one of the king’s most trusted advisers. Having been made a baron in 1461, he married Catherine, daughter of Richard Neville, earl of Salisbury, and was frequently sent on diplomatic errands to Burgundy and elsewhere. He was faithful to Edward IV. during the king’s exile in the winter of 1470-1471, and after his return he fought for him at Barnet and at Tewkesbury; he has been accused of taking part in the murder of Henry VI.’s son, prince Edward, after the latter battle. Hastings succeeded his sovereign in the favour of Jane Shore. He was made captain of Calais in 1471, and was with Edward IV. when he met Louis XI. of France at Picquigny in 1475, on which occasion he received gifts from Louis and from Charles the Bold of Burgundy. After Edward IV.’s death Hastings behaved in a somewhat undecided manner. He disliked the queen, Elizabeth Woodville, but he refused to ally himself with Richard, duke of Gloucester, afterwards King Richard III. Suddenly Richard decided to get rid of him, and during a meeting of the council on the 13th of June 1483 he was seized and at once put to death. This dramatic incident is related by Sir Thomas More in his History of Richard III., and has been worked by Shakespeare into his play Richard III. Hastings is highly praised by his friend Philippe de Commines, and also by More. He left a son, Edward (d. 1508), the father of George, Baron Hastings (c. 1488-1545), who was created earl of Huntingdon (q.v.) in 1529.

A distant relative of the same family was William, Baron Hastings (c. 1430-1483), the son of Sir Leonard Hastings (d. 1455). He became close to Edward IV, serving him before he became king, and after that, he took on roles like master of the mint, chamberlain of the royal household, and one of the king’s most trusted advisers. Made a baron in 1461, he married Catherine, the daughter of Richard Neville, Earl of Salisbury, and was often sent on diplomatic missions to Burgundy and other places. He stayed loyal to Edward IV during the king’s exile in the winter of 1470-1471, and after his return, he fought for him at Barnet and Tewkesbury. He was accused of being involved in the murder of Henry VI’s son, Prince Edward, after the latter battle. Hastings took over the king’s favor with Jane Shore. He became captain of Calais in 1471 and was with Edward IV when he met Louis XI of France at Picquigny in 1475, receiving gifts from both Louis and Charles the Bold of Burgundy. After Edward IV’s death, Hastings acted somewhat uncertainly. He didn’t like Queen Elizabeth Woodville, but he also refused to side with Richard, Duke of Gloucester, who later became King Richard III. Suddenly, Richard decided to eliminate him, and during a council meeting on June 13, 1483, he was seized and immediately executed. This dramatic event is recounted by Sir Thomas More in his *History of Richard III*, and it has been incorporated into Shakespeare’s play *Richard III.* Hastings is highly praised by his friend Philippe de Commines, as well as by More. He left behind a son, Edward (d. 1508), who was the father of George, Baron Hastings (c. 1488-1545), who was made Earl of Huntingdon (q.v.) in 1529.

When Francis, 10th earl of Huntingdon, died in October 1789, the barony of Hastings passed to his sister Elizabeth (1731-1808), wife of John Rawdon, earl of Moira, and from her it came to her son Francis Rawdon-Hastings (see below), who was created marquess of Hastings in 1817.

When Francis, the 10th Earl of Huntingdon, died in October 1789, the barony of Hastings went to his sister Elizabeth (1731-1808), who was married to John Rawdon, the Earl of Moira. From her, it passed to her son Francis Rawdon-Hastings (see below), who was made the Marquess of Hastings in 1817.


HASTINGS, FRANCIS RAWDON-HASTINGS, 1st Marquess of (1754-1826), British soldier and governor-general of India, born on the 9th of December 1754, was the son of Sir John Rawdon of Moira in the county of Down, 4th baronet, who was created Baron Rawdon of Moira, and afterwards earl of Moira, in the Irish peerage. His mother was the Lady Elizabeth Hastings, daughter of Theophilus, 9th earl of Huntingdon. Lord Rawdon, as he was then called, was educated at Harrow and Oxford, and joined the army in 1771 as ensign in the 15th foot. His life henceforth was entirely spent in the service of his country, and may be divided into four periods: from 1775 to 54 1782 he was engaged with much distinction in the American war; from 1783 to 1813 he held various high appointments at home, and took an active part in the business of the House of Lords; from 1813 to 1823 was the period of his labours in India; after retiring from which, in the last years of his life (1824-1826), he was governor of Malta.

HASTINGS, FRANCIS RAWDON-HASTINGS, 1st Marquis of (1754-1826), British soldier and governor-general of India, born on December 9, 1754, was the son of Sir John Rawdon of Moira in County Down, 4th baronet, who was made Baron Rawdon of Moira and later earl of Moira in the Irish peerage. His mother was Lady Elizabeth Hastings, daughter of Theophilus, 9th earl of Huntingdon. Lord Rawdon, as he was then known, was educated at Harrow and Oxford and joined the army in 1771 as an ensign in the 15th Foot. His life from then on was entirely devoted to serving his country and can be divided into four periods: from 1775 to 54 1782, he distinguished himself in the American War; from 1783 to 1813, he held various high positions at home and actively participated in the business of the House of Lords; from 1813 to 1823, he worked hard in India; and after retiring, in the last years of his life (1824-1826), he served as governor of Malta.

In America Rawdon served at the battles of Bunker Hill, Brooklyn, White Plains, Monmouth and Camden, at the attacks on Forts Washington and Clinton, and at the siege of Charleston. In fact he was engaged in many important operations of the war. Perhaps his most noted achievements were the raising of a corps at Philadelphia, called the Irish Volunteers, who under him became famous for their fighting qualities, and the victory of Hobkirk’s Hill, which, in command of only a small force, he gained by superior military skill and determination against a much larger body of Americans. In 1781 he was invalided. The vessel in which he returned to England was captured and carried into Brest. He was speedily released, and on his arrival in England was much honoured by George III., who created him an English peer (Baron Rawdon) in March 1783. In 1789 his mother succeeded to the barony of Hastings, and Rawdon added the surname of Hastings to his own.

In America, Rawdon fought in the battles of Bunker Hill, Brooklyn, White Plains, Monmouth, and Camden, as well as in the attacks on Forts Washington and Clinton and during the siege of Charleston. He was involved in many significant operations of the war. Perhaps his most recognized achievements were forming a group in Philadelphia called the Irish Volunteers, who became well-known for their fighting skills under his leadership, and winning the battle of Hobkirk’s Hill. He achieved this victory with just a small force, using superior military strategy and determination against a much larger American force. In 1781, he was injured and sent home. The ship he traveled back to England on was captured and taken to Brest. He was quickly released, and upon his return to England, he received great honors from George III., who made him an English peer (Baron Rawdon) in March 1783. In 1789, when his mother inherited the barony of Hastings, Rawdon added the surname Hastings to his own.

In 1793 Rawdon succeeded his father as earl of Moira. In 1794 he was sent with 7000 men to Ostend to reinforce the duke of York and the allies in Flanders. The march by which he effected a junction was considered extraordinary. In 1803 he was appointed commander-in-chief in Scotland, and in 1804 he married Flora Mure Campbell, countess of Loudoun in her own right. When Fox and Grenville came into power in 1806, Lord Moira, who had always voted with them, received the place of master-general of the ordnance. He was now enabled to carry a philanthropic measure, of which from his first entry into the House of Lords he had been a great promoter, namely, the Debtor and Creditor Bill for relief of poor debtors. Ireland was another subject to which he had given particular attention: in 1797 there was published a Speech by Lord Moira on the Dreadful and Alarming State of Ireland. Lord Moira’s sound judgment on public affairs, combined with his military reputation and the uprightness of his character, won for him a high position among the statesmen of the day, and he gained an additional prestige from his intimate relations with the prince of Wales. As a mark of the regent’s regard Lord Moira received the order of the Garter in 1812, and in the same year was appointed governor-general of Bengal and commander-in-chief of the forces in India. He landed at Calcutta, and assumed office in succession to Lord Minto in October 1813. One of the chief questions which awaited him was that of relations with the Gurkha state of Nepal. The Gurkhas, a brave and warlike little nation, failing to extend their conquests in the direction of China, had begun to encroach on territories held or protected by the East India Company; especially they had seized the districts of Batwal and Seoraj, in the northern part of Oudh, and when called upon to relinquish these, they deliberately elected (April 1814) to go to war rather than do so. Lord Moira, having travelled through the northern provinces and fully studied the question, declared war against Nepal (November 1814). The enemy’s frontier was 600 m. long, and Lord Moira, who directed the plan of the campaign, resolved to act offensively along the whole line. It was an anxious undertaking, because the native states of India were all watching the issue and waiting for any serious reverse to the English to join against them. At first all seemed to go badly, as the British officers despised the enemy, and the sepoys were unaccustomed to mountain warfare, and thus alternate extremes of rashness and despondency were exhibited. But this rectified itself in time, especially through the achievements of General (afterwards Sir David) Ochterlony, who before the end of 1815 had taken all the Gurkha posts to the west, and early in 1816 was advancing victoriously within 50 m. of Khatmandu, the capital. The Gurkhas now made peace; they abandoned the disputed districts, ceded some territory to the British, and agreed to receive a British resident. For his masterly conduct of these affairs Lord Moira was created marquess of Hastings in February 1817.

In 1793, Rawdon took over from his father as the Earl of Moira. In 1794, he was sent with 7,000 men to Ostend to support the Duke of York and the allies in Flanders. The way he managed to join forces was seen as impressive. In 1803, he was appointed commander-in-chief in Scotland, and in 1804, he married Flora Mure Campbell, who was the Countess of Loudoun in her own right. When Fox and Grenville came to power in 1806, Lord Moira, who had always supported them, was appointed master-general of the ordnance. This position allowed him to promote a charitable initiative he had championed since he entered the House of Lords: the Debtor and Creditor Bill aimed at helping poor debtors. Ireland was another area he focused on, and in 1797, a Speech by Lord Moira on the Dreadful and Alarming State of Ireland was published. Lord Moira’s wise judgment in public matters, along with his military reputation and integrity, earned him a prominent place among the statesmen of the time, and he gained even more prestige through his close relationship with the Prince of Wales. In 1812, as a sign of the regent’s respect, Lord Moira received the Order of the Garter and was appointed governor-general of Bengal and commander-in-chief of the forces in India that same year. He arrived in Calcutta and took office after Lord Minto in October 1813. One of the main issues awaiting him was the relationship with the Gurkha state of Nepal. The Gurkhas, a brave and fierce little nation, had started to encroach on land held or protected by the East India Company after failing to expand their conquests toward China; in particular, they seized the areas of Batwal and Seoraj in northern Oudh, and when asked to give these up, they chose to go to war instead (April 1814). After touring the northern provinces and closely examining the situation, Lord Moira declared war on Nepal in November 1814. The enemy's frontier stretched 600 miles, and Lord Moira, who planned the campaign, decided to take an offensive approach along the entire line. It was a risky endeavor because the native states of India were closely observing and waiting for any significant defeat of the British to rally against them. Initially, things were going poorly, as the British officers underestimated the enemy, and the sepoys were inexperienced in mountain combat, leading to alternating extremes of recklessness and despair. However, this situation improved over time, particularly due to the efforts of General (later Sir David) Ochterlony, who by the end of 1815 had captured all the Gurkha posts to the west and was advancing triumphantly within 50 miles of Kathmandu, the capital, in early 1816. The Gurkhas eventually sought peace; they gave up the contested territories, ceded some land to the British, and agreed to accept a British resident. For his excellent management of these affairs, Lord Moira was elevated to Marquess of Hastings in February 1817.

He had now to deal with internal dangers. A combination of Mahratta powers was constantly threatening the continuance of British rule, under the guise of plausible assurances severally given by the peshwa, Sindhia, Holkar and other princes. At the same time the existence of the Pindari state was not only dangerous to the British, as being a warlike power always ready to turn against them, but it was a scourge to India itself. In 1816, however, the Pindaris entered British territory in the Northern Circars, where they destroyed 339 villages. On this, permission was obtained to act for their suppression. Before the end of 1817 the preparations of Lord Hastings were completed, when the peshwa suddenly broke into war, and the British were opposed at once to the Mahratta and Pindari powers, estimated at 200,000 men and 500 guns. Both were utterly shattered in a brief campaign of four months (1817-18). The peshwa’s dominions were annexed, and those of Sindhia, Holkar, and the raja of Berar lay at the mercy of the governor-general, and were saved only by his moderation. Thus, after sixty years from the battle of Plassey, the supremacy of British power in India was effectively established. The Pindaris had ceased to exist, and peace and security had been substituted for misery and terror.

He now had to face internal threats. A coalition of Mahratta powers was constantly endangering British rule, disguised by the seemingly reasonable assurances from the peshwa, Sindhia, Holkar, and other princes. At the same time, the Pindari state was not only a threat to the British, being a military force always ready to strike against them, but it was also a scourge to India itself. In 1816, however, the Pindaris invaded British territory in the Northern Circars, destroying 339 villages. As a result, permission was granted to take action against them. By the end of 1817, Lord Hastings had completed preparations when the peshwa suddenly declared war, and the British found themselves facing both the Mahratta and Pindari forces, estimated at 200,000 men and 500 guns. Both were completely defeated in a short campaign lasting four months (1817-18). The peshwa’s territories were annexed, while those of Sindhia, Holkar, and the raja of Berar were left at the mercy of the governor-general, saved only by his restraint. Thus, after sixty years since the battle of Plassey, British dominance in India was firmly established. The Pindaris had been eliminated, and peace and security replaced misery and fear.

“It is a proud phrase to use,” said Lord Hastings, “but it is a true one, that we have bestowed blessings upon millions. Nothing can be more delightful than the reports I receive of the sensibility manifested by the inhabitants to this change in their circumstances. The smallest detachment of our troops cannot pass through that district without meeting everywhere eager and exulting gratulations, the tone of which proves them to come from glowing hearts. Multitudes of people have, even in this short interval, come from the hills and fastnesses in which they had sought refuge for years, and have reoccupied their ancient deserted villages. The ploughshare is again in every quarter turning up a soil which had for many seasons never been stirred, except by the hoofs of predatory cavalry.”

“It’s a proud phrase to use,” said Lord Hastings, “but it’s true that we have blessed millions. Nothing is more delightful than the reports I get about how grateful the locals are for this change in their circumstances. Even the smallest group of our troops can’t go through that area without being greeted everywhere with excited congratulations, showing that they come from truly grateful hearts. Many people have, even in this short time, come down from the hills and safe places where they had been hiding for years, and have returned to their old, abandoned villages. The plow is once again turning up soil that hasn’t been disturbed for many seasons, except by the hooves of raiding cavalry.”

While the natives of India appreciated the results of Lord Hastings’s achievements, the court of directors grumbled at his having extended British territory. They also disliked and opposed his measures for introducing education among the natives and his encouraging the freedom of the press. In 1819 he obtained the cession by purchase of the island of Singapore. In finance his administration was very successful, as notwithstanding the expenses of his wars he showed an annual surplus of two millions sterling. Brilliant and beneficent as his career had been, Lord Hastings did not escape unjust detraction. His last years of office were embittered by the discussions on a matter notorious at the time, namely, the affairs of the banking-house of W. Palmer and Company. The whole affair was mixed up with insinuations against Lord Hastings, especially charging him with having been actuated by favouritism towards one of the partners in the firm. From imputations which were inconsistent with his whole character he has subsequently been exonerated. But while smarting under them he tendered his resignation in 1821, though he did not leave India till the first day of 1823. He was much exhausted by the arduous labours which for more than nine years he had sustained. Among his characteristics it is mentioned that “his ample fortune absolutely sank under the benevolence of his nature”; and, far from having enriched himself in the appointment of governor-general, he returned to England in circumstances which obliged him still to seek public employment. In 1824 he received the comparatively small post of governor of Malta, in which island he introduced many reforms and endeared himself to the inhabitants. He died on the 28th of November 1826, leaving a request that his right hand should be cut off and preserved till the death of the marchioness of Hastings, and then be interred in her coffin.

While the people of India appreciated Lord Hastings's accomplishments, the court of directors complained about his expansion of British territory. They also disapproved of his efforts to bring education to the locals and his support for press freedom. In 1819, he successfully acquired the island of Singapore. His administration was financially successful, showing an annual surplus of two million pounds despite the costs of his wars. Although his career was notable and beneficial, Lord Hastings faced unfair criticism. His final years in office were tainted by discussions surrounding the well-known issues of the banking firm W. Palmer and Company. This situation was clouded with allegations against Lord Hastings, particularly accusations of favoritism toward one of the firm's partners. He was later cleared of any charges that didn't align with his character. However, while dealing with this criticism, he submitted his resignation in 1821, although he didn't leave India until January 1, 1823. He was significantly worn out from the demanding responsibilities he had handled for over nine years. Among his traits, it was noted that “his considerable fortune was completely diminished by his generous nature”; and rather than profiting from his position as governor-general, he returned to England in circumstances that required him to seek public employment again. In 1824, he took the relatively minor role of governor of Malta, where he implemented many reforms and won the affection of the local residents. He passed away on November 28, 1826, leaving a request for his right hand to be amputated and preserved until the death of the marchioness of Hastings, after which it was to be buried with her.

Hastings was succeeded by his son, Francis George Augustus (1808-1844), who in 1840 succeeded through his mother to the earldom of Loudoun. When his second son, Henry Weysford, the 4th marquess, died childless on the 10th of November 1868 the marquessate became extinct; the earldom of Loudoun devolved upon his sister, Edith Mary (d. 1874), wife of Charles Frederick Abney-Hastings, afterwards Baron Donington; the 55 barony of Hastings, which fell into abeyance, was also revived in 1871 in her favour.

Hastings was succeeded by his son, Francis George Augustus (1808-1844), who inherited the earldom of Loudoun in 1840 through his mother. When his second son, Henry Weysford, the 4th marquess, died without children on November 10, 1868, the marquessate became extinct. The earldom of Loudoun passed to his sister, Edith Mary (d. 1874), who was married to Charles Frederick Abney-Hastings, later known as Baron Donington; the barony of Hastings, which had been in abeyance, was also revived in 1871 in her favor.

See Ross-of-Bladensburg, The Marquess of Hastings (“Rulers of India” series) (1893); and Private Journal of the Marquess of Hastings, edited by his daughter, the marchioness of Bute (1858).

See Ross-of-Bladensburg, The Marquess of Hastings (“Rulers of India” series) (1893); and Private Journal of the Marquess of Hastings, edited by his daughter, the marchioness of Bute (1858).


HASTINGS, FRANK ABNEY (1794-1828), British naval officer and Philhellene, was the son of Lieut.-general Sir Charles Hastings, a natural son of Francis Hastings, tenth earl of Huntingdon. He entered the navy in 1805, and was in the “Neptune” (100) at the battle of Trafalgar; but in 1820 a quarrel with his flag captain led to his leaving the service. The revolutionary troubles of the time offered chances of foreign employment. Hastings spent a year on the continent to learn French, and sailed for Greece on the 12th of March 1822 from Marseilles. On the 3rd of April he reached Hydra. For two years he took part in the naval operations of the Greeks in the Gulf of Smyrna and elsewhere. He saw that the light squadrons of the Greeks must in the end be overpowered by the heavier Turkish navy, clumsy as it was; and in 1823 he drew up and presented to Lord Byron a very able memorandum which he laid before the Greek government in 1824. This paper is of peculiar interest apart from its importance in the Greek insurrection, for it contains the germs of the great revolution which has since been effected in naval gunnery and tactics. In substance the memorandum advocated the use of steamers in preference to sailing ships, and of direct fire with shells and hot shot, as a more trustworthy means of destroying the Turkish fleet than fire-ships. It will be found in Finlay’s History of the Greek Revolution, vol. ii. appendix i. The application of Hastings’s ideas led necessarily to the disuse of sailing ships, and the introduction of armour. The incompetence of the Greek government and the corrupt waste of its resources prevented the full application of Hastings’s bold and far-seeing plans. But largely by the use of his own money, of which he is said to have spent £7000, he was able to some extent to carry them out. In 1824 he came to England to obtain a steamer, and in 1825 he had fitted out a small steamer named the “Karteria” (Perseverance), manned by Englishmen, Swedes and Greeks, and provided with apparatus for the discharge of shell and hot shot. He did enough to show that if his advice had been vigorously followed the Turks would have been driven off the sea long before the date of the battle of Navarino. The great effect produced by his shells in an attack on the sea-line of communication of the Turkish army, then besieging Athens at Oropus and Volo in March and April 1827, was a clear proof that much more could have been done. Military mismanagement caused the defeat of the Greeks round Athens. But Hastings, in co-operation with General Sir R. Church (q.v.), shifted the scene of the attack to western Greece. Here his destruction of a small Turkish squadron at Salona Bay in the Gulf of Corinth (29th of September 1827) provoked Ibrahim Pasha into the aggressive movements which led to the destruction of his fleet by the allies at Navarino (q.v.) on the 20th of October 1827. On the 25th of May 1828 he was wounded in an attack on Anatolikon, and he died in the harbour of Zante on the 1st of June. General Gordon, who served in the war and wrote its history, says of him: “If ever there was a disinterested and really useful Philhellene it was Hastings. He received no pay, and had expended most of his slender fortune in keeping the ‘Karteria’ afloat for the last six months. His ship, too, was the only one in the Greek navy where regular discipline was maintained.”

HASTINGS, FRANK ABNEY (1794-1828), British naval officer and supporter of Greek independence, was the son of Lieutenant General Sir Charles Hastings, who was a natural son of Francis Hastings, the tenth Earl of Huntingdon. He joined the navy in 1805 and was aboard the "Neptune" (100) at the Battle of Trafalgar; however, in 1820, a dispute with his flag captain led him to leave the service. The upheaval of that time provided opportunities for overseas involvement. Hastings spent a year in Europe learning French and set sail for Greece on March 12, 1822, from Marseille. He arrived in Hydra on April 3. For two years, he participated in the Greek naval operations in the Gulf of Smyrna and other locations. He recognized that the smaller Greek squadrons would eventually be overwhelmed by the larger Turkish navy, despite its clumsiness; in 1823, he wrote and presented a detailed memorandum to Lord Byron, which he submitted to the Greek government in 1824. This document is particularly significant not only for its role in the Greek revolt but also because it contains the foundational concepts for the major advancements in naval artillery and tactics that followed. Essentially, the memorandum advocated for the use of steamships over sailing vessels and emphasized direct fire using shells and hot shot as more reliable methods for disabling the Turkish fleet compared to fire-ships. It can be found in Finlay’s History of the Greek Revolution, vol. ii. appendix i. The implementation of Hastings’s ideas inevitably led to the phasing out of sailing ships and the adoption of armor. The Greek government's incompetence and the corrupt misuse of its resources hindered the full execution of Hastings’s bold and visionary plans. Nevertheless, largely through his own funding—reportedly around £7000—he managed to partially realize them. In 1824, he returned to England to acquire a steamer, and in 1825, he had outfitted a small steamer named the “Karteria” (Perseverance), staffed by Englishmen, Swedes, and Greeks, equipped with technology for discharging shells and hot shot. He demonstrated sufficient effectiveness to show that if his recommendations had been eagerly implemented, the Turks could have been driven from the seas well before the Battle of Navarino. The significant impact of his shells during an assault on the Turkish army's lines of communication, which was then besieging Athens at Oropus and Volo in March and April 1827, clearly indicated that much could have been achieved. Poor military management led to the Greek defeat around Athens. However, in collaboration with General Sir R. Church (q.v.), Hastings redirected the attack to western Greece. There, he succeeded in destroying a small Turkish squadron at Salona Bay in the Gulf of Corinth on September 29, 1827, provoking Ibrahim Pasha into aggressive maneuvers that resulted in the destruction of his fleet by the allies at Navarino (q.v.) on October 20, 1827. On May 25, 1828, he was wounded in an attack on Anatolikon, and he died in the harbor of Zante on June 1. General Gordon, who served in the war and chronicled its history, remarked: “If ever there was a selfless and truly helpful Philhellene, it was Hastings. He received no salary and spent most of his limited wealth keeping the 'Karteria' afloat for the last six months. His ship was also the only one in the Greek navy where regular discipline was upheld.”

See Thomas Gordon, History of the Greek Revolution (London, 1832); George Finlay, History of the Greek Revolution (Edinburgh, 1861).

See Thomas Gordon, History of the Greek Revolution (London, 1832); George Finlay, History of the Greek Revolution (Edinburgh, 1861).


HASTINGS, WARREN (1732-1818), the first governor-general of British India, was born on the 6th of December 1732 in the little hamlet of Churchill in Oxfordshire. He came of a family which had been settled for many generations in the adjoining village of Daylesford; but his great-grandfather had sold the ancestral manor-house, and his grandfather had been unable to maintain himself in possession of the family living. His mother died a few days after giving him birth; his father, Pynaston Hastings, drifted away to perish obscurely in the West Indies. Thus unfortunate in his birth, young Hastings received the elements of education at a charity school in his native village. At the age of eight he was taken in charge by an elder brother of his father, Howard Hastings, who held a post in the customs. After spending two years at a private school at Newington Butts, he was moved to Westminster, where among his contemporaries occur the names of Lord Thurlow and Lord Shelburne, Sir Elijah Impey, and the poets Cowper and Churchill. In 1749, when his headmaster Dr Nichols was already anticipating for him a successful career at the university, his uncle died, leaving him to the care of a distant kinsman, Mr Creswicke, who was afterwards in the direction of the East India Company; and he determined to send his ward to seek his fortune as a “writer” in Bengal.

HASTINGS, WARREN (1732-1818), the first governor-general of British India, was born on December 6, 1732, in the small village of Churchill in Oxfordshire. He came from a family that had lived in the nearby village of Daylesford for many generations; however, his great-grandfather had sold the family manor, and his grandfather couldn't keep the family living. His mother died shortly after giving birth to him, and his father, Pynaston Hastings, went off and died unnoticed in the West Indies. Given these unfortunate circumstances at birth, young Hastings began his education at a charity school in his hometown. At the age of eight, he was taken in by his father's older brother, Howard Hastings, who worked in customs. After two years at a private school in Newington Butts, he moved to Westminster, where he studied alongside notable peers like Lord Thurlow, Lord Shelburne, Sir Elijah Impey, and poets Cowper and Churchill. In 1749, when his headmaster, Dr. Nichols, was already predicting a successful university career for him, his uncle passed away, leaving him in the care of a distant relative, Mr. Creswicke, who later got involved with the East India Company. He decided to send his ward to make his fortune as a “writer” in Bengal.

When Hastings landed at Calcutta in October 1750 the affairs of the East India Company were at a low ebb. Throughout the entire south of the peninsula French influence was predominant. The settlement of Fort St George or Madras, captured by force of arms, had only recently been restored in accordance with a clause of the peace of Aix-la-Chapelle. The organizing genius of Dupleix everywhere overshadowed the native imagination, and the star of Clive had scarcely yet risen above the horizon. The rivalry between the English and the French, which had already convulsed the south, did not penetrate to Bengal. That province was under the able government of Ali Vardi Khan, who peremptorily forbade the foreign settlers at Calcutta and Chandernagore to introduce feuds from Europe. The duties of a young “writer” were then such as are implied in the name. At an early date Hastings was placed in charge of an aurang or factory in the interior, where his duties would be to superintend the weaving of silk and cotton goods under a system of money advances. In 1753 he was transferred to Cossimbazar, the river-port of the native capital of Murshidabad. In 1756 the old nawab died, and was succeeded by his grandson Surajud-Dowlah, a young madman of 19, whose name is indelibly associated with the tragedy of the Black Hole. When that passionate young prince, in revenge for a fancied wrong, resolved to drive the English out of Bengal, his first step was to occupy the fortified factory at Cossimbazar, and make prisoners of Hastings and his companions. Hastings was soon released at the intercession of the Dutch resident, and made use of his position at Murshidabad to open negotiations with the English fugitives at Falta, the site of a Dutch factory near the mouth of the Hugli. In later days he used to refer with pride to his services on this occasion, when he was first initiated into the wiles of Oriental diplomacy. After a while he found it necessary to fly from the Mahommedan court and join the main body of the English at Falta. When the relieving force arrived from Madras under Colonel Clive and Admiral Watson, Hastings enrolled himself as a volunteer, and took part in the action which led to the recovery of Calcutta. Clive showed his appreciation of Hastings’s merits by appointing him in 1758 to the important post of resident at the court of Murshidabad. It was there that he first came into collision with the Bengali Brahman, Nuncomar, whose subsequent fate has supplied more material for controversy than any other episode in his career. During his three years of office as resident he was able to render not a few valuable services to the Company; but it is more important to observe that his name nowhere occurs in the official lists of those who derived pecuniary profit from the necessities and weakness of the native court. In 1761 he was promoted to be member of council, under the presidency of Mr Vansittart, who had been introduced by Clive from Madras. The period of Vansittart’s government has been truly described as “the most revolting page of our Indian history.” The entire duties of administration were suffered to remain in the hands of the nawab, while a few irresponsible English traders had drawn to themselves all real power. The members of council, the commanders of the troops, and the commercial residents plundered on a grand scale. The youngest servant of the Company claimed the right of trading on his own account, free from taxation and from local jurisdiction, not only for himself but also for every native subordinate whom he might permit 56 to use his name. It was this exemption, threatening the very foundations of the Mussulman government, that finally led to a rupture with the nawab. Macaulay, in his celebrated essay, has said that “of the conduct of Hastings at this time little is known.” As a matter of fact, the book which Macaulay was professing to review describes at length the honourable part consistently taken by Hastings in opposition to the great majority of the council. Sometimes in conjunction only with Vansittart, sometimes absolutely alone, he protested unceasingly against the policy and practices of his colleagues. On one occasion he was stigmatized in a minute by Mr Batson with “having espoused the nawab’s cause, and as a hired solicitor defended all his actions, however dishonourable and detrimental to the Company.” An altercation ensued. Batson gave him the lie and struck him in the council chamber. When war was actually begun, Hastings officially recorded his previous resolution to have resigned, in order to repudiate responsibility for measures which he had always opposed. Waiting only for the decisive victory of Buxar over the allied forces of Bengal and Oudh, he resigned his seat and sailed for England in November 1764.

When Hastings arrived in Calcutta in October 1750, the East India Company was struggling. French influence dominated the entire southern part of the peninsula. The settlement of Fort St. George, or Madras, which had been forcefully taken, had only recently been returned according to a clause of the peace of Aix-la-Chapelle. The organizing brilliance of Dupleix overshadowed local ambitions, and Clive's influence had barely begun to emerge. The rivalry between the English and the French, which had already destabilized the south, hadn't affected Bengal. That region was effectively governed by Ali Vardi Khan, who strictly prohibited foreign settlers in Calcutta and Chandernagore from bringing European conflicts to his territory. The responsibilities of a young “writer” at that time were precisely what the title suggests. Early on, Hastings was put in charge of an aurang or factory in the interior, where he was responsible for overseeing the production of silk and cotton goods through a system of monetary advances. In 1753, he was moved to Cossimbazar, the river port for the native capital of Murshidabad. In 1756, the old nawab passed away, and his grandson Surajud-Dowlah, a young man of 19 labeled as unstable, took over. His name is forever linked with the tragedy of the Black Hole. When this impulsive young prince decided to expel the English from Bengal out of revenge for a perceived slight, his first action was to seize the fortified factory at Cossimbazar and imprison Hastings and his colleagues. Hastings was soon freed at the request of the Dutch resident and used his position in Murshidabad to negotiate with the English refugees at Falta, a site for a Dutch factory near the Hugli River's mouth. Later, he proudly recalled his involvement during this time, which introduced him to the complexities of Eastern diplomacy. Eventually, he felt he had to escape the Muslim court and join the main group of English at Falta. When the relief force from Madras, led by Colonel Clive and Admiral Watson, arrived, Hastings volunteered and participated in the action that recaptured Calcutta. Clive recognized Hastings's contributions by appointing him in 1758 as the resident at the court of Murshidabad. It was here that he first clashed with the Bengali Brahman, Nuncomar, whose later fate generated more disputes than any other part of Hastings's career. During his three years as resident, Hastings was able to provide several valuable services to the Company; however, it's crucial to note that his name does not appear in the official lists of those who profited financially from the vulnerabilities and weaknesses of the local government. In 1761, he was promoted to a council member under Mr. Vansittart's presidency, who had been brought from Madras by Clive. The period of Vansittart's rule has accurately been described as “the most revolting page of our Indian history.” The full responsibilities of governance remained with the nawab while a few unchecked English traders amassed real power. The council members, military leaders, and commercial residents plundered on a grand scale. Even the youngest employees of the Company claimed the right to trade for themselves without paying taxes or complying with local laws, not just for themselves but also for any native subordinate they allowed to use their name. This exemption, which threatened the very foundations of the Muslim government, ultimately led to a break with the nawab. Macaulay, in his famous essay, claimed that “little is known about Hastings's actions at this time.” In reality, the book Macaulay was ostensibly reviewing details the honorable role Hastings consistently played against the vast majority of the council. Sometimes in partnership with Vansittart and sometimes entirely alone, he tirelessly protested their policies and practices. At one point, Mr. Batson publicly accused him of “supporting the nawab’s cause and acting as a paid lawyer defending all his actions, regardless of how dishonorable or harmful to the Company.” This sparked a conflict. Batson challenged him and struck him in the council chamber. When war finally started, Hastings officially noted his prior decision to resign, distancing himself from the actions he had always opposed. After waiting for the decisive victory at Buxar over the joint forces of Bengal and Oudh, he resigned his position and set sail for England in November 1764.

After fourteen years’ residence in Bengal Hastings did not return home a rich man, estimated by the opportunities of his position. According to the custom of the time he had augmented his slender salary by private trade. At a later date he was charged by Burke with having taken up profitable contracts for supplying bullocks for the use of the Company’s troops. It is admitted that he conducted by means of agents a large business in timber in the Gangetic Sundarbans. When at Falta he had married Mrs Buchanan, the widow of an officer. She bore him two children, of whom one died in infancy at Murshidabad, and was shortly followed to the grave by her mother. Their common gravestone is in existence at the present day, bearing date July 11, 1759. The other child, a son, was sent to England, and also died shortly before his father’s return. While at home Hastings is said to have attached himself to literary society; and it may be inferred from his own letters that he now made the personal acquaintance of Samuel Johnson and Lord Mansfield. In 1766 he was called upon to give evidence before a committee of the House of Commons upon the affairs of Bengal. The good sense and clearness of the views which he expressed caused attention to be paid to his desire to be again employed in India. His pecuniary affairs were embarrassed, partly from the liberality with which he had endowed his few surviving relatives. The great influence of Lord Clive was also exercised on his behalf. At last, in the winter of 1768, he received the appointment of second in council at Madras. Among his companions on his voyage round the Cape were the Baron Imhoff, a speculative portrait-painter, and his wife, a lady of some personal attractions and great social charm, who was destined henceforth to be Hastings’s lifelong companion. Of his two years’ work at Madras it is needless to speak in detail. He won the good-will of his employers by devoting himself to the improvement of their manufacturing business, and he kept his hands clean from the prevalent taint of pecuniary transactions with the nawab of the Carnatic. One fact of some interest is not generally known. He drew up a scheme for the construction of a pier at Madras, to avoid the dangers of landing through the surf, and instructed his brother-in-law in England to obtain estimates from the engineers Brindley and Smeaton.

After fourteen years living in Bengal, Hastings didn’t come back home as a wealthy man, considering the opportunities of his position. Like many others at the time, he supplemented his modest salary with private trade. Later, Burke accused him of taking up profitable contracts to supply bullocks for the Company’s troops. It's acknowledged that he ran a large timber business in the Gangetic Sundarbans through agents. While in Falta, he married Mrs. Buchanan, the widow of an officer. She had two children with him; one died as an infant in Murshidabad, and shortly after, her mother passed away as well. Their shared gravestone still exists today, dated July 11, 1759. The other child, a son, was sent to England and also died shortly before Hastings returned. While home, it’s said that Hastings connected with literary circles; from his own letters, it's suggested he met Samuel Johnson and Lord Mansfield. In 1766, he was asked to give evidence before a committee of the House of Commons regarding Bengal's affairs. The common sense and clarity of his views attracted attention to his wish to return to India. His financial situation was strained, partly due to his generosity towards his few surviving relatives. The considerable influence of Lord Clive was also in his favor. Finally, in the winter of 1768, he was appointed second in council at Madras. Among the people he traveled with around the Cape were Baron Imhoff, a speculative portrait painter, and his wife, an attractive lady with great social charm, who was to become Hastings’s lifelong companion. It’s unnecessary to detail his two years of work in Madras. He gained his employers' goodwill by focusing on improving their manufacturing business and avoided the typical corruption of financial dealings with the nawab of the Carnatic. One interesting fact that isn’t widely known is that he created a plan for building a pier at Madras to mitigate the dangers of landing through the rough surf and instructed his brother-in-law back in England to get estimates from engineers Brindley and Smeaton.

In the beginning of 1772 his ambition was stimulated by the nomination to the second place in council in Bengal with a promise of the reversion of the governorship when Mr Cartier should retire. Since his departure from Bengal in 1764 the situation of affairs in that settlement had scarcely improved. The second governorship of Clive was marked by the transfer of the dīwānī or financial administration from the Mogul emperor to the Company, and by the enforcement of stringent regulations against the besetting sin of peculation. But Clive was followed by two inefficient successors; and in 1770 occurred the most terrible Indian famine on record, which is credibly estimated to have swept away one-third of the population. In April 1772 Warren Hastings took his seat as president of the council at Fort William. His first care was to carry out the instructions received from home, and effect a radical reform in the system of government. Clive’s plan of governing through the agency of the native court had proved a failure. The directors were determined “to stand forth as dīwān, and take upon themselves by their own servants the entire management of the revenues.” All the officers of administration were transferred from Murshidabad to Calcutta, which Hastings boasted at this early date that he would make the first city in Asia. This reform involved the ruin of many native reputations, and for a second time brought Hastings into collision with the wily Brahman, Nuncomar. At the same time a settlement of the land revenue on leases for five years was begun, and the police and military systems of the country were placed upon a new footing. Hastings was a man of immense industry, with an insatiable appetite for detail. The whole of this large series of reforms was conducted under his own personal supervision, and upon no part of his multifarious labours did he dwell in his letters home with greater pride. As an independent measure of economy, the stipend paid to the titular nawab of Bengal, who was then a minor, was reduced by one-half—to sixteen lakhs a year (say £160,000). Macaulay imputes this reduction to Hastings as a characteristic act of financial immorality; but in truth it had been expressly enjoined by the court of directors, in a despatch dated six months before he took up office. His pecuniary bargains with Shuja-ud-Dowlah, the nawab wazīr of Oudh, stand on a different basis. Hastings himself always regarded them as incidents in his general scheme of foreign policy. The Mahrattas at this time had got possession of the person of the Mogul emperor, Shah Alam, from whom Clive obtained the grant of Bengal in 1765, and to whom he assigned in return the districts of Allahabad and Kora and a tribute of £300,000. With the emperor in their camp, the Mahrattas were threatening the province of Oudh, and causing a large British force to be cantoned along the frontier for its defence. Warren Hastings, as a deliberate measure of policy, withheld the tribute due to the emperor, and resold Allahabad and Kora to the wazīr of Oudh. The Mahrattas retreated, and all danger for the time was dissipated by the death of their principal leader. The wazīr now bethought him that he had a good opportunity for satisfying an old quarrel against the adjoining tribe of Rohillas, who had played fast and loose with him while the Mahratta army was at hand. The Rohillas were a race of Afghan origin, who had established themselves for some generations in a fertile tract west of Oudh, between the Himalayas and the Ganges, which still bears the name of Rohilkhand. They were not so much the occupiers of the soil as a dominant caste of warriors and freebooters. But in those troubled days their title was as good as any to be found in India. After not a little hesitation, Hastings consented to allow the Company’s troops to be used to further the ambitious designs of his Oudh ally, in consideration of a sum of money which relieved the ever-pressing wants of the Bengal treasury. The Rohillas were defeated in fair fight. Some of them fled the country, and so far as possible Hastings obtained terms for those who remained. The fighting, no doubt, on the part of the wazīr was conducted with all the savagery of Oriental warfare; but there is no evidence that it was a war of extermination.

In early 1772, his ambition was fueled by being nominated for the second position on the council in Bengal, with a promise that he would take over as governor when Mr. Cartier retired. Since he left Bengal in 1764, conditions in the settlement had barely improved. Clive's second term as governor was defined by the transfer of financial authority from the Mogul emperor to the Company, as well as strict regulations against corruption. However, Clive was succeeded by two ineffective leaders, and in 1770, the worst famine in Indian history struck, leading to the death of an estimated one-third of the population. In April 1772, Warren Hastings became president of the council at Fort William. His main focus was to implement the instructions he received from home and bring significant reforms to the government system. Clive's approach of governing through the native court had failed. The directors were committed to acting as the financial authority, taking full control of revenue management with their own staff. All administrative officers were moved from Murshidabad to Calcutta, where Hastings confidently claimed he would make it the premier city in Asia. This reform damaged many native reputations and once again put Hastings at odds with the clever Brahman, Nuncomar. At the same time, he initiated a five-year land revenue lease system and revamped the country's police and military structures. Hastings was incredibly hardworking, with a relentless focus on detail. He personally oversaw the entire series of reforms, and he took great pride in discussing them in his letters home. As a cost-saving measure, the pay for the titular nawab of Bengal, who was a minor at the time, was cut by half to sixteen lakhs a year (about £160,000). Macaulay criticizes this cut as a typical example of financial immorality by Hastings, but it was actually mandated by the court of directors in a letter sent six months before he took office. Hastings’s financial dealings with Shuja-ud-Dowlah, the nawab wazir of Oudh, were viewed differently; Hastings considered them part of his broader foreign policy strategy. At that time, the Mahrattas had captured the Mogul emperor, Shah Alam, from whom Clive had received the Bengal grant in 1765. In return, Clive had given him the districts of Allahabad and Kora, along with a tribute of £300,000. With the emperor in their camp, the Mahrattas threatened the province of Oudh, prompting the stationing of a significant British force along the frontier for defense. As a strategic decision, Warren Hastings withheld the tribute owed to the emperor and resold Allahabad and Kora to the wawizir of Oudh. The Mahrattas withdrew, and the threat diminished with the death of their main leader. The wazir then seized the opportunity to settle an old score with the neighboring Rohilla tribe, which had previously betrayed him during the Mahratta's presence. The Rohillas were of Afghan descent and had settled in a rich area west of Oudh, known as Rohilkhand, for generations. They were more warriors and raiders than actual landholders, but in those tumultuous times, their claim was as valid as any in India. After some hesitation, Hastings agreed to allow the Company's troops to support his Oudh ally’s ambitions in exchange for funds that eased the constant strain on the Bengal treasury. The Rohillas were defeated in open battle. Some fled the country, and Hastings negotiated terms for those who remained as best he could. While the fighting by the wazir was undoubtedly brutal, there is no evidence it was a campaign of annihilation.

Meanwhile, the affairs of the East India Company had come under the consideration of parliament. The Regulating Act, passed by Lord North’s ministry in 1773, effected considerable changes in the constitution of the Bengal government. The council was reduced to four members with a governor-general, who were to exercise certain indefinite powers of control over the presidencies of Madras and Bombay. Hastings was named in the act as governor-general for a term of five years. The council consisted of General Clavering and the Hon. Colonel Monson, two third-rate politicians of considerable parliamentary influence; Philip Francis (q.v.), then only known as an able permanent official; and Barwell, of the Bengal Civil Service. At the same time a supreme court of judicature was appointed, composed of a chief and three puisne judges, to exercise an indeterminate jurisdiction at Calcutta. The chief-justice was Sir Elijah Impey, 57 already mentioned as a schoolfellow of Hastings at Westminster. The whole tendency of the Regulating Act was to establish for the first time the influence of the crown, or rather of parliament, in Indian affairs. The new members of council disembarked at Calcutta on the 19th of October 1774; and on the following day commenced the long feud which scarcely terminated twenty-one years later with the acquittal of Warren Hastings by the House of Lords. Macaulay states that the members of council were put in ill-humour because their salute of guns was not proportionate to their dignity. In a contemporary letter Francis thus expresses the same petty feeling: “Surely Mr H. might have put on a ruffled shirt.” Taking advantage of an ambiguous clause in their commission, the majority of the council (for Barwell uniformly sided with Hastings) forthwith proceeded to pass in review the recent measures of the governor-general. All that he had done they condemned; all that they could they reversed. Hastings was reduced to the position of a cipher at their meetings. After a time they lent a ready ear to detailed allegations of corruption brought against him by his old enemy Nuncomar. To charges from such a source, and brought in such a manner, Hastings disdained to reply, and referred his accuser to the supreme court. The majority of the council, in their executive capacity, resolved that the governor-general had been guilty of peculation, and ordered him to refund. A few days later Nuncomar was thrown into prison on a charge of forgery preferred by a private prosecutor, tried before the supreme court sitting in bar, found guilty by a jury of Englishmen and sentenced to be hanged. Hastings always maintained that he did not cause the charge to be instituted, and the legality of Nuncomar’s trial is thoroughly proved by Sir James Stephen. The majority of the council abandoned their supporter, who was executed in due course. He had forwarded a petition for reprieve to the council, which Clavering took care should not be presented in time, and which was subsequently burnt by the common hangman on the motion of Francis. While the strife was at its hottest, Hastings had sent an agent to England with a general authority to place his resignation in the hands of the Company under certain conditions. The agent thought fit to exercise that authority. The resignation was promptly accepted, and one of the directors was appointed to the vacancy. But in the meantime Colonel Monson had died, and Hastings was thus restored, by virtue of his casting vote, to the supreme management of affairs. He refused to ratify his resignation; and when Clavering attempted to seize on the governor-generalship, he judiciously obtained an opinion from the judges of the supreme court in his favour. From that time forth, though he could not always command an absolute majority in council, Hastings was never again subjected to gross insult, and his general policy was able to prevail.

Meanwhile, the affairs of the East India Company were being discussed in Parliament. The Regulating Act, passed by Lord North's government in 1773, made significant changes to the structure of the Bengal government. The council was reduced to four members with a governor-general, who were given certain unclear powers of control over the presidencies of Madras and Bombay. Hastings was named in the act as governor-general for a five-year term. The council included General Clavering and the Hon. Colonel Monson, two second-rate politicians with significant parliamentary influence; Philip Francis (q.v.), then only recognized as a capable permanent official; and Barwell, from the Bengal Civil Service. At the same time, a supreme court was established, consisting of a chief justice and three other judges, to exercise undefined jurisdiction in Calcutta. The chief justice was Sir Elijah Impey, already mentioned as a schoolmate of Hastings at Westminster. The overall aim of the Regulating Act was to establish, for the first time, the influence of the crown, or more accurately, of Parliament, in Indian affairs. The new council members arrived in Calcutta on October 19, 1774, and the following day marked the beginning of a long feud that hardly ended twenty-one years later with Warren Hastings' acquittal by the House of Lords. Macaulay notes that the council members were in a bad mood because their salute of guns didn't match their status. In a contemporary letter, Francis expressed this same petty sentiment: “Surely Mr. H. could have worn a ruffled shirt.” Taking advantage of a vague clause in their commission, the majority of the council (as Barwell consistently sided with Hastings) immediately began to review the recent actions of the governor-general. They condemned everything he had done and reversed all that they could. Hastings was reduced to the status of a non-entity at their meetings. After a while, they readily listened to detailed accusations of corruption made against him by his old rival Nuncomar. Faced with allegations from such a source, and presented in such a way, Hastings chose not to respond and referred his accuser to the supreme court. The majority of the council, in their executive role, decided that the governor-general had committed theft and ordered him to repay. A few days later, Nuncomar was imprisoned on a charge of forgery brought by a private prosecutor, tried before the supreme court sitting in bar, found guilty by a jury of Englishmen, and sentenced to hang. Hastings always claimed that he did not instigate the charges, and the legality of Nuncomar’s trial is thoroughly validated by Sir James Stephen. The majority of the council distanced themselves from their supporter, who was executed as scheduled. He had sent a petition for clemency to the council, which Clavering made sure was not presented in time, and which was later burned by the public executioner at Francis's request. While the conflict was at its peak, Hastings had sent an agent to England with general authority to submit his resignation to the Company under certain conditions. The agent chose to exercise that authority. The resignation was quickly accepted, and one of the directors was appointed to fill the vacancy. However, Colonel Monson had died in the meantime, which restored Hastings, by virtue of his deciding vote, to the overall control of affairs. He refused to validate his resignation; and when Clavering attempted to take over the governor-generalship, he wisely obtained a favorable opinion from the judges of the supreme court. From that point on, although he couldn't always secure an absolute majority in council, Hastings was never again subjected to blatant disrespect, and his overall strategy was able to prevail.

A crisis was now approaching in foreign affairs which demanded all the experience and all the genius of Hastings for its solution. Bengal was prosperous, and free from external enemies on every quarter. But the government of Bombay had hurried on a rupture with the Mahratta confederacy at a time when France was on the point of declaring war against England, and when the mother-country found herself unable to subdue her rebellious colonists in America. Hastings did not hesitate to take upon his own shoulders the whole responsibility of military affairs. All the French settlements in India were promptly occupied. On the part of Bombay, the Mahratta war was conducted with procrastination and disgrace. But Hastings amply avenged the capitulation of Wargaon by the complete success of his own plan of operations. Colonel Goddard with a Bengal army marched across the breadth of the peninsula from the valley of the Ganges to the western sea, and achieved almost without a blow the conquest of Gujarat. Captain Popham, with a small detachment, stormed the rock fortress of Gwalior, then deemed impregnable and the key of central India; and by this feat held in check Sindhia, the most formidable of the Mahratta chiefs. The Bhonsla Mahratta raja of Nagpur, whose dominions bordered on Bengal, was won over by the diplomacy of an emissary of Hastings. But while these events were taking place, a new source of embarrassment had arisen at Calcutta. The supreme court, whether rightly or wrongly, assumed a jurisdiction of first instance over the entire province of Bengal. The English common law, with all the absurdities and rigours of that day, was arbitrarily extended to an alien system of society. Zamíndárs, or government renters, were arrested on mesne process; the sanctity of the zenána, or women’s chamber, as dear to Hindus as to Mahommedans, was violated by the sheriff’s officer; the deepest feelings of the people and the entire fabric of revenue administration were alike disregarded. On this point the entire council acted in harmony. Hastings and Francis went joint-bail for imprisoned natives of distinction. At last, after the dispute between the judges and the executive threatened to become a trial of armed force, Hastings set it at rest by a characteristic stroke of policy. A new judicial office was created in the name of the Company, to which Sir Elijah Impey was appointed, though he never consented to draw the additional salary offered to him. The understanding between Hastings and Francis, originating in this state of affairs, was for a short period extended to general policy. An agreement was come to by which Francis received patronage for his circle of friends, while Hastings was to be unimpeded in the control of foreign affairs. But a difference of interpretation arose. Hastings recorded in an official minute that he had found Francis’s private and public conduct to be “void of truth and honour.” They met as duellists. Francis fell wounded, and soon afterwards returned to England.

A crisis in foreign affairs was approaching that required all of Hastings' experience and intelligence to resolve. Bengal was thriving and free from external threats. However, the government of Bombay rushed into conflict with the Mahratta confederacy just as France was about to declare war on England, and the mother country was struggling to control its rebellious colonies in America. Hastings took full responsibility for military matters. All French settlements in India were quickly seized. The Mahratta war from Bombay was marked by delays and dishonor. Hastings, however, avenged the defeat at Wargaon with the success of his own military strategy. Colonel Goddard led a Bengal army across the peninsula from the Ganges valley to the western sea and almost effortlessly conquered Gujarat. Captain Popham, with a small troops detachment, captured the rock fortress of Gwalior, which was considered impregnable and the key to central India; this feat kept Sindhia, the most powerful Mahratta chief, in check. The Bhonsla Mahratta raja of Nagpur, whose territories bordered Bengal, was swayed by the diplomatic efforts of Hastings' envoy. But while all this was happening, a new challenge emerged in Calcutta. The supreme court, whether rightly or wrongly, claimed authority over the entire province of Bengal. English common law, with all its absurdities and harshness from that time, was applied to a completely different society. Zamíndárs, or government renters, were arrested without due process; the sanctity of the zenána, or women’s quarters, which was sacred to both Hindus and Muslims, was violated by the sheriff’s officer; and the deep-seated sentiments of the people and the entire revenue system were disregarded. On this issue, the entire council was united. Hastings and Francis jointly bailed out imprisoned notable locals. Eventually, when the conflict between the judges and the executive seemed like it might escalate to armed confrontation, Hastings resolved it with a clever policy move. A new judicial office was created under the name of the Company, and Sir Elijah Impey was appointed to it, though he refused the extra salary offered to him. The understanding between Hastings and Francis, stemming from this situation, briefly extended to broader policy matters. They reached an agreement in which Francis received patronage for his associates while Hastings maintained control over foreign affairs. But they disagreed on interpretations. Hastings noted in a formal record that he found Francis's personal and public behavior to be “devoid of truth and honor.” They confronted each other like duelists. Francis was wounded and soon returned to England.

The Mahratta war was not yet terminated, but a far more formidable danger now threatened the English in India. The imprudent conduct of the Madras authorities had irritated beyond endurance the two greatest Mussulman powers in the peninsula, the nizam of the Deccan and Hyder Ali, the usurper of Mysore, who began to negotiate an alliance with the Mahrattas. A second time the genius of Hastings saved the British empire in the east. On the arrival of the news that Hyder had descended from the highlands of Mysore, cut to pieces the only British army in the field, and swept the Carnatic up to the gates of Madras, he at once adopted a policy of extraordinary boldness. He signed a blank treaty of peace with the Mahrattas, who were still in arms, reversed the action of the Madras government towards the nizam, and concentrated all the resources of Bengal against Hyder Ali. Sir Eyre Coote, a general of renown in former Carnatic wars, was sent by sea to Madras with all the troops and treasure that could be got together; and a strong body of reinforcements subsequently marched southwards under Colonel Pearse along the coast line of Orissa. The landing of Coote preserved Madras from destruction, though the war lasted through many campaigns and only terminated with the death of Hyder. Pearse’s detachment was decimated by an epidemic of cholera (perhaps the first mention of this disease by name in Indian history); but the survivors penetrated to Madras, and not only held in check Bhonsla and the nizam, but also corroborated the lesson taught by Goddard—that the Company’s sepoys could march anywhere, when boldly led. Hastings’s personal task was to provide the ways and means for this exhausting war. A considerable economy was effected by a reform in the establishment for collecting the land tax. The government monopolies of opium and salt were then for the first time placed upon a remunerative basis. But these reforms were of necessity slow in their beneficial operation. The pressing demands of the military chest had to be satisfied by loans, and in at least one case from the private purse of the governor-general. Ready cash could alone fill up the void; and it was to the hoards of native princes that Hastings’s fertile mind at once turned. Chait Sing, raja of Benares, the greatest of the vassal chiefs who had grown rich under the protection of the British rule, lay under the suspicion of disloyalty. The wazir of Oudh had fallen into arrears in the payment due for the maintenance of the Company’s garrison posted in his dominions, and his administration was in great disorder. In his case the ancestral hoards were under the control of his mother, the begum of Oudh, into whose hands they had been allowed to pass at the time when Hastings 58 was powerless in council. Hastings resolved to make a progress up country in order to arrange the affairs of both provinces, and bring back all the treasure that could be squeezed out of its holders by his personal intervention. When he reached Benares and presented his demands, the raja rose in insurrection, and the governor-general barely escaped with his life. But the faithful Popham rapidly rallied a force for his defence. The insurgents were defeated again and again; Chait Sing took to flight, and an augmented permanent tribute was imposed upon his successor. The Oudh business was managed with less risk. The wazir consented to everything demanded of him. The begum was charged with having abetted Chait Sing in his rebellion; and after the severest pressure applied to herself and her attendant eunuchs, a fine of more than a million sterling was exacted from her. Hastings appears to have been not altogether satisfied with the incidents of this expedition, and to have anticipated the censure which it received in England. As a measure of precaution, he procured documentary evidence of the rebellious intentions of the raja and the begum, to the validity of which Impey obligingly lent his extra-judicial sanction.

The Mahratta war wasn't over yet, but a much bigger threat now faced the British in India. The reckless actions of the Madras officials had pushed the two most powerful Muslim leaders in the area—the Nizam of the Deccan and Hyder Ali, the self-proclaimed ruler of Mysore—into an alliance with the Mahrattas. Once again, Hastings's brilliance saved the British empire in the east. When he heard that Hyder had come down from the highlands of Mysore, destroyed the only British army in the field, and advanced through the Carnatic to the gates of Madras, he quickly adopted a bold strategy. He signed a blank peace treaty with the still-hostile Mahrattas, changed the Madras government's stance toward the Nizam, and focused all of Bengal’s resources against Hyder Ali. Sir Eyre Coote, a well-known general from previous Carnatic wars, was sent by sea to Madras with all the troops and treasures he could gather; a strong group of reinforcements later marched south under Colonel Pearse along the coast of Orissa. Coote’s arrival saved Madras from destruction, even though the war continued for several campaigns and only ended with Hyder's death. Pearse’s detachment suffered greatly from a cholera epidemic (possibly the first recorded mention of this disease in Indian history); however, the survivors made it to Madras and not only held back Bhonsla and the Nizam but also reinforced the lesson from Goddard—that the Company’s sepoys could march anywhere when effectively led. Hastings’s main task was to secure funding for this lengthy war. He managed significant savings by reforming the land tax collection system. For the first time, the government monopolies on opium and salt were made profitable. However, these reforms took time to show benefits. Urgent military expenditures had to be covered by loans, and in at least one case, by Hastings’s personal funds. Only ready cash could fill the gaps, and Hastings quickly turned his attention to the riches of local rulers. Chait Sing, the Raja of Benares and the wealthiest of the vassal chiefs who had prospered under British protection, was suspected of disloyalty. The Wazir of Oudh had fallen behind on payments owed for the upkeep of the Company’s troops in his area, and his governance was chaotic. His mother, the Begum of Oudh, controlled the family’s wealth, which had passed to her when Hastings was powerless in council. Hastings decided to travel inland to sort out the finances of both provinces and retrieve whatever treasure he could collect directly. When he arrived in Benares and made his demands, the Raja rebelled, and the governor-general barely escaped with his life. However, the loyal Popham quickly assembled a force to defend him. The rebels were defeated repeatedly; Chait Sing fled, and a new permanent tribute was imposed on his successor. The situation in Oudh was handled with less risk. The Wazir agreed to all demands. The Begum was accused of supporting Chait Sing in his uprising; after intense pressure on her and her eunuchs, she was fined over a million sterling. Hastings seemed not entirely pleased with the events of this expedition and anticipated the criticism it would receive in England. As a precaution, he obtained documentary proof of the rebellious intentions from both the Raja and the Begum, which Impey kindly agreed to legitimize.

The remainder of Hastings’s term of office in India was passed in comparative tranquillity, both from internal opposition and foreign war. The centre of interest now shifts to the India House and to the British parliament. The long struggle between the Company and the ministers of the crown for the supreme control of Indian affairs and the attendant patronage had reached its climax. The decisive success of Hastings’s administration alone postponed the inevitable solution. His original term of five years would have expired in 1778; but it was annually prolonged by special act of parliament until his voluntary resignation. Though Hastings was thus irremovable, his policy did not escape censure. Ministers were naturally anxious to obtain the reversion to his vacant post, and Indian affairs formed at this time the hinge on which party politics turned. On one occasion Dundas carried a motion in the House of Commons, censuring Hastings and demanding his recall. The directors of the Company were disposed to act upon this resolution; but in the court of proprietors, with whom the decision ultimately lay, Hastings always possessed a sufficient majority. Fox’s India Bill led to the downfall of the Coalition ministry in 1783. The act which Pitt successfully carried in the following year introduced a new constitution, in which Hastings felt that he had no place. In February 1785 he finally sailed from Calcutta, after a dignified ceremony of resignation, and amid enthusiastic farewells from all classes.

The rest of Hastings’s time in office in India was spent in relative peace, both from local opposition and foreign wars. The focus now shifts to the India House and the British Parliament. The long conflict between the Company and the crown's ministers for control over Indian affairs and the related patronage had reached its peak. The decisive success of Hastings’s administration only delayed the inevitable resolution. His original five-year term would have ended in 1778, but it was extended each year by special acts of Parliament until he voluntarily resigned. Although Hastings was thus secure in his position, his policies faced criticism. The ministers were understandably eager to secure his vacant position, and Indian affairs were at that time the key to party politics. At one point, Dundas pushed through a motion in the House of Commons, criticizing Hastings and calling for his recall. The directors of the Company were inclined to act on this decision; however, in the court of proprietors, where the final decision rested, Hastings always had enough support. Fox’s India Bill contributed to the fall of the Coalition ministry in 1783. The act that Pitt successfully passed the following year introduced a new constitution, in which Hastings felt he had no role. In February 1785, he finally left Calcutta after a dignified resignation ceremony and enthusiastic farewells from all social classes.

On his arrival in England, after a second absence of sixteen years, he was not displeased with the reception he met with at court and in the country. A peerage was openly talked of as his due, while his own ambition pointed to some responsible office at home. Pitt had never taken a side against him, while Lord Chancellor Thurlow was his pronounced friend. But he was now destined to learn that his enemy Francis, whom he had discomfited in the council chamber at Calcutta, was more than his match in the parliamentary arena. Edmund Burke had taken the subject races of India under the protection of his eloquence. Francis, who had been the early friend of Burke, supplied him with the personal animus against Hastings, and with the knowledge of detail, which he might otherwise have lacked. The Whig party on this occasion unanimously followed Burke’s lead. Dundas, Pitt’s favourite subordinate, had already committed himself by his earlier resolution of censure; and Pitt was induced by motives which are still obscure to incline the ministerial majority to the same side. To meet the oratory of Burke and Sheridan and Fox, Hastings wrote an elaborate minute with which he wearied the ears of the House for two successive nights, and he subsidized a swarm of pamphleteers. The impeachment was decided upon in 1786, but the actual trial did not commence until 1788. For seven long years Hastings was upon his defence on the charge of “high crimes and misdemeanours.” During this anxious period he appears to have borne himself with characteristic dignity, such as is consistent with no other hypothesis than the consciousness of innocence. At last, in 1795, the House of Lords gave a verdict of not guilty on all charges laid against him; and he left the bar at which he had so frequently appeared, with his reputation clear, but ruined in fortune. However large the wealth he brought back from India, all was swallowed up in defraying the expenses of his trial. Continuing the line of conduct which in most other men would be called hypocrisy, he forwarded a petition to Pitt praying that he might be reimbursed his costs from the public funds. This petition, of course, was rejected. At last, when he was reduced to actual destitution, it was arranged that the East India Company should grant him an annuity of £4000 for a term of years, with £90,000 paid down in advance. This annuity expired before his death; and he was compelled to make more than one fresh appeal to the bounty of the Company, which was never withheld. Shortly before his acquittal he had been able to satisfy the dream of his childhood, by buying back the ancestral manor of Daylesford, where the remainder of his life was passed in honourable retirement. In 1813 he was called on to give evidence upon Indian affairs before the two houses of parliament, which received him with exceptional marks of respect. The university of Oxford conferred on him the honorary degree of D.C.L.; and in the following year he was sworn of the privy council, and took a prominent part in the reception given to the duke of Wellington and the allied sovereigns. He died on the 22nd of August 1818, in his 86th year, and lies buried behind the chancel of the parish church, which he had recently restored at his own charges.

On his arrival in England, after being away for sixteen years, he was pleased with the reception he received at court and in the country. People were openly discussing a peerage for him, while his personal ambition aimed at a significant office at home. Pitt had never opposed him, and Lord Chancellor Thurlow was a strong ally. However, he was about to find out that his enemy Francis, whom he had bested in the council chamber at Calcutta, was more than a match for him in Parliament. Edmund Burke had taken the Indian subjects under his eloquent defense. Francis, who had previously been a friend of Burke, provided him with the personal motivation against Hastings, as well as the detailed knowledge he might have otherwise lacked. The Whig party unanimously supported Burke’s position this time. Dundas, Pitt’s favored subordinate, had already committed himself by his earlier censure resolution, and Pitt was swayed by motives still unclear to steer the ministerial majority to the same side. To counter the speeches of Burke, Sheridan, and Fox, Hastings wrote an elaborate statement that bored the House for two consecutive nights, and he hired a swarm of pamphleteers. The impeachment was decided in 1786, but the actual trial didn’t start until 1788. For seven long years, Hastings defended himself against the charge of “high crimes and misdemeanours.” During this stressful time, he maintained his characteristic dignity, consistent only with a sincere belief in his innocence. Finally, in 1795, the House of Lords found him not guilty on all charges, and he walked away from the bar where he had often appeared, with his reputation intact but financially broken. Despite the wealth he returned from India with, it was all consumed by the costs of his trial. Continuing a behavior that many would label hypocritical, he sent a petition to Pitt asking to be reimbursed from public funds for his expenses. This petition, of course, was turned down. Eventually, when he faced actual poverty, it was arranged for the East India Company to provide him with an annuity of £4,000 for a number of years, along with an upfront payment of £90,000. This annuity ended before his death, forcing him to make multiple appeals to the Company's generosity, which were always met. Shortly before his acquittal, he realized a childhood dream by buying back the family estate of Daylesford, where he spent the rest of his life in honorable retirement. In 1813, he was called to give testimony on Indian matters before both houses of Parliament, where he was received with exceptional respect. The University of Oxford awarded him an honorary degree of D.C.L.; the following year he was sworn in as a privy counselor and played a significant role in welcoming the Duke of Wellington and the allied sovereigns. He passed away on August 22, 1818, at the age of 86, and was buried behind the chancel of the parish church, which he had recently restored at his own expense.

In physical appearance, Hastings “looked like a great man, and not like a bad man.” The body was wholly subjugated to the mind. A frame naturally slight had been further attenuated by rigorous habits of temperance, and thus rendered proof against the diseases of the tropics. Against his private character not even calumny has breathed a reproach. As brother, as husband and as friend, his affections were as steadfast as they were warm. By the public he was always regarded as reserved, but within his own inner circle he gave and received perfect confidence. In his dealings with money, he was characterized rather by liberality of expenditure than by carefulness of acquisition. A classical education and the instincts of family pride saved him from both the greed and the vulgar display which marked the typical “nabob,” the self-made man of those days. He could support the position of a governor-general and of a country gentleman with equal credit. Concerning his second marriage, it suffices to say that the Baroness Imhoff was nearly forty years of age, with a family of grown-up children, when the complaisant law of her native land allowed her to become Mrs Hastings. She survived her husband, who cherished towards her to the last the sentiments of a lover. Her children he adopted as his own; and it was chiefly for her sake that he desired the peerage which was twice held out to him.

In terms of looks, Hastings “appeared to be a great man, not a bad man.” His body was completely subservient to his mind. A naturally slender frame had been further slimmed down by strict habits of moderation, making him resilient against tropical diseases. There hasn’t been a single reproach against his character, even from slander. As a brother, husband, and friend, his love was as unwavering as it was warm. The public always saw him as reserved, but within his close circle, he gave and received complete trust. In his financial dealings, he was known more for his generosity in spending than for being cautious about how he earned it. A classical education and a sense of family pride kept him from the greed and flashy behavior typical of a “nabob,” the self-made men of that time. He could hold the positions of governor-general and country gentleman with equal respect. Regarding his second marriage, it’s enough to say that Baroness Imhoff was nearly forty years old, with grown children, when the accommodating laws of her country allowed her to become Mrs. Hastings. She outlived her husband, who maintained loving feelings for her until the end. He adopted her children as his own, and it was mainly for her that he pursued the peerage that was offered to him twice.

Hastings’s public career will probably never cease to be a subject of controversy. It was his misfortune to be the scapegoat upon whose head parliament laid the accumulated sins, real and imaginary, of the East India Company. If the acquisition of the Indian empire can be supported on ethical grounds, Hastings needs no defence. No one who reads his private correspondence will admit that even his least defensible acts were dictated by dishonourable motives. It is more pleasing to point out certain of his public measures upon which no difference of opinion can arise. He was the first to attempt to open a trade route with Tibet, and to organize a survey of Bengal and of the eastern seas. It was he who persuaded the pundits of Bengal to disclose the treasures of Sanskrit to European scholars. He founded the Madrasa or college for Mahommedan education at Calcutta, primarily out of his own funds; and he projected the foundation of an Indian institute in England. The Bengal Asiatic Society was established under his auspices, though he yielded the post of president to Sir W. Jones. No Englishman ever understood the native character so well as Hastings; none ever devoted himself more heartily to the promotion of every scheme, great and small, that could advance the prosperity of India. Natives and Anglo-Indians alike venerate his name, the former as their first beneficent administrator, the latter as the 59 most able and the most enlightened of their own class. If Clive’s sword conquered the Indian empire, it was the brain of Hastings that planned the system of civil administration, and his genius that saved the empire in its darkest hour.

Hastings’s public career will probably always be a topic of debate. It was unfortunate for him to be the scapegoat upon whom parliament placed the accumulated faults, both real and imagined, of the East India Company. If the acquisition of the Indian empire can be justified on ethical grounds, Hastings doesn't need a defense. Anyone who reads his private correspondence will agree that even his least justifiable actions weren’t driven by dishonorable motives. It's more satisfying to highlight certain public measures of his that are beyond dispute. He was the first to try opening a trade route with Tibet and to organize a survey of Bengal and the eastern seas. He convinced the pundits of Bengal to share the treasures of Sanskrit with European scholars. He established the Madrasa, or college for Muslim education, in Calcutta, mostly using his own money; and he planned to set up an Indian institute in England. The Bengal Asiatic Society was founded under his leadership, even though he stepped down as president in favor of Sir W. Jones. No Englishman ever understood the native character as well as Hastings did; no one ever committed himself more wholeheartedly to promoting every initiative, big and small, that could enhance the prosperity of India. Both natives and Anglo-Indians respect his name—the former as their first benevolent administrator, the latter as the most capable and enlightened of their own group. If Clive’s sword conquered the Indian empire, it was Hastings’s intellect that designed the civil administration system and his brilliance that saved the empire in its darkest time.

See G. B. Malleson, Life of Warren Hastings (1894); G. W. Forrest, The Administration of Warren Hastings (Calcutta, 1892); Sir Charles Lawson, The Private Life of Warren Hastings (1895); L. J. Trotter, Warren Hastings (“Rulers of India” series) (1890); Sir Alfred Lyall, Warren Hastings (“English Men of Action” series) (1889); F. M. Holmes, Four Heroes of India (1892); G. W. Hastings, A Vindication of Warren Hastings (1909). Macaulay’s famous essay, though a classic, is very partial and inaccurate; and Burke’s speech, on the impeachment of Warren Hastings, is magnificent rhetoric. The true historical view has been restored by Sir James Stephen’s Story of Nuncomar (1885) and by Sir John Strachey’s Hastings and the Rohilla War (1892), and it is enforced in some detail in Sydney C. Grier’s Letters of Warren Hastings to his Wife (1905), material for which existed in a mass of documents relating to Hastings, acquired by the British Museum.

See G. B. Malleson, Life of Warren Hastings (1894); G. W. Forrest, The Administration of Warren Hastings (Calcutta, 1892); Sir Charles Lawson, The Private Life of Warren Hastings (1895); L. J. Trotter, Warren Hastings (“Rulers of India” series) (1890); Sir Alfred Lyall, Warren Hastings (“English Men of Action” series) (1889); F. M. Holmes, Four Heroes of India (1892); G. W. Hastings, A Vindication of Warren Hastings (1909). Macaulay’s famous essay, although a classic, is quite biased and inaccurate; and Burke’s speech during the impeachment of Warren Hastings is magnificent rhetoric. The true historical perspective has been restored by Sir James Stephen’s Story of Nuncomar (1885) and by Sir John Strachey’s Hastings and the Rohilla War (1892), and it is detailed further in Sydney C. Grier’s Letters of Warren Hastings to his Wife (1905), which was based on a wealth of documents related to Hastings, collected by the British Museum.

(J. S. Co.)

HASTINGS, a municipal, county and parliamentary borough and watering-place of Sussex, England, one of the Cinque Ports, 62 m. S.E. by S. from London, on the South Eastern & Chatham and the London, Brighton & South Coast railways. Pop. (1901), 65,528. It is picturesquely situated at the mouth of two narrow valleys, and, being sheltered by considerable hills on the north and east, has an especially mild climate. Eastward along the coast towards Fairlight, and inland, the country is beautiful. A parade fronts the English Channel, and connects the town on the west with St Leonard’s, which is included within the borough. This is mainly a residential quarter, and has four railway stations on the lines serving Hastings. Both Hastings and St Leonard’s have fine piers; there is a covered parade known as the Marina, and the Alexandra Park of 75 acres was opened in 1891. There are also numerous public gardens. The sandy beach is extensive, and affords excellent bathing. On the brink of the West Cliff stand a square and a circular tower and other fragments of the castle, probably erected soon after the time of William the Conqueror; together with the ruins, opened up by excavation in 1824, of the castle chapel, a transitional Norman structure 110 ft. long, with a nave, chancel and aisles. Besides the chapel there was formerly a college, both being under the control of a dean and secular canons. The deanery was held by Thomas Becket, and one of the canonries by William of Wykeham. The principal public buildings are the old parish churches of All Saints and St Clements, the first containing in its register for 1619 the baptism of Titus Oates, whose father was rector of the parish; numerous modern churches, the town hall (1880); theatre, music hall and assembly rooms. The Brassey Institute contains a public library, museum and art school. The Albert Memorial clock-tower was erected in 1864. Educational institutions include the grammar school (1883), school of science and art (1878) and technical schools. At the west end of the town are several hospitals and convalescent homes. The prosperity of the town depends almost wholly on its reputation as a watering-place, but there is a small fishing and boat-building industry. In 1890 an act of parliament authorized the construction of a harbour, but the work, begun in 1896, was not completed. The fish-market beneath the castle cliff is picturesque. The parliamentary borough, returning one member, falls within the Rye division of the county. The county borough was created in 1888. The municipal borough is under a mayor, 10 aldermen and 30 councillors. Area, 4857 acres.

HASTINGS, is a town and a parliamentary borough located in Sussex, England, one of the Cinque Ports, 62 miles southeast of London, served by the South Eastern & Chatham and the London, Brighton & South Coast railways. As of 1901, the population was 65,528. It is charmingly positioned at the mouth of two narrow valleys, and its location is protected by significant hills to the north and east, giving it a notably mild climate. The scenery is beautiful both along the coast heading towards Fairlight and inland. There’s a promenade that faces the English Channel, linking the town to St Leonard’s, which is part of the borough. This area primarily consists of residential neighborhoods and has four railway stations serving Hastings. Both Hastings and St Leonard’s feature impressive piers; there’s a covered promenade known as the Marina, and the 75-acre Alexandra Park, which opened in 1891. Numerous public gardens can also be found. The sandy beach is wide and offers excellent swimming options. At the edge of the West Cliff, you can see a square tower, a circular tower, and other remnants of the castle, likely built soon after William the Conqueror's time, along with the ruins of the castle chapel, which was excavated in 1824. This chapel is a transitional Norman structure that measures 110 feet in length, featuring a nave, chancel, and aisles. Previously, there was also a college, both overseen by a dean and secular canons. Thomas Becket held the deanery, while one of the canonries was held by William of Wykeham. The main public buildings include the old parish churches of All Saints and St Clements, the latter containing a baptismal record from 1619 for Titus Oates, whose father was the parish rector; several modern churches; the town hall (built in 1880); a theatre, a music hall, and assembly rooms. The Brassey Institute houses a public library, museum, and art school. The Albert Memorial clock tower was constructed in 1864. Educational facilities include the grammar school (established in 1883), a school of science and art (founded in 1878), and technical schools. The western end of the town has several hospitals and convalescent homes. The town's prosperity largely hinges on its reputation as a seaside resort, although it also has a small fishing and boat-building industry. In 1890, an act of parliament approved the construction of a harbor, but the work, started in 1896, was never finished. The fish market located beneath the castle cliff is notable for its picturesque setting. The parliamentary borough returns one representative and is part of the Rye division of the county. The county borough was established in 1888. The municipal borough is governed by a mayor, 10 aldermen, and 30 councillors. The total area is 4,857 acres.

Rock shelters on Castle Hill and numerous flint instruments which have been discovered at Hastings point to an extensive neolithic population, and there are ancient earthworks and a promontory camp of unknown date. There is no evidence that Hastings was a Roman settlement, but it was a place of some note in the Anglo-Saxon period. In 795 land at Hastings (Haestingaceaster, Haestingas, Haestingaport) is included in a grant, which may possibly be a forgery, of a South Saxon chieftain to the abbey of St Denis in France; and a royal mint was established at the town by Æthelstan. The battle of Hastings in 1066 described below was the first and decisive act of the Norman Conquest. It was fought near the present Battle Abbey, about 6 m. inland. After the Conquest William I. erected the earthworks of the existing castle. By 1086 Hastings was a borough and had given its name to the rape of Sussex in which it lay. The town at that time had a harbour and a market. Whether Hastings was one of the towns afterwards known as the Cinque Ports at the time when they received their first charter from Edward the Confessor is uncertain, but in the reign of William I. it was undoubtedly among them. These combined towns, of which Hastings was the head, had special liberties and a separate jurisdiction under a warden. The only charter peculiar to Hastings was granted in 1589 by Elizabeth, and incorporated the borough under the name of “mayor, jurats and commonalty,” instead of the former title of “bailiff, jurats and commonalty.” Hastings returned two members to parliament probably from 1322, and certainly from 1366, until 1885, when the number was reduced to one.

Rock shelters on Castle Hill and many flint tools that have been found at Hastings indicate a large Neolithic population, and there are ancient earthworks and a promontory camp of unknown age. There's no proof that Hastings was a Roman settlement, but it was significant during the Anglo-Saxon period. In 795, land at Hastings (Haestingaceaster, Haestingas, Haestingaport) appears in a grant, which may be a forgery, from a South Saxon chieftain to the abbey of St Denis in France; and a royal mint was established in the town by Æthelstan. The Battle of Hastings in 1066, described below, was the first and decisive event of the Norman Conquest. It took place near the present Battle Abbey, about 6 miles inland. After the Conquest, William I built the earthworks of the current castle. By 1086, Hastings was a borough and had given its name to the rape of Sussex in which it was located. At that time, the town had a harbor and a market. Whether Hastings was one of the towns later known as the Cinque Ports when they received their first charter from Edward the Confessor is uncertain, but during William I's reign, it certainly was among them. These combined towns, with Hastings as the head, had special privileges and a separate jurisdiction under a warden. The only charter specific to Hastings was granted in 1589 by Elizabeth, incorporating the borough under the name “mayor, jurats and commonalty,” instead of the previous title “bailiff, jurats and commonalty.” Hastings has returned two members to parliament, likely from 1322 and certainly from 1366, until 1885, when the number was reduced to one.

Battle of Hastings.—On the 28th of September 1066, William of Normandy, bent on asserting by arms his right to the English crown, landed at Pevensey. King Harold, who had destroyed the invaders of northern England at the battle of Stamford Bridge in Yorkshire, on hearing the news hurried southward, gathering what forces he could on the way. He took up his position, athwart the road from Hastings to London, on a hill1 some 6 m. inland from Hastings, with his back to the great forest of Anderida (the Weald) and in front of him a long glacis-like slope, at the bottom of which began the opposing slope of Telham Hill. The English army was composed almost entirely of infantry. The shire levies, for the most part destitute of body armour and with miscellaneous and even improvised weapons, were arranged on either flank of Harold’s guards (huscarles), picked men armed principally with the Danish axe and shield.

Battle of Hastings.—On September 28, 1066, William of Normandy, determined to claim the English crown by force, landed at Pevensey. King Harold, who had defeated the invaders in northern England at the battle of Stamford Bridge in Yorkshire, hurried south after hearing the news, gathering whatever forces he could along the way. He positioned himself across the road from Hastings to London on a hill1 about 6 miles inland from Hastings, with his back to the great forest of Anderida (the Weald) and in front of him a long sloping field, at the bottom of which began the opposing slope of Telham Hill. The English army was made up almost entirely of infantry. The local militias, mostly lacking body armor and equipped with various and even makeshift weapons, were lined up on either side of Harold’s guards (huscarles), elite fighters armed mainly with the Danish axe and shield.

Before this position Duke William appeared on the morning of the 14th of October. His host, composed not only of his Norman vassals but of barons, knights and adventurers from all quarters, was arranged in a centre and two wings, each corps having its archers and arblasters in the front line, the rest of the infantry in the second and the heavy armoured cavalry in the third. Neither the arrows nor the charge of the second line of foot-men, who, unlike the English, wore defensive mail, made any impression on the English standing in a serried mass behind their interlocked shields.2

Before this position, Duke William showed up on the morning of October 14th. His army, made up not just of his Norman vassals but also barons, knights, and adventurers from all over, was organized into a center and two wings. Each group had its archers and crossbowmen in the front line, with the rest of the infantry behind them and the heavily armored cavalry at the back. Neither the arrows nor the charge from the second line of foot soldiers, who, unlike the English, wore defensive armor, had any effect on the English troops standing tightly packed behind their interlocked shields.

Then the heavy cavalry came on, led by the duke and his brother Odo, and encouraged by the example of the minstrel Taillefer, who rode forward, tossing and catching his sword, into the midst of the English line before he was pulled down and killed. All along the front the cavalry came to close quarters with the defenders, but the long powerful Danish axes were 60 as formidable as the halbert and the bill proved to be in battles of later centuries, and they lopped off the arms of the assailants and cut down their horses. The fire of the attack died out and the left wing (Bretons) fled in rout. But as the fyrd levies broke out of the line and pursued the Bretons down the hill in a wild, formless mob, William’s cavalry swung round and destroyed them, and this suggested to the duke to repeat deliberately what the Bretons had done from fear. Another advance, followed by a feigned retreat, drew down a second large body of the English from the crest, and these in turn, once in the open, were ridden over and slaughtered by the men-at-arms. Lastly, these two disasters having weakened the defenders both materially and morally, William subjected the huscarles, who had stood fast when the fyrd broke its ranks, to a constant rain of arrows, varied from time to time by cavalry charges. These magnificent soldiers endured the trial for many hours, from noon till close on nightfall; but at last, when the Norman archers raised their bows so as to pitch the arrows at a steep angle of descent in the midst of the huscarles, the strain became too great. While some rushed forward alone or in twos and threes to die in the midst of the enemy, the remainder stood fast, too closely crowded almost for the wounded to drop. At last Harold received a mortal wound, the English began to waver, and the knights forced their way in. Only a remnant of the defenders made its way back to the forest; and William, after resting for a night on the hardly-won ground, began the work of the Norman Conquest.

Then the heavy cavalry moved in, led by the duke and his brother Odo, inspired by the minstrel Taillefer, who charged ahead, throwing and catching his sword, right into the English line before he was taken down and killed. The cavalry clashed with the defenders, but the long, powerful Danish axes were just as formidable as the halberds and bills would be in later battles, chopping off the attackers' arms and taking down their horses. The assault lost momentum, and the left wing (Bretons) broke and fled in chaos. But as the fyrd broke from the line and chased the Bretons down the hill in a frenzied mob, William's cavalry circled around and routed them, prompting the duke to deliberately replicate what the frightened Bretons had done. Another advance, followed by a feigned retreat, lured another large group of the English from the crest, who were then trampled and slaughtered by the knights. Ultimately, these two disasters weakened the defenders both physically and mentally, leading William to continually rain arrows on the huscarles, who had held their ground when the fyrd broke apart, interspersed with cavalry charges. These brave soldiers endured this assault for many hours, from noon until nearly nightfall; but eventually, when the Norman archers aimed their arrows to drop steeply among the huscarles, the pressure became too much. While some rushed forward alone or in small groups to face the enemy, the rest stood firm, too tightly packed for the wounded to fall. Eventually, Harold received a fatal wound, the English began to falter, and the knights pushed through. Only a few defenders managed to retreat to the forest; and after resting for a night on the hard-won ground, William began the work of the Norman Conquest.


1 Freeman called this hill Senlac and introduced the fashion of describing the battle as “the battle of Senlac.” Mr J. H. Round, however, proved conclusively that this name, being French (Senlecque), could not have been in use at the time of the Conquest, that the battlefield had in fact no name, pointing out that in William of Malmesbury and in Domesday Book the battle is called “of Hastings” (Bellum Hastingense), while only one writer, Ordericus Vitalis, describes it two hundred years after the event as Bellum Senlacium. See Round, Feudal England (London, 1895), p. 333 et seq.

1 Freeman named this hill Senlac and started calling the battle “the battle of Senlac.” However, Mr. J. H. Round showed clearly that this name, being French (Senlecque), couldn't have been used at the time of the Conquest, and the battlefield actually had no name. He noted that in William of Malmesbury and in the Domesday Book, the battle is referred to as “of Hastings” (Bellum Hastingense), while only one writer, Ordericus Vitalis, referred to it as Bellum Senlacium two hundred years after the event. See Round, Feudal England (London, 1895), p. 333 et seq.

2 There is still a difference of opinion as to whether the English were, or were not, defended by any other rampart than that of the customary “shield-wall.” Freeman, apparently as a result of a misunderstanding of a passage in Henry of Huntingdon and the slightly ambiguous verse of Wace in the Roman du Rou (ll. 6991-6994 and ll. 7815-7826), affirms that Harold turned “the battle as far as possible into the likeness of a siege,” by building round his troops a “palisade” of solid timber (Norman Conquest, iii. 444). This was proved to be a fable by J. H. Round, in the course of a general attack on Freeman’s historical method, which provoked the professor’s defenders to take up the cudgels on his behalf in a very long and lively controversy. The result of this was that Freeman’s account was wholly discredited, though Round’s view—that there was no wall of any kind save the shield-wall—is not generally accepted. Professor Oman (Academy, June 9, 1894), for instance, holds that there was “an abattis of some sort” set to hamper the advance of cavalry (see also English History, vol. ix., p. 474). Mr Round sums up the controversy, from his point of view, in his Feudal England, p. 340 et seq., where references to other monographs on the subject will be found.

2 There's still a disagreement about whether the English were defended by anything other than the traditional “shield-wall.” Freeman, likely due to a misunderstanding of a passage in Henry of Huntingdon and the somewhat unclear lines from Wace in the Roman du Rou (ll. 6991-6994 and ll. 7815-7826), claims that Harold turned “the battle as far as possible into the likeness of a siege” by building a solid timber “palisade” around his troops (Norman Conquest, iii. 444). J. H. Round disproved this as a myth while attacking Freeman's historical method, which led to a lengthy and lively debate among the professor's supporters. As a result, Freeman's account was completely discredited, although Round's perspective—that there was no wall except the shield-wall—is not widely accepted. For instance, Professor Oman (Academy, June 9, 1894) believes there was “an abattis of some sort” set up to obstruct the cavalry's advance (see also English History, vol. ix., p. 474). Mr. Round summarizes the controversy from his viewpoint in his Feudal England, p. 340 et seq., where you'll find references to other works on the topic.


HASTINGS, a city and the county-seat of Adams county, Nebraska, U.S.A., about 95 m. W. by S. of Lincoln. Pop. (1890) 13,584; (1900) 7188 (1253 foreign-born); (1910) 9338. Hastings is served by the Chicago, Burlington & Quincy, the Chicago & North-western, the Missouri Pacific and the St Joseph & Grand Island railways. It is the seat of Hastings College (Presbyterian, coeducational), opened in 1882, and having 286 students in 1908, and of the state asylum for the chronic insane. The city carries on a considerable jobbing business for the farming region of which it is the centre and produce market. There are a large foundry and several large brickyards here. Hastings was settled in 1872, was incorporated in 1874 and was chartered as a city in the same year.

HASTINGS, is a city and the county seat of Adams County, Nebraska, U.S.A., about 95 miles west-southwest of Lincoln. Population: (1890) 13,584; (1900) 7,188 (1,253 foreign-born); (1910) 9,338. Hastings is served by the Chicago, Burlington & Quincy, the Chicago & Northwestern, the Missouri Pacific, and the St. Joseph & Grand Island railways. It is home to Hastings College (Presbyterian, coeducational), which opened in 1882 and had 286 students in 1908, as well as the state asylum for individuals with chronic mental illnesses. The city supports a significant jobbing business for the surrounding farming region, which it serves as a central market for produce. There are a large foundry and several significant brickyards located here. Hastings was settled in 1872, incorporated in 1874, and chartered as a city in the same year.


HAT, a covering for the head worn by both sexes, and distinguished from the cap or bonnet by the possession of a brim. The word in O.E. is hœt, which is cognate with O. Frisian hatt, O.N. hotte, &c., meaning head-covering, hood; it is distantly related to the O.E. hod, hood, which is cognate with the German for “hat,” Hut. The history of the hat as part of the apparel of both sexes, with the various changes in shape which it has undergone, is treated in the article Costume.

HAT a type of headwear worn by everyone, and different from a cap or bonnet because it has a brim. The word in Old English is hœt, which is related to Old Frisian hatt, Old Norse hotte, etc., meaning head-covering or hood; it’s also distantly related to the Old English hod, hood, which connects to the German word for “hat,” Hut. The evolution of the hat as part of clothing for everyone, along with the various changes in its shape over time, is discussed in the article Costume.

Hats were originally made by the process of felting, and as tradition ascribed the discovery of that very ancient operation to St Clement, he was assumed as the patron saint of the craft. At the present day the trade is divided into two distinct classes. The first and most ancient is concerned with the manufacture of felt hats, and the second has to do with the recent but now most extensive and important manufacture of silk or dress hats. In addition to these there is the important manufacture of straw or plaited hats (see Straw and Straw Manufactures); and hats are occasionally manufactured of materials and by processes not included under any of these heads, but such manufactures do not take a large or permanent position in the industry.

Hats were originally made through the process of felting, and since tradition credits St. Clement with the discovery of this very ancient technique, he's considered the patron saint of the craft. Nowadays, the trade is divided into two main categories. The first and oldest involves the production of felt hats, while the second focuses on the relatively recent but now widespread and significant production of silk or dress hats. Additionally, there's the important production of straw or woven hats (see Straw and Straw Manufactures); and hats are sometimes made from materials and through processes that don't fall under any of these categories, but such productions don't hold a substantial or lasting place in the industry.

Felt Hats.—There is a great range in the quality of felt hats: the finer and more expensive qualities are made entirely of fur; for commoner qualities a mixture of fur and wool is used; and for the cheapest kinds wool alone is employed. The processes and apparatus necessary for making hats of fur differ also from those required in the case of woollen bodies; and in large manufactories machinery is now generally employed for operations which at no distant date were entirely manual. An outline of the operations by which the old beaver hat was made will give an idea of the manual processes in making a fur napped hat, and the apparatus and mechanical processes employed in making ordinary hard and soft felts will afterwards be noticed.

Felt Hats.—There is a wide range in the quality of felt hats: the higher-end and more expensive types are made entirely from fur; for mid-range options, a blend of fur and wool is used; and for the cheaper varieties, only wool is utilized. The processes and equipment needed to make fur hats differ from those required for wool hats; and in large factories, machinery is now commonly used for tasks that were once done entirely by hand. A summary of the processes used to create the old beaver hat will provide insight into the manual techniques used in making a fur-napped hat, and the equipment and mechanical methods used in producing regular hard and soft felts will be addressed afterwards.

Hatters’ fur consists principally of the hair of rabbits (technically called coneys) and hares, with some proportion of nutria, musquash and beavers’ hair; and generally any parings and cuttings from furriers are also used. Furs intended for felting are deprived of their long coarse hairs, after which they are treated with a solution of nitrate of mercury, an operation called carroting or secretage, whereby the felting properties of the fur are greatly increased. The fur is then cut by hand or machine from the skin, and in this state it is delivered to the hat maker.

Hatters' fur mainly comes from rabbit hair (technically called coneys) and hare, along with some amount of nutria, musquash, and beaver hair; usually, any scraps and cuttings from furriers are also utilized. Furs meant for felting have their long, coarse hairs removed, and then they’re treated with a mercury nitrate solution in a process known as carroting or secretage, which significantly enhances the fur's felting properties. The fur is then cut by hand or machine from the skin, and it is delivered to the hat maker in this state.

Fig. 1.

The old process of making a beaver hat was as follows. The materials of a proper beaver consisted, for the body or foundation, of rabbits’ fur, and for the nap, of beaver fur, although the beaver was often mixed with or supplanted by a more common fur. In preparing the fur plate, the hatter weighed out a sufficient quantity of rabbit fur for a single hat, and spread it out and combined it by the operation of bowing. The bow or stang ABC (fig. 1) was about 7 ft. long, and it stretched a single cord of catgut D, which the workman vibrated by means of a wooden pin E, furnished with a half knob at each end. Holding the bow in his left hand, and the pin in his right, he caused the vibrating string to come in contact with the heap of tangled fur, which did not cover a space greater than that of the hand. At each vibration some of the filaments started up to the height of a few inches, and fell away from the mass, a little to the right of the bow, their excursions being restrained by a concave frame of wicker work called the basket. One half of the material was first operated on, and by bowing and gathering, or a patting use of the basket, the stuff was loosely matted into a triangular figure, about 50 by 36 in., called a bat. In this formation care was taken to work about two-thirds of the fur down towards what was intended for the brim, and this having been effected, greater density was induced by gentle pressure with the basket. It was then covered with a wettish linen cloth, upon which was laid the hardening skin, a piece of dry half-tanned horse hide. On this the workman pressed until the stuff adhered closely to the damp cloth, in which it was then doubled up, freely pressed with the hand, and laid aside. By this process, called basoning, the bat became compactly felted and thinned toward the sides and point. The other half of the fur was next subjected to precisely the same processes, after which a cone-shaped slip of stiff paper was laid on its surface, and the sides of the bat were folded over its edges to its form and size. It was then laid paper-side downward upon the first bat, which was now replaced on the hurdle, and its edges were transversely doubled over the introverted side-lays of the second bat, thus giving equal thickness to the whole body. In this condition it was reintroduced between folds of damp linen cloth, and again hardened, so as to unite the two halves, the knitting together of which was quickly effected. The paper was then withdrawn, and the body in the form of a large cone removed to the plank or battery room.

The old process of making a beaver hat was as follows. The materials for a proper beaver hat included rabbit fur for the body or foundation and beaver fur for the nap, although beaver fur was often mixed with or replaced by a more common fur. To prepare the fur plate, the hatter measured out enough rabbit fur for one hat, spread it out, and blended it using a technique called bowing. The bow or stang ABC (fig. 1) was about 7 feet long and stretched a single cord made of catgut D. The worker vibrated this cord with a wooden pin E, which had a half knob at each end. Holding the bow in his left hand and the pin in his right, he made the vibrating string touch the pile of tangled fur, which was no bigger than a hand. With each vibration, some of the filaments lifted a few inches and fell away from the mass, slightly to the right of the bow, while their movement was constrained by a concave wickerwork frame known as the basket. The worker first operated on one half of the material, and by bowing and gathering, or patting with the basket, the fur was loosely matted into a triangular shape about 50 by 36 inches, called a bat. During this process, care was taken to work about two-thirds of the fur down towards what would become the brim. Once this was done, greater density was achieved by gently pressing with the basket. It was then covered with a damp linen cloth, and on top of that was laid a piece of dry half-tanned horsehide, which acted as the hardening skin. The worker pressed down until the material stuck closely to the damp cloth, then folded it up, pressed it with his hand, and set it aside. This process, called basoning, compacted the bat and thinned it towards the sides and tip. The other half of the fur underwent the exact same process. After that, a cone-shaped piece of stiff paper was placed on top, and the sides of the bat were folded over its edges to match its shape and size. It was then laid paper-side down on top of the first bat, which was then put back on the hurdle. Its edges were folded over the inwardly turned side edges of the second bat, ensuring equal thickness throughout. In this state, it was wrapped again in damp linen cloth and hardened once more to bond the two halves together, which occurred rapidly. The paper was then removed, and the body, now shaped like a large cone, was taken to the plank or battery room.

Fig. 2.

The battery consisted of an open iron boiler or kettle A (fig. 2), filled with scalding hot water, with shelves, B, C, partly of mahogany and partly of lead, sloping down to it. Here the body was first dipped in the water, and then withdrawn to the plank to cool and drain, when it was unfolded, rolled gently with a pin tapering towards the ends, turned, and worked in every direction, to toughen and shrink it, and at the same time prevent adhesion of its sides. Stopping or thickening any thin spots seen on looking through the body, was carefully performed by dabbing on additional stuff in successive supplies from the hot liquor with a brush frequently dipped into the kettle, until the body was shrunk sufficiently (about one-half) and thoroughly equalized. When quite dried, stiffening was effected with a brush dipped into a thin varnish of shellac, and rubbed into the body, the surface intended for the inside having much more laid on it than the outer, while the brim was made to absorb many times the quantity applied to any other part.

The battery consisted of an open iron boiler or kettle A (fig. 2), filled with scalding hot water, with shelves, B, C, partly made of mahogany and partly of lead, slanting down to it. Here, the body was first dipped in the water and then pulled out to the plank to cool and drain. Once cooled, it was unfolded, gently rolled with a pin that tapered towards the ends, turned, and worked in every direction to toughen and shrink it while preventing the sides from sticking together. Any thin spots seen by looking through the body were carefully fixed by adding more material from the hot liquid with a brush frequently dipped into the kettle until the body shrank enough (about half) and was evenly compacted. Once completely dried, stiffening was done with a brush dipped into a thin shellac varnish and rubbed into the body, with much more applied to the inside surface than the outer, while the brim absorbed significantly more than any other part.

On being again dried, the body was ready to be covered with a nap of beaver hair. For this, in inferior qualities, the hair of the otter, nutria or other fine fur was sometimes substituted. The requisite quantity of one or other of these was taken and mixed with a proportion of cotton, and the whole was bowed up into a thin uniform lap. The cotton merely served to give sufficient body to the material to enable the workman to handle the lap. The body of the hat 61 being damped, the workman spread over it a covering of this lap, and by moistening and gentle patting with a brush the cut ends of the hair penetrated and fixed themselves in the felt body. The hat was then put into a coarse hair cloth, dipped and rolled in the hot liquor until the fur was quite worked in, the cotton being left on the surface loose and ready for removal. The blocking, dyeing and finishing processes in the case of beaver hats were similar to those employed for ordinary felts, except that greater care and dexterity were required on the part of the workmen, and further that the coarse hairs or kemps which might be in the fur were cut off by shaving the surface with a razor. The nap also had to be laid in one direction, smoothed and rendered glossy by repeated wettings, ironings and brushings. A hat so finished was very durable and much more light, cool and easy-fitting to the head than the silk hat which has now so largely superseded it.

After being dried again, the body was ready to be covered with a layer of beaver hair. For lower-quality hats, otter hair, nutria, or other fine furs were sometimes used instead. The necessary amount of one of these furs was taken and mixed with some cotton, then formed into a thin, uniform layer. The cotton was just there to give the material enough structure for the worker to manage it. With the hat body dampened, the worker spread this layer over it, and by moistening and gently tapping with a brush, the cut ends of the hair penetrated and secured themselves in the felt body. The hat was then placed into a coarse hair cloth, dipped, and rolled in hot liquid until the fur was fully integrated, with the cotton left loose on the surface for easy removal. The blocking, dyeing, and finishing processes for beaver hats were similar to those for regular felts, but required more care and skill from the workers. Additionally, any coarse hairs or kemps in the fur were shaved off with a razor. The nap also had to be laid down in one direction, smoothed out, and given a glossy finish through repeated wetting, ironing, and brushing. A hat finished this way was very durable and much lighter, cooler, and more comfortable than the silk hat that has mostly replaced it.

The first efficient machinery for making felt hats was devised in America, and from the United States the machine-making processes were introduced into England about the year 1858; and now in all large establishments machinery such as that alluded to below is employed. For the forming of hat bodies two kinds of machine are used, according as the material employed is fur or wool. In the case of fur, the essential portion of the apparatus is a “former,” consisting of a metal cone of the size and form of the body or bat to be made, perforated all over with small holes. The cone is made to revolve on its axis slowly over an orifice under which there is a powerful fan, which maintains a strong inward draught of air through the holes in the cone. At the side of the cone, and with an opening towards it, is a trunk or box from which the fur to be made into a hat is thrown out by the rapid revolution of a brushlike cylinder, and as the cloud of separate hairs is expelled from the trunk, the current of air being sucked through the cone carries the fibres to it and causes them to cling closely to its surface. Thus a coating of loose fibres is accumulated on the copper cone, and these are kept in position only by the exhaust at work under it. When sufficient for a hat body has been deposited, it is damped and a cloth is wrapped round it; then an outer cone is slipped over it and the whole is removed for felting, while another copper cone is placed in position for continuing the work. The fur is next felted by being rolled and pressed, these operations being performed partly by hand and partly by machine.

The first efficient machinery for making felt hats was developed in America, and around 1858, the machine-making processes were introduced to England from the United States. Nowadays, all large factories use machinery like the one mentioned below. For creating hat bodies, two types of machines are used depending on whether the material is fur or wool. For fur, the main part of the apparatus is a “former,” which is a metal cone shaped like the body or hat to be made, covered with small holes. The cone slowly spins on its axis above an opening with a powerful fan underneath that creates a strong inward airflow through the holes in the cone. Next to the cone, there is a box with an opening that releases the fur to be made into a hat, thrown out by the fast rotation of a brush-like cylinder. As the cloud of individual hairs is released from the box, the sucking air draws the fibers through the cone, causing them to stick closely to its surface. As a result, a layer of loose fibers builds up on the copper cone, held in place by the exhaust underneath. When there are enough fibers deposited for a hat body, it is dampened, wrapped in cloth, and an outer cone is placed over it. The entire setup is then taken for felting, while another copper cone is put in place to continue the process. The fur is then felted through rolling and pressing, with some of these steps done by hand and others by machine.

In the case of wool hats the hat or body is prepared by first carding in a modified form of carding machine. The wool is divided into two separate slivers as delivered from the cards, and these are wound simultaneously on a double conical block of wood mounted and geared to revolve slowly with a reciprocating horizontal motion, so that there is a continual crossing and recrossing of the wool as the sliver is wound around the cone. This diagonal arrangement of the sliver is an essential feature in the apparatus, as thereby the strength of the finished felt is made equal in every direction; and when strained in the blocking the texture yields in a uniform manner without rupture. The wool wound on the double block forms the material of two hats, which are separated by cutting around the median or base line, and slipping each half off at its own end. Into each cone of wool or bat an “inlayer” is now placed to prevent the inside from matting, after which they are folded in cloths, and placed over a perforated iron plate through which steam is blown. When well moistened and heated, they are placed between boards, and subjected to a rubbing action sufficient to harden them for bearing the subsequent strong planking or felting operations. The planking of wool hats is generally done by machine, in some cases a form of fulling mill being used; but in all forms the agencies are heat, moisture, pressure, rubbing and turning.

In the case of wool hats, the body is prepared by first carding the wool using a modified carding machine. The wool is divided into two separate slivers as it comes from the cards, and these are wound at the same time onto a double conical block of wood that is mounted and geared to rotate slowly with a back-and-forth horizontal motion, ensuring a continuous crossing and recrossing of the wool as the sliver is wound around the cone. This diagonal arrangement of the sliver is crucial because it makes the strength of the finished felt uniform in all directions, allowing the texture to yield evenly under stress without tearing when it’s shaped. The wool wrapped around the double block creates enough material for two hats, which are separated by cutting around the middle, allowing each half to be removed from its end. An “inlayer” is then placed inside each cone of wool to prevent matting, after which they are wrapped in cloth and set over a perforated iron plate where steam can be blown through. Once they are properly moistened and heated, they are placed between boards and treated with a rubbing action to stiffen them for the subsequent intense planking or felting processes. The planking of wool hats is usually done by machine, sometimes using a form of fulling mill; but in all cases, the methods involve heat, moisture, pressure, rubbing, and turning.

When by thorough felting the hat bodies of any kind have been reduced to dense leathery cones about one-half the size of the original bat, they are dried, and, if hard felts are to be made, the bodies are at this stage hardened or stiffened with a varnish of shellac. Next follows the operations of blocking, in which the felt for the first time assumes approximately the form it is ultimately to possess. For this purpose the conical body is softened in boiling water, and forcibly drawn over and over a hat-shaped wooden block. The operation of dyeing next follows, and the finishing processes include shaping on a block, over which crown and brim receive ultimately their accurate form, and pouncing or pumicing, which consists of smoothing the surface with fine emery paper, the hat being for this purpose mounted on a rapidly revolving block. The trimmer finally binds the outer brim and inserts the lining, after which the brim may be given more or less of a curl or turn over according to prevailing fashion.

When the hat bodies of any kind have been thoroughly felted down to dense, leathery cones about half the size of the original bat, they are dried. If hard felts are to be made, the bodies are then hardened or stiffened with shellac varnish at this stage. Next, the blocking process occurs, where the felt first takes on the approximate shape it will ultimately have. To do this, the conical body is softened in boiling water and then repeatedly pulled over a hat-shaped wooden block. Following this is the dyeing process, and the finishing steps include shaping on a block, where the crown and brim get their precise form, and pouncing or pumicing, which smooths the surface with fine emery paper while the hat is mounted on a rapidly spinning block. Finally, the trimmer binds the outer brim and adds the lining, after which the brim can be curled or turned over more or less, depending on current fashion trends.

Silk Hats.—The silk hat, which has now become co-extensive with civilization, is an article of comparatively recent introduction. It was invented in Florence about 1760, but it was more than half a century before it was worn to any great extent.

Silk Hats.—The silk hat, which is now synonymous with civilization, is a relatively modern invention. It was created in Florence around 1760, but it took over fifty years before it became widely worn.

A silk hat consists of a light stiff body covered with a plush of silk, the manufacture of which in a brilliant glossy condition is the most important element in the industry. Originally the bodies were made of felt and various other materials, but now calico is chiefly used. The calico is first stiffened with a varnish of shellac, and then cut into pieces sufficient for crown, side and brim. The side-piece is wound round a wooden hat block, and its edges are joined by hot ironing, and the crown-piece is put on and similarly attached to the side. The brim, consisting of three thicknesses of calico cemented together, is now slipped over and brought to its position, and thereafter a second side-piece and another crown are cemented on. The whole of the body, thus prepared, now receives a coat of size, and subsequently it is varnished over, and thus it is ready for the operation of covering. In covering this body, the under brim, generally of merino, is first attached, then the upper brim, and lastly the crown and side sewn together are drawn over. All these by hot ironing and stretching are drawn smooth and tight, and as the varnish of the body softens with the heat, body and cover adhere all over to each other without wrinkle or pucker. Dressing and polishing by means of damping, brushing and ironing, come next, after which the hat is “velured” in a revolving machine by the application of haircloth and velvet velures, which cleans the nap and gives it a smooth and glossy surface. The brim has only then to be bound, the linings inserted, and the brim finally curled, when the hat is ready for use.

A silk hat has a light, stiff frame covered with a plush layer of silk, and creating this brilliant, glossy finish is the most important part of the process. Originally, the frames were made from felt and other materials, but now calico is mostly used. The calico is first stiffened with a shellac varnish, then cut into pieces for the crown, sides, and brim. The side piece is wrapped around a wooden hat block, and its edges are joined by hot ironing. The crown piece is then added and similarly attached to the side. The brim, made of three layers of calico glued together, is slipped on and positioned, followed by another side piece and crown being glued on. The whole body, now prepared, gets a coat of sizing and then is varnished, making it ready for covering. To cover the body, the under brim, usually made of merino, is attached first, followed by the upper brim, and finally, the crown and side are sewn together and pulled over. All of these parts are smoothed and tightened with hot ironing and stretching, and as the varnish on the body softens with the heat, the body and cover stick together without any wrinkles. Next comes the dressing and polishing by dampening, brushing, and ironing, after which the hat is “velured” in a revolving machine, applying haircloth and velvet velures to clean the nap and achieve a smooth, glossy finish. Finally, the brim is bound, the linings are inserted, and the brim is curled, making the hat ready to wear.


HATCH, EDWIN (1835-1889), English theologian, was born at Derby on the 14th of September 1835, and was educated at King Edward’s school, Birmingham, under James Prince Lee, afterwards bishop of Manchester. He had many struggles to pass through in early life, which tended to discipline his character and to form the habits of severe study and the mental independence for which he came to be distinguished. Hatch became scholar of Pembroke College, Oxford, took a second-class in classics in 1857, and won the Ellerton prize in 1858. He was professor of classics in Trinity College, Toronto, from 1859 to 1862, when he became rector of the high school at Quebec. In 1867 he returned to Oxford, and was made vice-principal of St Mary Hall, a post which he held until 1885. In 1883 he was presented to the living of Purleigh in Essex, and in 1884 was appointed university reader in ecclesiastical history. In 1880 he was Bampton lecturer, and from 1880 to 1884 Grinfield lecturer on the Septuagint. In 1883 the university of Edinburgh conferred on him the D.D. degree. He was the first editor of the university official Gazette (1870), and of the Student’s Handbook to the University. A reputation acquired through certain contributions to the Dictionary of Christian Antiquities was confirmed by his treatises On the Organization of the Early Christian Churches (1881, his Bampton lectures), and on The Influence of Greek Ideas and Usages on the Christian Church (the Hibbert lectures for 1888). These works provoked no little criticism on account of the challenge they threw down to the high-church party, but the research and fairness displayed were admitted on all hands. The Bampton lectures were translated into German by Harnack. Among his other works are The Growth of Church Institutions (1887); Essays in Biblical Greek (1889); A Concordance to the Septuagint (in collaboration with H. A. Redpath); Towards Fields of Light (verse, 1889); The God of Hope (sermons with memoir, 1890). Hatch died on the 10th of November 1889.

HATCH, EDWIN (1835-1889), an English theologian, was born in Derby on September 14, 1835. He was educated at King Edward’s School in Birmingham, under James Prince Lee, who later became the bishop of Manchester. He faced many challenges in his early life that helped shape his character and foster the habits of rigorous study and mental independence for which he became well-known. Hatch became a scholar at Pembroke College, Oxford, earned a second-class degree in classics in 1857, and won the Ellerton Prize in 1858. He served as a professor of classics at Trinity College, Toronto, from 1859 to 1862, when he became the rector of the high school in Quebec. In 1867, he returned to Oxford and was appointed vice-principal of St Mary Hall, a position he held until 1885. In 1883, he was presented with the living of Purleigh in Essex, and in 1884 he was appointed university reader in ecclesiastical history. In 1880, he was the Bampton lecturer, and from 1880 to 1884, he served as the Grinfield lecturer on the Septuagint. In 1883, the University of Edinburgh awarded him the D.D. degree. He was the first editor of the university's official Gazette (1870) and of the Student’s Handbook to the University. His reputation, built through certain contributions to the Dictionary of Christian Antiquities, was solidified by his treatises On the Organization of the Early Christian Churches (1881, his Bampton lectures) and The Influence of Greek Ideas and Usages on the Christian Church (the Hibbert lectures for 1888). These works sparked some criticism due to the challenge they posed to the high-church party, but their research and fairness were acknowledged by all. The Bampton lectures were translated into German by Harnack. Among his other works are The Growth of Church Institutions (1887); Essays in Biblical Greek (1889); A Concordance to the Septuagint (in collaboration with H. A. Redpath); Towards Fields of Light (poetry, 1889); and The God of Hope (sermons with memoir, 1890). Hatch passed away on November 10, 1889.

An appreciation by W. Sanday appeared in The Expositor for February 1890.

An appreciation by W. Sanday was published in The Expositor in February 1890.


HATCH. 1. (In Mid. Eng. hacche; the word is of obscure origin, but cognate forms appear in Swed. häcka, and Dan. hackke; it has been connected with “hatch,” grating, with possible reference to a coop, and with “hack” in the sense “to peck,” of chickens coming out of the shell), to bring out young from the egg, by incubation or other process, natural or artificial. The word is also used as a substantive of a brood of chickens brought out from the eggs. “Hatchery” is particularly applied to a place for the hatching of fish spawn, where the natural process is aided by artificial means. In a figurative sense “to hatch” is often used of the development or contrivance of a plot or conspiracy.

HATCH. 1. (In Middle English hacche; the word has an unclear origin, but similar forms show up in Swedish häcka and Danish hackke; it has been linked to “hatch,” grating, possibly relating to a coop, and with “hack” in the sense of “to peck,” referring to chickens coming out of the egg) to bring young out from the egg, through incubation or other methods, whether natural or artificial. The word is also used as a noun to refer to a group of chicks that emerge from the eggs. “Hatchery” specifically refers to a location where fish eggs are incubated, with artificial assistance boosting the natural process. Figuratively, “to hatch” is often used to describe the creation or planning of a plot or conspiracy.

2. (From the Fr. hacher, to cut, hache, hatchet), to engrave or draw by means of cutting lines on wood, metal, &c., or to ornament by inlaying with strips of some other substance as gold or silver. Engraved lines, especially those used in shading, are called “hatches” or “hachures” (see Hachure).

2. (From the Fr. hacher, to cut, hache, hatchet), to engrave or draw by cutting lines into wood, metal, etc., or to decorate by inlaying with strips of another material like gold or silver. Engraved lines, especially those used for shading, are referred to as “hatches” or “hachures” (see Hachure).

3. (O.E. hæc, a gate, rack in a stable; found in various Teutonic languages; cf. Dutch hek, Dan. hekke; the ultimate origin is obscure; Skeat suggests a connexion with the root seen in “hook”), the name given to the lower half of a divided 62 door, as in “buttery-hatch,” the half-door leading from the buttery or kitchen, through which the dishes could be passed into the dining-hall. It was used formerly as another name for a ship’s deck, and thus the phrase “under hatches” meant properly below deck; the word is now applied to the doors of grated framework covering the openings (the “hatchways”) which lead from one deck to another into the hold through which the cargo is lowered. In Cornwall the word is used to denote certain dams or mounds used to prevent the tin-washes and the water coming from the stream-works from flowing into the fresh rivers.

3. (O.E. hæc, meaning a gate, or a rack in a stable; found in various Teutonic languages; cf. Dutch hek, Dan. hekke; the ultimate origin is unclear; Skeat suggests a connection to the root seen in “hook”), the term refers to the lower half of a divided 62 door, like in “buttery-hatch,” the half-door from the buttery or kitchen, through which dishes could be passed into the dining hall. It was previously used as another name for a ship’s deck, so the phrase “under hatches” originally meant below deck; the word is now applied to the doors made of grated framework that cover the openings (the “hatchways”) leading from one deck to another into the hold where cargo is lowered. In Cornwall, the term is used to refer to certain dams or mounds that prevent the tin-washes and water from the stream-works from flowing into the freshwater rivers.


HATCHET (adapted from the Fr. hachette, diminutive of hache, axe, hacher, to cut, hack), a small, light form of axe with a short handle (see Tool); for the war-hatchet of the North American Indians and the symbolical ceremonies connected with it see Tomahawk.

HATCHET (adapted from the French hachette, which is a smaller version of hache, meaning axe, and hacher, meaning to cut or hack), a small, lightweight type of axe with a short handle (see Tool); for information on the war-hatchet used by North American Indians and the symbolic ceremonies associated with it, see Tomahawk.


HATCHETTITE, sometimes termed Mountain Tallow, Mineral Adipocire, or Adipocerite, a mineral hydrocarbon occurring in the Coal-measures of Belgium and elsewhere, occupying in some cases the interior of hollow concretions of iron-ore, but more generally the cavities of fossil shells or crevices in the rocks. It is of yellow colour, and translucent, but darkens and becomes opaque on exposure. It has no odour, is greasy to the touch, and has a slightly glistening lustre. Its hardness is that of soft wax. The melting point is 46° to 47° C., and the composition is C. 85.55, H. 14.45.

HATCHETTITE, also known as Mountain Tallow, Mineral Adipocire, or Adipocerite, is a mineral hydrocarbon found in the coal deposits of Belgium and other locations. It sometimes fills the inside of hollow iron ore concretions, but more commonly it occupies the cavities of fossil shells or cracks in rocks. It has a yellow color and is translucent, but it darkens and turns opaque when exposed. It has no smell, feels greasy to the touch, and has a slightly shiny surface. Its hardness is comparable to soft wax. The melting point is between 46° and 47° C, and its composition is C. 85.55, H. 14.45.


HATCHMENT, properly, in heraldry, an escutcheon or armorial shield granted for some act of distinction or “achievement,” of which word it is a corruption through such forms as atcheament, achement, hachement, &c. “Achievement” is an adaptation of the Fr. achèvement, from achever, à chef venir, Lat. ad caput venire, to come to a head, or conclusion, hence accomplish, achieve. The term “hatchment” is now usually applied to funeral escutcheons or armorial shields enclosed in a black lozenge-shaped frame suspended against the wall of a deceased person’s house. It is usually placed over the entrance at the level of the second floor, and remains for from six to twelve months, when it is removed to the parish church. This custom is falling into disuse, though still not uncommon. It is usual to hang the hatchment of a deceased head of a house at the universities of Oxford and Cambridge over the entrance to his lodge or residence.

Hatchment, In heraldry, a hatchment is an escutcheon or armorial shield awarded for some act of distinction or “achievement,” which is a corrupted form of words like atcheament, achement, hachement, etc. “Achievement” is derived from the French achèvement, coming from achever and à chef venir, which means to come to a head or conclusion, essentially meaning to accomplish or achieve. The term “hatchment” now typically refers to funeral escutcheons or armorial shields framed in a black lozenge-shaped frame that are hung against the wall of a deceased person's home. It's usually placed over the entrance at the second-floor level and stays up for six to twelve months before being moved to the parish church. This tradition is becoming less common, though it is still seen occasionally. It is customary to hang the hatchment of a deceased head of a household at the universities of Oxford and Cambridge over the entrance to his lodge or residence.

If for a bachelor the hatchment bears upon a shield his arms, crest, and other appendages, the whole on a black ground. If for a single woman, her arms are represented upon a lozenge, bordered with knotted ribbons, also on a black ground. If the hatchment be for a married man (as in the illustration), his arms upon a shield impale those of his surviving wife; or if she be an heiress they are placed upon a scutcheon of pretence, and crest and other appendages are added. The dexter half of the ground is black, the sinister white. For a wife whose husband is alive the same arrangement is used, but the sinister ground only is black. For a widower the same is used as for a married man, but the whole ground is black; for a widow the husband’s arms are given with her own, but upon a lozenge, with ribbons, without crest or appendages, and the whole ground is black. When there have been two wives or two husbands the ground is divided into three parts per pale, and the division behind the arms of the survivor is white. Colours and military or naval emblems are sometimes placed behind the arms of military or naval officers. It is thus easy to discern from the hatchment the sex, condition and quality, and possibly the name of the deceased.

If a bachelor has a hatchment, it displays his arms, crest, and other elements on a black background. For a single woman, her arms are shown in a lozenge shape, bordered with knotted ribbons, also on a black background. If the hatchment is for a married man (like in the illustration), his arms are shown on a shield alongside those of his surviving wife; if she is an heiress, her arms are placed on a scutcheon of pretence, with the crest and other elements added. The right side of the background is black, and the left side is white. For a wife whose husband is alive, the same layout is used, but the left side of the background is only black. A widower’s hatchment follows the same format as that of a married man, but the entire background is black. For a widow, her husband’s arms are included with hers on a lozenge, with ribbons, and without a crest or additional elements, all on a black background. If there have been two wives or two husbands, the background is divided into three parts vertically, with the section behind the arms of the surviving spouse being white. Colors and military or naval symbols are sometimes included behind the arms of military or naval officers. This makes it easy to identify from the hatchment the sex, status, quality, and possibly the name of the deceased.

In Scottish hatchments it is not unusual to place the arms of the father and mother of the deceased in the two lateral angles of the lozenge, and sometimes the 4, 8 or 16 genealogical escutcheons are ranged along the margin.

In Scottish hatchments, it's common to place the coats of arms of the father and mother of the deceased in the two side angles of the lozenge, and sometimes 4, 8, or 16 family crest shields are arranged along the edge.


HATFIELD, a town in the Mid or St Albans parliamentary division of Hertfordshire, England, 17½ m. N. of London by the Great Northern railway. Pop. (1901), 4754. It lies picturesquely on the flank of a wooded hill, and about its foot, past which runs the Great North Road. The church of St Etheldreda, well situated towards the top of the hill, contains an Early English round arch with the dog-tooth moulding, but for the rest is Decorated and Perpendicular, and largely restored. The chapel north of the chancel is known as the Salisbury chapel, and was erected by Robert Cecil, first earl of Salisbury (d. 1612), who was buried here. It is in a mixture of classic and Gothic styles. In a private portion of the churchyard is buried, among others of the family, the third marquess of Salisbury (d. 1903). In the vicinity is Hatfield House, close to the site of a palace of the bishops of Ely, which was erected about the beginning of the 12th century. From this palace comes the proper form of the name of the town, Bishop’s Hatfield. In 1538 the manor was resigned to Henry VIII. by Bishop Thomas Goodrich of Ely, in exchange for certain lands in Cambridge, Essex and Norfolk; and after that monarch the palace was successively the residence of Edward VI. immediately before his accession, of Queen Elizabeth during the reign of her sister Mary, and of James I. The last-named exchanged it in 1607 for Theobalds, near Cheshunt, in the same county, an estate of Robert Cecil, earl of Salisbury, in whose family Hatfield House has since remained. The west wing of the present mansion, built for Cecil in 1608-1611, was destroyed by fire in November 1835, the dowager marchioness of Salisbury, widow of the 1st marquess, perishing in the flames. Hatfield House was built, and has been restored and maintained, in the richest style of its period, both without and within. The buildings of mellowed red brick now used as stables and offices are, however, of a period far anterior to Cecil’s time, and are probably part of the erection of John Morton, bishop of Ely in 1478-1486. The park measures some 10 m. in circumference. From the eminence on which the mansion stands the ground falls towards the river Lea, which here expands into a small lake. Beyond this is a rare example of a monks’ walled vineyard. In the park is also an ancient oak under which Elizabeth is said to have been seated when the news of her sister’s death was brought to her. Brocket Park is another fine demesne, at the neighbouring village of Lemsford, and the Brocket chapel in Hatfield church contains memorials of the families who have held this seat.

HATFIELD, is a town in the St Albans parliamentary division of Hertfordshire, England, located 17½ miles north of London by the Great Northern railway. Its population was 4,754 in 1901. The town is charmingly situated on the side of a wooded hill, with the Great North Road running at its base. The church of St Etheldreda is well-placed near the top of the hill and features an Early English round arch with dog-tooth molding, with the rest of the church displaying Decorated and Perpendicular styles, largely restored. The chapel located north of the chancel is known as the Salisbury chapel, built by Robert Cecil, the first Earl of Salisbury (d. 1612), who is buried there. It features a blend of classic and Gothic styles. In a private section of the churchyard rest several members of the family, including the third Marquess of Salisbury (d. 1903). Nearby is Hatfield House, close to where a palace of the bishops of Ely stood, which was built around the early 12th century. The town's name, Bishop’s Hatfield, comes from this palace. In 1538, Bishop Thomas Goodrich of Ely resigned the manor to Henry VIII in exchange for certain lands in Cambridge, Essex, and Norfolk. After that, the palace served as the residence of Edward VI just before his accession, Queen Elizabeth during her sister Mary’s reign, and James I. The latter exchanged it in 1607 for Theobalds, near Cheshunt, an estate of Robert Cecil, Earl of Salisbury, and Hatfield House has remained in his family since. The west wing of the current mansion, constructed for Cecil between 1608 and 1611, was destroyed by fire in November 1835, claiming the life of the dowager Marchioness of Salisbury, widow of the first Marquess. Hatfield House was built and has been restored and maintained in the most elaborate style of its time, both inside and out. The stables and offices built of mellowed red brick, however, date from an earlier period than Cecil's time, likely part of the construction by John Morton, Bishop of Ely, from 1478 to 1486. The park surrounding the house measures about 10 miles in circumference. From the elevated position of the mansion, the ground slopes down toward the River Lea, which widens into a small lake. Nearby is a rare example of a monks’ walled vineyard. The park also features an ancient oak tree, under which Elizabeth is said to have been sitting when she received the news of her sister’s death. Brocket Park, another beautiful estate, is located in the neighboring village of Lemsford, and the Brocket chapel in Hatfield church contains memorials for the families who have held this estate.


HATHERLEY, WILLIAM PAGE WOOD, 1st Baron (1801-1881), lord chancellor of Great Britain, son of Sir Matthew Wood, a London alderman and lord mayor who became famous for befriending Queen Caroline and braving George IV., was born in London on the 29th of November 1801. He was educated at Winchester, Geneva University, and Trinity College, Cambridge, where he became a fellow after being 24th wrangler in 1824. He entered Lincoln’s Inn, and was called to the bar in 1824, studying conveyancing in Mr John Tyrrell’s chambers. He soon obtained a good practice as an equity draughtsman and before parliamentary committees, and in 1830 married Miss Charlotte Moor. In 1845 he became Q.C., and in 1847 was elected to parliament for the city of Oxford as a Liberal. In 1849 he was appointed vice-chancellor of the county palatine of Lancaster, and in 1851 was made solicitor-general and knighted, vacating that position in 1852. When his party returned to power in 1853, he was raised to the bench as a vice-chancellor. In 1868 he was made a lord justice of appeal, but before the end of the year was selected by Mr Gladstone to be lord chancellor, and was raised to the peerage as Lord Hatherley of Down Hatherley. He retired in 1872 owing to failing eyesight, but sat occasionally as a law lord. His wife’s death in 1878 was a great blow, from which he never recovered, and he died in London on the 10th of July 1881. Dean Hook said that Lord Hatherley—who was a sound and benevolent supporter of the Church of 63 England—was the best man he had ever known. He was a particularly clear-headed lawyer, and his judgments—always delivered extempore—commanded the greatest confidence both with the public and the legal profession. He left no issue and the title became extinct on his death.

HATHERLEY, WILLIAM PAGE WOOD, 1st Baron (1801-1881), lord chancellor of Great Britain, son of Sir Matthew Wood, a London alderman and lord mayor known for befriending Queen Caroline and standing up to George IV., was born in London on November 29, 1801. He was educated at Winchester, Geneva University, and Trinity College, Cambridge, where he became a fellow after ranking 24th wrangler in 1824. He entered Lincoln’s Inn and was called to the bar in 1824, studying conveyancing in Mr. John Tyrrell’s chambers. He quickly built a solid practice as an equity draughtsman and before parliamentary committees, and in 1830 he married Miss Charlotte Moor. In 1845, he became Q.C., and in 1847, he was elected to parliament for the city of Oxford as a Liberal. In 1849, he was appointed vice-chancellor of the county palatine of Lancaster, and in 1851 he was made solicitor-general and knighted, stepping down from that position in 1852. When his party returned to power in 1853, he was elevated to the bench as a vice-chancellor. In 1868, he became a lord justice of appeal, but by the end of the year, he was chosen by Mr. Gladstone to be lord chancellor and was given the title of Lord Hatherley of Down Hatherley. He retired in 1872 due to failing eyesight but occasionally sat as a law lord. The death of his wife in 1878 was a significant blow from which he never recovered, and he died in London on July 10, 1881. Dean Hook remarked that Lord Hatherley—who was a principled and compassionate supporter of the Church of England—was the best man he had ever known. He was a particularly clear-headed lawyer, and his judgments—always delivered spontaneously—gained immense confidence from both the public and the legal profession. He left no heirs, and the title became extinct upon his death.


HATHERTON, EDWARD JOHN LITTLETON, 1st Baron (1791-1863), was born on the 18th of March 1791 and was educated at Rugby school and at Brasenose College, Oxford. He was the only son of Moreton Walhouse of Hatherton, Staffordshire; but in 1812, in accordance with the will of his great-uncle Sir Edward Littleton, Bart. (d. 1812), he took the name of Littleton. From 1812 to 1832 he was member of parliament for Staffordshire and from 1832 to 1835 for the southern division of that county, being specially prominent in the House of Commons as an advocate of Roman Catholic emancipation. In January 1833, against his own wish, he was put forward by the Radicals as a candidate for the office of speaker, but he was not elected and in May 1833 he became chief secretary to the lord-lieutenant of Ireland in the ministry of Earl Grey. His duties in this capacity brought him frequently into conflict with O’Connell, but he was obviously unequal to the great Irishman, although he told his colleagues to “leave me to manage Dan.” He had to deal with the vexed and difficult question of the Irish tithes on which the government was divided, and with his colleagues had to face the problem of a new coercion act. Rather hastily he made a compact with O’Connell on the assumption that the new act could not contain certain clauses which were part of the old act. The clauses, however, were inserted; O’Connell charged Littleton with deception; and in July 1834 Grey, Althorp (afterwards Earl Spencer) and the Irish secretary resigned. The two latter were induced to serve under the new premier, Lord Melbourne, and they remained in office until Melbourne was dismissed in November 1834. In 1835 Littleton was created Baron Hatherton, and he died at his Staffordshire residence, Teddesley Hall, on the 4th of May 1863. In 1888 his grandson, Edward George Littleton (b. 1842), became 3rd Baron Hatherton.

Hatherton, Edward John Littleton, 1st Baron (1791-1863) was born on March 18, 1791, and educated at Rugby School and Brasenose College, Oxford. He was the only son of Moreton Walhouse of Hatherton, Staffordshire; however, in 1812, following the will of his great-uncle Sir Edward Littleton, Bart. (d. 1812), he adopted the name Littleton. From 1812 to 1832, he served as a Member of Parliament for Staffordshire and from 1832 to 1835 for the southern division of the county, gaining prominence in the House of Commons as a supporter of Roman Catholic emancipation. In January 1833, against his own preference, he was nominated by the Radicals as a candidate for the office of Speaker, but he was not elected. In May 1833, he became Chief Secretary to the Lord Lieutenant of Ireland in Earl Grey’s ministry. His role often put him at odds with O’Connell, and although he told his colleagues to “leave me to manage Dan,” he was clearly not up to the challenge posed by the great Irishman. He faced the contentious issue of the Irish tithes, which divided the government, and along with his colleagues dealt with the problem of a new coercion act. He hastily reached an agreement with O’Connell assuming the new act wouldn't include certain clauses from the old act. However, those clauses were included, O’Connell accused Littleton of deception, and in July 1834, Grey, Althorp (later Earl Spencer), and the Irish Secretary resigned. The latter two were persuaded to serve under the new Prime Minister, Lord Melbourne, and remained in office until Melbourne was dismissed in November 1834. In 1835, Littleton was made Baron Hatherton, and he passed away at his Staffordshire home, Teddesley Hall, on May 4, 1863. In 1888, his grandson, Edward George Littleton (b. 1842), became the 3rd Baron Hatherton.

See Hatherton’s Memoirs and Correspondence relating to Political Occurrences, June-July 1834, edited by H. Reeve (1872); and Sir S. Walpole, History of England, vol. iii. (1890).

See Hatherton’s Memoirs and Correspondence relating to Political Occurrences, June-July 1834, edited by H. Reeve (1872); and Sir S. Walpole, History of England, vol. iii. (1890).


HATHRAS, a town of British India, in the Aligarh district of the United Provinces, 29 m. N. of Agra. Pop. (1901), 42,578. At the end of the 18th century it was held by a Jat chieftain, whose ruined fort still stands at the east end of the town, and was annexed by the British in 1803, but insubordination on the part of the chief necessitated the siege of the fort in 1817. Since it came under British rule, Hathras has rapidly risen to commercial importance, and now ranks second to Cawnpore among the trading centres of the Doab. The chief articles of commerce are sugar and grain, there are also factories for ginning and pressing cotton, and a cotton spinning-mill. Hathras is connected by a light railway with Muttra, and by a branch with Hathras junction, on the East Indian main line.

Hathras, is a town in British India, located in the Aligarh district of the United Provinces, 29 miles north of Agra. The population in 1901 was 42,578. At the end of the 18th century, it was held by a Jat chieftain, whose ruined fort still stands at the east end of the town. The British annexed it in 1803, but the chief's insubordination led to the siege of the fort in 1817. Since becoming part of British rule, Hathras has quickly grown in commercial importance and is now the second-largest trading hub in the Doab after Cawnpore. The main goods traded here are sugar and grain, and there are also factories for ginning and pressing cotton, as well as a cotton spinning mill. Hathras is connected by a light railway to Muttra and has a branch line to Hathras Junction on the East Indian main line.


HATTIESBURG, a city and the county-seat of Forrest county, Mississippi, U.S.A., on the Hastahatchee (or Leaf) river, about 90 m. S.E. of Jackson. Pop. (1890) 1172; (1900) 4175 (1687 negroes); (1910) 11,733. Hattiesburg is served by the Gulf & Ship Island, the Mississippi Central, the New Orleans, Mobile & Chicago and the New Orleans & North Eastern railways. The officers and employees of the Gulf & Ship Island railway own and maintain a hospital here. The city is in a rich farming, truck-gardening and lumbering country. Among its manufactures are lumber (especially yellow-pine), wood-alcohol, turpentine, paper and pulp, fertilizers, wagons, mattresses and machine-shop products. Hattiesburg was founded about 1882 and was named in honour of the wife of W. H. Hardy, a railway official, who planned a town at the intersection of the New Orleans & North-Eastern (which built a round house and repair shops here in 1885) and the Gulf & Ship Island railways. The latter railway was opened from Gulfport to Hattiesburg in January 1897, and from Hattiesburg to Jackson in September 1900. Hattiesburg was incorporated as a town in 1884 and was chartered as a city in 1899. Formerly the “court house” of the second judicial district of Perry county, Hattiesburg became on the 1st of January 1908 the county-seat of Forrest county, erected from the W. part of Perry county.

Hattiesburg, is a city and the county seat of Forrest County, Mississippi, U.S.A., located on the Hastahatchee (or Leaf) River, about 90 miles southeast of Jackson. Population: (1890) 1,172; (1900) 4,175 (1,687 African Americans); (1910) 11,733. Hattiesburg is served by the Gulf & Ship Island, Mississippi Central, New Orleans, Mobile & Chicago, and New Orleans & North Eastern railways. The staff and workers of the Gulf & Ship Island railway own and operate a hospital here. The city is situated in a fertile area known for farming, truck gardening, and lumber production. Some of its manufacturing includes lumber (especially yellow pine), wood alcohol, turpentine, paper and pulp, fertilizers, wagons, mattresses, and machine shop products. Hattiesburg was founded around 1882 and was named in honor of the wife of W. H. Hardy, a railway official who established a town at the intersection of the New Orleans & North-Eastern (which built a roundhouse and repair shops here in 1885) and the Gulf & Ship Island railways. The latter was opened from Gulfport to Hattiesburg in January 1897 and from Hattiesburg to Jackson in September 1900. Hattiesburg became a town in 1884 and was chartered as a city in 1899. Previously the courthouse of the second judicial district of Perry County, Hattiesburg became the county seat of Forrest County on January 1, 1908, created from the western part of Perry County.


HATTINGEN, a town of Germany, in the Prussian province of Westphalia, on the river Ruhr, 21 m. N.E. of Düsseldorf. Pop. (1900), 8975. It has two Evangelical and a Roman Catholic church. The manufactures include tobacco, and iron and steel goods. In the neighbourhood are the ruins of the Isenburg, demolished in 1226. Hattingen, which received communal rights in 1396, was one of the Hanse towns.

HATTINGEN, is a town in Germany, located in the Prussian province of Westphalia, along the Ruhr River, 21 miles northeast of Düsseldorf. Its population was 8,975 in 1900. The town has two Evangelical churches and one Roman Catholic church. Its industries include tobacco production as well as iron and steel manufacturing. Nearby, you can find the ruins of Isenburg, which was destroyed in 1226. Hattingen, which gained municipal rights in 1396, was one of the Hanseatic towns.


HATTO I. (c. 850-913), archbishop of Mainz, belonged to a Swabian family, and was probably educated at the monastery of Reichenau, of which he became abbot in 888. He soon became known to the German king, Arnulf, who appointed him archbishop of Mainz in 891; and he became such a trustworthy and confidential counsellor that he was popularly called “the heart of the king.” He presided over the important synod at Tribur in 895, and accompanied the king to Italy in 894 and 895, where he was received with great favour by Pope Formosus. In 899, when Arnulf died, Hatto became regent of Germany, and guardian of the young king, Louis the Child, whose authority he compelled Zwentibold, king of Lorraine, an illegitimate son of Arnulf, to recognize. During these years he did not neglect his own interests, for in 896 he secured for himself the abbey of Ellwangen and in 898 that of Lorsch. He assisted the Franconian family of the Conradines in its feud with the Babenbergs, and was accused of betraying Adalbert, count of Babenberg, to death. He retained his influence during the whole of the reign of Louis; and on the king’s death in 911 was prominent in securing the election of Conrad, duke of Franconia, to the vacant throne. When trouble arose between Conrad and Henry, duke of Saxony, afterwards King Henry the Fowler, the attitude of Conrad was ascribed by the Saxons to the influence of Hatto, who wished to prevent Henry from securing authority in Thuringia, where the see of Mainz had extensive possessions. He was accused of complicity in a plot to murder Duke Henry, who in return ravaged the archiepiscopal lands in Saxony and Thuringia. He died on the 15th of May 913, one tradition saying he was struck by lightning, and another that he was thrown alive by the devil into the crater of Mount Etna. His memory was long regarded in Saxony with great abhorrence, and stories of cruelty and treachery gathered round his name. The legend of the Mouse Tower at Bingen is connected with Hatto II., who was archbishop of Mainz from 968 to 970. This Hatto built the church of St George on the island of Reichenau, was generous to the see of Mainz and to the abbeys of Fulda and Reichenau, and was a patron of the chronicler Regino, abbot of Prüm.

HATTO I. (c. 850-913), archbishop of Mainz, came from a Swabian family and was likely educated at the monastery of Reichenau, where he became abbot in 888. He quickly caught the attention of the German king, Arnulf, who appointed him archbishop of Mainz in 891; he became such a trusted advisor that people started calling him “the heart of the king.” He led the important synod at Tribur in 895 and traveled to Italy with the king in 894 and 895, where he was warmly received by Pope Formosus. In 899, after Arnulf’s death, Hatto became regent of Germany and guardian of the young king, Louis the Child, whose authority he forced Zwentibold, king of Lorraine and an illegitimate son of Arnulf, to acknowledge. During this time, he also looked out for his own interests, securing the abbey of Ellwangen in 896 and that of Lorsch in 898. He supported the Franconian family of the Conradines in their conflict with the Babenbergs and was accused of betraying Adalbert, count of Babenberg, leading to his death. He maintained his influence throughout Louis’s reign, and after the king died in 911, he played a key role in getting Conrad, duke of Franconia, elected to the vacant throne. When tensions arose between Conrad and Henry, duke of Saxony, who later became King Henry the Fowler, the Saxons blamed Hatto for Conrad's stance, believing he wanted to prevent Henry from gaining power in Thuringia, where Mainz held significant land. He was accused of being involved in a plot to assassinate Duke Henry, who retaliated by ravaging the archiepiscopal lands in Saxony and Thuringia. He died on May 15, 913; one story says he was struck by lightning, while another claims he was cast alive into the crater of Mount Etna by the devil. His legacy was long viewed with great disdain in Saxony, with tales of cruelty and treachery surrounding his name. The legend of the Mouse Tower at Bingen is linked to Hatto II., who was archbishop of Mainz from 968 to 970. This Hatto built the church of St. George on the island of Reichenau, was generous to the see of Mainz and the abbeys of Fulda and Reichenau, and supported the chronicler Regino, abbot of Prüm.

See E. Dümmler, Geschichte des ostfränkischen Reichs (Leipzig, 1887-1888); G. Phillips, Die grosse Synode von Tribur (Vienna, 1865); J. Heidemann, Hatto I., Erzbischof von Mainz (Berlin, 1865); G. Waitz, Jahrbücher der deutschen Geschichte unter Heinrich I. (Berlin and Leipzig, 1863); and J. F. Böhmer, Regesta archiepiscoporum Maguntinensium, edited by C. Will (Innsbruck, 1877-1886).

See E. Dümmler, History of the East Frankish Empire (Leipzig, 1887-1888); G. Phillips, The Great Synod of Tribur (Vienna, 1865); J. Heidemann, Hatto I, Archbishop of Mainz (Berlin, 1865); G. Waitz, Yearbooks of German History under Henry I (Berlin and Leipzig, 1863); and J. F. Böhmer, Registers of the Archbishops of Mainz, edited by C. Will (Innsbruck, 1877-1886).


HATTON, SIR CHRISTOPHER (1540-1591), lord chancellor of England and favourite of Queen Elizabeth, was a son of William Hatton (d. 1546) of Holdenby, Northamptonshire, and was educated at St Mary Hall, Oxford. A handsome and accomplished man, being especially distinguished for bis elegant dancing, he soon attracted the notice of Queen Elizabeth, became one of her gentlemen pensioners in 1564, and captain of her bodyguard in 1572. He received numerous estates and many positions of trust and profit from the queen, and suspicion was not slow to assert that he was Elizabeth’s lover, a charge which was definitely made by Mary queen of Scots in 1584. Hatton, who was probably innocent in this matter, had been made vice-chamberlain of the royal household and a member of the privy council in 1578, and had been a member of parliament since 1571, first representing the borough of Higham Ferrers and afterwards the county of Northampton. In 1578 he was knighted, and was now regarded as the queen’s spokesman in the House of Commons, being an active agent in the prosecutions of John Stubbs and William Parry. He was one of those who were appointed to arrange a marriage between Elizabeth and Francis, duke of 64 Alençon, in 1581; was a member of the court which tried Anthony Babington in 1586; and was one of the commissioners who found Mary queen of Scots guilty. He besought Elizabeth not to marry the French prince; and according to one account repeatedly assured Mary that he would fetch her to London if the English queen died. Whether or no this story be true, Hatton’s loyalty was not questioned; and he was the foremost figure in that striking scene in the House of Commons in December 1584, when four hundred kneeling members repeated after him a prayer for Elizabeth’s safety. Having been the constant recipient of substantial marks of the queen’s favour, he vigorously denounced Mary Stuart in parliament, and advised William Davison to forward the warrant for her execution to Fotheringay. In the same year (1587) Hatton was made lord chancellor, and although he had no great knowledge of the law, he appears to have acted with sound sense and good judgment in his new position. He is said to have been a Roman Catholic in all but name, yet he treated religious questions in a moderate and tolerant way. He died in London on the 20th of November 1591, and was buried in St Paul’s cathedral. Although mention has been made of a secret marriage, Hatton appears to have remained single, and his large and valuable estates descended to his nephew, Sir William Newport, who took the name of Hatton. Sir Christopher was a knight of the Garter and chancellor of the university of Oxford. Elizabeth frequently showed her affection for her favourite in an extravagant and ostentatious manner. She called him her mouton, and forced the bishop of Ely to give him the freehold of Ely Place, Holborn, which became his residence, his name being perpetuated in the neighbouring Hatton Garden. Hatton is reported to have been a very mean man, but he patronized men of letters, and among his friends was Edmund Spenser. He wrote the fourth act of a tragedy, Tancred and Gismund, and his death occasioned several panegyrics in both prose and verse.

HATTON, SIR CHRISTOPHER (1540-1591), Lord Chancellor of England and favorite of Queen Elizabeth, was the son of William Hatton (d. 1546) of Holdenby, Northamptonshire, and was educated at St Mary Hall, Oxford. A good-looking and talented man, especially known for his graceful dancing, he quickly caught the attention of Queen Elizabeth, became one of her gentlemen pensioners in 1564, and captain of her bodyguard in 1572. He received numerous estates and many significant positions from the queen, and rumors soon circulated that he was Elizabeth’s lover, a claim explicitly made by Mary, Queen of Scots, in 1584. Hatton, likely innocent in this matter, had been appointed vice-chamberlain of the royal household and a member of the Privy Council in 1578 and had been a member of Parliament since 1571, first representing Higham Ferrers and then Northamptonshire. In 1578, he was knighted and was seen as the queen’s spokesperson in the House of Commons, actively participating in the prosecutions of John Stubbs and William Parry. He was appointed to negotiate a marriage between Elizabeth and Francis, Duke of Alençon, in 1581; was on the court that tried Anthony Babington in 1586; and was one of the commissioners who found Mary Queen of Scots guilty. He urged Elizabeth not to marry the French prince; and according to one account, repeatedly promised Mary that he would bring her to London if the English queen died. Whether this story is true or not, Hatton's loyalty was unquestioned; he was a key figure in the dramatic scene in the House of Commons in December 1584 when four hundred kneeling members echoed his prayer for Elizabeth’s safety. Being a constant recipient of the queen’s favor, he strongly denounced Mary Stuart in Parliament and advised William Davison to send the warrant for her execution to Fotheringhay. In the same year (1587), Hatton became Lord Chancellor, and although he lacked extensive legal knowledge, he seemed to have acted with common sense and good judgment in his new role. He was reportedly a Roman Catholic in all but name, yet he handled religious issues with a moderate and tolerant approach. He died in London on November 20, 1591, and was buried in St Paul’s Cathedral. Although there are mentions of a secret marriage, Hatton appears to have remained single, and his large and valuable estates passed to his nephew, Sir William Newport, who adopted the name Hatton. Sir Christopher was a Knight of the Garter and Chancellor of the University of Oxford. Elizabeth often expressed her affection for her favorite in extravagant and showy ways. She referred to him as her mouton and compelled the Bishop of Ely to grant him the freehold of Ely Place, Holborn, which became his home, with his name being remembered in the nearby Hatton Garden. Hatton is said to have been a rather petty man, but he supported literary figures, including Edmund Spenser. He wrote the fourth act of a tragedy, Tancred and Gismund, and his death inspired several tributes in both prose and poetry.

When Hatton’s nephew, Sir William Hatton, died without sons in 1597, his estates passed to a kinsman, another Sir Christopher Hatton (d. 1619), whose son and successor, Christopher (c. 1605-1670), was elected a member of the Long Parliament in 1640, and during the Civil War was a partisan of Charles I. In 1643 he was created Baron Hatton of Kirby; and, acting as comptroller of the royal household, he represented the king during the negotiations at Uxbridge in 1645. Later he lived for some years in France, and after the Restoration was made a privy councillor and governor of Guernsey. He died at Kirby on the 4th of July 1670, and was buried in Westminster Abbey. By his wife Elizabeth (d. 1672), daughter of Sir Charles Montagu of Boughton, he had two sons and three daughters. His eldest son Christopher (1632-1706), succeeded his father as Baron Hatton and also as governor of Guernsey in 1670. In 1683 he was created Viscount Hatton of Grendon. He was married three times, and left two sons: William (1690-1760), who succeeded to his father’s titles and estates, and Henry Charles (c. 1700-1762), who enjoyed the same dignities for a short time after his brother’s death. When Henry Charles died, the titles became extinct, and the family is now represented by the Finch-Hattons, earls of Winchilsea and Nottingham, whose ancestor, Daniel Finch, 2nd earl of Nottingham, married Anne (d. 1743), daughter of the 1st Viscount Hatton.

When Hatton’s nephew, Sir William Hatton, passed away without sons in 1597, his estates went to a relative, another Sir Christopher Hatton (d. 1619). His son and successor, Christopher (c. 1605-1670), was elected as a member of the Long Parliament in 1640 and was a supporter of Charles I during the Civil War. In 1643, he was made Baron Hatton of Kirby and, serving as comptroller of the royal household, he represented the king during the negotiations at Uxbridge in 1645. He later lived in France for several years, and after the Restoration, he became a privy councillor and governor of Guernsey. He died at Kirby on July 4, 1670, and was buried in Westminster Abbey. With his wife Elizabeth (d. 1672), daughter of Sir Charles Montagu of Boughton, he had two sons and three daughters. His eldest son Christopher (1632-1706) succeeded him as Baron Hatton and also as governor of Guernsey in 1670. In 1683, he was made Viscount Hatton of Grendon. He was married three times and left two sons: William (1690-1760), who inherited his father’s titles and estates, and Henry Charles (c. 1700-1762), who held the same titles for a short time after his brother’s death. When Henry Charles died, the titles became extinct, and the family is now represented by the Finch-Hattons, earls of Winchilsea and Nottingham, whose ancestor, Daniel Finch, 2nd earl of Nottingham, married Anne (d. 1743), the daughter of the 1st Viscount Hatton.

See Sir N. H. Nicolas, Life and Times of Sir Christopher Hatton (London, 1847); and Correspondence of the Family of Hatton, being chiefly Letters addressed to Christopher, first Viscount Hatton, 1601-1704, edited with introduction by E. M. Thompson (London, 1878).

See Sir N. H. Nicolas, Life and Times of Sir Christopher Hatton (London, 1847); and Correspondence of the Family of Hatton, being chiefly Letters addressed to Christopher, first Viscount Hatton, 1601-1704, edited with introduction by E. M. Thompson (London, 1878).


HATTON, JOHN LIPTROT (1809-1886), English musical composer, was born at Liverpool on the 12th of October 1809. He was virtually a self-taught musician, and besides holding several appointments as organist in Liverpool, appeared as an actor on the Liverpool stage, subsequently finding his way to London as a member of Macready’s company at Drury Lane in 1832. Ten years after this he was appointed conductor at the same theatre for a series of English operas, and in 1843 his own first operetta, Queen of the Thames, was given with success. Staudigl, the eminent German bass, was a member of the company, and at his suggestion Hatton wrote a more ambitious work, Pascal Bruno, which, in a German translation, was presented at Vienna, with Staudigl in the principal part; the opera contained a song, “Revenge,” which the basso made very popular in England, though the piece as a whole was not successful enough to be produced here. Hatton’s excellent pianoforte playing attracted much attention in Vienna; he took the opportunity of studying counterpoint under Sechter, and wrote a number of songs, obviously modelled on the style of German classics. In 1846 he appeared at the Hereford festival as a singer, and also played a pianoforte concerto of Mozart. He undertook concert tours about this time with Sivori, Vieuxtemps and others. From 1848 to 1850 he was in America; on his return he became conductor of the Glee and Madrigal Union, and from about 1853 was engaged at the Princess’s theatre to provide and conduct the music for Charles Kean’s Shakespearean revivals. He seems to have kept this appointment for about five years. In 1856 a cantata, Robin Hood, was given at the Bradford festival, and a third opera, Rose, or Love’s Ransom, at Covent Garden in 1864, without much success. In 1866 he went again to America, and from this year Hatton held the post of accompanist at the Ballad Concerts, St James’s Hall, for nine seasons. In 1875 he went to Stuttgart, and wrote an oratorio, Hezekiah, given at the Crystal Palace in 1877; like all his larger works it met with very moderate success. Hatton excelled in the lyrical forms of music, and, in spite of his distinct skill in the severer styles of the madrigal, &c., he won popularity by such songs as “To Anthea,” “Good-bye, Sweetheart,” and “Simon the Cellarer,” the first of which may be called a classic in its own way. His glees and part-songs, such as “When Evening’s Twilight,” are still reckoned among the best of their class; and he might have gained a place of higher distinction among English composers had it not been for his irresistible animal spirits and a want of artistic reverence, which made it uncertain in his younger days whether, when he appeared at a concert, he would play a fugue of Bach or sing a comic song. He died at Margate on the 20th of September 1886.

HATTON, JOHN LIPTROT (1809-1886), an English musical composer, was born in Liverpool on October 12, 1809. He was mostly a self-taught musician and held several organist positions in Liverpool. He also acted on the Liverpool stage before moving to London as a member of Macready’s company at Drury Lane in 1832. A decade later, he became the conductor at the same theater for a series of English operas, and in 1843, his first operetta, Queen of the Thames, premiered successfully. Staudigl, the notable German bass, was part of the company and suggested that Hatton write a more ambitious work, Pascal Bruno, which was performed in German translation in Vienna with Staudigl in the lead role. The opera included a song, “Revenge,” that became very popular in England, although the work itself was not successful enough to be staged there. Hatton’s impressive piano playing gained him attention in Vienna, where he took the chance to study counterpoint under Sechter and wrote several songs influenced by German classics. In 1846, he performed at the Hereford festival as a singer and played a Mozart piano concerto. Around this time, he went on tour with Sivori, Vieuxtemps, and others. From 1848 to 1850, he traveled to America; upon his return, he became the conductor of the Glee and Madrigal Union and from about 1853 worked at the Princess’s theatre providing and conducting music for Charles Kean’s Shakespearean revivals. He seems to have held this meeting for about five years. In 1856, a cantata titled Robin Hood was performed at the Bradford festival, and a third opera, Rose, or Love’s Ransom, was staged at Covent Garden in 1864, though it did not achieve much success. In 1866, he returned to America, and from that year, Hatton served as the accompanist at the Ballad Concerts at St James’s Hall for nine seasons. In 1875, he went to Stuttgart and wrote an oratorio, Hezekiah, which was performed at the Crystal Palace in 1877; like all his larger works, it had only moderate success. Hatton excelled in lyrical music forms, and despite his clear talent in more serious styles like madrigals, he became popular for songs like “To Anthea,” “Good-bye, Sweetheart,” and “Simon the Cellarer,” the first of which may be considered a classic. His glees and part-songs, such as “When Evening’s Twilight,” are still regarded as some of the best in their genre. He might have achieved a higher status among English composers if not for his lively spirit and lack of artistic reverence, which made it uncertain in his younger years whether he would perform a Bach fugue or a comic song at a concert. He died at Margate on September 20, 1886.


HAUCH, JOHANNES CARSTEN (1790-1872), Danish poet, was born of Danish parents residing at Frederikshald in Norway, on the 12th of May 1790. In 1802 he lost his mother, and in 1803 returned with his father to Denmark. In 1807 he fought as a volunteer against the English invasion. He entered the university of Copenhagen in 1808, and in 1821 took his doctor’s degree. He became the friend and associate of Steffens and Oehlenschläger, warmly adopting the romantic views about poetry and philosophy. His first two dramatic poems, The Journey to Ginistan and The Power of Fancy, appeared in 1816, and were followed by a lyrical drama, Rosaura (1817); but these works attracted little or no attention. Hauch therefore gave up all hope of fame as a poet, and resigned himself entirely to the study of science. He took his doctor’s degree in zoology in 1821, and went abroad to pursue his studies. At Nice he had an accident which obliged him to submit to the amputation of one foot. He returned to literature, publishing a dramatized fairy tale, the Hamadryad, and the tragedies of Bajazet, Tiberius, Gregory VII., in 1828-1829, The Death of Charles V. (1831), and The Siege of Maestricht (1832). These plays were violently attacked and enjoyed no success. Hauch then turned to novel-writing, and published in succession five romances—Vilhelm Zabern (1834); The Alchemist (1836); A Polish Family (1839); The Castle on the Rhine (1845); and Robert Fulton (1853). In 1842 he collected his shorter Poems. In 1846 he was appointed professor of the Scandinavian languages in Kiel, but returned to Copenhagen when the war broke out in 1848. About this time his dramatic talent was at its height, and he produced one admirable tragedy after another; among these may be mentioned Svend Grathe (1841); The Sisters at Kinnekulle (1849); Marshal Stig (1850); Honour Lost and Won (1851); and Tycho Brahe’s Youth (1852). From 1858 to 1860 Hauch was director of the Danish National Theatre; he produced three more tragedies—The King’s Favourite (1859); Henry of Navarre (1863); and Julian the Apostate (1866). In 1861 he 65 published another collection of Lyrical Poems and Romances; and in 1862 the historical epic of Valdemar Seir, volumes which contain his best work. From 1851, when he succeeded Oehlenschläger, to his death, he held the honorary post of professor of aesthetics at the university of Copenhagen. He died in Rome in 1872. Hauch was one of the most prolific of the Danish poets, though his writings are unequal in value. His lyrics and romances in verse are always fine in form and often strongly imaginative. In all his writings, but especially in his tragedies, he displays a strong bias in favour of what is mystical and supernatural. Of his dramas Marshal Stig is perhaps the best, and of his novels the patriotic tale of Vilhelm Zabern is admired the most.

HAUCH, JOHANNES CARSTEN (1790-1872), Danish poet, was born to Danish parents living in Frederikshald, Norway, on May 12, 1790. In 1802, he lost his mother, and in 1803, he returned to Denmark with his father. In 1807, he volunteered to fight against the British invasion. He enrolled at the University of Copenhagen in 1808 and received his doctorate in 1821. He became close friends with Steffens and Oehlenschläger, embracing the romantic ideas surrounding poetry and philosophy. His first two dramatic poems, The Journey to Ginistan and The Power of Fancy, were published in 1816, followed by a lyrical drama, Rosaura (1817); however, these works gained little to no attention. Consequently, Hauch gave up any hopes of being recognized as a poet and devoted himself entirely to studying science. He earned his doctorate in zoology in 1821 and went abroad to further his studies. While in Nice, he suffered an accident that required the amputation of one foot. He returned to literature, publishing a dramatized fairy tale, The Hamadryad, alongside the tragedies Bajazet, Tiberius, Gregory VII. between 1828-1829, followed by The Death of Charles V. (1831) and The Siege of Maestricht (1832). These plays faced harsh criticism and received little success. Hauch then shifted to novel writing and published five romances in succession—Vilhelm Zabern (1834), The Alchemist (1836), A Polish Family (1839), The Castle on the Rhine (1845), and Robert Fulton (1853). In 1842, he collected his shorter Poems. In 1846, he was appointed professor of Scandinavian languages in Kiel but returned to Copenhagen when war broke out in 1848. Around this time, his talent for drama was at its peak, producing one exceptional tragedy after another; notable works include Svend Grathe (1841), The Sisters at Kinnekulle (1849), Marshal Stig (1850), Honour Lost and Won (1851), and Tycho Brahe’s Youth (1852). From 1858 to 1860, Hauch served as the director of the Danish National Theatre, where he produced three more tragedies—The King’s Favourite (1859), Henry of Navarre (1863), and Julian the Apostate (1866). In 1861, he published another collection of Lyrical Poems and Romances; in 1862, he released the historical epic Valdemar Seir, volumes which showcase his best work. From 1851 until his death, after succeeding Oehlenschläger, he held the honorary position of professor of aesthetics at the University of Copenhagen. He passed away in Rome in 1872. Hauch was one of the most prolific Danish poets, although the quality of his writings varied. His lyrical works and poems are consistently well-crafted and often deeply imaginative. In all his writings, particularly his tragedies, he reveals a strong inclination towards the mystical and supernatural. Among his dramas, Marshal Stig is perhaps the finest; of his novels, the patriotic story Vilhelm Zabern is the most admired.

See G. Brandes, “Carsten Hauch” (1873) in Danske Digtere (1877); F. Rönning, J. C. Hauch (1890), and in Dansk Biografisk-Lexicon, (vol. vii. Copenhagen, 1893). Hauch’s novels were collected (1873-1874) and his dramatic works (3 vols., 2nd ed., 1852-1859).

See G. Brandes, “Carsten Hauch” (1873) in Danske Digtere (1877); F. Rönning, J. C. Hauch (1890), and in Dansk Biografisk-Lexicon, (vol. vii. Copenhagen, 1893). Hauch’s novels were collected (1873-1874) and his dramatic works (3 vols., 2nd ed., 1852-1859).


HAUER, FRANZ, Ritter von (1822-1899), Austrian geologist, born in Vienna on the 30th of January 1822, was son of Joseph von Hauer (1778-1863), who was equally distinguished as a high Austrian official and authority on finance and as a palaeontologist. He was educated in Vienna, afterwards studied geology at the mining academy of Schemnitz (1839-1843), and for a time was engaged in official mining work in Styria. In 1846 he became assistant to W. von Haidinger at the mineralogical museum in Vienna; three years later he joined the imperial geological institute, and in 1866 he was appointed director. In 1886 he became superintendent of the imperial natural history museum in Vienna. Among his special geological works are those on the Cephalopoda of the Triassic and Jurassic formations of Alpine regions (1855-1856). His most important general work was that of the Geological Map of Austro-Hungary, in twelve sheets (1867-1871; 4th ed., 1884, including Bosnia and Montenegro). This map was accompanied by a series of explanatory pamphlets. In 1882 he was awarded the Wollaston medal by the Geological Society of London. In 1892 von Hauer became a life-member of the upper house of the Austrian parliament. He died on the 20th of March 1899.

HAUER, FRANZ, Knight of (1822-1899), Austrian geologist, born in Vienna on January 30, 1822, was the son of Joseph von Hauer (1778-1863), who was also well-known as a high-ranking Austrian official and finance expert, as well as a paleontologist. He was educated in Vienna and later studied geology at the mining academy in Schemnitz from 1839 to 1843. For a time, he worked in official mining roles in Styria. In 1846, he became an assistant to W. von Haidinger at the mineralogical museum in Vienna. Three years later, he joined the imperial geological institute, and in 1866, he was appointed its director. In 1886, he became the superintendent of the imperial natural history museum in Vienna. Some of his notable geological works include studies on the Cephalopoda of the Triassic and Jurassic formations in the Alpine regions (1855-1856). His most significant general contribution was the Geological Map of Austro-Hungary, published in twelve sheets from 1867 to 1871, with a fourth edition in 1884 that included Bosnia and Montenegro. This map was accompanied by a series of explanatory pamphlets. In 1882, he received the Wollaston medal from the Geological Society of London. In 1892, von Hauer became a life member of the upper house of the Austrian parliament. He passed away on March 20, 1899.

Publications.Beiträge zur Paläontolographie von Österreich (1858-1859); Die Geologie und ihre Anwendung auf die Kenntnis der Bodenbeschaffenheit der österr.-ungar. Monarchie (1875; ed. 2, 1878).

Publications.Contributions to the Paleontology of Austria (1858-1859); The Geology and Its Application to Understanding the Soil Composition of the Austro-Hungarian Monarchy (1875; 2nd ed., 1878).

Memoir by Dr E. Tietze; Jahrbuch der K. K. geolog. Reichsanstalt (1899, reprinted 1900, with portrait).

Memoir by Dr. E. Tietze; Yearbook of the Imperial Geological Institute (1899, reprinted 1900, with portrait).


HAUFF, WILHELM (1802-1827), German poet and novelist, was born at Stuttgart on the 29th of November 1802, the son of a secretary in the ministry of foreign affairs. Young Hauff lost his father when he was but seven years of age, and his early education was practically self-gained in the library of his maternal grandfather at Tübingen, to which place his mother had removed. In 1818 he was sent to the Klosterschule at Blaubeuren, whence he passed in 1820 to the university of Tübingen. In four years he completed his philosophical and theological studies, and on leaving the university became tutor to the children of the famous Württemberg minister of war, General Baron Ernst Eugen von Hügel (1774-1849), and for them wrote his Märchen, which he published in his Märchenalmanach auf das Jahr 1826. He also wrote there the first part of the Mitteilungen aus den Memoiren des Satan (1826) and Der Mann im Monde (1825). The latter, a parody of the sentimental and sensual novels of H. Clauren (pseudonym of Karl Gottlieb Samuel Heun [1771-1854]), became, in course of composition, a close imitation of that author’s style and was actually published under his name. Clauren, in consequence, brought an action for damages against Hauff and gained his case. Whereupon Hauff followed up the attack in his witty and sarcastic Kontroverspredigt über H. Clauren und den Mann im Monde (1826) and attained his original object—the moral annihilation of the mawkish and unhealthy literature with which Clauren was flooding the country. Meanwhile, animated by Sir Walter Scott’s novels, Hauff wrote the historical romance Lichtenstein (1826), which acquired great popularity in Germany and especially in Swabia, treating as it did the most interesting period in the history of that country, the reign of Duke Ulrich (1487-1550). While on a journey to France, the Netherlands and north Germany he wrote the second part of the Memoiren des Satan and some short novels, among them the charming Bettlerin vom Pont des Arts and his masterpiece, the Phantasien im Bremer Ratskeller (1827). He also published some short poems which have passed into Volkslieder, among them Morgenrot, Morgenrot, leuchtest mir zum frühen Tod; and Steh’ ich in finstrer Mitternacht. In January 1827, Hauff undertook the editorship of the Stuttgart Morgenblatt and in the following month married, but his happiness was prematurely cut short by his death from fever on the 18th of November 1827.

HAUFF, WILHELM (1802-1827), German poet and novelist, was born in Stuttgart on November 29, 1802, the son of a secretary in the foreign ministry. Young Hauff lost his father when he was just seven years old, and he learned mostly on his own in his maternal grandfather's library in Tübingen, where his mother had moved. In 1818, he was sent to the Klosterschule in Blaubeuren, and in 1820 he went on to the University of Tübingen. He completed his studies in philosophy and theology in four years, and after leaving the university, he became a tutor for the children of the notable Württemberg Minister of War, General Baron Ernst Eugen von Hügel (1774-1849), for whom he wrote his Märchen, published in Märchenalmanach auf das Jahr 1826. He also wrote the first part of Mitteilungen aus den Memoiren des Satan (1826) and Der Mann im Monde (1825) there. The latter, a parody of the sentimental and sensual novels by H. Clauren (the pseudonym of Karl Gottlieb Samuel Heun [1771-1854]), ended up closely imitating Clauren’s style and was actually published under his name. As a result, Clauren sued Hauff for damages and won his case. Hauff then responded with his witty and sarcastic Kontroverspredigt über H. Clauren und den Mann im Monde (1826), achieving his original goal—the moral dismantling of the overly emotional and unhealthy literature that Clauren was pushing on the public. Inspired by Sir Walter Scott’s novels, Hauff wrote the historical romance Lichtenstein (1826), which became very popular in Germany, particularly in Swabia, as it covered the intriguing period in the history of that region during the reign of Duke Ulrich (1487-1550). While traveling through France, the Netherlands, and northern Germany, he wrote the second part of Memoiren des Satan and several short novels, including the delightful Bettlerin vom Pont des Arts and his masterpiece, Phantasien im Bremer Ratskeller (1827). He also published some short poems that have become folk songs, including Morgenrot, Morgenrot, leuchtest mir zum frühen Tod and Steh’ ich in finstrer Mitternacht. In January 1827, Hauff took over as editor of the Stuttgart Morgenblatt and got married the following month, but his happiness was cut short when he died from fever on November 18, 1827.

Considering his brief life, Hauff was an extraordinarily prolific writer. The freshness and originality of his talent, his inventiveness, and his genial humour have won him a high place among the south German prose writers of the early nineteenth century.

Considering his short life, Hauff was an incredibly productive writer. The freshness and originality of his talent, his creativity, and his warm humor have earned him a significant spot among the southern German prose writers of the early nineteenth century.

His Sämtliche Werke were published, with a biography, by G. Schwab (3 vols., 1830-1834; 5 vols., 18th ed., 1882), and by F. Bobertag (1891-1897), and a selection by M. Mendheim (3 vols., 1891). For his life cf. J. Klaiber, Wilhelm Hauff, ein Lebensbild (1881); M. Mendheim, Hauffs Leben und Werke (1894); and H. Hofmann, W. Hauff (1902).

His Sämtliche Werke were published, along with a biography, by G. Schwab (3 vols., 1830-1834; 5 vols., 18th ed., 1882), and by F. Bobertag (1891-1897), with a selection by M. Mendheim (3 vols., 1891). For information about his life, see J. Klaiber, Wilhelm Hauff, ein Lebensbild (1881); M. Mendheim, Hauffs Leben und Werke (1894); and H. Hofmann, W. Hauff (1902).


HAUG, MARTIN (1827-1876), German Orientalist, was born at Ostdorf near Balingen, Württemberg, on the 30th of January 1827. He became a pupil in the gymnasium at Stuttgart at a comparatively late age, and in 1848 he entered the university of Tübingen, where he studied Oriental languages, especially Sanskrit. He afterwards attended lectures in Göttingen, and in 1854 settled as Privatdozent at Bonn. In 1856 he removed to Heidelberg, where he assisted Bunsen in his literary undertakings; and in 1859 he accepted an invitation to India, where he became superintendent of Sanskrit studies and professor of Sanskrit in Poona. Here his acquaintance with the Zend language and literature afforded him excellent opportunities for extending his knowledge of this branch of literature. The result of his researches was a volume of Essays on the sacred language, writings and religion of the Parsees (Bombay, 1862). Having returned to Stuttgart in 1866, he was called to Munich as professor of Sanskrit and comparative philology in 1868. He died on the 3rd of June 1876.

HAUG, MARTIN (1827-1876), was a German Orientalist born in Ostdorf near Balingen, Württemberg, on January 30, 1827. He started attending the gymnasium in Stuttgart at a relatively late age, and in 1848, he enrolled at the University of Tübingen to study Oriental languages, focusing on Sanskrit. He later took courses in Göttingen and became a Privatdozent in Bonn in 1854. In 1856, he moved to Heidelberg, where he worked with Bunsen on various literary projects. In 1859, he was invited to India, where he became the superintendent of Sanskrit studies and a professor of Sanskrit in Poona. His exposure to the Zend language and literature provided him with great opportunities to expand his knowledge in this field. His research resulted in a volume titled Essays on the sacred language, writings and religion of the Parsees (Bombay, 1862). After returning to Stuttgart in 1866, he was appointed as a professor of Sanskrit and comparative philology in Munich in 1868. He passed away on June 3, 1876.

Besides the Essays on the Parsees, of which a new edition, by E. W. West, greatly enriched from the posthumous papers of the author, appeared in 1878, Haug published a number of works of considerable importance to the student of the literatures of ancient India and Persia. They include Die Pehlewisprache und der Bundehesch (1854); Die Schrift und Sprache der zweiten Keilschriftgattung (1855); Die fünf Gathas, edited, translated and expounded (1858-1860); an edition, with translation and explanation, of the Aitareya Brahmana of the Rigveda (Bombay, 1863), which is accounted his best work in the province of ancient Indian literature; A Lecture on an original Speech of Zoroaster (1865); An old Zend-Pahlavi Glossary (1867); Über den Charakter der Pehlewisprache (1869); Das 18. Kapitel des Wendidad (1869); Über das Ardai-Virafnameh (1870); An old Pahlavi-Pazand Glossary (1870); and Vedische Rätselfragen und Rätselsprüche (1875).

Besides the Essays on the Parsees, for which a new edition by E. W. West, significantly expanded from the author's posthumous papers, was released in 1878, Haug published several important works for anyone studying the literatures of ancient India and Persia. These include Die Pehlewisprache und der Bundehesch (1854); Die Schrift und Sprache der zweiten Keilschriftgattung (1855); Die fünf Gathas, edited, translated, and explained (1858-1860); an edition with translation and explanation of the Aitareya Brahmana of the Rigveda (Bombay, 1863), recognized as his best work in ancient Indian literature; A Lecture on an original Speech of Zoroaster (1865); An old Zend-Pahlavi Glossary (1867); Über den Charakter der Pehlewisprache (1869); Das 18. Kapitel des Wendidad (1869); Über das Ardai-Virafnameh (1870); An old Pahlavi-Pazand Glossary (1870); and Vedische Rätselfragen und Rätselsprüche (1875).

For particulars of Haug’s life and work, see A. Bezzenberger, Beiträge zur Kunde der indogermanischen Sprachen, vol. i. pp. 70 seq.

For details about Haug’s life and work, see A. Bezzenberger, Beiträge zur Kunde der indogermanischen Sprachen, vol. i. pp. 70 seq.


HAUGE, HANS NIELSEN (1771-1824), Norwegian Lutheran divine, was born in the parish of Thunö, Norway, on the 3rd of April 1771, the son of a peasant. With the aid of various religious works which he found in his father’s house, he laboured to supplement his scanty education. In his twenty-sixth year, believing himself to be a divinely-commissioned prophet, he began to preach in his native parish and afterwards throughout Norway, calling people to repentance and attacking rationalism. In 1800 he passed to Denmark, where, as at home, he gained many followers and assistants, chiefly among the lower orders. Proceeding to Christiansand in 1804, Hauge set up a printing-press to disseminate his views more widely, but was almost immediately arrested for holding illegal religious meetings, and for insulting the regular clergy in his books, all of which were confiscated; he was also heavily fined. After being in confinement for some years, he was released in 1814 on payment of a fine, and retiring to an estate at Breddwill, near Christiania, he died there on the 29th of March 1824. His adherents, who did not formally break with the church, were called Haugianer or Leser (i.e. Readers). He unquestionably did much to revive 66 the spiritual life of the northern Lutheran Church. His views were of a pietistic nature. Though he cannot be said to have rejected any article of the Lutheran creed, the peculiar emphasis which he laid upon the evangelical doctrines of faith and grace involved considerable antagonism to the rationalistic or sacerdotal views commonly held by the established clergy.

HAUGE, HANS NIELSEN (1771-1824), Norwegian Lutheran minister, was born in the parish of Thunö, Norway, on April 3, 1771, the son of a peasant. With the help of various religious texts he found in his father's house, he worked to supplement his limited education. At the age of twenty-six, believing he was a divinely appointed prophet, he began to preach in his hometown and later throughout Norway, calling people to repentance and criticizing rationalism. In 1800, he moved to Denmark, where, as at home, he gained many followers and supporters, primarily among the lower classes. After moving to Christiansand in 1804, Hauge set up a printing press to spread his ideas more widely, but was almost immediately arrested for holding unauthorized religious meetings and for insulting the regular clergy in his books, all of which were confiscated; he was also heavily fined. After spending several years in confinement, he was released in 1814 upon paying a fine, and he retired to an estate at Breddwill, near Christiania, where he died on March 29, 1824. His followers, who did not formally break from the church, were called Haugianer or Leser (i.e. Readers). He undoubtedly did much to revive 66 the spiritual life of the northern Lutheran Church. His views were pietistic in nature. Although he cannot be said to have rejected any part of the Lutheran creed, the unique emphasis he placed on the evangelical doctrines of faith and grace involved significant opposition to the rationalistic or sacerdotal views commonly held by the established clergy.

Hauge’s principal writings are Forsög til Afhandeling om Guds Visdom (1796); Anvisning til nogle mörkelige Sprog i Bibelen (1798); Forklaring over Loven og Evangelium (1803). For an account of his life and doctrines see C. Bang’s Hans Nielsen Hauge og hans Samtid (Christiania; 2nd ed., 1875); O. Rost, Nogle Bemaerkninger om Hans Nielsen Hauge og hans Retning (1883), and the article in Herzog-Hauck, Realencyklopädie.

Hauge’s main works are Attempts to Discuss God's Wisdom (1796); Guide to Some Dark Languages in the Bible (1798); Explanation of the Law and Gospel (1803). For a biography of his life and beliefs, see C. Bang’s Hans Nielsen Hauge and His Time (Christiania; 2nd ed., 1875); O. Rost, Some Remarks on Hans Nielsen Hauge and His Movement (1883), and the article in Herzog-Hauck, Realencyclopedia.


HAUGESUND, a seaport of Norway in Stavanger amt (county), on the west coast, 34 m. N. by W. of Stavanger. Pop. (1900), 7935. It is an important fishing centre. Herrings are exported to the annual value of £100,000 to £200,000, also mackerel and lobsters. The principal imports are coal and salt. There are factories for woollen goods and a margarine factory. Haugesund is the reputed death-place of Harald Haarfager, to whom an obelisk of red granite was erected in 1872 on the thousandth anniversary of his victory at the Hafsfjord (near Stavanger) whereby he won the sovereignty of Norway. The memorial stands 1¼ m. north of the town, on the Haraldshaug, where the hero’s supposed tombstone is shown.

HAUGESUND, is a seaport in Norway located in Stavanger amt (county), on the west coast, 34 miles north by west of Stavanger. Its population in 1900 was 7,935. It is a vital fishing hub, exporting herrings worth between £100,000 and £200,000 annually, along with mackerel and lobsters. The main imports are coal and salt. There are factories producing woolen goods and a margarine factory. Haugesund is believed to be the death place of Harald Haarfager, for whom a red granite obelisk was erected in 1872 to mark the thousandth anniversary of his victory at Hafsfjord (near Stavanger), through which he gained sovereignty over Norway. The memorial is located 1¼ miles north of the town, on the Haraldshaug, where the hero’s supposed tombstone can be seen.


HAUGHTON, SAMUEL (1821-1897), Irish scientific writer, the son of James Haughton (1795-1873), was born at Carlow on the 21st of December 1821. His father, the son of a Quaker, but himself a Unitarian, was an active philanthropist, a strong supporter of Father Theobald Mathew, a vegetarian, and an anti-slavery worker and writer. After a distinguished career in Trinity College, Dublin, Samuel was elected a fellow in 1844. He was ordained priest in 1847, but seldom preached. In 1851 he was appointed professor of geology in Trinity College, and this post he held for thirty years. He began the study of medicine in 1859, and in 1862 took the degree of M.D. in the university of Dublin. He was then made registrar of the Medical School, the status of which he did much to improve, and he represented the university on the General Medical Council from 1878 to 1896. He was elected F.R.S. in 1858, and in course of time Oxford conferred upon him the hon. degree of D.C.L., and Cambridge and Edinburgh that of LL.D. He was a man of remarkable knowledge and ability, and he communicated papers on widely different subjects to various learned societies and scientific journals in London and Dublin. He wrote on the laws of equilibrium and motion of solid and fluid bodies (1846), on sun-heat, terrestrial radiation, geological climates and on tides. He wrote also on the granites of Leinster and Donegal, and on the cleavage and joint-planes in the Old Red Sandstone of Waterford (1857-1858). He was president of the Royal Irish Academy from 1886 to 1891, and for twenty years he was secretary of the Royal Zoological Society of Ireland. He died in Dublin on the 31st of October 1897.

HAUGHTON, SAMUEL (1821-1897), Irish scientific writer, the son of James Haughton (1795-1873), was born in Carlow on December 21, 1821. His father, a Quaker's son who identified as a Unitarian, was an active philanthropist, a strong supporter of Father Theobald Mathew, a vegetarian, and worked against slavery while writing about it. After a successful academic career at Trinity College, Dublin, Samuel was elected a fellow in 1844. He was ordained as a priest in 1847 but rarely preached. In 1851, he was appointed professor of geology at Trinity College, a position he held for thirty years. He started studying medicine in 1859 and earned an M.D. from the University of Dublin in 1862. He was then appointed registrar of the Medical School, where he significantly improved its status, and represented the university on the General Medical Council from 1878 to 1896. He became an F.R.S. in 1858, and later Oxford awarded him an honorary D.C.L., while Cambridge and Edinburgh honored him with an LL.D. He was a remarkable individual known for his vast knowledge and skills, contributing papers on a variety of topics to different learned societies and scientific journals in London and Dublin. He wrote about the laws of equilibrium and the movement of solid and fluid bodies (1846), sun-heat, terrestrial radiation, geological climates, and tides. He also explored the granites of Leinster and Donegal, and studied the cleavage and joint-planes in the Old Red Sandstone of Waterford (1857-1858). He served as president of the Royal Irish Academy from 1886 to 1891 and acted as secretary of the Royal Zoological Society of Ireland for twenty years. He passed away in Dublin on October 31, 1897.

Publications.Manual of Geology (1865); Principles of Animal Mechanics (1873); Six Lectures on Physical Geography (1880). In conjunction with his friend, Professor J. Galbraith, he issued a series of Manuals of Mathematical and Physical Science.

Publications.Manual of Geology (1865); Principles of Animal Mechanics (1873); Six Lectures on Physical Geography (1880). Together with his friend, Professor J. Galbraith, he published a series of Manuals on Mathematical and Physical Science.


HAUGHTON, WILLIAM (fl. 1598), English playwright. He collaborated in many plays with Henry Chettle, Thomas Dekker, John Day and Richard Hathway. The only certain biographical information about him is derived from Philip Henslowe, who on the 10th of March 1600 lent him ten shillings “to release him out of the Clink.” Mr Fleay credits him with a considerable share in The Patient Grissill (1599), and a merry comedy entitled English-Men for my Money, or A Woman will have her Will (1598) is ascribed to his sole authorship. The Devil and his Dame, mentioned as a forthcoming play by Henslowe in March 1600, is identified by Mr Fleay as Grim, the Collier of Croydon, which was printed in 1662. In this play an emissary is sent from the infernal regions to report on the conditions of married life on earth.

HAUGHTON, WILLIAM (active 1598), English playwright. He collaborated on many plays with Henry Chettle, Thomas Dekker, John Day, and Richard Hathway. The only reliable biographical information about him comes from Philip Henslowe, who on March 10, 1600, lent him ten shillings “to get him out of the Clink.” Mr. Fleay credits him with a significant role in The Patient Grissill (1599), and a lively comedy titled English-Men for my Money, or A Woman will have her Will (1598) is attributed to him as the sole author. The Devil and his Dame, mentioned as an upcoming play by Henslowe in March 1600, is identified by Mr. Fleay as Grim, the Collier of Croydon, which was printed in 1662. In this play, a messenger is sent from the underworld to report on the state of married life on earth.

Grim is reprinted in vol. viii., and English-Men for my Money in vol. x., of W. C. Hazlitt’s edition of Dodsley’s Old Plays.

Grim is reprinted in vol. viii., and English-Men for my Money in vol. x., of W. C. Hazlitt’s edition of Dodsley’s Old Plays.


HAUGWITZ, CHRISTIAN AUGUST HEINRICH KURT, Count von, Freiherr von Krappitz (1752-1831), Prussian statesman, was born on the 11th of June 1752, at Peucke near Öls. He belonged to the Silesian (Protestant) branch of the ancient family of Haugwitz, of which the Catholic branch is established in Moravia. He studied law, spent some time in Italy, returned to settle on his estates in Silesia, and in 1791 was elected by the Silesian estates general director of the province. At the urgent instance of King Frederick William II. he entered the Prussian service, became ambassador at Vienna in 1792 and at the end of the same year a member of the cabinet at Berlin.

HAUGWITZ, CHRISTIAN AUGUST HEINRICH KURT, Count von Krappitz (1752-1831), Prussian statesman, was born on June 11, 1752, in Peucke near Öls. He was part of the Silesian (Protestant) branch of the ancient Haugwitz family, with a Catholic branch established in Moravia. He studied law, spent some time in Italy, and then returned to manage his estates in Silesia. In 1791, he was elected by the Silesian estates as the general director of the province. At the strong request of King Frederick William II, he joined the Prussian service, became ambassador in Vienna in 1792, and later that year became a member of the cabinet in Berlin.

Haugwitz, who had attended the young emperor Francis II. at his coronation and been present at the conferences held at Mainz to consider the attitude of the German powers towards the Revolution, was opposed to the exaggerated attitude of the French émigrés and to any interference in the internal affairs of France. After the war broke out, however, the defiant temper of the Committee of Public Safety made an honourable peace impossible, while the strained relations between Austria and Prussia on the question of territorial “compensations” crippled the power of the Allies to carry the war to a successful conclusion. It was in these circumstances that Haugwitz entered on the negotiations that resulted in the subsidy treaty between Great Britain and Prussia, and Great Britain and Holland, signed at the Hague on the 19th of April 1794. Haugwitz, however, was not the man to direct a strong and aggressive policy; the failure of Prussia to make any effective use of the money supplied broke the patience of Pitt, and in October the denunciation by Great Britain of the Hague treaty broke the last tie that bound Prussia to the Coalition. The separate treaty with France, signed at Basel on the 5th of April 1795, was mainly due to the influence of Haugwitz.

Haugwitz, who had attended the young emperor Francis II at his coronation and been present at the meetings in Mainz to discuss the German powers' stance on the Revolution, was against the extreme views of the French émigrés and any interference in France's internal issues. However, once the war started, the confrontational attitude of the Committee of Public Safety made a fair peace impossible, while the tense relations between Austria and Prussia over territorial “compensations” weakened the Allies' ability to successfully conduct the war. It was under these circumstances that Haugwitz began negotiations that led to the subsidy treaty between Great Britain and Prussia, as well as Great Britain and Holland, which was signed in The Hague on April 19, 1794. However, Haugwitz was not the right person to lead a strong and aggressive policy; Prussia's failure to effectively use the provided funds frustrated Pitt, and in October, Great Britain’s denunciation of the Hague treaty severed the last connection Prussia had with the Coalition. The separate treaty with France, signed in Basel on April 5, 1795, was largely due to Haugwitz's influence.

His object was now to save the provinces on the left bank of the Rhine from being lost to the Empire. No guarantee of their maintenance had been inserted in the Basel treaty; but Haugwitz and the king hoped to preserve them by establishing the armed neutrality of North Germany and securing its recognition by the French Republic. This policy was rendered futile by the victories of Napoleon Bonaparte and the virtual conquest of South Germany by the French. Haugwitz, who had continued to enjoy the confidence of the new king, Frederick William III., recognized this fact, and urged his master to join the new Coalition in 1798. But the king clung blindly to the illusion of neutrality, and Haugwitz allowed himself to be made the instrument of a policy of which he increasingly disapproved. It was not till 1803, when the king refused his urgent advice to demand the evacuation of Hanover by the French, that he tendered his resignation. In August 1804 he was definitely replaced by Hardenberg, and retired to his estates.

His goal was now to save the provinces on the left bank of the Rhine from being lost to the Empire. No guarantee of their preservation had been included in the Basel treaty; however, Haugwitz and the king hoped to maintain them by establishing the armed neutrality of North Germany and getting it recognized by the French Republic. This approach became pointless due to Napoleon Bonaparte's victories and the near complete conquest of South Germany by the French. Haugwitz, who continued to have the new king, Frederick William III.’s, trust, recognized this reality and urged his king to join the new Coalition in 1798. But the king stubbornly held onto the illusion of neutrality, and Haugwitz allowed himself to become an instrument of a policy he increasingly disagreed with. It wasn't until 1803, when the king ignored his urgent advice to demand the French evacuate Hanover, that he offered his resignation. In August 1804, he was officially replaced by Hardenberg and retired to his estates.

In his retirement Haugwitz was still consulted, and he used all his influence against Hardenberg’s policy of a rapprochement with France. His representations had little weight, however, until Napoleon’s high-handed action in violating Prussian territory by marching troops through Ansbach, roused the anger of the king. Haugwitz was now once more appointed foreign minister, as Hardenberg’s colleague, and it was he who was charged to carry to Napoleon the Prussian ultimatum which was the outcome of the visit of the tsar Alexander I. to Berlin in November. But in this crisis his courage failed him; his nature was one that ever let “I dare not wait upon I will”; he delayed his journey pending some turn in events and to give time for the mobilization of the duke of Brunswick’s army; he was frightened by reports of separate negotiations between Austria and Napoleon, not realizing that a bold declaration by Prussia would nip them in the bud. Napoleon, when at last they met, read him like a book and humoured his diplomatic weakness until the whole issue was decided at Austerlitz. On the 15th of December, instead of delivering an ultimatum, Haugwitz signed at Schönbrunn the treaty which gave Hanover to Prussia in return for Ansbach, Cleves and Neuchâtel.

In his retirement, Haugwitz was still sought for advice, and he used all his influence against Hardenberg’s approach of getting closer to France. However, his opinions carried little weight until Napoleon’s aggressive act of violating Prussian territory by marching troops through Ansbach ignited the king’s anger. Haugwitz was again appointed foreign minister, joining Hardenberg, and it was his responsibility to deliver Prussia's ultimatum to Napoleon, which was a result of tsar Alexander I's visit to Berlin in November. But during this critical time, he lost his nerve; his character was such that he often let “I dare not wait upon I will.” He postponed his journey, hoping for some change in the situation and to allow time for the duke of Brunswick’s army to mobilize. He was alarmed by reports of separate talks between Austria and Napoleon, not realizing that a bold statement from Prussia would squash them quickly. When they finally met, Napoleon saw right through him and played into his diplomatic weaknesses until the entire situation was settled at Austerlitz. On December 15th, instead of delivering an ultimatum, Haugwitz signed the treaty at Schönbrunn, which gave Hanover to Prussia in exchange for Ansbach, Cleves, and Neuchâtel.

The humiliation of Prussia and her minister was, however, 67 not yet complete. In February 1806 Haugwitz went to Paris to ratify the treaty of Schönbrunn and to attempt to secure some modifications in favour of Prussia. He was received with a storm of abuse by Napoleon, who insisted on tearing up the treaty and drawing up a fresh one, which doubled the amount of territory to be ceded by Prussia and forced her to a breach with Great Britain by binding her to close the Hanoverian ports to British commerce. The treaty, signed on the 15th of February, left Prussia wholly isolated in Europe. What followed belongs to the history of Europe rather than to the biography of Haugwitz. He remained, indeed, at the head of the Prussian ministry of foreign affairs, but the course of Prussian policy it was beyond his power to control. The Prussian ultimatum to Napoleon was forced upon him by overwhelming circumstances, and with the battle of Jena, on the 14th of October, his political career came to an end. He accompanied the flight of the king into East Prussia, there took leave of him and retired to his Silesian estates. In 1811 he was appointed Curator of the university of Breslau; in 1820, owing to failing health, he went to live in Italy, where he remained till his death at Venice in 1831.

The humiliation of Prussia and her minister was, however, 67 not yet complete. In February 1806, Haugwitz went to Paris to finalize the treaty of Schönbrunn and try to negotiate some changes in favor of Prussia. He was met with a barrage of insults from Napoleon, who insisted on canceling the treaty and creating a new one that doubled the amount of territory Prussia had to give up and forced her into a conflict with Great Britain by requiring her to close the Hanoverian ports to British trade. The treaty, signed on February 15th, left Prussia completely isolated in Europe. What happened next is more a part of European history than Haugwitz’s biography. He stayed at the head of the Prussian ministry of foreign affairs, but he had no control over Prussian policy. The ultimatum to Napoleon was imposed on him by overwhelming circumstances, and with the battle of Jena on October 14th, his political career came to an end. He accompanied the king’s flight to East Prussia, said goodbye, and retired to his estates in Silesia. In 1811, he was appointed Curator of the University of Breslau; in 1820, due to his declining health, he moved to Italy, where he lived until his death in Venice in 1831.

Haugwitz was a man of great intellectual gifts, of dignified presence and a charming address which endeared him to his sovereigns and his colleagues; but as a statesman he failed, not through want of perspicacity, but through lack of will power and a fatal habit of procrastination. During his retirement in Italy he wrote memoirs in justification of his policy, a fragment of which dealing with the episode of the treaty of Schönbrunn was published at Jena in 1837.

Haugwitz was a man of exceptional intelligence, with a dignified demeanor and a charming manner that made him well-liked by his rulers and peers; however, as a statesman, he fell short, not due to a lack of insight, but because of weak willpower and a damaging tendency to procrastinate. While he was retired in Italy, he wrote memoirs to defend his policies, and a portion of these, focusing on the Schönbrunn treaty, was published in Jena in 1837.

See J. von Minutoli, Der Graf von Haugwitz und Job von Witzleben (Berlin, 1844); L. von Ranke, Hardenberg u. d. Gesch. des preuss. Staates (Leipzig, 1879-1881), note on Haugwitz’s memoirs in vol. ii.; Denkwürdigkeiten des Staatskanzlers Fürsten von Hardenberg, ed. Ranke (5 vols., Leipzig, 1877); A. Sorel, L’Europe et la Révol. Franç., passim.

See J. von Minutoli, The Count of Haugwitz and Job von Witzleben (Berlin, 1844); L. von Ranke, Hardenberg and the History of the Prussian State (Leipzig, 1879-1881), note on Haugwitz’s memoirs in vol. ii.; Memoirs of the State Chancellor Prince von Hardenberg, edited by Ranke (5 vols., Leipzig, 1877); A. Sorel, Europe and the French Revolution, various pages.


HAUNTINGS (from “to haunt,” Fr. hanter, of uncertain origin, but possibly from Lat. ambitare, ambire, to go about, frequent), the supposed manifestations of existence by spirits of the dead in houses or places familiar to them in life. The savage practice of tying up the corpse before burying it is clearly intended to prevent the dead from “walking”; and cremation, whether in savage lands or in classical times, may have originally had the same motive. The “spirit” manifests himself, as a rule, either in his bodily form, as when he lived, or in the shape of some animal, or by disturbing noises, as in the case of the poltergeist (q.v.). Classical examples occur in Plautus (Mostellaria), Lucian (Philopseudes), Pliny, Suetonius, St Augustine, St Gregory, Plutarch and elsewhere, while Lucretius has his theory of apparitions of the dead. He does not deny the fact; he explains it by “films” diffused from the living body and persisting in the atmosphere.

HAUNTINGS (from “to haunt,” Fr. hanter, of uncertain origin, but possibly from Lat. ambitare, ambire, to go around, frequent), the supposed appearances of spirits of the dead in places they were familiar with in life. The primitive practice of tying up the body before burial is clearly meant to stop the dead from “walking”; and cremation, whether in primitive societies or in classical times, may have originally served the same purpose. The “spirit” usually appears either in its physical form as it was in life, or as an animal, or through disruptive noises, as seen in the case of the poltergeist (q.v.). Classical examples can be found in Plautus (Mostellaria), Lucian (Philopseudes), Pliny, Suetonius, St Augustine, St Gregory, Plutarch, and others, while Lucretius has his theory on the appearances of the dead. He doesn’t deny the phenomenon; he explains it by “films” that spread from the living body and linger in the atmosphere.

A somewhat similar hypothesis, to account for certain alleged phenomena, was invented by Mr Edmund Gurney. Some visionary appearances in haunted houses do not suggest the idea of an ambulatory spirit, but rather of the photograph of a past event, impressed we know not how on we know not what. In this theory there is no room for the agency of spirits of the dead. The belief in hauntings was naturally persistent through the middle ages, and example and theory abound in the Loca infesta (Cologne, 1598) of Petrus Thyraeus, S.J.; Wierius (c. 1560), in De praestigiis daemonum, is in the same tale. According to Thyraeus, hauntings appeal to the senses of sight, hearing and touch. The auditory phenomena are mainly thumping noises, sounds of footsteps, laughing and moaning. Rackets in general are caused by lares domestici (“brownies”) or the Poltergeist. In the tactile way ghosts push the living; “I have been thrice pushed by an invisible power,” writes the Rev. Samuel Wesley, in 1717, in his narrative of the disturbances at his rectory at Epworth. Once he was pushed against the corner of his desk in the study; once up against the door of the matted chamber; and thirdly, “against the right-hand side of the frame of my study door, as I was going in.” We have thus Protestant corroboration of the statement of the learned Jesuit.

A similar idea to explain some reported phenomena was proposed by Mr. Edmund Gurney. Some ghostly sightings in haunted houses don’t suggest a wandering spirit, but rather resemble a snapshot of a past event, captured in a way we can't explain. This theory doesn't involve the actions of spirits of the dead. Belief in hauntings was naturally strong throughout the Middle Ages, and there are plenty of examples and theories in the Loca infesta (Cologne, 1598) by Petrus Thyraeus, S.J.; Wierius (c. 1560) also tells a similar story in De praestigiis daemonum. According to Thyraeus, hauntings appeal to our senses of sight, hearing, and touch. The sounds associated with hauntings mainly include banging noises, footsteps, laughing, and moaning. Noises in general are caused by lares domestici (“brownies”) or Poltergeist activity. In terms of touch, ghosts can push the living; “I have been pushed three times by an invisible force,” writes Rev. Samuel Wesley in 1717, recounting the disturbances at his rectory in Epworth. Once he was shoved against the corner of his desk in his study; another time against the door of the matted room; and a third time, “against the right-hand side of the frame of my study door as I was entering.” Thus, we have Protestant confirmation of what the learned Jesuit stated.

Thyraeus raises the question, Are the experiences hallucinatory? Did Mr Wesley (to take his case) receive a mere hallucinatory set of pushes? Was the hair of a friend of the writer’s, who occupied a haunted house, only pulled in a subjective way? Thyraeus remarks that, in cases of noisy phenomena, not all persons present hear them; and, rather curiously, Mr Wesley records the same experience; he sometimes did not hear sounds that seemed violently loud to his wife and family, who were with him at prayers. Thyraeus says that, as collective hallucinations of sight are rare—all present not usually seeing the apparition—so audible phenomena are not always experienced by all persons present. In such cases, he thinks that the sights and sounds have no external cause, he regards the sights and sounds as delusions—caused by spirits. This is a difficult question. He mentions that we hear all the furniture being tossed about (as Sir Walter and Lady Scott heard it at Abbotsford; see Lockhart’s Life, v. 311-315). Yet, on inspection, we find all the furniture in its proper place. There is abundant evidence to experience of this phenomenon, which remains as inexplicable as it was in the days of Thyraeus. When the sounds are heard, has the atmosphere vibrated, or has the impression only been made on “the inner ear”? In reply, Mr. Procter, who for sixteen years (1831-1847) endured the unexplained disturbances at Willington Mill, avers that the material objects on which the knocks appeared to be struck did certainly vibrate (see Poltergeist). Is then the felt vibration part of the hallucination?

Thyraeus raises the question, Are the experiences hallucinatory? Did Mr. Wesley (to take his case) just experience a hallucinatory set of pushes? Was the hair of a friend of the writer’s, who lived in a haunted house, only pulled in a subjective way? Thyraeus notes that, in cases of noisy phenomena, not everyone present hears them; and interestingly, Mr. Wesley reports the same experience; sometimes he didn't hear sounds that seemed extremely loud to his wife and family, who were with him during prayers. Thyraeus states that, just as collective visual hallucinations are rare—not everyone usually sees the apparition—audible phenomena are not always experienced by everyone present. In such cases, he believes that the sights and sounds lack an external cause, viewing them as delusions caused by spirits. This is a challenging question. He mentions hearing all the furniture being tossed around (as Sir Walter and Lady Scott heard it at Abbotsford; see Lockhart’s Life, v. 311-315). Yet, upon inspection, we find all the furniture in its proper place. There’s plenty of evidence of this phenomenon, which remains as puzzling as it was in Thyraeus’s time. When the sounds are heard, did the atmosphere vibrate, or was the impression simply made on “the inner ear”? In response, Mr. Procter, who endured the unexplained disturbances at Willington Mill for sixteen years (1831-1847), asserts that the material objects on which the knocks seemed to strike did indeed vibrate (see Poltergeist). So, is the felt vibration part of the hallucination?

As for visual phenomena, “ghosts,” Thyraeus does not regard them as space-filling entities, but as hallucinations imposed by spirits on the human senses; the spirit, in each case, not being necessarily the soul of the dead man or woman whom the phantasm represents.

As for visual phenomena, “ghosts,” Thyraeus doesn’t see them as entities that fill space, but rather as hallucinations created by spirits that affect human senses; the spirit, in each instance, isn’t necessarily the soul of the deceased man or woman that the phantom represents.

In the matter of alleged hauntings, the symptoms, the phenomena, to-day, are exactly the same as those recorded by Thyraeus. The belief in them is so far a living thing that it greatly lowers the letting value of a house when it is reported to be haunted. (An action for libelling a house as haunted was reported in the London newspapers of the 7th of March 1907). It is true that ancient family legends of haunts are gloried in by the inheritors of stately homes in England, or castles in Scotland, and to discredit the traditional ghost—in the days of Sir Walter Scott—was to come within measurable distance of a duel. But the time-honoured phantasms of old houses usually survive only in the memory of “the oldest aunt telling the saddest tale.” Their historical basis can no more endure criticism than does the family portrait of Queen Mary,—signed by Medina about 1750-1770, and described by the family as “given to our ancestor by the Queen herself.” After many years’ experience of a baronial dwelling credited with seven distinct and separate phantasms, not one of which was ever seen by hosts, guests or domestics, scepticism as regards traditional ghosts is excusable. Legend reports that they punctually appear on the anniversaries of their misfortunes, but no evidence of such punctuality has been produced.

In the case of supposed hauntings, the signs and occurrences today are exactly the same as those documented by Thyraeus. The belief in them is so strong that it significantly decreases the rental value of a house when it’s said to be haunted. (A lawsuit over labeling a house as haunted was reported in the London newspapers on March 7, 1907). It’s true that ancient family legends of ghosts are cherished by the owners of grand homes in England or castles in Scotland, and to discredit the traditional ghost—back in Sir Walter Scott's time—could lead to a duel. However, the time-honored spirits of old houses usually only live on in the stories told by "the oldest aunt sharing the saddest tale." Their historical foundation can withstand just as little scrutiny as the family portrait of Queen Mary—signed by Medina around 1750-1770, and claimed by the family to be “given to our ancestor by the Queen herself.” After many years of living in a baronial home said to have seven distinct ghosts, none of which were ever seen by hosts, guests, or staff, skepticism about these traditional ghosts is understandable. Legend has it that they appear promptly on the anniversaries of their misfortunes, but no proof of such punctuality has ever been provided.

The Society for Psychical Research has investigated hundreds of cases of the alleged haunting of houses, and the reports are in the archives of the society. But, as the mere rumour of a haunt greatly lowers the value of a house, it is seldom possible to publish the names of the witnesses, and hardly ever permitted to publish the name of the house. From the point of view of science this is unfortunate (see Proceedings S.P.R. vol. viii. pp. 311-332 and Proceedings of 1882-1883, 1883-1884). As far as inquiry had any results, they were to the following effect. The spectres were of the most shy and fugitive kind, seen now by one person, now by another, crossing a room, walking along a corridor, and entering chambers in which, on inspection, they were not found. There was almost never any story to account for the appearances, as in magazine ghost-stories, and, if story there were, it lacked evidence. Recognitions of known dead persons were infrequent; occasionally there was recognition of a portrait in the house. The apparitions spoke in only one or two recorded cases, and, as a rule, seemed to have no motive for appearing. 68 The “ghost” resembles nothing so much as a somnambulist, or the dream-walk of one living person made visible, telepathically, to another living person. Almost the only sign of consciousness given by the appearances is their shyness; on being spoken to or approached they generally vanish. Not infrequently they are taken, at first sight, for living human beings. In darkness they are often luminous, otherwise they would be invisible! Unexplained noises often, but not always, occur in houses where these phenomena are perceived. Evidence is only good, approximately, when a series of persons, in the same house, behold the same appearance, without being aware that it has previously been seen by others. Naturally it is almost impossible to prove this ignorance.

The Society for Psychical Research has looked into hundreds of cases of alleged haunted houses, and the reports are kept in the society's archives. However, since just the rumor of a haunting significantly decreases a house's value, it's rarely possible to reveal the names of the witnesses, and almost never allowed to disclose the house's name. From a scientific standpoint, this is unfortunate (see Proceedings S.P.R. vol. viii. pp. 311-332 and Proceedings of 1882-1883, 1883-1884). As far as inquiries yielded results, they indicated the following. The apparitions were elusive and shy, seen by one person or another, moving across a room, walking down a hall, and entering rooms where they couldn't be found afterward. There was almost never any backstory to explain the sightings, like in ghost stories from magazines, and if there was a story, it lacked supporting evidence. Recognitions of known deceased individuals were rare; occasionally, someone recognized a portrait in the house. The apparitions only spoke in one or two recorded instances and typically seemed to have no reason for appearing. 68 The “ghost” resembles nothing more than a somnambulist, or the dream-walk of one living person made visible, telepathically, to another living person. The only hint of consciousness given by the appearances is their shyness; when approached or spoken to, they usually disappear. They are often mistaken for living people at first glance. In the dark, they commonly appear luminous; otherwise, they would be invisible! Unexplained noises often—but not always—occur in houses where these phenomena are reported. Evidence is generally only valid when a group of people in the same house sees the same apparition without knowing it has been seen by others. Naturally, proving this lack of awareness is almost impossible.

When inquirers believe that the appearances are due to the agency of spirits of the dead, they usually suppose the method to be a telepathic impact on the mind of the living by some “mere automatic projection from a consciousness which has its centre elsewhere” (Myers, Proceedings S.P.R. vol. xv. p. 64). Myers, in Human Personality, fell back on “palaeolithic psychology,” and a theory of a phantasmogenetic agency producing a phantasm which had some actual relation to space. But space forbids us to give examples of modern experiences in haunted houses, endured by persons sane, healthy and well educated. The cases, abundantly offered in Proceedings S.P.R., suggest that certain localities, more than others, are “centres of permanent possibilities of being hallucinated in a manner more or less uniform.” The causes of this fact (if causes there be, beyond a casual hallucination or illusion of A, which, when reported, begets by suggestion, or, when not reported, by telepathy, hallucinations in B, C, D and E), remain unknown (Proceedings S.P.R. vol. viii. p. 133 et seq.). Mr Podmore proposed this hypothesis of causation, which was not accepted by Myers; he thought that the theory laid too heavy a burden on telepathy and suggestion. Neither cause, nor any other cause of similar results, ever affects members of the S.P.R. who may be sent to dwell in haunted houses. They have no weird experiences, except when they are visionaries who see phantoms wherever they go.

When people who investigate believe that the phenomena are caused by the spirits of the dead, they often assume that it’s a telepathic influence on the minds of the living by some “mere automatic projection from a consciousness which has its center elsewhere” (Myers, Proceedings S.P.R. vol. xv. p. 64). Myers, in Human Personality, relied on “paleolithic psychology” and a theory that a phantasmogenetic force creates a phantasm that has some real connection to space. However, due to space constraints, we cannot provide examples of modern experiences in haunted houses that have been reported by sane, healthy, and well-educated individuals. The numerous cases documented in Proceedings S.P.R. suggest that certain locations, more than others, are “centers of permanent possibilities for experiencing hallucinations in a somewhat uniform way.” The reasons behind this observation (if there are reasons other than a random hallucination or illusion experienced by A, which, when shared, leads to similar hallucinations in B, C, D, and E through suggestion or, when not shared, through telepathy) remain unclear (Proceedings S.P.R. vol. viii. p. 133 et seq.). Mr. Podmore suggested this hypothesis of causation, which Myers did not accept; he believed that the theory placed too great a burden on telepathy and suggestion. Neither this cause nor any other similar cause ever impacts members of the S.P.R. who may be assigned to live in haunted houses. They don’t have any strange experiences, except when they are visionaries who see phantoms everywhere they go.

(A. L.)

HAUPT, MORITZ (1808-1874), German philologist, was born at Zittau, in Lusatia, on the 27th of July 1808. His early education was mainly conducted by his father, Ernst Friedrich Haupt, burgomaster of Zittau, a man of good scholarly attainment, who used to take pleasure in turning German hymns or Goethe’s poems into Latin, and whose memoranda were employed by G. Freytag in the 4th volume of his Bilder aus der deutschen Vergangenheit. From the Zittau gymnasium, where he spent the five years 1821-1826, Haupt removed to the university of Leipzig with the intention of studying theology; but the natural bent of his mind and the influence of Professor G. Hermann soon turned all his energies in the direction of philosophy. On the close of his university course (1830) he returned to his father’s house, and the next seven years were devoted to quiet work, not only at Greek, Latin and German, but at Old French, Provençal and Bohemian. He formed with Lachmann at Berlin a friendship which had great effect on his intellectual development. In September 1837 he “habilitated” at Leipzig as Privatdozent, and his first lectures, dealing with such diverse subjects as Catullus and the Nibelungenlied, indicated the twofold direction of his labours. A new chair of German language and literature being founded for his benefit, he became professor extraordinarius (1841) and then professor ordinarius (1843); and in 1842 he married Louise Hermann, the daughter of his master and colleague. But the peaceful and prosperous course opening out before him at the university of Leipzig was brought to a sudden close. Having taken part in 1849 with Otto Jahn and Theodor Mommsen in a political agitation for the maintenance of the imperial constitution, Haupt was deprived of his professorship by a decree of the 22nd of April 1851. Two years later, however, he was called to succeed Lachmann at the university of Berlin; and at the same time the Berlin academy, which had made him a corresponding member in 1841, elected him an ordinary member. For twenty-one years he continued to hold a prominent place among the scholars of the Prussian capital, making his presence felt, not only by the prestige of his erudition and the clearness of his intellect, but by the tirelessness of his energy and the ardent fearlessness of his temperament. He died, of heart disease, on the 5th of February 1874.

HAUPT, MORITZ (1808-1874), a German philologist, was born in Zittau, Lusatia, on July 27, 1808. His early education was primarily handled by his father, Ernst Friedrich Haupt, the mayor of Zittau, a well-educated man who enjoyed translating German hymns and Goethe's poems into Latin. His notes were used by G. Freytag in the fourth volume of his Bilder aus der deutschen Vergangenheit. After spending five years (1821-1826) at the Zittau gymnasium, Haupt moved to the University of Leipzig intending to study theology, but the natural inclination of his mind and the influence of Professor G. Hermann quickly redirected his focus to philosophy. After completing his studies in 1830, he returned to his father's home and spent the next seven years quietly studying not just Greek, Latin, and German, but also Old French, Provençal, and Bohemian. He developed a friendship with Lachmann in Berlin, which significantly impacted his intellectual growth. In September 1837, he qualified as a Privatdozent in Leipzig, and his inaugural lectures on topics like Catullus and the Nibelungenlied showcased his diverse scholarly interests. With the establishment of a new chair in German language and literature for him, he became professor extraordinarius in 1841 and then professor ordinarius in 1843. In 1842, he married Louise Hermann, the daughter of his mentor and colleague. However, his promising path at the University of Leipzig came to an abrupt end. After participating in a political movement in 1849 alongside Otto Jahn and Theodor Mommsen to uphold the imperial constitution, Haupt lost his professorship due to a decree on April 22, 1851. Two years later, he was invited to replace Lachmann at the University of Berlin, and concurrently, the Berlin Academy, which had made him a corresponding member in 1841, elected him as an ordinary member. For twenty-one years, he maintained a significant position among scholars in the Prussian capital, leaving his mark through the prestige of his scholarship, the clarity of his thought, his relentless energy, and his passionate boldness. He passed away from heart disease on February 5, 1874.

Haupt’s critical work is distinguished by a happy union of the most painstaking investigation with intrepidity of conjecture, and while in his lectures and addresses he was frequently carried away by the excitement of the moment, and made sharp and questionable attacks on his opponents, in his writings he exhibits great self-control. The results of many of his researches are altogether lost, because he could not be prevailed upon to publish what fell much short of his own high ideal of excellence. To the progress of classical scholarship he contributed by Quaestiones Catullianae (1837), Observationes criticae (1841), and editions of Ovid’s Halieutica and the Cynegetica of Gratius and Nemesianus (1838), of Catullus, Tibullus and Propertius (3rd ed., 1868), of Horace (3rd ed., 1871) and of Virgil (2nd ed., 1873). As early as 1836, with Hoffmann von Fallersleben, he started the Altdeutsche Blätter, which in 1841 gave place to the Zeitschrift für deutsches Altertum, of which he continued editor till his death. Hartmann von Aue’s Erec (1839) and his Lieder, Büchlein and Der arme Heinrich (1842), Rudolf von Ems’s Guter Gerhard (1840) and Conrad von Würzburg’s Engelhard (1844) are the principal German works which he edited. To form a collection of the French songs of the 16th century was one of his favourite schemes, but a little volume published after his death, Französische Volkslieder (1877), is the only monument of his labours in that direction. Three volumes of his Opuscula were published at Leipzig (1875-1877).

Haupt’s critical work combines thorough investigation with bold speculation. While he often got carried away during his lectures and made sharp, questionable critiques of his opponents, his writings show remarkable self-discipline. Many of his research findings were never shared because he wouldn’t publish anything that didn’t meet his own high standards of excellence. He contributed to classical scholarship through *Quaestiones Catullianae* (1837), *Observationes criticae* (1841), and editions of Ovid’s *Halieutica* and the *Cynegetica* of Gratius and Nemesianus (1838), along with works by Catullus, Tibullus, and Propertius (3rd ed., 1868), Horace (3rd ed., 1871), and Virgil (2nd ed., 1873). As early as 1836, he teamed up with Hoffmann von Fallersleben to start the *Altdeutsche Blätter*, which transitioned to the *Zeitschrift für deutsches Altertum* in 1841, and he remained editor until his death. He edited key German works including Hartmann von Aue’s *Erec* (1839) and his *Lieder*, *Büchlein*, and *Der arme Heinrich* (1842), Rudolf von Ems’s *Guter Gerhard* (1840), and Conrad von Würzburg’s *Engelhard* (1844). One of his favorite projects was compiling a collection of 16th-century French songs, but only a small volume published after his death, *Französische Volkslieder* (1877), stands as a testament to his efforts in that area. Three volumes of his *Opuscula* were published in Leipzig (1875-1877).

See Kirchhoff, “Gedächtnisrede,” in Abhandl. der Königl. Akad. der Wissenschaften zu Berlin (1875); Otto Belger, Moritz Haupt als Lehrer (1879); Sandys, Hist. Class. Schol. iii. (1908).

See Kirchhoff, “Memorial Speech,” in Proceedings of the Royal Academy of Sciences in Berlin (1875); Otto Belger, Moritz Haupt as a Teacher (1879); Sandys, History of Classical Scholarship iii. (1908).


HAUPTMANN, GERHART (1862-  ), German dramatist, was born on the 15th of November 1862 at Obersalzbrunn in Silesia, the son of an hotel-keeper. From the village school of his native place he passed to the Realschule in Breslau, and was then sent to learn agriculture on his uncle’s farm at Jauer. Having, however, no taste for country life, he soon returned to Breslau and entered the art school, intending to become a sculptor. He then studied at Jena, and spent the greater part of the years 1883 and 1884 in Italy. In May 1885 Hauptmann married and settled in Berlin, and, devoting himself henceforth entirely to literary work, soon attained a great reputation as one of the chief representatives of the modern drama. In 1891 he retired to Schreiberhau in Silesia. Hauptmann’s first drama, Vor Sonnenaufgang (1889) inaugurated the realistic movement in modern German literature; it was followed by Das Friedensfest (1890), Einsame Menschen (1891) and Die Weber (1892), a powerful drama depicting the rising of the Silesian weavers in 1844. Of Hauptmann’s subsequent work mention may be made of the comedies Kollege Crampton (1892), Der Biberpelz (1893) and Der rote Hahn (1901), a “dream poem,” Hannele (1893), and an historical drama Florian Geyer (1895). He also wrote two tragedies of Silesian peasant life, Fuhrmann Henschel (1898) and Rose Berndt (1903), and the “dramatic fairy-tales” Die versunkene Glocke (1897) and Und Pippa tanzt (1905). Several of his works have been translated into English.

HAUPTMANN, GERHART (1862-  ), German playwright, was born on November 15, 1862, in Obersalzbrunn, Silesia, the son of a hotel owner. He attended the local village school before moving on to the Realschule in Breslau, and then went to learn farming on his uncle’s farm in Jauer. However, lacking interest in rural life, he soon returned to Breslau and enrolled in art school, aiming to become a sculptor. He later studied in Jena and spent most of 1883 and 1884 in Italy. In May 1885, Hauptmann got married and settled in Berlin, fully committing himself to writing and quickly gaining a reputation as a leading figure in modern drama. In 1891, he moved to Schreiberhau in Silesia. Hauptmann’s first play, Vor Sonnenaufgang (1889), kicked off the realistic movement in modern German literature; it was followed by Das Friedensfest (1890), Einsame Menschen (1891), and Die Weber (1892), a powerful drama about the uprising of Silesian weavers in 1844. Other notable works include the comedies Kollege Crampton (1892), Der Biberpelz (1893), and Der rote Hahn (1901), a “dream poem,” Hannele (1893), and the historical drama Florian Geyer (1895). He also wrote two tragedies about Silesian peasant life, Fuhrmann Henschel (1898) and Rose Berndt (1903), and the “dramatic fairy tales” Die versunkene Glocke (1897) and Und Pippa tanzt (1905). Several of his works have been translated into English.

Biographies of Hauptmann and critical studies of his dramas have been published by A. Bartels (1897); P. Schlenther (1898); and U. C. Woerner (2nd ed., 1900). See also L. Benoist-Hanappier, Le Drame naturaliste en Allemagne (1905).

Biographies of Hauptmann and critical studies of his plays have been published by A. Bartels (1897); P. Schlenther (1898); and U. C. Woerner (2nd ed., 1900). See also L. Benoist-Hanappier, Le Drame naturaliste en Allemagne (1905).


HAUPTMANN, MORITZ (1792-1868), German musical composer and writer, was born at Dresden, on the 13th of October 1792, and studied music under Scholz, Lanska, Grosse and Morlacchi, the rival of Weber. Afterwards he completed his education as a violinist and composer under Spohr, and till 1820 held various appointments in private families, varying his musical occupations with mathematical and other studies bearing chiefly on acoustics and kindred subjects. For a time also Hauptmann was employed as an architect, but all other pursuits gave place to music, and a grand tragic opera, Mathilde, belongs to the period just referred to. In 1822 he entered the orchestra of Cassel, again under Spohr’s direction, and it was then that he first taught composition and musical theory to such men as Ferdinand David, Burgmüller, Kiel and others. His compositions at this time chiefly consisted of motets, masses, cantatas and songs. His opera Mathilde was performed at Cassel 69 with great success. In 1842 Hauptmann obtained the position of cantor at the Thomas-school of Leipzig (long previously occupied by the great Johann Sebastian Bach) together with that of professor at the conservatoire, and it was in this capacity that his unique gift as a teacher developed itself and was acknowledged by a crowd of enthusiastic and more or less distinguished pupils. He died on the 3rd of January 1868, and the universal regret felt at his death at Leipzig is said to have been all but equal to that caused by the loss of his friend Medelssohn many years before. Hauptmann’s compositions are marked by symmetry and perfection of workmanship rather than by spontaneous invention.

HAUPTMANN, MORITZ (1792-1868), a German composer and writer, was born in Dresden on October 13, 1792. He studied music with Scholz, Lanska, Grosse, and Morlacchi, who was a rival of Weber. He later trained as a violinist and composer under Spohr, and until 1820, held various positions in private households, balancing his musical work with mathematical and other studies related primarily to acoustics and similar topics. For a time, Hauptmann also worked as an architect, but eventually focused entirely on music, producing a grand tragic opera, Mathilde, during this period. In 1822, he joined the orchestra in Cassel, again under Spohr’s guidance, where he first taught composition and music theory to students like Ferdinand David, Burgmüller, Kiel, and others. His works during this time mainly included motets, masses, cantatas, and songs. His opera Mathilde was performed in Cassel 69 with great success. In 1842, Hauptmann became the cantor at the Thomas-school in Leipzig (a position previously held by the great Johann Sebastian Bach) and also took on a role as a professor at the conservatory. It was in this role that his exceptional teaching skills flourished, earning him recognition from a large number of enthusiastic and notably varied students. He passed away on January 3, 1868, and the widespread sorrow in Leipzig over his death was said to be nearly equal to the grief caused by the earlier loss of his friend Mendelssohn. Hauptmann’s works are known for their symmetry and craftsmanship, rather than for spontaneous creativity.

Amongst his vocal compositions—by far the most important portion of his work—may be mentioned two masses, choral songs for mixed voices (Op. 32, 47), and numerous part songs. The results of his scientific research were embodied in his book Die Natur der Harmonik und Metrik (1853), a standard work of its kind, in which a philosophic explanation of the forms of music is attempted.

Among his vocal compositions—by far the most significant part of his work—are two masses, choral songs for mixed voices (Op. 32, 47), and many part songs. The findings of his scientific research were published in his book Die Natur der Harmonik und Metrik (1853), a standard reference in its field, where he attempts a philosophical explanation of the forms of music.


HAURÉAU, (JEAN) BARTHÉLEMY (1812-1896), French historian and miscellaneous writer, was born in Paris. At the age of twenty he published a series of apologetic studies on the Montagnards. In later years he regretted the youthful enthusiasm of these papers, and endeavoured to destroy the copies. He joined the staff of the National, and was praised by Théophile Gautier as the “tribune” of romanticism. At that time he seemed to be destined to a political career, and, indeed, after the revolution of the 24th of February 1848 was elected member of the National Assembly; but close contact with revolutionary men and ideas gradually cooled his old ardour. Throughout his life he was an enemy to innovators, not only in politics and religion, but also in literature. This attitude sometimes led him to form unjust estimates, but only on very rare occasions, for his character was as just as his erudition was scrupulous. After the coup d’état he resigned his position as director of the MS. department of the Bibliothèque Nationale, to which he had been appointed in 1848, and he refused to accept any administrative post until after the fall of the empire. After having acted as director of the national printing press from 1870 to 1881, he retired, but in 1893 accepted the post of director of the Fondation Thiers. He was also a member of the council of improvement of the École des Chartes. He died on the 29th of April 1896. For over half a century he was engaged in writing on the religious, philosophical, and more particularly the literary history of the middle ages. Appointed librarian of the town of Le Mans in 1838, he was first attracted by the history of Maine, and in 1843 published the first volume of his Histoire littéraire du Maine (4 vols., 1843-1852), which he subsequently recast on a new plan (10 vols., 1870-1877). In 1845 he brought out an edition of vol. ii. of G. Ménage’s Histoire de Sablé. He then undertook the continuation of the Gallia Christiana, and produced vol. xiv. (1856) for the province of Tours, vol. xv. (1862) for the province of Besançon, and vol. xvi. (1865-1870) for the province of Vienne. This important work gained him admission to the Académie des Inscriptions et Belles-Lettres (1862). In the Notices et extraits des manuscrits he inserted several papers which were afterwards published separately, with additions and corrections, under the title Notices et extraits de quelques manuscrits de la Bibliothèque Nationale (6 vols., 1890-1893). To the Histoire littéraire de la France he contributed a number of studies, among which must be mentioned that relating to the sermon-writers (vol. xxvi., 1873), whose works, being often anonymous, raise many problems of attribution, and, though deficient in originality of thought and style, reflect the very spirit of the middle ages. Among his other works mention must be made of his remarkable Histoire de la philosophie scolastique (1872-1880), extending from the time of Charlemagne to the 13th century, which was expanded from a paper crowned by the Académie des Sciences Morales et Politiques in 1850; Les Mélanges poétiques d’Hildebert de Lavardin (1882); an edition of the Works of Hugh of St Victor (1886); a critical study of the Latin poems attributed to St Bernard (1890); and Bernard Délicieux et l’inquisition albigeoise (1877). To these must be added his contributions to the Dictionnaire des sciences philosophiques, Didot’s Biographie générale, the Bibliothèque de l’École des Chartes, and the Journal des savants. From the time of his appointment to the Bibliothèque Nationale up to the last days of his life he was engaged in making abstracts of all the medieval Latin writings (many anonymous or of doubtful attribution) relating to philosophy, theology, grammar, canon law, and poetry, carefully noting on cards the first words of each passage. After his death this index of incipits, arranged alphabetically, was presented to the Académie des Inscriptions, and a copy was placed in the MS. department of the Bibliothèque Nationale.

HAURÉAU, (JEAN) BARTHÉLEMY (1812-1896), French historian and miscellaneous writer, was born in Paris. At twenty, he published a series of apologetic studies on the Montagnards. In later years, he regretted the youthful enthusiasm of these papers and tried to destroy the copies. He joined the staff of the National and was praised by Théophile Gautier as the “tribune” of romanticism. At that time, he seemed destined for a political career, and indeed, after the revolution of February 24, 1848, he was elected as a member of the National Assembly; but close interaction with revolutionary people and ideas gradually dulled his old enthusiasm. Throughout his life, he opposed innovators not only in politics and religion but also in literature. This stance sometimes led him to make unfair judgments, but only very rarely, as his character was as fair as his scholarship was meticulous. After the coup d’état, he resigned from his position as director of the manuscript department of the Bibliothèque Nationale, to which he had been appointed in 1848, and he refused to accept any administrative position until after the fall of the empire. After serving as the director of the national printing press from 1870 to 1881, he retired, but in 1893, he accepted the role of director of the Fondation Thiers. He was also a member of the council for the improvement of the École des Chartes. He died on April 29, 1896. For over fifty years, he was involved in writing about the religious, philosophical, and particularly the literary history of the Middle Ages. Appointed librarian of the town of Le Mans in 1838, he was initially drawn to the history of Maine, and in 1843, published the first volume of his Histoire littéraire du Maine (4 vols., 1843-1852), which he later reorganized into a new format (10 vols., 1870-1877). In 1845, he released an edition of vol. ii. of G. Ménage’s Histoire de Sablé. He then continued the Gallia Christiana, producing vol. xiv. (1856) for the province of Tours, vol. xv. (1862) for the province of Besançon, and vol. xvi. (1865-1870) for the province of Vienne. This significant work earned him admission to the Académie des Inscriptions et Belles-Lettres (1862). In the Notices et extraits des manuscrits, he included several papers that were later published separately with additions and corrections under the title Notices et extraits de quelques manuscrits de la Bibliothèque Nationale (6 vols., 1890-1893). He contributed a number of studies to the Histoire littéraire de la France, notably one related to the sermon-writers (vol. xxvi., 1873), whose works, often anonymous, raise many attribution issues and, although lacking in originality of thought and style, reflect the very spirit of the Middle Ages. Other significant works include his remarkable Histoire de la philosophie scolastique (1872-1880), covering the period from Charlemagne to the 13th century, which evolved from a paper awarded by the Académie des Sciences Morales et Politiques in 1850; Les Mélanges poétiques d’Hildebert de Lavardin (1882); an edition of the Works of Hugh of St Victor (1886); a critical study of the Latin poems attributed to St Bernard (1890); and Bernard Délicieux et l’inquisition albigeoise (1877). In addition, he contributed to the Dictionnaire des sciences philosophiques, Didot’s Biographie générale, the Bibliothèque de l’École des Chartes, and the Journal des savants. From his appointment to the Bibliothèque Nationale until the last days of his life, he worked on making abstracts of all medieval Latin writings (many anonymous or of uncertain authorship) related to philosophy, theology, grammar, canon law, and poetry, carefully noting the first words of each passage on cards. After his death, this index of incipits, arranged alphabetically, was presented to the Académie des Inscriptions, and a copy was placed in the manuscript department of the Bibliothèque Nationale.

See obituary notice read by Henri Wallon at a meeting of the Académie des Inscriptions on the 12th of November 1897; and the notice by Paul Meyer prefixed to vol. xxxiii. of the Histoire littéraire de la France.

See obituary notice read by Henri Wallon at a meeting of the Académie des Inscriptions on November 12, 1897; and the notice by Paul Meyer prefixed to vol. xxxiii of the Histoire littéraire de la France.


HAUSA, sometimes incorrectly written Haussa, Houssa or Haoussa, a people inhabiting about half a million square miles in the western and central Sudan from the river Niger in the west to Bornu in the east. Heinrich Barth identifies them with the Atarantians of Herodotus. According to their own traditions the earliest home of the race was the divide between the Sokoto and Chad basins, and more particularly the eastern watershed, whence they spread gradually westward. In the middle ages, to which period the first authentic records refer, the Hausa, though never a conquering race, attained great political power. They were then divided into seven states known as “Hausa bokoy” (“the seven Hausa”) and named Biram, Daura, Gober, Kano, Rano, Katsena and Zegzeg, after the sons of their legendary ancestor. This confederation extended its authority over many of the neighbouring countries, and remained paramount till the Fula under Sheikh Dan Fodio in 1810 conquered the Hausa states and founded the Fula empire of Sokoto (see Fula).

HAUSA, sometimes incorrectly written as Hausa, Houssa, or Haussa, are a people living in about half a million square miles in the western and central Sudan, stretching from the Niger River in the west to Bornu in the east. Heinrich Barth links them to the Atarantians mentioned by Herodotus. According to their traditions, the original homeland of this group was the divide between the Sokoto and Chad basins, particularly the eastern watershed, from which they gradually spread westward. During the Middle Ages, the first authentic records note that the Hausa, although never a conquering people, gained significant political power. They were then organized into seven states, known as “Hausa bokoy” (“the seven Hausa”), named Biram, Daura, Gober, Kano, Rano, Katsena, and Zegzeg, after the sons of their legendary ancestor. This confederation exerted influence over many neighboring countries and remained dominant until the Fula under Sheikh Dan Fodio conquered the Hausa states in 1810 and established the Fula empire of Sokoto (see Fula).

The Hausa, who number upwards of 5,000,000, form the most important nation of the central Sudan. They are undoubtedly nigritic, though in places with a strong crossing of Fula and Arab blood. Morally and intellectually they are, however, far superior to the typical Negro. They are a powerful, heavily built race, with skin as black as most Negroes, but with lips not so thick nor hair so woolly. They excel in physical strength. The average Hausa will carry on his head a load of ninety or a hundred pounds without showing the slightest signs of fatigue during a long day’s march. When carrying their own goods it is by no means uncommon for them to take double this weight. They are a peaceful and industrious people, living partly in farmsteads amid their crops, partly in large trading centres such as Kano, Katsena and Yakoba (Bauchi). They are extremely intelligent and even cultured, and have exercised a civilizing effect upon their Fula conquerors to whose oppressive rule they submitted. They are excellent agriculturists, and, almost unaided by foreign influence, they have developed a variety of industries, such as the making of cloth, mats, leather and glass. In Sierra Leone and the Gold Coast territory they form the backbone of the military police, and under English leadership have again and again shown themselves to be admirable fighters and capable of a high degree of discipline and good conduct. Their food consists chiefly of guinea corn (sorghum vulgare), which is ground up and eaten as a sort of porridge mixed with large quantities of red pepper. The Hausa attribute their superiority in strength to the fact that they live on guinea corn instead of yams and bananas, which form the staple food of the tribes on the river Niger. The Hausa carried on agriculture chiefly by slave labour; they are themselves born traders, and as such are to be met with in almost every part of Africa north of the equator. Small colonies of them are to be found in towns as far distant from one another as Lagos, Tunis, Tripoli, Alexandria and Suakin.

The Hausa, numbering over 5,000,000, are the most significant nation in central Sudan. They are primarily of African descent, though there is considerable mixing with Fula and Arab ancestry in some regions. Morally and intellectually, they surpass the typical Black African. They are a strong, well-built people, with skin as dark as most Black Africans, but their lips are not as thick and their hair is less coarse. They are incredibly strong. The average Hausa can carry a load of 90 to 100 pounds on their head without showing any signs of tiredness during a long day’s march. When carrying their own goods, it's common for them to carry double that weight. They are a peaceful and hardworking people, living partially in farmsteads surrounded by their crops, and partially in major trading centers like Kano, Katsena, and Yakoba (Bauchi). They are highly intelligent and even cultured, having had a civilizing influence on their Fula conquerors, whose oppressive rule they accepted. They are excellent farmers and, with little foreign influence, have developed a range of industries, including cloth, mats, leather, and glass production. In Sierra Leone and the Gold Coast, they make up the backbone of the military police, and under British leadership, they have repeatedly proven to be outstanding fighters with a high degree of discipline and good conduct. Their diet mainly consists of guinea corn (sorghum vulgare), which they grind up and eat as a porridge mixed with a lot of red pepper. The Hausa believe their strength comes from their diet of guinea corn, unlike the yams and bananas that are staples for tribes along the Niger River. The Hausa primarily practice agriculture through slave labor; they are natural traders and can be found in almost every region of Africa north of the equator. Small communities exist in cities as far apart as Lagos, Tunis, Tripoli, Alexandria, and Suakin.

Language.—The Hausa language has a wider range over Africa north of the equator, south of Barbary and west of the valley of the Nile, than any other tongue. It is a rich sonorous language, with a vocabulary containing perhaps 10,000 words. As an example of the richness of the vocabulary Bishop Crowther mentions that there are eight names for different parts of the day from cockcrow till after sunset. About a third of the words are connected with Arabic roots, nor are these such as the Hausa could well have borrowed in anything like recent times from the Arabs. Many words representing 70 ideas or things with which the Hausa must have been familiar from the very earliest time are obviously connected with Arabic or Semitic roots. There is a certain amount of resemblance between the Hausa language and that spoken by the Berbers to the south of Tripoli and Tunis. This language, again, has several striking points of resemblance with Coptic. If, as seems likely, the connexion between these three languages should be demonstrated, such connexion would serve to corroborate the Hausa tradition that their ancestors came from the very far east away beyond Mecca. The Hausa language has been reduced to writing for at least a century, possibly very much longer. It is the only language in tropical Africa which has been reduced to writing by the natives themselves, unless the Vai alphabet, introduced by a native inventor in the interior of Liberia in the first half of the 19th century be excepted; the character used is a modified form of Arabic. Some fragments of literature exist, consisting of political and religious poems, together with a limited amount of native history. A volume, consisting of history and poems reproduced in facsimile, with translations, has been published by the Cambridge University Press.

Language.—The Hausa language is more widely spoken across North Africa, south of the Barbary, and west of the Nile Valley than any other language. It’s a rich, melodic language with a vocabulary of around 10,000 words. For instance, Bishop Crowther points out the richness of the vocabulary by noting that there are eight different names for various parts of the day from dawn until after sunset. About a third of the words have Arabic roots, and these are not terms that the Hausa could have recently borrowed from the Arabs. Many words that represent ideas or items the Hausa must have known from their earliest days are clearly connected to Arabic or Semitic roots. There is some similarity between the Hausa language and that spoken by the Berbers south of Tripoli and Tunis. This language also shares several notable similarities with Coptic. If, as seems likely, the connection between these three languages can be established, it would support the Hausa tradition that their ancestors came from far to the east, beyond Mecca. The Hausa language has been written down for at least a century, possibly much longer. It is the only language in tropical Africa that has been written down by its native speakers, aside from the Vai alphabet, which was created by a native inventor in the interior of Liberia in the first half of the 19th century; the character used is a modified version of Arabic. Some fragments of literature exist, including political and religious poems, along with a limited amount of native history. A volume containing history and poems reproduced in facsimile, with translations, has been published by Cambridge University Press.

Religion.—About one-third of the people are professed Mahommedans, one-third are heathen, and the remainder have apparently no definite form of religion. Their Mahommedanism dates from the 14th century, but became more general when the Fula sheikh Dan Fodio initiated the religious war which ended in the founding of the Fula empire. Ever since then the ruler of Sokoto has been acknowledged as the religious head of the whole country, and tribute has been paid to him as such. The Hausa who profess Mahommedanism are extremely ignorant of their own faith, and what little religious fanaticism exists is chiefly confined to the Fula. Large numbers of the Hausa start every year on the pilgrimage to Mecca, travelling sometimes across the Sahara desert and by way of Tripoli and Alexandria, sometimes by way of Wadai, Darfur, Khartum and Suakin. The journey often occupies five or six years, and is undertaken quite as much from trading as from religious motives. Mahommedanism is making very slow, if any, progress amongst the Hausa. The greatest obstacle to its general acceptance is the institution of the Ramadan fast. In a climate so hot as that of Hausaland, the obligation to abstain from food and drink from sunrise to sunset during one month in the year is a serious difficulty. Until the last decade of the 19th century no important attempt had been made to introduce Christianity, but the fact that the Hausa are fond of reading, and that native schools exist in all parts of the country, should greatly facilitate the work of Christian missionaries.

Religion.—About one-third of the population are practicing Muslims, one-third are non-believers, and the rest seem to have no specific religion. Their Islam began in the 14th century but became more widespread when the Fula leader Dan Fodio sparked a religious war that led to the creation of the Fula empire. Since then, the ruler of Sokoto has been recognized as the spiritual leader of the entire country, and tribute has been paid to him in that capacity. The Hausa who practice Islam know very little about their faith, and the limited religious fervor that exists mainly comes from the Fula. Every year, many Hausa set out on the pilgrimage to Mecca, sometimes traveling through the Sahara desert and via Tripoli and Alexandria, and other times through Wadai, Darfur, Khartoum, and Suakin. The journey can take five or six years and is often motivated by trade as much as by religious reasons. Islam is progressing very slowly, if at all, among the Hausa. The biggest barrier to its widespread acceptance is the practice of fasting during Ramadan. In the hot climate of Hausaland, the requirement to refrain from food and drink from sunrise to sunset for a month is a significant challenge. Up until the last decade of the 19th century, no serious efforts had been made to introduce Christianity, but the fact that the Hausa enjoy reading and that local schools exist throughout the country should greatly aid Christian missionaries in their work.

Bibliography.—El Hage Abd Salam Shabeeny, Account of Timbuctoo and Haussa Territories (1820); Norris, Dialogues and part of the New Testament in the English, Arabic, Haussa and Bornu Languages (1853); Koelle, Polyglotta Africana (1854); Schön, Grammar of the Hausa Language (London, 1862), Hausa Reading Book (1877), and also A Dictionary of the Hausa Language (1877). Schön has also produced Hausa translations of Gen. (1858), Matt. (1857) and Luke (1858). Heinrich Barth, Travels in North and Central Africa (2 vols., London, 1857); Central-afrikanische Vokabularien (Gotha, 1867); C. H. Robinson, Hausaland, or Fifteen Hundred Miles through the Central Soudan (1896); Specimens of Hausa Literature (1896); Hausa Grammar (1897); Hausa Dictionary (1899); P. L. Monteil, De St-Louis à Tripoli par le lac Tchad (Paris, 1895); Lt. Seymour Vandeleur, Campaigning on the Upper Nile and Niger (1898).

References.—El Hage Abd Salam Shabeeny, Account of Timbuctoo and Haussa Territories (1820); Norris, Dialogues and part of the New Testament in the English, Arabic, Haussa and Bornu Languages (1853); Koelle, Polyglotta Africana (1854); Schön, Grammar of the Hausa Language (London, 1862), Hausa Reading Book (1877), and also A Dictionary of the Hausa Language (1877). Schön has also produced Hausa translations of Gen. (1858), Matt. (1857), and Luke (1858). Heinrich Barth, Travels in North and Central Africa (2 vols., London, 1857); Central-afrikanische Vokabularien (Gotha, 1867); C. H. Robinson, Hausaland, or Fifteen Hundred Miles through the Central Soudan (1896); Specimens of Hausa Literature (1896); Hausa Grammar (1897); Hausa Dictionary (1899); P. L. Monteil, De St-Louis à Tripoli par le lac Tchad (Paris, 1895); Lt. Seymour Vandeleur, Campaigning on the Upper Nile and Niger (1898).


HAUSER, KASPAR, a German youth whose life was remarkable from the circumstances of apparently inexplicable mystery in which it was involved. He appeared on the 26th of May 1828, in the streets of Nuremberg, dressed in the garb of a peasant, and with such a helpless and bewildered air that he attracted the attention of the passers-by. In his possession was found a letter purporting to be written by a poor labourer, stating that the boy was given into his custody on the 7th of October 1812, and that according to agreement he had instructed him in reading, writing, and the Christian religion, but that up to the time fixed for relinquishing his custody he had kept him in close confinement. Along with this letter was enclosed another purporting to be written by the boy’s mother, stating that he was born on the 30th of April 1812, that his name was Kaspar, and that his father, formerly a cavalry officer in the 6th regiment at Nuremberg, was dead. The appearance, bearing, and professions of the youth corresponded closely with these credentials. He showed a repugnance to all nourishment except bread and water, was seemingly ignorant of outward objects, wrote his name as Kaspar Hauser, and said that he wished to be a cavalry officer like his father. For some time he was detained in prison at Nuremberg as a vagrant, but on the 18th of July 1828 he was delivered over by the town authorities to the care of a schoolmaster, Professor Daumer, who undertook to be his guardian and to take the charge of his education. Further mysteries accumulated about Kaspar’s personality and conduct, not altogether unconnected with the vogue in Germany, at that time, of “animal magnetism,” “somnambulism,” and similar theories of the occult and strange. People associated him with all sorts of possibilities. On the 17th of October 1829 he was found to have received a wound in the forehead, which, according to his own statement, had been inflicted on him by a man with a blackened face. Having on this account been removed to the house of a magistrate and placed under close surveillance, he was visited by Earl Stanhope, who became so interested in his history that he sent him in 1832 to Ansbach to be educated under a certain Dr Meyer. After this he became clerk in the office of Paul John Anselm von Feuerbach, president of the court of appeal, who had begun to pay attention to his case in 1828; and his strange history was almost forgotten by the public when the interest in it was suddenly revived by his receiving a deep wound on his left breast, on the 14th of December 1833, and dying from it three or four days afterwards. He affirmed that the wound was inflicted by a stranger, but many believed it to be the work of his own hand, and that he did not intend it to be fatal, but only so severe as to give a sufficient colouring of truth to his story. The affair created a great sensation, and produced a long literary agitation. But the whole story remains somewhat mysterious. Lord Stanhope eventually became decidedly sceptical as to Kaspar’s stories, and ended by being accused of contriving his death!

HAUSER, KASPAR, was a German youth whose life was remarkable due to the circumstances surrounding the mysterious way it unfolded. He appeared on May 26, 1828, in the streets of Nuremberg, dressed like a peasant, looking so helpless and confused that he caught the attention of passers-by. He had a letter with him supposedly written by a poor laborer, stating that the boy had been placed in his care on October 7, 1812, and that, per their agreement, he had taught him reading, writing, and Christianity, but had kept him confined until the time came to hand him over. Along with this letter was another one supposedly from the boy’s mother, saying he was born on April 30, 1812, that his name was Kaspar, and that his father, a former cavalry officer in the 6th regiment from Nuremberg, had died. The boy's appearance, demeanor, and claims matched these documents closely. He showed a dislike for all food except bread and water, appeared to know little about the outside world, signed his name as Kaspar Hauser, and expressed a desire to be a cavalry officer like his father. For a while, he was held in Nuremberg as a vagrant, but on July 18, 1828, the local authorities turned him over to a schoolmaster, Professor Daumer, who agreed to be his guardian and handle his education. More mysteries piled up around Kaspar’s personality and behavior, somewhat linked to the German fascination at the time with “animal magnetism,” “somnambulism,” and other odd theories. People speculated about all sorts of possibilities regarding him. On October 17, 1829, he was discovered with a forehead wound, which he claimed was inflicted by a man with a blackened face. Because of this, he was moved to a magistrate's house under close watch and was visited by Earl Stanhope, who became so intrigued by his story that he sent him in 1832 to Ansbach for education under Dr. Meyer. Afterward, he became a clerk in the office of Paul John Anselm von Feuerbach, the president of the court of appeal, who had begun to take an interest in his case in 1828; and his strange story might have faded from public interest if not for a significant incident—on December 14, 1833, he sustained a serious wound on his left breast and died from it three or four days later. He stated that a stranger caused the wound, but many believed he had inflicted it on himself, intending it to be serious enough to lend credibility to his story without being fatal. This incident caused quite a stir and led to prolonged discussion in literary circles. However, the entire situation remains somewhat mysterious. Lord Stanhope eventually became quite skeptical of Kaspar’s claims and was ultimately accused of orchestrating his death!

In 1830 a pamphlet was published at Berlin, entitled Kaspar Hauser nicht unwahrscheinlich ein Betrüger; but the truthfulness of his statements was defended by Daumer, who published Mitteilungen über Kaspar Hauser (Nuremberg, 1832), and Enthüllungen über Kaspar Hauser (Frankfort, 1859); as well as Kaspar Hauser, sein Wesen, seine Unschuld, &c. (Regensburg, 1873), in answer to Meyer’s (a son of Kaspar’s tutor) Authentische Mitteilungen über Kaspar Hauser (Ansbach, 1872). Feuerbach awakened considerable psychological interest in the case by his pamphlet Kaspar Hauser, Beispiel eines Verbrechens am Seelenleben (Ansbach, 1832), and Earl Stanhope also took part in the discussion by publishing Materialien zur Geschichte K. Hausers (Heidelberg, 1836). The theory of Daumer and Feuerbach and other pamphleteers (finally presented in 1892 by Miss Elizabeth E. Evans in her Story of Kaspar Hauser from Authentic Records) was that the youth was the crown prince of Baden, the legitimate son of the grand-duke Charles of Baden, and that he had been kidnapped at Karlsruhe in October 1812 by minions of the countess of Hochberg (morganatic wife of the grand-duke) in order to secure the succession to her offspring; but this theory was answered in 1875 by the publication in the Augsburg Allgemeine Zeitung of the official record of the baptism, post-mortem examination and burial of the heir supposed to have been kidnapped. See Kaspar Hauser und sein badisches Prinzentum (Heidelberg, 1876). In 1883 the story was again revived in a Regensburg pamphlet attacking, among other people, Dr Meyer; and the sons of the latter, who was dead, brought an action for libel, under the German law, to which no defence was made; all the copies of the pamphlet were ordered to be destroyed. The evidence has been subtly analyzed by Andrew Lang in his Historical Mysteries (1904), with results unfavourable to the “romantic” version of the story. Lang’s view is that possibly Kaspar was a sort of “ambulatory automatist,” an instance of a phenomenon, known by other cases to students of psychical abnormalities, of which the characteristics are a mania for straying away and the persistence of delusions as to identity; but he inclines to regard Kaspar as simply a “humbug.” The “authentic records” purporting to confirm the kidnapping story Lang stigmatizes as “worthless and impudent rubbish.” The evidence is in any case in complete confusion.

In 1830, a pamphlet titled Kaspar Hauser nicht unwahrscheinlich ein Betrüger was published in Berlin; however, Daumer defended the truthfulness of Hauser's claims in his works Mitteilungen über Kaspar Hauser (Nuremberg, 1832) and Enthüllungen über Kaspar Hauser (Frankfort, 1859), as well as Kaspar Hauser, sein Wesen, seine Unschuld, &c. (Regensburg, 1873), in response to Meyer’s (the son of Kaspar’s tutor) Authentische Mitteilungen über Kaspar Hauser (Ansbach, 1872). Feuerbach stirred up significant psychological interest in the case with his pamphlet Kaspar Hauser, Beispiel eines Verbrechens am Seelenleben (Ansbach, 1832), and Earl Stanhope also contributed to the discussion by publishing Materials zur Geschichte K. Hausers (Heidelberg, 1836). Daumer, Feuerbach, and other pamphlet authors (eventually presented in 1892 by Miss Elizabeth E. Evans in her Story of Kaspar Hauser from Authentic Records) theorized that the young man was the crown prince of Baden, the legitimate son of Grand-Duke Charles of Baden, who had been kidnapped in Karlsruhe in October 1812 by agents of the Countess of Hochberg (the morganatic wife of the grand-duke) to secure the succession for her descendants; however, this theory was challenged in 1875 when the official records of the baptism, autopsy, and burial of the heir believed to have been abducted were published in the Augsburg Allgemeine Zeitung. See Kaspar Hauser und sein badisches Prinzentum (Heidelberg, 1876). In 1883, the story was reignited in a pamphlet from Regensburg that attacked several individuals, including Dr. Meyer; his sons, who had since passed away, filed a libel lawsuit under German law, against which no defense was made, leading to the destruction of all copies of the pamphlet. Andrew Lang thoroughly analyzed the evidence in his Historical Mysteries (1904), reaching conclusions that were unfavorable to the “romantic” version of the story. Lang suggests that Kaspar might have been a type of “ambulatory automatist,” a noted phenomenon among students of psychical abnormalities characterized by a compulsive urge to wander and persistent identity delusions; however, he tends to view Kaspar as simply a “humbug.” Lang condemns the “authentic records” that allegedly support the kidnapping tale as “worthless and impudent rubbish.” In any case, the evidence remains completely tangled.


HAUSMANN, JOHANN FRIEDRICH LUDWIG (1782-1859), German mineralogist, was born at Hanover on the 22nd of February 1782. He was educated at Göttingen, where he obtained the degree of Ph.D. After making a geological tour in Denmark, Norway and Sweden in 1807, he was two years later placed at the head of a government mining establishment in Westphalia, and he established a school of mines at Clausthal in the Harz mountains. In 1811 he was appointed professor of technology and mining, and afterwards of geology and mineralogy in the university of Göttingen, and this chair he occupied until a short time before his death. He was also for many years secretary of the Royal Academy of Sciences of Göttingen. He published observations on geology and mineralogy in Spain and Italy as well as in central and northern Europe: he wrote on gypsum, pyrites, felspar, tachylite, cordierite and on some eruptive 71 rocks, and he devoted much attention to the crystals developed during metallurgical processes. He died at Hanover on the 26th of December 1859.

HAUSMANN, JOHANN FRIEDRICH LUDWIG (1782-1859), a German mineralogist, was born in Hanover on February 22, 1782. He studied at Göttingen, where he earned a Ph.D. After taking a geological tour through Denmark, Norway, and Sweden in 1807, he was appointed the head of a government mining facility in Westphalia two years later. He established a school of mines in Clausthal in the Harz mountains. In 1811, he was appointed professor of technology and mining, and later of geology and mineralogy at the University of Göttingen, a position he held until shortly before his death. He also served for many years as the secretary of the Royal Academy of Sciences of Göttingen. He published studies on geology and mineralogy in Spain and Italy, as well as in central and northern Europe. His work included writings on gypsum, pyrites, felspar, tachylite, cordierite, and several eruptive rocks, and he focused a lot on the crystals formed during metallurgical processes. He passed away in Hanover on December 26, 1859.

Publications.Grundlinien einer Encyklopädie der Bergwerkswissenschaften (1811); Reise durch Skandinavien (5 vols., 1811-1818); Handbuch der Mineralogie (3 vols., 1813; 2nd ed., 1828-1847).

Publications.Foundations of an Encyclopedia of Mining Sciences (1811); Travel Through Scandinavia (5 vols., 1811-1818); Manual of Mineralogy (3 vols., 1813; 2nd ed., 1828-1847).


HAUSRATH, ADOLPH (1837-1909), German theologian, was born at Karlsruhe on the 13th of January 1837 and was educated at Jena, Göttingen, Berlin and Heidelberg, where he became Privatdozent in 1861, professor extraordinary in 1867 and ordinary professor in 1872. He was a disciple of the Tübingen school and a strong Protestant. Among other works he wrote Der Apostel Paulus (1865), Neutestamentliche Zeitgeschichte (1868-1873, 4 vols.; Eng. trans.), D. F. Strauss und die Theologie seiner Zeit (1876-1878, 2 vols.), and lives of Richard Rothe (2 vols. 1902), and Luther (1904). His scholarship was sound and his style vigorous. Under the pseudonym George Taylor he wrote several historical romances, especially Antinous (1880), which quickly ran through five editions, and is the story of a soul “which courted death because the objective restraints of faith had been lost.” Klytia (1883) was a 16th-century story, Jetta (1884) a tale of the great immigrations, and Elfriede “a romance of the Rhine.” He died on the 2nd of August 1909.

HAUSRATH, ADOLPH (1837-1909), German theologian, was born in Karlsruhe on January 13, 1837, and was educated at Jena, Göttingen, Berlin, and Heidelberg, where he became a Privatdozent in 1861, an extraordinary professor in 1867, and an ordinary professor in 1872. He was a follower of the Tübingen school and a staunch Protestant. Among other works, he wrote Der Apostel Paulus (1865), Neutestamentliche Zeitgeschichte (1868-1873, 4 vols.; Eng. trans.), D. F. Strauss und die Theologie seiner Zeit (1876-1878, 2 vols.), and biographies of Richard Rothe (2 vols. 1902) and Luther (1904). His scholarship was solid and his writing style forceful. Under the pseudonym George Taylor, he authored several historical novels, particularly Antinous (1880), which quickly went through five editions and tells the story of a soul "that courted death because the objective restraints of faith had been lost." Klytia (1883) was a 16th-century tale, Jetta (1884) was a story about the great migrations, and Elfriede was "a romance of the Rhine." He died on August 2, 1909.


HÄUSSER, LUDWIG (1818-1867), German historian, was born at Kleeburg, in Alsace. Studying philology at Heidelberg in 1835, he was led by F. C. Schlosser to give it up for history, and after continuing his historical work at Jena and teaching in the gymnasium at Wertheim he made his mark by his Die teutschen Geschichtsschreiber vom Anfang des Frankenreichs bis auf die Hohenstaufen (1839). Next year appeared his Sage von Tell. After a short period of study in Paris on the French Revolution, he spent some time working in the archives of Baden and Bavaria, and published in 1845 Die Geschichte der rheinischen Pfalz, which won for him a professorship extraordinarius at Heidelberg. In 1850 he became professor ordinarius. Häusser also interested himself in politics while at Heidelberg, publishing in 1846 Schleswig-Holstein, Dänemark und Deutschland, and editing with Gervinus the Deutsche Zeitung. In 1848 he was elected to the lower legislative chamber of Baden, and in 1850 advocated the project of union with Prussia at the parliament held at Erfurt. Another timely work was his edition of Friedrich List’s Gesammelte Schriften (1850), accompanied with a life of the author. His greatest achievement, and the one on which his fame as an historian rests, is his Deutsche Geschichte vom Tode Friedrichs des Grossen bis zur Gründung des deutschen Bundes (Leipzig, 1854-1857, 4 vols.). This was the first work covering that period based on a scientific study of the archival sources. In 1859 he again took part in politics, resuming his place in the lower chamber, opposing in 1863 the project of Austria for the reform of the Confederation brought forward in the assembly of princes at Frankfort, in his book Die Reform des deutschen Bundestages, and becoming one of the leaders of the “little German” (kleindeutsche) party, which advocated the exclusion of Austria from Germany. In addition to various essays (in his Gesammelte Schriften, Berlin, 1869-1870, 2 vols.), Häusser’s lectures have been edited by W. Oncken in the Geschichte des Zeitalters der Reformation (1869, 2nd ed. 1880), and Geschichte der französischen Revolution (1869, 2nd ed. 1870). These lectures reveal all the charm of style and directness of presentation which made Häusser’s work as a professor so vital.

Häusser, Ludwig (1818-1867), a German historian, was born in Kleeburg, Alsace. While studying philology at Heidelberg in 1835, he was encouraged by F. C. Schlosser to switch to history. After furthering his historical studies at Jena and teaching at the gymnasium in Wertheim, he gained recognition with his book Die teutschen Geschichtsschreiber vom Anfang des Frankenreichs bis auf die Hohenstaufen (1839). The following year, he published Sage von Tell. After a brief study in Paris focusing on the French Revolution, he spent some time researching in the archives of Baden and Bavaria, and in 1845 he published Die Geschichte der rheinischen Pfalz, which earned him a position as professor extraordinarius at Heidelberg. By 1850, he had become professor ordinarius. While at Heidelberg, Häusser also engaged in politics, publishing Schleswig-Holstein, Dänemark und Deutschland in 1846 and co-editing the Deutsche Zeitung with Gervinus. In 1848, he was elected to the lower legislative chamber of Baden and in 1850 supported the project for union with Prussia during the parliament session at Erfurt. Another significant contribution was his edition of Friedrich List’s Gesammelte Schriften (1850), which included a biography of the author. His most notable work, which solidified his reputation as a historian, is Deutsche Geschichte vom Tode Friedrichs des Grossen bis zur Gründung des deutschen Bundes (Leipzig, 1854-1857, 4 vols.). This was the first comprehensive study of that period based on a thorough examination of archival sources. In 1859, he returned to politics, rejoining the lower chamber, and in 1863 he opposed Austria's proposal for reforming the Confederation, detailed in his book Die Reform des deutschen Bundestages. He became a leading figure in the “little German” (kleindeutsche) movement, advocating for Austria's exclusion from Germany. In addition to various essays (compiled in his Gesammelte Schriften, Berlin, 1869-1870, 2 vols.), Häusser’s lectures were edited by W. Oncken in Geschichte des Zeitalters der Reformation (1869, 2nd ed. 1880) and Geschichte der französischen Revolution (1869, 2nd ed. 1870). These lectures showcase the engaging style and clear presentation that made Häusser an impactful professor.

See W. Wattenbach, Lud. Häusser, ein Vortrag (Heidelberg, 1867).

See W. Wattenbach, Lud. Häusser, ein Vortrag (Heidelberg, 1867).


HAUSSMANN, GEORGES EUGÈNE, Baron (1809-1891), whose name is associated with the rebuilding of Paris, was born in that city on the 27th of March 1809 of a Protestant family, German in origin. He was educated at the Collège Henri IV, and subsequently studied law, attending simultaneously the classes at the Paris conservatoire of music, for he was a good musician. He became sous-préfet of Nérac in 1830, and advanced rapidly in the civil service until in 1853 he was chosen by Persigny prefect of the Seine in succession to Jean Jacques Berger, who hesitated to incur the vast expenses of the imperial schemes for the embellishment of Paris. Haussmann laid out the Bois de Boulogne, and made extensive improvements in the smaller parks. The gardens of the Luxembourg Palace were cut down to allow of the formation of new streets, and the Boulevard de Sebastopol, the southern half of which is now the Boulevard St Michel, was driven through a populous district. A new water supply, a gigantic system of sewers, new bridges, the opera, and other public buildings, the inclusion of outlying districts—these were among the new prefect’s achievements, accomplished by the aid of a bold handling of the public funds which called forth Jules Ferry’s indictment, Les Comptes fantastiques de Haussmann, in 1867. A loan of 250 million francs was sanctioned for the city of Paris in 1865, and another of 260 million in 1869. These sums represented only part of his financial schemes, which led to his dismissal by the government of Émile Ollivier. After the fall of the Empire he spent about a year abroad, but he re-entered public life in 1877, when he became Bonapartist deputy for Ajaccio. He died in Paris on the 11th of January 1891. Haussmann had been made senator in 1857, member of the Academy of Fine Arts in 1867, and grand cross of the Legion of Honour in 1862. His name is preserved in the Boulevard Haussmann. His later years were occupied with the preparation of his Mémoires (3 vols., 1890-1893).

HAUSSMANN, GEORGES EUGÈNE, Baron (1809-1891), whose name is linked to the reconstruction of Paris, was born in that city on March 27, 1809, to a Protestant family of German descent. He was educated at Collège Henri IV and later studied law while also attending classes at the Paris Conservatoire of Music because he was a talented musician. He became sous-préfet of Nérac in 1830 and quickly advanced in the civil service until in 1853 he was appointed by Persigny as prefect of the Seine, succeeding Jean Jacques Berger, who was reluctant to take on the substantial expenses of the imperial projects to beautify Paris. Haussmann designed the Bois de Boulogne and made significant improvements to smaller parks. The gardens of the Luxembourg Palace were cut down to create new streets, and the Boulevard de Sebastopol, with its southern half now known as Boulevard St Michel, was constructed through a densely populated area. A new water supply, a massive sewer system, new bridges, the opera, and other public buildings, as well as the inclusion of outlying districts—these were some of the new prefect's accomplishments, carried out through a bold management of public funds that prompted Jules Ferry's criticism, Les Comptes fantastiques de Haussmann, in 1867. A loan of 250 million francs was approved for the city of Paris in 1865, followed by another loan of 260 million in 1869. These amounts were only a portion of his financial plans, which ultimately led to his dismissal by Émile Ollivier's government. After the fall of the Empire, he spent about a year abroad, but returned to public life in 1877 when he became a Bonapartist deputy for Ajaccio. He died in Paris on January 11, 1891. Haussmann had been made a senator in 1857, a member of the Academy of Fine Arts in 1867, and received the grand cross of the Legion of Honour in 1862. His name is remembered in the Boulevard Haussmann. In his later years, he worked on his Mémoires (3 vols., 1890-1893).


HAUSSONVILLE, JOSEPH OTHENIN BERNARD DE CLÉRON, Comte d’ (1809-1884), French politician and historian, was born in Paris on the 27th of May 1809. His grandfather had been “grand louvetier” of France; his father Charles Louis Bernard de Cléron, comte d’Haussonville (1770-1846), was chamberlain at the court of Napoleon, a count of the French empire, and under the Restoration a peer of France and an opponent of the Villéle ministry. Comte Joseph had filled a series of diplomatic appointments at Brussels, Turin and Naples before he entered the chamber of deputies in 1842 for Provins. Under the Second Empire he published a liberal anti-imperial paper at Brussels, Le Bulletin français, and in 1863 he actively supported the candidature of Prévost Paradol. He was elected to the French Academy in 1869, in recognition of his historical writings, Histoire de la politique extérieure du gouvernement français de 1830 à 1848 (2 vols., 1850), Histoire de la réunion de la Lorraine à la France (4 vols., 1854-1859), L’Église romaine et le premier empire 1800-1814 (5 vols., 1864-1879). In 1870 he published a pamphlet directed against the Prussian treatment of France, La France et la Prusse devant l’Europe, the sale of which was prohibited in Belgium at the request of King William of Prussia. He was the president of an association formed to provide new homes in Algeria for the inhabitants of Alsace-Lorraine who elected to retain their French nationality. In 1878 he was made a life-senator, in which capacity he allied himself with the Right Centre in defence of the religious associations against the anti-clericals. He died in Paris on the 28th of May 1884.

HAUSSONVILLE, JOSEPH OTHENIN BERNARD DE CLÉRON, Count d’ (1809-1884), was a French politician and historian, born in Paris on May 27, 1809. His grandfather was the “grand louvetier” of France; his father, Charles Louis Bernard de Cléron, comte d’Haussonville (1770-1846), served as a chamberlain at Napoleon's court, was a count of the French empire, and later became a peer of France and an opponent of the Villéle ministry during the Restoration. Comte Joseph held various diplomatic positions in Brussels, Turin, and Naples before joining the chamber of deputies in 1842 for Provins. During the Second Empire, he published a liberal anti-imperial newspaper in Brussels, Le Bulletin français, and in 1863 he actively supported the candidacy of Prévost Paradol. He was elected to the French Academy in 1869, recognized for his historical writings, including Histoire de la politique extérieure du gouvernement français de 1830 à 1848 (2 vols., 1850), Histoire de la réunion de la Lorraine à la France (4 vols., 1854-1859), and L’Église romaine et le premier empire 1800-1814 (5 vols., 1864-1879). In 1870, he published a pamphlet criticizing Prussia's treatment of France, La France et la Prusse devant l’Europe, which was banned in Belgium at the request of King William of Prussia. He was president of an association that aimed to provide new homes in Algeria for the residents of Alsace-Lorraine who chose to keep their French nationality. In 1878, he was appointed a life senator, aligning himself with the Right Centre to defend religious associations against anti-clericals. He passed away in Paris on May 28, 1884.

His wife Louise (1818-1882), a daughter of Duc Victor de Broglie, published in 1858 a novel Robert Emmet, followed by Marguerite de Valois reine de Navarre (1870), La Jeunesse de Lord Byron (1872), and Les Dernières Années de Lord Byron (1874).

His wife Louise (1818-1882), the daughter of Duc Victor de Broglie, published a novel in 1858 titled Robert Emmet, followed by Marguerite de Valois reine de Navarre (1870), La Jeunesse de Lord Byron (1872), and Les Dernières Années de Lord Byron (1874).

His son, Gabriel Paul Otherin de Cléron, comte d’Haussonville, was born at Gurcy de Châtel (Seine-et-Marne) on the 21st of September 1843, and married in 1865 Mlle Pauline d’Harcourt. He represented Seine-et-Marne in the National Assembly (1871) and voted with the Right Centre. Though he was not elected to the chamber of deputies he became the right-hand man of his maternal uncle, the duc de Broglie, in the attempted coup of the 16th of May. His Établissements pénitentiaires en France et aux colonies (1875) was crowned by the Academy, of which he was admitted a member in 1888. In 1891 the resignation of Henri Édouard Bocher from the administration of the Orleans estates led to the appointment of M d’Haussonville as accredited representative of the comte de Paris in France. He at once set to work to strengthen the Orleanist party by recruiting from the smaller nobility the officials of the local monarchical committees. He established 72 new Orleanist organs, and sent out lecturers with instructions to emphasize the modern and democratic principles of the comte de Paris; but the prospects of the party were dashed in 1894 by the death of the comte de Paris. In 1904 he was admitted to the Academy of Moral and Political Science. The comte d’Haussonville published:—C. A. Sainte-Beuve, sa vie et ses œuvres (1875), Études biographiques et littéraires, 2 series (1879 and 1888), Le Salon de Mme Necker (1882, 2 vols.), Madame de La Fayette (1891), Madame Ackermann (1892), Le Comte de Paris, souvenirs personnels (1895), La Duchesse de Bourgogne et l’alliance savoyarde (1898-1903), Salaire et misères de femme (1900), and, with G. Hanotaux, Souvenirs sur Madame de Maintenon (3 vols., 1902-1904).

His son, Gabriel Paul Otherin de Cléron, comte d’Haussonville, was born in Gurcy de Châtel (Seine-et-Marne) on September 21, 1843, and married Mlle Pauline d’Harcourt in 1865. He represented Seine-et-Marne in the National Assembly (1871) and voted with the Right Centre. Although he wasn’t elected to the Chamber of Deputies, he became the right-hand man of his maternal uncle, the duc de Broglie, during the attempted coup on May 16. His book Établissements pénitentiaires en France et aux colonies (1875) won an award from the Academy, and he became a member in 1888. In 1891, after Henri Édouard Bocher resigned from the administration of the Orleans estates, M d’Haussonville was appointed as the accredited representative of the comte de Paris in France. He immediately started working to strengthen the Orleanist party by recruiting officials from the smaller nobility for the local monarchical committees. He established 72 new Orleanist outlets and dispatched lecturers to highlight the modern and democratic principles of the comte de Paris; however, the party’s prospects were shattered in 1894 by the death of the comte de Paris. In 1904, he was admitted to the Academy of Moral and Political Science. The comte d’Haussonville published: C. A. Sainte-Beuve, sa vie et ses œuvres (1875), Études biographiques et littéraires, 2 series (1879 and 1888), Le Salon de Mme Necker (1882, 2 vols.), Madame de La Fayette (1891), Madame Ackermann (1892), Le Comte de Paris, souvenirs personnels (1895), La Duchesse de Bourgogne et l’alliance savoyarde (1898-1903), Salaire et misères de femme (1900), and, with G. Hanotaux, Souvenirs sur Madame de Maintenon (3 vols., 1902-1904).


HAUTE-GARONNE, a frontier department of south-western France, formed in 1790 from portions of the provinces of Languedoc (Toulousain and Lauraguais) and Gascony (Comminges and Nébouzan). Pop. (1906), 442,065. Area, 2458 sq. m. It is bounded N. by the department of Tarn-et-Garonne, E. by Tarn, Aude and Ariége, S. by Spain and W. by Gers and Hautes-Pyrénées. Long and narrow in shape, the department consists in the north of an undulating stretch of country with continual interchange of hill and valley nowhere thrown into striking relief; while towards the south the land rises gradually to the Pyrenees, which on the Spanish border attain heights of upwards of 10,000 ft. Two passes, the Port d’Oo, near the beautiful lake and waterfall of Oo, and the Port de Vénasque, exceed 9800 and 7900 ft. in altitude respectively. Entering the department in the south-east, the Garonne flows in a northerly direction and traverses almost its entire length, receiving in its course the Pique, the Salat, the Louge, the Ariége, the Touch and the Save. Except in the mountainous region the climate is mild, the mean annual temperature being rather higher than that of Paris. The rainfall, which averages 24 in. at Toulouse, exceeds 40 in. in some parts of the mountains; and sudden and destructive inundations of the Garonne—of which that of 1875 is a celebrated example—are always to be feared. The valley of the Garonne is also frequently visited by severe hail-storms. Thick forests of oak, fir and pine exist in the mountains and furnish timber for shipbuilding. The arable land of the plains and valleys is well adapted for the cultivation of wheat, maize and other grain crops; and the produce of cereals is generally much more than is required for the local consumption. Market-gardening flourishes around Toulouse. A large area is occupied by vineyards, though the wine is only of medium quality; and chestnuts, apples and peaches are grown. As pasture land is abundant a good deal of attention is given to the rearing of cattle and sheep, and co-operative dairies are numerous in the mountains; but deforestation has tended to reduce the area of pasture-land, because the soil, unretained by the roots of trees, has been gradually washed away. Haute-Garonne has deposits of zinc and lead, and salt-workings; there is an ancient and active marble-working industry at St Béat. Mineral springs are common, those of Bagnères-de-Luchon Encausse, Barbazan and Salies-du-Salat being well known. The manufactures are various though not individually extensive, and include iron and copper goods, woollen, cotton and linen goods, leather, paper, boots and shoes, tobacco and table delicacies. Flour-mills, iron-works and brick-works are numerous. Railway communication is furnished by the Southern and the Orléans railways, the main line of the former from Bordeaux to Cette passing through Toulouse. The Canal du Midi traverses the department for 32 m. and the lateral canal of the Garonne for 15 m. The Garonne is navigable below its confluence with the Salat. There are four arrondissements—Toulouse, Villefranche, Muret and St Gaudens, subdivided into 39 cantons and 588 communes. The chief town is Toulouse, which is the seat of a court of appeal and of an archbishop, the headquarters of the XVIIth army corps and the centre of an academy; and St Gaudens, Bagnères-de-Luchon and, from an architectural and historical standpoint, St Bertrand-de-Comminges are of importance and receive separate treatment. Other places of interest are St Aventin, Montsaunès and Vénerque, which possess ancient churches in the Romanesque style. The church of St Just at Valcabrère is of still greater age, the choir dating from the 8th or 9th century and part of the nave from the 11th century. There are ruins of a celebrated Cistercian abbey at Bonnefont near St Martory. Gallo-Roman remains and works of art have been discovered at Martres. Near Revel is the fine reservoir of St Ferréol, constructed for the canal du Midi in the 17th century.

HAUTE-GARONNE is a border department in southwestern France, created in 1790 from parts of the provinces of Languedoc (Toulousain and Lauraguais) and Gascony (Comminges and Nébouzan). Population (1906) was 442,065, with an area of 2,458 sq. miles. It borders the department of Tarn-et-Garonne to the north, Tarn, Aude, and Ariège to the east, Spain to the south, and Gers and Hautes-Pyrénées to the west. The department is long and narrow, consisting of a rolling landscape in the north with hills and valleys that don’t have any dramatic features; while in the south, the land gradually rises to the Pyrenees, which reach elevations over 10,000 feet at the Spanish border. Two passes, the Port d’Oo, near the beautiful lake and waterfall of Oo, and the Port de Vénasque, exceed altitudes of 9,800 and 7,900 feet respectively. The Garonne River enters the department in the southeast, flowing northward and running almost its entire length, taking in the Pique, Salat, Louge, Ariège, Touch, and Save rivers along the way. Except in the mountainous areas, the climate is mild, with the average annual temperature being slightly higher than that of Paris. Rainfall averages 24 inches in Toulouse and exceeds 40 inches in some mountainous areas; sudden and destructive floods of the Garonne—like the infamous one in 1875—are always a risk. The Garonne valley also frequently experiences severe hailstorms. The mountains have dense forests of oak, fir, and pine that provide timber for shipbuilding. The plains and valleys are well-suited for growing wheat, maize, and other crops; typically, the yield of cereals exceeds local consumption. Market gardening is thriving around Toulouse. A large portion of the land is planted with vineyards, although the wine produced is of only average quality; chestnuts, apples, and peaches are also cultivated. Because there is ample pasture land, significant attention is given to raising cattle and sheep, and there are many cooperative dairies in the mountains; however, deforestation has reduced pasture areas since the soil, unsupported by tree roots, has gradually been washed away. Haute-Garonne has deposits of zinc and lead and salt mining; there is an ancient and active marble-working industry in St Béat. Mineral springs are common, with Bagnères-de-Luchon, Encausse, Barbazan, and Salies-du-Salat being notable. Manufacturing is diverse, though not extensive, including iron and copper products, wool, cotton and linen textiles, leather, paper, footwear, tobacco, and gourmet foods. There are many flour mills, ironworks, and brickworks. Railway services are provided by the Southern and Orléans railways, with the main line from Bordeaux to Cette passing through Toulouse. The Canal du Midi runs through the department for 32 miles, and the lateral canal of the Garonne for 15 miles. The Garonne is navigable below where it meets the Salat. There are four arrondissements—Toulouse, Villefranche, Muret, and St Gaudens—further divided into 39 cantons and 588 communes. The main town is Toulouse, which is the seat of a court of appeal and an archbishop, the headquarters of the XVII army corps, and the center of an academy; and St Gaudens, Bagnères-de-Luchon, and St Bertrand-de-Comminges are important places from architectural and historical perspectives and are treated separately. Other noteworthy locations include St Aventin, Montsaunès, and Vénerque, which have ancient Romanesque churches. The church of St Just at Valcabrère is even older, with the choir dating back to the 8th or 9th century and part of the nave from the 11th century. The ruins of a famous Cistercian abbey can be found at Bonnefont near St Martory. Gallo-Roman remains and artifacts have been found at Martres. Near Revel is the beautiful reservoir of St Ferréol, built for the canal du Midi in the 17th century.


HAUTE-LOIRE, a department of central France, formed in 1790 of Velay and portions of Vivarais and Gévaudan, three districts formerly belonging to the old province of Languedoc, of a portion of Forez formerly belonging to Lyonnais, and a portion of lower Auvergne. Pop. (1906), 314,770. Area, 1931 sq. m. It is bounded N. by Puy-de-Dôme and Loire, E. by Loire and Ardèche, S. by Ardèche and Lozère and W. by Lozère and Cantal. Haute-Loire, which is situated on the central plateau of France, is traversed from north to south by four mountain ranges. Its highest point, the Mont Mézenc (5755 ft.), in the south-east of the department, belongs to the mountains of Vivarais, which are continued along the eastern border by the Boutières chain. The Lignon divides the Boutières from the Massif du Mégal, which is separated by the Loire itself from the mountains of Velay, a granitic range overlaid with the eruptions of more than one hundred and fifty craters. The Margeride mountains run along the western border of the department. The Loire enters the department at a point 16 m. distant from its source in Ardèche, and first flowing northwards and then north-east, waters its eastern half. The Allier, which joins the Loire at Nevers, traverses the western portion of Haute-Loire in a northerly direction. The chief affluents of the Loire within the limits of the department are the Borne on the left, joining it near Le Puy, and the Lignon, which descends from the Mézenc, between the Boutières and Mégal ranges, on the right. The climate, owing to the altitude, the northward direction of the valleys, and the winds from the Cévennes, is cold, the winters being long and rigorous. Storms and violent rains are frequent on the higher grounds, and would give rise to serious inundations were not the rivers for the most part confined within deep rocky channels. Cereals, chiefly rye, oats, barley and wheat, are cultivated in the lowlands and on the plateaus, on which aromatic and medicinal plants are abundant. Lentils, peas, mangel-wurzels and other forage and potatoes are also grown. Horned cattle belong principally to the Mézenc breed; goats are numerous. The woods yield pine, fir, oak and beech. Lace-making, which employs about 90,000 women, and coal-mining are main industries; the coal basins are those of Brassac and Langeac. There are also mines of antimony and stone-quarries. Silk-milling, caoutchouc-making, various kinds of smith’s work, paper-making, glass-blowing, brewing, wood-sawing and flour-milling are also carried on. The principal imports are flour, brandy, wine, live-stock, lace-thread and agricultural implements. Exports include fat stock, wool, aromatic plants, coal, lace. The department is served chiefly by the Paris-Lyon-Méditerranée company. There are three arrondissements—Le Puy, Brioude and Yssingeaux, with 28 cantons and 265 communes.

HAUTE-LOIRE, is a department in central France, created in 1790 from Velay and parts of Vivarais and Gévaudan, three areas that used to be part of the old province of Languedoc, along with a section of Forez that was once part of Lyonnais and part of lower Auvergne. Population (1906) was 314,770. Area: 1,931 sq. miles. It borders Puy-de-Dôme and Loire to the north, Loire and Ardèche to the east, Ardèche and Lozère to the south, and Lozère and Cantal to the west. Haute-Loire, located on the central plateau of France, is crossed from north to south by four mountain ranges. Its highest point, Mont Mézenc (5,755 ft.), in the southeast of the department, is part of the Vivarais mountains, which continue along the eastern border with the Boutières chain. The Lignon River separates the Boutières from the Massif du Mégal, which is divided from the Velay mountains, a granitic range topped with the eruptions of over one hundred and fifty craters, by the Loire River. The Margeride mountains run along the western edge of the department. The Loire enters the department 16 miles from its source in Ardèche, flowing north and then northeast, draining its eastern half. The Allier River, which joins the Loire at Nevers, flows through the western part of Haute-Loire in a northern direction. The main tributaries of the Loire in the department are the Borne on the left, joining near Le Puy, and the Lignon, which comes down from the Mézenc between the Boutières and Mégal ranges on the right. The climate is cold due to the altitude, the north-facing valleys, and winds from the Cévennes, with long, harsh winters. Storms and heavy rains are common in the higher areas, which could lead to serious flooding if the rivers weren't mostly contained within deep rocky channels. Crops cultivated in the lowlands and on the plateaus include cereals like rye, oats, barley, and wheat, while aromatic and medicinal plants flourish. Additionally, lentils, peas, mangel-wurzels, other fodder crops, and potatoes are grown. The main breed of cattle is Mézenc cattle, and there are many goats. The forests provide pine, fir, oak, and beech trees. The primary industries are lace-making, which employs about 90,000 women, and coal mining, mainly in the Brassac and Langeac basins. There are also antimony mines and stone quarries. Other activities include silk milling, rubber production, various blacksmithing, paper making, glass blowing, brewing, wood cutting, and flour milling. Key imports are flour, brandy, wine, livestock, lace thread, and farming tools. Exports consist of livestock, wool, aromatic plants, coal, and lace. The department is primarily served by the Paris-Lyon-Méditerranée company. It consists of three arrondissements—Le Puy, Brioude, and Yssingeaux—along with 28 cantons and 265 communes.

Haute-Loire forms the diocese of Le Puy and part of the ecclesiastical province of Bourges, and belongs to the academie (educational division) of Clermont-Ferrand. Its court of appeal is at Riom. Le Puy the capital, Brioude and La Chaise-Dieu the principal towns of the department, receive separate treatment. It has some notable churches, of which those of Chamalières, St Paulien and Sainte-Marie-des-Chazes are Romanesque in style; Le Monastier preserves the church, in part Romanesque, and the buildings of the abbey to which it owes its origin. Arlempdes and Bouzols (near Coubon) have the ruins of large feudal châteaus. The rocky plateau overlooking Polignac is occupied by the ruins of the imposing stronghold of the ancient family of Polignac, including a square donjon of the 14th century. Interesting Gallo-Roman remains have been found on the site.

Haute-Loire is part of the diocese of Le Puy and the ecclesiastical province of Bourges, and it falls under the academic division of Clermont-Ferrand. Its court of appeal is located in Riom. The capital city is Le Puy, with Brioude and La Chaise-Dieu being the main towns in the department, each getting individual treatment. There are some notable churches, including Romanesque-style ones like those in Chamalières, St. Paulien, and Sainte-Marie-des-Chazes; Le Monastier has a church that is partially Romanesque as well as the buildings of the abbey that it originated from. Arlempdes and Bouzols (near Coubon) feature the ruins of large feudal castles. The rocky plateau overlooking Polignac is home to the ruins of the impressive stronghold belonging to the ancient Polignac family, which includes a square donjon from the 14th century. Fascinating Gallo-Roman remains have also been discovered at the site.


HAUTE-MARNE, a department of north-eastern France, made up for the most part of districts belonging to the former province of Champagne (Bassigny, Perthois, Vallage), with smaller portions of Lorraine and Burgundy, and some fragments of 73 Franche-Comté. Area, 2415 sq. m. Pop. (1906), 221,724. It is bounded N.E. by Meuse, E. by Vosges, S.E. by Haute-Saône, S. and S.W. by Côte d’Or, W. by Aube, and N.W. by Marne. Its greatest elevation (1693 ft.) is in the plateau of Langres in the south between the sources of the Marne and those of the Aube; the watershed between the basin of the Rhone on the south and those of the Seine and Meuse on the north, which is formed by the plateau of Langres continued north-east by the Monts Faucilles, has an average height of 1500 or 1600 ft. The country descends rapidly towards the south, but in very gentle slopes northwards. To the north is Bassigny (the paybas or low country, as distinguished from the highlands), a district characterized by monotonous flats of little fertility and extensive wooded tracts. The lowest level of the department is 361 ft. Hydrographically Haute-Marne belongs for the most part to the basin of the Seine, the remainder to those of the Rhone and the Meuse. The principal river is the Marne, which rises here, and has a course of 75 m. within the department. Among its more important affluents are, on the right the Rognon, and on the left the Blaise. The Saulx, another tributary of the Marne on the right, also rises in Haute-Marne. Westward the department is watered by the Aube and its tributary the Aujon, both of which have their sources on the plateau of Langres. The Meuse also rises in the Monts Faucilles, and has a course of 31 m. within the department. On the Mediterranean side the department sends to the Saône the Apance, the Amance, the Salon and the Vingeanne. The climate is partly that of the Seine region, partly that of the Vosges, and partly that of the Rhone; the mean temperature is 51° F., nearly that of Paris; the rainfall is slightly below the average for France.

HAUTE-MARNE, is a department in northeastern France, primarily consisting of districts from the former province of Champagne (Bassigny, Perthois, Vallage), with smaller areas from Lorraine and Burgundy, and some remnants of 73 Franche-Comté. It covers an area of 2,415 sq. miles and had a population of 221,724 in 1906. It is bordered to the northeast by Meuse, to the east by Vosges, to the southeast by Haute-Saône, to the south and southwest by Côte d’Or, to the west by Aube, and to the northwest by Marne. The highest point, at 1,693 ft., is located on the Langres plateau in the south, between the sources of the Marne and Aube rivers; the watershed separating the Rhône basin to the south from the Seine and Meuse basins to the north is created by the Langres plateau extending northeast through the Monts Faucilles, averaging 1,500 to 1,600 ft. The landscape slopes down steeply to the south but rises gently to the north. Bassigny to the north (the paybas or low country, as it's called in contrast to the highlands) features flat, less fertile land and vast wooded areas. The lowest elevation in the department is 361 ft. Hydrographically, Haute-Marne mostly drains into the Seine basin, with parts also feeding into the Rhône and Meuse basins. The main river is the Marne, which starts here and flows 75 miles through the department. Key tributaries include the Rognon on the right and the Blaise on the left. The Saulx, another tributary of the Marne, also originates in Haute-Marne. To the west, the department is fed by the Aube and its tributary, the Aujon, both of which begin on the Langres plateau. The Meuse rises in the Monts Faucilles and flows 31 miles within the department. On the Mediterranean side, the department contributes the Apance, Amance, Salon, and Vingeanne to the Saône. Its climate is a mix of the Seine, Vosges, and Rhône regions, with an average temperature of 51°F, similar to Paris, and slightly below-average rainfall for France.

The agriculture of the department is carried on chiefly by small proprietors. The chief crops are wheat and oats, which are more than sufficient for the needs of the inhabitants; potatoes, lucerne and mangel-wurzels are next in importance. Natural pasture is abundant, especially in Bassigny, where horse and cattle-raising flourish. The vineyards produce some fair wines, notably the white wine of Soyers. More than a quarter of the territory is under wood. The department is rich in iron and building and other varieties of stone are quarried. The warm springs of Bourbonne-les-Bains are among the earliest known and most frequented in France. The leading industry is the metallurgical; its establishments include blast furnaces, foundries, forges, plate-rolling works, and shops for nailmaking and smith’s work of various descriptions. St Dizier is the chief centre of manufacture and distribution. The cutlery trade occupies thousands of hands at Nogent-en-Bassigny and in the neighbourhood of Langres. Val d’Osne is well known for its production of fountains, statues, &c., in metal-work. Flour-milling, glove-making (at Chaumont), basket-making, brewing, tanning and other industries are also carried on. The principal import is coal, while manufactured goods, iron, stone, wood and cereals are exported. The department is served by the Eastern railway, of which the line from Paris to Belfort passes through Chaumont and Langres. The canal from the Marne to the Saône and the canal of the Haute-Marne, which accompany the Marne, together cover 99 m.; there is a canal 14 m. long from St Dizier to Wassy. There are three arrondissements (Chaumont, Langres and Wassy), with 28 cantons and 550 communes. Chaumont is the capital. The department forms the diocese of Langres; it belongs to the VII. military region and to the educational circumscription (académie) of Dijon, where also is its court of appeal. The principal towns—Chaumont, Langres, St Dizier and Bourbonne-les-Bains—receive separate notice. At Montier-en-Der the remains of an abbey founded in the 7th century include a fine church with nave and aisles of the 10th, and choir of the 13th century. Wassy, the scene in 1562 of the celebrated massacre of Protestants by the troops of Francis, duke of Guise, has among its old buildings a church much of which dates from the Romanesque period. Vignory has a church of the 11th century. Joinville, a metallurgical centre, preserves a chateau of the dukes of Guise in the Renaissance style. Pailly, near Langres, has a fine chateau of the last half of the 16th century.

The agriculture in the region is primarily managed by small landowners. The main crops are wheat and oats, which more than meet the needs of the local population. Potatoes, alfalfa, and mangel-wurzels follow in importance. Natural pasture is abundant, especially in Bassigny, where horse and cattle farming thrive. The vineyards produce some decent wines, especially the white wine from Soyers. Over a quarter of the land is covered in forest. The region is rich in iron, and various types of stone are quarried for building. The warm springs of Bourbonne-les-Bains are among the oldest and most popular in France. The leading industry is metallurgy, with facilities that include blast furnaces, foundries, forges, plate-rolling mills, and shops for making nails and various smithing work. St Dizier is the main manufacturing and distribution hub. The cutlery industry employs thousands in Nogent-en-Bassigny and the surrounding area of Langres. Val d’Osne is well-known for its metalwork, especially fountains and statues. Other industries like flour milling, glove-making (in Chaumont), basket-making, brewing, tanning, and more are also present. The primary import is coal, while manufactured goods, iron, stone, wood, and cereals are exported. The department is connected by the Eastern railway, with the line from Paris to Belfort passing through Chaumont and Langres. The canal linking the Marne to the Saône and the Haute-Marne canal, which follows the Marne, stretch over 99 miles; there is also a 14-mile canal from St Dizier to Wassy. The region has three arrondissements (Chaumont, Langres, and Wassy), 28 cantons, and 550 communes, with Chaumont as the capital. The department is part of the diocese of Langres, falls within the VII military region, and is in the educational area of Dijon, which also hosts its court of appeal. The key towns—Chaumont, Langres, St Dizier, and Bourbonne-les-Bains—receive individual attention. In Montier-en-Der, the remains of a 7th-century abbey include a beautiful church with a nave and aisles from the 10th century and a choir from the 13th century. Wassy, known for the famous massacre of Protestants in 1562 by the troops of Francis, Duke of Guise, has old buildings including a church that dates mainly from the Romanesque period. Vignory features an 11th-century church. Joinville, a center for metallurgy, has a Renaissance-style chateau of the Dukes of Guise. Pailly, near Langres, boasts a stunning chateau from the late 16th century.


HAUTERIVE, ALEXANDRE MAURICE BLANC DE LANAUTTE, Comte d’ (1754-1830), French statesman and diplomatist, was born at Aspres (Hautes-Alpes) on the 14th of April 1754, and was educated at Grenoble, where he became a professor. Later he held a similar position at Tours, and there he attracted the attention of the duc de Choiseul, who invited him to visit him at Chanteloup. Hauterive thus came in contact with the great men who visited the duke, and one of these, the comte de Choiseul-Goiffier, on his appointment as ambassador to Constantinople in 1784 took him with him. Hauterive was enriched for a time by his marriage with a widow, Madame de Marchais, but was ruined by the Revolution. In 1790 he applied for and received the post of consul at New York. Under the Consulate, however, he was accused of embezzlement and recalled; and, though the charge was proved to be false, was not reinstated. In 1798, after trying his hand at farming in America, Hauterive was appointed to a post in the French foreign office. In this capacity he made a sensation by his L’État de la France à la fin de l’an VIII (1800), which he had been commissioned by Bonaparte to draw up, as a manifesto to foreign nations, after the coup d’état of the 18th Brumaire. This won him the confidence of Bonaparte, and he was henceforth employed in drawing up many of the more important documents. In 1805 he was made a councillor of state and member of the Legion of Honour, and between 1805 and 1813 he was more than once temporarily minister of foreign affairs. He attempted, though vainly, to use his influence to moderate Napoleon’s policy, especially in the matter of Spain and the treatment of the pope. In 1805 a difference of opinion with Talleyrand on the question of the Austrian alliance, which Hauterive favoured, led to his withdrawal from the political side of the ministry of foreign affairs, and he was appointed keeper of the archives of the same department. In this capacity he did very useful work, and after the Restoration continued in this post at the request of the duc de Richelieu, his work being recognized by his election as a member of the Académie des Inscriptions et Belles-Lettres in 1820. He died at Paris on the 28th of July 1830.

HAUTERIVE, ALEXANDRE MAURICE BLANC DE LANAUTTE, Count of (1754-1830), was a French statesman and diplomat born in Aspres (Hautes-Alpes) on April 14, 1754. He studied in Grenoble, where he became a professor. Later, he took a similar role in Tours, where he caught the attention of the duc de Choiseul, who invited him to visit at Chanteloup. Hauterive met many influential people there, one of whom, the comte de Choiseul-Goiffier, took him along as an ambassador to Constantinople in 1784. He gained wealth for a time through his marriage to a widow, Madame de Marchais, but lost it all during the Revolution. In 1790, he applied for and was granted the position of consul in New York. However, during the Consulate, he was accused of embezzlement and recalled; despite the charges being proven false, he was not reinstated. In 1798, after attempting farming in America, Hauterive was appointed to a position in the French foreign office. In this role, he made headlines with his L’État de la France à la fin de l’an VIII (1800), which he was commissioned by Bonaparte to create as a manifesto for foreign nations following the coup d’état of the 18th Brumaire. This earned him Bonaparte's trust, and from then on, he was involved in drafting many key documents. In 1805, he became a councillor of state and was made a member of the Legion of Honour. Between 1805 and 1813, he served multiple times as the temporary minister of foreign affairs. He tried, though unsuccessfully, to use his influence to moderate Napoleon’s policies, particularly concerning Spain and the treatment of the pope. In 1805, a disagreement with Talleyrand over the Austrian alliance, which Hauterive supported, led him to resign from the political aspect of the foreign ministry, after which he became the keeper of the archives in the same department. He performed valuable work in this role, and following the Restoration, he continued in this position at the request of the duc de Richelieu. His contributions were recognized when he was elected as a member of the Académie des Inscriptions et Belles-Lettres in 1820. He passed away in Paris on July 28, 1830.

There is a detailed account of Hauterive, with considerable extracts from his correspondence with Talleyrand, in the Biographie universelle by A. F. Artand de Montor, who published a separate life in 1831. Criticisms of his État de la France appeared in Germany and England by F. von Gentz (Von dem politischen Zustände, 1801), and by T. B. Clarke (A Hist. and Pol. View ..., 1803).

There is a thorough account of Hauterive, including significant excerpts from his correspondence with Talleyrand, in the Biographie universelle by A. F. Artand de Montor, who released a separate biography in 1831. Critiques of his État de la France were published in Germany and England by F. von Gentz (Von dem politischen Zustände, 1801) and T. B. Clarke (A Hist. and Pol. View ..., 1803).


HAUTES ALPES, a department in S.E. France, formed in 1790 out of the south-eastern portion of the old province of Dauphiné, together with a small part of N. Provence. It is bounded N. by the department of Savoie, E. by Italy and the department of the Basses Alpes, S. by the last-named department and that of the Drôme, and W. by the departments of the Drôme and of the Isère. Its area is 2178 sq. m., its greatest length is 85 m. and its greatest breadth 62 m. It is very mountainous, and includes the Pointe des Écrins (13,462 ft.), the loftiest summit in France before the annexation of Savoy in 1860, as well as the Meije (13,081 ft.), the Ailefroide (12,989 ft.) and the Mont Pelvoux (12,973 ft.), though Monte Viso (12,609 ft.) is wholly in Italy, rising just over the border. The department is to a large extent made up of the basins of the upper Durance (with its tributaries, the Guisane, the Gyronde and the Guil), of the upper Drac and of the Buëch—all being to a very large extent wild mountain torrents in their upper course. The department is divided into three arrondissements (Gap, Briançon and Embrun), 24 cantons and 186 communes. In 1906 its population was 107,498. It is a very poor department owing to its great elevation above the sea-level. There are no industries of any extent, and its commerce is almost wholly of local importance. The prolonged winter greatly hinders agricultural development, while the pastoral region has been greatly damaged and the forests destroyed by the ravages of the Provençal sheep, vast flocks of which are driven up here in the summer, as the pastures are leased out to a large extent, and but little utilized by the inhabitants. It now forms the diocese of Gap (this see is first certainly mentioned in the 6th century), which is in the ecclesiastical province of Aix en Provence; in 1791 there was annexed 74 to it the archiepiscopal see of Embrun, which was then suppressed. There are 114 m. of railway in the department. This includes the main line from Briançon past Gap towards Grenoble. About 16½ m. W. of Gap is the important railway junction of Veynes, whence branch off the lines to Grenoble, to Valence by Die and Livron, and to Sisteron for Marseilles. The chief town is Gap, while Briançon and Embrun are the only other important places.

HAUTES ALPES, is a department in southeastern France, created in 1790 from the southeastern part of the old province of Dauphiné and a small section of northern Provence. It is bordered to the north by the Savoie department, to the east by Italy and the Basses Alpes department, to the south by the same department and the Drôme, and to the west by the Drôme and Isère departments. It covers an area of 2,178 square miles, with its longest side measuring 85 miles and its widest side 62 miles. The region is very mountainous, featuring the Pointe des Écrins (13,462 ft), the highest peak in France before the annexation of Savoy in 1860, along with the Meije (13,081 ft), the Ailefroide (12,989 ft), and the Mont Pelvoux (12,973 ft), although Monte Viso (12,609 ft) is entirely in Italy, just across the border. The department mainly consists of the basins of the upper Durance (along with its tributaries, the Guisane, the Gyronde, and the Guil), the upper Drac, and the Buëch—all largely consisting of wild mountain streams in their upper stretches. The department is divided into three arrondissements (Gap, Briançon, and Embrun), 24 cantons, and 186 communes. In 1906, the population was 107,498. This department is very poor due to its high elevation above sea level. There are no significant industries, and its commerce is almost entirely local. The long winters severely limit agricultural growth, while the pastoral areas have suffered substantial damage and deforestation due to the dozens of Provençal sheep that are driven here in the summer, as the pastures are mostly leased out and minimally used by the residents. It now forms the diocese of Gap (which has been certainly mentioned since the 6th century), part of the ecclesiastical province of Aix en Provence; in 1791, the archbishopric of Embrun, which was then abolished, was annexed to it. There are 114 miles of railway in the department, including the main line from Briançon through Gap towards Grenoble. About 16½ miles west of Gap is the important railway junction of Veynes, which connects to lines toward Grenoble, Valence via Die and Livron, and to Sisteron for Marseilles. The main town is Gap, while Briançon and Embrun are the only other notable locations.

See J. Roman, Dictionnaire topographique du dép. des Htes-Alpes (Paris, 1884), Tableau historique du dép. des Htes-Alpes (Paris, 1887-1890, 2 vols.), and Répertoire archéologique du dép. des Htes-Alpes(Paris, 1888); J. C. F. Ladoucette, Histoire, topographie, &c., des Hautes-Alpes (3rd ed., Paris, 1848).

See J. Roman, Dictionnaire topographique du dép. des Htes-Alpes (Paris, 1884), Tableau historique du dép. des Htes-Alpes (Paris, 1887-1890, 2 vols.), and Répertoire archéologique du dép. des Htes-Alpes (Paris, 1888); J. C. F. Ladoucette, Histoire, topographie, &c., des Hautes-Alpes (3rd ed., Paris, 1848).

(W. A. B. C.)

HAUTE-SAÔNE, a department of eastern France, formed in 1790 from the northern portion of Franche Comté. It is traversed by the river Saône, bounded N. by the department of the Vosges, E. by the territory of Belfort, S. by Doubs and Jura, and W. by Côte-d’Or and Haute-Marne. Pop. (1906), 263,890; area, 2075 sq. m. On the north-east, where they are formed by the Vosges, and to the south along the course of the Ognon the limits are natural. The highest point of the department is the Ballon de Servance (3970 ft.), and the lowest the confluence of the Saône and Ognon (610 ft.). The general slope is from north-east to south-west, the direction followed by those two streams. In the north-east the department belongs to the Vosgian formation, consisting of forest-clad mountains of sandstone and granite, and is of a marshy nature; but throughout the greater part of its extent it is composed of limestone plateaus 800 to 1000 ft. high pierced with crevasses and subterranean caves, into which the rain water disappears to issue again as springs in the valleys 200 ft. lower down. In its passage through the department the Saône receives from the right the Amance and the Salon from the Langres plateau, and from the left the Coney, the Lanterne (augmented by the Breuchin which passes by Luxeuil), the Durgeon (passing Vesoul), and the Ognon. The north-eastern districts are cold and have an annual rainfall ranging from 36 to 48 in. Towards the south-west the climate becomes more temperate. At Vesoul and Gray the rainfall only reaches 24 in. per annum.

HAUTE-SAÔNE, a department in eastern France, was created in 1790 from the northern part of Franche Comté. It is crossed by the Saône River and is bordered to the north by the Vosges department, to the east by the territory of Belfort, to the south by Doubs and Jura, and to the west by Côte-d’Or and Haute-Marne. Population (1906): 263,890; area: 2,075 sq. miles. The northeastern border, formed by the Vosges, and the southern border along the Ognon River are natural. The highest point in the department is Ballon de Servance (3,970 ft.), and the lowest is where the Saône meets the Ognon (610 ft.). The general slope runs from the northeast to the southwest, following the direction of these two rivers. In the northeast, the department consists of the Vosgian formation, which features forest-covered mountains made of sandstone and granite and is somewhat marshy. However, most of the area consists of limestone plateaus that are 800 to 1,000 ft. high, filled with cracks and underground caves where rainwater drains and then re-emerges as springs in valleys that are 200 ft. lower. As the Saône flows through the department, it receives the Amance and the Salon from the right as it descends from the Langres plateau and the Coney, the Lanterne (increased by the Breuchin, which flows past Luxeuil), the Durgeon (flowing through Vesoul), and the Ognon from the left. The northeastern regions are chilly and receive annual rainfall of 36 to 48 inches, while the southwestern part has a milder climate, with Vesoul and Gray having only 24 inches of rainfall per year.

Haute-Saône is primarily agricultural. Of its total area nearly half is arable land; wheat, oats, meslin and rye are the chief cereals and potatoes are largely grown. The vine flourishes mainly in the arrondissement of Gray. Apples, plums and cherries (from which the kirsch, for which the department is famous, is distilled) are the chief fruits. The woods which cover a quarter of the department are composed mainly of firs in the Vosges and of oak, beech, hornbeam and aspen in the other districts. The river-valleys furnish good pasture for the rearing of horses and of horned cattle. The department possesses mines of coal (at Ronchamp) and rock-salt (at Gouhenans) and stone quarries are worked. Of the many mineral waters of Haute-Saône the best known are the hot springs of Luxeuil (q.v.). Besides iron-working establishments (smelting furnaces, foundries and wire-drawing mills), Haute-Saône possesses copper-foundries, engineering works, steel-foundries and factories at Plancher-les-Mines and elsewhere for producing ironmongery, nails, pins, files, saws, screws, shot, chains, agricultural implements, locks, spinning machinery, edge tools. Window-glass and glass wares, pottery and earthenware are manufactured; there are also brick and tile-works. The spinning and weaving of cotton, of which Héricourt (pop. in 1906, 5194) is the chief centre, stand next in importance to metal working, and there are numerous paper-mills. Print-works, fulling mills, hosiery factories and straw-hat factories are also of some account; as well as sugar works, distilleries, dye-works, saw-mills, starch-works, the chemical works at Gouhenans, oil-mills, tanyards and flour-mills. The department exports wheat, cattle, cheese, butter, iron, wood, pottery, kirschwasser, plaster, leather, glass, &c. The Saône provides a navigable channel of about 70 m., which is connected with the Moselle and the Meuse at Corre by the Canal de l’Est along the valley of the Coney. Gray is the chief emporium of the water-borne trade of the Saône. Haute-Saône is served chiefly by the Eastern railway. There are three arrondissements—Vesoul, Gray, Lure—comprising 28 cantons, 583 communes. Haute-Saône is in the district of the VII. army corps, and in its legal, ecclesiastical and educational relations depends on Besançon.

Haute-Saône is mainly agricultural. Almost half of its total area is arable land, with wheat, oats, meslin, and rye being the main cereals, and potatoes being widely cultivated. The vine thrives primarily in the Gray area. Apples, plums, and cherries (from which kirsch, for which the department is famous, is distilled) are the main fruits. The forests that cover a quarter of the department consist mainly of firs in the Vosges, and oak, beech, hornbeam, and aspen in other areas. The river valleys provide good pastures for raising horses and cattle. The department has coal mines (at Ronchamp) and rock salt mines (at Gouhenans), and stone quarries are also in operation. Among the many mineral waters in Haute-Saône, the hot springs of Luxeuil (q.v.) are the most well-known. Aside from ironworking facilities (smelting furnaces, foundries, and wire-drawing mills), Haute-Saône also has copper foundries, engineering works, steel foundries, and factories in Plancher-les-Mines and elsewhere that produce iron goods, nails, pins, files, saws, screws, shot, chains, agricultural tools, locks, spinning machinery, and edge tools. Window glass and glassware, pottery and earthenware are produced; there are also brick and tile factories. The spinning and weaving of cotton, with Héricourt (pop. in 1906, 5,194) as the main center, is next in importance to metalworking, and there are many paper mills. Printworks, fulling mills, hosiery factories, and straw hat factories are also significant, along with sugar plants, distilleries, dye works, sawmills, starch works, the chemical works at Gouhenans, oil mills, tanneries, and flour mills. The department exports wheat, cattle, cheese, butter, iron, wood, pottery, kirschwasser, plaster, leather, glass, etc. The Saône offers a navigable channel of about 70 miles, which connects with the Moselle and the Meuse at Corre via the Canal de l’Est along the Coney valley. Gray is the main port for the waterborne trade of the Saône. Haute-Saône is primarily served by the Eastern railway. There are three districts—Vesoul, Gray, Lure—comprising 28 cantons and 583 communes. Haute-Saône is part of the VII army corps district, and in its legal, ecclesiastical, and educational relations, it depends on Besançon.

Vesoul, the capital of the department, Gray and Luxeuil are the principal towns. There is an important school of agriculture at St Rémy in the arrondissement of Vesoul. The Roman ruins and mosaics at Membrey in the arrondissement of Gray and the church (13th and 15th centuries) and abbey buildings at Faverney, in the arrondissement of Vesoul, are of antiquarian interest.

Vesoul, the capital of the department, along with Gray and Luxeuil, are the main towns. There's a significant agricultural school in St Rémy, located in the Vesoul area. The Roman ruins and mosaics at Membrey in the Gray area, along with the church (13th and 15th centuries) and abbey buildings at Faverney, in the Vesoul area, are of historical interest.


HAUTE-SAVOIE, a frontier department of France, formed in 1860 of the old provinces of the Genevois, the Chablais and the Faucigny, which constituted the northern portion of the duchy of Savoy. It is bounded N. by the canton and Lake of Geneva, E. by the Swiss canton of the Valais, S. by Italy and the department of Savoie, and W. by the department of the Ain. It is mainly made up of the river-basins of the Arve (flowing along the northern foot of the Mont Blanc range, and receiving the Giffre, on the right, and the Borne and Foron, on the left—the Arve joins the Rhone, close to Geneva), of the Dranse (with several branches, all flowing into the Lake of Geneva), of the Usses and of the Fier (both flowing direct into the Rhone, the latter after forming the Lake of Annecy). The upper course of the Arly is also in the department, but the river then leaves it to fall into the Isère. The whole of the department is mountainous. But the hills attain no very great height, save at its south-east end, where rises the snowclad chain of Mont Blanc, with many high peaks (culminating in Mont Blanc, 15,782 ft.) and many glaciers. That portion of the department is alone frequented by travellers, whose centre is Chamonix in the upper Arve valley. The lowest point (945 ft.) in the department is at the junction of the Fier with the Rhone. The whole of the department is included in that portion of the duchy of Savoy which was neutralized in 1815. In 1906 the population of the department was 260,617. Its area is 1775 sq. m., and it is divided into four arrondissements (Annecy, the chief town, Bonneville, St Julien and Thonon), 28 cantons and 314 communes. It forms the diocese of Annecy. There are in the department 176 m. of broad-gauge railways, and 70 m. of narrow-gauge lines. There are also a number of mineral springs, only three of which are known to foreigners—the chalybeate waters of Évian and Amphion, close to each other on the south shore of the Lake of Geneva, and the chalybeate and sulphurous waters of St Gervais, at the north-west end of the chain of Mont Blanc. Anthracite and asphalte mines are numerous, as well as stone quarries. Cotton is manufactured at Annecy, while Cluses is the centre of the clock-making industry. There is a well-known bell foundry at Annecy le Vieux. Thonon (the old capital of the Chablais) is the most important town on the southern shore of the Lake of Geneva and, after Annecy, the most populous place in the department.

HAUTE-SAVOIE, is a border department of France, created in 1860 from the former provinces of Genevois, Chablais, and Faucigny, which made up the northern part of the duchy of Savoy. It is bordered to the north by the canton and Lake of Geneva, to the east by the Swiss canton of Valais, to the south by Italy and the department of Savoie, and to the west by the department of Ain. The department mainly consists of the river basins of the Arve (which flows along the northern slope of the Mont Blanc range, receiving the Giffre on the right and the Borne and Foron on the left—the Arve joins the Rhone near Geneva), the Dranse (with several branches that flow into Lake Geneva), the Usses, and the Fier (both flowing directly into the Rhone, with the latter forming Lake Annecy). The upper part of the Arly is also in the department, but the river then exits to join the Isère. The entire department is mountainous, with the hills not reaching significant heights except at the southeastern end, where the snow-covered chain of Mont Blanc rises, featuring many high peaks (the highest being Mont Blanc at 15,782 ft.) and numerous glaciers. This area is primarily visited by tourists, with Chamonix in the upper Arve valley being the central hub. The lowest point (945 ft.) in the department is at the confluence of the Fier and Rhone. The entire department is part of the area of the duchy of Savoy that was neutralized in 1815. In 1906, the population of the department was 260,617. Its area is 1,775 square miles, and it is divided into four arrondissements (Annecy, the main town, Bonneville, St Julien, and Thonon), 28 cantons, and 314 communes. It is within the diocese of Annecy. The department has 176 miles of broad-gauge railways and 70 miles of narrow-gauge lines. There are also several mineral springs, three of which are known internationally—the chalybeate waters of Évian and Amphion, located close to each other on the southern shore of Lake Geneva, and the chalybeate and sulphurous waters of St Gervais, found at the northwestern end of the Mont Blanc range. Anthracite and asphalt mines are plentiful, along with stone quarries. Cotton is produced in Annecy, while Cluses is the center of the clock-making industry. There is a renowned bell foundry in Annecy le Vieux. Thonon (the former capital of Chablais) is the most significant town on the southern shore of Lake Geneva and, after Annecy, the most populated place in the department.

(W. A. B. C.)

HAUTES-PYRÉNÉES, a department of south-western France, on the Spanish frontier, formed in 1790, half of it being taken from Bigorre and the remainder from Armagnac, Nébouzan, Astarac and Quatre Vallées, districts which all belonged to the province of Gascony. Pop. (1906), 209,397. Area, 1750 sq. m. Hautes-Pyrénées is bounded S. by Spain, W. by the department of Basses-Pyrénées (which encloses on its eastern border five communes belonging to Hautes-Pyrénées), N. by Gers and E. by Haute-Garonne. Except on the south its boundaries are conventional. The south of the department, comprising two-thirds of its area, is occupied by the central Pyrénées. Some of the peaks reach or exceed the height of 10,000 ft., the Vignemale (10,820 ft.) being the highest in the French Pyrénées. The imposing cirques (Cirques de Troumouse, Gavarnie and Estaubé), with their glaciers and waterfalls, and the pleasant valleys attract a large number of tourists, the most noted point being the Cirque de Gavarnie. The northern portion of the department is a region of plains and undulating hills clothed with cornfields, vineyards and meadows. To the north-east, however, the 75 cold and wind-swept plateau of Lannemezan (about 2000 ft.), the watershed of the streams that come down on the French side of the Pyrenees, presents in its bleakness and barrenness a striking contrast to the plain that lies below. The department is drained by three principal streams, the Gave de Pau, the Adour and the Neste, an affluent of the Garonne. The sources of the first and third lie close together in the Cirque of Gavarnie and on the slopes of Troumouse, whence they flow respectively to the north-west and north-east. An important section of the Pyrenees, which carries the Massif Néouvielle and the Pic du Midi de Bigorre (with its meteorological observatory), runs northward between these two valleys. From the Pic du Midi descends the Adour, which, after watering the pleasant valley of Campan, leaves the mountains at Bagnères and then divides into a multitude of channels, to irrigate the rich plain of Tarbes. The chief of these is the Canal d’Alaric with a length of 36 m. Beyond Hautes-Pyrénées it receives on the right the Arros, which flows through the department from south to north-northwest; on the left it receives the Gave de Pau. This latter stream, rising in Gavarnie, is joined at Luz by the Gave de Bastan from Néouvielle, and at Pierrefitte by the Gave de Cauterets, fed by streams from the Vignemale. The Gave de Pau, after passing Argelès, a well-known centre for excursions, and Lourdes, leaves the mountains and turns sharply from north to west; it has a greater volume of water than the Adour, but, being more of a mountain torrent, is regarded as a tributary of the Adour, which is navigable in the latter part of its course. The Neste d’Aure, descending from the peaks of Néouvielle and Troumouse, receives at Arreau the Neste de Louron from the pass of Clarabide and flows northwards through a beautiful valley as far as La Barthe, where it turns east; it is important as furnishing the plateau of Lannemezan with a canal, the Canal de la Neste, the waters of which are partly used for irrigation and partly for supplying the streams that rise there and are dried up in summer—the Gers and the Baïse, affluents of the Garonne. This latter only touches the department. The climate of Hautes-Pyrénées, though very cold on the highlands, is warm and moist in the plains, where there are hot summers, fine autumns, mild winters and rainy springs. On the plateau of Lannemezan, while the summers are dry and scorching, the winters are very severe. The average annual rainfall at Tarbes, in the north of the department, is about 34 in.; at the higher altitudes it is much greater. The mean annual temperature at Tarbes is 59° Fahr.

HAUTES-PYRÉNÉES, is a department in southwestern France, located on the Spanish border. It was established in 1790, with half of its territory taken from Bigorre and the rest from Armagnac, Nébouzan, Astarac, and Quatre Vallées, all of which were part of the Gascony province. The population in 1906 was 209,397, and the area covers 1,750 square miles. Hautes-Pyrénées is bordered to the south by Spain, to the west by the department of Basses-Pyrénées (which contains five communes that belong to Hautes-Pyrénées on its eastern edge), to the north by Gers, and to the east by Haute-Garonne. With the exception of the southern border, the boundaries are mostly conventional. The southern part of the department, which makes up two-thirds of the area, is home to the central Pyrénées. Some peaks reach heights of 10,000 feet or more, with the Vignemale (10,820 feet) being the tallest in the French Pyrénées. The impressive cirques (Cirques de Troumouse, Gavarnie, and Estaubé), featuring glaciers and waterfalls, along with the scenic valleys, draw many tourists, especially the renowned Cirque de Gavarnie. The northern section of the department is characterized by plains and rolling hills covered with cornfields, vineyards, and meadows. However, in the northeast, the cold, windy plateau of Lannemezan (around 2,000 feet) serves as the watershed for streams that flow down the French side of the Pyrenees, starkly contrasting the fertile plain below with its barren landscape. The department is drained by three main rivers: the Gave de Pau, the Adour, and the Neste, which is a tributary of the Garonne. The sources of the first and third are located close together in the Cirque of Gavarnie and on the slopes of Troumouse, with the Gave de Pau flowing northwest and the Neste flowing northeast. An important section of the Pyrenees includes the Massif Néouvielle and the Pic du Midi de Bigorre (which hosts a meteorological observatory) running north between these two valleys. The Adour flows from the Pic du Midi, watering the picturesque valley of Campan before exiting the mountains at Bagnères, where it splits into multiple channels to irrigate the rich plain of Tarbes. The main channel is the Canal d’Alaric, which is 36 miles long. Beyond Hautes-Pyrénées, it receives the Arros from the right, which travels through the department from southwest to north-northwest. On the left, it receives the Gave de Pau, which rises in Gavarnie and is joined at Luz by the Gave de Bastan from Néouvielle and at Pierrefitte by the Gave de Cauterets, fed by streams from the Vignemale. After flowing past Argelès, a popular excursion center, and Lourdes, the Gave de Pau exits the mountains and sharply turns from north to west; it has a larger water volume than the Adour, but since it is more of a mountain torrent, it is considered a tributary of the Adour, which is navigable in its later stages. The Neste d’Aure descends from the peaks of Néouvielle and Troumouse, receiving the Neste de Louron from the Clarabide pass at Arreau and flowing north through a beautiful valley until La Barthe, where it bends east. It is significant for supplying the Lannemezan plateau with the Canal de la Neste, with waters used partially for irrigation and partially for sustaining streams that rise there and dry up in summer—the Gers and the Baïse, which are tributaries of the Garonne. The Garonne only touches the department. The climate of Hautes-Pyrénées is very cold in the highlands but warm and humid in the plains, featuring hot summers, beautiful autumns, mild winters, and rainy springs. On the Lannemezan plateau, summers are dry and scorching, while winters are quite harsh. The average annual rainfall at Tarbes, located in the north of the department, is about 34 inches; it increases significantly at higher elevations. The mean annual temperature in Tarbes is 59° Fahrenheit.

Hautes-Pyrénées is agricultural in the plains, pastoral in the highlands. The more important cereals are wheat and maize, which is much used for the feeding of pigs and poultry, especially geese; rye, oats and barley are grown in the mountain districts. The wines of Madiran and Peyriguère are well known and tobacco is also cultivated; chestnut trees and fruit trees are grown on the lower slopes. In the neighbourhood of Tarbes and Bagnères-de-Bigorre horse-breeding is the principal occupation and there is a famous stud at Tarbes. The horse of the region is the result of a fusion of Arab, English and Navarrese blood and is well fitted for saddle and harness; it is largely used by light cavalry regiments. Cattle raising is important; the milch-cows of Lourdes and the oxen of Tarbes and the valley of the Aure are highly esteemed. Sheep and goats are also reared. The forests, which occur chiefly in the highlands, contain bears, boars, wolves and other wild animals. There are at Campan and Sarrancolin quarries of fine marble, which is sawn and worked at Bagnères. There is a group of slate quarries at Labassère. Deposits of lignite, lead, manganese and zinc are found. The mineral springs of Hautes-Pyrénées are numerous and much visited. The principal in the valley of the Gave de Pau are Cauterets (hot springs containing sulphur and sodium), St Sauveur (springs with sulphur and sodium), and Barèges (hot springs with sulphur and sodium), and in the valley of the Adour Bagnères (hot or cold springs containing calcium sulphates, iron, sulphur and sodium) and Capvern near Lannemezan (springs containing calcium sulphates).

Hautes-Pyrénées is agricultural in the plains and pastoral in the highlands. The main crops are wheat and corn, which are widely used to feed pigs and poultry, especially geese; rye, oats, and barley are grown in the mountain areas. The wines of Madiran and Peyriguère are well-known, and tobacco is also cultivated; chestnut trees and fruit trees grow on the lower slopes. In the Tarbes and Bagnères-de-Bigorre area, horse breeding is the main occupation, and there’s a famous stud in Tarbes. The region's horses come from a mix of Arab, English, and Navarrese breeds and are well-suited for riding and harness work; they are mainly used by light cavalry regiments. Cattle raising is important; the milk cows of Lourdes and the oxen from Tarbes and the Aure valley are highly valued. Sheep and goats are also raised. The forests, mostly found in the highlands, are home to bears, boars, wolves, and other wild animals. There are quarries of fine marble in Campan and Sarrancolin, which are sawed and worked in Bagnères. There's also a group of slate quarries at Labassère. Deposits of lignite, lead, manganese, and zinc are present. The mineral springs of Hautes-Pyrénées are numerous and frequently visited. The main ones in the Gave de Pau valley are Cauterets (hot springs with sulphur and sodium), St Sauveur (springs with sulphur and sodium), and Barèges (hot springs with sulphur and sodium). In the Adour valley, Bagnères has hot or cold springs containing calcium sulfates, iron, sulfur, and sodium, and Capvern near Lannemezan has springs with calcium sulfates.

The department has flour-mills and saw-mills, a large military arsenal at Tarbes, paper-mills, tanneries and manufactories of agricultural implements and looms. The spinning and weaving of wool and the manufacture of knitted goods are carried on; Bagnères-de-Bigorre is the chief centre of the textile industry.

The department has flour mills and sawmills, a big military arsenal in Tarbes, paper mills, tanneries, and factories for agricultural tools and looms. They spin and weave wool and make knitted goods as well; Bagnères-de-Bigorre is the main hub of the textile industry.

Of the passes (ports) into Spain, even the chief, Gavarnie (7398 ft.), is not accessible to carriages. The department is served by the Southern railway and is traversed from west to east by the main line from Bayonne to Toulouse. There are three arrondissements, those of Tarbes, Argelès and Bagnères-de-Bigorre, 26 cantons and 480 communes. Tarbes is the capital of Hautes-Pyrénées, which constitutes the diocese of Tarbes, and is attached to the appeal court of Pau; it forms part of the region of the XVIII. army corps. In educational matters it falls within the circumscription of the académie of Toulouse. Tarbes, Lourdes, Bagnères-de-Bigorre and Luz-St Sauveur are the principal towns. St Savin, in the valley of the Gave de Pau, and Sarrancolin have interesting Romanesque churches. The church of Maubourguet built by the Templars in the 12th century is also remarkable.

Of the passes (ports) into Spain, even the main one, Gavarnie (7398 ft.), isn’t accessible to vehicles. The region is served by the Southern railway and is crossed from west to east by the main line from Bayonne to Toulouse. There are three districts: Tarbes, Argelès, and Bagnères-de-Bigorre, along with 26 cantons and 480 communes. Tarbes is the capital of Hautes-Pyrénées, which makes up the diocese of Tarbes and is connected to the appeal court of Pau; it is part of the XVIII army corps region. In terms of education, it falls under the jurisdiction of the académie of Toulouse. Key towns include Tarbes, Lourdes, Bagnères-de-Bigorre, and Luz-St Sauveur. St Savin, located in the valley of the Gave de Pau, and Sarrancolin feature interesting Romanesque churches. The church of Maubourguet, built by the Templars in the 12th century, is also noteworthy.


HAUTE-VIENNE, a department of central France, formed in 1790 of Haut-Limousin and of portions of Marche, Poitou and Berry. Pop. (1906), 385,732. Area, 2144 sq. m. It is bounded N. by Indre, E. by Creuse, S.E. by Corrèze, S.W. by Dordogne, W. by Charente and N.W. by Vienne. Haute-Vienne belongs to the central plateau of France, and drains partly to the Loire and partly to the Garonne. The highest altitude (2549 ft.) is in the extreme south-east, and belongs to the treeless but well-watered plateau of Millevaches, formed of granite, gneiss and mica. From that point the department slopes towards the west, south-west and north. To the north-west of the Millevaches are the Ambazac and Blond Hills, both separating the valley of the Vienne from that of the Gartempe, a tributary of the Creuse. The Vienne traverses the department from east to west, passing Eymoutiers, St Léonard, Limoges and St Junien, and receiving on the right the Maude and the Taurion. The Isle, which flows into the Dordogne, with its tributaries the Auvézère and the Dronne, and the Tardoire and the Bandiat, tributaries of the Charente, all rise in the south of the department. The altitude and inland position of Haute-Vienne, its geological character, and the northern exposure of its valleys make the winters long and severe; but the climate is milder in the west and north-west. The annual rainfall often reaches 36 or 37 in. and even more in the mountains. Haute-Vienne is on the whole unproductive. Rye, wheat, buckwheat and oats are the cereals most grown, but the chestnut, which is a characteristic product of the department, still forms the staple food of large numbers of the population. Potatoes, mangolds, hemp and colza are cultivated. After the chestnut, walnuts and cider-apples are the principal fruits. Good breeds of horned cattle and sheep are reared and find a ready market in Paris. Horses for remount purposes are also raised. The quarries furnish granite and large quantities of kaolin, which is both exported and used in the porcelain works of the department. Amianthus, emeralds and garnets are found. Limoges is the centre of the porcelain industry and has important liqueur distilleries. Woollen goods, starch, paper and pasteboard, wooden and leather shoes, gloves, agricultural implements and hats are other industrial products, and there are flour-mills, breweries, dye-works, tanneries, iron foundries and printing works. Wine and alcohol for the liqueur-manufacture, coal, raw materials for textile industries, hops, skins and various manufactured articles are among the imports.

HAUTE-VIENNE, is a department in central France, created in 1790 from parts of Haut-Limousin and sections of Marche, Poitou, and Berry. Population (1906): 385,732. Area: 2144 sq. miles. It is bordered to the north by Indre, to the east by Creuse, to the southeast by Corrèze, to the southwest by Dordogne, to the west by Charente, and to the northwest by Vienne. Haute-Vienne is part of the central plateau of France, draining partly into the Loire and partly into the Garonne. The highest point (2549 ft.) is located in the extreme southeast on the treeless but well-watered Millevaches plateau, made up of granite, gneiss, and mica. From that point, the department slopes west, southwest, and north. To the northwest of Millevaches are the Ambazac and Blond Hills, which separate the Vienne valley from the Gartempe valley, a tributary of the Creuse. The Vienne river flows through the department from east to west, passing through Eymoutiers, St Léonard, Limoges, and St Junien, receiving the Maude and the Taurion on the right. The Isle river, which flows into the Dordogne, along with its tributaries the Auvézère and the Dronne, as well as the Tardoire and the Bandiat (tributaries of the Charente), all originate in the south of the department. The elevation and inland location of Haute-Vienne, its geological features, and the northern exposure of its valleys contribute to long and harsh winters; however, the climate is milder in the west and northwest. Annual rainfall often reaches 36 or 37 inches and even more in the mountains. Overall, Haute-Vienne is not very productive. Rye, wheat, buckwheat, and oats are the most common cereals grown, but the chestnut, a key product of the department, remains a staple food for many people. Potatoes, mangolds, hemp, and colza are also cultivated. After chestnuts, walnuts and cider apples are the primary fruits. Good breeds of cattle and sheep are raised and are easily sold in Paris. Horses for remount purposes are also bred. The quarries provide granite and large amounts of kaolin, which are both exported and used in the local porcelain factories. Amianthus, emeralds, and garnets can also be found. Limoges is the hub of the porcelain industry and houses important liqueur distilleries. Other industrial products include woolen goods, starch, paper and pasteboard, wooden and leather shoes, gloves, agricultural tools, and hats, along with flour mills, breweries, dye works, tanneries, iron foundries, and printing shops. The imports include wine and alcohol for liqueur production, coal, raw materials for textile industries, hops, hides, and various manufactured goods.

The department is served almost entirely by the Orléans Railway. It is divided into the arrondissements of Limoges, Bellac, Rochechouart and St Yrieix (29 cantons and 205 communes), and belongs to the académie (educational division) of Poitiers and the ecclesiastical province of Bourges. Limoges, the capital, is the seat of a bishopric and of a court of appeal, and is the headquarters of the XII. army corps. The other principal towns are St Yrieix and St Junien. Solignac, St Léonard and Le Dorat have fine Romanesque churches. The remains 76 of the chateau of Chalusset (S.S.E. of Limoges), the most remarkable feudal ruins in Limousin, and the château of Rochechouart, which dates from the 13th, 15th and 16th centuries, are also of interest.

The department is primarily served by the Orléans Railway. It’s divided into the districts of Limoges, Bellac, Rochechouart, and St Yrieix (29 cantons and 205 communes), and it falls under the académie (educational division) of Poitiers and the ecclesiastical province of Bourges. Limoges, the capital, is the location of a bishopric and a court of appeal, and it serves as the headquarters of the XII. army corps. The other main towns are St Yrieix and St Junien. Solignac, St Léonard, and Le Dorat feature beautiful Romanesque churches. The remains of the chateau of Chalusset (S.S.E. of Limoges), the most notable feudal ruins in Limousin, and the château of Rochechouart, which dates back to the 13th, 15th, and 16th centuries, are also of interest.


HAUT-RHIN, before 1871 a department of eastern France, formed in 1790 from the southern portion of Alsace. The name “Haut-Rhin” is sometimes used of the territory of Belfort (q.v.).

HAUT-RHIN, before 1871 was a region in eastern France, created in 1790 from the southern part of Alsace. The name "Haut-Rhin" is occasionally applied to the area of Belfort (q.v.).


HAÜY, RENÉ JUST (1743-1822), French mineralogist, commonly styled the Abbé Haüy, from being an honorary canon of Notre Dame, was born at St Just, in the department of Oise, on the 28th of February 1743. His parents were in a humble rank of life, and were only enabled by the kindness of friends to send their son to the college of Navarre and afterwards to that of Lemoine. Becoming one of the teachers at the latter, he began to devote his leisure hours to the study of botany; but an accident directed his attention to another field in natural history. Happening to let fall a specimen of calcareous spar belonging to a friend, he was led by examination of the fragments to make experiments which resulted in the statement of the geometrical law of crystallization associated with his name (see Crystallography). The value of this discovery, the mathematical theory of which is given by Haüy in his Traité de minéralogie, was immediately recognized, and when communicated to the Academy, it secured for its author a place in that society. Haüy’s name is also known for the observations he made in pyro-electricity. When the Revolution broke out, he was thrown into prison, and his life was even in danger, when he was saved by the intercession of E. Geoffroy Saint-Hilaire. In 1802, under Napoleon, he became professor of mineralogy at the museum of natural history, but after 1814 he was deprived of his appointments by the government of the Restoration. His latter days were consequently clouded by poverty, but the courage and high moral qualities which had helped him forward in his youth did not desert him in his old age; and he lived cheerful and respected till his death at Paris on the 3rd of June 1822.

HAÜY, RENÉ JUST (1743-1822), French mineralogist, commonly known as Abbé Haüy because he was an honorary canon of Notre Dame, was born in St Just, Oise, on February 28, 1743. His parents were of modest means and could only send him to the College of Navarre and later to the College of Lemoine with the help of friends. After becoming a teacher there, he started spending his free time studying botany; however, an accident shifted his focus to a different area of natural history. When he accidentally dropped a piece of calcareous spar belonging to a friend, examining the fragments led him to conduct experiments that established the geometrical law of crystallization associated with his name (see Crystallography). The significance of this discovery, the mathematical theory of which Haüy presented in his Traité de minéralogie, was quickly recognized, and once shared with the Academy, it earned him a place in the society. Haüy is also recognized for his observations in pyro-electricity. When the Revolution began, he was imprisoned and faced life-threatening danger until E. Geoffroy Saint-Hilaire intervened on his behalf. In 1802, under Napoleon, he became a professor of mineralogy at the natural history museum, but after 1814, he lost his positions due to the Restoration government. His later years were marked by poverty, but the courage and strong moral character that had aided him in his youth did not abandon him in old age; he lived cheerfully and with respect until his death in Paris on June 3, 1822.

The following are his principal works: Essai d’une théorie sur la structure des cristaux (1784); Exposition raisonnée de la théorie de l’électricité et du magnétisme, d’après les principes d’Aepinus (1787); De la structure considérée comme caractère distinctif des minéraux (1793); Exposition abrégée de la théorie de la structure des cristaux (1793); Extrait d’un traité élémentaire de minéralogie (1797); Traité de minéralogie (4 vols., 1801); Traité élémentaire de physique (2 vols., 1803, 1806); Tableau comparatif des résultats de la cristallographie, et de l’analyse chimique relativement à la classification des minéraux (1809); Traité des pierres précieuses (1817); Traité de cristallographie (2 vols., 1822). He also contributed papers, of which 100 are enumerated in the Royal Society’s catalogue, to various scientific journals, especially the Journal de physique and the Annals du Muséum d’Histoire Naturelle.

The following are his main works: Essai d’une théorie sur la structure des cristaux (1784); Exposition raisonnée de la théorie de l’électricité et du magnétisme, d’après les principes d’Aepinus (1787); De la structure considérée comme caractère distinctif des minéraux (1793); Exposition abrégée de la théorie de la structure des cristaux (1793); Extrait d’un traité élémentaire de minéralogie (1797); Traité de minéralogie (4 vols., 1801); Traité élémentaire de physique (2 vols., 1803, 1806); Tableau comparatif des résultats de la cristallographie, et de l’analyse chimique relativement à la classification des minéraux (1809); Traité des pierres précieuses (1817); Traité de cristallographie (2 vols., 1822). He also wrote papers, with 100 listed in the Royal Society’s catalogue, published in various scientific journals, especially the Journal de physique and the Annals du Muséum d’Histoire Naturelle.


HAVANA (the name is of aboriginal origin; Span. Habana or, more fully, San Cristóbal de la Habana), the capital of Cuba, the largest city of the West Indies, and one of the principal seats of commerce in the New World, situated on the northern coast of the island in 23° 9′ N. lat. and 82° 22′ W. long. Pop. (1899), 235,981; (1907), 297,159. The city occupies a peninsula to the W. of the harbour, between its waters and those of the sea. Several small streams, of which the Almendares river is the largest, empty into the harbour. The pouch-shaped, landlocked bay is spacious and easy of access. Large merchantmen and men-of-war can come up and unload along at least a considerable part of the water-front. The entrance, which is encumbered by neither bar nor rock, averages about 260 yds. in width and is about 1400 yds. long. Within, the bay breaks up into three distinct arms, Marimalena or Regla Bay, Guanabacoa Bay and the Bay of Atarés. On the left hand of the entrance stands the lofty lighthouse tower of the Morro. The sewage of the city and other impurities were for centuries allowed to pollute the bay, but the extent to which the harbour was thereby filled up has been exaggerated. Though certainly very much smaller than it once was, there is a difference of opinion as to whether the harbour has grown smaller since the end of the 18th century.

HAVANA (the name is of indigenous origin; Span. Habana or, more fully, San Cristóbal de la Habana), the capital of Cuba, the largest city in the Caribbean, and one of the main commercial hubs in the New World, located on the northern coast of the island at 23° 9′ N. latitude and 82° 22′ W. longitude. Population (1899), 235,981; (1907), 297,159. The city sits on a peninsula to the west of the harbor, between its waters and the sea. Several small streams, with the Almendares river being the largest, flow into the harbor. The pouch-shaped, landlocked bay is spacious and easily accessible. Large cargo ships and warships can come in and unload along a significant part of the waterfront. The entrance, which is free of any bar or rocks, is about 260 yards wide and approximately 1400 yards long. Inside, the bay splits into three distinct arms: Marimalena or Regla Bay, Guanabacoa Bay, and the Bay of Atarés. To the left of the entrance stands the tall lighthouse tower of the Morro. For centuries, the city's sewage and other waste were allowed to pollute the bay, but the extent of the harbor's filling has been overstated. While it is certainly much smaller than it once was, opinions differ on whether the harbor has continued to shrink since the late 18th century.

From the sea the city presents a picturesque appearance. The Havana side of the bay has a sea-wall and an excellent drive. The city walls, begun in 1671 and completed about 1740, were almost entirely demolished between 1863 and 1880, only a few insignificant remnants having survived the American military occupation of 1899-1902; but it is still usual to speak of the “intramural” and the “extramural” city. The former, the old city, lying close to the harbour front, has streets as narrow as is consistent with wheel traffic. Obispo (Pi y Margall in the new republican nomenclature), O’Reilly and San Rafael are the finest retail business streets, and the Prado and the Cerro the handsomest residential streets in the city proper. The new city, including the suburbs to the W. overlooking the sea, has been laid out on a somewhat more spacious plan, with isolated dwellings and wide thoroughfares, some planted with trees. Most of the houses, and especially those of the planter aristocracy, are massively built of stone, with large grated windows, flat roofs with heavy parapets and inner courts. As the erection of wooden buildings was illegal long after 1772, it is only in the suburban districts that they are to be seen. The limestone which underlies almost all the island affords excellent building stone. The poorer houses are built of brick with plaster fronts. Three-fourths of all the buildings of the city are of one very high storey; there are but a few dozen buildings as high as four storeys. Under Spanish rule, Havana was reputed to be a city of noises and smells. There was no satisfactory cleaning of the streets or draining of the subsoil, and the harbour was rendered visibly foul by the impurities of the town. A revolution was worked in this respect during the United States military occupation of the city, and the republic continued the work.

From the sea, the city looks picturesque. The Havana side of the bay has a seawall and a great drive. The city walls, which began construction in 1671 and were completed around 1740, were mostly destroyed between 1863 and 1880, with only a few minor remnants surviving the American military occupation from 1899 to 1902. However, people still commonly refer to the “intramural” and “extramural” city. The former, the old city, is close to the harbor front and has streets narrow enough for vehicles. Obispo (Pi y Margall in the new republican names), O’Reilly, and San Rafael are the best shopping streets, while the Prado and the Cerro are the most beautiful residential streets in the city. The new city, including the suburbs to the west overlooking the sea, has been designed on a more spacious layout, with single-family homes and wide roads, some lined with trees. Most of the houses, particularly those of the wealthy planters, are sturdily built of stone, featuring large barred windows, flat roofs with thick parapets, and inner courtyards. Since wooden buildings were illegal long after 1772, they can only be found in the suburban areas. The limestone that underlies almost the entire island provides excellent building stone. The poorer houses are made of brick with plastered fronts. Three-quarters of the buildings in the city are one very high story, and only a few dozen reach four stories. Under Spanish rule, Havana was known for its noise and odors. There was no effective street cleaning or drainage, and the harbor became visibly polluted by the town's waste. A significant change occurred during the U.S. military occupation of the city, and the republic continued those improvements.

Climate.—The general characteristics of the climate of Havana are described in the article Cuba. A temperature as low as 40° F. is extraordinary; and freezing point is only reached on extremely rare occasions, such as during hurricanes or electric storms. The mean annual temperature is about 25.7° C. (78° F.); that of the hottest month is about 28.8° C. (84° F.), and that of the coldest, 21° C. (70° F.). The means of the four seasons are approximately—for December, January, February and successive quarters—23°, 27°, 28° and 26° C. (73.4°, 80.6°, 82.4° and 78.8° F.). The mean relative humidity is between 75 and 80 for all seasons save spring, when it is least and may be from 65 upward. A difference of 30° C. (54° F.) at mid-day in the temperature of two spots close together, one in sun and one in shade, is not unusual. The daily variation of temperature is also considerable. The depressing effect of the heat and humidity is greatly relieved by afternoon breezes from the sea, and the nights are invariably comfortable and generally cool.

Climate.—The general characteristics of Havana's climate are discussed in the article on Cuba. A temperature dropping to 40° F. is extremely rare, and freezing temperatures only occur on very infrequent occasions, like during hurricanes or electrical storms. The average annual temperature is about 25.7° C. (78° F.); the hottest month averages around 28.8° C. (84° F.), while the coldest month averages 21° C. (70° F.). The average temperatures for the four seasons are roughly—December, January, February, and the following quarters—23°, 27°, 28°, and 26° C. (73.4°, 80.6°, 82.4°, and 78.8° F.). The average relative humidity ranges from 75 to 80 for all seasons except spring, when it is lower and can be from 65 and above. A temperature difference of 30° C. (54° F.) at midday between two close spots, one in the sun and one in the shade, is not uncommon. The daily temperature variation is also significant. The oppressive heat and humidity are greatly eased by afternoon breezes from the sea, and the nights are always comfortable and usually cool.

Defences.—The principal defences of Havana under Spanish rule, when the city was maintained as a military stronghold of the first rank, were (to use the original and unabbreviated form of the names) the Castillo de San Salvador de la Punta, to the W. of the harbour entrance; the Castillo de Los Tres Reyes del Morro and San Carlos de la Cabaña, to the E.; the Santo Domingo de Atarés, at the head of the western arm of the bay, commanding the city and its vicinity; and the Castillo del Príncipe (1767-1780), situated inland on an eminence to the W. El Morro, as it is popularly called, was first erected in 1590-1640, and La Punta, a much smaller fort, is of the same period; both were reconstructed after the evacuation of the city by the English in 1763, from which time also date the castles of Príncipe, Atarés and the Cabaña. The Cabaña, which alone can accommodate some 6000 men, fronts the bay for a distance of more than 800 yds., and was long supposed, at least by Spaniards, to be the strongest fortress of America. Here is the “laurel ditch” or “dead-line”—commemorated by a handsome bronze relief set in the wall of the fortress—where scores of Cuban patriots were shot. To the E. and W. inland are several small forts. The military establishment of the republic is very small.

Defenses.—The main defenses of Havana during Spanish rule, when the city was a top military stronghold, were (to use the full, unshortened names) the Castillo de San Salvador de la Punta, located to the west of the harbor entrance; the Castillo de Los Tres Reyes del Morro and San Carlos de la Cabaña, to the east; the Santo Domingo de Atarés, at the head of the western arm of the bay, overseeing the city and its surroundings; and the Castillo del Príncipe (1767-1780), located inland on a hill to the west. El Morro, as it's commonly known, was built between 1590 and 1640, and La Punta, a much smaller fort, was constructed during the same period; both were rebuilt after the English evacuated the city in 1763, which is also when the castles of Príncipe, Atarés, and Cabaña were created. The Cabaña, which can hold about 6000 men, stretches along the bay for more than 800 yards and was long believed by Spaniards to be the strongest fortress in America. Here stands the “laurel ditch” or “dead-line”—memorialized by a beautiful bronze relief embedded in the fortress wall—where many Cuban patriots were executed. There are several small forts to the east and west inland. The military force of the republic is very small.

Churches.—Of the many old churches in the city, the most noteworthy is the cathedral. The original building was abandoned in 1762. The present one, originally the church of the Jesuits, was erected in 1656-1724. The interior decoration dates largely from the last decade of the 18th century and the first two decades of the 19th. In the wall of the chancel, a medallion and inscription long distinguished the tomb of Columbus, whose remains were removed hither from Santo Domingo in 1796. In 1898 they were taken to Spain. Mention may also be made of the churches of Santo Domingo (begun in 1578), Santa Catalina (1700), San Agustin (1608), Santa Clara (1644), La Merced (1744, with a collection of oil paintings) and San Felipe (1693). Monasteries and nunneries were very numerous until the suppression of the religious orders in 1842, when many became simple churches. Some of the convents were successful in conserving their wealth. The former monastery of the Jesuits, now the Jesuit church of Belén (1704), at the corner of Luz 77 and Compostela Streets, is one of the most elegant and richly ornamented in Cuba.

Churches.—Of the many old churches in the city, the most notable is the cathedral. The original building was abandoned in 1762. The current structure, originally the Jesuit church, was built between 1656 and 1724. Most of the interior decoration is from the last decade of the 18th century and the first two decades of the 19th. In the wall of the chancel, a medallion and inscription long marked the tomb of Columbus, whose remains were moved here from Santo Domingo in 1796. They were taken to Spain in 1898. Other notable churches include Santo Domingo (started in 1578), Santa Catalina (1700), San Agustin (1608), Santa Clara (1644), La Merced (1744, featuring a collection of oil paintings), and San Felipe (1693). Monasteries and convents were very common until the religious orders were suppressed in 1842, after which many became regular churches. Some convents managed to preserve their wealth. The former Jesuit monastery, now the Jesuit church of Belén (1704), located at the corner of Luz 77 and Compostela Streets, is one of the most elegant and richly decorated in Cuba.

Public Buildings.—The Palace, which served as a residence for the captains-general during the Spanish rule, is the home of the city government and the residence of the president of the republic. It is a large and handsome stone structure (tinted in white and yellow), and stands on the site of the original parish church, facing the Plaza de Armas from the east. It was erected in 1773-1792 and radically altered in 1835 and 1851. A large municipal gaol (1834-1837), capable of receiving 500 inmates, with barracks for a regiment, is a striking object on the Prado. The Castillo del Príncipe now serves as the state penitentiary. Among other public buildings are the exchange (El Muelle), the custom-house (formerly the church of San Francisco; begun about 1575, rebuilt in 1731-1737), and the Maestranza (c. 1723), once the navy yard and the headquarters of the artillery and now the home of the national library. All these are in the old city. Some of the older structures—notably the church of Santo Domingo and the Maestranza—are built of grey limestone. In the old city also are the Plaza Vieja, dating from the middle of the 16th century (with the modern Mercado de Cristina, of 1837—destroyed 1908), the old stronghold La Fuerza, erected by Hernando de Soto in 1538, once the treasury of the flotas and galleons, and residence of the governors, with its old watch-tower (La Vigía); and the Plaza de Armas, with the palace, the Senate building, a statue of Fernando VII. (1833), and a commemorative chapel (El Templete, 1828) to mark the supposed spot where mass was first said at the establishment of the city. Mention must be made of the large and interesting markets, especially those of Colón and Tacón. Of the theatres, which until the end of the Spanish period had to compete with the bull-ring and the cockpit, the most important is the Tacón (now “Nacional”) erected in 1838.

Public Buildings.—The Palace, which was the residence for the captains-general during Spanish rule, is now the home of the city government and the residence of the president of the republic. It's a large and beautiful stone building (painted in white and yellow) that stands on the site of the original parish church, facing the Plaza de Armas from the east. It was built from 1773 to 1792 and underwent major renovations in 1835 and 1851. A large municipal jail (1834-1837), designed to hold 500 inmates and with barracks for a regiment, is a prominent feature on the Prado. The Castillo del Príncipe now operates as the state penitentiary. Other public buildings include the exchange (El Muelle), the custom house (which was once the church of San Francisco; construction began around 1575 and it was rebuilt from 1731 to 1737), and the Maestranza (c. 1723), which used to be the navy yard and the headquarters for the artillery and now houses the national library. All these structures are located in the old city. Some of the older buildings—notably the church of Santo Domingo and the Maestranza—are made of grey limestone. The old city also includes the Plaza Vieja, which dates back to the mid-16th century (with the modern Mercado de Cristina, built in 1837 and destroyed in 1908), the ancestral stronghold La Fuerza built by Hernando de Soto in 1538, which once served as the treasury for the flotas and galleons and the residence of the governors, complete with its old watch-tower (La Vigía); and the Plaza de Armas, featuring the palace, the Senate building, a statue of Fernando VII. (1833), and a commemorative chapel (El Templete, 1828) marking the supposed location where mass was first said upon the city's establishment. We should also highlight the large and fascinating markets, particularly those of Colón and Tacón. Among the theaters, which until the end of the Spanish period had to compete with the bullring and the cockpit, the most notable is the Tacón (now “Nacional”) built in 1838.

Havana is famous for its promenades, drives and public gardens. On the city’s E. harbour front runs the Paseo (Alameda) de Paula (1772-1775, improved 1844-1845), an embanked drive, continued by the Paseo de Rocali and the Cortina de Valdes, with fine views of the forts and the harbour. On the N., along the sea, beginning at the Punta fortress and running W. for several miles along the sea-wall, is a speedway and pleasure-drive, known—from the wall—as the Malecón. Beginning at the Punta fortress—where a park was laid out in 1899 in the place of an ugly quarter, with a memorial to the students judicially murdered by the Spanish volunteers in 1871—and running along the line of the former city walls, past the Parque Central, through the Parque de Isabel II. and the Parque de la India (these two names are now practically abandoned) to the Parque de Colón or Campo de Marte, is the Prado,1 a wide and handsome promenade and drive, shaded with laurels and lined with fine houses and clubs. In 1907 a hurricane destroyed the greater part of the laurels of the Prado and the royal palms of the Parque de Colón. Central Park is surrounded by hotels, theatres, cafés and clubs, the last including the Centro Asturiano and Casino Español. In the centre is a monument to José Martí (1853-1895), “the apostle of independence,” and in an adjoining square is the city’s fine monument to the Cuban engineer Francisco de Albear, to whom she owes her water system. From the Parque de Colón the Calle (or Calzada) de la Reina—an ordinary business street, once a promenade and known as the Alameda de Isabel II.—with its continuations, the Paseo de Carlos III. and Paseo de Tacón, runs westward through the city past the botanical gardens and the Quinta de los Molinos to the citadel of El Príncipe (1774-1794). A statue of Charles III. by Canova (1803), fountains, pavilions and four rows of trees adorn the Paseo de Carlos III. The gardens of Los Molinos, where the captains-general formerly maintained their summer residence, and the adjoining botanical gardens of the university, contain beautiful avenues of palm trees. Near El Príncipe is the Columbus cemetery, with a fine gateway, a handsome monument (1888) to the students shot in 1871, and another (1897; 75 ft. high) to the firemen lost in a great fire in 1890, besides many smaller memorials. The Calzada de la Infanta is a fine street at the W. end of the new city; the Cerro, in the S.W., is lined with massive residences, once the homes of Cuban aristocracy.

Havana is well-known for its promenades, drives, and public gardens. Along the city's east harbor front runs the Paseo (Alameda) de Paula (1772-1775, improved 1844-1845), an embanked road, which continues with the Paseo de Rocali and the Cortina de Valdes, offering great views of the forts and the harbor. To the north, along the ocean, starting at the Punta fortress and extending west for several miles along the seawall, is a road and leisure drive known—as seen from the wall—as the Malecón. Starting at Punta fortress—where a park was created in 1899 to replace an unsightly area, featuring a memorial to the students who were judicially murdered by Spanish volunteers in 1871—and running along the old city walls, past Parque Central, through Parque de Isabel II and Parque de la India (these names are now mostly unused) to Parque de Colón or Campo de Marte, is the Prado, a wide and beautiful promenade and drive, shaded by laurels and lined with elegant houses and clubs. In 1907, a hurricane destroyed most of the laurels along the Prado and the royal palms in Parque de Colón. Central Park is surrounded by hotels, theaters, cafés, and clubs, including Centro Asturiano and Casino Español. In the center stands a monument to José Martí (1853-1895), “the apostle of independence,” and in a nearby square is the city’s impressive monument to Cuban engineer Francisco de Albear, who is responsible for the water system. From Parque de Colón, the Calle (or Calzada) de la Reina—an ordinary business street, once a promenade known as Alameda de Isabel II.—and its extensions, Paseo de Carlos III and Paseo de Tacón, stretch westward through the city, past the botanical gardens and Quinta de los Molinos to the citadel of El Príncipe (1774-1794). The Paseo de Carlos III is decorated with a statue of Charles III by Canova (1803), fountains, pavilions, and four rows of trees. The gardens of Los Molinos, where the captains-general once had their summer residence, along with the adjacent botanical gardens of the university, feature beautiful palm tree-lined avenues. Near El Príncipe is the Columbus cemetery, with an elegant entrance, a notable monument (1888) to the students shot in 1871, and another (1897; 75 ft. high) honoring the firefighters lost in a significant blaze in 1890, in addition to many smaller memorials. The Calzada de la Infanta is a lovely street at the west end of the new city; Cerro, in the southwest, is lined with large residences that were once the homes of Cuban aristocrats.

Suburbs.—In the coral rock of the coast sea-baths are excavated, so that bathers may run no risk from sharks. On the S. and W. the city is backed by an amphitheatre of hills, which are crowned in the W. by the conspicuous fortifications of Castillo del Príncipe. On the lower heights near the city lie Vedado, Jesus del Monte, Luyano and other healthy suburbs. Chorrera, Puentes Grandes, Marianao (founded 1830; pop. 1907, 9332) and Guanabacoa (with mineral springs), are attractive places of resort. Regla, just across the bay (now part of the municipio), has large business interests.

Suburbs.—Along the coral rock of the coast, sea-baths are created to keep swimmers safe from sharks. To the south and west, the city is backed by a ring of hills, with the prominent fortifications of Castillo del Príncipe crowning the western side. On the lower slopes near the city are Vedado, Jesus del Monte, Luyano, and other healthy suburbs. Chorrera, Puentes Grandes, Marianao (established in 1830; population in 1907, 9,332), and Guanabacoa (which has mineral springs) are popular getaway spots. Regla, directly across the bay (now part of the municipio), has significant business interests.

Charities and Education.—Among the numerous charitable institutions the most important hospital is the Casa de Beneficencia y Maternidad (Charity and Maternity Asylum), opened in 1794, and containing an orphan asylum, a maternity ward, a home for vagrants, a lunatic asylum and an infirmary. There is also in the city an immense lazaretto for lepers. The Centro Asturiano, a club with a membership of some ten or fifteen thousand (not limited to Asturians), maintains for the benefit of its members a large and well-managed sanatorium in spacious grounds in the midst of the city.

Charities and Education.—Among the many charitable organizations, the most significant hospital is the Casa de Beneficencia y Maternidad (Charity and Maternity Asylum), which opened in 1794. It includes an orphanage, a maternity ward, a shelter for the homeless, a psychiatric facility, and a clinic. The city also has a large leper hospital. The Centro Asturiano, a club with around ten to fifteen thousand members (not just limited to Asturians), operates a large and well-run sanatorium on spacious grounds right in the city.

Of the schools of the city the most noteworthy is the university (581 regular students, 1907), founded in 1728. Its quarters were in the old convent of Santo Domingo until 1900, when the American military government prepared better quarters for it in the former Pirotecnica Militar, near El Príncipe. There are various laboratories in the city. Other schools are the provincial Institute of Secondary Education (490 regular students in 1907; library of 12,863 vols.), a provincial school of arts and trades (opened 1882), a theological seminary, a boys’ technical school, a school of painting and sculpture, a conservatory of music, normal school, mercantile school and a military academy. The Jesuit church (Belén) has a large college for boys, laboratories, an observatory, a museum of natural history, and an historical library. Great progress has been made in education, which was extremely backward until after the end of Spanish rule. The Sociedad Economica de Amigos del Pais, established in 1792, has always had considerable influence. It has a library of some 42,000 volumes, rich in material for Cuban history. Among other similar organizations are an Academy of Medical, Physical and Natural Sciences (1863); a national library, established in 1901, and having in 1908 about 40,000 volumes, including the finest collection in the world of materials for Cuban history; an anthropological society; various medical societies; and a Bar association. An association of sugar planters is a very important factor in the economic development of the island.

Of the schools in the city, the most notable is the university (581 regular students in 1907), established in 1728. It was located in the old convent of Santo Domingo until 1900, when the American military government provided improved facilities for it in the former Pirotecnica Militar, near El Príncipe. There are various laboratories throughout the city. Other educational institutions include the provincial Institute of Secondary Education (490 regular students in 1907; a library with 12,863 volumes), a provincial school of arts and trades (opened in 1882), a theological seminary, a boys’ technical school, a school for painting and sculpture, a conservatory of music, a normal school, a mercantile school, and a military academy. The Jesuit church (Belén) has a large boys’ college, laboratories, an observatory, a museum of natural history, and a historical library. Great strides have been made in education, which was very underdeveloped until after Spanish rule ended. The Sociedad Economica de Amigos del Pais, founded in 1792, has always had significant influence. It has a library of about 42,000 volumes, with extensive material on Cuban history. Other similar organizations include an Academy of Medical, Physical and Natural Sciences (1863); a national library established in 1901, which had around 40,000 volumes in 1908, including the world's finest collection of materials on Cuban history; an anthropological society; various medical associations; and a Bar association. An association of sugar planters is a crucial factor in the economic development of the island.

Of the newspapers of Havana the most notable is the El Diario de la Marina (established in 1838; under its present name, 1844; morning and evening), which was almost from its foundation an official organ of the Spanish government, and generally the mouthpiece of the most intransigent peninsular opinion in all that concerned the politics of the island. El Ansador Comercial (1868; evening) is devoted almost exclusively to commercial and financial news. Of the other newspapers the leading ones in 1909 were La Discusion (1888; evening), La Luchu (1884; evening) and El Mundo (1902; morning).

Of the newspapers in Havana, the most notable is El Diario de la Marina (founded in 1838; under its current name since 1844; published in the morning and evening), which has been almost from its start an official voice of the Spanish government and generally represents the most rigid opinions from the mainland regarding the politics of the island. El Ansador Comercial (1868; evening) focuses almost entirely on commercial and financial news. Other leading newspapers in 1909 included La Discusion (1888; evening), La Luchu (1884; evening), and El Mundo (1902; morning).

Trade.—Havana commands the wholesale trade of all the western half of the island, and is the centre of commercial and banking interests. Its foreign trade in the five calendar years 1902-1906 (average imports $57,201,276; exports, $40,563,637) amounted to 68.9% of the imports and 44.6% of the exports of the island. The average number of vessels entering the port annually in the ten years from 1864 to 1873 was 1981 (771,196 tons), and the average entries in the five years 1902-1906 were 3698 of 3,904,906 gross tons (coast trade alone, 2162 of 333,795 tons).

Trade.—Havana dominates the wholesale trade for the entire western half of the island and serves as the hub for commercial and banking activities. From 1902 to 1906, its foreign trade averaged $57,201,276 in imports and $40,563,637 in exports, accounting for 68.9% of the island's imports and 44.6% of its exports. On average, 1,981 vessels entered the port each year between 1864 and 1873, totaling 771,196 tons, while the average number of vessels entering from 1902 to 1906 was 3,698, with a gross tonnage of 3,904,906 (coastal trade alone included 2,162 vessels totaling 333,795 tons).

In spite of high tariffs and civil wars, and the competition of Matanzas, Cárdenas, Cienfuegos and other Cuban ports opened to foreign trade in modern times, the commerce of Havana has steadily increased. The chief foreign customers are Great Britain and the United States. The two staple articles of export are sugar and tobacco-wares. Other exports of importance are rum, wax and honey; and of less primary importance, fruits, fine cabinet woods, oils and starch. The leading imports are grains, flour, lard and various other foodstuffs, coal, lumber, petroleum and machinery, all mainly from the United States; wines and olive oil from Spain; jerked beef from South America; fabrics and other staples from varied sources. Rice is a principal food of the people; it was formerly taken from the East Indies, but is now mostly raised in the island.

Despite high tariffs and civil wars, along with the competition from Matanzas, Cárdenas, Cienfuegos, and other Cuban ports that opened to foreign trade in modern times, trade in Havana has consistently grown. The main foreign customers are Great Britain and the United States. The two main export items are sugar and tobacco. Other significant exports include rum, wax, and honey, while fruits, fine woods, oils, and starch are of lesser importance. The top imports are grains, flour, lard, and various other food items, coal, lumber, petroleum, and machinery, primarily sourced from the United States; wines and olive oil from Spain; jerky from South America; and fabrics and other supplies from various places. Rice is a staple food for the people; it used to be sourced from the East Indies, but is now mostly grown on the island.

The chief manufacturing industry of Havana is that of tobacco. Of the cigar factories, some of which are in former public and private palaces, more than a hundred may be reckoned as of the first class. Besides the making of boxes and barrels and other articles necessarily involved in its sugar and tobacco trade, Havana also, to some extent, builds carriages and small ships, and manufactures iron and machinery; but the weight of taxation during the Spanish period was always a heavy deterrent on the development of any business requiring great capital. There are minor manufacturing interests in tanneries, and in the manufacture of sweetmeats, malt and distilled liquors, especially rum, besides soaps, candles, starch, perfume, &c. There is one large and complete petroleum refinery (1905).

The main manufacturing industry in Havana is tobacco. There are over a hundred cigar factories, some located in former public and private palaces, that are considered top-quality. In addition to making boxes, barrels, and other items needed for the sugar and tobacco trade, Havana also produces carriages, small ships, and manufactures iron and machinery to some extent. However, the heavy taxes during the Spanish era significantly hindered the growth of businesses that required large capital investments. There are smaller manufacturing sectors in tanneries and the production of sweets, malt, and distilled beverages, especially rum, as well as soaps, candles, starch, and perfumes. There is also one large and fully operational petroleum refinery established in 1905.

Havana has frequent steam-boat communication with New York, Baltimore, Philadelphia, Tampa, Mobile, New Orleans and other ports of the United States; and about as frequent with several ports in England, Spain and France. It is the starting-point of a railway system which reaches the six provincial capitals between Pinar del Rio and Santiago, Cárdenas, Cienfuegos and other ports. Telegraphs radiate to all parts of the island; a submarine cable to Key West forms part of the line of communication between Colon and New York, and by other cables the island has connexion with various parts of the West Indies and with South America.

Havana has regular steamship service to New York, Baltimore, Philadelphia, Tampa, Mobile, New Orleans, and other ports in the United States, as well as frequent connections to several ports in England, Spain, and France. It serves as the starting point for a railway network that connects the six provincial capitals from Pinar del Río to Santiago, along with Cárdenas, Cienfuegos, and other ports. Telegraph lines extend to all parts of the island; a submarine cable to Key West is part of the communication line between Colon and New York, and through other cables, the island is connected with various regions in the West Indies and South America.

Population and Health.—The population of Havana was reported as 51,307 in 1791; 96,304 in 1811; 94,023 in 1817; 184,508 in 1841. In 1899 the American census showed 235,981, of whom about 25% were foreign (20% Spanish); and the census of 1907 showed 297,159 (not including the attached country districts) and 302,526 (including these country districts), the last being for the “municipio” of Havana. The industrial population is very densely crowded. Owing to this, as well as to the entire lack of proper sanitary customs among the people, the horrible condition of sewerage and the 78 prevalence of yellow fever (first brought to Havana, it is thought, in 1761, from Vera Cruz), the reputation of the city as regards health was long very bad. The practical extermination of yellow fever during the U.S. military occupation following 1899 was a remarkable achievement. In 1895-1899, owing to the war, there were few non-immune persons in the city, and there was no trouble with the fever, but from the autumn of 1899 a heavy immigration from Spain began, and a fever epidemic was raging in 1900. The American military authorities found that the most extraordinary measures for cleansing the city—involving repeated house-to-house inspection, enforced cleanliness, improved drainage and sewerage, the destruction of various public buildings, and thorough cleansing of the streets—although decidedly effective in reducing the general death-rate of the city (average, 1890-1899, 45.83; 1900, 24.40; 1901, 22.11; 1902, 20.63; general death-rate of U.S. soldiers in 1898, 67.94; in 1901-1902, 7.00), apparently did not affect yellow fever at all. In 1900-1901 Major Walter Reed (1851-1902), a surgeon in the United States army, proved by experiments on voluntary human subjects that the infection was spread by the Stegomyia mosquito,2 and the prevention of the disease was then undertaken by Major William C. Gorgas—all patients being screened and mosquitoes practically exterminated.3 The number of subsequent deaths from yellow fever has depended solely on the degree to which the necessary precautionary measures were taken.

Population and Health.—The population of Havana was reported to be 51,307 in 1791; 96,304 in 1811; 94,023 in 1817; and 184,508 in 1841. In 1899, the American census showed 235,981 residents, about 25% of whom were foreign (20% from Spain); while the 1907 census recorded 297,159 (excluding the surrounding rural areas) and 302,526 (including these rural areas), the latter being for the "municipio" of Havana. The industrial population is very densely packed. Due to this, along with a complete lack of proper sanitary practices among the people, the terrible state of sewerage, and the widespread presence of yellow fever (thought to have first arrived in Havana in 1761 from Vera Cruz), the city had a long-standing reputation for poor health. The near-total eradication of yellow fever during the U.S. military occupation after 1899 was a remarkable achievement. Between 1895-1899, due to the war, there were very few non-immune people in the city, and there were no issues with the fever, but starting in the autumn of 1899, a significant influx of immigrants from Spain began, coinciding with a yellow fever outbreak in 1900. The American military found that extraordinary measures to clean up the city—such as thorough house-to-house inspections, enforced cleanliness, better drainage and sewer systems, the demolition of certain public buildings, and detailed street cleaning—while significantly reducing the overall death rate in the city (average for 1890-1899 was 45.83; in 1900 it was 24.40; in 1901 it dropped to 22.11; in 1902, it was down to 20.63; the U.S. military death rate in 1898 was 67.94; and in 1901-1902, it fell to 7.00), seemed to have no impact on yellow fever itself. In 1900-1901, Major Walter Reed (1851-1902), a U.S. Army surgeon, demonstrated through experiments on willing human subjects that the disease was transmitted by the Stegomyia mosquito, and then Major William C. Gorgas took on the task of preventing the disease—screening all patients and almost eliminating mosquitoes. The number of subsequent deaths from yellow fever has depended entirely on how well the necessary preventive measures were implemented.

The entire administrative system of the island, when a Spanish colony, was centred at Havana. Under the republic this remains the capital and the residence of the president, the supreme court, Congress when in session and the chief administrative officers. None of the public services was good in the Spanish period, except the water-supply, which was excellent. The water is derived from the Vento springs, 9 m. from Havana, and is conducted through aqueducts constructed between 1859 and 1894 at a cost of some $5,000,000. About 40,000,000 gallons are supplied daily. The system is owned by the municipality. The older Fernando VII. aqueduct (1831-1835) is still usable in case of need; its supply was the Almendares river (until long after the construction of this, a still older aqueduct, opened at the end of the 16th century, was in use). The sewerage system and conditions of house sanitation were found extremely inadequate when the American army occupied the city in 1899. Several public buildings were so foul that they were demolished and burned. The improvement since the end of Spanish rule has been steady.

The whole administrative system of the island, when it was a Spanish colony, was centered in Havana. Under the republic, this remains the capital and the residence of the president, the supreme court, Congress when it’s in session, and the chief administrative officers. None of the public services were good during the Spanish period, except for the water supply, which was excellent. The water comes from the Vento springs, 9 miles from Havana, and is carried through aqueducts built between 1859 and 1894 at a cost of around $5,000,000. About 40,000,000 gallons are supplied every day. The system is owned by the municipality. The older Fernando VII aqueduct (1831-1835) is still usable if needed; its source was the Almendares river (until long after this, an even older aqueduct, opened at the end of the 16th century, was in use). The sewer system and house sanitation conditions were incredibly inadequate when the American army occupied the city in 1899. Several public buildings were so filthy that they were torn down and burned. The improvements since the end of Spanish rule have been consistent.

History.—Havana, originally founded by Diego Velasquez in 1514 on an unhealthy site near the present Batabanó (pop. in 1907, 15,435, including attached country districts), on the south coast, was soon removed to its present position, was granted an ayuntamiento (town council), and shortly came to be considered one of the most important places in the New World. Its commanding position gained it in 1634, by royal decree, the title of “Llave del Nuevo Mundo y Antemural de las Indias Occidentales” (Key of the New World and Bulwark of the West Indies), in reference to which it bears on its coat of arms a symbolic key and representations of the Morro, Punta and Fuerza. In the history of the place in the 16th century few things stand out except the investments by buccaneers: in 1537 it was sacked and burned, and in 1555 plundered by French buccaneers, and in 1586 it was threatened by Drake. In 1589 Philip II. of Spain ordered the erection of the Punta and the Morro. In the same year the residence of the governor of the island was moved from Santiago de Cuba to Havana. Philip II. granted Havana the title of “ciudad” in 1592. Sugar plantations in the environs appeared before the end of the 16th century. The population of the city, probably about 3000 at the beginning of the 17th century, was doubled in the years following 1655 by the coming of Spaniards from Jamaica. In the course of the 17th century the port became the great rendezvous for the royal merchant and treasure fleets that monopolized trade with America, and the commercial centre of the Spanish-American possessions. It was blockaded four times by the Dutch (who were continually molesting the treasure fleets) in the first half of the 17th century. In 1671 the city walls were begun; they were completed in 1702. The European wars of the 17th and 18th centuries were marked by various incidents in local history. After the end of the Spanish War of Succession (1713) came a period of comparative prosperity in slave-trading and general commerce. The creation in 1740 of a monopolistic trading-company was an event of importance in the history of the island. English squadrons threatened the city several times in the first half of the 18th century, but it was not until 1762 that an investment, made by Admiral Sir George Pocock and the earl of Albemarle, was successful. The siege lasted from June to August and was attended by heavy loss to both besiegers and besieged. The British commanders wrung great sums from the church and the city as prize of war and price of good order. By the treaty of the 10th of February 1763, at the close of the Seven Years’ War, Havana was restored to Spain in exchange for the Floridas. The English turned over the control of the city on the 6th of July. Their occupation greatly stimulated commerce, and from it dates the modern history of the city and of the island (see Cuba). The gradual removal of obstacles from the commerce of the island from 1766 to 1818 particularly benefited Havana. At the end of the 18th century the city was one of the seven or eight great commercial centres of the world, and in the first quarter of the 19th century was a rival in population and in trade of Rio Janeiro, Buenos Aires and New York. In 1789 a bishopric was created at Havana suffragan to the archbishopric at Santiago. From the end of the 18th century Havana, as the centre of government, was the centre of movement and interest. During the administration of Miguel Tacón Havana was improved by many important public works; his name is frequent in the nomenclature of the city. The railway from Havana to Güines was built between 1835 and 1838. Fifty Americans under Lieut. Crittenden, members of the Bahia Honda filibustering expedition of Narciso Lopez, were shot at Fort Atarés in 1851. Like the rest of Cuba, Havana has frequently suffered severely from hurricanes, the most violent being those of 1768 (St Theresa’s), 1810 and 1846. The destruction of the U.S. battleship “Maine” in the harbour of Havana on the 15th of February 1898 was an influential factor in causing the outbreak of the Spanish-American War, and during the war the city was blockaded by a United States fleet.

History.—Havana, originally founded by Diego Velasquez in 1514 on an unhealthy site near what is now Batabanó (pop. in 1907, 15,435, including surrounding country districts), on the south coast, was soon moved to its current location. It was granted a town council (ayuntamiento) and quickly became one of the most significant places in the New World. In 1634, it received the title of “Llave del Nuevo Mundo y Antemural de las Indias Occidentales” (Key of the New World and Bulwark of the West Indies) by royal decree, which is symbolized on its coat of arms with a key and representations of Morro, Punta, and Fuerza. In the 16th century, notable events mostly involved attacks by buccaneers: it was sacked and burned in 1537, plundered by French buccaneers in 1555, and threatened by Drake in 1586. In 1589, Philip II of Spain ordered the construction of Punta and Morro. That same year, the governor's residence moved from Santiago de Cuba to Havana. Philip II granted Havana the title of “ciudad” in 1592. Sugar plantations appeared in the surrounding areas before the end of the 16th century. The city’s population, estimated at around 3,000 at the beginning of the 17th century, doubled in the years after 1655 with the arrival of Spaniards from Jamaica. Throughout the 17th century, the port became a major hub for royal merchant and treasure fleets monopolizing trade with America, establishing itself as the commercial center of Spanish-American possessions. The Dutch blockaded it four times during the first half of the 17th century, as they constantly disrupted the treasure fleets. Construction of the city walls began in 1671 and was completed in 1702. The European wars of the 17th and 18th centuries brought various local historical incidents. Following the conclusion of the Spanish War of Succession (1713), a period of relative prosperity developed in slave trade and general commerce. The creation of a monopolistic trading company in 1740 marked an important moment in the island’s history. English forces threatened the city several times in the early 18th century, but it wasn’t until 1762 that Admiral Sir George Pocock and the Earl of Albemarle successfully captured it. The siege lasted from June to August, causing significant casualties for both sides. The British commanders extorted large sums from the church and the city as war prizes and for maintaining order. Through the treaty on February 10, 1763, concluding the Seven Years' War, Havana was returned to Spain in exchange for the Floridas. The English handed over control of the city on July 6. Their occupation greatly boosted trade, marking the beginning of modern Havana’s and the island's history (see Cuba). The gradual easing of trade restrictions from 1766 to 1818 greatly favored Havana. By the end of the 18th century, the city was one of the world's seven or eight major commercial centers, and in the early 19th century, it was a competitor in population and trade with Rio de Janeiro, Buenos Aires, and New York. A bishopric was established in Havana in 1789, subordinate to the archbishopric in Santiago. From the late 18th century, as the government center, Havana was the focus of activity and interest. Under Miguel Tacón’s administration, Havana underwent significant public works improvements, and his name is commonly found in the city’s place names. The railway from Havana to Güines was constructed between 1835 and 1838. In 1851, fifty Americans under Lieut. Crittenden, part of Narciso Lopez's Bahia Honda filibustering expedition, were executed at Fort Atarés. Like much of Cuba, Havana has often been severely impacted by hurricanes, the most intense being in 1768 (St. Theresa’s), 1810, and 1846. The destruction of the U.S. battleship “Maine” in Havana harbor on February 15, 1898, played a critical role in triggering the Spanish-American War, and during the conflict, the city was blockaded by a United States fleet.

See J. de la Pezuela, Diccionario de la Isla de Cuba, vol. iii. (Madrid, 1863), for minute details of history, administration and economic conditions down to 1862; J. M. de la Torre, Lo que fuimos y lo que somos, ó la Habana antigua y moderna (Habana, 1857); P.J. Guitéras, Historia de la conquista de la Habana 1762 (Philadelphia, 1856); J. de la Pezuela, Sitio y rendicion de la Habana en 1762 (Madrid, 1859); A. Bachiller y Morales, Monografía historica (Habana, 1883), minutely covering the English occupation (the best account) of 1762-1763; Maria de los Mercedes, comtesse de Merlin, La Havana (3 vols., Paris, 1844); and the works cited under Cuba.

See J. de la Pezuela, Diccionario de la Isla de Cuba, vol. iii. (Madrid, 1863), for detailed information on history, administration, and economic conditions up to 1862; J. M. de la Torre, Lo que fuimos y lo que somos, ó la Habana antigua y moderna (Habana, 1857); P.J. Guitéras, Historia de la conquista de la Habana 1762 (Philadelphia, 1856); J. de la Pezuela, Sitio y rendicion de la Habana en 1762 (Madrid, 1859); A. Bachiller y Morales, Monografía historica (Habana, 1883), providing a thorough account of the English occupation (the best account) from 1762-1763; Maria de los Mercedes, comtesse de Merlin, La Havana (3 vols., Paris, 1844); and the works cited under Cuba.


1 Renamed Paseo de Marti by the republic, but the name is never used.

1 Renamed Paseo de Marti by the republic, but the name is never used.

2 Dr Carlos Finlay of Havana, arguing from the coincidence between the climatic limitation of yellow fever and the geographical limitation of the mosquito, urged (1881 sqq.) that there was some relation between the disease and the insect. Reed worked from the observation of Dr H. R. Carter (U.S. Marine Hospital Service) that although the incubation of the disease was 5 days, 15 to 20 days had to elapse before the “infection” of the house, and from Ross’s demonstration of the part played in malaria by the Anopheles. See H. A. Kelly, Walter Reed and Yellow Fever (New York, 1907).

2 Dr. Carlos Finlay from Havana argued, based on the connection between the limits of yellow fever and the geographical distribution of mosquitoes, that there was a relationship between the disease and the insect (1881 onwards). Reed built on Dr. H. R. Carter's observation (U.S. Marine Hospital Service) that while the incubation period of the disease was 5 days, it took 15 to 20 days for the “infection” of the house to occur, and also referenced Ross’s findings on the role of the Anopheles in malaria. See H. A. Kelly, Walter Reed and Yellow Fever (New York, 1907).

3 The average number of deaths from yellow fever annually from 1885 (when reliable registration began) to 1898 was 455; maximum 1282 in 1896 (supposed average for 4 years, 1856-1859, being 1489.8 and for 7 years, 1873-1879, 1395.1), minimum 136, in 1898; average deaths of military, 1885-1898, 278.4 (in 1896-1897 constituting 1966 out of a total of 2140); deaths of American soldiers, 1899-1900, 18 out of 431.

3 The average number of deaths from yellow fever each year from 1885 (when reliable records started) to 1898 was 455; the highest was 1282 in 1896 (the estimated average for the 4 years from 1856 to 1859 was 1489.8, and for the 7 years from 1873 to 1879 it was 1395.1), and the lowest was 136 in 1898; the average deaths among military personnel from 1885 to 1898 was 278.4 (during 1896-1897, there were 1966 out of a total of 2140); deaths among American soldiers in 1899-1900 were 18 out of 431.


HAVANT, a market-town in the Fareham parliamentary division of Hampshire, England, 67 m. S.W. from London by the London & South Western and the London, Brighton & South Coast railways. Pop. of urban district (1901), 3837. The urban district of Warblington, 1 m. S.E. (pop. 3639), has a fine church, Norman and later, with traces of pre-Norman work, and some remains of a Tudor castle. Havant lies in a flat coastal district, near the head of Langstone Harbour, a wide shallow inlet of the English Channel. The church of St Faith was largely rebuilt in 1875, but retains some good Early English work. There are breweries and tanneries, and the manufacture of parchment is carried on. Off the mainland near Havant lies Hayling, a flat island of irregular form lying between the harbours of Langstone and Chichester. It measures 4 m. in length from N. to S., and is nearly the same in breadth at the south, but the breadth generally is about 1½ m. It is well wooded and fertile. A railway serves the village of South Hayling, which is in some 79 favour as a seaside resort, having a wide sandy beach and good golf links. The island was in the possession of successive religious bodies from the Conquest (when it was given to the Benedictines of Jumièges, near Rouen), until the Dissolution. The church of South Hayling is a fine Early English building.

HAVANT, is a market town in the Fareham parliamentary division of Hampshire, England, located 67 miles southwest of London via the London & South Western and the London, Brighton & South Coast railways. The population of the urban district (1901) was 3,837. The nearby urban district of Warblington, 1 mile southeast (population 3,639), features a beautiful church with Norman architecture and later additions, as well as remnants of a Tudor castle. Havant is situated in a flat coastal area near the entrance of Langstone Harbour, a broad, shallow inlet of the English Channel. The church of St Faith was mostly rebuilt in 1875 but still has some notable Early English elements. The town has breweries, tanneries, and parchment manufacturing. Off the mainland near Havant is Hayling, a flat island of irregular shape lying between the harbours of Langstone and Chichester. It is 4 miles long from north to south, almost the same width at the southern end, with an average width of about 1.5 miles. The island is well-wooded and fertile. There is a railway serving the village of South Hayling, which is somewhat popular as a seaside resort, with a wide sandy beach and excellent golf links. The island was held by various religious organizations since the Conquest (when it was granted to the Benedictines of Jumièges, near Rouen) until the Dissolution. The church in South Hayling is a beautiful Early English structure.


HAVEL, a river of Prussia, Germany, having its origin in Lake Dambeck (223 ft.) on the Mecklenburg plateau, a few miles north-west of Neu-Strelitz, and after threading several lakes flowing south as far as Spandau. Thence it curves south-west, past Potsdam and Brandenburg, traversing another chain of lakes, and finally continues north-west until it joins the Elbe from the right some miles above Wittenberge after a total course of 221 m. and a total fall of only 158 ft. Its banks are mostly marshy or sandy, and the stream is navigable from the Mecklenburg lakes downwards. Several canals connect it with these lakes, as well as with other rivers—e.g. the Finow canal with the Oder, the Ruppin canal with the Rhin, the Berlin-Spandau navigable canal (5½ m.) with the Spree, and the Plaue-Ihle canal with the Elbe. The Sakrow-Paretz canal, 11 m. long, cuts off the deep bend at Potsdam. The most notable of the tributaries is the Spree (227 m. long), which bisects Berlin and joins the Havel at Spandau. Area of river basin, 10,159 sq. m.

HAVEL is a river in Prussia, Germany, that starts at Lake Dambeck (223 ft.) on the Mecklenburg plateau, just a few miles northwest of Neu-Strelitz. It flows south through several lakes until it reaches Spandau. From there, it curves southwest, passing Potsdam and Brandenburg, going through another set of lakes, and finally continues northwest until it merges with the Elbe from the right a few miles above Wittenberge, covering a total distance of 221 km with a total drop of just 158 ft. Its banks are mostly marshy or sandy, and the river is navigable from the Mecklenburg lakes downstream. Several canals connect it with these lakes and other rivers — for example, the Finow canal connects with the Oder, the Ruppin canal with the Rhine, the Berlin-Spandau navigable canal (5.5 km) with the Spree, and the Plaue-Ihle canal with the Elbe. The Sakrow-Paretz canal, which is 11 km long, bypasses the deep bend at Potsdam. The most significant of the tributaries is the Spree (227 km long), which cuts through Berlin and joins the Havel at Spandau. The area of the river basin is 10,159 sq. km.


HAVELBERG, a town of Germany, in the Prussian province of Brandenburg, on the Havel and the railway Glöwen-Havelberg. Pop. (1905), 5988. The town is built partly on an island in the Havel, and partly on hills on the right bank of the river, on one of which stands the fine Romanesque cathedral dating from the 12th century. The two parts, which are connected by a bridge, were incorporated as one town in 1875. The inhabitants are chiefly engaged in tobacco manufacturing, sugar-refining and boat-building, and in the timber trade.

Havelberg is a town in Germany, located in the Prussian province of Brandenburg, along the Havel River and the Glöwen-Havelberg railway. As of 1905, it had a population of 5,988. The town is partly situated on an island in the Havel and partly on hills on the right bank of the river, where you can find the impressive Romanesque cathedral that dates back to the 12th century. The two sections of the town, connected by a bridge, became one town in 1875. The residents mainly work in tobacco manufacturing, sugar refining, boat building, and the timber trade.

Otto I. founded a bishopric at Havelberg in 946; the bishop, however, who was a prince of the Empire, generally resided at Plattenburg, or Wittstock, a few miles to the north. In 1548 the bishopric was seized by the elector of Brandenburg, who finally took possession of it fifty years later, and the cathedral passed to the Protestant Church, retaining its endowments till the edict of 1810, by which all former ecclesiastical possessions were assumed by the crown. The final secularization was delayed till 1819. Havelberg was formerly a strong fortress, but in the Thirty Years’ War it was taken from the Danish by the imperial troops in 1627. Recaptured by the Swedes in 1631, and again in 1635 and 1636, it was in 1637 retaken by the Saxons. It suffered severely from a conflagration in 1870.

Otto I established a bishopric at Havelberg in 946; however, the bishop, who was a prince of the Empire, usually lived at Plattenburg or Wittstock, a few miles to the north. In 1548, the elector of Brandenburg seized the bishopric, finally taking full control fifty years later, and the cathedral became part of the Protestant Church, keeping its endowments until the 1810 edict, which transferred all former church possessions to the crown. The final secularization was postponed until 1819. Havelberg used to be a strong fortress, but during the Thirty Years' War, it was captured from the Danes by imperial troops in 1627. It was recaptured by the Swedes in 1631, and again in 1635 and 1636, but was retaken by the Saxons in 1637. It suffered significant damage from a fire in 1870.


HAVELOCK, SIR HENRY (1795-1857), British soldier, one of the heroes of the Indian Mutiny, the second of four brothers (all of whom entered the army), was born at Ford Hall, Bishop-Wearmouth, Sunderland, on the 5th of April 1795. His parents were William Havelock, a wealthy shipbuilder in Sunderland, and Jane, daughter of John Carter, solicitor at Stockton-on-Tees. When about five years old Henry accompanied his elder brother William to Mr Bradley’s school at Swanscombe, whence at the age of ten he removed for seven years to Charterhouse school. In accordance with the desire of his mother, who had died in 1811, he entered the Middle Temple in 1813, studying under Chitty the eminent special pleader. His legal studies having been abridged by a misunderstanding with his father, he in 1815 accepted a second lieutenancy in the Rifle Brigade (95th), procured for him by the interest of his brother William. During the following eight years of service in Britain he read extensively and acquired a good acquaintance with the theory of war. In 1823, having exchanged into the 21st and thence into the 13th Light Infantry, he followed his brothers William and Charles to India, first qualifying himself in Hindustani under Dr Gilchrist, a celebrated Orientalist.

Havelock, Sir Henry (1795-1857), British soldier and one of the heroes of the Indian Mutiny, was the second of four brothers (all of whom joined the army). He was born at Ford Hall, Bishop-Wearmouth, Sunderland, on April 5, 1795. His parents were William Havelock, a wealthy shipbuilder in Sunderland, and Jane, the daughter of John Carter, a solicitor in Stockton-on-Tees. Around the age of five, Henry went with his older brother William to Mr. Bradley's school in Swanscombe, and at ten, he moved to Charterhouse School for seven years. Following his mother’s wishes, who passed away in 1811, he entered the Middle Temple in 1813, studying under Chitty, a prominent special pleader. After a disagreement with his father shortened his legal studies, he accepted a second lieutenancy in the Rifle Brigade (95th) in 1815, thanks to his brother William's influence. During the next eight years of service in Britain, he read widely and gained a solid understanding of military theory. In 1823, after transferring to the 21st and then to the 13th Light Infantry, he followed his brothers William and Charles to India, first learning Hindustani under Dr. Gilchrist, a well-known Orientalist.

At the close of twenty-three years’ service he was still a lieutenant, and it was not until 1838 that, after three years’ adjutancy of his regiment, he became captain. Before this, however, he had held several staff appointments, notably that of deputy assistant-adjutant-general of the forces in Burma till the peace of Yandabu, of which he, with Lumsden and Knox, procured the ratifications at Ava from the “Golden Foot,” who bestowed on him the “gold leaf” insignia of Burmese nobility. His first command had been at a stockade capture in the war, and he was present also at the battles of Napadee, Patanago and Pagan. He had also held during his lieutenancy various interpreterships and the adjutancy of the king’s troops at Chinsura. In 1828 he published at Serampore Campaigns in Ava, and in 1829 he married Hannah Shepherd, daughter of Dr Marshman, the eminent missionary. About the same time he became a Baptist, being baptized by Mr John Mack at Serampore. During the first Afghan war he was present as aide-de-camp to Sir Willoughby Cotton at the capture of Ghazni, on the 23rd of July 1839, and at the occupation of Kabul. After a short absence in Bengal to secure the publication of his Memoirs of the Afghan Campaign, he returned to Kabul in charge of recruits, and became interpreter to General Elphinstone. In 1840, being attached to Sir Robert Sale’s force, he took part in the Khurd-Kabul fight, in the celebrated passage of the defiles of the Ghilzais (1841) and in the fighting from Tezeen to Jalalabad. Here, after many months’ siege, his column in a sortie en masse defeated Akbar Khan on the 7th of April 1842. He was now made deputy adjutant-general of the infantry division in Kabul, and in September he assisted at Jagdalak, at Tezeen, and at the release of the British prisoners at Kabul, besides taking a prominent part at Istaliff. Having obtained a regimental majority he next went through the Mahratta campaign as Persian interpreter to Sir Hugh (Viscount) Gough, and distinguished himself at Maharajpore in 1843, and also in the Sikh campaign at Moodkee, Ferozeshah and Sobraon in 1845. For these services he was made deputy adjutant-general at Bombay. He exchanged from the 13th to the 39th, then as second major into the 53rd at the beginning of 1849, and soon afterwards left for England, where he spent two years. In 1854 he became quartermaster-general, then full colonel, and lastly adjutant-general of the troops in India.

At the end of twenty-three years of service, he was still a lieutenant, and it wasn't until 1838, after three years as the adjutant of his regiment, that he became a captain. Before that, he held several staff positions, notably as the deputy assistant adjutant general of the forces in Burma until the peace of Yandabu, for which he, along with Lumsden and Knox, secured the ratifications at Ava from the "Golden Foot," who granted him the "gold leaf" insignia of Burmese nobility. His first command came during the capture of a stockade in the war, and he also took part in the battles of Napadee, Patanago, and Pagan. During his time as a lieutenant, he held various interpreter roles and served as the adjutant of the king’s troops at Chinsura. In 1828, he published *Campaigns in Ava* at Serampore, and in 1829, he married Hannah Shepherd, the daughter of Dr. Marshman, the well-known missionary. Around the same time, he became a Baptist, being baptized by Mr. John Mack at Serampore. During the first Afghan war, he served as aide-de-camp to Sir Willoughby Cotton during the capture of Ghazni on July 23, 1839, and at the occupation of Kabul. After a brief time away in Bengal to ensure the publication of his *Memoirs of the Afghan Campaign*, he returned to Kabul in charge of recruits and became an interpreter for General Elphinstone. In 1840, while attached to Sir Robert Sale’s force, he participated in the Khurd-Kabul fight, the famous passage through the Ghilzai defiles (1841), and the battles from Tezeen to Jalalabad. Here, after months of siege, his column defeated Akbar Khan in a sortie *en masse* on April 7, 1842. He was then made deputy adjutant general of the infantry division in Kabul, and in September, he assisted at Jagdalak, Tezeen, and the rescue of the British prisoners in Kabul, while also playing a significant role at Istaliff. After obtaining a regimental majority, he went through the Mahratta campaign as a Persian interpreter for Sir Hugh (Viscount) Gough, earning distinction at Maharajpore in 1843 and again during the Sikh campaign at Moodkee, Ferozeshah, and Sobraon in 1845. For these services, he was appointed deputy adjutant general in Bombay. He transferred from the 13th to the 39th, then as second major into the 53rd at the beginning of 1849, and soon after left for England, where he spent two years. In 1854, he became quartermaster general, then full colonel, and finally the adjutant general of the troops in India.

In 1857 he was selected by Sir James Outram for the command of a division in the Persian campaign, during which he was present at the actions of Muhamra and Ahwaz. Peace with Persia set him free just as the Mutiny broke out; and he was chosen to command a column “to quell disturbances in Allahabad, to support Lawrence at Lucknow and Wheeler at Cawnpore, to disperse and utterly destroy all mutineers and insurgents.” At this time Lady Canning wrote of him in her diary: “General Havelock is not in fashion, but all the same we believe that he will do well. No doubt he is fussy and tiresome, but his little old stiff figure looks as active and fit for use as if he were made of steel.” But in spite of this lukewarm commendation Havelock proved himself the man for the occasion, and won the reputation of a great military leader. At Fatehpur, on the 12th of July, at Aong and Pandoobridge on the 15th, at Cawnpore on the 16th, at Unao on the 29th, at Busherutgunge on the 29th and again on the 5th of August, at Boorhya on the 12th of August, and at Bithur on the 16th, he defeated overwhelming forces. Twice he advanced for the relief of Lucknow, but twice prudence forbade a reckless exposure of troops wasted by battle and disease in the almost impracticable task. Reinforcements arriving at last under Outram, he was enabled by the generosity of his superior officer to crown his successes on the 25th of September 1857 by the capture of Lucknow. There he died on the 24th of November 1857, of dysentery, brought on by the anxieties and fatigues connected with his victorious march and with the subsequent blockade of the British troops. He lived long enough to receive the intelligence that he had been created K.C.B. for the first three battles of the campaign; but of the major-generalship which was shortly afterwards conferred he never knew. On the 26th of November, before tidings of his death had reached England, letters-patent were directed to create him a baronet and a pension of £1000 a year was voted at the assembling of parliament. The baronetcy was afterwards bestowed upon his eldest son; while to his widow, by royal order, was given the rank to which she would have been entitled had her husband survived and been created a baronet. To both widow and son pensions of £1000 were awarded by parliament.

In 1857, Sir James Outram chose him to lead a division in the Persian campaign, during which he participated in the battles of Muhamra and Ahwaz. The peace with Persia freed him just as the Mutiny began; he was appointed to lead a column “to put down unrest in Allahabad, to support Lawrence in Lucknow and Wheeler in Cawnpore, to disperse and completely destroy all mutineers and insurgents.” At this point, Lady Canning noted in her diary: “General Havelock isn’t trendy, but we believe he will perform well. No doubt he can be fussy and annoying, but his little stiff figure looks as active and ready as if he were made of steel.” Despite this mild praise, Havelock proved to be just the right person for the job and earned the reputation of a great military leader. At Fatehpur on July 12, at Aong and Pandoobridge on July 15, at Cawnpore on July 16, at Unao on July 29, at Busherutgunge on July 29 and again on August 5, at Boorhya on August 12, and at Bithur on August 16, he defeated much larger forces. He attempted to advance to relieve Lucknow twice, but both times he wisely chose not to risk his troops, who were weakened by battle and disease, on the nearly impossible task. Finally, with reinforcements arriving under Outram, he was able, thanks to the generosity of his superior officer, to achieve his victories by capturing Lucknow on September 25, 1857. He died there on November 24, 1857, from dysentery, caused by the stress and exhaustion from his victorious march and the subsequent blockade of British troops. He lived long enough to hear that he had been named K.C.B. for the first three battles of the campaign, but he never learned about the major-generalship that was awarded shortly after. On November 26, before news of his death reached England, letters-patent were issued to create him a baronet, and a pension of £1000 a year was approved when Parliament convened. The baronetcy was later granted to his eldest son, while his widow was given royal recognition equal to what she would have received if her husband had survived and been made a baronet. Both the widow and son received pensions of £1000 from Parliament.

80

80

See Marshman, Life of Havelock (1860); L. J. Trotter, The Bayard of India (1903); F. M. Holmes, Four Heroes of India; G. B. Smith, Heroes of the Nineteenth Century (1901); and A. Forbes, Havelock (“English Men of Action” series, 1890).

See Marshman, Life of Havelock (1860); L. J. Trotter, The Bayard of India (1903); F. M. Holmes, Four Heroes of India; G. B. Smith, Heroes of the Nineteenth Century (1901); and A. Forbes, Havelock (“English Men of Action” series, 1890).


HAVELOK THE DANE, an Anglo-Danish romance. The hero, under the name of Cuheran or Cuaran, was a scullion-jongleur at the court of Edelsi (Alsi) or Godric, king of Lincoln and Lindsey. At the same court was brought up Argentille or Goldborough, the orphan daughter of Adelbrict, the Danish king of Norfolk, and his wife Orwain, Edelsi’s sister; and Edelsi, to humiliate his ward, married her to the scullion Cuaran. But, inspired by a vision, Cuaran and Goldborough set out for Grimsby, where Cuaran learned that Grim, his supposed father, was dead. His foster-sister, moreover, told him that his real name was Havelok, that he was the son of Gunter (or Birkabeyn), king of Denmark, and had been rescued by Grim, who though a poor fisherman was a noble in his own country, when Gunter perished by treason. The hero then wins back his own and Goldborough’s kingdoms, punishing traitors and rewarding the faithful. The story exists in two French versions: as an interpolation between Geffrei Gaimar’s Brut and his Estorie des Engles (c. 1150) and in the Anglo-Norman Lai d’Havelok (12th century). The English Havelok (c. 1300) is written in a Lincolnshire dialect and embodies abundant local tradition. A short version of the tale is interpolated in the Lambeth MS. of Robert Mannyng’s Handlyng Synne. The story reappears more than once in English literature, notably in the ballad of “Argentille and Curan” in William Warner’s Albion’s England. The name of Havelok (Habloc, Abloec, Abloyc) is said to correspond in Welsh to Anlaf or Olaf. Now the historical Anlaf Curan was the son of a Viking chief Sihtric, who was king of Northumbria in 925 and died in 927. Anlaf Sihtricson was driven into exile by his stepmother’s brother Æthelstan, and took refuge in Scotland at the court of Constantine II., whose daughter he married. He was defeated with Constantine1 at Brunanburh (937), but was nevertheless for two short periods joint ruler in Northumbria with his cousin Anlaf Godfreyson. He reigned in Dublin till 980, when he was defeated. He died the next year as a monk at Iona. Round the name of Anlaf Curan a number of legends rapidly gathered, and the legend of the Danish hero probably filtered through Celtic channels, as the Welsh names of Argentille and Orwain indicate. The close similarity between the Havelok saga and the story of Hamlet (Amlethus) as told by Saxo Grammaticus was pointed out long ago by Scandinavian scholars. The individual points they have in common are found in other legends, but the series of coincidences between the adventurous history of Anlaf Curan and the life of Amlethus can hardly be fortuitous. Interesting light is thrown on the whole question by Professor I. Gollancz (Hamlet in Iceland, 1898) by the identification of Amhlaide—who is said by Queen Gormflaith2 in the Annals of Ireland by the Four Masters to have slain Niall Glundubh—with Anlaf’s father Sihtric. The exploits of father and son were likely to be confused.

HAVELK THE DANE, an Anglo-Danish romance. The hero, known as Cuheran or Cuaran, was a kitchen servant and entertainer at the court of Edelsi (Alsi) or Godric, the king of Lincoln and Lindsey. At that same court grew up Argentille or Goldborough, the orphan daughter of Adelbrict, the Danish king of Norfolk, and his wife Orwain, Edelsi’s sister. To humiliate his ward, Edelsi married her off to the kitchen servant Cuaran. However, inspired by a vision, Cuaran and Goldborough set out for Grimsby, where Cuaran learned that Grim, the man he thought was his father, had passed away. His foster sister also revealed that his real name was Havelok, that he was the son of Gunter (or Birkabeyn), king of Denmark, and had been saved by Grim, who, despite being a poor fisherman, was noble in his homeland, when Gunter was betrayed and killed. The hero then regained his own and Goldborough’s kingdoms, punishing traitors and rewarding the loyal. The story exists in two French versions: as an addition between Geffrei Gaimar’s Brut and his Estorie des Engles (c. 1150) and in the Anglo-Norman Lai d’Havelok (12th century). The English Havelok (c. 1300) is written in the Lincolnshire dialect and incorporates a wealth of local tradition. A shorter version of the tale is found in the Lambeth manuscript of Robert Mannyng’s Handlyng Synne. The story appears multiple times in English literature, especially in the ballad of “Argentille and Curan” in William Warner’s Albion’s England. The name Havelok (Habloc, Abloec, Abloyc) is thought to correspond in Welsh to Anlaf or Olaf. The historical Anlaf Curan was the son of the Viking chief Sihtric, who was king of Northumbria in 925 and died in 927. Anlaf Sihtricson was exiled by his stepmother’s brother Æthelstan and took refuge in Scotland at the court of Constantine II, whose daughter he married. He was defeated with Constantine1 at Brunanburh (937), but still served as joint ruler in Northumbria with his cousin Anlaf Godfreyson for two short periods. He reigned in Dublin until 980, when he was defeated, and he died the following year as a monk at Iona. Numerous legends quickly formed around the name Anlaf Curan, and the legend of the Danish hero likely spread through Celtic channels, as indicated by the Welsh names of Argentille and Orwain. The striking similarities between the Havelok saga and the story of Hamlet (Amlethus) as recounted by Saxo Grammaticus were noted long ago by Scandinavian scholars. While individual elements they share can also be found in other legends, the series of coincidences between Anlaf Curan's adventurous history and the life of Amlethus seems too significant to be simply coincidental. Professor I. Gollancz sheds light on this whole matter in Hamlet in Iceland (1898) by linking Amhlaide—who is mentioned by Queen Gormflaith2 in the Annals of Ireland by the Four Masters as having killed Niall Glundubh—with Anlaf’s father Sihtric. It’s likely that the feats of father and son were confused.

The mythical elements in the Havelok story are numerous. Argentille, as H. L. Ward points out, is a disguised Valkyrie. Like Svava she inspired a dull and nameless youth, and as Hild raised the dead to fight by magic, so Argentille in Havelok and Hermuthruda in Amleth prop up dead or wounded men with stakes to bluff the enemy. Havelok’s royal lineage is betrayed by his flame breath when he is asleep, a phenomenon which has parallels in the history of Servius Tullius and of Dietrich of Bern. Part of the Havelok legend lingers in local tradition. Havelok destroyed his enemies in Denmark by casting down great stones upon them from the top of a tower, and Grim is said to have kicked three of the turrets from the church tower in his efforts to destroy the enemy’s ships. John Weever (Antient Funerall Monuments, 1631, p. 749) says that the privilege of the town in Elsinore, where its merchants were free from toll, was due to the interest of Havelok, the Danish prince, and the common seal of the town of Grimsby represents Grim, with “Habloc” on his right hand and Goldeburgh on his left.

The mythical elements in the Havelok story are abundant. Argentille, as H. L. Ward notes, is a disguised Valkyrie. Like Svava, she inspired a dull and nameless youth, and just as Hild raised the dead to fight with magic, Argentille in Havelok and Hermuthruda in Amleth support dead or wounded men with stakes to intimidate the enemy. Havelok's royal lineage is revealed by his fiery breath when he sleeps, a phenomenon that has parallels in the stories of Servius Tullius and Dietrich of Bern. Part of the Havelok legend remains in local tradition. Havelok defeated his enemies in Denmark by dropping large stones on them from the top of a tower, and Grim is said to have kicked off three of the turrets from the church tower in his attempts to destroy the enemy's ships. John Weever (Antient Funerall Monuments, 1631, p. 749) mentions that the town privilege in Elsinore, where its merchants were exempt from tolls, was due to Havelok's influence, the Danish prince, and the common seal of the town of Grimsby depicts Grim, with "Habloc" on his right hand and Goldeburgh on his left.

The English MS. of Havelok (MSS. Laud Misc. 108) in the Bodleian library is unique. It was edited for the Roxburghe Club by Sir F. Madden in 1828. This edition contains, besides the English text, the two French versions. There are subsequent editions by W. W. Skeat (1868) for the E.E. Text Society, by F. Holthausen (London, New York and Heidelberg, 1901), and by W. W. Skeat (Clarendon Press, Oxford, 1902, where further bibliographical references will be found); and a modern English version by Miss E. Hickey (London, 1902). Gaimar’s text and the French lai are edited by Sir T. D. Hardy and C. F. Martin in Rerum Brit. med. aev. scriptores, vol. i. (1888). See also the account of the saga by H. L. Ward (Cat. of Romances, i. 423-446); for the identification of Havelok with Anlaf Curan see G. Storm, Englische Studien (1880), iii. 533, a reprint of an earlier article; E. K. Putnam, The Lambeth Version of Havelok (Baltimore, 1900).

The English manuscript of Havelok (MSS. Laud Misc. 108) in the Bodleian library is one of a kind. It was edited for the Roxburghe Club by Sir F. Madden in 1828. This edition includes, in addition to the English text, two French versions. There are later editions by W. W. Skeat (1868) for the E.E. Text Society, by F. Holthausen (London, New York, and Heidelberg, 1901), and by W. W. Skeat (Clarendon Press, Oxford, 1902, where additional bibliographical references can be found); plus a modern English version by Miss E. Hickey (London, 1902). Gaimar’s text and the French lai are edited by Sir T. D. Hardy and C. F. Martin in Rerum Brit. med. aev. scriptores, vol. i. (1888). Also, see H. L. Ward’s account of the saga in Cat. of Romances, i. 423-446; for the identification of Havelok with Anlaf Curan, refer to G. Storm, Englische Studien (1880), iii. 533, a reprint of an earlier article; E. K. Putnam, The Lambeth Version of Havelok (Baltimore, 1900).


1 H. L. Ward (Cat. of Romances, i. 426) suggests that it was the mention of Constantine in the Havelock legend which led Gaimar to place the tale in the 6th century in the days of the Constantine who succeeded King Arthur. Gaimar voices more than once an Anglo-Danish legend of a Danish dynasty in Britain anterior to the Saxon invasion.

1 H. L. Ward (Cat. of Romances, i. 426) suggests that the mention of Constantine in the Havelock legend led Gaimar to set the story in the 6th century during the time of the Constantine who followed King Arthur. Gaimar repeatedly refers to an Anglo-Danish legend about a Danish dynasty in Britain that existed before the Saxon invasion.

2 A different person from the second wife of Anlaf Curan, also Gormflaith, who forms another link with Amlethus, as she was a woman of the Hermuthruda type and married her husband’s conqueror.

2 A different person from Anlaf Curan's second wife, also named Gormflaith, who creates another connection with Amlethus, as she belonged to the Hermuthruda type and married the man who conquered her husband.


HAVERFORDWEST (Welsh Hwlfordd, the English name being perhaps a corruption of the Scandinavian Hafna-Fjord), the chief town of Pembrokeshire, S. Wales, a contributory parliamentary and municipal borough, and a county of itself with its own lord-lieutenant. Pop. (1901), 6007. It is picturesquely situated on the slopes overlooking the West Cleddau river, which is here crossed by two stone bridges. It has a station on the Great Western Railway on the east side of the river, and when viewed from this point the town presents an imposing appearance with its castle-keep and its many ancient buildings. The river is tidal and navigable for vessels of not more than 150 tons. Coal, cattle, butter and grain are exported, but the commercial importance of the place has greatly declined, as the many ruined warehouses near the river plainly testify. The old walls and fortifications have almost disappeared, but Haverfordwest is still rich in memorials of its past greatness. The huge castle-keep, which dominates the town, was probably built by Gilbert de Clare, early in the 12th century; formerly used as the county gaol, it now serves as the police-station. The large church of St Mary, at the top cf the steep High Street, has fine clerestory windows, clustered columns and an elaborate carved-oak ceiling of the 15th century; it contains several interesting monuments of the 17th and 18th centuries, some of which commemorate members of the family of Philipps of Picton Castle. At the N. corner of the adjacent churchyard stands an ancient building with a vaulted roof, once the record office, but now used as a fish-market. St Martin’s, with a low tower and spire, close to the castle, is probably the oldest church in the town, but has been much modernized. Near St Thomas’s church on the Green stands an old Moravian chapel which is closely associated with the great scholar and divine, Bishop John Gambold (1711-1771). In a meadow on the W. bank of the river are the considerable remains of the Augustinian Priory of St Mary and St Thomas, built by Robert de Hwlfordd, lord of Haverford, about the year 1200. On the E. bank are the suburbs of Cartlet and Prendergast, the latter of which contains the ancient parish church of St David and the ruins of a large mansion originally built by Maurice de Prendergast (12th century) and subsequently the seat of the Stepney family. A little to the S. of the town are the remains of Haroldstone, once the residence of the powerful Perrot family. The charities belonging to the town, which include John Perrot’s bequest (1579), yielding about £350 annually for the improvement of the town, and Tasker’s charity school (1684), are very considerable.

HAVERFORDWEST (Welsh Hwlfordd, the English name likely being a variation of the Scandinavian Hafna-Fjord), is the main town of Pembrokeshire in South Wales. It is a parliamentary and municipal borough and a county in its own right, with its own lord-lieutenant. Population (1901) was 6,007. The town is beautifully set on the slopes overlooking the West Cleddau river, which is crossed by two stone bridges. There's a station on the Great Western Railway on the east side of the river, and from this viewpoint, the town showcases an impressive view with its castle-keep and many historic buildings. The river is tidal and navigable for vessels up to 150 tons. Coal, cattle, butter, and grain are exported from here, but the town's commercial significance has significantly decreased, as shown by the many dilapidated warehouses by the river. While the old walls and fortifications have nearly vanished, Haverfordwest still boasts reminders of its former glory. The large castle-keep, which overlooks the town, was probably constructed by Gilbert de Clare in the early 12th century; it was previously used as the county jail and now serves as a police station. The large St Mary’s church, located at the top of the steep High Street, features beautiful clerestory windows, clustered columns, and an intricately carved oak ceiling from the 15th century. It houses several intriguing monuments from the 17th and 18th centuries, some commemorating members of the Philipps family from Picton Castle. In the northern corner of the nearby churchyard stands an ancient building with a vaulted roof, which was once the record office and is now a fish market. St Martin’s church, characterized by its low tower and spire near the castle, is likely the oldest church in town but has undergone considerable modernization. Close to St Thomas’s church on the Green is an old Moravian chapel linked to the renowned scholar and divine, Bishop John Gambold (1711-1771). In a meadow on the west bank of the river lie the significant remains of the Augustinian Priory of St Mary and St Thomas, founded by Robert de Hwlfordd, lord of Haverford, around the year 1200. On the east bank are the suburbs of Cartlet and Prendergast, the latter of which features the ancient parish church of St David and the ruins of a large mansion originally built by Maurice de Prendergast in the 12th century, which later became the residence of the Stepney family. Just south of the town are the remains of Haroldstone, once the home of the powerful Perrot family. The town has notable charities, including John Perrot’s bequest (1579), which provides about £350 per year for town improvements, and Tasker’s charity school (1684).

Haverfordwest owes its origin to the advent of the Flemings, who were permitted by Henry I. to settle in the hundred of Roose, or Rhôs, in the years 1106-1108, in 1111, and again in 1156. English is exclusively spoken in the town and district, and its inhabitants exhibit their foreign extraction by their language, customs and appearance. Haverfordwest is, in fact, the capital of that English-speaking portion of Pembrokeshire, which has been nicknamed “Little England beyond Wales.” 81 This new settlement of intruding foreigners had naturally to be protected against the infuriated natives, and the castle was accordingly built c. 1113 by Gilbert de Clare, first earl of Pembroke, who subsequently conferred the seignory of Haverford on his castellan, Richard Fitz-Tancred. On the death of Robert de Hwlfordd, the benefactor and perhaps founder of the priory of St Mary and St Thomas, in 1213, the lordship of the castle reverted to the Crown, and was purchased for 1000 marks from King John by William Marshal, earl of Pembroke, who gave various privileges to the town. Of the numerous charters the earliest known (through an allusion found in a document of Bishop Houghton of St Davids, c. 1370) is one from Henry II., who therein confirms all former rights granted by his grandfather, Henry I. John in 1207 gave certain rights to the town concerning the Port of Milford, while William Marshal II., earl of Pembroke, presented it with three charters, the earliest of which is dated 1219. An important charter of Edward V., as prince of Wales and lord of Haverford, enacted that the town should be incorporated under a mayor, two sheriffs and two bailiffs, duly chosen by the burgesses. In 1536, under Henry VIII., Haverfordwest was declared a town and county of itself and was further empowered to send a representative burgess to parliament.

Haverfordwest traces its origins to the arrival of the Flemings, who were allowed by Henry I to settle in the hundred of Roose, or Rhôs, between 1106-1108, again in 1111, and once more in 1156. English is the primary language spoken in the town and surrounding area, and the residents reflect their foreign roots through their language, customs, and appearance. Haverfordwest is essentially the capital of the English-speaking part of Pembrokeshire, often referred to as “Little England beyond Wales.” 81 This new settlement of foreign newcomers needed protection against the angry locals, so a castle was built around 1113 by Gilbert de Clare, the first earl of Pembroke, who later granted the lordship of Haverford to his castellan, Richard Fitz-Tancred. After the death of Robert de Hwlfordd, the benefactor and possibly founder of the priory of St Mary and St Thomas, in 1213, the lordship of the castle returned to the Crown and was bought from King John for 1,000 marks by William Marshal, earl of Pembroke, who granted various rights to the town. Of the many charters, the earliest known one (mentioned in a document from Bishop Houghton of St Davids, around 1370) is from Henry II, confirming all previous rights granted by his grandfather, Henry I. In 1207, John granted certain rights to the town regarding the Port of Milford, while William Marshal II, earl of Pembroke, provided it with three charters, the first of which is dated 1219. A significant charter from Edward V, when he was prince of Wales and lord of Haverford, established that the town would be incorporated with a mayor, two sheriffs, and two bailiffs, all chosen by the burgesses. In 1536, under Henry VIII, Haverfordwest was declared a town and county in its own right and was further authorized to send a representative burgess to parliament.

The town long played a prominent part in South Welsh history. In 1220 Llewelyn ap Iorwerth, prince of North Wales, during the absence of William Marshal II., earl of Pembroke, attacked and burnt the suburbs, but failed to reduce the castle by assault. Several of the Plantagenet kings visited the town, including Richard II., who stopped here some time on his return from Ireland in 1299, and is said to have performed here his last regal act—the confirmation of the grant of a burgage to the Friars Preachers. Oliver Cromwell spent some days here on his way to Ireland, and his original warrant to the mayor and council for the demolition of the castle is still preserved in the council chamber. The prosperity and local importance of Haverfordwest continued unimpaired throughout the 17th and 18th centuries, and Richard Fenton, the historian of Pembrokeshire, describes it in 1810, as “the largest town in the county, if not in all Wales.” With the rise of Milford, however, the shipping trade greatly declined, and Haverfordwest has now the appearance of a quiet country town.

The town has always been significant in South Welsh history. In 1220, Llewelyn ap Iorwerth, the prince of North Wales, attacked and burned the suburbs while William Marshal II, the earl of Pembroke, was away, but he couldn’t capture the castle. Several Plantagenet kings visited the town, including Richard II, who stayed here for a while on his way back from Ireland in 1299, and it’s said that he performed his last royal act here—confirming a grant of land to the Friars Preachers. Oliver Cromwell spent a few days here on his way to Ireland, and his original order to the mayor and council to demolish the castle is still kept in the council chamber. The prosperity and local importance of Haverfordwest remained steady throughout the 17th and 18th centuries, and Richard Fenton, the historian of Pembrokeshire, described it in 1810 as “the largest town in the county, if not in all of Wales.” However, with the rise of Milford, the shipping trade declined significantly, and Haverfordwest now looks like a quiet country town.


HAVERGAL, FRANCES RIDLEY (1836-1879), English hymn-writer, daughter of the Rev. William Henry Havergal, was born at Astley, Worcestershire, on the 14th of December 1836. At the age of seven she began to write verse, most of it of a religious character. As a hymn-writer she was particularly successful, and the modern English Church collections include several of her compositions. Her collected Poetical Works were published in 1884. She died at Caswell Bay, Swansea, on the 3rd of June 1879.

HAVERGAL, FRANCES RIDLEY (1836-1879), English hymn writer, daughter of Rev. William Henry Havergal, was born in Astley, Worcestershire, on December 14, 1836. She started writing poetry at the age of seven, primarily of a religious nature. As a hymn writer, she found significant success, and many of her works are included in modern English Church hymnals. Her collected Poetical Works were published in 1884. She passed away in Caswell Bay, Swansea, on June 3, 1879.

See Memorials of Frances Ridley Havergal (1880), by her sister.

See Memorials of Frances Ridley Havergal (1880), by her sister.


HAVERHILL, a market town of England, in the Sudbury parliamentary division of Suffolk, and the Saffron Walden division of Essex. Pop. of urban district (1901), 4862. It is 55 m. N.N.E. from London by the Great Eastern railway, on the Long Melford-Cambridge branch, and is the terminus of the Colne Valley railway from Chappel in Essex. The church of St Mary is Perpendicular, but extensively restored. There are large manufactures of cloth, silk, matting, bricks, and boots and shoes, and a considerable agricultural trade.

HAVERHILL, is a market town in England, located in the Sudbury parliamentary division of Suffolk and the Saffron Walden division of Essex. The population of the urban district (1901) was 4,862. It is 55 miles N.N.E. from London by the Great Eastern Railway, on the Long Melford-Cambridge branch, and serves as the terminus of the Colne Valley Railway from Chappel in Essex. The church of St Mary is built in the Perpendicular style but has been extensively restored. The town has significant manufacturing for cloth, silk, matting, bricks, and boots and shoes, along with a notable agricultural trade.


HAVERHILL, a city of Essex county, Massachusetts, U.S.A., situated on the Merrimac river, at the head of tide and navigation, and on the Boston & Maine railway, 33 m. N. of Boston. Pop. (1880) 18,472; (1890) 27,412; (1900) 37,175, of whom 8530 were foreign-born (including 2403 French Canadians, 1651 English Canadians and 2144 Irish), and 15,077 were of foreign parentage (both parents foreign-born); (1910 census) 44,115. The city, 3 m. wide and 10 m. long, lies for its entire length along the Merrimac river, from which it rises picturesquely, its surface being undulating, with several detached round hills (maximum 330 ft.). Like all old New England cities, it is irregularly laid out. A number of lakes within its limits are the source of an abundant and excellent water supply. There are fifteen public parks, the largest of which, Winnikenni Park (214 acres), contiguous to Lake Kenoza, is of great natural beauty. The city has three well-equipped hospitals, the beautiful Pentucket club house, a children’s home, an old ladies’ home and numerous charitable organizations. The schools of the city, both public and private, are of high standing; they include Bradford Academy (1803) for girls and the St James School (Roman Catholic). The public library is generously endowed, and in 1908 had about 90,000 volumes. Almost from the beginning of its history Haverhill was active industrially. Thomas Dustin, the husband of Hannah Dustin, manufactured bricks, and this industry has been carried on in the same locality for more than two hundred years. The large Stevens woollen mills are the outgrowth of mills established in 1835. The manufacture of woollen hats, established in the middle of the 18th century, is one of the prominent industries. There are large morocco factories. By far the leading industry of the city is the manufacture of boots, shoes and slippers, chiefly of the finer kinds, of which it is one of the largest producers in the world. In 1905 Haverhill ranked fourth among the cities of the United States in the product value of this manufacture, which was 4.8% of the total value of boots and shoes made in the United States. This industry began about 1795. In 1905 Haverhill’s manufacturing establishments produced goods valued at $24,446,594, 83.9% of this output being represented by boots and shoes or their accessories. One of the largest sole-leather manufactories in the world is here.

HAVERHILL, is a city in Essex County, Massachusetts, U.S.A., located on the Merrimack River, at the head of tide and navigation, and on the Boston & Maine railway, 33 miles north of Boston. Population (1880) 18,472; (1890) 27,412; (1900) 37,175, of whom 8,530 were foreign-born (including 2,403 French Canadians, 1,651 English Canadians, and 2,144 Irish), and 15,077 were of foreign parentage (both parents foreign-born); (1910 census) 44,115. The city is 3 miles wide and 10 miles long, stretching along the Merrimack River, from which it rises beautifully, featuring an undulating surface with several detached round hills (maximum 330 ft.). Like all old New England cities, it has an irregular layout. Several lakes within its borders provide a plentiful and excellent water supply. There are fifteen public parks, the largest of which, Winnikenni Park (214 acres), adjacent to Lake Kenoza, is stunningly beautiful. The city has three well-equipped hospitals, the lovely Pentucket clubhouse, a children’s home, an old ladies’ home, and numerous charitable organizations. The schools in the city, both public and private, are of high quality; they include Bradford Academy (1803) for girls and St. James School (Roman Catholic). The public library is well-endowed and had about 90,000 volumes in 1908. Almost from the start of its history, Haverhill has been industrially active. Thomas Dustin, husband of Hannah Dustin, produced bricks, and this industry has been carried on in the same area for over two hundred years. The large Stevens woolen mills stem from mills established in 1835. The production of woolen hats, which began in the mid-18th century, is one of the main industries. There are large morocco factories. By far the leading industry in the city is the manufacture of boots, shoes, and slippers, mainly in finer types, making it one of the largest producers in the world. In 1905, Haverhill ranked fourth among U.S. cities in the product value of this manufacturing, which accounted for 4.8% of the total value of boots and shoes produced in the U.S. This industry started around 1795. In 1905, Haverhill's manufacturing establishments produced goods valued at $24,446,594, with 83.9% of this output represented by boots and shoes or their accessories. One of the largest sole-leather factories in the world is located here.

Haverhill was settled in June 1640 by a small colony from Newbury and Ipswich, and its Indian name, Pentucket, was replaced by that of Haverhill in compliment to the first minister, Rev. John Ward, who was born at Haverhill, England. In its earlier years this frontier town suffered severely from the forays of the Indians, and in 1690 the abandonment of the settlement was contemplated. Two Indian attacks are particularly noteworthy—one in 1698, in which Hannah Dustin, her new-born babe, and her nurse were carried away to the vicinity of Penacook, now Concord, New Hampshire. Here in the night Mrs Dustin, assisted by her nurse and by a captive English boy, tomahawked and scalped ten Indians (two men, the others children and women) and escaped down the river to Haverhill; a monument to her stands in City Hall Park. In 1708 250 French and Indians attacked the village, killing 40 of its inhabitants. In 1873 a destructive fire caused the loss of 35 places of business, and on the 17th of February 1882 almost the entire shoe district (consisting of 10 acres) was burned, with a loss of more than $2,000,000; but a greater business district was built on the ruins of the old. Haverhill was the birthplace of Whittier, who lived here in 1807-1836, and who in his poem Haverhill, written for the 250th anniversary of the town in 1890, and in many of his other poems, gave the poet’s touch to the history, the legends and the scenery of his native city. His birthplace, the scene of Snow-Bound in the eastern part of the city, is owned by the Whittier Association and is open to visitors. A petition from Haverhill to the national House of Representatives in 1842, praying for a peaceable dissolution of the Union, raised about J. Q. Adams, its presenter, perhaps the most violent storm in the long course of his defence of the right of petition. Haverhill was incorporated as a town in 1645 and became a city in 1869. Bradford, a town (largely residential) lying on the opposite bank of the river, became a part of the city in 1897. In October 1908, by popular vote, the city adopted a new charter providing for government by commission.

Haverhill was established in June 1640 by a small group from Newbury and Ipswich, and its original Indian name, Pentucket, was changed to Haverhill in honor of the first minister, Rev. John Ward, who was born in Haverhill, England. In its early years, this frontier town faced serious challenges from Indian raids, and in 1690 there were thoughts of abandoning the settlement. Two Indian attacks are especially notable—one in 1698, when Hannah Dustin, her newborn baby, and her nurse were taken to the area around Penacook, now Concord, New Hampshire. That night, Mrs. Dustin, with help from her nurse and a captured English boy, killed and scalped ten Indians (two men, while the others were women and children) and made her escape down the river to Haverhill; a monument to her memory stands in City Hall Park. In 1708, 250 French and Indian fighters attacked the village, killing 40 residents. In 1873, a devastating fire destroyed 35 businesses, and on February 17, 1882, nearly the entire shoe district (covering 10 acres) was burned down, resulting in losses exceeding $2,000,000; however, a larger business district was built on the remains of the old one. Haverhill was the birthplace of Whittier, who lived there from 1807 to 1836, and in his poem Haverhill, written for the town's 250th anniversary in 1890, as well as in many of his other poems, he added a poet’s perspective to the history, legends, and landscape of his hometown. His birthplace, the setting for Snow-Bound in the eastern part of the city, is owned by the Whittier Association and is open to visitors. A petition from Haverhill to the national House of Representatives in 1842, asking for a peaceful separation from the Union, sparked perhaps the most intense controversy during J. Q. Adams's defense of the right to petition. Haverhill was incorporated as a town in 1645 and became a city in 1869. Bradford, a primarily residential town across the river, became part of the city in 1897. In October 1908, by popular vote, the city adopted a new charter providing for government by commission.


HAVERSACK, or Havresack (through the French from Ger. Habersack, an oat-sack, a nose-bag, Hafer or Haver, oats), the bag in which horsemen carried the oats for their horses. In Scotland and the north of England haver, meaning oats, is still used, as haver-meal or haver-bread. Haversack is now used for the strong bag made of linen or canvas, in which soldiers, sportsmen or travellers, carry their personal belongings, or more usually the provisions for the day.

HAVERSACK, or Haversack (from the French, derived from the German Habersack, which means an oat-sack or nose-bag; Hafer or Haver refers to oats), is the bag that horse riders used to carry oats for their horses. In Scotland and the north of England, haver, meaning oats, is still in use, as seen in terms like haver-meal or haver-bread. Today, haversack refers to a sturdy bag made of linen or canvas that soldiers, sports enthusiasts, or travelers use to carry their personal items, or more commonly, their daily supplies.

82

82


HAVERSTRAW, a village of Rockland county, New York, U.S.A., in a township of the same name, 32 m. N. of New York City, and finely situated on the W. shore of Haverstraw Bay, an enlargement of the Hudson river. Pop. of the village (1890), 5070; (1900) 5935, of whom 1231 were foreign-born and 568 were negroes; (1905, state census) 6182; (1910) 5669; of the township (1910) 9335. Haverstraw is served by the West Shore, the New Jersey & New York (Erie), and the New York, Ontario & Western railways, and is connected by steamboat lines with Peekskill and Newburgh. The village lies at the N. base of High Tor (832 ft.). It has a public library, founded by the King’s Daughters’ Society in 1895 and housed in the Fowler library building. Excellent clay is found in the township, and Haverstraw is one of the largest brick manufacturing centres in the world; brick-machines also are manufactured here. The Minesceongo creek furnishes water power for silk mills, dye works and print works. Haverstraw was settled by the Dutch probably as early as 1648. Near the village of Haverstraw (in the township of Stony Point), in the Joshua Hett Smith House, or “Old Treason House,” as it is generally called, Benedict Arnold and Major André met before daylight on the 22nd of September 1780 to arrange plans for the betrayal of West Point. In 1826 a short-lived Owenite Community (of about 80 members) was established near West Haverstraw and Garnerville (in the township of Haverstraw). The members of the community established a Church of Reason, in which lectures were delivered on ethics, philosophy and science. Dissensions soon arose in the community, the experiment was abandoned within five months, and most of the members joined in turn the Coxsackie Community, also in New York, and the Kendal Community, near Canton, Ohio, both of which were also short-lived. The village of Haverstraw was originally known as Warren and was incorporated under that name in 1854; in 1873 it became officially the village of Haverstraw—both names had previously been used locally. The village of West Haverstraw (pop. in 1890, 180; in 1900, 2079; and in 1910, 2369), also in Haverstraw township, was founded in 1830, was long known as Samsondale, and was incorporated under its present name in 1883.

HAVERSTRAW, is a village in Rockland County, New York, U.S.A., located in the township of the same name, 32 miles north of New York City, and nicely situated on the west shore of Haverstraw Bay, an extension of the Hudson River. The population of the village was 5,070 in 1890; 5,935 in 1900, including 1,231 foreign-born residents and 568 African Americans; 6,182 in the 1905 state census; and 5,669 in 1910. The township's population in 1910 was 9,335. Haverstraw is served by the West Shore, New Jersey & New York (Erie), and New York, Ontario & Western railroads, and has steamboat connections to Peekskill and Newburgh. The village lies at the northern base of High Tor (832 ft). It features a public library, founded by the King’s Daughters’ Society in 1895 and located in the Fowler library building. Excellent clay is abundant in the township, making Haverstraw one of the largest brick manufacturing centers globally; brick machinery is also produced here. Minesceongo Creek provides water power for silk mills, dye works, and print works. Haverstraw was likely settled by the Dutch as early as 1648. Near the village of Haverstraw (in the township of Stony Point), in the Joshua Hett Smith House, commonly referred to as the “Old Treason House,” Benedict Arnold and Major André met before dawn on September 22, 1780, to finalize plans for the betrayal of West Point. In 1826, a short-lived Owenite Community (with around 80 members) was established near West Haverstraw and Garnerville (in Haverstraw township). The community founded a Church of Reason, delivering lectures on ethics, philosophy, and science. Conflicts soon emerged, leading to the abandonment of the experiment within five months, and most members subsequently joined the Coxsackie Community in New York and the Kendal Community near Canton, Ohio, both of which were also short-lived. The village of Haverstraw was originally called Warren and was incorporated under that name in 1854. In 1873, it officially became the village of Haverstraw—both names had previously been used locally. The village of West Haverstraw (population in 1890, 180; in 1900, 2,079; and in 1910, 2,369), also in Haverstraw township, was founded in 1830, long known as Samsondale, and was incorporated under its current name in 1883.

See F. B. Green, History of Rockland County (New York, 1886).

See F. B. Green, History of Rockland County (New York, 1886).


HAVET, EUGÈNE AUGUSTE ERNEST (1813-1889), French scholar, was born in Paris on the 11th of April 1813. Educated at the Lycée Saint-Louis and the École Normale, he was for many years before his death on the 21st of December 1889 professor of Latin eloquence at the Collège de France. His two capital works were a commentary on the works of Pascal, Pensées de Pascal publiées dans leur texte authentique avec un commentaire suivi (1852; 2nd ed. 2 vols., 1881), and Le Christianisme et ses origines (4 vols., 1871-1884), the chief thesis of which was that Christianity owed more to Greek philosophy than to the writings of the Hebrew prophets. His elder son, Pierre Antoine Louis Havet (b. 1849), was professor of Latin philology at the Collège de France and a member of the Institute. The younger, Julien, is separately noticed.

HAVET, EUGÈNE AUGUSTE ERNEST (1813-1889), a French scholar, was born in Paris on April 11, 1813. He studied at the Lycée Saint-Louis and the École Normale. For many years before his death on December 21, 1889, he was a professor of Latin eloquence at the Collège de France. His major works include a commentary on the writings of Pascal, Pensées de Pascal publiées dans leur texte authentique avec un commentaire suivi (1852; 2nd ed. 2 vols., 1881), and Le Christianisme et ses origines (4 vols., 1871-1884), which argued that Christianity was influenced more by Greek philosophy than by the Hebrew prophets' writings. His elder son, Pierre Antoine Louis Havet (b. 1849), served as a professor of Latin philology at the Collège de France and was a member of the Institute. The younger son, Julien, is mentioned separately.


HAVET, JULIEN (Pierre Eugène) (1853-1893), French historian, was born at Vitry-sur-Seine on the 4th of April 1853, the second son of Ernest Havet. He early showed a remarkable aptitude for learning, but had a pronounced aversion for pure rhetoric. His studies at the École des Chartes (where he took first place both on entering and leaving) and at the École des Hautes Études did much to develop his critical faculty, and the historical method taught and practised at these establishments brought home to him the dignity of history, which thenceforth became his ruling passion. His valedictory thesis at the École des Chartes, Série chronologique des gardiens et seigneurs des Îles Normandes (1876), was a definitive work and but slightly affected by later research. In 1878 he followed his thesis by a study called Les Cours royales dans les Îles Normandes. Both these works were composed entirely from the original documents at the Public Record Office, London, and the archives of Jersey and Guernsey. On the history of Merovingian institutions, Havet’s conclusions were widely accepted (see La Formule N. rex Francor., v. inl., 1885). His first work in this province was Du sens du mot “romain” dans les lois franques (1876), a critical study on a theory of Fustel de Coulanges. In this he showed that the status of the homo Romanus of the barbarian laws was inferior to that of the German freeman; that the Gallo-Romans had been subjected by the Germans to a state of servitude; and, consequently, that the Germans had conquered the Gallo-Romans. He aimed a further blow at Fustel’s system by showing that the Frankish kings had never borne the Roman title of vir inluster, and that they could not therefore be considered as being in the first place Roman magistrates; and that in the royal diplomas the king issued his commands as rex Francorum and addressed his functionaries as viri inlustres. His attention having been drawn to questions of authenticity by the forgeries of Vrain Lucas, he devoted himself to tracing the spurious documents that encumbered and perverted Merovingian and Carolingian history. In his A propos des découvertes de Jérome Vignier (1880), he exposed the forgeries committed in the 17th century by this priest. He then turned his attention to a group of documents relating to ecclesiastical history in the Carolingian period and bearing on the question of false decretals, and produced Les Chartes de St-Calais (1887) and Les Actes de l’évêché du Mans (1894). On the problems afforded by the chronology of Gerbert’s (Pope Silvester II.) letters and by the notes in cipher in the MS. of his letters, he wrote L’Écriture secrète de Gerbert (1877), which may be compared with his Notes tironiennes dans les diplômes mérovingiens (1885). In 1889 he brought out an edition of Gerbert’s letters, which was a model of critical sagacity. Each new work increased his reputation, in Germany as well as France. At the Bibliothèque Nationale, where he obtained a post, he rendered great service by his wide knowledge of foreign languages, and read voraciously everything that related, however remotely, to his favourite studies. He was finally appointed assistant curator in the department of printed books. He died prematurely at St Cloud on the 19th of August 1893.

HAVET, JULIEN (Pierre Eugene) (1853-1893), a French historian, was born in Vitry-sur-Seine on April 4, 1853, and was the second son of Ernest Havet. He showed a strong talent for learning at an early age but had a clear dislike for pure rhetoric. His studies at the École des Chartes (where he ranked first both at the beginning and end of his time there) and at the École des Hautes Études greatly enhanced his critical skills. The historical methods taught at these institutions revealed to him the significance of history, which became his driving passion from that point on. His final thesis at the École des Chartes, Série chronologique des gardiens et seigneurs des Îles Normandes (1876), was a landmark work with minimal impact from subsequent research. In 1878, he followed this with a study titled Les Cours royales dans les Îles Normandes. Both works were entirely based on original documents from the Public Record Office in London, as well as the archives of Jersey and Guernsey. Regarding the history of Merovingian institutions, Havet’s findings were widely accepted (see La Formule N. rex Francor., v. inl., 1885). His first piece in this area was Du sens du mot “romain” dans les lois franques (1876), a critical study on Fustel de Coulanges’ theory. Here, he demonstrated that the status of the homo Romanus in the barbarian laws was lower than that of the German freeman; that the Gallo-Romans were subjected to servitude by the Germans; and that the Germans had thus conquered the Gallo-Romans. He further challenged Fustel’s system by showing that the Frankish kings never held the Roman title of vir inluster, making it impossible to regard them primarily as Roman magistrates; in royal diplomas, the king issued commands as rex Francorum and referred to his officials as viri inlustres. After being made aware of authenticity issues by the forgeries of Vrain Lucas, he focused on identifying the false documents that distorted Merovingian and Carolingian history. In his A propos des découvertes de Jérome Vignier (1880), he exposed the forgeries perpetrated in the 17th century by this priest. He then shifted his focus to a set of documents concerning ecclesiastical history during the Carolingian era and related to false decretals, producing Les Chartes de St-Calais (1887) and Les Actes de l’évêché du Mans (1894). He wrote L’Écriture secrète de Gerbert (1877), addressing the chronological issues of Gerbert’s (Pope Silvester II.) letters and the notes in cipher in their manuscript, which can be compared to his Notes tironiennes dans les diplômes mérovingiens (1885). In 1889, he published an edition of Gerbert’s letters that exemplified critical insight. Each new publication bolstered his reputation in both Germany and France. At the Bibliothèque Nationale, where he secured a position, he greatly contributed with his extensive knowledge of foreign languages and eagerly read everything related, even tangentially, to his favorite subjects. He was eventually promoted to assistant curator in the printed books department. He died young in St Cloud on August 19, 1893.

After his death his published and unpublished writings were collected and published (with the exception of Les Cours royales des Îles Normandes and Lettres de Gerbert) in two volumes called Questions mérovingiennes and Opuscules inédits (1896), containing, besides important papers on diplomatic and on Carolingian and Merovingian history, a large number of short monographs ranging over a great variety of subjects. A collection of his articles was published by his friends under the title of Mélanges Havet (1895), prefixed by a bibliography of his works compiled by his friend Henri Omont.

After his death, his published and unpublished writings were gathered and released (except for Les Cours royales des Îles Normandes and Lettres de Gerbert) in two volumes titled Questions mérovingiennes and Opuscules inédits (1896). These volumes included significant papers on diplomacy, as well as Carolingian and Merovingian history, and featured many short monographs covering a wide range of topics. A collection of his articles was put together by his friends under the title Mélanges Havet (1895), introduced with a bibliography of his works compiled by his friend Henri Omont.

(C. B.*)

HAVRE, LE, a seaport of north-western France, in the department of Seine-Inférieure, on the north bank of the estuary of the Seine, 143 m. W.N.W. of Paris and 55 m. W. of Rouen by the Western railway. Pop. (1906), 129,403. The greater part of the town stands on the level strip of ground bordering the estuary, but on the N. rises an eminence, la Côte, covered by the gardens and villas of the richer quarter. The central point of the town is the Place de l’hôtel de ville in which are the public gardens. It is crossed by the Boulevard de Strasbourg, running from the sea on the west to the railway station and the barracks on the east. The rue de Paris, the busiest street, starts at the Grand Quai, overlooking the outer harbour, and, intersecting the Place Gambetta, runs north and enters the Place de l’hôtel de ville on its southern side. The docks start immediately to the east of this street and extend over a large area to the south and south-east of the town. Apart from the church of Notre-Dame, dating from the 16th and 17th centuries, the chief buildings of Havre, including the hôtel de ville, the law courts, and the exchange, are of modern erection. The museum contains a collection of antiquities and paintings. Havre is the seat of a sub-prefect, and forms part of the maritime arrondissement of Cherbourg. Among the public institutions are a tribunal of first instance, a tribunal of commerce, a board of trade arbitrators, a tribunal of maritime commerce, a chamber of commerce and a branch of the Bank of France. There are lycées for boys and girls, schools of commerce and other educational establishments. Havre, which is a fortified place of the second class, ranks second to Marseilles among French seaports. There are nine basins (the oldest of which 83 dates back to 1669) with an area of about 200 acres and more than 8 m. of quays. They extend to the east of the outer harbour which on the west opens into the new outer harbour, formed by two breakwaters converging from the land and leaving an entrance facing west. The chief docks (see Dock for plan) are the Bassin Bellot and the Bassin de l’Eure. In the latter the mail-steamers of the Compagnie Générale Transatlantique are berthed; and the Tancarville canal, by which river-boats unable to attempt the estuary of the Seine can make the port direct, enters the harbour by this basin. There are, besides, several repairing docks and a petroleum dock for the use of vessels carrying that dangerous commodity. The port, which is an important point of emigration, has regular steam-communication with New York (by the vessels of the Compagnie Générale Transatlantique) and with many of the other chief ports of Europe, North, South and Central America, the West Indies and Africa. Imports in 1907 reached a value of £57,686,000. The chief were cotton, for which Havre is the great French market, coffee, copper and other metals, cacao, cotton goods, rubber, skins and hides, silk goods, dye-woods, tobacco, oil-seeds, coal, cereals and wool. In the same year exports were valued at £47,130,000, the most important being cotton, silk and woollen goods, coffee, hides, leather, wine and spirits, rubber, tools and metal ware, earthenware and glass, clothes and millinery, cacao and fancy goods. In 1907 the total tonnage of shipping (with cargoes) reached its highest point, viz. 5,671,975 tons (4018 vessels) compared with 3,816,340 tons (3832 vessels) in 1898. Forty-two per cent of this shipping sailed under the British flag. France and Germany were Great Britain’s most serious rivals. Havre possesses oil works, soap works, saw mills, flour mills, works for extracting dyes and tannin from dye-woods, an important tobacco manufactory, chemical works and rope works. It also has metallurgical and engineering works which construct commercial and war-vessels of every kind as well as engines and machinery, cables, boilers, &c.

HAVRE, LE is a seaport in north-western France, located in the Seine-Inférieure department, on the north bank of the Seine estuary, 143 miles W.N.W. of Paris and 55 miles W. of Rouen by the Western railway. Population (1906) was 129,403. Most of the town is on a flat area along the estuary, but to the north, there’s an elevated area called la Côte, featuring gardens and villas in the wealthier section. The town's central point is the Place de l’hôtel de ville, which includes public gardens. It is crossed by Boulevard de Strasbourg, which runs from the sea in the west to the railway station and barracks in the east. The rue de Paris, the busiest street, starts at the Grand Quai, overlooking the outer harbor, intersects Place Gambetta, and runs north, entering the Place de l’hôtel de ville from the south. The docks begin just east of this street and cover a large area to the south and southeast of the town. Besides the church of Notre-Dame, dating back to the 16th and 17th centuries, most of Havre’s major buildings, including the hôtel de ville, the law courts, and the exchange, are of modern construction. The museum features a collection of antiquities and paintings. Havre is the seat of a sub-prefect and is part of the maritime district of Cherbourg. Public institutions include a first-instance court, a commercial court, a board of trade arbitrators, a maritime commercial court, a chamber of commerce, and a branch of the Bank of France. There are high schools for boys and girls, trade schools, and other educational facilities. Havre, which is a fortified second-class location, ranks second to Marseille among French seaports. There are nine basins (the oldest dating back to 1669) covering about 200 acres and over 8 miles of quays. They extend east of the outer harbor, which on the west opens into the new outer harbor, formed by two breakwaters converging from the land, leaving an entrance facing west. The main docks (see Dock for plan) include Bassin Bellot and Bassin de l’Eure. In the latter, the mail steamers of Compagnie Générale Transatlantique are docked; and the Tancarville canal, which allows riverboats that can’t navigate the Seine estuary to reach the port directly, enters the harbor through this basin. Additionally, there are several repair docks and a petroleum dock for vessels carrying that hazardous material. The port, an important emigration hub, has regular steamship service to New York (by Compagnie Générale Transatlantique) and many major ports in Europe, North, South, and Central America, the West Indies, and Africa. In 1907, imports were valued at £57,686,000, with major items including cotton, for which Havre is the primary French market, coffee, copper and other metals, cacao, cotton goods, rubber, skins and hides, silk goods, dye-woods, tobacco, oil-seeds, coal, cereals, and wool. Exports in the same year were valued at £47,130,000, the key items being cotton, silk and woolen goods, coffee, hides, leather, wine and spirits, rubber, tools and metal goods, ceramics and glass, clothing and millinery, cacao, and decorative items. In 1907, total shipping tonnage (with cargo) hit a record high of 5,671,975 tons (4018 vessels) compared to 3,816,340 tons (3832 vessels) in 1898. Forty-two percent of this shipping was under the British flag. France and Germany were Britain’s main competitors. Havre has oil refineries, soap factories, sawmills, flour mills, facilities for extracting dyes and tannins from dye-woods, a significant tobacco processing plant, chemical manufacturing facilities, and rope manufacturing. Additionally, it has metallurgical and engineering works that build commercial and military vessels of all kinds, along with engines, machinery, cables, boilers, etc.

Until 1516 Havre was only a fishing village possessing a chapel dedicated to Notre-Dame de Grâce, to which it owes the name, Havre (harbour) de Grâce, given to it by Francis I. when he began the construction of its harbour. The town in 1562 was delivered over to the keeping of Queen Elizabeth by Louis I., prince de Condé, leader of the Huguenots, and the command of it was entrusted to Ambrose Dudley, earl of Warwick; but the English were expelled in 1563, after a most obstinate siege, which was pressed forward by Charles IX. and his mother, Catherine de’ Medici, in person. The defences of the town and the harbour-works were continued by Richelieu and completed by Vauban. In 1694 it was vainly besieged by the English, who also bombarded it in 1759, 1794 and 1795. It was a port of considerable importance as early as 1572, and despatched vessels to the whale and cod-fishing at Spitsbergen and Newfoundland. In 1672 it became the entrepôt of the French East India Company, and afterwards of the Senegal and Guinea companies. Napoleon I. raised it to a war harbour of the first rank, and under Napoleon III. works begun by Louis XVI. were completed.

Until 1516, Havre was just a fishing village with a chapel dedicated to Notre-Dame de Grâce, which is how it got its name, Havre (harbour) de Grâce, given by Francis I when he started building its harbor. In 1562, the town was handed over to Queen Elizabeth by Louis I, Prince de Condé, leader of the Huguenots, and Ambrose Dudley, Earl of Warwick, was put in charge. However, the English were expelled in 1563 after a very stubborn siege led by Charles IX and his mother, Catherine de’ Medici. The town's defenses and harbor works continued under Richelieu and were completed by Vauban. In 1694, the English attempted to besiege it but failed, and they also bombarded it in 1759, 1794, and 1795. As early as 1572, it was an important port, sending ships for whale and cod fishing in Spitsbergen and Newfoundland. In 1672, it became the hub for the French East India Company and later for the Senegal and Guinea companies. Napoleon I upgraded it to a top-tier war harbor, and under Napoleon III, the projects started by Louis XVI were finished.

See A. E. Borely, Histoire de la ville du Havre (Le Havre, 1880-1881).

See A. E. Borely, Histoire de la ville du Havre (Le Havre, 1880-1881).


HAWAII (Hawaiian or Sandwich Islands), a Territory of the United States of America, consisting of a chain of islands in the North Pacific Ocean, eight inhabited and several uninhabited. The inhabited islands lie between latitudes 18° 54′ and 22° 15′ N., and between longitudes 154° 50′ and 160° 30′ W., and extend about 380 m. from E.S.E. to W.N.W.; the uninhabited ones, mere rocks and reefs, valuable only for their guano deposits and shark-fishing grounds, continue the chain several hundred miles farther W.N.W. From Honolulu, the capital, which is about 100 m. N.W. of the middle of the inhabited group, the distance to San Francisco is about 2100 m.; to Auckland, New Zealand, about 3810 m.; to Sydney, New South Wales, about 4410 m.; to Yokohama, about 3400 m.; to Hong-Kong, about 4920 m.; to Manila, about 4890 m. The total area of the inhabited islands is 6651 sq. m., distributed as follows: Hawaii, 4210; Maui, 728; Oahu, about 600; Kauai, 547; Molokai, 261; Lanai, 139; Niihau, 97; Kahoolawe, 69.

HAWAII (Hawaiian culture or Hawaiian Islands), a territory of the United States, consists of a chain of islands in the North Pacific Ocean, with eight inhabited and several uninhabited. The inhabited islands are located between latitudes 18° 54′ and 22° 15′ N, and longitudes 154° 50′ and 160° 30′ W, stretching about 380 miles from E.S.E. to W.N.W. The uninhabited islands, which are mostly rocks and reefs valuable only for their guano deposits and shark-fishing areas, extend the chain several hundred miles farther W.N.W. From Honolulu, the capital, which is about 100 miles N.W. of the center of the inhabited group, the distance to San Francisco is about 2100 miles; to Auckland, New Zealand, about 3810 miles; to Sydney, New South Wales, about 4410 miles; to Yokohama, about 3400 miles; to Hong Kong, about 4920 miles; and to Manila, about 4890 miles. The total area of the inhabited islands is 6651 square miles, distributed as follows: Hawaii, 4210; Maui, 728; Oahu, about 600; Kauai, 547; Molokai, 261; Lanai, 139; Niihau, 97; Kahoolawe, 69.

All the islands are of volcanic origin, and have been built up by the eruptive process from a base about 15,000 ft. below the sea to a maximum height (Mauna Kea) on the largest island (Hawaii) of 13,823 ft. above the sea; altogether there are forty volcanic peaks. Evidence of slight upheaval is occasionally afforded by an elevated coral-reef along the shore, and evidence of the subsidence of the S. portion of Oahu for several hundred feet has been discovered by artesian borings through coral-rock. In some instances, notably the high and nearly vertical wall along the N. shore of the E. half of Molokai, there is evidence of a fracture followed by the submergence of a portion of a volcano. With the exception of the coral and a small amount of calcareous sandstone, the rocks are entirely volcanic and range from basalt to trachyte, but are mainly basalt. Cinder cones and tufa cones abound, but one of the most distinguishing features of the Hawaiian volcanoes is the great number of craters of the engulfment type, i.e. pit-craters which enlarge slowly by the breaking off and falling in of their walls, and discharge vast lava-flows with comparatively little violence. The age of the several inhabited islands, or at least the time since the last eruptions on them, decreases from W. to E., and on the most easterly (Hawaii) volcanic forces are still in operation. That those to the westward have long been inactive is shown by the destruction of craters by denudation, by deep ravines, valleys and tall cliffs eroded on the mountain sides, especially on the windward side, by the depth of soil formed from the disintegrated rocks, and by the amount as well as variety of vegetable life.

All the islands are volcanic and have formed through eruptive processes from a base about 15,000 feet below sea level to a maximum height (Mauna Kea) on the largest island (Hawaii) of 13,823 feet above sea level; in total, there are forty volcanic peaks. Occasionally, signs of slight uplift can be seen in an elevated coral reef along the shore, and evidence of the southern part of Oahu sinking for several hundred feet has been found through artesian borings in coral rock. In some cases, particularly along the high and nearly vertical wall on the northern shore of the eastern half of Molokai, there are signs of a fracture followed by the submergence of part of a volcano. With the exception of the coral and a small amount of calcareous sandstone, the rocks are entirely volcanic and range from basalt to trachyte, though they are mainly basalt. Cinder cones and tufa cones are common, but one of the most notable features of the Hawaiian volcanoes is the large number of engulfment-type craters, meaning pit-craters that slowly enlarge as their walls break and collapse, discharging vast lava flows with relatively little violence. The age of the inhabited islands, or at least the time since their last eruptions, decreases from west to east, with the most easterly island (Hawaii) still showing volcanic activity. The inactivity of those to the west is evident from the erosion of craters, the presence of deep ravines, valleys, and tall cliffs eroded on the mountain sides—especially on the windward side—along with the depth of soil created from disintegrated rocks and the variety and abundance of plant life.

Hawaii Island, from which the group and later the Territory was named, has the shape of a rude triangle with sides of 90 m., 75 m. and 65 m. Its coast, unlike that of the other islands of the archipelago, has few coral reefs. Its surface consists mainly of the gentle slopes of five volcanic mountains which have encroached much upon one another by their eruptions.

Hawaii Island, after which the group and later the Territory was named, has the shape of a rough triangle with sides measuring 90 m, 75 m, and 65 m. Unlike the other islands in the archipelago, its coastline has few coral reefs. The land mainly consists of the gentle slopes of five volcanic mountains that have significantly overlapped due to their eruptions.

Mauna Loa (“Great Mountain”), on the S., is by far the largest volcano in the world; from a base measuring at sea-level about 75 m. from N. to S. and 50 m. from E. to W., it rises gradually to a height of 13,675 ft. On its E.S.E. side, at an elevation of 4000 ft. above the sea (300 ft. above the adjoining plain on the W.) is Kilauea, from whose lava-flows the island has been extended to form its S.E. angle. To the N.N.E. of Mauna Loa, and blending with it in an intervening plateau, is Mauna Kea (“White Mountain,” so named from the snow on its summit), with a much smaller base but with steeper slopes and a crowning cinder cone 13,823 ft. above the sea, the maximum height in the Pacific Ocean; blending with Mauna Loa on the N.N.W. is Mauna Hualalai, 8269 ft. in height; and rising abruptly from the extreme N.W. shore are the remains of the oldest mountains of the island, the Kohala, with a summit 5505 ft. in height. On the land side the Kohala Mountains have been covered with lava from Mauna Kea, and form the broad plains of Kohala, having a maximum elevation of about 3000 ft.; on the ocean side, wherever this lava has not extended, erosion has gone on until bluffs 1000 ft. in height face the sea and the enormous gorges of Waipio and Waimanu, with nearly perpendicular walls as much as 3000 ft. high and extending inland 5-6 m., have been formed. Mauna Kea is not nearly so old as the Kohala Mountains, but there is no record of its eruption, nor have its lavas a modern aspect. The last eruption of Mauna Hualalai was in 1801. Mauna Loa and Kilauea are still active. Cinder cones are the predominant type of craters on both Mauna Kea and the Kohala Mountains, and they are also numerous on the upper slopes of Mauna Hualalai; but the more typically Hawaiian pit or engulfment craters also abound on Mauna Hualalai and Mokuaweoweo, crowning the summit of Mauna Loa, as well as Kilauea, to the S.E. of it, are prominent representatives of this type. Kilauea is the largest active crater in the world (8 m. in circumference) and is easily accessible. Enclosed by a circular wall from 200 to 700 ft. in height is a black and slightly undulating plain having an area of 4.14 sq. m., and within this plain is a pit, Halemaumau, of varying area (about 2000 ft. in diameter in 1905), now full of boiling lava, now empty to a depth of perhaps 1000 ft. When most active, Halemaumau affords a grand spectacle, especially at night: across the crust run glowing cracks, the crust is then broken into cakes, the cakes plunge beneath, lakes of liquid lava are formed, over whose surface play fire-fountains 10 to 50 ft. in height, the surface again solidifies and the process is repeated.1 According to an account of the natives, a violent eruption of Kilauea occurred in 1789, or about that time, and deposits of volcanic sand, large stones, sponge-like scoria (pumice) and ashes for miles around are evidence of such an eruption. Since the Rev. William Ellis and a party of American missionaries first made the volcano known to the civilized 84 world in 1823, the eruptions have consisted mainly in the quiet discharge of lava through a subterranean passage into the sea. In the eruptions of 1823, 1832, 1840 and 1868 the floor of the crater rose on the eve of an eruption and then sank, sometimes hundreds of feet, with the discharge of lava; but since 1868 (in 1879, 1886, 1891, 1894 and 1907; and once, before 1868, in 1855) this action has been confined to Halemaumau and such other pits as at the time existed.

Mauna Loa ("Great Mountain") in the south is the largest volcano in the world. Its base, extending from sea level, measures about 75 miles north to south and 50 miles east to west, gradually rising to a height of 13,675 feet. On the southeast side, at an elevation of 4,000 feet above sea level (300 feet above the surrounding plain to the west), lies Kilauea, whose lava flows have extended the island's southeastern tip. To the north-northeast of Mauna Loa, merging with it on an intervening plateau, is Mauna Kea ("White Mountain," named for the snow at its summit). Although it has a smaller base, it has steeper slopes and features a summit cinder cone of 13,823 feet, the highest point in the Pacific Ocean. To the north-northwest, Mauna Hualalai rises 8,269 feet, while the remains of the island's oldest mountains, the Kohala, tower 5,505 feet from the extreme northwest shore. On the land side, the Kohala Mountains are covered with lava from Mauna Kea, forming the broad Kohala plains, which reach a maximum elevation of about 3,000 feet. On the ocean side, where lava hasn’t spread, erosion has created 1,000-foot-high cliffs facing the sea, along with the deep gorges of Waipio and Waimanu, which have nearly vertical walls rising up to 3,000 feet and extending inland 5 to 6 miles. Mauna Kea is not nearly as old as the Kohala Mountains, and there is no recorded eruption of it, nor do its lavas appear modern. The last eruption of Mauna Hualalai occurred in 1801. Mauna Loa and Kilauea remain active. Cinder cones are the main type of craters found on both Mauna Kea and the Kohala Mountains and are also numerous on the upper slopes of Mauna Hualalai. However, the more classic Hawaiian pit or caldera craters are also abundant on Mauna Hualalai. Prominent examples of this type include Mokuaweoweo, which crowns the summit of Mauna Loa, and Kilauea to the southeast. Kilauea is the largest active crater in the world, measuring 8 miles in circumference and is easily accessible. Inside a circular wall that rises between 200 and 700 feet is a slightly undulating plain covering an area of 4.14 square miles; within this plain lies Halemaumau, a pit that varies in size (about 2,000 feet in diameter in 1905), sometimes filled with boiling lava and at other times empty to depths of around 1,000 feet. When most active, Halemaumau offers a stunning display, especially at night: glowing cracks surface across the crust, which then breaks into pieces that sink, creating lakes of liquid lava where fire fountains reaching 10 to 50 feet high play across the surface. This surface solidifies again and the cycle repeats. According to local accounts, a significant eruption of Kilauea took place in 1789 or around that time, with deposits of volcanic sand, large rocks, pumice, and ash scattered for miles as evidence of the eruption. Since Reverend William Ellis and a group of American missionaries first introduced the volcano to the civilized world in 1823, eruptions have mainly involved the slow discharge of lava through an underground channel into the sea. During the eruptions of 1823, 1832, 1840, and 1868, the floor of the crater would rise before an eruption and then fall, sometimes by hundreds of feet, as lava was released. However, since 1868 (including in 1879, 1886, 1891, 1894, and 1907; and once before 1868 in 1855), this phenomenon has been limited to Halemaumau and other pits that were present at that time.

Mokuaweoweo, on the flat top of Mauna Loa, is a pit crater with a floor 3.7 sq. m. in area and sunk 500-600 ft. within walls that are almost vertical and that measure 9.47 m. in circumference. Formerly, on the eve of a great eruption of Mauna Loa, this crater often spouted forth great columns of flame and emitted clouds of vapour, but in modern times this action has usually been followed by a fracture of the mountain side from the summit down to a point 1000 ft. or more below where the lava was discharged in great streams, the action at the summit diminishing or wholly ceasing when this discharge began. The first recorded eruption of Mauna Loa was in 1832; since then there have been eruptions in 1851, 1852, 1855, 1859, 1868, 1880-1881, 1887, 1896, 1899 and 1907. The eruptions of 1868, 1887 and 1907 were attended by earthquakes; in 1868 huge sea waves, 40 ft. in height, were raised, and, as they broke on the S. shore, they destroyed the villages of Punaluu, Ninole, Kawaa and Honuapo. But the eruptions of Mauna Loa have consisted mainly in the quiet discharge of enormous flows of lava: in 1859 the lava-stream, which began to run on the 23rd of January, flowed N.W., reached the sea, 33 m. distant, eight days later, and continued to flow into it until the 25th of November; and the average length of the flows from seven other eruptions is nearly 14 m. The surface of the upper slopes of Mauna Loa is almost wholly of two widely different kinds of barren lava-flows, called by the Hawaiians the pahoehoe and the aa. The pahoehoe has a smooth but billowy or hummocky surface, and is marked by lines which show that it cooled as it flowed. The aa is lava broken into fragments having sharp and jagged edges. As the same stream sometimes changes abruptly from one kind to the other, the two kinds must be due to different conditions affecting the flow, and among the conditions which may cause a stream to break up into the aa have been mentioned the greater depth of the stream, a sluggish current, impediments in its course just as it is granulating, and, what is more probable, subterranean moisture which causes it to cool from below upward instead of from above downward as in the pahoehoe. The natives are in the habit of making holes in the aa, and planting in them banana shoots or sweet-potato cuttings, and though the holes are simply filled with stones or fern leaves, the plants grow and in due time are productive. Another curious feature of Mauna Loa, and to some extent of other Hawaiian volcanoes, is the great number of caves, some of them as much as 60 to 80 ft. in height and several miles in length; they were produced by the escape of lava over which a crust had formed. In the midst of barren wastes to the S.E. and S.W. of Kilauea are small channels with steam cracks, along which appears the only vegetation of the region.

Mokuaweoweo, located on the flat top of Mauna Loa, is a pit crater with a floor area of 3.7 square meters and is sunk 500-600 feet within almost vertical walls that measure 9.47 meters in circumference. In the past, right before a significant eruption of Mauna Loa, this crater would often shoot up great columns of flame and release clouds of vapor, but nowadays, this activity is generally followed by a crack in the mountainside that runs from the summit down to a point 1,000 feet or more below, where lava flows out in massive streams. The action at the summit tends to decrease or stop entirely when this discharge starts. The first recorded eruption of Mauna Loa was in 1832; since then, eruptions have occurred in 1851, 1852, 1855, 1859, 1868, 1880-1881, 1887, 1896, 1899, and 1907. The eruptions in 1868, 1887, and 1907 were accompanied by earthquakes; in 1868, enormous sea waves, 40 feet high, were generated, and when they crashed onto the southern shore, they destroyed the villages of Punaluu, Ninole, Kawaa, and Honuapo. However, the eruptions of Mauna Loa mostly consist of the quiet release of vast lava flows: in 1859, the lava stream that started on January 23 flowed northwest, reached the sea 33 miles away eight days later, and continued to flow into it until November 25; the average length of the flows from seven other eruptions is nearly 14 miles. The surface of the upper slopes of Mauna Loa is primarily made up of two very different types of barren lava flows, known by Hawaiians as pahoehoe and aa. The pahoehoe has a smooth but wavy or bumpy surface and is marked by lines that indicate it cooled while flowing. The aa consists of lava broken into shards with sharp, jagged edges. Since the same stream can suddenly switch between the two types, different conditions affecting the flow must be responsible. Among the factors that may cause a stream to break into aa are increased stream depth, a slow current, obstacles in the path as it begins to solidify, and, more likely, underground moisture that causes it to cool from below instead of from above like in pahoehoe. Locals often make holes in the aa and plant banana shoots or sweet potato cuttings in them, and even though these holes are simply filled with stones or fern leaves, the plants grow and eventually produce fruit. Another interesting feature of Mauna Loa, and to some extent other Hawaiian volcanoes, is the large number of caves, some reaching heights of 60 to 80 feet and several miles long; these were formed by lava flowing beneath a crust. In the desolate areas southeast and southwest of Kilauea, there are small channels with steam cracks, where the only vegetation in the region appears.

Maui, lying 26 m. N.W. of Hawaii, is composed of two mountains connected by an isthmus, Wailuku, 7 or 8 m. long, about 6 m. across, and about 160 ft. above the sea in its highest part.

Maui, located 26 miles northwest of Hawaii, consists of two mountains linked by an isthmus, Wailuku, which is 7 or 8 miles long, about 6 miles wide, and rises approximately 160 feet above sea level at its highest point.

Mauna Haleakala, on the E. peninsula, has a height of 10,032 ft., and forms a great dome-like mass, with a circumference at the base of 90 m. and regular slopes of only 8° or 9°. It has numerous cinder cones on its S.W. slope, is well wooded on the N. and E. slopes, and has on its summit an extinct pit-crater which is one of the largest in the world. This crater is 7.48 m. long, 2.37 m. wide, and covers 19 sq. m.; the circuit of its walls, which are composed of a hard grey clinkstone much fissured, is 20 m.; its greatest depth is 2720 ft. At opposite ends are breaks in the walls a mile or more in width—one about 1000 ft., the other at least 3000 ft. in depth—through which poured the lava of probably the last great eruption. From the floor of the crater rise sixteen well-preserved cinder-cones, which range from more than 400 ft. to 900 ft. in height. Along the N. base of the mountain are numerous ravines (several hundred feet deep), to the bottom of which small streams of water fall in long cascades, but elsewhere on the eastern mountain there is little erosion or other mark of age. That the mountainous mass of western Maui is much older is shown by the destruction of its crater, by its sharp ridges and by deeply eroded gorges or valleys. Its highest peak, Puu Kukui, rises 5788 ft. above the sea, and directly under this is the head of Iao Valley, 5 m. long and 2 m. wide, which has been cut in the mountain to a depth of 4000 ft. This and the smaller valleys are noted for the beauty of their tropical scenery.

Mauna Haleakala, on the eastern peninsula, stands at 10,032 ft. tall and has a massive dome shape, with a base circumference of 90 m. and gentle slopes of only 8° or 9°. It features several cinder cones on its southwest slope, is richly forested on the north and east slopes, and has a large extinct pit crater at its summit, one of the biggest in the world. This crater is 7.48 m long, 2.37 m wide, and covers an area of 19 sq. m.; the perimeter of its walls, made from a hard grey clinkstone that is quite fissured, is 20 m; its deepest point reaches 2720 ft. There are breaks in the walls at either end, more than a mile wide—one about 1000 ft wide and the other at least 3000 ft deep—through which the lava from the last major eruption likely flowed. From the crater floor, sixteen well-preserved cinder cones rise, varying in height from over 400 ft to 900 ft. Along the northern base of the mountain, there are many ravines (several hundred feet deep) where small streams cascade down. However, the rest of the eastern mountain shows little signs of erosion or aging. The fact that the mountainous area of western Maui is much older is indicated by the erosion of its crater, its jagged ridges, and its deeply cut gorges or valleys. Its highest peak, Puu Kukui, reaches 5788 ft above sea level, and directly below it lies the head of Iao Valley, which is 5 m long and 2 m wide, carved into the mountain to a depth of 4000 ft. This valley and other smaller valleys are renowned for their stunning tropical scenery.

Kahoolawe is a small island 6 m. S.W. of Maui. It is 14 m. long by 6 m. wide. Its mountains, which rise to a height of 1472 ft., are rugged and nearly destitute of verdure, but the intervening valleys afford pasturage for sheep.

Kahoolawe is a small island located 6 miles southwest of Maui. It is 14 miles long and 6 miles wide. Its mountains, which reach a height of 1,472 feet, are rough and almost barren, but the valleys in between provide grazing land for sheep.

Lanai is another small island, 7 m. W. of Maui, about 18 m. long and 12 m. wide. It has a mountain range which rises to a 85 maximum height, S.E. of its centre, of about 3480 ft. The N.E. slope is cut by deep gorges, and at the bottom of one of these, which is 2000 ft. deep, is the only water-supply on the island. On the S. side is a rolling table-land affording considerable pasturage for sheep, but over the whole N.W. portion of the island the trade winds, driving through the channel between Maui and Molokai, sweep the rocks bare. Kahoolawe and Lanai are both privately owned.

Lanai is another small island, 7 miles west of Maui, about 18 miles long and 12 miles wide. It has a mountain range that rises to a maximum height, southeast of its center, of about 3,480 feet. The northeast slope is cut by deep gorges, and at the bottom of one of these, which is 2,000 feet deep, is the only water supply on the island. On the south side is a rolling tableland that provides considerable pasture for sheep, but across the entire northwest portion of the island, the trade winds, blowing through the channel between Maui and Molokai, leave the rocks bare. Kahoolawe and Lanai are both privately owned.

Molokai, 8 m. N.W. of Maui, extends 40 m. from E. to W. and has an average width of nearly 7 m. From the S.W. extremity of the island rises the backbone of a ridge which extends E.N.E. about 10 m., where it culminates in the round-topped hill of Mauna Loa, 1382 ft. above the sea. Both the northern and southern slopes of this ridge are cut by ravines and gulches, and along the N. shore is a steep sea-cliff. At the E. extremity of the ridge there is a sudden drop to a low and gently rolling plain, but farther on the surface rises gradually towards a range of mountains which comprises more than one-half the island and attains a maximum height of 4958 ft. in the peak of Kamakou. The S. slope of this range is gradual but is cut by many straight and narrow ravines, in some instances to a great depth. The N. slope is abrupt, with precipices from 1000 to 4000 ft. in height. Extending N. from the foot of the precipice, a little E. of the centre of the island, is a comparatively low peninsula (separated from the mainland by a rock wall 2000 ft. high), on which is a famous leper settlement. The peninsula forms a separate county, Kalawao.

Molokai, 8 miles northwest of Maui, stretches 40 miles from east to west and has an average width of nearly 7 miles. From the southwestern tip of the island rises a ridge that extends east-northeast for about 10 miles, culminating in the rounded peak of Mauna Loa, which is 1,382 feet above sea level. The northern and southern slopes of this ridge are carved by ravines and gullies, and along the northern shore, there is a steep sea cliff. At the eastern end of the ridge, there is a sudden drop to a low and gently rolling plain, but further on, the ground gradually rises towards a mountain range that covers more than half the island, reaching a maximum height of 4,958 feet at the peak of Kamakou. The southern slope of this range is gradual but is interrupted by many straight and narrow ravines, some of which are quite deep. The northern slope is steep, with cliffs ranging from 1,000 to 4,000 feet in height. Extending north from the base of the cliff, slightly east of the center of the island, is a comparatively low peninsula (separated from the mainland by a rock wall 2,000 feet high), which is home to a famous leper settlement. The peninsula forms a separate county, Kalawao.

Oahu, 23 m. N.W. of Molokai, has an irregular quadrangular form. It is traversed from S.E. to N.W. by two roughly parallel ranges of hill separated by a plain that is 20 m. long and in some parts 9 to 10 m. wide. The highest point in the island is Mauna Kaala, 4030 ft., in the Waianae or W. range; but the Koolau or E. range is much longer than the other, and its ridge is very much broken; on the land side there are many ravines formed by lateral spurs, but to the sea for 30 m. it presents a nearly vertical wall without a break. The valleys are remarkable for beautiful scenery,—peaks, cliffs, lateral ravines, cascades and tropical vegetation. There are few craters on the loftier heights, but on the coasts there are several groups of small cones with craters, some of lava, others of tufa. The greater part of the coast is surrounded by a coral reef, often half a mile wide; in several localities an old reef upheaved, sometimes 100 ft. high, forms part of the land.

Oahu, 23 miles northwest of Molokai, has an irregular quadrilateral shape. It runs from southeast to northwest with two roughly parallel mountain ranges separated by a plain that is 20 miles long and in some areas 9 to 10 miles wide. The highest point on the island is Mauna Kaala at 4,030 feet, located in the Waianae or western range; however, the Koolau or eastern range is much longer and its ridge is very broken. On the land side, there are many ravines created by lateral spurs, but on the seaward side, it has a nearly vertical wall that stretches for 30 miles without interruption. The valleys are known for their beautiful scenery—peaks, cliffs, side ravines, waterfalls, and tropical vegetation. There are few craters on the higher elevations, but along the coasts, there are several groups of small cones with craters, some made of lava and others of tufa. Most of the coast is surrounded by a coral reef that is often half a mile wide; in several spots, an ancient, uplifted reef, sometimes reaching 100 feet high, forms part of the land.

Kauai, 63 m. W.N.W. of Oahu, has an irregularly circular form with a maximum diameter of about 25 m. On the N.W. is a precipice 2000 ft. or more in height and above this is a mountain plain, but elsewhere around the island is a shore plain, from which rises Mount Waialeale to a height of 5250 ft. The peaks of the mountain are irregular, abrupt and broken; its sides are deeply furrowed by gorges and ravines; the shore plain is broken by ridges and by broad and deep valleys; no other island of the group is so well watered on all sides by large mountain streams; and it is called “garden isle.”

Kauai, 63 miles W.N.W. of Oahu, has an irregular circular shape with a maximum diameter of about 25 miles. On the northwest side, there’s a cliff that rises over 2000 feet high, and above that is a mountain flat. The rest of the island features a coastal plain, from which Mount Waialeale rises to a height of 5250 feet. The mountain peaks are uneven, steep, and jagged; its slopes are deeply carved by gorges and ravines. The coastal plain is interrupted by ridges and broad, deep valleys. No other island in the group is as well-supplied with large mountain streams on all sides, earning it the nickname “garden isle.”

Niihau, the most westerly of the inhabited islands, is 18 m. W. by S. of Kauai. It is 16 m. long and 6 m. wide. The western two-thirds consists of a low plain, composed of an uplifted coral reef and matter washed down from the mountains; but on the E. side the island rises precipitously from the sea and attains a maximum height of 1304 ft. at Paniau. There are large salt lagoons on the southern coast.

Niihau, the most western of the inhabited islands, is 18 miles W. by S. of Kauai. It is 16 miles long and 6 miles wide. The western two-thirds of the island is made up of a low plain, which consists of an uplifted coral reef and debris washed down from the mountains; however, on the eastern side, the island rises steeply from the sea, reaching a maximum height of 1304 feet at Paniau. There are large salt lagoons along the southern coast.

Climate.—The climate is cooler than that of other regions in the same latitude, and is very healthy. The sky is usually cloudless or only partly cloudy. The N.E. trades blow with periodic variations from March to December; and the leeward coast, being protected by high mountains, is refreshed by regular land and sea breezes. During January, February and a part of March the wind blows strongly from the S. or S.W.; and at this season an unpleasant hot, damp wind is sometimes felt. More rain falls from January to May than during the other months; very much more falls on the windward side of the principal islands than on the leeward; and the amount increases with the elevation also up to about 4000 ft. The greatest recorded extremes of local rainfall for a year within the larger islands range from 12 to 300 in. For Honolulu the mean annual rainfall (1884-1899) was 28.18 in.; the maximum 49.82; and the minimum 13.46. At sea level the daily average temperature for July is 76.4° F., for December 70.7° F.; the mean annual temperature is about 73° F.—68° during the night, 80° during the day—and for each 200 ft. of elevation the temperature falls about 1° F., and snow lies for most of the time on the highest mountains.

Climate.—The climate here is cooler than in other areas at the same latitude and is very healthy. The sky is typically clear or only partly cloudy. The northeast trade winds blow with some variation from March to December, and the leeward coast, sheltered by high mountains, enjoys regular land and sea breezes. From January to February and part of March, the wind blows strongly from the south or southwest, and during this time a hot, damp wind can occasionally be uncomfortable. More rain falls from January to May than during the rest of the year; significantly more falls on the windward sides of the main islands compared to the leeward sides, and the amount increases with altitude up to about 4000 ft. The greatest recorded extremes of annual rainfall on the larger islands range from 12 to 300 inches. In Honolulu, the mean annual rainfall from 1884 to 1899 was 28.18 inches; the maximum was 49.82 inches, and the minimum was 13.46 inches. At sea level, the daily average temperature in July is 76.4°F and in December is 70.7°F; the mean annual temperature is around 73°F—68°F at night and 80°F during the day—and for every 200 ft. of elevation, the temperature decreases by about 1°F, with snow often covering the highest mountains.

Flora.—The Hawaiian Islands have a peculiar flora. As a result of their isolation, the proportion of endemic plants is greater here than in any other region, and the great elevation of the mountains, with the consequent variation in temperature, moisture and barometric pressure, has multiplied the number of species. Towards the close of the 19th century William Hillebrand found 365 genera and 999 species, and of this number of species 653 were peculiar to this part of the Pacific. The number of species is greatest on the older islands, particularly Kauai and Oahu, and the total number for the group has been constantly increasing, some being introduced, others possibly being produced by the varying climatic conditions from those already existing. Among the peculiar dicotyledonous plants there is not a single annual, and by far the greater number are perennial and woody. Hawaiian forests are distinctly tropical, and are composed for the most part of trees below the medium height. They are most common between elevations of 2000 and 8000 ft.; there are only a few species below 2000 ft., and above 8000 ft. the growth is stunted. The destruction of considerable portions of the forests by cattle, goats, insects, fire and cutting has been followed by reforesting, the planting of hitherto barren tracts, the passage of severe forest fire laws, and the establishment of forest reserves, of which the area in 1909 was 545,746 acres, of which 357,180 were government land. In regions of heavy rainfall the ohia-lehua (Metrosideros polymorpha), a tree growing from 30 to 100 ft. in height, is predominant, and on account of the dense undergrowth chiefly of ferns and climbing vines, forms the most impenetrable of the forests; its hard wood is used chiefly for fuel. The koa (Acacia koa), from the wood of which the natives used to make the bodies of their canoes, and the only tree of the islands that furnishes much valuable lumber (a hard cabinet wood marketed as “Hawaiian mahogany”), forms extensive forests on Hawaii and Maui between elevations of 2000 and 4000 ft. The mamane (Sophora chrysophylla), which furnishes the best posts, grows principally on the high slopes of Mauna Kea and Hualalai. Posts and railway ties are also made from ohia-ha (Eugenia sandwicensis). In many districts between elevations of 2000 and 6000 ft., where there is only a moderate amount of moisture, occur mixed forests of koa, koaia (Acacia koaia), kopiko (Straussia oncocarpa and S. hawaiiensis), kolea (Myrsine kauaiensis and M. lanaiensis), naio or bastard sandalwood (Myoporum sandwicense) and pua (Olea sandwicensis); of these the koaia furnishes a hard wood suitable for the manufacture of furniture, and out of it the natives formerly made spears and fancy paddles. The wood of the naio when dry has a fragrance resembling that of sandalwood, and is used for torches in fishing. The kukui (Aleurites triloba) and the algaroba (Prosopis juliflora) are the principal species of forest trees that occur below elevations of 2000 ft. The kukui grows along streams and gulches; from its nuts, which are very oily, the natives used to make candles, and it is still frequently called the candlenut tree. On the leeward side, from near the sea level to elevations of 1500 ft., and on ground that was formerly barren, the algaroba tree has formed dense forests since its introduction in 1837. Forests of iron-wood and blue gum have also been planted. Sandalwood (Santalum album or freycinetianum) was once abundant on rugged and rather inaccessible heights, but so great a demand arose for it in China,2 where it was used for incense and for the manufacture of fancy articles, that the supply was nearly exhausted between 1802 and 1836; since then some young trees have sprung up, but the number is relatively small. Other peculiar trees prized for their wood are: the kauila (Alphitonia ponderosa), used for making spears, mallets and other tools; the kela (Mezoneuron kauaiense), the hard wood of which resembles ebony; the halapepe (Dracaena aurea), out of the soft wood of which the natives carved many of their idols; and the wiliwili (Erythrina monosperma), the wood of which is as light as cork and is used for outriggers. In 1909, on six large rubber plantations, mostly on the windward side of the island of Maui, there were planted 444,450 ceara trees, 66,700 hevea trees, and 600 castilloa trees. About the only indigenous fruit-bearing plants are the Chilean strawberry (Fragaria chilensis) and the ohelo berry (Vaccinium reticulatum), both of which grow at high elevations on Hawaii and Maui. The ohelo berry is famous in song and story, and formerly served as a propitiatory offering to Pele. The number of fruit-bearing trees, shrubs and plants that have been introduced and are successfully cultivated or grow wild is much greater; among them are the mango, orange, banana, pineapple, coconut, palm, grape, fig, strawberry, litchi (Nephelium litchi)—the favourite fruit of the Chinese—avocado or alligator pear (Persea gratissima), Sapodilla pear (Achras sapota), loquat or mespilus plum (Eriobotrya japonica), Cape gooseberry (Physalis peruviana), tamarind (Tamarindus indica), papaw (Carica papaya), resembling in appearance the cantaloupe, granadilla (Passiflora quadrangularis) and guava (Psidium guajava). Most of the native grasses are too coarse for grazing, and some of 86 them, particularly the hilo grass (Paspalum conjugatum), which forms a dense mat over the ground, prevent the spread of forests. The pili grass (Heteropogon contortus) is also noxious, for its awns get badly entangled in the wool of sheep. The native manienie (Stenotaphrum americanum) and kukai (Panicum pruriens), however, are relished by stock and are found on all the inhabited islands; the Bermuda grass (Cynodon dactylon), a June grass (Poa annua), and Guinea grass (Panicum jumentorum) have also been successfully introduced. The Paspalum orbiculare is the large swamp grass with which the natives covered their houses. On the island of Niihau is a fine grass (Cyperus laevigatus), out of which the beautiful Niihau mats were formerly made; it is used in making Panama hats. Mats were also made of the leaves of the hala tree (Pandanus odoratissimus). The wauke plant (Broussonetia papyrifera), and to a less extent the mamake (Pipturus albidus) and Boehmeria stipularis, furnished the bark out of which the famous kapa cloth was made, while the olopa (Cheirodendron gaudichaudii) and the koolea (Myrsine lessertiana) furnished the dyes with which it was coloured. From several species of Cibotium is obtained a glossy yellowish wool, used for making pillows and mattresses. Ferns, of which there are about 130 species varying from a few inches to 30 ft. in height, form a luxuriant undergrowth in the ohia-lehua and the koa forests, and the islands are noted for the profusion and beautiful colours of their flowering plants. Kalo (Colocasia antiquorum, var., esculenta), which furnishes the principal food of the natives, and sugar cane (Saccharum officinarum), the cultivation of which has become the chief industry of the islands, were introduced before the discovery of the group by Captain Cook in 1778. Sisal hemp has been introduced, and there is a large plantation of it W. of Honolulu.

Flora.—The Hawaiian Islands have a unique plant life. Due to their isolation, the number of native plants is higher here than in any other place, and the high mountains, with their varying temperatures, moisture, and air pressure, have led to a greater diversity of species. By the end of the 19th century, William Hillebrand discovered 365 genera and 999 species, with 653 of those species being unique to this area of the Pacific. The highest number of species is found on the older islands, especially Kauai and Oahu, and the total number for the group has been steadily increasing, with some plants being introduced and others possibly arising from the changing climate conditions. Among the unique flowering plants, there are no annuals, and most are perennial and woody. Hawaiian forests are distinctly tropical, primarily composed of medium-sized trees. They are most common at elevations between 2000 and 8000 ft. Only a few species grow below 2000 ft., while growth is stunted above 8000 ft. The destruction of large areas of forest by cattle, goats, insects, fire, and logging has been followed by efforts to reforest, including planting in previously barren areas, enforcing strict fire laws, and establishing forest reserves, which covered 545,746 acres in 1909, of which 357,180 acres were government land. In areas with heavy rainfall, the ohia-lehua (Metrosideros polymorpha), a tree that can reach heights of 30 to 100 ft., is dominant and, due to its thick undergrowth of ferns and climbing vines, creates some of the most impenetrable forests; its hard wood is mainly used for fuel. The koa (Acacia koa), which the natives used to make canoe bodies and is the only tree in the islands that provides significant valuable lumber (a hardwood marketed as “Hawaiian mahogany”), forms large forests on Hawaii and Maui at elevations between 2000 and 4000 ft. The mamane (Sophora chrysophylla), known for producing sturdy posts, primarily grows on the high slopes of Mauna Kea and Hualalai. Posts and railway ties are also made from ohia-ha (Eugenia sandwicensis). In many areas between 2000 and 6000 ft., where moisture levels are moderate, mixed forests of koa, koaia (Acacia koaia), kopiko (Straussia oncocarpa and S. hawaiiensis), kolea (Myrsine kauaiensis and M. lanaiensis), naio or bastard sandalwood (Myoporum sandwicense), and pua (Olea sandwicensis) can be found; of these, koaia provides a hardwood suitable for making furniture, and the natives previously used it to make spears and decorative paddles. The naio wood has a sandalwood-like fragrance when dry and is used for making torches for fishing. The kukui (Aleurites triloba) and algaroba (Prosopis juliflora) are the main forest tree species found below 2000 ft. The kukui grows alongside streams and in gulches; its oily nuts were used by the natives to make candles, leading to its common name as the candlenut tree. On the leeward side, from near sea level up to 1500 ft. on previously barren land, the algaroba tree has created dense forests since its introduction in 1837. Forests of ironwood and blue gum have also been planted. Sandalwood (Santalum album or freycinetianum) was once abundant in steep and hard-to-reach areas, but a high demand for it in China for incense and luxury items nearly depleted the supply between 1802 and 1836; since then, some young trees have appeared, but they are still relatively few. Other unique trees valued for their wood include the kauila (Alphitonia ponderosa), used for making spears, mallets, and tools; the kela (Mezoneuron kauaiense), whose hardwood resembles ebony; the halapepe (Dracaena aurea), from which the natives carved many idols; and the wiliwili (Erythrina monosperma), whose wood is as light as cork and is used for outriggers. In 1909, six large rubber plantations mainly on the windward side of Maui had planted 444,450 ceara trees, 66,700 hevea trees, and 600 castilloa trees. The only native fruit-bearing plants are the Chilean strawberry (Fragaria chilensis) and the ohelo berry (Vaccinium reticulatum), which grow at high altitudes on Hawaii and Maui. The ohelo berry is well-known in songs and stories and was once used as an offering to Pele. The number of introduced fruit-bearing trees, shrubs, and plants that thrive or grow wild is much higher; these include mango, orange, banana, pineapple, coconut, palm, grape, fig, strawberry, lychee (Nephelium litchi)—which is the favorite fruit of the Chinese—avocado or alligator pear (Persea gratissima), sapodilla pear (Achras sapota), loquat or mespilus plum (Eriobotrya japonica), Cape gooseberry (Physalis peruviana), tamarind (Tamarindus indica), papaya (Carica papaya), which looks like cantaloupe, granadilla (Passiflora quadrangularis), and guava (Psidium guajava). Most native grasses are too coarse for grazing, and some, especially hilo grass (Paspalum conjugatum), form dense mats that hinder forest growth. Pili grass (Heteropogon contortus) is also troublesome since its awns become badly tangled in sheep wool. However, native grasses like manienie (Stenotaphrum americanum) and kukai (Panicum pruriens) are favored by livestock and are found on all inhabited islands; Bermuda grass (Cynodon dactylon), June grass (Poa annua), and Guinea grass (Panicum jumentorum) have also been successfully introduced. The Paspalum orbiculare is the large swamp grass used by the natives to cover their houses. On Niihau, a fine grass (Cyperus laevigatus) was used to make beautiful Niihau mats and is still used for making Panama hats. Mats were also crafted from the leaves of the hala tree (Pandanus odoratissimus). The wauke plant (Broussonetia papyrifera) and to a lesser extent, mamake (Pipturus albidus) and Boehmeria stipularis, provided the bark for the famous kapa cloth, while olopa (Cheirodendron gaudichaudii) and koolea (Myrsine lessertiana) supplied the dyes used to color it. Glossy yellowish wool used for making pillows and mattresses comes from several species of Cibotium. Ferns, of which there are about 130 species ranging from a few inches to 30 ft. tall, create a lush undergrowth in the ohia-lehua and koa forests, and the islands are renowned for the abundance and vibrant colors of their flowering plants. Kalo (Colocasia antiquorum, var., esculenta), which is the main food for the natives, and sugar cane (Saccharum officinarum), the cultivation of which has become the primary industry of the islands, were introduced before Captain Cook discovered the islands in 1778. Sisal hemp has also been introduced, with a large plantation located west of Honolulu.

Over seventy varieties of seaweeds, growing in the fresh-water pools and in the waters near the coast, are used by the natives as food. These limus, as they are called by the Kanakas, are washed, salted, broken and eaten as a relish or as a flavouring for fish or other meat. The culture of such algae may prove of economic importance; gelatine, glue and agar-agar would be valuable by-products.

Over seventy types of seaweed, found in freshwater pools and coastal waters, are used by the locals as food. These limus, as the Kanakas refer to them, are washed, salted, broken up, and eaten as a condiment or flavoring for fish or other meat. Farming these algae could be economically important; gelatin, glue, and agar-agar would be valuable by-products.

Fauna.—A day-flying bat, whales and dolphins are about the only indigenous mammals; hogs, dogs and rats had been introduced before Cook’s discovery. Fish in an interesting variety of colours and shapes abound in the sea and in artificial ponds along the coasts.3 There are some fine species of birds, and the native avifauna is so distinctive that Wallace argued from it that the Hawaiian Archipelago had long been separated from any other land. There were native names for 89 varieties. The most typical family is the Drepanidae, so named for the stout sickle-shaped beak with which the birds extract insects from heavy-barked trees; Gadow considers the family American in its origin, and thinks that the Moho,4 a family of honey-suckers, were later comers and from Australia. The mamo (Drepanis pacifica) has large golden feathers on its back; it is now very rare, and is seldom found except on Mauna Loa, Hawaii, about 4000 ft. above the sea. The smaller yellow feathers, once used for the war cloaks of the native chiefs, were furnished by the oo (Moho nobilis) and the aa (Moho braccatus), now found only occasionally in the valleys of Kauai near Hanalei, on the N. side of the island; scarlet feathers for similar mantles were taken from the iiwi (Vestiaria coccinea), a black-bodied, scarlet-winged song-bird, which feeds on nectar and on insects found in the bark of the koa and ohia trees, and from the Fringilla coccinea. In the old times birds were protected by the native belief that divine messages were conveyed by bird cries, and by royal edict forbidding the killing of species furnishing the material for feather cloaks, contributions towards which were long almost the only taxes paid. Thus the downfall of the monarchy and of the ancient cults have been nearly fatal to some of the more beautiful birds; feather ornaments, formerly worn only by nobles, came to be a common decoration; and many species (for example the Hawaiian gallinule, Gallinula sandwicensis, which, because of its crimson frontal plate and bill, was said by the natives to have played the part of Prometheus, burning its head with fire stolen from the gods and bestowed on mortals) have been nearly destroyed by the mongoose, or have been driven from their lowland homes to the mountains, such being the fate of the mamo, mentioned above, and of the Sandwich Island goose (Bernicla sandwicensis), which is here a remarkable example of adaptation, as its present habitat is quite arid. This goose has been introduced successfully into Europe. A bird called moho, but actually of a different family, was the Pennula ecaudata or millsi, which had hardly any tail, and had wings so degenerate that it was commonly thought wingless. The turnstone (Strepsilas interpres) arrives in the islands in August after breeding in Alaska. There are no parrots. The only reptiles are three species of skinks and four of the gecko; the islands are famed for their freedom from snakes. Land-snails, mostly Achatinellidae, are remarkably frequent and diverse; over 300 varieties exist. Insects are numerous, and of about 500 species of beetle some 80% are not known to exist elsewhere; cockroaches and green locusts are pests, as are, also, mosquitoes,5 wasps, scorpions, centipedes and white ants, which have all been introduced from elsewhere.

Fauna.—The only native mammals are a day-flying bat, whales, and dolphins; pigs, dogs, and rats were brought in before Cook's discovery. The sea and artificial ponds along the coasts are full of fish in a fascinating range of colors and shapes. There are some impressive bird species, and the local birdlife is so unique that Wallace argued it showed the Hawaiian Archipelago had been separated from other lands for a long time. There were native names for 89 different types. The most representative family is the Drepanidae, named for their thick, sickle-shaped beaks that the birds use to extract insects from thick-barked trees. Gadow believes this family originates from the Americas and thinks that the Moho, a group of honey-suckers, arrived later from Australia. The mamo (Drepanis pacifica) has large golden feathers on its back; it is now extremely rare and usually only found on Mauna Loa, Hawaii, at about 4000 ft above sea level. The smaller yellow feathers, once used for the war cloaks of the native chiefs, came from the oo (Moho nobilis) and the aa (Moho braccatus), which are now only occasionally seen in the valleys of Kauai near Hanalei, on the north side of the island. Scarlet feathers for similar cloaks were sourced from the iiwi (Vestiaria coccinea), a black-bodied, scarlet-winged songbird that feeds on nectar and insects found in the bark of koa and ohia trees, and from the Fringilla coccinea. In ancient times, birds were protected by the belief that their cries conveyed divine messages and by royal decrees prohibiting the killing of species used for feather cloaks, which were almost the only taxes paid for a long time. Consequently, the collapse of the monarchy and ancient beliefs nearly devastated some of the most beautiful birds; feather ornaments that were once reserved for nobles became common; and many species (like the Hawaiian gallinule, Gallinula sandwicensis, which, due to its crimson frontal plate and bill, was said by locals to have played the role of Prometheus, burning its head with fire stolen from the gods to give to mortals) have been almost wiped out by the mongoose, or have been forced from their lowland habitats to the mountains, as happened with the mamo and the Sandwich Island goose (Bernicla sandwicensis), which is a striking example of adaptation since its current home is quite dry. This goose has been successfully introduced into Europe. A bird referred to as moho, but actually from a different family, was the Pennula ecaudata or millsi, which had almost no tail and wings so underdeveloped that it was commonly thought to be wingless. The turnstone (Strepsilas interpres) arrives in the islands in August after breeding in Alaska. There are no parrots. The only reptiles consist of three species of skinks and four of geckos; the islands are famous for being snake-free. Land snails, mostly Achatinellidae, are unusually abundant and diverse, with over 300 varieties. Insects are plentiful, and out of about 500 species of beetles, around 80% are not known to exist anywhere else; cockroaches, green locusts, mosquitoes, wasps, scorpions, centipedes, and termites, which have all been introduced from other places, are considered pests.

Soil.—The soil of the Territory is almost wholly a decomposition of lava, and in general differs much from the soils of the United States, particularly in the large amount of nitrogen (often more than 1.25% in cane and coffee soil, and occasionally 2.2%) and iron, and in the high degree of acidity. High up on the windward side of a mountain it is thin, light red or yellow, and of inferior quality. Low down on the leeward side it is dark red and fertile, but still too pervious to retain moisture well. In the older valleys on the islands of Kauai, Oahu and Maui, as well as on the lowland plain of Molokai, the soil is deeper and usually, too, the moisture is retained by a heavy clay. In some places along the coast there is a narrow strip of decomposed coral limestone; often, too, a coral reef has served to catch the sediment washed down the mountain side until a deep sedimentary soil has been deposited. On the still lower levels the soil is deepest and most productive.

Soil.—The soil in the Territory is mostly made up of decomposed lava and differs significantly from soils in the United States, especially with its high nitrogen content (often more than 1.25% in cane and coffee soil, and sometimes 2.2%) and iron, as well as its high acidity. At higher elevations on the windward side of a mountain, the soil is thin, light red or yellow, and of lower quality. On the leeward side, it is dark red and fertile, but still too porous to hold moisture effectively. In the older valleys of Kauai, Oahu, and Maui, as well as on the lowland plain of Molokai, the soil is deeper and usually retains moisture better due to heavy clay. Along some coastal areas, there's a narrow strip of decomposed coral limestone; often a coral reef has trapped sediment washed down from the mountains, leading to a deep layer of sedimentary soil. At even lower levels, the soil is the deepest and most productive.

Agriculture.—The tenure by which lands were held before 1838 was strictly feudal, resembling that of Germany in the 11th century, and lands were sometimes enfeoffed to the seventh degree. But in the “Great Division” which took place in 1848 and forms the foundation of present land titles, about 984,000 acres, nearly one-fourth of the inhabited area, were set apart for the crown, about 1,495,000 acres for the government, and about 1,619,000 acres for the several chiefs; and the common people received fee-simple titles6 for their house lots and the pieces of land which they cultivated for themselves, about 28,600 acres, almost entirely in isolated patches of irregular shape hemmed in by the holdings of the crown, the government or the great chiefs. Generally the chiefs ran into debt; many died without heirs; and their lands passed largely into the hands of foreigners. At the abolition of the monarchy in 1893, the crown domains were declared to be public lands, and, with the other government lands, were by the terms of annexation turned over to the United States in 1898. They had been offered for sale or lease in accordance with land acts (of 1884 and 1895—the latter corresponding generally to the land laws of New Zealand) designed to promote division into small farms and their immediate improvement. In 1909 the area of the public land was about 1,700,000 acres. In 1900 there were in the Territory 2273 farms, of which 1209 contained less than 10 acres, 785 contained between 10 and 100 acres, and 116 contained 1000 acres or more. The natives seldom cultivate more than half an acre apiece, and the Portuguese settlers usually only 25 or 30 acres at most. Of the total area of the Territory only 86,854 acres, or 2.77%, were under cultivation in 1900, and of this 65,687 acres, or 75.6%, were divided into 170 farms and planted to sugar-cane. In 1909 it was estimated that 213,000 acres (about half of which was irrigated) were planted to sugar, one half being cropped each year. The average yield per acre of cane-sugar is the greatest in the world, 30 to 40 tons of cane being an average per acre, and as much as 10¼ tons of sugar having been produced from a single acre under irrigation. The cultivation of the cane was greatly encouraged by the Reciprocity Treaty of 1875, which established practically free trade between the islands and the United States, and since 1879 it has been widely extended by means of irrigation, the water being obtained both by pumping from numerous artesian wells and by conducting surface water through canals and ditches. The sugar farms are mostly on the islands of Hawaii, Oahu, Maui and Kauai, at the bases of mountains; those on the leeward side have the better soil, but require much more irrigating. The product increased from 26,072,429 ℔ in 1876 to 259,789,462 ℔ in 1890, 542,098,500 ℔ in 1899 and about 1,060,000,000 ℔ (valued at more than $40,000,000) in 1909. Nearly all of it is exported to the United States. Rice was the second product in importance until competition with Japan, Louisiana and Texas made the crop a poor investment; improved culture and machinery may restore rice culture to its former importance. It is grown almost wholly by Japanese and Chinese on small low farms along the coasts, mostly on the islands of Kauai and Oahu. In 1899 the product amounted to 33,442,400 ℔; in 1907 about 12,000 acres were planted, and the crop was estimated to be worth $2,500,000. Coffee of good quality is grown at elevations ranging between 1000 to 3000 ft. above the sea; the Hawaiian product is called Kona coffee—from Kona, a district of the S. side of Hawaii island, where much of it is grown. In 1909 about 4500 acres were in coffee, the value of the crop was $350,000; and 1,763,119 ℔ of coffee, valued at $211,535, were exported from Hawaii to the mainland of the United States. A few bananas and (especially from Oahu) pineapples of fine quality are exported; since 1901 the canning of 87 pineapples has been successfully carried on, and in the year ending May 31, 1907, 186,700 cases were exported, being packed in nine canneries. Oranges, lemons, limes, figs, mangoes, grapes and peaches, besides a considerable variety of vegetables, are raised in small quantities for local consumption. In 1909 the exports of fruits and nuts to the continental United States were valued at $1,457,644. An excellent quality of sisal is grown. Rubber trees have been planted with some success, particularly on the eastern part of the island of Maui; they were not tapped for commercial use until 1909. In 1907 there were vanilla plantations in the islands of Oahu and Hawaii. Tobacco of a high grade, especially for wrappers, has been grown at the Agricultural Experiment Station’s farm at Hamakua, on the island of Hawaii, where the tobacco is practically “shade grown” under the afternoon fogs from Mauna Kea. Cotton and silk culture have been experimented with on the islands; and the work of the Hawaiian Agricultural Experiment Station is of great value, in introducing new crops, in improving old, in studying soils and fertilizers and in entomological research. Honey is a crop of some importance; in 1908 the yield was about 950 tons of honey and 15 tons of wax. The small islands of Lanai, Niihau and Kahoolawe are devoted chiefly to the raising of sheep and cattle—Niihau is one large privately owned sheep-ranch. There are large cattle-ranches on the islands supplying nearly all the meat for domestic consumption, and cattle-raising is second in importance to the sugar industry. It was estimated in 1908 that there were about 130,500 cattle and about 99,500 sheep on the islands. The “native” cattle, descended from those left on the islands by early navigators, are being improved by breeding with imported Hereford, Shorthorn, Angus and Holstein bulls, the Herefords being the best for the purpose. In the fiscal year 1908, 359,413 ℔ of wool (valued at $58,133) and 928,599 ℔ of raw hides (valued at $87,599) were shipped from the Territory to the United States.

Agriculture.—The way land was owned before 1838 was strictly feudal, similar to Germany in the 11th century, and land was sometimes held even to the seventh degree. However, during the "Great Division" in 1848, which laid the groundwork for current land titles, around 984,000 acres, nearly one-fourth of the inhabited area, were designated for the crown, about 1,495,000 acres for the government, and about 1,619,000 acres for various chiefs. The common people received fee-simple titles6 for their house lots and the land they farmed, totaling about 28,600 acres, mostly in isolated patches of irregular shape surrounded by the holdings of the crown, the government, or the major chiefs. Generally, the chiefs faced financial difficulties; many died without heirs, and their lands largely ended up in the hands of foreigners. After the monarchy was abolished in 1893, the crown lands were declared public lands and, along with the other government lands, were handed over to the United States in 1898 as part of the annexation agreement. These lands were offered for sale or lease in accordance with land acts (from 1884 and 1895—the latter generally matching New Zealand's land laws) aimed at promoting division into small farms and enhancing their immediate development. By 1909, the area of public land was about 1,700,000 acres. In 1900, there were 2,273 farms in the territory, of which 1,209 were less than 10 acres, 785 were between 10 and 100 acres, and 116 were 1,000 acres or more. Natives typically cultivated no more than half an acre each, and the Portuguese settlers usually grew only 25 or 30 acres at most. Of the total area of the territory, only 86,854 acres, or 2.77%, were under cultivation in 1900, and of that, 65,687 acres, or 75.6%, were divided into 170 farms growing sugarcane. By 1909, it was estimated that 213,000 acres (around half of which was irrigated) were planted with sugar, with half being harvested each year. The average yield per acre of cane sugar is the highest in the world, with an average of 30 to 40 tons of cane per acre, and up to 10¼ tons of sugar produced from a single irrigated acre. The cultivation of sugarcane received a significant boost from the Reciprocity Treaty of 1875, which established nearly free trade between the islands and the United States, and since 1879, it has been widely expanded through irrigation, with water sourced from various artesian wells and surface water channeled through canals and ditches. Most sugar farms are located on the islands of Hawaii, Oahu, Maui, and Kauai, at the base of mountains; farms on the leeward side typically have better soil but require significantly more irrigation. Sugar production soared from 26,072,429 pounds in 1876 to 259,789,462 pounds in 1890, 542,098,500 pounds in 1899, and roughly 1,060,000,000 pounds (valued at more than $40,000,000) in 1909. Nearly all of it is exported to the United States. Rice was the second most important product until competition from Japan, Louisiana, and Texas made it less profitable; improved farming practices and machinery may bring rice farming back to its previous significance. It is primarily grown by Japanese and Chinese farmers on small, low-lying farms along the coasts, mainly on Kauai and Oahu. In 1899, the rice yield was 33,442,400 pounds; by 1907, about 12,000 acres were planted, and the crop was valued at $2,500,000. Good quality coffee is grown at elevations between 1,000 and 3,000 feet above sea level; the Hawaiian coffee known as Kona coffee comes from Kona, a region on the southern side of the island of Hawaii, where much of it is cultivated. By 1909, about 4,500 acres were planted with coffee, valued at $350,000; 1,763,119 pounds of coffee, worth $211,535, were exported from Hawaii to the mainland United States. A few superior quality bananas and (particularly from Oahu) pineapples are exported; since 1901, canning of pineapples has been successfully undertaken, with 186,700 cases exported in the year ending May 31, 1907, packed in nine canneries. Small quantities of oranges, lemons, limes, figs, mangoes, grapes, and peaches, along with a variety of vegetables, are grown for local consumption. In 1909, the export of fruits and nuts to the continental United States was valued at $1,457,644. High-quality sisal is cultivated as well. Rubber trees have been planted successfully in the eastern part of Maui, but were not tapped for commercial use until 1909. In 1907, there were vanilla plantations on Oahu and Hawaii. High-grade tobacco, especially for wrappers, has been cultivated at the Agricultural Experiment Station's farm in Hamakua, Hawaii, under the afternoon fogs from Mauna Kea. Cotton and silk cultivation have been experimented with in the islands, and the work of the Hawaiian Agricultural Experiment Station has been invaluable for introducing new crops, improving old ones, studying soils and fertilizers, and conducting entomological research. Honey is also an important crop, with a yield of about 950 tons of honey and 15 tons of wax in 1908. The small islands of Lanai, Niihau, and Kahoolawe primarily focus on raising sheep and cattle—Niihau is one large privately owned sheep ranch. There are extensive cattle ranches on the islands that supply almost all domestic meat, with cattle raising being the second most important industry after sugar. In 1908, it was estimated that there were about 130,500 cattle and approximately 99,500 sheep on the islands. The "native" cattle, descended from those left by early navigators, are being improved through breeding with imported Hereford, Shorthorn, Angus, and Holstein bulls, the Herefords being the most effective for this purpose. In the fiscal year 1908, 359,413 pounds of wool (valued at $58,133) and 928,599 pounds of raw hides (valued at $87,599) were shipped from the territory to the United States.

Minerals.—The islands have large (unworked) supplies of pumice, sandstone, sulphur, gypsum, alum and mineral-paint ochres, and some salt, kaolin and sal-ammoniac, but otherwise they are without mineral wealth other than lava rocks for building purposes.

Minerals.—The islands have plenty of (untapped) supplies of pumice, sandstone, sulfur, gypsum, alum, and mineral-paint ochres, along with some salt, kaolin, and sal-ammoniac, but besides that, they lack mineral resources other than lava rocks for construction.

Manufactures.—The manufactures are chiefly sugar, fertilizers, and such products of the foundry and machine shop as are required for the machinery of the sugar factories. Most of the manufacturing industries, indeed, are maintained for supplying the local market, there being only three important exceptions—the manufacture of sugar, the cleaning of coffee and the cleaning and polishing of rice. The manufacture of sugar, which began between 1830 and 1840, has long been much the most important of the manufacturing industries: thus in 1900 the value of the sugar production was $19,254,773, and the total value of all manufactures, including custom work and repairing, was only $24,992,068. Next to sugar, fertilizers were the most important manufactured product, their value being $1,150,625; the products of the establishments for the polishing and cleaning of rice were valued at $664,300. Of the total product in 1900, only 18.5% (by value) is to be credited to the city of Honolulu. The growth of manufacturing is much hampered by the lack of labour. Excellent water power is utilized on the island of Kauai in an electric plant.

Manufactures.—The main products manufactured here are sugar, fertilizers, and various items from foundries and machine shops that are needed for sugar factory machinery. Most manufacturing industries primarily serve the local market, with only three significant exceptions: sugar production, coffee cleaning, and rice cleaning and polishing. Sugar manufacturing, which started between 1830 and 1840, has long been the most important industry; for instance, in 1900, the value of sugar production was $19,254,773, while the total value of all manufacturing, including custom work and repairs, was only $24,992,068. After sugar, fertilizers were the second most crucial product, valued at $1,150,625, and the products from rice polishing and cleaning were valued at $664,300. Of the total production in 1900, only 18.5% (by value) was attributed to the city of Honolulu. The growth of manufacturing is significantly limited by a lack of labor. An excellent water power source is used in an electric plant on the island of Kauai.

Communications.—There are good wagon roads on the islands, some of them macadamized, built of the hard blue lava rock. Hawaii had in 1909 about 200 m. of railway, of which the principal line is that of the Oahu Railway & Land Company (about 89 m.), extending from Honolulu W. and N. along the coast to Kahuku about one-half the distance around Oahu; another line from Kahuku Mill, the most northerly point of the island, S.E. to Honolulu, was projected in 1905; on the island of Hawaii is the Hilo Railroad (about 46 m.), carrying sugar, pineapples, rubber and lumber; other railways are for the most part short lines on sugar estates and in coffee-producing sections of the islands of Hawaii and Maui. Each of the larger islands has one or more ports which a local steamboat serves regularly, and Honolulu has the regular service of seven trans-Pacific lines (the American-Hawaiian Steamship Co., the Canadian-Australian Steamship Co., the Matson Navigation Co., the Oceanic Steamship Co., the Pacific Mail Steamship Co., the Mexican Oriental and the Toyo Kisen Kaisha); it is a midway station for vessels between the United States (mainland) and Australia and Southern Asia. In 1908 five steamship companies were engaged in traffic between island ports and the mainland (including Mexico). Honolulu has cable connexion with San Francisco and the East, and the several islands of the group are served by wireless telegraph.

Communications.—The islands have good roads, some of which are paved with hard blue lava rock. In 1909, Hawaii had about 200 miles of railway, with the main line being the Oahu Railway & Land Company (around 89 miles), which runs west and north along the coast to Kahuku, covering about half the distance around Oahu. Another line from Kahuku Mill, the northernmost point of the island, towards Honolulu was planned in 1905. On the island of Hawaii, there is the Hilo Railroad (about 46 miles), transporting sugar, pineapples, rubber, and lumber; other railways are mostly short lines on sugar estates and in coffee-growing areas on Hawaii and Maui. Each of the larger islands has one or more ports served regularly by local steamboats, and Honolulu has the regular service of seven trans-Pacific lines (the American-Hawaiian Steamship Co., the Canadian-Australian Steamship Co., the Matson Navigation Co., the Oceanic Steamship Co., the Pacific Mail Steamship Co., the Mexican Oriental, and the Toyo Kisen Kaisha); it serves as a midway point for ships traveling between the U.S. mainland and Australia and Southern Asia. In 1908, five steamship companies were involved in shipping between island ports and the mainland (including Mexico). Honolulu has cable connections with San Francisco and the East, and the various islands in the group are connected by wireless telegraph.

Commerce.—The position of the archipelago, at the “cross-roads” of the North Pacific, has made it commercially important since the days of the whale fishery, and it has a practical monopoly of coaling, watering and victualling. Its main disadvantage is the lack of harbours—Honolulu and Pearl Harbor are the only ones in the archipelago; but under the River and Harbour Act of 1905 examinations and surveys were made to improve Hilo Bay on the island of Hawaii. Pearl Harbor is the U.S. naval station, and a great naval dock, nearly 1200 ft. long, was projected for the station in 1908. Within recent years commerce has grown greatly in volume; it has always been almost entirely with the United States. In 1880 the value of imports from the United States was $2,086,000, that of exports to the United States was $4,606,000; in 1907 the value of shipments of domestic merchandise from the United States to Hawaii was $5,357,907, and the value of shipments of domestic merchandise from Hawaii to the United States was $31,984,433, of which $30,111,524 was the value of brown sugar, $133,133 the value of rice, $601,748 the value of canned fruits, $124,146 the value of green, ripe or dried fruits, $117,403 the value of hides and skins, and $105,515 the value of green or raw coffee. The shipments of foreign merchandise each way are relatively insignificant. In the fiscal year 1908 the exports from Hawaii to foreign countries were valued at $597,640, ten times as much as in 1905 ($59,541); the imports into Hawaii from foreign countries were valued at $4,682,399 in the fiscal year 1908, as against $3,014,964 in 1905.

Commerce.—The location of the archipelago, at the “crossroads” of the North Pacific, has made it commercially significant since the days of whaling, and it holds a practical monopoly on coaling, watering, and victualling. Its main drawback is the lack of harbors—Honolulu and Pearl Harbor are the only ones in the archipelago; however, under the River and Harbour Act of 1905, examinations and surveys were conducted to improve Hilo Bay on the island of Hawaii. Pearl Harbor is the U.S. naval station, and in 1908, plans were made for a great naval dock, nearly 1200 ft. long, for the station. In recent years, commerce has increased significantly in volume; it has always been almost entirely with the United States. In 1880, the value of imports from the United States was $2,086,000, and the value of exports to the United States was $4,606,000; in 1907, the value of shipments of domestic merchandise from the United States to Hawaii was $5,357,907, while the value of shipments from Hawaii to the United States was $31,984,433, of which $30,111,524 was for brown sugar, $133,133 for rice, $601,748 for canned fruits, $124,146 for green, ripe, or dried fruits, $117,403 for hides and skins, and $105,515 for green or raw coffee. The shipments of foreign merchandise in either direction are relatively small. In the fiscal year 1908, exports from Hawaii to foreign countries were valued at $597,640, ten times more than in 1905 ($59,541); imports into Hawaii from foreign countries were valued at $4,682,399 in the fiscal year 1908, compared to $3,014,964 in 1905.

Population.—The total population of the islands in 1890 was 89,990; in 1900 it was 154,001, an increase within the decade of 71.13%; in 1910 it was 191,909. In 1908 there were about 72,000 Japanese, 18,000 Chinese, 5000 Koreans, 23,000 Portuguese, 2000 Spanish, 2000 Porto Ricans, 35,000 Hawaiians and part Hawaiians and 12,000 Teutons. Of the total for 1900 there were 61,111 Japanese, 25,767 Chinese and 233 negroes; of the same total there were 90,780 foreign-born, of whom 56,234 were natives of Japan, and 6512 were natives of Portugal. There were in all in 1900, 106,369 males (69.1%; a preponderance due to the large number of Mongolian labourers, whose wives are left in Asia) and only 47,632 females. About three-fifths of the Hawaiians and nearly all of American, British or North European descent are Protestants. Most of the Portuguese and about one-third of the native Hawaiians are Roman Catholics. The Mormons claim more than 4000 adherents, whose principal settlement is at Laie, on the north-east shore of Oahu; the first Mormon missionaries came to the islands in 1850. The population of 1910 was distributed among the several islands as follows: Oahu, 82,028; Hawaii, 55,382; Kauai and Niihau, 23,952; Kalawao, 785; and Maui, Lanai, Kahoolawe and Molokai, 29,762. The population of Honolulu district, the entire urban population of the Territory, was 22,907 in 1890, 39,306 in 1900, and 52,183 in 1910.

Population.—The total population of the islands in 1890 was 89,990; by 1900, it had increased to 154,001, which is a growth of 71.13% over the decade. In 1910, the population reached 191,909. In 1908, there were about 72,000 Japanese, 18,000 Chinese, 5,000 Koreans, 23,000 Portuguese, 2,000 Spanish, 2,000 Puerto Ricans, 35,000 Hawaiians and part-Hawaiians, and 12,000 Germans. In 1900, the total included 61,111 Japanese, 25,767 Chinese, and 233 Black individuals; from that total, 90,780 were foreign-born, with 56,234 from Japan and 6,512 from Portugal. In 1900, there were 106,369 males (69.1%), a majority due to the high number of laborers from Asia who left their families behind; in contrast, there were only 47,632 females. About three-fifths of the Hawaiians and almost all individuals of American, British, or North European descent are Protestants. Most Portuguese and about one-third of native Hawaiians are Roman Catholics. The Mormons have more than 4,000 members, primarily settled in Laie on the northeast shore of Oahu; the first Mormon missionaries arrived in the islands in 1850. The population in 1910 was distributed across the islands as follows: Oahu, 82,028; Hawaii, 55,382; Kauai and Niihau, 23,952; Kalawao, 785; and Maui, Lanai, Kahoolawe, and Molokai, 29,762. In the Honolulu district, which comprises the entire urban population of the Territory, the counts were 22,907 in 1890, 39,306 in 1900, and 52,183 in 1910.

The aboriginal Hawaiians (sometimes called Kanakas, from a Hawaiian word kanaka, meaning “man”) belong to the Malayo-Polynesian race; they probably settled in Hawaii in the 10th century, having formerly lived in Native population. Samoa, and possibly before that in Tahiti and the Marquesas. Their reddish-brown skin has been compared in hue to tarnished copper. Their hair is dark brown or black, straight, wavy or curly; the beard is thin, the face broad, the profile not prominent, the eyes large and expressive, the nose somewhat flattened, the lips thick, the teeth excellent in shape and of a pearly whiteness. The skull is sub-brachycephalic in type, with an index of 82.6 from living “specimens” and 79 from a large collection of skulls; it is never prognathous. Most of the people are of moderate stature, but the chiefs and the women of their families have been remarkable for their height, and 400 pounds was formerly not an unusual weight for one of this class. This corpulence was due not alone to over-feeding but to an almost purely vegetable diet; stoutness was a part of the ideal of feminine beauty. The superiority in physique of the nobles to the common people may have been due in part to a system of massage, the lomi-lomi; it is certainly contrary to the belief in the bad effects of inbreeding—among the upper classes marriage was almost entirely between near relatives.

The indigenous Hawaiians (sometimes referred to as Kanakas, from the Hawaiian word kanaka, meaning “man”) are part of the Malayo-Polynesian race. They likely arrived in Hawaii in the 10th century, having previously lived in Samoa, and possibly earlier in Tahiti and the Marquesas. Their reddish-brown skin has been likened to the color of tarnished copper. Their hair ranges from dark brown to black, and can be straight, wavy, or curly; they have thin beards, broad faces, non-prominent profiles, large expressive eyes, somewhat flattened noses, thick lips, and excellently shaped, pearly white teeth. Their skull shape is sub-brachycephalic, with an index of 82.6 from living people and 79 from a large skull collection; it is never prognathous. Most individuals have a moderate height, but chiefs and women from their families have been noted for their taller stature, with weights of 400 pounds not being unusual for this class. This heaviness was not just from overeating but also from an almost entirely plant-based diet; being stout was considered part of the ideal of feminine beauty. The physical superiority of the nobles over commoners may partially stem from a massage technique called lomi-lomi; this contradicts the belief that inbreeding has negative effects—marriage among the upper classes was mainly between close relatives.

The Rev. William Ellis, an early English missionary, described the natives as follows: “The inhabitants of these islands are, considered physically, amongst the finest races in the Pacific, bearing the strongest resemblance to the New Zealanders in stature, and in their well-developed muscular limbs. The tattooing of their bodies is less artistic than that of the New Zealanders, and much more limited than among some of the other islanders. They are also more hardy and industrious than those living nearer the equator. This in all probability arises from their salubrious climate, and the comparative sterility of their soil rendering them dependent upon the cultivation of the ground for the yam, the arum, and the sweet potato, their chief articles of food. Though, like all undisciplined races, the Sandwich Islanders [Hawaiians] have proved deficient in firm and steady perseverance, they manifest considerable intellectual capability. Their moral character, when first visited by Europeans, was not 88 superior to that of other islanders; and excepting when improved and preserved by the influence of Christianity, it has suffered much from the vices of intemperance and licentiousness introduced by foreigners. Polygamy prevailed among the chiefs and rulers, and women were subject to all the humiliations of the tabu system, which subjected them to many privations, and kept them socially in a condition of inferiority to the other sex. Infanticide was practised to some extent, the children destroyed being chiefly females. Though less superstitious than the Tahitians, the idolatry of the Sandwich Islanders was equally barbarous and sanguinary, as, in addition to the chief objects of worship included in the mythology of the other islands, the supernatural beings supposed to reside in the volcanoes and direct the action of subterranean fires rendered the gods objects of peculiar terror. Human sacrifices were slain on several occasions, and vast offerings presented to the spirits supposed to preside over the volcanoes, especially during the periods of actual eruptions. The requisitions of their idolatry were severe and its rites cruel and bloody. Grotesque and repulsive wooden figures, animals and the bones of chiefs were the objects of worship. Human sacrifices were offered whenever a temple was to be dedicated, or a chief was sick, or a war was to be undertaken; and these occasions were frequent. The apprehensions of the people with regard to a future state were undefined, but fearful. The lower orders expected to be slowly devoured by evil spirits, or to dwell with the gods in burning mountains. The several trades, such as that of fisherman, the tiller of the ground, and the builder of canoes and houses, had each their presiding deities. Household gods were also kept, which the natives worshipped in their habitations. One merciful provision, however, had existed from time immemorial, and that was [the puuhonuas] sacred inclosures, places of refuge, into which those who fled in time of war, or from any violent pursuer, might enter and be safe. To violate their sanctity was one of the greatest crimes of which a man could be guilty.” The native religion was an admixture of idolatry and hero-worship, of some ethical but little moral force. The king was war chief, priest and god in one, and the shocking licence at the death of a king was probably due to the feeling that all law or restraint was annulled by the death of the king—incarnate law. The mythic and religious legends of the people were preserved in chants, handed down from generation to generation; and in like poetic form was kept the knowledge of the people of botany, medicine and other sciences. Name-songs, written at the birth of a chief, gave his genealogy and the deeds of his ancestors; dirges and love-songs were common. These were without rhyme or rhythm, but had alliteration and a parallelism resembling Hebrew poetry. Drums, gourd and bamboo flutes, and a kind of guitar, were known before Cook’s day.

The Rev. William Ellis, an early English missionary, described the natives like this: “The people of these islands are, in terms of physical appearance, among the finest races in the Pacific, closely resembling New Zealanders in height and their well-developed muscular limbs. Their tattooing is less artistic than that of the New Zealanders, and much more limited compared to some other islanders. They are also hardier and more industrious than those living closer to the equator. This is likely due to their healthy climate and the relatively poor soil, which makes them reliant on farming for their main food sources like yam, arum, and sweet potato. Though, like many undisciplined groups, the Sandwich Islanders [Hawaiians] have shown limitations in firm and steady perseverance, they demonstrate significant intellectual potential. Their moral character, when first encountered by Europeans, was not better than that of other islanders; and except when improved and preserved by the influence of Christianity, it has been greatly affected by the vices of intemperance and promiscuity brought by foreigners. Polygamy was common among the chiefs and leaders, and women faced numerous humiliations from the tabu system, which kept them socially inferior to men. Infanticide was practiced to some extent, mainly affecting female children. Although they were less superstitious than the Tahitians, the idolatry of the Sandwich Islanders was just as barbaric and bloody, with additional gods associated with the volcanoes and the forces of underground fires instilling particular fear. Human sacrifices were made on several occasions, and large offerings were presented to the spirits believed to control the volcanoes, especially during eruptions. The demands of their idolatry were strict, and its rituals were harsh and bloody. Grotesque and repulsive wooden figures, animals, and the bones of chiefs were worshipped. Human sacrifices were offered whenever a temple was to be dedicated, a chief was ill, or a war was impending; these events were quite frequent. The people's fears about the afterlife were vague but ominous. The lower classes thought they would be slowly devoured by evil spirits or live with the gods in burning mountains. Various trades, such as fishing, farming, and canoe and house building, had their own deities. People also kept household gods that they worshipped in their homes. However, one merciful provision that had existed for a long time was the [the puuhonuas] sacred enclaves, safe havens where people fleeing during war or from any violent pursuers could find refuge. Violating their sanctuary was considered one of the greatest crimes a person could commit.” The native religion mixed idolatry and hero-worship, with some ethical but little moral strength. The king was a war chief, priest, and god all in one, and the shocking behavior after a king's death likely stemmed from the belief that all laws or restraints were removed with the death of the king—who represented law itself. The people preserved their mythic and religious legends in chants passed down through generations; similarly, their knowledge of botany, medicine, and other sciences was maintained in poetic forms. Name-songs created at the birth of a chief detailed his genealogy and the achievements of his ancestors; dirges and love songs were common. These lacked rhyme and rhythm but featured alliteration and a parallelism that resembled Hebrew poetry. Drums, gourd and bamboo flutes, and a form of guitar were already known before Cook’s arrival.

When the islands first became known to Europeans, the Hawaiian family was in a stage including both polyandry and polygyny, and, according to Morgan, older than either: two or more brothers, with their wives, or two or more sisters with their husbands, cohabited with seeming promiscuity. This system called punalua (a word which in the modern vernacular means merely “dear friend”) was first brought to the attention of ethnologists in 1871 by Lewis H. Morgan (who was incorrect in many of his premises) and was made the basis of his second stage, the punaluan, in the evolution of the family. These conditions did not last long after the coming of the missionaries. Descent was more commonly traced through the female line. As regard cannibalism, it appears that the heart and liver of the human victims offered in the temples were eaten as a religious rite, and that the same parts of any prominent warrior slain in battle were devoured by the victor chiefs, who believed that they would thereby inherit the valour of the dead man. Under taboo as late as 1819 women were to be put to death if they ate bananas, cocoa-nuts, pork, turtles or certain fish. In the days of idolatry the only dress worn by the men was a narrow strip of cloth wound around the loins and passed between the legs. Women wore a short petticoat made of kapa cloth (already referred to), which reached from the waist to the knee. But now the common class of men wear a shirt and trousers; the better class are attired in the European fashion. The women are clad in the holoka, a loose white or coloured garment with sleeves, reaching from the neck to the feet. A coloured handkerchief is twisted around the head or a straw hat is worn. Both sexes delight in adorning themselves with garlands (leis) of flowers and necklaces of coloured seeds. The Hawaiians are a good-tempered, light-hearted and pleasure-loving race. They have many games and sports, including boxing, wrestling (both in and out of water), hill-sliding, spear-throwing, and a game of bowls played with stone discs. Both sexes are passionately fond of riding. They delight to be in the water and swim with remarkable skill and ease. In the exciting sport of surf-riding, which always astonishes strangers, they balance themselves lying, kneeling or standing on a small board which is carried landwards on the curling crest of a great roller. All games were accompanied by gambling. Dances, especially the indecent hula, “danse du ventre,” were favourite entertainments.

When the islands were first discovered by Europeans, Hawaiian family life included both polyandry and polygyny, and, according to Morgan, was older than either: two or more brothers lived with their wives, or two or more sisters lived with their husbands, cohabiting with what seemed like promiscuity. This system, called punalua (which in modern terms just means “dear friend”), was first highlighted by ethnologist Lewis H. Morgan in 1871 (who had many incorrect assumptions) and formed the basis of his second stage, the punaluan, in the evolution of family structures. These practices didn’t last long after the missionaries arrived. Descent was more often traced through the female line. Regarding cannibalism, it seems that the heart and liver of human victims sacrificed in temples were consumed as part of a religious ritual, and the same organs of prominent warriors killed in battle were eaten by victorious chiefs, who believed they would gain the valor of the slain man. Under taboo as late as 1819, women could be executed for eating bananas, coconuts, pork, turtles, or certain fish. In the days of idolatry, men typically wore a narrow strip of cloth wrapped around their waists and between their legs. Women wore a short petticoat made of kapa cloth (previously mentioned), which extended from the waist to the knee. But now, common men wear shirts and trousers, while the upper class dresses in European styles. Women wear the holoka, a loose white or colored garment with sleeves that goes from neck to feet. They tie a colored handkerchief around their heads or wear straw hats. Both men and women enjoy decorating themselves with garlands (leis) made of flowers and necklaces of colored seeds. Hawaiians are a friendly, cheerful, and fun-loving people. They play many games and sports, including boxing, wrestling (both in and out of water), hill-sliding, spear-throwing, and a game involving stone discs. Both genders are enthusiastic about riding. They enjoy being in the water and can swim with impressive skill and ease. In the thrilling sport of surf-riding, which always amazes newcomers, they balance themselves while lying, kneeling, or standing on a small board that rides the curling crest of a large wave. All games involved gambling. Dances, especially the suggestive hula, or “belly dance,” were popular forms of entertainment.

Even at the time when they were first known to Europeans, they had stone and lava hatchets, shark’s-tooth knives, hardwood spades, kapa cloth or paper, mats, fans, fish-hooks and nets, woven baskets, &c., and they had introduced a rough sort of irrigation of the inland country with long canals from highlands to plains. They derived their sustenance chiefly from pork and fish (both fresh and dried), from seaweed (limu), and from the kalo (Colocasia antiquorum, var. esculenta), the banana, sweet potato, yam, bread-fruit and cocoa-nut. From the root of the kalo is made the national dish called poi; after having been baked and well beaten on a board with a stone pestle it is made into a paste with water and then allowed to ferment for a few days, when it is ready to be eaten. One of the table delicacies of former days was a particular breed of dog which was fed exclusively on poi before it was killed, cooked and served. Like other South Sea Islanders they made an intoxicating drink, awa or kava, from the roots of the Macropiper latifolium or Piper methysticum; in early times this could be drunk only by nobles and priests. The native dwellings are constructed of wood, or occasionally are huts thatched with grass at the sides and top. What little cooking is undertaken among the poorer natives is usually done outside. The oven consists of a hole in the ground in which a fire is lighted and stones made hot; and the fire having been removed, the food is wrapped up in leaves and placed in the hole beside the hot stones and covered up until ready; or else, as is now more common, the cooking is done in an old kerosene-oil can over a fire.

Even when they were first discovered by Europeans, they had stone and lava axes, shark-tooth knives, sturdy wooden spades, kapa cloth or paper, mats, fans, fish hooks and nets, woven baskets, and more. They had also developed a crude form of irrigation in the inland areas with long canals from highlands to plains. Their diet mainly consisted of pork and fish (both fresh and dried), seaweed (limu), and kalo (Colocasia antiquorum, var. esculenta), along with bananas, sweet potatoes, yams, breadfruit, and coconuts. From the kalo root, they made the national dish called poi; after it was baked and thoroughly pounded on a board with a stone pestle, it was mixed with water and allowed to ferment for a few days before it was ready to eat. A delicacy in the past was a specific breed of dog that was exclusively fed poi before it was slaughtered, cooked, and served. Like other South Sea Islanders, they made an intoxicating drink called awa or kava from the roots of Macropiper latifolium or Piper methysticum; in earlier times, this drink was reserved for nobles and priests. The traditional homes were built from wood or sometimes consisted of grass-thatched huts. Any cooking that happened among the poorer locals was typically done outside. Their oven was simply a hole in the ground where a fire was lit, and stones were heated. After the fire was removed, food was wrapped in leaves and placed in the hole next to the hot stones and covered up until it was ready. Nowadays, it's more common for cooking to be done in an old kerosene can over a fire.

The Hawaiian language is a member of the widely-diffused Malayo-Polynesian group and closely resembles the dialect of the Marquesas; Hawaiians and New Zealanders, although occupying the most remote regions north and south at which the race has been found, can understand each other without much difficulty. Various unsuccessful attempts have been made to prove the language Aryan in its origin. It is soft and harmonious, being highly vocalic in structure. Every syllable is open, ending in a vowel sound, and short sentences may be constructed wholly of vocalic sounds. The only consonants are k, l, m, n and p, which with the gently aspirated h, the five vowels, and the vocalic w, make up all the letters in use. The letters r and t have been discarded in favour of l and k, as expressing more accurately the native pronunciation, so that, for example, taro, the former name of the Colocasia plant, is now kalo. The language was not reduced to a written form until after the arrival of the missionaries. A Hawaiian spelling book was printed in 1822; in 1834 two newspapers were founded; and in 1839 the first translation of the Bible was published.

The Hawaiian language belongs to the widely spread Malayo-Polynesian group and is very similar to the dialect spoken in the Marquesas. Hawaiians and New Zealanders, despite living in the farthest northern and southern reaches where this race has been found, can understand each other quite easily. There have been several unsuccessful attempts to prove that the language originated from the Aryan family. It is smooth and melodious, with a structure that leans heavily on vowel sounds. Every syllable is open, ending with a vowel sound, and short sentences can be made entirely of vowel sounds. The only consonants in the language are k, l, m, n, and p, along with the softly aspirated h, the five vowels, and the vocalic w, which make up all the letters used. The letters r and t have been replaced by l and k to better match the native pronunciation; for instance, taro, the previous name for the Colocasia plant, is now kalo. The language wasn’t written down until after the missionaries arrived. A Hawaiian spelling book was published in 1822; in 1834, two newspapers were launched; and in 1839, the first translation of the Bible was released.

In spite of moral and material progress—indeed largely because of changes in their food, clothing, dwellings and of other “advantages” of civilization—the race is probably dying out. Captain Cook estimated the number of natives at 400,000, probably an over-estimate; in 1823 the American missionaries estimated their number at 142,000; the census of 1832 showed the population to be 130,313; the census of 1878 proved that the number of natives was no more than 44,088. In 1890 they numbered 89 34,436; in 1900, 29,834, a decrease of 4602 or 13.3% within the decade. To account for this it is said that the blood of the race has become poisoned by the introduction of foreign diseases. The women are much less numerous than the men; and the married ones have few children at the most; two out of three have none. Moreover, the mothers appear to have little maternal instinct and neglect their offspring. It is, however, thought by some that these causes are now diminishing in force, and that the “fittest” of the race may survive. The part-Hawaiians, the offspring of intermarriage between Hawaiian women and men of other races, increased from 3420 in 1878 to 6186 in 1890 and 7835 in 1900.

In spite of moral and material progress—indeed, largely because of changes in their food, clothing, homes, and other "advantages" of civilization—the race is probably dying out. Captain Cook estimated the number of natives at 400,000, which was probably an overestimate; in 1823, American missionaries estimated their number at 142,000; the census of 1832 showed the population to be 130,313; the census of 1878 revealed that the number of natives was no more than 44,088. In 1890, they numbered 89 34,436; in 1900, 29,834, a decrease of 4,602 or 13.3% within the decade. To explain this, it’s said that the blood of the race has become poisoned by the introduction of foreign diseases. The women are much fewer than the men; and the married ones have very few children at most; two out of three have none. Moreover, the mothers seem to have little maternal instinct and neglect their children. However, some believe that these factors are now lessening in impact, and that the "fittest" of the race may survive. The part-Hawaiians, the children of intermarriage between Hawaiian women and men of other races, increased from 3,420 in 1878 to 6,186 in 1890 and 7,835 in 1900.

The pressing demand for labour created by the Reciprocity Treaty of 1875 with the United States led to great changes in the population of the Hawaiian Islands. It became the policy of the government to assist immigrants from different countries. Immigration. In 1877 arrangements were made for the importation of Portuguese families from the Azores and Madeira, and during the next ten years about 7000 of these people were brought to the islands; in 1906-1907 there was a second immigration from the Azores and Madeira of 1325 people. In 1900 the total number of Portuguese in the islands, including those born there, was not far from 16,000, about 2400 of whom were employed in sugar plantations. They have shown themselves to be industrious, thrifty and law-abiding. In 1907 2201 Spanish immigrants from the sugar district about Malaga arrived in Hawaii, and about the same number of Portuguese immigrated in the same year. The Board of Immigration, using funds contributed by planters, was very active in its efforts to encourage the immigration of suitable labourers, but the general immigration law of 1907 prohibited the securing of such immigration through contributions from corporations. Persistent efforts have also been made to introduce Polynesian islanders, as being of a cognate race with the Hawaiians, but the results have been wholly unsatisfactory. About 2000, mainly from the Gilbert Islands, were brought in at the expense of the government between 1878 and 1884; but they did not give satisfaction either as labourers or as citizens, and most of them have been returned to their homes. There never existed any treaty or labour convention between Hawaii and China. In early days a limited number of Chinese settled in the islands, intermarried with the natives and by their industry and economy generally prospered. About 750 of them were naturalized under the monarchy. The first importation of Chinese labourers was in 1852. In 1878 the number of Chinese had risen to 5916. During the next few years there was such a steady influx of Chinese free immigrants that in the spring of 1881 the Hawaiian government sent a despatch to the governor of Hong Kong to stop this invasion. Again, in April 1883, it was suddenly renewed, and within twenty days five steamers arrived from Hong Kong bringing 2253 Chinese passengers, followed the next month by 1100 more, with the news that several thousand more were ready to embark. Accordingly, the Hawaiian government sent another despatch to the governor of Hong Kong, refusing to permit any further immigration of male Chinese from that port. Various regulations restricting Chinese immigration were enacted from time to time, until in 1886 the landing of any Chinese passenger without a passport was prohibited. The number of Chinese in the islands had then risen to 21,000. The consent of the Japanese government to the immigration of its subjects to Hawaii was obtained with difficulty in 1884, and in 1886 a labour convention was ratified. Subsequently the increase of the Japanese element in the population was rapid. It rose from 116 in 1884 to 12,360 in 1890 and 24,400 in 1896. Most of these were recruited from the lowest classes in Japan. Unlike the Chinese, they show no inclination to intermarry with the Hawaiians. The effect of making Hawaii a Territory of the United States was to put an end to all assisted immigration, of whatever race, and to exclude all Chinese labourers. No Chinese labourer is allowed to enter any other Territory of the Union from Hawaii; and the act of Congress of the 26th of February 1885, “to prohibit the importation and migration of foreigners and aliens under contract or agreement to perform labour in the United States, its Territories and the District of Columbia,” and the amending and supplementary acts, are extended to it. But in the treaty of 1894 between the United States and Japan there is nothing to limit the free immigration of Japanese; and several companies have been formed to promote it. The system of contract labour, which was abolished by the act of Congress in 1900, and under which labourers had been restrained from leaving their work before the end of the contract term, concerned few labourers except the Japanese. Various methods of co-operation or profit-sharing are in successful operation on some plantations.

The urgent need for workers created by the Reciprocity Treaty of 1875 with the United States caused significant changes in the population of the Hawaiian Islands. The government adopted a policy to support immigrants from various countries. Immigration. In 1877, arrangements were made to bring Portuguese families from the Azores and Madeira, and over the next ten years, about 7,000 of these individuals were brought to the islands; in 1906-1907, a second wave of immigration from the Azores and Madeira added another 1,325 people. By 1900, the total number of Portuguese in the islands, including those born there, was close to 16,000, with about 2,400 employed on sugar plantations. They proved to be hardworking, resourceful, and law-abiding. In 1907, 2,201 Spanish immigrants from the sugar region near Malaga arrived in Hawaii, and about the same number of Portuguese immigrated that year as well. The Board of Immigration was quite active in promoting the immigration of suitable workers with funds contributed by planters, but the general immigration law of 1907 stopped such immigration through corporate contributions. There were also ongoing attempts to introduce Polynesian islanders, seen as similar to the Hawaiians, but these efforts did not yield good results. About 2,000, mainly from the Gilbert Islands, were brought in at the government's expense between 1878 and 1884; however, they did not meet expectations as laborers or citizens, and most were sent back home. There was never a treaty or labor agreement between Hawaii and China. In the early days, a small number of Chinese settled in the islands, married locals, and generally thrived through their work ethic and frugality. About 750 of them were naturalized under the monarchy. The first importation of Chinese laborers occurred in 1852, and by 1878, their numbers had grown to 5,916. In the following years, there was such a consistent influx of Chinese immigrants that in the spring of 1881, the Hawaiian government sent a message to the governor of Hong Kong to stop their arrival. Again, in April 1883, the immigration surged, and within twenty days, five steamers from Hong Kong arrived carrying 2,253 Chinese passengers, followed the next month by another 1,100, with reports of several thousand more ready to board. Consequently, the Hawaiian government sent another message to the governor of Hong Kong, refusing further immigration of male Chinese from that port. Various restrictions on Chinese immigration were implemented over time, and by 1886, the landing of any Chinese passenger without a passport was banned. The number of Chinese in the islands had then reached 21,000. It was challenging to gain the approval of the Japanese government for the immigration of its citizens to Hawaii, but in 1884, this consent was secured, and a labor agreement was ratified in 1886. After that, the Japanese population grew rapidly, increasing from 116 in 1884 to 12,360 in 1890 and 24,400 in 1896. Most of these individuals were from the lower classes in Japan. Unlike the Chinese, they showed little interest in intermarrying with Hawaiians. The transition of Hawaii into a Territory of the United States ended all assisted immigration, regardless of race, and excluded all Chinese laborers. No Chinese laborer is allowed to enter any other Territory of the Union from Hawaii, and the act of Congress on February 26, 1885, “to prohibit the importation and migration of foreigners and aliens under contract or agreement to perform labor in the United States, its Territories, and the District of Columbia,” along with related amendments, applies to Hawaii as well. However, the treaty of 1894 between the United States and Japan does not impose any restrictions on the free immigration of Japanese, and several companies have been established to promote it. The contract labor system, abolished by Congress in 1900, which prevented workers from leaving their jobs before their contract ended, affected few laborers outside of the Japanese. Successful co-operative or profit-sharing methods have been implemented on some plantations.

An interesting sociological problem is raised by the presence of the large Asiatic element in the population. The Japanese and Koreans, and in less measure the Chinese, act as domestic servants, work under white contractors on irrigating ditches and reservoirs, do most of the plantation labour and compete successfully with whites and native islanders in all save skilled urban occupations, such as printing and the manufacture, of machinery. The “Yellow Peril” is considered less dangerous in Hawaii than formerly, although it was used as a political cry in the campaign for American annexation. No success met the apparently well-meaning efforts of the Central Japanese League which was organized in November and December 1903 to promote the observance of law and order by the Japanese in the islands, who assumed a too independent attitude and felt themselves free from governmental control whether Japanese or American; indeed, after the League had been in operation for a year or more, it almost seemed that it contributed to industrial disorders among the Japanese. At about the same time Japanese immigration to Hawaii fell off upon the opening of new fields for colonization by the Russo-Japanese War, and Korean immigration was promoted by employers on the islands. From the first of January 1903 to the 30th of June 1905 Japanese immigrants numbered 18,027; Koreans 7388 (four Koreans to every ten Japanese); but in the last twelve months of this same period there were 4733 Koreans to 5941 Japanese (eight Koreans to every ten Japanese). Another fact which is possibly contributing to the solution of the problem is that the Japanese are leaving the islands in large numbers as compared with the Koreans. The Japanese leaving Hawaii between the 14th of June 1900 and the 31st of December 1905 numbered 42,313, or 4284 more than the number of Japanese immigrants arriving during the same period. The corresponding figures for Koreans during the same period are as follows: number leaving between the 14th of June 1900 and the 31st of December 1905, 721, or 6673 less than the Korean immigrants for the same period. The acceleration of the departure of the Japanese is shown by the fact that in the eighteen months (July 1904 to January 1906) occurred 19,114 of the 42,313 departures in the sixty-six months from July 1900 to January 1906.7 After 1906, owing to restrictions by the Japanese government, immigration to Hawaii greatly decreased. At the same time the number of departures was decreasing rapidly. The change in the character of the immigration of Japanese is shown by the fact that in the fiscal year 1906-1907 the ratio of female immigrants to males was as 1 to 8, in the fiscal year 1907-1908 it was as 1 to 2, and in the latter year, of 4593 births in the Territory, 2445 were Japanese.

An interesting sociological issue arises from the significant Asian presence in the population. The Japanese and Koreans, and to a lesser extent the Chinese, work as domestic helpers, labor under white contractors on irrigation projects, handle most plantation work, and compete effectively with white residents and native islanders in all but skilled urban jobs, like printing and machinery manufacturing. The "Yellow Peril" is seen as less threatening in Hawaii than it used to be, although it was once a rallying point in the campaign for American annexation. Efforts by the Central Japanese League, established in November and December 1903 to encourage law and order among the Japanese in the islands, did not succeed as planned. The Japanese community developed a sense of independence and felt they were not under any governmental authority, whether Japanese or American. In fact, after the League had been active for about a year, it seemingly contributed to industrial unrest among the Japanese. Around the same time, Japanese immigration to Hawaii declined as new opportunities for colonization opened up due to the Russo-Japanese War, and employers on the islands began promoting Korean immigration. From January 1, 1903, to June 30, 1905, there were 18,027 Japanese immigrants and 7,388 Koreans (four Koreans for every ten Japanese); however, in the last twelve months of this period, there were 4,733 Koreans to 5,941 Japanese (eight Koreans for every ten Japanese). Another factor potentially affecting this situation is the increasing number of Japanese leaving the islands compared to Koreans. From June 14, 1900, to December 31, 1905, 42,313 Japanese left Hawaii, which was 4,284 more than the number of Japanese immigrants arriving during that time. For Koreans in the same timeframe, 721 left, or 6,673 fewer than the number of Korean immigrants during this period. The surge in Japanese departures is highlighted by the fact that in the eighteen months from July 1904 to January 1906, 19,114 of the 42,313 departures occurred. After 1906, due to restrictions imposed by the Japanese government, immigration to Hawaii significantly declined. At the same time, the rate of departures was also dropping quickly. The shift in the profile of Japanese immigration is evident in the fact that in the fiscal year 1906-1907, the ratio of female to male immigrants was 1 to 8, while in the fiscal year 1907-1908, it was 1 to 2. Additionally, of the 4,593 births in the Territory that year, 2,445 were Japanese.

Administration.—The Hawaiian Islands are governed under an Act of Congress, signed by the president on the 30th of April 1900, which first organized them as a Territory of the United States. The legislature, which meets biennially at Honolulu, consists of a Senate of 15 members holding office for four years, and a House of Representatives of 30 members holding office for two years. In order to vote for Representatives or Senators, the elector must be a male citizen of the United States who has attained the age of twenty-one years, has lived in the Territory not less than one year preceding, and is able to speak, read and write the English or Hawaiian language. No person is allowed to vote by reason of being in or attached to the army or navy. The executive power is vested in a governor, appointed by the president and holding office for four years. He must not be less than thirty-five years of age and must be a citizen of the Territory. The secretary of the Territory is appointed in like manner for a term of the same length. The governor appoints, by and with the consent of the Senate of the Territory, an attorney-general, treasurer, commissioner of public lands, commissioner of agriculture and forestry, superintendent of public works, superintendent of public instruction, commissioners of public instruction, auditor and deputy-auditor, surveyor, high sheriff, members of the board of health, board of prison inspectors, board of registration, inspectors of election, &c. All such officers are appointed for four years except the commissioners of public instruction and the members of the said 90 boards, whose terms are as provided by the laws of the Territory; all must be citizens of the Territory. The judicial power is vested in a supreme court, 5 circuit courts, and 29 district courts, each having a jurisdiction corresponding to similar courts in each state in the Union; and, entirely distinct from these territorial courts, Hawaii has a United States district court. A Supplementary Act of the 3rd of March 1905 provides that writs of error and appeals may be taken from the Supreme Court of Hawaii to the Supreme Court of the United States “in all cases where the amount involved exclusive of costs or value exceeds the sum of five thousand dollars.” The Territory was without the forms of local government common to the United States until 1905, when the Territorial legislature divided it into five counties8 without, however, giving to them the usual powers of taxation. Each county has the following officers: a board of supervisors, a clerk, a treasurer, an auditor, an assessor and tax-collector, a sheriff and coroner, and an attorney. The members (from five to nine) of the board of supervisors are elected by districts into which the county is divided, usually only one from each. All county officers are elected for a term of two years. The act of 1900 provides for the election of a delegate to Congress, and prescribes that the delegate shall have the qualifications necessary for membership in the Hawaiian Senate, and shall be elected by voters qualified to vote for members of the House of Representatives of Hawaii. As usual, the delegate has a right to take part in the debates in the national House of Representatives, but may not vote.

Administration.—The Hawaiian Islands are governed by a law passed by Congress and signed by the president on April 30, 1900, which first established them as a Territory of the United States. The legislature, which meets every two years in Honolulu, consists of a Senate with 15 members serving four-year terms and a House of Representatives with 30 members serving two-year terms. To vote for Representatives or Senators, a voter must be a male citizen of the United States, at least 21 years old, have lived in the Territory for at least one year prior, and be able to speak, read, and write in either English or Hawaiian. No one can vote just because they are in or connected to the army or navy. The executive power is held by a governor appointed by the president, serving a four-year term. The governor must be at least 35 years old and a citizen of the Territory. The secretary of the Territory is appointed in the same way for the same term length. The governor, with the Senate's consent, appoints an attorney-general, treasurer, commissioner of public lands, commissioner of agriculture and forestry, superintendent of public works, superintendent of public instruction, commissioners of public instruction, auditor and deputy-auditor, surveyor, high sheriff, members of the board of health, board of prison inspectors, board of registration, election inspectors, etc. All these officers are appointed for four years except for the commissioners of public instruction and the members of the aforementioned boards, whose terms are defined by the laws of the Territory; all must be citizens of the Territory. The judicial power is held by a supreme court, 5 circuit courts, and 29 district courts, each corresponding to similar courts in each state in the Union; additionally, Hawaii has a United States district court that is separate from these territorial courts. A Supplementary Act from March 3, 1905, states that writs of error and appeals can be taken from the Supreme Court of Hawaii to the Supreme Court of the United States “in all cases where the amount involved, excluding costs or value, exceeds five thousand dollars.” Until 1905, the Territory lacked the local government structures common in the United States, when the Territorial legislature divided it into five counties8 but did not grant them the usual powers of taxation. Each county has the following officers: a board of supervisors, a clerk, a treasurer, an auditor, an assessor and tax-collector, a sheriff and coroner, and an attorney. The members (ranging from five to nine) of the board of supervisors are elected by the districts into which the county is divided, usually one from each. All county officers are elected for two-year terms. The 1900 law provides for the election of a delegate to Congress, specifying that the delegate must have the qualifications to be a member of the Hawaiian Senate and be elected by voters eligible to vote for members of the House of Representatives of Hawaii. As is typical, the delegate can participate in debates in the national House of Representatives but cannot vote.

Charities.—The principal public charity of the Territory is the leper asylum on a peninsula almost 10 sq. m. in area on the N. side of the island of Molokai. A steep precipice forms a natural wall between it and the rest of the island. The place became an asylum for lepers and the caring for them began to be a charity under government charge in 1866; but conditions here were at first unspeakably unhygienic, their improvement being largely due to Father Damien, who devoted himself to this work in 1873. The patients are almost exclusively native Hawaiians, and their number is slowly but steadily decreasing; in 1908 they numbered 791, and there were at Molokai 46 non-leprous helpers and 27 officers and assistants, including the Roman Catholic brothers and sisters in charge of the homes. In 1905 the United States government appropriated $100,000 for a hospital station and laboratory “for the study of the methods of transmission, cause and treatment of leprosy,” and $50,000 a year for their maintenance; the station and laboratory to be established when the territorial government should have ceded to the United States a tract of 1 sq. m. on the leper reservation. The cession was made soon afterward by the territorial government. In 1907-1908 a home for non-leprous boys of leprous parents was established at Honolulu. Another public charity of Hawaii is the general free dispensary maintained by the territorial government at Honolulu.

Charities.—The main public charity in the Territory is the leper asylum located on a peninsula nearly 10 sq. m. in size on the northern side of Molokai Island. A steep cliff creates a natural barrier between the asylum and the rest of the island. This area became a refuge for lepers, and care for them was officially recognized as a charity by the government in 1866; initially, conditions were incredibly unsanitary, but improvements were largely thanks to Father Damien, who dedicated himself to this cause in 1873. The patients are primarily native Hawaiians, and their numbers are slowly but consistently declining; in 1908, there were 791 patients, along with 46 non-leprous helpers and 27 staff members, including the Roman Catholic brothers and sisters overseeing the homes. In 1905, the U.S. government allocated $100,000 for a hospital station and lab “to study how leprosy is transmitted, its causes, and treatment,” along with $50,000 annually for their upkeep; the facility was to be set up once the territorial government ceded a 1 sq. m. parcel on the leper reservation to the United States. This cession occurred shortly after. In 1907-1908, a home for non-leprous boys whose parents had leprosy was established in Honolulu. Another public charity in Hawaii is the general free dispensary run by the territorial government in Honolulu.

Education.—Education is universal, compulsory and free. Every child between the ages of six and fifteen must attend either a public school or a duly authorized private school. Consequently the percentage of illiteracy is extremely low. The school system is essentially American in its text-books and in its methods, thanks to the foundations laid by American missionaries. Between 1820 and 1824 the missionaries taught about 2000 natives to read. Several important schools were founded before 1840, when the first written laws were published. Among these was a law providing for compulsory education, and decreeing that no illiterate born after the beginning of Liholiho’s reign should hold office, and that no illiterate man or woman, born after the same date, could marry. The first Hawaiian minister of public instruction was the Rev. William Richards (1792-1847), who held office from 1843 to 1847, and was followed by Richard Armstrong (1805-1860), an American Presbyterian missionary, the father of General S. C. Armstrong. He laid stress on the importance of manual and industrial training during his term of office (1847-1855), and was succeeded by a board of education (1855-1865), of which he was first president; then an inspector-general of schools was appointed, Judge Abraham Fornander being the first inspector; in 1896 an executive department was created under a minister of public instruction and six commissioners; in 1900 a superintendent of public instruction was first appointed. English is by law the medium of instruction in all schools, both public and private, although other languages may be taught in addition. Formal instruction in Hawaiian ceased in 1898. The schools are in session forty weeks during the year. In 1908 there were 154 public schools with 18,564 pupils (27.06% of whom were Japanese, 20.89% Hawaiian, 13.54% part Hawaiian, 18.72% Portuguese and 10.63% Chinese) and 51 private schools with 4881 pupils. A normal school has been established at Honolulu, with a practice school attached to it. The territorial legislature of 1907 established the College of Agriculture and Mechanic Arts of the Territory of Hawaii, and also founded a public library. The Honolulu high school does excellent work and has beautiful buildings and grounds. The Lahainaluna Seminary on west Maui, founded in 1831 as a training school for teachers, furnishes instruction to Hawaiian boys in agriculture, carpentry, printing and mechanical drawing. The boys in the industrial school (1902) at Waialee, on the island of Oahu, are taught useful trades. The teaching of sewing in the public schools has met with great success, and a simple form of the Swedish sloid was introduced into many of the schools in 1894. Lace work was introduced into the public schools in 1903. But the best industrial instruction is furnished by the independent schools, among which the Kamehameha schools take the first place. They were founded by Mrs Bernice Pauahi Bishop (1831-1884), the last lineal descendant of Kamehameha I., who left her extensive landed estates in the hands of trustees for their support. They furnish a good manual and technical training to Hawaiian boys and girls, in addition to a primary and grammar school course of study, and exert a strong religious influence. There are six boarding schools for Hawaiian girls, supported by private resources. The most advanced courses of study are offered by Oahu College, which occupies a beautiful site near the beach just E. of Honolulu; it was founded in 1841 as the Punahou School for missionaries’ children, and was chartered as Oahu College in 1852. It is well equipped with buildings and apparatus, and has an endowment of about $300,000.

Education.—Education is universal, mandatory, and free. Every child between the ages of six and fifteen must attend either a public school or a properly authorized private school. As a result, the illiteracy rate is very low. The school system is primarily American in its textbooks and methods, thanks to the groundwork laid by American missionaries. Between 1820 and 1824, these missionaries taught around 2,000 locals how to read. Several important schools were established before 1840, when the first written laws were published. Among these was a law requiring compulsory education and stating that no illiterate person born after the start of Liholiho’s reign could hold public office, and that no illiterate man or woman born after that date could marry. The first Hawaiian minister of public instruction was Rev. William Richards (1792-1847), who served from 1843 to 1847, followed by Richard Armstrong (1805-1860), an American Presbyterian missionary and father of General S. C. Armstrong. He emphasized the importance of manual and industrial training during his time in office (1847-1855) and was succeeded by a board of education (1855-1865), of which he was the first president. An inspector-general of schools was then appointed, with Judge Abraham Fornander being the first inspector. In 1896, an executive department was created under a minister of public instruction and six commissioners; in 1900, a superintendent of public instruction was appointed for the first time. English is mandated by law as the language of instruction in all schools, both public and private, although other languages can also be taught. Formal instruction in Hawaiian ended in 1898. The schools operate for forty weeks each year. In 1908, there were 154 public schools with 18,564 students (27.06% of whom were Japanese, 20.89% Hawaiian, 13.54% part-Hawaiian, 18.72% Portuguese, and 10.63% Chinese) and 51 private schools with 4,881 students. A normal school was established in Honolulu, with a practice school attached to it. The territorial legislature of 1907 established the College of Agriculture and Mechanic Arts of the Territory of Hawaii and also founded a public library. The Honolulu high school does outstanding work and has beautiful buildings and grounds. The Lahainaluna Seminary on west Maui, established in 1831 as a training school for teachers, offers instruction to Hawaiian boys in agriculture, carpentry, printing, and mechanical drawing. The boys at the industrial school (1902) in Waialee, Oahu, learn practical trades. The teaching of sewing in public schools has been very successful, and a simple form of the Swedish sloid was introduced into many schools in 1894. Lace work was integrated into public schools in 1903. However, the best industrial instruction is provided by independent schools, with the Kamehameha schools leading the way. These were founded by Mrs. Bernice Pauahi Bishop (1831-1884), the last direct descendant of Kamehameha I, who put her vast land holdings in the hands of trustees for their support. They provide excellent manual and technical training to Hawaiian boys and girls, along with primary and grammar school education and have a significant religious influence. There are six boarding schools for Hawaiian girls, supported by private funds. The most advanced courses of study are available at Oahu College, which is located on a beautiful site near the beach just east of Honolulu; it was established in 1841 as the Punahou School for missionaries’ children and was chartered as Oahu College in 1852. It is well-equipped with facilities and resources, boasting an endowment of about $300,000.

Finance.—The revenue of the Territory for the fiscal year ending the 30th of June 1908 amounted to $2,669,748.32, of which $640,051.42 was the proceeds of the tax on real estate, $635,265.81 was the proceeds of the tax on personal property; and among the larger of the remaining items were the income tax ($266,241.74), waterworks ($141,898.04), public lands (sales, $37,585.75; revenue, $122,541.71) and licences ($206,374.28). On the 30th of June 1908 the bonded debt of the Territory was $3,979,000; there was on hand net cash, without floating debt, $677,648.48.

Finance.—The revenue of the Territory for the fiscal year ending June 30, 1908, totaled $2,669,748.32, of which $640,051.42 came from the tax on real estate, $635,265.81 from the tax on personal property; and among the larger remaining items were the income tax ($266,241.74), waterworks ($141,898.04), public lands (sales, $37,585.75; revenue, $122,541.71), and licenses ($206,374.28). On June 30, 1908, the bonded debt of the Territory was $3,979,000; there was available cash, excluding floating debt, of $677,648.48.

History.—The history of the islands before their discovery by Captain James Cook, in 1778, is obscure.9 This famous navigator, who named the islands in honour of the earl of Sandwich, was received by the natives with many demonstrations of astonishment and delight; and offerings and prayers were presented to him by their priest in one of the temples; and though in the following year he was killed by a native when he landed in Kealakekua Bay in Hawaii, his bones were preserved by the priests and continued to receive offerings and homage from the people until the abolition of idolatry. At the time of Cook’s visit the archipelago seems to have been divided into three distinct kingdoms: Hawaii; Oahu and Maui; and Lanai and Molokai. On the death of the chief who ruled Hawaii at that time there succeeded one named Kamehameha (1736-1819), who appears to have been a man of quick perception and great force of character. When Vancouver visited the islands in 1792, he left sheep and neat cattle,10 protected by a ten years’ taboo, and laid down the keel of a European ship for Kamehameha. Ten or twelve years later Kamehameha had 20 vessels (of 25 to 50 tons), which traded among the islands. He afterwards purchased others from foreigners. Having encouraged a warlike spirit in his people and having introduced firearms, Kamehameha attacked and overcame the chiefs of the other kingdoms one after another, until (in 1795) he became undisputed master of the whole group. He made John Young (c. 1775-1835) and Isaac Davis, Americans from one of the ships of Captain Metcalf which visited the island in 1789, his advisers, encouraged trade with foreigners, 91 and derived from its profits a large increase of revenue as well as the means of consolidating his power. He died in 1819, and was succeeded by his son, Lilohilo, or Kamehameha II., a mild and well-disposed prince, but destitute of his father’s energy. One of the first acts of Kamehameha II. was, for vicious and selfish reasons, to abolish taboo and idolatry throughout the islands. Some disturbances were caused thereby, but the insurgents were defeated.

History.—The history of the islands before their discovery by Captain James Cook in 1778 is unclear.9 This famous navigator, who named the islands after the earl of Sandwich, was received by the locals with much surprise and joy; offerings and prayers were presented to him by a priest in one of the temples. Although he was killed the following year by a native when he landed in Kealakekua Bay in Hawaii, his bones were preserved by the priests and continued to receive offerings and respect from the people until the end of idol worship. At the time of Cook’s visit, the archipelago seems to have been divided into three distinct kingdoms: Hawaii; Oahu and Maui; and Lanai and Molokai. After the chief who ruled Hawaii at that time died, Kamehameha (1736-1819) took over; he was a man of keen perception and strong character. When Vancouver visited the islands in 1792, he left sheep and cattle, 10 protected by a ten-year taboo, and laid down the keel of a European ship for Kamehameha. Ten or twelve years later, Kamehameha had 20 vessels (ranging from 25 to 50 tons), which traded among the islands. He later bought more from foreigners. After fostering a warrior spirit in his people and introducing firearms, Kamehameha attacked and defeated the chiefs of the other kingdoms one by one until he became the uncontested ruler of the entire group in 1795. He made John Young (c. 1775-1835) and Isaac Davis, Americans from one of Captain Metcalf's ships that visited the island in 1789, his advisers, promoted trade with foreigners, 91 and gained significant revenue and power from its profits. He died in 1819 and was succeeded by his son, Lilohilo, or Kamehameha II., a gentle and well-meaning prince but lacking his father's drive. One of Kamehameha II.'s first actions was to abolish taboo and idolatry throughout the islands for selfish reasons. This caused some unrest, but the insurgents were defeated.

On the 31st of March 1820 missionaries of the American Board of Commissioners for Foreign Missions—two clergymen, two teachers, a physician, a farmer, and a printer, each with his wife—and three Hawaiians educated in the Cornwall (Connecticut) Foreign Missionary School, arrived from America and began their labours at Honolulu. A short time afterwards the British government presented a small schooner to the king, and this afforded an opportunity for the Rev. William Ellis, the well-known missionary, to visit Honolulu with a number of Christian natives from the Society Islands. Finding the language of the two groups nearly the same, Mr Ellis, who had spent several years in the southern islands, was able to assist the American missionaries in reducing the Hawaiian language to a written form. In 1825 the ten commandments were recognized by the king as the basis of a code of laws. In the years 1830-1845 the educational work of the American missionaries was so successful that hardly a native was unable to read and write. A law prohibiting drunkenness (1835) was followed in 1838 by a licence law and in 1839 by a law prohibiting the importation of spirits and taxing wines fifty cents a gallon; in 1840 another prohibitory law was enacted; but licence laws soon made the sale of liquor common. Missionary effort was particularly fruitful in Hilo, where Titus Coan (1801-1882), sent out in 1835 by the American Board of Commissioners for Foreign Missions, worked in repeated revivals, induced most of his church members to give up tobacco even, and received prior to 1880 more than 12,000 members into a church which became self-supporting and sent missions to the Gilbert Islands and the Marquesas. In 1823 Keopuolani, the king’s mother, was baptized; and on a single Sunday in 1838 Coan baptized 1705 converts at Hilo. In 1864 the American Board withdrew its control of evangelical work.

On March 31, 1820, missionaries from the American Board of Commissioners for Foreign Missions—two clergymen, two teachers, a doctor, a farmer, and a printer, each with their wives—and three Hawaiians who had been educated at the Cornwall (Connecticut) Foreign Missionary School, arrived from America and began their work in Honolulu. Shortly after, the British government gifted a small schooner to the king, which allowed Rev. William Ellis, a well-known missionary, to visit Honolulu with several Christian natives from the Society Islands. Because the languages of the two groups were almost identical, Mr. Ellis, who had spent several years in the southern islands, helped the American missionaries develop a written form of the Hawaiian language. In 1825, the king acknowledged the Ten Commandments as the foundation of a legal code. Between 1830 and 1845, the American missionaries’ educational efforts were so successful that almost every native could read and write. A law against drunkenness was passed in 1835, followed in 1838 by a licensing law, and in 1839 by a law banning the importation of spirits and taxing wines fifty cents a gallon; another prohibitory law was enacted in 1840, but licensing laws soon made liquor sales common. Missionary efforts were particularly successful in Hilo, where Titus Coan (1801-1882), sent out by the American Board of Commissioners for Foreign Missions in 1835, led repeated revivals, encouraged most of his church members to quit tobacco, and welcomed over 12,000 members into a church that became self-sufficient and sent missions to the Gilbert Islands and the Marquesas before 1880. In 1823, Keopuolani, the king’s mother, was baptized; and on one Sunday in 1838, Coan baptized 1,705 converts in Hilo. In 1864, the American Board withdrew its control of evangelical work.

In 1824 the king and queen of the Hawaiian Islands paid a visit to England, and both died there of measles. His successor, Kamehameha III. ruled from 1825 to 1854. In 1839 Kamehameha III. signed a Bill of Rights and in 1840 he promulgated the first constitution of the realm; in 1842 a code of laws was proclaimed; by 1848 the feudal system of land tenure was completely abolished; the first legislature met in 1845 and full suffrage was granted in 1852, but in 1864 suffrage was restricted. Progress was at times interrupted by the conduct of the officers of foreign powers. On one occasion (July 1839) French officers abrogated the laws (particularly against the importation of liquor), dictated treaties, extorted $20,000 and by force of arms procured privileges for Roman Catholic11 priests in the country; and at another time (February 1843) a British officer, Captain Paulet of the “Carysfort,” went so far as to take possession of Oahu and establish a commission for its government. The act of the British officer was disavowed by his superiors as soon as known.

In 1824, the king and queen of the Hawaiian Islands visited England, where both sadly died of measles. His successor, Kamehameha III, ruled from 1825 to 1854. In 1839, Kamehameha III signed a Bill of Rights, and in 1840, he published the first constitution of the kingdom. A code of laws was proclaimed in 1842; by 1848, the feudal system of land ownership was completely abolished. The first legislature met in 1845, and full voting rights were granted in 1852, but in 1864, these rights were restricted. Progress was sometimes interrupted by the actions of foreign officials. For instance, in July 1839, French officers violated the laws (especially those against importing liquor), dictated treaties, extorted $20,000, and by force took privileges for Roman Catholic priests in the country; at another time, in February 1843, a British officer, Captain Paulet of the “Carysfort,” went as far as to take control of Oahu and set up a commission to govern it. The British officer's actions were disavowed by his superiors as soon as they were known.

These incidents led to a representation on the part of the native sovereign to the governments of Great Britain, France and the United States, and the independence of the islands (recognized by the United States in 1842) was recognized in 1844 by France and Great Britain. In 1844 John Ricord, an American lawyer, became the first minister of foreign affairs. A new constitution came into effect in 1852. It was the aim of Kamehameha III. and his advisers to combine the native and the foreign elements under one government; to make the king the sovereign not of one race or class, but of all; and to extend equal and impartial laws over all inhabitants of the country. Kamehameha IV. and his queen, Emma, ruled from 1855 to 1863 and were succeeded by his brother, Kamehameha V., who died in 1872, and in whose reign a third (and a reactionary) constitution went into effect in 1864, by mere royal proclamation. Lunalilo, a grandson of Kamehameha I., was king for two years, and in 1874, backed by American influence, Kalakaua was elected his successor, in preference to Queen Emma, a member of the Anglican Church and the candidate of the pro-British party. Kalakaua considered residents of European or American descent as alien invaders, and he aimed to restore largely the ancient system of personal government, under which he should have control of the public treasury. On the 2nd of July 1878, and again on the 14th of August 1880, he dismissed a ministry without assigning any reason, after it had been triumphantly sustained by a test vote of the legislature. On the latter occasion he appointed C. C. Moreno, who had come to Honolulu in the interest of a Chinese steamship company, as Premier and minister of foreign affairs. This called forth the protest of the representatives of Great Britain, France and the United States, and aroused such opposition on the part of both the foreigners and the better class of natives that the king was obliged, after four days of popular excitement, to remove the obnoxious minister. During the king’s absence on a tour round the world in 1881, his sister, Mrs Lydia Dominis (b. 1838), also styled Liliuokalani, acted as regent. After his return the contest was renewed between the so-called National party, which favoured absolution, and the Reform party, which sought to establish parliamentary government. The king took an active part in the elections, and used his patronage to the utmost to influence legislation. For three successive sessions a majority of the legislature was composed of office-holders, dependent on the favour of the executive. Among the measures urged by the king and opposed by the Reform party were the project of a ten-million dollar loan, chiefly for military purposes; the removal of the prohibition of the sale of alcoholic liquor to Hawaiians, which was carried in 1882; the licensing of the sale of opium; the chartering of a lottery company; the licensing of kahunas, or medicine men, &c. Systematic efforts were made to turn the constitutional question into a race issue, and the party cry was raised of “Hawaii for Hawaiians.” Adroit politicians flattered the king’s vanity, defended his follies and taught him how to violate the spirit of the constitution while keeping the letter of the law. From 1882 till 1887 his prime minister was Walter Murray Gibson (1823-1888), a singular and romantic genius, a visionary adventurer and a shrewd politician, who had been imprisoned by the Dutch government in Batavia in 1852 on a charge of inciting insurrection in Sumatra, and had arrived at Honolulu in 1861 with the intention of leading a Mormon colony to the East Indies. To exalt his royal dignity, which was lowered, he thought, by his being only an elected king, Kalakaua caused himself to be crowned with imposing ceremonies on the ninth anniversary of his election (Feb. 12, 1883).

These events led the native king to reach out to the governments of Great Britain, France, and the United States. The islands' independence, recognized by the United States in 1842, was acknowledged by France and Great Britain in 1844. That same year, John Ricord, an American lawyer, became the first minister of foreign affairs. A new constitution came into effect in 1852. Kamehameha III and his advisors aimed to unite the native and foreign elements under one government, making the king a sovereign of all races and classes, and extending equal laws to all inhabitants of the country. Kamehameha IV and his queen, Emma, ruled from 1855 to 1863, followed by his brother, Kamehameha V, who died in 1872. During his reign, a third (and reactionary) constitution was enacted via royal proclamation in 1864. Lunalilo, a grandson of Kamehameha I, reigned for two years, and in 1874, with American backing, Kalakaua was elected as his successor over Queen Emma, a member of the Anglican Church and the pro-British candidate. Kalakaua viewed European or American residents as foreign intruders and aimed to largely reinstate the ancient system of personal rule, intending to have control over the public treasury. On July 2, 1878, and again on August 14, 1880, he dismissed a ministry without giving reasons, despite it being supported by a test vote from the legislature. On the latter occasion, he appointed C. C. Moreno, who had come to Honolulu representing a Chinese steamship company, as Premier and minister of foreign affairs. This sparked protests from the representatives of Great Britain, France, and the United States, and faced strong opposition from both foreigners and the more elite native citizens, forcing the king to remove the unpopular minister after four days of public unrest. During the king's world tour in 1881, his sister, Mrs. Lydia Dominis (also known as Liliuokalani), acted as regent. Upon his return, the rivalry reignited between the so-called National party, which supported absolute power, and the Reform party, which aimed to implement parliamentary government. The king actively participated in elections, using his influence to sway legislation. For three consecutive sessions, the majority of the legislature consisted of office-holders relying on the executive's favor. Initiatives pushed by the king and opposed by the Reform party included a proposal for a ten-million dollar loan primarily for military purposes, the lifting of the ban on selling alcohol to Hawaiians (passed in 1882), the licensing of opium sales, establishing a lottery company, and licensing kahunas (medicine men), among others. Systematic efforts were made to frame the constitutional issue as a racial matter, with the rallying cry of “Hawaii for Hawaiians.” Skilled politicians flattered the king's ego, defended his missteps, and taught him how to circumvent the spirit of the constitution while following its letter. From 1882 to 1887, his prime minister was Walter Murray Gibson (1823-1888), a distinctive and romantic figure, a visionary adventurer, and a savvy politician, who had previously been imprisoned by the Dutch government in Batavia in 1852 for inciting insurrection in Sumatra. He arrived in Honolulu in 1861 intending to lead a Mormon settlement in the East Indies. To elevate his royal status, which he believed was diminished by being an elected king, Kalakaua had himself crowned in a grand ceremony on the ninth anniversary of his election (February 12, 1883).

Kalakaua was now no longer satisfied with being merely king of Hawaii, but aspired to what was termed the “Primacy of the Pacific.” Accordingly Mr Gibson addressed a protest to the great powers, deprecating any further annexation of the islands of the Pacific Ocean, and claiming for Hawaii the exclusive right “to assist them in improving their political and social condition.” In pursuance of this policy, two commissioners were sent to the Gilbert Islands in 1883 to prepare the way for a Hawaiian protectorate. On the 23rd of December 1886 Mr J. E. Bush was commissioned as minister plenipotentiary to the king of Samoa, the king of Tonga and the other independent chiefs of Polynesia. He arrived in Samoa on the 3rd of January 1887, and remained there six months, during which time he concluded a treaty of alliance with Malietoa, which was ratified by his government. The “Explorer,” a steamer of 170 tons, which had been employed in the copra trade, was purchased for $20,000, and refitted as a man-of-war, to form the “nest-egg” of the future Hawaiian navy. She was renamed the “Kaimiloa,” and was despatched to Samoa on the 17th of May 1887 92 to strengthen the hands of the embassy. As R. L. Stevenson wrote: “The history of the ‘Kaimiloa’ is a story of debauchery, mutiny and waste of government property.” At length the intrigues of the Hawaiian embassy gave umbrage to the German government, and it was deemed prudent to recall it to Honolulu in July 1887. Meanwhile a reform league had been formed to stop the prevailing misrule and extravagance; it was supported by a volunteer military force, the “Honolulu Rifles.” The king carried through the legislature of 1886 a bill for an opium licence, as well as a Loan Act, under which a million dollars were borrowed in London. Under his influence the Hale Naua Society was organized in 1886 for the spread of idolatry and king-worship; and in the same year a “Board of Health” was formed which revived the vicious practices of the kahunas or medicine-men.

Kalakaua was no longer content just being the king of Hawaii; he aimed for what was called the “Primacy of the Pacific.” As a result, Mr. Gibson sent a protest to the major powers, objecting to any further annexation of the Pacific Islands and asserting Hawaii's exclusive right “to help improve their political and social conditions.” To support this agenda, two commissioners were dispatched to the Gilbert Islands in 1883 to lay the groundwork for a Hawaiian protectorate. On December 23, 1886, Mr. J. E. Bush was appointed as minister plenipotentiary to the king of Samoa, the king of Tonga, and other independent chiefs of Polynesia. He arrived in Samoa on January 3, 1887, and stayed for six months, during which he signed a treaty of alliance with Malietoa that was ratified by his government. The “Explorer,” a 170-ton steamer used in the copra trade, was bought for $20,000 and refitted as a warship to serve as the “nest egg” of the future Hawaiian navy. It was renamed the “Kaimiloa” and sent to Samoa on May 17, 1887, to support the embassy. As R. L. Stevenson noted: “The history of the ‘Kaimiloa’ is a story of debauchery, mutiny, and waste of government property.” Eventually, the activities of the Hawaiian embassy upset the German government, prompting a decision to recall it to Honolulu in July 1887. In the meantime, a reform league had been established to put an end to the rampant mismanagement and excesses, supported by a volunteer military group called the “Honolulu Rifles.” The king managed to pass a bill for an opium license and a Loan Act through the legislature in 1886, resulting in one million dollars being borrowed in London. Influenced by him, the Hale Naua Society was formed in 1886 to promote idolatry and king-worship, and that same year, a “Board of Health” was created that revived the harmful practices of the kahunas or medicine men.

The king’s acceptance of two bribes—one of $75,000 and another of $80,000 for the assignment of an opium licence—precipitated the revolution of 1887. An immense mass meeting was held on the 30th of June, which sent a committee to the king with specific demands for radical reforms. Finding himself without support, he yielded without a struggle, dismissed his ministry and signed a constitution on the 7th of July 1887, revising that of 1864, and intended to put an end to personal government and to make the cabinet responsible only to the legislature; this was called the “bayonet constitution,” because it was so largely the result of the show of force made by the Honolulu Rifles. By its terms office-holders were made ineligible for seats in the legislature, and no member of the legislature could be appointed to any civil office under the government during the term for which he had been elected. The members of the Upper House, instead of being appointed by the king for life, were henceforth to be elected for terms of six years by electors possessing a moderate property qualification. The remainder of Kalakaua’s reign teemed with intrigues and conspiracies to restore autocratic rule. One of these came to a head on the 30th of July 1889, but this “Wilcox rebellion,” led by R. W. Wilcox, a half-breed, educated in Italy, and a friend of the king and of his sister, was promptly suppressed. Seven of the insurgents were killed and a large number wounded. For his health the king visited California in the United States cruiser “Charleston” in November 1890, and died on the 20th of January 1891 in San Francisco. On the 29th of January at noon his sister, the regent, took the oath to maintain the constitution of 1887, and was proclaimed queen, under the title of Liliuokalani.

The king took two bribes—$75,000 and $80,000 for an opium license—which triggered the revolution of 1887. A huge mass meeting took place on June 30th, sending a committee to the king with specific demands for major reforms. Realizing he had no support, he gave in without a fight, dismissed his ministry, and signed a new constitution on July 7, 1887, revising the one from 1864. This was meant to end personal rule and make the cabinet accountable only to the legislature; it was called the “bayonet constitution” because it was largely a result of the show of force by the Honolulu Rifles. According to its terms, office-holders were barred from holding seats in the legislature, and no legislature member could be appointed to any civil office during their elected term. Members of the Upper House would now be elected for six-year terms by voters who had a moderate property qualification, rather than being appointed by the king for life. The rest of Kalakaua’s rule was filled with plots and conspiracies to restore absolute power. One of these escalated on July 30, 1889, but this “Wilcox rebellion,” led by R. W. Wilcox, a mixed-race individual educated in Italy and a friend of the king and his sister, was quickly suppressed. Seven insurgents were killed and many others were wounded. For his health, the king traveled to California aboard the U.S. cruiser “Charleston” in November 1890 and died on January 20, 1891, in San Francisco. On January 29th at noon, his sister, the regent, took the oath to uphold the constitution of 1887 and was proclaimed queen under the name Liliuokalani.

The history of her reign shows that it was her constant purpose to restore autocratic government. The legislative session of 1892, during which four changes of ministry took place, was protracted to eight months chiefly by her determination to carry through the opium and lottery bills and to have a pliable cabinet. She had a new constitution drawn up, practically providing for an absolute monarchy, and disfranchising a large class of citizens who had voted since 1887; this constitution (drawn up, so the royal party declared, in reply to a petition signed by thousands of natives) she undertook to force on the country after proroguing the legislature on the 14th of January 1893, but her ministers shrank from the responsibility of so revolutionary an act, and with difficulty prevailed upon her to postpone the execution of her design. An uprising similar to that of 1887 declared the monarchy forfeited by its own act. A third party proposed a regency during the minority of the heir-apparent, Princess Kaiulani, but in her absence this scheme found few supporters. A Committee of Safety was appointed at a public meeting, which formed a provisional government and reorganized the volunteer military companies, which had been disbanded in 1890. Its leading spirits were the “Sons of Missionaries” (as E. L. Godkin styled them), who were accused of using their knowledge of local affairs and their inherited prestige among the natives for private ends—of founding a “Gospel Republic” which was actually a business enterprise. The provisional government called a mass meeting of citizens, which met on the afternoon of the 6th and ratified its action. The United States steamer “Boston,” which had unexpectedly arrived from Hilo on the 14th, landed a small force on the evening of the 16th, at the request of the United States minister, Mr J. L. Stevens, and a committee of residents, to protect the lives and property of American citizens in case of riot or incendiarism. On the 17th the Committee of Safety took possession of the government building, and issued a proclamation declaring a monarchy to be abrogated, and establishing a provisional government, to exist “until terms of union with the United States of America shall have been negotiated and agreed upon.” Meanwhile two companies of volunteer troops arrived and occupied the grounds. By the advice of her ministers, and to avoid bloodshed, the queen surrendered under protest, in view of the landing of United States troops, appealing to the government of the United States to reinstate her in authority. A treaty of annexation was negotiated with the United States during the next month, just before the close of President Benjamin Harrison’s administration, but it was withdrawn on the 9th of March 1893 by President Harrison’s successor, President Cleveland, who then despatched James H. Blount (1837-1903) of Macon, Georgia, as commissioner paramount, to investigate the situation in the Hawaiian Islands. On receiving Blount’s report to the effect that the revolution had been accomplished by the aid of the United States minister and by the landing of troops from the “Boston,” President Cleveland sent Albert Sydney Willis (1843-1897) of Kentucky to Honolulu with secret instructions as United States minister. Willis with much difficulty and delay obtained the queen’s promise to grant an amnesty, and made a formal demand on the provisional government for her reinstatement on the 19th of December 1893. On the 23rd President Sanford B. Dole sent a reply to Willis, declining to surrender the authority of the provisional government to the deposed queen. The United States Congress declared against any further intervention by adopting on the 31st of May 1894 the Turpie Resolution. On the 30th of May 1894 a convention was held to frame a constitution for the republic of Hawaii, which was proclaimed on the 4th of July following, with S. B. Dole as its first president. Toward the end of the same year a plot was formed to overthrow the republic and to restore the monarchy. A cargo of arms and ammunition from San Francisco was secretly landed at a point near Honolulu, where a company of native royalists were collected on the 6th of January 1895, intending to capture the government buildings by surprise that night, with the aid of their allies in the city. A premature encounter with a squad of police alarmed the town and broke up their plans. There were several other skirmishes during the following week, resulting in the capture of the leading conspirators, with most of their followers. The ex-queen, on whose premises arms and ammunition and a number of incriminating documents were found, was arrested and was imprisoned for nine months in the former palace. On the 24th of January 1895 she formally renounced all claim to the throne and took the oath of allegiance to the republic. The ex-queen and forty-eight others were granted conditional pardon on the 7th of September, and on the following New Year’s Day the remaining prisoners were set at liberty.

The history of her reign shows that her constant goal was to restore autocratic government. The legislative session of 1892, which saw four changes in ministry, dragged on for eight months mainly because she was determined to push through the opium and lottery bills and have a compliant cabinet. She had a new constitution created that essentially established an absolute monarchy and disenfranchised a large group of citizens who had voted since 1887; this constitution (which, according to the royal party, was drawn up in response to a petition signed by thousands of locals) she attempted to impose on the country after closing the legislature on January 14, 1893, but her ministers hesitated to take responsibility for such a drastic action and managed to convince her to delay her plans. A revolt similar to that of 1887 declared the monarchy forfeited due to its own actions. A third party suggested a regency during the minority of the heir apparent, Princess Kaiulani, but without her presence, this idea had little support. A Committee of Safety was established at a public meeting, creating a provisional government and reorganizing the volunteer military companies that had been disbanded in 1890. The key figures were the “Sons of Missionaries” (as E. L. Godkin referred to them), who were accused of leveraging their local knowledge and inherited prestige among the natives for personal gain—essentially creating a “Gospel Republic” that was actually a business venture. The provisional government called a mass meeting of citizens, which occurred in the afternoon of the 6th and confirmed its actions. The United States steamer “Boston,” which had unexpectedly arrived from Hilo on the 14th, landed a small contingent on the evening of the 16th at the request of the United States minister, Mr. J. L. Stevens, and a committee of residents, to safeguard the lives and property of American citizens in case of riots or arson. On the 17th, the Committee of Safety took command of the government building and issued a proclamation declaring the monarchy abrogated and establishing a provisional government, which would last “until terms of union with the United States of America have been negotiated and agreed upon.” Meanwhile, two companies of volunteer troops arrived and took control of the grounds. Following her ministers' advice and to avoid bloodshed, the queen surrendered under protest, considering the arrival of United States troops, appealing to the United States government to restore her authority. A treaty of annexation was negotiated with the United States the following month, just before the end of President Benjamin Harrison’s administration, but it was retracted on March 9, 1893, by President Harrison's successor, President Cleveland, who then sent James H. Blount (1837-1903) from Macon, Georgia, as a chief commissioner to assess the situation in the Hawaiian Islands. Upon receiving Blount’s report, which indicated that the revolution was supported by the United States minister and the landing of troops from the “Boston,” President Cleveland dispatched Albert Sydney Willis (1843-1897) from Kentucky to Honolulu with secret instructions as United States minister. Willis, after much difficulty and delay, secured the queen’s promise to grant an amnesty and formally demanded her reinstatement from the provisional government on December 19, 1893. On the 23rd, President Sanford B. Dole replied to Willis, refusing to surrender the authority of the provisional government to the deposed queen. The United States Congress declared against further intervention by passing the Turpie Resolution on May 31, 1894. On May 30, 1894, a convention was held to draft a constitution for the republic of Hawaii, which was proclaimed on July 4, with S. B. Dole as its first president. Towards the end of that year, a plot was devised to overthrow the republic and restore the monarchy. A shipment of arms and ammunition from San Francisco was secretly unloaded near Honolulu, where a group of native royalists gathered on January 6, 1895, intending to surprise the government buildings that night, with assistance from their allies in the city. An early encounter with a police squad alarmed the town and disrupted their plans. Several skirmishes occurred during the following week, leading to the capture of the main conspirators and most of their followers. The ex-queen, on whose property arms, ammunition, and several incriminating documents were discovered, was arrested and held for nine months in the former palace. On January 24, 1895, she formally renounced any claim to the throne and took an oath of allegiance to the republic. The ex-queen and forty-eight others received conditional pardons on September 7, and on the following New Year's Day, the remaining prisoners were released.

On the inauguration of President McKinley, in March 1897, negotiations with the United States were resumed, and on the 16th of June a new treaty of annexation was signed at Washington. As its ratification by the Senate had appeared to be uncertain, extreme measures were taken: the Newlands joint resolution, by which the cession was “accepted, ratified and confirmed,” was passed by the Senate by a vote of 42 to 21 and by the House of Representatives by a vote of 209 to 91, and was signed by the president on the 7th of July 1898. The formal transfer of sovereignty took place on the 12th of August 1898, when the flag of the United States (the same flag hauled down by order of Commissioner Blount) was raised over the Executive Building with impressive ceremonies.

On the inauguration of President McKinley in March 1897, negotiations with the United States were resumed, and on June 16th, a new annexation treaty was signed in Washington. Since ratification by the Senate seemed uncertain, extreme measures were taken: the Newlands joint resolution, which “accepted, ratified, and confirmed” the cession, was passed by the Senate with a vote of 42 to 21 and by the House of Representatives with a vote of 209 to 91, and was signed by the president on July 7, 1898. The formal transfer of sovereignty occurred on August 12, 1898, when the United States flag (the same flag that was lowered by order of Commissioner Blount) was raised over the Executive Building in a noteworthy ceremony.

The sovereigns of the monarchy, the president of the republic and the governors of the Territory up to 1910 were as follows: 93 Sovereigns: Kamehameha I., 1795-1819; Kamehameha II., 1819-1824; Kaahumanu (regent), 1824-1832; Kamehameha III., 1832-1854; Kamehameha IV., 1855-1863; Kamehameha V., 1863-1872; Lunalilo, 1873-1874; Kalakaua, 1874-1891; Liliuokalani, 1891-1893. President: Sanford B. Dole, 1893-1898. Governors: S. B. Dole, 1898-1904; George R. Carter, 1904-1907; W. F. Frear, 1907.

The rulers of the monarchy, the president of the republic, and the governors of the Territory up to 1910 were as follows: 93 Rulers: Kamehameha I, 1795-1819; Kamehameha II, 1819-1824; Kaahumanu (regent), 1824-1832; Kamehameha III, 1832-1854; Kamehameha IV, 1855-1863; Kamehameha V, 1863-1872; Lunalilo, 1873-1874; Kalakaua, 1874-1891; Liliuokalani, 1891-1893. President: Sanford B. Dole, 1893-1898. Governors: S. B. Dole, 1898-1904; George R. Carter, 1904-1907; W. F. Frear, 1907.

Authorities.—Consult the bibliography in Adolf Marcuse, Die hawaiischen Inseln (Berlin, 1894); A. P. C. Griffen, List of Books relating to Hawaii (Washington, 1898); C. E. Dutton, Hawaiian Volcanoes, in the fourth annual report of the United States Geological Survey (Washington, 1884); J. D. Dana, Characteristics of Volcanoes with Contribution of Facts and Principles from the Hawaiian Islands (New York, 1890); W. H. Pickering, Lunar and Hawaiian Physical Features compared (1906); C. H. Hitchcock, Hawaii and its Volcanoes (Honolulu, 1909); Augustin Kramer, Hawaii, Ostmikronesien und Samoa (Stuttgart, 1906); Sharp, Fauna (London, 1899); Walter Maxwell, Lavas and Soils of the Hawaiian Islands (Honolulu, 1898); W. Hillebrand, Flora of the Hawaiian Islands (London, 1888); G. P. Wilder, Fruits of the Hawaiian Islands (3 vols., Honolulu, 1907); H. W. Henshaw, Birds of the Hawaiian Islands (Washington, 1902); A. Fornander, Account of the Polynesian Race and the Ancient History of the Hawaiian People to the Times of Kamehameha I. (3 vols., London, 1878-1885); W. D. Alexander, A Brief History of the Hawaiian People (New York, 1899); C. H. Forbes-Lindsay, American Insular Possessions (Philadelphia, 1906); José de Olivares, Our Islands and their People (New York, 1899); J. A. Owen, Story of Hawaii (London, 1898); E. J. Carpenter, America in Hawaii (Boston, 1899); W. F. Blackman, The Making of Hawaii, a Study in Social Evolution (New York, 1899), with bibliography; T. G. Thrum, Hawaiian Almanac and Annual (Honolulu); Lucien Young, The Real Hawaii (New York, 1899), written by a lieutenant of the “Boston,” an ardent defender of Stevens; Liliuokalani, Hawaii’s Story (Boston, 1898); C. T. Rodgers, Education in the Hawaiian Islands (Honolulu, 1897); Henry E. Chambers, Constitutional History of Hawaii (Baltimore, 1896), in Johns Hopkins University Studies; W. Ellis, Tour Around Hawaii (London, 1829); J. J. Jarves, History of the Sandwich Islands (Honolulu, 1847); H. Bingham, A Residence of Twenty-one Years in the Sandwich Islands (Hartford, 1848); Isabella Bird, Six Months in the Sandwich Islands (New York, 1881); Adolf Bastian, Zur Kenntnis Hawaiis (Berlin, 1883); the annual Reports of the governor of Hawaii, of the Hawaii Agricultural Experiment Station, of the Hawaiian Sugar Planters’ Experiment Station, of the Board of Commissioners on Agriculture and Forestry, and of the Hawaii Promotion Committee; and the Papers of the Hawaiian Historical Society.

Authorities.—Check the bibliography in Adolf Marcuse, The Hawaiian Islands (Berlin, 1894); A. P. C. Griffen, List of Books Related to Hawaii (Washington, 1898); C. E. Dutton, Hawaiian Volcanoes, in the fourth annual report of the United States Geological Survey (Washington, 1884); J. D. Dana, Characteristics of Volcanoes with Contributions of Facts and Principles from the Hawaiian Islands (New York, 1890); W. H. Pickering, Lunar and Hawaiian Physical Features Compared (1906); C. H. Hitchcock, Hawaii and Its Volcanoes (Honolulu, 1909); Augustin Kramer, Hawaii, Eastern Micro-Nesia and Samoa (Stuttgart, 1906); Sharp, Fauna (London, 1899); Walter Maxwell, Lavas and Soils of the Hawaiian Islands (Honolulu, 1898); W. Hillebrand, Flora of the Hawaiian Islands (London, 1888); G. P. Wilder, Fruits of the Hawaiian Islands (3 vols., Honolulu, 1907); H. W. Henshaw, Birds of the Hawaiian Islands (Washington, 1902); A. Fornander, Account of the Polynesian Race and the Ancient History of the Hawaiian People to the Times of Kamehameha I. (3 vols., London, 1878-1885); W. D. Alexander, A Brief History of the Hawaiian People (New York, 1899); C. H. Forbes-Lindsay, American Insular Possessions (Philadelphia, 1906); José de Olivares, Our Islands and Their People (New York, 1899); J. A. Owen, Story of Hawaii (London, 1898); E. J. Carpenter, America in Hawaii (Boston, 1899); W. F. Blackman, The Making of Hawaii, a Study in Social Evolution (New York, 1899), with bibliography; T. G. Thrum, Hawaiian Almanac and Annual (Honolulu); Lucien Young, The Real Hawaii (New York, 1899), written by a lieutenant of the “Boston,” a passionate supporter of Stevens; Liliuokalani, Hawaii’s Story (Boston, 1898); C. T. Rodgers, Education in the Hawaiian Islands (Honolulu, 1897); Henry E. Chambers, Constitutional History of Hawaii (Baltimore, 1896), in Johns Hopkins University Studies; W. Ellis, Tour Around Hawaii (London, 1829); J. J. Jarves, History of the Sandwich Islands (Honolulu, 1847); H. Bingham, A Residence of Twenty-One Years in the Sandwich Islands (Hartford, 1848); Isabella Bird, Six Months in the Sandwich Islands (New York, 1881); Adolf Bastian, Zur Kenntnis Hawaiis (Berlin, 1883); the annual Reports of the governor of Hawaii, of the Hawaii Agricultural Experiment Station, of the Hawaiian Sugar Planters’ Experiment Station, of the Board of Commissioners on Agriculture and Forestry, and of the Hawaii Promotion Committee; and the Papers of the Hawaiian Historical Society.


1 Among the minor phenomena of Hawaiian volcanoes are the delicate glassy fibres called Pele’s hair by the Hawaiians, which are spun by the wind from the rising and falling drops of liquid lava, and blown over the edge or into the crevices of the crater. Pele in idolatrous times was the dreaded goddess of Kilauea.

1 One of the lesser-known features of Hawaiian volcanoes is the delicate glassy strands known as Pele’s hair, which the Hawaiians say are formed by the wind from the rising and falling drops of liquid lava, and swept over the edge or into the cracks of the crater. Pele was the feared goddess of Kilauea in ancient times.

2 The Chinese name for the Hawaiian Islands means “Sandalwood Islands.”

2 The Chinese name for the Hawaiian Islands translates to “Sandalwood Islands.”

3 Partly described by T. S. Streets, Contributions to the Natural History of the Hawaiian and Fanning Islands, Bulletin 7 of U.S. National Museum (Washington, 1877). Several new species are described in U.S. Bureau of Fisheries Document, No. 623 (Washington, 1907).

3 Partly detailed by T. S. Streets, Contributions to the Natural History of the Hawaiian and Fanning Islands, Bulletin 7 of the U.S. National Museum (Washington, 1877). Several new species are detailed in U.S. Bureau of Fisheries Document No. 623 (Washington, 1907).

4 So Lesson called the family from the native name in 1831; Cabanis (1847) suggested Acrulocercus.

4 So Lesson named the family from the original name in 1831; Cabanis (1847) proposed Acrulocercus.

5 The entomological department of the Hawaii Experiment Station undertakes “mosquito control,” and in 1905-1906 imported top-minnows (Poeciliidae) to destroy mosquito larvae.

5 The entomology department of the Hawaii Experiment Station focuses on "mosquito control," and in 1905-1906, it imported top-minnows (Poeciliidae) to eliminate mosquito larvae.

6 These and other title-holders received corresponding rights to the use of irrigation ditches, and to fish in certain sea areas adjacent to their holdings.

6 These and other title holders received similar rights to use irrigation ditches and to fish in specific sea areas near their properties.

7 Large numbers of Japanese immigrants have used the Hawaiian Islands merely as a means of gaining admission at the mainland ports of the United States. For, as the Japanese government would issue only a limited number of passports to the mainland but would quite readily grant passports to Honolulu, the latter were accepted, and after a short stay on some one of the islands the immigrants would depart on a “coastwise” voyage to some mainland port. The increasing numbers arriving by this means, however, provoked serious hostility in the Pacific coast states, especially in San Francisco, and to remedy the difficulty Congress inserted a clause in the general immigration act of the 20th of February 1907 which provides that whenever the president is satisfied that passports issued by any foreign government to any other country than the United States, or to any of its insular possessions, or to the Canal Zone, “are being used for the purpose of enabling the holders to come to the continental territory of the United States to the detriment of labour conditions therein,” he may refuse to admit them. This provision has been successful in reducing the number of Japanese coming to the mainland from Hawaii.

7 A large number of Japanese immigrants have used the Hawaiian Islands simply as a way to get into mainland ports in the United States. The Japanese government issued a limited number of passports to the mainland, but gladly provided passports to Honolulu, so those were accepted. After a brief stay on one of the islands, the immigrants would leave on a “coastwise” journey to a mainland port. However, the growing numbers arriving this way sparked serious resentment on the Pacific coast, particularly in San Francisco. To address this issue, Congress added a clause to the general immigration act on February 20, 1907, stating that whenever the president believes that passports issued by any foreign government for any country other than the United States, or its insular territories, or the Canal Zone, “are being used to allow the holders to enter the continental United States to the detriment of labor conditions there,” he may deny their entry. This provision has been effective in decreasing the number of Japanese coming to the mainland from Hawaii.

8 These are: the county of Hawaii, consisting of the island of the same name; the county of Maui, including the islands of Maui, Lanai and Kahoolawe, and the greater part of Molokai; the county of Kalawao, being the leper settlement on Molokai; the city and county of Honolulu (created from the former county of Oahu by an act of 1907, which came into effect in 1909), consisting of the island of Oahu and various small islands, of which the only ones of any importance are the Midway Islands, 1232 m. from Honolulu, a Pacific cable relay station and a post of the U.S. navy marines; and the county of Kauai, including Kauai and Niihau islands.

8 These are: the county of Hawaii, which includes the island of the same name; the county of Maui, covering the islands of Maui, Lanai, and Kahoolawe, along with most of Molokai; the county of Kalawao, which is the leper settlement on Molokai; the city and county of Honolulu (established from the former county of Oahu by an act of 1907 that took effect in 1909), which comprises the island of Oahu and several small islands, with the Midway Islands being the most significant, located 1232 miles from Honolulu, serving as a Pacific cable relay station and a base for the U.S. navy marines; and the county of Kauai, which includes the islands of Kauai and Niihau.

9 Their discovery in the 16th century (in 1542 or 1555 by Juan Gaetan, or in 1528 when two of the vessels of Alvaro de Saavedra were shipwrecked here and the captain of one, with his sister, survived and intermarried with the natives) seems probable, because there are traces of Spanish customs in the islands; and they are marked in their correct latitude on an English chart of 1687, which is apparently based on Spanish maps; a later Spanish chart (1743) gives a group of islands 10° E. of the true position of the Hawaiian Islands.

9 Their discovery in the 16th century (either in 1542 or 1555 by Juan Gaetan, or in 1528 when two ships from Alvaro de Saavedra were wrecked here, and the captain of one, along with his sister, survived and intermarried with the locals) seems likely, as there are signs of Spanish customs in the islands; they are correctly placed on an English map from 1687, which is apparently based on Spanish charts; a later Spanish map from 1743 shows a group of islands 10° east of the actual location of the Hawaiian Islands.

10 The first horses were left by Captain R. J. Cleveland in 1803.

10 The first horses were left by Captain R. J. Cleveland in 1803.

11 The first Roman Catholic priests came in 1827 and were banished in 1831, but returned in 1837. An edict of toleration in 1839 shortly preceded the visit of the “Artemise.”

11 The first Roman Catholic priests arrived in 1827 and were expelled in 1831, but they came back in 1837. An edict of toleration in 1839 soon followed the visit of the “Artemise.”


HAWARDEN (pronounced Harden, Welsh Penarlâg), a market-town of Flintshire, North Wales, 6 m. W. of Chester, on a height commanding an extensive prospect, connected by a branch with the London & North-Western railway. Pop. (1901), 5372. It lies in a coal district, with clay beds near. Coarse earthenware, draining tiles and fire-clay bricks are the chief manufactures. The Maudes take the title of viscount from the town. Hawarden castle—built in 1752, added to and altered in the Gothic style in 1814—stands in a fine wooded park near the old castle of the same name, which William the Conqueror gave to his nephew, Hugh Lupus. It was taken in 1282 by Dafydd, brother of Llewelyn, prince of Wales, destroyed by the Parliamentarians in the Civil War, and came into the possession of Sergeant Glynne, lord chief justice of England under Cromwell. The last baronet, Sir Stephen R. Glynne, dying in 1874, Castell Penarlâg passed to his brother-in-law, William Ewart Gladstone. St Deiniol church, early English, was restored in 1857 and 1878. There are also a grammar school (1606), a Gladstone golden-wedding fountain (1889), and St Deiniol’s Hostel (with accommodation for students and an Anglican clerical warden); west of the church, on Truman’s hill, is an old British camp.

HAWARDEN (pronounced Harden, Welsh Penarlâg), is a market town in Flintshire, North Wales, located 6 miles west of Chester, on a hill that offers a wide view, connected by a branch line to the London & North-Western railway. The population in 1901 was 5,372. It is situated in a coal region, with clay deposits nearby. The main local products include coarse pottery, drainage tiles, and fire-clay bricks. The Maudes hold the title of viscount originating from this town. Hawarden Castle—built in 1752 and remodeled in the Gothic style in 1814—sits in a lovely wooded park close to the older castle of the same name, which William the Conqueror granted to his nephew, Hugh Lupus. It was captured in 1282 by Dafydd, the brother of Llewelyn, the prince of Wales, destroyed by Parliamentarians during the Civil War, and later came into the possession of Sergeant Glynne, who served as lord chief justice of England under Cromwell. The last baronet, Sir Stephen R. Glynne, passed away in 1874, and Castell Penarlâg then went to his brother-in-law, William Ewart Gladstone. St Deiniol church, built in early English style, was restored in 1857 and 1878. There is also a grammar school (established in 1606), a fountain to commemorate Gladstone’s golden wedding (1889), and St Deiniol’s Hostel (which accommodates students and has an Anglican clerical warden); to the west of the church, on Truman’s Hill, lies an ancient British camp.


HAWAWIR (Hauhauin), an African tribe of Semitic origin, dwelling in the Bayuda desert, Anglo-Egyptian Sudan. They are found along the road from Debba to Khartum as far as Bir Ganir, and from Ambigol to Wadi Bishāra. They have adopted none of the negro customs, such as gashing the cheeks or elaborate hairdressing. They own large herds of oxen, sheep and camels.

HAWAWIR (Hauhauin), an African tribe of Semitic origin, lives in the Bayuda desert of Anglo-Egyptian Sudan. They are found along the road from Debba to Khartum as far as Bir Ganir, and from Ambigol to Wadi Bishāra. They have not adopted any of the local customs, like gashing their cheeks or intricate hairdressing. They own large herds of oxen, sheep, and camels.


HAWEIS, HUGH REGINALD (1838-1901), English preacher and writer, was born at Egham, Surrey, on the 3rd of April 1838. On leaving Trinity College, Cambridge, he travelled in Italy and served under Garibaldi in 1860. On his return to England he was ordained and held various curacies in London, becoming in 1866 incumbent of St James’s, Marylebone. His unconventional methods of conducting the service, combined with his dwarfish figure and lively manner, soon attracted crowded congregations. He married Miss M. E. Joy in 1866, and both he and Mrs Haweis (d. 1898) contributed largely to periodical literature and travelled a good deal abroad. Haweis was Lowell lecturer at Boston, U.S.A., in 1885, and represented the Anglican Church at the Chicago Parliament of Religions in 1893. He was much interested in music, and wrote books on violins and church bells, besides contributing an article to the 9th edition of the Encyclopaedia Britannica on bell-ringing. His best-known book was Music and Morals (3rd ed., 1873); and for a time he was editor of Cassell’s Magazine. He also wrote five volumes on Christ and Christianity (a popular church history, 1886-1887). Other writings include Travel and Talk (1896), and similar chatty and entertaining books. He died on the 29th of January 1901.

HAWEIS, HUGH REGINALD (1838-1901), an English preacher and writer, was born in Egham, Surrey, on April 3, 1838. After leaving Trinity College, Cambridge, he traveled to Italy and served under Garibaldi in 1860. Upon returning to England, he was ordained and held various curacies in London, eventually becoming the vicar of St James’s, Marylebone, in 1866. His unconventional approach to services, combined with his short stature and lively personality, quickly drew large crowds. He married Miss M. E. Joy in 1866, and both he and Mrs. Haweis (d. 1898) were significant contributors to periodical literature and traveled extensively abroad. Haweis was the Lowell lecturer in Boston, U.S.A., in 1885, and represented the Anglican Church at the Chicago Parliament of Religions in 1893. He had a strong interest in music and wrote books on violins and church bells, in addition to contributing an article on bell-ringing to the 9th edition of the Encyclopaedia Britannica. His most famous book was Music and Morals (3rd ed., 1873); for a time, he was the editor of Cassell’s Magazine. He also wrote five volumes on Christ and Christianity (a popular church history, 1886-1887). Other works include Travel and Talk (1896) and other similar entertaining books. He passed away on January 29, 1901.


HAWES, STEPHEN (fl. 1502-1521), English poet, was probably a native of Suffolk, and, if his own statement of his age may be trusted, was born about 1474. He was educated at Oxford, and travelled in England, Scotland and France. On his return his various accomplishments, especially his “most excellent vein” in poetry, procured him a place at court. He was groom of the chamber to Henry VII. as early as 1502. He could repeat by heart the works of most of the English poets, especially the poems of John Lydgate, whom he called his master. He was still living in 1521, when it is stated in Henry VIII.’s household accounts that £6. 13s. 4d. was paid “to Mr Hawes for his play,” and he died before 1530, when Thomas Field, in his “Conversation between a Lover and a Jay,” wrote “Yong Steven Hawse, whose soule God pardon, Treated of love so clerkly and well.” His capital work is The Passetyme of Pleasure, or the History of Graunde Amour and la Bel Pucel, conteining the knowledge of the Seven Sciences and the Course of Man’s Life in this Worlde, printed by Wynkyn de Worde, 1509, but finished three years earlier. It was also printed with slightly varying titles by the same printer in 1517, by J. Wayland in 1554, by Richard Tottel and by John Waley in 1555. Tottel’s edition was edited by T. Wright and reprinted by the Percy Society in 1845. The poem is a long allegory in seven-lined stanzas of man’s life in this world. It is divided into sections after the manner of the Morte Arthur and borrows the machinery of romance. Its main motive is the education of the knight, Graunde Amour, based, according to Mr W. J. Courthope (Hist. of Eng. Poetry, vol. i. 382), on the Marriage of Mercury and Philology, by Martianus Capella, and the details of the description prove Hawes to have been well acquainted with medieval systems of philosophy. At the suggestion of Fame, and accompanied by her two greyhounds, Grace and Governance, Graunde Amour starts out in quest of La Bel Pucel. He first visits the Tower of Doctrine or Science where he acquaints himself with the arts of grammar, logic, rhetoric and arithmetic. After a long disputation with the lady in the Tower of Music he returns to his studies, and after sojourns at the Tower of Geometry, the Tower of Doctrine, the Castle of Chivalry, &c., he arrives at the Castle of La Bel Pucel, where he is met by Peace, Mercy, Justice, Reason and Memory. His happy marriage does not end the story, which goes on to tell of the oncoming of Age, with the concomitant evils of Avarice and Cunning. The admonition of Death brings Contrition and Conscience, and it is only when Remembraunce has delivered an epitaph chiefly dealing with the Seven Deadly Sins, and Fame has enrolled Graunde Amour’s name with the knights of antiquity, that we are allowed to part with the hero. This long imaginative poem was widely read and esteemed, and certainly exercised an influence on the genius of Spenser.

HAWES, STEPHEN (fl. 1502-1521), English poet, was probably from Suffolk, and if we trust his claim about his age, he was born around 1474. He was educated at Oxford and traveled throughout England, Scotland, and France. Upon his return, his various skills, especially his impressive talent in poetry, earned him a position at court. He was a groom of the chamber to Henry VII. as early as 1502. He could recite most of the works of English poets from memory, especially those of John Lydgate, whom he regarded as his master. He was still alive in 1521, when Henry VIII.’s household accounts noted that £6. 13s. 4d. was paid “to Mr Hawes for his play,” and he died before 1530, when Thomas Field wrote in his “Conversation between a Lover and a Jay,” “Young Steven Hawse, whose soul God pardon, Treated of love so scholarly and well.” His major work is The Passetyme of Pleasure, or the History of Graunde Amour and la Bel Pucel, containing the knowledge of the Seven Sciences and the Course of Man’s Life in this Worlde, printed by Wynkyn de Worde in 1509, though it was completed three years earlier. It was also printed with slightly different titles by the same printer in 1517, by J. Wayland in 1554, by Richard Tottel, and by John Waley in 1555. Tottel’s edition was edited by T. Wright and reprinted by the Percy Society in 1845. The poem is a long allegory in seven-lined stanzas about man’s life in this world. It is divided into sections similar to the Morte Arthur and uses the framework of romance. Its main theme is the education of the knight, Graunde Amour, which, according to Mr. W. J. Courthope (Hist. of Eng. Poetry, vol. i. 382), is based on the Marriage of Mercury and Philology by Martianus Capella, and the details show that Hawes was well-versed in medieval philosophical systems. At the urging of Fame, and accompanied by her two greyhounds, Grace and Governance, Graunde Amour sets off in search of La Bel Pucel. He first goes to the Tower of Doctrine or Science, where he learns about grammar, logic, rhetoric, and arithmetic. After a long discussion with the lady in the Tower of Music, he returns to his studies, and after visits to the Tower of Geometry, the Tower of Doctrine, the Castle of Chivalry, etc., he reaches the Castle of La Bel Pucel, where he is welcomed by Peace, Mercy, Justice, Reason, and Memory. His joyous marriage doesn’t conclude the tale, which continues to discuss the arrival of Age, accompanied by the dangers of Avarice and Cunning. The warning from Death brings Contrition and Conscience, and it is only after Remembraunce has given an epitaph focused on the Seven Deadly Sins, and Fame has recorded Graunde Amour's name with the knights of the past, that we can finally say goodbye to the hero. This extensive imaginative poem was widely read and appreciated and certainly influenced the genius of Spenser.

The remaining works of Hawes are all of them bibliographical rarities. The Conversyon of Swerers (1509) and A Joyfull Medytacyon to all Englonde, a coronation poem (1509), was edited by David Laing for the Abbotsford Club (Edinburgh, 1865). A 94 Compendyous Story ... called the Example of Vertu (pr. 1512) and the Comfort of Lovers (not dated) complete the list of his extant work.

The remaining works of Hawes are all rare finds. The Conversyon of Swerers (1509) and A Joyfull Medytacyon to all Englonde, a coronation poem (1509), were edited by David Laing for the Abbotsford Club (Edinburgh, 1865). A 94 Compendyous Story ... called the Example of Vertu (printed 1512) and Comfort of Lovers (not dated) complete the list of his surviving works.

See also G. Saintsbury, The Flourishing of Romance and the Rise of Allegory (Edin. and Lond., 1897); the same writer’s Hist. of English Prosody (vol. i. 1906); and an article by W. Murison in the Cambridge History of English Literature (vol. ii. 1908).

See also G. Saintsbury, The Flourishing of Romance and the Rise of Allegory (Edin. and Lond., 1897); the same writer’s Hist. of English Prosody (vol. i. 1906); and an article by W. Murison in the Cambridge History of English Literature (vol. ii. 1908).


HAWES, WILLIAM (1785-1846), English musician, was born in London in 1785, and was for eight years (1793-1801) a chorister of the Chapel Royal, where he studied music chiefly under Dr Ayrton. He subsequently held various musical posts, being in 1817 appointed master of the children of the Chapel Royal. He also carried on the business of a music publisher, and was for many years musical director of the Lyceum theatre, then devoted to English opera. In the last-named capacity (July 23rd, 1824), he introduced Weber’s Der Freischütz for the first time in England, at first slightly curtailed, but soon afterwards in its entirety. Winter’s Interrupted Sacrifice, Mozart’s Cosi fan tutte, Marschner’s Vampyre and other important works were also brought out under his auspices. Hawes also wrote or compiled the music for numerous pieces. Better were his glees and madrigals, of which he published several collections. He also superintended a new edition of the celebrated Triumph of Oriana. He died on the 18th of February 1846.

HAWES, WILLIAM (1785-1846), English musician, was born in London in 1785. He was a chorister at the Chapel Royal for eight years (1793-1801), where he studied music mainly under Dr. Ayrton. He later held various musical positions, and in 1817, he was appointed master of the children of the Chapel Royal. He also worked as a music publisher and served for many years as the musical director of the Lyceum theatre, which focused on English opera. In that role (July 23rd, 1824), he introduced Weber’s Der Freischütz for the first time in England, initially in a slightly shortened version but soon after in its entirety. Other significant works, such as Winter’s Interrupted Sacrifice, Mozart’s Cosi fan tutte, and Marschner’s Vampyre, were also premiered under his direction. Hawes also wrote or compiled the music for many pieces, with his glee and madrigal collections being particularly well-regarded. He also oversaw a new edition of the famous Triumph of Oriana. He passed away on February 18, 1846.


HAWFINCH, a bird so called from the belief that the fruit of the hawthorn (Crataegus Oxyacantha) forms its chief food, the Loxia coccothraustes of Linnaeus, and the Coccothraustes vulgaris of modern ornithologists, one of the largest of the finch family (Fringillidae), and found over nearly the whole of Europe, in Africa north of the Atlas and in Asia from Palestine to Japan. It was formerly thought to be only an autumnal or winter-visitor to Britain, but later experience has proved that, though there may very likely be an immigration in the fall of the year, it breeds in nearly all the English counties to Yorkshire, and abundantly in those nearest to London. In coloration it bears some resemblance to a chaffinch, but its much larger size and enormous beak make it easily recognizable, while on closer inspection the singular bull-hook form of some of its wing-feathers will be found to be very remarkable. Though not uncommonly frequenting gardens and orchards, in which as well as in woods it builds its nest, it is exceedingly shy in its habits, so as seldom to afford opportunities for observation.

HAWFINCH, is a bird named for the belief that hawthorn berries (Crataegus Oxyacantha) are its main food. Known scientifically as Loxia coccothraustes by Linnaeus and Coccothraustes vulgaris by modern bird watchers, it is one of the largest members of the finch family (Fringillidae) and can be found throughout much of Europe, in North Africa north of the Atlas Mountains, and across Asia from Palestine to Japan. It was once thought to only visit Britain during autumn or winter, but later observations have shown that while there may indeed be an influx in the fall, it breeds in nearly all English counties up to Yorkshire and is quite common in those closest to London. Its coloring is somewhat similar to that of a chaffinch, but its much larger size and huge beak make it easy to identify. Upon closer examination, the unique bull-hook shape of some of its wing feathers is also quite noticeable. While it frequently visits gardens and orchards, where it also builds its nests, it is very shy by nature, making it rare to spot.

(A. N.)

HAWICK, a municipal and police burgh of Roxburghshire, Scotland. Pop. (1891), 19,204; (1901), 17,303. It is situated at the confluence of the Slitrig (which flows through the town) with the Teviot, 10 m. S.W. of Jedburgh by road and 52¾ m. S.E. of Edinburgh by the North British railway. The name has been derived from the O. Eng. heaih-wic, “the village on the flat meadow,” or haga-wic, “the fenced-in dwelling,” the Gadeni being supposed to have had a settlement at this spot. Hawick is a substantial and flourishing town, the prosperity of which dates from the beginning of the 19th century, its enterprise having won for it the designation of “The Glasgow of the Borders.” The municipal buildings, which contain the free library and reading-room, stand on the site of the old town hall. The Buccleuch memorial hall, commemorating the 5th duke of Buccleuch, contains the Science and Art Institute and a museum rich in exhibits illustrating Border history. The Academy furnishes both secondary and technical education. The only church of historical interest is that of St Mary’s, the third of the name, built in 1763. The first church, believed to have been founded by St Cuthbert (d. 687), was succeeded by one dedicated in 1214, which was the scene of the seizure of Sir Alexander Ramsay of Dalhousie in 1342 by Sir William Douglas. The modern Episcopal church of St Cuthbert was designed by Sir Gilbert Scott. The Moat or Moot hill at the south end of the town—an earthen mound 30 ft. high and 300 ft. in circumference—is conjectured to have been the place where formerly the court of the manor met; though some authorities think it was a primitive form of fortification. The Baron’s Tower, founded in 1155 by the Lovels, lords of Branxholm and Hawick, and afterwards the residence of the Douglases of Drumlanrig, is said to have been the only building that was not burned down during the raid of Thomas Radcliffe, 3rd earl of Sussex, in April 1570. At a later date it was the abode of Anne, duchess of Buccleuch and Monmouth, after the execution of her husband, James, duke of Monmouth in 1585, and finally became the Tower Hotel. Bridges across the Teviot connect Hawick with the suburb of Wilton, in which a public park has been laid out, and St Leonard’s Park and race-course are situated on the Common, 2 m. S.W. The town is governed by a provost, bailies and council, and unites with Selkirk and Galashiels (together known as the Border burghs) to send a member to parliament. The leading industries are the manufacture of hosiery, established in 1771, and woollens, dating from 1830, including blankets, shepherd’s plaiding and tweeds. There are, besides, tanneries, dye works, oil-works, saw-mills, iron-founding and engineering works, quarries and nursery gardens. The markets for live stock and grain are also important.

HAWICK, a town and police burgh in Roxburghshire, Scotland. Population (1891), 19,204; (1901), 17,303. It is located at the point where the Slitrig River (which flows through the town) meets the Teviot, 10 miles southwest of Jedburgh by road and 52¾ miles southeast of Edinburgh via the North British railway. The name comes from the Old English heaih-wic, meaning “the village on the flat meadow,” or haga-wic, meaning “the fenced-in dwelling,” with the Gadeni believed to have settled in this area. Hawick is a thriving town, whose prosperity began in the early 19th century, earning it the nickname “The Glasgow of the Borders.” The municipal buildings, which house the free library and reading room, are located on the site of the old town hall. The Buccleuch Memorial Hall, honoring the 5th Duke of Buccleuch, houses the Science and Art Institute as well as a museum full of exhibits showcasing Border history. The Academy provides both secondary and vocational education. The only historically significant church is St Mary’s, the third of its name, built in 1763. The first church, thought to have been founded by St Cuthbert (d. 687), was followed by another dedicated in 1214, where Sir Alexander Ramsay of Dalhousie was captured by Sir William Douglas in 1342. The modern Episcopal Church of St Cuthbert was designed by Sir Gilbert Scott. The Moat or Moot Hill at the southern end of the town—an earthen mound 30 ft. high and 300 ft. in circumference—is believed to have once been where the manor court met, although some experts consider it to be an early form of fortification. The Baron’s Tower, established in 1155 by the Lovels, lords of Branxholm and Hawick, and later the home of the Douglases of Drumlanrig, is noted to be the only structure that survived the raid led by Thomas Radcliffe, 3rd Earl of Sussex, in April 1570. Later, it became the residence of Anne, Duchess of Buccleuch and Monmouth, after her husband, James, Duke of Monmouth, was executed in 1585, and eventually turned into the Tower Hotel. Bridges across the Teviot connect Hawick with the suburb of Wilton, which has a public park, and St Leonard’s Park and racecourse are located on the Common, 2 miles southwest. The town is governed by a provost, bailies, and council, and together with Selkirk and Galashiels (known as the Border burghs), sends a representative to parliament. The main industries are the production of hosiery, which started in 1771, and woolens, beginning in 1830, including blankets, shepherd’s plaid, and tweeds. Additionally, there are tanneries, dye works, oil works, sawmills, ironworks, engineering facilities, quarries, and nursery gardens. The markets for livestock and grain are also significant.

In 1537 Hawick received from Sir James Douglas of Drumlanrig a charter which was confirmed by the infant Queen Mary in 1545, and remained in force until 1861, when the corporation was reconstituted by act of parliament. Owing to its situation Hawick was often imperilled by Border warfare and marauding freebooters. Sir Robert Umfraville (d. 1436), governor of Berwick, burned it about 1417, and in 1562 the regent Moray had to suppress the lawless with a strong hand. Neither of the Jacobite risings aroused enthusiasm. In 1715 the discontented Highlanders mutinied on the Common, 500 of them abandoning their cause, and in 1745 Prince Charles Edward’s cavalry passed southward through the town. In 1514, the year after the battle of Flodden, in which the burghers had suffered severely, a number of young men surprised an English force at Hornshole, a spot on the Teviot 2 m. below the town, routed them and bore away their flag. This event is celebrated every June in the ceremony of “Riding the Common”—in which a facsimile of the captured pennon is carried in procession to the accompaniment of a chorus “Teribus, ye Teri Odin,” supposed to be an invocation to Thor and Odin—a survival of Northumbrian paganism. Two of the most eminent natives of the burgh were Dr Thomas Somerville (1741-1830), the historian, and James Wilson (1805-1860), founder of the Economist newspaper and the first financial member of the council for India.

In 1537, Hawick received a charter from Sir James Douglas of Drumlanrig that was confirmed by the infant Queen Mary in 1545 and remained in effect until 1861, when the corporation was restructured by an act of parliament. Because of its location, Hawick frequently faced threats from Border warfare and roaming bandits. Sir Robert Umfraville (d. 1436), the governor of Berwick, burned it around 1417, and in 1562, the regent Moray had to take strong measures against lawlessness. Neither of the Jacobite uprisings sparked much excitement. In 1715, discontented Highlanders revolted on the Common, with 500 of them abandoning their cause, and in 1745, Prince Charles Edward’s cavalry passed through the town on their way south. In 1514, the year after the Battle of Flodden, where the townspeople had suffered greatly, a group of young men ambushed an English force at Hornshole, a location on the Teviot 2 miles below the town, defeated them, and took their flag. This event is celebrated every June in the ceremony known as “Riding the Common,” where a replica of the captured pennon is carried in a procession accompanied by a chorus singing “Teribus, ye Teri Odin,” which is believed to be an invocation to Thor and Odin—a remnant of Northumbrian paganism. Two of the most notable figures from the town were Dr. Thomas Somerville (1741-1830), the historian, and James Wilson (1805-1860), the founder of the Economist newspaper and the first financial member of the council for India.

Minto House, 5 m. N.E., is the seat of the earl of Minto. Denholm, about midway between Hawick and Jedburgh, was the birthplace of John Leyden the poet. The cottage in which Leyden was born is now the property of the Edinburgh Border Counties Association, and a monument to his memory has been erected in the centre of Denholm green. Cavers, nearer Hawick, was once the home of a branch of the Douglases, and it is said that in Cavers House are still preserved the pennon that was borne before the Douglas at the battle of Otterburn (Chevy Chase), and the gauntlets that were then taken from the Percy (1388). Two m. S.W. of Hawick is the massive peel of Goldielands—the “watch-tower of Branxholm,” a well-preserved typical Border stronghold. One mile beyond it, occupying a commanding site on the left bank of the Teviot, stands Branxholm Castle, the Branksome Hall of The Lay of the Last Minstrel, once owned by the Lovels, but since the middle of the 15th century the property of the Scotts of Buccleuch, and up to 1756 the chief seat of the duke. It suffered repeatedly in English invasions and was destroyed in 1570. It was rebuilt next year, the peel, finished five years later, forming part of the modern mansion. About 3 m. W. of Hawick, finely situated on high ground above Harden Burn, a left-hand affluent of Borthwick Water, is Harden, the home of Walter Scott (1550-1629), an ancestor of the novelist.

Minto House, 5 miles northeast, is the home of the Earl of Minto. Denholm, located about halfway between Hawick and Jedburgh, is where the poet John Leyden was born. The cottage where Leyden was born now belongs to the Edinburgh Border Counties Association, and a memorial to him has been placed in the center of Denholm green. Cavers, closer to Hawick, was once the residence of a branch of the Douglases, and it’s said that Cavers House still has the pennon carried before the Douglas at the battle of Otterburn (Chevy Chase), along with the gauntlets taken from the Percy in 1388. Two miles southwest of Hawick is the impressive peel of Goldielands—the “watch-tower of Branxholm,” a well-preserved typical Border stronghold. One mile beyond that, located on a commanding site on the left bank of the Teviot, is Branxholm Castle, the Branksome Hall of The Lay of the Last Minstrel, which was once owned by the Lovels but has been the property of the Scotts of Buccleuch since the mid-15th century, serving as the main residence of the duke until 1756. It was damaged multiple times during English invasions and was destroyed in 1570. The castle was rebuilt the following year, with the peel being completed five years later as part of the modern mansion. About 3 miles west of Hawick, beautifully located on high ground overlooking Harden Burn, a left-hand tributary of Borthwick Water, is Harden, the ancestral home of Walter Scott (1550-1629), who is an ancestor of the novelist.


HAWK (O. Eng. hafoc or heafoc, a common Teutonic word, cf. Dutch havik, Ger. Habicht; the root is hab-, haf-, to hold, cf. Lat. accipiter, from capere), a word of somewhat indefinite meaning, being often used to signify all diurnal birds-of-prey which are neither vultures nor eagles, and again more exclusively for those of the remainder which are not buzzards, falcons, harriers or kites. Even with this restriction it is comprehensive enough, and will include more than a hundred species, which have been arrayed in genera varying in number from a dozen to above a score, according to the fancy of the systematizer. Speaking generally, hawks may be characterized by possessing comparatively short wings and long legs, a bill which begins to decurve directly from the cere (or soft bare skin that covers its base), and has the cutting edges of its maxilla (or upper mandible) 95 sinuated1 but never notched. To these may be added as characters, structurally perhaps of less value, but in other respects quite as important, that the sexes differ very greatly in size, that in most species the irides are yellow, deepening with age into orange or even red, and that the immature plumage is almost invariably more or less striped or mottled with heart-shaped spots beneath, while that of the adults is generally much barred, though the old males have in many instances the breast and belly quite free from markings. Nearly all are of small or moderate size—the largest among them being the gos-hawk (q.v.) and its immediate allies, and the male of the smallest, Accipiter tinus, is not bigger than a song-thrush. They are all birds of great boldness in attacking a quarry, but if foiled in the first attempts they are apt to leave the pursuit. Thoroughly arboreal in their habits, they seek their prey, chiefly consisting of birds (though reptiles and small mammals are also taken), among trees or bushes, patiently waiting for a victim to shew itself, and gliding upon it when it appears to be unwary with a rapid swoop, clutching it in their talons, and bearing it away to eat it in some convenient spot.

HAWK (Old English hafoc or heafoc, a common Teutonic term, cf. Dutch havik, Ger. Habicht; the root is hab-, haf-, meaning to hold, cf. Latin accipiter, from capere), a word with somewhat vague meaning, often used to refer to all daytime birds of prey that are neither vultures nor eagles, and more specifically for those that aren't buzzards, falcons, harriers, or kites. Even with this limitation, it covers a wide range, including over a hundred species that have been classified in genera varying from around a dozen to more than twenty, depending on the preferences of the classifier. Generally speaking, hawks can be identified by their relatively short wings and long legs, a bill that starts to curve downward right from the base (the cere, or the soft bare skin covering it), and the cutting edges of the maxilla (upper mandible) that are curved but never notched. Additional features, perhaps less structurally significant but still important, include a noticeable size difference between the sexes, that in most species the irises are yellow and deepen with age into orange or even red, and that the juvenile plumage typically has some stripes or mottled with heart-shaped spots underneath, while adults usually have more pronounced barring, although older males often have a clean breast and belly. Almost all hawks are small to medium-sized—the largest being the goshawk (q.v.) and its close relatives, while even the smallest male, Accipiter tinus, is about the size of a song thrush. They are very bold when attacking their prey, but if they fail on their first attempt, they tend to abandon the chase. Mostly living in trees, they hunt primarily for birds (though they also catch reptiles and small mammals), patiently waiting in the trees or bushes for a chance to ambush an unsuspecting victim with a swift swoop, grabbing it with their talons, and carrying it off to eat in a more convenient location.

European Sparrow-Hawk (Male and Female).

Systematic ornithologists differ as to the groups into which the numerous forms known as hawks should be divided. There is at the outset a difference of opinion as to the scientific name which the largest and best known of these groups should bear—some authors terming it Nisus, and others, who seem to have the most justice on their side, Accipiter. In Europe there are two species—first, A. nisus, the common sparrow-hawk, which has a wide distribution from Ireland to Japan, extending also to northern India, Egypt and Algeria, and secondly, A. brevipes (by some placed in the group Micronisus and by others called an Astur), which only appears in the south-east and the adjoining parts of Asia Minor and Persia. In North America the place of the former is taken by two very distinct species, a small one, A. fuscus, usually known in Canada and the United States as the sharp-shinned hawk, and Stanley’s or Cooper’s hawk, A. cooperi (by some placed in another genus, Cooperastur), which is larger and has not so northerly a range. In South America there are four or five more, including A. tinus, before mentioned as the smallest of all, while a species not much larger, A. minullus, together with several others of greater size, inhabits South Africa. Madagascar and its neighbouring islands have three or four species sufficiently distinct, and India has A. badlus. A good many more forms are found in south-eastern Asia, in the Indo-Malay Archipelago, and in Australia three or four species, of which A. cirrhocephalus most nearly represents the sparrow-hawk of Europe and northern Asia, while A. radiatus and A. approximans show some affinity to the gos-hawks (Astur) with which they are often classed. The differences between all the forms above named and the much larger number here unnamed are such as can be only appreciated by the specialist. The so-called “sparrow-hawk” of New Zealand (Hieracidea) does not belong to this group of birds at all, and by many authors has been deemed akin to the falcons. For hawking see Falconry.

Systematic ornithologists disagree on how to categorize the many types of birds known as hawks. First, there's a debate about the scientific name for the largest and most recognized group—some experts call it Nisus, while others, who appear to be more accurate, prefer Accipiter. In Europe, there are two species: first, A. nisus, the common sparrow-hawk, which is widely found from Ireland to Japan, and also in northern India, Egypt, and Algeria; and second, A. brevipes (some classify it under Micronisus while others refer to it as an Astur), which is only found in the southeast and nearby regions of Asia Minor and Persia. In North America, the place of the former is taken by two quite different species: a smaller one, A. fuscus, commonly called the sharp-shinned hawk in Canada and the United States, and Stanley’s or Cooper’s hawk, A. cooperi (sometimes classified in another genus, Cooperastur), which is larger and has a less northerly distribution. In South America, there are four or five more, including A. tinus, noted earlier as the smallest of all, while a species slightly larger, A. minullus, along with several other bigger ones, lives in South Africa. Madagascar and its nearby islands have three or four distinctly different species, and India has A. badlus. Several more types are found in southeastern Asia, the Indo-Malay Archipelago, and in Australia, where three or four species exist, notably, A. cirrhocephalus, which closely resembles the sparrow-hawk of Europe and northern Asia, while A. radiatus and A. approximans share some similarities with the goshawks (Astur), with which they are often grouped. The differences among all the named forms and the many unnamed ones can only be fully understood by specialists. The so-called "sparrow-hawk" of New Zealand (Hieracidea) is not part of this bird group at all and is considered by many experts to be more closely related to falcons. For hawking, see Falconry.

(A. N.)

1 In one form, Nisoides, which on that account has been generically separated, they are said to be perfectly straight.

1 In one form, Nisoides, which for that reason has been categorized separately, they are said to be completely straight.


HAWKE, EDWARD HAWKE, Baron (1705-1781), British admiral, was the only son of Edward Hawke, a barrister. On his mother’s side he was the nephew of Colonel Martin Bladen (1680-1746), a politician of some note, and was connected with the family of Fairfax. Edward Hawke entered the navy on the 20th of February 1720 and served the time required to qualify him to hold a lieutenant’s commission on the North American and West Indian stations. Though he passed his examination on the 2nd of June 1725, he was not appointed to a ship to act in that rank till 1729, when he was named third lieutenant of the “Portland” in the Channel. The continuance of peace allowed him no opportunities of distinction, but he was fortunate in obtaining promotion as commander of the “Wolf” sloop in 1733, and as post captain of the “Flamborough” (20) in 1734. When war began with Spain in 1739, he served as captain of the “Portland” (50) in the West Indies. His ship was old and rotten. She nearly drowned her captain and crew, and was broken up after she was paid off in 1742. In the following year Hawke was appointed to the “Berwick” (70), a fine new vessel, and was attached to the Mediterranean fleet then under the command of Thomas Mathews. The “Berwick” was manned badly, and suffered severely from sickness, but in the ill-managed battle of Toulon on the 11th of January 1744 Hawke gained great distinction by the spirit with which he fought his ship. The only prize taken by the British fleet, the Spanish “Poder” (74), surrendered to him, and though she was not kept by the admiral, Hawke was not in any degree to blame for the loss of the only trophy of the fight. His gallantry attracted the attention of the king. There is a story that he was dismissed from the service for having left the line to engage the “Poder,” and was restored by the king’s order. The legend grew not unnaturally out of the confusing series of courts martial which arose out of the battle, but it has no foundation. There is better reason to believe that when at a later period the Admiralty intended to pass over Hawke’s name in a promotion of admirals, the king, George II., did insist that he should not be put on the retired list.

HAWKE, EDWARD HAWKE, Baron (1705-1781), British admiral, was the only son of Edward Hawke, a lawyer. On his mother’s side, he was the nephew of Colonel Martin Bladen (1680-1746), a notable politician, and was connected to the Fairfax family. Edward Hawke joined the navy on February 20, 1720, and completed the time needed to qualify for a lieutenant’s commission on the North American and West Indian stations. Although he passed his exam on June 2, 1725, he wasn't assigned to a ship at that rank until 1729 when he became the third lieutenant of the "Portland" in the Channel. The ongoing peace left him with no opportunities for recognition, but he got promoted to commander of the "Wolf" sloop in 1733 and then to post captain of the "Flamborough" (20) in 1734. When war broke out with Spain in 1739, he served as captain of the "Portland" (50) in the West Indies. His ship was old and falling apart, nearly sinking him and his crew, and it was scrapped after being paid off in 1742. The next year, Hawke was assigned to the "Berwick" (70), a new and fine vessel, and joined the Mediterranean fleet under Thomas Mathews. The "Berwick" was poorly manned and plagued by sickness, but during the poorly executed Battle of Toulon on January 11, 1744, Hawke distinguished himself with the bravery he showed while fighting his ship. The only prize captured by the British fleet, the Spanish "Poder" (74), surrendered to him, and although he didn’t keep her, Hawke wasn't at fault for losing the only trophy of the battle. His courage caught the attention of the king. There’s a story that he was dismissed from service for leaving the line to engage the "Poder" and was reinstated by the king's order. This legend likely developed from the confusing courts martial that followed the battle, but it has no basis in fact. It's more plausible that when the Admiralty later sought to overlook Hawke's name in a promotion for admirals, King George II insisted that he should not be put on the retired list.

He had no further chance of making his energy and ability known out of the ranks of his own profession, where they were fully realized, till 1747. In July of that year he attained flag rank, and was named second in command of the Channel fleet. Owing to the ill health of his superior he was sent in command of the fourteen ships detached to intercept a French convoy on its way to the West Indies. On the 14th of October 1747 he fell in with it in the Bay of Biscay. The French force, under M. Desherbiers de l’Étenduère, consisted of nine ships, which were, however, on the average larger than Hawke’s. He attacked at once. The French admiral sent one of his liners to escort the merchant ships on their way to the West Indies, and with the other eight fought a very gallant action with the British squadron. Six of the eight French ships were taken. The French admiral did for a time succeed in saving the trading vessels under his charge, but most of them fell into the hands of the British cruisers in the West Indies. Hawke was made a knight of the Bath for this timely piece of service, a reward which cannot be said to have been lavish.

He had no chance to showcase his energy and skills outside of his profession, where they were fully recognized, until 1747. In July of that year, he achieved flag rank and was appointed second-in-command of the Channel fleet. Due to his superior's poor health, he was put in charge of the fourteen ships assigned to intercept a French convoy heading to the West Indies. On October 14, 1747, he encountered it in the Bay of Biscay. The French force, led by M. Desherbiers de l’Étenduère, included nine ships, which were generally larger than Hawke’s. He launched an immediate attack. The French admiral dispatched one of his ships to escort the merchant vessels to the West Indies and fought bravely with the other eight against the British squadron. Six of the eight French ships were captured. The French admiral managed to protect the trading vessels for a while, but most eventually fell into the hands of the British cruisers in the West Indies. For this prompt and effective action, Hawke was made a Knight of the Bath, a reward that was not particularly extravagant.

In 1747 Hawke had been elected M.P. for Portsmouth, which he continued to represent for thirty years, though he can seldom have been in his place, and it does not appear that he often spoke. A seat in parliament was always valuable to a naval officer at that time, since it enabled him to be useful to ministers, and increased his chances of obtaining employment. Hawke had married a lady of fortune in Yorkshire, Catherine Brook, in 1737, and was able to meet the expenses entailed by a seat in parliament, which were considerable at a time when votes were openly paid for by money down. In the interval between the war of 96 the Austrian Succession and the Seven Years’ War, Hawke was almost always on active service. From 1748 till 1752 be was in command at home, and he rehoisted his flag in 1755 as admiral in command of the Western Squadron. Although war was not declared for some time, England and France were on very hostile terms, and conflicts between the officers of the two powers in America had already taken place. Neither government was scrupulous in abstaining from the use of force while peace was still nominally unbroken. Hawke was sent to sea to intercept a French squadron which had been cruising near Gibraltar, but a restriction was put on the limits within which he might cruise, and he failed to meet the French. The fleet was much weakened by ill-health. In June 1756 the news of John Byng’s retreat from Minorca reached England and aroused the utmost indignation. Hawke was at once sent out to relieve him in the Mediterranean command, and to send him home for trial. He sailed in the “Antelope,” carrying, as the wits of the day put it, “a cargo of courage” to supply deficiencies in that respect among the officers then in the Mediterranean. Minorca had fallen, from want of resources rather than the attacks of the French, before he could do anything for the assistance of the garrison of Fort St Philip. In winter he was recalled to England, and he reached home on the 14th of January 1757. On the 24th of February following he was promoted full admiral.

In 1747, Hawke was elected as the M.P. for Portsmouth, a position he held for thirty years, even though he was rarely present and didn’t speak often. Having a seat in parliament was valuable for a naval officer at that time, as it allowed him to be helpful to ministers and increased his chances of getting assigned to important roles. Hawke married Catherine Brook, a wealthy woman from Yorkshire, in 1737, which enabled him to cover the significant expenses of maintaining a parliamentary seat, especially when votes could openly be bought. During the time between the War of the Austrian Succession and the Seven Years’ War, Hawke was mostly on active duty. From 1748 to 1752, he commanded at home, and he resumed his position as admiral of the Western Squadron in 1755. While there was no official declaration of war for some time, England and France were very much at odds, and clashes between their officers in America had already occurred. Neither government was hesitant to use force even though peace was still technically in place. Hawke was dispatched to intercept a French squadron that was operating near Gibraltar, but restrictions were placed on his cruising limits, preventing him from encountering the French. The fleet was significantly weakened by illness. In June 1756, news of John Byng's retreat from Minorca reached England, causing widespread outrage. Hawke was immediately sent out to take over command in the Mediterranean and to bring Byng back for a trial. He set sail on the “Antelope,” humorously noted to be carrying “a cargo of courage” to make up for the lack of it among the officers in the Mediterranean at that time. Minorca had fallen due to a lack of resources rather than French assaults before he could assist the garrison at Fort St. Philip. In the winter, he was recalled to England, arriving home on January 14, 1757. On February 24, he was promoted to full admiral.

It is said, but on no very good authority, that he was not on good terms with Pitt (afterwards earl of Chatham), and it is certain that when Pitt’s great ministry was formed in June 1757, he was not included in the Board of Admiralty. Yet as he was continued in command of important forces in the Channel, it is obvious that his great capacity was fully recognized. In the late summer of 1757 he was entrusted with the naval side of an expedition to the coast of France. These operations, which were scoffingly described at the time as breaking windows with guineas, were a favourite device of Pitt’s for weakening the French and raising the confidence of the country. The expedition of 1757 was directed against Rochefort, and it effected nothing. Hawke, who probably expected very little good from it, did his own work as admiral punctually, but he cannot be said to have shown zeal, or any wish to inspirit the military officers into making greater efforts than they were disposed naturally to make. The expedition returned to Spithead by the 6th of October. No part of the disappointment of the public, which was acute, was visited on Hawke. During the end of 1757 and the beginning of 1758 be continued cruising in the Channel in search of the French naval forces, without any striking success. In May of that year he was ordered to detach a squadron under the command of Howe to carry out further combined operations. Hawke considered himself as treated with a want of due respect, and was at the time in bad humour with the Admiralty. He somewhat pettishly threw up his command, but was induced to resume it by the board, which knew his value, and was not wanting in flattery. He retired in June for a time on the ground of health, but happily for his own glory and the service of the country he was able to hoist his flag in May 1759, the “wonderful year” of Garrick’s song.

It's said, though not with solid proof, that he wasn't on good terms with Pitt (later earl of Chatham), and it's clear that when Pitt’s major ministry was formed in June 1757, he wasn't included in the Board of Admiralty. However, since he continued to lead significant forces in the Channel, it's obvious that his considerable talent was well recognized. In late summer 1757, he was tasked with the naval part of an expedition to the coast of France. These operations, mockingly referred to at the time as breaking windows with guineas, were a favored tactic of Pitt’s to weaken the French and boost the country's morale. The 1757 expedition targeted Rochefort but achieved nothing. Hawke, who likely expected little from it, carried out his duties as admiral punctually, although he can't be said to have shown enthusiasm or a desire to motivate the military officers to exert any more effort than they were inclined to. The expedition returned to Spithead by October 6th. The public disappointment, which was intense, wasn't directed at Hawke. Throughout late 1757 and early 1758, he continued to cruise in the Channel looking for the French naval forces, but without any notable success. In May of that year, he was ordered to send a squadron led by Howe to carry out additional combined operations. Hawke felt disrespected and was unhappy with the Admiralty at the time. He somewhat petulantly resigned his command but was persuaded to return by the board, which appreciated his worth and didn’t hold back on flattery. He took a break in June for health reasons, but thankfully for his own honor and the country's service, he was able to hoist his flag in May 1759, the “wonderful year” of Garrick’s song.

France was then elaborating a scheme of invasion which bears much resemblance to the plan afterwards formed by Napoleon. An army of invasion was collected at the Morbihan in Brittany, and the intention was to transport it under the protection of a powerful fleet which was to be made up by uniting the squadron at Brest with the ships at Toulon. The plan, like Napoleon’s, had slight chance of success, since the naval part of the invading force must necessarily be brought together from distant points at the risk of interruption by the British squadrons. The naval forces of England were amply sufficient to provide whatever was needed to upset the plans of the French government. But the country was not so confident in the capacity of the navy to serve as a defence as it was taught to be in later generations. It had been seized by a most shameful panic at the beginning of the war in face of a mere threat of invasion. Therefore the anxiety of Pitt to baffle the schemes of the French decisively was great, and the country looked on at the development of the naval campaign with nervous attention. The proposed combination of the French fleet was defeated by the annihilation of the Toulon squadron on the coast of Portugal by Boscawen in May, but the Brest fleet was still untouched and the troops were still at Morbihan. It was the duty of Hawke to prevent attack from this quarter. The manner in which he discharged his task marks an epoch in the history of the navy. Until his time, or very nearly so, it was still believed that there was rashness in keeping the great ships out after September. Hawke maintained his blockade of Brest till far into November. Long cruises had always entailed much bad health on the crews, but by the care he took to obtain fresh food, and the energy he showed in pressing the Admiralty for stores, he was able to keep his men healthy. Early in November a series of severe gales forced him off the French coast, and he was compelled to anchor in Torbay. His absence was brief, but it allowed the French admiral, M. de Conflans (1690?-1777), time to put to sea, and to steer for the Morbihan. Hawke, who had left Torbay on the 13th of November, learnt of the departure of the French at sea on the 17th from a look-out ship, and as the French admiral could have done nothing but steer for the Morbihan, he followed him thither. The news that M. de Conflans had got to sea spread a panic through the country, and for some days Hawke was the object of abuse of the most irrational kind. There was in fact no danger, for behind Hawke’s fleet there were ample reserves in the straits of Dover, and in the North Sea. Following his enemy as fast as the bad weather, a mixture of calms and head winds would allow, the admiral sighted the French about 40 m. to the west of Belleisle on the morning of the 20th of November. The British fleet was of twenty-one sail, the French of twenty. There was also a small squadron of British ships engaged in watching the Morbihan as an inshore squadron, which was in danger of being cut off. M. de Conflans had a sufficient force to fight in the open sea without rashness, but after making a motion to give battle, he changed his mind and gave the signal to his fleet to steer for the anchorage at Quiberon. He did not believe that the British admiral would dare to follow him, for the coast is one of the most dangerous in the world, and the wind was blowing hard from the west and rising to a storm. Hawke, however, pursued without hesitation, though it was well on in the afternoon before he caught up the rear of the French fleet, and dark by the time the two fleets were in the bay. The action, which was more a test of seamanship than of gunnery, or capacity to manœuvre in order, ended in the destruction of the French. Five ships only were taken or destroyed, but others ran ashore, and the French navy as a whole lost all confidence. Two British vessels were lost, but the price was little to pay for such a victory. No more fighting remained to be done. The fleet in Quiberon Bay suffered from want of food, and its distress is recorded in the lines:—

France was then developing an invasion plan that looked a lot like the one Napoleon would later create. An invasion army was gathered at Morbihan in Brittany, and the goal was to transport it with the support of a powerful fleet made up by combining the squadron at Brest with the ships at Toulon. Like Napoleon's plan, this one had little chance of success since the naval part of the invading force had to come together from far away, risking interruption by British ships. The English naval forces were more than capable of disrupting the French government’s plans. However, the public wasn't as confident in the navy's ability to provide defense as later generations would be. At the start of the war, there was a shameful panic over the mere threat of invasion. Because of this anxiety, Pitt was eager to thwart French plans, and the country watched the naval campaign unfold with nervous anticipation. The proposed combination of the French fleet was thwarted when Boscawen destroyed the Toulon squadron off the coast of Portugal in May, but the Brest fleet remained intact and troops were still in Morbihan. It was Hawke's responsibility to prevent any action from this direction. How he fulfilled this duty marked a significant moment in naval history. Until then, or nearly so, it was thought to be reckless to keep the large ships out after September. Hawke maintained his blockade of Brest well into November. Long deployments had always caused health issues for the crews, but by ensuring access to fresh food and vigorously pushing the Admiralty for supplies, he kept his men healthy. In early November, a series of strong gales drove him off the French coast, forcing him to anchor in Torbay. His absence was short, but it gave the French admiral, M. de Conflans (1690?-1777), time to set sail and head for Morbihan. Hawke, who had left Torbay on November 13th, learned about the French departure at sea on the 17th from a lookout ship, and since the French admiral could only head toward Morbihan, he followed him there. The news that M. de Conflans had set sail spread panic throughout the country, and for a few days, Hawke faced unreasonable criticism. In reality, there was no danger; behind Hawke’s fleet were plenty of reserves in the straits of Dover and the North Sea. Despite the bad weather, a mix of calm and headwinds, the admiral spotted the French about 40 miles west of Belleisle on the morning of November 20th. The British fleet consisted of twenty-one ships, while the French had twenty. There was also a small squadron of British vessels watching the Morbihan as an inshore squadron, which risked getting cut off. M. de Conflans had enough forces to fight in open water without being reckless, but after considering a battle, he changed his mind and ordered his fleet to head for the anchorage at Quiberon. He didn't think the British admiral would dare to pursue him since that coast is one of the most treacherous in the world, and the wind was howling from the west and rising to a storm. However, Hawke pursued without hesitation, though it was late afternoon before he caught up with the rear of the French fleet, and it was dark by the time the two fleets were in the bay. The encounter, which tested seamanship more than gunnery or maneuvers, resulted in the destruction of the French fleet. Only five ships were captured or destroyed, but others ran aground, and the French navy lost all confidence. Two British vessels were lost, but that price was small for such a victory. No further fighting remained. The fleet in Quiberon Bay suffered from lack of food, and its distress is captured in the lines:—

“Ere Hawke did bang

"Before Hawke did bang"

Mounseer Conflang

Monsieur Conflang

You sent us beef and beer;

You sent us beef and beer;

Now Mounseer’s beat

Now Mounseer’s vibe

We’ve nought to eat,

We have nothing to eat,

Since you have nought to fear.”

Since you have nothing to fear.

Hawke returned to England in January 1760 and had no further service at sea. He was not made a peer till the 20th of May 1776, and then only as Baron Hawke of Towton. From 1776 to 1771 he was first lord of the Admiralty. His administration was much criticized, perhaps more from party spirit than because of its real defects. Whatever his relations with Lord Chatham may have been he was no favourite with Chatham’s partizans. It is very credible that, having spent all his life at sea, his faculty did not show in the uncongenial life of the shore. As an admiral at sea and on his own element Hawke has had no superior. It is true that he was not put to the test of having to meet opponents of equal strength and efficiency, but then neither has any other British admiral since the Dutch wars of the 17th century. On his death on the 17th of October 1781 his title passed to his son, Martin Bladen (1744-1805), and it is 97 still held by his descendants, the 7th Baron (b. 1860) being best known as a great Yorkshire cricketer.

Hawke returned to England in January 1760 and didn’t serve at sea again. He wasn’t made a peer until May 20, 1776, when he became Baron Hawke of Towton. From 1776 to 1771, he was the First Lord of the Admiralty. His administration faced a lot of criticism, likely more due to party rivalry than its actual shortcomings. Whatever his relationship with Lord Chatham may have been, he wasn’t favored by Chatham’s supporters. It’s quite believable that, after spending his entire life at sea, his skills didn’t translate well to the unfamiliar life on land. As an admiral at sea, Hawke had no equal. While it is true that he wasn’t tested against opponents of equal strength and skill, neither has any other British admiral since the Dutch wars of the 17th century. Upon his death on October 17, 1781, his title passed to his son, Martin Bladen (1744-1805), and it is 97 still held by his descendants, with the 7th Baron (b. 1860) being best known as a prominent Yorkshire cricketer.

There is a portrait of Hawke in the Painted Hall at Greenwich. His Life by Montagu Burrows (1883) has superseded all other authorities; it is supplemented in a few early particulars by Sir J. K. Laughton’s article in the Dict. Nat. Biog. (1891).

There’s a portrait of Hawke in the Painted Hall at Greenwich. His Life by Montagu Burrows (1883) has replaced all other references; it’s supplemented in a few early details by Sir J. K. Laughton’s article in the Dict. Nat. Biog. (1891).


HAWKER, ROBERT STEPHEN (1803-1874), English antiquary and poet, was born at Stoke Damerel, Devonshire, on the 3rd of December 1803. His father, Jacob Stephen Hawker, was at that time a doctor, but afterwards curate and vicar of Stratton, Cornwall. Robert was sent to Liskeard grammar school, and when he was about sixteen was apprenticed to a solicitor. He was soon removed to Cheltenham grammar school, and in April 1823 matriculated at Pembroke College, Oxford. In the same year he married Charlotte I’Ans, a lady much older than himself. On returning to Oxford he migrated to Magdalen Hall, where he graduated in 1828, having already won the Newdigate prize for poetry in 1827. He became vicar of Morwenstow, a village on the north Cornish coast, in 1834. Hawker described the bulk of his parishioners as a “mixed multitude of smugglers, wreckers and dissenters of various hues.” He was himself a high churchman, and carried things with a high hand in his parish, but was much beloved by his people. He was a man of great originality, and numerous stories were told of his striking sayings and eccentric conduct. He was the original of Mortimer Collins’s Canon Tremaine in Sweet and Twenty. His first wife died in 1863, and in 1864 he married Pauline Kuczynski, daughter of a Polish exile. He died in Plymouth on the 15th of August 1875. Before his death he was formally received into the Roman Catholic Church, a proceeding which aroused a bitter newspaper controversy. The best of his poems is The Quest of the Sangraal: Chant the First (Exeter, 1864). Among his Cornish Ballads (1869) the most famous is on “Trelawny,” the refrain of which, “And shall Trelawny die,” &c., he declared to be an old Cornish saying.

HAWKER, ROBERT STEPHEN (1803-1874), English antiquarian and poet, was born in Stoke Damerel, Devonshire, on December 3, 1803. His father, Jacob Stephen Hawker, was a doctor at that time, later becoming the curate and vicar of Stratton, Cornwall. Robert attended Liskeard grammar school, and at about sixteen, he was apprenticed to a solicitor. He was soon transferred to Cheltenham grammar school and, in April 1823, enrolled at Pembroke College, Oxford. That same year, he married Charlotte I’Ans, a woman significantly older than him. After returning to Oxford, he moved to Magdalen Hall, where he graduated in 1828, having already won the Newdigate prize for poetry in 1827. He became the vicar of Morwenstow, a village on the north Cornish coast, in 1834. Hawker described most of his parishioners as a “mixed multitude of smugglers, wreckers, and dissenters of various kinds.” He was a high churchman and conducted himself with authority in his parish, but he was very much loved by his community. He was known for his originality, and many stories circulated about his memorable sayings and quirky behavior. He inspired Mortimer Collins’s Canon Tremaine in Sweet and Twenty. His first wife passed away in 1863, and in 1864 he married Pauline Kuczynski, the daughter of a Polish exile. He died in Plymouth on August 15, 1875. Before his death, he was formally received into the Roman Catholic Church, a move that sparked a heated newspaper controversy. His best poem is The Quest of the Sangraal: Chant the First (Exeter, 1864). Among his Cornish Ballads (1869), the most well-known is about “Trelawny,” the refrain of which, “And shall Trelawny die,” etc., he claimed to be an old Cornish saying.

See The Vicar of Morwenstow (1875; later and corrected editions, 1876 and 1886), by the Rev. S. Baring-Gould, which was severely criticized by Hawker’s friend, W. Maskell, in the Athenaeum (March 26, 1876); Memorials of the late Robert Stephen Hawker (1876), by the late Dr F. G. Lee. These were superseded in 1905 by The Life and Letters of R. S. Hawker, by his son-in-law, C. E. Byles, which contains a bibliography of his works, now very valuable to collectors. See also Boase and Courtney, Bibliotheca Cornubiensis. His Poetical Works (1879) and his Prose Works (1893) were edited by J. G. Godwin. Another edition of his Poetical Works (1899) has a preface and bibliography by Alfred Wallis, and a complete edition of his poems by C. E. Byles, with the title Cornish Ballads and other Poems, appeared in 1904.

See The Vicar of Morwenstow (1875; later revised editions, 1876 and 1886), by Rev. S. Baring-Gould, which was heavily criticized by Hawker’s friend, W. Maskell, in the Athenaeum (March 26, 1876); Memorials of the late Robert Stephen Hawker (1876), by the late Dr. F. G. Lee. These were replaced in 1905 by The Life and Letters of R. S. Hawker, by his son-in-law, C. E. Byles, which includes a bibliography of his works, now quite valuable to collectors. See also Boase and Courtney, Bibliotheca Cornubiensis. His Poetical Works (1879) and his Prose Works (1893) were edited by J. G. Godwin. Another edition of his Poetical Works (1899) has a preface and bibliography by Alfred Wallis, and a complete edition of his poems by C. E. Byles, titled Cornish Ballads and other Poems, was published in 1904.


HAWKERS and PEDLARS, the designation of itinerant dealers who convey their goods from place to place to sell. The word “hawker” seems to have come into English from the Ger. Höker or Dutch heuker in the early 16th century. In an act of 1533 (25 Henry VIII. c. 9, § 6) we find “Sundry evill disposed persons which commonly beane called haukers ... buying and selling of Brasse and Pewter.” The earlier word for such an itinerant dealer is “huckster,” which is found in 1200. “For that they have turned God’s house intill hucksteress bothe” (Ormulum, 15,817). The base of the two words is the same, and is probably to be referred to German hocken, to squat, crouch; cf. “hucklebone,” the hip-bone; and the hawkers or hucksters were so called either because they stooped under their packs, or squatted at booths in markets, &c. Another derivation finds the origin in the Dutch hock, a hole, corner. It may be noticed that the termination of “huckster” is feminine; though there are examples of its application to women it was always applied indiscriminately to either sex.

HAWKERS and PEDLARS refer to traveling sellers who move around to sell their goods. The term “hawker” appears to have originated in English from the German Höker or Dutch heuker in the early 16th century. In a law from 1533 (25 Henry VIII. c. 9, § 6), we find “Various bad characters who are commonly called hawkers ... buying and selling brass and pewter.” The earlier term for such a traveling seller is “huckster,” which dates back to 1200. “For they have turned God’s house into a huckster’s den both” (Ormulum, 15,817). Both words have the same root, likely tracing back to the German hocken, meaning to squat or crouch; compare “hucklebone,” referring to the hip-bone; and hawkers or hucksters were named either because they bent under their loads or squatted at market booths, etc. Another possible origin relates to the Dutch hock, meaning a hole or corner. It’s worth noting that the ending of “huckster” is feminine; although there are instances of its use for women, it has always been applied equally to both genders.

“Pedlar” occurs much earlier than the verbal form “to peddle,” which is therefore a derivative from the substantive. The origin is to be found in the still older word “pedder,” one who carries about goods for sale in a “ped,” a basket or hamper. This is now only used dialectically and in Scotland. In the Ancren Riwle (c. 1225), peoddare is found with the meaning of “pedlar,” though the Promptorium parvulorum (c. 1440) defines it as calathasius, i.e. a maker of panniers or baskets.

“Pedlar” appeared long before the verb “to peddle,” which is therefore derived from the noun. Its origin traces back to the even older word “pedder,” referring to someone who carries goods for sale in a “ped,” meaning a basket or hamper. This term is now mostly used in certain dialects and in Scotland. In the Ancren Riwle (c. 1225), peoddare is mentioned with the meaning of “pedlar,” while the Promptorium parvulorum (c. 1440) defines it as calathasius, which means a maker of panniers or baskets.

The French term for a hawker or pedlar of books, colporteur (col, neck, porter, to carry), has been adopted by the Bible Society and other English religious bodies as a name for itinerant vendors and distributors of Bibles and other religious literature.

The French word for a book seller or peddler, colporteur (col, neck, porter, to carry), has been embraced by the Bible Society and other English religious organizations as a term for traveling vendors and distributors of Bibles and other religious texts.

The occupation of hawkers and pedlars has been regulated in the United Kingdom, and the two classes have also been technically distinguished. The Pedlars Act 1871 defines a pedlar as “any hawker, pedlar, petty chapman, tinker, caster of metals, mender of chairs, or other person who, without any horse or other beast bearing or drawing burden, travels and trades on foot and goes from town to town or to other men’s houses, carrying to sell or exposing for sale any goods, wares or merchandise ... or selling or offering for sale his skill in handicraft.” Any person who acts as a pedlar must have a certificate, which is to be obtained from the chief officer of police of the police district in which the person applying for the certificate has resided during one month previous to his application. He must satisfy the officer that he is above seventeen years of age, is of good character, and in good faith intends to carry on the trade of a pedlar. The fee for a pedlar’s certificate is five shillings, and the certificate remains in force for a year from the date of issue. The act requires a register of certificates to be kept in each district, and imposes a penalty for the assigning, borrowing or forging of any certificate. It does not exempt any one from vagrant law, and requires the pedlar to show his certificate on demand to certain persons. It empowers the police to inspect a pedlar’s pack, and provides for the arrest of an uncertificated pedlar or one refusing to show his certificate. A pedlar’s certificate is not required by commercial travellers, sellers of vegetables, fish, fruit or victuals, or sellers in fairs. The Hawkers Act 1888 defines a hawker as “any one who travels with a horse or other beast of burden, selling goods,” &c. An excise licence (expiring on the 31st of March in each year) must be taken out by every hawker in the United Kingdom. The duty imposed upon such licence is £2. A hawker’s licence is not granted, otherwise than by way of licence, except on production of a certificate signed by a clergyman and two householders of the parish or place wherein the applicant resides, or by a justice of the county or place, or a superintendent or inspector of police for the district, attesting that the person is of good character and a proper person to be licenced as a hawker. There are certain exemptions from taking out a licence—commercial travellers, sellers of fish, coal, &c., sellers in fairs, and the real worker or maker of any goods. The act also lays down certain provisions to be observed by hawkers and others, and imposes penalties for infringements. In the United States hawkers and pedlars must take out licences under State laws and Federal laws.

The occupation of hawkers and pedlars has been regulated in the United Kingdom, with clear distinctions between the two groups. The Pedlars Act 1871 defines a pedlar as “any hawker, pedlar, petty chapman, tinker, metalworker, chair mender, or any other person who, without any horse or burden-bearing animal, travels and trades on foot, going from town to town or to people's houses, carrying goods for sale or exposing them for sale... or selling or offering their skills in craftsmanship.” Anyone acting as a pedlar must obtain a certificate from the chief police officer of the district where they have lived for at least a month prior to applying. They must prove to the officer that they are over seventeen, of good character, and genuinely intend to work as a pedlar. The fee for a pedlar's certificate is five shillings, and it is valid for one year from the date it is issued. The act requires a record of certificates to be maintained in each district and imposes penalties for assigning, borrowing, or forging any certificate. It does not exempt anyone from vagrancy laws and mandates that pedlars show their certificate on request to certain individuals. It allows the police to inspect a pedlar's pack and provides for the arrest of pedlars without certificates or those who refuse to show theirs. A pedlar's certificate is not required for commercial travelers, sellers of vegetables, fish, fruit, or food, or sellers at fairs. The Hawkers Act 1888 defines a hawker as “anyone who travels with a horse or other burden-bearing animal, selling goods,” etc. Every hawker in the United Kingdom must obtain an excise license (which expires on March 31 each year). The fee for this license is £2. A hawker's license is granted only on the presentation of a certificate signed by a clergyman and two householders of the parish where the applicant lives, or by a justice of the peace, or a police superintendent or inspector, confirming that the person is of good character and suitable for licensing as a hawker. There are specific exemptions from needing a license—commercial travelers, sellers of fish, coal, etc., sellers at fairs, and genuine producers or makers of goods. The act also sets certain rules for hawkers and others, with penalties for violations. In the United States, hawkers and pedlars must obtain licenses under state and federal laws.


HAWKESWORTH, JOHN (c. 1715-1773), English miscellaneous writer, was born in London about 1715. He is said to have been clerk to an attorney, and was certainly self-educated. In 1744 he succeeded Samuel Johnson as compiler of the parliamentary debates for the Gentleman’s Magazine, and from 1746 to 1749 he contributed poems signed Greville, or H. Greville, to that journal. In company with Johnson and others he started a periodical called The Adventurer, which ran to 140 numbers, of which 70 were from the pen of Hawkesworth himself. On account of what was regarded as its powerful defence of morality and religion, Hawkesworth was rewarded by the archbishop of Canterbury with the degree of LL.D. In 1754-1755 he published an edition (12 vols.) of Swift’s works, with a life prefixed which Johnson praised in his Lives of the Poets. A larger edition (27 vols.) appeared in 1766-1779. He adapted Dryden’s Amphitryon for the Drury Lane stage in 1756, and Southerne’s Oronooko in 1759. He wrote the libretto of an oratorio Zimri in 1760, and the next year Edgar and Emmeline: a Fairy Tale, was produced at Drury Lane. His Almoran and Hamet (2 vols., 1761) was first of all drafted as a play, and a tragedy founded on it by S. J. Pratt, The Fair Circassian (1781), met with some success. He was commissioned by the admiralty to edit Captain Cook’s papers relative to his first voyage. For this work, An Account of the Voyages undertaken ... for making discoveries in the Southern Hemisphere and performed by Commodore Byrone, Captain Wallis, Captain Carteret and Captain Cook (from 1764 to 1771) drawn up from the Journals ... (3 vols., 1773), Hawkesworth is said to have received from the publishers the sum of £6000. His descriptions of the manners and customs of the South Seas were, however, regarded by many critics as inexact and hurtful to the interests of morality, and the severity of their strictures is said to have hastened his death, which took place on the 16th of November 1773. He was buried 98 at Bromley, Kent, where he and his wife had kept a school. Hawkesworth was a close imitator of Johnson both in style and thought, and was at one time on very friendly terms with him. It is said that he presumed on his success, and lost Johnson’s friendship as early as 1756.

HAWKESWORTH, JOHN (c. 1715-1773), English miscellaneous writer, was born in London around 1715. He is believed to have worked as a clerk for a lawyer and was definitely self-taught. In 1744, he took over from Samuel Johnson as the compiler of the parliamentary debates for Gentleman’s Magazine, and from 1746 to 1749, he contributed poems under the names Greville or H. Greville to that magazine. Along with Johnson and others, he launched a periodical called The Adventurer, which published 140 issues, with 70 authored by Hawkesworth himself. Because of what many viewed as its strong defense of morality and religion, the archbishop of Canterbury awarded Hawkesworth the degree of LL.D. Between 1754 and 1755, he published a 12-volume edition of Swift’s works, which included a biography that Johnson praised in his Lives of the Poets. A larger edition (27 volumes) came out from 1766 to 1779. He adapted Dryden’s Amphitryon for the Drury Lane stage in 1756 and Southerne’s Oronooko in 1759. He wrote the libretto for an oratorio Zimri in 1760, and the following year, Edgar and Emmeline: a Fairy Tale was staged at Drury Lane. His Almoran and Hamet (2 vols., 1761) was initially drafted as a play, and a tragedy based on it by S. J. Pratt, The Fair Circassian (1781), found some success. He was commissioned by the admiralty to edit Captain Cook’s papers related to his first voyage. For this project, An Account of the Voyages undertaken ... for making discoveries in the Southern Hemisphere and performed by Commodore Byrone, Captain Wallis, Captain Carteret and Captain Cook (from 1764 to 1771) drawn up from the Journals ... (3 vols., 1773), Hawkesworth reportedly received £6000 from the publishers. However, many critics deemed his accounts of the customs and manners of the South Seas to be inaccurate and detrimental to morals, and the harshness of their critiques is said to have contributed to his death on November 16, 1773. He was buried 98 at Bromley, Kent, where he and his wife had run a school. Hawkesworth closely imitated Johnson in both style and thought and was once on very friendly terms with him. It is said that he became overconfident in his success, losing Johnson’s friendship as early as 1756.


HAWKHURST, a town in the southern parliamentary division of Kent, England, 47 m. S.E. of London, on a branch of the South-Eastern & Chatham railway. Pop. (1901), 3136. It lies mainly on a ridge above the valley of the Kent Ditch, a tributary of the Rother. The neighbouring country is hilly, rich and well wooded, and the pleasant and healthy situation has led to the considerable extension of the old village as a residential locality. The Kent Sanatorium and one of the Barnardo homes are established here. The church of St Lawrence, founded from Battle Abbey in Sussex, is Decorated and Perpendicular and its east window, of the earlier period, is specially beautiful.

HAWKHURST, is a town in the southern parliamentary division of Kent, England, 47 miles southeast of London, on a branch of the South-Eastern & Chatham railway. Population (1901) was 3,136. It mainly sits on a ridge above the valley of the Kent Ditch, which is a tributary of the Rother. The surrounding area is hilly, rich in resources, and well-wooded, and the pleasant, healthy location has led to significant growth of the old village as a residential area. The Kent Sanatorium and one of the Barnardo homes are located here. The church of St. Lawrence, which was founded from Battle Abbey in Sussex, is in the Decorated and Perpendicular styles, and its east window, from an earlier period, is particularly beautiful.


HAWKINS, CAESAR HENRY (1798-1884), British surgeon, son of the Rev. E. Hawkins and grandson of the Sir Caesar Hawkins (1711-1786), who was serjeant-surgeon to Kings George II. and George III., was born at Bisley, Gloucestershire, on the 19th of September 1798, was educated at Christ’s Hospital, and entered St George’s Hospital, London, in 1818. He was surgeon to the hospital from 1829 to 1861, and in 1862 was made serjeant-surgeon to Queen Victoria. He was president of the College of Surgeons in 1852, and again in 1861; and he delivered the Hunterian oration in 1849. His success in complex surgical cases gave him a great reputation. For long he was noted as the only surgeon who had succeeded in the operation of ovariotomy in a London hospital. This occurred in 1846, when anaesthetics were unknown. He did much to popularize colotomy. A successful operator, he nevertheless was attached to conservative surgery, and was always more anxious to teach his pupils how to save a limb than how to remove it. He reprinted his contributions to the medical journals in two volumes, 1874, the more valuable papers being on Tumours, Excision of the Ovarium, Hydrophobia and Snake-bites, Stricture of the Colon, and The Relative Claims of Sir Charles Bell and Magendie to the Discovery of the Functions of the Spinal Nerves. He died on the 20th of July 1884. His brother, Edward Hawkins (1789-1882), was the well-known provost of Oriel, Oxford, who played so great a part in the Tractarian movement.

HAWKINS, CAESAR HENRY (1798-1884), British surgeon, son of Rev. E. Hawkins and grandson of Sir Caesar Hawkins (1711-1786), who served as serjeant-surgeon to Kings George II and George III, was born in Bisley, Gloucestershire, on September 19, 1798. He was educated at Christ's Hospital and entered St George's Hospital, London, in 1818. He worked as surgeon at the hospital from 1829 to 1861 and in 1862 became serjeant-surgeon to Queen Victoria. He served as president of the College of Surgeons in 1852 and again in 1861, and he delivered the Hunterian oration in 1849. His success in complicated surgical cases earned him a great reputation. For a long time, he was noted as the only surgeon to have successfully performed ovariotomy in a London hospital, which he did in 1846 when anesthetics were not available. He also played a significant role in popularizing colotomy. Although he was a successful operator, he favored conservative surgery and was always more focused on teaching his students how to save limbs rather than remove them. He published his contributions to medical journals in two volumes in 1874, with the most valuable papers on Tumours, Excision of the Ovarium, Hydrophobia and Snake-bites, Stricture of the Colon, and The Relative Claims of Sir Charles Bell and Magendie to the Discovery of the Functions of the Spinal Nerves. He passed away on July 20, 1884. His brother, Edward Hawkins (1789-1882), was the well-known provost of Oriel, Oxford, who played a significant role in the Tractarian movement.


HAWKINS, or Hawkyns, SIR JOHN (1532-1595), British admiral, was born at Plymouth in 1532, and belonged to a family of Devonshire shipowners and skippers—occupations then more closely connected than is now usual. His father, William Hawkins (d. 1553), was a prosperous freeman of Plymouth, who thrice represented that town in parliament, and is described by Hakluyt as one of the principal sea-captains in the west parts of England; his elder brother, also called William (d. 1589), was closely associated with him in his Spanish expeditions, and took an active part in fitting out ships to meet the Armada; and his nephew, the eldest son of the last named and of the same name, sailed with Sir Francis Drake to the South Sea in 1577, and served as lieutenant under Edward Fenton (q.v.) in the expedition which started for the East Indies and China in 1582. His son, Sir Richard Hawkins, is separately noticed.

HAWKINS, or Hawkins, SIR JOHN (1532-1595), British admiral, was born in Plymouth in 1532 and came from a family of shipowners and captains from Devonshire—jobs that were more intertwined back then than they are today. His father, William Hawkins (d. 1553), was a successful freeman of Plymouth who served three times in parliament and is mentioned by Hakluyt as one of the leading sea captains in western England. His older brother, also named William (d. 1589), was closely involved with him in Spanish expeditions and played an active role in preparing ships to confront the Armada. His nephew, the eldest son of the latter and also named William, sailed with Sir Francis Drake to the South Sea in 1577 and served as a lieutenant under Edward Fenton (q.v.) in the expedition that began for the East Indies and China in 1582. His son, Sir Richard Hawkins, is mentioned separately.

Sir John Hawkins was bred to the sea in the ships of his family. When the great epoch of Elizabethan maritime adventure began, he took an active part by sailing to the Guinea coast, where he robbed the Portuguese slavers, and then smuggled the negroes he had captured into the Spanish possessions in the New World. After a first successful voyage in 1562-1563, two vessels which he had rashly sent to Seville were confiscated by the Spanish government. With the help of friends, and the open approval of the queen, who hired one of her vessels to him, he sailed again in 1564, and repeated his voyage with success, trading with the Creoles by force when the officials of the king endeavoured to prevent him. These two voyages brought him reputation, and he was granted a coat of arms with a demi-Moor, or negro, chained, as his crest. The rivalry with Spain was now becoming very acute, and when Hawkins sailed for the third time in 1567, he went in fact, though not technically, on a national venture. Again he kidnapped negroes, and forced his goods on the Spanish colonies. Encouraged by his discovery that these settlements were small and unfortified, he on this occasion ventured to enter Vera Cruz, the port of Mexico, after capturing some Spaniards at sea to be held as hostages. He alleged that he had been driven in by bad weather. The falsity of the story was glaring, but the Spanish officers on the spot were too weak to offer resistance. Hawkins was allowed to enter the harbour, and to refit at the small rocky island of San Juan de Ulloa by which it is formed. Unfortunately for him, and for a French corsair whom he had in his company, a strong Spanish force arrived, bringing the new viceroy. The Spaniards, who were no more scrupulous of the truth than himself, pretended to accept the arrangement made before their arrival, and then when they thought he was off his guard attacked him on the 24th of September. Only two vessels escaped, his own, the “Minion,” and the “Judith,” a small vessel belonging to his cousin Francis Drake. The voyage home was miserable, and the sufferings of all were great.

Sir John Hawkins grew up at sea on his family’s ships. When the era of Elizabethan maritime adventure began, he actively participated by sailing to the Guinea coast, where he stole from Portuguese slave traders and then smuggled the enslaved people he captured into Spanish territories in the New World. After a successful first voyage in 1562-1563, two ships he had foolishly sent to Seville were seized by the Spanish government. With the help of friends and the queen’s support, who lent him one of her ships, he set sail again in 1564, successfully repeating his voyage and trading forcefully with the Creoles when the king’s officials tried to stop him. These two voyages earned him recognition, and he was awarded a coat of arms featuring a chained demi-Moor, or black person, as his crest. The rivalry with Spain was intensifying, and when Hawkins sailed for the third time in 1567, he effectively, though not officially, embarked on a national mission. Again, he abducted enslaved people and pushed his goods onto Spanish colonies. He was encouraged by discovering that these settlements were small and unprotected, so this time he dared to enter Vera Cruz, the port of Mexico, after capturing some Spaniards at sea to hold as hostages. He claimed he had been forced in by bad weather. The falsehood was obvious, but the Spanish officers present were too weak to resist. Hawkins was allowed to enter the harbor and repair his ships at the small rocky island of San Juan de Ulloa nearby. Unfortunately for him and a French corsair sailing with him, a strong Spanish force arrived, bringing the new viceroy. The Spaniards, just as dishonest as he was, pretended to honor the agreements made before their arrival, but then, when they thought he was vulnerable, they attacked him on September 24th. Only two ships escaped: his own, the “Minion,” and the “Judith,” a small vessel owned by his cousin Francis Drake. The journey home was miserable, and everyone suffered greatly.

For some years Hawkins did not return to the sea, though he continued to be interested in privateering voyages as a capitalist. In the course of 1572 he recovered part of his loss by pretending to betray the queen for a bribe to Spain. He acted with the knowledge of Lord Burleigh. In 1573 he became treasurer of the navy in succession to his father-in-law Benjamin Gonson. The office of comptroller was conferred on him soon after, and for the rest of his life he remained the principal administrative officer of the navy. Burleigh noted that he was suspected of fraud in his office, but the queen’s ships were kept by him in good condition. In 1588 he served as rear-admiral against the Spanish Armada and was knighted. In 1590 he was sent to the coast of Portugal to intercept the Spanish treasure fleet, but did not meet it. In giving an account of his failure to the queen he quoted the text “Paul doth plant, Apollo doth water, but God giveth the increase,” which exhibition of piety is said to have provoked the queen into exclaiming, “God’s death! This fool went out a soldier, and has come home a divine.” In 1595 he accompanied Drake on another treasure-hunting voyage to the West Indies, which was even less successful, and he died at sea off Porto Rico on the 12th of November 1595.

For several years, Hawkins stayed away from the sea, although he remained interested in privateering ventures as an investor. In 1572, he managed to recoup some of his losses by pretending to betray the queen for a bribe from Spain, doing so with the approval of Lord Burleigh. In 1573, he became the treasurer of the navy, taking over from his father-in-law, Benjamin Gonson. Shortly after, he was appointed comptroller and held the position of the navy's main administrative officer for the rest of his life. Burleigh noted that people suspected him of fraud in his role, but he kept the queen's ships in good shape. In 1588, he served as rear-admiral against the Spanish Armada and was knighted. In 1590, he was dispatched to the coast of Portugal to intercept the Spanish treasure fleet but failed to find it. When he reported his failure to the queen, he quoted, “Paul doth plant, Apollo doth water, but God giveth the increase," which reportedly led the queen to exclaim, “God’s death! This fool went out a soldier and has come home a divine.” In 1595, he joined Drake on another treasure-hunting expedition to the West Indies, which was even less successful, and he died at sea off Puerto Rico on November 12, 1595.

Hawkins was twice married, first to Katharine Gonson and then to Margaret Vaughan. He was counted a puritan when puritanism meant little beyond hatred of Spain and popery, and when these principles were an ever-ready excuse for voyages in search of slaves and plunder. In the course of one of his voyages, when he was becalmed and his negroes were dying, he consoled himself by the reflection that God would not suffer His elect to perish. Contemporary evidence can be produced to show that he was greedy, unscrupulous and rude. But if he had been a more delicate man he would not have risked the gallows by making piratical attacks on the Portuguese and by appearing in the West Indies as an armed smuggler; and in that case he would not have played an important part in history by setting the example of breaking down the pretension of the Spaniards to exclude all comers from the New World. His morality was that of the average stirring man of his time, whether in England or elsewhere.

Hawkins was married twice, first to Katharine Gonson and then to Margaret Vaughan. He was considered a puritan when puritanism really just meant hating Spain and Catholicism, and when these beliefs were often used as justifications for voyages aimed at capturing slaves and stealing. During one of his trips, when he was stuck without wind and his crew of enslaved people was dying, he comforted himself with the thought that God wouldn't let His chosen ones be lost. There’s plenty of evidence to show that he was greedy, ruthless, and impolite. But if he’d been a more sensitive person, he wouldn’t have risked execution by launching pirate attacks on the Portuguese and showing up in the West Indies as an armed smuggler; in that case, he wouldn't have played a significant role in history by setting the precedent of challenging the Spanish claim to keep everyone out of the New World. His sense of morality was typical for a bold man of his era, whether in England or elsewhere.

See R. A. J. Walling, A Sea-dog of Devon (1907); and Southey in his British Admirals, vol. iii. The original accounts of his voyages compiled by Hakluyt have been reprinted by the Hakluyt Society, with a preface by Sir C. R. Markham.

See R. A. J. Walling, A Sea-dog of Devon (1907); and Southey in his British Admirals, vol. iii. The original accounts of his voyages compiled by Hakluyt have been reprinted by the Hakluyt Society, with a preface by Sir C. R. Markham.


HAWKINS, SIR JOHN (1719-1789), English writer on music, was born on the 30th of March 1719, in London, the son of an architect who destined him for his own profession. Ultimately, however, Hawkins took to the law, devoting his leisure hours to his favourite study of music. A wealthy marriage in 1753 enabled him to indulge his passion for acquiring rare works of music, and he bought, for example, the collection formed by Dr Pepusch, and subsequently presented by Hawkins to the British Museum. It was on such materials that Hawkins 99 founded his celebrated work on the General History of the Science and Practice of Music, in 5 vols. (republished in 2 vols., 1876). It was brought out in 1776, the same year which witnessed the appearance of the first volume of Burney’s work on the same subject. The relative merits of the two works were eagerly discussed by contemporary critics. Burney no doubt is infinitely superior as a literary man, and his work accordingly comes much nearer the idea of a systematic treatise on the subject than Hawkins’s, which is essentially a collection of rare and valuable pieces of music with a more or less continuous commentary. But by rescuing these from oblivion Hawkins has given a permanent value to his work. Of Hawkins’s literary efforts apart from music it will be sufficient to mention his occasional contributions to the Gentleman’s Magazine, his edition (1760) of the Complete Angler (1787) and his biography of Dr Johnson, with whom he was intimately acquainted. He was one of the original members of the Ivy Lane Club, and ultimately became one of Dr Johnson’s executors. If there were any doubt as to his intimacy with Johnson, it would be settled by the slighting way in which Boswell refers to him. Speaking of the Ivy Lane Club, he mentions amongst the members “Mr John Hawkins, an attorney,” and adds the following footnote, which at the same time may serve as a summary of the remaining facts of Hawkins’s life: “He was for several years chairman of the Middlesex justices, and upon presenting an address to the king accepted the usual offer of knighthood (1772). He is the author of a History of Music in five volumes in quarto. By assiduous attendance upon Johnson in his last illness he obtained the office of one of his executors—in consequence of which the booksellers of London employed him to publish an edition of Dr Johnson’s works and to write his life.” Sir John Hawkins died on the 21st of May 1789, and was buried in the cloisters of Westminster Abbey.

HAWKINS, SIR JOHN (1719-1789), English writer on music, was born on March 30, 1719, in London, the son of an architect who intended him to follow in his footsteps. However, Hawkins eventually pursued a career in law while dedicating his free time to his love for music. A wealthy marriage in 1753 allowed him to indulge his passion for collecting rare musical works; for instance, he acquired a collection from Dr. Pepusch, which he later donated to the British Museum. Using these resources, Hawkins created his famous work, General History of the Science and Practice of Music, published in 5 volumes (later republished in 2 volumes in 1876). The book was released in 1776, the same year that saw the first volume of Burney’s study on the same topic. Critics of the time eagerly compared the two works. Burney is undoubtedly a superior writer, making his work approach more of a systematic treatise than Hawkins’s, which is primarily a compilation of rare and valuable music pieces accompanied by a continuous commentary. Nevertheless, by preserving these works, Hawkins has given lasting significance to his contributions. Regarding Hawkins’s literary work outside of music, it’s worth mentioning his occasional articles in the Gentleman’s Magazine, his edition (1760) of the Complete Angler (1787), and his biography of Dr. Johnson, with whom he had a close relationship. He was one of the founding members of the Ivy Lane Club and became one of Dr. Johnson’s executors. Any doubts about his closeness to Johnson would be resolved by the dismissive way Boswell describes him. Referring to the Ivy Lane Club, he notes among the members “Mr. John Hawkins, an attorney,” and adds a footnote that summarizes Hawkins’s life: “He was chairman of the Middlesex justices for several years and accepted the usual offer of knighthood after presenting an address to the king (1772). He authored a History of Music in five quarto volumes. By diligently attending to Johnson during his final illness, he became one of his executors, which led the booksellers of London to hire him to publish an edition of Dr. Johnson’s works and to write his biography.” Sir John Hawkins passed away on May 21, 1789, and was buried in the cloisters of Westminster Abbey.


HAWKINS, or Hawkyns, SIR RICHARD (c. 1562-1622), British seaman, was the only son of Admiral Sir John Hawkins (q.v.) by his first marriage. He was from his earliest days familiar with ships and the sea, and in 1582 he accompanied his uncle, William Hawkins, to the West Indies. In 1585 he was captain of a galliot in Drake’s expedition to the Spanish main, in 1588 he commanded a queen’s ship against the Armada, and in 1590 served with his father’s expedition to the coast of Portugal. In 1593 he purchased the “Dainty,” a ship originally built for his father and used by him in his expeditions, and sailed for the West Indies, the Spanish main and the South Seas. It seems clear that his project was to prey on the oversea possessions of the king of Spain. Hawkins, however, in an account of the voyage written thirty years afterwards, maintained, and by that time perhaps had really persuaded himself, that his expedition was undertaken purely for the purpose of geographical discovery. After visiting the coast of Brazil, the “Dainty” passed through the Straits of Magellan, and in due course reached Valparaiso. Having plundered the town, Hawkins pushed north, and in June 1594, a year after leaving Plymouth, arrived in the bay of San Mateo. Here the “Dainty” was attacked by two Spanish ships. Hawkins was hopelessly outmatched, but defended himself with great courage. At last, when he himself had been severely wounded, many of his men killed, and the “Dainty” was nearly sinking, he surrendered on the promise of a safe-conduct out of the country for himself and his crew. Through no fault of the Spanish commander this promise was not kept. In 1597 Hawkins was sent to Spain, and imprisoned first at Seville and subsequently at Madrid. He was released in 1602, and, returning to England, was knighted in 1603. In 1604 he became member of parliament for Plymouth and vice-admiral of Devon, a post which, as the coast was swarming with pirates, was no sinecure. In 1620-1621 he was vice-admiral, under Sir Robert Mansell, of the fleet sent into the Mediterranean to reduce the Algerian corsairs. He died in London on the 17th of April 1622.

HAWKINS, or Hawkins, SIR RICHARD (c. 1562-1622), British seaman, was the only son of Admiral Sir John Hawkins (q.v.) from his first marriage. He was familiar with ships and the sea from an early age, and in 1582 he joined his uncle, William Hawkins, on a trip to the West Indies. By 1585, he was captain of a galliot in Drake’s expedition to the Spanish Main, and in 1588 he commanded a queen’s ship against the Armada. In 1590, he served with his father’s expedition to the coast of Portugal. In 1593, he bought the “Dainty,” a ship originally built for his father and used in his expeditions, and set sail for the West Indies, the Spanish Main, and the South Seas. It seems clear that his plan was to raid the overseas territories of the King of Spain. However, in an account of the voyage written thirty years later, Hawkins insisted, and by that time perhaps truly believed, that his expedition was purely for the purpose of geographical discovery. After visiting the coast of Brazil, the “Dainty” passed through the Straits of Magellan and eventually reached Valparaiso. After plundering the town, Hawkins moved north, and in June 1594, a year after leaving Plymouth, arrived in the bay of San Mateo. Here, the “Dainty” was attacked by two Spanish ships. Hawkins was hopelessly outmatched but defended himself bravely. Eventually, after he had been severely wounded, many of his men killed, and with the “Dainty” nearly sinking, he surrendered on the promise of safe passage out of the country for himself and his crew. Through no fault of the Spanish commander, this promise was not fulfilled. In 1597, Hawkins was sent to Spain and imprisoned first in Seville and later in Madrid. He was released in 1602 and returned to England, where he was knighted in 1603. In 1604, he became a member of parliament for Plymouth and vice-admiral of Devon, a position that was no easy task as the coast was overrun with pirates. In 1620-1621, he served as vice-admiral, under Sir Robert Mansell, of the fleet sent to the Mediterranean to tackle the Algerian corsairs. He died in London on April 17, 1622.

See his Observations in his Voiage into the South Sea (1622), republished by the Hakluyt Society.

See his Observations in his Voyage into the South Sea (1622), republished by the Hakluyt Society.


HAWKS, FRANCIS LISTER (1798-1866), American clergyman, was born at Newbern, North Carolina, on the 10th of June 1798, and graduated at the university of his native state in 1815. After practising law with some distinction he entered the Episcopalian ministry in 1827 and proved a brilliant and impressive preacher, holding livings in New Haven, Philadelphia, New York and New Orleans, and declining several bishoprics. On his appointment as historiographer of his church in 1835, he went to England, and collected the abundant materials afterwards utilized in his Contributions to the Ecclesiastical History of U.S.A. (New York, 1836-1839). These two volumes dealt with Maryland and Virginia, while two later ones (1863-1864) were devoted to Connecticut. He was the first president of the university of Louisiana (now merged in Tulane). He died in New York on the 26th of September 1866.

HAWKS, FRANCIS LISTER (1798-1866), American clergyman, was born in Newbern, North Carolina, on June 10, 1798, and graduated from the university in his home state in 1815. After practicing law successfully, he entered the Episcopalian ministry in 1827 and became a remarkable and influential preacher, serving in New Haven, Philadelphia, New York, and New Orleans, while turning down several bishop positions. When he was appointed historiographer of his church in 1835, he traveled to England, where he gathered extensive materials later used in his Contributions to the Ecclesiastical History of U.S.A. (New York, 1836-1839). These two volumes focused on Maryland and Virginia, while two later volumes (1863-1864) were centered on Connecticut. He was the first president of the University of Louisiana (now part of Tulane). He passed away in New York on September 26, 1866.


HAWKSHAW, SIR JOHN (1811-1891), English engineer, was born in Yorkshire in 1811, and was educated at Leeds grammar school. Before he was twenty-one he had been engaged for six or seven years in railway engineering and the construction of roads in his native county, and in the year of his majority he obtained an appointment as engineer to the Bolivar Mining Association in Venezuela. But the climate there was more than his health could stand, and in 1834 he was obliged to return to England. He soon obtained employment under Jesse Hartley at the Liverpool docks, and subsequently was made engineer in charge of the railway and navigation works of the Manchester, Bury and Bolton Canal Company. In 1845 he became chief engineer to the Manchester & Leeds railway, and in 1847 to its successor, the Lancashire & Yorkshire railway, for which he constructed a large number of branch lines. In 1850 he removed to London and began to practise as a consulting engineer, at first alone, but subsequently in partnership with Harrison Hayter. In that capacity his work was of an extremely varied nature, embracing almost every branch of engineering. He retained his connexion with the Lancashire & Yorkshire Company until his retirement from professional work in 1888, and was consulted on all the important engineering points that affected it in that long period. In London he was responsible for the Charing Cross and Cannon Street railways, together with the two bridges which carried them over the Thames; he was engineer of the East London railway, which passes under the Thames through Sir M. I. Brunel’s well-known tunnel; and jointly with Sir J. Wolfe Barry he constructed the section of the Underground railway which completed the “inner circle” between the Aldgate and Mansion House stations. In addition, many railway works claimed his attention in all parts of the world—Germany, Russia, India, Mauritius, &c. One noteworthy point in his railway practice was his advocacy, in opposition to Robert Stephenson, of steeper gradients than had previously been thought desirable or possible, and so far back as 1838 he expressed decided disapproval of the maintenance of the broad gauge on the Great Western, because of the troubles he foresaw it would lead to in connexion with future railway extension, and because he objected in general to breaks of gauge in the lines of a country. The construction of canals was another branch of engineering in which he was actively engaged. In 1862 he became engineer of the Amsterdam ship-canal, and in the succeeding year he may fairly be said to have been the saviour of the Suez Canal. About that time the scheme was in very bad odour, and the khedive determined to get the opinion of an English engineer as to its practicability, having made up his mind to stop the works if that opinion was unfavourable. Hawkshaw was chosen to make the inquiry, and it was because his report was entirely favourable that M. de Lesseps was able to say at the opening ceremony that to him he owed the canal. As a member of the International Congress which considered the construction of an interoceanic canal across central America, he thought best of the Nicaraguan route, and privately he regarded the Panama scheme as impracticable at a reasonable cost, although publicly he expressed no opinion on the matter and left the Congress without voting. Sir John Hawkshaw also had a wide experience in constructing harbours (e.g. Holyhead) and docks (e.g. Penarth, the Albert Dock at Hull, and the south dock of the East and West India Docks in London), in river-engineering, in drainage and sewerage, 100 in water-supply, &c. He was engineer, with Sir James Brunlees, of the original Channel Tunnel Company from 1872, but many years previously he had investigated for himself the question of a tunnel under the Strait of Dover from an engineering point of view, and had come to a belief in its feasibility, so far as that could be determined from borings and surveys. Subsequently, however, he became convinced that the tunnel would not be to the advantage of Great Britain, and thereafter would have nothing to do with the project. He was also engineer of the Severn Tunnel, which, from its magnitude and the difficulties encountered in its construction, must rank as one of the most notable engineering undertakings of the 19th century. He died in London on the 2nd of June 1891.

HAWKSHAW, SIR JOHN (1811-1891), English engineer, was born in Yorkshire in 1811 and educated at Leeds grammar school. Before he turned twenty-one, he spent six or seven years in railway engineering and road construction in his home county. In the year he became of age, he was appointed as the engineer for the Bolivar Mining Association in Venezuela. However, the climate proved too harsh for his health, forcing him to return to England in 1834. He quickly found work under Jesse Hartley at the Liverpool docks and later became the engineer in charge of the railway and navigation projects for the Manchester, Bury, and Bolton Canal Company. By 1845, he was the chief engineer for the Manchester & Leeds railway, and in 1847 for its successor, the Lancashire & Yorkshire railway, for which he built many branch lines. In 1850, he moved to London and began working as a consulting engineer, initially on his own and later partnering with Harrison Hayter. His work was incredibly diverse, covering almost every aspect of engineering. He maintained his connection with the Lancashire & Yorkshire Company until he retired from professional work in 1888, and he was frequently consulted on major engineering issues affecting the company throughout that time. In London, he was responsible for the Charing Cross and Cannon Street railways, as well as the two bridges that crossed the Thames; he was the engineer for the East London railway, which runs beneath the Thames through Sir M. I. Brunel’s famous tunnel; and in partnership with Sir J. Wolfe Barry, he constructed the stretch of the Underground railway that completed the “inner circle” between Aldgate and Mansion House stations. Additionally, he was involved in many railway projects worldwide—Germany, Russia, India, Mauritius, etc. One significant aspect of his railway work was his support for steeper gradients than were previously considered acceptable, and as early as 1838, he expressed strong disapproval of maintaining the broad gauge on the Great Western, foreseeing issues with future railway expansion and opposing breaks of gauge within national rail lines. Canal construction was another area where he was actively involved. In 1862, he became the engineer for the Amsterdam ship canal, and the following year, he is often credited as the savior of the Suez Canal. At that time, the project was facing severe criticism, and the khedive sought the opinion of an English engineer regarding its viability, planning to halt the works if the feedback was negative. Hawkshaw was selected for this task, and it was due to his entirely positive report that M. de Lesseps could state at the opening ceremony that he owed the canal’s success to him. As a member of the International Congress considering the construction of an interoceanic canal across Central America, he preferred the Nicaraguan route and privately viewed the Panama scheme as unfeasible at a reasonable cost; however, he publicly refrained from expressing a personal opinion on the matter and left the Congress without casting a vote. Sir John Hawkshaw also had extensive experience in constructing harbors (e.g., Holyhead) and docks (e.g., Penarth, the Albert Dock in Hull, and the south dock of the East and West India Docks in London), river-engineering, drainage and sewerage, water supply, etc. He was an engineer, alongside Sir James Brunlees, for the original Channel Tunnel Company starting in 1872, but long before that, he investigated the feasibility of a tunnel under the Strait of Dover from an engineering perspective, concluding that it was possible based on borings and surveys. Later, however, he became convinced that the tunnel would not benefit Great Britain and subsequently disassociated himself from the project. He was also the engineer for the Severn Tunnel, which, due to its scale and the challenges faced during construction, is considered one of the most significant engineering projects of the 19th century. He passed away in London on June 2, 1891.


HAWKSLEY, THOMAS (1807-1893), English engineer, was born on the 12th of July 1807, at Arnold, near Nottingham. He was at Nottingham grammar school till the age of fifteen, but was indebted to his private studies for his knowledge of mathematics, chemistry and geology. In 1822 he was articled to an architect in Nottingham, subsequently becoming a partner in the firm, which also undertook engineering work; and in 1852 he removed to London, where he continued in active practice till he was well past eighty. His work was chiefly concerned with water and gas supply and with main-drainage. Of waterworks he used to say that he had constructed 150, and a long list might be drawn up of important towns that owe their water to his skill, including Liverpool, Sheffield, Leicester, Leeds, Derby, Darlington, Oxford, Cambridge and Northampton in England, and Stockholm, Altona and Bridgetown (Barbados) in other countries. To his native town of Nottingham he was water engineer for fifty years, and the system he designed for it was noteworthy from the fact that the principle of constant supply was adopted for the first time. The gas-works at Nottingham, and at many other towns for which he provided water supplies were also constructed by him. He designed main-drainage systems for Birmingham, Worcester and Windsor among other places, and in 1857 he was called in, together with G. P. Bidder and Sir J. Bazalgette, to report on the best solution of the vexed question of a main-drainage scheme for London. In 1872 he was president of the Institution of Civil Engineers—an office in which his son Charles followed him in 1901. He died in London on the 23rd of September 1893.

HAWKSLEY, THOMAS (1807-1893), an English engineer, was born on July 12, 1807, in Arnold, near Nottingham. He attended Nottingham grammar school until he was fifteen but gained his knowledge of mathematics, chemistry, and geology through self-study. In 1822, he became an apprentice to an architect in Nottingham and later became a partner in the firm, which also handled engineering projects. In 1852, he moved to London, where he practiced actively until well past eighty. His work primarily focused on water and gas supply as well as main drainage. He often claimed to have constructed 150 waterworks, and a substantial list could be compiled of important towns that depend on his expertise, including Liverpool, Sheffield, Leicester, Leeds, Derby, Darlington, Oxford, Cambridge, and Northampton in England, as well as Stockholm, Altona, and Bridgetown (Barbados) abroad. For his hometown of Nottingham, he served as the water engineer for fifty years, and the system he designed was significant for being the first to adopt the principle of constant supply. The gas works in Nottingham and many other towns that he provided water supplies for were also built by him. He designed main drainage systems for places like Birmingham, Worcester, and Windsor, among others, and in 1857 he was called in, along with G. P. Bidder and Sir J. Bazalgette, to advise on the best solution for the complicated issue of a main drainage scheme for London. In 1872, he became the president of the Institution of Civil Engineers—a position his son Charles took over in 1901. He passed away in London on September 23, 1893.


HAWKSMOOR, NICHOLAS (1661-1736), English architect, of Nottinghamshire birth, became a pupil of Sir Christopher Wren at the age of eighteen, and his name is intimately associated with those of Wren and Sir J. Vanbrugh in the English architecture of his time. Through Wren’s influence he obtained various official posts, as deputy-surveyor at Chelsea hospital, clerk of the works and deputy-surveyor at Greenwich hospital, clerk of the works at Whitehall, St James’s and Westminster, and he succeeded Wren as surveyor-general of Westminster Abbey. He took part in much of the work done by Wren and Vanbrugh, and it is difficult often to assign among them the credit for the designs of various features. Hawksmoor appears, however, to have been responsible for the early Gothic designs of the two towers of All Souls’ (Oxford) north quadrangle, and the library and other features at Queen’s College (Oxford). At the close of Queen Anne’s reign he had a principal part in the scheme for building fifty new churches in London, and himself designed five or six of them, including St Mary Woolnoth (1716-1719) and St George’s, Bloomsbury (1720-1730). A number of his drawings have been preserved. He died in London on the 25th of March 1736.

HAWKSMOOR, NICHOLAS (1661-1736), English architect, born in Nottinghamshire, became a student of Sir Christopher Wren at eighteen, and his name is closely linked with Wren and Sir J. Vanbrugh in the English architecture of his time. Thanks to Wren’s influence, he held various official positions, such as deputy-surveyor at Chelsea Hospital, clerk of the works and deputy-surveyor at Greenwich Hospital, clerk of the works at Whitehall, St James’s, and Westminster, and he succeeded Wren as surveyor-general of Westminster Abbey. He was involved in much of the work done by Wren and Vanbrugh, making it often challenging to attribute credit for various design features. Nonetheless, Hawksmoor seems to have been responsible for the early Gothic designs of the two towers of All Souls’ (Oxford) north quadrangle, as well as the library and other elements at Queen’s College (Oxford). Towards the end of Queen Anne’s reign, he played a key role in the plan to build fifty new churches in London, personally designing five or six of them, including St Mary Woolnoth (1716-1719) and St George’s, Bloomsbury (1720-1730). Several of his drawings have been preserved. He passed away in London on March 25, 1736.


HAWKWOOD, SIR JOHN (d. 1394), an English adventurer who attained great wealth and renown as a condottiere in the Italian wars of the 14th century. His name is variously spelt as Haccoude, Aucud, Aguto, &c., by contemporaries. It is said that he was the son of a tanner of Hedingham Sibil in Essex, and was apprenticed in London, whence he went, in the English army, to France under Edward III. and the Black Prince. It is said also that he obtained the favour of the Black Prince, and received knighthood from King Edward III., but though it is certain that he was of knightly rank, there is no evidence as to the time or place at which he won it. On the peace of Bretigny in 1360, he collected a band of men-at-arms, and moved southward to Italy, where we find the White Company, as his men were called, assisting the marquis of Monferrato against Milan in 1362-63, and the Pisans against Florence in 1364. After several campaigns in various parts of central Italy, Hawkwood in 1368 entered the service of Bernabò Visconti. In 1369 he fought for Perugia against the pope, and in 1370 for the Visconti against Pisa, Florence and other enemies. In 1372 he defeated the marquis of Monferrato, but soon afterwards, resenting the interference of a council of war with his plans, Hawkwood resigned his command, and the White Company passed into the papal service, in which he fought against the Visconti in 1373-1375. In 1375 the Florentines entered into an agreement with him, by which they were to pay him and his companion 130,000 gold florins in three months on condition that he undertook no engagement against them; and in the same year the priors of the arts and the gonfalonier decided to give him a pension of 1200 florins per annum for as long as he should remain in Italy. In 1377, under the orders of the cardinal Robert of Geneva, legate of Bologna, he massacred the inhabitants of Cesena, but in May of the same year, disliking the executioner’s work put upon him by the legate, he joined the anti-papal league, and married, at Milan, Donnina, an illegitimate daughter of Bernabò Visconti. In 1378 and 1379 Hawkwood was constantly in the field; he quarrelled with Bernabò in 1378, and entered the service of Florence, receiving, as in 1375, 130,000 gold florins. He rendered good service to the republic up to 1382, when for a time he was one of the English ambassadors at the papal court. He engaged in a brief campaign in Naples in 1383, fought for the marquis of Padua against Verona in 1386, and in 1388 made an unsuccessful effort against Gian Galeazzo Visconti, who had murdered Bernabò. In 1390 the Florentines took up the war against Gian Galeazzo in earnest, and appointed Hawkwood commander-in-chief. His campaign against the Milanese army in the Veronese and the Bergamask was reckoned a triumph of generalship, and in 1392 Florence exacted a satisfactory peace from Gian Galeazzo. His latter years were spent in a villa in the neighbourhood of Florence. On his death in 1394 the republic gave him a public funeral of great magnificence, and decreed the erection of a marble monument in the cathedral. This, however, was never executed; but Paolo Uccelli painted his portrait in terre-verte on the inner façade of the building, where it still remains, though damaged by removal from the plaster to canvas. Richard II. of England, probably at the instigation of Hawkwood’s sons, who returned to their native country, requested the Florentines to let him remove the good knight’s bones, and the Florentine government signified its consent.

HAWKWOOD, SIR JOHN (d. 1394), was an English adventurer who gained significant wealth and fame as a condottiere during the Italian wars of the 14th century. His name was spelled variously by contemporaries, including Haccoude, Aucud, Aguto, and others. He is believed to be the son of a tanner from Hedingham Sibil in Essex and was apprenticed in London. From there, he joined the English army and went to France under Edward III and the Black Prince. He is said to have won the favor of the Black Prince and received knighthood from King Edward III; however, there is no clear evidence of when or where he was knighted. Following the peace of Bretigny in 1360, he gathered a group of men-at-arms and headed south to Italy, where his fighters, known as the White Company, aided the marquis of Monferrato against Milan in 1362-63 and the Pisans against Florence in 1364. After several campaigns across central Italy, Hawkwood joined the service of Bernabò Visconti in 1368. He fought for Perugia against the pope in 1369 and for the Visconti against Pisa, Florence, and other foes in 1370. In 1372, he defeated the marquis of Monferrato but soon grew resentful of a council of war interfering with his plans, which led him to resign his command. The White Company then entered the papal service, where he fought against the Visconti from 1373 to 1375. In 1375, the Florentines agreed to pay him and his companion 130,000 gold florins within three months on the condition that he wouldn't engage against them; that same year, the priors of the arts and the gonfalonier decided to grant him a pension of 1200 florins per year for the duration of his stay in Italy. In 1377, under the orders of Cardinal Robert of Geneva, legate of Bologna, he massacred the people of Cesena, but later that year, disliking the brutal tasks assigned to him by the legate, he joined the anti-papal league and married Donnina, an illegitimate daughter of Bernabò Visconti, in Milan. Hawkwood was active in 1378 and 1379, quarreling with Bernabò in 1378 and then serving Florence, again receiving 130,000 gold florins. He provided valuable service to the republic until 1382 when he briefly served as one of the English ambassadors at the papal court. He engaged in a short campaign in Naples in 1383, fought for the marquis of Padua against Verona in 1386, and in 1388 attempted unsuccessfully to confront Gian Galeazzo Visconti, who had killed Bernabò. In 1390, the Florentines began serious warfare against Gian Galeazzo, appointing Hawkwood as commander-in-chief. His campaign against the Milanese army in the Veronese and Bergamask was deemed a triumph of military strategy, and by 1392, Florence secured a favorable peace from Gian Galeazzo. He spent his final years in a villa near Florence. Upon his death in 1394, the republic held a grand public funeral for him and decided to build a marble monument in the cathedral. However, this was never realized; instead, Paolo Uccelli painted his portrait in terre-verte on the inner façade of the building, where it remains today, albeit damaged from being transferred from plaster to canvas. Richard II of England, likely influenced by Hawkwood's sons who returned to their homeland, asked the Florentines for permission to remove the knight's remains, and the Florentine government agreed.

Of his children by Donnina Visconti, who appears to have been his second wife, the eldest daughter married Count Brezaglia of Porciglia, podestá of Ferrara, who succeeded him as Florentine commander-in-chief, and another a German condottiere named Conrad Prospergh. His son, John, returned to England and settled at Hedingham Sibil, where, it is supposed, Sir John Hawkwood was buried. The children of the first marriage were two sons and three daughters, and of the latter the youngest married John Shelley, an ancestor of the poet.

Of his children with Donnina Visconti, who seems to be his second wife, the oldest daughter married Count Brezaglia of Porciglia, who was the podestà of Ferrara and took over as the Florentine commander-in-chief after him. Another daughter married a German mercenary named Conrad Prospergh. His son, John, went back to England and settled in Hedingham Sibil, where it's believed Sir John Hawkwood is buried. The children from his first marriage included two sons and three daughters, with the youngest daughter marrying John Shelley, an ancestor of the poet.

Authorities.—Muratori, Rerum Italicarum scriptores, and supplement by Tartinius and Manni; Archivio storico italiano; Temple-Leader and Marcotti, Giovanni Acuto (Florence, 1889; Eng. transl., Leader Scott, London, 1889); Nichol, Bibliotheca topographica Britannica, vol. vi.; J. G. Alger in Register and Magazine of Biography, v. 1.; and article in Dict. Nat. Biog.

Sources.—Muratori, Rerum Italicarum scriptores, along with supplements by Tartinius and Manni; Archivio storico italiano; Temple-Leader and Marcotti, Giovanni Acuto (Florence, 1889; English translation by Leader Scott, London, 1889); Nichol, Bibliotheca topographica Britannica, vol. vi.; J. G. Alger in Register and Magazine of Biography, vol. 1.; and an article in Dict. Nat. Biog.


HAWLEY, HENRY (c. 1679-1759), British lieut.-general, entered the army, it is said, in 1694. He saw service in the War of Spanish Succession as a captain of Erle’s (the 19th) foot. After Almanza he returned to England, and a few years later had become lieut.-colonel of the 19th. With this regiment he served at Sheriffmuir in 1715, where he was wounded. After this for some years he served in the United Kingdom, obtaining promotion in the usual course, and in 1739 he arrived at the grade of major general. Four years later he accompanied George II. 101 and Stair to Germany, and, as a general officer of cavalry under Sir John Cope, was present at Dettingen. Becoming lieut.-general somewhat later, he was second-in-command of the cavalry at Fontenoy, and on the 20th of December 1745 became commander-in-chief in Scotland. Less than a month later Hawley suffered a severe defeat at Falkirk at the hands of the Highland insurgents. This, however, did not cost him his command, for the duke of Cumberland, who was soon afterwards sent north, was captain-general. Under Cumberland’s orders Hawley led the cavalry in the campaign of Culloden, and at that battle his dragoons distinguished themselves by their ruthless butchery of the fugitive rebels. After the end of the “Forty-Five” he accompanied Cumberland to the Low Countries and led the allied cavalry at Lauffeld (Val). He ended his career as governor of Portsmouth and died at that place in 1759. James Wolfe, his brigade-major, wrote of General Hawley in no flattering terms. “The troops dread his severity, hate the man and hold his military knowledge in contempt,” he wrote. But, whether it be true or false that he was the natural son of George II., Hawley was always treated with the greatest favour by that king and by his son the duke of Cumberland.

HAWLEY, HENRY (c. 1679-1759), British lieutenant general, joined the army, it is said, in 1694. He served in the War of Spanish Succession as a captain of Erle’s (the 19th) foot. After the Battle of Almanza, he returned to England, and a few years later became lieutenant colonel of the 19th. He fought at Sheriffmuir in 1715, where he was wounded. After that, he served in the United Kingdom for a few years, moving up the ranks as expected, and by 1739 had reached the rank of major general. Four years later, he went to Germany with George II and Stair, and as a general officer of cavalry under Sir John Cope, he was present at Dettingen. He later became a lieutenant general and was second-in-command of the cavalry at Fontenoy, and on December 20, 1745, he took over as commander-in-chief in Scotland. Less than a month later, Hawley faced a major defeat at Falkirk against the Highland insurgents. However, this did not cost him his command, as the duke of Cumberland, who was sent north shortly after, was captain-general. Under Cumberland’s orders, Hawley led the cavalry in the Culloden campaign, where his dragoons gained infamy for their brutal slaughter of fleeing rebels. After the “Forty-Five,” he accompanied Cumberland to the Low Countries and led the allied cavalry at Lauffeld (Val). He ended his career as governor of Portsmouth and died there in 1759. James Wolfe, his brigade major, described General Hawley in unflattering terms: “The troops dread his severity, hate the man and hold his military knowledge in contempt,” he wrote. However, whether or not it was true that he was the illegitimate son of George II, Hawley was always treated with the utmost favor by that king and his son, the duke of Cumberland.


HAWLEY, JOSEPH ROSWELL (1826-1905), American political leader, was born on the 31st of October at Stewartsville, Richmond county, North Carolina, where his father, a native of Connecticut, was pastor of a Baptist church. The father returned to Connecticut in 1837 and the son graduated at Hamilton College (Clinton, N.Y.) in 1847. He was admitted to the bar in 1850, and practised at Hartford, Conn., for six years. An ardent opponent of slavery, he became a Free Soiler, was a delegate to the National Convention which nominated John P. Hale for the presidency in 1852, and subsequently served as chairman of the State Committee, having at the same time editorial control of the Charter Oak, the party organ. In 1856 he took a leading part in organizing the Republican party in Connecticut, and in 1857 became editor of the Hartford Evening Press, a newly established Republican newspaper. He served in the Federal army throughout the Civil War, rising from the rank of captain (April 22, 1861) to that of brigadier-general of volunteers (Sept. 1864); took part in the Port Royal Expedition, in the capture of Fort Pulaski (April 1862), in the siege of Charleston and the capture of Fort Wagner (Sept. 1863), in the battle of Olustee (Feb. 20, 1864), in the siege operations about Petersburg, and in General W. T. Sherman’s campaign in the Carolinas; and in September 1865 received the brevet of major-general of volunteers. From April 1866 to April 1867 he was governor of Connecticut, and in 1867 he bought the Hartford Courant, with which he combined the Press, and which became under his editorship the most influential newspaper in Connecticut and one of the leading Republican papers in the country. He was the permanent chairman of the Republican National Convention in 1868, was a delegate to the conventions of 1872, 1876 and 1880, was a member of Congress from December 1872 until March 1875 and again in 1879-1881, and was a United States senator from 1881 until the 3rd of March 1905, being one of the Republican leaders both in the House and the Senate. From 1873 to 1876 he was president of the United States Centennial Commission, the great success of the Centennial Exhibition being largely due to him. He died at Washington, D.C., on the 17th of March 1905.

HAWLEY, JOSEPH ROSWELL (1826-1905), American political leader, was born on October 31st in Stewartsville, Richmond County, North Carolina, where his father, originally from Connecticut, was the pastor of a Baptist church. His father returned to Connecticut in 1837, and the son graduated from Hamilton College (Clinton, N.Y.) in 1847. He was admitted to the bar in 1850 and practiced law in Hartford, Connecticut, for six years. A passionate opponent of slavery, he became a Free Soiler, served as a delegate to the National Convention that nominated John P. Hale for president in 1852, and later became chairman of the State Committee while also overseeing the editorial direction of the Charter Oak, the party’s newspaper. In 1856, he played a key role in organizing the Republican Party in Connecticut, and in 1857 he became editor of the Hartford Evening Press, a newly launched Republican newspaper. He served in the Federal army throughout the Civil War, advancing from captain (April 22, 1861) to brigadier general of volunteers (September 1864); he participated in the Port Royal Expedition, the capture of Fort Pulaski (April 1862), the siege of Charleston, and the capture of Fort Wagner (September 1863), the battle of Olustee (February 20, 1864), the siege operations at Petersburg, and General W. T. Sherman’s campaign in the Carolinas. In September 1865, he received the honorary rank of major general of volunteers. From April 1866 to April 1867, he served as governor of Connecticut, and in 1867, he purchased the Hartford Courant, which he merged with the Press, turning it into the most influential newspaper in Connecticut and one of the leading Republican papers in the nation. He was the permanent chairman of the Republican National Convention in 1868, attended the conventions of 1872, 1876, and 1880 as a delegate, served as a member of Congress from December 1872 until March 1875, and again from 1879 to 1881, and was a United States senator from 1881 until March 3, 1905, becoming one of the Republican leaders in both the House and the Senate. From 1873 to 1876, he served as president of the United States Centennial Commission, greatly contributing to the success of the Centennial Exhibition. He passed away in Washington, D.C., on March 17, 1905.


HAWORTH, an urban district in the Keighley parliamentary division of the West Riding of Yorkshire, England, 10 m. N.W. of Bradford, on a branch of the Midland railway. Pop. (1901), 7492. It is picturesquely situated on a steep slope, lying high, and surrounded by moorland. The Rev. Patrick Brontë (d. 1861) was incumbent here for forty-one years, and a memorial near the west window of St Michael’s church bears his name and the names of his gifted daughters upon it. The grave of Charlotte and Emily Brontë is also marked by a brass. In 1895 a museum was opened by the Brontë society. There is a large worsted industry.

HAWORTH, is an urban district in the Keighley parliamentary division of West Yorkshire, England, 10 miles northwest of Bradford, on a branch of the Midland railway. Population (1901): 7,492. It is beautifully located on a steep slope, sitting high and surrounded by moorland. The Rev. Patrick Brontë (d. 1861) served as the incumbent here for forty-one years, and a memorial near the west window of St Michael’s Church features his name along with the names of his talented daughters. The graves of Charlotte and Emily Brontë are also marked with a brass plaque. In 1895, a museum was opened by the Brontë Society. There is a significant worsted industry.


HAWSER (in sense and form as if from “hawse,” which, from the 16th-century form halse, is derived from Teutonic hals, neck, of which there is a Scandinavian use in the sense of the forepart of a ship; the two words are not etymologically connected; “hawser” is from an O. Fr. haucier, hausser, to raise, tow, hoist, from the Late Lat. altiare, to lift, altus, high), a small cable or thick rope used at sea for the purposes of mooring or warping, in the case of large vessels made of steel. When a cable or tow line is made of three or more small ropes it is said to be “hawser-laid.” The “hawse” of a ship is that part of the bows where the “hawse-holes” are made. These are two holes cut in the bows of a vessel for the cables to pass through, having small cast-iron pipes, called “hawse-pipes,” fitted into them to prevent abrasion. In bad weather at sea these holes are plugged up with “hawse-plugs” to prevent the water entering. The phrase to enter the service by the “hawse-holes” is used of those who have risen from before the mast to commissioned rank in the navy. When the ship is at anchor the space between her head and the anchor is called “hawse,” as in the phrase “athwart the hawse.” The term also applies to the position of the ship’s anchors when moored; when they are laid out in a line at right angles to the wind it is said to be moored with an “open hawse”; when both cables are laid out straight to their anchors without crossing, it is a “clear hawse.”

HAWSER (in meaning and form as if from “hawse,” which, from the 16th-century form halse, comes from Teutonic hals, meaning neck, and has a Scandinavian use referring to the front part of a ship; the two words are not etymologically related; “hawser” comes from Old French haucier, hausser, to raise, tow, hoist, from Late Latin altiare, to lift, altus, high), is a small cable or thick rope used at sea for mooring or warping, especially on large steel vessels. When a cable or tow line is made of three or more small ropes, it's called “hawser-laid.” The “hawse” of a ship is the part of the bow where the “hawse-holes” are located. These are two holes cut in the bow of a vessel for the cables to go through, fitted with small cast-iron pipes called “hawse-pipes” to prevent wear. In rough seas, these holes are sealed with “hawse-plugs” to stop water from entering. The phrase to enter the service through the “hawse-holes” refers to those who have advanced from the lower ranks to commissioned officer positions in the navy. When the ship is anchored, the space between her bow and the anchor is called “hawse,” as in the phrase “athwart the hawse.” The term also describes the position of the ship’s anchors when moored; if they are aligned at right angles to the wind, it’s said to be moored with an “open hawse”; if both cables lead straight to their anchors without crossing, it’s a “clear hawse.”


HAWTHORN, a city of Bourke county, Victoria, Australia, 4½ m. by rail E. of and suburban to Melbourne. Pop. (1901), 21,339. It is the seat of the important Methodist Ladies’ College. The majority of the inhabitants are professional and business men engaged in Melbourne and their residences are numerous at Hawthorn.

HAWTHORN, a city in Bourke County, Victoria, Australia, located 4.5 miles by rail east of and suburban to Melbourne. Population (1901), 21,339. It is home to the prominent Methodist Ladies' College. Most residents are professionals and businesspeople who work in Melbourne and have many homes in Hawthorn.


HAWTHORN (O. Eng. haga-, hæg-, or hege-thorn, i.e. “hedge-thorn”), the common name for Crataegus, in botany, a genus of shrubs or small trees belonging to the natural order Rosaceae, native of the north temperate regions, especially America. It is represented in the British Isles by the hawthorn, white-thorn or may (Ger. Hagedorn and Christdorn; Fr. aubépine), C. Oxyacantha, a small, round-headed, much-branched tree, 10 to 20 ft. high, the branches often ending in single sharp spines. The leaves, which are deeply cut, are 1 to 2 in. long and very variable in shape. The flowers are sweet-scented, in flat-topped clusters, and ½ to ¾ in. in diameter, with five spreading white petals alternating with five persistent green sepals, a large number of stamens with pinkish-brown anthers, and one to three carpels sunk in the cup-shaped floral axis. The fruit, or haw, as in the apple, consists of the swollen floral axis, which is usually scarlet, and forms a fleshy envelope surrounding the hard stone.

HAWTHORN (Old English haga-, hæg-, or hege-thorn, meaning “hedge-thorn”), is the common name for Crataegus, which is a genus of shrubs or small trees in the Rosaceae family, native to the northern temperate regions, especially in America. In the British Isles, it is represented by the hawthorn, white-thorn, or may (German Hagedorn and Christdorn; French aubépine), C. Oxyacantha, a small, round-headed, highly branched tree that grows 10 to 20 feet tall, with branches that often end in single sharp spines. The leaves are deeply lobed, measuring 1 to 2 inches long and vary greatly in shape. The flowers are fragrant, arranged in flat-topped clusters, and are ½ to ¾ inch in diameter, featuring five spreading white petals that alternate with five persistent green sepals, numerous stamens with pinkish-brown anthers, and one to three carpels embedded in the cup-shaped floral base. The fruit, called a haw, similar to an apple, consists of the swollen floral base, which is usually bright red, forming a fleshy covering around the hard stone.

The common hawthorn is a native of Europe as far north as 60½° in Sweden, and of North Africa, western Asia and Siberia, and has been naturalized in North America and Australia. It thrives best in dry soils, and in height varies from 4 or 5 to 12, 15 or, in exceptional cases, as much as between 20 and 30 ft. It may be propagated from seed or from cuttings. The seeds must be from ripe fruit, and if fresh gathered should be freed from pulp by maceration in water. They germinate only in the second year after sowing; in the course of their first year the seedlings attain a height of 6 to 12 in. Hawthorn has been for many centuries a favourite park and hedge plant in Europe, and numerous varieties have been developed by cultivation; these differ in the form of the leaf, the white, pink or red, single or double flowers, and the yellow, orange or red fruit. In England the hawthorn, owing to its hardiness and closeness of growth, has been employed for enclosure of land since the Roman occupation, but for ordinary field hedges it is believed it was generally in use till about the end of the 17th century. James I. of Scotland, in his Quair, ii. 14 (early 15th century), mentions the “hawthorn hedges knet” of Windsor Castle. The first hawthorn hedges in Scotland are said to have been planted by soldiers of Cromwell at Inch Buckling Brae in East Lothian and Finlarig in Perthshire. Annual pruning, to which the hawthorn is particularly amenable, is necessary if the hedge is to maintain its compactness and sturdiness. When the lower part shows a tendency to go bare the strong stems may be “plashed,” i.e. split, bent over and pegged to the ground so that new growths may start. The wood of the hawthorn is white in colour, with 102 a yellowish tinge. Fresh cut it weighs 68 ℔ 12 oz. per cubic foot, and dry 57 ℔ 3 oz. It can seldom be obtained in large portions, and has the disadvantage of being apt to warp; its great hardness, however, renders it valuable for the manufacture of various articles, such as the cogs of mill-wheels, flails and mallets, and handles of hammers. Both green and dry it forms excellent fuel. The bark possesses tanning properties, and in Scotland in past times yielded with ferrous sulphate a black dye for wool. The leaves are eaten by cattle, and have been employed as a substitute for tea. Birds and deer feed upon the haws, which are used in the preparation of a fermented and highly intoxicating liquor. The hawthorn serves as a stock for grafting other trees. As an ornamental feature in landscapes, it is worthy of notice; and the pleasing shelter it affords and the beauty of its blossoms have frequently been alluded to by poets. The custom of employing the flowering branches for decorative purposes on the 1st of May is of very early origin; but since the alteration in the calendar the tree has rarely been in full bloom in England before the second week of that month. In the Scottish Highlands the flowers may be seen as late as the middle of June. The hawthorn has been regarded as the emblem of hope, and its branches are stated to have been carried by the ancient Greeks in wedding processions, and to have been used by them to deck the altar of Hymen. The supposition that the tree was the source of Christ’s crown of thorns gave rise doubtless to the tradition current among the French peasantry that it utters groans and cries on Good Friday, and probably also to the old popular superstition in Great Britain and Ireland that ill-luck attended the uprooting of hawthorns. Branches of the Glastonbury thorn, C. Oxyacantha, var. praecox, which flowers both in December and in spring, were formerly highly valued in England, on account of the legend that the tree was originally the staff of Joseph of Arimathea.

The common hawthorn is native to Europe as far north as 60½° in Sweden, as well as North Africa, western Asia, and Siberia. It has also been naturalized in North America and Australia. It grows best in dry soils, and in height varies from 4 to 5 feet up to 12, 15, or in rare cases, between 20 and 30 feet. It can be propagated from seeds or cuttings. The seeds must come from ripe fruit, and if freshly gathered, they should be cleaned of pulp by soaking in water. They only germinate in the second year after being sown; in the first year, the seedlings reach a height of 6 to 12 inches. Hawthorn has been a popular choice for parks and hedges in Europe for many centuries, and many varieties have been cultivated, differing in leaf shape, and the color of their single or double flowers which can be white, pink, or red, as well as their fruit which can be yellow, orange, or red. In England, because of its hardiness and dense growth, hawthorn has been used for land enclosures since the Roman occupation. However, it is believed that for regular field hedges, its use became more common until about the end of the 17th century. James I of Scotland mentions the "hawthorn hedges knet" of Windsor Castle in his Quair, ii. 14 (early 15th century). The first hawthorn hedges in Scotland are said to have been planted by Cromwell's soldiers at Inch Buckling Brae in East Lothian and Finlarig in Perthshire. Annual pruning, which the hawthorn responds well to, is necessary for the hedge to maintain its compactness and strength. When the lower part starts to become bare, the thick stems can be "plashed," which means they are split, bent over, and secured to the ground to encourage new growth. The wood of the hawthorn is white with a yellowish tint. When freshly cut, it weighs 68 lbs 12 oz per cubic foot, and dry it weighs 57 lbs 3 oz. It is rarely available in large quantities and has the downside of being prone to warping; however, its great hardness makes it useful for making various items, such as mill-wheel cogs, flails, mallets, and hammer handles. Whether green or dry, it makes excellent fuel. The bark has tanning properties, and in Scotland, it used to produce a black dye for wool when combined with ferrous sulfate. Cattle eat the leaves, which have also been used as a tea substitute. Birds and deer eat the haws, which are used to make a fermented and highly intoxicating drink. Hawthorn serves as a rootstock for grafting other trees. It stands out as an ornamental feature in landscapes, and the pleasant shelter it provides and the beauty of its blossoms have often been mentioned by poets. The practice of using flowering branches for decoration on May 1st has a long history; however, due to changes in the calendar, the tree rarely blooms fully in England before the second week of that month. In the Scottish Highlands, flowers can be seen as late as mid-June. The hawthorn has been seen as a symbol of hope, and its branches are said to have been carried by ancient Greeks in wedding processions and used to decorate the altar of Hymen. The belief that the tree was the source of Christ’s crown of thorns likely contributed to the tradition among French peasants that it groans and cries on Good Friday. This may also relate to the old superstition in Great Britain and Ireland that uprooting hawthorns brings bad luck. Branches of the Glastonbury thorn, C. Oxyacantha, var. praecox, which blooms in both December and spring, were once highly valued in England due to the legend that the tree was originally the staff of Joseph of Arimathea.

The number of species in the genus is from fifty to seventy, according to the view taken as to whether or not some of the forms, especially of those occurring in the United States, represent distinct species. C. coccinea, a native of Canada and the eastern United States, with bright scarlet fruits, was introduced into English gardens towards the end of the 17th century. C. Crus-Galli, with a somewhat similar distribution and introduced about the same time, is a very decorative species with showy, bright red fruit, often remaining on the branches till spring, and leaves assuming a brilliant scarlet and orange in the autumn; numerous varieties are in cultivation. C. Pyracantha, known in gardens as pyracantha, is evergreen and has white flowers, appearing in May, and fine scarlet fruits of the size of a pea which remain on the tree nearly all the winter. It is a native of south Europe and was introduced into Britain early in the 17th century.

The number of species in the genus ranges from fifty to seventy, depending on whether some of the forms, particularly those found in the United States, are considered distinct species. C. coccinea, native to Canada and the eastern United States, features bright scarlet fruits and was introduced into English gardens toward the end of the 17th century. C. Crus-Galli, which has a similar distribution and was introduced around the same time, is a very decorative species with showy, bright red fruit that often stays on the branches until spring. Its leaves turn a brilliant scarlet and orange in the autumn, and there are many varieties in cultivation. C. Pyracantha, commonly known in gardens as pyracantha, is evergreen and produces white flowers in May, along with small scarlet fruits the size of peas that remain on the tree throughout most of the winter. It is native to southern Europe and was introduced to Britain in the early 17th century.


HAWTHORNE, NATHANIEL (1804-1864), American writer, son of Nathaniel Hathorne (1776-1808), was born at Salem, Massachusetts, on the 4th of July 1804. The head of the American branch of the family, William Hathorne of Wilton, Wiltshire, England, emigrated with Winthrop and his company, and arrived at Salem Bay, Mass., on the 12th of June 1630. He had grants of land at Dorchester, where he resided for upwards of six years, when he was persuaded to remove to Salem by the tender of further grants of land there, it being considered a public benefit that he should become an inhabitant of that town. He represented his fellow-townsmen in the legislature, and served them in a military capacity as a captain in the first regular troop organized in Salem, which he led to victory through an Indian campaign in Maine. Originally a determined “Separatist,” and opposed to compulsion for conscience, he signalized himself when a magistrate by the active part which he took in the Quaker persecutions of the time (1657-1662), going so far on one occasion as to order the whipping of Anne Coleman and four other Friends through Salem, Boston and Dedham. He died, an old man, in the odour of sanctity, and left a good property to his son John, who inherited his father’s capacity and intolerance, and was in turn a legislator, a magistrate, a soldier and a bitter persecutor of witches. Before the death of Justice Hathorne in 1717, the destiny of the family suffered a sea-change, and they began to be noted as mariners. One of these seafaring Hathornes figured in the Revolution as a privateer, who had the good fortune to escape from a British prison-ship; and another, Captain Daniel Hathorne, has left his mark on early American ballad-lore. He too was a privateer, commander of the brig “Fair American,” which, cruising off the coast of Portugal, fell in with a British scow laden with troops for General Howe, which scow the bold Hathorne and his valiant crew at once engaged and fought for over an hour, until the vanquished enemy was glad to cut the Yankee grapplings and quickly bear away. The last of the Hathornes with whom we are concerned was a son of this sturdy old privateer, Nathaniel Hathorne. He was born in 1776, and about the beginning of the 19th century married Miss Elizabeth Clarke Manning, a daughter of Richard Manning of Salem, whose ancestors emigrated to America about fifty years after the arrival of William Hathorne. Young Nathaniel took his hereditary place before the mast, passed from the forecastle to the cabin, made voyages to the East and West Indies, Brazil and Africa, and finally died of fever at Surinam, in the spring of 1808. He was the father of three children, the second of whom was the subject of this article. The form of the family name was changed by the latter to “Hawthorne” in his early manhood.

HAWTHORNE, NATHANIEL (1804-1864), American writer, son of Nathaniel Hathorne (1776-1808), was born in Salem, Massachusetts, on July 4, 1804. The head of the American branch of the family, William Hathorne from Wilton, Wiltshire, England, emigrated with Winthrop and his company, arriving at Salem Bay, Massachusetts, on June 12, 1630. He received land grants in Dorchester, where he lived for over six years, before being persuaded to move to Salem due to the promise of more land, as it was considered beneficial for him to become a resident there. He represented his fellow townspeople in the legislature and served in a military role as a captain in the first regular troop organized in Salem, leading them to victory in an Indian campaign in Maine. Originally a strong “Separatist” and against forced beliefs, he made a name for himself as a magistrate by playing an active role in the Quaker persecutions of the time (1657-1662), even ordering the whipping of Anne Coleman and four other Friends through Salem, Boston, and Dedham on one occasion. He died as an old man, remembered well, and left a substantial property to his son John, who inherited his father’s skills and intolerance, becoming a legislator, magistrate, soldier, and a fierce persecutor of witches. Before Justice Hathorne’s death in 1717, the family's fortune changed, and they became known as sailors. One of these seafaring Hathornes participated in the Revolution as a privateer, managing to escape from a British prison ship; another, Captain Daniel Hathorne, made his mark in early American ballads. He was also a privateer, commanding the brig “Fair American,” which, while cruising off the coast of Portugal, encountered a British scow filled with troops for General Howe. Hathorne and his brave crew engaged the enemy for over an hour until the defeated foe was forced to cut their lines and quickly retreat. The last of the Hathornes relevant to our story was a son of this sturdy old privateer, Nathaniel Hathorne. He was born in 1776 and, around the turn of the 19th century, married Miss Elizabeth Clarke Manning, daughter of Richard Manning of Salem, whose ancestors arrived in America about fifty years after William Hathorne. Young Nathaniel took his inherited place at sea, moving from the forecastle to the cabin, making voyages to the East and West Indies, Brazil, and Africa, and ultimately died of fever in Surinam in the spring of 1808. He had three children, the second of whom is the subject of this article. The family name was changed to “Hawthorne” by the latter in his early adulthood.

After the death of her husband Mrs Hawthorne removed to the house of her father with her little family of children. Of the boyhood of Nathaniel no particulars have reached us, except that he was fond of taking long walks alone, and that he used to declare to his mother that he would go to sea some time and would never return. Among the books that he is known to have read as a child were Shakespeare, Milton, Pope and Thomson, The Castle of Indolence being an especial favourite. In the autumn of 1818 bis mother removed to Raymond, a town in Cumberland county, Maine, where his uncle, Richard Manning, had built a large and ambitious dwelling. Here the lad resumed his solitary walks, exchanging the narrow streets of Salem for the boundless, primeval wilderness, and its sluggish harbour for the fresh bright waters of Sebago lake. He roamed the woods by day, with his gun and rod, and in the moonlight nights of winter skated upon the lake alone till midnight. When he found himself away from home, and wearied with his exercise, he took refuge in a log cabin where half a tree would be burning upon the hearth. He had by this time acquired a taste for writing, that showed itself in a little blank-book, in which he jotted down his woodland adventures and feelings, and which was remarkable for minute observation and nice perception of nature.

After her husband passed away, Mrs. Hawthorne moved to her father's house with her young children. We don't have many details about Nathaniel's childhood, except that he enjoyed long walks by himself and would often tell his mother that he planned to go to sea one day and never come back. Some of the books he read as a child included Shakespeare, Milton, Pope, and Thomson, with The Castle of Indolence being a particular favorite. In the fall of 1818, his mother moved to Raymond, a town in Cumberland County, Maine, where his uncle, Richard Manning, had built a large and impressive house. There, the boy resumed his solitary walks, trading the narrow streets of Salem for the vast, untamed wilderness, and the sluggish harbor for the clear, sparkling waters of Sebago Lake. He explored the woods during the day with his gun and fishing rod, and on bright winter nights, he skated on the lake alone until midnight. Whenever he found himself away from home and tired from his activities, he would seek refuge in a log cabin where a large fire burned in the hearth. By this time, he had developed a passion for writing, which he showcased in a small blank book where he noted down his woodland adventures and feelings, notable for their detailed observations and keen understanding of nature.

After a year’s residence at Raymond, Nathaniel returned to Salem in order to prepare for college. He amused himself by publishing a manuscript periodical, which he called the Spectator, and which displayed considerable vivacity and talent. He speculated upon the profession that he would follow, with a sort of prophetic insight into his future. “I do not want to be a doctor and live by men’s diseases,” he wrote to his mother, “nor a minister to live by their sins, nor a lawyer and live by their quarrels. So I don’t see that there is anything left for me but to be an author. How would you like some day to see a whole shelf full of books, written by your son, with ‘Hawthorne’s Works’ printed on their backs?”

After spending a year at Raymond, Nathaniel went back to Salem to get ready for college. He kept himself busy by publishing a magazine he called the Spectator, which showed a lot of energy and talent. He thought about what profession he might pursue, with a kind of intuitive sense of his future. “I don’t want to be a doctor making a living off people’s illnesses,” he wrote to his mother, “nor a minister living off their sins, nor a lawyer profiting from their disputes. So, I guess there’s nothing left for me but to be an author. How would you feel about someday seeing an entire shelf filled with books written by your son, with ‘Hawthorne’s Works’ printed on their spines?”

Nathaniel entered Bowdoin College, Brunswick, Maine, in the autumn of 1821, where he became acquainted with two students who were destined to distinction—Henry W. Longfellow and Franklin Pierce. He was an excellent classical scholar, his Latin compositions, even in his freshman year, being remarkable for their elegance, while his Greek (which was less) was good. He made graceful translations from the Roman poets, and wrote several English poems which were creditable to him. After graduation three years later (1825) he returned to Salem, and to a life of isolation. He devoted his mornings to study, his afternoons to writing, and his evenings to long walks along the rocky coast. He was scarcely known by sight to his townsmen, and he held so little communication with the members of his own family that his meals were frequently left at his 103 locked door. He wrote largely, but destroyed many of his manuscripts, his taste was so difficult to please. He thought well enough, however, of one of his compositions to print it anonymously in 1828. A crude melodramatic story, entitled Fanshawe, it was unworthy even of his immature powers, and should never have been rescued from the oblivion which speedily overtook it. The name of Nathaniel Hawthorne finally became known to his countrymen as a writer in The Token, a holiday annual which was commenced in 1828 by Mr S. G. Goodrich (better known as “Peter Parley”), by whom it was conducted for fourteen years. This forgotten publication numbered among its contributors most of the prominent American writers of the time, none of whom appear to have added to their reputation in its pages, except the least popular of all—Hawthorne, who was for years the obscurest man of letters in America, though he gradually made admirers in a quiet way. His first public recognition came from England, where his genius was discovered in 1835 by Henry F. Chorley, one of the editors of the Athenaeum, in which he copied three of Hawthorne’s most characteristic papers from The Token. He had but little encouragement to continue in literature, for Mr Goodrich was so much more a publisher than an author that he paid him wretchedly for his contributions, and still more wretchedly for his work upon an American Magazine of Useful and Entertaining Knowledge, which he persuaded him to edit. This author-publisher consented, however, at a later period (1837) to bring out a collection of Hawthorne’s writings under the title of Twice-told Tales. A moderate edition was got rid of, but the great body of the reading public ignored the book altogether. It was generously reviewed in the North American Review by his college friend Longfellow, who said it came from the hand of a man of genius, and praised it for the exceeding beauty of its style, which was as clear as running waters.

Nathaniel entered Bowdoin College in Brunswick, Maine, in the fall of 1821, where he met two students who were destined for greatness—Henry W. Longfellow and Franklin Pierce. He was a brilliant classical scholar, with his Latin compositions being impressive for their elegance, even in his freshman year, while his Greek (which was less developed) was also good. He created graceful translations of Roman poets and wrote several commendable English poems. After graduating three years later (1825), he returned to Salem and led a life of solitude. He spent his mornings studying, his afternoons writing, and his evenings taking long walks along the rocky coast. He was hardly recognized by the townspeople, and he communicated so little with his own family that his meals were often left at his locked door. He wrote extensively but destroyed many of his manuscripts, as his taste was hard to satisfy. However, he thought highly enough of one of his works to publish it anonymously in 1828. A rough melodramatic story titled Fanshawe, it was not worthy of even his early abilities and should have been left to fade into obscurity. The name Nathaniel Hawthorne finally became known to his fellow countrymen as a writer in The Token, a holiday annual that began in 1828 by Mr. S. G. Goodrich (better known as “Peter Parley”), who ran it for fourteen years. This forgotten publication included contributions from most of the prominent American writers of the time, but none seemed to gain any reputation from it, except for the least popular of all—Hawthorne, who was for years the most obscure writer in America, although he gradually gained admirers quietly. His first public recognition came from England, where his talent was discovered in 1835 by Henry F. Chorley, one of the editors of the Athenaeum, who published three of Hawthorne’s most notable pieces from The Token. He received little encouragement to keep writing, as Mr. Goodrich was more of a publisher than an author, paying him poorly for his contributions and even more poorly for his work on an American Magazine of Useful and Entertaining Knowledge, which he convinced him to edit. However, this author-publisher later agreed (in 1837) to publish a collection of Hawthorne’s writings titled Twice-told Tales. A modest edition was sold, but the majority of the reading public ignored the book entirely. It received a generous review in the North American Review from his college friend Longfellow, who described it as the work of a man of genius and praised it for its incredibly beautiful style, which was as clear as running water.

The want of pecuniary success which had so far attended his authorship led Hawthorne to accept a situation which was tendered him by George Bancroft, the historian, collector of the port of Boston under the Democratic rule of President Van Buren. He was appointed a weigher in the custom-house at a salary of about $1200 a year, and entered upon the duties of his office, which consisted for the most part in measuring coal, salt and other bulky commodities on foreign vessels. It was irksome employment, but faithfully performed for two years, when he was superseded through a change in the national administration. Master of himself once more, he returned to Salem, where he remained until the spring of 1841, when he wrote a collection of children’s stories entitled Grandfather’s Chair, and joined an industrial association at West Roxbury, Mass. Brook Farm, as it was called, was a social Utopia, composed of a number of advanced thinkers, whose object was so to distribute manual labour as to give its members time for intellectual culture. The scheme worked admirably—on paper; but it was suited neither to the temperament nor the taste of Hawthorne, and after trying it patiently for nearly a year he returned to the everyday life of mankind.

The lack of financial success that had accompanied his writing led Hawthorne to accept a position offered to him by George Bancroft, the historian and collector of the port of Boston under President Van Buren's Democratic administration. He was appointed as a weigher in the custom-house with a salary of about $1200 a year, and he took on the responsibilities of his job, which mainly involved measuring coal, salt, and other large goods on foreign ships. It was a tedious job, but he did it diligently for two years, until he was replaced due to a change in the national administration. Once he was free again, he went back to Salem, where he stayed until the spring of 1841, when he wrote a collection of children’s stories called Grandfather’s Chair, and joined an industrial association in West Roxbury, Mass. Brook Farm, as it was known, was a social Utopia made up of a group of progressive thinkers whose aim was to organize manual labor in a way that would allow members time for intellectual growth. The plan looked great on paper; however, it didn't suit Hawthorne's personality or preferences, and after patiently trying it for nearly a year, he returned to regular life.

One of Hawthorne’s earliest admirers was Miss Sophia Peabody, a lady of Salem, whom he married in the summer of 1842. He made himself a new home in an old manse, at Concord, Mass., situated on historic ground, in sight of an old revolutionary battlefield, and devoted himself diligently to literature. He was known to the few by his Twice-told Tales, and to the many by his papers in the Democratic Review. He published in 1842 a further portion of Grandfather’s Chair, and also a second volume of Twice-told Tales. He also edited, during 1845, the African Journals of Horatio Bridge, an officer of the navy, who had been at college with him; and in the following year he published in two volumes a collection of his later writings, under the title of Mosses from an Old Manse.

One of Hawthorne’s earliest fans was Miss Sophia Peabody, a woman from Salem, whom he married in the summer of 1842. He settled into a new home in an old manse in Concord, Mass., located on historic ground, with a view of an old revolutionary battlefield, and dedicated himself to literature. He was known to a few through his Twice-told Tales, and to many through his articles in the Democratic Review. In 1842, he published more of Grandfather’s Chair, along with a second volume of Twice-told Tales. In 1845, he also edited the African Journals of Horatio Bridge, a navy officer who had attended college with him; and the following year, he released a two-volume collection of his later works titled Mosses from an Old Manse.

After a residence of nearly four years at Concord, Hawthorne returned to Salem, having been appointed surveyor of the custom-house of that port by a new Democratic administration. He filled the duties of this position until the incoming of the Whig administration again led to his retirement. He seems to have written little during his official term, but, as he had leisure enough and to spare, he read much, and pondered over subjects for future stories. His next work, The Scarlet Letter, which was begun after his removal from the custom-house, was published in 1850. If there had been any doubt of his genius before, it was settled for ever by this powerful romance.

After living in Concord for almost four years, Hawthorne moved back to Salem after being appointed the customs collector of that port by a new Democratic administration. He held this position until the arrival of the Whig administration led to his departure. He didn’t seem to write much during his time in office, but he had plenty of free time, so he read a lot and thought about ideas for future stories. His next work, The Scarlet Letter, which he started after leaving the customs house, was published in 1850. If there was any doubt about his talent before, it was completely resolved by this powerful novel.

Shortly after the publication of The Scarlet Letter Hawthorne removed from Salem to Lenox, Berkshire, Mass., where he wrote The House of the Seven Gables (1851) and The Wonder-Book (1851). From Lenox he removed to West Newton, near Boston, Mass., where he wrote The Blithedale Romance (1852) and The Snow Image and other Twice-told Tales (1852). In the spring of 1852 he removed back to Concord, where he purchased an old house which he called The Wayside, and where he wrote a Life of Franklin Pierce (1852) and Tanglewood Tales (1853). Mr Pierce was the Democratic candidate for the presidency, and it was only at his urgent solicitation that Hawthorne consented to become his biographer. He declared that he would accept no office in case he were elected, lest it might compromise him; but his friends gave him such weighty reasons for reconsidering his decision that he accepted the consulate at Liverpool, which was understood to be one of the best gifts at the disposal of the president.

Shortly after the release of The Scarlet Letter, Hawthorne moved from Salem to Lenox, Berkshire, Mass., where he wrote The House of the Seven Gables (1851) and The Wonder-Book (1851). From Lenox, he moved to West Newton, near Boston, Mass., where he wrote The Blithedale Romance (1852) and The Snow Image and other Twice-told Tales (1852). In the spring of 1852, he moved back to Concord, where he bought an old house he named The Wayside, and where he wrote a Life of Franklin Pierce (1852) and Tanglewood Tales (1853). Mr. Pierce was the Democratic candidate for president, and it was only because of his urgent request that Hawthorne agreed to be his biographer. He stated that he would accept no position if elected, so as not to compromise himself; however, his friends provided such compelling reasons for him to rethink his decision that he accepted the consulate in Liverpool, which was understood to be one of the best offers the president had at his disposal.

Hawthorne departed for Europe in the summer of 1853, and returned to the United States in the summer of 1860. Of the seven years which he passed in Europe five were spent in attending to the duties of his consulate at Liverpool, and in little journeys to Scotland, the Lakes and elsewhere, and the remaining two in France and Italy. They were quiet and uneventful, coloured by observation and reflection, as his note-books show, but productive of only one elaborate work, Transformation, or The Marble Faun, which he sketched out during his residence in Italy, and prepared for the press at Leamington, England, whence it was despatched to America and published in 1860.

Hawthorne left for Europe in the summer of 1853 and returned to the United States in the summer of 1860. Out of the seven years he spent in Europe, five were dedicated to his duties as consul in Liverpool, along with short trips to Scotland, the Lakes, and other places. The remaining two years were spent in France and Italy. These years were quiet and uneventful, filled with observation and reflection, as his notebooks reveal, but they resulted in only one major work, Transformation, or The Marble Faun, which he outlined while living in Italy and prepared for publication in Leamington, England, from where it was sent to America and published in 1860.

Hawthorne took up his abode at The Wayside, not much richer than when he left it, and sat down at his desk once more with a heavy heart. He was surrounded by the throes of a great civil war, and the political party with which he had always acted was under a cloud. His friend ex-President Pierce was stigmatized as a traitor, and when Hawthorne dedicated his next book to him—a volume of English impressions entitled Our Old Home (1863)—it was at the risk of his own popularity. His pen was soon to be laid aside for ever; for, with the exception of the unfinished story of Septimius Felton, which was published after his death by his daughter Una (1872), and the fragment of The Dolliver Romance, the beginning of which was published in the Atlantic Monthly in July 1864, he wrote no more. His health gradually declined, his hair grew white as snow, and the once stalwart figure that in early manhood flashed along the airy cliffs and glittering sands sauntered idly on the little hill behind his house. In the beginning of April 1864 he made a short southern tour with his publisher Mr William D. Ticknor, and was benefited by the change of scene until he reached Philadelphia, where he was shocked by the sudden death of Mr Ticknor. He returned to The Wayside, and after a short season of rest joined his friend ex-President Pierce. He died at Plymouth, New Hampshire, on the 19th of May 1864, and five days later was buried at Sleepy Hollow, a beautiful cemetery at Concord, where he used to walk under the pines when he was living at the Old Manse, and where his ashes moulder under a simple stone, inscribed with the single word “Hawthorne.”

Hawthorne settled back at The Wayside, not much better off than when he left, and once again sat down at his desk with a heavy heart. He was surrounded by the turmoil of a major civil war, and the political party he had always supported was in disgrace. His friend, former President Pierce, was labeled a traitor, and when Hawthorne dedicated his next book to him—a collection of English impressions titled Our Old Home (1863)—he risked his own popularity. His writing career was soon to come to an end; except for the unfinished story Septimius Felton, which was published posthumously by his daughter Una (1872), and the fragment of The Dolliver Romance, the first part of which appeared in Atlantic Monthly in July 1864, he wrote no more. His health gradually declined, his hair turned white as snow, and the once strong figure that dashed along the cliffs and glistening sands in his youth now strolled slowly on the small hill behind his house. In early April 1864, he took a short trip south with his publisher, Mr. William D. Ticknor, and found the change of scenery refreshing until he reached Philadelphia, where he was devastated by Mr. Ticknor's sudden death. He returned to The Wayside and, after a brief rest, joined his friend former President Pierce. He died in Plymouth, New Hampshire, on May 19, 1864, and was buried five days later at Sleepy Hollow, a beautiful cemetery in Concord, where he used to walk under the pines when he lived at the Old Manse, and where his ashes rest beneath a simple stone marked with the single word “Hawthorne.”

The writings of Hawthorne are marked by subtle imagination, curious power of analysis and exquisite purity of diction. He studied exceptional developments of character, and was fond of exploring secret crypts of emotion. His shorter stories are remarkable for originality and suggestiveness, and his larger ones are as absolute creations as Hamlet or Undine. Lacking the accomplishment of verse, he was in the highest sense a poet. His work is pervaded by a manly personality, and by an almost feminine delicacy and gentleness. He inherited the gravity of his Puritan ancestors without their superstition, and learned in his solitary meditations a knowledge of the night-side of life 104 which would have filled them with suspicion. A profound anatomist of the heart, he was singularly free from morbidness, and in his darkest speculations concerning evil was robustly right-minded. He worshipped conscience with his intellectual as well as his moral nature; it is supreme in all he wrote. Besides these mental traits, he possessed the literary quality of style—a grace, a charm, a perfection of language which no other American writer ever possessed in the same degree, and which places him among the great masters of English prose.

The writings of Hawthorne are characterized by subtle imagination, a unique power of analysis, and exquisite purity of language. He studied exceptional character developments and was drawn to exploring hidden emotional depths. His shorter stories are notable for their originality and suggestiveness, while his longer works are as complete as Hamlet or Undine. Although he lacked the skill of verse, he was, in every sense, a poet. His work radiates a strong personality along with a nearly feminine delicacy and gentleness. He inherited the seriousness of his Puritan ancestors without their superstition and, through his solitary reflections, gained insights into the darker aspects of life that would have made them uncomfortable. A deep analyzer of the heart, he remained remarkably free from morbid thoughts, and even in his darkest musings about evil, he maintained a healthy perspective. He revered conscience with both his intellect and his morality; it is the central theme in all his writings. In addition to these intellectual qualities, he had a unique literary style—a grace, charm, and perfection of language that no other American writer has matched to the same degree, placing him among the great masters of English prose.

His Complete Writings (22 vols., Boston, 1901) were edited, with introduction, including a bibliography, by H. S. Scudder. The standard authority for Hawthorne’s biography is Nathaniel Hawthorne and his Wife (2 vols., Boston, 1884), by his son Julian Hawthorne (b. 1846), himself a novelist and critic of distinction. See also Henry James, Hawthorne (London, 1879), in the “English Men of Letters” series; Julian Hawthorne, Hawthorne and his Circle (New York, 1903); a paper in R. H. Hutton’s Essays Theological and Literary (London, 1871); George B. Smith, Poets and Novelists (London, 1875); Moncure D. Conway, Life of Nathaniel Hawthorne (London, 1890, in the “Great Writers” series); Horatio Bridge, Personal Recollections of Nathaniel Hawthorne (New York, 1893); Rose Hawthorne Lathrop, Memories of Hawthorne (Boston, 1897); W. C. Lawton, The New England Poets (New York, 1898); Sir L. Stephen, Hours in a Library (1874); Annie Fields, Nathaniel Hawthorne (Boston, 1899); G. E. Woodberry, Life of Hawthorne (1902); and bibliography by N. E. Browne (1905).

His Complete Writings (22 vols., Boston, 1901) were edited with an introduction that includes a bibliography by H. S. Scudder. The go-to source for Hawthorne’s biography is Nathaniel Hawthorne and his Wife (2 vols., Boston, 1884), written by his son Julian Hawthorne (b. 1846), who was also a notable novelist and critic. Also check out Henry James, Hawthorne (London, 1879), from the “English Men of Letters” series; Julian Hawthorne, Hawthorne and his Circle (New York, 1903); an essay in R. H. Hutton’s Essays Theological and Literary (London, 1871); George B. Smith, Poets and Novelists (London, 1875); Moncure D. Conway, Life of Nathaniel Hawthorne (London, 1890, in the “Great Writers” series); Horatio Bridge, Personal Recollections of Nathaniel Hawthorne (New York, 1893); Rose Hawthorne Lathrop, Memories of Hawthorne (Boston, 1897); W. C. Lawton, The New England Poets (New York, 1898); Sir L. Stephen, Hours in a Library (1874); Annie Fields, Nathaniel Hawthorne (Boston, 1899); G. E. Woodberry, Life of Hawthorne (1902); and bibliography by N. E. Browne (1905).

(R. H. S.)

HAWTREY, CHARLES HENRY (1858-  ), English actor, was born at Eton, where his father was master of the lower school, and educated at Rugby and Oxford. He took to the stage in 1881, and in 1883 adapted von Moser’s Bibliothekar as The Private Secretary, which had an enormous success. He then appeared in London in a number of modern plays, in which he was conspicuous as a comedian. He was unapproachable for parts in which cool imperturbable lying constituted the leading characteristic. Among his later successes A Message from Mars was particularly popular in London and in America.

HAWTREY, CHARLES HENRY (1858-  ), English actor, was born in Eton, where his father was the headmaster of the lower school, and educated at Rugby and Oxford. He began his acting career in 1881, and in 1883, he adapted von Moser’s Bibliothekar into The Private Secretary, which was a huge success. He then performed in several modern plays in London, where he stood out as a comedian. He was unmatched for roles that required a calm, unflappable demeanor while lying. Among his later hits, A Message from Mars was especially popular in both London and America.


HAWTREY, EDWARD CRAVEN (1789-1862), English educationalist, was born at Burnham on the 7th of May 1789, the son of the vicar of the parish. He was educated at Eton and King’s College, Cambridge, and in 1814 was appointed assistant master at Eton under Dr Keate. In 1834 he became headmaster of the college, and his administration was a vigorous one. New buildings were erected, including the school library and the sanatorium, the college chapel was restored, the Old Christopher Inn was closed, and the custom of “Montem,” the collection by street begging of funds for the university expenses of the captain of the school, was suppressed. He is supposed to have suggested the prince consort’s modern language prizes, while the prize for English essay he founded himself. In 1852 he became provost of Eton, and in 1854 vicar of Mapledurham. He died on the 27th of January 1862, and was buried in the Eton College chapel. On account of his command of languages ancient and modern, he was known in London as “the English Mezzofanti,” and he was a book collector of the finest taste. Among his own books are some excellent translations from the English into Italian, German and Greek. He had a considerable reputation as a writer of English hexameters and as a judge of Homeric translation.

HAWTREY, EDWARD CRAVEN (1789-1862), English educator, was born in Burnham on May 7, 1789, the son of the local vicar. He studied at Eton and King’s College, Cambridge, and in 1814, he became an assistant master at Eton under Dr. Keate. In 1834, he was appointed headmaster of the college, where he led a dynamic administration. New buildings were constructed, including the school library and the sanatorium; the college chapel was restored; the Old Christopher Inn was shut down; and the practice of “Montem,” where funds were collected through street begging for the school captain's university expenses, was put to an end. He is believed to have proposed the prince consort’s modern language prizes, and he himself founded the prize for English essays. In 1852, he became provost of Eton, and in 1854, vicar of Mapledurham. He passed away on January 27, 1862, and was buried in the Eton College chapel. Known in London as “the English Mezzofanti” for his mastery of ancient and modern languages, he was also a discerning book collector. His collection includes excellent translations from English into Italian, German, and Greek. He gained considerable recognition as a writer of English hexameters and as a critic of Homeric translation.


HAXO, FRANÇOIS NICOLAS BENOÎT, Baron (1774-1838), French general and military engineer, was born at Lunéville on the 24th of June 1774, and entered the Engineers in 1793. He remained unknown, doing duty as a regimental officer for many years, until, as major, he had his first chance of distinction in the second siege of Saragossa in 1809, after which Napoleon made him a colonel. Haxo took part in the campaign of Wagram, and then returned to the Peninsula to direct the siege operations of Suchet’s army in Catalonia and Valencia. In 1810 he was made general of brigade, in 1811 a baron, and in the same year he was employed in preparing the occupied fortresses of Germany against a possible Russian invasion. In 1812 he was chief engineer of Davout’s I. corps, and after the retreat from Moscow he was made general of division. In 1813 he constructed the works around Hamburg which made possible the famous defence of that fortress by Davout, and commanded the Guard Engineers until he fell into the enemy’s hands at Kulm. After the Restoration Louis XVIII. wished to give Haxo a command in the Royal Guards, but the general remained faithful to Napoleon, and in the Hundred Days laid out the provisional fortifications of Paris and fought at Waterloo. It was, however, after the second Restoration that the best work of his career as a military engineer was done. As inspector-general he managed, though not without meeting considerable opposition, to reconstruct in accordance with the requirements of the time, and the designs which he had evolved to meet them, the old Vauban and Cormontaigne fortresses which had failed to check the invasions of 1814 and 1815. For his services he was made a peer of France by Louis Philippe (1832). Soon after this came the French intervention in Belgium and the famous scientific siege of Antwerp citadel. Under Marshal Gérard Haxo directed the besiegers and completely outmatched the opposing engineers, the fortress being reduced to surrender after a siege of a little more than three weeks (December 23, 1832). He was after this regarded as the first engineer in Europe, and his latter years were spent in urging upon the government and the French people the fortification of Paris and Lyons, a project which was partly realized in his time and after his death fully carried out. General Haxo died at Paris on the 25th of June 1838. He wrote Mémoire sur le figuré du terrain dans les cartes topographiques (Paris, N.D.), and a memoir of General Dejean (1824).

HAXO, FRANÇOIS NICOLAS BENOÎT, Baron (1774-1838), French general and military engineer, was born in Lunéville on June 24, 1774, and joined the Engineers in 1793. He remained relatively unknown, serving as a regimental officer for many years until, as a major, he got his first significant opportunity during the second siege of Saragossa in 1809, after which Napoleon promoted him to colonel. Haxo participated in the Wagram campaign and then returned to the Peninsula to oversee the siege operations of Suchet’s army in Catalonia and Valencia. He was made a general of brigade in 1810, a baron in 1811, and that same year, he was tasked with preparing the occupied fortresses in Germany against a potential Russian invasion. In 1812, he served as the chief engineer of Davout’s I. corps, and after the retreat from Moscow, he was promoted to general of division. In 1813, he built the fortifications around Hamburg that enabled the famous defense of that fortress by Davout, and he led the Guard Engineers until he was captured by the enemy at Kulm. After the Restoration, Louis XVIII wanted to give Haxo a command in the Royal Guards, but the general remained loyal to Napoleon and, during the Hundred Days, designed the temporary fortifications of Paris and fought at Waterloo. However, it was after the second Restoration that he accomplished his most significant work as a military engineer. As inspector-general, he managed, despite facing substantial opposition, to reconstruct the outdated Vauban and Cormontaigne fortresses to meet current needs, which had failed to prevent the invasions of 1814 and 1815. For his contributions, he was made a peer of France by Louis Philippe in 1832. Shortly after, during the French intervention in Belgium, he played a key role in the renowned scientific siege of Antwerp citadel. Under Marshal Gérard, Haxo led the besieging forces and effectively outmaneuvered the opposing engineers, resulting in the fortress's surrender after a siege lasting just over three weeks (December 23, 1832). After this, he was regarded as the leading engineer in Europe, and in his later years, he urged the government and the French people to fortify Paris and Lyons, a project that was partially realized during his time and fully completed after his death. General Haxo passed away in Paris on June 25, 1838. He authored Mémoire sur le figuré du terrain dans les cartes topographiques (Paris, N.D.) and a memoir about General Dejean (1824).


HAXTHAUSEN, AUGUST FRANZ LUDWIG MARIA, Freiherr von (1792-1866), German political economist, was born near Paderborn in Westphalia on the 3rd of February 1792. Having studied at the school of mining at Klausthal, and having served in the Hanoverian army, he entered the university of Göttingen in 1815. Finishing his course there in 1818 he was engaged in managing his estates and in studying the land laws. The result of his studies appeared in 1829 when he published Über die Agrarverfassung in den Fürstentümern Paderborn und Corvey, a work which attracted much attention and which procured for its author a commission to investigate and report upon the land laws of the Prussian provinces with a view to a new code. After nine years of labour he published in 1839 an exhaustive treatise, Die ländliche Verfassung in der Provinz Preussen, and in 1843, at the request of the emperor Nicholas, he undertook a similar work for Russia, the fruits of his investigations in that country being contained in his Studien über die innern Zustände des Volkslebens, und insbesondere die ländlichen Einrichtungen Russlands (Hanover, 1847-1852). He received various honours, was a member of the combined diet in Berlin in 1847 and 1848, and afterwards of the Prussian upper house. Haxthausen died at Hanover on the 31st of December 1866.

HAXTHAUSEN, AUGUST FRANZ LUDWIG MARIA, Baron von (1792-1866), was a German political economist born near Paderborn in Westphalia on February 3, 1792. After studying at the mining school in Klausthal and serving in the Hanoverian army, he enrolled at the University of Göttingen in 1815. He completed his studies there in 1818 and then focused on managing his estates and studying land laws. His research led to the publication of Über die Agrarverfassung in den Fürstentümern Paderborn und Corvey in 1829, a work that gained significant attention and earned him a commission to investigate and report on the land laws of the Prussian provinces for a new code. After nine years of work, he published a comprehensive treatise, Die ländliche Verfassung in der Provinz Preussen, in 1839. In 1843, at the request of Emperor Nicholas, he conducted similar research for Russia, which resulted in his work Studien über die innern Zustände des Volkslebens, und insbesondere die ländlichen Einrichtungen Russlands (Hanover, 1847-1852). He received various honors and was a member of the combined diet in Berlin in 1847 and 1848, later serving in the Prussian upper house. Haxthausen passed away in Hanover on December 31, 1866.

In addition to the works already mentioned he wrote Die ländliche Verfassung Russlands (Leipzig, 1866). His Studien has been translated into French and into English by R. Farie as The Russian Empire (1856). Other works of his which have appeared in English are: Transcaucasia; Sketches of the Nations and Races between the Black Sea and the Caspian (1854), and The Tribes of the Caucasus (1855). Haxthausen edited Das konstitutionelle Prinzip (Leipzig, 1864), a collection of political writings by various authors, which has been translated into French (1865).

In addition to the works already mentioned, he wrote Die ländliche Verfassung Russlands (Leipzig, 1866). His Studien has been translated into French and English by R. Farie as The Russian Empire (1856). Other works of his that have been published in English include: Transcaucasia; Sketches of the Nations and Races between the Black Sea and the Caspian (1854), and The Tribes of the Caucasus (1855). Haxthausen edited Das konstitutionelle Prinzip (Leipzig, 1864), a collection of political writings by various authors, which has been translated into French (1865).


HAY, GEORGE (1729-1811), Scottish Roman Catholic divine, was born at Edinburgh on the 24th of August 1729. He was accused of sympathizing with the rebellion of 1745 and served a term of imprisonment 1746-1747. He then entered the Roman Catholic Church, studied in the Scots College at Rome, and in 1759 accompanied John Geddes (1735-1799), afterwards bishop of Morocco, on a Scottish mission. Ten years later he was appointed bishop of Daulis in partibus and coadjutor to Bishop James Grant (1706-1778). In 1778 he became vicar apostolic of the lowland district. During the Protestant riots in Edinburgh in 1779 his furniture and library were destroyed by fire. From 1788 to 1793 he was in charge of the Scalan seminary; in 1802 he retired to that of Aquhorties near Inverury which he had founded in 1799. He died there on the 15th of October 1811.

Hey, George (1729-1811), Scottish Roman Catholic theologian, was born in Edinburgh on August 24, 1729. He was accused of supporting the rebellion of 1745 and spent time in prison from 1746 to 1747. He then joined the Roman Catholic Church, studied at the Scots College in Rome, and in 1759 he went on a Scottish mission with John Geddes (1735-1799), who later became the bishop of Morocco. A decade later, he was appointed bishop of Daulis in partibus and coadjutor to Bishop James Grant (1706-1778). In 1778, he became vicar apostolic of the lowland district. During the Protestant riots in Edinburgh in 1779, his furniture and library were destroyed by fire. From 1788 to 1793, he led the Scalan seminary; in 1802, he retired to the Aquhorties seminary near Inverury, which he had established in 1799. He died there on October 15, 1811.

His theological works, including The Sincere Christian, The Devout Christian, The Pious Christian and The Scripture Doctrine of Miracles, were edited by Bishop Strain in 1871-1873.

His theological works, including The Sincere Christian, The Devout Christian, The Pious Christian, and The Scripture Doctrine of Miracles, were edited by Bishop Strain between 1871 and 1873.

105

105


HAY, GILBERT, or “Sir Gilbert the Haye” (fl. 1450), Scottish poet and translator, was perhaps a kinsman of the house of Errol. If he be the student named in the registers of the university of St Andrews in 1418-1419, his birth may be fixed about 1403. He was in France in 1432, perhaps some years earlier, for a “Gilbert de la Haye” is mentioned as present at Reims, in July 1430, at the coronation of Charles VII. He has left it on record, in the Prologue to his Buke of the Law of Armys, that he was “chaumerlayn umquhyle to the maist worthy King Charles of France.” In 1456 he was back in Scotland, in the service of the chancellor, William, earl of Orkney and Caithness, “in his castell of Rosselyn,” south of Edinburgh. The date of his death is unknown.

Hey, Gilbert, or “Sir Gilbert de Haye” (fl. 1450), Scottish poet and translator, was possibly related to the house of Errol. If he is the student listed in the records of the University of St Andrews from 1418-1419, he was likely born around 1403. He was in France in 1432, and possibly a few years earlier, as a “Gilbert de la Haye” is noted to have been present in Reims in July 1430 during the coronation of Charles VII. He wrote in the Prologue to his Buke of the Law of Armys that he was “formerly chamberlain to the most worthy King Charles of France.” By 1456, he had returned to Scotland, serving Chancellor William, Earl of Orkney and Caithness, “in his castle of Rosselyn,” south of Edinburgh. The exact date of his death is not known.

Hay is named by Dunbar (q.v.) in his Lament for the Makaris, and by Sir David Lyndsay (q.v.) in his Testament and Complaynt of the Papyngo. His only political work is The Buik of Alexander the Conquerour, of which a portion, in copy, remains at Taymouth Castle. He has left three translations, extant in one volume (in old binding) in the collection of Abbotsford: (a) The Buke of the Law of Armys or The Buke of Bataillis, a translation of Honoré Bonet’s Arbre des batailles; (b) The Buke of the Order of Knichthood from the Livre de l’ordre de chevalerie; and (c) The Buke of the Governaunce of Princes, from a French version of the pseudo-Aristotelian Secreta secretorum. The second of these precedes Caxton’s independent translation by at least ten years.

Hay is mentioned by Dunbar (q.v.) in his Lament for the Makaris and by Sir David Lyndsay (q.v.) in his Testament and Complaynt of the Papyngo. His sole political work is The Buik of Alexander the Conquerour, of which a part still exists in copy at Taymouth Castle. He left three translations, all found in one volume (in old binding) in the collection at Abbotsford: (a) The Buke of the Law of Armys or The Buke of Bataillis, a translation of Honoré Bonet’s Arbre des batailles; (b) The Buke of the Order of Knichthood from the Livre de l’ordre de chevalerie; and (c) The Buke of the Governaunce of Princes, from a French version of the pseudo-Aristotelian Secreta secretorum. The second of these was completed at least ten years before Caxton’s independent translation.

For the Buik of Alexander see Albert Herrmann’s The Taymouth Castle MS. of Sir Gilbert Hay’s Buik, &c. (Berlin, 1898). The complete Abbotsford MS. has been reprinted by the Scottish Text Society (ed. J. H. Stevenson). The first volume, containing The Buke of the Law of Armys, appeared in 1901. The Order of Knichthood was printed by David Laing for the Abbotsford Club (1847). See also S.T.S. edition (u.s.) “Introduction” and Gregory Smith’s Specimens of Middle Scots, in which annotated extracts are given from the Abbotsford MS., the oldest known example of literary Scots prose.

For the Buik of Alexander, check out Albert Herrmann’s The Taymouth Castle MS. of Sir Gilbert Hay’s Buik, &c. (Berlin, 1898). The full Abbotsford MS. has been republished by the Scottish Text Society (ed. J. H. Stevenson). The first volume, which includes The Buke of the Law of Armys, was released in 1901. The Order of Knichthood was published by David Laing for the Abbotsford Club (1847). Also, refer to the S.T.S. edition (u.s.) “Introduction” and Gregory Smith’s Specimens of Middle Scots, which includes annotated extracts from the Abbotsford MS., the oldest known example of literary Scots prose.


HAY, JOHN (1838-1905), American statesman and author, was born at Salem, Indiana, on the 8th of October 1838. He graduated from Brown University in 1858, studied law in the office of Abraham Lincoln, was admitted to the bar in Springfield, Illinois, in 1861, and soon afterwards was selected by President Lincoln as assistant private secretary, in which capacity he served till the president’s death, being associated with John George Nicolay (1832-1901). Hay was secretary of the U.S. legation at Paris in 1865-1867, at Vienna in 1867-1869 and at Madrid in 1869-1870. After his return he was for five years an editorial writer on the New York Tribune; in 1879-1881 he was first assistant secretary of state to W. M. Evarts; and in 1881 was a delegate to the International Sanitary Conference, which met in Washington, D.C., and of which he was chosen president. Upon the inauguration of President McKinley in 1897 Hay was appointed ambassador to Great Britain, from which post he was transferred in 1898 to that of secretary of state, succeeding W. R. Day, who was sent to Paris as a member of the Peace Conference. He remained in this office until his death at Newburg, New Hampshire, on the 1st of July 1905. He directed the peace negotiations with Spain after the war of 1898, and not only secured American interests in the imbroglio caused by the Boxers in China, but grasped the opportunity to insist on “the administrative entity” of China; influenced the powers to declare publicly for the “open door” in China; challenged Russia as to her intentions in Manchuria, securing a promise to evacuate the country on the 8th of October 1903; and in 1904 again urged “the administrative entity” of China and took the initiative in inducing Russia and Japan to “localize and limit” the area of hostilities. It was largely due to his tact and good management, in concert with Lord Pauncefote, the British ambassador, that negotiations for abrogating the Clayton-Bulwer Treaty and for making a new treaty with Great Britain regarding the Isthmian Canal were successfully concluded at the end of 1901; subsequently he negotiated treaties with Colombia and with Panama, looking towards the construction by the United States of a trans-isthmian canal. He also arranged the settlement of difficulties with Germany over Samoa in December 1899, and the settlement, by joint commission, of the question concerning the disputed Alaskan boundary in 1903. John Hay was a man of quiet and unassuming disposition, whose training in diplomacy gave a cool and judicious character to his statesmanship. As secretary of state under Presidents McKinley and Roosevelt his guidance was invaluable during a rather critical period in foreign affairs, and no man of his time did more to create confidence in the increased interest taken by the United States in international matters. He also represented, in another capacity, the best American traditions—namely in literature. He published Pike County Ballads (1871)—the most famous being “Little Breeches”—a volume worthy to rank with Bret Harte, if not with the Lowell of the Biglow Papers; Castilian Days (1871), recording his observations in Spain; and a volume of Poems (1890); with John G. Nicolay he wrote Abraham Lincoln: A History (10 vols., 1890), a monumental work indispensable to the student of the Civil War period in America, and published an edition of Lincoln’s Complete Works (2 vols., 1894). The authorship of the brilliant novel The Breadwinners (1883) is now certainly attributed to him. Hay was an excellent public speaker: some of his best addresses are In Praise of Omar; On the Unveiling of the Bust of Sir Walter Scott in Westminster Abbey, May 21, 1897; and a memorial address in honour of President McKinley.

Hey, John (1838-1905), American statesman and author, was born in Salem, Indiana, on October 8, 1838. He graduated from Brown University in 1858, studied law in Abraham Lincoln’s office, was admitted to the bar in Springfield, Illinois, in 1861, and shortly after was chosen by President Lincoln as assistant private secretary, serving in that role until the president's death, alongside John George Nicolay (1832-1901). Hay was secretary of the U.S. legation in Paris from 1865 to 1867, in Vienna from 1867 to 1869, and in Madrid from 1869 to 1870. After returning, he worked as an editorial writer for the New York Tribune for five years; from 1879 to 1881, he served as first assistant secretary of state under W. M. Evarts; and in 1881, he was a delegate to the International Sanitary Conference in Washington, D.C., where he was elected president. When President McKinley took office in 1897, Hay was appointed ambassador to Great Britain, and in 1898, he became secretary of state, succeeding W. R. Day, who went to Paris as a member of the Peace Conference. He held this position until his death in Newburg, New Hampshire, on July 1, 1905. He led the peace negotiations with Spain after the 1898 war and not only protected American interests during the Boxer Rebellion in China but also seized the chance to promote "the administrative entity" of China; influenced international support for the “open door” policy in China; questioned Russia's intentions in Manchuria, securing a promise to withdraw from the region on October 8, 1903; and in 1904, again advocated for “the administrative entity” of China and took initiative to encourage Russia and Japan to limit the conflict. Much of his success was due to his diplomacy and effective collaboration with Lord Pauncefote, the British ambassador, which led to the successful negotiation to end the Clayton-Bulwer Treaty and establish a new treaty with Great Britain regarding the Isthmian Canal by the end of 1901; subsequently, he negotiated treaties with Colombia and Panama for the United States to construct a trans-isthmian canal. He also resolved disputes with Germany over Samoa in December 1899 and addressed the disputed Alaskan boundary issue through a joint commission in 1903. John Hay was a man of calm and modest demeanor, whose diplomatic training added a thoughtful and measured approach to his statesmanship. As secretary of state under Presidents McKinley and Roosevelt, his guidance was essential during a crucial time in foreign affairs, and no one else of his time inspired more confidence in America's expanding role in international issues. He also embodied the best American traditions in literature. He published Pike County Ballads (1871)—the most famous being “Little Breeches”—a volume that merits comparison to Bret Harte, if not to Lowell's Biglow Papers; Castilian Days (1871), chronicling his experiences in Spain; and a collection of Poems (1890); along with John G. Nicolay, he co-authored Abraham Lincoln: A History (10 vols., 1890), a crucial resource for anyone studying the Civil War era in America, and published an edition of Lincoln’s Complete Works (2 vols., 1894). The acclaimed novel The Breadwinners (1883) is now definitively recognized as his work. Hay was an outstanding public speaker; some of his best speeches include In Praise of Omar; On the Unveiling of the Bust of Sir Walter Scott in Westminster Abbey, May 21, 1897; and a memorial address honoring President McKinley.

The best of his previously unpublished speeches appeared in Addresses of John Hay (1906).

The best of his previously unpublished speeches were published in Addresses of John Hay (1906).


HAY, a town of Waradgery county, New South Wales, Australia, on the Murrumbidgee river, 454 m. by rail W.S.W. of Sydney. Pop. (1901), 3012. It is the cathedral town of the Anglican diocese of Riverina, the terminus of the South Western railway, and the principal depot for the wool produced at the numerous stations on the banks of the Murrumbidgee and Lachlan rivers.

HAY, is a town in Waradgery County, New South Wales, Australia, located on the Murrumbidgee River, 454 km by rail west-southwest of Sydney. Population (1901) was 3,012. It's the cathedral town of the Anglican diocese of Riverina, the endpoint of the South Western railway, and the main hub for the wool produced at the many stations along the Murrumbidgee and Lachlan rivers.


HAY, a market town and urban district of Breconshire, south Wales, on the Hereford and Brecon section of the Midland railway, 164½ m. from London, 20 m. W. of Hereford and 17 m. N.E. of Brecon by rail. Pop. (1901), 1680. The Golden Valley railway to Pontrilas (18¾ m.), now a branch of the Great Western, also starts from Hay. The town occupies rising ground on the south (right) bank of the Wye, which here separates the counties of Brecknock and Radnor but immediately below enters Herefordshire, from which the town is separated on the E. by the river Dulas.

HAY, is a market town and urban district in Breconshire, south Wales, located on the Hereford and Brecon section of the Midland railway, 164½ miles from London, 20 miles west of Hereford, and 17 miles northeast of Brecon by rail. Population (1901) was 1,680. The Golden Valley railway to Pontrilas (18¾ miles), which is now a branch of the Great Western, also starts from Hay. The town sits on rising ground on the south (right) bank of the Wye, which here separates the counties of Brecknock and Radnor but flows into Herefordshire immediately below, where the town is separated to the east by the river Dulas.

Leland and Camden ascribe a Roman origin to the town, and the former states that quantities of Roman coin (called by the country people “Jews’ money”) and some pottery had been found near by, but of this no other record is known. The Wye valley in this district served as the gate between the present counties of Brecknock and Hereford, and, though Welsh continued for two or three centuries after the Norman Conquest to be the spoken language of the adjoining part of Herefordshire south of the Wye (known as Archenfield), there must have been a “burh” serving as a Mercian outpost at Glasbury, 4 m. W. of Hay, which was itself several miles west of Offa’s Dyke. But the earliest settlement at Hay probably dates from the Norman conquest of the district by Bernard Newmarch about 1088 (in which year he granted Glasbury, probably as the first fruits of his invasion, to St Peter’s, Gloucester). The manor of Hay, which probably corresponded to some existing Welsh division, he gave to Sir Philip Walwyn, but it soon reverted to the donor, and its subsequent devolution down to its forfeiture to the crown as part of the duke of Buckingham’s estate in 1521, was identical with that of the lordship of Brecknock (see Breconshire). The castle, which was probably built in Newmarch’s time and rebuilt by his great-grandson William de Breos, passed on the latter’s attainder to the crown, but was again seized by de Breos’s second son, Giles, bishop of Hereford, in 1215, and retaken by King John in the following year. In 1231 it was burnt by Llewelyn ab Iorwerth, and in the Barons’ War it was taken in 1263 by Prince Edward, but in the following year was burnt by Simon Montfort and the last Llewelyn. From the 16th century the castle has been used as a private residence.

Leland and Camden believe the town has Roman roots, and the former mentions that a lot of Roman coins (referred to by locals as "Jews’ money") and some pottery have been discovered nearby, though there are no other records of these finds. The Wye valley in this area acted as the border between what are now Brecknock and Hereford counties. Even though Welsh was the main language spoken in the part of Herefordshire south of the Wye (known as Archenfield) for two or three centuries after the Norman Conquest, there was likely a “burh” acting as a Mercian outpost at Glasbury, which is 4 miles west of Hay, several miles west of Offa’s Dyke. However, the earliest settlement in Hay likely began after Bernard Newmarch conquered the area around 1088, when he granted Glasbury to St Peter’s, Gloucester, probably as a way to reward himself for his invasion. He gave the manor of Hay, which likely matched some existing Welsh division, to Sir Philip Walwyn, but it quickly returned to Newmarch. Its ownership changed until it was forfeited to the crown as part of the Duke of Buckingham’s estate in 1521, which followed the same path as the lordship of Brecknock (see Breconshire). The castle, likely constructed during Newmarch’s time and rebuilt by his great-grandson William de Breos, went to the crown after de Breos’s attainder but was reclaimed by his second son, Giles, Bishop of Hereford, in 1215, and recaptured by King John the following year. In 1231, it was burned by Llewelyn ab Iorwerth, and during the Barons’ War, it was captured in 1263 by Prince Edward but was set on fire the next year by Simon Montfort and the last Llewelyn. Since the 16th century, the castle has served as a private residence.

106

106

The Welsh name of the town is Y Gelli (“the wood”), or formerly in full (Y) Gelli ganddryll (literally “the wood all to pieces”), which roughly corresponds to Sepes Inscissa, by which name Walter Map (a native of the district) designates it. Its Norman name, La Haia (from the Fr. haie, cf. English “hedge”), was probably intended as a translation of Gelli. The same word is found in Urishay and Oldhay, both between Hay and the Golden Valley. The town is still locally called the Hay, as it also is by Leland.

The Welsh name for the town is Y Gelli (“the wood”), or formerly (Y) Gelli ganddryll (literally “the wood all to pieces”), which roughly corresponds to Sepes Inscissa, the name Walter Map (a local resident) used for it. Its Norman name, La Haia (from the French haie, similar to the English word “hedge”), was likely meant to translate Gelli. The same word appears in Urishay and Oldhay, both located between Hay and the Golden Valley. The town is still referred to locally as the Hay, as noted by Leland.

Even down to Leland’s time Hay was surrounded by a “right strong wall,” which had three gates and a postern, but the town within the wall has “wonderfully decayed,” its ruin being ascribed to Owen Glendower, while to the west of it was a flourishing suburb with the church of St Mary on a precipitous eminence overlooking the river. This was rebuilt in 1834. The old parish church of St John within the walls, used as a school-house in the 17th century, has entirely disappeared. The Baptists, Calvinistic Methodists, Congregationalists and Primitive Methodists have a chapel each. The other public buildings are the market house (1833); a masonic hall, formerly the town hall, its basement still serving as a cheese market; a clock tower (1884); parish hall (1890); and a drill hall. The Wye is here crossed by an iron bridge built in 1864. There are also eighteen almshouses for poor women, built and endowed by Miss Frances Harley in 1832-1836, and Gwyn’s almshouses for six aged persons, founded in 1702 and rebuilt in 1878.

Even by Leland’s time, Hay was surrounded by a “strong wall” that had three gates and a postern, but the town inside the wall had “wonderfully decayed,” with its decline attributed to Owen Glendower. To the west, there was a thriving suburb with St. Mary’s Church perched on a steep rise overlooking the river. This church was rebuilt in 1834. The old parish church of St. John within the walls, which served as a schoolhouse in the 17th century, has completely vanished. The Baptists, Calvinistic Methodists, Congregationalists, and Primitive Methodists each have their own chapel. Other public buildings include the market house (1833), a masonic hall formerly used as the town hall, with its basement still functioning as a cheese market; a clock tower (1884); a parish hall (1890); and a drill hall. The Wye is crossed here by an iron bridge built in 1864. There are also eighteen almshouses for poor women, built and funded by Miss Frances Harley from 1832 to 1836, and Gwyn’s almshouses for six elderly people, established in 1702 and rebuilt in 1878.

Scarcely anything but provisions are sold in the weekly market, the farmers of the district now resorting to the markets of Brecon and Hereford. There are good monthly stock fairs and a hiring fair in May. There is rich agricultural land in the district.

Scarcely anything but food is sold in the weekly market, as the local farmers now go to the markets in Brecon and Hereford. There are well-attended monthly livestock fairs and a hiring fair in May. The area has fertile agricultural land.

Hay was reputed to be a borough by prescription, but it never had any municipal institutions. Its manor, like that of Talgarth, consisted of an Englishry and a Welshery, the latter, known as Haya Wallensis, comprising the parish of Llanigon with the hamlet of Glynfach, and in this Welsh tenures and customs prevailed. The manor is specially mentioned in the act of Henry VIII. (1535) as one of those which were then taken to constitute the new county of Brecknock.

Hay was said to be a borough by prescription, but it never had any local governance. Its manor, similar to that of Talgarth, included both an English area and a Welsh area, with the Welsh part, known as Haya Wallensis, covering the parish of Llanigon and the hamlet of Glynfach, where Welsh customs and tenures were dominant. The manor is specifically referenced in the act of Henry VIII (1535) as one of those included in the formation of the new county of Brecknock.

(D. Ll. T.)

HAY (a word common in various forms to Teutonic languages; cf. Ger. Heu, Dutch hooi; the root from which it is derived, meaning “to cut,” is also seen in “to hew”; cf. “hoe”), grass mown and dried in the sun and used as fodder for cattle. It is properly applied only to the grass when cut, but is often also used of the standing crop. (See Haymaking below). Another word “hay,” meaning a fence, must be distinguished; the root from which it is derived is seen in its doublet “hedge,” cf. “haw-thorn,” i.e. “hedge thorn.” In this sense it survives in legal history in “hay bote,” i.e. hedge-bote, the right of a tenant, copyholder, &c. to take wood to repair fences, hedges, &c. (see Estovers), and also in “hayward,” an official of a manor whose duty was to protect the enclosed lands from cattle breaking out of the common land.

HAY (a word found in different forms in Teutonic languages; cf. Ger. Heu, Dutch hooi; the root meaning “to cut” is also reflected in “to hew”; cf. “hoe”), refers to grass that has been cut and dried in the sun for use as feed for livestock. It’s typically used to describe grass once it’s cut, but it can also refer to standing crops. (See Haymaking below). Another term “hay,” which means a fence, should be noted; its root is seen in its doublet “hedge,” cf. “haw-thorn,” i.e. “hedge thorn.” In this sense, it still appears in legal history in “hay bote,” i.e. hedge-bote, which is the right of a tenant or copyholder to collect wood for repairing fences, hedges, etc. (see Estovers), and also in “hayward,” an official of a manor responsible for keeping the enclosed lands secure from livestock straying from common land.

Haymaking.—The term “haymaking” signifies the process of drying and curing grass or other herbage so as to fit it for storage in stacks or sheds for future use. As a regular part of farm work it was unknown in ancient times. Before its introduction into Great Britain the animals intended for beef and mutton were slaughtered in autumn and salted down; the others were turned out to fend for themselves, and often lost all the fat in winter they had gained the previous summer. The introduction of haymaking gave unlimited scope for the production of winter food, and improved treatment of live stock became possible.

Haymaking.—The term “haymaking” refers to the process of drying and curing grass or other plants to prepare it for storage in stacks or sheds for later use. This practice was not a part of regular farming in ancient times. Before haymaking was introduced in Great Britain, animals raised for beef and mutton were slaughtered in the fall and preserved in salt; others were left to fend for themselves, often losing all the weight they had gained during the summer throughout the winter. The introduction of haymaking provided unlimited opportunities for producing winter feed, allowing for better care of livestock.

Though every country has its own methods of haymaking, the principal stages in the process everywhere are: (1) mowing, (2) drying or “making,” (3) “carrying” and storage in stacks or sheds.

Though every country has its own ways of making hay, the main stages in the process are: (1) mowing, (2) drying or “making,” (3) “carrying” and storing in stacks or sheds.

In a wet district such as the west of Ireland the “making” is a difficult affair and large quantities of hay are often spoiled, while much labour has to be spent in cocking up, turning over, ricking, &c., before it is fit to be stacked up. On the other hand, in the dry districts of south-eastern England it is often possible to cut and carry the hay without any special “making,” as the sun and wind will dry it quickly enough to fit it for stacking up without the expenditure of much labour. This rule also applies to dry countries like the United States and several of the British colonies, and it is for this reason that most of the modern implements used for quickly handling a bulk of hay have been invented or improved in those countries. Forage of all kinds intended for hay should be cut at or before the flowering stage if possible. The full growth and food value of the plant are reached then, and further change consists in the formation and ripening of the seed at the expense of the leaves and stems, leaving these hard and woody and of less feeding value.

In a wet area like the west of Ireland, making hay can be quite a challenge, and a lot of it often goes to waste. It requires extensive labor for tasks like cocking up, turning over, and ricking before it’s ready to be stacked. In contrast, in the dry regions of southeastern England, you can often cut and transport hay without any special processing because the sun and wind dry it quickly enough to be stacked with minimal effort. This principle also applies to dry areas like the United States and some British colonies, which is why most of the modern tools for efficiently handling large amounts of hay have been developed or improved in those regions. Forage meant for hay should ideally be cut at or before the flowering stage. At this point, the plant has reached its full growth and nutritional value, and any later growth focuses on seed formation and ripening, which reduces the quality of the leaves and stems, making them tougher and less nutritious.

Grass or other forage, when growing, contains a large proportion of water, and after cutting must be left to dry in the sun and wind, a process which may at times be assisted by turning over or shaking up. In fine weather in the south of England grass is sufficiently dried in from two to four days to be stacked straight away. In Scotland or other districts where the rainfall is heavy and the air moist, it is first put into small field-ricks or “pykes” of from 10 to 20 cwt. each. In the drying process the 75% of water usually present in grass should be reduced to approximately 15% in the hay, and in wet or broken weather it is exceedingly difficult to secure this reduction. With a heavy crop or in damp weather grass may need turning in the swathe, raking up into “windrows,” and then making up into cocks or “quiles,” i.e. round beehive-like heaps, before it can be “carried.” A properly made cock will stand bad weather for a week, as only the outside straws are weathered, and therefore the hay is kept fresh and green. Indeed, it is a good rule always to cock hay, for even in sunny weather undue exposure ends in bleaching, which is almost as detrimental to its quality as wet-weathering.

Grass or other forage, when it’s growing, has a high water content, and after cutting, it needs to dry in the sun and wind. Sometimes, this process is helped by turning it over or shaking it up. In nice weather in southern England, grass can dry enough to be stacked in just two to four days. In Scotland or other areas with heavy rainfall and moist air, it’s first made into small field stacks or "pykes" weighing between 10 to 20 hundredweight each. During the drying process, the typical 75% water content in grass should drop to about 15% in the hay, but achieving this reduction can be really tough in wet or unsettled weather. With a heavy crop or in damp conditions, grass may need to be turned over in the swathe, raked into "windrows," and then shaped into cocks or "quiles," meaning round beehive-like piles, before it can be moved. A well-made cock can withstand bad weather for a week since only the outer straw is exposed, keeping the hay fresh and green. In fact, it's a good practice to always cock hay, because even in sunny weather, too much exposure can lead to bleaching, which is almost as harmful to its quality as getting wet.

In the last quarter of the 19th century the methods of haymaking were completely changed, and even some of the principles underlying its practice were revised. Generally speaking, before that time the only implements used were the scythe, the rake and the pitchfork; nowadays—with the exception of the pitchfork—these implements are seldom used, except where the work is carried on in a small way. Instead of the scythe, for instance, the mowing machine is employed for cutting the crop, and with a modern improved machine taking a swathe as wide as 5 or 6 ft. some 10 acres per day can easily be mown by one man and a pair of horses (figs. 1 and 2).

In the late 19th century, haymaking methods changed completely, and even some of the principles behind the practice were updated. Generally, before that time, the only tools used were the scythe, rake, and pitchfork; nowadays—except for the pitchfork—these tools are rarely used unless the work is done on a small scale. Instead of a scythe, for example, a mowing machine is now used to cut the crop, and with a modern improved machine that can take a swath as wide as 5 or 6 feet, one person and a pair of horses can easily mow about 10 acres per day (figs. 1 and 2).

Fig. 1.—Mower (viewed from above) with enlarged detail of Blade. (Harrison, M‘Gregor & Co.)

It will be seen from the figures that a mower consists of three principal parts: (1) a truck or carriage on two high wheels carrying the driving gear; (2) the cutting mechanism, comprising a reciprocating knife or sickle operating through slots in the guards or “fingers” fastened to the cutting bar which projects to either the right or left of the truck; and (3) the pole with whipple-trees, by which the horses are attached to give the motive power. The reciprocating knife has a separate blade to correspond to each finger, and is driven by a connecting rod and crank on the fore part of the truck. In work the pointed “fingers” pass in between the stalks of grass and the knives shear them off, acting against the fingers as the crank drives them backwards and forwards. In the swathe of grass left 107 behind by the machine, the stalks are, in a manner, thatched over one another, so that it is in the best position for drying in the sun, or, per contra, for shedding off the rain if the weather is wet. This is a great point in favour of the use of the machine, because the swathe left by the scythe required to be “tedded” out, i.e. the grass had to be shaken out or spread to allow it to be more easily dried.

It can be observed from the figures that a mower has three main parts: (1) a truck or carriage on two large wheels that supports the driving mechanism; (2) the cutting system, which includes a back-and-forth knife or sickle that moves through slots in the guards or “fingers” attached to the cutting bar, extending to either side of the truck; and (3) the pole with whipple-trees, which connect the horses to provide the power. The reciprocating knife has a separate blade for each finger, driven by a connecting rod and crank at the front of the truck. While in operation, the pointed “fingers” move between the grass stalks, and the knives cut them off against the fingers as the crank pushes them back and forth. In the strip of grass left behind by the machine, the stalks are somewhat layered over each other, making them well-positioned for drying in the sun or, conversely, for shedding rain if the weather is wet. This is a significant advantage of using the machine, as the swath left by the scythe needed to be “tedded” out, meaning the grass had to be shaken or spread out to dry more easily.

Fig. 2.—Mower (side view).

After the grass has lain in the swathe a day or two till it is partly dried, it is necessary to turn it over to dry the other side. This used to be done with the hand rake, and a band of men or women would advance in échelon across a field, each turning the swathe of hay by regular strokes of the rake at each step: “driving the dusky wave along the mead” as described in Thomson’s Seasons. This part of the work was the act of “haymaking” proper, and the subject of much sentiment in both prose and poetry. The swathes as laid by the mowing machine lent themselves to this treatment in the old days when the swathe was only some 3 to 4 ft. wide, but with the wide cut of the present day it becomes impracticable. If the hay is turned and “made” at all, the operation is now generally performed by a machine made for the purpose. There is a wide selection of “tedders” or “kickers,” and “swathe-turners” on the market. The one illustrated in fig. 3 is the first prize winner at the Royal Agricultural Society’s trials (1907). It takes two swathes at a time, and it will be seen that the working part consists of a wheel or circle of prongs or tines, which revolves across the line of the swathe. Each prong in turn catches the edge of the swathe of grass and kicks it up and over, thus turning it and leaving it loose for the wind to blow through.

After the grass has been lying in the field for a day or two until it’s partly dried, it’s important to flip it over to dry the other side. This used to be done by hand with rakes, and a group of men or women would move in formation across the field, each turning the row of hay with regular strokes of the rake at every step: “driving the dusky wave along the meadow,” as Thomson described in his *Seasons*. This part of the work was known as “haymaking” and was the focus of much sentiment in both prose and poetry. In the past, when the mowing machine produced swathes that were only about 3 to 4 feet wide, this method was effective, but with the wider cuts used today, it’s no longer practical. If the hay is flipped and “made” at all now, it’s usually done by a machine designed for the task. There’s a wide variety of “tedders” or “kickers,” and “swathe-turners” available on the market. The one shown in fig. 3 won first prize at the Royal Agricultural Society’s trials (1907). It picks up two swathes at a time, and you can see that the working part consists of a wheel or circle of prongs or tines that rotates across the line of grass. Each prong catches the edge of the swathe and flips it over, allowing it to be loose enough for the wind to blow through.

Fig. 3.—Swathe-turner. (Blackstone & Co., Ltd.).

The “kicker” is mounted on two wheels, and carries in bearings at the rear of the frame a multiple-cranked shaft, provided with a series of forks sleeved on the cranks and having their upper ends connected by links to the frame. As the crankshaft is driven from the wheels by proper gearing the forks move upward and forward, then downward and rearward, in an elliptical path, and kick the hay sharply to the rear, thus scattering and turning it.

The “kicker” is mounted on two wheels and has a multi-cranked shaft held in bearings at the back of the frame. This shaft has a series of forks attached to the cranks, and their upper ends are connected by links to the frame. As the crankshaft is turned by the wheels through proper gearing, the forks move upward and forward, then downward and backward, in an elliptical motion, kicking the hay sharply to the back, thus spreading and flipping it.

It is a moot point, however, whether grass should be turned at all, or left to “make” as it falls from the mowing machine. In a dry sunny season and with a moderate crop it is only a waste of time and labour to turn it, for it will be cured quite well as it lies, especially if raked up into loose “windrows” a little before carrying to the stack. On the other hand, where the crop is heavy (say over 2 tons per acre) or the climate is wet, turning will be necessary.

It’s debatable, though, whether grass should be turned at all or left to “dry” as it falls from the mower. In a dry, sunny season with a moderate crop, turning it is just a waste of time and effort since it will dry out nicely as it is, especially if you rake it into loose “windrows” before moving it to the stack. On the flip side, if the crop is heavy (like over 2 tons per acre) or the weather is wet, turning it will be necessary.

With heavy crops of clover, lucerne and similar forage crops, turning may be an absolute necessity, because a thick swathe of a succulent crop will be difficult to dry or “make” excepting in hot sunny weather, but with ordinary meadow grass or with a mixture of “artificial” grasses it may often be dispensed with. It must be remembered, however, that the process of turning breaks the stalks (thus letting out the albuminoid and saccharine juices), and should be avoided as far as possible in order to save both labour and the quality of the hay.

With heavy yields of clover, alfalfa, and similar forage crops, turning may be absolutely necessary, because a thick layer of a juicy crop will be hard to dry except in hot sunny weather. However, with regular meadow grass or a mix of "artificial" grasses, it might often be skipped. It's important to remember that the process of turning breaks the stems (releasing the protein and sugary juices), so it should be avoided as much as possible to preserve both labor and the quality of the hay.

One of the earlier mechanical inventions in connexion with haymaking was that of the horse rake (fig. 4). Before its introduction the hay, after making, had to be gathered up by the hand rake—a tedious and laborious process—but the introduction of this implement, whereby one horse and one man can do work before requiring six or eight men, marked a great advance. The horse rake is a framework on two wheels carrying hinged steel teeth placed 3 in. apart, so that their points slide along the ground below the hay. In work it gathers up the loose hay, and when full a tipping mechanism permits the emptying of the load.

One of the earlier mechanical inventions related to haymaking was the horse rake (fig. 4). Before it was introduced, hay had to be collected using a hand rake—a slow and labor-intensive task—but the arrival of this tool, which allows one horse and one person to do the work that previously required six or eight people, was a significant improvement. The horse rake consists of a framework on two wheels that carries hinged steel teeth spaced 3 inches apart, allowing their points to slide along the ground beneath the hay. When in use, it collects the loose hay, and when it’s full, a tipping mechanism allows for easy unloading.

Fig. 4.—Self-acting Horse Rake. (Ransomes, Sims & Jefferies, Ltd.).

The tipping is effected by pulling down a handle which sets a leverage device in motion, whereby the teeth are lifted up and the load of hay dropped below and left behind. On some rakes a clutch is worked by the driver’s foot, and this put in action causes the ordinary forward revolving motion of the driving wheels to do the tipping.

The tipping happens by pulling down a handle that activates a lever mechanism, which lifts the teeth up and drops the load of hay below and behind. On some rakes, the driver operates a foot pedal that triggers this mechanism, allowing the usual forward motion of the driving wheels to perform the tipping.

The loads are tipped end to end as the rake passes and repasses at the work, and thus the hay is left loose in long parallel rows on the field. Each row is termed a “windrow,” the passage of the wind through the hay greatly aiding the drying and “making” thereof. When hay is in this form it may either be carried direct to the stack if sufficiently “made,” or else put into cocks to season a little longer. The original width of horse rakes was about 8 ft., but nowadays they range up to 16 and 18 ft. The width should be suited to that of the swathes as left by the mower, and as the latter is now made to cut 5 and 6 ft. wide, it is necessary to have a rake to cover two widths. The very wide rakes are only suitable for even, level land; those of less width must be used where the land has been laid down in ridge and furrow. As the swathes lie in long parallel rows, it is a great convenience in working for two to be taken in width at a time, so that the horse can walk in the space between.

The loads are tipped end to end as the rake moves back and forth over the field, leaving the hay loosely arranged in long parallel lines. Each line is called a “windrow,” and the breeze passing through the hay helps it dry and "cure." When the hay is in this state, it can be sent directly to the stack if it's dry enough, or it can be piled into cocks to dry a bit longer. Originally, horse rakes were about 8 feet wide, but now they can go up to 16 and 18 feet. The width should match the size of the swaths left by the mower, which now cuts 5 to 6 feet wide, so a rake needs to cover two widths. Very wide rakes are only good for flat, level land; narrower ones should be used on land with ridges and furrows. Since the swaths are laid out in long parallel lines, it's very convenient to work two widths at a time, allowing the horse to walk in the space between.

The side-delivery rake, a development of the ordinary horse rake, is a useful implement, adapted for gathering and laying a quantity of hay in one continuous windrow. It is customary with this to go up the field throwing two swathes to one side, and then back down on the adjacent swathes, so that thus four are thrown into one central windrow. The implement consists of a frame carried on two wheels with shafts for a horse; across the frame are fixed travelling or revolving prongs of different varieties which pick up the hay off the ground and pass it along sideways across the line of travel, leaving it in one continuous line. Some makes of swathe-turners are designed to do this work as well as the turning of the hay.

The side-delivery rake, an improvement on the regular horse rake, is a handy tool designed for collecting and laying down a large amount of hay in one continuous row. The usual practice is to move up the field, tossing two swathes to one side, and then come back down the adjacent swathes, so that four are combined into one central windrow. The tool consists of a frame mounted on two wheels with shafts for a horse; across the frame are attached moving or rotating prongs of various types that pick up the hay from the ground and move it sideways across the path, leaving it in a single line. Some models of swathe-turners are built to do this job as well as turning the hay.

Fig. 5.—Sweep Rake.

Perhaps the greatest improvement of modern times is the method 108 of carrying the hay from the field to the stack. An American invention known as the sweep rake was introduced by the writer into England in 1894, and now in many modified forms is in very general use in the Midlands and south of England, where the hay is carried from the cock, windrow or swathe straight to the stack. This implement consists of a wheeled framework fitted with long wooden iron-pointed teeth which slide along the ground; two horses are yoked to it—one at each side—the driver directing from a central seat behind the framework. When in use it is taken to the farther end of a row of cocks, a windrow, or even to a row of untouched swathes on the ground, and walked forward. As it advances it scoops up a load, and when full is drawn to where the stack is being erected (fig. 5). In ordinary circumstances the sweep rake will pick up at a load two-thirds of an ordinary cart-load, but, where the hay is in good order and it is swept down hill, a whole one-horse cart-load can be carried each time. The drier the hay the better will the sweep rake work, and if it is not working sweetly but has a tendency to clog or make rolls of hay, it may be inferred that the latter is not in a condition fit for stacking. Where the loads must be taken through a gateway or a long distance to the stack, it is necessary to use carts or wagons, and the loading of these in the field out of the windrow is largely expedited by the use of the “loader,” also an American invention of which many varieties are in the market. Generally speaking, it consists of a frame carrying a revolving web with tines or prongs. The implement is hitched on behind a cart or wagon, and as it moves forward the web picks the loose hay off the ground and delivers it on the top, where a man levels it with a pitchfork and builds it into a load ready to move to the stack. At the stack the most convenient method of transferring the hay from a cart, wagon or sweep rake is the elevator, a tall structure with a revolving web carrying teeth or spikes (fig. 6). The hay is thrown in forkfuls on at the bottom, a pony-gear causes the web to revolve, and the hay is carried in an almost continuous stream up the elevator and dropped over the top on to the stack. The whole implement is made to fold down, and is provided with wheels so that it can be moved from stack to stack. In the older forms there is a “hopper” or box at the bottom into which the hay is thrown to enable the teeth of the web to catch it, but in the modern forms there is no hopper, the web reaching down to the ground so that hay can be picked up from the ground level. Where the hay is brought to the stack on carts or wagons it can be unloaded by means of the horse fork. This is an adaptation of the principle of the ordinary crane; a central pole and jib are supported by guy ropes, and from the end of the jib a rope runs over a pulley. At the end of this rope is a “fork” formed of two sets of prongs which open and shut. This is lowered on to the load of hay, the prongs are forced into it, a horse pulls at the other end of the rope, and the prongs close and “grab” several cwt. of hay which are swung up and dropped on the stack. In this way a large cart or wagon load is hoisted on to the stack in three or four “forkfuls.” The horse fork is not suited for use with the sweep rake, however, because the hay is brought up to the stack in a loose flat heap without sufficient body for the fork to get hold of.

Perhaps the biggest advancement of our times is how we move hay from the field to the stack. An American invention called the sweep rake was introduced to England by the author in 1894, and it has now been adapted into various forms that are widely used in the Midlands and southern England. This tool allows hay to be moved directly from the cock, windrow, or swathe to the stack. It consists of a wheeled frame with long wooden teeth that have metal points, which slide along the ground; it’s pulled by two horses—one on each side—with the driver seated centrally behind the frame. When in use, it’s taken to the far end of a row of cocks, a windrow, or even untouched swathes, and driven forward. As it moves, it scoops up a load and, when full, is taken to the stack site. Typically, the sweep rake can pick up about two-thirds of a standard cart load, but if the hay is in good condition and the slope is downhill, it can carry a full one-horse cart load each time. The drier the hay, the better the sweep rake performs, and if it tends to clog or create rolls instead of working smoothly, it likely means the hay isn’t ready for stacking. When loads need to go through a gateway or a longer distance to the stack, carts or wagons must be used, and loading these from the windrow is greatly sped up by a "loader," also an American invention, available in many versions on the market. Generally, it consists of a frame that supports a spinning web with tines. The loader is attached behind a cart or wagon, and as it moves, the web picks up loose hay from the ground and delivers it on top, where a person levels it with a pitchfork to prepare it for transport to the stack. At the stack, the easiest way to transfer hay from a cart or wagon or sweep rake is with an elevator, which is a tall structure featuring a rotating web with teeth or spikes. Hay is thrown in forkfuls at the bottom; a pony-gear turns the web to move the hay up the elevator and drop it on top of the stack. This tool can fold down and has wheels for easy movement from one stack to another. Older versions have a "hopper" at the bottom to receive the hay, while modern designs eliminate the hopper, allowing the web to extend to ground level to pick up hay. When hay is brought to the stack on carts or wagons, it can be unloaded using a horse fork. This is based on the principle of a standard crane, where a central pole and jib are supported by guy ropes. A rope runs over a pulley at the end of the jib, ending in a "fork" made from two sets of prongs that open and close. This is lowered onto the load of hay, the prongs are thrust into it, and a horse pulls on the other end of the rope to close the prongs and "grab" several hundredweight of hay, which are then swung up and dropped onto the stack. This method allows a large cart or wagon load to be lifted onto the stack in three or four forkfuls. However, the horse fork isn’t suitable for use with the sweep rake, as the hay is brought to the stack in a loose flat heap that lacks enough bulk for the fork to grip.

In northern and wet districts of England it is customary to “make” the hay as in the south, but it is then built up into little stacks in the field where it grew (ricks, pykes or tramp-cocks are names used for these in different districts), each containing about 10 to 15 cwt. These are made in the same way as the ordinary stack—one person on top building, another on the ground pitching up the hay—and are carefully roped and raked down. In these the hay gets a preliminary sweating or tempering while at the same time it is rendered safe from the weather, and, thus stored, it may remain for weeks before being carried to the big stacks at the homestead. The practice of putting up the hay into little ricks in the field has brought about the introduction of another set of implements for carrying these to the stackyard.

In the northern and wetter parts of England, it's common to "make" hay like they do in the south, but instead of big stacks, they form small piles in the fields where the grass is cut (these are called ricks, pykes, or tramp-cocks in different areas), each holding about 10 to 15 hundredweight. They're constructed the same way as regular stacks—one person builds on top while another pitches the hay from the ground—and they're securely tied and leveled off. This method allows the hay to go through a preliminary sweating or tempering, and at the same time, it protects it from the weather. Stored this way, it can sit for weeks before being transported to the larger stacks at the farm. The practice of creating small ricks in the fields has led to the need for a different set of tools to move these to the stackyard.

Various forms of rick-lifters are in use, the characteristic feature of which is a tipping platform on wheels to which a horse is attached between shafts. The vehicle is backed against a rick, and a chain passed round the bottom of the latter, which is then pulled up the slant of the tipped platform by means of a small windlass. When the centre of the balance is passed, the platform carrying the rick tips back to the level, and the whole is thus loaded ready to move. Another variety of loader is formed of three shear-legs with block and tackle. These are placed over a rick, under which the grab-irons are passed, and the whole hauled up by a horse. When high enough a cart is backed in below, the rick lowered, and the load is ready to carry away.

Various types of rick-lifters are used, which have a tipping platform on wheels where a horse is attached between shafts. The vehicle is positioned against a rick, and a chain is wrapped around the bottom of it, which is then lifted up the slant of the tipped platform using a small winch. Once the balance point is reached, the platform with the rick tips back to level, making it ready to move. Another type of loader consists of three sheer-legs with a block and tackle. These are set over a rick, and the grab-irons are passed underneath, then the whole thing is pulled up by a horse. When it’s high enough, a cart is backed in underneath, the rick is lowered, and the load is ready to be taken away.

Fig. 6.—Hay Elevator. (Maldon Iron Works Co.).

When put into a stack the next stage in curing the hay begins—the heating or sweating. In the growing plants the tissues are composed of living cells containing protoplasm. This continues its life action as long as it gets sufficient moisture and air. As life action involves the development of heat, the temperature in a confined space like a stack where the heat is not dissipated may rise to such a point that spontaneous combustion occurs. The chemical or physical reasons for this are not very well understood. The starch and sugar contents of the tissues are changed in part into alcohol. In the analogous process of making silage (i.e. stacking wet green grass in a closed building) the alcohol develops into acetic acid, thus making “sour” silage. In a haystack the intermediate body, acetaldehyde, which is both inflammable and suffocating, is produced—men having been suffocated when sleeping on the top of a heating stack. The production of this gas leads to slow combustion and ignition. One explanation of the process is that the protoplasm of the cells acts as a fermenting agent (like yeast) until a temperature sufficient to kill germ life, say 150° F., is reached, beyond which the action which leads up to the temperature of ignition must be purely chemical. If the stack contains no air at all it does not heat, or if it has excess of air it is safe. The danger-point in a stack is the centre at about 6 ft. from the ground; below this the weight of the hay itself squeezes out the air, and at the sides and top the heat is dissipated outwards. If a stack shows signs of overheating (a process that may take weeks or even months to develop) it can be saved by cutting a gap in the side of it with the hay knife, thus letting out the heat and fumes, and admitting fresh air to the centre. The essential point in haymaking is that the hay should be dried sufficiently to ensure the sweating process in the stack reaching no further than the stage of the formation of 109 sugar. Good hay should come out green and with the odour of coumarin—to which is due the scent of new-mown hay. Only part of a stack can ever attain to a perfect state: the tops, bottom and outsides are generally wasted by the weather after stacking, while there may be three or four intermediate qualities present. In some markets hay that has been sweated till it is brown in colour is desired, but for general purposes green hay is the best.

When stacked, the next stage of curing hay begins—the heating or sweating. In growing plants, the tissues are made up of living cells containing protoplasm. This continues to live as long as it gets enough moisture and air. Since life processes generate heat, the temperature in a confined space like a stack, where heat isn't released, can rise enough to cause spontaneous combustion. The exact chemical or physical reasons for this aren't very well understood. The starches and sugars in the tissues are partly converted into alcohol. In the similar process of making silage (i.e., stacking wet green grass in a closed building), the alcohol develops into acetic acid, which gives silage its “sour” taste. In a haystack, an intermediate substance, acetaldehyde, is produced, which is both flammable and suffocating—people have suffocated while sleeping on top of a heating stack. The production of this gas leads to slow combustion and ignition. One explanation for the process is that the protoplasm in the cells acts as a fermenting agent (like yeast) until a temperature high enough to kill germ life, about 150°F, is reached; beyond that point, the actions leading to ignition must be purely chemical. If the stack has no air at all, it doesn't heat up, and if it has too much air, it is safe. The danger zone in a stack is the center, about 6 feet off the ground; below this, the weight of the hay squeezes the air out, and at the sides and top, the heat dissipates outward. If a stack shows signs of overheating (a process that can take weeks or even months to develop), it can be saved by cutting a gap in the side with a hay knife, allowing the heat and fumes to escape while letting fresh air into the center. The key point in haymaking is that the hay should be dried enough to ensure the sweating process in the stack doesn’t go beyond the formation of sugar. Good hay should come out green and smell of coumarin, which gives new-mown hay its scent. Only part of a stack can ever be in perfect condition: the tops, bottoms, and outsides typically get damaged by the weather after stacking, while there may be three or four intermediate qualities present. In some markets, hay that has been sweated to a brown color is sought after, but for general use, green hay is the best.

Hay often becomes musty when the weather during “making” has been too wet to allow of its getting sufficiently dry for stacking. Mustiness is caused by the growth of various moulds (Penicillium, Aspergillus, &c.) on the damp stems, with the result that the hay when cut out for use is dusty and shows white streaks and spots. Such hay is inferior to that which has been overheated, and in practice it is found that a strong heating will prevent mouldiness by killing the fungi.

Hay often becomes musty when the weather during the “making” process has been too wet to let it dry enough for stacking. Mustiness is caused by the growth of various molds (Penicillium, Aspergillus, etc.) on the damp stems, resulting in dusty hay with white streaks and spots when cut for use. This hay is of lower quality than hay that has been overheated; in practice, it's found that strong heating prevents mold by killing the fungi.

Heavy lush crops—especially those containing a large proportion of clover or other leguminous plants—are proportionately more difficult to “make” than light grassy ones. Thus, if one ton is taken as a fair yield off one acre, a two-ton crop will probably require four times as much work in curing as the smaller crop. In the treacherous climate of Great Britain hay is frequently spoiled because the weather does not hold good long enough to permit of its being properly “made.” Consequently many experienced haymakers regard a moderate crop as the more profitable because it can be stacked in first-class condition, whereas a heavy crop forced by “high farming” is grown at a loss, owing to the weather waste and the heavier expenses involved in securing it.

Heavy, dense crops—especially those with a lot of clover or other leguminous plants—are significantly harder to manage than lighter grassy ones. So, if you consider one ton a reasonable yield from an acre, a two-ton crop will likely require four times as much effort to cure as the smaller one. In Great Britain's unpredictable weather, hay often gets ruined because conditions don't stay favorable long enough for it to be properly prepared. As a result, many experienced haymakers believe that a moderate crop is more profitable because it can be stored in excellent condition, while a heavy crop driven by "intensive farming" results in losses due to weather damage and the higher costs associated with harvesting it.

In handling or marketing out of the stack hay may be transported loose on a cart or wagon, but it is more usual to truss or bale it. A truss is a rectangular block cut out of the solid stack, usually about 3 ft. long and 2 ft. wide, and of a thickness sufficient to give a weight of 56 ℔: thirty-six of these constitute a “load” of 18 cwt.—the unit of sale in many markets. A truss is generally bound with two bands of twisted straw, but if it has to undergo much handling it is compressed in a hay-press and tied with two string bands. In some districts a baler is used: a square box with a compressible lid. The hay is tumbled in loose, the lid forced down by a leverage arrangement and the bale tied by three strings. It is usually made to weigh from 1 to 1½ cwt. The customs of different markets vary very much in their methods of handling hay, and in the overseas hay trade the size and style of the trusses or bales are adapted for packing on ship-board.

In handling or marketing hay from the stack, it can be transported loose on a cart or wagon, but it's more common to bundle or bale it. A truss is a rectangular block cut from the solid stack, typically about 3 feet long and 2 feet wide, with a thickness that gives it a weight of 56 pounds; thirty-six of these make up a “load” of 18 hundredweight—the unit of sale in many markets. A truss is usually bound with two bands of twisted straw, but if it needs to be handled a lot, it's compressed in a hay-press and tied with two string bands. In some areas, a baler is used: a square box with a compressible lid. The hay is tossed in loose, the lid is pushed down using a lever, and the bale is tied with three strings. It's usually made to weigh between 1 and 1½ hundredweight. The practices of different markets vary widely in how they handle hay, and in the international hay trade, the size and type of trusses or bales are adapted for shipping.


HAYASHI, TADASU, Count (1850-  ), Japanese statesman, was born in Tōkyō (then Yedo), and was one of the first batch of students sent by the Tokugawa government to study in England. He returned on the eve of the abolition of the Shōgunate, and followed Enomoto (q.v.) when the latter, sailing with the Tokugawa fleet to Yezo, attempted to establish a republic there in defiance of the newly organized government of the emperor. Thrown into prison on account of this affair, Hayashi did not obtain office until 1871. Thereafter he rose rapidly, until, after a long period of service as vice-minister of foreign affairs, he was appointed to represent his country first in Peking, then in St Petersburg and finally in London, where he acted an important part in negotiating the first Anglo-Japanese Alliance, for which service he received the title of viscount. He remained in London throughout the Russo-Japanese War, and was the first Japanese ambassador at the court of St James after the war. Returning to Tōkyō in 1906 to take the portfolio of foreign affairs, he remained in office until the resignation of the Saionji cabinet in 1908. He was raised to the rank of count for eminent services performed during the war between his country and Russia, and in connexion with the second Anglo-Japanese Alliance of 1905.

HAYASHI, TADASU, Count (1850-  ), Japanese statesman, was born in Tokyo (then Yedo) and was one of the first groups of students sent by the Tokugawa government to study in England. He returned just before the end of the Shōgunate and followed Enomoto (q.v.) when the latter, sailing with the Tokugawa fleet to Yezo, tried to establish a republic there in opposition to the newly organized emperor's government. Imprisoned because of this incident, Hayashi didn’t hold office until 1871. After that, he quickly advanced, and after a long period as vice-minister of foreign affairs, he was appointed to represent his country first in Peking, then in St. Petersburg, and finally in London, where he played a key role in negotiating the first Anglo-Japanese Alliance, for which he was given the title of viscount. He stayed in London throughout the Russo-Japanese War and was the first Japanese ambassador at the court of St. James after the war. Returning to Tokyo in 1906 to take up the foreign affairs portfolio, he remained in office until the Saionji cabinet resigned in 1908. He was elevated to the rank of count for his significant contributions during the war between Japan and Russia, and in relation to the second Anglo-Japanese Alliance of 1905.


HAYDEN, FERDINAND VANDEVEER (1829-1887), American geologist, was born at Westfield, Massachusetts, on the 7th of September 1829. He graduated from Oberlin College in 1850 and from the Albany Medical College in 1853, where he attracted the notice of Professor James Hall, state geologist of New York, through whose influence he was induced to join in an exploration of Nebraska. In 1856 he was engaged under the United States government, and commenced a series of investigations of the Western Territories, one result of which was his Geological Report of the Exploration of the Yellowstone and Missouri Rivers in 1859-1860 (1869). During the Civil War he was actively employed as an army surgeon. In 1867 he was appointed geologist-in-charge of the United States Geological and Geographical Survey of the Territories, and from his twelve years of labour there resulted a most valuable series of volumes in all branches of natural history and economic science; and he issued in 1877 his Geological and Geographical Atlas of Colorado. Upon the reorganization and establishment of the United States Geological Survey in 1879 he acted for seven years as one of the geologists. He died at Philadelphia on the 22nd of December 1887.

HAYDEN, FERDINAND VANDEVEER (1829-1887), American geologist, was born in Westfield, Massachusetts, on September 7, 1829. He graduated from Oberlin College in 1850 and from Albany Medical College in 1853, where he caught the attention of Professor James Hall, the state geologist of New York. Thanks to Hall’s influence, he joined an exploration of Nebraska. In 1856, he was hired by the United States government and began a series of investigations in the Western Territories, leading to his Geological Report of the Exploration of the Yellowstone and Missouri Rivers in 1859-1860 (1869). During the Civil War, he served actively as an army surgeon. In 1867, he was appointed geologist-in-charge of the United States Geological and Geographical Survey of the Territories, and from his twelve years of work there, he produced a valuable series of volumes across all branches of natural history and economic science; he published his Geological and Geographical Atlas of Colorado in 1877. When the United States Geological Survey was reorganized and established in 1879, he served as one of the geologists for seven years. He died in Philadelphia on December 22, 1887.

His other publications were: Sun Pictures of Rocky Mountain Scenery (1870); The Yellowstone National Park, illustrated by chromolithographic reproductions of water-colour sketches by Thomas Moran (1876); The Great West: its Attractions and Resources (1880). With F. B. Meek, he wrote (Smithsonian Institution Contributions, v. 14. Art. 4) “Palaeontology of the Upper Missouri, Pt. 1, Invertebrate.” His valuable notes on Indian dialects are in The Transactions of the American Philosophical Society (1862), in The American Journal of Science (1862) and in The Proceedings of the American Philosophical Society (1869). With A. R. C. Selwyn he wrote North America (1883) for Stanford’s Compendium.

His other publications were: Sun Pictures of Rocky Mountain Scenery (1870); The Yellowstone National Park, which features chromolithographic reproductions of watercolor sketches by Thomas Moran (1876); The Great West: its Attractions and Resources (1880). Along with F. B. Meek, he wrote (Smithsonian Institution Contributions, v. 14. Art. 4) “Paleontology of the Upper Missouri, Pt. 1, Invertebrate.” His important notes on Indian dialects are found in The Transactions of the American Philosophical Society (1862), in The American Journal of Science (1862), and in The Proceedings of the American Philosophical Society (1869). He also collaborated with A. R. C. Selwyn to write North America (1883) for Stanford’s Compendium.


HAYDN, FRANZ JOSEPH (1732-1809), Austrian composer, was born on the 31st of March 1732 at Rohrau (Trstnik), a village on the borders of Lower Austria and Hungary. There is sufficient evidence that his family was of Croatian stock: a fact which throws light upon the distinctively Slavonic character of much of his music. He received the first rudiments of education from his father, a wheelwright with twelve children, and at an early age evinced a decided musical talent. This attracted the attention of a distant relative named Johann Mathias Frankh, who was schoolmaster in the neighbouring town of Hainburg, and who, in 1738, took the child and for the next two years trained him as a chorister. In 1740, on the recommendation of the Dean of Hainburg, Haydn obtained a place in the cathedral choir of St Stephen’s, Vienna, where he took the solo-part in the services and received, at the choir school, some further instruction on the violin and the harpsichord. In 1749 his voice broke, and the director, Georg von Reutter, took the occasion of a boyish escapade to turn him into the streets. A few friends lent him money and found him pupils, and in this way he was enabled to enter upon a rigorous course of study (he is said to have worked for sixteen hours a day), partly devoted to Fux’s treatise on counterpoint, partly to the “Friedrich” and “Württemberg” sonatas of C. P. E. Bach, from which he gained his earliest acquaintance with the principles of musical structure. The first fruits of his work were a comic opera, Der neue krumme Teufel, and a Mass in F major (both written in 1751), the former of which was produced with success. About the same time he made the acquaintance of Metastasio, who was lodging in the same house, and who introduced him to one or two patrons; among others Señor Martinez, to whose daughter he gave lessons, and Porpora, who, in 1753, took him for the summer to Männersdorf, and there gave him instruction in singing and in the Italian language.

HAYDN, FRANZ JOSEPH (1732-1809), Austrian composer, was born on March 31, 1732, in Rohrau (Trstnik), a village on the borders of Lower Austria and Hungary. There is enough evidence to suggest that his family was of Croatian descent, which sheds light on the distinctively Slavic character of much of his music. He received his early education from his father, a wheelwright with twelve children, and showed a clear musical talent from a young age. This talent drew the attention of a distant relative named Johann Mathias Frankh, who was a schoolmaster in the nearby town of Hainburg. In 1738, he took the child in and trained him as a chorister for the next two years. In 1740, on the recommendation of the Dean of Hainburg, Haydn got a spot in the cathedral choir of St Stephen’s in Vienna, where he sang solos in services and received additional training in violin and harpsichord at the choir school. In 1749, when his voice changed, the director, Georg von Reutter, took the opportunity of a youthful mischief to kick him out. A few friends helped him out with money and found him students, which allowed him to start a rigorous course of study (he reportedly worked for sixteen hours a day), partly focused on Fux’s treatise on counterpoint and partly on the “Friedrich” and “Württemberg” sonatas of C. P. E. Bach, from which he learned the basics of musical structure. The first results of his hard work were a comic opera, Der neue krumme Teufel, and a Mass in F major (both written in 1751), with the former being successfully performed. Around the same time, he met Metastasio, who was staying in the same house and introduced him to a few patrons, including Señor Martinez, whose daughter he taught, and Porpora, who took him to Männersdorf for the summer in 1753 and instructed him in singing and the Italian language.

The turning-point of his career came in 1755, when he accepted an invitation to the country-house of Freiherr von Fürnberg, an accomplished amateur who was in the habit of collecting parties of musicians for the performance of chamber-works. Here Haydn wrote, in rapid succession, eighteen divertimenti which include his first symphony and his first quartet; the two earliest examples of the forms with which his name is most closely associated. Thenceforward his prospects improved. On his return to Vienna in 1756 he became famous as teacher and composer, in 1759 he was appointed conductor to the private band of Count Morzin, for whom he wrote several orchestral works (including a symphony in D major erroneously called his first), and in 1760 he was promoted to the sub-directorship of Prince Paul Esterhazy’s Kapelle, at that time the best in Austria. During the tenure of his appointment with Count Morzin he married the daughter of a Viennese hairdresser named Keller, who had befriended him in his days of poverty, but the 110 marriage turned out ill and he was shortly afterwards separated from his wife, though he continued to support her until her death in 1800. From 1760 to 1790 he remained with the Esterhazys, principally at their country-seats of Esterhàz and Eisenstadt, with occasional visits to Vienna in the winter. In 1762 Prince Paul Esterhazy died and was succeeded by his brother Nicholas, surnamed the Magnificent, who increased Haydn’s salary, showed him every mark of favour, and, on the death of Werner in 1766, appointed him Oberkapellmeister. With the encouragement of a discriminating patron, a small but excellent orchestra and a free hand, Haydn made the most of his opportunity and produced a continuous stream of compositions in every known musical form. To this period belong five Masses, a dozen operas, over thirty clavier-sonatas, over forty quartets, over a hundred orchestral symphonies and overtures, a Stabat Mater, a set of interludes for the service of the Seven Words, an Oratorio Tobias written for the Tonkünstler-Societät of Vienna, and a vast number of concertos, divertimenti and smaller pieces, among which were no less than 175 for Prince Nicholas’ favourite instrument, the baryton.

The turning point of his career came in 1755 when he accepted an invitation to the country house of Freiherr von Fürnberg, an accomplished amateur who often gathered groups of musicians to perform chamber works. Here, Haydn quickly composed eighteen divertimenti, including his first symphony and first quartet; these are the two earliest examples of the forms most closely associated with his name. From then on, his prospects improved. Upon returning to Vienna in 1756, he became well-known as a teacher and composer. In 1759, he was appointed conductor of the private band of Count Morzin, for whom he wrote several orchestral works (including a symphony in D major, mistakenly called his first), and in 1760, he was promoted to the sub-directorship of Prince Paul Esterhazy’s Kapelle, which was then the best in Austria. During his time with Count Morzin, he married the daughter of a Viennese hairdresser named Keller, who had helped him during his days of poverty, but the marriage turned out poorly, and he was soon separated from his wife, although he continued to support her until her death in 1800. From 1760 to 1790, he stayed with the Esterhazys, mostly at their country estates of Esterhàz and Eisenstadt, with occasional visits to Vienna in the winter. In 1762, Prince Paul Esterhazy died and was succeeded by his brother Nicholas, known as the Magnificent, who raised Haydn’s salary, showed him every favor, and, after Werner’s death in 1766, appointed him Oberkapellmeister. With the encouragement of a discerning patron, a small but excellent orchestra, and plenty of creative freedom, Haydn seized the opportunity and produced a steady stream of compositions in every known musical form. This period includes five Masses, a dozen operas, over thirty clavier sonatas, more than forty quartets, over a hundred orchestral symphonies and overtures, a Stabat Mater, a set of interludes for the service of the Seven Words, an oratorio Tobias written for the Tonkünstler-Societät of Vienna, and an extensive number of concertos, divertimenti, and smaller pieces, including no less than 175 for Prince Nicholas’ favorite instrument, the baryton.

Meanwhile his reputation was spreading throughout Europe. A Viennese notice of his appointment as Oberkapellmeister spoke of him as “the darling of our nation,” his works were reprinted or performed in every capital from Madrid to St Petersburg. He received commissions from the cathedral of Cadiz, from the grand duke Paul, from the king of Prussia, from the directors of the Concert Spirituel at Paris; beside his transactions with Breitkopf and Härtel, and with La Chevardière, he sold to one English firm the copyright of no less than 129 compositions. But the most important fact of biography during these thirty years was his friendship with Mozart, whose acquaintance he made at Vienna in the winter of 1781-1782. There can have been little personal intercourse between them, for Haydn was rarely in the capital, and Mozart seems never to have visited Eisenstadt; but the cordiality of their relations and the mutual influence which they exercised upon one another are of the highest moment in the history of 18th-century music. “It was from Haydn that I first learned to write a quartet,” said Mozart; it was from Mozart that Haydn learned the richer style and the fuller mastery of orchestral effect by which his later symphonies are distinguished.

Meanwhile, his reputation was spreading across Europe. A notice from Vienna about his appointment as Oberkapellmeister referred to him as “the darling of our nation.” His works were reprinted or performed in every capital from Madrid to St. Petersburg. He received commissions from the cathedral of Cadiz, from Grand Duke Paul, from the King of Prussia, and from the directors of the Concert Spirituel in Paris. In addition to his contracts with Breitkopf and Härtel, and with La Chevardière, he sold the copyright of no less than 129 compositions to one English firm. But the most significant aspect of his life during these thirty years was his friendship with Mozart, whom he met in Vienna in the winter of 1781-1782. There probably wasn’t much personal interaction between them, as Haydn was rarely in the capital, and Mozart seems never to have visited Eisenstadt. However, the warmth of their relationship and the mutual influence they had on each other were crucial to the history of 18th-century music. “It was from Haydn that I first learned to write a quartet,” said Mozart; from Mozart, Haydn learned the richer style and greater mastery of orchestral effects that characterize his later symphonies.

In 1790 Prince Nicholas Esterhazy died and the Kapelle was disbanded. Haydn, thus released from his official duties, forthwith accepted a commission from Salomon, the London concert-director, to write and conduct six symphonies for the concerts in the Hanover Square Rooms. He arrived in England at the beginning of 1791 and was welcomed with the greatest enthusiasm, receiving among other honours the degree of D Mus. from the university of Oxford. In June 1792 he returned home, and, breaking his journey at Bonn, was presented with a Cantata by Beethoven, then aged two-and-twenty, whom he invited to come to Vienna as his pupil. The lessons, which were not very successful, lasted for about a year, and were then interrupted by Haydn’s second visit to England (January 1794 to July 1795), where he produced the last six of his “Salomon” symphonies. From 1795 onward he resided in the Mariahilf suburb of Vienna, and there wrote his last eight Masses, the last and finest of his chamber works, the Austrian national anthem (1797), the Creation (1799) and the Seasons (1801). His last choral composition which can be dated with any certainty was the Mass in C minor, written in 1802 for the name-day of Princess Esterhazy. Thenceforward his health declined, and his closing years, surrounded by the love of friends and the esteem of all musicians, were spent almost wholly in retirement. On the 27th of March 1808 he was able to attend a performance of the Creation, given in his honour, but it was his last effort, and on the 31st of May 1809 he died, aged seventy-seven. Among the mourners who followed him to the grave were many French officers from Napoleon’s army, which was then occupying Vienna.

In 1790, Prince Nicholas Esterhazy passed away, and the Kapelle was disbanded. Haydn, now free from his official responsibilities, quickly accepted a commission from Salomon, the concert director in London, to write and conduct six symphonies for the concerts in the Hanover Square Rooms. He arrived in England at the beginning of 1791 and was welcomed with great enthusiasm, receiving, among other honors, an honorary D Mus. degree from the University of Oxford. In June 1792, he returned home and, while stopping in Bonn, was presented with a cantata by Beethoven, who was then just 22 years old. Haydn invited him to come to Vienna as his student. The lessons, which were not very effective, lasted about a year before being interrupted by Haydn's second visit to England (January 1794 to July 1795), where he completed the last six of his “Salomon” symphonies. From 1795 onward, he lived in the Mariahilf suburb of Vienna, where he wrote his last eight Masses, the last and best of his chamber works, the Austrian national anthem (1797), the Creation (1799), and the Seasons (1801). His last choral work with a known date was the Mass in C minor, written in 1802 for Princess Esterhazy's name day. After that, his health declined, and his later years, filled with the love of friends and the respect of all musicians, were mostly spent in seclusion. On March 27, 1808, he attended a performance of the Creation in his honor, but it was his last appearance, and on May 31, 1809, he passed away at the age of seventy-seven. Among those mourning him at his funeral were many French officers from Napoleon’s army, which was then occupying Vienna.

Haydn’s place in musical history is best determined by his instrumental compositions. His operas, for all their daintiness and melody, no longer hold the stage; the Masses in which he “praised God with a cheerful heart” have been condemned by the severer decorum of our own day; of his oratorios the Creation alone survives. In all these his work belongs mainly to the style and idiom of a bygone generation: they are monuments, not landmarks, and their beauty and invention seem rather to close an epoch than to inaugurate its successor. Even the naïf pictorial suggestion, of which free use is made in the Creation and in the Seasons, is closer to the manner of Handel than to that of the 19th century: it is less the precursor of romance than the descendant of an earlier realism. But as the first great master of the quartet and the symphony his claim is incontestable. He began, half-consciously, by applying through the fuller medium the lessons of design which he had learned from C. P. E. Bach’s sonatas; then the medium itself began to suggest wider horizons and new possibilities of treatment; his position at Eisenstadt enabled him to experiment without reserve; his genius, essentially symphonic in character, found its true outlet in the opportunities of pure musical structure. The quartets in particular exhibit a wider range and variety of structural invention than those of any other composer except Beethoven. Again it is here that we can most readily trace the important changes which he wrought in melodic idiom. Before his time instrumental music was chiefly written for the Paradiesensaal, and its melody often sacrificed vitality of idea to a ceremonial courtliness of phrase. Haydn broke through this convention by frankly introducing his native folk-music, and by writing many of his own tunes in the same direct, vigorous and simple style. The innovation was at first received with some disfavour; critics accustomed to polite formalism censured it as extravagant and undignified; but the freshness and beauty of its melody soon silenced all opposition, and did more than anything else throughout the 18th century to establish the principle of nationalism in musical art. The actual employment of Croatian folk-tunes may be illustrated from the string quartets Op. 17, No. 1; Op. 33, No. 3; Op. 50, No. 1; Op. 77, No. 1, and the Salomon Symphonies in D and E♭, while there is hardly an instrumental composition of Haydn’s in which his own melodies do not show some traces of the same influence. His natural idiom in short was that of a heightened and ennobled folk-song, and one of the most remarkable evidences of his genius was the power with which he adapted all his perfection and symmetry of style to the requirements of popular speech. His music is in this way singularly expressive; its humour and pathos are not only absolutely sincere, but so outspoken that we cannot fail to catch their significance.

Haydn’s role in musical history is best defined by his instrumental works. His operas, despite their charm and melody, are no longer performed; the Masses in which he “praised God with a cheerful heart” have fallen out of favor due to the stricter norms of today; of his oratorios, only the Creation remains popular. Overall, his work belongs mainly to the style and language of a past era: they are monuments, not landmarks, and their beauty and creativity seem to close an era rather than start a new one. Even the naive pictorial elements found in the Creation and the Seasons are more aligned with Handel’s style than that of the 19th century; they are less precursors of romanticism and more descendants of earlier realism. However, as the first major master of the quartet and symphony, his contributions are undeniable. He began, somewhat unconsciously, by applying the design lessons he learned from C. P. E. Bach’s sonatas through a fuller medium; then the medium itself started to suggest broader horizons and new ways to explore. His position in Eisenstadt allowed him to experiment freely; his genius, fundamentally symphonic, found its true expression in the possibilities of pure musical structure. The quartets especially show a broader range and variety of structural innovation than any other composer except Beethoven. It is also here that we can easily observe the significant changes he made in melodic style. Before his time, instrumental music was mainly composed for the Paradiesensaal, often sacrificing the vitality of ideas for ceremonial elegance. Haydn broke this norm by openly incorporating his native folk music and composing many of his tunes in a direct, energetic, and simple style. Initially, this innovation faced criticism; critics who favored formal politeness deemed it extravagant and undignified. However, the freshness and beauty of his melodies quickly silenced dissent and played a crucial role in establishing the principle of nationalism in musical art throughout the 18th century. The actual use of Croatian folk tunes can be seen in the string quartets Op. 17, No. 1; Op. 33, No. 3; Op. 50, No. 1; Op. 77, No. 1, and the Salomon Symphonies in D and E♭, while hardly any of Haydn's instrumental compositions lack traces of this influence. His natural style was essentially an elevated and refined folk song, and one of the most remarkable aspects of his genius was his ability to adapt his skillful and symmetrical style to the needs of popular expression. His music is remarkably expressive; its humor and pathos are not only completely sincere but also so direct that their meaning is unmistakable.

In the development of instrumental polyphony Haydn’s work was almost as important as that of Mozart. Having at his disposal a band of picked virtuosi he could produce effects as different from the tentative experiments of C. P. E. Bach as these were from the orchestral platitudes of Reutter or Hasse. His symphony Le Midi (written in 1761) already shows a remarkable freedom and independence in the handling of orchestral forces, and further stages of advance were reached in the oratorio of Tobias, in the Paris and Salomon symphonies, and above all in the Creation, which turns to good account some of the debt which he owed to his younger contemporary. The importance of this lies not only in a greater richness of musical colour, but in the effect which it produced on the actual substance and texture of composition. The polyphony of Beethoven was unquestionably influenced by it and, even in his latest sonatas and quartets, may be regarded as its logical outcome.

In the development of instrumental polyphony, Haydn's work was almost as significant as Mozart's. With a group of talented virtuosos at his disposal, he could create effects that were as different from the tentative experiments of C. P. E. Bach as those were from the orchestral clichés of Reutter or Hasse. His symphony Le Midi (written in 1761) already demonstrates notable freedom and independence in the use of orchestral forces, and further advancements were made in the oratorio Tobias, in the Paris and Salomon symphonies, and especially in the Creation, which effectively utilized some of the influence he received from his younger contemporary. The significance of this lies not only in a richer musical palette but also in the impact it had on the actual substance and texture of composition. Beethoven's polyphony was undeniably influenced by it, and even in his latest sonatas and quartets, it can be seen as a logical outcome of that influence.

The compositions of Haydn include 104 symphonies, 16 overtures, 76 quartets, 68 trios, 54 sonatas, 31 concertos and a large number of divertimentos, cassations and other instrumental pieces; 24 operas and dramatic pieces, 16 Masses, a Stabat Mater, interludes for the “Seven Words,” 3 oratorios, 2 Te Deums and many smaller pieces for the church, over 40 songs, over 50 canons and arrangements of Scottish and Welsh national melodies.

The works of Haydn include 104 symphonies, 16 overtures, 76 quartets, 68 trios, 54 sonatas, 31 concertos, and a variety of divertimentos, cassations, and other instrumental works; 24 operas and dramatic pieces, 16 Masses, a Stabat Mater, interludes for the "Seven Words," 3 oratorios, 2 Te Deums, and many smaller pieces for the church, over 40 songs, more than 50 canons, and arrangements of Scottish and Welsh national melodies.

His younger brother, Johann Michael Haydn (1737-1806), was also a chorister at St Stephen’s, and shortly after leaving the choir-school was appointed Kapellmeister at Grosswardein (1755) and at Salzburg (1762). The latter office he held for forty-three years, during which time he wrote over 360 compositions 111 for the church and much instrumental music, which, though unequal, deserves more consideration than it has received. He was the intimate friend of Mozart, who had a high opinion of his genius, and the teacher of C. M. von Weber. His most important works were the Missa hispanica, which he exchanged for his diploma at Stockholm, a Mass in D minor, a Lauda Sion, a set of graduals, forty-two of which are reprinted in Diabelli’s Ecclesiasticon, three symphonies (1785), and a string quintet in C major which has been erroneously attributed to Joseph Haydn. Another brother, Johann Evangelist Haydn (1743-1805), gained some reputation as a tenor vocalist, and was for many years a member of Prince Esterhazy’s Kapelle.

His younger brother, Johann Michael Haydn (1737-1806), was also a choir member at St. Stephen’s, and shortly after leaving the choir school, he became the Kapellmeister at Grosswardein (1755) and Salzburg (1762). He held the latter position for forty-three years, during which he composed over 360 pieces 111 for the church and a lot of instrumental music, which, while varied in quality, deserves more recognition than it has received. He was a close friend of Mozart, who thought highly of his talent, and he taught C. M. von Weber. His most significant works include the Missa hispanica, which he traded for his diploma in Stockholm, a Mass in D minor, a Lauda Sion, a set of graduals, forty-two of which are reprinted in Diabelli’s Ecclesiasticon, three symphonies (1785), and a string quintet in C major that has mistakenly been credited to Joseph Haydn. Another brother, Joseph Haydn (1743-1805), earned some fame as a tenor vocalist and was a member of Prince Esterhazy’s Kapelle for many years.

Bibliography.—S. Mayr, Brevi notizie storiche della vita e delle opere di Giuseppe Haydn (1809); Griesinger, Biographische Notizen über Joseph Haydn (1810); Carpani, Le Haydeni (1812 and 1823); Bombet (M. de Stendhal), Vies de Haydn, de Mozart et de Métastase (Paris, 1854); Karajan, Joseph Haydn in London (1861); C. F. Pohl, Mozart und Haydn in London (1867); Joseph Haydn (vol. i. 1875, vol. ii. 1882: this, the standard biography, was left unfinished at Dr Pohl’s death and needs a third volume to complete it); article on Haydn in Grove’s Dictionary of Music and Musicians; Fr. S. Kuhač, Josip Haydn i Hravatske Narodne Popievke (Joseph Haydn and the Croatian Folk-songs) (Agram, 1880); A. Niggli, Joseph Haydn, sein Leben und Werken (Basel, 1882); L. Nohl, Biographie Haydns (Leipzig, Reclam); P. D. Townsend; Joseph Haydn (London, 1884), Biography in H. Reimann’s Berühmte Musiker (Berlin, 1898); J. C. Hadden, Joseph Haydn (Great Musicians series) (London, 1902). To these should be added the list of Haydn’s symphonies printed in Alfred Wotquenne’s Catalogue de la Bibliothèque du Conservatoire Royal de Bruxelles, vol. ii. (1902).

References.—S. Mayr, Brief Historical Notes on the Life and Works of Giuseppe Haydn (1809); Griesinger, Biographical Notes on Joseph Haydn (1810); Carpani, The Haydn (1812 and 1823); Bombet (M. de Stendhal), Lives of Haydn, Mozart, and Metastasio (Paris, 1854); Karajan, Joseph Haydn in London (1861); C. F. Pohl, Mozart and Haydn in London (1867); Joseph Haydn (vol. i. 1875, vol. ii. 1882: this, the standard biography, was left unfinished at Dr. Pohl’s death and needs a third volume to complete it); article on Haydn in Grove’s Dictionary of Music and Musicians; Fr. S. Kuhač, Josip Haydn i Hravatske Narodne Popievke (Joseph Haydn and the Croatian Folk-songs) (Zagreb, 1880); A. Niggli, Joseph Haydn, His Life and Works (Basel, 1882); L. Nohl, Biography of Haydn (Leipzig, Reclam); P. D. Townsend, Joseph Haydn (London, 1884); Biography in H. Reimann’s Famous Musicians (Berlin, 1898); J. C. Hadden, Joseph Haydn (Great Musicians series) (London, 1902). Additionally, the list of Haydn’s symphonies can be found in Alfred Wotquenne’s Catalogue of the Royal Conservatory Library of Brussels, vol. ii. (1902).

(W. H. Ha.)

HAYDON, BENJAMIN ROBERT (1786-1846), English historical painter and writer, was born at Plymouth on the 26th of January 1786. His mother was the daughter of the Rev. Benjamin Cobley, rector of Dodbrook, Devon, whose son, General Sir Thomas Cobley, signalized himself in the Russian service at the siege of Ismail. His father, a prosperous printer, stationer and publisher, was a man of literary taste, and was well known and esteemed amongst all classes in Plymouth. Haydon, an only son, at an early date gave evidence of his taste for study, which was carefully fostered and promoted by his mother. At the age of six he was placed in Plymouth grammar school, and at twelve in Plympton St Mary school. He completed his education in this institution, where Sir Joshua Reynolds also had acquired all the scholastic training he ever received. On the ceiling of the school-room was a sketch by Reynolds in burnt cork, which it used to be Haydon’s delight to sit and contemplate. Whilst at school he had some thought of adopting the medical profession, but he was so shocked at the sight of an operation that he gave up the idea. A perusal of Albinus, however, inspired him with a love for anatomy; and Reynolds’s discourses revived within him a smouldering taste for painting, which from childhood had been the absorbing idea of his mind.

HAYDON, BENJAMIN ROBERT (1786-1846), English historical painter and writer, was born in Plymouth on January 26, 1786. His mother was the daughter of Rev. Benjamin Cobley, rector of Dodbrook, Devon, whose son, General Sir Thomas Cobley, distinguished himself in the Russian army during the siege of Ismail. His father, a successful printer, stationer, and publisher, had a love for literature and was well-known and respected among all classes in Plymouth. Haydon, their only son, showed an early interest in learning, which his mother carefully nurtured. At six, he was enrolled in Plymouth grammar school, and at twelve, he moved to Plympton St Mary school. He finished his education there, the same place where Sir Joshua Reynolds had also received all the formal training he ever had. On the ceiling of the schoolroom was a sketch by Reynolds done in burnt cork, which Haydon loved to sit and admire. While at school, he considered pursuing a career in medicine, but he discarded the idea after being horrified by the sight of a surgery. However, reading Albinus sparked a passion for anatomy in him; and Reynolds’s lectures reignited his long-held interest in painting, which had captivated him since childhood.

Sanguine of success, full of energy and vigour, he started from the parental roof, on the 14th of May 1804, for London, and entered his name as a student of the Royal Academy. He began and prosecuted his studies with such unwearied ardour that Fuseli wondered when he ever found time to eat. At the age of twenty-one (1807) Haydon exhibited, for the first time, at the Royal Academy, “The Repose in Egypt,” which was bought by Mr Thomas Hope the year after. This was a good start for the young artist, who shortly received a commission from Lord Mulgrave and an introduction to Sir George Beaumont. In 1809 he finished his well-known picture of “Dentatus,” which, though it brought him a great increase of fame, involved him in a lifelong quarrel with the Royal Academy, whose committee had hung the picture in a small side-room instead of the great hall. In 1810 his difficulties began through the stoppage of an allowance of £200 a year he had received from his father. His disappointment was embittered by the controversies in which he now became involved with Sir George Beaumont, for whom he had painted his picture of “Macbeth,” and Payne Knight, who had denied the beauties as well as the money value of the Elgin Marbles. “The Judgment of Solomon,” his next production, gained him £700, besides £100 voted to him by the directors of the British Institution, and the freedom of the borough of Plymouth. To recruit his health and escape for a time from the cares of London life, Haydon joined his intimate friend Wilkie in a trip to Paris; he studied at the Louvre; and on his return to England produced his “Christ’s Entry into Jerusalem,” which afterwards formed the nucleus of the American Gallery of Painting, erected by his cousin, John Haviland of Philadelphia. Whilst painting another large work, the “Resurrection of Lazarus,” his pecuniary difficulties increased, and for the first time he was arrested but not imprisoned, the sheriff-officer taking his word for his appearance. Amidst all these harassing cares he married in October 1821 a beautiful young widow who had some children, Mrs Hyman, to whom he was devotedly attached.

Confident of success and full of energy, he left his parents' home on May 14, 1804, for London, and enrolled as a student at the Royal Academy. He pursued his studies with such tireless enthusiasm that Fuseli wondered when he ever had time to eat. At twenty-one (1807), Haydon exhibited his work “The Repose in Egypt” at the Royal Academy for the first time, which was purchased by Mr. Thomas Hope the following year. This was a promising start for the young artist, who soon received a commission from Lord Mulgrave and an introduction to Sir George Beaumont. In 1809, he completed his famous painting “Dentatus,” which, while it brought him considerable fame, also led to a lifelong feud with the Royal Academy, whose committee had displayed the piece in a small side room instead of the main hall. In 1810, his troubles began when his father stopped an annual allowance of £200. His disappointment was worsened by the disputes he had with Sir George Beaumont, for whom he had painted “Macbeth,” and Payne Knight, who criticized the beauty and monetary value of the Elgin Marbles. His next work, “The Judgment of Solomon,” earned him £700, along with £100 awarded by the directors of the British Institution and the freedom of the borough of Plymouth. To restore his health and take a break from the stress of London life, Haydon joined his close friend Wilkie on a trip to Paris; he studied at the Louvre; and upon returning to England, he created “Christ’s Entry into Jerusalem,” which later became the centerpiece of the American Gallery of Painting established by his cousin, John Haviland of Philadelphia. While working on another large piece, “The Resurrection of Lazarus,” his financial troubles grew, and for the first time he was arrested but not jailed, as the sheriff's officer accepted his promise to appear. Amidst all these stressful issues, he married in October 1821 a beautiful young widow with children, Mrs. Hyman, to whom he was deeply devoted.

In 1823 Haydon was lodged in the King’s Bench, where he received consoling letters from the first men of the day. Whilst a prisoner he drew up a petition to parliament in favour of the appointment of “a committee to inquire into the state of encouragement of historical painting,” which was presented by Brougham. He also, during a second imprisonment in 1827, produced the picture of the “Mock Election,” the idea of which had been suggested by an incident that happened in the prison. The king (George IV.) gave him £500 for this work. Among Haydon’s other pictures were—1829, “Eucles” and “Punch”; 1831, “Napoleon at St Helena,” for Sir Robert Peel; “Xenophon, on his Retreat with the ‘Ten Thousand,’ first seeing the Sea”; and “Waiting for the Times,” purchased by the marquis of Stafford; 1832, “Falstaff” and “Achilles playing the Lyre.” In 1834 he completed the “Reform Banquet,” for Lord Grey—this painting contained 197 portraits; in 1843, “Curtius Leaping into the Gulf,” and “Uriel and Satan.” There was also the “Meeting of the Anti-Slavery Society,” energetically treated, now in the National Portrait Gallery. When the competition took place at Westminster Hall, Haydon sent two cartoons, “The Curse of Adam” and “Edward the Black Prince,” but, with some unfairness, he was not allowed a prize for either. He then painted “The Banishment of Aristides,” which was exhibited with other productions under the same roof where the American dwarf Tom Thumb was then making his début in London. The exhibition was unsuccessful; and the artist’s difficulties increased to such an extent that, whilst employed on his last grand effort, “Alfred and the Trial by Jury,” overcome by debt, disappointment and ingratitude, he wrote “Stretch me no longer on this rough world,” and put an end to his existence with a pistol-shot, on the 22nd of June 1846, in the sixty-first year of his age. He left a widow and three children (various others had died), who, by the generosity of their father’s friends, were rescued from their pecuniary difficulties and comfortably provided for; amongst the foremost of these friends were Sir Robert Peel, Count D’Orsay, Mr Justice Talfourd and Lord Carlisle.

In 1823, Haydon was held in the King’s Bench, where he received encouraging letters from prominent figures of the time. While imprisoned, he drafted a petition to Parliament advocating for the formation of “a committee to investigate the support for historical painting,” which was presented by Brougham. During a second imprisonment in 1827, he created the painting “Mock Election,” inspired by an incident that occurred in the prison. King George IV awarded him £500 for this work. Among Haydon’s other paintings were—1829, “Eucles” and “Punch”; 1831, “Napoleon at St Helena,” commissioned by Sir Robert Peel; “Xenophon, on his Retreat with the ‘Ten Thousand,’ first seeing the Sea”; and “Waiting for the Times,” bought by the Marquis of Stafford; 1832, “Falstaff” and “Achilles playing the Lyre.” In 1834, he completed the “Reform Banquet” for Lord Grey—this painting included 197 portraits; in 1843, “Curtius Leaping into the Gulf,” and “Uriel and Satan.” He also created “Meeting of the Anti-Slavery Society,” which was passionately depicted and is now in the National Portrait Gallery. During the competition at Westminster Hall, Haydon submitted two cartoons, “The Curse of Adam” and “Edward the Black Prince,” but, somewhat unfairly, he did not win a prize for either. He then painted “The Banishment of Aristides,” which was displayed alongside other works at the same venue where the American performer Tom Thumb was debuting in London. The exhibition didn’t succeed; and Haydon's struggles worsened to the point that while working on his last major piece, “Alfred and the Trial by Jury,” overwhelmed by debt, disappointment, and ingratitude, he wrote “Stretch me no longer on this rough world,” and ended his life with a gunshot on June 22, 1846, at the age of sixty-one. He left behind a widow and three children (as various others had died), who were supported by the kindness of their father’s friends, ensuring they were taken care of; among those friends were Sir Robert Peel, Count D’Orsay, Mr. Justice Talfourd, and Lord Carlisle.

Haydon began his first lecture on painting and design in 1835, and afterwards visited all the principal towns in England and Scotland. His delivery was energetic and imposing, his language powerful, flowing and apt, and replete with wit and humour; and to look at the lecturer, excited by his subject, one could scarcely fancy him a man overwhelmed with difficulties and anxieties. The height of Haydon’s ambition was to behold the chief buildings of his country adorned with historical representations of her glory. He lived to see the acknowledgment of his principles by government in the establishment of schools of design, and the embellishment of the new houses of parliament; but in the competition of artists for the carrying out of this object, the commissioners (amongst whom was one of his former pupils) considered, or affected to consider, that he had failed. Haydon was well versed in all points of his profession; and his Lectures, which were published shortly after their delivery, showed that he was as bold a writer as painter. It may be mentioned in this connexion that he was the author of the long and elaborate article, “Painting,” in the 7th edition of the Encyclopaedia Britannica.

Haydon kicked off his first lecture on painting and design in 1835, and afterwards traveled to all the major towns in England and Scotland. His delivery was energetic and impressive, his language strong, fluid, and fitting, and full of wit and humor; and looking at the lecturer, energized by his subject, you could hardly imagine he was a man burdened with challenges and worries. The peak of Haydon’s ambition was to see his country’s main buildings decorated with historical representations of its glory. He lived to witness the government acknowledge his principles with the establishment of design schools and the decoration of the new houses of parliament; however, in the competition among artists to achieve this goal, the commissioners (including one of his former students) decided, or pretended to decide, that he had not succeeded. Haydon was knowledgeable about every aspect of his profession; and his Lectures, published shortly after they were delivered, demonstrated that he was as bold a writer as he was a painter. It’s worth mentioning that he authored the lengthy and detailed article, “Painting,” in the 7th edition of the Encyclopaedia Britannica.

112

112

To form a correct estimate of Haydon it is necessary to read his autobiography. This is one of the most natural books ever written, full of various and abundant power, and fascinating to the reader. The author seems to have daguerreotyped his feelings and sentiments without restraint as they rose in his mind, and his portrait stands in these volumes limned to the life by his own hand. His love for his art was both a passion and a principle. He found patrons difficult to manage; and, not having the tact to lead them gently, he tried to drive them fiercely. He failed, abused patrons and patronage, and intermingled talk of the noblest independence with acts not always dignified. He was self-willed to perversity, but his perseverance was such as is seldom associated with so much vehemence and passion. With a large fund of genuine self-reliance he combined a considerable measure of vanity. To the last he believed in his own powers and in the ultimate triumph of art. In taste he was deficient, at least as concerned himself. Hence the tone of self-assertion which he assumed in his advertisements, catalogues and other appeals to the public. He proclaimed himself the apostle and martyr of high art, and, not without some justice, he believed himself to have on that account a claim on the sympathy and support of the nation. It must be confessed that he often tested severely those whom he called his friends. Every reader of his autobiography will be struck at the frequency and fervour of the short prayers interspersed throughout the work. Haydon had an overwhelming sense of a personal, overruling and merciful providence, which influenced his relations with his family, and to some extent with the world. His conduct as a husband and father entitles him to the utmost sympathy. In art his powers and attainments were undoubtedly very great, although his actual performances mostly fall short of the faculty which was manifestly within him; his general range and force of mind were also most remarkable, and would have qualified him to shine in almost any path of intellectual exertion or of practical work. His eager and combative character was partly his enemy; but he had other enemies actuated by motives as unworthy as his own were always high-pitched and on abstract grounds laudable. Of his three great works—the “Solomon,” the “Entry into Jerusalem” and the “Lazarus”—the second has generally been regarded as the finest. The “Solomon” is also a very admirable production, showing his executive power at its loftiest, and of itself enough to place Haydon at the head of British historical painting in his own time. The “Lazarus” (which belongs to the National Gallery, but is not now on view there) is a more unequal performance, and in various respects open to criticism and censure; yet the head of Lazarus is so majestic and impressive that, if its author had done nothing else, we must still pronounce him a potent pictorial genius.

To get an accurate view of Haydon, you need to read his autobiography. It's one of the most genuine books ever written, full of diverse and powerful insights that captivate the reader. The author seems to have vividly captured his feelings and thoughts as they came to him, and his character is vividly portrayed in these volumes by his own hand. His love for his art was both a passion and a principle. He found it challenging to manage his patrons; and without the finesse to gently guide them, he often tried to push them forcefully. He struggled, criticized patrons and patronage, mixing discussions about noble independence with actions that weren't always dignified. He was stubborn to a fault, but his determination was impressive, especially for someone so passionate. Along with a strong sense of self-reliance, he also had a good amount of vanity. Until the end, he believed in his abilities and the ultimate victory of art. His taste was lacking, at least when it came to himself. This explains the tone of self-assertion he adopted in his advertisements, catalogs, and other appeals to the public. He declared himself the apostle and martyr of high art and, not without some justification, believed he deserved sympathy and support from the nation. It must be said that he often put his friends to the test. Anyone who reads his autobiography will notice the frequent and heartfelt short prayers throughout the book. Haydon had a strong sense of a personal, all-powerful, and merciful higher power, which influenced his relationships with his family and, to some degree, with the world. His behavior as a husband and father deserves the utmost sympathy. In terms of art, his abilities and achievements were undeniably significant, although his actual works often fell short of the talent that was clearly within him; his overall range and mental force were remarkable and would have allowed him to excel in almost any field of intellectual or practical work. His eager and combative nature was partly his enemy, but he faced other foes motivated by less noble reasons. Of his three major works—the “Solomon,” the “Entry into Jerusalem,” and the “Lazarus”—the second is generally seen as the best. The “Solomon” is also an admirable piece, showcasing his highest executive skill and enough to establish Haydon as a leading figure in British historical painting of his era. The “Lazarus” (which belongs to the National Gallery but isn’t currently on display) is a more uneven work and is open to various criticisms; yet, the head of Lazarus is so grand and striking that, even if he had done nothing else, we would still consider him a powerful artistic genius.

The chief authorities for the life of Haydon are Life of B. R. Haydon, from his Autobiography and Journals, edited and compiled by Tom Taylor (3 vols., 1853); and B. R. Haydon’s Correspondence and Table Talk, with a memoir by his son, F. W. Haydon (2 vols., 1876).

The main sources for the life of Haydon are Life of B. R. Haydon, from his Autobiography and Journals, edited and compiled by Tom Taylor (3 vols., 1853); and B. R. Haydon’s Correspondence and Table Talk, with a memoir by his son, F. W. Haydon (2 vols., 1876).

(W. M. R.)

HAYES, RUTHERFORD BIRCHARD (1822-1893), nineteenth president of the United States, was born in Delaware, Ohio, on the 4th of October 1822. He received his first education in the common schools, graduated in 1842 at Kenyon College, Gambier, Ohio, and was a student at the law school of Harvard University from 1843 until his graduation in 1845. He was admitted to the bar in 1845, and practised law, first at Lower Sandusky (now Fremont), and then at Cincinnati, where he won a very respectable standing, and in 1858-1861 served as city solicitor. In politics he was at first an anti-slavery Whig and then from the time of its organization in 1854 until his death was a member of the Republican party. In December 1852 he married Lucy Ware Webb of Chillicothe, Ohio, who survived him. After the breaking out of the Civil War the governor of Ohio, on the 7th of June 1861, appointed him a major of a volunteer regiment, and in July he was sent to western Virginia for active service. He served throughout the war, distinguished himself particularly at South Mountain, Winchester, Fisher’s Hill and Cedar Creek, and by successive promotions became a brigadier-general of volunteers and, by brevet, a major-general of volunteers. While still in the field he was elected a member of the National House of Representatives, and took his seat in December 1865. He was re-elected in 1866, and supported the reconstruction measures advocated by his party. From 1868 to 1872 he was governor of Ohio. In 1873 he removed from Cincinnati to Fremont, his intention being to withdraw from public life; but in 1875 the Republican party in Ohio once more selected him as its candidate for the governorship. He accepted the nomination with great reluctance. The Democrats adopted a platform declaring in favour of indefinitely enlarging the volume of the irredeemable paper currency which the Civil War had left behind it. Hayes stoutly advocated the speediest practicable resumption of specie payments, and carried the election. The “sound-money campaign” in Ohio having attracted the attention of the whole country, Hayes was marked out as a candidate for the presidency, and he obtained the nomination of the Republican National Convention of 1876, his chief competitor being James G. Blaine. The candidate of the Democratic party, Samuel J. Tilden, by his reputation as a statesman and a reformer of uncommon ability, drew many Republican votes. An excited controversy having arisen about the result of the balloting in the states of South Carolina, Florida, Oregon and Louisiana, the two parties in Congress in order to allay a crisis dangerous to public peace agreed to pass an act referring all contested election returns to an extraordinary commission, called the “Electoral Commission” (q.v.), which decided each contest by eight against seven votes in favour of the Republican candidates. Hayes was accordingly on the 2nd of March 1877 declared duly elected.

HAYES, RUTHERFORD BIRCHARD (1822-1893), the nineteenth president of the United States, was born in Delaware, Ohio, on October 4, 1822. He received his early education in local schools, graduated in 1842 from Kenyon College in Gambier, Ohio, and studied at Harvard Law School from 1843 until he graduated in 1845. He was admitted to the bar in 1845 and practiced law, first in Lower Sandusky (now Fremont) and then in Cincinnati, where he established a solid reputation and served as city solicitor from 1858 to 1861. Politically, he began as an anti-slavery Whig, and from the time the Republican party was founded in 1854 until his death, he was a member of that party. In December 1852, he married Lucy Ware Webb from Chillicothe, Ohio, who outlived him. After the Civil War broke out, the governor of Ohio appointed him a major of a volunteer regiment on June 7, 1861, and in July, he was sent to western Virginia for active duty. He served throughout the war, notably at South Mountain, Winchester, Fisher’s Hill, and Cedar Creek, and through successive promotions, he became a brigadier general of volunteers and, by brevet, a major general of volunteers. While still serving in the field, he was elected to the National House of Representatives and took his seat in December 1865. He was re-elected in 1866 and supported the reconstruction policies of his party. From 1868 to 1872, he served as governor of Ohio. In 1873, he moved from Cincinnati to Fremont, intending to retire from public life; however, in 1875, the Ohio Republican party nominated him again for governor. He reluctantly accepted the nomination. The Democrats adopted a platform that favored greatly expanding the irredeemable paper currency left in the wake of the Civil War. Hayes strongly advocated for the quickest possible return to specie payments and won the election. The “sound-money campaign” in Ohio gained national attention, and Hayes emerged as a presidential candidate, securing the nomination of the Republican National Convention in 1876, with James G. Blaine as his main competitor. Samuel J. Tilden, the Democratic candidate, attracted many Republican votes due to his reputation as a skilled statesman and reformer. A heated dispute arose regarding the election results in South Carolina, Florida, Oregon, and Louisiana. To resolve a potentially destabilizing crisis, both parties in Congress agreed to pass a law that referred all contentious election returns to a special body called the “Electoral Commission” (q.v.), which resolved each dispute with an eight-to-seven vote in favor of the Republican candidates. Hayes was officially declared elected on March 2, 1877.

During his administration President Hayes devoted his efforts mainly to civil service reform, resumption of specie payments and the pacification of the Southern States, recently in rebellion. In order to win the co-operation of the white people in the South in maintaining peace and order, he put himself in communication with their leaders. He then withdrew the Federal troops which since the Civil War had been stationed at the southern State capitals. An end was thus made of the “carpet-bag governments” conducted by Republican politicians from the North, some of which were very corrupt, and had been upheld mainly by the Federal forces. This policy found much favour with the people generally, but displeased many of the Republican politicians, because it loosened the hold of the Republican party upon the Southern States. Though it did not secure to the negroes sufficient protection in the exercise of their political rights, it did much to extinguish the animosities still existing between the two sections of the Union and to promote the material prosperity of the South. President Hayes endeavoured in vain to induce Congress to appropriate money for a Civil Service Commission; and whenever he made an effort to restrict the operation of the traditional “spoils system,” he met the strenuous opposition of a majority of the most powerful politicians of his party. Nevertheless the system of competitive examinations for appointments was introduced in some of the great executive departments in Washington, and in the custom-house and the post-office in New York. Moreover, he ordered that “no officer should be required or permitted to take part in the management of political organizations, caucuses, conventions or election campaigns,” and that “no assessment for political purposes on officers or subordinates should be allowed”; and he removed from their offices the heads of the post-office in St Louis and of the custom-house in New York—influential party managers—on the ground that they had misused their official positions for partisan ends. In New York the three men removed were Chester A. Arthur, the collector; Alonzo B. Cornell, the naval officer of the Port; and George H. Sharpe, the surveyor of the customs. While these measures were of limited scope and effect, they served greatly to facilitate the more extensive reform of the civil service which subsequently took place, though at the same time they alienated a powerful faction of the Republican party in New York under the leadership of Roscoe Conkling. Although the resumption of specie payments had been provided for, to begin at a given 113 time by the Resumption Act of January 1875, opposition to it did not cease. A bill went through both Houses of Congress providing that a silver dollar should be coined of the weight of 412½ grains, to be full legal tender for all debts and dues, public and private, except where otherwise expressly stipulated in the contract. President Hayes returned this bill with his veto, but the veto was overruled in both Houses of Congress. Meanwhile, however, the preparations for the return to specie payments were continued by the Administration with unflinching constancy and on the 1st of January 1879 specie payments were resumed without difficulty. None of the evils predicted appeared. A marked revival of business and a period of general prosperity ensued. In his annual message of the 1st of December 1879 President Hayes urged the suspension of the silver coinage and also the withdrawal of the United States legal tender notes, but Congress failed to act upon the recommendation. His administration also did much to ameliorate the condition of the Indian tribes and to arrest the spoliation of the public forest lands.

During his time in office, President Hayes focused primarily on civil service reform, resuming specie payments, and restoring peace in the Southern States, which had recently been in rebellion. To gain the support of white Southerners in maintaining order, he reached out to their leaders. He then removed the Federal troops that had been stationed in the Southern State capitals since the Civil War. This move effectively ended the "carpet-bag governments" run by corrupt Republican politicians from the North, which had largely depended on Federal forces for support. This policy was generally well-received by the public, but it upset many Republican politicians because it weakened the Republican party's influence in the South. While it did not provide enough protection for African Americans in exercising their political rights, it significantly helped reduce the hostility between the two regions of the Union and boosted the South's economic growth. President Hayes tried unsuccessfully to convince Congress to allocate money for a Civil Service Commission, and whenever he attempted to limit the traditional “spoils system,” he faced strong opposition from many powerful politicians in his party. Nonetheless, competitive examinations for appointments were introduced in some key executive departments in Washington, along with the custom house and post office in New York. Additionally, he ordered that “no officer should be required or allowed to participate in managing political organizations, caucuses, conventions, or election campaigns,” and that “no assessments for political purposes on officers or subordinates should be permitted”; he also removed influential party managers from their posts in St. Louis and New York's custom house for misusing their official roles for political gain. In New York, the three officials removed were Chester A. Arthur, the collector; Alonzo B. Cornell, the naval officer of the port; and George H. Sharpe, the customs surveyor. Although these actions had limited impact, they significantly aided the later, more extensive reform of the civil service, although they also alienated a powerful faction of the Republican party in New York led by Roscoe Conkling. Even though the Resumption Act of January 1875 had set a specific start date for resuming specie payments, opposition continued. A bill was passed by both Houses of Congress to coin a silver dollar weighing 412½ grains, making it full legal tender for all debts, except where specified otherwise in contracts. President Hayes vetoed this bill, but Congress overrode the veto in both Houses. Meanwhile, the Administration pressed on with preparations for returning to specie payments, and on January 1, 1879, specie payments were resumed smoothly. None of the predicted issues occurred. A significant revival in business and a period of general prosperity followed. In his annual message on December 1, 1879, President Hayes recommended suspending silver coinage and withdrawing U.S. legal tender notes, but Congress did not act on his recommendation. His administration also made considerable efforts to improve the situation of the Indian tribes and to stop the exploitation of public forest lands.

Although President Hayes was not popular with the professional politicians of his own party, and was exposed to bitter attacks on the part of the Democratic opposition on account of the cloud which hung over his election, his conduct of public affairs gave much satisfaction to the people generally. In the presidential election of 1880 the Republican party carried the day after an unusually quiet canvass, a result largely due to popular contentment with the then existing state of public affairs. On the 4th of March 1881 President Hayes retired to his home at Fremont, Ohio. Various universities and colleges conferred honorary degrees upon him. His remaining years he devoted to active participation in philanthropic enterprises; thus he served as president of the National Prison Association and of the Board of Trustees chosen to administer the John F. Slater fund for the promotion of industrial education among the negroes of the South, and was a member, also, of the Board of Trustees of the Peabody Education fund for the promotion of education in the South. He died at Fremont, after a short illness, on the 17th of January 1893.

Although President Hayes wasn't popular with the political professionals in his own party and faced harsh criticism from the Democratic opposition because of the controversy surrounding his election, his management of public affairs was generally well-received by the public. In the presidential election of 1880, the Republican party won after an unusually calm campaign, a result largely due to widespread satisfaction with the current state of affairs. On March 4, 1881, President Hayes returned to his home in Fremont, Ohio. Various universities and colleges awarded him honorary degrees. In his later years, he actively participated in philanthropic efforts; he served as president of the National Prison Association and on the Board of Trustees responsible for managing the John F. Slater fund to promote industrial education for African Americans in the South, and he was also a member of the Board of Trustees of the Peabody Education Fund, which aimed to enhance education in the South. He passed away in Fremont after a brief illness on January 17, 1893.

There is no adequate biography, but three “campaign lives” may be mentioned: Life, Public Services and Select Speeches of Rutherford B. Hayes, by James Quay Howard (Cincinnati, 1876); Life of R. B. Hayes, by William D. Howells (New York, 1876); and a Life by Russell H. Conwell (Boston, 1876). See also Paul L. Haworth, The Hayes-Tilden Disputed Presidential Election of 1876 (Cleveland, O., 1906).

There isn’t a thorough biography, but three "campaign lives" can be noted: Life, Public Services and Select Speeches of Rutherford B. Hayes, by James Quay Howard (Cincinnati, 1876); Life of R. B. Hayes, by William D. Howells (New York, 1876); and a Life by Russell H. Conwell (Boston, 1876). Also, see Paul L. Haworth, The Hayes-Tilden Disputed Presidential Election of 1876 (Cleveland, O., 1906).

(C. S.)

HAY FEVER, Hay Asthma, or Summer Catarrh, a catarrhal affection of the mucous membrane of the upper respiratory tract, due to the action of the pollen of certain grasses. It is often associated with asthmatic attacks. The disease affects certain families, and is hereditary in about one-third of the cases. It is more common among women than men, city than country dwellers, and the educated and highly nervous than the lower classes. It has no connexion with the coryzas that are produced in nervous people by the odour of cats, &c. The complaint has been investigated by Professor W. P. Dunbar of Hamburg, who has shown that it is due to the pollens of certain grasses (notably rye) and plants, and that the severity of the attack is directly proportional to the amount of pollen in the air. He has isolated an albuminoid poison which, when applied to the nose of a susceptible individual, causes an attack, while there is no result in the case of a normal person. By injecting the poison into animals, he has obtained an anti-toxin, which is capable of aborting an attack of hay fever. The symptoms are those commonly experienced in the case of a severe cold, consisting of headache, violent sneezing and watery discharge from the nostrils and eyes, together with a hard dry cough, and occasionally severe asthmatic paroxysms. The period of liability to infection naturally coincides with the pollen season.

ALLERGIES, Hay Fever Asthma, or Summer Allergies, is a condition that affects the mucous membrane of the upper respiratory tract, caused by the pollen from certain grasses. It’s often linked to asthma attacks. The condition tends to run in families, with about one-third of cases being hereditary. It’s more prevalent in women than men, more common in urban areas than rural ones, and shows a higher incidence among educated and highly anxious individuals compared to those from lower socioeconomic backgrounds. It is not related to the nasal reactions that some individuals have to cat odors, etc. Professor W. P. Dunbar from Hamburg has researched this condition and found that it is triggered by the pollen of certain grasses (especially rye) and plants, with the intensity of symptoms directly related to the pollen count in the air. He has identified a protein toxin that, when introduced into the nose of an allergic person, triggers an attack, while it does not affect a non-allergic individual. By injecting this toxin into animals, he created an anti-toxin that can prevent a hay fever attack. Symptoms resemble those of a severe cold and include headaches, intense sneezing, and watery nasal and eye discharge, along with a dry cough and occasionally severe asthma episodes. The risk of experiencing symptoms generally aligns with the pollen season.

The radical treatment is to avoid vegetation. Local treatment consisting of thorough destruction of the sensitive area of the mucous membrane of the nose often produces good results. There are various drugs, the best of which are cocaine and the extract of the suprarenal body, which, when applied to the nose, are sometimes effectual; in practice, however, it is found that larger and larger doses are required, and that sooner or later they afford no relief. The same remarks apply to a number of patent specifics, of which the principal constituent is one of the above drugs. An additional and stronger objection to the use of cocaine is that a “habit” is often contracted, with the most disastrous results. Finally Dunbar’s serum may be applied to the nose and eyes on rising, and on the slightest suggestion of irritation during the day; it will, in the large majority of cases, be found to be quite effectual.

The extreme approach is to avoid allergens. Local treatment that involves thoroughly eliminating the sensitive areas of the nasal mucous membrane often yields good results. There are various medications, with cocaine and adrenal gland extract being the most effective. When applied to the nose, these can sometimes work, but in practice, it's noticed that increasingly larger doses are necessary, and eventually, they offer no relief. The same applies to many over-the-counter remedies that contain one of these drugs as their main ingredient. A significant concern with using cocaine is that it can lead to addiction, which can have disastrous effects. Lastly, Dunbar’s serum can be applied to the nose and eyes upon waking and at the first sign of irritation during the day; in most cases, it tends to be quite effective.


HAYLEY, WILLIAM (1745-1820), English writer, the friend and biographer of William Cowper, was born at Chichester on the 9th of November 1745. He was sent to Eton in 1757, and to Trinity Hall, Cambridge, in 1763; his connexion with the Middle Temple, London, where he was admitted in 1766, was merely nominal. In 1767 he left Cambridge and went to live in London. Two years later he married Eliza, daughter of Thomas Ball, dean of Chichester. His private means enabled Hayley to live on his patrimonial estate at Eartham, Sussex, and he retired there in 1774. He had already written many occasional poetical pieces, when in 1771 his tragedy, The Afflicted Father, was rejected by David Garrick. In the same year his translation of Pierre Corneille’s Rodogune as The Syrian Queen was also declined by George Colman. Hayley won the fame he enjoyed amongst his contemporaries by his poetical Essays and Epistles; a Poetical Epistle to an Eminent Painter (1780), addressed to his friend George Romney, an Essay on History (1780), in three epistles, addressed to Edward Gibbon; Essay on Epic Poetry (1782) addressed to William Mason; A Philosophical Essay on Old Maids (1785); and the Triumphs of Temper (1781). The last mentioned work was so popular as to run to twelve or fourteen editions; together with the Triumphs of Music (Chichester, 1804) it was ridiculed by Byron in English Bards and Scotch Reviewers. So great was Hayley’s fame that on Thomas Warton’s death in 1790 he was offered the laureateship, which he refused. In 1792, while writing the Life of Milton (1794), Hayley made Cowper’s acquaintance. A warm friendship sprang up between the two which lasted till Cowper’s death in 1800. Hayley indeed was mainly instrumental in getting Cowper his pension. In 1800 Hayley also lost his natural son, Thomas Alphonso Hayley, to whom he was devotedly attached. He had been a pupil of John Flaxman’s, to whom Hayley’s Essay on Sculpture (1800) is addressed. Flaxman introduced William Blake to Hayley, and after the latter had moved in 1800 to his “marine hermitage” at Felpham, Sussex, Blake settled near him for three years to engrave the illustrations for the Life of Cowper. This, Hayley’s best known work, was published in 1803-1804 (Chichester) in 3 vols. In 1805 he published Ballads founded on Anecdotes of Animals (Chichester), with illustrations by Blake, and in 1809 The Life of Romney. For the last twelve years of his life Hayley received an allowance for writing his Memoirs. He died at Felpham on the 12th of November 1820. Hayley’s first wife died in 1797; her mind had been seriously affected, and since 1789 they had been separated. He married in 1809 Mary Welford, but they also separated after three years. He left no children.

HAYLEY, WILLIAM (1745-1820), was an English writer and a close friend and biographer of William Cowper. He was born in Chichester on November 9, 1745, and attended Eton in 1757, then Trinity Hall, Cambridge, in 1763. His connection with the Middle Temple in London, where he was admitted in 1766, was mostly just formal. In 1767, he left Cambridge and moved to London. Two years later, he married Eliza, the daughter of Thomas Ball, the dean of Chichester. His personal finances allowed Hayley to live on his inherited estate in Eartham, Sussex, where he relocated in 1774. He had already penned several occasional poems when his tragedy, The Afflicted Father, was rejected by David Garrick in 1771. That same year, his translation of Pierre Corneille’s Rodogune as The Syrian Queen was also turned down by George Colman. Hayley gained the recognition he received among his peers through his poetical Essays and Epistles; particularly a Poetical Epistle to an Eminent Painter (1780) addressed to his friend George Romney, an Essay on History (1780) in three epistles directed to Edward Gibbon, Essay on Epic Poetry (1782) aimed at William Mason, A Philosophical Essay on Old Maids (1785), and The Triumphs of Temper (1781). The latter work was so successful that it went to twelve or fourteen editions; along with The Triumphs of Music (Chichester, 1804), it was mocked by Byron in English Bards and Scotch Reviewers. Hayley was so famous that when Thomas Warton died in 1790, he was offered the position of poet laureate, which he declined. In 1792, while working on the Life of Milton (1794), Hayley met Cowper. A deep friendship developed between them, lasting until Cowper’s death in 1800. Hayley played a significant role in securing Cowper a pension. In 1800, Hayley also lost his natural son, Thomas Alphonso Hayley, to whom he was very devoted. Thomas had been a student of John Flaxman, to whom Hayley’s Essay on Sculpture (1800) is dedicated. Flaxman introduced William Blake to Hayley, and after moving in 1800 to his “marine hermitage” in Felpham, Sussex, Blake lived nearby for three years to create illustrations for the Life of Cowper. This, Hayley’s most famous work, was published between 1803 and 1804 in Chichester in three volumes. In 1805, he released Ballads founded on Anecdotes of Animals (Chichester), illustrated by Blake, and in 1809, The Life of Romney. For the last twelve years of his life, Hayley received a stipend to write his Memoirs. He died in Felpham on November 12, 1820. Hayley’s first wife died in 1797; she had suffered a serious mental decline, and they had been separated since 1789. He married Mary Welford in 1809, but they also split after three years. He had no children.

Hayley’s Poetical Works were published in 3 vols. (1785); his Poems and Plays in 6 vols. (1788).

Hayley’s Poetical Works were published in 3 volumes (1785); his Poems and Plays in 6 volumes (1788).

See Memoirs ... of William Hayley ... and Memoirs of his son T. A. Hayley, ed. John Johnson (2 vols., 1823) (containing many of Hayley’s letters); an article on these memoirs by Robert Southey in the Quarterly Review, vol. xxxi., 1825; William Blake, by A. C. Swinburne (2nd ed., 1868, pp. 28 et seq.); Life of William Blake, by Alexander Gilchrist (vol. i., 1880), with some of Blake’s letters to Hayley; The Correspondence of William Cowper, arranged by Thomas Wright (vol. iv., 1904), containing many letters to Hayley.

See Memoirs ... of William Hayley ... and Memoirs of his son T. A. Hayley, ed. John Johnson (2 vols., 1823) (which includes many of Hayley’s letters); an article about these memoirs by Robert Southey in the Quarterly Review, vol. xxxi., 1825; William Blake, by A. C. Swinburne (2nd ed., 1868, pp. 28 and following); Life of William Blake, by Alexander Gilchrist (vol. i., 1880), featuring some of Blake’s letters to Hayley; The Correspondence of William Cowper, compiled by Thomas Wright (vol. iv., 1904), which includes many letters to Hayley.


HAYM, RUDOLF (1821-1901), German publicist and philosopher, was born at Grünberg, in Silesia, on the 5th of October 1821, and died at St Anton (Arlberg) on the 27th of August 1901. He studied philosophy and theology at Halle and Berlin, and lived at Halle during 1846 and 1847. He was a member of the National Assembly at Frankfort in 1848, and wrote an account of the proceedings from the standpoint of the Right Centre. 114 From 1851 he lectured in literature and philosophy at the university of Halle, and became professor in 1860. His writings are biographical and critical, devoted mainly to modern German philosophy and literature. In 1870 he published a masterly history of the Romantic school. He also wrote biographies of W. von Humboldt (1856), Hegel (1857), Schopenhauer (1864), Herder (1877-1885), Max Duncker (1890). In 1901 he published Erinnerungen aus meinem Leben.

HAYM, RUDOLF (1821-1901), a German publicist and philosopher, was born in Grünberg, Silesia, on October 5, 1821, and passed away in St Anton (Arlberg) on August 27, 1901. He studied philosophy and theology at Halle and Berlin, living in Halle during 1846 and 1847. He was a member of the National Assembly in Frankfurt in 1848 and wrote an account of the events from the perspective of the Right Centre. 114 From 1851, he lectured on literature and philosophy at Halle University and became a professor in 1860. His writings are biographical and critical, mainly focused on modern German philosophy and literature. In 1870, he published an impressive history of the Romantic school. He also wrote biographies of W. von Humboldt (1856), Hegel (1857), Schopenhauer (1864), Herder (1877-1885), and Max Duncker (1890). In 1901, he published Erinnerungen aus meinem Leben.


HAYNAU, JULIUS JACOB (1786-1853), Austrian general, was the natural son of the landgrave—afterwards elector—of Hesse-Cassel, William IX. He entered the Austrian army as an infantry officer in 1801, and saw much service in the Napoleonic wars. He was wounded at Wagram, and distinguished during the operations in Italy in 1813 and 1814. Between 1815 and 1847 he rose to the rank of field marshal lieutenant. A violent temper, which he made no attempt to control or conceal, led him into trouble with his superiors. His hatred of revolutionary principles was fanatical. When the insurrectionary movements of 1848 broke out in Italy, his known zeal for the cause of legitimacy, as much as his reputation as an officer, marked him out for command. He fought with success in Italy, but was chiefly noted for the severity he showed in suppressing and punishing a rising in Brescia. It ought to be remembered that the mob of Brescia had massacred invalid Austrian soldiers in the hospital, a provocation which always leads to reprisals. In June 1849 Haynau was called to Vienna to command first an army of reserve, and then in the field against the Hungarians. His successes against the declining revolutionary cause were numerous and rapid. In Hungary, as in Italy, he was accused of brutality. It was, for instance, asserted that he caused women who showed any sympathy with the insurgents to be whipped. His ostentatious hatred of the revolutionary parties marked him out as the natural object for these accusations. On the restoration of peace he was appointed to high command in Hungary. His temper quickly led him into quarrels with the minister of war, and he resigned his command in 1850. He then travelled abroad. The refugees had spread his evil reputation. In London he was attacked and beaten by Messrs Barclay & Perkins’ draymen when visiting the brewery, and he was saved from mob violence in Brussels with some difficulty. He died on the 14th of March 1853. On the 11th of October 1808 Haynau had married Thérèse von Weber, the daughter of Field Marshal Lieutenant Weber, who was slain at Aspern. She died, leaving one daughter, in 1850.

HAYNAU, JULIUS JACOB (1786-1853), was an Austrian general and the illegitimate son of William IX, the landgrave who later became elector of Hesse-Cassel. He joined the Austrian army as an infantry officer in 1801 and saw significant action during the Napoleonic wars. He was wounded at Wagram and distinguished himself during the campaigns in Italy in 1813 and 1814. From 1815 to 1847, he climbed to the rank of field marshal lieutenant. His uncontrolled and transparent violent temper often got him into conflict with his superiors. He had an extreme hatred for revolutionary ideas. When the uprisings in Italy broke out in 1848, his well-known commitment to the cause of legitimacy, as well as his reputation as an officer, made him a natural choice for command. He had success in Italy but gained notoriety for his harsh methods in quelling a rebellion in Brescia. It's important to note that the mob in Brescia had slaughtered injured Austrian soldiers in a hospital, which is a provocation that typically triggers retaliation. In June 1849, Haynau was summoned to Vienna to lead a reserve army and then to confront the Hungarians directly. He achieved numerous quick victories against the weakening revolutionary movement. In Hungary, as in Italy, he faced accusations of brutality. For example, it was claimed that he had women who showed any sympathy for the insurgents whipped. His public disdain for the revolutionary factions made him a prime target for such allegations. After peace was restored, he was given a high command in Hungary. However, his temper soon led to clashes with the minister of war, resulting in his resignation in 1850. He then traveled abroad. Refugees had spread his notorious reputation. In London, he was attacked and beaten by draymen from Barclay & Perkins when he visited their brewery, and he narrowly escaped mob violence in Brussels. He died on March 14, 1853. On October 11, 1808, Haynau married Thérèse von Weber, the daughter of Field Marshal Lieutenant Weber, who was killed at Aspern. She passed away in 1850, leaving behind one daughter.

See R. v. Schönhals, Biographie des K. K. Feldzeugmeisters Julius Freiherrn von Haynau (Vienna, 1875).

See R. v. Schönhals, Biography of the K. K. Field Marshal Julius Freiherr von Haynau (Vienna, 1875).


HAYNE, ROBERT YOUNG (1791-1839), American political leader, born in St Paul’s parish, Colleton district, South Carolina, on the 10th of November 1791. He studied law in the office Of Langdon Cheves (1776-1857) in Charleston, S.C., and in November 1812 was admitted to the bar there, soon obtaining a large practice. For a short time during the War of 1812 against Great Britain, he was captain in the Third South Carolina Regiment. He was a member of the lower house of the state legislature from 1814 to 1818, serving as speaker in the latter year; was attorney-general of the state from 1818 to 1822, and in 1823 was elected, as a Democrat, to the United States Senate. Here he was conspicuous as an ardent free-trader and an uncompromising advocate of “States Rights,” opposed the protectionist tariff bills of 1824 and 1828, and consistently upheld the doctrine that slavery was a domestic institution and should be dealt with only by the individual states. In one of his speeches opposing the sending by the United States of representatives to the Panama Congress, he said, “The moment the federal government shall make the unhallowed attempt to interfere with the domestic concerns of the states, those states will consider themselves driven from the Union.” Hayne is best remembered, however, for his great debate with Daniel Webster (q.v.) in January 1830. The debate arose over the so-called “Foote’s Resolution,” introduced by Senator Samuel A. Foote (1780-1846) of Connecticut, calling for the restriction of the sale of public lands to those already in the market, but was concerned primarily with the relation to one another and the respective powers of the federal government and the individual states, Hayne contending that the constitution was essentially a compact between the states, and the national government and the states, and that any state might, at will, nullify any federal law which it considered to be in contravention of that compact. He vigorously opposed the tariff of 1832, was a member of the South Carolina Nullification Convention of November 1832, and reported the ordinance of nullification passed by that body on the 24th of November. Resigning from the Senate, he was governor of the state from December 1832 to December 1834, and as such took a strong stand against President Jackson, though he was more conservative than many of the nullificationists in the state. He was intendant (mayor) of Charleston, S.C., from 1835 to 1837, and was president of the Louisville, Cincinnati & Charleston railway from 1837 to 1839. He died at Asheville, N.C., on the 24th of September 1839. His son, Paul Hamilton Hayne (1830-1886), was a poet of some distinction, and in 1878 published a life of his father.

HAYNE, ROBERT YOUNG (1791-1839), American political leader, was born in St. Paul’s Parish, Colleton District, South Carolina, on November 10, 1791. He studied law in the office of Langdon Cheves (1776-1857) in Charleston, S.C., and was admitted to the bar there in November 1812, quickly building a large practice. For a short time during the War of 1812 against Great Britain, he served as a captain in the Third South Carolina Regiment. He was a member of the lower house of the state legislature from 1814 to 1818, serving as Speaker in the latter year; was attorney general of the state from 1818 to 1822, and in 1823 was elected as a Democrat to the United States Senate. There, he was noted as a passionate free trader and a strong advocate of “States Rights,” opposing the protective tariff bills of 1824 and 1828, and consistently supporting the view that slavery was a domestic issue to be handled solely by the individual states. In one of his speeches against the U.S. sending representatives to the Panama Congress, he stated, “The moment the federal government makes the unlawful attempt to interfere with the domestic concerns of the states, those states will consider themselves driven from the Union.” Hayne is best remembered for his important debate with Daniel Webster (q.v.) in January 1830. The debate stemmed from the so-called “Foote’s Resolution,” introduced by Senator Samuel A. Foote (1780-1846) of Connecticut, which called for restricting the sale of public lands to those already on the market, but primarily focused on the relationship and respective powers of the federal government and the individual states. Hayne argued that the constitution was essentially an agreement between the states and the national government, and that any state could nullify any federal law it deemed contrary to that agreement. He strongly opposed the tariff of 1832, was a part of the South Carolina Nullification Convention in November 1832, and reported the ordinance of nullification passed by that body on November 24. After resigning from the Senate, he served as governor of the state from December 1832 to December 1834, taking a strong stance against President Jackson while being more conservative than many of the nullification supporters in the state. He served as intendant (mayor) of Charleston, S.C., from 1835 to 1837, and was the president of the Louisville, Cincinnati & Charleston Railway from 1837 to 1839. He died in Asheville, N.C., on September 24, 1839. His son, Paul Hamilton Hayne (1830-1886), was a notable poet and published a biography of his father in 1878.

See Theodore D. Jervey, Robert Y. Hayne and his Times (New York, 1909).

See Theodore D. Jervey, Robert Y. Hayne and his Times (New York, 1909).


HAYTER, SIR GEORGE (1792-1871), English painter, was the son of a popular drawing-master and teacher of perspective who published a well-known introduction to perspective and other works. He was born in London, and in his early youth went to sea. He afterwards studied in the Royal Academy, became a miniature-painter, and was appointed in 1816 miniature-painter to the princess Charlotte. He passed some years in Italy, more especially in Rome, between 1816 and 1831, returned to London in the last-named year, resumed portrait-painting, now chiefly in oil-colour, executed many likenesses of the royal family, and attained such a reputation for finish and refinement in his work that he received the appointment of principal painter to Queen Victoria and teacher of drawing to the princesses. In 1842 he was knighted. He painted various works on a large scale of a public and semi-historical character, but essentially works of portraiture; such as “The Trial of Queen Caroline” (189 likenesses), “The Meeting of the First Reformed Parliament,” now in the National Portrait Gallery, “Queen Victoria taking the Coronation Oath” (accounted his finest production), “The Marriage of the Queen,” and the “Trial of Lord William Russell.” The artistic merits of Hayter’s works are not, however, such as to preserve to him with posterity an amount of prestige corresponding to that which court patronage procured him.

HAYTER, SIR GEORGE (1792-1871), an English painter, was the son of a well-known drawing teacher and perspective instructor who published a popular introduction to perspective and other works. He was born in London and went to sea in his youth. He later studied at the Royal Academy, became a miniature painter, and in 1816 was appointed as the miniature painter to Princess Charlotte. He spent several years in Italy, mainly in Rome, between 1816 and 1831, before returning to London in 1831 where he resumed portrait painting, primarily in oil. He created many portraits of the royal family and gained a reputation for the precision and elegance of his work, leading to his appointment as the principal painter to Queen Victoria and drawing teacher to the princesses. He was knighted in 1842. He painted several large-scale works of a public and semi-historical nature, yet they were primarily portraits, such as “The Trial of Queen Caroline” (which features 189 likenesses), “The Meeting of the First Reformed Parliament,” now in the National Portrait Gallery, “Queen Victoria taking the Coronation Oath” (considered his finest work), “The Marriage of the Queen,” and the “Trial of Lord William Russell.” However, the artistic quality of Hayter’s works does not ensure that he will be remembered with the same level of prestige that court patronage granted him.

He is not to be confounded with a contemporary artist, John Hayter, who produced illustrations for the Book of Beauty, &c.

He should not be confused with a modern artist, John Hayter, who created illustrations for the Book of Beauty, etc.


HAYTON (Haithon, Hethum), king of Little Armenia or Cilicia from 1224 to 1269, traveller in western and central Asia, Mongolia, &c., was the son of Constantine Rupen, and became heir to the throne of Lesser Armenia by his marriage with Isabella, daughter and only child of Leo II. After a reign of forty-five years he abdicated (1269) in favour of his son Leo III., became a monk and died in 1271. Before his accession he had been “constable,” or head of the Armenian army, and “bailiff” of the realm. Throughout his reign he followed the policy of friendship and alliance with the overwhelming power of the Mongols. In about 1248 he sent his brother Sempad, who was now constable in his place, on a mission to Kuyuk Khan, the supreme Mongol emperor. Sempad was well received and returned home in 1250, bringing letters from Kuyuk. After Mangu’s accession in 1251, Batu (the most powerful of the Mongol princes and generals, and the conqueror—in name at least—of eastern Europe, now commanding on the line of the Volga) summoned Hayton to the court of the new grand khan. Carefully disguised, so as to pass safely through the Turkish states in the interior of eastern Asia Minor (where he was hated as an ally of the Mongols against Islam), Hayton made his way to Kars, the central Mongol camp in Great Armenia, where the famous general Bachu, or Baiju, commanded. Here he reported himself, and was permitted to remain some time in the Ararat region, at the foot of Mt Alagoz, near the metropolitan church of 115 Echmiadzin. Being joined by his suite, especially the clerical diplomatists Basil the Priest, and James the Abbot, Hayton next passed through eastern Caucasia, threading the pass of the Iron Gates of Derbent, and so reached the camp of Batu on the Volga, where he was cordially welcomed. Thence he set out (May 13th, 1254) on the “very long road beyond the Caspian Sea” to the residence of Mangu at or near Karakorum, south of Lake Baikal. After passing the Ural river, we only hear of his arrival at Or, probably the present Ili province, east of Balkhash, and of his reaching the Irtish, entering the Naiman country, and passing through “Karakhitai” (apparently the capital of the ruined Karakhitai empire is intended, a place perhaps situated on the Chu, mentioned out of its proper place in Hayton’s record). On the 13th of September the travellers entered Mongolia, and on the 14th (?) of September were received by Mangu. Here the king remained till the 1st of November, when he left with diplomas, seals and letters of enfranchisement which promised great things for the Armenian state, church and people. His return journey was by very unusual and interesting routes—through the Urumtsi region, the basin of “the sea of milk,” Lake Sairam, the valley of the Ili, the neighbourhood of Kulja, and so over mountains, which probably answer to certain outliers of the Alexander range, to Talas near the present Aulie Ata, midway between the Syr Daria and the Chu. Here he met and conferred with Hulagu Khan, Mangu’s brother, the future conqueror of Bagdad: probably Hayton was expected to aid in the coming forward movement of the Mongol armies against the Moslem world. From Talas Hayton made a detour to the north-west to meet another Mongol prince, Sartach the son of Batu; after which he ascended the valley of the Syr Daria, crossed into Trans-Oxiana, visited Samarkand and Bokhara, and passed the Oxus apparently near Charjui. By way of Merv and Sarakhs he then entered Khorasan and traversed north Persia, passing through Rai near Tehran, Kazvin and Tabriz, and so returning to the camp of Bachu in Armenia, now at Sisian near Lake Gokcha (July 1255). Thanks to his powerful friends, Hayton’s journey was unusually rapid. Eight months after quitting Mangu’s horde, he was back in Great Armenia. The narrative of this journey, which was written by a member of the king’s suite, one Kirakos of Gandsak (the modern Elizavetpol), concludes with some interesting references to Buddhist tenets, to Chinese habits, to various monstrous races and to certain “women endowed with reason” dwelling “beyond Cathay.” It also gives some notes, compounded of truth and legend, on the wild tribes and animals of the Gobi and adjoining regions.

HAYTON (Haithon, Hethum), king of Little Armenia or Cilicia from 1224 to 1269, traveler in western and central Asia, Mongolia, etc., was the son of Constantine Rupen, and became heir to the throne of Lesser Armenia by marrying Isabella, the daughter and only child of Leo II. After a reign of forty-five years, he abdicated (1269) in favor of his son Leo III, became a monk, and died in 1271. Before his accession, he had been “constable,” or head of the Armenian army, and “bailiff” of the realm. Throughout his reign, he maintained a policy of friendship and alliance with the dominant power of the Mongols. Around 1248, he sent his brother Sempad, who was now constable in his place, on a mission to Kuyuk Khan, the supreme Mongol emperor. Sempad was well received and returned home in 1250, bringing letters from Kuyuk. After Mangu’s accession in 1251, Batu (the most powerful of the Mongol princes and generals, and the conqueror—in name at least—of eastern Europe, now commanding along the Volga) summoned Hayton to the court of the new grand khan. Carefully disguised to safely pass through the Turkish states in the interior of eastern Asia Minor (where he was hated as an ally of the Mongols against Islam), Hayton made his way to Kars, the central Mongol camp in Great Armenia, where the famous general Bachu, or Baiju, was in command. Here he reported himself and was allowed to stay for some time in the Ararat region, at the foot of Mt Alagoz, near the metropolitan church of 115 Echmiadzin. Joined by his staff, especially the clerical diplomats Basil the Priest and James the Abbot, Hayton then traveled through eastern Caucasia, threading the pass of the Iron Gates of Derbent, and reached Batu's camp on the Volga, where he was warmly welcomed. From there, he set out (May 13th, 1254) on the “very long road beyond the Caspian Sea” to the residence of Mangu at or near Karakorum, south of Lake Baikal. After passing the Ural river, we only hear of his arrival at Or, probably in the present Ili province, east of Balkhash, of his reaching the Irtish, entering the Naiman country, and passing through “Karakhitai” (apparently referring to the capital of the ruined Karakhitai empire, possibly situated on the Chu, mentioned out of its proper place in Hayton’s account). On September 13th, the travelers entered Mongolia, and on September 14th (?) were received by Mangu. Here the king stayed until November 1st, when he left with diplomas, seals, and letters of enfranchisement that promised great things for the Armenian state, church, and people. His return journey took unusual and interesting routes—through the Urumtsi region, the basin of “the sea of milk,” Lake Sairam, the valley of the Ili, near Kulja, and over mountains likely corresponding to certain outliers of the Alexander range, to Talas near the present Aulie Ata, midway between the Syr Daria and the Chu. Here he met and conferred with Hulagu Khan, Mangu’s brother, the future conqueror of Baghdad; likely, Hayton was expected to assist in the forthcoming Mongol military campaigns against the Muslim world. From Talas, Hayton detoured northwest to meet another Mongol prince, Sartach, son of Batu; after that, he ascended the valley of the Syr Daria, crossed into Trans-Oxiana, visited Samarkand and Bokhara, and crossed the Oxus, apparently near Charjui. Through Merv and Sarakhs, he then entered Khorasan and passed through northern Persia, traveling through Rai near Tehran, Kazvin, and Tabriz, and finally returning to Bachu's camp in Armenia, now at Sisian near Lake Gokcha (July 1255). Thanks to his influential friends, Hayton’s journey was remarkably swift. Eight months after leaving Mangu’s horde, he was back in Great Armenia. The account of this journey, written by a member of the king’s retinue, one Kirakos of Gandsak (the modern Elizavetpol), concludes with some intriguing references to Buddhist beliefs, Chinese customs, various mythical races, and certain “women endowed with reason” living “beyond Cathay.” It also includes notes, a mix of fact and legend, about the wild tribes and animals of the Gobi and surrounding regions.

The record drawn up by Kirakos Gandsaketsi was in Armenian. A MS. of his, dated 1616, was found in the Sanahin monastery in Georgia, and translated into Russian by Prince Argutinsky in the Sibirsky Vyestnik for 1822, pp. 69, &c. This Russian version was again translated into French by Klaproth in the Nouveau Journal asiatique for 1833 (vol. xii. pp. 273, &c.). Another French translation was made direct from the Armenian by M. Brosset in the Mémoires de l’Académie des Sciences de St Pétersbourg for 1870; a fresh Russian version of the original, by Professor Patkanov, appeared in 1874. See also E. Bretschneider, Medieval Researches from Eastern Asiatic Sources, i. 164-172 (London, 1888, “Trübner’s Oriental” Series); C. R. Beazley, Dawn of Modern Geography, ii. 381-391 (1901).

The document created by Kirakos Gandsaketsi was in Armenian. A manuscript of his, dated 1616, was discovered in the Sanahin monastery in Georgia and translated into Russian by Prince Argutinsky in the Sibirsky Vyestnik for 1822, pp. 69, &c. This Russian version was later translated into French by Klaproth in the Nouveau Journal asiatique for 1833 (vol. xii. pp. 273, &c.). Another French translation was made directly from the Armenian by M. Brosset in the Mémoires de l’Académie des Sciences de St Pétersbourg for 1870; a new Russian version of the original, by Professor Patkanov, was published in 1874. See also E. Bretschneider, Medieval Researches from Eastern Asiatic Sources, i. 164-172 (London, 1888, “Trübner’s Oriental” Series); C. R. Beazley, Dawn of Modern Geography, ii. 381-391 (1901).

(C. R. B.)

HAYWARD, ABRAHAM (1801-1884), English man of letters, son of Joseph Hayward, of an old Wiltshire family, was born at Wilton, near Salisbury, on the 22nd of November 1801. After education at Blundell’s school, Tiverton, he entered the Inner Temple in 1824, and was called to the bar in June 1832. He took part as a conservative in the discussions of the London Debating Society, where his opponents were J. A. Roebuck and John Stuart Mill. The editorship of the Law Magazine; or, Quarterly Review of Jurisprudence, which he held from 1829 to 1844, brought him into connexion with John Austin, G. Cornewall Lewis, and such foreign jurists as Savigny, whose tractate on contemporary legislation and jurisprudence he rendered into English. In 1833 he travelled abroad, and on his return printed privately a translation of Goethe’s Faust into English prose (pronounced by Carlyle to be the best version extant in his time). A second and revised edition was published after another visit to Germany in January 1834, in the course of which Hayward met Tieck, Chamisso, De La Motte Fouqué, Varnhagen von Ense and Madame Goethe. In 1878 he contributed the rather colourless volume on Goethe to Blackwood’s Foreign Classics. A successful translation was in those days a first-rate credential for a reviewer, and Hayward began contributing to the New Monthly, the Foreign Quarterly, the Quarterly Review and the Edinburgh Review. His first successes in this new field were won in 1835-1836 by articles on Walker’s “Original” and on “Gastronomy.” The essays were reprinted to form one of his best volumes, The Art of Dining, in 1852. In February 1835 he was elected to the Athenaeum Club under Rule II., and he remained for nearly fifty years one of its most conspicuous and most influential members. He was also a subscriber to the Carlton, but ceased to frequent it when he became a Peelite. At the Temple, Hayward, whose reputation was rapidly growing as a connoisseur not only of a bill of fare but also (as Swift would have said) of a bill of company, gave recherché dinners, at which ladies of rank and fashion appreciated the wit of Sydney Smith and Theodore Hook, the dignity of Lockhart and Lyndhurst and the oratory of Macaulay. At the Athenaeum and in political society he to some extent succeeded to the position of Croker. He and Macaulay were commonly said to be the two best-read men in town. Hayward got up every important subject of discussion immediately it came into prominence, and concentrated his information in such a way that he habitually had the last word to say on a topic. When Rogers died, when Vanity Fair was published, when the Greville Memoirs was issued or a revolution occurred on the continent, Hayward, whose memory was as retentive as his power of accumulating documentary evidence was exhaustive, wrote an elaborate essay on the subject for the Quarterly or the Edinburgh. He followed up his paper by giving his acquaintances no rest until they either assimilated or undertook to combat his views. Political ladies first, and statesmen afterwards, came to recognize the advantage of obtaining Hayward’s good opinion. In this way the “old reviewing hand” became an acknowledged link between society, letters and politics. As a professional man he was less successful; his promotion to be Q.C. in 1845 excited a storm of opposition, and, disgusted at not being elected a Bencher of his Inn in the usual course, Hayward virtually withdrew from legal practice. In February 1848 he became one of the chief leader-writers for the Peelite organ, the Morning Chronicle. The morbid activity of his memory, however, continued to make him many enemies. He alienated Disraeli by tracing a purple patch in his official eulogy of Wellington to a newspaper translation from Thiers’s funeral panegyric on General St Cyr. His sharp tongue made an enemy of Roebuck, and he disgusted the friends of Mill by the stories he raked up for an obituary notice of the great economist (The Times, 10th May 1873). He broke with Henry Reeve in 1874 by a venomous review of the Greville Memoirs, in which Reeve was compared to the beggarly Scot deputed to let off the blunderbuss which Bolingbroke (Greville) had charged. His enemies prevented him from enjoying a well-selected quasi-sinecure, which both Palmerston and Aberdeen admitted to be his due. Samuel Warren attacked him (very unjustly, for Hayward was anything but a parasite) as Venom Tuft in Ten Thousand a Year; and Disraeli aimed at him partially in Ste Barbe (in Endymion), though the satire here was directed primarily against Thackeray. After his break with Reeve, Hayward devoted himself more exclusively to the Quarterly. His essays on Chesterfield and Selwyn were reprinted in 1854. Collective editions of his articles appeared in volume form in 1858, 1873 and 1874, and Selected Essays in two volumes, 1878. In his useful but far from flawless edition of the Autobiography, Letters and Literary Remains of Mrs (Thrale) Piozzi (1861), he again appears as a supplementer and continuator of J. W. Croker. His Eminent Statesmen and Writers (1880) commemorates to a large extent personal friendships with such men as Dumas, Cavour and Thiers, whom he knew intimately. As a counsellor of great ladies and of politicians, to whom he 116 held forth with a sense of all-round responsibility surpassing that of a cabinet minister, Hayward retained his influence to the last years of his life. But he had little sympathy with modern ideas. He used to say that he had outlived every one that he could really look up to. He died, a bachelor, in his rooms at 8 St James’s Street (a small museum of autograph portraits and reviewing trophies) on the 2nd of February 1884.

HAYWARD, ABRAHAM (1801-1884), an English writer, son of Joseph Hayward from an old Wiltshire family, was born in Wilton, near Salisbury, on November 22, 1801. After attending Blundell's School in Tiverton, he joined the Inner Temple in 1824 and was called to the bar in June 1832. He participated as a conservative in debates at the London Debating Society, where he faced off against J. A. Roebuck and John Stuart Mill. He edited the Law Magazine; or, Quarterly Review of Jurisprudence from 1829 to 1844, which connected him with John Austin, G. Cornewall Lewis, and foreign jurists like Savigny, whose tract on contemporary legislation and jurisprudence he translated into English. In 1833, he traveled abroad and privately published a translation of Goethe’s Faust in English prose (which Carlyle declared to be the best version available at that time). A second, revised edition came out after another trip to Germany in January 1834, during which he met Tieck, Chamisso, De La Motte Fouqué, Varnhagen von Ense, and Madame Goethe. In 1878, he contributed a rather bland volume on Goethe to Blackwood’s Foreign Classics. A successful translation back then was a highly regarded credential for a reviewer, and Hayward began writing for the New Monthly, the Foreign Quarterly, the Quarterly Review, and the Edinburgh Review. His initial successes in this area came in 1835-1836 with articles on Walker’s “Original” and “Gastronomy.” These essays were reprinted to form one of his best volumes, The Art of Dining, in 1852. In February 1835, he was elected to the Athenaeum Club under Rule II, and he remained one of its most notable and influential members for nearly fifty years. He was also a member of the Carlton but stopped going there when he became a Peelite. At the Temple, Hayward, whose reputation as a connoisseur of both food and (as Swift would put it) social company was quickly rising, hosted recherché dinners attended by fashionable ladies who enjoyed the wit of Sydney Smith and Theodore Hook, the dignity of Lockhart and Lyndhurst, and Macaulay's oratory. At the Athenaeum and in political circles, he to some extent took over the role of Croker. He and Macaulay were commonly regarded as the two best-read men in town. Hayward would immediately dive into every major topic of discussion as it emerged, concentrating his knowledge so effectively that he often had the final say on any issue. When Rogers died, when Vanity Fair was published, when the Greville Memoirs came out, or during any major upheaval in Europe, Hayward, whose memory was as sharp as his ability to gather documentary evidence was extensive, wrote detailed essays about the events for either the Quarterly or the Edinburgh. He followed up his writings by giving his acquaintances no peace until they either agreed with him or actively challenged his opinions. Political women first, and later statesmen, began to recognize the benefit of earning Hayward's favor. In this way, the “old reviewing hand” became a recognized bridge between society, literature, and politics. However, he was less successful as a professional. His promotion to Q.C. in 1845 stirred up a lot of opposition, and frustrated at not being elected a Bencher of his Inn in the usual way, Hayward effectively withdrew from legal practice. In February 1848, he became one of the main leader writers for the Peelite newspaper, the Morning Chronicle. However, his relentless memory made him many enemies. He upset Disraeli by pointing out a phrase in his official tribute to Wellington that had come from a newspaper translation of Thiers’s eulogy for General St Cyr. His sharp tongue alienated Roebuck, and he angered Mill’s friends by resurrecting stories for an obituary notice of the renowned economist (The Times, May 10, 1873). He had a falling out with Henry Reeve in 1874 due to a scathing review of the Greville Memoirs, where he compared Reeve to a destitute Scot asked to fire the blunderbuss charged by Bolingbroke (Greville). His adversaries blocked him from enjoying a well-deserved quasi-sinecure, which both Palmerston and Aberdeen acknowledged was rightfully his. Samuel Warren unjustly attacked him as Venom Tuft in Ten Thousand a Year (Hayward was anything but a freeloader), and Disraeli took some jabs at him in Ste Barbe (in Endymion), even though the satire primarily targeted Thackeray. After his split with Reeve, Hayward dedicated himself more exclusively to the Quarterly. His essays on Chesterfield and Selwyn were reprinted in 1854. Collections of his articles were published in volumes in 1858, 1873, and 1874, and Selected Essays came out in two volumes in 1878. In his helpful but not flawless edition of the Autobiography, Letters and Literary Remains of Mrs (Thrale) Piozzi (1861), he again served as a supplementer and continuator of J. W. Croker. His Eminent Statesmen and Writers (1880) commemorates, to a large extent, personal friendships with figures like Dumas, Cavour, and Thiers, whom he knew well. As a consultant for prominent women and politicians, with a sense of responsibility that surpassed that of a cabinet minister, Hayward maintained his influence until his later years. However, he had little empathy for modern ideas. He often said that he had outlived everyone he could truly admire. He died, a bachelor, in his rooms at 8 St James's Street (which was filled with autograph portraits and reviewing trophies) on February 2, 1884.

Two volumes of Hayward’s Correspondence (edited by H. E. Carlisle) were published in 1886. In Vanity Fair (27th November 1875) he may be seen as he appeared in later life.

Two volumes of Hayward’s Correspondence (edited by H. E. Carlisle) were published in 1886. In Vanity Fair (November 27, 1875), you can see how he looked in his later years.

(T. Se.)

HAYWARD, SIR JOHN (c. 1560-1627), English historian, was born at or near Felixstowe, Suffolk, where he was educated, and afterwards proceeded to Pembroke College, Cambridge, where he took the degrees of B.A., M.A. and LL.D. In 1599 he published The First Part of the Life and Raigne of King Henrie IV. dedicated to Robert Devereux, earl of Essex. This was reprinted in 1642. Queen Elizabeth and her advisers disliked the tone of the book and its dedication, and the queen ordered Francis Bacon to search it for “places in it that might be drawn within case of treason.” Bacon reported “for treason surely I find none, but for felony very many,” explaining that many of the sentences were stolen from Tacitus; but nevertheless Hayward was put in prison, where he remained until about 1601. On the accession of James I. in 1603 he courted the new king’s favour by publishing two pamphlets—“An Answer to the first part of a certaine conference concerning succession,” and “A Treatise of Union of England and Scotland.” The former pamphlet, an argument in favour of the divine right of kings, was reprinted in 1683 as “The Right of Succession” by the friends of the duke of York during the struggle over the Exclusion Bill. In 1610 Hayward was appointed one of the historiographers of the college which James founded at Chelsea; in 1613 he published his Lives of the Three Norman Kings of England, written at the request of James’s son, Prince Henry; in 1616 he became a member of the College of Advocates; and in 1619 he was knighted. He died in London on the 27th of June 1627. Among his manuscripts was found The Life and Raigne of King Edward VI., first published in 1630, and Certain Yeres of Queen Elizabeth’s Raigne, the beginning of which was printed in an edition of his Edward VI., published in 1636, but which was first published in a complete form in 1840 for the Camden Society under the editorship of John Bruce, who prefixed an introduction on the life and writings of the author. Hayward was conscientious and diligent in obtaining information, and although his reasoning on questions of morality is often childish, his descriptions are generally graphic and vigorous. Notwithstanding his imprisonment under Elizabeth, his portrait of the qualities of the queen’s mind and person is flattering rather than detractive. He also wrote several works of a devotional character.

HAYWARD, SIR JOHN (c. 1560-1627), English historian, was born in or near Felixstowe, Suffolk, where he was educated, and later attended Pembroke College, Cambridge, earning his degrees of B.A., M.A., and LL.D. In 1599, he published The First Part of the Life and Raigne of King Henrie IV. dedicated to Robert Devereux, Earl of Essex. This work was reprinted in 1642. Queen Elizabeth and her advisors disliked the tone of the book and its dedication, prompting the queen to order Francis Bacon to search for “places in it that might be drawn within case of treason.” Bacon reported, “for treason surely I find none, but for felony very many,” explaining that many sentences were taken from Tacitus; nevertheless, Hayward was imprisoned, where he stayed until around 1601. After James I ascended to the throne in 1603, he sought the king’s favor by publishing two pamphlets—“An Answer to the first part of a certaine conference concerning succession,” and “A Treatise of Union of England and Scotland.” The former, an argument supporting the divine right of kings, was reprinted in 1683 as “The Right of Succession” by supporters of the Duke of York during the Exclusion Bill debate. In 1610, Hayward was appointed one of the historiographers of the college founded by James at Chelsea; in 1613, he published his Lives of the Three Norman Kings of England, written at the request of James’s son, Prince Henry; in 1616, he became a member of the College of Advocates; and in 1619, he was knighted. He died in London on June 27, 1627. Among his manuscripts was The Life and Raigne of King Edward VI., first published in 1630, and Certain Yeres of Queen Elizabeth’s Raigne, the beginning of which was printed in an edition of his Edward VI. published in 1636, but was first published in full form in 1840 for the Camden Society under the editorship of John Bruce, who included an introduction on the life and writings of the author. Hayward was thorough and diligent in gathering information, and although his reasoning on moral issues can be simplistic, his descriptions are often vivid and strong. Despite his imprisonment under Elizabeth, his portrayal of the queen’s mind and character is more flattering than critical. He also wrote several works of a devotional nature.


HAYWOOD, ELIZA (c. 1693-1756), English writer, daughter of a London tradesman named Fowler, was born about 1693. She made an early and unhappy marriage with a man named Haywood, and her literary enemies circulated scandalous stories about her, possibly founded on her works rather than her real history. She appeared on the stage as early as 1715, and in 1721 she revised for Lincoln’s Inn Fields The Fair Captive, by a Captain Hurst. Two other pieces followed, but Eliza Haywood made her mark as a follower of Mrs Manley in writing scandalous and voluminous novels. To Memoirs of a certain Island adjacent to Utopia, written by a celebrated author of that country. Now translated into English (1725), she appended a key in which the characters were explained by initials denoting living persons. The names are supplied to these initials in the copy in the British Museum. The Secret History of the Present Intrigues of the Court of Caramania (1727) was explained in a similar manner. The style of these productions is as extravagant as their matter. Pope attacked her in a coarse passage in The Dunciad (bk. ii. 11. 157 et seq.), which is aggravated by a note alluding to the “profligate licentiousness of those shameless scribblers (for the most part of that sex which ought least to be capable of such malice or impudence) who in libellous Memoirs and Novels reveal the faults or misfortunes of both sexes, to the ruin of public fame, or disturbance of private happiness.” Swift, writing to Lady Suffolk, says, “Mrs Haywood I have heard of as a stupid, infamous, scribbling woman, but have not seen any of her productions.” She continued to be a prolific writer of novels until her death on the 25th of February 1756, but her later works are characterized by extreme propriety, though an anonymous story of The Fortunate Foundlings (1744), purporting to be an account of the children of Lord Charles Manners, is generally ascribed to her.

HAYWOOD, ELIZA (c. 1693-1756), English writer, daughter of a London tradesman named Fowler, was born around 1693. She had an early and unhappy marriage to a man named Haywood, and her literary rivals spread scandalous stories about her, possibly based more on her works than her actual life. She began acting as early as 1715, and in 1721, she revised The Fair Captive for Lincoln’s Inn Fields, written by Captain Hurst. Two other pieces followed, but Eliza Haywood made her name as a follower of Mrs. Manley in writing sensational and lengthy novels. To Memoirs of a certain Island adjacent to Utopia, written by a celebrated author of that country. Now translated into English (1725), she added a key explaining the characters with initials that represented real people. The names corresponding to these initials are provided in the copy at the British Museum. The Secret History of the Present Intrigues of the Court of Caramania (1727) was explained in a similar way. The style of these works is as extravagant as their content. Pope criticized her in a crude passage in The Dunciad (bk. ii. 11. 157 et seq.), which is worsened by a note referring to the “profligate licentiousness of those shameless scribblers (mostly women who should be least capable of such malice or shamelessness) who, in libelous Memoirs and Novels, reveal the faults or misfortunes of both sexes, leading to the ruin of public reputation or disruption of private happiness.” Swift, writing to Lady Suffolk, remarked, “Mrs. Haywood is known to me as a dull, infamous, scribbling woman, but I haven’t seen any of her works.” She remained a prolific novelist until her death on February 25, 1756, although her later writings are marked by extreme propriety, even though an anonymous story titled The Fortunate Foundlings (1744), claiming to be about the children of Lord Charles Manners, is generally attributed to her.

A collected edition of her novels, plays and poems appeared in 1724, and her Secret Histories, Novels and Poems in 1725. See also an article by S. L. Lee in the Dictionary of National Biography.

A collected edition of her novels, plays, and poems was published in 1724, and her Secret Histories, Novels and Poems came out in 1725. See also an article by S. L. Lee in the Dictionary of National Biography.


HAZARA, a race of Afghanistan. The Hazaras are of Mongolian origin, speak a dialect of Persian, and belong to the Shiah sect of Mahommedans. They are of middle size but stoutly made, with small grey eyes, high cheek bones and smooth faces. They are descendants of military colonists introduced by Jenghiz Khan, who occupy all the highlands of the upper Helmund valley, spreading through the country between Kabul and Herat, as well as into a strip of territory on the frontier slopes of the Hindu Kush north of Kabul. In the western provinces they are known as the Chahar Aimak (Hazaras, Jamshidis, Taimanis and Ferozkhois), and in other districts they are distinguished by the name of the territory they occupy. They are pure Mongols, intermixing with no other races (chiefly for the reason that no other races will intermix with them), preserving their language and their Mongol characteristics uninfluenced by their surroundings, having absolutely displaced the former occupants of the Hazarajat and Ghor. They make good soldiers and excellent pioneers. The amir’s companies of engineers are recruited from the Hazaras, and they form perhaps the most effective corps in his heterogeneous army. They are now recruited into the British service in India.

HAZARA, an ethnic group from Afghanistan. The Hazaras are of Mongolian descent, speak a dialect of Persian, and practice the Shia branch of Islam. They are of average height but sturdy builds, with small gray eyes, high cheekbones, and smooth faces. They are descendants of military settlers brought in by Genghis Khan, who inhabit all the highlands of the upper Helmand valley, extending throughout the region between Kabul and Herat, as well as into a stretch of land on the slopes of the Hindu Kush north of Kabul. In the western provinces, they are referred to as the Chahar Aimak (Hazaras, Jamshidis, Taimanis, and Ferozkhois), while in other areas, they are identified by the names of the regions they occupy. They are purely Mongolian, mixing with no other ethnic groups (mainly because other groups choose not to mix with them), maintaining their language and Mongolian traits without influence from their environment, completely replacing the former inhabitants of Hazarajat and Ghor. They are skilled soldiers and excellent pioneers. The Amir's engineering units are made up of Hazaras, who likely form the most effective corps in his diverse army. They are now being recruited into British service in India.


HAZARA, a district of British India, in the Peshawar division of the North-West Frontier Province, with an area of 3391 sq. m. It is bounded on the N. by the Black Mountain, the Swat country, Kohistan and Chilas; on the E. by the native state of Kashmir; on the S. by Rawalpindi district; and on the W. by the river Indus. On the creation of the North-West Frontier Province in 1901 the district was reconstituted, the Tahsil of Attock being transferred to Rawalpindi. The district forms a wedge of territory extending far into the heart of the outer Himalayas, and consisting of a long narrow valley, shut in on both sides by lofty mountains, whose peaks rise to a height of 17,000 ft. above sea level. Towards the centre of the district the vale of Kagan is bounded by mountain chains, which sweep southward still maintaining a general parallel direction, and send off spurs on every side which divide the country into numerous minor dales. The district is well watered by the tributaries of the Indus, the Kunhar, which flows through the Kagan Valley into the Jhelum, and many rivulets. Throughout the scenery is picturesque. To the north rise the distant peaks of the snow-clad ranges; midway, the central mountains stand clothed to their rounded summits with pines and other forest trees, while grass and brushwood spread a green cloak over the nearer hills, and cultivation covers every available slope. The chief frontier tribes on the border are the cis-Indus Swatis, Hassanzais, Akazais, Chagarzais, Pariari Syads, Madda Khels, Amazais and Umarzais. Within the district Pathans are not numerous.

HAZARA, a district of British India located in the Peshawar division of the North-West Frontier Province, covers an area of 3,391 square miles. It is bordered to the north by the Black Mountain, Swat region, Kohistan, and Chilas; to the east by the native state of Kashmir; to the south by the Rawalpindi district; and to the west by the Indus River. When the North-West Frontier Province was established in 1901, the district was reorganized, with the Tahsil of Attock being transferred to Rawalpindi. The district is a wedge of land that extends deep into the outer Himalayas, featuring a long, narrow valley flanked by towering mountains, whose peaks reach heights of up to 17,000 feet above sea level. In the center of the district lies the Kagan Valley, bordered by mountain ranges that curve southward while generally maintaining a parallel direction, sending out spurs in all directions that create numerous smaller valleys. The district is well-irrigated by tributaries of the Indus, including the Kunhar River, which flows through the Kagan Valley into the Jhelum, along with many smaller streams. The scenery is stunningly picturesque. To the north, you can see the distant peaks of snow-covered mountains; in the middle, the central mountains are adorned with pines and other trees up to their rounded summits, while grass and brush provide a green cover over the nearby hills, and cultivation takes up every usable slope. The primary frontier tribes along the border include the cis-Indus Swatis, Hassanzais, Akazais, Chagarzais, Pariari Syads, Madda Khels, Amazais, and Umarzais. Within the district, Pathans are not very numerous.

The name Hazara possibly belonged originally to a Turki family which entered India with Timur in the 14th century, and subsequently settled in this remote region. During the prosperous period of the Mogul dynasty the population included a number of mixed tribes, which each began to assert its independence, so that the utmost anarchy prevailed until Hazara attracted the attention of the rising Sikh monarchy. Ranjit Singh first obtained a footing here in 1818, and, after eight years of constant aggression, became master of the whole country. During the minority of the young maharaja Dhuleep Singh, the Sikh kingdom fell into a state of complete disorganization; the people seized the opportunity for recovering their independence, 117 and rose in 1845 in rebellion. They stormed the Sikh forts, laid siege to Haripur, and drove the governor across the borders. After the first Sikh War it was proposed to transfer Hazara with Kashmir to Gulab Singh, but it remained under the Lahore government in charge of James Abbott, who pacified it in less than a year and held it single-handed throughout the troubles of the second Sikh War. It was also undisturbed during the Mutiny. The population in 1901 was 560,288, showing an increase of 8.52% in the decade. The headquarters are at Abbotabad; pop. (1901) 7764. Through the Kagan valley and over the Babusar pass at its head lies the most direct route from the Punjab to Chilas and Gilgit.

The name Hazara likely originally belonged to a Turki family that entered India with Timur in the 14th century and later settled in this remote area. During the prosperous period of the Mughal dynasty, the population included several mixed tribes, each starting to claim its independence, leading to widespread chaos until Hazara caught the attention of the emerging Sikh monarchy. Ranjit Singh first established a presence here in 1818, and after eight years of continuous conflict, he gained control of the entire region. During the youth of the young maharaja Dhuleep Singh, the Sikh kingdom fell into complete disarray; the people took this chance to regain their independence, 117 and revolted in 1845. They attacked the Sikh forts, besieged Haripur, and drove the governor out of the territory. After the first Sikh War, there was a suggestion to hand over Hazara along with Kashmir to Gulab Singh, but it remained under the Lahore government, managed by James Abbott, who pacified the area in less than a year and maintained control throughout the troubles of the second Sikh War. It also remained undisturbed during the Mutiny. The population in 1901 was 560,288, which reflects an increase of 8.52% in the decade. The headquarters are located in Abbotabad; pop. (1901) 7764. Through the Kagan valley and over the Babusar pass at its head lies the most direct route from the Punjab to Chilas and Gilgit.


HAZARD (O. Fr. hazard, from Span. azar, unlucky throw at dice, misfortune, from Arab, al, and zar, dice), a game of dice (called Craps in America), once very popular in England and played for large stakes at the famous rooms of Crockford (St James’s Street, London) and Almack (Pall Mall, London). The player or “caster” calls a “main” (that is, any number from five to nine inclusive). He then throws with two dice. If he “throws in,” or “nicks,” he wins the sum played for from the banker or “setter.” Five is a nick to five, six and twelve are nicks to six, seven and eleven to seven, eight and twelve to eight and nine to nine. If the caster “throws out” by throwing aces, or deuce-ace (called crabs or craps), he loses. When the main is five or nine the caster throws out with 11 or 12; when the main is six or eight he throws out with 11; when the main is seven he throws out with 12. If the caster neither nicks nor throws out, the number thrown is his “chance,” and he keeps on throwing till either the chance comes up, when he wins, or till the main comes up, when he loses. When a chance is thrown the “odds” for or against the chance are laid by the setter to the amount of the original stake. Seven is the best main for the caster to call, as it can be thrown in six different ways out of the thirty-six casts which are possible with dice. Supposing seven to be the main; then the caster wins if he throws 7 or 11; he loses if he throws crabs or 12. If he throws any other number, 4 for example, that is his chance. The odds against him are two to one, as 7 can be thrown in six ways, but 4 only in three; hence six to three, or two to one, are the correct odds, and if the original stake was £1, the setter now lays £2 to £1 in addition. It is useful to remember that 2 and 12 can be thrown in one way; 3 and 11 in two ways; 4 and 10 in three ways; 5 and 9 in four ways; 6 and 8 in five ways. The odds against the caster are thus given by Hoyle: If 7 is the main and 4 the chance, two to one; 6 and 4, five to three; 5 and 4, four to three; 7 and 9, three to two; 7 and 6, six and five; 7 and 5, three to two; 6 and 5, five to four; 8 and 5, five to four, &c.

HAZARD (O. Fr. hazard, from Span. azar, unlucky throw at dice, misfortune, from Arab, al, and zar, dice), a dice game (called Craps in America), once very popular in England and played for high stakes at the famous rooms of Crockford (St James’s Street, London) and Almack (Pall Mall, London). The player or “caster” calls a “main” (any number from five to nine inclusive). He then rolls two dice. If he “throws in” or “nicks,” he wins the amount wagered from the banker or “setter.” Five is a nick to five, six and twelve are nicks to six, seven and eleven to seven, eight and twelve to eight, and nine to nine. If the caster “throws out” by rolling aces or deuce-ace (called crabs or craps), he loses. When the main is five or nine, the caster throws out with 11 or 12; when the main is six or eight, he throws out with 11; when the main is seven, he throws out with 12. If the caster neither nicks nor throws out, the number rolled becomes his “chance,” and he continues rolling until either the chance appears, at which point he wins, or the main appears, at which point he loses. When a chance is rolled, the “odds” for or against the chance are set by the setter based on the original stake. Seven is the best main to call, as it can be rolled in six different ways out of the thirty-six possible rolls with dice. Assuming seven is the main; then the caster wins if he rolls 7 or 11; he loses if he rolls crabs or 12. If he rolls any other number, say 4, that becomes his chance. The odds against him are two to one, as 7 can be rolled in six ways, but 4 can only be rolled in three; thus six to three, or two to one, represents the correct odds, and if the original stake was £1, the setter now offers £2 to £1 on top. It’s useful to remember that 2 and 12 can be rolled in one way; 3 and 11 in two ways; 4 and 10 in three ways; 5 and 9 in four ways; 6 and 8 in five ways. The odds against the caster are outlined by Hoyle: If 7 is the main and 4 is the chance, two to one; 6 and 4, five to three; 5 and 4, four to three; 7 and 9, three to two; 7 and 6, six to five; 7 and 5, three to two; 6 and 5, five to four; 8 and 5, five to four, etc.


HAZARIBAGH, a town and district of British India, in the Chota Nagpur division of Bengal. The town is well situated at an elevation of 2000 ft. Pop. (1901) 15,799. Hazaribagh has ceased to be a military cantonment since the European penitentiary was abolished. There are a central jail and a reformatory school. The Dublin University Mission maintains a First Arts college.

HAZARIBAGH is a town and district in British India, located in the Chota Nagpur division of Bengal. The town is positioned at an elevation of 2000 ft. Population (1901) was 15,799. Hazaribagh is no longer a military cantonment since the European prison was closed down. There is a central jail and a reform school. The Dublin University Mission runs a First Arts college.

The District comprises an area of 7021 sq. m. In 1901 the population was 1,177,961, showing an increase of 1% in the decade. The physical formation of Hazaribagh exhibits three distinct features: (1) a high central plateau occupying the western section, the surface of which is undulating and cultivated; (2) a lower and more extensive plateau stretching along the north and eastern portions; to the north, the land is well cultivated, while to the east the country is of a more varied character, the elevation is lower, and the character of a plateau is gradually lost; (3) the central valley of the Damodar river occupying the entire southern section. Indeed, although the characteristics of the district are rock, hill and wide-spreading jungle, fine patches of cultivation are met with in all parts, and the scenery is generally pleasing and often striking. The district forms a part of the chain of high land which extends across the continent of India, south of the Nerbudda on the west, and south of the Sone river on the east. The most important river is the Damodar, with its many tributaries, which drains an area of 2480 sq. m.

The Area covers an area of 7,021 sq. m. In 1901, the population was 1,177,961, reflecting a 1% increase over the decade. The geography of Hazaribagh has three main features: (1) a high central plateau in the western part, which is rolling and cultivated; (2) a lower, wider plateau that runs along the northern and eastern sides; the northern area is well-farmed, while the eastern side is more diverse, with lower elevations where the plateau shape starts to fade; (3) the central valley of the Damodar River, which spans the entire southern section. Even though the district is characterized by rocks, hills, and vast jungles, there are nice patches of farmland throughout, and the scenery is generally attractive and often impressive. The district is part of the highlands that stretch across India, located south of the Nerbudda River on the west and south of the Sone River on the east. The most significant river is the Damodar, along with its numerous tributaries, which drains an area of 2,480 sq. m.

The history of the district is involved in obscurity until 1755, about which time a certain Mukund Singh was chief of the country. In a few years he was superseded by Tej Singh, who had gained the assistance of the British. In 1780 Hazaribagh, along with the surrounding territory, passed under direct British rule.

The history of the district is unclear until 1755, when a man named Mukund Singh was in charge of the area. A few years later, he was replaced by Tej Singh, who had the support of the British. In 1780, Hazaribagh and the surrounding region came under direct British control.

The district contains an important coal-field at Giridih which supplies the East Indian railway. There are altogether six mines. There are also mica mines which are gaining in importance. Rice and oilseeds are the principal crops. Tea cultivation has been tried but does not flourish, and is almost extinct. The only railways are the branch of the East Indian to the coal-field at Giridih, where there is a technical school maintained by the railway company, and the newly-opened Gaya-Katrasgarh chord line; but the district is traversed by the Grand Trunk road. Parasnath hill is annually visited by large numbers of Jain worshippers.

The district has a significant coal field in Giridih, which supplies the East Indian Railway. There are a total of six mines. Additionally, mica mines are becoming increasingly important. Rice and oilseeds are the main crops grown here. Though tea cultivation has been attempted, it hasn't succeeded and is nearly gone. The only railways are the branch line of the East Indian to the coal field in Giridih, where the railway company maintains a technical school, and the newly opened Gaya-Katrasgarh chord line; however, the district is crossed by the Grand Trunk Road. Parasnath Hill attracts many Jain worshippers every year.


HAZEBROUCK, a town of northern France, capital of an arrondissement in the department of Nord, on the canalized Bourre, 29 m. W.N.W. of Lille, on the Northern railway, between that town and St Omer. Pop. (1906), town, 8798; commune, 12,819. With the exception of the church of St Eloi, a building of the 16th century with a spire of fine open work 260 ft. high, and the hospice, occupying a convent built in the 16th and 17th centuries, there is little of architectural interest in the town. Hazebrouck is the seat of a sub prefect, and has a tribunal of first instance and a board of trade arbitration. It is the market for a fertile agricultural district, and has trade in live-stock, grain and hops. Cloth-weaving is the chief industry. Hazebrouck is an important junction, and railway employés form a large part of its population.

HAZEBROUCK is a town in northern France, the capital of an arrondissement in the Nord department, located on the Bourre canal, 29 miles W.N.W. of Lille, along the Northern railway, between Lille and St Omer. The population in 1906 was 8,798 for the town and 12,819 for the commune. Aside from the church of St Eloi, a 16th-century building with a stunning 260-foot openwork spire, and the hospice, which is situated in a convent built in the 16th and 17th centuries, there isn't much architectural interest in the town. Hazebrouck is the administrative center for a sub-prefect and hosts a tribunal of first instance and a trade arbitration board. It serves as a market for a productive agricultural area, trading in livestock, grain, and hops. Cloth-weaving is the main industry. Hazebrouck is an important railway junction, and railway workers make up a significant portion of its population.


Fig. 1.—Hazel (Corylus Avellana).—1, Female catkin (enlarged); 2, Pair of fruits (nuts) each enclosed in its involucre (reduced).

HAZEL (O. Eng. hæsel1; cf. Ger. Hasel, Swed. and Dan. hassel, &c.,; Fr. noisetier, coudrier), botanically corylus, a genus of shrubs or low trees of the natural order Corylaceae. The common hazel, Corylus Avellana (fig. 1), occurs throughout Europe, in North Africa and in central and Russian Asia, except the northernmost parts. It is commonly found in hedges and coppices, and as an undergrowth in woods, and reaches a height of some 12 ft.; occasionally, as at Eastwell Park, Kent, it may attain to 30 ft. According to Evelyn (Sylva, p. 35, 1664), hazels “above all affect cold, barren, dry, and sandy soils; also mountains, and even rockie ground produce them; but more plentifully if somewhat moist, dankish, and mossie.” In Kent they flourish best in a calcareous soil. The bark of the older stems is of a bright brown, mottled with grey, that of the young twigs is ash-coloured, and glandular and hairy. The leaves are alternate, from 2 to 4 in. in length, downy below, roundish heart-shaped, pointed and shortly stalked. In the variety C. purpurea, the leaves, as also the pellicle of the kernel and the husk of the nut, are purple, and in C. heterophylla they are thickly clothed with hairs. In autumn the rich yellow tint acquired by the leaves of the hazel adds greatly to the beauty of landscapes. The flowers are monoecious, and appear in Great Britain in February and March, before the leaves. The cylindrical drooping yellow male catkins (fig. 2) are 1 to 2½ in. long, and occur 2 to 4 in a raceme; when in unusual numbers they may be terminal in position. The female flowers are small, sub-globose and sessile, 118 resembling leaf-buds, and have protruding crimson stigmas; the minute inner bracts, by their enlargement, form the palmately lobed and cut involucre or husk of the nut. The ovary is not visible till nearly midsummer, and is not fully developed before autumn. The nuts have a length of from ½ to ¾ in., and grow in clusters. Double nuts are the result of the equal development of the two carpels of the original flower, of which ordinarily one becomes abortive; fusion of two or more nuts is not uncommon. From the light-brown or brown colour of the nuts the terms hazel and hazelly, i.e. “in hue as hazel nuts” (Shakespeare, Taming of the Shrew, ii. 1), derive their significance.2 The wood of the hazel is whitish-red, close in texture and pliant, and has when dry a weight of 49 ℔ per cub. ft.; it has been used in cabinet-making, and for toys and turned articles. Curiously veined veneers are obtained from the roots; and the root-shoots are largely employed in the making of crates, coal-corves or baskets, hurdles, withs and bands, whip-handles and other objects. The rods are reputed to be most durable when from the driest ground, and to be especially good where the bottom is chalky. The light charcoal afforded by the hazel serves well for crayons, and is valued by gunpowder manufacturers. An objection to the construction of hedges of hazel is the injury not infrequently done to them by the nut-gatherer, who “with active vigour crushes down the tree” (Thomson’s Seasons, “Autumn”), and otherwise damages it.

HAZEL (O. Eng. hæsel1; cf. Ger. Hasel, Swed. and Dan. hassel, &c.; Fr. noisetier, coudrier), botanically corylus, a group of shrubs or small trees in the natural order Corylaceae. The common hazel, Corylus Avellana (fig. 1), grows throughout Europe, in North Africa, and in central and Russian Asia, except for the northernmost regions. It’s usually found in hedges and coppices and as an undergrowth in woods, reaching heights of about 12 ft.; sometimes, as in Eastwell Park, Kent, it can grow up to 30 ft. According to Evelyn (Sylva, p. 35, 1664), hazels “prefer cold, barren, dry, and sandy soils; they can even thrive on mountains and rocky ground, but they grow more abundantly if the soil is somewhat moist, damp, and mossy.” In Kent, they do best in a calcareous soil. The bark of older stems is a bright brown mottled with grey, while the young twigs are ash-colored and covered in glands and hairs. The leaves alternate, are 2 to 4 inches long, downy underneath, rounded heart-shaped, pointed, and have short stems. In the variety C. purpurea, the leaves, along with the husk and shell of the nut, are purple, and in C. heterophylla, they have a thick covering of hairs. In autumn, the rich yellow color of hazel leaves enhances the beauty of landscapes. The flowers are monoecious and appear in Great Britain in February and March, before the leaves. The cylindrical drooping yellow male catkins (fig. 2) are 1 to 2½ inches long, appearing 2 to 4 in a cluster; when there are many, they can be found at the tips of branches. The female flowers are small, round, and sit closely on the branches, resembling leaf buds, with protruding crimson stigmas; the tiny inner bracts grow larger and form the palmately lobed husk of the nut. The ovary isn't visible until nearly midsummer, and it’s not fully developed until autumn. The nuts range from ½ to ¾ inch in length and grow in clusters. Double nuts result from both carpels of the original flower developing equally, while usually, one becomes abortive; it’s also common for two or more nuts to fuse together. The names hazel and hazelly, meaning “the color of hazel nuts” (Shakespeare, Taming of the Shrew, ii. 1), come from the light brown or brown color of the nuts.2 The wood of the hazel is whitish-red, dense, and flexible, weighing 49 lbs per cubic foot when dry; it has been used in cabinet-making, for toys, and turned articles. Interesting veined veneers are sourced from the roots, and the root shoots are commonly used to make crates, baskets, hurdles, withes, and bands, whip handles, and more. The rods are believed to be most durable when grown in dry soil, particularly where the ground is chalky. The light charcoal produced by hazel is great for crayons and is valued by gunpowder manufacturers. A drawback to using hazel for hedges is the damage often caused by nut gatherers, who “with active vigor crush down the tree” (Thomson’s Seasons, “Autumn”) and inflict other harm.

Fig. 2.—Catkin of Hazel (Corylus Avellana), consisting of an axis covered with bracts in the form of scales, each of which covers a male flower, the stamens of which are seen projecting beyond the scale. The catkin falls off entire, separating from the branch by an articulation.

The filbert,3 among the numerous varieties of Corylus Avellana, is extensively cultivated, especially in Kent, for the sake of its nuts, which are readily distinguished from cob-nuts by their ample involucre and greater length. It may be propagated by suckers and layers, by grafting and by sowing. Suckers afford the strongest and earliest-bearing plants. Grafted filberts are less liable than others to be encumbered by suckers at the root. By the Maidstone growers the best plants are considered to be obtained from layers. These become well rooted in about a twelvemonth, and then, after pruning, are bedded out in the nursery for two or three years. The filbert is economically grown on the borders of plantations or orchards, or in open spots in woods. It thrives most in a light loam with a dry subsoil; rich and, in particular, wet soils are unsuitable, conducing to the formation of too much wood. Plantations of filberts are made in autumn, in well-drained ground, and a space of about 10 ft. by 8 has to be allowed for each tree. In the third year after planting the trees may require root-pruning; in the fifth or sixth they should bear well. The nuts grow in greatest abundance on the extremities of second year’s branches, where light and air have ready access. To obtain a good tree, the practice in Kent is to select a stout upright shoot 3 ft. in length; this is cut down to about 18 in. of which the lower 12 are kept free from outgrowth. The head is pruned to form six or eight strong offsets; and by judicious use of the knife, and by training, preferably on a hoop placed within them, these are caused to grow outwards and upwards to a height of about 6 ft. so as to form a bowl-like shape. Excessive luxuriance of the laterals may be combated by root-pruning, or by checking them early in the season, and again later, and by cutting back to a female blossom bud, or else spurring nearly down to the main branch in the following spring.

The filbert, 3 among the many varieties of Corylus Avellana, is widely grown, especially in Kent, for its nuts, which can be easily distinguished from cob-nuts by their larger involucre and longer shape. It can be grown from suckers and layers, as well as through grafting and sowing. Suckers produce the strongest and quickest-bearing plants. Grafted filberts are less likely to be burdened by suckers at the roots. The best plants are typically obtained from layers according to Maidstone growers. These rooted well in about a year, and after pruning, are moved to the nursery for two or three years. Filberts are economically cultivated on the edges of plantations or orchards, or in open areas of woods. They thrive best in light loam with a dry subsoil; rich and particularly wet soils are not suitable as they encourage excessive wood growth. Plantations of filberts are established in the fall on well-drained ground, allowing for a space of about 10 ft. by 8 ft. for each tree. In the third year after planting, the trees may need root-pruning; they should bear well by the fifth or sixth year. The nuts grow most abundantly at the tips of second-year branches, where they have plenty of light and air. To get a good tree, the common practice in Kent is to choose a strong upright shoot about 3 ft. long; it is cut down to about 18 in., with the lower 12 in. kept free from growth. The head is pruned to create six or eight strong branches; with careful pruning and training, preferably using a hoop placed within them, these branches are encouraged to grow outward and upward to about 6 ft., creating a bowl-like shape. To manage excessive growth of the side branches, root-pruning can be done, or they can be restricted early in the season and again later, and cut back to a female blossom bud, or spur nearly to the main branch in the following spring.

Filbert nuts required for keeping must be gathered only when quite ripe; they may then be preserved in dry sand, or, after drying, by packing with a sprinkling of salt in sound casks or new flower-pots. Their different forms include the Cosford, which are thin-shelled and oblong; the Downton, or large square nut, having a lancinated husk; the white or Wrotham Park filbert; and the red hazel or filbert, the kernel of which has a red pellicle. The last two, on account of their elongated husk, have been distinguished as a species, under the name Corylus tubulosa. Like these, apparently, were the nuts of Abella, or Avella, in the Campania (cf. Fr. aveline, filbert), said by Pliny to have been originally designated “Pontic,” from their introduction into Asia and Greece from Pontus (see Nat. Hist. xv. 24, xxiii. 78). Hazel-nuts, under the name of Barcelona or Spanish nuts, are largely exported from France and Portugal, and especially Tarragona and other places in Spain. They afford 60% of a colourless or pale-yellow, sweet-tasting, non-drying oil, which has a specific gravity of 0.92 nearly, becomes solid at -19° C. (Cloez), and consists approximately of carbon 77, and hydrogen and oxygen each 11.5%. Hazel nuts formed part of the food of the ancient lake-dwellers of Switzerland and other countries of Europe (see Keller, Lake Dwellings, trans. Lee, 2nd ed., 1878). By the Romans they were sometimes eaten roasted. Kaltenbach (Pflanzenfeinde, pp. 633-638, 1874) enumerates ninety-eight insects which attack the hazel. Among these the beetle Balaninus nucum, the nut-weevil, seen on hazel and oak stems from the end of May till July, is highly destructive to the nuts. The female lays an egg in the unripe nut, on the kernel of which the larva subsists till September, when it bores its way through the shell, and enters the earth, to undergo transformation into a chrysalis in the ensuing spring. The leaves of the hazel are frequently found mined on the upper and under side respectively by the larvae of the moths Lithocolletis coryli and L. Nicelii. Squirrels and dormice are very destructive to the nut crop, as they not only take for present consumption but for a store for future supply. Parasitic on the roots of the hazel is found the curious leafless Lathraea Squamaria or toothwort.

Filbert nuts used for storage should only be collected when they're fully ripe. They can then be kept in dry sand, or after drying, packed with a sprinkle of salt in sturdy barrels or new flower pots. The different types include the Cosford, which are thin-shelled and oblong; the Downton, a large square nut with a pointed husk; the white or Wrotham Park filbert; and the red hazel or filbert, which has a red skin around the kernel. The last two, due to their elongated husk, have been classified as a separate species called Corylus tubulosa. Similar to these are the nuts from Abella or Avella in Campania (cf. Fr. aveline, filbert), which Pliny said were originally called “Pontic” because they were brought into Asia and Greece from Pontus (see Nat. Hist. xv. 24, xxiii. 78). Hazel nuts, referred to as Barcelona or Spanish nuts, are mostly exported from France and Portugal, especially from Tarragona and other areas in Spain. They yield 60% of a colorless or pale yellow, sweet, non-drying oil with a specific gravity of about 0.92, which solidifies at -19° C. (Cloez), and is made up of approximately 77% carbon, and 11.5% hydrogen and oxygen each. Hazel nuts were part of the diet of the ancient lake-dwellers of Switzerland and other parts of Europe (see Keller, Lake Dwellings, trans. Lee, 2nd ed., 1878). The Romans sometimes ate them roasted. Kaltenbach (Pflanzenfeinde, pp. 633-638, 1874) lists ninety-eight insects that attack hazel. Among them, the beetle Balaninus nucum, or nut-weevil, can be found on hazel and oak stems from late May to July, and it is very harmful to the nuts. The female lays an egg inside the unripe nut, and the larva feeds on the kernel until September, when it bores through the shell and burrows into the ground to transform into a pupa the following spring. The leaves of the hazel are often mined on both the upper and lower sides by the larvae of the moths Lithocolletis coryli and L. Nicelii. Squirrels and dormice are very damaging to the nut harvest since they take nuts for immediate consumption and for future storage. Parasitizing the roots of the hazel is the unusual leafless plant Lathraea Squamaria, also known as toothwort.

The Hebrew word luz, translated “hazel” in the authorized version of the English Bible (Gen. xxx. 37), is believed to signify “almond” (see Kitto, Cycl. of Bibl. Lit. ii. 869, and iii. 811, 1864). A belief in the efficacy of divining-rods of hazel for the discovery of concealed objects is probably of remote origin (cf. Hosea iv. 12). G. Agricola, in his treatise Vom Bergwerck (pp. xxix.-xxxi., Basel, 1557), gives an account, accompanied by a woodcut, of their employment in searching for mineral veins. By certain persons, who for different metals used rods of various materials, rods of hazel, he says, were held serviceable simply for silver lodes, and by the skilled miner, who trusted to natural signs of mineral veins, they were regarded as of no avail at all. The virtue of the hazel wand was supposed to be dependent on its having two forks; these were to be grasped in the fists, with the fingers uppermost, but with moderate firmness only, lest the free motion of the opposite end downwards towards the looked-for object should be interfered with. According to Cornish tradition, the divining or dowsing rod is guided to lodes by the pixies, the guardians of the treasures of the earth. By Vallemont, who wrote towards the end of the 17th century, the divining-rod of hazel, or “baguette divinatoire,” is described as instrumental in the pursuit of criminals. The Jesuit Vanière, who flourished in the early part of the 18th century, in the Praedium rusticum (pp. 12, 13, new ed., Toulouse, 1742) amusingly relates the manner in which he exposed the chicanery of one who pretended by the aid of a hazel divining-rod to point out hidden water-courses and gold. The burning of hazel nuts for the magical investigation of the future is alluded to by John Gay in Thursday, or the Spell, and by Burns in Halloween. The hazel is very frequently mentioned by the old French romance writers. Corylus rostrata and C. americana of North America have edible fruits like those of C. Avellana.

The Hebrew word luz, translated as “hazel” in the authorized version of the English Bible (Gen. xxx. 37), is believed to mean “almond” (see Kitto, Cycl. of Bibl. Lit. ii. 869, and iii. 811, 1864). The belief in the effectiveness of hazel divining rods for finding hidden objects likely dates back a long time (cf. Hosea iv. 12). G. Agricola, in his work Vom Bergwerck (pp. xxix.-xxxi., Basel, 1557), provides an account, along with an illustration, of how they were used to search for mineral veins. Certain individuals used rods made from different materials for various metals, but Agricola notes that hazel rods were particularly seen as useful for locating silver lodes. However, experienced miners, who relied on natural indicators of mineral veins, considered them useless. The effectiveness of the hazel wand was thought to depend on its having two forks; these should be held in the hands with the fingers facing up, but not too tightly, so as not to disrupt the movement of the other end downward toward the sought-after object. According to Cornish tradition, pixies—the guardians of earth’s treasures—guide the divining or dowsing rod to lodes. Vallemont, who wrote toward the end of the 17th century, described the hazel divining rod, or “baguette divinatoire,” as being useful in tracking down criminals. The Jesuit Vanière, who was active in the early 18th century, amusingly recounted in Praedium rusticum (pp. 12, 13, new ed., Toulouse, 1742) how he revealed the tricks of someone who pretended to use a hazel divining rod to find hidden water-courses and gold. The burning of hazelnuts for magical readings about the future is mentioned by John Gay in Thursday, or the Spell, and by Burns in Halloween. The hazel is commonly referenced by old French romance writers. Corylus rostrata and C. americana from North America bear edible fruits similar to those of C. Avellana.

The witch hazel is quite a distinct plant, Hamamelis virginica, of the natural order Hamamalideae, the astringent bark of which is used in medicine. It is a hardy deciduous shrub, native of North America, which bears a profusion of rich yellow flowers in autumn and winter when the plant is leafless.

The witch hazel is a unique plant, Hamamelis virginica, belonging to the natural order Hamamalideae; its astringent bark is used in medicine. It is a tough deciduous shrub, native to North America, that produces an abundance of vibrant yellow flowers in the fall and winter when the plant has no leaves.


1 It has been supposed that the origin is to be found in O. Eng. hæs, a behest, connected with hatan = Ger. heissen, to give orders: the hazel-wand was the sceptre of authority of the shepherd chieftain (ποιμὴν λαῶν) of olden times, see Grimm, Gesch. d. deutsch. Sprache, p. 1016, 1848. The root is kas-, cf. Lat. corulas, corylus; and the original meaning is unknown.

1 It is believed that the origin comes from Old English hæs, a command, related to hatan = German heissen, to give orders: the hazel wand was the symbol of authority for the shepherd leader (shepherd of the people) of ancient times, see Grimm, Gesch. d. deutsch. Sprache, p. 1016, 1848. The root is kas-, cf. Latin corulas, corylus; and the original meaning is unclear.

2 On the expression “hazel eyes,” see Notes and Queries, 2nd ser. xii. 337, and 3rd ser. iii. 18, 39.

2 For the phrase “hazel eyes,” check Notes and Queries, 2nd ser. xii. 337, and 3rd ser. iii. 18, 39.

3 For derivations of the word see Latham’s Johnson’s Dictionary.

3 For the origins of the word, see Latham’s Johnson’s Dictionary.


HAZLETON, a city of Luzerne county, Pennsylvania, U.S.A., about 25 m. S. of Wilkes-Barré. Pop. (1890) 11,872; (1900) 14,230, of whom 2732 were foreign-born; (1910 census) 25,452. It is served by the Lehigh Valley, the Pennsylvania (for freight), and the Wilkes-Barré & Hazleton (electric) railways. The city is built on a broad tableland on Nescopeck or Buck Mountain, a spur of the Blue Mountains, about 1620 ft. above sea-level. It has a park and a number of handsome residences; and its agreeable climate and picturesque situation make it attractive as a summer resort. The city has a public library. Hazleton is near the centre of one of the richest coal regions (the Lehigh or “Eastern Middle Coal Field”) of the state, and its principal industry is the mining and shipping of anthracite coal. It has silk mills, knitting mills, shirt factories, breweries, macaroni factories, lumber and planing mills, important iron works, a casket factory and a large electric power plant. The value of 119 the city’s factory products increased from $998,823 in 1900 to $2,185,876 in 1905, or 118.8%, only three other cities in the state having a population of 8000 or more in 1900 showing a greater rate of increase. There is a state hospital here for the treatment of persons injured in mines. Hazleton was settled in 1820, was laid out in 1836, was incorporated as a borough in 1856 and received a city charter in 1891. The local coal industry dates from 1837.

HAZLETON, is a city in Luzerne County, Pennsylvania, U.S.A., about 25 miles south of Wilkes-Barre. Population: (1890) 11,872; (1900) 14,230, of whom 2,732 were foreign-born; (1910 census) 25,452. It's served by the Lehigh Valley, the Pennsylvania (for freight), and the Wilkes-Barre & Hazleton (electric) railways. The city is located on a broad tableland on Nescopeck or Buck Mountain, a spur of the Blue Mountains, about 1,620 feet above sea level. It has a park and several attractive residences; its pleasant climate and scenic location make it appealing as a summer getaway. The city features a public library. Hazleton is close to the center of one of the richest coal regions (the Lehigh or "Eastern Middle Coal Field") in the state, and its main industry is mining and shipping anthracite coal. It also has silk mills, knitting mills, shirt factories, breweries, macaroni factories, lumber and planing mills, significant iron works, a casket factory, and a large electric power plant. The value of 119 the city's factory products rose from $998,823 in 1900 to $2,185,876 in 1905, an increase of 118.8%. Only three other cities in the state with a population of 8,000 or more in 1900 showed a greater rate of increase. There’s a state hospital here for treating people injured in mines. Hazleton was settled in 1820, laid out in 1836, incorporated as a borough in 1856, and received a city charter in 1891. The local coal industry began in 1837.


HAZLITT, WILLIAM (1778-1830), British literary critic and essayist, was born on the 10th of April 1778 at Maidstone, where his father, William Hazlitt, was minister of a Unitarian congregation. The father took the side of the Americans in their struggle with the mother-country, and during a residence at Bandon, Co. Cork, interested himself in the welfare of some American prisoners at Kinsale. In 1783 he migrated with his family to America, but in the winter of 1786-1787 returned to England, and settled at Wem in Shropshire, where he ministered to a small congregation. There his son William went to school, till in 1793 he was sent to the Hackney theological college in the hope that he would become a dissenting minister. For this career, however, he had no inclination, and returned, probably in 1794, to Wem, where he led a desultory life until 1802, and then decided to become a portrait painter. His elder brother John was already established as a miniature painter in London. The monotony of life at Wem was broken in January 1798 by the visit of Samuel Taylor Coleridge to Shrewsbury, where young Hazlitt went to hear him preach. Coleridge encouraged William Hazlitt’s interest in metaphysics, and in the spring of the next year Hazlitt visited Coleridge at Nether Stowey and made the acquaintance of William Wordsworth. The circumstances of this early intercourse with Coleridge are related with inimitable skill in a paper in Hazlitt’s Literary Remains (1839). On visits to his brother in London he made many acquaintances, the most important being a friendship with Charles Lamb, said to have been founded on a remark of Lamb’s interpolated in a discussion between Coleridge, Godwin and Holcroft, “Give me man as he is not to be.” He also formed an acquaintance with John Stoddart, whose sister Sarah he married in 1808. In October 1802 he went to Paris to copy portraits in the Louvre, and spent four happy months in Paris. When he returned to London he undertook commissions for portraits, but soon found he was not likely to excel in his art; his last portrait, one of Charles Lamb as a Venetian senator (now in the National Portrait Gallery), was executed in 1805. In that year he published his first book, An Essay on the Principles of Human Action: being an argument in favour of the Natural Disinterestedness of the Human Mind, which had occupied him at intervals for six or seven years. It attracted little attention, but remained a favourite with its author. Other works belonging to this period are: Free Thoughts on Public Affairs (1806); An Abridgment of the Light of Nature Revealed, by Abraham Tucker ... (1807); The Eloquence of the British Senate ... (2 vols., 1807); A Reply to Malthus, on his Essay on Population (1807); A New and Improved Grammar of the English Tongue ... (1810).

HAZLITT, WILLIAM (1778-1830), British literary critic and essayist, was born on April 10, 1778, in Maidstone, where his father, William Hazlitt, was the minister of a Unitarian congregation. His father supported the Americans during their struggle against Britain and, while living in Bandon, Co. Cork, became involved in helping some American prisoners at Kinsale. In 1783, he moved with his family to America, but returned to England in the winter of 1786-1787 and settled in Wem, Shropshire, where he ministered to a small congregation. There, his son William attended school until 1793, when he was sent to Hackney theological college in hopes he would become a dissenting minister. However, he had no interest in this path and returned, likely in 1794, to Wem, where he led a wandering lifestyle until 1802, when he decided to pursue a career as a portrait painter. His older brother John was already established as a miniature painter in London. The dullness of life in Wem was broken in January 1798 by Samuel Taylor Coleridge's visit to Shrewsbury, where young Hazlitt went to hear him preach. Coleridge sparked William Hazlitt’s interest in metaphysics, and the following spring, Hazlitt visited Coleridge at Nether Stowey and met William Wordsworth. The details of this early interaction with Coleridge are told with remarkable skill in a paper in Hazlitt’s Literary Remains (1839). During visits to his brother in London, he made many acquaintances, including a friendship with Charles Lamb, which was reportedly based on a comment from Lamb during a discussion with Coleridge, Godwin, and Holcroft: “Give me man as he is not to be.” He also became acquainted with John Stoddart, whose sister Sarah he married in 1808. In October 1802, he went to Paris to copy portraits in the Louvre and spent four enjoyable months there. Upon returning to London, he took on portraits commissions but soon realized he was unlikely to excel in the art; his last portrait, of Charles Lamb as a Venetian senator (now in the National Portrait Gallery), was completed in 1805. That year, he published his first book, An Essay on the Principles of Human Action: being an argument in favour of the Natural Disinterestedness of the Human Mind, which he had worked on for six or seven years. It garnered little attention but remained a favorite of his. Other works from this period include: Free Thoughts on Public Affairs (1806); An Abridgment of the Light of Nature Revealed, by Abraham Tucker ... (1807); The Eloquence of the British Senate ... (2 vols., 1807); A Reply to Malthus, on his Essay on Population (1807); A New and Improved Grammar of the English Tongue ... (1810).

Hazlitt married in 1808. His domestic life was unhappy. His wife was an unromantic, business-like woman, while he himself was fitful and moody, and impatient of restraint. The dissolution of the ill-assorted union was nevertheless deferred for fourteen years, during which much of Hazlitt’s best literary work had been produced. Mrs Hazlitt had inherited a small estate at Winterslow near Salisbury, and here the Hazlitts lived until 1812, when they removed to 19 York Street, Westminster, a house that was once Milton’s. Hazlitt delivered in 1812 a course of lectures at the Russell Institution on the Rise and Progress of Modern Philosophy. He soon abandoned philosophy, however, to give his whole attention to journalism. He was parliamentary reporter and subsequently dramatic critic for the Morning Chronicle; he also contributed to the Champion and The Times; but his closest connexion was with the Examiner, owned by John and Leigh Hunt. In conjunction with Leigh Hunt he undertook the series of articles called The Round Table, a collection of essays on literature, men and manners which were originally contributed to the Examiner. To this time belong his View of the English Stage (1818), and Lectures on the English Poets (1818), on the English Comic Writers (1819), and on the Dramatic Literature of the Age of Elizabeth (1821). By these works, together with his Characters of Shakespeare’s Plays (1817), and his Table Talk; or Original Essays on Men and Manners (1821-1822), his reputation as a critic and essayist was established. Next to Coleridge, Hazlitt was perhaps the most powerful exponent of the dawning perception that Shakespeare’s art was no less marvellous than his genius; and Hazlitt’s criticism did not, like Coleridge’s, remain in the condition of a series of brilliant but fitful glimpses of insight, but was elaborated with steady care. His lectures on the Elizabethan dramatists performed a similar service for the earlier, sweeter and simpler among them, such as Dekker, till then unduly eclipsed by later writers like Massinger, better playwrights but worse poets. Treating of the contemporary drama, he successfully vindicated for Edmund Kean, whose genius he recognized from the first, the high place which he has retained as an actor, and his enthusiasm for Mrs Siddons knew no bounds. His criticisms on the English comic writers and men of letters in general are masterpieces of ingenious and felicitous exposition, though rarely, like Coleridge’s, penetrating to the inmost core of the subject. Moreover, at the time when the lectures were written, Hazlitt’s views, orthodox as they may seem now, were novel enough.

Hazlitt got married in 1808. His home life was unhappy. His wife was practical and unromantic, while he was unpredictable, moody, and restless. Despite this mismatch, their troubled marriage lasted for fourteen years, during which Hazlitt produced much of his best literary work. Mrs. Hazlitt had inherited a small estate in Winterslow near Salisbury, and the couple lived there until 1812 when they moved to 19 York Street, Westminster, a house that had once belonged to Milton. In 1812, Hazlitt gave a series of lectures at the Russell Institution on the Rise and Progress of Modern Philosophy. However, he soon shifted his focus entirely to journalism. He worked as a parliamentary reporter and later as a dramatic critic for the Morning Chronicle; he also wrote for the Champion and The Times, but his closest association was with the Examiner, owned by John and Leigh Hunt. Along with Leigh Hunt, he contributed to a series of articles called The Round Table, a collection of essays on literature, people, and manners that were originally published in the Examiner. This period includes his works View of the English Stage (1818), Lectures on the English Poets (1818), English Comic Writers (1819), and Dramatic Literature of the Age of Elizabeth (1821). Through these works, along with Characters of Shakespeare’s Plays (1817) and Table Talk; or Original Essays on Men and Manners (1821-1822), he established his reputation as a critic and essayist. After Coleridge, Hazlitt was perhaps the strongest advocate of the idea that Shakespeare's artistry was as remarkable as his genius. Unlike Coleridge's insights, which were often sporadic, Hazlitt's criticism was thorough and carefully developed. His lectures on the Elizabethan dramatists illuminated the earlier, more straightforward writers like Dekker, who had been overshadowed by later but less poetic playwrights like Massinger. In discussing contemporary drama, he championed Edmund Kean, recognizing his genius from the beginning, and he had boundless enthusiasm for Mrs. Siddons. His critiques of English comic writers and literary figures in general are brilliant examples of insightful and eloquent analysis, though they seldom penetrate the deeper essence of the topic as Coleridge's work does. Additionally, at the time these lectures were written, Hazlitt’s perspectives, while they may seem traditional now, were quite revolutionary.

As an essayist Hazlitt is even more effective than as a critic. Being enabled to select his own subjects, he escapes dependence upon others either for his matter or his illustrations, and presents himself by turns as a metaphysician, a moralist, a humorist, a painter of manners and characteristics, but always, whatever his ostensible theme, deriving the essence of his commentary from himself. This combination of intense subjectivity with strict adherence to his subject is one of Hazlitt’s most distinctive and creditable traits. Intellectual truthfulness is a passion with him. He steeps his topic in the hues of his own individuality, but never uses it as a means of self-display. The first reception of his admirable essays was by no means in accordance with their deserts. Hazlitt’s political sympathies and antipathies were vehement, and he had taken the unfashionable side. The Quarterly Review attacked him with deliberate malignity, stopped the sale of his writings for a time and blighted his credit with publishers. Hazlitt retaliated by his Letter to William Gifford (1819), accusing the editor of deliberate misrepresentation. In downright abuse and hard-hitting, Hazlitt proved himself more than a match even for Gifford. By the writers in Blackwood’s Magazine Hazlitt was also scurrilously treated.1 He had become estranged from his early friends, the Lake poets, by what he uncharitably but not unnaturally regarded as their political apostasy; and he had no scruples about recording his often very unfavourable opinions of his contemporaries. He displayed, moreover, an exasperating facility in grounding his criticisms on facts that his victims were unable to deny. His inequalities of temper separated him for a time even from Leigh Hunt and Charles Lamb, and on the whole the period of his most brilliant literary success was that when he was most soured and broken. Domestic troubles supervened; he had gone to live in Southampton Buildings in September 1819, and his marriage, long little more than nominal, was dissolved in consequence of the infatuated passion he had conceived for his landlord’s daughter, Sarah Walker, a most ordinary person in the eyes of every one else. It is impossible to regard Hazlitt as a responsible agent while he continued subject to this influence. His own record of the transaction, published by himself under the title of Liber Amoris, or the New Pygmalion (1823), is an unpleasant but remarkable psychological document. It consists of conversations between Hazlitt and Sarah Walker, drawn up in the spring of 1822, of a correspondence between Hazlitt and his friend P. G. Patmore between March and July, and an account of the rupture of his relations with Sarah. The business-like dissolution of his marriage under the law of Scotland is related with amazing 120 naïveté by the family biographer. Rid of his wife and cured of his mistress, he shortly afterwards astonished his friends by marrying a widow. “All I know,” says his grandson, “is that Mrs Bridgewater became Mrs Hazlitt.” They travelled on the continent for a year and then parted finally. Hazlitt’s study of the Italian masters during this tour, described in a series of letters contributed to the Morning Chronicle, had a deep effect upon him, and perhaps conduced to that intimacy with the cynical old painter Northcote which, shortly after his return, engendered a curious but eminently readable volume of The Conversations of James Northcote, R.A. (1830). The respective shares of author and artist are not always easy to determine. During the recent agitations of his life he had been writing essays, collected in 1826 under the title of The Plain Speaker: opinions on Books, Men and Things (1826). The Spirit of the Age; or Contemporary Portraits (1825), a series of criticisms on the leading intellectual characters of the day, is in point of style perhaps the most splendid and copious of his compositions. It is eager and animated to impetuosity, though without any trace of carelessness or disorder. He now undertook a work which was to have crowned his literary reputation, but which can hardly be said to have even enhanced it—The Life of Napoleon Buonaparte (4 vols., 1828-1830). The undertaking was at best premature, and was inevitably disfigured by partiality to Napoleon as the representative of the popular cause, excusable in a Liberal politician writing in the days of the Holy Alliance. Owing to the failure of his publishers Hazlitt received no recompense for this laborious work. Pecuniary anxieties and disappointments may have contributed to hasten his death, which took place on the 18th of September 1830. Charles Lamb was with him to the last.

As an essayist, Hazlitt is even more impactful than as a critic. Being able to choose his own subjects, he avoids relying on others for content or illustrations, presenting himself in various roles: a metaphysician, a moralist, a humorist, a commentator on manners and characteristics. Regardless of the theme, he always draws the essence of his commentary from his own experiences. This blend of deep subjectivity with a strong focus on his topic is one of Hazlitt’s most distinctive and admirable traits. He is passionate about intellectual honesty. He infuses his topics with his own individuality but never uses them to showcase himself. The initial reception of his outstanding essays didn’t reflect their true value. Hazlitt’s political sympathies and oppositions were strong, and he took an unpopular stance. The Quarterly Review attacked him with deliberate malice, halted the sale of his writings temporarily, and damaged his reputation with publishers. Hazlitt responded with his Letter to William Gifford (1819), accusing the editor of misleading representation. In terms of outright criticism and strong words, Hazlitt proved to be more than a match for Gifford. The writers of Blackwood’s Magazine also treated Hazlitt unfairly. He had become estranged from his early friends, the Lake poets, due to what he felt was their political betrayal, and he was unreserved in expressing his often negative opinions about his contemporaries. Additionally, he had a frustrating talent for grounding his criticisms in facts that his targets could not deny. His fluctuations in temperament distanced him for a while even from Leigh Hunt and Charles Lamb, and overall, the period of his greatest literary successes coincided with a time when he was feeling most bitter and broken. Domestic issues arose; he had moved to Southampton Buildings in September 1819, and his marriage, which had long been more or less nominal, ended due to the all-consuming passion he developed for his landlord’s daughter, Sarah Walker, who was considered rather ordinary by everyone else. It’s hard to see Hazlitt as a rational agent while under her influence. His own account of the situation, published as Liber Amoris, or the New Pygmalion (1823), is an uncomfortable but significant psychological document. It consists of conversations between Hazlitt and Sarah Walker created in the spring of 1822, a correspondence between Hazlitt and his friend P. G. Patmore from March to July, and a summary of the end of his relationship with Sarah. The straightforward dissolution of his marriage under Scottish law is described with surprising simplicity by the family biographer. Free from his wife and the mistress, he soon surprised his friends by marrying a widow. “All I know,” his grandson says, “is that Mrs. Bridgewater became Mrs. Hazlitt.” They traveled across Europe for a year and then separated for good. Hazlitt’s exploration of the Italian masters during this trip, detailed in a series of letters to the Morning Chronicle, had a profound effect on him and perhaps led to a relationship with the cynical old painter Northcote, which shortly after his return resulted in an interesting but very readable book, The Conversations of James Northcote, R.A. (1830). It’s not always easy to discern who contributed more to this work, the author or the artist. During the recent turbulence of his life, he had been writing essays, which were collected in 1826 under the title The Plain Speaker: Opinions on Books, Men and Things (1826). The Spirit of the Age; or Contemporary Portraits (1825), a series of critiques on the leading intellectual figures of the time, is perhaps his most splendid and expansive work in terms of style. It's eager and lively to the point of being impulsive, yet without any signs of carelessness or chaos. He then undertook a project that was meant to elevate his literary reputation but hardly did—The Life of Napoleon Buonaparte (4 vols., 1828-1830). This endeavor was at best premature and was inevitably marred by his bias toward Napoleon as representative of the popular cause, which is understandable for a liberal politician writing during the era of the Holy Alliance. Due to his publishers' failure, Hazlitt received no payment for this labor-intensive project. Financial worries and disappointments may have contributed to hasten his death, which occurred on September 18, 1830. Charles Lamb was with him until the end.

Hazlitt had many serious defects of temper. His consistency was gained at the expense of refusing to revise his early impressions and prejudices. His estimate of a man’s work was too apt to be decided by sympathy or the reverse with his politics. For Scott, however, he had a great admiration, although they were far enough apart in politics. He was a compound of intellect and passion, and the refinement of his critical analysis is associated with vehement eloquence and glowing imagery. He was essentially a critic, a dissector and, as Bulwer justly remarks, a much better judge of men of thought than of men of action. The paradoxes with which his works abound never spring from affectation; they are in general the sallies of a mind so agile and ardent as to overrun its own goal. His style is perfectly natural, and yet admirably calculated for effect. His diction, always rich and masculine, seems to kindle as he proceeds; and when thoroughly animated by his subject, he advances with a succession of energetic, hard-hitting sentences, each carrying his argument a step further, like a champion dealing out blows as he presses upon the enemy. Although, however, his grasp upon his subject is strenuous, his insight into it is rarely profound. He can amply satisfy men of taste and culture; he cannot, like Coleridge or Burke, dissatisfy them with themselves by showing them how much they would have missed without him. He is a critic who exhibits, rather than reveals, the beauties of an author. But all shortcomings are forgotten in the genuineness and fervour of the writer’s self-portraiture. The intensity of his personal convictions causes all he wrote to appear in a manner autobiographic. Other men have been said to speak like books, Hazlitt’s books speak like men. To read his works in connexion with Leigh Hunt’s and Charles Lamb’s is to be introduced into one of the most attractive of English literary circles, and this alone will long preserve them from oblivion.

Hazlitt had many serious temperament issues. He maintained his consistency by refusing to reconsider his early impressions and biases. His evaluation of a person's work often depended too much on whether he liked or disliked their politics. However, he greatly admired Scott, even though their political views were quite different. He was a mix of intellect and passion, and the sophistication of his critical analysis was paired with intense eloquence and vivid imagery. He was primarily a critic, an analyst, and, as Bulwer rightly points out, a much better judge of thinkers than doers. The paradoxes that fill his works don't come from pretension; they generally reflect a mind so lively and passionate that it overshoots its own goal. His style is completely natural, yet expertly crafted for impact. His language, always rich and masculine, seems to ignite as he continues; when he's fully engaged with his topic, he delivers a series of dynamic, impactful sentences, each propelling his argument forward like a champion landing blows as he attacks the opponent. However, although his grip on his subject is intense, his understanding of it is rarely deep. He can easily satisfy people of taste and culture, but he cannot, like Coleridge or Burke, make them feel inadequate by showing them what they would have missed without him. He is a critic who shows rather than uncovers the beauty of an author. Yet, any shortcomings disappear in the authenticity and passion of the writer's self-portrait. The intensity of his personal beliefs makes everything he wrote feel somewhat autobiographical. While some people speak like books, Hazlitt's books speak like real people. Reading his works alongside those of Leigh Hunt and Charles Lamb introduces you to one of the most appealing circles in English literature, and this alone will keep them from being forgotten for a long time.

His son, William Hazlitt (1811-1893), was born on the 26th of September 1811. The separation between his parents did not prevent him from being on affectionate terms with both of them. He early began to write for the Morning Chronicle, and in 1833 married Caroline Reynell. He was the author of many translations, chiefly from the French, and of some works on the law of bankruptcy. He was called to the bar at the Middle Temple in 1844, and became registrar in the court of bankruptcy. He held this position for more than thirty years, retiring two years before his death, which took place at Addlestone, Surrey, on the 23rd of February 1893.

His son, William Hazlitt (1811-1893), was born on September 26, 1811. The separation of his parents didn’t stop him from having a close relationship with both of them. He started writing for the Morning Chronicle at an early age, and in 1833 he married Caroline Reynell. He authored many translations, mostly from French, and wrote some works on bankruptcy law. He was called to the bar at the Middle Temple in 1844 and became the registrar in the bankruptcy court. He held this role for over thirty years, retiring two years before his death, which occurred in Addlestone, Surrey, on February 23, 1893.

Hazlitt’s grandson, William Carew Hazlitt, the bibliographer, was born on the 22nd of August 1834. He was educated at the Merchant Taylors’ school and was called to the bar of the Inner Temple in 1861. Among his many publications may be noted his invaluable Handbook to the Popular, Poetical and Dramatic Literature of Great Britain, from the Invention of Printing to the Restoration (1867), supplemented in 1876, 1882, 1887 and 1889, a General Index by J. G. Gray appearing in 1893. He published further contributions to the subject in Bibliographical Collections and Notes on Early English Literature made during the years 1893-1903 (1903), and a Manual for the Collector and Amateur of Old English Plays ... (1892). He was the chief editor of the useful 1871 edition of Warton’s History of English Poetry, and compiled the Catalogue of the Huth Library (1880).

Hazlitt’s grandson, William Carew Hazlitt, the bibliographer, was born on August 22, 1834. He attended Merchant Taylors’ school and was called to the bar of the Inner Temple in 1861. Among his many publications is his invaluable Handbook to the Popular, Poetical and Dramatic Literature of Great Britain, from the Invention of Printing to the Restoration (1867), which was updated in 1876, 1882, 1887, and 1889, with a General Index by J. G. Gray published in 1893. He continued to contribute to the topic with Bibliographical Collections and Notes on Early English Literature made during the years 1893-1903 (1903), and a Manual for the Collector and Amateur of Old English Plays ... (1892). He served as the chief editor of the useful 1871 edition of Warton’s History of English Poetry, and compiled the Catalogue of the Huth Library (1880).

The list of the first William Hazlitt’s works also includes: Political Essays, with Sketches of Public Characters (1819); Sketches of the Principal Picture Galleries in England ... (1824); Characteristics; in the Manner of Rochefoucauld’s Maxims (1823); Select Poets of Great Britain: to which are prefixed Critical Notices of each Author (1825); Notes of a Journey through France and Italy ... (1826); The Life of Titian; with Anecdotes of the Distinguished Persons of his Time (1830), nominally by James Northcote; an article on the “Fine Arts” contributed to the seventh edition of the Encyclopaedia Britannica; and posthumous collections made by his son.

The list of the first works by William Hazlitt also includes: Political Essays, with Sketches of Public Characters (1819); Sketches of the Principal Picture Galleries in England ... (1824); Characteristics; in the Manner of Rochefoucauld’s Maxims (1823); Select Poets of Great Britain: to which are prefixed Critical Notices of each Author (1825); Notes of a Journey through France and Italy ... (1826); The Life of Titian; with Anecdotes of the Distinguished Persons of his Time (1830), nominally by James Northcote; an article on the “Fine Arts” contributed to the seventh edition of the Encyclopaedia Britannica; and posthumous collections made by his son.

A comprehensive edition of The Collected Works of William Hazlitt (12 vols., 1902-1904) does not include the life of Napoleon. It contains an introduction by W. E. Henley, and was issued under the superintendence of A. R. Waller and Arnold Glover, and there are many modern reprints of isolated works. The most copious source of information respecting Hazlitt is the Memoirs of William Hazlitt, with Portions of his Correspondence (2 vols., 1867), by his grandson, W. C. Hazlitt, a medley rather than a memoir, yet full of interest. A slight but appropriate sketch had previously been prefixed by his son to his Literary Remains ... (2 vols., 1836), accompanied by estimates of his intellectual character by Bulwer and by Talfourd, who had been his fast friend. There is an excellent monograph on William Hazlitt (1902) by Mr Augustine Birrell, in the “English Men of Letters” series, and one in French by J. Donady (Paris, 1907), who also published a bibliography of his works. Valuable biographical particulars have been preserved in Barry Cornwall’s memoirs of Lamb; in the My Friends and Acquaintances (1854) of Mr P. G. Patmore, Hazlitt’s most intimate associate in his later years; in Crabb Robinson’s Diary, and in Lamb’s correspondence. A full bibliographical list of his writings, with a collection of the most remarkable critical judgments upon them from all quarters, was prepared by Alexander Ireland (1868). Further information on the Hazlitt family is to be found in Mr W. C. Hazlitt’s Four Generations of a Literary Family (2 vols., 1897). The chief interest of this desultory book is the considerable extracts from the diary of Margaret [Peggy] Hazlitt, which describes the Hazlitt experiences in America. See also “William Hazlitt” in Sir L. Stephen’s Hours in a Library (ed. 1892, vol. ii.), and Lamb and Hazlitt, further Letters and Records hitherto unpublished (1900), by W. C. Hazlitt.

A comprehensive edition of The Collected Works of William Hazlitt (12 vols., 1902-1904) does not include the life of Napoleon. It features an introduction by W. E. Henley and was published under the supervision of A. R. Waller and Arnold Glover, with many modern reprints of individual works available. The most extensive source of information about Hazlitt is the Memoirs of William Hazlitt, with Portions of his Correspondence (2 vols., 1867), written by his grandson, W. C. Hazlitt. This book is more of a collection than a memoir, but it’s captivating. A brief yet fitting overview was added earlier by his son to his Literary Remains ... (2 vols., 1836), alongside evaluations of his intellectual character by Bulwer and Talfourd, who were his close friends. There is an excellent monograph on William Hazlitt (1902) by Mr. Augustine Birrell in the “English Men of Letters” series, and one in French by J. Donady (Paris, 1907), who also published a bibliography of his works. Valuable biographical details can be found in Barry Cornwall’s memoirs of Lamb; in Mr. P. G. Patmore’s My Friends and Acquaintances (1854), Hazlitt’s closest associate in his later years; in Crabb Robinson’s Diary; and in Lamb’s correspondence. A complete bibliographical list of his writings, along with a collection of notable critical opinions about them, was compiled by Alexander Ireland (1868). Additional information about the Hazlitt family can be found in Mr. W. C. Hazlitt’s Four Generations of a Literary Family (2 vols., 1897). The main interest of this varied book lies in the significant excerpts from the diary of Margaret [Peggy] Hazlitt, which details the Hazlitt family’s experiences in America. Also see “William Hazlitt” in Sir L. Stephen’s Hours in a Library (ed. 1892, vol. ii.), and Lamb and Hazlitt, further Letters and Records hitherto unpublished (1900), by W. C. Hazlitt.


1 For some quotations see Alexander Ireland’s bibliography.

1 For some quotes, check out Alexander Ireland’s bibliography.


HEAD, SIR EDMUND WALKER, Bart. (1805-1868), English colonial governor and writer on art, was the son of the Rev. Sir John Head, Bart., rector of Rayleigh, Essex. He was educated at Winchester school and Oriel College, Oxford, and taking his degree with first-class honours in classics, he became fellow of Merton College. On his father’s death in 1838, he succeeded to the baronetcy as 8th baronet. His services as poor-law commissioner, to which post he was appointed in 1841 after five years as assistant-commissioner, procured for him in 1847 the office of lieutenant-governor of New Brunswick, whence he passed in 1854 to the governor-generalship of Canada, which he retained till 1861. The following year, having returned to England, Head was nominated a civil service commissioner. In 1857 he was sworn of the Privy Council, and in 1860 was decorated as K.C.B., while in the course of his career he received the degrees of D.C.L. at Oxford and LL.D. at Cambridge. He died in London on the 28th of January 1868, the baronetcy becoming extinct, as his only son had died in 1859.

HEAD, SIR EDMUND WALKER, Bart. (1805-1868), English colonial governor and art writer, was the son of Rev. Sir John Head, Bart., rector of Rayleigh, Essex. He was educated at Winchester School and Oriel College, Oxford, graduating with first-class honors in Classics, and became a fellow of Merton College. After his father's death in 1838, he inherited the baronetcy as the 8th baronet. His work as a poor-law commissioner, a position he took on in 1841 after five years as assistant commissioner, led to his appointment as lieutenant-governor of New Brunswick in 1847. In 1854, he became the governor-general of Canada, a role he held until 1861. The following year, after returning to England, Head was named a civil service commissioner. In 1857, he was sworn into the Privy Council, and in 1860 he was honored as K.C.B. Throughout his career, he received the degrees of D.C.L. from Oxford and LL.D. from Cambridge. He passed away in London on January 28, 1868, and the baronetcy became extinct, as his only son had died in 1859.

Sir Edmund Head wrote the article “Painting” in the Penny Cyclopaedia; A Handbook of the Spanish and French Schools of Painting (1845); Shall and Will, or two Chapters on Future Auxiliary Verbs (1856); and Ballads and other Poems, Original and Translated (1868). He also edited F. T. Kugler’s Handbook of Painting of the 121 German, Flemish, Dutch, Spanish, and French Schools (1854) and the Essays on the Administrations of Great Britain (1864), written by his lifelong friend, Sir George Cornewall Lewis. His translation from the Icelandic of Viga Glum’s Saga appeared in 1866.

Sir Edmund Head wrote the article “Painting” in the Penny Cyclopaedia; A Handbook of the Spanish and French Schools of Painting (1845); Shall and Will, or Two Chapters on Future Auxiliary Verbs (1856); and Ballads and Other Poems, Original and Translated (1868). He also edited F. T. Kugler’s Handbook of Painting of the 121 German, Flemish, Dutch, Spanish, and French Schools (1854) and the Essays on the Administrations of Great Britain (1864), written by his lifelong friend, Sir George Cornewall Lewis. His translation from the Icelandic of Viga Glum’s Saga was published in 1866.


HEAD, SIR FRANCIS BOND, Bart. (1793-1875), English soldier, traveller and author, son of James Roper Head of the Hermitage, Higham, Kent, was born there on the 1st of January 1793. He was educated at Rochester grammar school and the Royal Military Academy, whence in 1811 he was commissioned to the Royal Engineers. He was for some years stationed in the Mediterranean, and he served in the campaign of 1815, being present at the battle of Waterloo. He went on half-pay in 1825, when he accepted the charge of an association formed to work the gold and silver mines of Rio de La Plata. In connexion with this enterprise he made several rapid journeys across the Pampas and among the Andes, his Rough Notes of which, published in 1826, and written in a clear and spirited style, obtained for him the name of “Galloping Head.” On his return in 1827, he became involved in a controversy with the directors of his company, and in defence of his conduct he published Reports of the La Plata Mining Association (London, 1827). He was soon afterwards restored to the active list of the army as a major unattached, mainly owing to his efforts to introduce the South American lasso into the British service for auxiliary draught. In 1830 he published a life of Bruce, the African traveller, and in 1834 Bubbles from the Brunnens of Nassau, by an Old Man. In 1835 he was knighted, and in the following year created a baronet. In 1835 he was appointed lieutenant-governor of Upper Canada, and in this capacity he had to deal with a political situation of great difficulty, being called upon in 1837 to suppress a serious insurrection. Shortly afterwards, in consequence of a dispute with the home government, he resigned his post and returned to England, via New York (see Quarterly Review, vols. 63-64). Thereafter he devoted himself to writing, chiefly for the Quarterly Review, and to hunting. He rode to hounds until he was seventy-five. In 1869 Sir Francis Head was made a privy councillor. He died on the 20th of July 1875, at Duppas Hall, Croydon.

HEAD, SIR FRANCIS BOND, Bart. (1793-1875), English soldier, traveler, and author, son of James Roper Head of the Hermitage, Higham, Kent, was born there on January 1, 1793. He was educated at Rochester Grammar School and the Royal Military Academy, and in 1811 he was commissioned into the Royal Engineers. He spent several years stationed in the Mediterranean and served in the 1815 campaign, being present at the Battle of Waterloo. He went on half-pay in 1825 when he took charge of an association formed to work the gold and silver mines of Rio de La Plata. In connection with this venture, he made several quick journeys across the Pampas and through the Andes, writing a spirited account in his Rough Notes, published in 1826, which earned him the nickname “Galloping Head.” Upon his return in 1827, he entered into a dispute with the directors of his company, and to defend his actions, he published Reports of the La Plata Mining Association (London, 1827). Soon after, he was restored to the active army list as a major unattached, mainly due to his efforts to introduce the South American lasso into the British service for auxiliary draft purposes. In 1830 he published a biography of Bruce, the African traveler, and in 1834 Bubbles from the Brunnens of Nassau, by an Old Man. He was knighted in 1835 and created a baronet the following year. In 1835, he was appointed lieutenant-governor of Upper Canada, where he faced a challenging political situation, having to suppress a serious insurrection in 1837. Soon after, due to a disagreement with the home government, he resigned and returned to England via New York (see Quarterly Review, vols. 63-64). After that, he focused on writing, mostly for the Quarterly Review, and on hunting. He continued to ride to hounds until he was seventy-five. In 1869, Sir Francis Head was appointed a privy councillor. He died on July 20, 1875, at Duppas Hall, Croydon.

Head was the author of a considerable number of works, chiefly of travel, written in a clever, amusing and graphic fashion, and displaying both acute observation and genial humour. His principal works, beside those mentioned above, and a narrative of his Canadian administration (1839), were The Emigrant (1846); Highways and Dryways, the Britannia and Conway Tubular Bridges (1849); Stokers and Pokers, a sketch of the working of a railway line (1849); The Defenceless State of Great Britain (1850); A Faggot of French Sticks (1852); A Fortnight in Ireland (1852); Descriptive Essays (1856); comments on Kinglake’s Crimean War (1853); The Horse and his Rider (1860); The Royal Engineer (1870); and a sketch of the life of Sir John Burgoyne (1872).

Head authored a significant number of works, mainly focusing on travel, written in a witty, entertaining, and vivid style, showcasing sharp observation and friendly humor. His major works, in addition to those previously mentioned and a narrative of his Canadian administration (1839), include The Emigrant (1846); Highways and Dryways, the Britannia and Conway Tubular Bridges (1849); Stokers and Pokers, a description of how a railway line operates (1849); The Defenceless State of Great Britain (1850); A Faggot of French Sticks (1852); A Fortnight in Ireland (1852); Descriptive Essays (1856); commentary on Kinglake’s Crimean War (1853); The Horse and his Rider (1860); The Royal Engineer (1870); and a biography of Sir John Burgoyne (1872).

His brother, Sir George Head (1782-1855), was educated at the Charterhouse. In 1808 he received an appointment in the commissariat of the British army in the Peninsula, where he was a witness of many exciting scenes and important battles, of which he gave an interesting account in “Memoirs of an Assistant Commissary-General” attached to the second volume of his Home Tour, published in 1837. In 1814 he was sent to America to take charge of the commissariat in a naval establishment on the Canadian lakes, and he subsequently held appointments at Halifax and Nova Scotia. Some of his Canadian experiences were narrated by him in Forest Scenery and Incidents in the Wilds of North America (1829). In 1831 he was knighted.

His brother, Sir George Head (1782-1855), was educated at Charterhouse. In 1808, he got a role in the commissariat of the British army in the Peninsula, where he witnessed many exciting events and significant battles, which he wrote about in “Memoirs of an Assistant Commissary-General” included in the second volume of his Home Tour, published in 1837. In 1814, he was sent to America to oversee the commissariat in a naval facility on the Canadian lakes, and he later held positions in Halifax and Nova Scotia. Some of his experiences in Canada were recounted in Forest Scenery and Incidents in the Wilds of North America (1829). He was knighted in 1831.

He published in 1835 A Home Tour through the Manufacturing Districts of England, and in 1837 a sequel to it, entitled A Home Tour through various parts of the United Kingdom. Both works are amusing and instructive, but his Rome, a Tour of many Days, published in 1849, is somewhat dull and tedious. He also translated Historical Memoirs of Cardinal Pacca (1850), and the Metamorphoses of Apuleius (1851).

He published in 1835 A Home Tour through the Manufacturing Districts of England, and in 1837 a follow-up called A Home Tour through Various Parts of the United Kingdom. Both works are entertaining and informative, but his Rome, a Tour of Many Days, published in 1849, is a bit boring and draggy. He also translated Historical Memoirs of Cardinal Pacca (1850) and the Metamorphoses of Apuleius (1851).


HEAD (in O. Eng. héafod; the word is common to Teutonic languages; cf. Dutch hoofd, Ger. Haupt, generally taken to be in origin connected with Lat. caput, Gr. κεφαλή), the upper portion of the body in man, consisting of the skull with its integuments and contents, &c., connected with the trunk by the neck (see Anatomy, Skull and Brain); also the anterior or fore part of other animals. The word is used in a large number of transferred and figurative senses, generally with reference to the position of the head as the uppermost part, hence the leading, chief portion of anything.

HEAD (in Old English héafod; this word is found in various Teutonic languages; see Dutch hoofd, German Haupt, which is generally believed to be related to the Latin caput and the Greek head), refers to the upper part of the body in humans, consisting of the skull along with its protective layers and contents, etc., which is connected to the torso by the neck (see Anatomy, Skull and Brain); it also denotes the front part of other animals. The term is used in many different transferred and figurative meanings, usually referring to the position of the head as the highest part, thus signifying the leading or main part of something.


HEAD-HUNTING, or Head-Snapping, as the Dutch call it, a custom once prevalent among all Malay races and surviving even to-day among the Dyaks (q.v.) of Borneo and elsewhere. Martin de Rada, provincial of the Augustinians, reported its existence in Luzon (Philippine Islands) as early as 1577. The practice is believed to have had its origin in religious motives, the worship of skulls being universal among the Malays. Severe repressive measures have led to its decrease. Among the Igorrotes all that remains is the dance, accompanied by singing, around the bare pole on which the head was formerly fixed. With the Ilongotes a bridegroom must bring his bride a number of heads, those of Christians being preferred. The chief examples of head-hunters are the Was, a hill-tribe on the north-eastern frontier of India, and the Nagas and Kukis of Assam.

HEADHUNTING, or Head-turning, as the Dutch refer to it, is a tradition that was once common among all Malay people and still exists today among the Dyaks (q.v.) of Borneo and other places. Martin de Rada, an Augustinian provincial, noted its presence in Luzon (Philippine Islands) as early as 1577. This practice is thought to have started for religious reasons, with the worship of skulls being widespread among Malays. Strict anti-head-hunting measures have caused a decline in this practice. Among the Igorottes, the only remnant is a dance, accompanied by singing, around the bare pole where the head used to be displayed. In Ilongote culture, a groom is expected to present his bride with several heads, preferably those of Christians. Major examples of head-hunters include the Was, a hill tribe on the northeastern frontier of India, as well as the Nagas and Kukis of Assam.

See Bock, Headhunters of Borneo (1881); W. H. Furness, Home Life of Borneo Head-hunters (Philadelphia, 1902); T. C. Hodson, “Head-hunting in Assam,” in Folk-Lore, xx. 2. 132.

See Bock, Headhunters of Borneo (1881); W. H. Furness, Home Life of Borneo Head-hunters (Philadelphia, 1902); T. C. Hodson, “Head-hunting in Assam,” in Folk-Lore, xx. 2. 132.


HEALTH, a condition of physical soundness or well-being, in which an organism discharges its functions efficiently; also in a transferred sense a state of moral or intellectual well-being (see Hygiene, Therapeutics and Public Health). “Health” represents the O. Eng. hælth, the condition or state of being hál, safe or sound. This word took in northern dialects the form “hale,” in southern or midland English hole, hence “whole,” with the addition of an initial w, as in “whoop,” and in the pronunciation of “one.” “Hail,” properly an exclamation of greeting, good health to you, hence, to greet, to call out to, is directly Scandinavian in origin, from Old Norwegian heill, cognate with the O. Eng. hál, used also in this sense. “To heal” (O. Eng. hælan), to make in sound health, to cure, is also cognate.

HEALTH, a state of physical fitness or well-being, where an organism functions effectively; also, in a broader sense, a condition of moral or intellectual wellness (see Hygiene, Therapeutics and Public Health). “Health” comes from the Old English hælth, meaning the condition of being hál, safe or sound. In northern dialects, this word evolved to “hale,” while in southern or midland English it became hole, which is where “whole” comes from, adding an initial w, seen in words like “whoop” and how “one” is pronounced. “Hail,” originally an expression of greeting—wishing good health to someone—comes from Scandinavian roots, specifically Old Norwegian heill, related to the Old English hál, also used in this context. “To heal” (Old English hælan), meaning to restore to good health or to cure, is also related.

Drinking of Healths.—The custom of drinking “health” to the living is most probably derived from the ancient religious rite of drinking to the gods and the dead. The Greeks and Romans at meals poured out libations to their gods, and at ceremonial banquets drank to them and to the dead. The Norsemen drank the “minni” of Thor, Odin and Freya, and of their kings at their funeral feasts. With the advent of Christianity the pagan custom survived among the Scandinavian and Teutonic peoples. Such festal formulae as “God’s minne!” “A bowl to God in Heaven!” occur, and Christ, the Virgin and the Saints were invoked, instead of heathen gods and heroes. The Norse “minne” was at once love, memory and thought of the absent one, and it survived in medieval and later England in the “minnying” or “mynde” days, on which the memory of the dead was celebrated by services and feasting. Intimately associated with these quasi-sacrificial drinking customs must have ever been the drinking to the health of living men. The Greeks drank to one another and the Romans adopted the custom. The Goths pledged each other with the cry “Hails!” a greeting which had its counterpart in the Anglo-Saxon “waes hael” (see Wassail). Most modern drinking-usages have had their equivalents in classic times. Thus the Greek practice of drinking to the Nine Muses as three times three survives to-day in England and elsewhere. The Roman gallants drank as many glasses to their mistresses as there were letters in each one’s name. Thus Martial:

Drinking of Healths.—The tradition of toasting "health" to the living likely comes from the ancient religious practice of toasting to the gods and the deceased. The Greeks and Romans poured out drinks to their gods during meals and toasted them and the dead at ceremonial feasts. The Norsemen toasted the “minni” of Thor, Odin, Freya, and their kings at funeral banquets. With the rise of Christianity, this pagan tradition continued among the Scandinavian and Germanic peoples. Phrases like “God’s minne!” and “A toast to God in Heaven!” became common, invoking Christ, the Virgin Mary, and the Saints instead of pagan gods and heroes. The Norse “minne” encompassed love, memory, and thoughts of those who were absent, and it carried on in medieval and later England through the “minnying” or “mynde” days, when the memories of the dead were honored with services and feasting. Closely tied to these almost-sacrificial drinking customs was the act of toasting to the health of the living. The Greeks toasted one another, and the Romans followed suit. The Goths toasted each other with the shout “Hails!” which is similar to the Anglo-Saxon “waes heael” (see Wassail). Most modern drinking traditions can be traced back to ancient times. For example, the Greek practice of toasting the Nine Muses three times three is still seen today in England and elsewhere. The Roman gentlemen drank as many toasts to their lovers as there were letters in each one’s name. Thus Martial:

“Six cups to Naevia’s health go quickly round,

“Six cups for Naevia’s health quickly pass around,

And be with seven the fair Justina’s crown’d.”

And be with seven the beautiful Justina’s crowned.

The English drinking phrase—a “toast,” to “toast” anyone—not older than the 17th century, had reference at first to this custom of drinking to the ladies. A toast was at first invariably a woman, and the origin of the phrase is curious. In Stuart days there appears to have been a time-honoured custom of putting a piece of toast in the wine-cup before drinking, from a fanciful notion that it gave the liquor a better flavour. In the Tatler No. 24 the connexion between this sippet of toast and the fair one pledged is explained as follows: “It happened that on a publick day” (speaking of Bath in Charles II.’s reign) 122 “a celebrated beauty of those times was in the cross bath, and one of the crowd of her admirers took a glass of the water in which the fair one stood, and drank her health to the company. There was in the place a gay fellow, half fuddled, who offered to jump in, and swore, though he liked not the liquor, he would have the toast. He was opposed in his resolution; yet this whim gave foundation to the present honour which is done to the lady we mention in our liquor, who has ever since been called a toast.” Skeat adds (Etym. Dict., 1908), “whether the story be true or not, it may be seen that a ‘toast,’ i.e. a health, easily took its name from being the usual accompaniment to liquor, especially in loving cups,” &c.

The English drinking term—a “toast,” to “toast” anyone—dates back to the 17th century and originally referred to the custom of drinking to the ladies. A toast was initially always connected to a woman, and the origin of the term is interesting. In the Stuart period, there was a long-standing tradition of placing a piece of toast in the wine cup before drinking, based on the fanciful idea that it enhanced the drink's flavor. In the Tatler No. 24, the link between this slice of toast and the lady being honored is explained as follows: “It happened that on a public day” (referring to Bath in the reign of Charles II) 122 “a famous beauty of that time was in the cross bath, and one of the crowd of admirers took a glass of the water where the lady stood and raised a toast to her health. There was a jovial fellow, a bit tipsy, who offered to jump in and swore that, although he didn’t care for the drink, he would have the toast. He was dissuaded from his plan; yet this quirky moment laid the groundwork for the current honor given to the lady, who has since been referred to as a toast.” Skeat adds (Etym. Dict., 1908), “whether the story is true or not, it’s clear that a ‘toast,’ i.e. a health, likely got its name from being the standard accompaniment to drinks, especially in loving cups,” & c.

Health drinking had by the beginning of the 17th century become a very ceremonious business in England. At Christmas 1623 the members of the Middle Temple, according to one of the Harleian MSS. quoted in The Life of Sir Simonds D’Ewes, drank to the health of the princess Elizabeth, who, with her husband the king of Bohemia, was then suffering great misfortunes, and stood up, one after the other, cup in one hand, sword in the other, and pledged her, swearing to die in her service. Toasts were often drunk solemnly on bended knees; according to one authority, Samuel Ward of Ipswich, in his Woe to Drunkards (1622), on bare knees. In 1668 at Sir George Carteret’s at Cranbourne the health of the duke of York was drunk by all in turn, each on his knees, the king, who was a guest, doing the like. A Scotch custom, still surviving, was to drink a toast with one foot on the table and one on the chair. Healths, too, were drunk in a definite order. Braithwaite says: “These cups proceed either in order or out of order. In order when no person transgresseth or drinkes out of course, but the cup goes round according to their manner of sitting: and this we call a health-cup, because in our wishing or confirming of any one’s health, bare headed and standing, it is performed by all the company” (Laws of Drinking, 1617). Francis Douce’s MSS. notes say: “It was the custom in Beaumont and Fletcher’s time for the young gallants to stab themselves in the arms or elsewhere, in order to drink the health of their mistresses.” Pepys, in his Diary for the 19th of June 1663, writes: “To the Rhenish wine house, where Mr Moore showed us the French manner when a health is drunk, to bow to him that drunk to you, and then apply yourself to him, whose lady’s health is drunk, and then to the person that you drink to, which I never knew before; but it seems it is now the fashion.” A Frenchman visiting England in Charles II.’s time speaks of the custom of drinking but half your cup, which is then filled up again and presented to him or her to whose health you drank. England’s divided loyalty in the 18th century bequeathed to modern times a custom which possibly yet survives. At dinners to royalties, until the accession of Edward VII., finger-glasses were not placed on the table, because in early Georgian days those who were secretly Jacobites passed their wine-glasses over the finger-bowls before drinking the loyal toasts, in allusion to the royal exiles “over the water,” thus salving their consciences. Lord Cockburn (1779-1854), in his Memorials of his Time (1856), states that in his day the drinking of toasts had become a perfect social tyranny; “every glass during dinner had to be dedicated to some one. It was thought sottish and rude to take wine without this, as if forsooth there was nobody present worth drinking with. I was present about 1803 when the late duke of Buccleuch took a glass of sherry by himself at the table of Charles Hope, then lord advocate, and this was noticed afterwards as a piece of direct contempt.” In Germany to-day it is an insult to refuse to drink with any one; and at one time in the west of America a man took his life in his hands by declining to pledge another. All this is a survival of that very early and universal belief that drinking to one another was a proof of fair play, whether it be in a simple bargain or in matters of life and death. The ceremony surrounding the Loving Cup to-day is reminiscent of the perils of those times when every man’s hand was raised against his fellow. This cup, known at the universities as the Grace Cup, was originated, says Miss Strickland in her Lives of the Queens of Scotland, by Margaret Atheling, wife of Malcolm Canmore, who, in order to induce the Scots to remain at table for grace had a cup of the choicest wine handed round immediately after it had been said. The modern “loving cup” sometimes has a cover, and in this case each guest rises and bows to his immediate neighbour on the right, who, also rising, removes and holds the cover with his right hand while the other drinks; the little comedy is a survival of the days when he who drank was glad to have the assurance that the right or dagger hand of his neighbour was occupied in holding the lid of the chalice. When there is no cover it is a common custom for both the left- and the right-hand neighbour to rise while the loving cup is drunk, with the similar object of protecting the drinker from attack. The Stirrup Cup is probably the Roman poculum boni genii, the last glass drunk at the banquet to a general “good night.”

Health drinking had become a very ceremonial affair in England by the early 17th century. At Christmas 1623, the members of the Middle Temple, according to one of the Harleian manuscripts quoted in The Life of Sir Simonds D’Ewes, raised their cups to toast the health of Princess Elizabeth, who, along with her husband, the King of Bohemia, was enduring great hardships. One by one, they stood up, with a cup in one hand and a sword in the other, and pledged her, swearing to die in her service. Toasts were often made solemnly on bended knees; according to one source, Samuel Ward of Ipswich in his Woe to Drunkards (1622), they were made on bare knees. In 1668, at Sir George Carteret’s in Cranbourne, everyone took turns drinking to the health of the Duke of York while kneeling, with the King, who was a guest, doing likewise. A Scottish custom, still practiced today, involved drinking a toast with one foot on the table and one on the chair. Toasts were also drunk in a specific order. Braithwaite states: “These cups proceed either in order or out of order. In order when no person transgresses or drinks out of turn, but the cup goes round according to their manner of sitting: and this we call a health-cup, because in our wishing or confirming of anyone’s health, bareheaded and standing, it is performed by all the company” (Laws of Drinking, 1617). Francis Douce’s manuscripts note: “It was the custom in Beaumont and Fletcher’s time for young gentlemen to stab themselves in the arms or elsewhere, in order to drink the health of their mistresses.” Pepys, in his Diary for June 19, 1663, writes: “To the Rhenish wine house, where Mr. Moore showed us the French way of toasting, to bow to the person who toasted you, then to the person whose lady's health is toasted, and then to the person you’re drinking to, which I had never known before; but it seems it’s now the fashion.” A Frenchman visiting England during Charles II’s reign mentions the custom of only drinking half your cup, which is then refilled and presented to the person whose health you just toasted. England's divided loyalties in the 18th century bequeathed to modern times a custom that might still survive. At royal dinners, until Edward VII's reign, finger bowls were not placed on the table because, in early Georgian days, those who were secretly Jacobites would pass their wine glasses over the finger bowls before drinking the loyal toasts, alluding to the royal exiles “over the water,” thus easing their consciences. Lord Cockburn (1779-1854), in his Memorials of his Time (1856), states that during his time, the toasting had become a form of social tyranny; “every glass during dinner had to be dedicated to someone. It was considered foolish and rude to take wine without this, as if, heavens, there was no one present worth drinking with. I was present around 1803 when the late Duke of Buccleuch took a glass of sherry by himself at the table of Charles Hope, then Lord Advocate, and this was noted later as an act of direct contempt.” In Germany today, it is an insult to refuse to drink with anyone; and at one time in the western U.S., a man risked his life by declining to toast another. All this is a survival of that very early and universal belief that toasting one another was a sign of fair play, whether in a simple deal or in matters of life and death. The ceremony surrounding the Loving Cup today is reminiscent of the dangers of those times when every man’s hand was raised against his fellow. This cup, known at the universities as the Grace Cup, was said to have originated with Margaret Atheling, wife of Malcolm Canmore, who, in order to encourage the Scots to stay at the table for grace, had a cup of the finest wine passed around right after it had been said. The modern “loving cup” sometimes has a lid, and in this case, each guest stands and bows to their immediate neighbor on the right, who, also standing, removes and holds the cover with their right hand while the other drinks; this little ritual is a holdover from the days when the person drinking was glad to know that their right or dagger hand neighbor was occupied holding the lid of the chalice. When there’s no cover, it’s common for both the left- and right-hand neighbors to stand while the loving cup is drunk, with the same intent of protecting the drinker from attack. The Stirrup Cup is likely the Roman poculum boni genii, the last glass drunk at the banquet for a general “good night.”

See Chambers, Book of Days; Valpy, History of Toasting (1881); F. W. Hackwood, Inns, Ales, and Drinking Customs (London, 1909).

See Chambers, Book of Days; Valpy, History of Toasting (1881); F. W. Hackwood, Inns, Ales, and Drinking Customs (London, 1909).


HEALY, GEORGE PETER ALEXANDER (1808-1894), American painter, was born in Boston, Massachusetts, on the 15th of July 1808. Going to Europe in 1835 Healy studied under Baron Gros in Paris and in Rome. He received a third-class medal in Paris in 1840, and one of the second class in 1855, when he exhibited his “Franklin urging the claims of the American Colonies before Louis XVI.” Among his portraits of eminent men are those of Webster, Clay, Calhoun, Guyot, Seward, Louis Philippe, and the presidents of the United States from John Quincy Adams to Grant—this series being painted for the Corcoran Gallery, Washington. His large group, “Webster replying to Hayne,” containing 150 portraits, is in Faneuil Hall, Boston, Mass. He was one of the most prolific and popular painters of his day. He died in Chicago, Illinois, on the 24th of June 1894.

HEALY, GEORGE PETER ALEXANDER (1808-1894), American painter, was born in Boston, Massachusetts, on July 15, 1808. He moved to Europe in 1835 and studied under Baron Gros in Paris and in Rome. He won a third-class medal in Paris in 1840, and a second-class medal in 1855 when he showcased his painting “Franklin urging the claims of the American Colonies before Louis XVI.” Among his portraits of notable figures are those of Webster, Clay, Calhoun, Guyot, Seward, Louis Philippe, and the U.S. presidents from John Quincy Adams to Grant—this series was created for the Corcoran Gallery in Washington. His large piece, “Webster replying to Hayne,” which includes 150 portraits, is located in Faneuil Hall, Boston, Massachusetts. He was one of the most productive and well-known painters of his time. He passed away in Chicago, Illinois, on June 24, 1894.


HEANOR, an urban district in the Ilkeston parliamentary division of Derbyshire, England, 10 m. N.W. of Nottingham, on the Great Northern and Midland railways. Pop. (1901) 16,249. Large hosiery works employ many of the inhabitants, and collieries are worked in the parish. The urban district includes Codnor-cum-Loscoe. Shipley Hall, to the south of Heanor, is a mansion built on a hill, amidst fine gardens. The ruin of the ancient moated castle of Codnor stands, overlooking the vale of the Erewash, on land which was once Codnor Park, and is now the site of large ironworks.

HEANOR is an urban district in the Ilkeston parliamentary division of Derbyshire, England, located 10 miles northwest of Nottingham, on the Great Northern and Midland railways. As of 1901, the population was 16,249. Large hosiery factories employ many of the residents, and coal mines operate in the area. The urban district includes Codnor-cum-Loscoe. Shipley Hall, located south of Heanor, is a mansion built on a hill surrounded by beautiful gardens. The ruins of the ancient moated castle of Codnor stand overlooking the Erewash valley, on what used to be Codnor Park, now the site of large ironworks.





        
        
    
Download ePUB

If you like this ebook, consider a donation!